p

CORNELL
UNIVERSITY
LIBRARY

Cornell University Library

PK 231.M13
Vedic

rammar

ill
3

1924 023 050 325

Cornell University
Library

The

original of this

book

is in

the Cornell University Library.

There are no known copyright

restrictions in

the United States on the use of the

text.

http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924023050325

Grundriss der Indo-Arisohen Philologie und Altertumskunde

(ENCYCLOPEDIA OF INDO -ARYAN RESEARCH)

BEGRiJNDET VON

G.

BUHLER, FORTGESETZT VON

HERAUSGEGEBEN VON
.

I.

H.

LUDERS UND

BAND,

4.

J.

F.

KIELHORN,

WACKERNAGEL.

HEFT.

VEDIC GRAMMAR
BY

A. A.

MACDONELL

STRASSBURG
VERLAG VON KARL TRUBNER
J.

The

printing

was commenced

in

May,

1907,

and

afterwards delayed by the death of the editor

Prof. Kielhorn.

Grundriss der Indo-Arischen Philologie und Altertumskunde

(ENCYCLOPEDIA OF INDO -ARYAN RESEARCH)

BEGRtJNDET VON

G.

BOHLER, FORTGESETZT VON

I.

BAND,

4.

F.

KIELHORN.

HEFT.

VED IC GRAMMAR
A. A.

MACDONELL.

INTRODUCTION.

I. General Scope of this \Vork.

Vedic grammar has never till now
been treated separately and as a whole. Both in India and in the West
the subject has hitherto been handled only in connexion with Classical
Hundreds of Panini's Sutras deal with the language of the Vedas;
Sanskrit.

but the account they give of

anything but comprehensive. In the West,

half a century ago (1852), to combine a
description of the linguistic peculiarities of the Vedas with an account of the
traditional matter of Panini; but as Vedic studies were at that time still in

Benfey was the

first,

it

is

more than

infancy, only the Samaveda^ and about one-fourth of the Rgveda^

having as yet been published, the Vedic material utilized in his large grammar ^
was necessarily very limited in extent. In Whitney's work'* the language of
the Vedas, which is much more fully represented, is treated in its historical
connexion with Classical Sanskrit. Partly for this reason, his work does not
supply a definite account of the grammar of the Sarnhitas as compared
with that of the later phases of the language; thus what is peculiar to the
Brahmanas or to a particular Sarnhita is often not apparent. Professor
Wackernagel's grammars, which when finished will present the ancient language
of India more completely than any other work on the subject, deals with
the combined Vedic and post-Vedic material from the point of view of
Different sections or individual points of Vedic
Comparative Philology.
grammar have been the subject of separately published treatises or of special
articles scattered in various Oriental and philological journals or other works
of a miscellaneous character. It is advisable that all this as well as additional
material* should now be brought together so as to afford a general survey

their

of the subject.
In view of the prominent position occupied by the Indo-Aryan branch
in Comparative Philology and of the fact that the language of the Vedas
1

Edited by Benfey, with German trans- Wackernagel, I. Lautlehre, Gbttingen 1 896;

NominalEinleitung zur Wortlehre.
II, I.
and glossary, Leipzig 1848.

lation

(Cp. Baetholomae, Bei2 Vol. I edited by Max Muller, London komposition, 1905.
2nd ed. London 1890 trage zur altindischen Grammatik, ZDMG.
1849, vol. VI 1875;
92; edited by Aufrecht, Berlin l86l and SO, 674-735)6 Such additional material is supplied in
1863 (vols. VI and vil of Indische Studien),
this work from collections made for me by
2"ii ed. Bonn 1877.
Grammatik der Sanskrit- my pupils Prof. H. C. Norman (Benares)
3 Vollstandige
from the Vajasaneyi Sarnhita, and Mr. A. B.
sprache, Leipzig 1852.
Sanskrit Grammar, Leipzig 1879; s^d Keith from the Taittirlya Sarnhita, the
4
Mantras in the Aitareya Aranyaka, and the
ed. 1896.
Grammatik von Jacob Khilas of the Rgveda.
5
Altindische

Indo-arische' Philologie.

I,

4.

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

represents the foundation of the subsequent strata, it seems important for the
sake of clearness and definiteness that the earliest phase should be treated as

a whole independently of later developments. The present work will therefore

deal with the grammar of only the Mantra portions of the Sarnhitas; that is
say, it will embrace the whole of the Rgveda, the Atharvaveda ', the
Samaveda'', and the Vajasaneyi Sarnhita^, but will exclude those portions of
the Taittirlya Samhita'*, the Maitrayani Sarnhita^ and the Kathaka^ which
have the character of Brahmanas'. Reference will also be made to Mantra
material not found in the canonical texts of the Sarnhitas, that is, to the
Khilas* of the Rgveda and the occasional Mantras of this type occurring
As the linguistic material of the Rgveda is
in the Brahmanas' and Sutras.
more ancient, extensive and authentic than that of the other Sarnhitas, all
of which borrow largely from that text", it is taken as the basis of the
present work. Hence all forms stated without comment belong to the Rgveda,
though they may occur in other Sarnhitas as well. From the other Vedas,
such matter only is added as occurs in their independent parts or, if borrowed
from the Rgveda, appears in an altered form, the source being in such cases
indicated by an abbreviation in parentheses (as VS., TS., AV.). The addition
of the abbreviation 'RV.' means that the form in question occurs in the

to

Rgveda
2.

only.

Verbal Authenticity of the Texts".--In

dealing with the linguistic

material of the Sarnhitas the question of the authenticity of the forms which
embraces is of great importance. What guarantees then do we possess
it

form of the texts handed down by tradition has not in the

course of ages undergone modification and modernization in respect to
This question must first be
vocabulary, phonetics, and grammatical forms?
applied to the Rgveda, the oldest of the Sarnhitas, which forms the very
foundation of Vedic tradition. The evidence of the SarvanukramanT", which
states the number of stanzas, the metre, and the deity for every hymn of
the RV., shows that in general extent, form, and matter, this Sarnhita was
The Pratisakhya 'J demonstrates that
in the Sutra period the same as now.
Yaska's commentary'* proves that,
its phonetic character was also the same.
that the original

Roth and

Mass., 1904); ScHEFTELOWlTZ, Die Apokryphen des Rgveda (edition of the Khilas),
translated by Whitney Breslau 1906 (cp. Oldenberg, Gottingische

Edited (Samhita text only) by

Whitney, Berlin 1856 (Index Verborum

in

JAOS., vol. XII);

(Books I xix), -with a critical and exegetical Gelehrte Anzeigen 1907, 210 41).
commentary, Cambridge, Mass., 1905 (vols.
9 Cp. Oldenberg, op. cit., 359 ff.
AufVII and VIII of the Harvard Oriental Series); RECHT, Das Aitareya Brahmana, Bonn 1879,

also edited
Sarnhita and

by Shankar P. Pandit (both

Pada text), Bombay 1895 99-

p.

420 f.

^o Cp. Oldenberg, op. cit, chapter in;

Besides Benfey's edition also that of Macdonell, History of Sanskrit Literature,
Satyavrata Sama^rami, 5 vols., Calcutta 181 and 186.
" Cp. Oldenberg, op. cit., chapter ui
187478 (Bibliotheca Indica).
3 Edited by Weber, with the commentary (271
369) Der Riktext und der Text der
jiingeren Sarnhitas
of Mahldhara, London and Berlin 1 852.
und der Brahmanas;
Ueber die Kritik des Rgveda4 Edited by Weber (vols, xi and xii of Lddwig,
Textes, Abhandlungen d. k. bohm. GesellIndische Studien), Berlin 187172.
Edited by L. v. Schroeder, Leipzig schaft der Wissenschaften, Prag 1889.
5
12 Edited by A. A. Macdonell, Oxford
188186.
6 Edited by L. v.
Schroeder, vol. i 1886.
13 The Rgveda Pratisakhya, edited with
(books I xvill), Leipzig 1900.
7 Cp. Oldenberg, Die Hymnen des Rigveda,
German translation by Max Muller, Leipzig
Band J (Prolegomena), Berlin 1888, p. 294ff. 1856 69; edited with Uvata's commentary,
8 See Aufrecht, Die Hymnen des Rigveda^, Benares Sanskrit Series 1894.
14 Yaska's Nirukta, edited by RoTH, Gotvol. 11, 67288; Max Muller, Rgveda^,
vol. IV, 519
41; cp. Macdonell, Bfhad- tingen 1852; edited by Satyavrata Samadevata, vol.1, introduction, 15 (Cambridge, ^RAMi, 4 vols. (II IV with the commentary
2

Introduction.
as regards

verbally

the limited

identical

with

number of stanzas explained by him, his text was

ours.
The frequent statements of the Brahmanas

concerning the number of verses contained in a hymn or liturgical group

agree with the extant text of the Rgveda. The explanatory discussions of the
Brahmanas further indicate that the text of the Rgveda must have been
regarded as immutably fixed by that time. Thus the Satapatha Brahmana,
while speaking of the possibility of varying some of the formulas of the
Yajurveda, rejects as impossible the notion of changing the text of a certain
verse of the Rgveda as proposed by some teachers ^Probably soon after the completion of the actual Brahmanas the hymns
of the Rgveda were fixed in the phonetic form of the Samhita text; and
after no long interval, in order to guard that text from the possibility of any
change or loss, the Pada text was constituted by Sakalya, whom the Aranyakas
or appendixes to the Brahmanas, the Nirukta, and the Rgveda Pratisakhya
presuppose ^ By this analysis of the Sarnhita text, its every word, stated in
a separate form as unaffected by the rules of euphonic combination, has
come down to us without change for about 2,500 years.
The Samhita text itself, however, only represented the close of a long
period in which the hymns, as originally composed by the seers, were handed
down by oral tradition. For the condition of the text even in this earlier
period we possess a large body of evidence corresponding to that of Mss.
for other literary monuments. It was then that the text of the other Vedas,
each of which borrowed extensively from the Rgveda, was constituted. With
each of them came into being a new and separate tradition in which the
borrowed matter furnishes a body of various readings for the Rgveda. The
comparison of these variants, about 1200 in number, has shown that the text
of the Rgveda already existed, with comparatively few exceptions, in its present

The number of
of the other Vedas was established.
small in which the Rgveda exhibits corruptions not
appearing in the others. We have thus good reason for beHeving that the
fixity of the text and the verbal integrity of the Rgveda go several centuries

form when the

instances

is

text

infinitely

back than the date at which the Samhita text came into existence.
As handed down exclusively by oral tradition, the text could hardly have
been preserved in perfectly authentic form from the time of the composers
themselves; and research has shown that there are some undeniable corruptions
further

in detail attributable to this earliest period. But apart from these, the Samhita
of phonetic
text, when the original metre has been restored by the removal
combinations which did not prevail in the time of the poets themselves, nearly
contains the very words, as represented by the Pada text, actually

always

used by the seers. The modernization of the ancient text appearing in the
Samhita form is only partial and is inconsistently applied. It has preserved
and the slightest
the' smallest minutiae of detail most hable to corruption
might have
differences in the matter of accent and alternative forms which
been removed with the greatest ease. We are thus justified in assuming that
divested of the
the accents and grammatical forms of the Rgveda, when
euphonic rules applied in the Samhita text, have come down to us, in the
themselves.
vast majority of cases, as they were uttered by the poets

Though the tradition of nearly

way been guarded by Anukramanls,
is

clearly inferior to

of Durga),
Indica).

Calcutta

that of the

188291

all

Rgveda.

(Bibliotheca

'

2
|

a general
its value
only natural in the case

the later Samhitas has

Pratisakhyas,

This

and Pada
is

See Oldenberg, op.

See Oldenberg, op.

texts,

cit.,

3SZ-

cit.,

380

1*

f.

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

Vedic Grammar.

of collections in which the matter was largely borrowed and arbitrarily cut
up into groups of verses or into single verses solely with a view to meet
new liturgical wants. Representing a later linguistic stage, these collections

from a modernized text in the material borrowed from the Rgveda, as

unmistakable when that material is compared with the original passages.
The text of the Samaveda is almost entirely secondary, containing only
Its variants are due in
seventy-five stanzas not derived from the Rgveda.
part to inferiority of tradition and in part to arbitrary alterations made for
the purpose of adapting verses removed from their context to new ritual uses '.
An indication that the tradition of the Yajur and Atharva Vedas is less trustworthy than that of the Rgveda is the great metrical irregularity which is
characteristic of those texts " Of all these the Vajasaneyi Sarnhita is the best
preserved, being not only guarded by an Anukramanij a Pratisakhya, and a
Pada text, but partially incorporated in the Satapatha Brahmana, where the
The
first 1 8 books are quoted word for word besides being commented on.
Taittiriya Sarnhita has also been carefully handed down, being protected by
an AnukramanT, a Pratisakhya, and a good Pada text 5. The MaitrayanT Sarnhita
not so well authenticated, having no Pratisakhya and only an inferior
is
Least
Pada text, of which but a single somewhat incorrect Ms. is known
trustworthy of all is the tradition of the Kathaka which lacks both a Pratisakhya
and a Pada text. Moreover only one complete Ms. of this Sarnhita is knownS.
As that Ms. is unaccented, it has only been possible to mark the accent
in small portions of that part of the text which has as yet been pubhshed
(Books I xviii). As, however, the texts of the Black Yajurveda often agree
even verbally, and the MaitrayanI Sarnhita is closely connected with the
Kathaka, the readings of the latter can to some extent be checked by those
of the cognate Samhitas.
The inferiority of tradition in the Atharvaveda was increased by the
It contains many corrupt
lateness of its recognition as a canonical text.
and uncertain forms, especially in Book xix, which is a later addition*.
The text is guarded by Anukramanls, a Pratisakhya, and a Padapatha^. The
latter, however, contains serious errors both in regard to accentuation and
the division of compound verbal forms, as well as in other respects.
The
Padapatha of Book xix, which is different in origin from that of the earlier
books ^, is full of grave blunders?. The critical and exegetical notep contained
in Whitney's Translation of the Atharvaveda accordingly furnish important aid
in estimating the value of the readings in the Saunakiya recension of the
Atharvaveda. The Paippalada recension is known in only a single corrupt
Ms., which has been reproduced in facsimile by Professors Garbe and
Bloomfield '- About one-eighth or one-ninth of this recension is original,
being found neither in the Saunakiya text of the Atharvaveda nor in any other
known collection of Mantras". The various readings of this recension, in the
start
is

"*.

1 On the Padapatha of the Samaveda see

Benfey's edition of that Sarnhita, p. Lvu LXiv.
2
See Whitney's Introduction to the
Atharvaveda, p. cxxvil; Bloomfield, The
Atharvaveda, Grundriss II, IB, I.
3
Cp. Weber's edition p. vinf.,
and
Indische Studien 13, I
114 (Ueber den
Padapatha der Taittirlya-Samhita).
4 See L. V. Scheokder's edition, Intro-

duction, p. xxxvif.
5 Cp. L. V. ScHROEDER's Introduction
his edition, i.

See Lanman's Introduction to Book xix

Whitney's Translation of the Atharva-

in

veda.
7 See Lanman's Introduction to Whitney's
Translation, p. Lxix Lxxiv.
8 The Padapatha of the Atharvaveda has
been edited in full by Shankar P. Pandit

in his Atharvaveda.
9

^o

to

The Atharvaveda
The Kashmirian Atharva-Veda,

Cp. Bloomfield,

more 1901.
" Bloomfield, The Atharvaveda

p. 16.

Baltip. 15;

Phonology.

I.

material

Pronunciation.

Sounds.

common

to both recensions, are given in the critical notes of Whitney's

variations range from slight differences to complete change
exact textual agreement between parallel stanzas is comparatively

The

Translation.

of sense, and

The
Book I^
rare'.

text

of this recension has not yet been critically edited except

PHONOLOGY.

I.

Rgveda

German

translation by MaxMuller, Leipzig 185669;

with Uvata's Commentary, Benares Sanskrit Series, 1894.
Atharvaveda Pratisakhya, ed.
Whitney, JAOS. vols, vu and x.
Taittirlya Pratisakhya, ed. Whitney, JAOS. vol. ix,
1871.
Vajasaneyi PratiSakhya, ed. Weber, IS. vol. iv, 1858; with Uvata's Commentary,
Benares Sanskrit Series, 1888.
Riktantravyakarana (= Pratisakhya of 'the SV.), ed. and
transl. by Burnell, Mangalore 1879.

Prati^akhya, ed. with

Benfey, Vollstandige Grammatik p.

Altindische Grammatik.

Wackernagel,

Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar

70.

Lautlehre (very

I.

full

p. 1

87.

bibliography).

Evidence throwing light on the phonetic

3. Ancient Pronunciation.
character of the language of the Samhitas is furnished not only by the
pronunciation of its sounds by the Brahmans of to-day, who still recite those
texts, but also by the transcription of Sanskrit words in foreign languages,
particularly Greek, in ancient times; by the summary information contained in
the works of the old Sanskrit grammarians, Panini and his successors^ and

more

especially by the detailed statements of the Pratisakhyas and the Siksas.

these sources we derive a sufficiently exact knowledge of the pronunciation
prevailing about 500 b. c. This pronunciation, however, need not necessarily

From

have coincided

which date from

Nevertheless, judging by the internal evidence supplied
the phonetic changes and analogical formations occurring in the language

many
by

in every particular with that of the Sarnhitas,

centuries earlier.

of the texts themselves and by the external evidence of comparative

we are justified in concluding that the pronunciation, with the possible
of a very few doubtful points, was practically the same.
There are
4. The Sounds of the Vedic Language.
52 sounds, 13 of which are vocalic and 39 consonantal. They are the

philology,

exception
altogether
following:

A. Vocalic sounds.
1

2.

adiiuurf

Nine simple vowels

Four diphthongs: e 0^
:

at

I.

au''.

B. Consonantal sounds.
Twenty-two mutes, divided into five classes,
class nasal, making a group of twenty-seven:
a) five gutturals: k kh g gh n,
b) five palatals
c)

c ch

seven cerebrals: /

d) five dentals: t tk
e)

five labials:

p ph

j jh
tk

of which

has

its

it,

d and

d dh

each

dh and Ih^

n,

n,

b bh m.

are really simple long vowels,

3 These
being diphthongs only in origin (= at, du).
4 Pronounced di, du (see Whitney on
* On the readings of the Paippalada reAPr. I. 40 and TPr. 11. 29), but derived
cension, see Lanman's Introduction p.Lxxix
from diphthongs with a long first element.
LXXXIX.
sounds take the place of d dh
2 The Kashmirian AtharvaVeda, Book One.
5 These
Edited with critical notes by Leroy Carr respectively between vowels; e. g. tie (but

Whitney's Translation
veda p. 1013 23.
cp.

Barret,

in

JAOS.

26,

of the Atharva-

197295.

tdyd),

mJlhuse (but mldhvan).

I.

Allgemeines und Speache.

Four semivowels: y r I v.
Three sibilants: / (palatal),

2.

3.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

f (cerebral), j (dental).

One aspiration; h.
One pure nasal: m

4.

{m) called Anusvara ('after-sound').

Three voiceless spirants: h (Visarjaniya), h (Jihvamuliya), k (Upadhmamya).
In order that the phonetic status of
5. Losses, changes, additions.
the Vedic language may be understood historically, the losses, changes, and
additions which have taken place in it as compared with earlier linguistic
stages, must be pointed out.
and 3; 2) long vowels e 0;
a. It has lost the IE. i) short vowels e
3) diphthongs ei oi, eu ou; Si ei oi, au eu ou; 4) sonant nasals; 5) voiced
5.

6.

spirant

z.

replaced a number of IE. sounds by others i) the short vowels

by a, a by i; 2) the long vowels eohya; 3) the diphthongs ei oi by e,
eu ou by 0; also dz ez oz by eo; 4) f by ir {ur), I by r; 5) ai ei oi by di,
au eu ou by du 6) r, when followed by a nasal, has become f; 7) gutturals
(velars) have, under certain conditions, become palatals'; 8) a palatal mute
has become the palatal spirant s^.
b. It has

c.

spirant

It

has

added

the

whole

of eight

series

(including the

cerebrals

s).

The above

innovations are specifically Indian, excepting (i) the loss of

together with the diphthongs formed with them; (2) the loss
These
of the sonant nasals; and (3) the addition of the spirants / and s.
the Avesta shares with the Vedas.

the vowels e

3,

I.

The vowel

The

simple vowels.

This is by far the commonest vowel, being much

a.
twice as frequent as a; while these two -vowels combined occur
According to
as often as all the rest (including diphthongs) taken together
the modern Indian pronunciation, a has the sound of a very short close
neutral vowel like the English u in but. That such was its character as early
6.

more than

-5.

as the time of Panini appears from his last Sutra, according to which a is
not the short sound corresponding to a. To the same effect are the statements
which describe as a 'close' (samvrtd) sound. This
of the Pratisakhyas
pronunciation is borne out by the reproduction of Indian words in Greek,
where the vowel, though usually represented by a, appears as e or
also;
on the other hand, the frequent reproduction of the Greek a by the Indian
a indicates that, to the Indian ear, that vowel was both longer and had more
Similarly, Hindus of the present day make the
distinctively the sound of a.
observation that the English pronunciation of a in Sanskrit words sounds long
As the ancient Iranian languages have the normal a
{dirgha) to them.
throughout, the close pronunciation must be an Indian innovation. But whether
it already prevailed in the period when the Sarnhitas were composed is
uncertain. The fact, however, that in the RV. the metre hardly ever admits
of the a being elided after e or (?, though the written text drops it in about
75 per cent of its occurrences, seems to indicate that when the hymns of
the RV. were composed, the pronunciation of a was still open, but that at
"i,

I Cp.
Brugmann, Kurze vergleichende
Orammatik der indogermanischen Sprachen

1902,

I,

244.

Op.

cit.

Cp.

Whitney, 22 and

APr.

I.

233.

36; VPr.

I.

72.

75.

^;

Phonology. Simple Vowels.

I.

the time when the Samhita text was

constituted, the close pronunciation was
already becoming general.
a.
Though a ordinarily represents IE. a e S^, it also often replaces an
original
sonant nasal ^ representing the reduced form of
the unaccented Vedic syllables +nasalx)an in derivative and inflexional syllables e. g. sat-S beside the stem sant'being'
mhv-ati
they sacrifice (suffix othervirise -ami); z) +nasal in
radical
;

syllables; e. g. (a-id- 'stretched'-

ytan-; g-a-ta-^^^OTve-.ygam-; das-md-'^NOxiiiTiou^'

-.ydams-; stem /a/^- 'path', beside /a^/i33) in words as shown by comparative philology; e. g. ^ato'-w 'hundred' (Lat. ^^A),
=>j
^
j,
dasa 'ten' (Lat. decem)i.
Very rarely a is a Prakritic representative of r, as in vi-Mta-i
'monstrous', beside
vi-krta- 'deformed'.
\

7.

The vowel

and a contraction;

a.

This sound

e. g.

represents both a simple long vowel

'I was' (= d-as-am),

has stood'; asam

d-stha-t 'he

bhdraii 'may he bear' (= b/idra-a-ti).

a. Like a, the long vowel a frequently corresponds
to or is derived from
a syllable containing a nasal; e. g. kks-td- 'dvig-.yk/ian-; a-tmdn- 'soul' an'breathe'. In very rare instances the nasal is retained in the RV.: jighamsati
'desires to %Xx\\.e -.y han-; srantd- 'wearied': )//ra2-; dhvantd-'^'ixY-.Ydhvanthere are six or eight more instances in the later Samhitas*.
Here the
reappearance of the nasal in a weak radical syllable is an innovation due to
the influence of other forms with nasals'.
8. The vowel /.
This sound in the first place is an original vowel;
e.g. div-i 'in heaven'. It also frequently represents the low grade of ^ and j'a
both in roots^ and suffixes; e. g. vid-md 'we know', beside ved-a 'I know';
:

ndv-istha- 'newest',

beside ndv-yas- 'newer'.

It further appears as the low
containing that vowel: e. g. sidhyati 'succeeds', beside
sistd- 'taught', beside sdsti 'teaches';
especially when the vowel is

grade of a
sadhati;
final,

in

roots

as in sthi-td- 'stood': \fstha-.

function of a 'connecting' vowel;

From
e. g.

the latter use it came to assume the

jan-i-tf- 'begetter' :"(/;'-; after heavy

syllables also in the ending -ire of 3 pi. pf mid. vavand-ire (beside nunudre).
In Hthird- 'loose' i would be a Prakritic representative of /-, if the word is
derived from Yh-atA-'^.
This sound is an original vowel, e.g. mjivd- 'hving'^".
g. The vo'wel 7.
It also often represents the low grade of ya both in roots and suffixes;
e. g. jT-td- (A v.), 'overcome': Yj'yS-; as-i-mdhi 'we would attain', beside as-ydm
'I would attain'. It further seems to represent the low grade of both radical
and suffixal a; but this can probably in all instances be explained as either a
low grade of ai or a later substitution for i; e. g. gi-tha- (AV.) beside ga-thd'song', is from the root gai-; adi-mahi (VS.) and di-sva (VS.), from 1/2 ^aand Y?>^^'i occur beside forms in i from the three roots da- which have i only
in the RV.; hind- 'forsaken', ixovaYha-, occurs once in RV. x beside forms with
i only in RV. i ix. A similar explanation probably applies to the -7iT- of the
ninth class of verbs beside -na-, q. g. grbknT-igrbkna-'^'^.

Cp. Brugmann, kg. 92, 104,

Cp. Brugmann 184.

work in its conventional sense (cp. Brugmann, KG. 365), and 'roots' will be
quoted in the usually low grade form in
3 See Wackernagel i, 7 (p. 7
10).
which they appear in Sanskrit grammar.
4 Cp. Wackernagel i, 146.
The term 'base' will be used to designate
5 It represents IE. a e 0: cp. Brugmann,
KG. 98, no, 122. It also appears for IE. the phonetic unit which is the starting point
before single consonants: cp. Wacker- of vowel gradation (cp. Brugmann, KG.
1

n6.

nagel
6

I,

10.

See below, past passive participles S74,

1).

Thus bhava-

See Wackernagel i, 13.

This term will be retained

is

a 'base',

Wackernagel i, 16 (p.
Brugmann, KG. 73.
" See Wackernagel i, 18.
1

in the present

or bhavi-

bhii-

'root'.

9 Cp.

a.

21
is

Cp.

19,

note).

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

The vowel

10.

This

u.

sound

supta- (AV.) 'asleep'

'yoking';

of kr- 'make'.

The vowel

11.

sAra-

'hero'.

become'

It

u.

bhavi-sydti

sud- 'sweeten'

t'/pa

'up

to';

grade of
g. yugd- m. n. 'yoke', beside yoga- m.
m. 'sleep'; krnu- krnd- present base
also

It

represents

the low

This

sound is an original vowel; e. g. bhru- 'brow';

low grade for avi, au, va; e. g. bhu-t 'has
become'; a'/5afe'-'shaken' dhautdrl-, f. 'shaking";

the

also

is

jz'(/?>a-

an original vowel; e.g.

is

duhitr- 'daughter'; mddhu- 'sweetness'.

or va both in roots and suffixes; e.

Vedic Grammar.

4.

'will

svad- 'enjoy'.

The vowel

The vowel

at the present day usually pronounced

old is shown by the confusion of the
two sounds in inscriptions and Mss., as well as by the reproduction of r by
ri in the Tibetan script ^. But r was originally pronounced as vocalic r. The
Pratisakhyas of the RV., VS., AV.3 describe it as containing an r, which
according to the RPr. is in the middle. According to the commentator
on the VPr. this medial r constitutes one-half of the sound, the first and
last quarter being a*.
This agrees with sr), the equivalent of r in the Avesta.
Except in the ace. and gen. plur. of r-stems (where f is written), the
long vowel is in the RV. represented by tlae sign for r: always in forms of
the verb mrd-^ 'be gracious', in the past participles trlhd- 'crushed', drlhd'firm', in the gen. nrndm, and in the one occurrence of the gen. tisrnam^12.

and that

as ri;

r.

this

/-' is

pronunciation

is

In the later Sarnhitas, the vowel in these instances was pronounced short'';
and it was doubtless for this reason that r came to be erroneously written for
f in the text of the RV.
This long vowel, according to RPr. and APr.9,
13. The vowel r^only in the ace. and gen.
contains an r in its first half only.
It appears
plur. masc. fem. of f-stems; e. g. pitfn, mdirs; pitfndm, svdsfnam. Thus the f
was written only where a- i- z^-stems showed analogous forms with a t u;
and prosodical evidence proves that, in the RV., f is required even in the
two genitives in which r is written {nrnam and tisrnSm) ^- In the TS., how-

ever,

these

all

genitives

tisrnam).

The vowel

have

plur.

r'' (that

is,

piirnSm

as well as

nrnam,

This

sound, though pronounced as Iri at the present

description in the Pratisakhyas '^ is analogous
to that of r.
It is found only in a few forms or derivatives of the verb
kip- 'be in order': caklpre, 3 pi. perf.; ciklpati, 3 sing. aor. subj.; klpti- (VS.)
14.

/.

day, was originally a vocalic

In the

'arrangement'.

RV.

Its

/.

r appears beside

The

2.

15.

in India

' In
several
present an IE.
I,

P-

as

instances
/

sound.

See Wackernagel

RPr. vm. 14; VPr.

e and 0.
At the present day these sounds are
long monophthongs like e and
in most European

appears to reCp. 'Wackeknagel

i,

IV.

_?

28.

I45; APr.

I.

37,71.

Cp.BEHFEY, Vedica und Verwandtesi, 18.

5 Except possibly RV. vll. 56"7 where the
vowel is metrically short; cp. op. cit. I, 6;
Arnold, Vedic Metre, p. 143.
4

RV.

V.

692.

AV.
some

the vowel is still metrically

of these instances
long in
OldenEERG, Prolegomena 477.
7

'form"''.

diphthongs.

33-

in krp-

The diphthongs

pronounced

it

In the

8 The
f of the gen. pi. is an Indian innovation; cp. 5, b 6 and 17.
On the other
hand, IE. f- is represented by tr and (after
labials) ur;
e. g. from kr- 'commeinorate',
klr-A- 'fame'; pr- 'fiW .Jin7--td-, n. 'reward'; as
low grade of ra in dlrgh-a- 'long', beside
dragh-iyas- 'longer'. Cp. Wackernagel I, 22.
9 RPr. xui. 14; APr. I. 38.
1 See above, 5, b 6.
'I Cp. Benfey, Vedica und Verwandtes
I.

3-

"
13

RPr. xm. 14; VPr.

Cp. Wackernagel

IV. 145.
1,

31.

I.

Phonology. Simple Vowels. Diphthongs.

languages. That they already had this character at the time of the Pratisakhyas '
and of Pariini's successors Katyayana^ and Patanjali^, appears from the accounts
given by those authorities, who at the same time recognize these two sounds

be in many instances the result of the euphonic combination {samdhi, Sandhi)

of + and a\u respectively. This evidence is borne out by the reproduction
of Indian words by the Greeks'* and of Greek words by the Indians 5 from

to

about 300

B. c. onwards.
These two sounds as a rule represent earlier diphthongs of which the second
element was i or u respectively, i. This is most evidently so when they are produced
in Sandhi by the coalescence of U with t and u.
As the result of such a combination
they are explicable only on the assumption of an earlier pronunciation of these sounds
as the genuine diphthongs ai and au.
2. They are further based on prehistoric contractions within words in declension and conjugation; e. g. loc. sing, of aha- 'horse'
a.

the ship')
riom. ace. du. neut. of padd- 'step' pade (cp. vdcas-T 'two
words'); 3. sing. pot. mid. bhiveta 'should become' (cp. as-lta 'would sit'); magh6n- weak
stem (=niagha-un) of maghdvan- 'bountiful'; d-voc-at 3. sing. aor. of vac- 'speak' i=^d-vauc-at).
3. These two sounds also represent the high grade corresponding to the weak
grade vowels i and ; e. g. j-fVaA' 'pours', beside /5-/o- 'poured'; bhoj-am, beside ihuj-am,
aor. of bhuj- 'enjoy' 7.
b. I. In a small number of words i represents Indo-Iranian az (still preserved in
the Avesta) before d dh and h [= dh): dehi 'give', and dhehi 'set' (A v. dazdi); e-dhi 'he.''
beside ds-ti; ned-iyas- 'very near', ned-isfha- 'nearest' (Av. nazdyo, nazdisia-); med/id- 'insight'
(Av. mazdas); miyedha- 'meat-juice' (Av. myazda-]; vedhds- 'adorer' (Av. vazdanh-'); sed-^
2. Similarly o'o represents
weak perf. of sad- 'sit' (A v. hazd- for Indo-Iranian sazd-)9.
az in stems ending in -as before the bh of case-endings, e. g. from dvcs-as- n. 'hatred',
and before secondary suffixes beginning with y or v. amko-yuinst. pi. dveso-bhis;
'distressing' (but apas-yit- 'active'); duvo-yu- 'wishing to give' (beside dzivas-yu-); sdho-van(AV.) 'mighty', beside sdhas-vant- (RV.). In derivatives of sds- 'six', and of vah- 'carry',
represents az before d or dk, which it cerebralizes s6-dasa (VS.) 'sixteen' ; so-4ha 'sixdive (cp. nav-i-

'in

fold';

vo-dhum

carry'.

'to

These sounds are pronounced at

16. The diphthongs ai and au.
the present day in India as diphthongs in which the first element is short. Even
But that
at the time of the Pratisakhyas they had the value of at and ak"
they are the etymological representatives of at and au is shown by their
becoming ay and av respectively before vowels both in Sandhi" and within
words; e. g. gav-as 'kine', beside gdu-s 'cow"''. That such was their original
value is also indicated by the fact that in Sandhi a contracts with e^*: to ai,
to '5.

and with
17.

Lengthening of vowels.

(except r in the gen. pi.) in the ace.

vowel is doubtless pre-Indian'7.

Before

2.

suffixal y,

i.

pi.

Before , vowels are lengthened only

where the long

in -an, -in, -un, -fn^^,

and u are phonetically lengthened: a)

as

finals

{Yksi-); su-ydte 'is pressed' {Ysu-);

of roots;
g.
srU-yis 'may he hear' {Ysru-); b) as finals of nouns in denominatives formed
with -yd and their derivatives; e. g. jani-ydnt- 'desiring a wife' {jdni-); valguksi-yate

e.

Thus Kekaya-, name of a people, becomes

JCyjKiai;

Gonda- name of a people, /ovSaXoj.

Thus Ka/irfkoi becomes

becomes Aara.
5

Cp.

Wackernagel

Op.

cit.

On

this

fect,

pronunciation from the monophthongs representing the diphthongs ai and du.

11 See Whitney on APr. I. 40 and TPr.
u. 29.

48.

I,

destroyed'

See Whitney on APr. i. 40.

Varttika on Panini viil. 2, 106.
Comment on Varttika 1 and 3 on Panini

I.

'is

483

a,

33
base

I,

c,

I,

^rameba-/ia-

33

upa

See below 73.

13

Cp.

14

That

came
b.

d, e.

see

12

below on the Per-

2.

9 Cp. Wackernagel I, 34 a.
10 These e and
are not distinguished in

15

Wackernagel

i,

36.
-{-

{e

=)

originally a -{

{0

=)

originally a

at

be-

di.

.That

came

is,

is,

au be-

all.

For original a i u r -\- ns.

the J which caused the length by
position had already for the most part disappeared in the Vedic language.
ID
17

As

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

Vedic Grammar.

4.

ydii 'treats kindly' {valgu-); gatu-ydti 'desires free course' {gati'i-; but also gatu'
The AV.^ has a few exceptions: arati-ydti 'is hostile'; jani-ydti as

ydti)

well as jani-ydti^; c)

Before

3.

r,

if

in the

radical,

suffix -i-ya and in the comparative suffix -lyas.

and u seem to be lengthened when a consonant

e. g. gJr-bkis htside glr-as {gi'r- 'song of praise'); pur-si'i beside pi'ir-as

{pur- 'fort'), but Tr and ur here represent IE. r*. In a few instances this is
extended by analogy to words in which the r is not radical: asir 'blessing'

follows;

{asls-); saji'ir 'together'

{YJ"?')^-

Before v, the vowels a i u are lengthened: a) in some instances the

augment: avidhyat 'he wounded' {Yvyadh-)'^; b) once before the primary
suffix -vams of the perfect participle: jigT-viims- 'having conquered' (l//V-);
c) often before the secondary suffixes -van^ -vana, -vatit, -vala, -vin; e. g.
rta-van- 'observing order'; ktirsX-vana- (AV.)
'ploughman'; yd-vant- 'how
great'; ivdsi-vant- (RV.) 'snorting' {j\fsvas-^; -krsi-vala- 'ploughman'; dvaya-vin'dishonest'; d) often before the second member of a compound; e. g. gurtavasu- 'whose treasures are welcome'''.
5. Before llr. z and z, when followed by one or more consonants, vowels
are lengthened by way of compensation for the loss of the z or z^; a) a
(= az) in tadhi 'hew' (//fl/^j-); badhd- 'firm' {Ybamh-); sddhr- 'conquering',
d-sadha- 'invincible' (l/ja/?-); b) t^=iz in id- 'adore' {YyV' 'sacrifice', or|/z^'wish');
nidd- 'nest'; pid- 'press';
midhd- 'reward'; midhvAins- 'bounteous';
4.

rldhd- 'licked' {Yrih-); vldii(cp. /lims- 'injure'),

c) u

'swift';

tiz

in

stdati

(=

sizdati)

udhd- 'borne'

'sits';

(j/z'^/z-);

kTd- 'be angry'

gudhd- 'concealed'

{Yg^^'i-y6. Vowels also appear lengthened under conditions other than those
enumerated above (1 5).
a. Final a i u are very frequently lengthened in the Sarnhitas before a
single consonant owing to rhythmical predilections; from this use the lengthening
of the vowels is extended to syllables which are reduplicative or precede
suffixes'".

b.
syllable.

For metrical reasons the length is in a few words shifted to another

Thus didihi often appears instead of the regular didihi; and in

vira-scit 'ruhng men',

vira-^'- stands

for vtra-.

applies to cardtha- 'moving', beside cardtha-;

similar explanation

perhaps

and mdhina- 'gladsome', beside

mdhina-.
c. The long vowel beside the short in the same stem appears in some
instances to be due to vowel gradation; as in tvdtpitaras (TS.) 'having thee
as a father', beside pitdras; prthu-jaghana- 'broad-hipped', beside jagkdfta-

Before this -yd, the final of a-stems is (for dus-") e. g. in dur-gd- 'hard to tralengthened, but probably not verse'.
6 The lengthening
phonetically; see below 6 d.
of the augment in
2 See Whitney on APr. iii. i8.
ayiinak, Syukta [Yyt'/-) and arinak, araik
No lengthening takes place in the i^ric-'', follows this analogy.
3
optative present of verbs of the 5'h or 8'h
7 The lengthening here probably started
class, e. g. srnu-yama (sru- 'hear'); nor in from that in Sandhi:
cp. Wackernagel
adverbs formed with -_yo from z^-stems ; e.g. I, 42.
asu-yd 'swiftly' ; amu-ya 'thus'.
8 This appears to be the only kind of
4 See above on r, p. 8, note ^.
compensatory lengthening in the Vedic
5 Cp. Wackernagel I, 23. When ir stands
language. Cp. 17, I.
for suffixal -is, it remains unchanged; c. g.
9 On e and
for az as, see above, 15, a, b,
'

sometimes

havirbhis 'with oblations' {kav-is-), krivir-dat-'i

'saw-toothed'; -zir, with genuine u, remains

short in -unjara- 'field', tn-vi- 'wide', uniiya
'widely' {imc- 'wide'), urv-dn- 'desire', dur-

and

cp.

Wackernagel i, 40.
Wackernagel i, 43.

10

See

11

Metrical shortening of a long syllable

I.

*hip';

Phonology. Lengthening and Loss of Vowels. Contraction.

snu-sdk

''in

continuous order', beside Mtu- 'along' as

first

member

of a

compound.
d. The lengthening of the vowel in a certain number
of instances appears
to be due to analogy; thus the denominatives in -ayd beside -ayd
from
^-sterns

(e. g.

rtayd-

model of those

'observe

in -lydti

and

order',

-uydti,

beside

rtayd-Y,

seem

which would account

to

follow the

for the fluctuation

in quantity.^ Tlksnd- 'sharp' (beside tigmd- tij- 'be sharp') and hdlikma(TS.)
\)t.%\^^ halik^na- (VS.), a kind of animal, appear to owe
their f to the influence
of desideratives which in several instances have f (partly for older i) before ks.
The reason for the u in tusnim 'silendy' {tus- 'become quiet'), and in
sumnd- (VS.), otherwise sumnd- 'favour', is, however, obscure.
:

i8. Loss of vowels.

Vowels are very rarely dropped in the language
of the Samhitas. Medial loss is almost entirely restricted^ to the isolated
disappearance of u before v and m. That vowel is dropped at the end of
first member of a compound in anvartita (RV^) 'wooer' (= anu-variita);
dnvartisye {KSf?) T shall follow' 3; car-vadana- (AV. Paipp.) 'of lovely aspect'
(= caru-vadana-) and car-vac- (AV. Paipp.) 'speaking pleasantly"^. The only

the

example of the

a in this position seems to be til-pinja- (AV.) a kind

(AV\). The vowel u is further dropped before the
of the I pers. pi. pres. ending of the s'li {-mi-) class, when the u is preceded
by only one consonant, in krn-mahe and krn-mdsi (AV.)3 'we do'.
Initial vowels also occasionally disappear.
The only vowel that is
lost with any frequency is a, which is dropped in Sandhi after e and o,
according to the evidence of metre, in about one per cent of its occurrences
in the RV. and about twenty per cent in the AV. and the metrical portions
of the YV.'^ In a few words its disappearance is prehistoric: in vi- 'bird'?
{Lat. avi-), possibly in /- 'in' (Greek eV/)*, in pTd- 'press' 9, bki-sdj-'' 'healer'.
a is lost in ttndn-, beside a-imdn-, but the reason has not been satisfactorily
explained". In va 'like', beside iva, the loss of i is probably only apparent:
cp. va 'like' (Lat. ve 'or')".
Initial u seems to be lost, if the reading is not
corrupt, in smasi (RV. ii. 31*) beside usmdsi 'we desire' {Yvas-).
Long vowels and diphthongs are often the result of
19. Contraction.
contraction in Sandhi'^. They have frequently a similar origin in the interior
of plant, beside

loss of

tila-pinji-

of words ^+.
a. Contractions of a with a vowel or diphthong are the following:
1. a. often stands for a -\- a, a + a, or a-\- a;
e. g. dj-at,
augmented
imperfect

(=

d-aj-at); dd-a, red. perf.

ati); uktkd^^, inst. sing.

aor. subj.

(=

dd-ati);

2. e stands

for

(=

(^

a-dd-d); bhdrati, pres. subj.

ukthd-d); dsvas 'mares', nom.

devdm, gen. pi. (= devd-ant).

a + f and a-\-i; e.g. dive, loc.

pi.

sing.

Cp. 25,

bhdra-

dsva-as); ddti,

(=

dsva-i); padi.

(at the end of a tristubh-line), without inter- berg, ZDMG. 44, 321 ff.
change of quantity, appears in sirasu, loc. Sandhi im Rgveda).

plur. of sTrd- 'stream'.

(=

(=

(Der Abhinihita

A I; Wackernagel

i,

71.

8 Cp.
Schmidt, KZ. 26, 24; WackerSee below, Denominatives, 563, a.
2 Apart from the syncopation of a in low nagel 21, p. 73.
S Op. cit. 2', p. 71 (bottom).
grade syllables cp. 25, A I.
10 Op. cit. 21, p. 72 (bottom).
Cp. B6HTLINGK, ZDMG. 39, 533; 44,
11 Op. cit. I, p. 6 1 (top).
492 f.; cp. Oldenberg 324.
12 Cp.
Perop. ciL I, 53 c, note; Arnold,
4 See Bohtlingk's Lexicon s. v.
haps also in jdmbila- (MS.) 'knee-pan', if Vedic Metre, 129 (p. 78J.
13 See below 69, 7.
Janu'vila-.
H See above 15, a 2.
5 Cp. DelbriJck, AIV. 174; V. Negelein,
15 The original inst. ending -a under the
Zur Sprachgeschiclite des Veda 60 {rinfluence of this contracted form became -a;
Wurzeln).
6 Cp. Wackernagel I, p. 324; Olden- cp. Wackernagel i, p. 102, mid.
1

.1

12

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

nom.

(=

ace. du. neut.

nom.

sisters',

bhdves,

padd-i);

4.

Vedic Grammar.

opt. pres.

(=

bhdva-is);

yami

'twin'

ace. du. fem. (== yajna-t).

3. o stands for a-\-u;

e.

g.

dvocam, aor. of vac- 'speak'

(=

dva-uc-am).

f ; e. g. tdsmai 'tostands for a-\-e and, in augmented forms, a

him', dat. sing. masc. (= tdsma-e); devydi^ dat. sing. fem. (= devyd-e); dicchat,
3. sing, impf {= d-icchai); dirata, 3. pi. impf. (= d-iratd) 'set in motion'.
5. au stands for a-\-a in augmented forms; e. g. ducchat, 3. sing. impf.
4. ai

(=

of vas- 'shine'
1.

(=

d-ucchai); auhat, 3. sing. impf. oiuh- 'remove'

/ with i or a are the following:

(=

a-Uh-af).

Contractions of

b.

stands for i-\-i in the

nom.

ace. pi. neut. of /-stems;

e. g.

tri 'three'

tri-i).

2.

vowel

is

+ / in weak forms of the perfect, when the reduplicative

immediately followed by / (either original or reduced from yd)\

stands for

(=

ts-ur

e. g.

3.

of stems in

-i;

cp. rivij-a),
4.

i-is-ttr

stands for
e. g.

from

+a

mati

is-

(=

mati-a) 'by

du. fem. 'the

si'cc-T,

(=

i-ij-e from yaj- 'sacrifice').

and the nom. ace. du. mase. fem.
thought'; pdfi 'the two lords' {= pdti-a,

'speed'); ij-e

in the inst. sing. fem.

T stands for i-\-a in

two bright ones'

compounds of dvi-

(=

'two',

suci-a).

ni 'down', prdti 'against",

with the low grade of 5p- 'viaXef dvTp-d- 'island'; nip-d- 'low-lying' (K.)^;
'against the stream' ^5. I stands for i-\-a, when reduplicative i is followed by the low grade
form of a root beginning with a ipsa-ti (AV.), desiderative of ap- 'obtain'
similar contraction takes place when initial radical a is long
(= i-ip-sa-) 3.
by position, in iks-ate 'sees' (cp. dks-i 'eye') and mkh-dyati 'swings' (cp. pariankhdyate 'may he embrace'). In ij-ate 'drives', beside dj-ati 'drives', the
contraction to f of ? + is perhaps due to analogy*.
c. Contractions of u with u (x a are the following:
1. u stands for u-\-u in weak forms of the perfect when the reduplicative
vowel is immediately followed by u (either original or reduced from va);
e. g. iic-e, 3 sing. mid. (= u-uc-e) from uc- 'like'; uc-i'ir (= u-uc-ur) from vac:

pratipdm

'speak'.
2. u stands for u-\-a in the compound formed with dnu 'along' and the
low grade of ap- 'water': anup-d-'< 'pond'.
3. u stands for u-\-a in the nom. aec. du. masc. fem. of K-stems; e. g. bahu
bahu-d).
'the two arms' (
4. u seems to stand for u-\-i in the nom. ace. pi. neuter of -stems;
from vdsu- 'good'; but the vowel may possibly be
e. g. vdsu (= vdsu-i),
lengthened by analogy s, for the Pada text always has u.
a. In the written text of the Sanihitas, hiatus is, as a
20. Hiatus.

diphthongs only, vowels being otherwise separated by

It nevertheless appears:
consonants.
1. in Sandhi, when a final s y ox v has been dropped before a following
vowel; when final i a e of dual endings are followed by vowels; when a
remains after final e and 0; and in some other instances*;
2. in compounds, when the final j of the first member has disappeared
before a vowel; e. g. dyo-agra- 'iron-pointed' (ay as- 'iron'); pura-etr- 'leader'
{purds 'before'); and when, by a Prakritism, y is lost in prd-uga- 'fore-part
of the shaft' {= prd-yuga-);
rule,

tolerated

in

4 Cp. Wackernagel I, 90 c, p. 104.

5 That is,
of the a and i stems;
and prdtTka- 'face'.
Cp. Samprasarana I and zZ for ya and bhadra, tri.
6 See below, Sandhi 6g
73.

Cp. nip-ya- (VS.), 'lying at the bottom'.

2 Cp. dnika3

e.

I.

Phonology.

Contraction. Hiatus. Svarabhakti.

13

word tltaii-^ 'sieve' (probably from tarns- 'shake'), by

due most likely to borrowing from an Iranian dialect (where
medial s would have become A, which then disappeared).
b. I. Though not written, hiatus is common elsewhere also in the
Samhitas^ The evidence of metre shows that_j' and v must often be pronounced
-as i and u, and that a long vowel or a diphthong has frequently the value
of two vowels. When the long vowel or diphthong is the result of contraction,
the two original vowels must often be restored, within a word as well as in
Sandhi. Thus pdnti 'they protect', may have to be read z& pa-anti {= pi-anti)^,
anjan 'they anointed' as d-anjan; jyistha- 'mightiest' as jyd-istha- {= jyi-isthafrom Jya- 'be mighty'); dicchas as d-icchas 'thou didst wish'; aurnos as a-urnos
in the simple

3.

z.

loss

of

J,

"'thou didst open'*.

2. Hiatus is further produced by distraction of long vowels ^ which, as
metre
shows, are in the Rgveda often to be pronounced as two short
the
This distraction was doubtless originally due partly to a slurred
vowels.
accentuation which practically divided a syllable into two halves, and partly
From such instances distraction
^to the resolution of etymological contraction.
spread to long vowels in which it was not historically justified. It appears

most often in a, especially in the gen. pi. in -am, also in the abl. sing, in
-at, the nom. ace. pi. in -as, -asas of a-stems, in the ace. sing, in -am of such
-words as abjdm 'born in the water'; and in many individual words ^- Distraction
it is not etymologically
is further found in the diphthongs of words in which
justified;
.ndtr-

as in the genitives

ve's

'of

bird',

gos 'of a cow', in tredhd 'threefold',

'leader', reknas- 'property', sreni- 'row';

When

and

in other

words 7.

a consonant is in conjunction with r or a

tends to be developed between them, and
sound
vocalic
short
nasal, a very
the evidence of metre shows that a vowel must often be pronounced between
It is the general view of the Pratisakhyas* that when an r precedes
them.
another consonant a vowel is sounded after it; according to some of them
consonant. They call
this also takes place after / or even after any voiced
equal
to '/s, ^U, or '/2
describe
as
they
which
'vowel-part',
or
it svarabhakti
e) in sound.
-mora in length and generally as equivalent \.o a ox e (probably
21.

Svarabhakti.

syllable is frequently
a. The metre of the RV. shows that an additional
another consonant;
follows
or
precedes
9
either
r
which
in
words
in
-required
(quadrisyllabic) ; {ndra-^, name of a god
e. g. darsatd- 'worthy to be seen'

(very often trisyllabic);

/ri

'forth'

(dissyllabic)".

appearance of slurred accentuation: WackerWackernagel 1, 37 b, note.

See Oldenberg, Prolegomena 434 ff.: NAGEL I, 47.
8 RPr. VI. I3f.,
VPr. iv. 16; TPr. xxi.
'Hiatus und Contraction'; Arnold, Vedic
loiff.
Metre, chapter iv, p. 70 ff. (Sandhi), chapter v, I5f.; APr. I.
9 The vowel which has to be restored in
'p. 81 ff. (Syllabic Restoration).
the gen.loc. du. termination -^wj, which must
3 As a rule, one vowel (including e and 0)
read as a dissyllable, is not to
shortened before another: see Olden- always be
is
be explained as Svarabhakti, since -taros is
berg, op. cit., 465 ff.; 447 ffthe original ending.
4 Wackernagel i, 46 b.
10 Cp. Oldenberg, ZDMG. 60, 711745
ff. (Vocale
5 See Oldenberg, op. cit., 163
(Die Messung von indra, rudrd u. a.).
Geltung).
zweisilbiger
mit
11 There seem to be a few instances of a
6 See Wackernagel i, 44- This is a very
vowel being actually written:
as it is found in the Avesta Svarabhakti
1

Cp.

-old

phenomenon,

the secon;
dary derivative svaitdrim, beside svitra- (AV.)
probably
This distraction 'white' ; puritsa- and piirusa- 'man',

the gen.pl. and in other forms:

berg 181; Wackernagel i, p. 50.

-in

Wackernagel

i,

46.

Olden-

diphthongs is also pre-Vedic, parallels

being found in the Avesta. Its use gradually
decreases in the RV. and is lacking in the
Hater Samhitas, doubtless owing to the disof

iardsanil, beside iras- 'tremble'

for

*pursa-

(Wackernagel

I,

51,

cp. 52).

of kMo-, which is commoner

than lokd- 'world', has not yet been satisfactorily explained; cp. op. cit. I, 52 d.

The

initial vowel

14

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

Vedic Grammar.

When

a consonant is followed by n, n, or in, the same parasitic vowel

e. g. yajnd- (= yafnd-) 'sacrifice'; gnA- (= g^nd-) 'woman'. It
is, however,
here frequent only as representing the second syllable after the
caesura in tristubh and jagati verses; it rarely occurs at the beginning of such
verses, and never at the end'.
b.

often appears;

VOWEL GRADATION.
The Guna

I.

Low

series: e o an.

u r.
In the same root or stem the simple vowels
i u r I are found to interchange^ with the respective high grade forms e o ar al^
called Guna ('secondary form'.?) by the native grammarians, according to the
conditions under which the formative elements are attached.
Beside these
appear, but much less frequently, the long grade forms ai au ar called Vrddhi
The latter regarded the simple vowels,
('increase') by the same authorities.
as the fundamental grade, which, from the Indian^point of view, these vowels
often evidently represent: thus from urnavdbhi- (SB.) 'spider', we have the
derivative formation aurnavabhd-''S'pr\m.g from a spider'*. Comparative grammar
has, however, shown that in such forms we have only a secondary application
of an old habit of gradation derived from the IE. period, and that Guna^
represents the normal stage from which the low grade form, with reduced
or altogether lacking vowel ^, arose in less accented syllables.
This theory
alone can satisfactorily explain the parallel treatment of Guna gradation
{e
ar beside i u r) and Samprasarana gradation {ya va ra beside i u r)^
22.

A.

grade:

{dis- 'point out')

and is-td-, iydj-a (yaf- 'sacrifice').
u r can easily be explained as reduced forms of both
Guna and Samprasarana syllables (as ending or beginning with i u r), while
the divergent 'strengthening' of i u r, under the same conditions, to e o ar
or ya va ra cannot be accounted for 7.
The interchange of Guna and simple vowel is generally accompanied
by a shift of accent: Guna appears in the syllable which bears the accent,,
but is replaced by the simple vowel when the accent is transferred to the
following syllable. This shows itself most clearly in inflexional forms; e. g. i-mi
'I go', but i-mds 'we go'; ap-nS-mi (AV.) 'I obtain', but ap-nu-mds 'we obtain';
vdrdhaya, but vrdhdya 'to further'. Hence it is highly probable that change
of accent was the cause of the gradation '.
a. Long grade or Vrddhi: ai, au, ar.
Vrddhi is far more restricted
in use than Guna, and as it nearly always appears where Guna is to be
expected, it may be regarded as a lengthened variety of it^ dating back to

as

in

dis-td-,

di-des-a

In other words,

the IE. period.

See

Oldenberg,

Prolegomena,

374,

note.

normal stage in the gradation of the avowels in many roots: see 24; Wacker-

2 This interchange was already noticed NAGEL I, 55 b.

6 The vowel sometimes disappears in the
by Vaska; see Nirukta X. 17.
3 The only root in which the gradation low grade of the a-series ('Schwundstufe')
al:l is found is kip-, cp. 14. It is employed see 24.

in word-formation

much

in

the

same way

and nominal inflexion.

See below a, 3 and cp. 25 B2; Wacker-

as in verbal
4

NA.GEL
5

I,

55, p. 62, note (top).

Both a and a represent the Guna or

Cp. Wackernagel I, 55.

Occasional exceptions, such as vfkaof explanation:
'wolf,
are capable
cp.
7

Wackernagel
9

i,

57.

'Dehnstufe'; cp.

Wackernagel

i,

61.

Phonology.

I.

to

It is

in the

nom.

be found
sing,

Vowel Gradation. Guna

i) in strong

of sdkhi-

'friend'

Series.

15

forms of a few monosyllabic substantives,

and of stems

in -r,

and

in the loc. sing,

of stems in i and u: su-hard- 'good-hearted' (from hfd- 'heart'), dydu-s 'heaven'^

(from dyit-), gdu-s 'cow' (from go-); sdkka'', piia'; agnai (from ag7ii- 'fire';,
aktdu (from aktit- 'night'); 2) before the primary nominal suffixes -a, -i, -ti,
-tna, -man, -vana; e.g. sparh-d- 'desirable' {Ysprh-); Mrd-i- 'hsaxt' (from kfd-);
(VS.) 'drawing' {Ykrs-); sraus-tt'dbtdiitnt' {Y srus-); (yaz^-Zraa- 'stimulating'
{Y0'-); bharman- 'board' {Y^hr-); kars-T-vana- (AV.) 'ploughman'; 3) in
secondary nominal derivation, generally to form patronymics or adjectives
expressive of connexion or relation ">; e. g. gairiksitd- 'descended from giri-ksif;
aidijd- 'son of Usif; srautrd- 'relating to the ear' (sritra-); hairanyd- 'golden^
{hiranya- 'gold'); 4) in the singular pres. of a few verbs of the second class
and in the active j-aorist of roots ending in vowels: ksndu-mi 'I sharpen'
{Yksnu-); mars-ti'^ 'he wipes' ( V^wr;-); ydu-mi (AV.) 'I unite' {Yyu^', a-jai-sam
'I have conquered' (l/>V-); ydu-s, 2 sing, 'ward off' ("j/j'^-); a-bhar-sam 'I have
borne' (l/Mr-).
B.
grade T u fr.
The same Guna and Vrddhi forms as a rule
correspond to these long vowels as to their short forms i u r. Thus bhi- 'fear'
bi-bhdy-a and bi-bhay-a\
hu- 'call' ju-hav-a;
ta-tar-a,
beside
tf- 'cross'
/^irj--?'-

Low

tir-dte

and

kr- 'do'

-ttr-na-

(just

like

sri-

'resort'

si-sray-a;

sru- 'hear'

su-srav-a;

Before consonants the roots pri- 'love', vi- 'desire', vt'impel', SI- 'lie'j ni- 'lead', bliT- 'fear', have Guna forms in e, the last two also>
Vrddhi forms in ai; but roots in u and f have avi^ and ari as Guna^ avi
and ari as Vrddhi, respectively; e. g. pa- 'purify', aor. pavi-sta and apavisur;
:

ca-kar-d).

kr- 'scatter', aor. subj. kari-saV.

a. t and u instead of Guna.
In a few verbs and some other words
and U are the old weak grade vowels (almost invariably medial) of e and 0,
the length of which has been preserved by the accent shifting to them (while
when not thus protected they have been shortened to i and u), and which
as thus accented, sometimes appear instead of the Guna vowels.
Thus i is
I

found in ris-ant- 'injuring' {= *rts-dn(-), beside resa-, the low grade form of
Similary gfihati 'hides' appears
the radical syllable otherwise becoming ris-^.
beside goh-a- 'hiding-place', the root being also shortened in guh-ydte, etc.;
dus-dyati 'spoils', beside dos-a- and dosds- (AV.) 'evening', also dus-ti- (AV.)
'destruction'; ih-ati 'removes', beside 6h-a- 'gift'; nU 'now', nti-tana- 'new',.
nu-ndm 'now', beside ndva- 'new', also ni'c 'now' (never at the beginning of a
sentence); mUs- 'mouse', beside mosatha 'ye rob', also musitd- 'stolen'; yiipa,

'post', he:a\die yuyop a 'has infringed', also yupitd- (AV.) 'smoothed'; sta-pa- 'tuft'^
beside sto-kd- 'drop', also stu-pd- (VS.) 'tuft '9.
b. In a few roots ending in '", the radical vowel i represents the low
1 With
loss of the final element, which
however, remains in datives like idsmai,
probably because the diphthong was here
pronounced with a slurred accent: cp.

WackernAgel

I,

93.

preceding vowel
r, the
having compensatory IE. lengthening (cp.
Wackernagel I, 61 c). In a, few instances,
the Vrddhi of the nom. sing, spread to other
cases (cp. 25 B b l); e. g. iar-as, nom. pi.,
from old nom. sing. *sidr (beside stf-hhis).
3 Also agndu, like the 2<;-stems.
4 See below 191.
2

With

loss

From

other forms,

the

of

present

e. g.

perf.

the^

ar spread

mamarja

(AV.).

to

6 They have
in the intensive reduplication only; e. g. sosu- ysii-.
7 Cp. Wackernagel i, 76.
8 The accentuation of i, the low grade of
ya, is probably to be explained similarly in
:

shortened
b 3 and 29.
9 The accentuation of u, the low grade of
11a is probably to be explained similarly in
feminines like kadrii-s {^^. B.) 'brown' (masc.
kadru-m, TS. B.); shortened to u in voc,
s.g.bibhru; cp. Wackernagel i, 82.
feminines like napti-s
to napti in

voc;

ira.s^sc.ndpat-');

cp. 19

10 That is, the original form would have

been tu- or iu- according as a vowel or a
consonant followed.

i6

grade, but early began to supplant

dev-ana- 'game

Vedic Grammar.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

of

occur

dice',

thus from div- 'play', beside dideva (AV.),

and div-i dat. and loc. of div-

e;

div-yati, div-i

dice'; from sriv- 'fail', beside Jrevdyant-, srivayati (AV.); but from
miv- 'push', only miv-ati etc.; from siv- 'sew', only siv-yati etc. It is a peculiarity
of these roots that iv appears before vowels and y only, becoming yu or u
before other consonants; thus dyu-td- (AV.) 'play'; -mu-ta- 'impelled', mu-rd'duir, nui-tra- (AV. VS.) 'urine'; syu-id- 'fastened', su-d- 'needle', sd-ira- (AV.)

'game of

'thread'; srd- 'lead ball".

The Samprasarana

II.

Gradation of ya va

a.

Low

series.

''

ra.

In place of the accented syllables ya va ra

u r\
23.
ar) appear the low grade vowels
(corresponding to the Guna vowels e
i u r* when the accent shifts to the following syllable in some fourteen

grade:

yaj- 'sacrifice', jyae- 'extend', vyadh- 'pierce', vac- 'speak', vadvap- 'strew', vai- 'be eager', vas- 'dwell', vas- 'shine', vah- 'carry';
svap- 'sleep', ^raM- wAgrah- 'st\zt\ pracck- (properly /ra/-) 'ask', vrasc- 'hew';
yds-tave; us-mdsi vds-ti; susup-vArns- susvdpa.
e. g. is-tda. Besides these, a good many other roots, in occasional verbal forms
or nominal derivatives, show the same gradation in the radical syllable.
1. / appears in inimiksi'ir mimydksa perf. of ywjai/-; vithura- 'wavering',
vithurydti 'wavers', beside vydth-ate 'wavers'.
2. u in uksant- 'growing' vavdksa 'has grown'; sus-dnt- svas-iti 'breathes';
ju-hur-as hvdr-ati 'is crooked'; ur-u- 'broad': comp. vdr-Tyas-^ superl. vdr-istka-\
Mr- dvdr- 'door'; dhun-i- 'resounding' dhvan-i- (AV.) 'sound'.
3. r in krpate 'laments': aor. akrapista; grnaiti {KS[ .) gratk-itd- 'tied';
roots,

viz.

'speak',

-irth-ita'adroit'

srath-nati 'becomes loose';

'spreads

out';

bhrin-d-

d-ni-bhrs-ta- 'undefeated': bhras-at aor.,

mrada

'soften' (impv.),

'straight'

rdj-istha- 'straightest'; rbh-u-

drh-ya 'be firm' (impv.)

rdbh-ate 'grasps';

'broad' -.prdth-ati

rj-i'i.-

Urna-mradas-

'error'

drah-ydt 'firmly'; prth-ubhram-d- 'whirling flame';

:

bhras-td- {KSl ^ 'fallen'; mrd-tias wool.'; sfk-van-

'soft

'soft':

srdk-va- 'corner

of the mouth'.
b. This gradation also appears in the stems of a few nouns and in certain
nominal suffixes: dyu-bhis dydv-i loc, dydu-s nom. 'heaven'; sun- svd-, svdn'dog' iydn- {=yic-un-) -.yi'iva-, yuvan- 'youth'; catur- catvar- 'four'; the superlative
and comparative suffixes -is-tha and -yas; the perf part, suffix -us -vat,
:

-vanis 5.
'

b.

24.
syllables

Lo'w grade:
ya va ra to

appear as

T u

Tr.

the

u ir {^= IE.

Gradation of ya va

ra.

Corresponding

short

vowels

to the reduction of the short

r,

the long syllables

ya va ra

f).

1 The etymology of this

word is, however, doubtful.
Cp. Wackernagel i, 81.
2 In the terminology of the native grammarians Samprasarana ('distraction') designates
the change of the semi-vowel only to the
corresponding vowel (but see also Panini VI.
Here we use the word to express
I, ro8).
the reduction of the entire syllables ya va ra
to the corresponding vowels z u r.
3
Though ; seems invariably to have
resulted from the reduction of Guna or
Samprasarana syllables, there is no reason

suppose that every

to

origin.

On

the

and u has a similar

contrary,

it

is

more

lilcely

that IE. i and u have been preserved by

the side of the reduced vowels and that the
Guna grade has in many instances been
subsequently added to original i and u.
Cp. Pedersen, if. 2, 323, note.
4 This reduction goes back to the IE. pretonic syncope oieo: cp. Wackernagel I, 62
On the two forms of the roots
(p. 69, mid.).
cp. also Niruktall. 2 and Mahabhasya I, 112.

See

Wackernagel

i,

63.

Phonology.

I.

found thus both

a. I is

ji-ydte (AV.)

and

ji-yate

Samprasarana
in radical

nom. ace,

in

and

Series.

- Series.

suffixal syllables:

i.

17
in jt-td-

'might', Jyi-yas- 'stronger', ji-jya-sant-

-jyii-

to overcome'; 2. in the fem. suffix

'girl';

{AN.)

'desiring

kan-i-nam (for kani-nam) from kanya-

-v.

devim, devis, beside -ya- in dat. abl. gen. loc. sing.

devydi {=devya-e), devyas {^devya-as), devy&m (= devya-ani); 3. in the optative,
either before or after the accented syllable, beside -ya-; e. g. bruv-i-td and
bhdret {= bkdra-t-t), but i-ya-t.

b.

is

e. g.^ devi,

(=

found:

i. in forms of sud- 'put in order'

'make palatable'),
sud-dyati, sam-sud-d- (TS.) 'gum', beside forms and derivatives

e. g. su-sud-ati,

of svad-

'enjoy', 'taste', e. g. svada-te, svattd-, svad-u- 'sweet';

2. in fem.
in -u beside -va in dat. abl. gen. loc. sing.; e. g. svasrd- 'mother-in-law',

nouns

= svasr-vi-as),

svasr-vdi (AV.,
svasr-va-e), gen. svasr-vds (AV.,
(= svasr-vd-am).

dat.

loc.

svasr-vam

tr

c.

(=

is found in dirgh-ddrdgh-mdn- 'length'.

f)

istha- 'longest',

The

III.

beside dragh-tyas- 'longer', dragh-

'long',

fl-series.

Gradation of

a.

a.

A. Low grade: a or -,
Many roots and formatives have a in
the Guna or normal stage.
The reduction of r from ar or ra indicates
that in low grade syllables this a would normally disappear.
As a rule,
25.

however, it remains', doubtless because its loss would in most cases have
led to unpronounceable or obscure forms'- At the same time, the syncope
takes place in a considerable number of instances:
d-dnt- (= old pres. part.) 'tooth'; as- 'be':
1. in verbal forms: ad- 'eat'
:

s-dnti, s-yat, s-dnt-, beside ds-ti

'is';

gam-

'go' .ja-gm-ur;

ghas-

'eat'

a-ks-an,

g-dha (= ghs-td), 3. sing. impf. mid., Ja-ks-tydt, perf. opt., beside

gkas-a-i ^Tii3,y he eat'; pat-'iaR' pa-pi-ima, pa-pt-iir, pa-pt-ivdms-, perf, a-pa-pt-at,
aor., heside pd:(-anfi ; pad- 'go' -.pi-bd-a-mana-, led. -pres. paxt, pi-bd-and- 'standing
impf.,

3. pi.

beside pdd-yate 'goes'; bhas- 'chew' ba-ps-ati, 3 pi. pres., bd-ps-at-, pres.
beside bhds-a-t 'may he chew'; sac- 'follow' sd-sc-ati, 3. pi. red. pres.,
sa-sc-ata,
sa-sc-ire,
beside sac-ante 'they
3. pi. impf. mid.,
3. pi. perf. mid.,
firm',

part.,

accompany'; sad3. pi. perf.,

hdn-ti

'sit'

sid-ati

(=

beside d-sad-at 'he

3. sing, pres.,

si-zd-ati),

sat';

han-

strike'

sed-i'cr

{=

sa-zd-i'ir),

gAn-dnii, 3. pi. pres., beside

3. sing.

in nominal derivatives: ghas- ^e&t' a-g-dhid- (TS.) 'eating what is

uneaten' (= a-ghs-ta-ad-), sd-g-dhi (VS.) 'joint meal' {= sa-ghs-ti-); bhas'chew' d-ps-u- 'foodless'; pad- 'walk' upa-bd-d-, upa-bd-i- 'noise' (lit. 'tread');
napt-i- 'granddaughter'
ndpatcati'ir- 'four';
tur-iya- 'fourth' (^ *ktur-iya-)
2.

'grandson'.
3. in suffixes: -s- for -as- in bhi-s-a, inst. sxng.-.bhiy-ds-a 'through fear';
sir-s-dne. g.

sir-as- 'head'; -s for -as in the abl. gen. sing^

agnfs, visno-s, go-s.

B. Long grade:
the

Guna

stage is a.
a. in the root:
I.

in

a.
It

The Vrddhi corresponding

ending of stems vni u

to the

0:

a which represents

appears:

primary nominal derivation: thus pdd-

'foot':

pad-, bd- 'walk'; raj-

'go' ga-ta- ; dyu-mdnt-, inst. sing, dyu-mat-a

i, 70.
followed by n or m, the nd-man; inst. pi. nama-bhis. The a in such
syllables an and am, if preceded by a con- low grade syllables is generally regarded as
historically representing the sonant nasal n :
sonant, usually lose the nasal before mutes
ha-tkas 2. du. pres. ; gam- cp. Wackernagel i, 66.
e. g. han- strike'
1

See Wackernagel

When

is

Indo-arische Philologie.

I. 4.

i8

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

rj- 'direct'; vac- 'voice' vac-, uc- 'speak'; ksis, nom., ksim, ace,
ksam-, kpn-; nabh- 'well' ndbk-as, abh-rd- {abhnbh-) 'cloud'.
Also before primary suffixes: ap-as dp-as 'work'; vas-as 'garment' vas-, us'wear'; vSh-as 'offering' vah-, uh- 'convey'; vSs-tu 'abode'
vas-, tis- 'dwell'.
Perhaps also pith-as 'place' path- 'path' '.
2. in secondary nominal derivation; e. g. kanvd- 'descended from Kanva';.
vapus-d- 'marvellous' vdp-us- 'marvel'.
3. in the active of the j-aorist: thus a-cchant-s-ur chand-, chad- (= cAnd-)
'appear'; a-yam-s-am, i. sing. -.yam-, ya- {= ym-) 'stretch'; sak-s-ama, also mid.
sak-s-i, sak-s-ate sah- 'overcome' ^b. in the suffix of nominal stems:
1. in the nom. sing. masc. of stems in -mant and -vant, and throughout
the strong cases of stems in -an, of mahdt- 'great', and of ndpat- 'grandson':
thus dyu-mSn 'brilliant' dyu-mdnt-, dyu-mdt- (= -mnt-); re-vdn 'rich' re-vdnf-,

'king'

'earth'

raj-,

re-vdt-

(=

vni-^^; rsj-a, ace. raj-afi-am 'king'

rdj-an-, rsj-n-, raj-a-

{=

raj-n-);

mah-in, ace. mah-ant-am; ndpat, ace. ndpat-am.

2. in the nom. ace. pi. neuter of stems in -an and -as and of one in
-ant; thus ndma* 'names' nAman, ndma- {= nSmn-); mdnams-i 'minds' mdn-as;
:

sdnt-i

c.

s-dnt- 'being'.

in

anu- as first member of a

otherwise anu-.

'continuously'

compound

in

anu-sdk and anukdm

Gradation of

b.

a.

The vowel a is not always the long grade vowel:

26. Low grade: /.
The low grade of this a is
a number of roots it represents Guna.
normally /; it sometimes, however, appears as i, owing to analogy 5, and,
Thus sthi-td- stha-s 'thou hast
especially with a secondary accent, as a.
stood'; dhi-td- dd-dha-ti 'pXa.cts' pu-ni-M pu-nd-ti, ixova pa- '^gvaiiy' ; gdh-ana'depth', gdh-vara- (AV.) 'hiding-place' ^(i/4-a/^ 'plunges'.
a. The low grade vowel disappears: i. in roots ending in a before
vowel terminations; in the weak forms of the reduplicated present base of
da- 'give' and dha- 'put', before all terminations;' and in the weak form of
the suffix -na- in the ninth class before vowel terminations; thus in the perf.
of da-: dad-dthur, dad-atur; dad-d, dad-ur; dad-e; in the pres. oi dha-: dadhSimilarly from hamdsi; beside pu-nd-ti 'he purifies', pu-n-dnti 'they purify'.
'forsake' occurs, in the opt. pres., the form jah-yat (AV.).
in
the final member of compounds formed with the perf. part,
2.
passive of da- 'give', and da- 'cut', or with a substantive in -ti- from da- 'give'
devd-tta-, a name ('given by the gods'); dva-tta- (VS.) 'cut off'; pdrT-tta- (VS.)
'given up'; d-pratl-tta- {tiN ^ 'not given back'; bhdga-tti- 'gift of fortune';
maghd-tti- 'gift of presents'; vdsu-tti- 'gift of wealth' (beside vdsu-dhiti- 'bestowal
of wealth' dha.-). Also in agni-dh-^ 'fire-placer', a kind of priest 7.
in

5 That is,
under the influence of i as
Cp. Aui'RECHT, BB. 14, 33; Wackerlow grade of ai which before consonants
I, 72 (p. 79, bottom).
2 Op. cit. I, 72 b S (p. 80).
appears as a, as in gT-ld- beside ga-thd-,
3 The
long vowel in these nominatives from gai- 'sing', pres. gdv-ati; cp. 27 a.
^
Cp. agni-dhana- 'fire-place'
is to be accounted for by IE. compensatory
in VS.
lengthening [-man
mant-s, etc.); in the agntdh- appears instead, as if 'fire-ldndler'
following examples it has spread from the (from idh- 'liindle').
nominative to other cases.
7 For a few other examples (which are
4 Such neuter plurals were in origin prob- doubtful) of the loss of the low grade vowel
ably feminine singular collectives cp. Brug- in the final member of compounds, see
MANN, KG. 481 ; Wackernagel I, 73 and 95. Wackernagel i, p. 82 (mid.).
1

NAGEL

I.

Phonology,

IV.

Low

a Series,

The
a.

ai

ai

and au

Gradation of

and au

Series.

19

series.
ai.

grade: 7.
27.
As the final of roots and in suffixes i is graded
with ai (as with ya^), which appears as ay- before vowels and as a- before
consonants".
The roots in which this gradation is found are stated by the
Indian grammarians in five different forms. They are:
a. I. roots given with -ai- (because their present base appears as -ay-a)
gai- 'sing' gi-td-, gT-yd-mana-, beside gAy-ati 'sings', -giy-as 'song', and ga-s-i,
:

1.

sing. aor. vaiA., ga-thd- 'song'; pyai- 'swell' -.pT-nd-, beside pydy-aie; s'rai- 'boil':

beside irdy-ati, sra-td-.

with -ay-: cay- ^o\)%ex\ cikt-hi

3. with -e-: dhe- 'sxssHs! -.dhi-td-,
beside dhdy-as 'drink', dhay-i'o- 'thirsty', and dha-tave 'to suck', dha-ru- (AV.)
'sucking'.
4. with -a-\ pa- 'drink' :/r-/i2'-, /r-^/- 'drink', beside pay-dyati, caus.,
pdy-dna- 'causing to drink', and d-pa-t, aor., pd-tave; rd- 'give' ra-ri-thds,
5. with -r2. sing, injv., beside rdy-a 'with wealth', and rd-sva, impv., rd-m, ace.
ni- 'lead' ;^r-/'-, beside ndy-d- 'leader', and -na-thd- (AV.) 'help'; pi- 'revile':
pi-yati, pT-ya-tnu- and pi-y-u- 'reviler', beside pay-u- (VS.) 'anus'; prT- 'love':
pri-nd-ti, prT-td-, beside prdy-as-e^; s'l-^ 'lie'; -si-van- 'lying', beside a-say-ata,
srT-nA-ti, srT-td-,

(AV.), beside cay-amana-,

cay-i'i-

2.

'respectful'.

5
3. sing.

b. This gradation also occurs in the final of dissyllabic bases: thus

grabhi-sta, a-grahhi-t, grhhi-td-, beside grbhay-dti 'seizes'*; and in the base of
the ninth class: grbhni-ta, 2. pi., beside grbhni-ti.
-ethe -ete and -ethdm -etam of the
which can only be explained as containing
ithe Tte and itham ftam, with weak grade t corresponding to the accented
a of dike die and dthdm dtam of the non-thematic conjugation (and parallel

c.

It is

also

found

in

the

suffixes

du. mid. of the a-conjugation,

2. 3.

to the

-I-

of the optative beside

-ya-'').

b. Gradation of au.

Low

As

the final of roots u is graded with au (parallel

with vd ^), much in the same way as f with ai, appearing as av before vowels,
d before consonants 9; but the certain examples are few. Thus dhu-no-ti
dha-rd'shakes', dha-ti- 'shaker', dhu-md- 'smoke', beside dhdv-ati 'runs',
But here au appears
'stream'; dhu-td- 'washed',, beside dhdv-ati 'washes'.
before consonants as well as a; thus dhau-tdri- 'shaking', beside dha- 'shake';
and dhau-ti- 'spring', dhau-td- (SV.), beside dhdv-ati 'washes'. Similarly gd-m
28.

grade

0.

See above 24.

2 ai

appears only in the

j-aor., as nai-s-ta,

to this e that ay- sometimes appears instead

of ay- in some of the above verbs; as

iroaiypri-;ray-i-'vrea,\th.',
2. pi., rii- 'lead', owing to the analogy of /;-fly-iZf- 'enjoyment',
from yra-; idy-e, 3. sing., from if- 'lie'.
forms like d-jai-s-ma, from Ji- 'conquer'.
6 Cp. Wackernagel i, 79 b (p. 89).
3 Occurs RV. IV. 21' (Pp. pro. ayase (and is

explained by Bohtlingk (pw.) as ==prayase.

Perhaps also in iT- 'fall' ityate (AV.),

beside iata-yati 'cuts off', which may be a
Cp.
denominative from *sa.-ta- 'fallen'.
Whitney, Roots, under ysat- and j/i h-;
Wackeenagel I, 79 a S (p. 88).
5 In some of the above roots e appears
instead of a before consonants; e. g. ce-ru'devout', beside cay-u-; pe-ru- 'causing to
4

drink', beside pay-ana-; dhe-nic- 'milch cow',

dhi-na- id.; U-se, beside a-iay-ata; ne-tf-,
beside na.y-a-; ste-nd- 'thief, beside stay-u(VS.) id., and std:^-ant- (AV.) 'furtive'; senamissile',

beside say-oka-.

It is,

perhaps, due

7
8

Op. cit. I, 79
See above 24

c (p. 89).
b.

9 Similarly in the RV. the -au of duals and

of as/du 'eight' normally appears as dv before
vowels and a before consonants in Sandhi.
The nominatives in a of -r stems and -an
stems, e. g. ma/a, sva 'dog', are probably
due originally to the loss of the final r and
n before consonants in the sentence, then
becoming the regular form everywhere.
Conversely as^du has become the only independent form in the AV., asfa- appearing
Cp.
only as first member of a compound.

Wackernagel

i,

94, 95.

2*

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

and gii-s, ace, beside g&v-as, nom. pi., but gau-s, nom. sing.,
nom. pi., but dydu-s, nom. sing.,

ace. sing., beside dyAv-as,

V. Secondary shortening of

'cow';

and dya-m,

'heaven'.

r.

Owing to the shift of the accent from its

29. Low grade: / u r.
normal position in a word to its beginning, the low grade vowels J u ir ur (=f
are often further shortened to i u r in compounds and reduplicated forms.
A pre-tonic syllable thus acquires a post-tonic position, where the force of the
accent is weakest. It is the same cause which shortens final weak grade i
and u in the vocative singular; e. g. devi, nom. devi; svdsru, nom. svasrUs'^.
This shortening often appears in:

compounds^:

a.

those in which the final member is derived with -ta- and -ti-,
the accent being regularly thrown back on the first member 5; thus d-ni-si-ta'resdess', /--/- (TS. B.) 'night', from sT 'lie'; prd-si-ti- 'onset', beside sdy-aka'missile'''; su-su-ti- 'easy birth', beside sfiti-ka- (AV.) 'lying-in woman'; a-str-ta1.

'unconquered', d-ni-str-ta- 'not overthrown', beside stir-nd-, from sir- 'strew' 5;

a-huti- 'invocation', otherwise -hu-ti- in sd-huti- 'joint invocation', devd-huti'invocation of the gods', and other compounds.
those in which the final member is a root in t^ or u with or
2.
'thought inspiring', beside jii- 'hastening',
beside bhu-, as in d-pra-bhu- 'powerless',
vi-bhi'c- 'mighty'; ni-yu-t- 'team', beside yu- 'unite' (as in yu-thd- 'herd').
3. those in which the final member is formed with other suffixes;
thus madhydn-di-na- 'midday', su-di-na- 'bright', beside di- 'shine'; su-su-mdnt-

without the suffix

ju-td- 'impelled';

'very

-t;

e.

dhi-jit-

g.

very often

stimulating',

beside

-bhii-,

su-td-

'impelled';

also

in

tuvi-gr-d-

and

tuvi-gr-i-

rT.
'much devouring', beside sam-gir-d- (AV.) 'devouring', as r here
4. some Bahuvrlhis (in which the first member is normally accented)*;

thus brJidd-ri-'^ 'possessing

much

wealth' (rdi-); try-udh-dn- 'having three udders',

beside tldh-an- 'udder'.

reduplicated forms"

which accentuation of the reduplicative

and one form of the aorist, counteracts
the normal accent of the verb; thus from di- 'shine', are formed di-di-hi,
b.

syllable,

in

especially in the third class

2.sing.impv., di-di-vSms-, perf part,

^/-(/z-z'z-

Cp. 23.

The

application of this shortening process becomes obscured, on the one hand

because the phonetically shortened vowel
has found its way into accented final
members of compounds as being characteristic of the end of a compound; while, on the
other hand, Tulr ur (=iP)forthe most part
have remained unchanged, even when the
accent has shifted, because of the influence of
the uncompounded word; e.g. su-siita-'^^begotten','J-d-suia- 'impelled'; a-kuti- 'inten2

'shining', 'btsiA.t df-paya- (causative)

The

secondarily shortened form of the

str-tais not found
as an independent word in the RV.; it first appears
5

past part,

in later texts.
6 An example of the shortening of i is
perhaps adki-ksi-t- 'ruler', ksX- being according
to J. Schmidt, Pluralbildung 419, the original

weak form

of the root;

cp.

Wackernagel

83 b.
7 Cp. Kketschmer, KZ. 31, 397; Wackernagel I, 83 u.
8 See accentuation of compounds, go.
tion' ;
rid-dhiti'truly adored' ; pra-tilrti9 Occurring only in the dat. sing, brhddraye, beside rdy-e, dat. of rdi- 'wealth'.
'onset'.
1 On the shortening of the radical syllable
3 That this is the cause of the shortening
is shown by the fact that the i of the inst. in some verbs
of the fifth and the ninth
sing, of derivatives in -ti appears as z only classes, ji-no-si, beside ji-rd- 'lively', dic-no-ii
when such words are compounded: e. g. 'burns', beside dii-nd- (AV.); 7a-?a-ft' 'impels',
prd-yiikti 'with the team'. Cp. Wackernagel hesiiej'u-id-; pu-na-ii 'purifies', beside pu-^d-,
I, 84.
see Wackernagel i, 85, note (bottom).
* Cp. 27, note 5.
I,

I.

Phonology.

Secondary Shortening of

f.

Consonants.

from dhi- 'think', dx-dhi-ma, i. pi. perf., di-dhi-ti- 'devotion', beside

from kf- 'commemorate', car-kr-se, intv., car-kr-ti- 'praise',
beside kir-ti- 'praise'; from/f- fill', pi-pr-tdm, 3. du., beside pur-nd- and J>ar-td-.
Such shortening often occurs in red. aor., e. g. bi-bhis-a-thas, 2. sing, mid.,

Tsindle';

'thought';

dhi-ti-

beside vi-bhh-ana-

'terrifying'.
It is also found in a few nouns; e. g. H-ii-ra'coolness', beside h-td- 'cold'; tu-tu-md- beside ta-ya- 'strong' '-

{PiiSf:)

The

Consonants.

30. Doubling of consonants.

All consonants, except r /5 /, Anusvara,
and Visarjamya, can be doubled, and the distinction between double and
single consonants

is

known

to the Pratisakhyas as well as to Panini.

Aspirates

however, nearly always written double by giving the first in the unaspirated
form.
A double consonant^ is pronounced by the organs of speech dwelling
longer on it than on the single sound. Within words ^ a double consonant
appears:
1. as the result of the contact of the same consonants or the assimilation <
of different ones; e. g. cit-td- 'perceived' (= cit-ta-); uc-cd- 'high' (= ud-ca-);

are,

(= bhed-ir-); dn-na- 'food' (= ad-na-).

a few onomatopoetic words: akhkhali-krtya 'shouting'; ciccikd- a kind
of bird; kukkutd- (VS.) 'cock'; tittiri- (VS.) and tittiri- (TS. B.) 'quail'; pippaka(VS.) a kind of bird.
3. in the case of the palatal aspirate, which regularly appears as cch
between vowels (though often written as ch in the Mss.), for it always
makes the preceding vowel long by position and is derived from an original
conjunct consonant*. Some forms of khid- 'press down', are doubled after a
vowel in the TS. {fzkkhidat, d-kkhidra-; a-kkhidate, pari-kkhidate). In the TS.*
bh appears doubled in pari bbhuja.
In a school of the White Yajurveda
initial v was regularly doubled '.
4. when final n is doubled after a short vowel if followed by any vowel
bhet-tr- 'breaker'
2. in

sound

'*-

In the Mss., when double consonants are preceded or followed by another conone of them is frequently dropped, because in such consonantal groups there
was no difference in pronunciation between single and double consonants. Hence the
VPr. (vi. 27) prescribes a single / in ksaiira- 'dominion' (= ksad-ira-), and in saitrd'sacrificial session' (= sad-Ira-').
Such shortening is further presupposed by the analysis
of the Pada texts in kr[d)-dyotah (AV. I. 22') and hr(d)-dy6tanah (AV. v. 20^2) as hr-dyotdh
and hr-dyoianah; in id(d]dyd}>i (AV. IV. 1 96) as idt yam (instead of tat dydni); and in
updstha-, which appears in the RV. Pada as upd-stha- instead of ufds-stha-, if Grassmann's
suggestion is right 1. In some instances this reduction is IE., as in satrd- (IE. seilo-)^^.
a.

sonant9,

On

variations in cognate forms between as in dviksat (AV.)

*dvis-sat, aor. of dvisin some other words see 'hate', is also an Indian innovation.
86.
3 On double consonants in Sandhi, see
2 Sometimes a single j represents the below 77.
4 The evidence of theAvestan iaxva.vsr3^kadouble sound, as in asi 'thou art' (= as-si);
apdsu (RV. VIII. 414), loc. pi. of apds- 'active'; shows that the double consonant in vrkkddmhasu (AV.), loc. pi. of dnihas- 'distress'; (AV. VS.) 'kidney' is due to assimilation.
5 See below 40; Wackernagel i, 133.
j6-si 'thou shalt taste' (Jus-); probably also in
6 See TPr. xiv. 8.
gho-si [ixora. ghus- 'sound'}, in us-ds, gen. sing.,
See Weber, Abh. d. Berliner Ak. d.
7
ace. pi. of us-, weak stem of us-ds- 'dawn'
ffor *uss-as), possibly in usr- 'dawn' (for Wiss. 1871, p. 83 f.
8 See below 46;
cp. Wackernagel \
*uss-r-).
As the single t in such forms is
1

f and i u r
Wackernagel I,
i

shown by cognate languages

also, it

seems

here to be pre-Vedic, and the double ss in

forms like rdjas-su, loc. pi., is probably an
Indian innovation. The change of ss to ks,

279

a.

9 Cp.
1
II

Roth

in

ZDMG.

See his Lexicon, s.

See Wackernagel

48, 102 f.
updstha-.

v.
i,

98 b, note.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

Mutes.

Modes of articulation. There are 20 mutes (or 22 counting//-^

the cerebrals), which comprise a tenuis, an aspirate tenuis, a media,
and an aspirate media in each of the five groups of gutturals, palatals, cerebi^als,
These four modes of articulation are initially and
dentals, and labials (4).
31.

among

medially liable to but little variation except when they come into contact
with other mutes or with following sibilants.
Gk.
e. g. cakrd- 'wheel',
1. The tenues regularly represent IE. tenues;
/c'JkXo-?; fitr- 'father', Gk. iraTrip, Lat. pafer.
2. The mediae regularly represent IE. mediae; e. g. gdcchati, Gk. ^a.<jKSi;
There are a few
raj- 'king', Lat. reg-; mdd-ati 'is drunk', Lat. mad-et.
instances in which a media appears in place of an older tenuis: gulphd- {KSf?)-.
kulphd- 'ancle'; drbhaga- ^^owM-vX arbhakd- '\\\A. ; tuj-:tuc-, ^^^a- 'offspring';
dn-ava-prgna- 'undivided' /re- 'mix'; girikd- (MS,) kirikd- (VS.)^ a kind of
demon. These examples may be due to popular dialects, in which tenues
In a few derivatives the media g appears instead
largely became mediae^.
of k before \ht n m v of suffixes owing to the influence of Sandhi e. g. vag-nu'sound', from vac- 'speak', but rik-nas- 'wealth', from ric-; sag-md- 'helpful',
from sak-, but ruk-md- 'gold', from rue- 'shine'; vag-vin- (AV.) 'eloquent', from
:

vak

but tak-vd-

'speech',

'swift',

from tak-

'hasten'.

The evidence of cognate languages shows that the Vedic aspirate

tenuis in a large number of instances is original, and it is highly probable
that it is the regular representative of IE. aspirate tenuis. The following are
3.

examples in which mutes of this character are inherited 3;

a. khan- 'dig'; kJia- 'spring'; khad-ati 'chews'; nakhd- 'nail'; makhd- 'lively';
mukha- 'mouth': safikhd- (AV.) 'shell'; sdkhi- 'companion'.
IE. s in inchoative gdcchati 'goes',
IE. sM, e. g. in cAid- 'split';
b. ch

=
=

ucchdti 'shines'.

AV.) 'sixth'; sthiv-ati (AV.) 'spits'.

dtha 'then'; athari- 'tip'; dtharvan- 'fire-priest'; drtha- 'use';
granth- 'V.-a.oH ; path- 'vi&y' ; prtk-u- 'hronA' ; prdth-as 'hrtadih' prethat- 'snorting';
math- 'stir'; mith- 'alternate'; yd-tha 'as'; rdtha- 'car'; vyathate 'wavers'; snathFurther in the various suffixes -tha: forming primary nouns; e. g.
'pierce'.
c. th

d.

th in sas-thd- (VS.

in

th'>

uk-thd-

'praise',

ga-thd-

f.

ga-thi-

forming ordinals: catur-thd- (AV.)

perf.

^ijiate-z'/zia:

ph

//-i'/lfl;

in phdla-

sphd{j)- 'grow

'fruit';

as

-atha

in

svas-dtha-

'hissing';

forming

2. sing,

'thou knowest'; forming 2. pi. pres.: bhava-

also in -thas of 2. sing, mid.,

tha 'ye are';

e.

'thou gavest',

'song';

'fourth'; saptd-tha- 'seventh';

e. g.

a-sthi-thas 'thou hast stood'.

phala- 'ploughshare';

sphar- and sphur-

'jerk';

fat'.

4. The aspirate media, which represents the same IE. sound, is a

media combined with h. This is proved by the express statements of the
dh is written with the separate letters
Pratisakhyas 5
by the fact that Ih
/ and h; and by the change of h following a media to an aspirate media

(as

tdd dhi for tdd

hi).

In two or three words an aspirate media interchanges with an aspirate tenuis

nadhamana- 'praying', nadhita- 'distressed', beside nathiia- 'distressed' (where th is probably
due to the influence of -naiha- 'help'); ddha and dtha 'then' 6; nisaitgadhi- (VS.) and
a.

nisahgdthi- (TS.) 'scabbard'.

I For some doubtful instances of media
representing IE. tenuis, see Wackernagel

sprachliche tenuis aspirata dentalis im arischen, griechischen und lateinischen' by

2 L c.
100 b, p. 117, note.
ZUBATY in KZ. 31, I 9.
5 RPr. XIII. 2. 5 ; TPr. II. 9.
Op. cit. loi.
6 There seem to have been a few IE.
t A complete list of Vedic and Sanskrit
words containing th in his article 'Die ur- doublets ofthiskind: seeWACKERNAGEL 1,103.

I,

I.

Phonology.
32.

Mutes. Modes of Articulation. Loss of Aspiration.

Loss of

aspiration.

Aspiration

when

lost

is

there

is

23

another

syllable or at the beginning of the next in roots \ Hence

a. initial aspiration is lost: i. in the reduplicative syllable: e. g. ja-

aspirate in the

same

ghsn-a {han-, ghan- 'strike'); ca-cchand-a (chand- 'please'); da-dha-ti {dha- 'put');
par-phar-at {phar- 'scatter'?). But when the reduplication consists of two
syllables, the rule does not apply; e. g. ghdni-ghan-at, intv. part, of han(beside jan-ghn-at), ghana-ghan-d- 'fond of striking'; bhdri-bhr-at, intv. part,
of bhr- 'bear'. Loss of aspiration, however, began, even in the RV.^, to
spread from monosyllabic to dissyllabic reduplication; thus a-pdni-phan-at,
2. in the following words, according to the
intv. part, of phan- 'bound'.
evidence of cognate languages: kumhhd- 'pot' 3; gadh- 'attach'; gdbhas-ti- 'arm';
guh- 'conceal'; grdh- 'be greedy'; grhd- 'house'; grabh- 'seize'; jdmhas 'gait';
jdngha- 'leg'; jaghdna- 'buttock'; dabh- 'harm'; dah- 'burn'; dih- 'besmear';
duh- 'milk'; duhitf- 'daughter'; drahydt 'strongly'; druh- 'injure'; bandh- 'bind';
babhru- 'brown'; badh- 'distress'; bahii- 'arm'; budh- 'awake'; budhnd- 'bottom';
brh- 'be great'. It is probable also in dagh- 'reach': bamh- 'be firm'; badhird'deaf; bahu-, bahuld- 'much'; bradhnd- 'pale red'; brdhman- 'devotion'.
b. Final aspiration is often lost*, i. When this occurs before suffixal s,
orignal initial aspiration is lost in some cases thus from guh- 'hide', desid.
3. du. ju-guk-sa-tas; grdh- 'be eager' ^r/ja- 'dexterous'; dabh- 'harm' desid.
dip-sa-ti, dip-su- 'intending to hurt'; dah- 'burn' impv. dak-si, aor. part, ddksat-,
ddksu- and daksus- 'iiaming'; duh- 'milk' aor. a-duksat, duksds, etc., des. part.
duduksan^; bhas- 'chew' bap-safi, part, bdps-at-; ghas- 'eat' -.jak-siydt, perf. opt.;

has- 'iaugh'

word drap-sd-

part. yi^j-i3/-; also in the

'drop'^.

But in some of the above and in analogous forms with

initial aspirate remains; thus from guh-, aor. aghuksaf; dah-

s,
:

the original
dhdksi,

part.
_

2. impv.
ddhuksat, dhuksdn, etc.
dhuk-sva; badh- 'distress' bi-bhat-su- 'loathing'; budh- 'awake' aor. d-bhut-s-i.
of final radical aspiration is due to any other
2. When the loss
cause than suffixal s, the original initial aspirate regularly remains; thus from
dah-, aor. a-dhak; budh- 'waken' nom. -bhut 'waking'; dha- '^vA! : dhaf
verb always before s
3. sing., dhat-thas, d-dhat-tam, etc.; and in the latter

dhdksat-,

fut.

part,

dhaksydn;

duh-

aor.

also: dhat-se, dhat-sva, desid. dhit-sati.

c. On the other hand, there is no loss of aspiration in the root if an
aspirate follows which belongs to a suffix or second member of a compound;
dhestha- 'giving most'
e. g. vibhu-bhis 'with the Vibhus'; proth-dtha- 'snorting';
{dha-istha-); ahi-hdn- 'serpent-slaying'; garbha-dhi- 'breeding-place'. The only
{{ox*bho-dhi'^ instead of *M2<exceptions^ are the two imperatives bo-dhi

%e

dhi) a.-a.Aja-hi (for *jha-hl) from han-

Except when the second aspirate belongs

a suffix or second member of a compound, see below c.
1

to

Later

this

became the

rule.

3 Initial aspiration has perhaps been lost

also in sakha- 'branch', and in the roots
and stambh- 'make firm'.
siigh- 'mount',

Cp.
4

Wackernagel I,
This may also be

105 a.
the case in the roots

hhuj- 'bend', chid- 'split', chad- 'cover', dhraj'sweep': op. cit I, 105 b, note.

These forms from dah- and duh- almost

appear in the Pada text with dh,
doubtless because from the time of the
Brahraanas this initial aspiration had become
the rule'; cp. Benfey, GGA. 1873, p. i8f.
5

always

'strike' ">-

IE. dhrebh- 'coagulate'.

For dhadh-t.

Forms like bud-dha- iax budh-ta can

be regarded as exceptions since
the aspiration is assumed by the suffix
8

hardly

instead of reappearing in the initial of the

root.
9

Here

bho-

is

a Prakritic contraction for

bhava-.
10

Also viddtha-

from vidh-

'feast', if

'vjrorship';

MiJLLER, SEE. 32,

Bloomfield,
226;

Geldner,

NAGEL
ples

I,

ZDMG.
108.

correctly derived

on this word see Max

350; FOY, KZ. 34,
JAOS. 19, 2, I2 ff.;

52.

73061;

Wacker-

few more uncertain exam-

might be exceptions

garda-bhd-

'ass'

'

24

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

d. There are a few cognate words in which an aspirate is found beside

the corresponding media or tenuis: mdj-man- 'greatness' wza'y?- 'great'; vispulinga-kd- 'scattering sparks' sphur-dti 'darts'
e. In a few isolated words a media seems, according to the evidence
of cognate languages, to stand for an IE. aspirate: gma- 'earth', gen. gmds;
jmd- 'earth', gtry. jmds, inst jmd; dvAr-, dur-^ 'door'; majjdn- marrow'.
:

Of two mutes in
33. Aspirates in contact with other mutes.
juxtaposition (of which both must be voiced or both voiceless^), the second
In such case either
only can be aspirated.
1. the second represents an original aspirate, the first an aspirate or not:
e.

dhat-thds

g.

'make

subject'),

*dhadh-thds {dhauk-thd-

'song'

ran(d)-dhi

'put');

uk-thd-

(vac-

= *randh-dhi
vet-tha =

'speak');

(randh*vSd-tha

*sak-dM {sak- 'be strong'); or

represents an aspirate media*, the second a dental tenuis
which assumes the mode of articulation of the first; e. g. ddg-dhr- 'one who
*vidh-ta- {vyadk-);
*ddgh-tr- {dah- 'burn'); -vid-dha- 'pierced'
burns' (ace.)
s) did not
*labh-ta- (labk-). An intervening sibilant {z
-lab-dha- 'taken'
prevent the same result: jag-dhd-, jag-dhvSya, jag-dhvd, (AV.), a-g-dha (TS.)
{vid- 'know'); sag-dhi 'help'
2.

the

first

gdh representing gzdh- for gzh-i- from gh{a)s-t-.

first is h representing an old palatal aspirate (= zh^ IE. gfi)^,
disappears after cerebralizing the dental and lengthening the preceding vowel;

from ghasa.

it

'eat',

When

the

Udhd*uz-dhd- for uzh-td- from vah-td-T.

b. In a few instances the t does not become dh owing to the influence
*dhagh-tdm) according
of cognate forms: thus dhaktam (instead of *dagdham
to 2. 3. sing. dJiak {^= *dhagh-t) from dqgh- 'reach'; dhat-tdm etc. (instead of
^dad-dham for *dhad/i-tam) according to 3. sing, dhat (= *dhadh-f), 2. sing. mid.
e. g.

dhdi-se, etc.

{=

*dhddA-se)^.

The Five

Classes of Mutes,

These mutes, by the Indian phoneticians called

34. The gutturals.
kanthya ('produced from the throat'), are minutely described in the Pratisakhyas
as formed at the 'root of the tongue' {jihva-muld) and at
They are therefore velar'" sounds and,
jaw' (hanu-muld)'^.

the

'root of the

as the

evidence

5 There seems to be no example of any

from grdh- 'be greedy'), barjaha- 'udder'
from brh- 'be great'), sabar-dicgha-, sabai'- other tenuis in contact with a preceding
dhu-, sabar-dhiik, epithet of cows (if sabar- aspirate media within a word, but the result
Gk. a^ap: Bartholomae, BB. 15, l8): would probably have been the same. There
cp. Wackernagel i^ lo8, note, 217 b; ZDMG. is no example of th becoming voiced in
this combination; it remains in dhat-thds
43, 667 f. ; 46, 292 [barjaha-]
1 A few doubtful examples discussed by (= *dadh-lhds).
6 See below 58.
Wackernagel I, p. 129 bottom.
2 Op. cit. 1, 109, note (mid.)^ according to
to this rule us-tra- 'buffalo',
7 According
Bloomfield, Album Kern^ p. 1 93 f., the media is could not ;be derived from vah- 'carry' (as
due to the influence of the numeral dva- 'two'. in that case it would have become udhra-'):
3 This was often due to assimilation, the cp. Wackernagel i, hi b, note.
8 Before sibilants, all aspirates as well as
mode of the articulation of the second
generally prevailing; e.g. dt-ti =:=*ad-ti (ad- mediae become tenues; but according to

(if

(if

'eat');

vH-tha

dhi; the
in 33. 2-

*ved-tha; sag-dhi
*sakof the first prevails

articulation

t An aspirate tenuis loses its aspiration

in these circumstances; thus grnatti (AV.)
for *grnath-ti, if this form is derived from

'tie'.

TPr. XIV. 12, APr. n. 6 (cp. RPr. vi. 15)

a tenuis in such a position may be pronounced as an aspirate; see Wackernagei.
I,

1139
'o

See APr.

That

is,

soft palate.

20 and WmxNEY's note,

pronounced with the velum or
I.

I.

The

Phonology.

five Classes of Mutes.

Gutturals.

Palatals.

25

of cognate languages shows, derived from IE. velars'Gutturals are found

interchanging to some extent with sounds of the four other classes.
I. Under certain conditions they interchange
with the new palatals
{c J h) which are derived from them'';
with the old palatal /3 (also old/ and h)
only when followed by j (which then becomes s) *.
Between this ks
is

and ks=^k-s

it

is

possible to distinguish

are represented by different sounds

thus be determined even in words

S;

by
and

in

the aid of Iranian, where the two

the original value of the k can

which no form without the

sibilant

occurs.

ksudh-

maksu 'quickly'; raks- (AV.) 'injure'; rdks-as- 'injury';

b. k-s: ksatrd- 'dominion'; ksd;p- 'night'; ksi- 'rule'; ksip- 'throw'; ksird'milk'; ksud- 'shake', ^joV-aj- 'rush of water', ksudrd- 'small' (VS.), n. 'minute
'eyelash';

particle'; ksubh- 'swift motion'; tvaks- 'be strong'; vrksd- 'tree'.

In a few instances k stands for a medial t: in vrkkdu (AV.) 'kidneys',

?; J>r/isu (SV.)
Jirtsu 'in battles'.
In these two forms the substitution is due to Prakritic influence; this is probably also the case in skambhbeside stambh- 'prop'^. The guttural only seems to stand for a dental in
dsikm- beside dsita- 'black', pdlikni- beside palitd- 'grey', and hdriknika- (AV.)
beside hdrita- 'yellow', as there is no etymological connexion between -krii2.

for *vrtkdu

and

-ta-'^.

3. In a few words a guttural interchanges with a labial medially:

kakdrdu- beside kaparda- 'braid of hair'; kulika (YS.) pulika {MS.) a kind
of bird; kulikdya- {TQ.) pultkdya- (MS.), kullpdya- (yS.) purikdya^ (AV.)
a kind of aquatic animal; nicunkund- (TS.)
nicumpund- 'flood';
and
in the TS. (B.) tristugbhis and anustvgbhyas occur beside tristi'ib-bhis and
:

anusti'ibbhyas ' '

few verbal forms from three roots k stands for s before suffixal j"^,
its way into the loc. pi. (where only -s-su- or -h-su,
-t-su occur).
The only example in the RV. is pinak (for pinak-s) 2. sing,
impf of pinas-ti {pis- 'crush'). In the AV. occur dvik-s-at, dvik-s-ata, aor.
of dvis- 'hate'; sisliksate, -sisliksu-, desid. of sHs- 'embrace'.
Other possible
examples from the RV. are -rksard- 'thorn' (if from rs- 'prick'); ririksa-ti
and ririksti-, desid. (if from ris- 'injure'); viveksi (if from vis- 'workj)'^.
4. In a

though

this

k never made

The palatals. These are pronounced in India at the present

a close combination of a ^sound followed by a palatal spirant /.
evidence of the Greek reproduction of Indian words ''^ points in the same

35.

day

The

as

1 That is, the jr-sounds; some, however,

are derived from IE. labio-velars or^J'-sounds;
see Brugmann, KG. I, 244 and 254;

See above 30, note

Cp.
Cp.

9
10

Wackernagel
J.

4.
i,

p. 136,

note

(top).

Schmidt, Pluralbildung 398.

See Brugmann, op. cit. 244.

3 Op. cit. 233.
4 See below 56.
thus
5 That is, s-s by / and k-s by hs\
vast; vaksya-mi, from
vaksi, from vas-

See ZDMG. 33, 193.

See Weber, IS. 8, 40. 54; 13, log.
12 This probably started from the parallelism of the 3. sing, of roots in j and s
thus dves-ti from ^dvis-, and vas-fi from yvas-;
then the 2. sing, dvek-si for dves-si, followed

vak- (for vac-)

vak-si.

Wackernagel

I,

115.

=
= vaksyd.

The two components of ks cannot yet

have coalesced when s dropped out between
6

two mutes
and

bhaj-),

in abhakta, for abhak-s-ta (aor. of

atasta for aiak-s-ta- from iaks-

(Av. tas^ 'fashion'; otherwise the two different original sounds could not have been
kept apart in these two forms.

"

13 The relation of the k in dadhrk 'firmly',

to dadhrsd-, dadhrs-vdni- 'bold', is uncertain.
Cp. Wackernagel i, 118, note (end).
14

Thus

rfavSavov

candana-

'sandal-

faj-/aa-, N. ; IlofaXai
wood'; Tiaaravi;;
2avS/3o'/fu?rTo;
pancala-, N. of a people;

candragupta-, N.

'O^T\-r(]

=
=

iijjayinl- (Prakrit

26

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

therefore likely that they were thus pronounced in Vedic

however, they have the value of a single consonant
date from the Indo-Iranian period only; but in order
ch").
They
(excepting
to understand their place in the Vedic language, especially in relation to the
direction.

times'.

gutturals,

parative

It

is

Prosodically,

we must go back to their ultimate origin. The evidence of comgrammar shows that two distinct series of palatals, the later and

This evidence alone can explain how

must be distinguished.
same Vedic palatal sound {j or h) is, under certain conditions, treated

the

earlier,

the

differently.

36. The new palatals {c,j\ h) are derived from gutturals (velars), being
interchangeable, in most roots and formatives, with gutturals, and being in
most cognate languages represented by the same sounds as represent original
Thus from the root he- 'shine' come verbal forms such as socaii,
gutturals.
beside the nominal derivatives soka-, sukvan-, sukrd-, sukld- (AV.); from yuj'yoke', yuje
'injure',

i.sing. mid.,

dudroka,

etc.,

beside j^w^i-, yoga-, yukid-, yugvan-; from druha name, and droghaetc., beside druhyu-,

3. sing, perf.,

'deceitful'.

The (Indo-Iranian) change from gutturals to palatals was regularly

produced before the palatal sounds i i y^; e. g. d^M- 'noticed', beside k/iaojiyas- 'stronger', beside ugrd- 'strong'; druhyu'wiir, from V- 'perceive';
This change invariably takes place in Iranian, while the
beside drogha-.
exceptions in Vedic appear only before vowels which were not originally
palatal.

Gutturals thus appear instead of palatals before ir {il) and ir

and _r)*, which were not yet pronounced with an z'-sound in the
Indo-Iranian periods; thus dngiras-, a name; giri-^ 'mountain'; kirdti, 3. sing.,
kirdna- 'dust', from kf- 'scatter'; carkirama, carkiran, kirti- 'fame', from kF'commemorate'; gir- 'lauding', from gr- 'praise'; girati (AV.), 3. sing., -gila- (AV.)
Before i (= IE. 9)'' k appears in ok-i-vdms-,
'devouring', from gf- 'swallow'.
part, from uc- 'be pleased', and g in tigitd-^ 'sharp', beside tejate, tejas'brilliance', and other derivatives, from tij- 'be sharp'.
Otherwise a guttural followed by a palatal vowel is due to the influence
a.

(=

IE. rr-

of cognate forms.
This is the case
I. in the initial of roots a) in gi-, the weak stem of gai- 'sing', beside
gay-, ga-; ) in reduplicated forms with cik-, jig-, due to forms like cikdya,
jigdya- (where the guttural is in accordance with phonetic law) and to the
frequency of palatal reduplication of guttural initial; thus perf. ciky-ur, part.
ciky-at-, desid. cikTsate, impv. cikihi (AV.), from ci- 'perceive'; intv. cekit-, cikit-,
desid. cikits-,

from

cit-

'petceive'; ^tri. jigy-ur, Atsid. jigTsate, Jigyu- 'victorious',

N. of a city; Aiaij.Qvva
yaimcnd-, I, 121 (p. 140, top).
The palatal aspirate
river.
Cp. Wackernagel i, 119.
in fact never represents a guttural aspirate,
1 Cp. Whitney on APr. i. 21.
but only an IE. palatal, or sibilant and
2 Cp. above 30, 3; 31, 3 b; and below 40. palatal.
3 The sphere
of the palatals has been
4 Cp. Wackernagel i, 24. 25.
extended by analogy at the expense of the
5 Cp. Wackernagel i, 123 a a.
6 In Av. gairi-.
gutturals and vice versa. The aspirate guttural
/ih appears where the other gutturals are
7 This sound had probably not yet become
replaced by palatals; thus before the j/ in a pure palatal in Ilr.
khyd- 'see' (but Jya-) 'overpower'; before
^ Otherwise the palatal regularly appears
the thematic a of the present: rikhati before this i in perfect forms; e. g. saiciri
'sits' (but dahati);
before the -ayaii of the (sac- 'accompany'); bhejiri [bkaf- 'divide');
Causative: mkhayati 'swings' (but arcayati); uvocitha, iicise {uc- 'be pleased'); diidohitha
and notably in sdkhi- 'friend': dat. sakhye, [duh- 'milk').
ujjent),

N. of a

pi.

sdkhibyas

(Ilr.

sachi-):

cp.

WackernagSl

Phonology.

I.

fromyz- conquer';

Palatals.

27

7) in the
kidrs-, beside the enclitic cid,

forms

ka-s,

kd-d,

pronominal forms kis, kirn, km, kiyat, kivant-,

because owing to the influence of the frequent
k appeared to be characteristic of the interrogative

etc.,

pronoun \

2.
the final of roots in which guttural forms predominate, before
the y^ of the optative and the gerund; thus dagh-yas,
from dagh- 'reach';
sak-yam, from hk- 'be able'; sagh-yasam (TS.), from sagh- 'be equal
It
to'.
also appears very often before the suffixes -i, -r, -in, -ya forming
derivatives
from nouns the last consonant of which is a guttural: e.
g. pldyogi- 'descendant
of Playoga'; vrk-i- 'she-wolf {vrka-); sak-in- 'powerful' {sakd-)] srng-in- 'horned'
{sfnga-); upa-vak-ya- 'to be praised' (beside upavacya-) from upavakd- 'praise'.
Siinilarly dragh-iyas- 'longer', dragh-istha- 'longest'
(beside dirghd- 'long',

dragh-mdn- 'length'); sphig4- 'buttock', with g from the nom. sphik of

which occurs in the post-Vedic language only.

sfhij-,

3. in a certain number of abnormal words, almost invariably at the

beginning:
a) words which may be suspected of foreign origin owing to meaning
or phonetic form: kimsukd-, kiydmbu- plant names; kimidin-, kikata-, kirata-

(VS.),
utensil;

sva-kiskin- (AV.)
kilbisa-

'guilt'

names of

(contains

foreigners or demons; kija- a kind of

the rare letter b), kistd- 'singer' {st instead

of J'/);,/?) onomatopoetic words: kikidivi- 'blue

kikkita (TS.)

an

interjection;

jay'; kikira-kr- 'tear to tatters';

some words of doubtful

origin: kikasa'vertebra'; /^r/zra- 'ploughman' (?); /5ra/a- 'ploughman'; Z'2-/a/i?- 'sweet draught'
kirmird- 075.) 'variegated'; kisord- {KST.) 'foal'; kisniila- (AV. Paipp.) a kind

7)

of disease.

a. Before a, a, and diphthongs,

37. New palatals as radical initials.
both palatals and gutturals are very frequent in Vedic and Iranian. Comparative
grammar shows that the palatals occur before a vowel or diphthong
representing IE. e e or a diphthong beginning with e e""; but gutturals before
IE. a
or sonant nasal.
According to this evidence the palatal has come

being in the following words: ca 'and'; cakrd- 'wheel'; catvdras 'four';

'last';
caru- 'pot'; cdru- 'agreeable'; pdiica 'five'; jathdra- 'belly';
}dnT-, -j'ani- 'woman'; jami- 'akin'; hdras- 'flame'.
On the other hand, the original guttural has remained in kakud- 'peak';
kdksa- 'armpit'; karu- 'poet'; Ma- 'will'; gdus 'cow'; ghartnd- 'hot'; ghord'terrible'; and in the roots kas- (AV.) 'cough'; gadh- 'clasp'; ga- 'go'; gahinto

caramd-

'p lunge'; gai- 'sing' 3.

b. Among the roots vsrith u n / as low grade vowels, the only one in
which the regular phonetic interchange of palatal and guttural takes place,
is jar- -.gP- 'call'; g appearing before r ir ar {=^ IE. or), j before ar {= IE. er)
preceding the thematic -a- of the present or the suffix -tr-; thus gr-ndti, gir-,
-gard- (VS.), beside jdrate, jarddhyai, jaritf-.

In other roots either the guttural

appears throughout; mostly the guttural, because the forms

ar al {= IE. ou or 81), which required the guttural^ were
with u r I and
ar al (= IE. ey. er el); thus from kr- 'do',
more numerous than those with
dkar aor. 'has done', kartr- 'agent', kdrman- 'action', retain the guttural, though
IE. er), through the influence
the palatal would be phonetic (as ar here
IE. or).
of forms with kr- and of kdrana- 'deed' (where ar
or

the

palatal

1
Cp. Wackernagel I, 128 a (p. 150,
bottom).
2 Cp. Italian and the Balto-Slavic languages
which palatalize before e as well as i.

3 In the IE. vowel gradation of these

appear.
roots only B. and
In other roots
in the IE. vowel gradation of which e is
found, an initial palatal would be expected

:;

28

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

On

4.

Vedic Grammar.

other hand, the palatal appears in cud-^, codati 'impel'; scut-,

because here forms with u, which required a guttural, were rare;
in car-, carati 'move', where the palatal is almost invariably phonetic in RV.
(but AV. has cacard); in crt- 'bind', the palatal has fixed itself in spite of
many forms with r; while beside harsate 'rejoices', hdrsant-, part, both
h and gh occur in weak forms: hrsita-, ghrsu- 'lively', ghfsvi- 'gladdening'.
c. Among roots in -an and am, survivals of the regular interchange are
found in kan- 'be pleased', and han- 'strike'. The former has the palatal
the

scotati 'drip',

(=
but

IE. ke-) in the aor. caiiistam, in the superl. cdnistha-, and in cartas- 'favour',
In Aan-, h appears before an (= IE. eti) and,
otherwise the guttural.

n; but gh before n and a

nn and a
IE. 0;
han-mas, han-yama; ha-thds, -ha-td, and with / in
impv. jahi (= *jhahi), but perf. jaghana, and ghand- 'striker', ghanaghandIE. e
In the intv. janghan-, gh stands for h before a
'found of striking'.
gmowing to the influence of the weak stem janghn-. In gam- 'go' ga*jam-, as in
in gdcchati, ga-td-) has led to the use of gam(e. g.
gdm-anti^.
d. In the remaining verbs, that is, those with a (25) or e (22) as
high grade vowel, there appears chiefly the palatal throughout; thus cakscacdksa (for *cakdksd). The phonetic guttural is, however, preserved in some
forms of the three verbs ci- 'observe' (perf cikdyd); cit- 'observe' (perf. ciketa;
kita- 'will'; ketu-^ 'appearance'); and /z- 'conquer' {^&:'i. jigdya; gdya- 'houseA guttural not phonetically justified appears before a (== IE. e)
hold').
only in ghas- 'eat' (aor. dghas, subj. ghas-a-t) and in gal- 'drop' {gal-

by analogy,

also before aii

thus hdn-ti,

inf.

hdn-tave;

=
=

galiti VS.).

reduplicative

syllables

a of roots having initial

appears in the perfect, pluperfect, or
cakhada; gamreduplicated aorist; thus kr- 'make' cakara; khad- 'chew'
acakrat;
'go' .jagama; ghas- 'eat' .jaghAsa; caks- 'see' cacdksa; pluperf. oi krThe palatal is here historically
red. aor. oi jas- 'be exhausted' yo/ffj-^a'/w.
e.

In

containing

guttural or palatal, the palatal always

:

phonetic, as the IE. reduplicative vowel was

In the intensive, however, the palatal

reduplication

is

monosyllabic;

e.g. kram-

e.

is

invariable only when the

can-kramata; gr- :ja-gr-

'stride'

But when the reduplication is dissyllabic,

the guttural 5 predominates; thus kr-, paxtkdri-kr-ai-; krand- 'roar' kdni-kra[ii)d-;
gam- 'go' -.gani-gan-, gani-gm-; han- 'strike' ghani-ghn- {cp.ghariaghand-); skand'leap' both kdni-skand- and cani-skadat subj.
palatals as radical finals, a. Verbal forms.
Before the
38.
thematic verbal endings (including those of the a-aorist and the reduphcated
aorist) the final of roots regularly appears as a palatal which, though phonetic*
only in about the same degree as the guttural, has prevailed. Gutturals are
'awake'; han-

'strike'

:jan-ghanti.

New

in certain forms ; but fewtraces of this remain,

as the forms of each verb have been normalized.

the

Beside cmi- 'devout', keru- appears in

compound mdhi-keru-

'wery devout'; cp.

loi (43 b).
In the post-Vedic language, the palatal

Wackernagel

21, p.

is derived from cud-, and

4
from h/-, the initial conso- is invariable even in dissyllabic reduplinant has not been affected by the norma- cation.
5 But if the initial of the root is a palatal,
lizing influence of the roots, because these
words have been isolated.
the reduplicative consonant is of course al2 The correct phonetic interchange appears ways a palatal
thus cand- 'shine' cdniscadin jdngahe 'kicks', and jamhas- 'course', if car- 'move' caracard-; cal- 'move' calacaldCp. 32 a.
these forms are connected, as BR. think. 'ever moving'.
6 Phonetically we should have *pdkami
Whitney, Roots, however, considers the
former an intensive of gah- 'plunge'.
(^lE. 0), pac-asi and pdc-ati (IE. e).
1

If

kutsa-

N.

carsani- 'active',

I.

Phonology.

Palatals.

29

rare at the end of the root, appearing only' in sak- 'be able'; 2. sing, sak-as;
sagh- 'be equal to': 3. sing, sagh-at; dagh- 'reach' dagh-at (TS.); in these roots
the guttural prevails throughout owing to the influence of the present stem
:

sak-nu; sagh-nu-^.

Even in the non-thematic presents and in the perfect

the palatal carried the day, though phonetic in still fewer forms; thus the
guttural alone would be historically justified in the forms yundj'S, yunje; yuyoja 3.

The
it

is

palatal further regularly appears before the causative* suffix -dya-,

phonetic (= IE. eie); e. g. arc-dya-ti from arc- 'praise' 5.

where

b. As shown by the appearance, in cognate forms^ of a guttural before

other consonants than j, the final of the following verbs is a new palatal:
anj- 'anoint'; ej- 'stir'; tij- 'sharpen'; tuj- 'beat'; tyaj- 'forsake'; nij- 'wash';
bhaj- 'divide'; bhanj- 'break'; bhuj- 'bend'; yuj- 'yoke'; ranj- 'colour'; ruj'break'; vij- 'shoot up'; vrj- 'turn'; sinj- 'sound'; sanj- 'attach'; svanj- 'embrace';
also in the noun srdj- 'garland'.
c. Apart from being the result of the Sandhi of d-\-j, jj is shown by
the evidence of cognate languages to be derived from a sibilant + guttural
{= IE. zg^ and thus to belong to the series of new palatals in majjdn- 'marrow'
7'djju- 'rope'; bhrjjdti 'roasts'; majjati 'dives', from which is derived madgu(VS.) 'diver- (a bird).
d. Nominal derivatives, i. Before the suffix -a, the final of the root
is mostly guttural, because the a in nearly all the cases of the noun represents
IE. 0. The rule in the RV. is that the guttural appears before both unaccented
-a and accented -a, but the palatal before accented -d only^; e. g. abhidroh-d-, druh-A- 'injury' drSgh-a- 'injuring'; bhoj-d- 'liberal' bhig-a- 'enjoyment';
a-yuj-d- 'companionless'; yog-a- 'yoking'; ruj-d- 'breaking': rog-a- (AV.) 'disease';
vevij-d- 'swift' vSg-a- (AV.) 'speed'; suc-d- 'bright' s6k-a- 'flame'; ruc-d- (VS.)
and roc-d- (AV.) 'shining' rok-a- a.nd rok-d- 'light'?.
2, Before the suffix -as, the palatal generally appears, as it is for the
The
most part phonetically required; e. g. 6j-as- 'force' ug-rd- 'mighty'.
guttural, however, prevailed in dnk-as- 'bend'; ag-as- 'offence'; -ny-ogh-as'streaming'; bhdrg-as- 'brilliance'; as there were no corresponding verbs with
palatal beside these words; it also prevailed in 6k-as- 'ease' and ny-okas'comfortable', as well as -hk-as- 'flaming', though there are such verbs {uc:

'be pleased',

and

sue- 'shine').

3. Before other suffixes beginning with a, the final of the root is generally
IE. -eno-), vac-and- 'speaking'; Uj-ana- 'act of
palatal; thus before -ana

(=

sharpening';

mamh-dna-

'gift'*;

before -ant,

-ana

(under the influence of

6 The fluctuation of words in -a- probably

Apart from roots ending in kh, see35, note 3.
In ni-megha-mana- 'drenching oneself, arose from some cases in oxytones having
had IE. e, others 0; hence in some words
the gh seems to be phonetic (as -amana
1

-omem). In vdlgate (AV.) 'springs', the guttural

is perhaps due to the preceding /, as neither
If nor Ic is ever found to occur.
normalization of the palatal is
3 This
probably Indo-Iranian, see J. ScHMffiT, KZ.
4

The denominatives

in -ayd- (IE. eie

and

follow the noun from which they are

derived; e. g. from aghd- 'evil', aghayaii
'wishes to injure'.
5 The causative ingayati of ejati 'stirs' is
probably due to an old present base *inag-,
ihg- formed according to the 7th class ; the
phonetic form -injayati is found in the BAU.
VI. 4, 23.

which
Cp.

originally

appeared in oxytones only.

Wackernagel

I,

128 a

(p.

150,

note,

end).

35, 104.
oie)

the palatal prevailed throughout, in others

the guttural. The agent-nouns, being mostly
oxytone, show a preference for the palatal,

palatal before
an unaccented -a
appears in doh-a- (RV. x. 122), otherwise dogha- 'milking' ; moh-a- (AV.) 'delusion',
beside mogk-a- 'vain'; krimc-a- (VS.) 'curlew', is probably only an extension of kruiic7

first

(VS.)
8

(Gk.

The gh oijaghanaKayavi]).

'buttock', is phonetic

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

verbal forms), e. g. duh-ana- and duduh-and^; before -ata (= IE. -eto), e. g.

pac-atd- 'cooked'^; before -an in majj-dn- 'marrow'^.
4. Nouns formed without suffix (including infinitives and gerunds) have
the palatal of the corresponding verb; e. g. pfc-as, nom. pi. 'food'; a-pfc-as

and a-prc-e 'to satisfy'; tuj-dye 'to

where the verb has a guttural only;

The

The

suffix -ka
guttural regularly

5.

procreate'.
e. g.

guttural of course appears

pra-tank-am (AV.)

'gliding' (/ai-'run').

treated analogously to the final guttural of roots*.

appears except when the suffix, being attached to-

is

unaccented prepositions, is itself accented; thus asmd-ka- 'oxir^ yupnd-ka- 'your';

dpa-ka- 'coming from afar'; abhi-ka- 'collision'; and even with the suffix
accented in locatives such as upa-ki, upa-kdyos 'in the vicinity' and in the abl.
pard-k&t 'from a distance'; but uc-ca and uc-cdis 'above'; para-cdis 'aside';
;

pai-cd and pas-cdt 'behind'; pra-cdis 'forwards'.

Before u r and consonants (except y),
39. Irregular palatalization.
the gutturals were not originally palatalized. Hence roots which regularly have
palatals before a and diphthongs, usually retain the guttural before u r and

consonants. Thus from ric- 'leave', are formed, rik-u- 'empty', rek-n-as- 'property',
perf part, ririk-vdms-; 3. sing. pres. rindk-ti, 2. sing. perf. mid. ririk-se (but opt.
riric-yat); vg-rd- 'mighty', beside oj-as- 'strength'; ghn- beside han- 'strike').
Nevertheless palatals appear by analogy before ^l, r, n, m, r, v.
a. initially: i. in the roots scut- 'drip', crt- 'bind', hrs- 'rejoice', in which
the unphonetic palatal before the low grade vowels is due to the phonetic
palatal before the high grade vowels o (= IE. eu) and ar {^= IE. ei).
2.

the reduplicative

in

(in

RV. occurring only

"^ca-

yab.

{a

e,

finally:

syllables

and ju- of the perfect and aorist

gup- 'guard', giir- 'praise') for older

cu-^

in cyu- 'shake',

the IE. reduplicative vowel).

i. in verbal inflexion, the palatal which appears before

and diphthongs always appears also before u, and nearly always before m
and r (instead of the phonetic guttural); thus sisic-ur beside sisic-atur, sisic-e^
from sic- 'pour'; bubhuj-mdhe beside bhundj'-amahe, from bkuj- 'enjoy'; anj-mas
beside anj-dnti, andj-an from anj- 'anoint'; riric-ri beside riric-S, from ric'leave'; d-yuj-ran, yuyuj-ri beside yuyuj-S, from yuj- 'yoke'; duh-re, duh-rate,
duduk-rJ, duh-rdm and duh-ratam (AV.j beside duh-i, from duh- 'milk'.

The

however, regularly remains before the -nu of the Sth class:

'be equal to', spreading thence to other forms''.
Phonetic k remains before m in vivak-mi from vac- 'speak'; and before r in
vavak-re beside vac-ydte, vdnc-ati (AV. VS.) from vaiic- 'move crookedly'.
2. in nominal derivation the guttural as a rule remains^: e. g. rug-nd'broken', from ruj- 'break'; ruk-md- 'brilliant', from rue- 'shine'; suk-rd-, suk-ldThe perf.
(AV.) 'bright', from sue- 'shine'; pak-vd- 'ripe'j from pae- 'cook'.
guttural,

sak-?iu- 'be able',

most part follows

part, for the

Strictly

sagh-yiu-

phonetic (but rarer)

atia- 'milking';

also vagh-at- (IE.

tutor of a sacrifice'.
2 The k in sik-aid- (AV. VS.)

phonetic (IE.

this

rule:

is

diigh-

-nt-")

'insti-

'sand',

is

-nia-).

(AV.) 'liver', and Jfl'i-.^^ 'dung',

the k is found in the stemsyak-an-, sak-an-,
but only in weak forms before or a
(= n): yak-nds, yak-na (VS.); sak-nd (yS.);
iak-'nds (AV.); sdka-bhis (TS.)
4 See above 38 d, I ; Wackernagel 1, 129.
5 The phonetic guttural, however, appears
in ^,fc-j-i- 'lively', ghrsvi- 'gladdening'; while
3Beside>'a'/5-?'^

e. g.

ru-ruk-vdms-, from rue- 'shine';

on the other hand the palatal appears unphonetically before u in the intv. part, carcuryd-mdna- from car' 'move'.
6 Otherwise cu- occurs only in the onomatopoetic ni-cumpU7id- 'swell'
and in a
few words suggestive of foreign origin
cumuri-, N. of a demon; cu-punlka-, N. of a.

krttikd. (TS.).
7 Also dagh-nu- 'reach',
in a Brahmana
passage of the Kathaka, and siigh-nu~
'mount', in a similar one of the TS.
8
CoLLrrz, BB. 3, 230 f.; J. ScHMrox,.
KZ. 25, 70 f,

Phonology.

I.

Palatals.

vi-vik-vsms; from vie- 'divide'; ok-i-vims- (36

a),

from

31
uc- 'find pleasure' (but

dat. sing, uc-us-e).

The

following

muh-ur

frmtful';

The

however,

are,

exceptions: oj-man- 'might"; bhuj-mdndruh-u- (AV.) 'injurer'; yac-ny&- (AV.) 'request'.

'suddenly';

old palatals {ch,

h).
The aspirate ch. This sound
of c^ and is therefore represented in
reduphcation by c. But in origin ch has nothing to do with c. The fact
that^ after a mute it takes the place of / in Sandhi shows that
it is allied
to /.
In fact, unlike J and h, it belongs exclusively to the old series
of
palatals; for it does not interchange with a guttural kkK
In the Avesta ck
is regularly represented by s and in cognate European
languages by a conjunct

40.

IS,

pronunciation,

the

consonant beginning with

aspirate);
sJh,

which

e. g.

chid- 'cut

j, s,

aspirate

and standing
Gk.

off',

(ryjl-.

for IE. skh (that is, j + palatal mute

This in Indo-Iranian probably became

and Vedic ch. In the inchoative suffix

Gk. ^dsicco) this palatal aspirate seems to represent IE. s^,
a conclusion which is supported by the old inchoative verb rapsate 'is full'
rap{s)sate, where after the s has been dropped between two consonants'*,
f
IE. k remained. Thus ch represents a double sound and metrically lengthens
a^preceding short vowel. Hence the RPr. (vi. i) prescribes the doubling
of ch (that is c-ch) between vowels. Though the Vedic Mss. almost invariably
write ch^ and Aufrecht's edition of the RV. and v. Schroeder's edition
of the MS.^ follow this practice, the speUing cch is to be preferred.
differentiated into Avestic s

-cha igdcchatt,

=
=

sakha- 'branch', the initial i probably stands for ch owing to the law by
aspirates in the same syllable are avoided 7.
b.
In a few instances ch is a Prakritic representative of ks and. ps -7-cchdra- (AV.)
beside rksala- (VS.) 8, part of an animal's leg; krcchrd- 'distress', perhaps iox*krpsrd-, and
allied to krpate 'laments', and krpana- 'misery' 9.

In

a.

which two

41.

palatal

The
it

is

old palatal
the

media of

j.

This

c).

It is

is
the media of / (while as a new
recognizable as an old palatal by the

following indications:
1. when there are parallel forms with j- before t, th, or a cerebral appears
either as final or before mutes; e. g. beside ydj-ati 'sacrifices', yds-tr- 'sacrificer',.
is-td- 'sacrificed', a-yat 'has sacrificed'; similarly in the roots bhraj- 'shine';

mrj- 'wipe off'; raj- 'rule'; rej- 'tremble' (?) ;

possibly also in bhrajj- 'roast''".

vraj- 'wander'; srj- 'send forth';

2. when m
in the lorm
form m
in question or m
in cognate forms^ sounds follow
foil
which do not palatalize gutturals'", that \%, u r n m r v; such are: dj'\j-ra'plain'j

dj-ma{n)- 'course'; drjuna- 'white', rj-rd- 'reddish';

Under the influence of

rj-i'i.-

'straight', rj-iy
'-tyas-

'stronger' in Sandhi and ducchuna- for "^dus-sunj- 'misnouns in -man- fortune'.

5 Except those
of the Kathaka, which,
being often closely connected with comparawrite ich (cp. note 2).
tives and superlatives.
2 In the Kathaka ch is spelt ich, which is
5 Also Roth's
ed. of the Nirukta and
probably only a provincial assibilation, and Macdonell's ed. of the Brhaddevata; cp.
not the survival of an older sound; cp. AUFRECHT, RV2, p. VI.
7 Cp, 32.
J. Schmidt, KZ. 27, 332.
8 On AV. Ms. spelling ch for ks in two
3 miirkhd- 'dull', occurring in a B. passage
of the TS., is probably a new formation or three words, see Whitney, JAOS. 12,
analogous to iokd- (AV.) from socati. Some 92- 1759 On the origin of ch, cp. Brugmann, KG.scholars hold that there is an etymological
connection between chand- 'appear', chand-as- 240; on the sound as a whole, Wacker'song', and skdndati 'leaps'; between chid- nagel I, 133 f.
10 But cp. 38 c, and Wackernagel 1,
'cut off' and khid- 'press' ; between chd- (AV.)
139.
11 Apart of course from the exceptions'cut off' and kha- [khan-] 'dig'. Cp. Wackerdue to analogy: see 39.
NAGEL I, 131, note, bottom.
t-\-s
4 Cp. above p. 25 note 6; cp. here cch
1

and

oj'-Tyas-

6j-isfha- 'strongest', such_

32

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

rdj-istha- 'straightest'; /- 'knee' beside

'straighter',

jha- 'knoyf' ; j'md-, gen. jm-ds

'earth';

7W-

'go'; -jvard-

y;22^-;

jrmbh- 'yawn";

'suffering'; /o/'-ri- 'fat';

maj-mdii- 'greatness'; vdj-ra- 'thunderbolt'; jurdti, juryati, jujur-vams-, jur-nd-,

from jr- 'grow old'.
3. when in inflexional forms, in which roots with a new palatal show
a guttural, the / remains; e. g. jajana from jan- 'beget'; jajasa (AV.) from
jas- 'be exhausted'; jujosa from jus- 'like'; jujur-vams-, jajara (AV.), from
jf- 'grow

old'''-

when j

4.

the reduplication of an old palatal / or h;

is

e.

g.

jajdna,

jajdra (AV.), juhoti.

5. when it is shown to be an old palatal by the evidence of the
cognate languages; thus in ajd- 'he-goat', a;'i-'goat'; ajina- (AV.) 'skin'; Urj'nourishment'; jdmhas- cqu\% ; jdnghs- ''\tg' ; jambA- 'chew up'; jsmatr- 'son''

in-law'; dhraj- 'sweep'; bhisaj- 'heal'; rajatd- 'silvery'; vdja- 'swiftness'; rjipyd-

'going straight'.
a. It

is

uncertain whether

represents an old or a

new

palatal in the

following words:

evidence is conflicting: vi-jsman- 'related';

1. because the comparative
ju- 'h^sXev! ; jya-, jindti 'overpower' s.
2. because the Vedic and comparative evidence is insufficient: ubj-' coe.rce';
kuj- (AV.) 'hum'; jdnjat-T-, pres. part., of uncertain meaning (a. X.); jdrate
'approaches'; jihamana- 'panting'; jihmd- 'transverse'; dkvdj-, dAvaJd- ^hajmer'
paj- 'be rigid' (in dpa...pdpaje 'started back'); -pujana- 'honouring'; bajd- a kind
of plant; btja- 'seed'; mimja- 'sedge'.
i. As the two kinds of / were indistinguishable in prob. Irregular/.
nunciation, a guttural sometimes intruded among the old palatals owing
to the analogy of the new palatals; thus from bhisaj- 'heal', bkisdk-tama-, spv.,
bhisdk-ti, 3. sing, pres., a-b/nsnak, 3. sing. impf. (like anak-ti from anj- 'anoint');
from mrj- 'wipe' ni-mrg-ra- 'attached', apa-margd- (AV.) a kind of plant,

vi-mfg-varT- (AV.) 'cleanly'; from srj- 'discharge', asrg-ram, asrgran, dsasrgram,

sasrgmdhe (SV.) beside sasrjmdhe; from jf- 'grow old', jagara (AV.) beside

iajdra (AV.).

The guttural beside the palatal may be due to IE. dialectic variety
'woman' beside jan- 'beget'; gm-ds beside /w-a'j 'of the earth'; bhdrgas'splendour', bhrgu- a name, beside bhraj- 'shine'.
3. In jyotis- 'light', jy seems, by an old Prakritism, to represent dy, as
the word is probably derived from dyut- 'shine'.
4. The media aspirate j/i^ occurs only in one form, jdjhjhat-i- (RV.'^),
a pres. part, probably meaning 'laughing' as an epithet of lightning (a metaphor
connected with lightning elsewhere also in the RV.); it appears to be derived,
by an old Prakritism, from has- 'laugh' -.jAjh probably iox jjh^ here
IS^.gzh,
which otherwise would become ks-, as in jdks-at-, part., 'laughing'.
The designation given to these sounds by the
42. The cerebrals.
native phoneticians^, murdhanya 'produced in the head', indicates that they
were pronounced at the highest point in the mouth nearest the (upper part
2.

in gnd-

cp.,

In which only forms with / occur;

4 The other two old palatals s and h will
however, Hubschmann, KZ. 23, 393.
be dealt with below in their alphabetical

The

Op.

instance of a new palatal order: 54, 58.

before ilr (= IE. f) is
5
The Kashmir Ms. of the RV. reads
carciiryd-mana- (RV. x). For some more or jdjjhatTr for jdjhjhatTr (V. 52^): ScHEFTEless doubtful examples of old palatal j, see LOWITZ, WZKM. 21, 86.
Wackernagel I, 137 b note.
6
See RPr. i. 19;
APr. i. 32; TPr.
[c

only

= k g gh)
cit.

I,

137

e,

note.

" 37-

I.

Phonology.

Cerebrals.

33

They

of the) head.
turning the tip

are described by the Pratisakhyas as pronounced by

of the tongue up to the roof of the mouth and bending it

backwards. They were therefore pronounced farther back in the mouth

than the palatals. This is also their pronunciation at the present day in
India.
An indication that it was such even in Vedic times is the fact that
4 is sometimes found in the later Samhitas interchanging, between vowels,
with /' (which itself interchanges with r), and that in the RV. itself 4 dh
become / Ih between vowels. It is also to be noted that the Greeks reproduced
</not only with B, but also with p^. The cerebrals, however, were a specifically
Indian product, being unknown in the Indo-Iranian period 3. They are still
rare in the RV., where they occur medially and finally only.
According to
most scholars, they are due to aboriginal, especially Dravidian, influence*.
As a rule, they have arisen immediately after
or an r sound from dentals.
But before consonants and finally they may represent the old palatals / / h.
j-

The

a.

(=

s,

voiceless cerebrals / th take the place of the dentals t th after _s

dus-tdra- 'invincible' (= dus-tdra-);
e. g. vrs-ti- 'rain' (suffix -ti);

or/);

(=

vds-tt); mrs-td- 'cleansed' (= mrj-td-)\

take the place of the dentals d dh
after *z {= s or old palatal /, h), which has disappeared*; e. g. mdd- 'nest'
(= IE. nizdo-); du-dhi- 'ill-disposed' (= dus-dhi-); id-e 'I worship' {*iz-d- ij-dfor yaf-d-); driihd- 'firm' (= drh-td-). The preceding voiced sibilant *z {= s
and s) has (instead of disappearing) itself become d in didid-dhi (from dis-

ndkis

te

(== ndkis

vds-ti 'wishes'

te);

Similarly the voiced

cerebrals

d dh

and

'show')

vivid-dhi (firom vis- 'be active') '.

When

the dental here was immediately followed by an > sound, the cerebralization
Hence dfdhrd- (= drh-ira-), beside dfdhdto have been stopped.
{==drk-ta-) 'firm'; and though str occurs several times in theRV. *, the r seems to have
been dropped in pronunciation, as tlie only stems ending in -sira- which show a. caseform with n, do not cerebralize it: usirdndm and rdsfrdndm, as if no r preceded. In
TS. I. 2. 5>, r is actually dropped after st in ivdsftmaii- 'accompanied by Tvastrl'.
a.

seems

originally

b. In several instances a
in place of a dental originally

cerebral appears

by an evident Prakritism,

preceded by an r (or

/)

sound; thus vi-kata-

beside kr-td- 'made'; katd- 'depth', beside kartd-"^ 'pit'; avatd(SV. VS.) 'pit', beside avdr'^ 'down'"; and as shown by comparative evidence,
kdtuka- 'sharp'; kudayati 'singes'; ke'vata- ''^\^-jjddhu- 'dull'; kutd- (AV.TS.) 'hornIn the following words, though cognate languages show /'^, the cerebral
less'.
is similarly based on Indian r or ;-'^ -t- dental: knta- 'frontal bone'; jathdra'monstrous',

'belly'; ^a^zV- 'contiguous', iada-

c.

Cp.

Cerebrals have in

VPr.

IV.

V.

143;

(AV.)'blow';/zWa- lump'; kanda-{AY.) 'piece' ^+.

instances supplanted dentals owing to the

some

Bradke, KZ.

28, 298.

Wackernagel

See
Op.

Ibid., note.

Cp. above 41,

Cp. above 17,

cit.

I,

i,

143, note.

if

from

krt- 'cut';

but

IF. 3, iSo'f.
12 IE. / by rhotacism

MS.

see

Bartholomae,

became r

in Ilr.

has the reading y/wwa rdvdt

for that of TS. u. 4. 7' jinvdr avft and
K. XI. 9 jinva rdvat. Cp. below p. 70, note 4.
14 The cerebral could be similarly accounted
13

144.
I.
5.

IL 47

7 See Wackernagel i, 145 a, note (end). for in i2</a- (RV.) 'house' (?),_ if it is related
to kula-{j>a-) 'family', and kuldya- (AV.) 'nest'.
Cp. 42 d (p. 34) end.
8 In rdsfrd'dominion% usfra- 'buffalo', In dandd- 'staff' if identical with Gk. ihhpov
i) we seem
desfri- 'Directress'; danistra- 'tooth'; sfr- in (J. ScHMmT, KZ. 25, 52, note
shaken off', ivdstf-mant- to have an instance of a cerebral for a
'not
a-ni-strta'accompanied by Tvastf ; nd^ in kundf- dental -\- following r, but such a change
seems not to be in accordance with the
naa- 'house-lizard' (?).
phonetic laws of either Vedic (cp. dfdhrd;
9 Wackernagel i, 146 a.
above a, a) or Prakrit.
On two other
10 Cp. Bartholomae, IF. 3, 179.
n Perhaps also renuka-kdta- 'stirring dust', examples of this supposed change, anda-

Indo-arische Philologie.

4.

34

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

words with phonetic cerebral. In padbhis 'with feet', and

and
it is due to padbkis, inst.pl. of both /'/- 'look.',
of pas- 'cord', and to pddbisa-, fddvisa (VS.) 'fetter', which is derived from
Vdsat and srdusat, sacrificial calls, probably for vdksat and
pdi- 'cord''*srdsat (3. sing. aor. subj. of vah- 'convey', and sru- 'hear'}, seem to owe their

analogy of

similar

N.,

"p&xhajps, Jidd-grbhi-,

W/

(VS.), vdi{TS.), 3. sing. aor.

cerebral to the influence of the sacrificial call
of Yvah-. The d oi purodai- 'sacrificial cake' (from das- 'worship'), is perhaps

due to

du-dds'- 'impious' (for duz-das-)'-

d. In a few instances a cerebral f or

sibilant

The phonetic

s.

d for
From

d appears

in place of the cerebral

representative of the latter before

where

b/i

would be d

appears in viprud-bhis (VS.)

'with drops'.
here the cerebral spread to the nom. sing., where it appears
in vi-pri'it (AV.) 'drop', from prus- 'sprinkle', and in edhamana-dvit 'hating the
arrogant' (from dvis- 'hate').
The cerebral d also appears before the -dhi of the 2. sing. impv. for s in
aviddhi (= avi-s-dhi) aor. of av- 'favour', and in vividdhi (= vivis-dhi), red.
aor. of vis- 'be active'.
The phonetic form here would be *idk (= iz-dh)*,
instead of which iddk appears under the influence, perhaps, of the cognate
verbal forms with the short vowel {avistu, avistdm etc.).
43. Cerebrals in many instances represent the old palatals / / h.
They are found thus:
a. as final: i. in nom. sing. m. f
Mri/ 'lustre' (M/'47-); r/ 'ruler' (r47-)>
vipat, N. of a river {vipas-); vit 'settlement' {vis-), spat 'spying' {spas-); sat
'overcoming' {sdk-); -vat 'conducting' {-vah-), pasthavat (VS.), -vit (TS.). The
guttural k would have been phonetic in this case, as the nom. sing, originally
ended in s^, and even the old palatals became k before s; the cerebral
must here therefore be due to the influence of forms in which it was
(parallel

to

IE. z before b/i)^,

it

phonetic.
in

2.

nom.

ace. sat,

the cerebral

(IE. sveks),

from sdsis

'six'.

As k might have been expected

doubtless due to forms

containing sas-, as sasti-

sasthd- (AV. VS.) 'skth'.

'sixty',

3. in the first member of a compound, where the final of the nom. sing,
appears, in sat- 'six', and pad- (from pas- 'cord', in pdd-bua-).
4. in 2. 3. sing. aor. for the radical palatal after the endings have been
dropped: thus d-bhrat {bhraj- 'shine'); yat {yaj- 'sacrifice'); rat {raj- 'shine');
nat, d-nat {nas- 'reach'); d-prat {pras- 'ask' in pras-nd- 'question'); d-vat {vak-

Here / is phonetic in the 3. pers. only, standing for s-t {= IE. k-t).
has been transferred to the 2. sing., where k would be phonetic (standing

'convey').
It

'egg',

and manduka-

NAGEL

I,

'frog',

see

Wacker-

147, note.

rtvik 'sacrificer' CJ/ya;'-); urk (VS.) 'nourishment' {urj-); dik (AV.) 'region' (dii-). For

-d-f-k, the later Samhitas have -dfh also.

In
MS. Itl. 49 (B.) the n. nom. the m. f. form appears: -dfk,
beside vy-avat, AV. vm. I^', from vi-Tjas- sprk; but as there was no s here, it
'shine forth', is probably due to the influence must be assumed that the cerebral was
of a-vai, aor. of yvah- but cp. Bartholomae, originally used in these neuter forms. In
Studien I, 34, note. On the cerebral in avata- bhisdj- 'healer', the k has spread from the
(SV. VS.), beside avata-, nadd- 'reed', beside nom. to other cases, where it is not phonetic
nadd-, and in kTtd- (AV.), markdfa- (VS.) cp. (cp. Wackernagel i, 138).
The original

Op.

cit.

I,

148 a

The form

(p.

vy-dvaf

172, top).

in

Wackernagel

I,

148 b, note.

See below 44 a, 3.
4 Cp. above 17, 5.
5 This phonetic k for an old palatal is
preserved in the nominatives -dfk 'seeing'
3

\d]'s-\

{sprh-),

-spfk 'touching' (sprs-), spfk 'desiring'

an-dk 'eyeless' {-aks- as- 'penetrate');
;

value of the palatal in usij- 'desiring', usnik(AV. VS.), a kind of metre, which have k
in the nom. is uncertain. The k in the nom,
ndk 'night' is probably not based on an old
palatal i
(cp. Wackernagel i, 149
a u,
note).

I.

Phonology.

Cerebrals.

Dentals.

35

for k-s
IE. i>).
The reverse transference of k to the 3. sing, has taken
place mj>rd nak beside i-nat (nas- 'reach') and in d-srak (from srj- 'discharge').
b. before consonant suffixes:
I. the phonetic cerebral appears before
case-endings beginning with bk
in pai-bhis, from pds- 'look' and 'cord'; vid-bhis from vis- 'settlement';
sarddhhyas 'for the bees' (probably from *sardh-y, sad-bMs^. In anadud-bhyas (AV),
from anad-vah- 'bull', d appears for d by dissimilation; while the guttural of
the nom. instead of the phonetic d appears in susamdrg-bhis (from drs- 'see')

to see'

'fair

and

in dig-bhyds {KSf.)

from

dis- 'region'.*

before the -su of the loc. pi. k is phonetic, and appears in vik-m,
from vis-, in spite of the unphonetic t of the nom. vit. But owing to the
influence of the other cases the unphonetic cerebral (in the form of t
dissimilated for /) appears in anadut-su.
3. before the dhi of the 2. sing. impv. the cerebral is phonetic in dididdhi,
from dis- "; also in z (== s), which after cerebralizing the dk is dropped,
leaving a compensating length, in tadhi from taks- 'hew' (= IE. tegzdhi); also
in so-dha 'sixfold' (for sas-dha as-, like as-, becoming
before a voiced mute) 3.
2.

The cerebrals

the following words have not been satisfactorily

explained: aghati- and a-ghatd- (AV.) 'striker', beside -a-ghata- (VS.); andd'egg'; itdnt- (x. 171') 'wandering' (?)
kuta- 'house' (?); kata- 'frontal boiie';
kfptta-'iatV{7); manduka- 'frog'; ita-{KS[.) 'reed'; rarita- (\^.), laldta- {KN
.)
'forehead'. Some others, mostly containing b, may be suspected of non-Aryan
origin: bat, badd, interjections; baturin- 'broad' (?), btrita- 'troop' (?); bekandta'usurer'; addmbara- (VS). 'drum'; khadgd- (VS. MS.) 'rhinoceros'; candald- (VS.)
'outcast'; markdta- (VS.) 'ape'.
The dentals. The dentals are at the present day pronounced as
44.
interdentals in India, but according to the Pratisakhyas* they were post-dental,
being produced at the root of the teeth {dantamula). They represent IE.
dentals, corresponding to similar sounds in the cognate languages.
When
two IE. dentals met, there seems to have been a tendency to change the
first to a sibilant 5.
survival of this appears in some Vedic combinations
of d or dh with dk, which point to an earlier zdA, viz. in de-hi, beside daddhi 'give'; dhe-hi (for *dhadh-dhi) 'put'; kiye-dhi 'containing much', in all of
c.

in

which examples e is based on Ilr. az^.

a. Change of s to i. The dental
stems becomes
I.

before the of verbal

verbs vasdwelt';

From

'dwell',

vas- 'shine',

vdt-syati (MS.)

jighat-si'i-

sibilant as the final of roots or

nominal

f:

'will

suffixes (future, aorist, desiderative) in the three

and ghas-

'eat'*:

thus avatsTs (AY.) 'thou hast

shine'; jighat-sati (AV.)

'desires

to

eat',

and

(AV.) 'hungry'.

phonetic change of j to rf corresponding forms). This sibilant, Indian/,

explained the stem id- first became the cerebral mute d before the
'refreshment', beside is- (which occurs before i^/4-suffixes (as dental ^ became dental d) when
vowel endings only): id-bhis etc. would have it first spread to the nom., and lastly to the
led to the formation of id-a, etc. (inst. sing.), loc. pi.
4 See RPr. I. 19; TPr. 11. 38.
which then gave rise to id-a- as an extension
Av. voista,
5 For example, Gk. J-oiaia,
of id-\ cp. also iddyata (RV. I. igi^ MM.,
Cp. Wackeril&yata, AufrecHt) ilayati (AV.) 'be quiet'. beside vet-tha 'thou knowest'.
2 It is not phonetic in aviddhi and vividdhi nagel I, 152 b.
6 Loc. cit., also note.
(see above, 42 d). Cp. Wackernagel i, 149 c
7 See discussion of attempted explanations
(end).
3 The cerebral which in this paragraph in Wackernagel i, 153, note.
8 All the other roots in j add the suffix
represents (except before s) the old palatals, is based on an llr. sh- sound / z (as with connecting vowel i.
shown by the Avesta having j z in the
3*
1

before bh

this

is

to be

36

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

Vedic Grammar.

4.

2. before the t of the 3. sing, of a past tense: thus vy-avat (AY.) 'has
shone forth', from vi-vas-. This is, however, probably not a phonetic change,
but is rather due to the influence of the 3. sing, of other preterites with -/;
*d-vas-t having thus, instead of *d-vas, become d-vaf^3. before case-terminations beginning with bh, and when final (in nom.
ace. sing, neut), in the perf. part, and in four other words: thus Jagr-vdd-bkis,

'having awakened', tatan-vdt,

inst. pi.,

'having stretched'; usdd-bhis,

ace. n.,

from usds- 'dawn'; mad-bhis, vidd-bhyds (AV.), from mas- 'month'; svd-tavadhhyas (VS.), from svd-tavas- 'self-strong'. The change of J to / began before
the bh endings (like that of s to / or d) ^ and was extended to the nom. acq.
sing. neut. in the E.V.,

but not

till

later before the -su of the loc. pl.3

Allied to the change of final s of roots and stems to

change of the medial dental sibilant to d in madgu- (VS.) 'diver',
a.

yjj

'

t,

is

from

the

apparent

niajj-

'dive'

\Y.. zg)\.

The

of dentals for other mutes is extremely rare. In consequence

dental replaces a cerebral in anadiitm and anaditdbhyas (AV.), from
anadvah- 'bull'; in drdhrd- 'firm', beside drdhd-S; in Jiasi/iafdi (TS.) 'four year old bull',
beside pasfhavap (VS.).
dental seems to take the place of a labial in ad-lhis, ad-bhyas, beside af'water': but this is probably due to the analogy of *nadbhis, nadbhyds, beside napdi'grandson' ^.
^.

substitution

of dissimilation,

a.

The

These sounds as a rule represent IE. labials; e. g.

bhdra 'bear', Gk. ^ipz. But owing to the great rarity of IE. b,
there are very few Vedic examples of inherited b; e. g. rambate 'hangs down',
45.

pitf-,

Gk.

labials.

TcaTfjp;

Lat. labi 'glide'?.

of words containing b has been greatly increased by

Thus b replaces / or bh before other voiced mutes:
rab-dhd-, beside rabhante 'they
e. g. pi-bd-and- 'firm', beside pad-d- 'place';
take'.
2. It is the regular substitute for bh in reduplicative syllables or when
initial aspiration is lost owing to
a following aspirate; e. g. ba-bktiva from

The number

a.

new

formations,

i.

bhu- 'be', baku- 'arm', bandh- 'bind'^.

3. In a few examples it takes the
place of or interchanges with v^; \hMS pddbisa- (RV.), latsiAe pddvTsa- (VS.);
band- beside vand- 'arrow'; -balsa- (AV.) beside -valsa- 'twig'; band- (AV.)
'music' beside vand-; -blina- (AV.) 'crushed', beside vltna- (B.)".
4. It further
occurs in some new onomatopoetic words; budbudd- 'bubble'; bsl (AV.) interj.
'dash!'; bata interj. 'alas!' and batd- 'weakling'.
5. In one instance b seems
to stand for m before r, in bru- 'speak', for *mru-'^'^, originally appearing most
likely after a pause or after a final consonant ^^b. In many words the origin of 5 is obscure. Most of these probably
come from a foreign source: i. owing to their meaning: arbudd- and drbuda-,
balbuthd-, sdmbara-, sfbinda-, names of foes of Indra and of the Aryans; brbt't-,
a proper name; bajd- (AV.), bdlbaja- (AV.), bilvd- (AV.), names of plants;
bdkura- and bakurd-, a musical instrument.
2. owing to their phonetic
form: kilbisa- 'sin'; bisa- 'root-fibre'; busd- 'vapour'; bat 3xA bada, interjections;

Wackernagel

Cp.

See 42 d

(p.

I,

different scholars, see

154.

Wackernagel

Cp.

4
5

Op. cit. I, 15s

See 42 a a (p.

The name

i,

155

a,

See above 32 a, T, 2.
There is some confusion between forms
of bfh- 'be great', and vf^h- 'tear'.

note.

b, note.

33).

in-d-ra

and ndnan-df-

'hus-

are explained by some scholars as containing a Prakritic d. See WACKERNAGEL I, 157, note.

band's

sister',

On some words

buthd-)

in

which

(sabar-, batd-, bdla-, bal-

b is

Wackernagel i, 158 b,

note.

34).

regarded as IE. by

10 On some doubtful or wrong explanations

of b for V [ni-bfh- 'crush', bdla-, bdlbaja-, bat,
sabdla-, idmba-), seeWACKERNAGELI, 161, note.
'^ Cp. Gk. fiporig for *iJ.por6(.

"

See

Wackernagel

i,

159.

Phonology.

I.

Labials.

Nasals.

37

bandd- {KSl) 'crippled'; bdrsva- (VS.) 'socket'; baskdya-

'yearling'; bdskiha- (VS.)

'decrepit'; bila-'caNQ', bUma-'c\{\^'-, ^frzVa- 'troop' (?); bekandta- 'nswtr'
3. for
both reasons: ilibha- and brsaya-, names of demons; aldbu- (AV.) 'bottle
.

gourd'.
4. Other words which if not of foreign origin, are as yet insufficiently
explained: bdrjaha- 'udder'; ^a;-^a- 'he-goat'; ^aV/ 'quickly'; -(5ara- 'aperture';
(55r-

bundd-

'seed';

'axrovf';

sabdla- 'brindled'; sdmba-,

bleska- (K.) 'noose'.

brbdd-uktha-, an epithet of Indra; chubiika-'okiva';

weapon of Indra; baldsa- (VS. AV.), a disease;

'^

46. The nasals.

There are five nasals corresponding, in regard
to place of articulation, to the five classes of mutes.
Each of them can
only appear before a mute of its own class ^. Before sibilants and h the
nasals do not appear 3; before / only 7n is found; does not appear finally
any more than the palatal mutes.
a. The guttural nasal n regularly appears before gutturals: e. g. ankd'hook'; ankkdya- 'embrace'; dnga- 'limb'; jdngha- 'leg'. Before other consonants
or as a final, it appears only when a following k o^ g has been dropped,
as in stems ending with -nc- or -nj- and in those compounded with -dfs-;
Q.g.pratydn, nom. sing, ol pratydnc- 'facing'; yundhi {^ yuhj-dhi), 2.sing. impv.
of yuj- 'join'; kt-dfn, nom. sing, of ki-dfi- 'of what kind?'.
b. The palatal nasal n is found only before and after c or /, and
before ch; e. g. vdncati (AV.) 'wavers'; yajnd- 'sacrifice'; varichantu 'let them
desire'.

Ci

The

labial nasal

a.s

a rule represents IE. m;

e. g.

maff- 'mother',

most common labial

sound'*, its frequency being greater than that of the four labial mutes taken
togetherS. By some scholars m is regarded as representing an original n or v

ndman-

Lat. mater;

'name', Lat. nomen.

It is

by

far the

in certain instances^.

The dental

nasal n a.s a, rule represents IE. n; e. g. nd 'not', Lat. -ne;

Gk. [i.zvoq. It is the commonest of the nasals, being more
frequent than m, and about three times as frequent as the other three taken
together?.
The dental nasal also appears instead of dental mutes and of
d.

mdnas-

'mind',

the labial nasal.

appears in place of d before the nominal suffix -na, and of t,

d, before the m of secondary suffixes; e. g. dn-na- 'food' {ad- 'eat');
chin-nd- 'cut off' {chid-); vidyim-mant- 'gleaming' {vidyut- 'lightning'); mfn-mayaThis substitution is in imitation of Sandhi, as
'earthen' {mfd- VS. 'earth').
dn tm dm otherwise occur within words; e. g. udna (from uddn- 'water'),
atmdn- 'breath', vid-md 'we know'.
i. before t; e. g. from yam^. dental n regularly appears in place of m
'restrain' yan-tur- and yan-tf- 'guide', yan-trd- 'rein'; from sram- 'exert oneself
srantd- 'wearied'; 2. before suffixal m or v; e. g. from gam- 'go' d-gan-ma,
gan-vaki, jagan-^ims-^ ; 3. when radically final, originally followed by suffixal
a.

It

as well as

s or

t;

e. g.

from gam-

jj/az^- 'restrain',

'go',

d-gan,

2. 3. sing. aor.

(^

d-gam-s, d-gam-t)\ from

a-yan, 3.sing.'aor.(= a-yam-s-t); from ddm-'houst', gtTi.{pdtir) ddn'>

8 This
change of m to n may be due
Op. cit. I, 162.
Excepting in a few instances when a to the influence of the cognate forms in
which m phonetically becomes n when final
mute has been dropped, as in yundki
(below 3).
yungdhi (see a).
of dan (denied
9 On this explanation
3 Excepting in a few instances h or n
by PiscHEL, VS. 2, 307 ff.) see especially
before the -su of the loc. pi.
Bartholomae, if. 8, in 'Arica' 229249;
4 Excluding the semivowel v.
also RiCHTER, KZ. 36, III
123, on dcim5 Cp. Whitney 50 and 75.

Wackernagel
Whitney 75.

6 Cp.
7

I,

177, note.

pati-.

38

I.

'of the house'

Allgemeines und Sprache.

(=

dams).

4.

Vedic Grammar.

Here the change oi

(as in i) to the dental s ox t

to

n was

evidently

due

which originally followed'.

This nasal, like the cerebral mutes, is an

47. The cerebral n.
Indian innovation. It is for the most part the result of a regular phonetic
development, but is also in a number of words due to Prakritic influence;
A. Besides regularly appearing before cerebral mutes, e. g. in dandd'staff',
the cerebral n phonetically takes the place of dental n after r r s',
either immediately preceding, e. g. nrnam 'of men', vdrna- 'colour', umd'hot'; or when only vowels 3, guttural or labial mutes'* or nasals, y v or. h,
intervene; e. g. krpdna- 'misery'; krdmana- 'step'; ksobhana- 'exciting'.
This
rule is followed throughout within a word even when a j which it contains
is produced by SandhiS; thus not only trpnoti {trp- 'be satisfied') z.-aA grbhnsti
{grbk- 'seize'), but also u suvandh (for suvandh, ix. 107^).
In su-sumnd'very gracious' (where the s is produced by internal Sandhi), the dental n
remains probably owing to the influence of the simple word sumnd-.
a. The cerebralization of dental n takes place almost as regularly
in verbs compounded with the prepositions prd 'before', para 'away', pdri
'round', nir (for nis) 'out'; as well as in nominal derivatives of these combinations. But the r does not cerebralize n when there is tmesis or any other
The cerebralization takes place:
preposition but a intervenes*1. in the initial of roots;
e. g. prdnak {nas- 'reach'); param'tde {nud'thrust); pra-netf- 'guide' {m- 'lead'). But n remains if r or ks follows; hence
prdnriyat {KSf.) from nrt- 'dance', zxiA-pdri naksati 'encompasses' (a^j- 'reach').
The cerebralization is also absent, without this dissimilating cause 7, in abhi
prd nonu- (SV.) beside abhi prd nonu- 'shout towards', and in prd-nabk-^ (AV.)
'burst'.

medially or finally in the roots knu- 'hide', an- 'breathe', han(though not in forms with gkn); thus pdri-hnuta (AV.) 'denied'; prdniti
'breathes'; nir hanyat (AV.), but abhi-pra-ghndnti.
3. in suffixal n the cerebralization fluctuates: it always takes place in the
n of the I. sing, subj., e. g. nir gamani; not always in the pres. base of M'impel'; e. g. prd hinomi, etc., but pari-hinomi^; never in that of minati
'diminishes' or of minoti 'estabhshes'; it is also absent in ydju skanndm
(x. i8i3)'; but -trnna- (VS.), from trd- 'pierce'.
b. In nominal compounds cerebralization takes place less regularly
when there is r r ox s in the first member, and n in the second:
I.
an initial n is here nearly always cerebralized in the RV.: e. g.
dur-naman- 'ill-named'; prd-napat- 'great-grandson'; also dur-ndia- (AV.) 'un2.

'strike'

1 The dental may stand for / in carmaIn some instances where the mute
+
mnd- 'tanner' (cp. carmani mlaiani): BR. immediately precedes the n, the cerebraliAccording to Benfey, it is used to fill the zation does not take place; e. g. v^tra-ghne
hiatus in declension, e. g. kavi-n-a; and in ksepnu- 'springing'.
the perf. red. syllable an-, e. g. in anrcur;
5 In one curious instance, sam
pindk
.

Wackernagel I, 175 c, note.

The cerebral mutes and nasal

(he?,iAs pinasfi, iiompis- 'crush'), the cerebral

not only lost at the end of a syllable has transferred
do not cerebralize a n separated from them its cerebral character to the beginning of
by a vowel, but even stop the influence of the syllable.
a preceding r r s; thus in reduplication
6 The preposition ni foUovnng another
only the first n is cerebralized; e. g. pra- containing > is mostly cerebralized.
nindya (> 'lead'); cp. manina inst. oi mani7 Cp. above 42 a, a.
'pearl' (B.b.). This arises from a disinclination
8 Cp.
tri-ndbhi- 'three-naved', and vfsw-

cp.

pronounce cerebral mutes and nasals in

successive syllables.
3 On the
absence of cerebralization in
ustrdnam and j-asiranam, see above 42 a, a.
to

nabhi- 'strong-naved'.
9 Cp.

xm.
10

VPr. m. 87; APr. m. 88;

IV. 95;

12.

Cp.

Wackernagel

i,

167 b

e.

TPr.

I.

Phonology.

The cerebral

39

s, r r or s follows) not
in -nrmiia- 'manhood', -nistha- 'eminent'; -nissidh- 'gift'; -nirnij- 'adornment'; nor
(owing to the intervening gh and m) in dirgkd-nitha-, N., yusmd-mta- 'led by

attainable', dur-nihita- (AV.) 'ill-preserved'; but (because

The cerebralization is further absent, without any preventing cause, in

aksa-ndh- 'tied to the axle' (beside pari-ndh- 'enclosure'); tri-nakd- 'third
heaven'; tri-nabhi- 'three-naved', and vfsa-nabhi- 'great-naved' p'mar-nava'renewing itself (but AV. pimar-nava-); dur-niydntu- 'hard to restrain'.
2. it is less frequent medially; e. g. purvahnd- forenoon'; aparahnd- (AV.)
'afternoon'; nr-vdhana- 'conveying ratr)!;pra-vdkana-{N'&) 'carr)dng oT ; purTsavAhana- (VS.) beside purlsa-vdhana- (TS. K.) 'removing rubbish'; nr-mdnas'kind to men', vrsa-manas- 'manly-spirited', but fd-manas- 'of far-seeing mind';
//r-^/^a(i- 'wooden club', but vrtra-ghnS, dat., 'Vrtra-slaying'; su-sumnd-^ ^v&nj
gracious'; su-pra-pand- 'good drinking place'; nr-pdna- 'giving drink to men';

you'.

but pari-pdna- 'drink', pari-pdna- (AV.) 'protection'; pary-uhyamana- (VS.)

beside pary-uhyamana-{ Yvak-).
c. Even in a closely connected following word cerebralization may
take place after r r s in the preceding one.
1. This is frequently the case with initial n, most usually in nas 'us',
nah
rarely in other monosyllables such as mi 'now', nd 'like'^; e. g. sa^d
(vm. 73^). Initial n occasionally appears thus in other words also; e. g.
srnga-vrso napat {SV., napat, RV.); asthuri nau
pdri netd
visai {ix.. 103+)
(VS., no RV. TS.); {gSmad)' u su nasatya (VS.) prd ndmani (TS.); punar
suhard nah; vdr ndma (TS. v. 6. i3).
nayamasi (AV.); suhdr nah (MS.)
2. Medial n also occurs thus, most often in the enclitic pronoun ena'this'; e. g. indra enam.
It occasionally appears in accented words also after
final r: gor ohena (i. i8o5); m'r inasah (AV.); nfbhir yemandh (SV, yemandh,
RV.); panibhir viydmanah (TS.)3. A final n is treated as medial and cere-

imdn (MS.) and aksdn dva (MS.).

B. In a number of words n has a Prakritic origin.
a. It is due to a preceding r or r which has been replaced hj a i u
or has disappeared through assimilation. This is indicated to be the case
by the appearance beside them of cognate words containing r ox I sounds:
I. in Vedic itself: thns am- 'pin of the axle'; /5aa- 'one-eyed', beside karnd-''
bralized thus in ifn

kdna- (AV.) 'particle' kald- 'small part'; janjana-bhdvan

jrn- from old pres. *j'rnati); punyaprobably
cp. parpharat 'may
'fill'; phan- 'bound' (= *phrn-, *pharn-)

'crop-eared' (MS.);

'ghttering' .jurni- 'glow' {-jan-

'auspicious' -.pf-

he scatter'; dhdnika- c\mw&^ -.dhdraka- (VS.), id. 2. in alHed languages:

gand- 'crowd'; paii- (VS.) 'purchase'; vanij- 'merchant'^; dnu- 'minute'; kiinaru'

'having a withered arm'; pani- 'hand'; sthanu- 'stump' ^.

b. Owing to the predilection for cerebrals in Prakrit, which substituted
for
n throughout between vowels, even without the influence of neighn
bouring cerebrals, one or two words with such n seem to have made their
way into Vedic: mani- 'pearl' (Lat. monile); amndh (MS.) 'at onct' amndh
:

(AV.),
c.

id. 7.

which may
1

exact explanation of the 11 in the foUowmg words (some of

be of foreign origin) is uncertain: kdnva-, N.; kalydna- 'fair';

The

haps be manor uhana. Cp. Lanman, Sanskrit

See above 47 A (end).
passage.
Cp. Benfey, Gottinger Abhandlungen Reader, note on this
4

20, 14.

agner avena (l. 128^), Pp. agneh avena,

On
is probably yiTong ior agneh jravena.
the other hand, for mdjw rukdna (l 328),
Pp. manah ruhanah, the reading should per3

See Wackernagel i, 172 a (p. 192, mid.).

See Fr6hde, BB. 16, 209.

6
7

Cp.

On

Wackernagel i, 1 72 d, note,

173, note.

a few doubtful instances, op.

173, note.

cit.

I,

;;;

40

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

kdnukd-, of doubtful meaning; nicumpund-, of doubtful meaning; nimk 'secretly',

7iinyd-'^ 'inner'; pain-, a kind of demon; (Jizwa- 'arrow'; z^^wi- 'udder', 'arrow',
'music'; z/^iwf- 'music'; vdnici-, a kind of musical instrument; sona-^x&d'; vgana(SV. VS.), of doubtful meaning; ki'mapa- {KN ) 'corpse'; ^i- 'division' (A V.)
and nicunkund- (TS.), of doubtful meaning;

cupttnika-(J^5.), N.; nicankund- (TS.)

venu- (AV.) 'reed'; sdnu- (AY.) 'hemp'^

The semivowels. The semivowels y, r, /, v have the peculiarity

each has a vowel corresponding to it, viz. i r I u respectively. They
are called anta{h)stha in the Pratisakhyas 3, the term doubtless meaning
'intermediate', that is, standing midway between vowels and consonants.
a. / and v regularly represent the final i and u of diphthongs before
and au av and av. But while j and v
vowels, e and ai becoming ay and ay,
are regularly written for i and u before vowels, they were often pronounced
48.

that

This is shown by the fact that:

and uv are frequently written, beside y and v, in the inflexion of
Thus from dhi- 'thought', there are several compounds, in
I- and z7-stems.
some of which the stem is written with iy before vowels, as itthadhiy- 'very

as iy

and

1.

uv.

iy

devout', in others withj', as adhy- 'longing'. Similarly -ju- 'hastening', regularly

appears as -juv-; but -/- 'purifying', -/^-'swelling', -ja- 'bringing forth', always
In the same way, the suffix -ya is often written -iya-,
as -pv-, -SV-, -sv-'^.

beside dgr-ya- (VS.); ftv-iya- and fiv-ya- 'regular'; urv-iyd

'widely'. This spelling is characteristic of the TS. Here
one consonant precede, almost
iy is generally written where more than
invariably so in the inflexion of stems in i and I; e. g. indrSgniy-os 'of Indra
and Agni', laksmiyd 'by Laksmi'; very often also in the suffix -ya; e. g. dsviya- beside dsv-ya- (RV.) 'relating to horses' '. Similarly uv appears here for
V in suvar- and suvargd- 'heaven', beside svar (RV.) and svargd- (RV.); in
the inflexion of tana- 'body', in some forms of vayu- 'wind', bahu- 'arm', uruIn the SV. and MS.7 there are two or three other examples of iy
'thigh'^.
e. g.

dgr-iya-

'first',

and urv-yd (VS. TS.)

and uv

y and

for

v^.

according to metrical evidence, y and v (though written as pronounced

in classical Sanskrit) have a syllabic value in a large number of examples in
This was recognized to be the case by the Pratisakhyas '
the Vedic hymns
3. r appears instead of r before the suffix -ya\ e. g. inpitr-ya- 'paternal',
2.

''.

from pitf4.

'father'.

ay ay

ey

Book X and

appear before the

Here yy

lying together'.

daksdyya- in

is
I.

suffix -_ya";

e. g.

saha-sey-yaya, dat, 'for

in the RV. (except in

always to be read as y-iy

129^)'^-

Perhaps from *nirnaya-, see Benfey, the present suffix -_)/a; the comp. suffix -^aj;
the gen. ending -jya, and the fut. suffix -jya
1858, p. 1627.
2 On these words see "Wackernagel I, the initial z* of suffixes; the ^z/- of the 5th class;
in asva- 'horse' and tvasfr-, N. On the otherhand
174 b and 173 d, note.
RPr. I. 2; VPr. IV. 101 ; also Nirukta the syllabic pronunciation is sometimes used
3
artificially by the poets, as is apparent from
Cp. Whitney on APr. I. 30.
II. 2.
4 Cp. Wackernagel i, 181 a, note.
the isolation of such occurrences. In some
individual words the written iy and uv have
5 Several other examples, loc. cit.
6 Cp. Whitney on TPr. 11. 25.
to be pronounced as consonantal j/ and v.
always in suvand-. pres. part, of su- 'press'
7 See Wackernagel 1, 181 a, note (p. 201,
1

GGA.

mid.).

On

the other
lated instances of

hand there

are
and v in the

occasionally in bhiyds- 'fear', hiyand- 'imCp. Wackernagel i, 181 b, note,

some iso- pelled'.

Vedas as bottom.

compared with

10

krit;

"

iy and uv in classical Sanssee Wackernagel i, p. 201, bottom.

9 In certain words and formatives j/ and v
are regularly consonantal: in the relative j'fl-

RPr. vin. 22; XVII. 14.

See Grassmann, Wb. 1711, columns

4 and 5.
12

Wackernagel

i,

181 c

7.

I.

Phonology.

Semivowels.

41

That this syllabic pronunciation was not simply i and u (with hiatus),
but iy and tiv, is rendered probable not only by the spelling iy uv beside;/ v,
but by the consideration that j/ and v are respectively the natural transition
from
.

b.

and u to a. following dissimilar vowel.

In the RV. / and v are pronounced with a syllabic value under

the following conditions:

almost invariably after a group of consonants and generally after a

consonant if preceded by a long vowel. Thus the ending -bkyas and
the suffix -tya are regularly pronoimced as dissyllables after a long vowel,
but as monosyllables after a short vowel. Hence, too, v is pronounced as
well as written in the forms davidhv-dt, susv-ati, susv-and-, jukv-e', jt'ikv-ati^.
2. after a single initial consonant at the beginning of a verse, or, within
a verse, if the preceding syllable is heavy, in some half dozen words. Thus
tyd- 'that', and tvdm 'thou' are nearly always pronounced as they are written
after a short vowel, but iiyd- and tuvdrn at the beginning of a Pada or after
a long vowel.
The y is pronounced as iy in j'yd- and jyakd- 'bowstring'
1.

single

only

beginning of a verse or after a long vowel, in jydyasonly after a long vowel. Finally tva- 'many', must generally be
read as tuva- after a long vowel, but almost invariably tva- after a short
vowel.
3. in the inflexion of the nouns in r (nom. sing, -i-s) and W^, where the
stem has (with only six exceptions) to be pronounced with iy and uv. 3
at

the

'mightier'

Thus the

from

and uv to y and v began in the RV., the

and uv which was pronounced by the poets
of that Veda, sometimes iy and uv, sometimes y and v.
This semivowel, when not derived from i
49. The semivowel /.
before other vowels (48 a) within Vedic itself, is based either on IE. i (= Gk.
spiritus asper) or voiced palatal spirant (= Gk. tY; e. g. yds 'who' (0-?);
yaj- 'sacrifice' {dy-io^); yudh- 'fight' {i<J-[ih-q); but ydva- 'corn' (Cf'a); yas'boil' (Cew); yuj- 'yoke' (fu/-); yusdn- 'broth' {^.v-i^yj).
It is probably due to
this diiference of origin that yas- 'boil' and yam- 'restrain', reduplicate with
transition

iy

traditional text writing for the iy

ya- in the perfect, but yaj- 'sacrifice', with /-.

a. This semivowel sometimes appears without etymological justification: r. after roots in -a before vowel suffixes; e. g. da-y-i, 3. sing. aor.
{da- 'give'), d-dha-y-i {dha- 'put'), d-jna-y-i {jna- 'know'); upa-stha-y-am, abs.
'approaching'; rsabha-da-y-in- (AV.) 'bestowing bulls'.
This is probably due
to the influence of roots in -ai (27 a), which have a- before consonants, but
ay- before vowels; t. g. pai- 'di'mk.^ -.pd-iave, d-pay-i, pay-ana-.
2. owing to

of closely allied words or formations, in: yu-y-dm 'you' (for

*yusam, Av. yuzem, cp. yus-md-, stem of other cases) 5 because of vay-dm
'we'; bhu-y-istha- 'most' because of bhii-yas- 'more'; bhdve-y-am, i. sing. opt.
the

(for

influence

*bhdvayam) because of bhdves,

bhdvet,

etc.

very rarely in the later Samhitas after palatals: tirascye {KSf. xv. 35)
var. lect. for tirasce, dat, 'transverse'; snydptra- (TS. i. 2. 13 3) -.indptra- (VS.)
'corner of the mouth'.
c. interchanging (after the manner of Prakrit) occasionally with w^ in
b.

6 In khya- 'tell', y seems at first sight to

be interchanged with the s of ksa-, which
2 See below 375, 382 a.
occurs in the K. and the MS. (cp. v. Schroesee der's ed., I, p. XLm, 7); but the two verbs,
3 For various explanations of this
though synonymous, have probably a different
Wackeknagel I. 182 a 7, note (p. 205).
origin. Cp. Wackernagel i, 188 c, note.
4 See Brugmann, KG. i, 302.
5 Cp. Wackernagel i, 86 c; 187, note.
1

Qnvyurnv-dn,

anias, see

vy-^irfiv-att-heside aporvuv'

Wackernagel

I,

182 a

a, note.

42

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

the Samhitas of the YV.;

one's bow drawn''.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

atatayln- (VS.) beside atatavin- (TS.)

a. g.

'having

This sound was, at the time of the Prati50. The semivowel v.

sakhyas^, a voiced labio-dental spirant Hke the English v or the German w.
Within Vedic it is very frequently derived from u^.
It seems otherwise
always to be based on IE. u; there is no evidence that it is ever derived
from an IE. spirant v which was not interchangeable with t.
a. This semivowel is sometimes found interchanging with b^, with y^,
and according to some scholars, with mi.
b. In two roots in which v is followed by r, an interchange of sonantal
and consonantal pronunciation, together with metathesis takes place, vr
becoming ru: hence from dhvr- 'bend' are derived both -dhvr-t- and -dhru-,
-dhru-t-, dhru-H-; from hvr- 'go crooked', -hvr-t-, -hvr-ia-, -hvr-ti- and hruni-ii, 3. sing., hru-t-, -hru-ta-. The root rudh- 'grow', may be a similar variation
of vrdh- 'grow'^The semivowel r. The liquid sound r must originally have
51.
been a cerebral, as is shown by its phonetic effect on a following dental
(47 A). By the time of the Pratisakhyas?, it was, however, pronounced inother phonetic positions also. Being the consonantal sound corresponding to
r before vowels (like y v \.o i v), it is in that position correspondingly
graded with ar; e. g. d-kr-an, d-kr-ata, beside d-kr-thas d-kar-am, aor. of

kr- 'do';

dr-ii-

ddr-u- 'wood'.

r generally corresponds to r in the cognate languages, but not

and where these languages agree in having /, the latter
may in these instances be assumed to be the original sound. As old Iranian
here invariably has r, there seems to have been a tendency to rhotacism in
the Indo-Iranian period'".
Words in which Vedic r thus represents IE. /
a.

infrequently to / also;

are the following:

1.

initially: raks- 'protect';

ramb- 'hang down'; ra-

rag/i-t'i- 'swift';

ramhate

'speeds'; rabh- 'grasp';

'bark'; ric- 'leave', rip- 'smear'; rih- 'lick'; rue- 'shine',

and ruhmedially: dngara-

ruj- 'break'; rudh-

'grow'.

aratni- 'elbow'; arh- 'be

Urna- 'wool'; urmi- 'wave';
garutmant-, a celestial bird; gardabhd- 'ass'; gdrbha- 'womb';
cakrd'wheel'; car- 'move'; caramd- 'last'; cird- 'long'; chardis- 'protection'; dharu(AV.) 'sucking'; parasu- 'axe'; piparti 'fills'; pi'tr- 'fort'; puri'i- 'much'; prath'spread out'; -pru-t- 'swimming',
-pruta- part, 'floating', pravate ^V2isit^
mdrdhati 'neglects'; -marsana- (AV.) 'touching'; inurdhdn- 'head'; vard'suitor',
and various forms of vr- 'choose'; vdrcas- 'light'; iarand- 'protecting'; sdrman- 'protection'; sdrkara- 'gravel'; Usira- (AV.) 'cold season';
sri- 'lean';
iru- 'hear'; sroni- 'buttock'; sar- in forms of sr- 'run',
and
sarird- (VS.) 'flood'; sarpis- 'clarified butter'; sahdsra- 'thousand';
svar'heaven'; surya- 'sun'; harit- and hdrita- 'yellow'; hiranya- 'gold'; hradi'mi2.

worthy'; iydrti

'coal';

ajird-

'agile';

'sets

in motion'; ir- 'set in motion';

GGA.

1852, ii4f.;

'hail'".

Cp. Benfey,

Wacicernagel I, 188
See Whitney on APr. 1. 26.

See above 48

Cp.

IS. 2, 28;

KG.
5

6
8

Webek,

I,.

a..

Wackernagel

I,

196;

Beugmann,

148 and 155.

See 45 a, 3.
I,

49 c.
For some

Wackernagel

46

c.

other possible instances see

i,
18
b, note.
|.

Whitney on

9 See
1 It seems

APr.

i.

20, 28.

the Vedic relation of r

to / could only be accounted for by assuming a mixture of dialects;
one dialect
having preserved the IE. distinction of r
and /; in another IE. / becoming r (the
Vedic dialect); in a third r becoming /
as

if

throughout (the later Magadht).

MANN, KG.

"

See

I,

175, note.

Wackernagel

i,

189.

See Brug-

I.

Phonology.

Semivowkls.

43

b. r appears in place of phonetic d (= z, Ilr. i)' as final of stems

and -us, before endings which begin with bk-; e. g. havir-bhis and
vdpur-bhis. This substitution is due to the influence of Sandhi, where is, us
in -is

would become

ir, ur.
r also takes the place of d in ira- beside ida- 'refreshing
In urubjd- 'wide open' r apparently takes the place of dental d
(= *ud-ubjd-), perhaps under the influence of the numerous compounds
beginning with uru- 'wide', e. g. uru-jri- 'wide-striding'
c. Metathesis of r takes place when ar would be followed by s or
h + consonant. Under these conditions it appears to be phonetic, being
due to the Svarabhakti after r being twice as great before h and sibilants
as before other consonants 3; when a vowel followed the sibilant or h (e. g.
darsatd-)^, the Svarabhakti was pronounced; but if a consonant followed,
rS took the place of ar + double Svarabhakti. This metathesis appears in
forms of drs- 'see' and srj- 'send forth': drdstum (AV.), drastr- (AV.) 'one
who sees'; sdm-srastr- 'one who engages in battle', 2. sing. aor. sras (== *sra/e)i;
also va.prds-ti- 'side-horse', beside /V/-z/- and prsti- 'rib'; moreover in brahmdnbeside barhis- 'sacrificial litter' (from brh- or
'priest', brdhman- 'devotion',
The
barh- 'make big'); perhaps also drahydi 'strongly' {drh- 'be firm').
same metathesis occurs, being, however, very rare and fluctuating, before ks-:
thus tuvi-mraksd- 'injuring greatly', mraksa-kftvan- 'rubbing to pieces' (from
mrj- 'wipe', or mrs- 'stroke'), but tdrksya-, N.*.
The liquid sound / is the semivowel corre52. The semivowel I.
however occurs only in some half dozen
(which
vowel
sponding to the
/
perfect and aorist forms of the root kip- 'be adapted'). It is pronounced at
the present day in India as an interdental; but it must have had a postdental sound at the time of the Pratisakhyas 7, by which it is described as

draught'.

in the same position as the dentals*.

represents IE. /9 and, in a few instances, IE. r. It is rarer in
Vedic than in any cognate language except old Iranian (where it does not
occur at all)". It is much rarer than r, which is seven times as frequent".
The gradual increase of /, chiefly at the cost of r, but partly also owing
Thus in the tenth Book
to the appearance of new words, is unmistakable.
nouns loman-, lohitd-,
the
and
and
labh-,
mhicthe
verbs
appear
RV.
of the
but in the earlier books only mruc- 'sink', rabh- 'seize', roman- 'hair', rohitd'red'; similarly dasanguld- 'length of ten fingers', hlddaka- and hlddika-vant-

being pronounced
a. It

Moreover, while
beside sv-anguri- 'fair-fingered', hradd- 'pond'.
of the RV. / occurs" in a few words only, it is eight
times as common in the latest parts. Again, in the AV. it is seven times
as common as in the RV.'3; thus for rap- 'chatter', rikh- 'scratch', a-srirdThe various texts
'ugly', appear in the AV. lap-, likh- (also VS.), aslTld-.
'refreshing',

in the

oldest parts

Cp. above p. 35, note 3.

a supposed parasitic r in chardis-

On

'fence', yajatra- 'adorable', vibhrtra- 'to be

thither', see Wackernagel

borne hither and

I,

189, note
3

4
5

sraj-

does not stand for

190 d, note.

raI,

ar,

Cp. PiSCHEL, BB. 3, 264. An indication

was not a cerebral is the fact that
it
never occurs (while rs is common).

that
Is

7.

'wreath',

Wackernagel

8 See 44.
According to the APr. I. 1 01.
9 Which, however,
Cp. above 21 a.
Cp. V. Negelein, Zur Sprachgeschichte by r also cp. 51 a.

is

largely represented

des Veda 83, note 7.

6 On the interchange

10

Loc.

cit.

11 See WmTNEY, JAOS. il, p. XLff.

and ar in
12 See Arnold, 'L in the Rigveda', in
raj- 'colour', rajata- 'silvery', raj- 'shine', and
von Roth, 1893, p. 145
arjuna- 'bright' ; bhraj- 'shine', and bhdrgas- Festgruss an Rudolf
148; Historical Vedic Grammar, JAOS.
'brilliance'; bhratr- 'brother', and bhartr- 'husVedic Metre p. 37, 3.
band'; see Wackernagel i, 190 e, note 18, 2, p. 258f.;

of ra

(end).

In

vraja- 'fold', vrati.- 'ordinance'.

13

Cp.

Wackernagel

i,

191

c.

44

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

of the YV. also show an increased number of words with / as compared

with the RV.; thus babhluid- (VS.) 'brownish' beside babhru- 'brown'; kulalaThe MS. has a special predilection for /^;
(VS.) 'potter' beside caril- 'pot'.
The SV. has pamsuldthus pulitdt 'pericardium' beside puritdt (AV. VS.).
'dusty', for pamsurd- in the corresponding passage of the RV.
In a certain number of words ! interchanges with / in the same
period: thus puru- and pulu- 'much'; mis'rd- and -misla- 'mixed'; jargur- and
jalgul-, intv. of gr- 'swallow'; in the AV.: -gird- and -gild- 'swallowing', ksudrdand ksuUakd- (= *ksudla-kd) 'small', tirya- and Hid- 'sesamum'.
The above considerations render it probable that the Vedic dialect was
descended from an Indo-Iranian one in which rhotacism had removed every /.
But since the oldest parts of the RV. contain some words with IE. /, and
in its later parts as well as in the other Sarnhitas / predominantly interchanges with r representing IE. I, there must have been another Vedic
dialect in which IE. r and / were kept distinct; from the latter / must have
found its way into the literary language to an increasing extent''.
b. In the oldest parts of the RV. there are no verbal forms which

preserve IE. /, and only a few nouns, viz. {u)lokd- 'free space', slSka- 'call',
and -misla- 'mixed'. A few other words containing / have no IE. cognates
and may therefore be of foreign origin: titia- 'dark-coloured', /a'/aj-a- 'healing',
iilvila- 'fertile', and the denominative tilvilaydte.
In the latest parts of the RV. / represents IE. /in: i. verbal forms
and primary derivatives: lebhire, lebhand-, labdhd-, from labh- 'grasp', layantam,
from

It- 'cling';

alipsata, aor. ol lip- 'anoint'; lobhdyanti- part,

cala-cald-, -cacali- 'swaying' {3X50 pums'-cali- 'whore',

pldvate, plavd- 'boat',

2. the following

'membrane'; kaldsa-

from plu-

nouns:

'jar';

AV.

from lubh-

'desire';

VS.), from cal- 'move';

'swim'.

uluka- 'owl';

logd- 'clod';

ulkd- 'meteor';

kalA- 'small portion'; kdla- 'time'; kalyana-

ulba-

'fair'; kt'ila-

'family'; gdldd- 'trickling' (VS. gal- 'drop'); palitd- 'grey'; pulu- (in compounds)
'much'; phalgva- 'weakly'; bdla- 'strength' 3 ; ball- 'tax'; mdla- 'dirty garment';
salild- 'surging'; hladaka- and hlidikdvant- 'refreshing'; also words with the suffix
-la , especially with diminutive sense; e. g. vrsa-ld- 'little man', sisii-la- 'little child' 5.
a. In the later Sarnhitas / represents IE. / in the following words:
-kulva- (VS.) 'bald'; kloman- (AV. VS.) 'lung'; gldhana- (AV.) 'dicing'; gldu{KSf. VS.) 'excrescence'; tulfi- (VS.) 'balance'; palAva- (AV.) 'chaff'; pula-sti(VS.) 'smooth-haired'; plihd?!- (AV. VS.) 'spleen'; phalgu- (VS.) 'reddish';
laghu- (AV.) 'light'; lap- (AV.) 'prate' (= rap- RV.).
c. On the other hand, / to some extent represents IE. /* also*.
this value of / is rare and occurs only in the neigh1. In the RV.
bourhood of labial sounds {u, 0, p, m, v): ulukhala- 'mortar' beside uru'broad'; Jalgul-, intv. of gf- 'swallow'; pli'isi-, a kind of insect, beside prus'squirt'; klosa- 'call' beside krosant- 'calling', kroiand- 'crying';
-lohitd- 'red',
lodkd-, a kind of red animal, beside rokit-, rohitd- 'red'; lopdsd- 'jackal',
lup- (AV.) 'break', beside rup- 'break'; vpala- 'upper millstone' beside updri
'above'; jdlpi- 'muttering'; pippala- 'berry'; mla- 'fade' beside mr- 'die'; vald'cave' beside vdrate 'encloses'.
2. In the later Sarnhitas the use of this /
IE. ;' extends further than
in the RV.; thus dlam (AV.) 'enough' dram; lis- (VS.) 'tear' ris-; -luncd- (VS.)

L. V. ScHROEDER,

ZDMG.

See Wackernagel i, 192

above p. 42, note 10.
3 Cp. above p. 36, note i".
2

33,

196.

b,

and

cp.

See Arnold, Festgruss an Roth 147.

See Wackernagel i, p. 218.
Cp. above 51 a.

I.

Phonology.

babhlusd- (VS.)
sthUrd- '.

'tearing out';
'gross'

3.

In

Semivowels.

'brownish'

Sibilants.

babhru- 'brown';

45
sthald-

a few instances / represents IE. r by dissimilation;

(AV. VS.)
thus dlarsi

of r- 'go' (= arar-); prd tilami (VS.)

prd tirami 'I promote'
d. In the later Samhitas / occasionally appears in place of phonetic d^
between vowels; and that this change could easily arise, is shown by the

dlarti, intv.

fact that / regularly appears instead of d between vowels'*.

This substitution
is regularly found in the Kanva recension of the VS.; e.
g. ile= ide^KY.ik);
dsalha
dsadha (RV. dsalha).
Other instances are ildyati (AV.) 'stands

still',

for Hddyati

byform of

(RV. ilayati) s from id- 'refreshment';, ila- (MS.) 'refreshment',

(RV. ila-); mil- (AV.) 'close the eyes' ^, connected with mis-

Ida-

'wink'.

In the later Samhitas / is also found for d between vowels when the
of a word (like / in RV.): thus turasal dyuktasah (VS.) for turasat 'overpowering quickly'; phdl Hi (AV.) for pkdt (AV.); probably also in sdiiii (AV.)
and bdl Hi (AV. TS.), cp. RV. bdl itthd.
e. In at least one word / stands for dental d: ksidla-kd- (AV.) 'small',
for *ksudld-, byform of ksudrd- (VS.) 'small'.
f. Sometimes / has an independent Indian origin in onomatopoetic words;
thus alala-bhdvant- 'sounding cheerfully'.
g. On the other hand there are many words in which a foreign origin
may be suspected; such are, besides those already mentioned in 45 b, the

final

and

following: kaulitard-, N.; dlina-

lavand- (AV.)

'salt'.

The

53.

bhalands-,

names of tribes;

libuja- 'creeper';

sibilants.
The three sibilants, the palatal s, the cerebral s,
s,
are all voiceless.
Even apart from the regular phonetic
jto s, and of s to s, both the palatal and the dental are
in many words and forms, to be substituted for each of the

and the dental

change of / or
further

liable,

other two.
a.

Assimilation of

is

liable to

occur

when /

or j appear at the end of the same or the beginning

This is the case in svdsura- 'father-in-law'; hasrUof the next syllable.
'mother-in-law'; imdsru- and -smasaru- 'beard'; sdsvant- 'ever-recurring'; in
sds- 'six' (Lat. sex), and its various derivatives, sas-ti- 'sixty', sodM (= *sazdha) 'sixfold', and others 7.
1.

initially,

2.

initially

'overcoming',

becomes

when

cerebral:

in

nom.

RV.
(=

invariably becomes s in sahwith or without a following dental,

sing, sdt 'victorious', and the compounds /awa-j-a/, tura-

the

the final

almost

Ilr. i),

sat, pura-sdt, prtana-sdt, vlra-sdt, vrtka-sdt, rta-sdt (VS.), visva-sdt (TS.

AV.)

The only

exceptions are sadhd, nom. sing, of sddhr'conqueror', and the perf. part. pass, sadhd- (AV.)^The s of the nom. has
been transferred to forms with -sdh-, when compounded with prtana-, though
also d-sadha- 'invincible'.

In B. passages of the TS. and MS. are

intv. forms of ti 'sway': alelayat, pf.
lelaya, also the adv. leldya 'quiveringly'. In
similar passages the prepositions prd and
'

found

affected plenkha- (TS.) =prenkhaswing'; plaksdrayan (MS. in. 102) 'they caused

para are

to flow' {]/ksar-),pald-y-ata (TS.) 'fled' (para-i-).

Some uncertain or wrong explanations of
atdirnd- 'miserly', utoid- 'wide space', ^at'drop', with /
IE. r, are discussed by

Wackernagel

I,

p. 221, top.

See Wackernagel i, 193 b, note.

See above SI b.
4 See above p. 5, note S.
5
According to B6HTLINGK, ildyaii is
wrong for ildyati. Cp. above p. 35, note '.
6 A form with the original d is found in
mtdam (K.) 'in a low tone'.
7 Cp. Wackernagel i, 197 a, note.
8 A B. passage of the MS. has sadhydi
2

(I.

83).

46

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

there

is

no phonetic

4.

Vedic Grammar.

justification for the cerebral (as the s is

preceded by a)

gen. prtana-sdhas, prtana-sAhya- 'victory in battle', but

prtana-sdham (SV.). When compounded with dyumna-, dhanva-, ratha-, vibhva-y
thus prtana-saham,

form -sS/i- remains'.

been assimilated to initial / in sasd- 'hare' (IE. kaso-').
assimilation 3, s 01 s has been changed to s, mostly

sada-, the phonetic

3.

Medial

b.

Without

s has

under the influence of allied words, in the following: k^sa- 'hair' kisara(AV. VS.); sdkrt^ 'excrement'; subh- 'adorn' (probably owing to sudh- 'purify');
:

(Ilr. suska-), si'csyati 'dries'; stu- 'flow', srdvas- 'stream' sru-, srdvas-y
has-, jW- 'breathe'; svatra-, svdtrya-'Asanty' svad-''tastt'i; pyasisTtnahi {AN'.) i
pyasisimahi (VS.), aor. (534) oi pya- 'swell'; osistha-hdn- (VS. TS.) 'striking very
swiftly' beside osistha-dAvan- (TS.) 'giving very rapidly' (from osdm 'quickly',
lit. 'burningly'),
owing to aiistha- 'very swift'; kosa- 'receptacle' (in the later
language often also kosa-); kustnd- (VS.) beside kusmd- (MS.), a kind of
demon; ruiati- (AV.) 'angry', beside rus- 'be angry', probably owing to.

suska- 'dry'

ri'iiant- 'shining'.

a.
On the other hand, s occasionally appears in the later Samhitas, chiefly AV.,
as- 'eat'; vasT- (AV.) 'pointed knife': vast-; sdru- (AV.}
for h. thus asyate (AV. v. 192)
'arrow': Jdru-; arus-srana- {AY.), a kind of wound preparation: Jra- 'boil'; saspin/a>'a- (TS.)
sas\pd\'ruddy like young grass', owing to sasd- 'grass', for sas-piiijara- (VS. MS.)
:

pinjara- 6.

54.

The

palatal

s.

This

sibilant is

a palatal both in origin

(=

Ilr. /),

by cognate languages, and in employment, as its combination

Thus it represents an old palatal in satdm
with other consonants shows.
as indicated

In external Sandhi it
indras ca. At the present
day the pronunciation of / in India varies between a sh sound (not always,
distinguished from s) and a j' sound followed by y.
It is to some extent
confused with the other two sibilants even in the Samhitas, but it is to be
noted that here it interchanges much oftener with s than with s^The aspirate of / is ch'^; its media is represented byy and when aspirated
by h. ^ These four form the old palatals (Ilr. s, sh, i, ih), representing
The exact phonetic character of the latter is doubtful, but
IE. k kh g gh.
it is probable that they were dialectically pronounced in two ways, either as
mutes (guttural'" or palatal) or as spirants, the centum languages later following,
the former, the satem languages the latter".
a. In external Sandhi s regularly appears for * before the palatals
c,ck,s^^. It also stands for s internally in /ajVi/ and /a^^i/a/ 'behind"^, and
in vrscdti 'hews' beside -vraskd- 'lopping'.
hundred',

'a

dsva- 'horse',

svdn-

'dog',

sru-

'hear''.

regularly appears before voiceless palatal mutes,

e. g.

Before s the palatal sibilant when medial is regularly replaced

and sometimes also when final; e. g. dfk-sase and -drk, from drs- 'see'.
Otherwise / very rarely interchanges with k or c; thus rusant- 'brilliant', beside
rue- 'shine'; perhaps kdrna- 'tax' sru- 'hear'"*. There are also a few words
b.

by

k,

Wackernagel

See, however, op. cit. i, 197 c, note.

For i and s are strictly distinguished in

the
4

RV.

;
cp. op. cit.
Cp., however, op.

Op. cit.
6 See op.
5

I,

On

197

I,

b.

197 d a, note (end).

I,
197 d a.

cit.

and below 64, I a.

the relation of s to the corresponding
cit, p. 226/?;

I,
200 a; Brugmann, kg.
See above 53, 3.

I,

233.

Cp. above 40.

The

fact

that i before s regularly be-

comes k and sometimes also when final,

seems to favour the assumption of theguttural pronunciation.

"

p. 226, top.

sounds in cognate languages, see Wacker-

NAGEL

'

Wackernagel i, 200 b.
See below, Sandhi, 78.
^3 Cp. Av. faskat and pasca.
'4 For some
words in which such an.
assumption is doubtful or wrong, seeWACKERCp.

12

NAGEL

I,

201

a,.

Phonology.

I.

Palatal

Dental

/.

s.

Cerebral

j.

47

with s to which k corresponds in the safem languages; such are ^rus-

dsmane.

g.

'stone''.

55sa

The

dental *.
This sound as a rule represents IE. dental s;
Gothic sa; divas 'horse', Lat. equo-s; dsti, Gk. s<ni. In the

'he',

combinations

'cry';

and

ts

ps,

when they stand

for etymological dAs and bhs, the s

(from grdA- 'be eager") and dipsa-,
'wish to injure' (from dabh- 'injure'), where the final aspirate of the root
would have been thrown forward on the suffix, as in bud-dhd- from ybudh-,
and -rab-dha-, firom Yrabh-'.
The dental j is in Sandhi frequently changed to the palatal s\ and still
more frequently to the cerebral j.

represents

IE.

zh;

as

in gfisa-

'adroit'

56. The cerebral s.

The cerebral sibilant is altogether of a
secondary nature, since it always represents either an original palatal or an
original dental sibilant.

The

cerebral s stands for a palatal before cerebral tenues (themselves

this j from dental tenues) in the following two ways:
a. for the palatal / (= Ilr. J) and / (= Ilr. z) ; e. g. nas-td-, from nas-

produced by

'be lost'; mrs-ta, 3.sing.mid., from mrj- 'wipe'; prs-td- 'asked', prds-tum 'to ask',
'ask' in pras'-nd- 'question' (present sttra. J)rccM-^ with inchoative

from pras-

suf&x -ckd). In some instances it is shown by the evidence of cognate words

represent /; thus astdu 'eight' beside asfti- 'eighty'; prsti- 'rib', prdsti'side-horse', beside pdrsu- 'rib';
dstra- 'goad', beside asdni- 'thunderbolt';
possibly also apasthd-^ 'barb', beside dsman- 'bolt'.
b. for the combination ks, which in origin is /+ s^; e. g. cds-te, a-casta,
firom caks-^ 'see'; a-tas-ta, tas-td-, tds-tr-'^,
beside taks- 'hew'; nir-as-ta'emasculated' beside nir-aks-nu-hi (AV.) 'emasculate'; also aorist forms like
d-yas-ta, 3. sing. mid. from yaj- 'sacrifice', beside 3. sing. subj. ydks-at; d-srs-tay
As in all these
3. sing, mid., beside d-srks-ata, 3. pi. mid. from sfj- 'emit'.
instances ks
s -{ s or/ (= z) + s^, loss of s before t must here be assumed,
the remaining / or / combining with the following t as usual to j/"A similar
origin of s is indicated by the evidence of cognate languages in sas-t/td- (AV.)
'sixth', where the final j has been dropped (as in Gk. sk-to?), while retained
in Lat. sex-tus; also in sas-ti- 'sixty', sodhd 'sixfold', sodasd- (AV.) 'sixteenth'.
It has possibly the same origin in asthivdnt- 'knee"^.
57. The cerebral s stands for dental s after vowels other than
a or a, and after the consonants k, r, s.
to

I.

radical
I

Medially

This seems

to

the IE. pronunciation

201
=

this

change regularly'3 takes place, both when the s is

from st/ia- 'stand'; su-sup-ur, 3. pi. perf. from svap-

ti-sthati,

e. g.

point
;

cp.

to fluctuation in

Wackernagel

b.

I,

or media

In a few
the sibilant
comes first in the cognate languages see
Wackernagel i, 209.
spirant tenuis

words,

(]i)

[d/i).

ksif-, ksu-, ksubh-, ksura-,

See Wackernagel t, 210.

Cp. above 54 a, and below
See below 56.

78, 2.

I'

Similarly,

when

ks

= guttural +

is

followed by , the j disappears and the guttural

combines with the t% thus from ghas- 'eat',

Cp. 40.
Cp. Wackernagel i, 202 b; and below gdha- {== ghz-ia-); ixora jaks- 't3X', Jagdkd[= jaghz-ta-), jagdhvaya (= jaghz-tv&ya);
p. 48, note 7.
from bhaj- 'share', aor. d-bhak-ta [=al>haj-s-td),
7 Cp. op. cit. I, 116 b.
8 Cp. Av. casman-.
beside d-bhak-s-i.
12 Cp. Bartholomae, Studien zur indo*lvarftr-, see
9 On the origin of tvas^rgermanischen Sprachgeschichte 2, 103.
Wackernagel r, 202 c, note.
1 Tliough ks is regularly based on a
The change does not take place in,
palatal or a guttural+-f in the Vedic language, some forms of the perfect of sic- 'pour'
there are some words of IE. origin in which sisice (lU. 3215), sisicur (iL 24*), beside sisicatiir..
the s appears to represent not s but a dental
5
6

48

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

'sleep';
'rain'

us-and-,

loc. pi.

suffix -su,

of the

is

'bull';

uksdn-

'ox';

e. g.

varsd-

suffixal; as in the superlative suffix -istha; in the

agni-su, aktic-su, nf-su, vik-su, gtr-su, kavis-su;

e. g.

aorist,

Vedic Grammar.

from vas- 'wear'; rsa-bhd-

part,

and when the

j-suffix

4.

ydk-s-at,

from yaj-

in the

'sacrifice'.

The change is phonetic even when Anusvara intervenes between

u f and s; e. g. pimsdnti from pis- 'crush'; Aavtmsi 'offerings' from havis-;
The s, however, remains in forms of himscdksumsi 'eyes' from cdksus-.
'injure', nims- 'kiss', and pums- 'man',
being probably transferred from the
strong forms kindsti, pi'imamsam, etc.
a. The s, however, remains when immediately followed by r or r, owing to a

~i

distaste for a succession of cerebrals

gen, usi-i s.nA.usram, loc. (beside

usrcis

Owing

i;

e. g.

tisras,

tisrbhis,

tisfnam,

f.

war, voc), usrd- 'matutinal'; 2/wa-

of

tri-

'bull';

'three'

sansrpd-

si; the
further remains in the syllable
(beside sisrate, sisrai-, sarsri etc.). In khara- (AV.
VS.) 'hair', the retention may be due to the ? having originally followed the s immediately 2. The s also remains unchanged in the combinations stir, stiir, spar, spr, sphur;
e. g. tistire, from stf- 'strew'; pisprsas, from sprs- 'touch' 3.
It remains in the second of
three successive syllables in which s-s-s would be expected ; thus yasisTsfhas, beside
ayasisam, from ja- 'go'; sisaksi, beside sisakti, from sac- 'follow'.

'creeping'-.

to the influence of

sm; instead of sm; as in

forms with

j-

sisarsi, sisaj-ii

^. Words in which s otherwise follows r or any vowel but a, must be of foreign

origin; such as bisa- 'root fibre'; busd- 'vapour'; bfsaya-, a demon; rbfsa- 'cleft'; ki/id'praiser'; barsvd- (VS.) 'socket'; htsula- (AV.), a kind of demon; musala- (AV.) 'pestle'
(for mt'isra-l); stsa- (AV. VS.) 'lead' 4.

The

is sometimes found even after a, representing an early Prakritic

based on rs and as on arsS. Instances of this are kasaii (AV.)
'scratches'; pasthavdh- (VS. TS.) 'young bull' (lit. 'carrying on the back') a.nA pasthauht-6
'young cow', beside prsthd- 'back'; pasya-1 'stone'; bhasd-i (VS.) 'barking' 9. There are
besides several unexplained instances, doubtless due to foreign influence or origin; such
are dsatara- 'more accessible'; kavdsa-, N.; cam- 'blue jay'; ccisdla-'''k.noh' ; jdlasa- 'remedy';
baskdya- 'yearling'; baskiha- (VS.) 'decrepit'; mdsa- 'bean' (AV. VS.); sdspa- (VS.) 'young

y.

change

grass'

in

cerebral s

which

as^ is

10.

change regularly takes place, in the RV.:

after prepositions ending in i or u, and in
nominal derivatives from such compound verbs; also after the preposition
nis 'out';
e. g. ni sida
(x. 98*);
dnu stuvanti (viii. 3*); nih-sdhamana^
2. Initially^' the

a.

in verbal

compounds

1273).

(I.

a. But (as when it is medial) the s remains unchanged when followed by r

(even when t or p intervenes) or r (even though a intervene, with an additional m or v
in the roots sinar- and svar-); e. g. vi srja 'let flow', vi-sfsfi- 'creation'; vi striutam 'let
him extend'; ni-spfse 'to caress' (but d-ni-sirta- 'unchecked'); pdri-sncta- 'flowed round';
vi-sargd- 'end', vi-sdrjana- 'extension' (owing to the influence of the forms with sr from
J?7'-);
vi-sarmdn- 'dissolving', vi-sard- 'extent', and even vi sasre (owing to the influence
of forms with sr from sr- 'flow'); prdti smaretham 'may ye two remember' [ysmr-);
abhi-svdranli 'praise', abhi-svdr- 'invocation', abhi-svare, loc, 'behind', abhi-svartf- 'invoker'.
But St sp sph are changed according to the general rule, when ar ir ur follow; c. g.
prdti sphura 'repel'. In roots which contain no r, the initial s rarely remains; thus in
forms of as- 'be' abhi santi. pari santu, pdri santi (beside pari santi], abhi sydma (beside
abhi-syama); and owing to dislike of repeated s: anu-sisidhat (sidh- 'drive off'); dnu-spasfa'iioticed' [spas- *s&e^); pdri sani-svanat [svan- 'sound').
:

6
a, a and p. 38, note 2.
Cp. Bartholomae,
KZ. 29, 579;
See Wackernagel i, 50.
WiNDISCH, KZ. 27, 169.
3 The combination sr is found only where
7 Cp. FORTHNATOV, BE. 6, 217 ;
J. SCHMIDT,
sr would be quite isolated amid cognate KZ. 32, 387.
forms with s\ thus ajus-ran, from jtis- 'be
8 FORTUNATOV, 1. C.
satisfied', since all the other very numerous
On doubtful instances like kastha9
forms of this verb have /.
'goal', asfhivdntau 'knees', apdsfhd- 'barb', cp.
4 See Wackernagel i, 203 e, note.
Wackernagel i, 208 b a, note; b /3, note.
>o Cp. Wackernagel i, 208 b /S.
5 Sometimes representing also IE. Is and
Is; cp. Wackernagel i, 208 b a.
" Finally, s stands for j in the first
1

Cp. above 42

;;

I.

In the later Samhitas

Phonology.

Cerebral

49

s.

similarly changed to j; but its retention is in

;
thus aiM sphilrjati (AV.) 'sounds towards'
adhi skanda (AV.) and abhi-skandam'^ , heside pari-siandd- (AV., VS.), from skand- 'leap';
praH-spasana- (AV.) 'lying in wait', prati-spasd- (TS.) 'spying'; dnu sthana (TS. V. 6.
from as- 'be' ; owing to the following j- also in abhi sisyade (AV.) from syand- 'run'.
j3.

some instances somewhat

initial s is

less

restricted

\\

y. The divergence between the later Samhitas and the RV. is much greater when
augment intervenes between a preposition ending in i and the initial j of a root.
In the RV. the s regularly remains unchanged (as ny-dsTdat, vy-dsikai, etc.) except in
pary dsasvajat 'embraced' (under the influence of pari sasvaje). In the other Samhitas,
however, the j here regularly becomes s; thus abhy-dsihcan (TS.), abky-dsicyanta (AV.)
from sic- 'sprinkle'; vy-asahanta (AV.)^, from sah- 'overcome'; ddhy-astham (AV.), dd/iyasthat (AV.), abhy-astham (AV.) from stkd- 'stand'.
In the root sthTv- 'spit', which first
occurs in the AV., the initial s has been displaced by s throughout. The form p-aty
asthivan indicates the transition which led to the change.

the

Similarly when a reduplicative syllable containing a intervenes between a preposition

ending in i and an initial radical j, the latter always remains unchanged in the RV.
thus /ar/ sasvaje; ni-sasdttha. (VIII. 489); ati-taslhdu (x. 5o3); but the AV. has vi-tasfhiri,
vi tasthe (owing to vi tis/kate, vi-sfhiia-), but also ddhi tast/mr.

b. Initially in the
s

second member of other than verbal

compounds

more common than j when preceded by vowels other than a.

even in the RV. the is not infrequently retained; not only when r
is

follows

as in hrdi-spfs-

'touching the heart',

su-sdriu-,

N.,

rsi-svard-

But
or

'sung

seers', but also when there is no such cause to prevent the change;
thus go-sakhi- beside go-sakhi- 'possessing cattle'; go-sdni- (AV. VS.) beside
go-sdni- 'winning cattle'; rayi-sthdna- beside rayi-sthdna- (AV.) 'possessing
wealth'; tri-saptd- beside tri-saptd- (AV.) 'twenty-one'; si't-samiddha- beside
su-samiddha- (SV.) 'well-kindled'; apake-stha- (AV.) 'standing in the oven'

by

beside -stJia- in other compounds after -e-\ prthivi-sdd- (VS.) beside prthivTAfter
sdd- (AV.) 'seated on the earth'; su-samrddha- (AV.) 'quite perfect'.
r the s becomes j in svar-sd- 'light-winning', svar-sati- 'obtainment of light';
after k, probably only in fk-sama- (TS.) 'resembling a re], beside fk-sama- (VS.).
a. In Avyayibhavas s seems to appear in the RV. only; thus anusvadhdm 'according to wish'; anu-satydm 'according to truth'; anu-svdpam
'sleepily'.

^.

In

some compounds

appears where

it

is

not phonetically

justifiable,

the influence of cognate words; thus upa-stut, adv., 'at one's call'
(because of the frequency oi -stu- after i and a), beside upa-stut- 'invocation';
sa-stubh- (TS.), a metre, owing to anu-stubk-, tri-stubh-; savya-sthd- (AV.), owing

owing

to

to

compounds

in -e-stha-.

In Amredita compounds, however, the s regularly remains unchanged

because of the desire to leave the repeated word unaltered; thus sutfsute
and somi-some 'at every Soma draught'; also in stuhi stuJii 'praise on' 3.
3. Initially in external Sandhi s frequently becomes s after a final
This change chiefly takes place in monosyllabic pronouns
i and u in the RV.
such
particles,
as sd{s), sd, syd{s), sim, sma, svid, and particularly sii.
and
It also appears in verbal forms like stka sthas sthana, santu, syam, sysma
(from as- 'be'); sidati, satsat, saisi (from sad- 'sit'); sinca, sincata (from sicy.

stavama, stave, stuhi (from stu- 'praise'); in participles like sdn, satds
(from as- 'be'); sidan (from sad 'sit'); suvands {su- 'press'); sitdm {si- 'bind');
In other words the change
stutds (stu- 'praise'); skanndm {skand- 'leap').
'pour');

3
This is not treated as an Amredita
of the compound and often in
compound in the Padapatha (vui. 13):
external Sandhi; see below 78.
IIii)
is
but pibd-piba
(ll.
sluhi\stuhi\U\;
1 Cp. APr. II. 104.
analyzed as piba-piba\it\.
2 Cp. Whitney's Translation of the AV.

member

I,

p.

LXlv

(mid.).

Indo-arische Philologie

I,

4.

:
:

50

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

takes place; e. g. dnu rajati sti'ip (ix. 96'^); tri sadhdstha

nih sadkasthaf (v. 3i9); mi sthirdm (i. 64'5); ddhi snund (ix. 97"^).

(ill.

rarely

565);

words such as u, tu, mi, si'i, hi, and occurs

a close syntactical connection of two words; e. g. rdjahsu sidan
(vii. 34^^);
vdmsu stdati (ix. 57^); divi sdn (vi. 2*); divi santu (v. 2');
In no word, however, even when these conditions
rcchdnii sma (x. 102^).
are fulfilled, is the change of initial s to s invariably made.
a. In the later Samhitas, apart from passages adopted from the RV. this
form of external Sandhi is very rare except in the combination u su. Examples

The

J usually follows short

where there

is

ad u stendm (AV. iv. 3^); md/ii sdd dyumdn ndmah (TS. m. 2. 8^)^The breathing h. The sound h is, at the present day, pro58.
nounced as a breathing in India, and this was its character at the period
when Greek and Indian words were interchanged, as is shown e. g. by '<i>pa.
It is already recognised as a breathing by the
being reproduced by hora.
are

identifies it with the second element of voiced aspirates

This is borne out by the spelling rag l-h (= dh) beside
/
(^ cf). The TPr. further (n. 47) assigns to it, on the authority of some, the
same place of articulation as the following vowel, this being still characteristic
The breathing is,
of the pronunciation of h at the present day in India 3.
moreover, stated by the Pratisakhyas to have been voiced. This pronunciation
proved by the evidence of the Sarnhitas themselves; for h is here often
is
derived from a voiced aspirate, e. g. hitd- from dha- 'put'; it is occasionally
replaced by a voiced aspirate, e. g. jaghdna from han- 'strike'; and in Sandhi
initial h after a final mute regularly becomes a voiced aspirate, e. g. tdd dhi
Ilr. zh) ^,
It is in fact clear that whatever its origin (even when
for tdd hi.
h was always pronounced as a voiced breathing in the Sarnhitas.
As h cannot be final owing to its phonetic character*, it is represented
in that position by sounds connected with its origin 7. It appears in combination
with voiced sounds only; being preceded only by vowels, Anusvara, or the
semivowels r and /* (in Sandhi also by the nasals 7I and n), and followed
only by vowels, the nasals n, ti, m, or the semivowels y, r, I, v.
The breathing h as a rule represents a voiced aspirate, regularly a

TPr.

(11.

which

9),

{g-h, d-h,

b-h).

"i

aspirate,

palatal

represents a
drogha-, as
(like

new

beside g,

(=

dental dk

the

occasionally
palatal

and the

labial

e. g.

for i) for the old palatal zh, the voiced aspirate of

as such in the

bh.

Jh, Av.j^), appearing beside gh,

ojiyas ugrd-.
But in many words

Ilr.

/,

usually

It

e. g.

druhyu-

it also stands
being recognizable

same way as/'".

la. h represents the palatalization (= Ilr.jh) oi gh when, in cognate

forms, gh (or g) is found before other sounds than s; e. g. hdn-ti 'strikes'
ghn-dnti, jaghsna; drhati 'is worthy' arghd- 'price'; rh-dnt- 'weak' ragh-uddhati 'burns' dag-dhd- 'burnt'; dohate
'light'; jdmh-as- 'gait' -.jdngha- 'leg';
'milks' dughana- 'milking', dug-dhd- 'milked'; dudroha 'have injured' driig-dhdmaghd- 'gift'; mih- 'mist'
'injured', drogha- 'injurious'; mdmhate 'presents'
:

8 Xhe combination Ih is rare; it is found

and uk produce the same effect as
u, as they were originally in upa-valh- (VS.) 'test by riddles'; vihdlhai and
pronounced as is and iif (cp. Sandhi, p. 7I,l(AV.}, of unknown meaning; and in the
Kanva recension of the VS. as represene 2); e. g. agni(s) stave; yajuis) skanndm.
I

ih

simple

3
II.

Cp.
Cp.

Wackernagel
207
Whitney on APr.
I.

I.

ting dh.

b.

and TPr.

13

4
5

6
7

See RPr. I. 12; XII. 2; APr.

See below I b.
See below, Sandhi, 66.
Ibid, b 6, S.

This h being related to gh

to g, it must represent IE. gh. This
survives, with loss of the aspiration, injahi
as

47.
I.

13.

Cp. 36.

is

(^ Ilr.y.^a-o'^i), 2. sing. impv.

10

Cp. 41.

oi han-

'strike'.

Phonology.

I.

meghd- 'cloud';
rdmhi- 'speed'
gharmye-stha'gladdening'.

'is

perplexed' ^zar^^/^a- 'gone astray', mSgha- 'vain';

haras- and gharmd- 'heat'; harmye-sthd- and
the house'; hrsitd- '^a,^' -.ghf-su- 'joyful', ghfsvi:

'dwelling

in

In dhi- 'serpent' and duhitj-- 'daughter' the

by cognate languages'.

when,

old

the

guh-

firm',

SI

h.

'swift';

shown
b. h represents the old palatal aspirate

is

a.

either as

palatals

and

final or

/=

Ilr.

before
i);

it

/,

e. g.

(=

Ilr.

guttural

origin of

ih)

replaced by a cerebral

is

vah- 'carry': d-vat,

(like

3. sing. aor.

concQsX xgudhd-^ 'concealed'; trhdti ^crash.Qs' :trdhd-^; dftnkafi 'raakts;

drhyati 'is iarcH drdkd- 'firm'; bakii- 'abundant' ^arf/^i- 'aloud'; mik:

'make

VfaX&c'

vdhati
'

rm'ihyati
raghi'c-

The breathing

me'dkra- {KSf ) 'penis'; rikdti

'carries'

vodhum

'to

carry',

ndhd-

^Yick!,'

re'dhi ^licks' , ridha-

'carried'; sdhate

'licked';

'overcomes'

sddhr-

victor'.

^. when it is followed by sounds which do not palatalize gutturals*,

before which dh and bh do not become h, and before which the other old
palatals / and, / (= i) appear; thus dmhas- and amhati- 'distress' because
of am/iil- 'narrow'; dkan- 'day', because of dhnam, g. pi., and pUrvahnd'forenoon' (not ghn as in ghnanti from han-); jehamana-^ 'panting', because
oi jihmd- 'oblique'; bahu- 'arm'; brdhman- n. 'devotion', brahmdn- 'one who
prays*; rahu- (AV.), demon of eclipse; yahvd-, yahvdnt- 'ever young', because
of yahu-, id. This applies to all words beginning with hu-, kr-, hn-, hr-,
hv-; e. g. hu- 'pour'; hrd- and hfdaya- 'heart'; -hraya- 'ashamed'; -hva-, hu'call';

y.

hvr- 'be crooked'.

when the 'satem' languages

{z or i)*; thus

ahdm T;

have

ehd- (AV.) 'desirous';

corresponding voiced spirant

garhate 'complains of; dih-

'besmear'; pllhdn- (AV. VS.) 'spleen'; barhis- 'sacrificial straw'; mah- 'great';
varahd- 'boar'; sahdsra- 'thousand'; simhd- 'lion'; sprh- 'desire'; hamsd- 'goose';
Mnu- 'jaw'; hi- 'impel'; hemdn- 'zeal', heti- 'weapon'; hdya- 'steed'; hdri- and
hdrita- 'tawny'; hdryati 'likes'; hdsta- 'hand'; ha- 'forsake'; hay and- (AV.)
'year'; hi 'for'; himd- 'cold'; hiranya- 'gold'; hiri- (AV. VS.) 'vein'; hims'injure'; he'sas- 'wound'; hr- 'take'; hyds 'yesterday' ?.
8. h according to the evidence of cognate languages, represents other
IE. k would be expected; and
palatals in some words. Thus in hfd- 'heart', /
IE. g in ahdm 'I', mahint- 'great', hdnu- 'jaw', hdsta- 'hand', hva-, huy
These irregularities are probably due to IE. dialectic variations^.
'cair.
2. h also represents dh and bh not infrequently, and dh at least once.
a. It takes the place of dh in four or five roots (with nominal derivatives)
and in a few nominal and verbal suffixes. Thus it appears initially in hitd-,
Medially it is found in gahate
-hiti-, beside -dhita-, dhiti-, from dha- 'put'.
'plunges' (with the derivatives gahd- 'depth', gdhana- 'deep', dur-gdha'impassable place') beside gadhd- 'ford'; rdhati 'rises', 'grows' (with the
derivatives ruh- 'growth', rohana- 'means of ascending', rohas- 'elevation')

beside rodhati 'grows' (with the derivatives vt-rudh- 'creeper', -rSdha- 'growing',
rodhas- 'bank', a-rodhana- 'ascent'); derivatives oi*rndh- 'be red' rohit-, rohita-,
:

Cp.

Wackernagel

I,

214

That

Cp. 12 and 17, 5.

See above 41, 2.
See Whitney, Roots, under jeh;

4
,

cp. 41

a,

also in has- 'laugh' and haas these verbs have no forms with gh
In
also naA- 'bind'- in spite of nad-dhd-.
several words the origin of the h is un7

b.

for *guzdhd (through gtizk-tafor gugh-td-), the cerebral 2 disappearing but

leaving the vowel long.
2

is

Perhaps

'go',

certain,

evidence

and

2.

6 This includes several examples given

under a and p.

e.
is

g.

jdngahe

'struggles',

as

the

doubtful.

8 See Wackernagel i, 216 b; for a fewdoubtful examples, ibid. 2l6 a, note.

52

I.

-lo/titd- 'red',

Allgemeines und Sprache.

beside

MM- 'reddish

4.

Vedic Grammar.

animal', rudhird- {KSl) 'red'; also rauhind-

beside rudkikrd-, names of demons; the evidence of cognate languages further

shows that h represents d/i in gr/id- 'house".
k moreover represents dh in the adverbial suffix -ha in visvd-ha beside
visvd-dha 'always'; in sahd 'together', beside sadka- in compounds; in i/id
'here', as shown by the Prakrit idha; and doubtless also in sama-ha 'somehow',
though there is no direct evidence. The evidence of cognate languages, moreover, shows that in the endings of the i. du. -vahe, -vaki, -vahai and the
I. pi. -make, -maki, -maliai h represents dh (cp. Gk. -{x.s'ha, etc.)^.
b. h takes the place of bh in the verb graJi-, grh- 'seize' (with its
derivatives grdha- 'ladleful', grahi- 'demoness', grahy\- 'to be grasped', grhdhasta-grhya 'having take the hand') beside grabh-, grbh- (with the
'taking possession of, grabhd- 'handful'); and in the
nouns kakuhd- 'high', beside kak'cbh- 'height', kakubhd- (VS. TS.) 'high', m. (AV.)
a kind of demon; bali-hH- 'paying tax' (beside bhr- 'bear'); probably bdrjaha'servant';

derivatives grdbha-

-bha (in rsa-bhd-, etc.) 3.

formed with suffix -ha
h takes the place of dh in bdrbrhi, 2. sing. impv. of the intv. bdrbrhof the root brh- 'make strong', for *barbrdhi (= ^barbrzdhi, with the cerebral
dropped after lengthening the preceding /- in pronunciation)*.
d. The rule is that h appears for dh, dh, bh, only between vowels 5,
the first of which is unaccented; e. g. ihd, kakuhd-, grhd- bdrjaha-, bali-hrtrauhind-, sahd. Similarly in gi-abh- 'seize', h alone appears after unaccented /'
in RV.i IX*; while on the other hand, in the 2. sing. impv. of graded roots, -dhi
regularly appears after strong and therefore originally accented vowels; e. g.
bodhi (from bhu- 'be'), yjdhi (from yu- 'yoke'), yuyodhi (from yu- 'separate');
sisadhi, but sislki (sS- 'sharpen'). Again, in fudh- 'rise', the unaccented form
of the root is regularly ruh-, while when it is accented, forms such as rodhati
appear beside rokati, and in nominal derivatives dh predominates in accented
radical syllables, the RV. having rjdha- and a-rodhana- only, but the AV.
'udder'(?), if
c.

roha- and arohana-''.

a. At the same time dh and bh remain in

a good many instances after an unimpv. kfdhi, gadhi, srudhi, srnudhl; in arf/^aj 'below',
adhamd- 'lowest', abhi 'towards'; rbhu- 'deft'; m'.dh'i- 'reward'; medha- 'wisdom'; vidkati
'adores'; vidhi't- 'solitary'; vidkdvd- 'widow'; vadhu- 'bride'; sidhii- 'right'; i~udhird- (AV.)
The retention of the dh and bh here
'red'; derivatives formed with -dhi-, -bhd-, etc."*
is partly to be explained as an archaism, and partly as due to borrowing from a dialect
in which these aspirates did not become h, and the existence of which is indicated by
the Prakrit form idha beside the Vedic ihd 'here'. The guttural aspirate media is
probably to be similarly explained in megha- 'cloud' and ajhd- 'sinful'.

accented vowel; thus in the

2. sing.

Wackernagel I, 217 a.
appears, though a vowel does not
The h in the perf. aha, dhur, ms^y\in gr^Jidiu (iv. ^7) and hasia-g'^hya,

Cp.

represent dh\ not, however, in ndhyati 'binds',

in spite of naddhd-; nah- rather stands for
Ilr. naih- (cp. Lat. nectd); the pp. instead of
*nadha-, became naddhd- through the influence of baddha- from bandh- 'bind'.
Cp.
Wackernagel i, 217 a, note, where several
other wrong explanations oi h
dh are
discussed.
3 Some erroneous etymologies in which
h is explained as
bh are discussed in

follow,
is

due

other forms of grabh- in which k is

followed by a vowel.
* In RV. x, however, grdha- and grahioccur; cp. above, 2 b.
Exceptions lilce rohiia-, visvdha and
7
inflected forms such as gahate, are due to
normalization.
8 Where the RV. fluctuates between h and
dh bh (above 2, a, b), h appears throughout
in the later Samhitis ; thus always -hi, after
Wackernagel i, 217 b, note.
vowels in imperatives except edhi 'be'; thus
4 Cp. 12 and 17, 5.
for srnudht (KSr. VIIL 843), SV. has irnuht.
5 It appears initially in hitd-dhiia-, But a new h of this kind hardly occurs.
but originally it was doutbless preceded in Cp. Wackernagel i, 219 a.
this position by a final vowel.
That h

to

I.

Phonology.

The cerebral

/.

Anusvara and Anunasika.

S3

3. The various origins of h led to some confusion in the groups of

forms belonging to roots which contain h.
a. roots in which h represents an original guttural (Ilr. //^) show some
forms which would presuppose an old palatal (Ilr. ih). Thus from muh- 'be
confused', phonetic derivatives of which are mvgdhd-, mog/ia-, axe. formed
mudhd- (AV.) 'bewildered' and muhur 'suddenly'.
b.
roots in which h represents an old palatal (Ilr. zh) show forms
with a guttural before vowels
and dentals; thus from dih- 'besmear'
is formed digdhd- (AV.) 'owing to the influence of dah- 'burn', and duh- 'milk'.
Similarly, from *sardh- 'bee', beside sarddbhyas, is formed saraghd- (AV. VS.)
'derived from the bee".
c. the root ruh-, though
r//(//2- 'ascend', is treated as if the h represented
(as in vah-^ an old palatal (Ilr. zK); hence aor. druksat, des. ruruksaii,
pp. -rudha- (AV.), ger. rudhvd (AV.).
59. The cerebral /. - This sound, as distinguished from the ordinary
dental /, is a cerebral /^.
It appears in our {Sakald) recension of the RV.
as a substitute, between vowels, for the cerebral d and, with the appended

sign

for

k,

the

for

cerebral aspirate

d/i^;

e. g.

ila-

'refreshment';

d-salha-

appears in Sandhi when final before an initial vowel;

In the written Sarnhita text, however,
e. g. turdssl abhibhutyojah (in. 43*).
it does not appear if followed by a semivowel which must be pronounced as
a vowel; e. g. vidv-attga- 'firm-limbed', to be pronounced as vilu-anga- and
analysed thus by the Padapatha. In one passage of the RV. the readings
'invincible'.

fluctuate

60.

also

It

between / and

/ in nilavat or nilavat {yi\.

Anusvara and Anunasika.

Anusvara,

97'')'*.

'after-sound',

is

a pure

nasal sound which differs from the five class nasals; for it appears after
vowels only, and its proper use is not before mutes, but before sibilants or h
But it resembled the class nasals in being
(which have no class nasal).
pronounced, according to the Pratisakhyas of the RV. and the VS. 5, after
the vowel.

The vowel itself might, however, be nasalized, forming a

The Pratisakhya of the AV.^, recognizes this nasal

combined sound.

single

vowel,

called Anunasika, 'accompanied

by a nasal', alone, ignoring Anusvara,
which with the preceding vowel represents two distinct successive sounds.
Whitney?, however, denies the existence of any distinction between Anunasika
and Anusvara. In any case, the Vedic Mss. have only the one sign ^ (placed
either above or after the vowel) for both^, employing the simple dot^ where
neither Anusvara nor Anunasika is allowable. The latter sign is used in the
TS. for final m before y v, and in both the TS. and MS. before mutes
instead of the class nasal 5, a practice arising from carelessness or the desire
There is thus no ground for the prevalent opinion that
to save trouble.
Anusvara'". Throughout the present work m with
represents Anunasika and
a dot {m) will be used for both, except if they appear before a vowel,
when m with the older sign (m) will be employed.
'

-^

4
1 The
Cp. Benfey, Gott. Abhandl. 19, 138,
root sagh- 'take upon oneself,
has no connexion with sak- 'overcome'; note. See also Whitney on APr. i. 29.
5 See RPr. xui. 13; VS. I. 74f., 147 f.
nor vaghat- "institutor of a sacrifice', with
6 See Whitney on APr. i. 11.
vah- 'convey'.
The relation of go-nyoghas7 On TPr. 11. 30; JAOS. 10, Lxxxvif.
'streaming among milk', to vah- is un8 Cp. Whitney on TPr. 11. 30.
Wackernagel I, 220 b,
certain;
cp.
9 In the MS. also when -am is written for
note.
2 Cp. above 42.
-an.
JO See Whitney, JAOS. 7, 92, note.
3 This practice is followed by the Mss.
of secondary texts of the RV.

54

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

Anusvara and Anunasika are commonest when

final.

As

in that position

they belong to the sphere of Sandhi, the conditions under which they then
appear, will be stated below'. Medially Anusvara and Anunasika are found
under the following conditions:
a. regularly before sibilants and h; e. g. vamsd- 'reed'; havimsi 'offerings';
mainsd- 'flesh'; simhd- 'lion'. This is generally recognized as the sphere of
Anusvara, except by the APr. ^; but mamscatu- 'light yellow', is stated 3 to
have Anunasika, while pumscali- (AV. VS.) is said to have both Anunasika
and Anusvara*. The Anusvara usually appears before s, and all forms
with ins are shown to be based on original ns or ms by the evidence of
cognate forms corroborated by that of allied languages 5; \!wi& mdmsate, 3. sing,
subj. aor. of man- 'think'; jlghamsati, des. from han- 'strike'; pimsdnti beside
pindsli, from pis- 'crush'; the neuter plurals in -amsi, -Tmsi, -umsi from stems
in -as,
-is,
-us, with nasal after the analogy of -anti, nom. ace. pi. from
neuters in -nt; stems in -yams, -vams beside nom. sing, in -yan, -van; kramsydte
(AV.) from kram- 'stride'.
When Anusvara appears before / and h derived
from an IE. palatal or guttural, it represents the corresponding class nasal.
The reduction of these old nasals to Anusvara is probably Ilr. after long
vowels (am, -imr, -umr); probably later after short vowels, for it does not
appear in forms like dhan (for dhans), though j- was not dropped after an
in the Ilr. period; but the j must have been dropped early in the Indian
period, before -ans became -ams''.
Anusvara before h {^^ Av. 7/7) must
have arisen in the Indian period.
b. before any consonant in the intensive reduplicative syllable, the final
of which is treated like that of the prior member of a compound; e. g. ndimiamTti (v.

835)" from

nam-

'bend'.

before any consonant which is the initial of secondary suffixes; thus

from sam- 'blessing', is formed sam-yu- 'beneficent'; sdm-tati- or idntxtic.

'blessing'.

Voiceless Spirants.
a. The sound called Visarjaniya^ in the
must in their time have been pronounced as a voiceless
breathing, since they describe it as an usman, the common term for breathings
and sibilants. This conclusion is borne out by the fact that, in the RPr.,
JihvamulTya and Upadhmanlya, the sounds which are most nearly related
to and may be replaced by Visarjaniya, are regarded as forming the second
half of the voiceless aspirates k/i and ph respectively, just as h forms the
second half of the voiced aspirates gk, bh, etc. At the present day Visarjaniya
is still pronounced in India as a voiceless breathing, which is, however, followed
by a weak echo of the preceding vowel. According to the TPr.', Visarjaniya
has the same place of articulation as the end of the preceding vowel. The
proper function of this sound is to represent final
and r in pausa; it may,
however, also appear before certain voiceless initial sounds, viz. k,kh,p,ph,
and the sibilants (occasionally also in compounds) "b. Beside and instead of Visarjaniya, the Pratisakhyas recognise two
61.

Pratisakhyas',

j-

voiceless breathings as appropriate before initial voiceless gutturals {k, kh)'^^

See below, Sandhi, 75.

APr. I. 67; 11. 33f.
Cp. RPr. IV. 35.
Cp. VPr. IV. 7f.
Cp. Wackernagel I, 224
Loc. cit.; cp. Brugmann,

In Aufrecht's edition

2
3
4
5

mid.

The term

visai-ga is

not found in the

Pratisakliyas (nor in Panini).

9 RPr. 1. 5 etc., VPr.' I. 41 etc.; APr.
etc.;
a.

KG. 354, 17.

printed nanna-

10

"
12

TPr. i. 12 etc.
See Whitney on TPr. n. 48.
See below, Sandhi, 78, 79.
See RPr. I. 8; VPr. m. ii etc.

I.

I.

and

labials

Phonology.
(/,

phy

Voiceless Spirants.

respectively.

Upadhmaniya,

55

The former

sound 'formed atjhe root of the tongue',

called

Loss of Consonants.

{h) called Jihvamiiliya, or

the guttural spirant x; the latter {/}),
is
the bilabial spirant /^
In Mss.

is

or 'on-breathing',

they are regularly employed in the Kasmirian Sarada character.

62. Loss of Consonants.
Consonants have been lost almost exclusively
when they have been in conjunction with others. The loss of a single
consonant which is not in conjunction with another is restricted to the disappearance of V before , and much more rarely of / before /. The v
thus disappears finally in the Sandhi of av before u in the RV. and VS.3
Initially, v is lost before Ur derived from a r vowel; thus in irana- and
zJra- 'sheep'; z/raj- 'breast'; ar-awa-, mid. part, (w-- 'choose'); ?ir/- 'vigour'; flrna'wool'; urnoti 'covers' {vr- 'cover'); urdhvd- 'high'; urmi- 'wave'.
Such loss
of V before Ur also occurs after an initial consonant in turtd- 'quick' (= Ilr.
tvftd-); dhUrvati, ddhUrsata, dhurti-, from dhvr- 'cause to fall'; hUrya-, juhurthas; juhur, from hvr- 'go crookedly' +- Before simple u the v has disappeared
at the beginning of the reduplicative syllable 11- {= *vu- for original va-),
in u-vac-a from vac- 'speak';
u-vdsa from vas- 'shine'; u-vah-a from vah-

'convey'.

Similarly initial

has disappeared from the reduplicative syllable

in the desiderative i-yak-sati, i-yak-samSna-,

1.

When

a group of consonants

are regularly lost (the

first

only,

as

is

from yaj-

z-

*yi-

'sacrifice's.

final, the last element or elements

rule,

remaining)

in

pausa and

in

Sandhi ^
2.

be

to

When

The only

lost.

group of consonants

is

initial, the first

element

is

frequently

example of an initial mute having disappeared seems

from *A(ur-, the low grade form oi catiir- 'four', because

certain

tur-iya- 'fourth',

the Vedic language did not tolerate initial conjunct mutes'.

An initial
sibilant is, however, often lost before a mute or nasal.
This loss was
originally* doubtless caused by the group being preceded by a final consonant.
There are a few survivals of this in the Vedas; thus cit kdmbhanena (x. iii'),
otherwise skdmbhajta- 'support'; and the roots stambh- 'support', and stha'stand',

lose there s after ud-;

e. g.

ut-fkita-,

I'd-tabhita-.

On

the other

hand

preserved after a final vowel, in compounds or in Sandhi, in

d-skrdkoyti- 'uncurtailed', beside krdhu- 'shortened'; scandrd- 'brilliant', in dsvascandra- 'brilliant with horses'?, ddhi scandrdm (vin. 65"), also in the intens.
pres. part, cdni-scad-at 'shining brightly', otherwise candrd- 'shining', and only
candrd-mas- 'moon'. In derivatives from four other roots, forms with and
without the sibilant'" are used indiscriminately, without regard to the preceding
the

sibilant

is

7 There
are some words in which an
See VPr. i. 41.
initial mute seems to have been lost in the
Cp. Ebel, KZ. 13, 277 f.
IE. period; thus t in satdm 'hundred' (^lE.
3 See below, Sandhi, 734
The V has either remained or been tkntditi); d perhaps in vimsati- 'twenty' and
restored before such ur and ?' in hotr-vurya- vi- 'between'; / perhaps mydkrl- 'liver'. An
'election of the invoker'; in the opt. vurTta, initial mute seems to have been lost before
from vr- 'choose'; and in the 3. pi. perfect a sibilant (originally perhaps after a final
1

babhii-vur, jiihu-vur, sum-vur, iuspu-vur.

5

The evidence of cognate languages seems

consonant) in stana- 'breast',

(KZ. 31, 4iSff.)8
Dissimilation may also

svid-

'sweat'

sas- 'six'

have played
d in dsru- 'tear'
dacruma, Gk. laxpv). It is, however, some part in the loss of the sibilant in the
probable that there were two different but reduplicative syllable of roots with initial sk(h)
synonymous IE. words akni and dakru. On st{h), s{(K), as caskanda, tlsfhami, faspdrsa.
9 See Grassmann's Worterbuch sub verbo
some doubtful etymologies based on loss of
initial consonants, seeWACKERNAGEL I, 228 c, scandrd;
10 The verb kj-- 'do', after fdri and sam,
note.
shows an initial s; e. g. fm-iskrnvanti, fdri6 See below, Sandhi, 65.
to point to the loss of initial

(Lat.

'

56

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

sound; from stan- 'thunder', stanayitnu-, beside

(also

AV.)

tanyu-

'thunder',

tanayitni'i-

tanyati

'thundering',

'thunder',

'resounds';

stend-

tanyatil'thief,

(AV.) 'stealing', stayu- (VS.) 'thief, steya- 'theft', beside tayu- 'thief;
str-, beside tf- 'star'; spas- 'spy' and spas- 'see' in verbal forms d-spas-ta aor.,
paspas- perf., spasdyati caus., -spasta- part., 'seen', beside pdsyati 'sees''.
stay-diit-

The loss of initial s may be inferred in the following words from the
evidence of cognate languages in which it has been preserved: tij- 'sharpen';
tuj- 'strike'; tud- 'beat'; narmd- (VS.) 'jest'; nrt- 'dance'; parnd- 'wing'; pikd(VS.) 'Indian cuckoo'; plihdn- (VS. AV.) 'spleen'; phena- 'foam'; mrd- 'crush',
mrdu- (VS.)

'soft';

vip- 'tremble'; stipti- 'shoulder'.

few examples occur of the loss of the semivowels / or 1^^ as

the last element of an initial consonant group. Thus y disappears in derivatives
of roots in Tv formed with suffixes beginning with consonats: -muta- 'moved',
mu-rd- 'impetuous', mtt-tra- (AV. VS.) 'urine', from miv- 'push'; suci- 'needle',
su-nd- 'plaited basket', sfl-tra- (AV.) 'thread', beside syii-man- 'thong', syu-td'sewn', from sTv- 'sew'.
Loss of v seems to have taken place in siti- 'white'
(only at the beginning of compounds), beside svit- 'be bright', svity-diic'brilliant', Jvitrd- (AV.) 'white', svitrya-, perhaps 'white'; and, on the evidence
of the Avesta, in ksip- 'throw' (Av. hsiw), sds- (Av. Jisvas).
3, When the group is medial, the loss usually taken takes place between
single consonants, a. The sibilants s and ^ thus regularly disappear between
mutes; e. g. d-bhak-ta, 3. sing, aor., for *dbhak-s-ta beside d-bhak-s-i, from bhaj-,
'share';

cas-te for caks-te

eaten', for *a-ghs-ia-,

The dental

{=

original *cas'-s-te)i.

from ghas-

Similarly a-gdha- (TS.)

'un-

'eat'^.

c in pas-cA and
and between / and j in *nap-su
which must have]been the loc. pi. (AV. Jiafsu), from *napt-, 'weak stem oindpat-,
beside the dat. ndd-bhyas 'to the grandsons', for napt-bkyas, where on the
other hand the p has been dropped.
c. A mute may disappear between a nasal and a mute; e.g. pant i- for
pankti-, ywidhi for yungdhi.
This spelling is common in Vedic Mss.; it is

b.

pas-cdt 'behind'

(=

has disappeared between a sibilant and

IE. post-qe, post-git);

prescribed in APr. 11. 20, and, as regards the mediae, in VPr. vi. 30.
4. The only example of the loss of an initial s mute in a medial
group of consonants seems to be that of b before dbh 'in nddbhyas
ndpat-.
The semivowel r seems to be
for *nabdbhyas from napt- for
lost before a consonant when another r follows in cakr-dt (Pp. cakrdn) and
cakr-iyas^ for *carkr- beside carkar-mi, from kr- 'commemorate'; and, on
the evidence of the Avesta, in tvdstr- (cp. pwarss 'cut', pwarsta- 'created').

skfta-, sam-skria- ; also after nis in nir askrta

(Pp. akfta), perhaps owing to Sandhi forms
with sk such as niskuni (AV.). There can

doubt that the j here was not oriwas due to analogy; cp.WACKERNAGEL I, 230 a, ;S, note.
1 Wackernagel I, 230 a 7, note, discusses
several uncertain or erroneous etymologies
based on loss of initial j (including maryas

be

little

ginal but

interpreted as 2. sing. opt. of smr-). The evidence of Prakrit seems to point to the loss
of initial j in iefia- 'tail', krJd- 'leap', krus'cry', parasu'axe', panisa'knotty'; cp.

Wackernagel i, 230
2
On the possible
(Lat. frango)

see

and of k

Wackernagel

i,

b.

loss

of r in

bhahj-

in savyd- (Lat. scaemis),

232

c,

note.

See above 56,

b.

On

apnas- 'property', ddmpati- 'lord of

the house', see Wackernagel I, 233 c, note.
5 The
guttural mute only seems to be
lost when ks
t becomes //:
see above,
56, 6. The loss of 711 in the inst. sing, -na of
nouns in -man is only a seeming one ; for dana,
prathind, prend, bhnna, niahind, Tjarina (TS.)
appear beside the stems daman- etc., because
some of them had a stem in -n without m,
so that -nd seemed an alternative from of
4

mnd:

see Benfey, GGA. 1846, 702. 880;

Gottinger Abhandlungen 19, 234; Bloomfield, JAOS. 17, 3;
cp. IF. 8, Anzeiger,
p.

17.
6

But see Geldner, VS.

l,

279.

'

I.

Phonology.

probably starting from forms

Loss of Consonants.

like tvdsira

57

{KST) in which the r immediately

followed

But the loss of a spirant

group is common.

(Ilr.

j,

z,

z,

Ui) at the beginning of a medial

a. The sibilant s ^ has thus been lost before k followed by a consonant

vavrktam, vrknd-, vrktvf, vrkd (TS.), from vrak- 'lop' (cp. -vraskd-).
b. The voiced form (Ilr. z) of dental s has disappeared ^ before voiced
dentals, without leaving any trace, in the roots as- 'sit', and sds- 'order'; thus
a-dhvam, sasa-dhi. But when d preceded the z, the disappearance of the

in

sibilant is indicated by e taking the place of az before d, dk, h {= dh);

thus e-dhi, from as- 'be'; sed-'-, perfect stem of sad- 'sit' (for sazd-, like sascfrom sac-). This e also replaces az with loss of the sibilant in de-hi 'give';
dhe-hi 'put'; kiye-dha- 'containing much'; ned-Tyas- and ned-istha- 'vtxy vaaQ}r!
\
j>ed-ii-^ N.; medatl 'is fat'; medhd- and medhds- 'wisdom'; m'edha- 'juice'*.
c. When a vowel other than a preceded, the z was cerebralized (like s
before a voiceless dental) and disappeared after cerebralizing the following
dental and lengthening the preceding vowel; thus a-sto-dhvam'' (= d-stoz-dhvam
for a-stos-dhvam) 2. pi. aor., beside a-sto-s-ta, 3. sing., from siu- 'praise'. Thus
also are to be explained mdd- 'nest' (= nizda- for ni-sd-a-); pid- 'press'
{== pizd- iox J>i-sd- 01 pis-d-) ; mid/id- 'reward' (Gk. fj.ia66g); vid-u- 'strong',
viddyati 'is strong' (from -vis- -work' +-^)*; Jud-'^ 'be angry', and its Guna

forms,

e. g.

hed-as-

mrz-d- from mrs-

'anger';

'forget')

{=

ttirddti

'be

gracious',

mrdikd- 'gracious'

(for

with vowel pronounced long (12), d-red-ant- (TS.)

from ris- 'injure'.

voiced palatal spirant (Ilr. z) disappeared after
cerebralizing a following ^_^or dh and lengthening the preceding vowel; thus
ta-dhi Jox *tai-dhi {= tak-s-dhi) from taks- 'fashion'; so-dhA for *sas-dhd
(= sak-s-dka), beside sas-thd- (AV.) 'sixth'. A similar loss is to be assumed
'not deceiving'

d.

a-rezd-atit-),

Similarly the old

in id- 'praise'

(=

This loss

iz-d ior yaj--{- d)'^.

specially frequent in the case of the old voiced palatal

aspirated spirant Qlr.z/i) represented by k, which was dropped after cerebralizing
and aspirating a followed i and lengthening the preceding vowel; thus baclhde.

is

In a few forms of the AV. the semi- suffixes beginning with m,yorv, the sibilant
vowel y seems to be lost at the end of the is lost (instead of becoming d in the former
medial group ksy: meksami, yokse, vidhaksdn, circumstances, or remaining in the latter)
sakse. But these forms may be due to errors owing to
the influence of Sandhi; e. g.
dveso-b/iis from dves-as- 'hate'.
An original
in the MSS.
2 In. ch^ IE. skh, the original s was lost
sibilant has perhaps been lost in mahisd-,

in a pre-Indian period.
3

Before voiced mutes other than dentals,

became d, as in madgt'i- (44, 3 a) 'diver';

similarly 2 became d, as in fadbhis, from
and in vi-prud-bhis
pas- 'look' or 'cord';
z

from
4

be
as

'drop'.
loss of the voiced sibilant [z] must
older than the original text of the RV.,
the e of sed- has been transferred to
viprits-

The

sahvdms-jjahiisa, hraduni-,;as- 'be exhausted'

cp. Wackernagel i, 237 a ,8, note.
7 The origin of krodd- (AV. VS.) 'breast'
(Av. hraozdra- 'hard') and of many words
with d or dh preceded by a long vowel, and
with no collateral forms containing a sibilant, is obscure.
8
In
Cp. HiJBSCHMANN, KZ. 24, 408.
sTda- (= sizda-) from sad- 'sit', the d has
been retained owing to the influence of
other forms of the verb sad-. See, however,

other stems which contain no sibilant, as in

from bhaj- 'divide'. Similarly the
vowel of Kid-, though derived from iz, is RozwADOWSKi, BB. 21, 147, and cp. ZDMG.
regarded as a primitive I'va. the form ajlhidat 48, 519.
9 Plnda- perhaps stands for *pinzda-, from
(AV.): cp. Wackernagel i, p. 272 (mid.).
On pis- 'crush; cp. WACKERNAGEL I, 146, d.
5
Cp. Bartholomae, KZ. 27, 361.
10 On /end-, cp. WACKERNAGEL I, 238 b,
edh- 'thrive', miyedha- 'broth', vedhds- 'virtuous',
note; PiscHEL, BB. 23, 253 if. On td-, cp.
see Wackernagel i, 237 c.
6 In stems in -as before case terminations Oldenberg, SBE. 30, 2.
beginning with bh, and before secondary
bhej-iri,

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

'strong', ni-bndha- 'dense' (= bazdhd- for bah-td-) from bamh- 'be strong';
sddhr- 'conqueror', d-sadha- 'invincible', from sah-; rjdhd- (= rizdkd-), from
rih- 'lick'; iidkd- (= usdhd-) from va/i- 'carry'; gadhd- 'concealed', ixoia. guh'hide';
trdhd-, trdhva (AV.), from trh- 'crush'; drdhd- 'firm', from drh- 'be
strong'.
Here e also appears for az in trnedhu (AV.) from /-^i^- (^ trnazWe also
dhu); and <? in vodhdm (= vazdhajn), 2. du. aor. of Z'a/^- 'carry'.
in medhra- (AV.), from iiiih- 'mingere' (= mezdhra-).
find e as Guna of
Apart from the few examples of ra before s and h
63. Metathesis.
(51 c), there are probably no certain instances of metathesis in the RV.'.
In the later Samhitas, however, a few other forms of metathesis are to be found.
Thus -valh- seems to be a transposition of hval- 'go deviously' in upa-valh(VS.) 'propound a riddle to"'.
In valmika- (VS.) 'anthill', m appears transposed beside vamrl- and vatnrd- 'ant', vamra-kd- 'little ant'. Metathesis of
quantity occurs in as-thas for *as-t/iSs, 2. sing. mid. aor. of as- 'throw'. This is
analogous to the shortening, in the RV., of the radical vowel of da- 'give',
in the forms adam, adas, adat, where the verb is compounded with the verbal
prefix a 3, while otherwise the forms dam, das, dat alone appear.
The notion of the syllable is already known to the late
64. Syllable.
hymns of the Rgveda, though the word {a-ksdra-) is there generally used as
an adjective meaning 'imperishable'. Thus aksdrena mimate saptd vdnih means
'with the syllable they measure the seven metres'. The vowel being according
to the Pratisakhyas the essential element of the syllable, the word aksara-^
is used
by them in the sense of 'vowel' also. Initially, a vowel, or a consonant and the following vowel form a syllable. Medially, a simple consonant
begins a syllable, e. g. ta-pas; when there is a group of consonants, the last
begins the syllable, e. g. tap-ta-, and if the last is a sibilant or semivowel,
the penultimate also belongs to the following syllable'^, e. g. astam-psTt, antya-.
A final consonant in pausa belongs to the preceding vowel, e. g.
/'

i-dain.

By

haplology one of two identical or similar syllables

dropped.
Syllable is here to be taken in the sense not
only of a consonant with a following vowel, but of a vowel with a following
consonant.
I. The first of the two syllables is dropped within a word in tuvi-rd\va\van
the process called

in juxtaposition

is

'roaring mightily"', beside tuvi-rdva-\

(like asa-yti,

'according to

nakta-ya);

vf\td\tha

madh{yd\ya

'at

will',

'in

the middle', from mddhya-

from vrtd-

'willed'

(like rtu-tha

svapatydi for svapat{ya\yai, dat. sing. f. oi sv-apatyd- 'having

good offspring'; perhaps also Vj, hfi\^% ydyos, gen. loc. du. of^i-*- Examples
of a vowel with following consonant being dropped are: ir\adfi\ddhyai, inf.
ofzVaayz-'seektowin'; ca^ati^anta, r[an]anta, v[an]anta9 ; perhaps sdd[as]as-pdtibeside sddasas-pdti- 'lord of the seat'".
a. The final syllable of the first member of a compound is sometimes dropped
in this

r/-');

way; thus se[vd\-vara-

'treasury'; se{vd\-vrdha- 'dear';

madugha- (AV.),

Perhaps stoka- 'drop', may stand for as the designation of syllable is not found
from imi- 'drip-, under the influence in Panini.
of stukd- 'tuft'.
6 See TPr. xxi. 7, 9.
On the division of
2 Cp. Wackernagel I, 212 b, note, and syllables cp. further RPr. I.
15; VPr. I. looff.
239 b.
APr. I. 55ff.; TPr. xxi. iff.; and Whitney
3 These
forms are not resolved in the on TPr. XXI. 5.
1

*skota.-,

Pada

text, i. e. they are treated as

did not contain the verbal prefix a.
\ RPr. xvm. 17; VPr. i, 99.
5

Though known

jali as

well as

to

to

if

they

Katyayana and Patan-

the Pratisakhyas,

aksara-

Bartholomae, KZ.

Cp.

Cp., however,

9
10

See KZ. 20, 70 f.

See Bloomfield, JAOS.

eti-os

29, 527, 562.

for ena-yos.
16,

xxxv.

II.

^^

Euphonic Combination (Sandhi).

N.

of a plant yielding honey, beside madhu-dugha- 'shedding

sas[pa]-pinjara- (VS.) 'tawny like young grass''.

59
sweetness';

2^. The second syllable is dropped in the

d&'iwts pdumsya\ja], ratnadheyj[ya],
saMyd[y a], and abhikhyd beside abhikhyaya; also \xi vrkdt[at\i- 'destruction',
beside vrkdtat- and devd-iati-; and at the beginning of the second member
of
a compound in sirsa-[sa\M- (AV.) 'headache'

a.
following syllable is sometimes dropped in spite of a different one
intervening; thus in the dative marydda[ya] 'boundary'; and somewhat

pecuHarly iri dvarrv[ar]ur,

a varTvarti.

3. pi.

impf beside the

3. sing,

d varivar and

3, sing.

pres.

II.

EUPHONIC COMBINATION

Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar p. 34

p. 2170.
Grammatik i, 301 343.
Arnold, Vedic Metre

Benfey, Vollstandige Grammatik

87.
p.

70

Wackernagel,

80.

Altindische

(SANDHI).

The

65. The nature of Vedic Sandhi.

of speech which forms an unbroken

sentence is naturally the

chain of syllables euphonically
combined. It is, however, strictly so only in the prose portion of the AV.3
and the prose Mantras of the YV. As the great bulk of the Vedas is
metrical, the RV. and the SV. being entirely so, the editors of the Sarnhita
text treat the hemistich (consisting generally of two Padas or verses) t as the
euphonic unit, applying the rules of Sandhi with special stringency between
the Padas or metrical units which form the hemistich.
The evidence of
metre, however, shows that, in the original form of the text, Sandhi at the
unit

end of an

Pada

but unknowns.
The verse, therefore, is the
of a word appears either at the end of this
unit in pausa {avasane) 7, or within it as modified by contact with a following
initial.
The form which the final of a word assumes in pausa, being regarded
as the normal ending, is generally the basis of the modification appearing
It will therefore conduce to clearness if the rules relating
within the verse.
to absolute finals are first stated.
a. Vowels' in this position undergo no change
66. Finals in pausa.
other than occasional nasalization.
1. In all the Sarnhitas a % u'^ are frequently nasalized when prolated;
vindati (x. 146'); babhuvaiin
babhUva (AV. x. 2'');
e. g. vindatiim
vivesaim
vivesa (VS. xxiii. 49); mamdim
mama (TS. vii. 4^).
2. In the Sarnhita text of the RV. there survive, at the end of a verse
within a hemistich, from the period when such end also was accounted a
pause, several instances of nasalized c, preserved to avoid hiatus and coninternal

true euphonic unit.

is

The

all

final

''

for

This

explanation

u\hi\bka-

(cp.

is

doubtful in uloka-

Erugmann, Grundriss

i,

The only probable exception is RV. IX.

cp. Arnold, Vedic Metre 119.
The sentence within a Pada, as well as

113, 7 c d;

6
471); susmaya- (TS.) for iusmabhTmala- (VS.) 'terrible', for bhTma- the Pada itself, is the unit of accent; cp.
mala-; improbable ia ne/anas for rujand-nas, below, 83.
7 Cp. RPr. L 3; VI. 5; x. S; xi. 30.
'with broken nose' (Bloomfield, JAOS. 16,
8 Final r never occurs in the RV., its
xxxiv).
2 Cp. Whitney, Translation of AV. I, 123.
place being supplied by iir as nom. ace. s. n.

624, p.

mdya-;

See Bloomfield, The Atharvaveda, in e. g. sihitur 'standing' (cp. WaCKERNAGEL,

Encyclopedia, 1 (beginning) and note i. KZ. 25, 287 f.); but the TS. already has
the Gayatrl metre, in which there janayiif and bhartf (B ?), Wackernagel I,
i In
are three Padas, the third alone constitutes 259 a, note.
9 The vowels I and li, when dual terminathe second hemistich; in the Pankti, which
has five Padas, the last three constitute the tions (pragrhya), cannot be nasalized.
3

this

second hemistich.

6o
traction.

Thus a appears

am

a appears
(7

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

'near',

before

wa

and

am

as

r;

<?

q. g.

'together',

4.

Vedic Grammar.

before e and 0;

yamynamcaye

ghanenaiBekas

e. g.

{Y.2,0^'^);

(i. ZJ,'');

while the prepositions

are nasalized before any vowel;

q. g.

sdcam^udydn.

before r in vipanydmytdsya (iv. i'^),

following the regular rule that unnasalized a is shortened before r in the RV.
b. Consonants are liable to change of mode of articulation and, to

The vowel a once appears

some

ayn

as

extent, of place of articulation.

Final mutes, whether tenuis, media, or aspirate, are without distinction

durdd ^iroxa
represented by the corresponding tenuis; e. g. durat (111.593)
1.

usar-bhut

afar';

The palatals

2.

65')

(i.

usar-bi'idh

and

'waking at dawn'.

revert

becoming k;

original guttural,

the

to

su-yuj 'well yoked'.

arvdc 'coming hither'; su-yi'ik
The old palatal y, however, becomes /, e.g. rat ij. i2i3), m. 'king', 'queen',
rtvlj 'priest' {{xovayajraj; in rtvik, however, it becomes the guttural,

arvdk

thus

118^)

(i.

'sacrifice')

^.

The

3.

ritual

iis') and srdusat (i. 139'), which

of /?- 'carry', and srtiowing to the analogy of the exclamations vdtiys.), vat

exclamations vdsat

are probably modified forms of the

have

'hear'*,

(TS.),
4.

these,

3. sing.

for

(x.

3. sing. aor. subj.

Yvah-^.

aor. of

The nasals occurring as finals, , n, m^, remain unchanged. Of

n and m are very common; but n is found very rarely and only

secondarily after the loss of a following k (representing an original palatal;

prsfi for *prdnk, from prdnc-). Probably no instance of final n can be
found in Vedic Mantras. The palatal n never occurs, since final palatals
e. g.

become
a.

guttural (b, 2).

In the rare instances

in

which a radical

becomes

final

after

or -s, it appears as n owing to the influence of the

dental;
thus ddn (= *dam-s) 'of the house' {dam-)T; d-kran (^=*d-kram-t),
d-gan (= *a-gam-s, *a-gam-t), 2. 3. sing, aor.,
3. sing. aor. of kram- 'stride';
a-Jagan {=*ajagam-i), 3. sing, plup., aganTgan (VS.), 3.sing. intv. of gam- 'go';
d-yan {= *a-yam-s-t), 3. sing. aor. of yam- 'reach'*.
r is represented by
5. The semivowels y v /^ do not occur as finals,

dropping a following

-t

Visarga; thus pi'mar 'again', is written punah'^.

6. The sibilants and h are all changed when
a.

The dental

becomes Visarga;
^.

sdt

in

e. g.

The cerebral
'six',

for

which

s,

sds;

ketus
s,

is

which

-dvit

is

by

The

ritual interjection

the

written ketuh
is

for

final.

commonest of

(iii.

-dvis;

final

sibilants,

61 3).

very rare as a

'hating',

6m (VS.) may be
nasalization of an original
prolated (cp. RPr. xv. 3).
Thus the JUB.
I. 24. 3ff.,
mentions the pronunciations o as
well as om, both of which it rejects in favour
1

far

becomes cerebral

final,

vi-prut

In the K. also

(AV.)

occurs

'sprinkling'.

the 'form

a-nSn

from nam- 'bend'. The SB.

has prasan 'painless', ^= *pra-sam-s.
8 See 46 d, /?.
9 Final / is spoken of as occurring rarely
of om.
(Wackernagel i, 260 c), or as very rare
2 O^. RPr. I. 13; Whitney on APr. 1.43,
(Whitney 144), but I have been unable
3 Cp. Wackernagel I, 149 a a.
to find a single example in the Vedas (or
4 Cp. above 42 c (p. 34).
even in post-Vedic Sanskrit). But though no
5 Loc. cit.
etymologically final / seems to occur either
6 Final m is often incorrectly written as in pausa or in Sandhi, it is found as a subAnusvara in Mss. (as conversely in Prakrit stitute for d in two or three words in the
Mss. m is often written as m under Sanskrit later Sainhitas (see above 52 d, p. 45).
10 When h stands for etymological r, this
influence: cp.PlscHEL.Grammatik derPrakritSprachen, in this Encyclopedia, 339, 348), is indicated by an added iti in the Padaand their example is sometimes followed in patha; e. g. piinar iti (x. 8518).
due

to

the

printed editions.

*-!iSm-s-i,

n. Euphonic Combination.

Finals. Rules of Sandhi.

6i

These are the only examples occurring in the RV. and AV. In
the only two examples in which s occurs in the RV. as a final in the compound form ks, it is dropped: andk 'eyeless', from an-dks-; d-myak, 3. sing. aor.
of myaks- 'be situated' (?).
y. The palatal s becomes either k or t'; e. g. -^r^ fox drs- (m. 61 9);
for vi-pri'is.

N. of a

vtpai,

river,

for vip3,s-.

h become k ar i;
it is guttural or palatal in origin,
thus d-dhok, 3. sing. impf. of i/z^,^- 'milk'; hvX d-vdt, 3. sing. aor. of z/a/^- 'carry'.
c. Th'i rule is, that only a single consonant may be final. Hence all
but the first of a group of consonants are dropped; e. g. dbhavan for
*dbhavant\ tAn for *idns; tuddn for iuddnts; prAh for *prAhks (= *prancs);
8.

According as

acckaii for *ackantst, 3, sing. aor. of chand- 'be pleasing'.

a. k t or t, when tliey follow an f and belong to the root, are allowed to remain;
vdrk, 2. 3. sing. aor. of vrj- 'bend'; urkj^S), nom. of a;;;- 'strength'; d-m3,rt, 3. sing,
impf. of mrj- 'wipe'; a-vart, 3. sing. aor. of vrt- 'turn'; stthdrt (AV.), nom. of suhardThe only instance of a suffix remaining after ris dar-t, 3 sing. aor. of dr'friend'.
d-dar (for *d-dars).
'cleave', used also for 2. sing, beside d-dah
8. Some half-dozen instances have been noted, in the Samhitas, in which a suffixal
s or f seems to have been retained instead of the preceding consonant; but they are
probably all to be explained as due to analogical influence. They are
the nominatives sadka-mas (beside sadha-mdd) 'companion of the feast'; ava-yds
1.
e. g.

and piro-das (ace. purodasam) 'sacrificial cake'. Sadha-mds may be due

influence of nom. with phonetic j- like -mas 'moon', beside inst. pi. mJd-bhis
which it occurs in the RV., has to be read as
(44 a 3). Ava-yas, in the only passage
quadiisyllabic (also in AV.), i. e. as ava-yajah, and is probably to be explained as a contraction which retains the living -s of the nom. (and not the prehistoric s of *-yaj-s).
Puro-das (from das- 'worship'), occurring only twice in the RV., may be due to the inThat the prehistoric nom. -jfluence of a frequent nom. like draviiw-djs 'wealth-giver'.
should in these three forms have survived in the linguistic consciousness of the Vedic
poets, and as such have ousted the preceding consonant, which in all other analogous
The only reasonable explanation is
nominatives alone remains, is hardly conceivable =.
to assume the analogical influence of the nom. -s which was in living use after
'sacrificial share',

the

to

vowels.
four verbal preterite forms [a-yas (for *a-yaj-s) beside a-y3f, 2. sing. aor. olyaj*a-srdj-s, 2. sing. aor. oi srj- 'emit'; a-bhanas[KS>j ^*a-bhanak-s,
srSs {KV.)
*a-sras-t, 3. sing. aor. of sras- 'fall')
2. sing. impf. of bhanj- 'break' ; and a-srat (VS.)
are the beginnings of the tendency (of which there are several other examjDles
in the Brahmanas)3, to normalize the terminations, so as to have -s in 2. sing, and -/in
sing. This tendency is extended in the RV. from the s and i of 2. 3. sing^ even to i. sing,
2.

The

'sacrifice';

3.

the forms a-kramlm (beside a-kramisani) owing to a-kram-u,

var-am) owing to 2. sing, vak (for var), aor. of vr- 'cover'.
in

67.

Rules of Sandhi.

The

body of euphonic

a-k7-am-it;

rules

and vam

by which

(for

final

consonants are assimilated to following initials and hiatus is avoided between

final and initial vowels is called Sandhi in the Pratisakhyas +. The editors of
the Samhita of the RV. have greatly obscured the true condition of the text

which they dealt by applying to it rules of euphonic combination which

did not prevail at the time when the text was composed. Thus though the
Sandhi between the verses of a hemistich is (excepting a few survivals from
elsewhere,
the older form of the text) 5 appHed with greater stringency than
hemistich conthe metre clearly shows that the end of the first verse of a
Within the verse, moreover,
stitutes a pause as much as the end of the last.
Sandhi is, according to metrical evidence, not applied where the caesura
never contracted
occurs; nd, when it means 'like' (as opposed to nd 'not'), is
t and w before
a^;
(?^
preceding
a
with
'then'
nor
vowel,
following
with any
vidth

Cp. 43 a.
Cp. Whitney 146 a; Bt.oomfield, AJP.
28 ff.; Bartholomae, KZ. 29, 578 ff.
3 Cp. Whitney 555 a.
1

3,

APr.
5

RPr.
IV.

11.

2.

13;

7.

VII.

l;

VPr.

III.

2;

414.

agnih (l. 701).

E. g. manisa
these instances there is a pause in
\

In

62

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

dissimilar initial vowels are hardly ever changed to the corresponding semivowels', and often remain uncontracted even before similar vowels^; the
elision of a after e
Va rare^; contraction is commonly avoided by the final
vowel of monosyllabic words, and by an initial vowel followed by conjunct
Nevertheless, it may be said in a general way that the poets
consonants'*.
of the RV. show a tendency to avoid the meeting of vowels ^. The divergences
between the apparent and the real Sandhi which appear in the RV., decrease
in the later Vedas, while the application of particular rules of Sandhi becomes
more uniform^a. External Sandhi, or that which applies between words in the sentence,
is to a considerable extent identical with internal Sandhi, or that which applies
within words.
The most striking difference is, that in the latter consonants
remain unchanged before verbal and nominal terminations beginning with
vowels, semivowels, or nasals'. External Sandhi is on the whole followed in
the formation of compounds,
the divergences from it in the latter being
merely survivals of an earlier stage of external Sandhi due to the closer
connexion between members of a compound that renders them less liable
than separate words to be affected by modifications of phonetic laws.
External Sandhi is to a considerable extent affected by the law of finals
in pausa.
Under that influence it avoids final aspirates and palatals. There
are, however, in the treatment of final n r, and s, certain survivals which do
not agree with the corresponding forms in pausa.

b. There are certain duplicate forms which were originally due to

divergent euphonic conditions.
Thus the tendency was to employ the dual
ending a before consonants, but au before vowels. Similarly, the word sdda
'always', was used before consonants, but sddam before vowels^.
68. Lengthening of final vowels.
Final vowels as a rule remain
unchanged before consonants. But a i u are very frequently lengthened 9
before a single initial consonant'" both in the metrical portion of the Samhitas

and

of the Yajurveda; e. g. irudhi hdvam 'hear (our)

This practice includes examples in which the consonant is followed by
a written y or w, to be pronounced, however, as i or u; e. g. ddha hy ague
(iv. 10=*)
ddha hi agne; abhi sv arydh (x. 5 9 3^)
abhi si'i arydh.
The
lengthening here appears to have arisen from an ancient rhythmic tendency
of the language to pronounce long, between two short syllables, a final short
vowel which was liable to be lengthened elsewhere as well"; this tendency
being utilized by the poets of the Sarnhitas where metrical exigencies required
a long syllable. Thus ddha 'then', appears as ddha when a short syllable
follows.
Similarly tu 'but' generally becomes til before a short syllable; and
sic 'weir nearly always becomes sii between short syllables '^in the prose formulas

call'.

the sense; cp. Oldenberg, Prolegomena 443,

note 2; Arnold 122.
1

Arnold

Op.
Op.

3
4
7iia

cit.

cit.

125.
124.
127.

Cp. Wackernagel I, 309, bottom.

The Padapatha in these instances regu-

unlengthened vowel.
Except in compounds, this lengthening

larly gives the original

'

disappears in the later language; there are,

Thus mSfsavah (iv. 47d) must be read however, several survivals in the Brahmanas
dpsavah, but maduvah (for mci dduvali) see Aufrecht, Aitareya Brahmana 427; and

remains

(ibid.).

cp.

Wackernagel

i,

264

b.

II This
Cp. Oldenberg 434 f.
tendency survived in the postCp. Bartholomae in KZ. 29, 37, Vedic language in compounds, in words
(which followed the analogy of compounds)
P- 5ilfsakat, d-saknuvan, salra-, sdkvan- before suffixes beginning
7 Thus
vfith consonants,
(from sak- 'be able'), in all which forms
g and in reduplicative syllables.
would be required by external Sandhi.
" Cp. Wackernagel i, 266 b.
5

'

II.

Euphonic Combination.

Vowels.

63

a. The short vowel regularly remains unchanged at the end of a verse

(even within a hemistich); and often before the caesura of a Tristubh or
JagatT Pada (even in terminations otherwise liable to be lengthened) ^.
b. The final vowel is not lengthened in i. vocatives (except vrsabks
vni. 4538, and hariyojana i. 61'^); 2, datives in -aya; 3. nom. plur. neuter in -i;
4. verbal forms ending in -i and -u (excepting imperatives in -dhi and the
3. sing, ra/^jff/z II. 26*) 3; 5. the prepositions i'ipa'> and dpa (except dpa vrdhi
VII.

27=).

some instances final

or two consonants^.

In

c.

vowels

vowels

appear

to

be lengthened before

When a final a i o^ u^ is
69. Contraction of similar vowels.
followed by corresponding initial a i or , contraction resulting in the long
form of the respective vowel regularly takes place; e. g. ihdsti
ihd asti;
tva agne; viddm (vi. 9')
vi iddm;
tndrA
indra d; tvagne
a. The contraction of + a and oi u \- u occasionally does not take
place even in the written text of the E.V. both at the end of and within a
Pada; thus manisa agnih (1.70'); mantsd abki {i.ioi^); puss dsurak (v.51"),
pusd abhi- (vi. 50^), pusd avistu (x. 26^*^); villi utd (i. 39^); su urdhvd{h)
(vi. 249); SIC Utibhih (i. ii2'~^3)j the compound suutdyah (viii. 47'"'^)^.
b. On the other hand, in many instances where the contraction is written,
the original vowels have to be restored in pronunciation with hiatus 9. The restored
initial in these instances is long by nature or position, and the preceding final if
long must be shortened in pronunciation'"; e. g. casdt (i. 273) ^= ca as&t; carcata
ma apsdvaJi; mrlaiidfse
ma apeh; mdpsdvah
ca areata; mdpeh
(i. 155')
{iw.ij']^)
mrlaii idfse; ydntindavak {iv.^T^) =yd?iti Indavak; bhavantuksdnah
bhavantu uksdnah. After monosyllables, the hiatus is regular in the
(vi. idt^)
case of the written contractions i and u, especially when the monosyllables are
hi indra'^'^.
vi indra; hTndra (i. io25)
vi and hi; e.g. vindra (x. 32^)
c. Duals in a / tf are regularly uncombined. Such i and u are usually
written with hiatus in the Samhita text; the dual a always appears before z^",
but at the end of internal Padas invariably coalesces in the written text.
i. When final a is
70. Contraction of a with dissimilar vowels.
e o''^ respectively; e. g.
followed by % u, contraction takes place resulting
d ubhd. When a is followed by r,
d Tm; obhd
piteva
pad iva; em
contraction is never written in the RV. and VS. "t, but the metre shows that
the combination is sometimes pronounced as ar, as is the case in the compound

=
=
=

saptarsdyah

'the

seven

seers'

'3.

8 Cp. Benfey, SV. XXXII f.; Roth, Litte1 Apparent exceptions are due to erroneous
metrical division of Padas by the editors of ratur 67f.
9 nd 'like', is never combined in prothe Samhitas, or to mechanical repetition of
formulas originally used in a different posi- nunciation, see above 67; cp. Arnold 120.
'o Long vowels being regularly shortened
tion in the verse. Thus srudhl havam (i. 2519)
appears in imitation of srudhi hdvam which before vowels; see Oldenberg 465 f.
" Cp. Arnold 124.
of a verse
is frequent at the beginning
12 Op. cit. 120.
Before other vowels, av,
(11. Ill, etc.).
Cp. Oldenberg 420 f.
2
See ZUBATY, Der Quantitatswechsel im the Sandbi form of au, the alternative dual
Auslaute vedifcher Worter, Vienna Or. ending, appears.
13 Because the long monophthongs /and
Journal 2, 315.
represent IE. ai and du.
3 See ZuBATY, op. cit. 3, 89.
14 The MS. does not contract either, but
4 See Oldenberg 399.
on the contrary often lengthens d to a, even
5 Op. cit. 60.
where the metre requires contraction. Cp.
6 Cp. Wackernagel l 265 b, note.
Wackernagel i, 267 a , note.
7 There is no example of contracted f in the
15 See Grassmann, Wbrterbuch p. vil
Samhitas, as r r never meet; and in the RV.
final r never occurs (cp. above, p. 59, note 8).
\

64

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

In the RV. a+i is once contracted to ai- in pi-discryur (l. 120^) =fra isayuh (Pp.)';
a indra (l. 2. I. 45); atid in the
a+z is once contracted to ai- in dindra
a-fii- 'suffering', and
AV. and "VS. the preposition a contracts with r to 5;- in artiThe last three instances are ^perhaps survivals of an older cona-rcchatu^.
archain
That a is not otlierwise contracted with i il r to ai au ar, is doubtless to be
traction.
accounted for by the previous shortening of a in hiatus 3.
b. Occasionally a followed by i remains uncontracted in the written text of the
RV. ; thus ;> iydm (vi. 753); piba imdm (vin. 171); ranaya ihd (VIII. 34")4. \yhen a
a.

in the SV.

is

followed

iadam
(iv.

by

rlacid (v.

112)

.r,

'39)^

= vipanyd

it

either shortened

is

= kada

r-;

or nasalized;
(iv. 333)6

vibhvam rbhur

e.

g.

tdtha r-tuh iortdt/ia r-

= vibhvar-;

vifanyaml

rtdsya

rtasya.

is written,
c. On the other hand, in many instances where the contraction ^ or
a
the original simple vowels must be restored with hiatus; e.g. endragnT {l. lo84)
subhdgd usak^.
indragtu; subhdgosah (l. 487)

or au to au;
Final a contracts with a following e or ai to ai; and vi^ith
'
eb/tih.
But though the contraction is written, the original
vowels must sometimes be restored; e. g. disu (i. 6i'^) must be read a em.
a. Final a, instead of being contracted with e and 0, is in a few instances elided
2.

. g.

dibkih for

iva etayah; aivin' evil (VU. 99)

iipa esattcg.

=
=

tatdra eTicd; iv'etayah (x. git)

thus iatdr' eved (vn. 333)
ydlha ohse;^ up' esatu
awina evct; ydth' ohise (VIH. 53)
example of a compound with this elision seems to be ddso>n-'^

before those diphthongs;

An

ddia-oni- 'having ten aids'.

b. Final a, instead of being contracted with ' is, in a few instances, nasalized
>o)
before that diphthong; thus aminantani evaih'^'- (l. 79'-) for -a e-; sdJaddnxm id (l. 123

for -a i-; upastham

ikd

(I.

356) for -d

e-.

a remains after a final jy or J has been dropped, it does not

as a rule contract with the following vowel. Nevertheless such contraction is
not infrequent in the Sariihitas. In some instances it is actually written; thus
Pp. vdi asdu;
sdrtavajdu (in. 32*)
Pp. sdrtavdi ajdn; vAsdii (v. 173)
Pp. rdjah-isitam; in the later Sainand the compound rdjesitam (viii. 46^*)
Pp. kftyah iti; pivopavasananain (VS.
hitas are found krtyeti (AV. x. I's)
3.

When

Pp. pivah-upavasananaiti '^.

In other instances the contraction, though not written, is required by the
metre; thus ta indra (vii. 21'^), Pp. te indra, must be read as tendra; prthivya
antdriksat (AV. ix. i9), Pp. prthivyah, zs. prthivyantdriksai'^^ gosthd upa (AV.
IX. 4^J), Pp. gosthe upa, as gosthjpa.
a.
There appear to be several other instances of such written contraction, which
are however otherwise explained by the Padapatha; thus rdyotd (x. 93") = rdyi utd,

XXI. 43)

1
6 vibhvam occurs thus three times;
see
Several instances of this contraction
occur in B and later.
Lanman 529.
2 The TS. extends this contraction to pre7 In opposition to the Mss. Max Muller,
positions ending in a: updrchati, avarchati\ RV2. reads vipanydm ridsya because Sayana
see Whitney, APr. iii. 47 f., TPr. iii. gf. appears to favour tliat reading.
8 See Arnold, Vedic Metre 123.
In the post-Vedic language this contraction
9 This is a precursor of the post-Vedic
was extended to all prepositions ending
in 5.
rule by which the a of a preposition before
3 Cp. Benfey, GGA.
initial e and
of verbs (except eli etc. and
1846, p. 822.
4 The
Pp. explains pibd and ?-aiiayd as edhate etc.) is elided.
10 Though the AV. has pdncaudana- ='
imperatives {piba, ranaya); but the a here
may represent -ds of the subjunctive (cp. pdhca odana- the elision of a before -odanaWackernagel i, p. 311 mid.). Occasionally often takes place in the Sutras and later.
11 The old hiatus is here treated as it
a remain uncontracted because the editors
regarded them as representing ak-e, or dh, as would be at the end of an internal Pada.
in raizla itya (viI. %,(i}i]jmaya dtra (VII. 393). Cp. The TS. (ill. I, IIS) retains the hiatus in
RPr. II. 28f; Benfey, SV. xxxf.; Wacicer- the same verse without nasalization; cp.
NAGEL I, 267 a ;8.
Oldenberg 46gff.
12 See Wackernagel i, 268 b.
5 See p. 63,
note 'o; a is shortened
before r in the AB.; see Aufrecht's ed.
13 In the Paippalada recension this contraction is actually written.
427.

II.

Euphonic Combination.

Vowels.

6S

Pp. raya u/d; bhiimyopari (x. 753)

bhiimyah itpdri, Pp. bhumya updri^. In a few of
these the contraction must be removed as contrary to metre; thus usa yati (ill. 61^),
Pp. ttsa.h yati, which means 'Dawn goes', should be read as usd a yati, as the sense
requires 'Dawn comes', and the metre requires an additional syllable; abhisfipasi (11.202),
Pp. -p&asi, should be read as abhisfipa{li) asi; vrmbheva (VI. 46*), Pp. vrsabha iva^, as

vrsabhd[h) iva.
b. In a very few instances a final m is dropped after a, which then combines with
a following vowel.
This contraction is actually written in durgdhaitat {w. 182) for
durgdham etdt (but Pp. durgdha etdi)i, and sdvaneddm (TS. I. 4. 442) for sdvanam iddm
(Pp. sdvana, iddm).
Occasionally this contraction though not written is required by the
metre; thus rastrdm ihd (AV.) must be read rasfrehd.

Final / and u before dissimilar vowels. i. The final vowels i

initial vowels
and before diphthongs are in the
Samhitas regularly written as / and fS respectively; e. g. prdty ayam
(i. II*)
prdti ayam; a tv eta (i. 5')
<? tu eta; jdnitry ajijanat (x. 134')
jdnitrT ajijanat.
The evidence of the metre, however, shows that this y
71.

and

?/*

before dissimilar

or V nearly always has the syllabic value of

or u^;

e. g.

vy iisdh

(i.

92'*)

must be read as vi umh: viddthesv afijdn (i. 9 2 5) as viddthesu anjdn.

a. The final of disyllabic prepositions must, however, frequently be pronounced
a semivowel, especially before augmented forms;
2323); also dnv ihi (x. 53^)7.
b. In all the Samhitas the

(I.

e. g.

adhydsthah

(I.

49=);

as

dnv acdrimm

n following a consonant is written as v and

avid v indra (I. 281)8; but the long form of the
same particle occasionally remains unchanged in the RV. even after a consonant; c. g.
id u ayavi (vi. 71^); tdm il akrnvan (X. 8810).
IX there are other instances of monosyllabic and disyllabic words at
0. In RV. I
the end of which >> and v are pronounced; but the only example of a trisyllabic word
in which this occurs is stvyaiu in sfvyatv dpah (11.32''). In RV. X there are a few further
examples; e. g. devesv ddhi (x. 1218)9.

pronounced as u before a vowel;

particle
e. g.

d.

The semivowel

is

regular in the

Unchangeable

and

compounds

rlv-ij-, gdvy-uti- 1, sv-aha,

The dual

and

sv-id''-'^.

and ii never change to

or w; nor is the former ever prosodically shortened, though the latter some7
times is; e. g. hdri (o -) rtdsya; but sadhii (_u) asmai (11. 2 '5). The dual f may
remain even before i; e.g. kdri iva, hdri indra, akst iva; but the contraction
2.

u.

a.

J)'

is

written in upadhiva, pradhiva, ddmpativa, vispdtiva, nrpdtiva (AV.), rodasimi

There are also several passages
rodasT im^ 'these two worlds'.

(vii. 90'3)

which the contraction, though not written, must be read".

b. The rare locatives in i and ii '3 (from stems in I and li) are regularly
written unchanged in the Samhita text of the RV., except vMy asyam (11. 3''),
in

iy and uv are sometimes written for i and u;

Cp. Wackernagel I, 268 a.
su-itd- 'accessible'; hence
In instances in which contraction with e. g. suv-itdiva seems to take place, the existence of a the pronunciation may have \ie.zxiiy,uv; cp.
byform va has to be taken into consider- Wackernagel i, 270 c, 271 a.
9 See Arnold, Vedic Metre 125.
ation; cp. Grassmann, Worterbuch, column
10 If the analysis of BR., gdvi-uti-, is correct;
221; Wackernagel i, 268 a, note.
the Pp. divides go- yiiti-.
3 Cp. Delbruck, Verbum 67, end.
11 See ArnolO, Vedic Metre 125.
4 In the RV. r is never final, and I doubt
12 Cp. Wackernagel i, 270 b, note. Here
whether any example can be quoted from
the other Sainhitas in which it is followed we have probably not contracted forms with
iva, but the dual T.\-va, the byform of iva.
by an initial vowel.
13 The vowels
which regularly remain
5 The Sandhi which changes a vowel to
the semivowel is called ksaipra 'gliding', unchanged are called pragrhya, 'separated',
in the PratiSakhyas; cp. RPr. II. 8; HI. 7; by the native phoneticians; see RPr. I. 16
They
etc.; VPr. I. 92 etc.; APr. I. 73 etc.
VII. sindicated as such in the Pp. by an
6 The long vowel being regularly short- are
I

'

appended iti. The particle u is indicated

as pragrhya in the Pp. of RV. and AV. by
note, ZDMG. 44, 326 note; Arnold, Vedic its nasalized form im (nasalization being
employed to avoid hiatus see above 66, I).
Metre 125.
8 The TS. has uv for v.
Elsewhere also
cp. Oldenberg 465.
Wackernagel i, 271 b; Oldenberg

ened;
7

438,

Indo-arische Philolog^ie.

I.

4.

66

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

The vowels here

).
where, however, the vowel must be pronounced (_ w
(unlike the dual i) seem always to be treated as prosodically shorts
c. The final i of other cases also occasionally remains unchanged;
thus the nominatives prthivi, prihujrdyi, samrijiil and the instrumental susdmT
sometimes retain their i, and the inst. uti frequently does so '.
Before a. The diphthongs e and
i. a.
remain
72. Final e and 0.
unchanged before an initial a. This a is often not written in the Samhitas 3,
being dropped in about three-fourths of its occurrences in the RV. and in about
two-thirds in the AV.'t; but the evidence of metre shows that, in 99 instances
out of 100 in the RV., and in about 80 in the AV. and the metrical parts of
the YV., it is, whether written or not, to be read, and at the same time
shortens the preceding diphthong to e or 0^. In visve devdso apturah (i. 3*)
the a is both written and pronounced; in sundve 'gne (i. i9) it must be
dgne^.
The exceptional treatment of e in stotava ambyam
restored: sundve
(viii. 725), for stotave ambyam, indicates that the Sandhi of e and o before a
was originally the same as before other vowels 7. But their unchanged form,
as before consonants, gained the day, because the short close a, when coming
immediately after them in their character of monophthongs, would have a
natural tendency to disappear and thus leave a consonant to follow.
b. Before other vowels. The diphthongs e and o before any vowels
di and au,
but a would naturally become ay and av, as being originally
and as having the form of ay and av within a word. But ay regularly drops
the y; e. g. agna ihd (i. 22'); av on the other hand generally retains the v,
dropping it before u^; e. g. vAyav a yahi (i. 2^); but vAya ukthSkir (i. 2^).
2. Unchangeable e.
a. The e of the dual nom. ace. f. n. of a-stems,
is regularly uncontracted {pragr/iya), because it consists ol
e. g. t'Me 'both',
a -1- the dual i^.
b. Under the influence of this nominal dual e, the verbal dual e^ of
the 2. 3. present and perfect middle, e. g. vdhethe 'ye two bring', bruvate

'they two speak', as-athe 'ye two have obtained', come to be uncontractable,
though the e is nearly always prosodically shortened; e. g. yunjathe apdh

parimamndtke asman

151'*); 'but

(i.

The

(vii.

93*).

locative tve 'in thee', is uncontractable. Under its

influence the other pronominal forms asme 'us', and yusme 'you', are also
always treated as pragrhya by the Samhita as well as the Padapatha; it is.
c.

Cp.

NAGEL

I,

e of the

Oldenberg
270

456, note;

b.

Wacker-

8 There are a few survivals of ay;

e. g.
tdy a (MS. L 11)
td a (TS.); cp. TPr. X.

270 b, note. Such forms, 23; Oldenberg 447 ff. In the MS., the K.,
in which the absence of contraction is only and Mantras occurring in the Manavasutras,
occasional, are
not indicated by iti in unaccented a for e before an accented initial
the Pp.
vowel is lengthened; e. g. a dadha iti.
3 This
form of Sandhi is in the PratiSee above 71, 2.
9
A dual e once
sakhyas called abhinihila 'elided'; RPr. 11. appears contracted in dhisnyemi {vn. 72^),
13 etc.; VPr. I. 114, 125; APr. m. 54; TPr. which, however, should probably be read
H. 8.
uncontracted as dhisnye ime. The -eva which
4 See Whitney 135 c.
occurs several times (l. 186'* etc ) and looks
5 Cp. Oldenberg 435 f., 453 ff.,
ZDMG. like a contraction of the dual e with iva, in
reaUty probably stands for the dual e-{-va,
44. 33 iff.; Wackernagel i, p. 324.
6 The few instances (70 out of 4500) of the byform oiiva; cp. Wackernagel
I, p.3i7,
the elision of a in the RV. are the fore- note, top.
2

Cp. op.

cit.

I,

10 There was
runners of the invariable practice of postoriginally no difference beVedic Sandhi.
tween this dual e and any other e in middle
7 Internally the
original Sandhi of the forms, such as that of the dual -vahe, the
compound go-agra- must have been gav-agra-; singular -ie, and the plural -ante.

cp.

Wackernagel

1,

p. 325, note.

Euphonic Combination.

II.

however,
the

of
6

doubtful

whether they were

RV.\
3. Unchangeable 0.
particles with
(which
tf

(=

b.

u),

dtho

(=

Following

a.

When

itself is

dtha u), uto

analogy,

this

so
is

Consonants.
treated

in

the

67
original

text

of

the result of combining the final a

it is pragrkya;
thus

often unchangeable) ^

(=
tlie

utd

u),

mi (= md

vocative

in

u).

of -stems is sometimes
pito a (TS.v. 7.2+). It is

zs. pragrhya in the Sarnhita of theTS.j e. g.

regularly so treated in the Padapathas of the RV., AV., VS., TS. (but not SV.).
Thus in vdyav a (i. 2'), vdya ukthibhir (i. 2^), vayo tdva (i. 2^) the vocative
is equally given in the Padapatha as vayo Hi.

treated

The diphthongs ai and au are treated

73- The diphthongs al and au.
throughout in the same way as e and
before vowels other than a.
Thus
ai is regularly written a (having dropped the y of ay'); e. g. tdsma aksi
(i. 116'^); tdsma indraya (i. 4').
On the other hand, au is generally written
av, but always a before it in the RV. and VS.; e.g. tav A (i. 2^); tdv
indragm (\.\o%i); but sujihvS. I'lpa (i. 13*). In the AV. a appears before u
in pads, ucyete (AV. xix. 65). In the MS. a appears before other vowels also '.
The Sandhi of final
74. Euphonic combination of consonants.
consonants, generally speaking, starts from the form which they assume in

pausa.

Thus an aspirate first loses its aspiration; the palatal c becomes k;

k or /t; and of a group of consonants the first alone remains.

j s h become

is, however, to a great extent differently treated from what it is in

and the Sandhi of s and r is, for the most part, based not on h,
their form in pausa, but on the original letter.
A final consonant is assimilated ^ in quality^ to the following initial,
becoming voiceless before a voiceless consonant, and voiced before a voiced
sound 7; e. g. tdt satydm (i. i^) for tdd; ydt tva (i. 15") ioiydd; havyavad
juhvhsyah (i. 12*), through -vAt for -vah; gdmad vafebki/i (i. 53) for gdmat;
arvdg rddhah (i. 9^) for arvdc through arvdk.
There
a. A final media before a nasal may become the nasal of its own class.

Final n

pausa;

seems to be no certain instance of this in the RV.; cakrdn na (x. 9512- ^3), however,
probably stands for cakrdt nd, though the Pp. has cakrdn na. This assimilation is regular
From here it penetrated into
in some compounds; e. g. sdn-navati- '96' for sdt-navati-.
internal Sandhi; e. g. san-n&m,
b. Assimilation not only in quality, but also largely in the place of articulation
occurs in the Sandhi of final m, of the final dentals 8 i n s, and of final r (under the
influence of

s).

i. Before vowels, final m

final m.
75.
remains unchanged; e. g. agnim tie (i. i ') In a very few instances, however,
the m is dropped, and the vowels then contract. This Sandhi is mostly
indicated by the metre only: it is very rarely written?, as in durgdhaitdt

Euphonic combination of

Cp. Oldenberg 4S5, note.

Cp. above 71, i b.
3 SeeGARBE, GGA. 1882, 117 f; WackerNAGEL I, 274; Oldenberg, ZDMG. 60, 755
758 (Duale auf -a und -au).
4 Some compounds, however, preserve
survivals of an earlier phase of Sandhi; e. g.
vis-pdti- 'lord of the house'; vispdla-'is., not
nab-raj-.
vii-; nabh-raj- (MS.) 'cloud-king', not
Cp. L. v. ScHROEDER, ed. of MS. I, p. XVI.
5 Final t before vowels becomes / in the
RV., not d as later; c. g. bdl itthi, for bdt.
6 Within a word a voiced consonant is
not necessary before vowels, semivowels,
1

and

nasals.

Some

scholars think that the 3. sing.impv.,

bhdvatu represents bhavat u for original
bhavad u, the t being retained owing to the
influence of the innumerable forms of the
3. sing, wiih -t, -ti, -te, etc. (cp. WackerNAGEL I, 276 b); but this is doubtful; DelBRUCK, Altindische Syntax Sl7ff.,_ thinks it
may originally have beenMflt'a+2'K(particle);
7

e. g.

cp. IF.

18, 71.

of a final guttural becoming

a dental occurs in TS. l.
2. 7', where samydi ie stands for samydk te.
There are a few other examples in B. passages
8

An example

dental before

Wackernagel

of the TS.; see

9

See above

70, 3 b.

5*

i,

277

b.

68

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

Vedic Grammar.

4.

80 for durgd/iam etdt, and it is never analysed by the Padapatha in

doublet
It may perhaps have started from the analogy of the
way.
tubhya beside tt'ibhyam 'to thee".
Before mutes, final in is regularly assimilated^ becoming the
2.
corresponding nasal, and before n similarly becoming fi. The Mss. and
printed texts, however, represent this assimilated m by the Anusvara sign;
bhadrdm no (x. 20"^) for
e. g. bhadrdin karisydsi (i. i*) for bhadrdh karisydsi;
bhadrdn no. This actual change of m to n before dentals led to some errors
in the Pada text; e. g. ydn ni-pAsi (iv. 11^), analysed as ydt instead oi yam;
dvi-venan tdm (iv.24^), analysed as aw'-w^aw instead of az'2-z'i?aOT (cp. iv. 253).
3. Before r s s s and A^. final m becomes Anusvara {m); e. g. hotaram
ratnadhdtamam (i. i'); vdrdhamanam svi (i. i?); niitrdm huve (i. 2 7). From
its original use before sibilants and h, Anusvara came to be employed before
A compound like sam-rdf- 'overlord' shows that m
the semivowel also *.
originally remained unchanged in Sandhi before r.
^
(iv.

this

4.

Before

v,

final in is

assimilated as nasalized

I v.

The

TPr.^,

however, allows Anusvara beside these, while the APr. even requires Anunasika
before J' and v; and the printed texts regularly use Anusvara; e.. g. sdm yudhi
83);

(i.

yajhdm

vdstu

(i.

30').

Forms

like

yamydmana-

'extended'

and dpa-

mlukta- 'concealed' show that final m originally remained unchanged in Sandhi

before y and l^; and forms like jaganvdn, from gam- 'go', point to its having
at one time become n before v in Sandhi.
i. Before /, final t^ becomes
76. Euphonic combination of final t.
fully assimilated as /; e. g. dngal lomnah (x. 163^) for di'igat ISmnak.
Before palatals (including /j7 final t^ becomes palatal*; e. g. tdc
2.
cdksuh (vii. 66^^) for tdd cdksuh; rohic chyavA (i. 100'*) for rohit syava; and
in a compound yataydj-jana- 'marshalling men', for yataydt-jana-.
i. Before vowels. Final 9,
77. Euphonic combination of final n.
a. if preceded by a short vowel, is doubled'"; e. g. dhann d/iim (11. ii5) for
dhan. The final n is here chiefly based on original its or nt. Though it is
always written double'^, the evidence of metre shows that this rule was only
partially applied in the RV. '^.
b. If preceded by a long vowel, it becomes within '^ a Pada in the RV.
in after a '"t, but mr after T u f^i; e. g. sdrgam iva, for sdrgan; paridhtmr dti, for
paridhin; abkisuinr iva, for abhisun; nriiir abki, for nfn.
This Sandhi was
caused by the n having originally been followed byj'^; e.g. vfkan originally

Wackernagel I, 283 a, note.

Op. cit. I, 283, b a.
3 Op. cit. I, 283 d.
4 In the post-Vedic language Anusvara
came to be allowed before mutes and nasals
1

11

Cp.

For various explanations of this doubling,

Wackernagel i, 279 a (p. 330).

12 Cp. Oldenberg 424f.,
429 ff.

see

13 At the end of a Pada, -an -m -tin remain

unchanged (as being in pausa) before a
vowel. For passages in which -an is unchanged within a Pada, see below and

Oldenberg

also.

Cp. Wackernagel i, 283 c.

Representing th d dh also, if they occur.
7 In the MS. t anomalously becomes ti,
instead of c, before s; see L. v. Schroeder,

14

In the

428.

MS. and K., -am

shortened
asman. Cp.
ZDMG. 33, 185; ed. of MS. i, p. xxix. On V. Schroeder, ed. of the MS. i, p. xxix.
15 fn becomes fffir only once (v.
the aspiration of i in this Sandhi, see
S415),
below 80 a.
remaining unchanged elsewhere because two
8 Final dentals never come into contact r sounds are avoided in the same syllable
with initial cerebrals in the Samhitas.
(see below 79).
16 For examples of this Sandhi applied
9 This rule applies to final guttural n
to
also; e. g. kTdfhn i- (x. lo83), cp. LanmaN nominatives in -an, see
Lanman 506 A,
490; hihn akrnoi (l. 16428J for hin a-.
note (mahdn), 512 {-van), 514 {-ydn), 517
10
The compound vfsan-asvd- 'having {-man); for accusatives, 346.
stallions as steeds', forms an exception.
to

-am;

c. g.

asmdm ahwtu

for

is

II.

Euphonic Combination.

Consonants.

69

"vrkans ' ; mahan for '^mahants; d-yan, 3. sing. aor. for *d-yan-si (i sing, d-yamsam) '.
The n became Anusvara (or Anunasika) before this
which was treated in
exactly the same way as when it followed an unnasalized vowel {as becoming
a, but Ts, us, rs becoming tr, ur, fr).
a. The an of the 3. pi. subjunctive (originally anl), however, remains unchanged
.

s-,

vowels within a Pada, obviously owing to the -t which at one time followed.
There happen to be only five occurrences of this form under the conditions required:
a vahan am (I. 8418J; gkosan t'lttara (iii. 338); sphuran rjipyam (vi. 67"); gacchan id
(vm. 795); gacchan icttara (x. 1010)3.
before

Before consonants.

Final n remains unchanged before all gutturals

(including n). It
iSj however, liable to be changed before the following sounds:
a. Before />, finals, when etymologically ^ns, sometimes becomes w^;
thus nhnh pahi (vm. 843)+; nfmh pAtram (i. 121').
b. Before all palatals that occur it becomes palatal fi; e. g. urdhvdn
cardthaya (1.36"*) for urdhvdn; tan jusetham (y.^i^) ior tdn; vajrin chnathihi
( I. 635) for vajrin snathihi^; devdh chlokah (x. 12 5) for devdn slokah.
Before o, however, the palatal sibilant is sometimes inserted in the
RV., the then becoming Anusvara. This insertion occurs only when the
2.

and

labials (including m), as well as before voiced dentals

'^

is etyrpologically justified (that is, in the nom. sing, and ace. pi.
masc.) almost exclusively (though not invariably) before ca and cid; thus
anuySjdtns ca (x. 51*), amenims cid (v. 31^^. In the other Samhitas the
inserted sibilant becomes commoner, occurring even where it is not etymologically justified (that is, in the 3. pi. impf, and the voc. and loc. of ft-

sibilant

stems)

*.

Before dental t^, final n

sometimes inserted in the RV., the
however, occurs in the RV. only
commoner in the other Samhitas ',
c.

usually remains; but the dental sibilant

n then becoming Anusvara.

when

it

where

it

is

is

This insertion,

etymologically justified;

it

is

appears even when not etymolog-

ically justified.

d. Before y r v h, final n as a rule remains unchanged; but -an, -In,

sometimes become -am^^, -Tmr, -umr, as before vowels; e.g. -annani
rayivfdhah (vii. pi^) for -annan; dadvdm va (x. 1323) for dadvSn; panmr
hatam (i. 184^) for panin; ddsyumr yonau (i. 63:) for ddsyUn.^
e. Before /, final n always becomes nasalized / '^; e. g.jigivdllaksdm{\i.i2'^).
the dental sibilant, final n remains; but a transitional t^^
f. Before
may be inserted; e. g. ahant sdhasa (i. 80^) 'he slew with might'; tdn mm
may also be written tdnt sdtn'"'. In the former example the t is organic;
from snch survivals it spread to cases where it was not justified. A similar

-un

may take place before /; that is, vajrin snathihi may become vajrin
snathihi or vajrin chnathihi (through vajrinc snathihi for vajrint snathihi) '5.
insertion

Cp. Cretic Xwov?.

In all the other Sainhitas the pause
forms -an -in -tin -fn predominate. In the
post-Vedic language they became the only
allowable forms.
3 Cp. Oldenberg 428.
1

post-Vedic language a sibilant is invariably

inserted after n before all voiceless palatals,
cerebrals, and dentals.
9 Neither th nor t fh occur in the Sarnhitas after final n.
1

Cp.

Lanman

5_i6

a, note.

For dadhanvdmydh of theRV. (ix. 1071)

the VS. (XIX. 2) has dadhanva yah.
5 For examples of nominatives with this and SV.,
J2 As m does before /;
see above 75, 4.
Sandhi, see LanMan 506 A, note, 512 (top),
13 Before s a transitional k may similarly
SI7be inserted after a final ii ; e. g. pratyah sd
6 Op. cit., 506 A, note, and 514.
may also be written pralyaiik sd.
7 Op. cit., 512.
14 See Lanman 506 A, note, and 346.
8 There are no examples of the inserted
4

The MS.

sibilant

(u.

13") has nfms pdhi.

before ck in the Sarnhitas.

In the

11

15

Cp.

Wackernagel

I,

282, note.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

70

4.

Vedic Grammar.

i. Before voiced sounds.

78. Euphonic combination of final s.
Final s after all vowels except a, assumes its voiced form r before all
vowels and voiced consonants'; e. g. fdbhir idyo (i. i^) for fsibhis; agnir
hotd (i. 1 5) for agnis] paribhtir dsi (i. I't) for paribhris; nijtanair utd (i. i^)

a.

for ndtanais.
s doubtless became r
shown by the Avesta,

The
as

z'',

is

througli
e. g.

an older

in duzita-

transitional

voiced cerebral

dur-ita-i.

b. Final j' after a must originally have become z before voiced

But az drops the sibilant before vowels and voiced consonants,
sounds.
while az drops it before vowels except a+, but becomes 0^ before voiced consonants^ and a; thus sutA i?ne' (l. j*) for sutas; visva vl (l. 3'^j, for visvas;
khya d for Myas (1.4^); no dti (1.4^) for nas; indavo vam (1.2') for tndavas.
2.

final s

b.

Before voiceless consonants, a. Before the palatals c, cA, s

becomes the palatal sibilant /' e. g. devas cakrmd (x. 37'^}.
Before the dental /9, final s following a always remains; z.g.yds te
;

medhiras

After i u^, it remains as a rule; e. g.

tesam (i. ii?).
But s becomes s, which cerebralizes the following t to /:
a. regularly in compounds " in all the Samhitas; e. g. dus-tara- 'insuperable'
4'');

(i.

dnvibhis tana

(i.

3+).

^. often in external Sandhi

independent passitges of the other
Samliitas'^ only, before pronouns; e. g. agnis te; krdtus tdm; otherwise it
occurs occasionally only in the RV. thus nis-tataksur (x. 31'); gobhis tarema
(x. 42'); nctkis taniisu (viii. 20 '^j '3.
c.
Before k kh p ph, final y as a rule becomes Visarjamya (its pause

for dus-tara- (but rajas-tur- 'traversing the air'j;

in the

RV. This occurs

chiefly,

and

in the

When

'

final s

becomes r before

r,

it

(from a stem in -tr), which

before r.
The starting point of this Sandhi was
probably the treatment of az before voiced
dentals, where the sibilant was dropped and
the preceding vowel lengthened to e or u.
The latter finally carried the day, e surviving
only in sure duhita (l. 345); cp. Bartholoa voc.

is

^'\\M

like

an

original

r,

It

may

-to.

MAE, BB. 15, if.; Wackernagel i,

cU does not stand for sdh
7 So

-.du-ddbha-j dil-dds-, du-dhl-^ dii-ndsa-, dii-

nasa-, beside diir-niydnlu-.

in -tar

would become

being dropped
after lengthening the preceding vowel.
2 This
z would be the voiced cerebral
corresponding to the voiceless j which appears
before voiceless consonants (e. g. in dit-sk/ia-).
3 This z would account for the Sandhi of
some Vedic compounds formed with dustreated

possibly

also account for the forms svddkiiTvaiv.Z''),

for svddhitiz va (Pp. svddhitir-iva), and m~ii
Iva (ix. 9615), where the metre requires urn va

for sd tt cit.
8 If initial cerebral
the Sarnhitas, final s

the cerebral being dropped

lengthening the preceding vowel.
4 In the
MS. unaccented -a for -as is
lengthened before an accented vowel; e. g.
laid indrah. InTS. II. 4. 7^ ar for a {n Jinvar
dvft is merely a bad reading (MS. H. 47
jinva rdvdi); cp. above p. 33, note i3.
5
In the compound dnar-vis- (l. 121')
'having a wain as his abode', ar instead of
(cp. anas-vant- 'possessed of a wain)' is
perhaps due to the influence of vanar-,
beside vanas- and vana-. On a still more
anomalous compound of the same word,
anad-vah- 'drawer of a cart',
'bull', cp.

become

(Pp.

p.

338.

cit,

but

mutes had existed in

would doubtless have

the cerebral sibilant s before them.

of initial th occurs in the
Samhitas ; but the internal Sandhi of sthd'stand', in ti-sthati (for ii-stha-ti) shows that
initial Ih would have been treated in the

nrii-iva);

after

No example

same way

as

t.

Final rs never occurs ; fs, occurring only

once in the RV., remains unchanged in

niatfs trtn
It
1

(I.

16410).

The only exception

cdtus-trimsat 'thirty- four',

in the
doubtless

RV.

is

due

to

the avoidance of the combination

12

The TS.

also has

iiis

sir.

lap- 'heat'.

On

the

usage of the SV., see Benfey, SV. p. XLIIl;

Wackernagel I, p. 339, top. The vowel on that of the AV., see Whitney, AFr. n. 84.
13
a.
appears instead of
rd/an
Owing to the far more numerous
in praceta
(l. 24'4) '0 wise king' [p}-aceio rajan in the
occurrences of is before t, combined with
same verse, TS. I. 5. 11 3), probably owing the disinclination to change the^ following
to the voc. p-acetah, as il; would have been initial, the retention of j after ? ii gradually
pronounced at the end of a Pada in the gained ground and finally prevailed in the
original text, having been misunderstood as post-Vedic language, even in compounds.
\

n. Euphonic Combination.

Consonants.

71

form),

or JihvamulTya {h) before the gutturals and Upadhmanlya (h) before

the ^labials; e. g. indrah pdhca (i. 75). But as remains and ts us fs become
is us rs':
a. regularly in compounds in all the Samhitas; t. g. paras-pd'far-protecting';

havis-pa- 'drinking the offering'; ^f-/5//- 'evil-doing'; dus-pddgeneral rule, however, applies in the following compounds:
purdh-prasravana- 'streaming forth'; chdndah-paksa- {KSf) 'borne on the wings
of desire'; sreyah-keta- (AV.) 'striving after superiority'; sadyah-kri- (AV.)

The

'evil-footed'.

'bought on the same day'; bahihparidhi (TS.) 'outside the enclosure';

pradana- (TS.) 'offering from hence (= this world)'.

itdh-

The repeated (or amreiita) compounds also follow the general rule,
doubtless from a desire to change the repeated word as httle as possible;
thus ptirvah-purvo 'each first'; pardhparah 'always without' (AV.); pdrusahparusas (VS.) 'from

paruh (TS.)

every knot';

pilrusah-puruso (TS.)

'every man';

by joint', but pdrus-parur also in RV. AV. TS.

Often in external Sandhi in the RV.^; e.g. divds pdri
^.
'from the sky'; pdtnivatas krdhi (i. 14^) 'make them possessed of
dydus pita

pdrit/i-

'joint

(iv.

i ')

(x. 45')

wives';

'Father Heaven'.

d. Before mutes immediately followed by s or s, final s regularly

becomes Visarjaniya; e. g. satdkratith tsdrat (viii. i"); ubhayatah-kmur (TS.)

'two-edged'. Occasionally the sibilant disappears, as in ddka ksdrantlr {wn. ^i^')i.

e. I. Before a simple sibilant final j' is either assimilated or becomes
Visarjaniya; e.g. vas sivdtamo or vah Hvdtamo (x. 9'); devis sal or divih sal
(x. 1285); nas sapdtna or nah sapdtna (x. 128').
Assimilation is undoubtedly

the original Sandhi* and is required by some of the Pratisakhyas^;

but the
Mss. usually employ Visarjaniya, and European editions regularly follow this

practice*
a. The sibilant disappears in the
dyau-samsita- (AV.) 'sky-sharpened';
saya raja-saya hard-saya (TS. I. 2. 112
litter';

compounds

barhi-sdd- 'sitting on the sacrificial

and, after lengthening the preceding a, ayi-

MS.

I.

27) for ayai-, rajas-, haras-.

Before a sibilant immediately followed by a voiceless mute, a final

sibilant is dropped; e. g. mandibhi stomebhir (i. 9 3) for mand'bhis; mitJiaThe omission is
spfdhya (i. 16 69) for mithas-; du-siutl- 'ill praise' for dus-T
required by the Pratisakhyas of the RV.^ VS., TS., and is the practice of all
the Mss. of the MS.
3. Before a sibilant immediately followed by a nasal or semivowel, a
final sibilant is optionally dropped; thus krta srdvah (vi. 5 8 3), beside which
(though the Pp. reads ir/fl) the MS. reads krtah srdvah'''; ni-svardm (vii. i?)
for nis-svardm 'noiseless' (Pp.^ however, ni-svardm).
As A is the pause form of
79. Euphonic combination of final r.
both r and s, a certain amount of mutual contamination appears in their
Sandhi; r, however, suffers much more in this respect than s. Since both jand r when preceded hy t u have the same natural Sandhi, it is in a few
2.

This treatment of

final s

Cp. Whitney on APr. 11. 40.

Cp. Wackernagel I, p. 342, top.
S \u pdrTto sihcata (x. 1071),
ito probably
ltd u (Pp. pdri iidh).
7 The omission was doubtless due to the

before voice-

and labials, which is

before t, was doubtless the

less gutturals

parallel

to that

original

from of sentence Sandhi.

4
5

ado pito (l. 1877) is probably only an

Ada ?/, not fact that it made no difference to the proapparent exception, as ado
Hence probably the wrong
adas (Pp. adah); the Paippalada recension nunciation.
of the AV., however, has adas fito, for analysis of isastut by the Pp. as isak-stut,
instead of isa-stut, as in isd-vant- (cp. BR.).
adas.
8 Cp. BOLLENSEN, ZDMG. 45, 24; PiSCHEL,
3 Though the Pp. reads adha, the PB. in
quoting the verse has adhah ; see Olden- Vedische Studien I, 13.
2

BERG

369, note

I.

72

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

instances uncertain which was the original sound. Thus it is somewhat doubtful
whether the -uh of the abl. gen. sing, of r-stems and of the 3. pi. act. of past
In the verbal form, the r in the corretenses represents original us or ur.

sponding middle termination

of the perfect,

-re,

seems to decide

in favour

of ur^.
1. a. Before vowels and voiced consonants (except r itself) r remains
not only when preceded by 7 u', but by a also^; e. g. gtr isd (\. 117')^
par devatra (vii. 52'); pratdr agnih (v. 18'); punar nah (x. 575); svar druho
\

(n. 35*)*-

Before

r disappears, after lengthening a preceding vowel; e. g.

appears instead of
24*). In a few instances^ however,
a {= ar), under the influence of -ah as the pause form of neuters in -as;
thus iidko romasdm (viii. 31 5), for fldha; and the compound aho-ratrd- 'day
b.

r,

piina rupini (AV.

and

for aha-.

night',

2.
a.

i.

Before voiceless consonants final r is as a rule treated like s.

Before the gutturals k kh and the labials p ph, it becomes h

of the pause form; e. g. pi'mah kaleh (x. 39^); piinah

But that the r originally remained
pdtriim (x. 85^9); punah-punar (i. 92').
before these consonants is shown by its survival in the compounds pdr-paii-,
But even here the pause form was
svar-paii; var-karyd-, ahdr-pati- (VS.).
gradually introduced; e. g. svah-pati- (SV.); it supplanted the r of antdr
throughout; e. g. antah-peya- 'drinking up'; antah-kosd- (AV.) 'inside of a
store-room'; antah-parsavyd- (VS.) 'flesh between the ribs'; a?itah-patrd- (AV.)

under the influence

a vessel'; and because the pause form of r and J was identical,

the Sandhi of i' came to be applied here even in the RV.; thus dntas-patha'being on the way' (for dntar-); cdtus-kaparda- 'having four braids', cdtiis-pad'interior of

'four-footed'

(for cdtur-).

Before the palatals c

b.

cA,

final

r invariably

(like s)

becomes the

189^) iox piir ca. This applies almost always

even in compounds; e. g. cdtus-catvarimsat (VS.) 'forty-four'. There are only
two examples of the r being retained even here: svar-caksas- 'brilliant as light',

palatal sibilant

/;

e. g.

svar-canas- 'lovely as

piis ca

(i.

light'.

Before dental

t,
e. g.
final r is without exception treated like s;
181*) ioi gir; cdtus-trimsat 'thirty-four' for cdtur-. The retention
of r before t in avar tdmah (1.92'') is only apparently an exception, as this
really stands for avart tdmah^.
d. Before sibilants, final r appears in its pause form as Visarjamya
In compounds, however, it
in sentence Sandhi, e. g. punah sdm (11. 38't).

c.

gis tribarhisi

(i.

Wackernagel

284 note (p. 335). as the form would originally have been
-- and -ur will pronounced at the end of an internal Pad a.
be found in Grassmann's Worterbuch 1693 iidho for udhar, which appears before u,
and m, is due to the influence of neuters
1694, columns 34.
3 r is original in dvar- 'door'; ziar- 'pro- in as, the pause form of which, -ah, would
The form
tector'; z'Jr- 'water'; dhar- 'day'; usar- 'dawn'; be the same as of those in -ar.
udhar- 'udder'; vddhai-- 'weapon'; vanar- avo, for avdr 'down', which appears bebut before
'wood'; ivat- 'light'; antdr 'within'; avdr fore d {avo divdh v. 40^, etc.
'down'; punar 'again'; p-aidr 'early'; the m, avdr mahdh, I. 133^), is due to the
voc. of r-stems, e. g. ihrdtar; the 2. 3. sing, of influence of pdro divdh and pdro diva (for
avo before a, d, m,
past tenses from roots in -r, e. g. dvar, from pdras), cp. RPr. I. 32.
vr- 'cover'.
explained by Benfey (SV. XL and 176) as
4 dha evd (vi. 48') for dhar eva is due to
standing for dvar is probably from vasdhah, the pause form of dhar, being treated 'shine'
(cp.
Wackernagel i, p. 335,
1

Cp.

list

I,

of root-stems in

of a neuter in -as, dhas. In aksd

983) for aksar indur (Pp. aksdr), the
editors of the Samhita misunderstood aksdh.

like

that

indur

(ix.

top).
5

Cp. above 62,

I.

n. Euphonic Combination.

Compounds.

73

frequently ^remains; thus vanar-sdd- and vanar-sdd- 'sitting

in the wood';
dhur-sdd- 'being on the yoke'; svar-sa- 'winning light';
svar-sati- 'acquisition

of

dhur-sah- (VS.) 'bearing the yoke'. This indicates that it originally

sibilants in sentence Sandhi also.
8o._ Initial aspiration.
The palatal sibilant s and the breathing h,
when initial, may under certain conditions be changed to aspirates.
a. After a final c, initial / may become,
and in practice always does
light';

remained before

become, ch; e. g. ydc chakndv.ama (x. 2 J) for ydd sakndvama. The same
change occasionally takes place after /; thus vlpat chuiudri (iii. 33'), for
sutudri; turasst chusmi (v. 40"*) for susmi.
b. After a final voiced mute, initial h may be and usually is changed
to the aspirate of that mute; e. g. tad dhi (1.126^) for tdd hi; sidad
dhota
(x. 12') iox sidad (= sidat) hdta;
dvad dhavyani (x. 16") for havyani.

8r. Sandhi of compounds'.

The euphonic combination at the junction
of the members of compounds is on the whole subject to the rules prevailing
in external Sandhi or between words in a sentence.
Thus the evidence of
metre shows that contracted vowels are often even in compounds to be read
with hiatus, when the initial vowel of the second member is in a heavy
syllable; e. g. yuktd-asva- 'having yoked horses', devd-iddha- 'kindled by the
gods', dccha-ukti- 'invitation'. Many archaisms of Sandhi are, however, preserved
in compounds which have either disappeared from or are obsolescent in the

sentence.
I.

An

earlier stage of Sandhi has been preserved by compounds alone

in the following instances:

a. Several

old phonetic combinations appear in single words: dvi-bdrha'having a double course' for dvi-bdrhaj-jman- (=^ *dvi-bdrhad- from
bdrk-as, with -ad for -as before the voiced palatal) ='; barhi-sdd- 'sitting on
the sacrificial litter' (from barhis- for barhis-sdd-); vis-pdti- 'lord of the house'

jman-

and vis-pdtm-

'mistress of the house' (with / retained instead of/;

3, sam-rajpreserved before r)'<.

compounds with dus- 'ill' as first member, the combinations du-d
duz-d and du-n
duz-n appear instead of dur-d and dur-n
du-ddbha- 'hard to deceive', du-dhi- 'malevolent', du-ndsa- 'hard to attain', dunAsa- 'hard to attain' and 'hard to destroy', du-das- (AV.) 'not worshipping'.
But dur-, the form which would be required by external Sandhi, is already

'sovereign ruler' (with

b. In a group of

commoner

the RV.; e. g. diir-drsika- 'looking bad', dur-dhdr-T-tu- 'hard

dur-niman- 'having a bad name', dur-ndsa- (AV.) 'hard to attain'.
Final r in the first member is preserved in the RV. before voiceless
in

to restrain',
c.

sounds

5;
thus var-karya- 'producing water', svar-caksas- 'brilliant as light',
pur-fati- 'lord of the stronghold', svar-pati- 'lord of heaven', dMr-sdd-'^ 'being
on the yoke'.

d.

Radical stems ending

in -ir

and

-ur mostly

lengthen their vowel

before consonants (as within words), e. g. dhur-sdd- 'being on the yoke', dhursah- (VS.) 'bearing the yoke', pur-pati- 'lord of the stronghold', pur-bhid'breaking down forts', pur-bhidya- n. 'destruction of forts', pur-ydna-'' 'leading
to the fort'.
'

See Benfey, Gbttingische Abhandlungen

15, 105
2

the
4
5

ff.;

Wackernagel

Cp. above 44 a, 3.
Later iiif-pati- (TB. II.

RV.

pdd-blia- 'fetter'

2',

125139.

5. 74), and even

from pas- 'bind'.

in

Otherwise Anusvara, as in sam-rajantam.

in external Sandhi it would be-

While

come

Visarjanlya or a sibilant.

6 External Sandhi gradually encroaches

here in the later Samhitas, as in svah-pati(SV.).
On punah- for punar- in punah-sara-,

dntas-paika-, and antahantah-peya- see Wackernagel 21, 126 y,

note, and above 79, 2 a,.
7 But gir retains
the short vowel in girvanas- 'fond of praise', gir-vdhas- 'praised in

dntas- for dntar- in

in

74

I.

As

e.

vowels

first

(while

'

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

member of a compound dyu- 'heaven' appears as div- before

yu would in external Sandhi become yv), as dlv-isti- 'striving

for heaven', div-it- 'going to heaven'.

2. Compounds in the Sainhitas preserve many euphonic archaisms which,
while still existing in external Sandhi, disappear from the sentence in later
periods of the language though still partially surviving in compounds.
a. A final consonant disappears before the same consonant when the
upd{s)-stha- 'lap',
initial
of a group:
nd{k)-ksatra- 'star',
latter is the
hr[d)-dyotd- (AV.), an internal disease, hr{d)-dy6tana (AV.) 'breaking the

heart'

^.

b.

final

sibilant disappears before

a mute followed by a

as in divd-ksa- 'heavenly' ('ruling over heaven', div-ds, gen.)

sibilant,

3.

sibilant as initial of the second member is retained; thus scandrapuru-scandrd- 'much-shining' and many other compounds, but almost
invariably candrd- as an independent word*.
d. A final s in the first member or an initial s in the second is
cerebralized; e. g. dus-tdra- 'invincible', nis-tdkvari- (AV.) 'running away',
dus-svdpnya- 'evil dream'.
e. An original n in the second member is cerebralized after a, r r s
with the necessary phonetic restrictions (47)
a. In derivatives from verbs compounded with prepositions containing r, initial, medial, or final n of the root
is almost invariably cerebralized in the Sarnhitas; thus nir-nij- 'bright garment',
pari-hnuta- (AV.) 'denied' ( \f htiit-^, pari-ndh- 'enclosure', pary-a-naddha- (AV.)
c.

'bright' in

'tied up', pra-Tii- and pra-netr- 'leader', prd-niti- 'guidance', prand- 'breath',
prdnana- and prandtha- (VS.) 'respiration' {an- 'breathe'). The cerebralization
appears even in suffixes, as pra-ydna- 'advance' 5.
In other compounds n greatly predominates when the second member
j3.

a verbal noun;

is

pana-

e.g. grama-nt- 'chief of a village', dur-gdni 'dangers'; nr-

by the fathers', pUr-ydna- (AV.)

rakso-hdn- 'demon-slaying', vrtra-hdn- 'Vrtra-slaying'. The
cerebralization fluctuates in -yavan: thus pratar-ydvan- 'going out early',
vfsa-pra-yavan- 'going with stallions', but puro-ydvan- 'going in front', subhra'giving drink to men', pitr-yina- 'trodden

'leading to the

fort',

yavan- 'going in a radiant chariot'; also in punsa-vahana- (VS.) and purisavdhana- (TS. K.) 'removing rubbish'.
Cerebralization never takes place
in -ghn-j the weak form of -han- 'killing'; nor in aksa-ndh- 'tied to the axle',
kravya-vdhana-^ 'conveying corpses', carma-mnd- 'tanner', yusmd-mta- 'led
by you'.

The

regularly when the

uru-nasd- 'broad-nosed',
tri-navd- (VS.) 'consisting of three times nine parts', tri-naman- ( AV.) ' 'having
three names', dru-ghand- 'mallet', nr-mdnas- 'friendly to men', puru-naman'many-named', purvahnd- 'forenoon', prd-napat- 'great-grandson'. There is
f.

cerebralization

second member

song'.

is

takes

The long vowel

in

dn-asTr-da- 'not
and asir-daya-

fulfilling expectation', asTr-da-

is due to analogy,
derived from the root sas-.
remains before consonants: dyu-ksd-,

'fulfilment of a benediction'

as a-Hs1

dyit-

is

dyu-ga-t-, dyit-bhakta-,

external Sandhi 'ta dyam (AV.

IV. 196) for tad dyim.
3 Also
in external Sandhi adha ksarantlr
(vil. 342), cp. above 78, 2 d.
4
Divergence from external Sandhi is
sometimes not archaic but due to innovation;
2

Also in

somewhat

place

an ordinary (non-verbal) noun;

less

e. g.

as go- 'cow' instead

of gav- before vowels,

go-agra- 'headed by cows' ; cp. WackerNAGEL 21, p. 129 e. Another kind of innovation in compounds is due to haplology;
cp. Wackernagel I, 241 a /3; 21, p. 128
e. g.

bottom.
5

There are a few exceptions pari-panapary-uhydmcina- 'being led home'

:

'drink',

[S/vah-), p-d-pTna-^ (VS.) .'distended'.

Like kavya vihana- 'conveying oblations'.

The later Sarnhitas always have n after
iri-,
while the RV. always has n; as tri6
7

II.

Euphonic Combination.

Compounds.

75

fluctuation when dus- 'ill' assumes the later Sandhi form of dur-, as durndrnan- 'having a bad name', dur-hanu- 'having ugly jaws', but dur-niydntu'hard to restrain"; also in vardkra-nasd- {TS,.) 'rhinoceros' and vardhrl-nasd(VS.) 'having streaks on the nose'; sri-manas- (TS.) and iri-manas- (VS.)
_

'well-disposed'.

But n often remains in this type of compound: initially in krpd-nilaiwhose home is splendour', candrd-nirnij- 'having a brilliant garment', varsdnirnij- 'clothed with rain', tvesd-nrmna- 'of brilliant power', dlrghd-mt/ia-, N. of
a man, punar-nava- 'again renewed', babhru-nikasa- (VS.) 'looking brownish',
vfsa-nabhi- 'having a mighty nave'; medially in fsi-manas-^ 'inspired', itidragni
'Indra and Agni', ksatra-vdni- (AV.) 'addicted to military rule', 'brdhma-vani- (VS.)
'well disposed to the priesthood',
cdtur-anika- 'four-faced', try-anikd- 'threefaced', jyotir-anika- ^ 'having a shining face', citrd-bhanu- 'having bright lustre',
dhruvd-yoni- (VS.) 'having a fixed abode', pra-mdnas- (AV.) 'careful', fidrimanyu-sayaka-'- (RV. x) 'stimulating the mettle of the bays'.
f.
The final vowel of the first member is often lengthened. This
frequently occurs before -; e. g. anna-vrdh- 'prospering by food', prati-vartd(AV.) 'returning into itself, pra-vrs-^ 'rainy season'. It is often due to the
rhythmical tendency (which also prevails in the sentence) to lengthen a
vowel before a single consonant between two short syllables; e. g. ahi-iuva-,
N. of a demon (from ahi-), urU-nasd- 'broad-nosed', rta-sdh- (VS.) 'maintaining
the sacred law', pavt-nasd- (AV.) 'having a nose like a spearhead', nagha-risd-
(AV.) N. of a plant', ratha-sdh- 'able to draw the car'. Lengthening of a
vowel between other than two short syllables is less common, being probably
due to imitation of compounds in which the long vowel is produced by the
normal rhythm; e. g. dhanva-sdh- 'skilled in archery' and vibhva-sdh- 'overcoming
the rich' like ratha-sdh-; sahdsra-magha- 'having a thousand gifts' like sats.magha- 'having a hundred gifts'. The interchange of short and long is entirely
regulated by the rhythmic principle in sana- 'of old' and almost entirely in
tuvi- 'much'; e. g. sana-jur- 'long since aged' and sdna-sruta- 'famous of old',
iuvf-maghd- 'very rich' and tuvi-badhd- 'killing many''. The final vowel of
prepositions is particularly often lengthened in the later Sarnhltas without
reference to rhythm, especially before nouns ending in -a with long radical
vowel, e. g. ni-vid- (AV.) 'liturgical invitation', abhi-moda-mi'id- (AV.) 'excessively
joyful', ni-nahd- (AV.) 'girth', prati-bodhd- (AV.) 'vigilance', vi-barhd- (AV.)
Sometimes the final vowel is left unlengthened between two
'scattering'.
short syllables; e. g. rayi-pdii- 'lord of wealth', ghrta-duh-as (voc. pi.) 'yielding
ghee'*-

g.

On

the

other

hand,

final a

and

T of the

first

member

are often

shortened before a group of consonants or a long syllable; e. g. amivacdtana-{AN) 'driving away disease' and amiva-hdn- 'dtstroy'vag disease' {dmiva-);
Urna-mradas- 'soft as wool' {flrna-) and *urna-vabhi- 'spinning wool', 'spider',
patronymic aurnavabhd-; kaksya-pra- 'filling out the girth' {kaksya-^;

in the

naki- 'third heaven', iri-n&bhi- 'having three

1

The AV. here always has

the cerebral,

But nr-manas-

Cp. 2l%o pra-sdh- ani pra-sak- 'victorious'.

in the former is probably

'friendly to

historic,
8

as dur-nihita- 'badly kept'.

2

The long vowel

naves'.

men'

and

IE. pro.

The vowel

'eight',

is

probably

originally long,
in accha-

also

in asfd'to'

and

be differently exviiva- 'all', and may

vfsa-manas- 'manly-spirited'.
plained in a-deva- 'hostile to the gods',
3 But purv-amka- 'having many faces'.
4
But vfsa-manyu- (RV. l) 'vigorous- a-rupUa- (iv. 5') meaning, and a-sat-; see
Wackernagel 2', p. 131, note.
minded'.
5 Cp. Wackernagel I, 42.
6 Beside nagha-niard- (AV.) N. of a plant.

76

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

armies'

'vanquishing

(VS.)

sena-jit-

4.

Vedic Grammar.
N. of a seer (from
before a short syllable
on the earth' {prtMvi-),

gduri-vtti-

{sena-);

gatiri), frthivi-stha- 'standing on the earth'; even

in ^rthivi-sdd- (AV.) and prthivi-sdd- (VS.) 'sitting

by

sdrasvati-krla- (VS.) 'made

Sarasvati''.

Extension of external to internal Sandhi.

Sandhi as applied between members of a compound
82.

The rules of sentence

are often found to affect

the internal form of words.

Nominal

suffixes with initial consonants are

of a compound; e. g. beside
This influence extends even to
duvas-yii- 'worshipping', appears duvo-yt'i-'.
radical finals before primary suffixes; e. g. dn-na- 'food' for dd-na-; san-nAm
for ad
for saf-nSm, from sds- 'six'; ndmo-bkis, from ndmas- 'obeisance', with
a.

(as

in

(chiefly secondary)

treated

frequently

second

the

like

from usds- 'dawn') J;

tisdd-bkis

JigT-vdms- for jigi-vAmslengthened as in sentence Sandhi.

'oblation';

b.

forms.

member

havih-su'-

'having

for

havis-su,

conquered',

with

from havisradical

final

In the verb the influence of sentence Sandhi is seen in reduplicated

Thus parallel with the lengthening of final syllables in the sentence,

made long before the ending -hi in didihi beside

from di- 'shine'. The rhythmical lengthening in the
probably due to a similar influence.

radical vowel

the

final

the

more

is

usual didihi,

reduplicated aorist

is

III.

ACCENT.

Roth, Nirukta LVil Lxxn: Ueber die Elemente des indischen Accentes nach den
Whitney, 'On the
Pratigakhja Sutren.
Benfey, VoUstandige Grammatik p.
13.
nature and designation of the accent in Sanskrit', Transactions of the American Philological Association, 1869
70; Oriental and Linguistic Studies 2, 318 ff. ; Sanskrit Grammar3,
Haug, Ueber das Wesen und den
p. 28
33 see also General Index, s. v. 'Accent'.
Werth des wedischen Accents, Miinchen 1873 (cp. Weber, Indische Streifen 3, 335 ff.;
Wackernagel, Altindische Grammatik i, 243 ff.
Whitney, JAOS. 10, ixff., cnif.).
Cp. also HiRT, Der indogermanische Akzent, Strassburg 1895, and Akzentstudien in IF.
VI IX; Brugmann, Kurze vergleichende Grammatik I (Strassburg 1902), p. 52
(>6.
Besides the PratiSakhyas several other native authorities refer to the accent. Panini
and his commentators give an account of it; all the Sutras of Panini relating to accentuation are collected in a chapter of the Siddhanta-kaumudi called vaidika-svara-prakriyd
'section on the Vedic accent'. The accent is further dealt with in the Bhasikasutra, in
the Pratijnasntra, in the Siksas, and as regards the position of the accent in individual
words, in the Unadisutras and especially in the Phitsfltras.

In Vedic literature
83. General character of the Vedic accent.
sacred texts only, primarily all the Sainhitas ^ have been handed down in an
accented form.
Of all other sacred texts, only those to which a special
importance was attached, have preserved the accent. These are the Taittiriya
Brahmana (together with its Aranyaka) and the Satapatha Brahmana (including
the Brhadaranyaka Upanisad). There is, however, evidence to show -that the
Paiicaviinsa Brahmana^ and other Brahmanas were at one time accented''.
1 On
the relation of this shortening to
the lengthening in the same position, and
its probable explanation, see Wackernagel

2'. P- 135 (56 g).

2 Hence the Padapatha treats

a nominal
stem which takes a suffix with initial consonant

the
separating

like
e.

g.

first
it

member

from the

dtivah-Syuh.

for

of

suffix

diaioyuh;

a compound,
by Avagraha;
adriSziak for
utiibhih

adrivah, voc, 'armed with a bolt';

for utibhis 'with aids'.
3

See above 44

a,

3.

See 57,

i.

The Mss.

of the Kathaka are so

defective as regards accentuation that L. v.
Schroeder found it possible to print parts
only of his edition of the text (vol. I, 1900)
witli accents.
5

Weber, Indische Studien 10, 421 cp.

MiiLLER, ASL. 348; Burnell, Samavidhana Brahmana p. VI. The Mantra parts
6

Max

of the AitareyaAranyaka are accented (Keith's

ed. p. 10).
7

The Suparnadhyaya, an

artificially

archaic

III.

The

Sutras,

Accent.

General Character of Vedic Accent.

77

though not themselves accented, occasionally accent the Mantras

ivhich they quote.

The Vedic accent,

riusical nature.

This

is

like

that of ancient Greece, was of an essentially

indicated by the fact that the accent exercises no

on the rhythm of versification. The phoneticians of the Pratiit,

speak only of its pitch, which is also indicated by
the name of the chief tone, ud-atta 'raised', 'high'
But that the Vedic accent
was accompanied by some stress ^ is shown by certain phonetic changes which
cannot otherwise be explained^.
In the Vedic accent three degrees of pitch may be distinguished the
high, properly represented by the udatta, the middle by the svarita ('sounded'),
and the low by the an-udatta ('not raised'). That the Udatta originallydenoted the highest pitch in the oldest form of the Vedic language, is
shown by the evidence of Comparative Philology, and especially of Greek
which, as far as its peculiar laws of accent will admit, has the acute on the
same syllable as in the Vedic language has the Udatta (e. g. A//6f divas
smd sapid; oktm astdu). This conclusion is also supported by the method
of marking the Udatta in the Samaveda, the Maitrayani Sainhita, and the
Kathaka. In the Rgveda, however, the Udatta has a middle pitch, lower
than that of the Svarita, as is shown both by the way in which it is marked
and by the account given of it in the Pratisakhyas. This must be an innovation,
though an old one.
The Svarita is a falling accent of a dependent nature, marking
the transition from an accented to a toneless syllable.
It regularly follows
an Udatta, to the rise of which its fall corresponds in pitch. It assumes an
independent appearance when the preceding Udatta is lost in consequence of
the vowel that bears the Udatta being changed to a semivowel in Sandhi.
It is described in Panini i. 2 3't as
a combination of Udatta and Anudatta,
which means that it falls from the high pitch of the acute to the low pitch
of unaccented syllables.
According to the RV. Pratisakhya and the TS.

influence

E(akhyas, in describing

'.

Pratisakhya, however, the first part of the Svarita sounds higher than the
This means that, instead of falling immediately from the high pitch
Udatta.
of the preceding Udatta, it first rises somewhat before falling to low pitch ^It would thus have something of the nature of a circumflex in the RV.; only
the rise in pitch above the highest level of the Udatta is but slight (corresponding to the initial rise of the Udatta from Anudattatara to Anudatta
level), while the fall corresponds to the total rise of the Udatta^. The low
tone of the syllables preceding an accented syllable (with Udatta or Svarita)
When it follows a
called an-udatta 'not raised' in the Pratisakhyas ^
is
Svarita it is called the pracaya^ {svara), or 'accumulated pitch' (as several
such unaccented syllables often occur in succession) which continues at the
low level reached by the preceding Svarita till the syllable immediately

poem composed
hymns,

is

mistakes;

in the style of the Vedic

accented, but with many
see Grube's edition in Indische
also

Studien, vol. Xiv.

1 Cp. Haug, op. cit. 19.
2 The Vedic accent, like the Greek, was,
after the beginning of our era, changed to
a stress accent which, however, unlike the
modern Greek stress accent, did not remain
on the original- syllable, but is regulated by
the quantity of the last two or three syllables,
much as in Latin; cp. Haug 99, end.

3 See Wackernagel i, 218 and cp. OsTHOFF, Morphologische Untersuchungen 4, 73.

4 In agreement with VPr. I. 126; APr. 1.

17; cp.

Haug

73.

See Oldenberg, Prolegomena 483 f.

6 According to Panini's account the Svarita
does not rise above Udatta pitch before
5

falling; see
7

Oldenberg,

See RPr.
Haug 92

Ul. i; cp.
f.

loc. cit.

Haug

91.

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

preceding the next accent'. The latter syllable, called sanna-tara 'lower' or
^ 'more lowered', sinks somewhat belovv this monotone.
of marking the accent.
Methods
The accent is maiked in tie
84.

antidatta-tara

Vedic

'

texts in four different ways.

I.

The system of the Rgveda

the Taittirlya Sarnhita (along with

its

tions in the treatment of the Svarita,

is followed also by the Atharvaveda '^,

Brahmana) and, with only slight deviaby the Vajasaneyi Sarnhita. This system

peculiar in not marking the principal accent at all.

The explanation is
doubtless to be found in the fact that the pitch of the Udatta is in the RV.
intermediate between that of the other two tones.
Hence the preceding
Anudatta, as having low pitch, is marked by a horizontal stroke below the

is

syllable, while the following

by a

vertical stroke

above

Svarita,

as rising to a

higher pitch, is marked

agntna. The

the syllable''; e.g. ^ffi^^i agnina

presence of successive Udattas at the beginning of a hemistich is recognizable

by the absence of all marks till the Svarita which follows the last of them,
or the Anudatta which follows the last of them and precedes the next accented
syllable; thus (TToiT aiffTf tav a yatam
tdvet
tav a yatam; tavet tat satyam
tat satyam. On the other hand, all the unaccented syllables at the beginning of a
hemistich are marked; e. g. ^^T'lTW
vaisranaram
vaisvanardm. But all the
syllables following a Svarita remain unmarked till the one immediately preceding
the next Udatta or Svarita; e. g. ?H flf i!^ JJH^ ^Jl^afrl 'Jfifgr imam me gahge
yamune sarasvaii suiudri
i??idm me gaiige yamune sarasvati sittudri^.
a. The hemistich being treated as the unit with regard to accentuation*,
the marking of the Anudatta and of the Svarita is not limited to the word
containing the Udatta which those accents precede and follow respectively'.
Hence the final syllable of one word may be marked with an Anudatta as
preceding an Udatta of the next initial syllable; or the initial syllable of one
word may be marked with the Svarita following the Udatta at the end of
the preceding word; e. g. 'ggfvraifisrfiTT purvebhij- rdbhir
ptlrvebhir fsibhir;
aTniraTTT yajfiam ddhvaram
yajndm adhvardm. But if an initial syllable
after a final Udatta precedes an accented syllable, it loses the enchtic Svarita
and must be marked as Anudatta; e. g. Sg^rffcraiT devam rtvijdm
devdm

=
=

rtvijam.
b. If an independent Svarita^ precedes an Udatta,

numeral \

when

vowel

it

is

marked with the

and with a (3) when it is long, the

figures receiving both the sign of the Svarita and that of the Anudatta 9 which
precedes an Udatta; e.g. ^rm\ ^\ =apsv antdr; XW\\'^^\
rayo 'vdnih.
The phenomenon is described by the phoneticians with the words kampa
(i)

its

is

short,

See Oldenberg, Prolegomena 485, end.

Sanna-tara, APr. I. 43; anudatta-tara in

vrtti on Panini 1. 24.
Mss. of the AV., however, show
3 The
considerable variations;
see Whitney's
Translation p. cxxi ff..
4 In the Kashmir Ms. of the RV. the
Udatta and the independent Svarita only
are marked, the former by a vertical stroke
above the accented syllable, the latter by a
hook (c\) above the accented syllable; see
ScHEFTELOWiTZ, Die Apokryphen des Rgveda

In the Padapatha, on the other hand,

7
each word receives its natural accent only,
so that where the one text has a Svarita,
the other may have an Anudatta; e. g. in
I.
I-'
the Sarnhita has rqyim asnavqt, the
Pada rqyhn qsnavqi (the latter word being
unaccented has the Anudatta marked under
each syllable).
8 Examples
of independent Svarita are
svar for sum-; kva for kua; viryam for vTriam.
'Independent' Svarita in the above rule is
intended to include that which results from

48

change

Kasika

'

ff.

Cp.

Haug,

op.

cit.

92

f.

6 From the point of view of the sentence

accent the Pada is the unit; thus a verb or
vocative is always accented at its beginning.

to
a semivowel [ksaipra),
from
contraction {praslisla) and from elision of a
(abhitiihitd).

The long vowel before

the Anudatta stroke as well.

the

receives

III.

Method of marking Accent.

Accent.

79

'qbaver', vikampita, and the verb pra-kamp-. In the TS. it appears only
the second syllable as well as the first has the Svarita, and the figure
wel'; as I and 3, is here used.
'

In the

2.

Udatta

the

is

when
as

2,

system of the Maitrayani Sarnhita' and of the Kathaka%

marked by a vertical stroke above (which seems to indicate

accent was here pronounced with the highest pitch); e. g. ^frinr

The two Saiiihitas, however, diverge in their method of indicating
the Svarita.
The MS. marks the independent Svarita by a curve below the
accented syllable, e. g. cflw viryam but the dependent Svarita by a horizontal
stroke in the middle or three vertical strokes above the accented syllable.
The Kathaka, on the other hand, marks the independent Svarita by a curve
below (if an unaccented syllable follows), e. g. cfljj gyrfk viryam badhnati;
or by a hook below (if an accented syllable follows)^ e. g. g?ij ouratS viryam
vyacade; but the dependent Svarita by a dot below the accented syllable^.
Both these Samhitas mark the Anudattatara in the ordinary way by a stroke
below the syllable. In L. v. Schroeder's editions, however, the Udatta and
the independent Svarita only are marked.
When the text of any of the
Sarnhitas is transliterated in Roman characters, it is the regular practice to omit
any indication of the dependent Svarita and of the Anudatta as unnecessary.
In the system of the Samaveda, the figures i 2 3 are written
3.
above the accented syllables to represent three degrees of pitch. Here
I
always stands for the highest pitch (Udatta), and 3 always for the
lowest (Anudatta), and 2 generally for the middle pitch (Svarita);
e. g.
12
3
that this

agnina.

barhisi

the latter

the

in

final

RV.
is

barhisi

(barhist).

But

also

represents

Udatta when

the

not followed by a Svarita (that is when the Udatta syllable is

hemistich or when an Anudattatara preceding another accented

32

23I2_

323.

RV. gira

yajhanaiii hots, visvesam

RV. yajnanam hotq visvesam (yajnanam hots visvesam). If there are two
successive Udattas, the second is not marked, but 2 r is written over the
syllable

e.g. giro.

follows);'

31

(gird);

2r

=RV.

following Svarita; e.g. dviso martyasya

If in such case there is no room for 2
3

instead;

it

e. g.

2U

e. g.

is

RV.

dviso martyasya (dviso mdrtyasya).

the

first

esa sya

Udatta has

pUaye

(esd

u written over

syd pTtdye).

The

dependent one which follows two successive

and the Anudatta which precedes it, with 3k;

(as well as the

marked with 2r;

3k 2r
tanvs.

esa sya piiaye

independent Svarita
Udattas)

3 I

r,

Syllables which follow a Svarita

31

and

in

which the pitch remains

312

RV. dutam
unchanged, are left unmarked; e. g. dutam vrnimahe hotSram
vrmmahe hotaram {dutdm vrnimahe hStSram)
4. Though the Brahmanas do not come within the scope of this work,
the system of accentuation in the Satapatha Brahmana cannot be passed
over here, as it must be treated in connexion with the other systems of the
Vedic period. It is historically important as forming a transition to the postVedic period, when the accent assumed a different character 5. The system
of the SB. in various respects differs considerably from the three de''.

scribed above.

See

Haug 2732;

Introduction to his edition

ZDMG.
2

L. v. Schroeder,
I, p.

xxix XXXlV;

33, l86ff.

Cp. L. y. ScHROEDER, Introduction to his

edition, 2, p.

XI.

On some

of the VS.
see Haug 32 35.
For further details see Haxjg 35 42.
Cp. Leumann, KZ. 31, 50 (mid.).
peculiarities

marliing the Svarita,

4
5

8o

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

only the main accent, ihe

is that it marks
horizontal
stroke below the accented
of
a
means
done
by
Udatta. This
If there are two or more successive Udaitas,
syllable;
e. g. u^u: piirusah.
agnir hi vdi dhdr
only the last is"^ marked; e. g. agnir hi vai dhur atha
dtha. When, however, an Udatla is thrown back as the result of Sandhi, an
immediately preceding Udatta is also marked; e. g. so 'gnim evabhT_ksam.anaIji.
evd abhi-.
so 'gnim evabhiksamanah, where evabhi- stands for evabhiTwo successive syllables are also sometimes marked when a compound receives
a.

Its

chief peculiarity
is

sprhayad-varnah, for sprhaydd-varnah.

is thrown back on the preceding syllable
in the form of an Udatta; e. g. manusyesu, that is, mani'tsyesu for manusyesu.
The Svarita resulting from change to a semivowel {ksaipra), from contraction
e. g. katham nv
(praslista), or elision of a {abhinihita), is similarly treated;
imam, that is, kathdm nv imam for kathdm nv imdm; evaitad, that is, evaitdd
a secondary Udatta;

e. g.

An independent Svarita

b.

from evd

etdd;

te_

'rcantah, that

is,

te

'rcaniah for // arcantah.

When, however, the prepositions & and prd, and final d in the first
member of a compound, combine with an unaccented vowel, the contracted
syllable retains the Udatta; e. g. ehi (= a ihi); praha {= prd aha); citroti-

(=

'bestowing wondrous gifts'.

Before a pause an accented syllable may lose its Udatta or
receive a reduced accent marked with three dots, if the initial syllable
after the pause has an Udatta or independent Svarita; e. g. sa bhagqh samsthite,
for sd bhagd/i\sdinsthite. The penultimate syllable may also be thus reduced;
This may occur even when the following
t.g.juhoti\\atha, iox juhoti\\diha.
initial syllable is unaccented; e. g. 7iqpsu\\apa, for ndpsu\\apd.
d. Reduplicated forms or long compounds accented on the first syllable
or prior member, sometimes receive a secondary accent near the end of
citrd-uti-)
c.

the word; e. g. balbalUi, that is bdlbaliti for bdlbaliti; e_ka-catvarimsat, that is,
Sometimes, in such case, the primary
eka-catvarimsdt for ika-catvarimsat.
accent itself is lost; e. g. eka-saptatih beside eka-saptatih. Somewhat analogous to

double accentuation of compounds is the frequent accentuation of both

verbal prefix and verb at the sam.e time; e.g. abhi gopaydd {c^. 109). Finally,
the accent occasionally appears on a syllable different from that on which it
The irregularities mentioned here (d) are much commoner in
usually rests.

this

X XIII

than in the earlier Books; they are commonest of all in xiv^.

a general rule, every Vedic
word is both accented and has one main accent only. The Udatta is the
It is generally found
only main accent in the original text of the Rgveda.
on the syllable which, according to the evidence of Comparative Philology ^ bore
Sometimes, however, the Udatta is secondary,
it in the Indo-European periods.
being a substitute for the independent Svarita (itself the result of an original
Udatta).
Thus there is already a tendency in the RV. to change a final
Svarita into a final Udatta: the vocative dyaus {= diaus) 'O Heaven', appears
as dydiis (vm. 89"); arya- (= aria-) 'kind', occurring only once (i. 123'),
otherwise and very frequently appears as aryd-; thus, too, sv&n- 'dog', was
probably at one time svhn- for si'ian- (Gk. kucov), which would explain the

Books

85.

Normal accentuation of words. -As

1 For further details, see Haug, 4348;

Vedic Udatta shifted, in a few instances, to
Leumann, Die accentuation des (Jatapatha- other syllables in the Brahmanas and in
Brahmana, KZ. 31, 22 51 cp. also Wacker- Panini's system
thus sapid, SB. and C.
NAGEL I, 252; Bhasikavrtti, ed. by KlEL- sapta, astau, C. dstau; AV. VS. SB. tild-

HORN
2

IS.

10,

397

ff.

'sesamum', C.

Brugmann, kg. 45, 1.

AV. gdhvaraUnder the influence of analogy the

Cp.

sidati 'sit', C. also siddti;

'deep', C. gahvard-.

iila-;

III.

Accent.

Normal Accentuation of Words.

abnormal accentuation simas

etc. instead of the regular accentuation *sunds etc.

monosyllabic stems (93). Or the final Svarita is thrown back
as anUdatta on the preceding syllable: thus 7/^r)'a- 'friendly', beside /wZ/rya-'In some Vedic words, however, the only accent which is written is the

prevailing

in

'independent' Svarita, by the native phoneticians called the 'genuine' {jatya) ^

or also the 'invariable' {nitya).
Always following a jy or . it is, however,
just as much due to a preceding Udatta (lost by the change of i and u to
y and v), as the dependent Svarita is; e. g. kva (= ki'ia) 'where?'; svar
(= suar^ TS. suvar) 'light'; rathyam (= ratkiam, from rathi- 'charioteer');
tanvam (= tanuam from /az?-'body'); ok-ya- {= ok-ia-) 'belonging to home';
vasav-ya- (= vasav-ia-) 'wealthy'. In reading the RV. the original vowel with

Udatta must be restored except in a very few late passages 3.

a. Double accent.
Contrary to the general rule that a word has a
single accent only, a certain class of infinitives and a special type of compounds
have a double accent +. The infinitives in -tavai, of which more than a dozen
examples occur, accent both the first and the last syllable; e. g. e-tavdi
The Udatta on the final syllable is
'to go', dpa-bhartavdi 'to take away'.
probably to be explained as a secondary accent like that of the SB. in
intensives and compounds {bdlbaliti, eka-catvarinisdt, cp. 84, 4 d), where an
accent at the beginning of a word is counterbalanced by another at the end.
A good many compounds of a syntactical type, in which both members
are duals in form or in which the first member is nearly always a genitive in
form, accent both members; e. g. ^iz/rfi-z^arK^a 'Mitra and Varuna', bfhas-pdti-

its

'Lord of prayer's.
Contrary to the general rule that every word is
b. Lack of accent.
accented, some words never have an accent, while others lose their accent

under special conditions.

1.

The following are invariably enclitic

pronouns: tva- 'another'; sama- 'some';

ena- 'he', 'she'^; me, D. G.,

me'; ma. A., 'me'; nau, du. A. D. G., 'us two', etc.; nas, A. D. G.,
tva. A., 'thee'; vam, A. D. G., 'ye two',
te, D. G., 'of or to thee';
'us', etc.;
etc.; vas, A. D. G., 'you', etc.; im, slm 'him', 'her', 'it', 'them', etc.; kis 'some
one' in nd-kis, mi-kis 'no one'; kim in d-kfm 'from', nd-kim, ma-ktm 'never'.
vs. 'or'; iva 'like', 'as it
^. particles: ca 'and'; u 'on the other hand';
were'; kam 'indeed' (after nu, su, hi); gha, ha 'just' (emphasizing); cid 'at all';
bhala 'indeed'; sama-ha 'somehow'; jz^a 'just', 'indeed' (almost invariably with
a.

'of or to

the present tense); svid 'probably'.

2. The following classes of forms or individual words are subject to loss
of accent according to their position or function in the sentence;
a. vocatives, unless beginning the sentence or Pada.
in principal clauses, unless beginning the sentence
S. finite verbs,
or Pada.
y.

all

cases formed from the demonstrative pronoun a-,

replace a preceding substantive, and not occurring at
of a sentence or Pada; e. g. asya jdnimani 'his (i. e. Agni's)

oblique

when used merely

to

the beginning
births' (but asyA usdsah 'of that Dawn').

3
Cp. Benfey, Gott. Abhandlungen 27,
Cp. the accentuation of the SB., 84, 4 b.
system of accentuation this 31 ff.
Panini's
4 In the Brahmanas also the particle vavatendency went still further; thus V. mryaSee below, on the accentuation of
5
(= viria-), becomes in C. vtrya-; and the
gerundive in -tavya (= -tavid) appears in compounds, 91.
6 The A. sing. f. occurs once (viii. 619)
C. as -tdvya also.
accented at the beginning of a Pada as enam.
2 RPr. m. 4, VPr.l. inf.; cp. Haug 75.
1

In,

Indo-arische Philologie.

I.

4.

82

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

when used in the sense of iva 'hke', 'as it were', at the

8. ydtha 'as',
end of a Pada; e. g. taydvo yatha (i. 50^) 'like thieves'.
e.
nd 'not', when followed by hi 'for'', the two particles being treated
nahi tva
invatah (i. 10*) 'for the two do not
e. g.
as one word;
na-nu
restrain thee'; similarly when combined with the particle m'l 'now'
.

'certainly not'.

I.

Accentuation of Nominal Stems.

A. In primary derivation no general law

for the accentuation of

can be stated; but there is a tendency, when -a, -ana, -as,
-an, -man are added, to accent the root in action nouns, and the suffix in
agent nouns; and in nouns formed with -as and -man difference of gender

86.

nominal

suffixes

some extent accompanied by difference of accent.

Root stems wh.en reduplicated or compounded with prepositions as
a rule retain the accent on the radical syllable; e. g. juhu- 'tongue' and

is

to

1.

yavi-yudh-

'ladle',

'eager to

fight';

pra-neni- 'guiding constantly'.

In stems

formed with intensive reduplication, however, the reduplicative syllable is

sometimes accented; thus jogU- 'singing aloud', vdnivan- 'desiring', ddridra-

The

(VS.) 'roving'.

prefix

accented in dva-sa- 'deliverance',

is

vocation', pdri-jri- 'running round'

t'lpa-stu-t-

'in-

^.

2. When the suffix -a is added, the root is accented in action nouns,

but the suffix in agent nouns; e. g. ved-a- 'knowledge', sisndth-a- 'perforation';
but cod-d- 'instigator', cacar-d- 'moveable' ^. When there is a verbal prefix, the
final syllable is as a rule accented; e. g. sam-gam-d- m. 'coming together'. In
a few of these compounds, however, the root is accented, as ut-pat-a- (AV.)
'portent', a-s'res-a- (AV.) 'plague'; and in some others (mostly agent nouns)

the prefix: d-bhag-a- ^s\i3Jm^, prdti-ves-a- 'neighbour', vy-os-a- {AN .) 'burning',

sdm-kas-a- (AV.) 'appearance'.
3. The suffix -ata is always accented on the final syllable; e. g. dars'atd- 'visible', pac-atd- 'cooked', yaj-atd- 'to
4.

when

Of

and

the participial suffixes -at

the sense

is

verbal;

e. g.

be adored'.
-ani the former

is

never accented

ddd-at- 'giving', dss-at- 'worshipping'.

few

old participles, however, which have become substantives, have shifted the
accent to the suffix: vah-dt- 'stream', vegh-dt- (AV. VS.) 'barren cow', vagh-dtThe suffix -ant is accented in
'sacrificer', srav-dt- 'stream', sasc-dt- 'pursuer'.
the present participle of the second (450) and sixth (429) classes and of
the denominative (562), e.g. ad-dnt-, tud-dnt-, aghay-dni-; in the future (537),
e. g. dasy-dni- (AV.); in the root aorist, e. g. bhid-dnt- and sometimes in the
fl-aorist, e. g. vrdh-dnt-; also in the old present participles which have become
adjectives, rh-dnt- 'weak', brh-dnt- 'great', and (with lengthened vowel) mahdnt- 'great'.
5.

'water'.

The suffix -an is generally accented; e.

The radical syllable is, however, not

g.

uks-dn- m.

'bull',

ud-dn-

infrequently accented;

n.

e. g.

rdj-an- m. 'king', udh-an- n. 'udder'.

6.
n.

'act',

Stems formed with -ana predominantly accent the root; e. g. kdr-anacod-ana- (AV.) 'impelling'.
The final syllable is, however, accented

e. g. kar-and- 'active', kros-and- 'yelling', ksay-and- (VS.) 'habitable',

tvar-and- (AV.) 'hastening', roc-and- 'shining' (AV.), n. 'light', svap-and- (VS.)

fairly often;

'sleepy'.

cp.

The

penultimate

is

also accented in several words:

The SB., however, accents both

Leumann, KZ. 31, 22.

particles;

^
I

3
I

Cp.
Cp.

WmxNEY
Whitney

the substantives

1147 g.
1148; Lindner

p.

34.

Accent.

III.

kir-dna- m.

dna-

krp-dna-

'dust',

n. 'great deed',

adjectives

tur-dij.a-

Accentuation of Nominal Stems.

n.

vrj-dna-

83

damsand the

'misery' (but krp-and- 'miserable' AV.),

n.

-hastening',

'enclosure',

doh-dna-

ves-dna- n. 'service';

'milking',

bhand-dna-

(VS.

TS.)

man-dna- 'considerate', mand-dna- 'joyful', saks-dna- 'overcoming'.

When the stem is compounded with a verbal prefix, the root is nearly always
accented; e.g. sam-gdmana- 'gathering together'; but the final syllable is
accented in vi-caksand- 'conspicuous', upari-sayand- (AV.) 'couch'.
7. The suffix -ana^ whether forming the feminine of adjectives in -ana
or f action nouns, is always accented either on the penultimate or the final
syllable; e. g. tur-dm- 'speeding', spand^ana- (AV.) 'kicking'; arh-dna- 'merit',
'rejoicing',

jar-and- 'old

The word

age'.

pft-ana-

'fight'

irregularly accented

is

on the

radical syllable.

The

8.

suffix -an/

ultimate syllable;

The

g.

in -ana,

accent

always accented, either on the

-am being

similarly accented;

is

is,

suffix

is

final

or the pen-

dyot-ani- 'brilliance'; as-dni- 'missile'.

e. g.

the feminine form of action and agent nouns

e. g.

The

pis-ani- (AV.) 'beautiful' {pe's-ana-).

however, sometimes shifted to the

final syllable;

e. g.

tap-ani- 'heat'

{idp-ana-).

10. Stems formed with the suffix -as accent the root if they are action
nouns, but the suffix if they are agent nouns; e. g. dp-as- n. 'work', but ap-ds'active'. There are also some masc. substantives with the accent on the suffix;
e. g. raks-ds- m. beside rdks-as- n. 'demon'.
11. The suffix -a, forming action nouns from roots and secondary con-

jugation stems,

invariably' accented;

is

e. g.

nind-a- (AV.) 'blame';

jigis-d-

gamay-d- (AV.) 'causing to go'; asvay-A- 'desire for horses'.

The suffix -ana^ forming middle participles, is normally accented on
syllable; e. g. ad-and- 'eating'. Reduplicated stems, however, regularly

'desire to win';
12.

the final
accent the

first

syllable; e. g. dad-ana-

'giving',

johuv-ana- 'invoking'.

few

others accent the root; e. g. cit-ana- (AV.) 'shining', dyut-ana- (RV'.) 'beaming'
(beside the usual dyut-and-Y. There are also a few adjectives and substantives
ending in -ana in which the primary character of the suffix or the derivation
of the word is doubtful. These also accent the first syllable; e. g. vdsav-ana'possessing wealth', pdrs-ana- m. 'abyss' J.
13. No general rule can be stated regarding the suffix
suffix or the

root being accented with about equal frequency;

-i,

either the

e. g. aj-i- 'race',

Action nouns used as infinitives, however, regularly accent

Reduplicated derivatives tend to accent the
'to see'.
initial syllable; e.g. cdkr-i- 'active'; while stems compounded with a preposition
usually accent the final syllable; e. g. para-dad-i- 'delivering over'.
14. Stems formed with the superlative suffix -istha regularly accent the

grah-i- 'seizure'.
the suffix;

root;

e. g.

meaning

e. g.

drs-dye

ydj-istha- 'sacrificing best'.

'eldest'

The

(but jyistha- 'greatest')

only exceptions are jyesthd-

and

kan-isthd- 'youngest'

when

(but kdn-

TS. B). When the stem is compounded with a preposition

accented; e. g. a-gam-istha- 'coming best'.
The
15. The suffix -is is nearly always accented; e. g. arc-is- 'flame'.
exceptions are am-is- 'raw flesh', j-j^V-w- 'light', and vydth-is- 'course' (?).
16. The few action and agent nouns formed with the suffix -r, are

istha- 'smallest',
tiie

latter is

accented

either

on the root

or

the

suffix;

e. g.

deh-i-

'rampart',

idc-i-

'power'.
1

If

jahgha-

'leg'

is

formed with

suffix, it is the only exception.

2 See Lindner p. 54, top.

this

3
See below, Nominal stem formation,
under -ana- (130).

84

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

Stems formed with the comparative suffix -lyams invariably accent

When the stem is compounded with
the root; e. g. jdv-iyams- 'swifter'.
17.

a preposition the

accented;

latter is

e. g.

closer

prdti-cyav-Tyains- 'pressing

against'.

The suffix

18.

The

-u

usually accented;

is

e. g.

ur-u- 'wide', pad-i'i- m. 'foot'.

however, not infrequently accented; e.g. /'a'/5-- 'speeding',

The suffix is regularly accented in adjectives formed from
ds-u- m. 'life'.
desiderative, causative, and denominative stems; e. g. dips-u- 'wishing to harm',
bhavay-u- 'cherishing', aghay-u- 'malignant'.
radical syllable

is,

formed with the suffix -us regularly accent the root

But a few adjectives which
e. g. dhdn-us- 'bow'.

Substantives

19.

(excepting jan-us-

'birth');

are never used as substantives accent the suffix;

tdp-us-

both

'hot'

The

20.

and

e. g.

jay-us- 'victorious', but

'heat'.

suffix -u forming independent feminine substantives

accented; as cam-a-

is

regularly

vadh-ii- 'bride'.

'dish',

21. When the suffix -ia forms past passive participles it is invariably
accented; e. g. ja-td- 'born', raks-i-td- 'protected'. But a few ordinary nouns
formed with this suffix accent the radical syllable: e-ta- 'variegated'; m.: gdr-ta'car-seat',
mdr-ta- 'mortal', vd-ta- 'wind', hds-ta- 'hand'; n.
ds-ta- 'home',
:

ndk-ta- 'night'.

the

22. Stems formed with the suffix -tar generally accent the root when
meaning is participial, but the suffix when it is purely nominal; e. g.

dd-tar- 'giving' (with ace), but da-tdr- 'giver'.

Stems formed with the suffix

23.

than the
but is-ti-

suffix;

ksl-ti-

-ii accent the root more frequently

(AV.) 'destruction', dhii-ii- m. 'shaker',

'abode', jiia-ti- m. 'relative', ra-ti- 'gift'. Reduplicated

have accented either the first syllable or the suffix; e. g.
'devotion' and carkr-ti- 'fame'.
When these stems are compounded
'desire',

derivatives
didhi-ti-

e. g. is-ti- 'offering',

seem

ksi-ti-

to

with prepositions, the latter are nearly always accented; e. g. d-hu-ti- 'offering';
the only exceptions are a-sak-ti- 'pursuit', a-su-ti- 'brew' and 'enlivening', and

m.

abhi-s-ti-

'helper' beside abhi-s-ti-

'help'.

f.

formed with the

Derivatives

24.

exceptions, accent the root (invariably

suffix -iu,

when they

with

some

half

dozen

are used as infinitives);

e. g.

tdn-tu- 'thread', but ak-tu- 'ray'.

25.

The

suffix -tnu

is

always accented ;

e. g.

ha-tni'c- 'deadly',

jigha-tnu-

'harming'.

Derivatives formed with the

26.
e. g.

suffix

-tra generally accent the root;

indn-tra- 'prayer', but ksa-trd- 'dominion'.

27.

Gerundives formed

with the suffix -iva regularly accent the root;

be made', vdk-tva- 'to be said', bhdv-i-tva- 'future'.

28. Derivatives formed with the suffix -iha
generally accent the
latter; e. g. uh-thd- n. 'saying'.
Sometimes, however, the root is accented;
e. g. dr-tka- 'goal'.
When the suffix is added with the connecting vowel -a-,
e. g.

kdr-tva-

the latter
29.

accented;

is

'to

generally accented; e. g. uc-d-tha- n. 'praise'.

suffix -na when forming past passive participles

The

bhin-nd-

When

is

invariably

forming ordinary nouns, whether

adjectives or masc. substantives, it is usually accented;
e. g. r-nd- 'guilty',
ghr-nd- m. 'heat'; but a few masculines accent the root, as kdr-rm- 'ear',
vdr-na- 'colour', svdp-?ta- 'sleep'. Neuters (except su-nd- 'welfare') and feminines
{-no) accent the root; e. g. dn-na-'^ 'food', tf-na- 'grass', tfs-na- 'thirst'.
e. g.

'split'.

Originally a past participle of ad-

'eat'.

III.

Derivatives jformed with -ni accent either the root

30.
e. gi

yo-ni31.

An

Accentuation of Nominal Stems.

Accent.

m.

m.

'receptacle', but ag-ni-

The

suffix -nu

is

85
or the

suffix;

'fire'.

almost invariably accented;

vag-nu- 'sound'.

e. g.

exception is vis-nu-'', N. of god.

32. Derivatives formed with the suffix -ma accent the

suffix

more than

twice as often as the root; e. g. tig-ma- 'sharp', ghar-md- 'heat', dhu-md'smoke', but n-tna- 'friend', s6-ma- 'Soma'.
33. Derivatives formed with -man regularly accent the root in neuter

There
e. g. kdr-man- 'action', jdn-man- 'birth', nd-man- 'name'.
however, several masculine agent nouns which accent the suffix; e. g.
dar-mdn- 'breaker'. In several instances the accent varies in the same word
according to the gender and meaning; e. g. brdh-man- n. 'prayer', brah-mdnm. 'one who prays'; sdd-man- n. 'seat', sad-mdn- m. 'sitter'. These stems when
compounded with prepositions nearly always accent the latter; e.g. prd-bharman-

substantives;
are,

n.

'presentation'.

The

34.

suffix

participial

anomalous perfect

-mana

is

never

participle sasr-mand- (RV'.)

accent of these derivatives

is

regularly

accented

except

on the same

the

in

sasr-and- 'speeding'.

The

syllable as in the tense-

stem to which the suffix is added; e. g. ydja-mana- 'sacrificing', icchd-mana'desiring', idhyd-mana- 'being kindled', yaksyd-mana- 'about to sacrifice'.
35. Gerundives formed with the suffix -ya invariably accent the root;
e. g. hdv-ya- 'to be invoked'.

The

36.

suffix -ra

is

m. N. of a god, abh-rd- n.
many words; e. g. gfdh-ra-

usually accented;
'cloud'.

The

'greedy',

&. g.

ak-rd-

xa..

'banner', rud-rd-,

however, accented in a good

dj-ra- m. 'field', md-ra-, N. of a god,
root

is,

dg-ra- n. 'point'.
37. Derivatives formed with the suffix -ri accent the root oftener than
the suffix; e. g. bha-ri- 'abundant', but also su-ri- m. 'patron'.
38. Derivatives formed with the suffix -va accent the suffix rather
oftener than the root; e. g. rk-vd- 'praising', but also fbh-va- 'skilful'.
39. The root is regularly accented in derivatives formed with the suffix
e. g. kr-t-van- 'active', pdt-van- 'flying', ydj-van- 'sacrificing'. This is the
case even when the stem is compounded with a preposition; e. g. vi-mfg-van(AV.) 'cleansing'.
40. The suffixes -vana^ -vanu, -vani are always accented, the first
two on the final,' the last on the initial syllable; e. g. vag-vand- 'talkative',

-van;

bhur-vdni- 'restless'.
formed with the suffix -vara chiefly accent the final
syllable when they are masc. nouns, but the root when they are neuter
n. 'deed',
substantives; e.g. zV-z/am- 'going', fj-'-waw- (AV.) 'able', but /^aV-z/rtr^?The suffix appears with / instead of r in the
<Tdh-vara- (AV.) n. 'thicket'.

vag-vam'i41.

m.

'noise',

Derivatives

adjective vid-vald- 'cunning'.

suffix -vams of the perfect participle is always accented, even

cakr-vdms- and
in the reduced form -us appearing in the weak cases; e. g.
cakr-us- 'having made'.
suffix -vi from the simple root
43. Derivatives formed with the
syllable of the reduplicated root;
first
the
but
syllable,
accent the radical
42.

The

thus ghfs-viI

'lively',

but jagr-vi- 'watchful'.

This word may, however, be differently

altindischen Sprache,

Amsterdam 1898;

Bloomfield, AJPh. 17, 427

world)'.
strebende', according to Uhlenbeck, Kurz- back (of the
gefasstes etymologisches Wortefbuch der
derived;

possibly vi-snu- 'der in die Weite

f.,

cp.
'crossing the

86

I.

44.

Allgemeines UND Sprache

Derivatives

sometimes

the

4.

Vedic Grammar.

formed with the suffix -sa sometimes accent the

suffix;

e. g.

grt-sa- 'adroit',

ut-sa-

m.

root,

but prk-sd-

'fountain',

'dappled', ghram-sd- m. 'sun's heat'.

45.
snu-

The

'joyful',

suffix -snu

is

always accented;

'wandering',

car-i-snu-

e. g.

ni-sat-snu-

ji-sim- Victorious', vrdh-a'sitting

tapay-i-snu-

down',

'tormenting', abhi-socay-i-snu- (AV.) 'causing torments'.

B. In secondary derivation five groups of stems may be distinguished

with regard to accentuation a. those which accent the suffix, being formed with
-ayand, -dyf, -dyya, -in, -iya, -ma, -iya, -mi, -inya, -td, -tav-ya, -tvd, -tvd-ta,
-tvand, -md, -mdya, -min, -mnd, -yin, -vd, -vat, -vald, -vin; b. those in which
the suffix is not accented, being formed with -taya, -tara, -ta, -tat, -tati, -tya,
-vya; c. those in which only the first syllable is accented, being formed with
-i and -ni; d. those in which either the first or the last syllable is accented,
:

being formed by means of Vrddhi with the suffixes -eya, -a or -na (the last
two also without Vrddhi); e. those in which the accent is sometimes on the
suffix, and sometimes on one or other syllable of the primitive stem, being

formed

with

the

suffixes

-bha, -mant, -ya, -ra,

-la,

-a,

-ani,

-ima,

-z,

-ka, -tana or -tna,

-van, -vant, -vaya, -sa.

The

following

-tama, -tha,
a detailed

is

account of the accent in derivatives formed with the above secondary suffixes
in their alphabetical order.
1.
Stems formed with the suffix -a and Vrddhi of the first syllable
from primitive stems ending in -a are predominantly accented on the final
syllable.
This is, however, mostly the case when the primitive is accented
on any syllable other than the last; e. g. amitrd- 'hostile' from amitra- 'foe',
narasamsd- 'belonging to Nara-samsa', saucadrathd-, patronymic from sucdd-ratha'having a shining car', pavamand- 'relating to the clear-flowing (pdvamana-)
Soma'. In several instances, however, the primitive stem is also oxytone,
e. g. kauHkd- 'belonging to Kusika'.
On the other hand, stems formed with
Vrddhi sometimes accent the first syllable, when the primitive is otherwise
accented; e. g. mdd/iyamdina- 'belonging to midday' {madhydin-dina-), sdubhagan. 'luck' from su-bhdga- 'lucky', vAdhryasva- 'descendant of Vadhryasva'.
The
derivative ddivodasa- 'belonging to Divodasa' is, however, formed from a stem
similarly accented (divo-dasa-).
A similar rule prevails in the accentuation of stems derived from other
primitives by means of the suffix -a and Vrddhi of the first syllable; e. g.
ayas-d- 'made of metal' (dyas-), saumanas-d- 'benevolence' from su-mdnaswell-disposed'; also sometimes from stems similarly accented, as paidv-d'belonging to Pedu'.
On the other hand, the first syllable is accented
in derivatives from primitives mostly accented on the last; e. g. parthiva'earthly' from prthivi'earth',
maghona- 'belonging to the bountiful one'
{maghdvan-); but sometimes also from stems similarly accented, as nahus-a'neighbouring' from ndhus- 'neighbour'. The accentuation is similar when the
secondary -a is added without Vrddhi; e. g. parus-d- 'knotty' from pdrus'knot', but hdrit-a- 'fallow' from harit-.
'

2.

The

on the same
3.

suffix -a forming feminines to masculines in -a retains the accent

syllable as in the masculine; e. g. priyd- beside priyd- 'dear'.

Stems formed

with the

somewhat

rare suffix -arii accent

one of the

oflndra', mudgalam- 'viiit oi yiAAgaXaJ

purukutsarii- 'wife of Purukiitsa', usTndratn- 'queen of the UsTnaras'.
last three syllables; t. g. indrani- 'wife

suffix -a/ana in the RV.

unaccented (occurring in the voc.
syllable seems to have been accented \\iAgm%\yj daks-ayand-

The only example of the

4.
kanv-ayana- 'descendant of Kanva'
only); the final

patronymic
is

III.

Accent.

Accentuation of Nominal Stems.

(VS. AV.) 'son of Daksa',

Black

The

one'.

derivative

87

and the fem. ramayani- (AV.) 'daughter of the

uksanyayana-, N. of a man, is unique both in

accentuation and absence of Vrddhi.

5. The suffix -ayi occurs accented on the first syllable only in agn-Ayi'wife of Agni'; vrsakap-ayi- (RV.) 'wife of Vrsakapi', occurring in the voc.
only, is unaccented.
6. The suffix -ayya- forming gerundival adjectives is always accented

on

first

its

syllable;

pan-Ayya-

e. g.

formed

Derivatives

with

'to

be admired'.
suffix -/ and Vrddhi,

being almost
always accent the first syllable; thus sgnives-i- 'son
of Agnivesa', pdurukuts-i- 'descendant of Purukutsa', prdtardan-i- 'descendant
of Pratardana', prahrad-i- (AV.) 'son of Prahrada', sdmvaran-i- 'descendant of
Samvarana'. Similarly formed and accented is sarath-i- 'charioteer' (from
sa-rdtha-m 'on the same chariot'). Two other words, formed without Vrddhi,
take the secondary -i: tdpus-i- 'burning' {tdptis- 'heat') and, accented on the
final syllable, sucant-i-, N. of a man.
8. The very frequent suffix -in forming possessive adjectives is always
accented; e. g. asv-in- 'possessing horses', dhan-in- 'wealthy'; manis-in- 'wise';
abhimat-in- 'insidious'. The adjective sak-in- 'powerful' occurs once accented
on the first syllable: sAk-T (i. 51*); the accentuation of this form and of the
two nominatives (each occurring once) ir-i 'violent' and sdr-i 'speeding' is
7.

the

exclusively patronymics,

perhaps due to

The

9.

stems

and

in -tra-

krtr-ima-

'artificial',

The

10.

error.

syllable;

of the

accentuation

suffix -iya

e. g.

suffix

which

-ima^

is

attached to three

khanitr-ima- 'made by digging',

putr-ima- (AV.) 'purified'; agr-imd- 'foremost'.

one

to

abhr-iya-

in -ra,

varies:

is regularly accented either on its first or

and abhr-iyd- 'derived from the clouds'

its

second

{abhrd-),

ksatr-iya- 'having authority' {ksatrd-), amitr-iya- 'inimical' iamitra- 'foe'); agriyd- 'foremost', indr-iyd- 'belonging to Indra'.

(AV.) 'being in season' {rtu-),

The

only exceptions are ftv-iyasrotr-iya- (AV.) 'learned'

and

beside rtv-iya-,

(Jrotra- 'learning').

commonly accent

Derivatives with the feminine suffix -T

11.

same

the

the corresponding masculines (except oxytones); e. g. bhdvant-iBut the feminine in -i from masculines in -a that are
'being', m. bhdvant-.
not accented on the final syllable usually accents the -T (and follows the
as

syllable

radical
-f

is

t-

declension)

also

e. g.

accented when

p_rtAv-i- 'hxoa.d'

rath-i- 'charioteer' (m.

it

'protectress'

'facing'

(praty-dnc-).

{avi-tdr-};

The

in

-u,

e. g.

Samprasarana, e. g. pratic-imasc. oxytones in -a sometimes

devi- 'goddess' {devd- 'god'), but more

-anc

taking

g.

drus-i- 'ruddy' (arum-).

on

its

first

syllable, rarely

on

samvatsar-ina- 'annual'; pratic-ind- 'turned

unaccented only in mAk-Tna- (RV.) 'mine'.

apac-ina- 'western',

The suffix is
suffix -Tya is always accented on
The
13.
a kind of Soma vessel, ahavan-iya- (AV.)

towards'.

lya-

e. g.

The

'chariot'.

fem. in -T from

retains the accent on the suffix, e. g.

usually throws it back on the first syllable, e.
12. The suffix -ina is generally accented
last;

from rdtha-

{prih-u-)\ '\n.-ant, e.g. usat-i- 'desiring' (us-dnt-); in -tdr, e.g.

avitr-i-

its

f.)

forms the fem. of masc. oxytones in

its

first

syllable;

'sacrificial fire',

e. g.

arjTk-

grhamedh-iya-

Similarly
'relating to the domestic sacrifice', parvat-iya- (AV.) 'mountainous'.
in the ordinals dvit-iya- 'second', trt-iya- 'third', tur-iya- 'fourth'.
14. The suffix -ena is accented on the final in its only occurrence in

the feminine form satnidh-eni- 'relating to fuel' {samidh-).

regularly accents
15. The suffix -e/J/a, nearly always forming gerundives,

88

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

its

first

syllable;

and

Vedic Grammar.

The only exception

drs-inya- 'worthy to be seen'.

e. g.

is

Similarly accented are the ordinary adjectives vtr-enya-

vdr-enya- 'desirable'.
'manly' (vird-)

4.

lart-enya- 'famous' {kXrti- 'fame').

formed with the suffix -eya and Vrddhi accent the final
a patronymic sense, but otherwise the first; e. g.
ars-eyd- 'descendant of a seer' (fsi-), but pdurus-eya- 'relating to man' (Jiurusa-).
The analogy of the gerundive from roots ending in -a, which is formed with
'to
be given'), is followed by didrks-iya- 'worth seeing'
-eya
(e. g. deya(didrksd-) and sabh-eya- 'fit for an assembly' {sabha-).
Those which
17. Derivatives formed with -ka are variously accented.
have a diminutive sense regularly accent the suffix; e. g. arbha-kd- 'small',
kamna-kd-^ 'youth', kumara-kd- 'little boy'. Otherwise the accent sometimes
remains on the same syllable as in the primitive; e. g. dnta-ka- 'making an
end' {dnta-), yusmd-ka- 'your' {yusmd-') ; or it shifts to the suffix, e. g. anya-kd16. Derivatives

syllable

when they have

'other' (anyd-), sana-ka- 'old' (sdna-); or to the first syllable,

e. g.

'having an assumed form' (rupd- 'form').

18. The rare suffix -ia is regularly accented: eka-td- (VS.)

Names,

riipa-ka- (AV.)
dvi-td-

'First',

muhur-td- 'moment'.
19. Derivatives formed with the suffix -tana or its syncopated form -ina
are variously accented: nil-tana- and nti-tna- 'present', sana-tdna- (AV.) and
sand-tna- (AV.) 'lasting', pra-tnd- 'ancient'.
20. The suffix -fama when forming superlatives is hardly ever accented^,
the primitive nearly always retaining its original accent; e. g. tavds-tama-'^
'very strong'. But when it forms ordinals the final syllable is accented; e. g.
'Second',

tri-td-

'Third' as Proper

ava-td- 'well',

sata-tamd- 'hundredth'.
21.

of so

many

few adjectives formed with -taya from numerals meaning 'consisting

parts', accent the primitive
cdtus-taya- (AV.) 'fourfold', ddsa-taya:

'tenfold'.

22.

The

suffix -iara forming comparatives

primitive retaining

exception

its

original accent;

e. g.

is

hardly ever accented, the

rathi-fara- 'better car-fighter'.

An

vrtra-tdra- 'a worse Vrtra'.

is

23. Derivatives formed with -t& regularly accentuate the syllable preceding
the suffix;
nature'.

24.
as those

e. g.

a-go-ta- 'want of cows', devd-ta- 'divinity', purusd-ta-

The only exception

Derivatives

formed with

formed with
-ta;

e. g.

'human

a-vira-ta- 'want of sons'.

is

and

-tail

a-ristd-tati-

-tat

have the same accentuation

'security',

devd-tati- 'divinity', sdtn-

'good fortune'. The accent is exceptional in dsta-tati- 'home' and ddksatati- (AV.) 'cleverness'.
25. The suffix -iya^ forming nouns from particles, is never accented:
dpa-tya- n. 'offspring', amd-tya- 'companion', dvis-tya- 'manifest', ni-tya- 'own',
nis-tya- 'foreign', sdnu-tya- 'secret'.
When attached to the substantive apwater' it is, however, accented: ap-tyd- and ap-tyd- 'watery'.
26. The suffix -iva is invariably accented; e. g. amrta-tvd- 'immortality',
tati-

'

pati-tvd- 'matrimony'.

27.

The very

rare suffix -iva-td

tvdta- 'excitement', purusa-tvdta-

28.

The

suffix -tvana

is

is

'human

accented on

its

first

syllable:

isita-

nature'.

always accented on

its

final syllable;

e. g. Jkavi-

tvand- 'wisdom', pati-ivand- 'matrimony', sakhi-tvand- 'friendship'.

1

Accented kanlnaka- in the VS. The fem. tanid- 'highest', sasvat-tama- 'most frequent'
is kanmaka- but in the AV'. (with the ordinal accent).

the RV.
kanmika-.
in

''

Except puru-lama- 'very many' and

ut-

3 It is shifted in mfdaydt-tama- 'showing

great compassion' {mrddyat-). Cp. below 89.

Accent.

III.

Accentuation of Nominal Stems.

89

29. The suffix -iha, forming ordinals from a few numerals and adjectives
of a cognate sense from pronominal stems, is nearly always accented: thus
cattir-thd-^ (AV.) 'fourth', sas-tM- (AV. VS.) -'sixth', kati-ihi- 'the how-maniest'
but saptd-tha- 'seventh'.
30. The rare derivatives formed with the suffix -na are accented either

on the

or the last syllable: strdi-na- 'feminine' {stri- 'woman'), visu-napura-nd-^ 'ancient', sama-nd- 'like'.
31. With the suffix -bha^ are formed the names of a few 'animals with
first

'various'j

hwt

one exception accented on the final syllable: rsa-bhd- and vrsa-bhd- 'bull',
garda-bhd- 'ass', sara-bhd- {KS[ VS.) 'fabulous eight-legged animal'^ rasa-bha'ass'.
This suffix also occurs once in the adjective sthula-bhd- (AV.) 'big'.
32. The suffix -ma is regularly accented, whether forming superlatives;
.

adka-md-

'lowest', madhya-md- 'middle-most', or ordinals; e.g. asta-mdexception is dnta-ma-^ 'next'.

33. Derivatives formed with the suffix -mant retain the accent of the
primitive, unless the latter is oxytone, when the accent in the great majority
of instances (about three-fourths) is thrown forward on the suffix; e. g. osadhimant- (AV.) 'rich in herbs', asdni-mant- 'bearing the thunderbolt'; but agnimdnt- 'having fire' iagni-).
34. The suffix -maya is always accented on the first syllable; e. g. ayas-

t.g.

An

'eighth'.

mdya- 'made of

metal',

go-mdya- 'consisting of cows', saka-mdya-

'arising

from

excrement'.

The

35.

formed with
36.

suffix

it:

The rare

'manliness',

-min

is

accented

suffix -mna

is

(like -in)

and rg-min-

in

the only two derivatives

{rc^.
always accented: dyu-mnd- 'brightness', nr-mnd-

is-min- 'impetuous',

ni-mnd- 'depth', su-mnd-

'jubilant with praise'

'welfare'.

formed with the suffix -ya and Vrddhi accent the

initial or the final syllable with the same shift as appears in those formed
with -a: the initial, when the primitive is accented on the final (or sometimes a medial) syllable, but the final, when the primitive is accented on the
e. g. ddiv-ya- 'divine' {devd- 'god'),
initial (or sometimes a medial syllable);
37.

Derivatives

of priest' {rtvtj-), garhapat-ya- 'position of a householder'

but adit-yd- 'son of Aditi', prajapat-yd- (AV.) 'relating to Prajapati'.
In a very few instances the accent remains unchanged, as adhipat-ya- 'lordship' {adhi-pati- 'lord'), pdums-ya- 'manhness' {pt'ims- 'maif), vdis-ya- 'man of
srdisth-ya- (AV.) 'superiority' {sristha- 'best');
the third caste' {vis- 'settler'),
artvij-ya- 'office

{grhd-pati-);

while in several instances it shifts from the final syllable to the suffix (instead
of to the initial syllable); e. g. kav-yd- 'descendant of Kavi' (but kiv-ya'endowed with the qualities of a sage', kavi-).
a. In derivatives formed without Vrddhi the accentuation is to some

accent

in
e. g.
to the first syllable;
prdtijan-ya- 'adverse' {prati-jand'adversary' AV.); or from the first to the last; e. g. gram-yi- 'belonging to
the village' {grima-) ; or it remains on the first syllable ; e. g. dv-ya- 'belonging
to sheep' (dvi-), gdv-ya- 'derived from cows' {go-); or it shifts from the final

extent

pitr-ya-

similar;

thus

'belonging

to

a final
the

fathers'

shifts

{pitf-),

syllable to the suffix (instead of the first syllable); e. g. kav-yd- 'wise' {kavi-).
But here the accent may also remain on or be shifted to a medial syllable;

svaraj-ya- 'autocracy' {svarij- 'sovereign'), visvddev-ya- 'belonging to all

gods' {visvd-deva-)\ hiranyd-ya- 'golden' {hiranya- 'gold'), avyd-ya- 'derived from
sheep' (beside avya-ya-), gavyd-ya- 'derived from cows' (beside gdvya-).
e. g.

Cp. BB. 28, 318, bottom.

'

Cp. Preli.witz, BB. 22, 74114, on animal names in -bha.

But antamehhik (I. 165S).

90

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

Vedic Grammar.

4.

But a peculiarity of the derivatives formed without Vrddhi is that the

of them have the Svarita accent on the suffix; e. g. rajan-ya-

majority

'belonging to the royal class' (ryan-); dosan-ya- 'relating to the arm' {dosdn-);
vayav-ya- 'belonging to Wind' {vayu-); -dicndubh-ya- (VS.) 'relating to a
drum' (dundubhl) ; budhn-ya- 'belonging to the bottom' {bud/ind-). The suffix
thus accented also appears in the gerundive in -iav-ya- (twice found in the

AV.) formed from an

The

38.

infinitive

rare suffix -yin

is

stem in

-tu

(like -in)

(585,4).
always accented:

atata-yin- (VS.)

bow

drawn', dhanva-yln- (VS.) 'bearing a bow', mara-yin-, N. of

a man, srka-yi?i- (VS.) 'having a spear', svadha-yin- (VS.) 'owning the Svadha'.
39. Derivatives formed with -ra having a comparative sense (chiefly from

'having one's

initial syllable: ddha-ra-'\o^tx\ d^a-ra- ^\a.ter', dva-ravpa-ra- 'lower', dnta-ra-^ 'near' (anta- 'end').
Other nouns formed
with the suffix are chiefly accented on the final syllable; e. g. a-srl-rd- 'ugly',
dhum-rd- (VS.) 'dusky' {dhumd- 'smoke'), pamsu-rd- 'dusty, rath-i-rd- 'riding

prepositions) accent the

'lower'j

in

a chariot'

kindler'

but sometimes otherwise ; thus dgnidh-ra- 'belonging to the

{agnidh-), midh-i-ra- 'wise',

karma-ra-

fire-

'smith'.

Derivatives formed with -la nearly always accent the suffix; e. g.

(AV.) 'ugly', jlva-ld- (AV.) 'lively', bahu-ld- 'abundant', madhu-ld'sweet'; but tilvi-la- 'fertile', seva-la- (AV.) 'slimy', sihi-la- 'little child'.
The suffix -va is regularly accented: arna-vd- 'billowy', kesa-vd41.
(AV.) 'hairy', anji-vd- (AV.) 'slippery', santi-vd- (AV.) 'friendly', sraddhi-vd-

40.

a-sli-ld-

'credible'.

42. The fern, substantives formed from adverbs or prepositions with the
suffix -vol always accent the final syllable: arva-vdt- 'proximity', a-vdt- (AV.)
'proximity', ud-vdt- 'height', ni-vdt- 'depth', para-vdt- 'distance', pra-vdt- 'height',

sam-vdt- 'region'.
43. Derivatives

any
van-

formed with the suffix -van may have the accent on

syllable; e.g. dthar-van, 'fire-priest', zW/5a-z'a- 'possessed of fuel',

'violent';

rta-van- 'regular',

maghd-van-

'bountiful';

aratX-vdn-

fgha-

'hostile',

srustT-vdn- 'obedient'.

Derivatives formed with -vant generally retain

the original accent

not ending in a or a), which as a rule throw it
on the suffix; e. g. kesa-vant- 'hairy', putrd-vant- (VS.) 'having a son', prajdvant- 'having offspring', dydvaprthivt-vant- 'connected with heaven and earth';
but agni-vdnt' 'having fire' {agni-), asan-vdnt {KSl^ 'having a mouth'. The
accent is anomalously shifted in krsaiia-vant- 'decorated with pearls' (krsana-)
and visu-vdnt- 'central' {vim-) 'in both directions'.
45. The very rare derivatives formed with the suffix -vaya accent
44.

except in oxytone stems

(if

either the suffix or the primitive: dru-vaya- (AV.) 'wooden dish' and cdturvaya- 'fourfold'.
46. Derivatives formed with the rare suffix -vala accent their final syllable:
krsT-vald- 'peasant', nad-vald- (VS.) 'reed bed'.
47. The suffix -vin is always accented; e. g. namas-vin- 'reverential',
yasas-vin- (AV.) 'beautiful', medha-vin- (AV.) 'wise', dArsad-vIn- 'bold'.
48. The very rare names of relationship formed with the suffix -vya

accent the
49.

first

syllable: bhrdtr-vya- (AV.) 'nephew'.

few

accent either the

adjectives

and substantives

formed with the suffix -sa

second syllable: arva-sd- or

final or, less often, the first or

I This word may,

however, be derived from antar- 'within',
1209 i.

with BR. and

WHITNEY

Accent.

in.

Accentuation of Compounds.

91

drva-sa- 'hasting', eta-sd- ox ita-sa- 'variegated', babhlu-id- (VS. MS.) 'brownish',

roma-sd- '\vwcf,yuva-sd- 'youthful', anku-sd- 'hook', turvd-s'a-, N. of a man.
Perhaps also kdsma-sa- (AV.) 'stupefaction' (?), and kald-sa- 'jar'.

2.

AuFRECHT, De accentu compositorum Sanscriticorum, Bonn 1847.

Garbe, KZ.
Reuter, Die altindischen nominalcomposita, ihrer betonung nach unterWackernagel, Altindische Grammatik 21,
31, 157
232; 485 612.
4043, etc.

23i 47 fsucht, KZ.

P-

Accentuation of Compounds.

87. The rule as to the accentuation of compounds, stated in the most

general way, is that iteratives, possessives, and governing compounds place
the accent on the first member; determinatives and regularly formed copulatives (with one accent) on the last member and to a large extent on its final
syllable. Speaking generally the accent of a compound is that of one of its
members. But some words always change their accent when compounded;
thus visva- 'all' regularly becomes vihd-, and in the later Sanihitas sdrva-

sometimes becomes sarvd-. Other words when compounded change their

accent in certain combinations only; thus some paroxy tones become oxytone,
as pfirva- 'prior' in purvd-citti- 'foreboding', pUrvd-pTti- 'precedence in drinking',
purvd-huti- 'first invocation'; nima- 'one' in nemd-dhiti- 'separation'; medha'all'

medhd-pati- 'lord of sacrifice', and medhd-sati- 'receiving the

vfsan- in vrsd-kapi-, N. of a monkey; on the other hand some
oxytones throw back the accent, as khadi- 'bracelet' in khsdi-fiasta- 'having
hands adorned with bracelets'; gnvA- 'neck' in tuvi-griva- 'powerful-necked';
vird- 'hero' in />i:-z'zV'- 'possessed of many men' and su-vira- 'heroic'; dhumd'smoke' in saka-dhuma- (AV.) 'smoke of cowdung'.
An adjective compound may shift the accent from one member to the
other if it becomes a substantive or a Proper Name; thus a-ksdra- 'im'sacrifice'

in

oblation';

d-ksara- 'speech'; su-krta- 'well done', su-krtd- n. 'good deed';

d-raya- 'niggardly', a-raya-, N. of a demon.
88. In iteratives, which may consist of repeated nouns, pronouns,
adverbs, prepositions, or particles, the first member alone is accented, the
two words being separated by Avagraha in the Pada text, like the members
of other compounds. Examples are: dhar-ahar jayate tnasi-masi {:s..S2i) 'day
after day he is born, month after month'; ydd-yad ydmi tdd d bhara (viii. 61^)
perishable',

yatha-yatha matdyah sdnti nrndm (x. in') 'as

case'; adyddya svdh-iva indra trdsva pari ca
nah (viii. 6i'0 '011 each to-day, on each to-morrow protect us, Indra, and
The prepositions which appear as iteratives are upa, para,
in the future'.
prd, sdm; e. g. prd-pra pusnds tuvijatdsya sasyate mahitvdm (i. 138') 'forth
and again the greatness of the mighty Pusan is praised''. The only verbal
11")'' 'drink again and again'.
iterative occurring is piba-piba (ir.
89. Governing compounds always accent the first member when it is
a verbal noun 3, as trasd-dasyu- 'terrifying the foe', N. of a man. When the
'bring to

me

whatever

are the desi?es of

men

I ^.^C;

in

each

a present or aorist participle, its final syllable is invariably

accented, whatever the original accentuation may have been, e. g. viddd-vasu'winning wealth', tardd-dvesas- 'overcoming {tdrat-) foes'.

first

member

is

2
Otherwise a repeated verbal form is
I
In a few instances the repeated
stuhi siuhi
words are not treated as a compound and not treated as an iterative, e. g.
13).
are both accenteid, as nu nu 'now, now', (vni.
3 Except sik^a-nara- 'helping men'.
ihcha (AV.) 'here, here', sam sdm (AV.).

92

When

a.

the

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

same

the

first

member

is

4.

a preposition,

as in possessives: either the

first

member

as abhi-dyii- 'directed to heaven';

syllable,

Vedic Grammar.
the
is

accentuation is much
accented on its proper

or the last

member on

the final

but only when it ends in the compositional suffix -a, or when as a

simple word it is not accented on the final syllable; e.g. adhas-fad-d-%\ag
under the feet', anu-kamd- 'according to wish' {kSma-). The accentuation of
api-prana- (f. -f-) 'accompanying the breath' is quite exceptional.
90. A. Possessive compounds (Bahuvrlhis) normally accent the first
member on the same syllable as the simple word, e. g. rdja-putra- 'having
kings as sons' (but raja-putrd- 'son of a king').
Other examples are:
dn-abhimlata-varna- 'whose colour is not dimmed', iddhdgni- 'whose fire is
kindled', ind7'a-jyestha- 'having Indra as chief, indra-sakhi- 'having Indra as
a friend', ghrtd-prstha- 'butter-backed', ridad-vats a- 'having a bright calf,
sahdsra-pad' 'thousand-footed"
Similarly when the first member is a preposition, an ordinary adverb, or sahd- and (chiefly in the later Vedas) sain the sense of 'accompanied by'; e.g. nir-hasta- (AV.) 'handless', prd-mahas'having pre-eminent might', vi-grTva- 'wrynecked', visvdto-mukha- 'facing in all
directions', sahd-vatsa- 'accompanied by her calf, sd-kama- ('accompanied by' =)
syllable,

desires' (VS.), sd-cetas-

'fulfilling
a.

The

original accent of the

vuva- 'air always,

and (owing

to

'inteUigent'
first

member

^.

is

sometimes changed, i. The adjective

'all' sometimes in the later Sam-

influence) saiva-

its

shift their accent to the final syllable; e. g. visvd-pesas- 'having all adornment',
sarvd-Janman-^ (AV.), sm-va-suddha-vala- (VS.) 'having a completely white tail', sarvayus(VS.) 'having all life"*.
2. Present participles in several instances shift the accent to
their final syllable; e. g. krandad-isti- 'having roaring [irdndai-) speed'^
dravad-aiva'having swift {lirdvat-'f steeds'. Other participles with this shift of accent are ai-cdt- and
bhaiiddl- 'shining', rapsdt- 'swelling', svandt- 'resounding'.
There are also a few
3.
miscellaneous examples of shift of accent in the first member abhisfi-dyumna- 'abounding
in aid', jyott-ratha- 'whose car is light' (jyo/is-), dadrsand-pavi- 'whose felly is visible'
[dddrsana-], avdkolba- (AV.) 'surrounded with Avaka plants' {dvakd-)\ cdiur-ahga- 'fourmembered' [caii'ir-], khddi-hasta- 'having hands adorned with bracelets' [khadi-].

hitas,

B. About one eighth of the

member, and in the majority of

number of Bahuvrlhis accent the second

on the final syllable.
a. This accentuation is common when the first member is a dissyllabic
adjective ending in / or u. It is invariable in the RV. after the very frequent
puru- 'much' and the less frequent krdhi'i- 'shortened', bahu- 'much', siti'white';

e.

treasures',

total

instances

many sons', puru-vdra- 'having many

g. puru-putrd- 'having
krdhu-kdrna- 'having short ears', bahv-annd-^ 'having much food'

siti-pdd-

Examples

of this accentuation after other

asu-hesas- 'having swift steeds', teru-ksdya'having a wide abode', rju-krdtu- 'whose works are right', tuvi-dyumnd- 'having
great glory', trsu-cydvas- 'moving greedily', prthu-pdksas- 'broad-flanked', vibhu{anna-),

'white-footed'.

adjectives ending in

and u

are:

krdtu- 'having great strength', vilu-pdni- 'strong-hoofed', hiri-siprd- 'goldencheeked' ?. In the later Samhitas there is an increasing tendency to follow

1 When
another adjective or an adverb sdrva- in the AV., where sdrva- as first
precedes the first member, it has the accent
member is common.
e. g. eka-sUi-pad- (VS. TS.) 'having one foot
4 sdrva- shows this shift of accent in the
white'; cp. Wackernagel 2', p. 291.
RV. in the adverb sarvd-ias 'from all sides'
2 There are,
however, a few exceptions and in the derivative sarvd-tati- 'totality'.
in which the final member is accented, as
5 Here the
accent may be affected by
vi-Hkhd- 'hairless' (but vi-Hkha- AV.), puro- that of the adverb dravdt 'swiftly'.
rathd- 'whose car is foremost', sa-prdthas- 'ex6 After iahu- the final syllable is always
tensive', sdngd- (AV.) 'together with the limbs'. accented, even in the later Sainhitas.
3 This is the only example (occurring beside
'
Both accentuations occur in prthtivihjd-janman-) of this shift of accent in iudhnd- and p^thit-budhna- 'broad-based'.

III.

Accent.

Accentuation of Compounds.

93

the general rule; e. g. puru-naman- (AV.) 'many-named', sUi-kakud- 'having a

white hump', and siti-bhasad- 'having white buttocks' (TS. v. 6. 14").
b. Bahuvrihis beginning with dvi- and tri- generally accent the second

member;

e. g. dvi-pdd- 'two-footed', dvi-dhAra- 'forming two streams', tri-tdntu'having three webs', tri-ndbhi- 'having three naves', tri-vandhurd- 'three-seated' ^.
The only exceptions to this rule in the RV. are dvi-savas- 'having twofold

might', try-ambaka- 'having three mothers'

and try-asir- 'having three products

and tri- in new Bahuvrihis as often
as not.
In a few possessives beginning with other numerals the second
member is accented on the last syllable, e. g. catur-aksd- 'four-eyed'^.
of milk'.

The

later Sainhitas accent dvi-

c.
Possessives beginning with the negative prefix a- or an- almost
invariably accent the final syllable irrespectively of the original accent of the
second member (doubtless in order to distinguish them clearly from determinatives); e. g. a-ddnt- 'toothless', a-phald- 'unfruitful' {pkdla-), a-bald- 'not
possessing strength' {bdla-).
very few accent the penultimate; a-bhratr-^

(AV.) 'brotherless', a-vira- 'childless', a-se'sas- 'without offspring'. On the other

hand a good many (though only a small proportion of the whole) accent the
prefix (hke determinatives), especially when the second member is a noun

formed with the

suffix -ti;

e. g.'*

d-gu- 'kineless', d-jnas- 'kinless',

burning', dn-api- 'kinless', d-prajas- (AV.)

d-dyu- 'not

d-mrtyu- 'deathless', d-hri-

'imperishable' 5.

d-ksiti-

'bold',

'childless';,

d. Possessives beginning with dus-^

or su- 'well' regularly accent the

'ill'

second member, usually on the original syllable; e. g. dur-mdnman- 'ill disposed'^

su-bhdga- 'well endowed'. There is, however, a tendency to throw the accent
forward on the final syllable; e. g. sv-aiiguri- 'fair-fingered' {angiiri-), su-phala-

On the other hand, the

(AV.) 'fruitful', su-bandhu- (AV.)? 'closely related'*.
accent is in a few instances shifted from the final to the penultimate syllable,
as su-vira- 'rich in heroes' ivtrd-),

gandhi- (from gandhdgi.

vailingly

'smell')

and su-gdndhi-

'sweet-smelling' beside su-

5.

Determinatives as a
on the final syllable.

accent the last member, and pre-

rule

A. I. In the descriptive type, that is, those in which a substantive is

described by an adjective or an appositional substantive ^Karmadharaya) and
those in which a verbal noun is described by an adverbial word, the accent
e. g. krsna-sakuna- (AV.) 'black bird', maha-dkandis on the final syllable;
'great spoil', ajnata-yaksmd- 'unknown disease', yavayat-sakhd- 'a protecting
friend',

raja-yaksmd-

('king'

=)

'going before', prathama-ja'self- existent',

dus-kft-

(AV.) 'not anointing',

1

But astorvandhura-

'royal disease"", surya-svit- 'sun-bright'; /z^ra-^/r-

'first-born', pratar-yuj-'^^ 'early

eight car-

Cp. Whitney 1300 c.

But in the RV. with the usual accen-

tuation a-bhratf-.
4

For many other examples see Wacker-

NAGEL 2', 114 note (p. 293).

5
The only possessive of

this

which the second member ends in

accents the final syllable seems

kind in
-ti

to

and
be

a-gavyuti- 'pastureless'.

The only exception in the case of dusdur-oHr- 'ill-mixed'.

retains the original accent,
7 The RV.
su-phdla-, su-bandhu-.
6

is

yoked', svayam-bhiia-gharin-

'victorious',

'not aging', a-jicr- 'unaging'.

For other examples see Wackernagel

21, p.

seats'.
2

a-jarayu-'^^

a-cit- 'senseless',

'having

su-pra-tiir-"

wickedly',

'acting

294, bottom.

Op.

cit. 2', p. 295 7, note.

Exceptions, when the first member is
a noun, are all compounds formed with
vihia- 'all', as visvd-manusa- 'every man',
also madhydm-dina- 'midday', vrsa-kapl- 'male
ape', in all of which the original accent of
the first member is shifted.

9
'

11

ddhri-gu- 'irresistible'

and

sadhd-stha-

'standing together', are exceptions.

12
sv-d-vrj' 'easy to acquire' is
ception.
13

But d-mavisnu- 'immoveable'.

an ex-

94

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

a-pra-mrs-ya-'^ 'indestructible',
a-yoddhf- 'not fighting', a-rajin- 'not shining',
a-budh-ya- 'not to be wakened', an-aty-ud-yd- (AV.) 'unspeakable', an-adhrs-ya'unassailable', an-amayi-tnu- 'not making ill'.
a. When, however, the second member ends in -van, -man or -i, or
has the form of a gerundive used as a neuter substantive, the penultimate
syllable

(radical)

accented;

is

raghu-pdtvan-

e. g.

'swift-flying',

puro-ydvan-'^

'going in front'; su-tdrman- 'crossing well', vilu-pdtman- 'flying mightily', raghuydman- 'going swiftly', su-vd/iman- 'driving well', dur-grbhi- 'hard to hold',

rm^t^f purva-pdyya- 2xA pUrva'precedence in drinking', saha-seyya- n. 'act of lying together', amutrabhaya-'^ (VS.) n. 'state of being in the other world'.
2. The first member is, however, accented under certain conditions.
a. It is generally accented if it is an adverbial word and the last member is
a past participle in -ta or -+ or a verbal noun in -ti; e. g. ddmsu-juta'speeding wondrously', dur-hita- 'faring ill', sdna-sruta-^ 'famed from of old';
rju-vdni 'striving forward', tuvi-svdni- 'roaring

peya-

n.

puro-hiti- 'priestly ministration', sadhd-stuti- 'joint praise'.

is

b.

The

privative

compounded with

particle a- or an- when

nearly always accented;

e.

a participle ^ adjective, or substantive

dn-adant-^ 'not eating', d-ditsant- 'not

g.

wishing to give', d-manyamana- 'not thinking', d-kimsana- 'not injuring',

d-vidvams- 'not knowing', d-krta-^ 'not done'; d-kr-a-'^ 'inactive', d-susv-i- 'not
pressing Soma', d-tandra- 'unwearied', d-kumara-'^ 'not a child'; d-citii- 'thought'
lessness'.
The particle is regularly accented when it negatives a compound;
e. g. d-dus-krt- 'not doing ill', dn-aiva-da- 'not giving a horse', d-paicad-daghvan'not remaining behind'; d-punar-diyamana-^^ (AV.) 'not being given back',
dn-agni-dagdha- 'not burnt with fire', dn-abhi-sasta- '^ 'blameless'.

B.

Dependent determinatives

I.

member

and

on the

that mostly

last

as

syllable,

rule

even

accent the second

if the simple word is

not an oxytone.
a.

When

the second

member

is

substantive (without verbal sense),

a root 'J, a verbal noun in -a, an ordinary

or an adjective ending in -z'+, the final

1
This is the regular accent of the tives a-rundhai-i- (AV.) a name, and a-jdrant-Tgerundive with the negative prefix, which (VS.) 'unaging'.
8 Exceptions are a citta-, a-dfsfa-, a-mfta-,
is, however, accented in some half dozen instances d-gohya-^ d-jesya-, d-dabhya-, d-nedya-^ a-yida- n. 'myriad' but (AV.) d-ynta- 'undisturbd-yahhya- (AV.) and a ghnya- beside a-ghnyd-. ed', a-turta- (beside d-turta-'), a-bhinnd- (AV.)
Two of these compounds in the AV. retain beside d-bhinna-.
the Svarita of the simple gerundive: an9 There are also some verbal derivatives
ativyddhya- and an-adharsya-.
in -a which accent the second member;
2 saiyd-viadvan- 'truly rejoicing' is an ex- e. g.
a-ksdr-a- 'imperishable', a-jdr-a 'un:

ception.
a-trp-daging',
a-ddbh-a- 'not-deceiving',
3 sadhd-sliUya- n. 'joint praise',
is an ex- 'dissatisfied'j a-vadhd- 'inviolable', a-vrdh-dception.
'not furthering', an-avrask-d (AV.) 'not falling
4 Here the adverb is treated like a pre- off'; cp. Whitney 1283
88.
'o There are also several ordinary nouns
position compounded with a past participle.
5 There are a good many exceptions in which are accented as second member; e. g.
which the original accent of the past parti- a-citrd- 'colourless', a-mitra- 'enemy', -a-vTra-

ciple

remains

on the

final

syllable;

tuvi-jdtd- 'mightily born', dus-krtd-

su-jatd- (beside su-jdta-).

accentuation
e.

g.

when

puru-sluld-

the

This

first

'much

is

e.

g.

done'^
the regular
'ill

member

\spuru-;

praised'.

Not, however, when the second member

a gerundive, a root, or a noun with verbal

6
is

meaning ending

in -yu, -tnu, -snu, -in, -ir-;

see examples above (A

7

But

ceasing',

a-sascdnt-

l).

iDeside

a-coddnt- (v. 442)

dsascant- 'not
as substan-

and

'unmanly'.
I' But a ni-pddyamdna- (AV.) 'not going to
rest' where RV. has d-ni-padyatndna.
12 But an-d-iastd(KV'.) 'not praised',
a-pra-sastd- beside d-pra-sasta- 'not praised',
^3 There are a few exceptions when derivation from a. root is not clear, as in 6sadhi- 'plant'; otherwise -dhi from dhd- 'put'
is regularly accented;
c. g. isu-dhi 'quiver'.
'4 This suffix being invariably accented in
the simple word (_86 B. 8).

III.

syllable

Accent.

Accentuation of Compounds.

regularly accented;

is

e. g.

95

gotra-bhid- 'opening the cowpens', ghrta-

of water'j go-saphd- (VS.) 'cow's hoof, jiva-lokd- 'wo'rld"of the living', indrasena- 'Indra's missile' {sSna-), krmajind- {KSl. TS.) 'hide {ajina-) of the black
antelope', deva-kom-'- (AV.) 'cask {kosa-) of the gods', deua-mand-i 'abode
{mana-) of the gods'; uktha-sams-inauspicious

'uttering praise', bhadra-vad-in- 'uttering

cries'.

a. The word pati- 'lord' follows this rule in only a few compounds occurring in
the later Samhitas; thus in the AV. apsard-pati- 'lord of the Apsarases', vraja-pati- 'lord
of a troop' {vraja-pati-,^ RV.); in the VS.: amhasas-pati- 'lord of perplexity', upa-pati'paramour', edidhisuh-paii- 'husband of a younger sister', nadl-pati- 'lord of rivers' ; in the
MS.: ahar-pati- 'lord of day', cit-pati- 'lord of thought', vdk-pati- 'lord of speech'. In a
few determinatives pdti- retains its own accent as second member, as nr-pdti- 'lord of
men', rayi-pati- 'lord of wealth', ms-pdti- 'lord of the tribe', also the f. in vasu-patnT'mistress of wealth', vis-pdtm-i, 'mistress of the tribe'; in the VS. ahar-pdli-, cit-pdti-,
vak-pdti-; in the AV. rtupdti- 'lord of proper seasons', pasu-pdti- 'lord of animals' (VS.),
pustirpdti- 'lord of welfare', bhuta-pdti- 'lord of beings', slha-pdti-i 'governor'. In compounds
with pdti-, however, the first member is usually accented, there being 22 cases in the
RV., besides 10 with/a/m-; c. g. grhd-pati- 'lord of the house', go-pati- 'lord of kine',
pdsu-pati- 'lord of creatures', medhd-pati-^ 'lord of animal sacrifice' iniedha-), vdsu-pati'lord of wealth', vaja-pati- 'lord of booty', svdr-pati- 7 'lord of light' ; grhd-patrii- 'mistress
of the house', devd-patnl- 'wife of a god', vaja-patm- 'queen of booty'.
In the AV., of
15 new masculines ending in -pati- more than half accent the first member as do all the
8 new ones ending in patnT-; e. g. dtithi-pati- 'entertainer of a. guest'. In the other
Samhitas also occur: ksatrd-pati- (VS.) 'lord of dominions', bhuva-pati- (VS.) 'lord of the
atmosphere', bhuvana-pati- (VS. TS.) 'lord of beings', bhu-pati- (TS.) 'lord of the world',
samvesd-pati- (VS.) 'lord of rest', visnu-paini- (VS. TS.) 'Visnu's wife' 8.
:

b. Determinatives which have

adjectives in

-ana'^,

-i

and

as their second

-van, as well as action

member

nouns

verbal nouns in
accent

in -ya, regularly

the radical syllable of the second member; e. g. deva-mdd-ana- 'exhilarating

the gods', kesa-vdrdh-ana-'^ 'causing the hair to grow'; pathi-rdks-i- 'protecting
the road'; soma-pa-van- 'somadrinking', talpa-si-van- 'lying on the couch',
pratar-i-t-van-^^ 'coming early';

ahi-hdt-ya- 'slaughter of the dragon', devahu-ya- 'invocation of the gods', mantra-sru-t-ya- n. 'listening to counsel', vrtratar-ya-^^ 'conquest of Vrtra'.

Dependent determinatives,

2.

member
1

past passive participles in

dugha-

retains

its

original accent,

which have as their second

and -na or action nouns in -ti accent

however,
-ta

as

svd-pati- 'one's

own

lord'

is

Karma-

madhu-dugha- 'yielding mead', kama-diigha- dharaya ; as a Bahuvrlhi it is accented sva(AV. VS.) 'yielding desires'. A few others pati- (AV.) 'having an own consort'.
8
On doubly accented compounds with
have the original accent of the first member:
marud-vrdha- 'delighting in the Maruts', pati- see below (3).
9 Just as when such nouns are compounded
divi-caror (AV.) 'moving in the sky', suti-kara'active at the

Soma

offering'.

Cp.

Whitney

1278.
2

few accent the penultimate

of the final
accent,

member

syllable

with shift of the original

as godhuma-^ (VS.)

'wheat',

iaka-

(AV.), yama-rajya- (AV. VS.) 'Yama's

sway' {rdjyd-); cp. WaCKERNAGEL 2', p. 268,

dhuma-

top, note.

with prepositions.
1 The very few apparent exceptions to
this rule are due to these words losing their
verbal character
e. g. yama-sadand- (AV.)
'Yama's realm'.
11 In nidtari-svan- and mdtaribhvan- the
suffix is probably -an; here the original
accent of the first member (if it is the loc.
7ndidri) has shifted, perhaps owing to the
;

But deva-yana- 'going to the gods'.

Also the Karmadharaya sa-pdtm- 'cowife' influence of words like prdiar'-i-tvan-.
12 An exception is sadhd-stu-t-ya- 'joint
and the Bahuvrlhi su-pdtm- 'having a good
praise'. A few feminines in -ya, which are
husband'.
3

Cp. Bloomfield, SBE. 42, 319.

6 In

K. medha-paii-.

closely allied to these neuters in -ya, retain

accent on the final syllable, as deva-

their

96

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

member

(like a preposition); e. g. indra-prasuta- 'incited by Indra',

'ordained by the gods', hdsta-yata- 'guided by the hand''; devdkuti-^ 'invocation of the gods', dkdna-sati-^ 'winning of wealth'.
certain number of determinative compounds,
3. Double accentuation.
syntactical in origin, which have a genitive case-form in the first member, and
Such are bfhasnearly always -pdti- in the second, are doubly accented.
pdti- and brdhmanas-pdti-'- 'lord of prayer', gnas-pdti- 'husband of a divine
woman' (with the anomalous fem. gnSs-pdtm- 'divine wife'), jss-pdti- 5 'head
The compound sddas-pdti- 'lord of the seat' (sddas-) probably
of a family'.
stands by haplology for *sddasas-pdH-, but vdna-s-pdti-^ 'lord of the wood'
perhaps, and rdtha-s-pdti- 'lord of the car' {rdtha-) probably,- owe their j- to
the analogy of bfhas-pdti-''. Though without case-ending in the first member,
sdcT-pdti- 'lord of might' follows the analogy of the above compounds. Other
doubly accented compounds with case-form in the first riiember but not ending
in -pati- are si'mah-sepa- 'Dog's tail', N. of a man; ddsyave-vfka- 'Wolf to the
Dasyu', N. of a man; apdm-ndpat- 'son of waters', the analogy of which is
followed by tdnu-ndpat- 'son of himself (iami-) though it is without caseending in the first member; ndra-sdmsa-^ 'Praise of men' (for *ndram-sdmsa-),
the analogy of which is followed by nf-sdmsa-.
The name nabha-nedisthaseems to contain an old locative in the first member, while the uninflected
stem appears in as-pdtra- (TS. 11. 5. 9^) 'vessel for the mouth'.
92. I. The regular class of copulatives, which have only one accent,
places the acute on the final syllable? irrespective of the accent of the
uncompounded word. In the plural occur: ajavdyah m. 'goats and sheep',
uktharka n. 'praises and songs', akoratrini 'days and nights'; in the dual:
rk-sami n. 'song and chant', satyanrte n. 'truth and untruth', sasananasane n.
'what eats and does not eat'; in the singular: nilalohitdm n. 'blue and red",
ista-pUrtdm^'- n. 'what is sacrificed and presented', kes'a-hnasru- (AV.) n. 'hair

the

first

devd-hita-

and

beard', anjanabhyanj'andm (AV.) n. 'salve

and ointment', kasipu-barhandm

'mat and pillow', krtakrtdm (AV.) n. 'what is done and undone',

dttakutdm (AV.) n. 'thought and desire', bhadra-papdm (AV.) 'good and evil',
bhuta-bhavydm (AV.) n. 'past and future', n. pi. priyapriydni (AV.) 'things

(AV.)

n.

yaj-ya- 'worship of the gods', beside devaydj-ya-, j ata-vid-ya- 'Itnowledge of things',

musfi-hat ya- 'hand to hand fight'.
1 There are, however,
a good many exceptions in which the final syllable is accented
(as in prepositional determinatives), e. g.
agni-taptd- 'glowing with fire', agni-dagdhd'burnt by fire'.
2 The original accent of the first member
shifted in ne7nd-dhiti- 'putting opposite'
'fight', vand-dhiti- 'layer of wood', medhdsati- 'receiving of the oblation'.
is

When

the verbal sense is lost in the

the general rule of final
accentuation applies; e.g. deva-sumati- 'favour
of the gods', deva-heti- (AV.) 'weapon of the
gods'. This analogy is followed by sarvajydni- (AV.) 'loss of one's all'.
4 Though 6rdhntanas-pdti- is
not treated
as a compound in the Pada text, it is so treated
in the Dvandv'a indrd-brahmanaspatX (u. 2412).
3

second member,

in

Thus accented inBookvil,

Book I.

The

hxiX jas-fati,

latter is the only

Tatpurusa

the RV. in which double accentuation

does not take place when -pdti- is preceded
in

s.
The only other instance in the RV.
of a Tatpurusa with case-ending in the first
member and yet singly accented is divoddsa-, N. of a king. Elsewhere occur apsuyogd- (AV.) 'connecting power in water',
amhasas-pati- (VS.), perhaps mdiur-bhrdtrd(MS. I. 6 '2) 'mother's brother' (the Mss. read

by

matur-bkrdtrd-).

In vdnas-pdti- the first member may be

the gen. sing, of van- 'wood' (gen. pi. vanam); but in rdtha-s-pdti- the s must be inorganic; cp. Garbe, KZ. 2,3,490; RiCHTER,
IF. 19, 17; Bartholomae, BB. 15, 15 notei;

Wackernagel 2',
7 The only new

p. 247.
instance of double accentuation
of a compound with -pdti- after
the RV. seems to be nfms-pdti- (MS.);
cp.

Wackernagel
Cp. FoY,

2', p.

JAOS.

248

d.

CLXXli-iv.
9 The two or three exceptions which occur
in the AV. and VS. are doubtless due to
wrong readings.
1 The adjectives being used as substan8

16,

tives.
'I

In the VS. used in the dual also.

and disagreeable'; and

agreeable

and
and

Accent

Accent.

III.

dark', daksina-savyd- (AV.)

as

'right

in Declension.

adjectives

and

left',

97

tMnra-dhumrd- (AV.) 'tawny

saptamastamd- (AV.) 'seventh

eighth'.

The very few adverbial copulatives which occur accent

a.

the first

member:

dhar-divi 'day by day', saydm-pratar (AV.) 'at even and at mom'.

2. The class of
svata-dvandvas, each member of which is dual in

and which in the RV. is about thrice as frequent as the regular class,
retains the accent of simple words in each member of the compound':
thus agna-^imu {hSl^^ agni-soma, indra-pusdna, indra-brkaspdti', indra-vdruna,
indra-visnu, indra-sSma, usasa-ndkta 'Dawn and Night', dyJvd-ksama 'heaven
and earth'j dydva-prthivf, dyAvS-bhimT, ndktosdsd, pdrJanyd-vAtS, prtkivi-dydva,
mitrd-vdrwia, siirya-mAsa. A few others are formed in the same way from
substantives which are not the names of deities: krdtu-ddksau (VS.) 'understanding and will', turvdsa-ydda (iv. 30'?) 'Turvasa and Yadu', dhuni-cumurl
'Dhuni and Cumuri', m%tdra-pitdra (iv. 6 7) 'mother and father'.
a. A certain number of these compounds have been assimilated to the
regular class of copulatives by giving up the accent of the first member:
form,

indragnt, indra-pusdna, soma-pUsdnd, vatd-parjanyd, surya-candramdsa, bhavarudrdti (AV.), bhava-sarvdu (AV.)^; one has been completely assimilated by
giving up also the dual form in the first member: indra-vayii.
a. There occurs once a secondary adjective copulative accented on both members,
being formed from an adverbial Dvandva: ahar-divd- i^?,^ '&3SS.f {ahar-divi 'day by day').

3.

in Declension.

The

93.

on the

Accent

first

vocative, when accented at all (85, 2) invariably has the acute

The
syllable; e. g. pitar, N. pita 'father'; deva, N. devd-s 'god'.

regularly accented vocative of dyu- {dydv-) 'heaven' is dyciu-s'', that is dlaus,

but the nominative form dydus is also used in its stead.
a. Otherwise, in the ^z-declension (f. -a) the accent always remains on
This rule is
the same syllable; e. g. N. devd-s, G. devd-sya, pi. devd-nam.
also followed by monosyllabic pronominal stems in -a;
e. g. from ma-:
I. mdy-a 'by me', D. md-hyam, L. mdy-i; from td- 'that', G. sing, ta-sya, pi. G.
ie-sam,

td-bkis^.

I.

An

exception to this rule is formed by the plural cardinal stems ending in -a.
regularly accent that vowel before endings with initial consonant, and throw the
acute on the ending of the genitive; c. %. panca 'five': 1. pancd-bhis, G. pancd.7tdm% astd
'eight', however," shifts the accent to the endings generally, thus I. asta-bhis, D. astabhyds (TS.).
a.

They

When

94.

This

I.

but

I.

the final syllable of the stem

a -declension)

in the

ndv-A,

is

is

is

the rule in monosyllabic stems;

pi. I.

accented, the acute (except

liable to shift to the endings in the

e. g.

nau-bhis, L. nau-si'i; ddnt-va.. 'tooth':

I.

weak

cases.

A. n&v-am,
dat-&, pi. A. dat-ds^,

ndu-

'ship':

dad-bhis.

I.

The double

accent is retained even in

mitra-vdruna-vant- 'accompanied by Mitra and Varuna', and dyavaprtkivi-vant- (AV.) 'accompanied by heaven
1

the

derivatives

and

earth'.

Retaining the

double

accent

of

the

second member.

AV. the number of Devataonly about half that in the RV.

(though the total number of Dvandvas is
more than double); about one-half of these,
3

In

the

dvandvas

is

Indo-arische Philologie.

I.

4.

have only one accent, which as in

the regular class is on the final syllable.
4 Retaining the nom. -s, instead of *dimt
(Gk. ZS).
exception is the pronoun a- 'this',
5 An
which is treated like a monosyllabic stem,
e. g. G. a-syd, pi. m. e-sam, f. d-sam; a few
times, however,
the accentuation d-smai,
d-sya, a-hhis occurs; cp. Whitney 502 b.
- The accusative plural
is treated as a
weak case and accented on the ending in
again,

98

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

a. Exceptions to this rule are the rare monosyllabic stems in -a, which retain the
accent on the stem; e.g. ffna- 'woman': pi. I. gnd-bhis, L. gnd-su. Individual exceptions
are go- 'cow', dyo- 'sky'; e. g. I. giv-a, pi. G. giv-am, I. go-bhis; L. dydv-i, pi. I. dyubins.
Similarly ///- 'man': D. nar-e, pi. I. nf-bhis, L. nf-su, but G. nar-am and iir-nani;
ksam- 'earth'; L. ksam-i; ian- 'succession: I. ^dn-a (a.nd ian-d), Tl. idn-e; ran- 'joy': rdn-e,
pi. L. ram-su; van- 'wood': pi. L. vdtn-su (but G. van-Sm); vip-'roA': G.vip-as; slf-'fAax':
pi. I. str-bhis; svar- 'light': G. sur-as (but D. siir-i); also the infinitives badh-e 'to press',
vah-e 'to convey'.
In some words the irregular accentuation is due to their having
originally been dissyllables; such are di-ii- 'wood', snii- 'summit', han- 'dog', yun- weak
stem ai yt'ivan- 'young'; eg, I. dru-na; pi. L. snu-su; I. iiin-a, pi. ivd-bhis; \. yun-a^.

2.

When

the

accented vowel of the

final syllable in polysyllabic

stems

by syncope or by changing to a semivowel, the acute is

thrown on endings with initial vowel in the weak cases; thus from mahimdn'greatness', I. mahimn-d; from murdhdn- 'head', D. murdhn-e; from agni- 'fire',
disappears

either

du. agny-6s\ from dhenu- 'cow', I. sing. dkenv-S; from vadhii- 'bride',
D. vadkv-di (AV.); from pitr- 'father', I. pitr-S.
a. Polysyllabic stems in -?', -I'l, -r, and in the RV. usually those in -X,
throw the acute on the ending of the G. pi. also, even though the vowel
retains its syllabic character in this case; e. g. agni-ndm, dhenu-nsm, datf-ndm;

G.

hahvi-7iam
3.

Present participles in -at and -dnt throw the acute on the endings

vowel in the weak cases;

from tud-dnt- 'striking': I. sing.

followed by the old participles
?nah-dt- 'great' and brh-dt 'large', e. g. mahat-d (but mahdd-b/iis)^.
4. In the RV. derivatives formed with accented -aiic throw the acute
on endings with initial vowel in the weak cases when contraction to t and u
appears in the final syllable; thus from praty-dnc- 'turned towards', I. sing.
pratic-d (but L. pi. praiydk-su); from anv-dnc- 'following'; G. anUc-ds (but
from prdfic- L. sing, prdc-i). The other Sarnhitas, however, generally retain
the accent on the stem*.
with

initial

tud-at-a (but' tud-dd-bhis).

This rule

4.

is

e.

g.

also

Verbal Accent.

95. As regards personal endings, those of the singular active in all

tenses and moods are always unaccented except the 2. imperative -dhi or -hi.

Others

may be

accented;

if dissyllabic,

they have the acute on the

first

syllable,

as -dnti, -mdhi.

When

the

tense

stem ends

in

-a

in

the present, in the future, in the

unaugmented imperfect and aorist, and throughout the subjunctive, the accent
on the ending, as it remains on the same syllable of the stem
is never
throughout.
96. All tenses formed with the augment invariably accent the latter,
if the verb is accented at all (85, 2/?); e. g. impf. d-bhara-t, plupf d-jagan,
aor.

d-bku-t,

tuation

is

as

If the augment is dropped, the accenIn the imperfect the acute is on the same syllable

conditional d-bharisya-t.
follows.

as in the present;

e. g.

bhdra-t, pres. bhdra-ti.

The pluperfect,

if

regularly

hardly more than one third of the stems the plural cardinals in -a: as pdnca 'five',
occurring; see Whitney 390 a; cp. Lanman pancd-nam, ddsa 'ten', dasa-nani.
3 The accent is, however, not shifted in
'494, 499, 504 top, 505.
' When a monosyllable becomes the final
the old participle vaghdt- m. 'worshipper';
member of a compound, it loses its mono- nor in the two forms a-coddt-e 'not urging'
syllabic accent; e. g. su-dhi- 'wise', G. pi. (from cod-ani-) zxvi. rathirdydl-am 'speeding';
sii-dh'inam. On the other hand/w- 'pressing cp. Lanman p. 505
6 (top).
on' though a compound {pra-is-] is accented
4 Thus the f. stem /ra^/f-> (AV.), but RV.
like monosyllables in the I. sing, pi-es-i,.
fratlc-i- (cnce in the A. fraltcim).
2 This regularly takes place in the G. of

III.

Verbal Accent.

Accent.

99

formed, accents the root, as 3. sing, cakan (Ykan-), 3. sing, rardn (Yran-),
1. sing, ciketam {Ycit-); when formed with thematic -a, it accents that vowel,
as 3. pi. cakrpa-nta.
The aorist if formed with -sa, accents that syllable,
e. g. 3. pi. dhuk-sa-n,
dhuk-sd-nta (from dnh- 'milk'); if formed with -s, it
accents the root, as may be inferred from i. sing, vdm-s-i (from van- 'win'),
the only accented example occurring; if formed with -is-, it accents the root,
e. g. I. sing, sdms-is-am'^
If formed from the root, it accents the radical
vowel in the singular active, but the endings elsewhere, as 3. sing, vark ( ]/'vrj-),
but 2. sing. mid. nut-thas ( Ynud-). If formed from the root with thematic -a,
.

usually follows the

it

analogy of the present -class, e. g. ruhd-m, bhujd-t,

however, it accents the root, as dra-nta
'flow'); sdda-tam {sad- 'sit'); sdna-t {san- 'gain') but opt.

vidd-t, budhd-nta; in several instances,

(r- 'go'); sdra-t {sr-

sane'ma; vdca-f {vac- 'speak') but opt. voceyam. The reduplicated aorist usually
accents the reduplicative syllable, as 2. sing, didharas, ninas'as, Ty.svxg. piparat,
sisvap, jijanat, -^X. jijaiian; but sometimes the root, as 2. sing. Usrdthas, 3. sing.

pipdrat, sihidthat.
jdn-i, pdd-i, sdd-i.

Passive aorists accent the root,

dhd-y-i, srdv-i, vM-i,

e. g.

-i. Throughout
the present system of the
97. Present system.
a-conjugation the accent remains on the same syllable of the stem in all
moods; on the radical syllable in verbs of the first and fourth classes; e. g.
bhdva-ti from bhu- 'be', ndh-ya-ti from nah- 'bind'; on the thematic -a in the

sixth class

e. g.

tudd-ti

from tud-

'strike'.

In the second or graded conjugation, the singular indicative active,

the whole of the subjunctive, and the 3. sing, imperative active' accent the stem,
while all other forms accent the endings^. In the strong forms the radical
syllable is accented in the second class; generally the reduplicative syllable,
but sometimes the root, in the third class; the suffix in the fifth, eighth,
seventh, and ninth; e. g. 3. sing. ind. ds-ti, subj. ds-a-t, impv. ds-tu, from as'be', 2nd cl.; 3. sing. ind. bi-bhar-ti from bhr- 'bear', 3rd cl.; 3. sing. ind. kr-nc-ti,
subj. kr-ndv-a-t, 2. pi. impv. kr-m-ta, and kr-no-tana from /It- 'make', 5'h cl.;
2.

3. sing. subj.

man-dv-a-te ixom. man-

'think', Stl^cL;

i.

%v!\g.'mA.yu-nd-j-miy

3. sing.

3. sing. ind. grb/i-nd-ti, 2. sing. subj.

subj. jyu-nd-j-a-t ixova yuj- 'join', 7th cl.;
grbh-nd-s from grabh- 'seize', 9'hcl.; but 2. sing. impv. ad-dhi, 3. pi. opt. ad-yi'ir

from ad-

'eat',

2nd

i. pi.

cl.;

ind.

bi-bhr-mdsi;

1.

sing. ind. xsaA.kr-nv-S,

2.

sing.

impv. kr-nu-kl; i. pL opt. van-u-ydma, 3. pi. impv. van-v-dntu from van- 'win',
8'h cl.; 3. sing. TmA. yunk-te, 2. sing. impv. mid. yunk-svd; i. pi. ind. gr-ni-mdsi,
g'li cl.
2. sing. impv. gr-ni-hl from gr- 'praise',
In the second or root class, several verbs accent the radical
a. Irregularities.
syllable throughout''': si- 'lie' does so besides taking Guna; e.g. I. sing, say-e, 2, sing.
Occasional accentuation of the root in weak forms appears in 2. sing. impv.
ie-se etc. 5
Jan-i-svad (yjizn.-), mat-sva^mad-), yak-sva[\/yaj-), sak-sva 3.Tii sak-sva {\/sak-), fdh-a-t, subj.
[rdh- 'thrive'), 3. pi. impv. svdp-antu (AV.) and kias-anlu (AV.)7. A few roots of the third
class accent the root instead of the reduplicative syllable in the strong forms. These
are ci- 'note', mad- 'exhilarate', yic- 'separate', ha- 'sacrifice'; e. g. 2. sing, ci-ke-si (AV.)j
sing. impv. ma-mdi-iu; $. sing. snhj. yu-ydv-a-i, 2. pi. impv. yii-ya3. sing. subj. ma-mad-a-t, $.
Occasional forms thus accented are 2. sing. >-a>- (RV'.) froni
iatia; 3. sing. /<-/i(J-6'.

1
2

the

Of the >-aorist no accented forms occur.

The 2. pi. impv. active often accents
which

stem,

is

then

strong,

as

e-ta,

These are

in motion'^

as-

'sit',

is- 'rule',

tra- 'protect',

nims-

Id- 'praise',

'kiss', vas-

sometimes also 'bring forth'.

5 See Whitney 628 and 629.
the case with the 2. du. in -tarn.
6 Op. cit. 631 a.
3 The final syllable of the ending of the
7 Op. cit. 630.
in several
3. pi. middle is regularly accented
e-tana

from

i-

'go';

this

is

verbs, as ri-hati, duh-ate; see

685, 699;

Delbruck, Verbiim

WHITNEY
73.

61 3,

Tr-

'set

caks- 'see', taks- 'fashion',

'clothe',

su-

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

r- 'go',

2. sing.

mid. dhat-sc from dha-

and

'put',

4,

Vedic Grammar.

bi-bhdr-ti

(RVi. AV^.) beside

tlie

usual

types, when the ending begins with a vowel, throw the accent back on
the reduplicative syllable; e.g. ^. -^X, juhv-ati and bibhr-ati, but 2.\>\, jiilai-tha and bibhrThe subjunctive here, as usual, follows the accentuation of the strong indicative;
tha.
In the optative middle
its stem from the same two roots would hejuhav-a- and bibhar-a-.
the accent is thrown back on the reduplicative syllable because the modal affix begins

Both

bi-bhar-ti.

with a vowel; e. g. I. sing, dadh-tya etc. beside I. sing. act. dadh-yam etc. ' The KV.,
however, once has dadhT-ta beside dadhl-ta (3 times). In the imperative, endings with
initial consonant are accented in the weak forms, otherwise the reduplicative syllable;
The strong 3. sing. impv. act.
2. du. dat-tain, but 3. mid. pi. jihataiii.
e. g. 2. sing, de-hi,
follows the strong ind., e.g. dadhaiic, pifartu; the 2. pi. is often strong; e. g. j'uhoia,
The participle regularly accents the reduplicative syllable; e.. %. juhv-at, jiikvdadhaia.
In the seventh class the root kirns- 'injure'
ana, except only pipand- {pa- 'drink').
(originally perhaps a desiderative of halt- 'strike') accents the radical syllable in weak
In the fifth and eighth classes
forms, as 3. sing, hims-te, pi. Idms-anti, part, hims-ana-.
the RV. has several instances of irregular accentuation of the final syllable in the 3. pi.
In the ninth class the irregular
mid.: kr-nv-ate, vr-nv-ate, spr-nv-aic; tan-v-ati, man-v-atl.accentuation of the 3. pi. mid. occurs in pu-n-a-ii and ri-n-ati [ri- 'flow'). The ending
-ana, which is here added in the 2. sing. impv. act. to a few roots with final consonant,
is accented on the last syllable: grh-ana, badh-and (AV.), siabh-and (AV.).

The

perfect.
The singular indicative active and the whole subaccent the radical syllable; all other forms of the indicative, as
well as the whole imperative and optative accent the endings; e. g. ind. 3. sing.
cakdr-a, pi. cakr-ur, i. pi. mid. cakr-mdhe; subj. sing. "z. paprdth-a-s, pipray-a-s;
mumoc-a-t; dadhdrs-a-ti, vavdrt-a-ti; pi. i. cakdn-ama,
2,. jabMr-a-t, piprdy-a-t,
sUsdv-ama, 3. paprdth-a-n; opt. sing. i. vavrt-ydm, 2. susril-yds, 3. tutuj-ystl
du. 2. suiru-yhtam; pi. 3. vavrj-yiir; mid. sing. 2. vavrdh-i-thds, 3. sisrT-td (Jri'resort'); impv.sing. 2. pipri-ki, mumiig-dhi {Ymuc^, du. i. jajas-tSm; mid. sing. 2.
The participle, both active and middle, accents the suffix; e. g.
dadhi-svd^.
98.

junctive^

cakr-vims-; cakr-and-.

The

gg.

aorist.

The

accentuation of the unaugmented forms of the

With regard to that of the moods,

been stated (96).

the following notes may be added.
indicative has already

The root

aorist accents the radical syllable in the subjunctive; e. g.

du. 3. srdv-a-tas, pi. 3. gdm-a-nti, mid. sing. 3. bhoja-te; in the injunctive, the radical syllable in the singular, but the ending
elsewhere; e. g. sing. i. ndm-s-i, pi. 3. dabh-i'w, mid. sing. 2. mr-thas; in the
optative, the endings throughout; e. g. act. sing. i. as-ySm, 2. bku-ySs, mid.
1.

sing. 2. kdr-a-s,

3. kdr-a-t,

ai-imdhi; in the imperative, the root in the 3. sing, act., but the ending
elsewhere; e. g. sing. 3. sro-tu, but 2. kr-dki, du. 2. ga-tdm, pi. 2. bhu-td'^, mid.
sing. 2. kr-svd; in the participle, the suffix is accented in the active, e. g.
bhid-dnt-, and generally in the middle, e. g. budh-and-, but in several instances

pi. I.

the root; e. g.
2. In the

dyi'it-ana-.

a-aorist the accentuation follows that of the unaugmented

indicative; thus the subjunctive sing. 3. viddt; the injunctive sing. i.

ddrsa-m

videyam,
pi. i. saketna, sane'ma and sdnema; the imperative, sing. 2. sdna,
sdra, du. 2. riihd-tam, sdda-tam, pi. 2. khyd-ta. The participle usually accents
the thematic -a^ but sometimes the root; e. g. trpd-nt-, but sdda-nt-; guhdmana-, but ddsa-mana-.

ruhd-m,
sanfyam,

ruha-t,

vidd-t,

sdna-t,

pi.

Whitney

645 a, 668 a, 669.

the primary endings are added,
reduplicative syllable is almost always

Cp.

When

the

3.

accented ; e. g. jitjosad; some others, which

take secondary endings, but do not strengthen
the root, also accent the reduplicative
syllable, as dddhrmnta; see below 490.

3.

vidd-nta;

optative,

sing. i.

3
few forms accent and strengthen the
radical syllable, du. 2. mumoc-ri-tam, pi. 2. mumoc-a-ta, mid. sing. 2. pipydy-a-sva.
\ But the root is strong and accented in
several forms, kdr-ta etc., of the 2. pi. imperative.

III.

3. In the

seems to be

Accent.

Verbal Accent.

reduplicated aorist the only accented form

vocati;- in the injunctive,

in the subjunctive

either the redupHcative syllable or the

root is accented; e. g. sing. 2. ninas-as, sisrdikas, 3. piparat and pTpdrat; in

the optative, the thematic vowel or the ending; e. g. pi. i. vocema, cucyuv-tnidhi; in the imperative, the thematic vowel or the ending; e. g. du. 2.jigr-tdm,
pl.jtgr-id, susudd-ta (AV.).

The s-aorist accents the root in the subjunctive; e. g. ddr-s-a-t {drydk-s-a-t {yaj- 'sacrifice'), du. 2. pdr-s-a-thas (pr- 'take across'); the
root in the injunctive as far as can be judged from the extremely few accented
4.

'split'),

forms,

as mid. sing. i. vdm-s-i {van- 'win'); the ending' in the optative, as

mid. bing. i. bhak-s-i-yd ( ybhaj-), pi. dkuk-s-T-mdhi {duh- 'milk'); in the imperative
no accented forms occur; the participle accents the root in the active, as
ddk-s-ant- {dak- 'burn'), but in the irregularly formed middle^ nearly always the
suffix, as arc-a-s-and-, but oh-a-s-ana- (527).
5. The AS-aorist accents the root in the subjunctive; e. g. sing. 3. bodhis-a-t; the root in the injunctive, e. g. sing. 2. mdt/i-is, but once the ending in
pi. 3. tar-is-i'ir (AV.); the ending in the optative; e. g. sing. i. edh-is-'iyd (AV.);
the ending in the imperative; e. g. sing. 2. av-id-dhi, du. 2. av-is-tdm.
6. In the s/s-aorist no accented forms occur except one in the imperative,
where the ending has the acute, du. 2. ya-sis-tdm.
7. The sa-aorist accents that syllable in the injunctive, as pi. 3. dhuk-sd-nta
(but once sing. 3. dhuk-sa-td), and in the imperative, as sing. .2. dhuk-sd-sva
No subjunctive or optative forms occur.
( Yduh-').
100. The future. The accent in all forms of this tense remains on the
suffix -syd- or -i-syd; e. g. sing. 3. e-syd-ti (AV.) 'he will go' {Yi-)', sing. i.
stav-i-sydmi 'I shall praise' ( Ystu-), 3. kar-i-sydti 'he will do' {Ykr-^; participle
kar-i-sydtit- 'about to do'.
All these, except the active form of
loi. Secondary conjugations.
They are
the intensive, accent the same syllable of the stem throughout.
the causative, the denominative, the passive, the secondary form of the
The
intensive, and the desiderative, the stem of all of which ends in -a.
causative accents the penultimate syllable of the stem; e. g. krodh-dya'enrage'. The passive, the secondary form of the intensive, and the
denominative, accent the suffix -yd; e. g. pan-yd-te 'is admired'; rerih-yd-te
certain number of unmistakable
"licks repeatedly'; gopa-ydnti 'they protect'.
denominatives, however, have the causative accent; e. g. inantrd-ya-te 'takes
The desiderative accents the reduplicative syllable; e. g. pipricounsel'.
sa-ti.
The primary form of the intensive agrees in accentuation with the
third or reduphcating class of verbs, that is, it accents the reduplicative
syllable in the strong forms, but the endings with initial consonant in the

weak forms of

the indicative active; e. g. sing. 2>- Johav-T-ti, A\y.i.jar-bhr-tds,

In the middle indicative, however, the reduplicative syllable
In the subjunctive
is more often accented than not; e. g. te-tik-te and nenik-te.
the reduplicative syllable is regularly accented; e. g. sing. :^. Jdngkan-a-t, but
once the root in sing. 1. jangMn-ani; mid. pi. t,. jdnghan-anta, but once the
ending in du. 3. tantas-dite. No accented form of the optative occurs. In
the imperative the ending is accented; e. g. sing. 2. jagr-hi, car-kr-tat. In the
pi. 3. vdr-vrt-ati.

participle, both active and middle, the reduplicative syllable is regularly

accented; e. g. cekit-at-, cekit-ana-; there are, however, two exceptions in the
middle: badbadJi-atid- and marmrj-and- {^afi^).
1

Once

form du.
2

The

the root
2.

is

accented in the irregular participles

root

is

accented in

irregularly formed with

and dht-s-a-mana-.

ha-s-a-7nana-

tra-s-i-tham.

two middle

-viana.

I02

I.

AlLGEMEINES UND SpRACHE.

VedIC GRAMMAR.

Accent of nominal verb forms.

5.

102. The accentuation of participles formed from tense and conjugation

When these are compounded with prestems has already been stated.
positions, they retain their accents; thus the present and perfect participles of
apa-gdm- 'go away' would be apa-gdcchant-, apa-gdcchamana-; apa-jaganv&ms-,
apa-jagmand-. The preposition is, however, not infrequently found separated
from the participle by another word or is placed after it, when it is treated
as independent and accented, e. g. prd smdsru dodhuvat {yi. 23') 'shaking his
beard'; dpa drlhs.nl ddrdrat (yi. 175) 'bursting strongholds asunder'; a ca pdra
ca pathlbhis cdrantam (i. 164J') 'wandering hither and thither on (his) paths',
niddhu bibhrata -iipa (i. 166^) 'bringing sweetness near'; tanvdnta A rdjah
The preposition is occasionally found
(n^ 45') 'extending through the air'.
independently accented immediately before the participle, as abhi ddksat (11. 4?)
'burning around'; vi vidvan (i. 189') 'distinguishing' (probably in distinction
from vividvan, perfect participle of vid- 'find').
a. When there are two prepositions, either both are compounded and
unaccented, as vi-pra-ydntah (ix. 2 2 5) 'advancing', pary-a-vivrtsan (vii. 63^)
'turning round'; or one is compounded and the other independent and
accented, as abhi a-cdrantih (viii. 96'^) 'approaching'; ava-srjdnn upa tmdna
'bestowing indeed'; prd vaykm uj-jihanah (v. i^) 'flying up to a
(j. 142")
branch'.
b.

Participles in -iar generally accent the root, as kdr-tar 'making',

compounded the suffix. But ni-cetar- 'observing' occurs beside

but when

ni-cetdr- 'observer'.

103.
ga-tdthis

The past passive participle

'gone', pat-i-td- (AV.)

regularly

chin-nd-

'cut

accents
off'

the suffix;

{Y^hid-).

e.

g.

But when

is compounded with prepositions,

the latter are as a rule
In several instances, however, the accent of the simple participle

participle

accented.
is

'fallen',

retained,

as apa-kri-td- (AV.) 'bought',

ni-sat-td- 'seated', ni-va-td-

a secondary form of ha-

ni-ci-td- 'seen',

nis-kr-td- 'prepared',

(AV.) 'uninjured', pra-jak-i-td-. 'given up' (from Jah-,

'leave'),

pra-sas-td- 'celebrated', sam-skr-td- 'prepared'

'.
The preposition may be
separated from the participle by another word, as pari soma siktdh (ix. 97 '5)

(beside sdm-skr-ta-),
'poured,

sam-hi-td- (VS.) 'variegated'

When

Soma, around'.

remains unaccented, as api-vrktah

are two prepositions, the first

80^) 'removed' {apa-d-\ sam-d-kr-tavi

there

(viii.

84O 'accumulated'; or it may be separated and independently accented,

prd ydt samudrd d-hitah (ix. 64^9) 'when despatched forth to the ocean';
iidri gobhir d-vrtam (ix. 86^') 'encompassed round by streams of milk'.
104. Of the gerundives, those in -ya (or -t-yd) and -tva accent the
root; e. g. cdks-ya- 'to be seen', sru-t-ya- 'to be heard', car-kf-t-ya- 'to be
(x.

as

be said'; those in -ayya, -enya, -aniya (AV.) accent the

penultimate; e. g. pan-dyya- 'to be admired', iks-cnya- 'worthy to be seen',
while those in -tavya accent the final syllable, as jan-i-tavya- (AV.) 'to be
born'^ When compounded with prepositions^, gerundives nearly always
leave the accent unchanged; e. g. pari-cdks-ya- 'to be despised'; with Svarita
praised', vdk-tva- 'to

on the

final

syllable

in

the

RV. only

a-kay-ya- 'desirable'

and upa-vdk-ya-

^ Such compounds are

also thus accent- only begin to appear in the AV., where
ed when turned into substantives, as nis- two examples of each occur (581 a, b).
kr-td- n. 'rendezvous', upa-slutd-, N. of a
3 The
preposition is here always inseman.
parable.

The gerundives

in

-aiiTya

and

-tavya

III.^

Accent.

Accent of Nominal Verb Forms.

103

be addressed'; abhy-a-yams-^nya- 'allowing oneself to be drawn near';

a-mantr-aniya- (AV.) 'to be addressed'.
105. Infinitives are as a rule accented like ordinary nominal cases
'to

formed from the same stems.

a. The dative infinitive from root stems accents the ending; e.
g. drs-e
'to see', but when compounded, the root; e. g. sam-idh-e 'to kindle', abhi-praCilks-e (i. 113^) 'to see'.
Those formed from stems in -as generally accent
that suffix, but sometimes the radical syllable; e. g. car-ds-e 'to fare', but
cdks-as-e 'to see'.
Those formed from stems in -i and -ti accent the suffix;
e. g. drs-dy-e 'to see', p-tdy-e 'to
drink'.
Those from stems in -tu accent
the root, as bhdr4av-e; also those from stems in -tava, but with a secondary
accent on the final syllable, as gdn-tavdi.
When these two forms are compounded with prepositions, the latter are accented; e. g. prd-vantave'' 'to
win', dpa-bhartavdi 'to be taken away', the latter retaining its final accent as
well.
When there are two prepositions, the first may be independent and
accented as well; e. g. vi prd-sartave (vm. 67") 'to spread'. Infinitives formed
with -dhyai generally accent the preceding a of the verbal stem, but sometimes

the root; e. g. iyd-dhyai 'to go', but gdma-dhyai 'to go'. Those formed from
stems in -man accent the root; e. g. dd-man-e 'to give', except vid-mdn-e 'to
know* ; from stems in -van there are da-vdn-e 'to give', tur-vdn-e 'to excel',
but dhUr-vati-e 'to injure' ( Y'^^W') '
b. The accusative infinitive if formed from a radical stem accents the
root even when compounded with a preposition; e. g. h'tbh-am 'to shine',
a-sdd-am 'to sit down'; if formed from a stem in -tu, it accents the root in
a simple stem, but the preposition in a compounded stem; e. g. di-tum 'to give',
prd-bkar-tum 'to present', dnu prd-volhum 'to advance' 3.
c. The ablative-genitive infinitive, if formed from radical stems, which
here occur only in combination with prepositions, accents the root; e. g. avapdd-as '(from) falling down'; if formed from a stem in -tu, the root in a
simple stem, but the preposition in a compound stem; e. g. gan-tos 'going',
ni-dha-tos 'putting down'.
d. The locative infinitive if formed from radical stems accents the
ending in the simple form, but the root in the compounded form; e. g. budh-i
'at the waking', but sam-dfs-i 'on seeing'.
The one locative infinitive formed
from a stem in -tar, and those from stems in -san accent the suffix; e. g.
dhar-tdr-i

'to

bestow', ne-sdn-i

'to

lead'.

106. Uncompounded gerunds formed with -tvT, -tva, tvaya accent the
suffix, while the compounded gerunds'- formed with -yd or -tya accent the
root; e, g. ga-tvi 'having gone', bhu-tvd 'having become', ga-tvdya 'having gone';
sam-gfbh-ya 'gathering', upa-sru-tya (AV.) 'having overheard'.

107. Case-forms used as adverbs frequently show a shift of accent.

Thus drav-dt 'quickly', but
This appears oftenest in the accusative neuter.
drdv-ant- 'running', probably also drah-ydt^ 'stoutly'; apardm 'later', but
dparam as neuter adjective; d-vyus-dm (AV.) 'till dawn'^; and the adverbs
in -vat, as angiras-vdt 'like Angiras', vianus-vdt 'as Manus did', purana-vdt,

The infinitive from stems in -tu in all first is independent and therefore also
cases accents the preposition ; e. g. sam- accented.
preposition is here always in4 The
hartum 'to collect', dpi-dhaiave 'to cover up',
separable.
ava-gantos 'of descending'.
^
seems to be formed from an
5 Which
preposition is occasionally uncompounded with or separated from the infinitive, irregular present participle of drk- 'be firm'.
6 The ordinary A. of vj-us- 'dawn' would
when both are accented, as pra daiidne
(IV. 32^; v.653)j p'A dasiise datave (iv. 20"). be vyus-am.
3 When there are two prepositions, the
I

its

104

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

Vedic Grammar.

4.

purva-vdt, pratna-vdt 'as of old', which are accusative neuters of the adjective
suffix -vant^ (unaccented)j and some adverbs from the comparative in -tara,
ut-tardm (AV.) 'higher', but I'd-tara- as adjective; similarly ava-tardm, parastardm and para-tardm 'farther away', vi-iardm 'more widely' ^ sam-tardvi (AV.)
Similarly the instrumental diva 'by day', but diva 'through
farther'.
'still
heaven'; and the dative aparaya 'for the future', but dparaya 'to the later';
and the ablatives apakat 'from afar' {dpaka- 'far'), amat 'from near' (ama- AV.
'this'), samit 'from of old' {sdna- 'old') 3.

Accent

6.

in Sandhi.

108. I. When two vowels combine so as to form a long vowel or

diphthong, the latter has the Udatta if either or both of the original vowels
had if; e. g. nudasvatha for nudasva dtha; tdve't iox tdva it; kvtlt ior kva it^;
agat for d agat; piteva for pita, iva, sato for satd u; nintaras (vi. 63^) for

nd dntaras.
contraction of /+ i is, however, accented l,^ the (dependent) Svarita
/ 1) ousted the preceding Udatta'; e. g. divlva (RV. AV.) for
is the praslista, 'contracted', Svarita of the Pratisakhyas ^.
a following
2. When i and u with Udatta are changend to y and v,
unaccented vowel receives the Svarita; e. g. vy Snat for vi mat.
The uncontracted form with Udatta must, however, almost invariably

The

having here (in

This
divi iva.

in the RV. This is the ksaipra'^ Svarita of the Pratisakhyas ^the enclitic Svarita assumes the appearance of an independent accent.

be read

Here

When d is elided, it throws back its Udatta on unaccented e or 0;

sundve ^gne for sundve dgne; v6 'vasah for vo dvasah. But when unaccented a is elided, it changes a preceding Udatta to Svarita; e. g. so 'd/iamdh
This is the abhinihita Svarita of the Pratisakhyas ^. Here
for so adhamdh.
also the enclitic Svarita (in 6 a) has ousted the preceding Udatta (as in divVud) '.
3.

e.

g.

7.

The Sentence Accent.

Haskell, Vocative-Accent in the Veda, JAOS. 11, 57.

BShtlingk, ein
erster Versuch uber den Accent im Sanskrit (Memoires de I'Acadernie imp. de St. PetersWmxNEY, JAOS. 5, 193 fF., 387 ff.
bourg 1843) p. 38 ff.
Aurel Mays, Beitrage aus
dem Rigveda zur Accentuirung des verbum finitum (Sitzungsberichte der phil.-hist. Classe
der Itaiserlichen Akademie der Wissenschaften, Wien 1871, p. 219 ff.).
Weber, IS. 13,
BOHTLINGK, Sanskrit-Chrestomathie^ p. 356
70ff.
WmXNEY, Sanskrit Grammar 591 ff.
Delbruck, Altindische Syntax (Halle 1888) 21 29.
Oldenberg, Die Verbalenldisis
im Rgveda, ZDMG. 60, 707740.

The

log.
single

vocative.

a.

word or a compound

syllable,

retains

Whitney

'

Cp.

See op.

cit.

its

1107

The

a.

in 9.

Cp. op. cit. 1 1 14 a.

Cp. Benfey, Vollstandige Grammatik 64.
5 But when a Svarita is followed by an
unaccented syllable, it of course remains;
e. g. kveyatha for kva iyatJia (VIII. 17).
^ Except
in the Taittirlya texts which
follow the general rule [diviva).
7 This also takes
place in sudgatA (TS.)
for si'i-udgata 'a good Udgatr' (TS. VII. I.
3

B.).

Cp.

Haug

75.

which whether

vocative,

expression,

is

it

invariably accented

consist of a

on the

accent only at the beginning of a sentence or

8'

first

Pada";

So called because 'uttered with a

9
quick' (ksipra-) pronunciation, the semivowel
replacing the vowel.
10

Cp.

Wackernagel

MANN, ICG.

"

This

I, 251, b ; Brug45, A.
applies to the second as well as

Pada of a hemistich (as some of the

above examples show), thus indicating the
independent character of these Padas, which
is
obscured by the way in which the rethe

first

dactors

of the Samhitas apply the rules of

Sandhi and mark the dependent Svarita.

Accent

Accent.

III.

Sentence Accent.

in Sandhi.

105

is to say, when, having the full force of the case, it occupies the most
emphatic position; e. g. dgne supayani bhava (i. i^"^) 'O Agni, be easy of
access'; lirjo napat sahasavan (x. iis^""} 'O mighty son of strength'; hStar
yavistha sukrato (1V.4"'') 'O most youthful, skilful priest'. This rule also applies
to doubly accented dual compounds, as mitravaruna (i. 15^'') '0 Mitra and
Varuna' (N. mitrd-vdruna).
a. Two or more vocatives at the beginning of a Pada are all accented; e. g. ddiU,

that

m'Ura,

varuna

bright one'

27^4^);

(II.

iirjo

napad, bhadrasoce

(vill.

71"') 'O son of strength,

propitiously

i.

b. The vocative, when it does not begin the sentence, loses its accent,
being unemphatic as referring only incidentally to a person already invoked;
e. g. rtena mitravarunav rtavrdhav rtaspria (i. 2') 'through Law, O Mitra and
Varuna, lovers and cherishers of Law'; vpa tvajxgne dive-dive, dosa-vastar
dhiya vaydin
Smasi (i. i^ 'to thee, O Agni, day by day, O illuminer
of darkness, with prayer we come'; a rajana^ maha rtasya gopa (vii. 64^)
'hither (come), O ye two sovereign guardians of great order'; ydd, indra
Brahmanasbrahmanas-pate, abhidrohdm cdramasi (x. i64'*)3 'if, O Indra,
|

we commit an

pati,

offence'*.

vocative, whether at the beginning of or within a, sentence, not being

regarded as part of it, does not interfere with the normal accentuation of the sentence.
Hence a verb |at the beginning of a sentence, following a vocative, is accented as the
first word of the sentence; while a verb within a sentence, following a vocative, remains
unaccented; e. g. deva, jivaia (AV. XIX. 70') 'O gods, live'; astni it su, vrsana, madayetham
(i. 1842) 'beside us, ye two heroes, enjoy yourselves'.

The

a.

A.
no. The verb.
unaccented except when it

The
is

the

first

praise Agni, the domestic priest';

This rule and its
wise'.

'I

Agni the

verb in a principal sentence is

word; e. g. agnim tie purohitam (i. i^)
but ile agnim vipasdtam (in. 27^) 'I praise
exception must, however, be understood

finite

with the following restrictions:

sentence is regarded as capable of having only one verb. Hence
1.
all other verbs syntactically connected with the subject of the first, are
accented as beginning new sentences (a subject or object coming between
two such verbs being generally counted to the first); e. g. tesam pahi, srudhi
hdvatn (i. 2') 'drink of them, hear our call'; asmdbhyam jesi yStsi ca (i. i32t)
'conquer and fight for us'; tardnir ij jayati,ksM, pusyati (vii. 32?) 'the energetic
man conquers, rules, thrives'; jahi prajAm ndyasva ca (KSf. i. 83) 'slay the

progeny and bring

2.

The

verb,

(it)

hither'.

though not beginning a sentence, receives the accent

if

coincides with the beginning of a Pada (which is treated as the beginning

vidy&ma sumatinam (i. 43J.
of a new sentence); e. g. dtha te dntamanam
at the beginning of a sentence is
vocatives)
(or
vocative
a
Since
3.
treated as extraneous to it, the verb which immediately follows it becomes
the first word of the sentence and is accordingly accented; e.g. dgne,jusdsva
it

1
Here bhadrasoce is treated as an independent vocative; it would lose its accent
expression
if intended to form a compound
'O propitously bright son
with urjo napat

vocatives.

The

preceding

example

may

contain two also, as the accent of two as

well as of one vocative would be lost within
a Pada; but \i raj ana stood at the beginning
hotar yavisiha of a Pada, the accentuation would be rajana
of strength', as is the case
inaha rtasya gopa, supposing two vocatives
sukrato.
2 When
the first word of u compound were intended.
exceptions to the rules
4 The very rare
vocative is an adjective (not a genitive), it
given above (a, b) are doubtless due to
retains its accent within a Pada; thus vUve
the part of the editors or of tradevasah 'O All-gods', would appear within a errors on

Pada as well
3

This

is

dition.

as at the beginning.

an

example of two

distinct

io6

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

no havih (m. 28') 'O Agni, enjoy our sacrifice'. Thus the following sentence
of six v/ords contains three accented verbs as well as three accented vocatives:
hidra, jiva, siirya, jiva, deva, jivata {KSf. xix. 70') 'O Indra, live; O Surya,
live;

gods,

live'.

There are some instances in the RV. of the verb when emphatic,
even though not placed at the beginning of the sentence, being accented
before the particle id, and even before cand'^; e. g. ddha sma no maghavaii
carkrtdd id (i. 104^) 'then be mindful of us, bounteous one'; nd, deva,
bhasdihas cand (vi. 59't) '(him) O gods, ye two never consume'^.
B. The accent always rests on the verb of a subordinate clause
(which is almost invariably introduced by the relative ya- and its derivatives,
or contains the particles ca and ced 'if, ned 'lest', hi 'for', kuvid 'whether');
4.

grhfin
e. g. yam yajfidm paribhcir dsi (i. i*) 'what offering thou protectest';
gaccha grhapdtni ydthajisah (x. 85^*) 'go to the house, that thou be lady
of the house'; indras ca mrldyati no, nd nah pascdd aghdm nasat {i\. 41")
'if Indra be gracious to us, no hurt will thereafter reach us'; vi ced ucchdnty,
asvina, usdsah, prd vain brdhmani kardvo bharattte (vii. 72+) 'when the dawns
shine forth, O Asvins, the singers offer their prayers to you'; md cirdm
tdpati siiro arcisa (v. 79?) 'do not long delay thy
tanutha dpah, net tva
work, lest the sun burn thee with his beam'; tvdm Id baladd dsi (iii. 53'*)
'for thou art a giver of strength'; tdm, indra, rnddatn d gahi, kuvin^ nv asya
irpndvaJi (iii. 42^) 'come to this gladdening drink,
Indra, (to see) whether
thou mayst enjoy it'.
clauses, though in form a principal one, is
1. When the first of two
virtually subordinate in sense (being equivalent to one introduced by 'if
or 'when'), its verb is occassionally accented; e. g. sdm dsvaparnas cdranti
no ndro, ''smdkam, indra, rathino jayantu (vi. 47^') 'when our men winged
with steeds come together, may the car-fighters of our side, O Indra, win
.

the victory'.
Similarly, but much more frequently, the verb of the first of two
which are antithetical in sense, is accented*. The occurrence of
correlative words like anyd-anyd, eka-ika, va-va, ca-ca, often makes the
antithesis obvious; e. g. prd-prajinye ydnti, pdry any a asate (in. 93) '(while)
some go on and on, others sit about'; sdm cajidhdsva jxgne, prd ca bodhaya^enam
(VS. XXVII. 2) 'both be kindled, O Agni, and waken this man's knowledge': ud
va sihcddkvam vpa va prnadhvam (vii. 16'') 'either pour out or fill up'. If
the verb of both clauses is the same, it usually appears (as is natural in the
circumstances) in the first only; e. g. dvipdc ca sdrvam no rdksa, cdtuspad
ydc ca nah svdm (AV. vi. 107') 'protect both every biped of ours and whatever
quadruped is our own'.
3. The second clause, on the other hand, accents the verb if it contains
an impeiative (with a final sense), and follows a clause with an imperative
of i; gam- or ya- 'go'; e. g. eta, dhiyam krndvama (v. 45^) 'come, let us
(== that we may) make prayer'; tayam d gahi, kdtivesu sdca piba (vin. 43)
'come quickly, beside the Kanvas drink thy fill'.
Ill, Verbal prepositions.
A. The preposition, which generally precedes,
but sometimes follows the verb, being often separated from it by other words.
2.

clauses

598

Cp.
a.

3, 4; 26,2; Whitney
SB. hanta regularly accents

DELBRUCK23,
In

the

the verb.
2 Cp. Grassmann, Wb. under id and cana.
3 There are only two passages in the RV.
(v. 310, 36^) in which kiivid does not accent

the verb; cp. Grassmann, sub verbo; DelBRfJCK 550, end.

4 This accentuation is more strictly applied
in B. than in V., and among the Samhitas
least strictly in the RV. ; cp. Whitney 597 a.

IV.

Nominal Stem Formation.

107

regularly accented in principal

sentences; e. g. d gamat {1. i^) 'may he
come"; jayema sdm yudhi sprdhah (i. 83)
'may we conquer our foes in fight';
^avam dfa vrajdm vrdhi (i. 10') 'unclose the stable of the kine'; gdmad
vaiebhir a sd tiah (i. 53) 'may he come
to us with booty'.
a. When there are two
prepositions, both are accented in the RV.,
being treated as separate words; e.
g. upa prd yahi (i. 82*) 'come forth'; pari
spaso fii sedire (i. 25^3) 'the spies have sat
down around'; upa prdyobhir A
gatam (i. 2+) 'come hither with refreshments'; dgne, vi pasya brhatAjibhi ray a
(III. 23^) 'O Agni, look
forth towards (us) with ample wealth'.
IS

a. When a immediately follows another preposition

(unless it ends in i), it alone
accented, both being compounded with the
verb; e. g. upa^ahi-^ (l. 9110) 'come hither';
samakrnoujivdse (x. 256) 'thou fittest (them) for living'. The general rule, however, is
tollowed if the preposition preceding a ends in i;
e. g. pretty a tanusva (iv. 44) 'draw
(thy bow) against (them)' 2.
In the only passage in which it has been noted in combination with another preposition preceding it, dva
is treated like a: upavasrja
(x. noi")I
I
.J
\
'pour out' 3.
IS

with

B. The preposition in subordinate clauses

the verb, when it is regularly unaccented;

is

e.

compounded

generally

ydd

g.

niddaihah''

'when ye two sit down'. It is, however, often separated from the
verb, and is then accented as well as the verb. In this case it is commonly the
first word of a Pada, but occasionally comes after
the verb; e. g. vi yo mami
rdjasi{i. i6ot) 'who measured out the two regions'; yds tastdmbha sdhasa vi
jmo dntan (iv-so") 'who with might propped earth's ends asunder'. Occasionally
the preposition is separate and accented even when immediately preceding
the verb; e. g. yd ahutim pdri ve'da ?idmobki/i (vi. i?) 'who fully knows the
(viii. 9^')

offering with devotion'.

a.

When

there are

two

prepositions, either both are unaccented and

separate and accented; e. g.

compounded with the verb, or the first only is

yuydm hi, devTr, rtayugbhir dsvaih pariprayathd

(iv.

515)

'for ye,

goddesses,

proceed around with steeds yoked by eternal order'; sdm ydm aydnti dhendvah
(v. 6^) 'to whom the cows come together', ydtra jibhi samndvamahe (viii. 695)
'where we to (him) together shout'. A very rare example of two independent
prepositions in a dependent sentence is prd ydt stota
upa girbhir itte
(ill. 525) 'when the praiser pours forth laudation to (him) with songs'.
.

NOMINAL STEM FORMATION.

Grassmann, Worterbuch zum Rig-veda 1687 1738
of nominal stems according
to alphabetical order of the
Lindner, Altindische Nominalbildung. Nach
den Samhitas dargestellt. Jena 1878. Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar 136 1245; Roots,
IV.

(list

final letter).

Verb-forms, and Primary Derivatives, 1885.

112.

The bare

root,

both

verbal

much more

declinable

is

formed by means of suffixes.

stem.

But

and pronominal,
generally

the

is

stem

These are of two kinds:

often

used

as

declension
primary, or

in

There seems to be an exception in goes much further, apparently making accenna iipa ydhi (VIII. 921) 'thence, tuation of the second preposition the rule
O Indra, come to us', but upa here coming cp. Delbruck p. 48.
3 Cp. Delbruck p. 47, end.
at the end of a Pada, is used adnominally
not clear why the Pada text
4
It
is
with nak,
2 The
treatment of two prepositions is analyses forms like ny dsTdat (i. 14'?'), ny
on the whole the same in the AV. (cp. asiak (Vir. 18"), vy dsthai (11.4') as ni dsldat,
Whitney, APr. 185 ff.) and the TS. (cp. ni dstah, vi dsthat. There are about thirty
Weber, IS. 13, 62 ff.); but the TS. treats instances of this; cp. Whitney 10S4 a.
some other prepositions like a, and the MS.
1

dtas cid, indra,

io8

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

those that are added directly to roots; secondary, or those that are added

to stems aheady derivative (pronominal stems being also accounted as such).

The distinction between these two kinds is, however, not absolute. Suffixes
containing a secondary element sometimes have the appearance and appli-an-Tya).
Less frequently primary
cation of primary suffixes (as -aniya
suffixes come to be used as secondary ones; thus the participial suffixes are
added not only to the root, but also to primary and secondary conjugation
stems as well as to tense stems. These nominal suffixes are sometimes added
by means of what looks like and may conveniently be called a connecting
Primary suffixes are also added
vowel, though it may not be so in origin.

compounded

to roots

with verbal prefixes ^

I.

Primary Nominal Derivation.

113. As regards form, the root when used without suffix usually remains
unchanged in respect to its voweP; it is then, however, hable to modification

two ways: always adding the determinative -t if it ends in -i, u, or -r,

and occasionally appearing in a reduplicated form. But before primary suffixes

in

the root usually appears in a strong form: either with Guna of medial or
sr-;
as ved-a- 'knowledge' from Y'^^'^'t sdr-atia- 'running' from

final vowels,

or with Vrddhi of final

-r

-z, -11,

and lengthening of medial

as kar-d- 'making*

a,

from ]/^raM-.
there are two classes of primary derivatives:
the one expressing abstract action nouns (with an infinitival character), the
other concrete agent nouns (with a participial character) used as adjectives
or substantives.
Other senses are only modifications of these two; as that
of the passive participle, which expresses an agent who becomes the recipient
of an action. The primary suffixes forming action nouns can also nearly all
be used to form agent nouns; and many of those properly forming agent
Those which properly form action
nouns may also form action nouns.

from Ykr-, grabh-d-

nouns
-ti,

'seizer',

As regards meaning,

a.

-tu,

-an,

are:

-a,

-tna,

-tha,

-ana,

-anS,

-thu, -nas,

-am,

-ani,

-ni,

Those which properly form agent nouns

-asi,

-aku, -ana,

-in,

-istha, -lyams,

-iva, -thi, -na, -tnana, -min,

-tri,

-vanu, -vara, -vas, -vams,

-vi,

-u,

-as,

-a,

-i,

-ma, -man,

-pa,

-nu,

-is,

-mi,

-ika, -us,

-i,

-yu,

-van,

-tas,

-sas.

are: -aka, -at or -ant, -ata, -aniya,

-uka, -u, -Uka, -ka, -ta, -tar, -tnu, -tra,

-ya, -ra, -ri, -ru, -la,

-sa, -sani,

-saru,

-S7ia,

-li, -lu,

-va, -vana, -vaiii,

-snu.

Root stems.
These stems are used both as action nouns (often in the function
of infinitives) and as agent nouns, either substantives or adjectives.
I. Examples of the simple root form are: dyi'ct- f. 'splendour', nft- (AV.) f.
'gesticulation', bi'idh- f. 'awaking'; dd- 'giver', bktd- f. 'destroyer', yi'tj- m.
'companion', spas- m. 'spy'; mdh- 'greaf, vfdh- 'strengthening'.
2. With root
determinative -/: mi-t- f. 'pillar', stu-t- f. 'praise'.
3. With reduplicated root:
114.

cikit- 'wise'

Those

tely in

-ana,

-man,

-i,

f.

f.

used are approximafrequency: -a,

and -tra, -in, -ya, -van and

order

-tar
-u,

'sacrificial

of

-as; cp.

their

WHITNEY

spoon' {hu-

firm'),

didyi't-

'offer'),

m.

juhii- 'tongue'

'missile',

didyi'i-t-

f.

'running stream' (syand- 'run') and with intensive

chiefly thus

the

-ti,

'observe'), juhit-

dadfh-^ 'hearty' (drh- 'be

'lightning', sasydd-

'missile',

{cii-

'call'),

{Jiu-

I141

u.

2 That is, the root appears in the weak

form, in which it is usually stated.
3 In dadhfk adv. 'heartily'.
4
Perhaps also gdiiga- f. 'Ganges' if

IV.

Nominal Stem Formation.

Primary Nominal Derivation.

109

reduplication; jogu- 'singing aloud' {gu- ''sound'), pra-neni- 'guiding constandy'

{ni- 'lead'), yaviyudh- 'warlike' {yudh- 'fight'), vdmvan- 'desiring', a-susil- (AV.)
'barren' ('not bringing forth'), ddridra- (VS.) 'roving' {dra- 'run') is a transfer
to the radical a-stems".
-a

115.

number of

vast

action

and agent.

is formed with this suffix, before which

the root is generally strengthened, but sometimes remains unchanged or is
reduplicated. Those formed with Guna are more than twice as numerous as
all the rest taken together.
Medial a generally remains unchanged.

derivatives

Guna are the following action nouns:

hdv-a- m. 'invocation' {hu- 'call'), tdr-a- m. 'crossing'
{tr- 'cross'); ved-a- 'knowledge' {vid- 'know'), /Jj-a- 'enjoyment' {jus- 'enjoy'),
sdrg-a- 'emission' {srj- 'send forth'); agent nouns : //az'-'- m. 'boat' [plu- 'float'),
megh-d- m. 'cloud' {mih- 'discharge water'), cod-d- 'instigator' {cud- 'incite'). With
medial a\ grdbh-a- m. 'seizure' {grabh- 'seize'), srdm-a- m. 'weariness' {sram'be weary').
1.

Examples of

dy-a- m. 'course'

(z-

derivatives with

'go')

In

several words thus formed the meaning varies according as the root is
or the suffix, the word in the former case being nearly always an abstract
substantive,
the latter regularly an adjective or an agent noun; thus ardh-a-ra.. 'side',
ardh-a- 'half; is-a- m. 'speed', es-d- 'speeding'; c6d-a- m. 'goad', cod-d- m. 'instigator'; var-am. 'choice', var-d- m. ('chooser') 'suitor', sds-a- m. 'command', sas-d- m. 'commander',
sok-a- m. 'glow', sok-d- (AV.) 'glowing'.
a.

accented

2.

Vrddhi

dav-d- (AV.)

of final vowels
{du-

'fire'

and lengthening of
tar-d- (VS.)

a':

'crossing'

agent nouns are nay-d- 'leader' {m-

'share' {bhaj- 'divide');

grabh-d-

'burn'),

action

{if-

nouns are

'cross'),

'lead'),

bhag-d-

jar-d- 'lover',

'seizer'.

formed from the weak form of the root, the

thus priy-d- 'dear' {pri- 'please'), sruv-d- m. 'spoon'

3. Several derivatives are

suffix being accented^;

{sru- 'flow'), vr-d-^

m.

'troop' {vr- 'surround'), tur-d- 'rapid' {tf- 'cross'); yug-d-n.

'yoke', suc-d- 'bright', krs-d- 'lean' 5.

a. Several derivatives of this type, which occur almost exclusively at the end of
compounds, are made from, various tense stems; e. g. -a-saj-a- 'stopping', -iud-d- (AV.)

'impelling', -pas-ya- 'seeing', -inv^d- 'urging', -fr-nd- 'bestowing', -indh-d- 'kindling', -bntv-d(AV.) 'saying', -pib-a- (AV.) 'drinking', -^'-ayi- 'exciting' 6; y^-j-o- m. 'attainment' (aor. stem

oi ji- 'conquer'), nesd- m. 'guidance'

(aor.

stem of

ni- 'lead').

considerable number of derivates are formed from the reduphcated

root; thus cacar-d- 'movable', dadhrs-d- 'bold', vavr-a- m. 'hiding' {vr- 'cover),
sisay-d- 'strengthening' (//- 'sharpen'), Hindth-a- 'perforation' {snath- 'pierce').
sasr-d- 'flowing' {Ysr-).
They are more usually formed directly from the
intensive stem or from stems analogously reduplicated; e. g. caksm-d- 'gracious'
{ksam- 'forbear'), rerih-d- (AV.) 'continually licking' {rih- 'lick), -rorud-d- (AV.)
'shedding tears' {rud- 'weep'), vevij-d 'quick' {vij- 'dart'); cara-car-d 'farextending', cala-cal-d- 'unsteady', fani-spad-d- (AV.) 'palpitating' {Yspand-),
mari-mri-d- (AV.) 'groping' {mrs- 'feel'), mali-mluc-d- (AV.) 'moving about in
4.

from gd-

'go';

sisu-

'grow'.
1 jdgat- 'going',

m.

'child',

if

from

su-

is an old partireduplicated stem of

gd- 'go'; Whitney, however, thinks (i 147 e)
that it is made from the reduplicated form
jaga- {= ja-gam-) with the root determina-

ciple

tive

present

-i.

on the root

living',

of the

from kam-d- 'desand sdk-d- 'help-

ful'.
3

See Lindner p. 33.

According to Grassmann,

Some

f.

vra-,

of the derivatives of this type are

transitions from the root stems to the a-declension, especially at the end of compounds.
6 See below. Determinative Compounds,
5

In these words the suffix is almost invariably accented ; kdm-a- 'desire' is accented 272.
2

as differentiated

iring'; similarly sak-a- 'help'

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

the dark', a kind of

demon

{vrt- 'turn'), sani-syad-d-

{sramsa.

sarT-srp-d- 'crawling'

'fall'),

The

suffix -a is

the root with

{mluc-

by

far the

Vedic Grammar.

of the sun), vari-vrt-d- (AV.) 'rolHng'

'set',

(AV.) 'running'

4.

Ysyand^,

sani-sras-d- (AV.) 'decrepit''

Vsrp-).

most frequent one used

a verbal prefix, being nearly always

in forming derivatives from

accented whether the noun ex-

iii-iud-d- (AV.) 'rousing', pari-car-a,- (AV. VS.) 'wandering', vi-hodh-d- 'wakeful', savi-gir-d- (AV.) 'swallowing', sam-jay-d- 'victorious' '.
b. There are many words which have the appearance of ending in this suffix,,

'climbing over', d-dardir-d- 'crushing',

They include several nouns of plants and

animals. Examples are ukhd-'^ (AV.) 'caldron', krodd- (VS. AV.) 'breast', khild- (AV.>
'waste land', nakhd- 'naiV, paisd- 'wing', vamsd- 'reed' 3.
though the root cannot be found elsewhere.

-tt-ka

agent.

This suffix, which consists of the primary -a with the secondary -ka
added, is in a few words used as a primary suffix forming agent notms only:
abhi-kris-aka- (VS.) 'reviler', piy-aka- (AV.) 'abuser', a class of demon, vadhaka- (AV.), a kind of reed ('destructive'), sAy-aka- n. 'missile' (!/"-); also
pav-akd- 'purifying', 'bright', which though always written thus is invariably
116.

be pronounced pavakd-''.

to

-ata

agent.

117. In a few adjectives the primary suffix -a v^ith -id added is attached
to the strong form of the root, chiefly with the sense of the gerundive: darsatd- 'visible', pac-atd- 'cooked', bhar-atd- 'to be tended', yaj-atd- 'to be adored',.

raj-atd-^ 'silvery', hary-atd-^ 'desirable'.

-at
118.

The

suffixes -at

and

-ant

agent.

and -ant are almost

restricted to the formation of

The former appears chiefly in the formation of present,

active participles.
participles of the reduplicating class, as ddd-at- 'giving'; also in das-at- 'worshipping',

sds-at- 'instructing',

and the

aorist participle ddks-at-

and dhdks-at-

from dah- 'burn'. There are besides a few substantives originally participles,
which have shifted their accent, formed with -at: vah-dt- f. 'stream', vegh-dt(AV. VS.) f. 'barren cow', vagh-dt- m. 'sacrificer', srav-dt- f. 'stream', sasc-dt- m.
The suffix -ant is used to form the active participle of present
'pursuer' 7.
stems (excepting those of the reduplicating class), of future stems, and aorist.
Some of these have become independent adjectives: rli-dnt- 'weak',.
stems.
'spotted', hrh-dnt- 'great', mah-iint-^ 'great', riis-ant- 'brilliant'; also
dvay-ant- in d-dvay-ant- (RV^) 'not doublesubstantive d-dnt- m. 'tooth'?,
tongued' has the appearance of a participle of a denominative stem from.

pfs-aiit-

the

dvi- 'two'.
great'

'so

With the same

('making

suffix are

/-)

this',

and

aniig.

root

is

Few words

are

formed the two pronominal stems

'how great?' ('making what?'

kl-y-ant-

i-y-antki-).

action and agent,

formed with

this

suffix,

and

in

some of them

the-

doubtful.

6 Formed from the denominative stem

Cp. Lindner p. 35.
Also in tikha-ccfiid- (RV'.) 'fragile as a of hdri- 'bright'.
7
See below. Participial stems in -at,
pot', f. ukhd:
3TI A.
3 Cp. Lindner p. 33, bottom.
8 With lengthened vowel in the strong;
4 -aka- also appears in the Proper Name
1
2

cases.

nabh-alia-,
5

Probably from the root

raj- 'colour'.

See below, Participles in

-ant, 313.

IV.

Nominal Stem Formation.

Primary Nominal Derivation.

The only action nouns are the following neuters:

(RV.) 'guidance', gdmbh-an- (VS'.) 'depth'. The

/a/-a'^-

raj-dn-

(588c) are, however, probably locatives

from aorist stems.

Agent nouns
^carpenter', pus-dn-

'greatness',

in -s-dn-i

of action nouns formed with -an

uks-dn- m. 'ox', cdks-an- (AV.)

N. of a god, flih-dn- (VS. AV.) m.

are:

la..,

'

infinitives

n.

'eye',

tdks-an- m.

'spleen', tnajj-dn-

'marrow', murdh-dn- m. 'head', raj-an- m. 'king', ifs-an- adj.

sdgh-an- (TS. in. 2. i^) 'vulture'.

'virile',

m.

m.

'bull',

a. There are also several words formed with -an the root and original meaning of
which are mostly doubtful: 1. yu-v-an- m. 'youth', yds- an- f. 'maiden', sz/-dn- m. 'dog';
2. defective neuternouns; ah-an- 'eye', as-an- 'blood', asth-dn- 'bone', dh-an- 'day', ds-an-

'face', tid-dn-^

'water',

udh-an- udder',

dadh-dn- 'sour milk',

dos-dn- (AV.) 'arm',

yak-dn-

(AV. VS.) 'dung', sakih-dn- 'thigh'

3. stems occurring at the end ot
compounds only: -gm-an- and -jm-dn- (also used independently) 'course', -div-an-^ 'playing';

'liver',

idk-an-

bhv-an-',

'being', -hi-an-S 'growing'

-ana

(?) 6.

action and agent.

120. With the suffix -ana are formed a large number of derivatives with
both types of meaning. The root generally shows Guna, sometimes Vrddhi,
occasionally no change, rarely a weakened vowel.
These derivatives very
often appear with a preposition, such verbal compounds coming next in
frequency to those formed with the suffix -a.
1. With Guna are formed neuter action nouns;
e. g. kdr-ana- 'deed",
cdy-ana-{hN.) 'piling', dh-ana- 'play', bhoj-ana- 'enjoyment', vdrdh-ana- 'increase',

ved-ana- 'possession', hdv-ana- 'invocation', adhi-vi-kdrt-ana- 'cutting off'; also

agent nouns; e. g. the adjectives kar-and- 'active', cet-ana- 'visible', cod-ana(AV.)' 'impelling', vi-mSc-ana- 'releasing'; from a dupHcated (intensive) stem:
mgar-and- (VS.) 'waking' ( Yi^')2. With Vrddhi^ or lengthened medial a are formed neuter action
nouns, sometimes with a concrete sense; e. g. ut-pAr-ana- (AV.) 'transporting',
upa-vds- ana- {AY.) 'clothing', '6j:q5s' , pra-vac-ana- 'proclamation', sad-ana- 'stsX';
also agent nouns; e.g. sain-srav-ana- (AV.) 'flowing together'; -iriz-a/za- 'driving
away', msd-ana- 'gladdening', -vah-ana- 'conveying', -spas-ana-'^ (AV.) 'spying';

svdd-ana- m. 'sweetener'.
3. With unchanged vowel (final -a and medial a) are formed neuter
action nouns; e. g. ddna- 'giving', ud-ydna- (AV.) 'going out', ni-dhdna'receptacle', rdks-ana- 'protection', sad-ana- 'seat', ava-pra-bhrdms-ana- ^ (AV.
XIX. 39^) 'slipping down', prSn- ana- 'breathing' {Yan-); anomalously formed
directly from a preposition, sdm-ana- 'meeting'; also agent nouns; &. g. tdpa?ia- 'burning', a-krdm-ana- (VS.) 'stepping upon', sam-gdm-ana- 'assembling'.
4. With weak vowel are formed very few derivatives: either neuter
action nouns partly with concrete meaning: krp-dna- 'misery', pfs-ana'tenderness', bhi'tv-ana- 'being', vrj-dna- and (once) vfj-ana- 'enclosure', -si'ivaia:- (A V.) 'procreation'; or agent nouns: krp-and- {ASf .) 'miserable', tur-dna-

Used

in the instrumental only.

From
From

ud- 'be wet'.

3
dlv- 'play' in pratl-dlv-an- 'adversary at play'.
+ From bhu- 'be' in vi-bhvan- and vi-b/ivdn-

'far-reaching'.
5

Names matari-sv-an- and

Wackernagel 21, p. 125,

In the Proper

rji-iv-an-,

cp.

bottom, and above, p. 95, u. ".

o -kaman- in ni-kaman- 'desirous' is
transition form for the -stem ni-kdma-.

In

the

RV. only

compounds, rsi-codana-

as

final

member

of

etc.

In this type the only vowel appearing

in the radical syllable is a.

\n prati-spasana- (AV. viu.

J")See Whitney's note on navaprabhrdiuiana- in his translation of AV. XIX.398 and
Weber's erroneous interpretation of this as'descent of the ship'.
9
10

112

I.

m.

'speeding';

vfs-ana- (VS.)

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I'lr-ana-

'ram'

{vr-

121.

'cover'),

Vedic Grammar.
m.

kir-dna-

'dust'

('scattering'),

'testicle'.

-ana

With

4.

this

suffix

action and agent.

(accented on the

some feminine action nouns

first

formed
which sometimes have

or the last syllable) are

(like the neuters in -and)

a concrete meaning: as-and- 'missile', jar-and- 'old age', dyot-and- 'brilliance',

ma7i-and- 'devotion', rodh-and- ('obstruction') 'dam', svet-and- 'daybreak', has-ana^laughter'. kap-and- 'caterpillar' and ras-and- 'rein' have the appearance of
being formed with this suffix, though the radical parts are not found in
Accented on the penultimate syllable: arh-dna- 'merit',
independent use.
jar-ana- 'dry wood'(?), bark-ana- 'might', bhand-dna- 'brilliance', mamh-dna^readiness', meh-dna- 'abundance', vaks-dna- 'belly', vadh-dna- 'slaughter', van-

The formation of yos-dnd- (RV'.), usually yos-ana-, 'woman' is

ana- 'desire'.
obscure '. With the suffix -ana- is also formed (though irregularly accented on
the radical syllable) /.r/-a3- ' 'fight' from a root not found in independent use^.
The suffix -ana also forms feminine agent nouns (adjectives) corresponding
to masculines in accented -ana-; thus tur-dna-'- 'speeding', tvar-ana- (AV.)
"hasting', spand-and- (AV.) 'kicking'.
a. Derivatives in -ana with verbal prefixes, if compounded with other -v^ordsj^ form
their

in -ana- ; thus an-apa-vac-ana- (AV.) 'not to be ordered away', siifa-vanc-ana- and

5 [K^J .) 'easy of approach', sad-vi-dhaiia- 'forming an ox&^x {vi-dhana-^ of six'.

f.

siipa-sM-f-ana-

-a/7/

action

and agent.

on the first or the last syllable, is added

weak form of the root.
forms feminine action nouns, sometimes with concrete sense; thus

122. This suffix, accented either

to either the strong or the
It

1.

as-dni- 'missile', is-dni- 'impulse', ksip-ani- 'blow', dyot-ani- 'brilliance', dham-dni'piping', vart-ani- 'tra.cY , sar-dni- 'va]vLxy' ; also /izraz'- 'noise' (?) in the

jarani-prd- 'moving with noise' (?).

2. It forms agent nouns, both m.
ar-diii-

tar-dni-

'fire-stick',

f.

and

{a-aj-)

f.

and

substantives

'enlightener',

thus

adjectives;

'movable',

car-dni-

'active',

dhvas-dni- 'sprinkling', vaks-dni- m. 'strengthener'; also in the

N. of a demon, dj-ani- (AV.) f. 'stick for driving'
tidani-mdt- 'abounding in waves' (ud-ani- 'undulating' from ud-

'swift',

compounds

%e

m.

caks-dni-

compound

dn-ars-ani-,

wet').
a.

'swift

From

flight'.

the

reduplicated root: papt-ani- {pat-

From

aorist stems: cars-ant- 'active'

'fly')

in

su-papt-ani-

{car- 'move'),

f.

pi.

f.

'men',

j'iZ/5j-(z';z2- 'overcoming' ( "iAj^/^-). From desiderative

stems: ruruks-dni- 'willing to destroy' {ruj- 'break'), sisas-dni- 'eager to win'
( Ysa-), a-suhiks-dni- 'gleaming forth' {sue- 'shine').

/fln--a'2- 'crossing' (//--'cross'),

-am

action and agent.

feminine form corresponding to the action and

agent nouns formed with -ana firom the strengthened or unreduced root*,
with or without verbal prefix; thus -cdd-ani-'' 'vagiug^ {cod-ana-), pes-ani- (AV.)
'well-formed' {pes-ana-), proks-ani- (VS. AV.) f. 'sprinkling water', pra-jndni123.

This suffix

is

the

Other stems with the same meaning

This is
4
The rootis probably accentuation.

the

only

example

of

such

are yos-an-, ySs-a-,yds4i-.

:

yu-

'unite'.

The suffix
when the root
2

-and never otherwise occurs

is accented.
Only as a nominal stem prt- 'fight'.

That

is,

sarp-and'.
6 See -ana,
7

su--upa-vahc-ana12.0,

and

su-ufa-

3.

In brahma-codani- 'stimulating devotion'.

IV.

Nominal Stem Formation.

Primary Nominal Derivation.

113

(AV.) 'easily known', spar-ani- (AV.) 'preserving'; abhi-sav-anJ- (AV.) 'pressing

implement', vi-dhdr-ani- (AV.) 'preserving'.
a.

In some (partly obscure) words the accent here shifts from the radical vowel

to the^ final of the suffix

ars-ant- (AV.) 'piercing pain', cet-ard- (AV.) 'visible' {ck-ana-),
tap-ant- 'heat' {tap-ana- 'burning'), ted-ani- (AV. VS.) 'blood', pri-ani- 'tender' \pfi-ana'tenderness'), vrj-ani- 'enclosure' {vrj-dna- and vfj'-ana-).
:

-an-7ya

gerundive.

124. This is a new compositive suffix beginning to be attached directly

to the root in the formation of the gerundive.
It is based on the primary

-ana of neuter action nouns extended with the secondary adjective

-Tya.
There are two examples in the AV.: upa-jTv-aniya- 'to be
subsisted on', and a-mantr-aniya- 'to be addressed'.
suffix

suffix

-ar

agent.

125. This suffix is found in a very few words: us-dr'husband's brother', nd-nand-ar- I. 'husband's sister' '-

-as

action

'dawn', dev-ar- m.

f.

and agent.

126. This suffix forms a large class of neuter action nouns (which sometimes acquire a concrete sense) accented on the root, and a small class of
agent nouns (mostly adjectives) accented on the suffix. Some words belong
to one class or the other according to the accent. The root generally takes
Guna, and medial a is sometimes lengthened, while the vowel is reduced in

a few instances.
I. Examples of action nouns are: with Guna, /roy-aj- 'pleasure' ( l//rr-),
(
srdv-as- 'fame' (lAjra-), kdr-as- 'deed' '/'i^r-), cet-as- 'brilliance' (!/'/-), tij-asWith medial a unchanged:
'splendour' {Ytij-^, doh-as- 'milking' {Yduh-Y.

dv-as-

'aid',

tdf-as- 'heat', prdth-as- 'breadth', vdc-as- 'speech';

or wholly concrete meaning, cdks-assdr-as- 'lake'.

"With lengthened

a:

'lustre',

and with

partially

mdn-as- 'thought', 'mind',

'eye',

-vac-as-^, vss-as- 'covering',

'garment',

vAh-as- 'offering', -svad-as- 'flavour' in prd-svadas- 'agreeable'; and from roots

not in independent use: paj-as- 'briUiance' zxiA path-as-'^ 'path'. 'With reduced
vowel: ur-as- 'breast', juv-as- 'speed' (beside j'dv-as-), mfdh-as- 'contempt',
sir-as- 'head';

the

also vip-as- 'inspiration' in

compounds

vipas-cit- 'inspired'

denominative iras-ydPerhaps also the

'be angry'; hur-as- 'deceit' in huras-dt- 'plotting mischief.
adverbs (with shift of accent) tir-ds 'across' and mith-ds 'mutually'.
a. To roots ending in -a the suffix is added direct in bhas-S n. 'light' {bha- 'shine')
and -dds-S 'giving' 6 (ydd-). jiias- 'kinsman' and mas- 'moon' are probably also formed

and vipo-dha- 'bestowing

inspiration'; iras- 'anger' in the

but being masculines were most likely agent nouns in origin: ma-dsThe suffix seems to be added with an intervening y in
-hay-as 'agility' 7 if it is derived from ka- 'leave' 8, while in dhay-as- n. 'enjoyment' and
-gdy-as- 'song' 9 the y probably belongs to the root'o.

with the suffix

= 'measurer'
1

-as,

(?a- 'measure').

svasar- 'sister' in probably an old

com-

Often to be read as dissyllables, bhaas-

pound in which -sar represents a root; cp. and daas:

6 In -das- 'giving' and -dhas- 'placing' an
Brugmann, Grundriss 2, 8, note.
2 The
word hes-as- 'missile' is perhaps -as has been formed probably by a misformed from the aorist stem of hi- 'impel'. understanding of the N. sing, -dd-s and -dhd-s.
3

and
4

this

'vigorous' and sdrva-kdyas7 In vi-hdyasIn vi-vdcas- (AV.) 'speaking variously'

(AV.) 'having all strength'.
sa-vdcas- (AV.) 'speaking similarly'.

According to Oldenberg, ZDMG. S4. 6?

word means 'home' and is perhaps formed

suffix -thas horn pa- 'protect'; according to SlEG, Gurupujakaumudl 97, it means
'food', and is derived from /a- 'drink'.

with a

Indo-arische Philologie.

I.

4.

But

it

may be

derivative

of hi-

'impel'.
9

From

above 27
10

dhe-

'suck'

and gai-

'sing';

cp.

m ay

a.

In pT-v-as-

n. 'fat' {pi- 'swell') the

114

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

Agent nouns

in -as, mostly adjectives, correspond in several instances

nouns accented on the root. These are ap-ds- 'active' {dp-as- 'work'),
tar-ds- (VS^) 'quick' (tdr-as- 'quickness'), tyaj-ds- m. 'descendant' {tydj-as2.

to action

duv-ds-

'abandonment'),
'greatness').

The

{duv-as- 'worship'),

'stirring'

mah-ds-

'great'

{md/i-as-

derivative tav-ds- occurs both as an adjective 'strong'

and

without change of accent' as a m. substantive 'strength'. A few others have

no corresponding action noun: tos-ds- 'bestowing', dhvar-ds- 'deceiving', yaj-ds'offering', vedh-ds- 'worshipper', ves-ds- (AV.) 'neighbour'; and from a denominative stem mrgay-ds-

(AV.)

'wild animal'^.

There are a few substantives accented on the suffix and seemingly

never neuter, which are allied to the neuter action nouns in meaning, some
being abstract, others concrete in sense. The change of accent may be due
Thus raks-ds- m. occurs beside rdks-as- n. both
to change of gender^.
meaning 'demon'. There also occur jar-ds- m. 'old age', bhiy-ds- m. 'fear',
tves-ds-'' 'impulse', hav-ds- 'invocation'; us-ds- f. 'dawn' may have been an
agent noun originally; dos-ds- (AV.) f. (?) beside dos-d- 'night' may be due
The stem upds- 'lap' (the gender of which is
to parallelism with us-ds-.
uncertain, as it occurs only in the locative singular) may have been formed
under the influence of upd-stha-^ m. 'lap'.
a.
A few Proper Names are formed with the suffix -as; thus nodh-as-; arcananasis a compound of anas- 'wain', possibly also bhaldnds-. ap-saras-(> f. 'nymph' is perhaps
angiras-, a name of Agni, has the appearance of
a compound ('moving in the waters'),
a.

being formed with this

suffix,

but the

-asi

-s is

perhaps secondary?.

action and agent.

127. This suffix, which is an extension of -as with -/, forms a couple
of action nouns with concrete sense, and a few agent nouns: dhasi- m.
'drink' {dhe- 'suck') and dhasi- f. 'abode'; at-as'i- m. 'beggar', dharn-asi- 'strong',
san-asl- 'victorious'.

-a

action.

128. By far the greatest proportion of words in -a consists of secondary

feminine adjectives corresponding to masculines and neuters in -a.
There is, however, also a considerable number of feminine action nouns
of an independent character, formed by adding -a sometimes to the root, but
usually to secondary conjugation stems (desiderative, causative, denominative).
Thus is-d- (AV.) 'dominion', nind-d- (AV.) 'blame'; jigis-S- 'desire to win',
bhiks-d- (AV.) 'begging', virts-d-^ 'desire to frustrate'; gamay-d-^ (AV'.) 'causing
to go'; asvay-d- 'desire for horses', apasy-d- 'activity', urusy-a- 'readiness to
help', jtvanasy-d- (TS. 11. 3. io^-3) 'desire of life', sukratuy-d- 'skill'.
a.

'leg'

This

and

suffix

has the appearance of being added to a reduplicated stem xajangh-a- 1"

it may also be contained in the very obscure word snsd-^'^ (AV'.).

jihv-a- 'tongue';

have been inserted owing

oi pi-van- adj.
1

Whitney

to the influence

1152, 2

but

owing

to

the

accent

it

probably

is

masc.

'fat'.

e,

erroneously, tavas-

According

updstha- probably

to

Grassmann,

however,

81, 2 a.
6 See Macdonell, Vedic Mythology
probably contained in
47,
a-han-as- 'wanton', but the derivation is note 3; but cp. PlscHEL, VS. 3, 197.
obscure, Cp. FrShde, BB. 21, 321
7 Cp. Brugmann, Grundriss 2, p. 188.
330.
8
3 The dative infinitives from stems in -as
From vi-Trtsa- desiderative of rdhare sometimes accented on the root, but 'prosper'.
usually on the suffix (105 a). This may indicate a
9 The causative stem used in the formadifference of gender, the former being neuter, tion of the periphrastic perfect.
10 Cp. Brugmann, Grundriss 2, p. 106,
the latter masculine.
4 As tves-ds- and hav-ds- occur in the top.
I' See Whitney's note on AV. i, ii^.
I.
sing,
only,
the
gender is uncertain,
'strength'.
2

The

suffix

is

iipds-stha-; cp.

IV.

Nominal Stem Formation.

-aku

Primary Nominal Derivation.

115

agent.

129. This very rare suffix seems to have been limited to the formation
of agent nouns. It appears in mrday-aku- 'gracious' (formed from a causative
stem), pfd-aku- (AV. VS.)' 'adder', iksv-aku-, N. of a man.

-ana
130. This

agent.

forms a middle participle^ from the present (455, 461,

perfect (493) and (in the form of -s-and) from the
aorist tense stems (527).
It also appears
in the formation of a few
adjectives and substantives, a preceding u always taking Guija. Such adjectives
are: tdkav-ana- 'speeding' (beside tdk-u- and tdk-va-), bhrgav-ana- 'beaming'
(beside bhfgu- m.), vdsav-ana- 'possessing wealth' (vdsu-), urdhva-s-and- 'being
erect' (formed like an aorist participle from urdhvd- 'upright').
There are also the Proper Names dpnav-ana-, cydv-ana-, pfthav-ana-;
also cydvat-ana- which looks as if formed by adding -ana to the active
present participle stem of cyii- 'fall'. Of doubtful derivation are the substantives
pdrs-ana- m. 'abyss' and ruj'ana-^ f. 'river' (i. 32*).
suffix

the

4^7) 473) 479))

-/

131.

With

nouns (adjectives
etymology 5.

action and agent.

formed numerous feminine action nouns, agent

and masculine substantives), and a few neuters of obscure

this

suffix are

The

root appears in various forms: sometimes with Guna, Virddhi or

a, generally with unchanged or weak vowel, often reduplicated.
suffix a final radical palatal regularly appears (not the original
In many of these derivatives the root is not traceable elsewhere.
guttural).
The accent is so fluctuating that no general rule can be stated. The meaning

lengthened
Before the

often greatly specialised.

Examples of action
1.

is

hc-i (AV.)

'heat';

nouns are: with Guna, rSp-i (AV.) 'pain',

lengthened a: aj'-i- m. f. 'race', grdh-i- 'seizure',
unchanged vowel: san-i- 'gain'; with weak vowel:

with

dhraj-i- 'course'; with

'brilliance', krs-i-

tvis-i-

'tillage',

ri'tc-i-

(AV.) 'brightness'.

Examples of agent nouns are: with Guna, ar-i- 'devout', arc-i- m.

'beam'; with Vrddhi, kirs-i (VS.) 'drawing'; with lengthened vowel
2.

-jani-^

f.

'wife',

sar-i-

'poisonous matter';
'mantle', nabh-i-

vowel:

'arrow' (RV^), a kind of bird (VS. TS.), da?-i- (AV.)

in a few words of obscure etymology, drap-i- m.

'navel', pan-i-

h'ld-i- 'playing', granth-i-

siic-i- 'bright',

motion').

or

f.

f.

also

m. 'hand', ras-i- m. 'heap'; with unchanged

m. 'knot', mdh-i- 'great'; with weak vowel:

grbh-i- (AV.) 'container', bhfm-i- 'lively' (beside bhrm-i- f. 'lively

the reduplicated root, which nearly always has a weak

From

reduced radical vowel, are formed with ordinary reduplicative vowel:

ctkit-i-^ (SV.)

'understanding', cdkr-i- 'active', jdghr-i- 'sprinkling about' {ghr-),

pdpr-i- 'bestowing abundantly', babhr-i- 'carrying', vavr-i- m. 'covering', sdsr-i'speeding', susv-i- 'pressing'; yuyudh-i- 'warlike', vivic-i- 'appropriating' {Yvyac-);

first

It

4 For this word occurring in the form of

in the RV. only as the
of a compound in pfdaku- rujanas see p. 59, note '.
Grassmann, Worterbuch r7l8f.
5 See
'having a surface like that of a

occurs

member

sanusnake'.

Lindner

p.

5558.

6 At the end of compounds beside the

See Lindner p. 53 55.
3 apnana- seems to be an irregular present independent jani:
reading for the cikit-t'i- of the
7 Various
participle of o^- 'obtain' formed from the stem

Sp-nd- instead of ap-nu-.

RV.
8*

ii6

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

jdgmi- 'hastening' {gam-

4.

'go'), jdghfi-i- 'striking' (

Vedic Grammar.

Y han-), sdsn-i- 'vfinning'

jdgur-i-

'conducting' (l/^^-), tdtur-i- 'victorious' {Y^P')> pdpur-i- and pupur-i- (SV.)

'bestowing abundantly' {Vpf-) beside pdpr-i; with lengthened or strong
reduplicative vowel: tdtrp-i- 'gladdening', dddhrs-i- 'bold', v&vah-i- 'driving
swiftly', sasah-i-

'victorious'; ttituj-i- 'speeding', tutuj-i-

m.

'stimulator', yiiyuv-i-

weak

'driving away', y&yudh-i- 'warlike'; jarbhdr-i- 'nourishing'' ( lAiJ/^r-) '. The

reduplicated present stem appears in dad-i- 'giving' and dddh-i- 'bestowing';

from similar stems (appearing in the perfect) are formed //-/ 'drinking' {Ypd-)
and yay-i 'speeding' ( Yys-}.
a. There are only about half a dozen neuters formed with the suffix -i,
They are dis-i- 'eye', dsth-i- (AV. VS.)
nearly all being obscure in origin.
'bone', dddh-i- 'sour milk', sdm-i- 'toil' {sam- 'work'); and with Vrddhi hird-i'heart'.

sometimes compounded with verbal prefixes in these

being then usually accented; thus a-j&n-i- f. 'birth',
vi-vavr-i- m. 'opening', sam-tan-i- f. 'harmony', 'music', a-yaj-i- 'bringing near
by offerings', a-mur-i- m. 'destroyer', ni-jaghn-i- 'striking down', para-dad-ib.

The

derivatives,

root

the

is

suffix

'delivering over', vi-sasah-i- 'victorious', vy-anas-i-^ 'pervading'.

c. From dha- 'put' is derived the stem -dhi- which is used in forming

many m. compounds;

e. g. antar-dhi- (AV.) 'concealment', ud-dhi- (AV.), part

From stha- 'stand' is similarly
of a car, ni-dh{- 'treasure', pari-dhi- 'fence'.
formed -sthi- in prati-sthi- f. 'resistance'. There is here some doubt as to
whether we have a reduced form of the root (as in dhi-ta-) or displacement
The latter alternative is
of the radical vowel by the very frequent suffix -i.
perhaps the more probable owing to the almost invariable accentuation of

the

and the occurrence of a stem

like prati-sthi- 'resistance'

beside prati-

sthd- 'standpoint'.
-in

132.

The

agent.

very frequent secondary

the value of a primary

suffix,

suffix -in

seems sometimes to have

end of compounds;

exclusively, however, at the

thus -ad-in- 'eating', --/- (AV.) 'seeking', -tod-in- 'piercing', d-n&m-in- 'unbending',
-vySdh-in- (AV.) 'piercing'; from a present stem -as-nuv-in- (VS.) 'reaching';

from an aorist stem

'4
stem -yay-in- 'going'

-saks-in-^

overpowering {Y^ah-);

'istha

from a reduplicated

agent.

attached to the root is formed the superlative

The root is regularly accenteds, i and u taking
with an adjectival sense.
Guna, while a remains unchanged, though in two or three instances it is
strengthened with a nasal.
Roots in -a combine that vowel with the initial -i
of the suffix to e, which, however, is usually to be read as two syllables.
About fifty superlatives formed with this suffix occur in the Sarnhitas. Examples
are: ndy-istha- 'leading in the best manner' {ni- 'lead'), jdv-istha- 'quickest'
(Ju- 'speed'), ved-istha- 'procuring most' {jjid- 'find'), ioc-istha- 'most brilliant'
(sue- 'shine'); ydj-istha- 'sacrificing best'; bdmh-istha- 'most abundant' (bamh133'

With

this

suffix

1 The words bdmbhar-i- (VS.) m., a somaguarding genius, karkar-i- f. 'lute', dundubk-im. 'drum' may be onomatopoetic in origin.
2 From the perfect stem
an-as- of ai-

'attain'.
3

In pra-saks-in- 'victorious'.

+
p.

In ni-yay-in- 'passing over'. Cp.

59;

Whitney

1183

Lindner

a.

5 Except two or three times jyestka- and

kan-istha- (see above p. 83, 14); and when
the superlative is compounded with a prefix,

which then has the accent.

IV.

Nominal Stem Formation.

Primary Nominal Derivation.

'make firm'), mdmh-istha- 'most liberal' {mah- 'be great'); jyhthaand jyesthd- 'eldest' {jya- 'overpower'), dhhtha- 'bestowing the most'
ySstha- 'going fastest'

117

'greatest'
(

Ydha-),

!/>-)
a. In many instances these superlatives attach themselves in meaning
to
derivative adjectives, being formed from the root which the latter
contain; thus os-istha-"- (TS. i. 6. i23) beside 6sa-m 'quickly', bdrh-istha'greatest' beside brh-dnt- 'great', vdr-istha- 'choicest' {vr- 'choose') beside vdr-a'choice',

the suffix

sadh-isthais

added

adjective; thus

beside

'straightest'

sadh-u- 'straight'.
In a few
form of the root which appears

to the derivative

cases
in the

As-istha- {KS[\) 'swiftest' beside

as-u- (from as- 'reach'); and

attached to the radical element in ndv-a-''
'new" (and not directly to the root from which that word may be derived).
b. In some cases the root is compounded with a verbal prefix or
other indeclinable; thus d-gam-istha- 'coming best', d-sram-istha- 'never tiring',
idtn-bhav-istha-^ 'most beneficial'.
a. There are some irregularities in the formation of this superlative.
Thus hhuretains its vowel unchanged, adding the suffix with an intervening -y. bhu-y-isiha'greatest'; the roots j!>?-J- and irl- are treated as if they ended in -a: presfha- 'dearest',
iresfha- 'most glorious'; pdr-s-isfha- 'taking across best' is made from an aorist stem of
pr- 'cross'. The abnormal accentuation of jyesfhd- 'eldest' is doubtless intended to
differentiate its meaning from jyistha- 'greatest'.
The use of kan-isthd- 'youngest' is
in ndv-istha- 'newest' the suffix

is

parallel to that of the formers.

-is

action.

134. This suffix forms a dozen neuter action nouns, mostly used in a
concrete sense.
Though the root takes Guna, the suffix is accented except
in three instances.
flesh',

The words

thus formed are:

arc-is- 'flame',

krav-is- 'raw flesh', chad-is- 'cover', chard-is- 'protection',

barh-ts- 'straw', roc-is-

'light',

vart-is- 'track', vydih-is- 'course'

am-is-^ 'raw
j'yot-is- 'light',

soc-is- 'flame',

(?),

sarp-is- 'melted butter', hav-is- 'oblation'.

Besides these av-is- appears for av-as- 'aid' and mah-is- for mdh-asa few derivatives: avis-ydnt- 'helping readily', avis-yd- 'desire',
avis-yt'i- 'desirous'; mdhis-vant- 'great'; and with inorganic -s tuvi-s- 'might',
suci-s- 'flame', su-rabhi-s- 'fragrant' for iuvi-, s'uci-, surabhi- in a few derivatives:
tuvis-mant- 'mighty', sucis-mant- (only voc.) 'brilliant', surabhis-tama- 'very
a.

'greatness' in

fragrant'.

-7:

action

and agent.

secondary use in the formation of feminines,

chiefly adjectives, from m. and n. stems in -a, -i, -u, -r, as well as various
consonant stems (201), seems to be primary in forming a few independent
feminine action and agent nouns. Such are deh-i- 'rampart', nad-i- 'stream',
135. This

suffix,

besides

its

'joy', pSs-i- (RV.) 'swaddling clothes' (?), ves-i- 'needle', sdc-i- 'power',
sdm-t- and sim-i- 'work'; seemingly from an aorist stem {yvah-^ vaks-i- (RV.)
There are also about a dozen masculines: ah-i- 'serpent', upav-i'flame'.
(VS.) 'encouraging', daks-i- (RV'.)^ 'flaming', prav-i- 'attentive', dus-prav-i-

nand-i-

1 In the compound osistha-davan- 'giving

immediately'.
2 Probably from a demonstrative root nuwhich appears in nic 'now', nu-iana- -present'.
3 This superlative is formed under the
influence of the positive sam-bhu- as the independent superlative of bhu- is bhu-y-istha-.
4 The regular form bhav-htha- occurs in
combination with sam-.

5 kan-istha- 'smallest' appears in books v

and VI oif' the TS.
6 This word, which occurs in the L. sing,
form dmis-i only, is given as m. in BR., pw.,
and Grassmann, but why it should not be

like all the rest a neuter, is not clear.

7 Only voc. daksi,
Cp. p. 119, note 5.

Pada

dhaksi-,

x.

14 18.

ii8

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

'unfriendly',

charioteer';

su-prav-i-

'very

4.

rath-i-

attentive',

and the Proper Names ndm-i- and

-ika

action

Vedic Grammar.
'not

d-raih-i-

'charioteer',

pfth-T-'^.

and agent.

136. This suffix forms a few neuter substantives and some adjectives:
thus dn-ika- n. 'face', dfs-ika- n. 'aspect', mrd-ikd- n. 'grace', a-sar-Tka- (AV.) n.

'rheumatic pains';
ikd-

m.

dfbh-tka- m., N. of a demon, vrdh(AV.) m., a kind of disease; from a reduplicated

-rj-Tka-^ 'beaming',

'increaser', vi-sar-ika-

stem: par-phar-ika- m.

'filler'.

-Tyatps

agent.

137. This suffix is used in forming comparatives, being added to the

root in the same way as the superlative suffix -istha (133).
At least 40 of
these derivatives^ occur in the Samhitas. Examples are: jdv-tyams- 'quicker',

mdmh-Tyams- 'more

liberal', ydj-iyams- 'sacrificing better', tej-iyams- 'sharper',

vcd-iyams- 'procuring more', yodh-Tyams- 'fighting better', preyams-^ 'dearer'
iVpri-), sreyams-^ ( yiri-) 'more splendid', -stheyams- 'lasting' (V^J'^/^a-). Connected

sense with the corresponding positive are dn-tyams- (AV.) 'smaller',

beside dim- 'minute', sds-iyams- 'more frequent', beside sds-vani- 'constant';
and from a derivative form of the root tikm-iyams- (AV.)^ 'sharper', beside
in

tiksnd- 'sharp'

{tij-

'be sharp').

Beside the usual form in -Tyams- there appear some half dozen
comparatives made with a shorter form of the suffix -yams tdv-yams- beside
tdv-iyams- 'stronger', ndv-yams- beside ndv-iydms- 'new', pdfi-yams- beside pdntyams- 'more wonderful', bhii-yams-^ '(becoming) more', 'greater', beside bhdvtyams- 'more plentiful', rdbh-yams- beside rabh-iyams- (VS.) 'more violent',
sdh-yams- beside sdh-iyams- 'stronger'; j'yd-ySms- 'greater', 'older', and sdn-yams'older' {sdna- 'old') appear without an alternative form beside them.
b. With verbal prefixes or particles: vi-kled-iydms- (AV.) 'moistening
more', pdri-svaj-iydms- (AV.) 'clasping more firmly', prdti-cyav-Tyams- 'pressing
a.

closer against'; d-stheyams- 'not enduring'.

-u

This

138.
adjectives

and

suffix

forms

agent.

considerable

The

substantives.

latter are

number of agent nouns, both

chiefly masculines,

but there are

and neuters. The suffix is usually accented. The root

is generally weak, but sometimes shows Vrddhi,
least often Guna; it also
occasionally appears in a reduplicated form.
Medial a usually remains
unchanged, but is sometimes lengthened; occasionally it is nasalized or appears
as e. Final -a adds an intervening y, but is occasionally dropped. Gutturals
only (not palatals) appear before this suffix.
I.
Examples of adjectives are: ur-i'i- 'wide', rj-i'i- 'straight', prth-ualso several feminines

'broad',
dar-i'i.-

jigv-t'i-

mrd-i'i-

(VS.)

'soft',

iydr-);

'splitting'

'victorious', sisn-u-

below 375 B;

See

of a few
as bha-rjTka- 'light shedding'.
3

See Lindner

p.

p.

80;

compounds,

Whitney 466

155;

470.
4

The

and srl- being treated as

pra-lyims- and sra-iyanis- as

roots prT-

ending in

-a:

in the superlative.
5

In the TS. pdp-Tydts-

is

'solitary';

'lying'

(V/r-),

jay-i't-

formed directly

'conquering' (y^V-),

ciJdt-u-

'ready to give' {^san-y-, tak-u-

Lindner

Whitney 355 b.
2 As final member

vidh-u-

say-it-

'shining'
'swift',

{Ycit-),

tan-u-

'thin',

from the adjective stem papa-, the radical

element of which is uncertain.
6 With the radical vowel unchanged as
the superlative.
Some other words have the appearance
of being reduplicated: babhr-u- 'brown',
a-rdr-u- 'hostile' {rd- 'give'); nialimlu- (VS.)
seems to be a mutilated form of malimlucd(AV.) 'robber'.

in

Nominal Stem Formation.

IV.
tAp-u-

as-u-

'hot',

'move');

{as-

'swift'

dhd-y-ic-'^

Primary Nominal Derivation.

amh-u- 'narrow';

'reach');

pa-y-u- 'protecting';

'thirsty'j

y-i'c-

cer-u-

'going'

119

'active'

(!/>-)=';

{car-

reku-

'empty' {Yric-).

Examples of substantives are: m. grh-u- 'beggar', rip-ii- 'cheat';

of a demon; ds-u- 'life', mdn-u- 'man', pad-u- 'foot', bah-i'i- 'arm',

2.

pipr-u-, N.
aitts-tl-

'filament',

'river',

dhdn-u-

va-y-u- 'wind'; f. h-u- (also m.) 'arrow', sindh-u- (also m.)

'sandbank', pdrs-u- 'rib', Mti-u- 'jaw'; n. ay-u 'life', jan-u'knee', tdl-u- (VS.) 'palate', trdp-u- (AV. VS.) 'tin', ddr-u- (also m.) 'wood',
sdn-u (also m.) 'summit'; with syncope, ks-u- 'food' {ghas- 'eat'); with reduplication, tl-ta-ii- 'sieve'.

In a few of these derivatives the root appears with a prefix: upa-y-uI') 'approaching', ni-cer-ii- 'ghding', pra-may-u- (AV.) 'liable to
destruction', pari-tatn-u- (AV.) 'surrounding', sdm-vas-u- 'dwelling together';
ab/iis-u-i m. 'rein', vi-kUnd-u- (AV.) m. a kind of disease.
139. There is besides a large class of agent nouns formed with -u
not directly from the root but from tense or secondary conjugation stems.
1. From present stems are formed: tany-u- 'thundering' {tanya-ti 'roars'),
a.

(TS.

I.

I.

bhind-i't-m.. 'destroyer' (bhind-dnti 'they split'), -vind-u-^ 'finding' {vindd-ti 'finds');

from an

stem ddks-u-^ and dhdks-u- 'burning'.

are formed i-yaks-u- 'desirous of sacrificing'
'desirous of winning' ( yyV-),
( VO"?/-)j cikits-u- (AV.) 'cunning' ( \f cit-), Jigis-ii
jighats-u- (AV.) 'greedy' {ghas- 'eat'), titiks-u- (AV.) 'patient', dits-u- 'ready to
2.

give'

aorist

From desiderative steins

didfks-u-^

(l/'^a-),

to obtain'
revile',

Yd/ia-),

blbhats-n-

mumuks-u-

vivaks-ic- (AV.)

3.

'feeling

'desiring

From

86^)

(vii.

'eager

to

dips-u- 'wishing to harm'

disgust'

release'

yfbadh-),

\ftnuc-),

{Ydrs-), didhis-n- 'wishing

Y^abh-), ninits-u- 'wishing to
mimiks-u- 'mingling' ( Ymis-),

see'

ririks-t'i-

'wishing to

damage'

Yris-),

Yvac-), sisas-i'i- (AV.) 'eager to win' ( Ysa-^.

causative stems are formed: dharay-i'i- 'streaming', bhdjay-u'calling

aloud'

'liberal', bhdvay-i'i- 'cherishing',

mamkay-u-

'liberal',

manday-u-

'joyous', sramay-i'i-

'exhausting oneself; from a causative denominative mrgay-u- (AV.VS.) m. 'hunter'.

4. By far the commonest are the derivatives from regular denominatives,

of which nearly 80 occur in the RV., and at least half a dozen additional
About 35 of these words are formed from denominative
?
thus aghay-u- 'malignant', aratly-2'1- (AV.) 'hostile', vasuy-t'cA few are formed
'desiring wealth', carany-u- 'mobile', manasy-i'i- 'desirous'.
from pronouns, as ahamy-u- 'selfish', asmay-u- 'favouring us', kimy-i'c- 'desiring
whatp'j tvay-i'i- 'loving thee', yuvay-u- and yuvay-u- 'desiring you two', svay-i'iIn the absence of an accompanying denominative, there is
'left to oneself.
the appearance of a secondary suffix -yu (with the sense of 'desiring' or some
more general adjectival meaning) attached directly to nouns. Thus there are
derivatives in the RV. in which the -as of noun stems is changed to -<?, as
amho-yu- 'threatening', duvo-yu- 'honouring'
if the suffix were actually -yu:
cases in the AV.
stems in actual use

beside

duvas-yi'i-,

and d-skrdho-yu-

'not niggardly'.

-uka

agent,

140. This suffix probably consists of the primary -u extended with the
secondary -ka. It is very rare in the Samhitas. There is no certain example
3 Probably from abhi-\-is- 'rule'.
1 Here
the y really belongs to the root
4 In go-vindi'i- 'searching for millc'.
dAe- 'suck'.
5 The Pada text has dhaks-u-. Cp. p. 117,
2 Also in the reduplicated form ydy-u(VS.) 'swift'; the final-o seems also to be note 7.
6 With irregular accent.
dropped in a-kh-u- 'mole' (kha- 'dig') and in
7 See the list in Lindner p. 63.
su-sih-u '(standing) well' {siha- 'stand').

I20

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

the RV., but san-ukd- (RV'.) 'desirous of prey' (yjaw-) and the Proper
per-ukd- (RV.) may be instances. In the AV. occur ghat-uka- 'kilhng',
vi-kas-uka- 'bursting', sdm-kas-uka- 'crumbhng up', d-pra-may-uka- 'not dying
suddenly'.
In the TS. occurs vas-iikd-, but the meaning and derivation are
in

Name

doubtful.

-us

action and agent.

nouns which have mostly a concrete

and masculine agent nouns, altogether less than 20 in number.
All the substantives except one are accented on the root, which generally
takes Guna, but in one instance Vrddhi. Those adjectives which also appear
as substantives have the same accentuation; but those stems which are used
This

141.

forms neuter action

suffix

sense,

solely as adjectives accent the suffix.

The

1.

neuter substantives are

dr-us- (AV.) 'wound', Sy-us-

'life',

cdks-us-

dhdn-us- 'bow', pdr-us- 'knot', ydj-iis'worship', vdp-us- 'marvel', sds-us- 'command'; with accent on the suffix: jan-i'istdp-us-

'light',

'birth'

'heat',

tdr-us-

'battle',

(also m.).

The masculine substantives are: ndh-us- 'neighbour', mdn-us- 'man';

adjectives identical in form with neuter substantives are: cdks-us- 'seeing',
tdp-us- 'glowing', vdp-us- 'wondrous'; adjectives without corresponding sub2.

stantives are: jay-us- 'victorious', van-i'cs- 'eager', vid-us-^ 'heedful'; also daks-us'flaming'

from the

aorist stem.

-u

feminine substantives.

142. This rare suffix chiefly forms feminines corresponding to masculines

Independent feminine substantives are: cam-U- 'dish',

-u^.
vadh-U- 'bride'; perhaps pan-a-^ 'admiration'.
There are also
compounds pums-cal-d- (VS.) 'courtesan', pra-jan-ii- (AV.) 'organ of

and neuters
tan-ti-

the

in

'body',

generation'.

-Uka

intensive adjectives.

143. This suffix is merely the lengthened form of -uka used in forming
a few derivatives from the reduplicated intensive stem. It appears in jagaraka- 'wakeful', dandas-uka- (VS.) 'mordacious', salal-aka- (RV'.) 'wandering
aimlessly'.

-ka

a very

agent.

common

secondary suffix, but very rarely appears

It is thus used in dt-ka- m. 'garment', su-me-kain a primary character.
'firmly fixed' {mi- 'fix'), si'is-ka- 'dry', sld-ka- m. 'call' {sru- 'hear'), sto-kd- m.
In vric-i-ka- m. 'scorpion' the suffix is added with connecting -i-.
'drop'.
The feminine form of the suffix appears in stii-ka- 'flake', ra-kd-, N. of a
144. This

is

goddess.
-ia

145. This

agent.

employed almost exclusively

to form past participles*,

with passive, sometimes with intransitive meaning.
Its more general
and original sense is, however, preserved in some words used as adjectives
or as substantives with concrete meaning; thus tri-td- 'rough', drdhd- 'firm',
suffix is

chiefly

si-td- 'cold',

vavd-ta-^ 'dear';

With weak root;

m.

du-td- 'messenger', sil-td- (AV. VS.) 'charioteer'.

only instance of form occurring is the I. sing, fanva.

4 See below, Past passive participles, 572,
syllable.
and the lists in Lindner p. 70 f.
2 See below, derivative -k steins, 384.
5 From a reduplicated form of va- 'win',
3 The
stem may be pan-u-, as the only and with unusual accent.
1

medial

the

vowel other than a in the radical

Nominal Stem Formation.

IV.
kistd-^

'singer',

dyu-td-

(AV.)

'ordinance';

bastd-'^

with

n.

'he-goat';

'gambling',

and

r-ld- 'right',

121

ghr-td- 'ghee', ja-td- 'kind',

(AV.)

'dance',

pur-td-

strong

radical

syllable:

nrt-td-

accented

Primary Nominal Derivation.

'reward',
(f-ta-

vra-id-'

'variegated';

m.

gdr-ta- 'car-seat', mdr-ta- 'mortal', vd-ta- 'wind', hds-ta- 'hand'; n. ds-ta'home', ndk-ta- 'night'.
a. In many past participles the suffix is added with connecting -/-,
as

raks-i-td-

Some

of these are used as n. substantives; thus

Several words thus formed appear as
adjectives only; thus tig-i-td-^ 'sharp', pal-i-td- 'grey'; also some other names
of colours with strong and accented radical syllable: ds-i-ta- 'black', rSh-i-ta'red', lok-i-ta- (AV.) 'red', hdr-i-ta- 'yellow' ; sye-td- 'white' is perhaps anomalously
formed with -ita- from syd-'- 'freeze'5.

jiv-i-td-

'protected'.

'life',

car-i-td-

'behaviour'.

-iar

agent.

The agent nouns formed

with this very frequent suffix* are often

used participially, governing an accusative. The root is generally accented
when they have this verbal force, but the suffix, when they are purely nominal
(86
22).
The root regularly has Guna, a and a remaining unchanged; thus
146.

ne-tar- 'leader' (l/r-), ho-tar- 'priest' {Yhu-), kar-tdr- 'doer' {Ykr-), bhet-idr'breaker' (Ybhid-), yok-tdr- 'yoker' {Yyuj-^; yas-tdr- 'sacrificer' (vO'^-)j dd-tdr-

With weak root: us-tdr- m. 'ploughing bull'".

Less commonly the suffix is added to the root with connecting -/-:
regularly when the root ends in more than one consonant 5, as vand-i-tdr'praiser', but also often when it ends in a single consonant and sometimes
when it ends in a vowel, as cod-i-tdr- 'instigator', sav-i-tdr- 'stimulator' ( }/ su-').
b. The suffix is combined with -J- instead of -i- in grdbh-T-tar- (AV.)
'seizer', prati-grah-i-tdr- (AV.) 'receiver', sam-grah-l-tdr- (VS.) 'charioteer', pra'giver'7.

a.

tar-i-tdr- 'prolonger', a-mar-i-tdr- 'destroyer';

and

tar-u-tdr-

with

with

dhdn-u-tar- 'running

'conqueror',

-u- in var-u-tdr- 'protector';

with

-u-

in tdr-u-tar- 'winning'

swiftly',

sdji-u-tar-

-0- in man-o-tar-''

'winning';

and man-o-tdr-

'inventor'.

These derivatives are very frequently compounded with prepositions";

pura-e-tdr- 'leader', apa-bhar-tdr- 'taking away', prdv-i-tdr- 'protector'
{av- 'favour'), pra-sav-i-tdr- 'vivifier'.
d. They are very rarely formed from secondary conjugation or from
tense stems, as coday-i-tdr- 'stimulator'", bodhay-i-tdr- 'awakener', ne'-s-tar-'^i
c.

e.

g.

kind

of

priest.

From

the

reduphcated

root

is

formed vavd-tar-

'ad-

herent'.
e.

Being

names of relationship appear to be formed with this suffix.

very old words, the radical syllable is obscure in meaning or irregular

Several
all

They are jd-vid-tar- 'son-in-law', duh-i-tdr- 'daughter',

form.
'grandson', pi-tdr- 'father', bhrd-tar- 'brother', ma-tdr- 'mother'.

in

ndp-tar-

7 -itir appear, instead of -tar in yan-turThese two words are of doubtful origin.
from v)-- 'choose' with ano- heside yan-idr- 'guide' and in stha-tur- beside
malous form of radical syllable but accord- stha-tar- 'stationary'.
8 The
these words is formed with
f. of
ing to Whitney (11 76 b) it is to be explained as vrat-a- formed from vrt- 'turn' t from the weak stem, i. e. in -irJ.
9 Except danis-fdr- (AV.) 'biter'.
like vraj-d- from \vrj-.
10 Connected with the present stem manu-ie
3 With anomalous guttural before^ -i-.
4 Originally perhaps 'rimy', cp. Hl-ta- 'cold'. etc. of man- 'think'.
11 See Lindner p. 73 f.
5 The f. of these adjectives of colour is
12 In the f. coday-i-tr-i-.
formed from other stems: eni-, asikm-,
1

If derived

pdlikm-,
6

rohini-, lohim-

See the

lists in

{KV .),

Lindner

syenT-,

p.

harim-.

7275.

13

From

the aorist stem of

m-

'lead'.

122

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

-fas

action.

meaning with

-as, being used to form

a concrete meaning. It is very

147. This suffix is identical

action nouns which have acquired
in

Vedic Grammar.

4.

neuter

rare, occurring only in re-fas- "^semen' (ri- 'flow')

and

sro-tas- 'stream', 'current'

{sru- 'flow').
-i'l

action and agent.

used to form a large number of feminine action

nouns; it also appears in a few agent nouns employed either as adjectives
or masculine substantives'.
The root generally has the same weak form as
appears before the -ta of the past passive participle^; it is, however, more
often accented than the suffix. In a few words the suffix is added with the
connecting vowels -a-, -i- or -T-.
1. Action nouns.
With accent on the suffix are formed e. g. is-ii'desire' {is- 'seek'),
kir-tl- 'praise' {kr- 'commemorate'),
u-tt- 'aid' (lAai--),
This

148.

dhau-ti{prra-ti-

is

'stream' {dhav{ra-

'gift'

'draught' {pa- 'drink'), pur-tl-

'give'),

ri-tl-

(rz-

'flow'

'flow'),

'reward'

'work' {vis- 'be active'),

vis-ti-

from the reduplicated root: carkr-tl-

'praise';

morate');

'flow'), pi-t'i-

bhak-ti- 'distribution' {bhaj- 'divide'), ma-ti- 'thought' {man- 'think'),

'fill'),

stu-ti-

suffix

connecting

with

amh-a-ti-

-a-j:

'praise'
drs-a-ti-

'distress',

{kr-

'comme-

'appearance',

'abode'. With accent on the root are formed

YyV')) ga-ti- 'motion' ( Ygam-), di-ti- 'liberality' {da'give'), vfd-dhi- 'increase' {Yvrdh-), san-ti- (AV. VS.) 'repose' ('[/"jWw-); from
the reduplicated root didhi-ti- 'devotion' {dhi- 'think') -t; with connecting
mith-a-tl- 'conflict',

vas-a-ti-

e. g.

is-ti-

'offering'

-a-: dm-a-ti-^ 'indigence' {am- 'be afflicted').

The

a.

reduced

derivative

to -tti-

'giving'

di-ti-

when used

hhaga-ili-, inagha-tti-, vasu-iti-

2. Agent nouns.
These are
Accented on the suffix: jM-ti- m.

as the final

above 26 a

amounting

rare,

'relative', pat-ti-

member

of a

compound

is

2.

20 in number.

to hardly

m. (AV. VS.)

'pedestrian',

connecting -a-: ar-a-ti- m. 'servant', khal-a-ti- (VS.)

on the connecting vowel vrk-d-ti- m. 'murderer'.

'willing to give'; with

ra-ti-

and with accent

'bald',

Accented on the
sdp-ti-

'steed';

'eager';

m.

dhfl-ti-

dhrs-ti-

'shaker', pd-ti-

(VS.)

'bold',

and from the reduplicated root Jigar-ti- m.

vowels:

rdm-a-ti- {KS!. TS.)

dm-a-ti- 'poor',

turv-i-ti-,

man' 7,

root:

adjectives:

N. of a

man

{turv-

and

sneh-a-ti- 'carnage'

tur-,

tr-

'master',

(AV.)

pii-ti-

'fist',

vds-ti-

with connecting

'swallower';

'liking

7ni'is-ti-

'putrid',

to stay', fj-i-ti- 'glowing',

'overcome'),

dabh-i-ti-^,

N. of a

snlh-i-ii- (SV.).

These derivatives are often compounded with prepositions

8,
which are almost
thus anu-ma-ti- 'assent', abhili- 'attack' {aihi-iti-), a-hu-ti- 'offering',
itir-r-ti- 'dissolution',
vy-ap-ti- {A}J .) 'attainment', sam-ga-ti- 'coming together', aihi-ma-ti'insidious' (?:- 'think')9; with suflix accented, only a-sak-ii- 'pursuit', d-su-ti- 'hxevf' {^su-)
and 'enlivening' (ysii-); also abhi-s-ii- m. 'helper' beside abhi-s-ti- f. 'help'.

a.

always

accented;

1 See the list in Grassmann, Worterbuch

fatuated' (also d-drp-ta-). These are, however,
the only two examples.
1719 21; Lindner p. 76 79.
2 The roots tan- 'stretch', ram- 'rest', han5 But with
the connecting -a- accented:

'strike'

may

ran-ii-

'enjoyment'

ra-ii-

(VS.),

retain the nasal

a-han-ti- (VS'.)

'uninjured condition'.
3 The -a- here often,
to a verbal stem.
4

the

tdn-ii-

f.

'cord',

TS.) beside
beside d-ha-ii-

(AV. VS.

drp-ti-

(AN .)

This word

may be

compound (*o'a^,^/-

iti-).

if

not always, belongs

Roots which have the connecting -i- in

past participle, do not take it here

gup-ii-

am-d-ti- 'lustre', ram-d-ti- (AV.) 'haunt', vratd-ti- 'creeper'.

'protection' hesiAe giip-i-td-, pi-d'arrogance' beside d-drp-i-ta- 'not in-

BR.

yaydti-, N. of a

and

man,

Grassmann

is
according to
derived from yat-

'stretch'.
8

See Lindner

Compounded

77 f.
with a noun: ktima-ka-H'requiring the fulfilment of a wish'.
p.

Nominal Stem Formation.

IV.

The

Primary Nominal Derivation.

123

added to a secondary stem ia. Jdn-aya-ti- (VS.) f. 'generation'; it

to have a secondary character in yuva-ti- f. 'maiden',
adj. 'young'. It is secondary
pak^a-ti (VS.) 'root of the wing'; in the numerals vimsa-ti- '20',
sas-ti-'6o', and others;
pank-h- f. 'set of five'; in the pronominal words 'ka-ii 'how
many?', id-ti (AV.) 'so
b.

suffix is

seems
\TX
va.

many

many

'as

jj/fl-ft

and

as';

in addha-ti-

-iu

m.

'sage',

formed from the adverb ad-dha

'truly'.

action and agent.

The

great majority of the words derived with this suffix are infinitives
appearing in the form of the dative, ablative-genitive, and accusative cases.
149.

Besides these, there are a few action nouns used independently, and still
fewer agent nouns.
The root is usually accented' and takes Guna; but
the suffix is accented in some half dozen instances, in two or three
of
which the radical syllable is weakened. The gender is usually masculine, but
a few feminines and neuters also occur.
1.

(>^r-

Accented on the

'make'),

Tjond'

{si-

'bind'),

s6-tu-

m. mdn-tu-

*suck');

m.

root:

o-tu- Sveft' {va- 'weave'),

krd-tu- 'capacity'

{Y sanj-),

se-iu-

'drinkable'

{dhe-

'thread', -^/5-/&!-^ 'element', sdk-tii- 'gxozX%'

to'-/z/-

'libation'

'adviser';

{su-

'press'),

dha-tu-

adj.

vds-tu-

'morning' {vas- 'shine'), sil-tu-T' (AV.)

'birth'; n. da-iu- 'division' {da- 'divide'), vas-tu-'^ 'abode' {vas- 'dwell').
2. Accented on the suffix: m. ak-tit- 'ray' {anj- 'anoint'), ga-tii- 'way'
{ga- 'go') and 'song' {ga- 'sing'), jan-tu- 'creature', he-ti'i- 'cause' {hi- 'impel');
with weak radical vowel: r-ti'i- 'season', pi-tii- 'drink' {pi- 'swell') 5.
a. The suffix is attached in a few instances (as in some infinitives) with
f.

connecting -1-: dur-dhdr-i-tu- 'irresistible', su-Jidv-T-tu- 'to be successfully

invoked', tur-phdr-J-tu-^.
b. The suffix appears in a few instances to be attached to a present
or a secondary conjugational stem: edha-tu- m. 'welfare' {edha-te 'thrives'),
tapya-tu-

adj.

'conveys'),

'glowing' {tapyd-te

'is

vaha-ta- m.

heated'),

sisSsd-tu-^ 'desirous of obtaining';

formed with

jTva-tu-

f.

'wedding' {vdha-ti

'life'

{jiva-ti- 'lives')_

in several instances compounded with the

particles dus- and su-; diir-dhdr-T-tu- and dur-dhdr-iu- 'irresistible', dur-vdr-iu- 'difficult
to ward off', dus-tdr-T-tii- 'unconquerable', sa-ydn-iu- 'guiding well', su-sro-tu- 'hearing
willingly', sic-hdn-tu- 'easy to slay'; also with a pronoun in svditu- 'going one's own
c.

Derivatives

-tii

are

{sva-) gait' {etu-).

-tna
150. This suffix
adj. 'animating' {cyu-

is

action and agent.

very rare, occurring only in cyau-tnd-

'stir')

and

in rd-tna- n.

-inu

'gift'

n. 'concussion',

{ra- 'give').

agent.

always accented, forms more than a dozen

adjectives and a few substantives. It is added to the root either directly or
more commonly with the connecting vowel -a- (which probably belongs to the
present stem) or -i- (which is almost exclusively used with causative stems).
1. Attached directly to the root: kr-tnu- 'active', dar-tm'i- m. 'breaker',
ha-tiiH- 'deadly' ( Y^an-) ; with reduplication jiga-tm'i- 'hastening' {gam- 'go'),
151.

This

suffix,

which

is

jigha-tnii- 'harming' {han- 'strike').

2.

With connecting -a-: kav-a-tnu-^

The infinitives always accent the root(l05).

'miserly', piy-a-tmi- 'revihng' {piya-ti

The

derivation of this

word is uncertain

Only in the compounds tri-dhdlu-' three- and its meaning is obscure. [Cp. Mahabhasya
Vol. I, p. 363, 1. 25.J
fold' and saptd-dhatu- 'sevenfold'.
From the desiderative stem of sa7
3 Without Guna.
'obtain'.
4 With lengthened a.
8 Cp. Whitney, Roots, under hi- 'design'.
5 krtv-as 'times' is probably an ace. pi. of
a stem kf-tu- 'making'. Cp. BB. 25, 294.
2

124

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

meh-a-tnu-, N. of a river

'abuses'),

Vedic Grammar.

{miha-ti),

a-riij-a-tnu-

(rujd-ti

'breaking'

'breaks').

With connecting

3.

-/-: drav-i-tml- 'running' {dru- 'run');

from causative

stems: tanay-i-tnu- 'thundering', dravay-i-tnic- 'hasting' {dru- 'run'), posay-i-tnu'causing to thrive' {Ypus-), maday-i-tnii- 'intoxicating' {Ymad-), suday-i-imi'causing sweetness to flow' ( Ysud-), stanay-i-trn't- m. 'thunder' {Ysiaji-);
an-amay-i-tnu- 'not making ill', 'curative' (]Aa-).
-tra

agent.

152. This suffix was doubtless originally formed by a secondary -a added

to -/;- (the weak form of tar-).
But having early attained an independent
character, it came to be largely employed as a primary suffix. It is used to

form some half dozen adjectives' and about 60 substantives, the latter being
neuters except about a dozen (partly masc. and partly fem.) \ The substantives
generally express the means or instrument by which the action of the verb
The root is generally
is performed, sometimes the place where it is performed.
accented and has Guna; but it is sometimes unaccented and has a weak

The

vowel.

suffix

is

generally

added

directly to

but in about a

the root,

dozen instances with a connecting vowel.

1.
Attached directly to the root: adjectives: jdi-tra-^

'victorious',

sva-trd-'- 'invigorating'; with reduplication: y^^?i-^ra- 'calling aloud' ( ]A/^^-).

a-trd-i 'eater', us-tra-^ 'buffalo', ddms-tra- 'tusk' {dams- 'bite'), mdn-tra-

m.

'prayer'; with

vr-trd-^

weak (etymologically

ds-tra- 'goad'

f.

doubtful) root: pu-trd- 'son', mi-trd-i 'friend',

'foe'.
(tf/-

'reach'), nas-irS-

(AV. VS.) 'destroyer' {Ynas'-), ma-tra-

'measure', ho-tra- 'sacrifice'.

n. With
'field',

accent on the root:

d-tra-9 'food', kdr-tra- (AV.) 'spell', kse-ira-

ksno-tra- 'whetstone', ga-ira- 'hmb', /nS-tra- (VS.)

'intellectual faculty',

dhdr-tra-

'support' (VS. TS.),

dd-tra-^

tdn-tra- 'warp',

'gift',

da-ira- 'knife',

pdt-tra- (VS.)" 'wing', pa-tra- 'cup', (pa- 'drink'), pes-tra- (AV.) 'bone', mU-tra-

(AV.)

'urine',

medhra-

(AV.)

vds-tra- 'garment', sro-tra-

'ear',

'penis',

ySk-tra-

'rope',

vdr-tra- (AV.)

With accent on the suffix and often with an abstract meaning:

(AV.)

'dam',

su-tra- (AV.) 'thread' (siv- 'sew').

as-trd-

'dominion'; da-trd- 'share', des-ird- 'indication' {Ydis-),

ne-trd- (AV.) 'guidance', ras-trd- 'dominion', sas-trd- (VS.) 'invocation', sas-trd'missile', ksa-trd-^''

'command',

sat-trd- 'sacrificial session', sto-trd- 'praise', stha-trd- 'station', ho-trd-

'sacrifice'.

2.

With connecting vowel -a-: dm-a-tra-

'violent', ydj-a-ira- 'adorable';

krnt-d-ira- 'shred' , gay-a-trd- 'song' , pdi-a-ira- 'wing',vddA-a-fra- 'deadly weapon',

f.

var-a-tr&- 'strap'; with -/-: khan-i-tra- 'shovel', car-i-tra- 'ioQt',jan-i-tra- 'birth-

place', pav-i-tra- 'sieve',

bhav-i-tra- 'world',

bhar-i-tra- 'arm',

san-i-tra-

'gift';

with -u-\ tdr-u-tra-^^ 'overcoming'.

1 These have mostly masc. forms, some

neuter; the only one which has fem. forms is
ydjatra- 'deserving adoration'.
2 Six or seven masculines and five femi-

Occurs also

as

a n. in the

RV. when

plural.
9 For at-tra- from ad- 'eat'.
1 Probably for dal-ira- from

the present-

stem of da- 'give'.

i Only at the end of a compound in the
With exceptional Vrddhi of the radical

nines.
3

syllable.
4

From

For

6
7

iva-

RV.
sii-

'swell'.

12

naksaira- 'asterism'

perhaps a com-

is

Cp. above 81, 2 a.

hom. ad-' e3.t'. Cp. p. 125, note'. pound.
'3 Cp. tar-u-tm-- 'victor'.
With weak root though accented.
Occurs in the RV. as a u. when it

means

ai-trd-

'friendship'.

IV.

Nominal Stem Formation.

-tri

Primary Nominal Derivation.

125

agent,

153. This very rare suffix occurs in only three or four derivatives: d-tri-^
'devouring', sd-tri- m., N. of a man^; with connecting -a in arc-d-tri- 'roaring';
also in the f. form with i in ra-tri-^ 'night'.
-tru

154. This suffix

from sad- 'prevail'.

is

found only
-tva

agent.
in

sdtrit-

'enemy' for *sdt-tru-,

perhaps

agent.

155. This suffix probably arose by the addition of the secondary suffix -a
to action nouns in -tic, which turned them into adjectives used in a gerundive
sense.
It occurs in about a dozen such derivatives which are almost restricted
to the RV.; e. g. kdr-tva- 'to be made'*.

-iha
156. This

action.

almost exclusively used to form action nouns (some

of which have acquired a concrete meaning) in all genders'.
The root
generally appears in a weak form, as the suffix is mostly accented.
The
suffix is attached to the root either directly or more commonly with a
connecting vowel*.
1. Attached directly to the root: m. dr-tha-^ 'goal', ga-thd- 'song',
pak-thd-, N. of a man, bhr-thd- 'offering', rd-ika-^ 'car', kd-tha-'^ 'slaughter';
in composition with prepositions: sam-i-thd- 'conflict', nir-r-thd- 'destruction',
sam-ga-thd- 'union' {gam- 'go'), ud-gi-tM-^ (AV.) 'singing of chants'; in composition with nouns: putra-kr-thd- 'procreation of sons', dirgha-ya-thd- 'long
suffix

is

'protection' {pa- 'protect') and 'draught' {pa- 'drink') of

kas-tha- 'course', gd-tha- 'song', ni-tha- 'trick'.
n. uk-thd- 'saying'

course', go-pT-thd-'^'^
milk'.

f.

{Yvac-'), tir-thd- 'ford' {tf- 'cross'),

'inheritance' '^.
2.
(

'With connecting vowel

y^z/ac-), car-d-tha- n.

m.

sac-d-tha-

m. or

sap-d-tha'aid',

m.

m.

'roar',

m.

m.

uc-d-tha- n. 'praise'

'foot',

vaks-d-tha- m. 'growth', vid-d-tka-''^ n.

'lair',

has-d-tha- m. 'snorting',

'thunder', stav-d-tha-

n. 'flow'; with prefix: a-vas-a-thd-

rik-thd-

'herd',

proth-d-tha- n. 'snorting',

'fury',

say-d-tha- n.

'curse',

stan-d-tha-

'song', yu-thd-'^'^

-a- : ay-d-tha- n.

'mobility', tves-d-tha-

yaj-d-tha-'^'' 'worship', rav-d-tha-

'assembly',

rii-thd-

m.

srav-d-tha-

'praise',

(AV.) ^abods:', pra-vas-a-tkd-

n. 'absence',

pran-d-tka-'^^ (VS.) 'respiration'.

a.

With

-u:jdr-u-tha-, m. a kind of

'protection';

n.

with

-u: mat-ti-t/la-^^

For di-in- from aii- 'eat'. Cp. p. 1 24, note 5.

For sat-tn- from sat- 'cut in pieces'.
In

AV.

7-a-iri-

also.

See below, Future Passive

Participles,

581
5

The fem. form

This

of the suffix

is

-tlid.

demon

('wearing out'j^r-), vdr-u-tha-

'sage'.

The

root in this word is uncertain.

prsfka- 'back' probably contains the
root stha- 'stand',
*fra-siAd- 'prominent'.
'4 The gender is uncertain, as the word
occurs in the dat. sing. only.
15 Probably from vidk- 'worship'
Olden'2

13

vowel for the most part belongs BERG,

note

in reality to a present stem.

ZDMG,

54,

608

611;

cp.

above

p. 23,

10.

16 When there is a prefix the accent is

With accented strong root.
thrown on the suffix but pran- {=pra-an-)
The root is uncertain.
With root accented though weakened is treated like a root.

by

m.

I'

loss of nasal [han- 'slay').

With gd- 'sing' weakened to gi-.

" Both pa- 'protect' and pa- 'drink'
weakened to pT-. Cp. above 27.
10

Perhaps from man- with double

{-iu, -ihd).

are

suffix


126

I.

Allgemeines UND Sprache.

-ihi

4.

Vedic Grammar.

agent.

As

far as can be judged from the very few examples occurring,

was used to form agent nouns. It is attached with or without
a connecting vowel. The derivation of all the words which seem to be
formed with this suffix is doubtful: dt-i-thi- m. 'guest' (if from at- 'wander');
ud-ar-a-thi- adj. 'rising'; ine-thl- (AV.) m. 'pillar' (tni- 'fix'). The neuters dsthi(AV. VS., beside astk-dn-) 'bone' and sdkthi- (beside sakth-dn-) may be formed

157.

this

suffix

with the suffix

-/.

-ihu

action.

158. This very rare suffix, which is not found in the RV., appears only
with the connecting vowel -a- (which in reality belongs to a present stem),,

forming masculine action nouns: ej-d-thu- (AV.) 'trembling', z'^-aV.^astan-d-thu- (AV.) 'roar'.
-na action and agent.

'quivering',.

place used, like -ta, to form past passive

unlike -/"a, it is never added
to the root with a connecting vowel or to a secondary conjugation stem.
It is further employed to form a number of adjectives and masculine
It also forms a few feminine
substantives, mostly accented on the suffix.
{-no) and neuter substantives, all but one of the latter being accented on the
The substantives have partly an abstract and partly a concrete meaning..
root.
A medial vowel never takes Guna, but a final vowel nearly always does.
1.
The adjectives (f. -a) are: ds-nd- 'voracious', us-nd- 'hot', u-nd'deficient', r-7id- 'guilty', krs-nd- 'black', kso-nd- 'immovable' (?), nag-jid- 'naked',.
bradh-nd- 'pale red', s6-na- 'red', sro-nd- and ilo-nd- (AV.) 'lame', slaks-tid159. This

suffix is in the first

from

participles'; e.g. bhin-nd-

(AV.)

Mz'rf- 'split'; but,

'slippery', svit-na- 'white', syo-nd- 'agreeable';

'inviolable', d-ruks-na-

(AV.)

'tender', sada-pr-nd-

compounded: an-amr-nd-

'always munificent'.

2. Substantives are: m. ghr-nd- 'heat', bttdh-nd- 'bottom', bhru-nd'emhiy o\ yaj'-nd- 'sacrifice', sye-nd- 'eagle', ste-nd- 'thief; sam-pras-nd- 'question';
accented on root: ds-na- 'stone', kdr-na- 'ear', vdr-na- 'colour', lus-na-, N. of
n. //-/za- 'grass', dkd-na-' 'booty', par-nd- 'wing',.
a demon, svdp-na- 'sleep'.

vas-nd- 'price', sls-na- 'penis', su-nd- 'welfare', su-na- 'want', si-na- 'property'.
f. tf-s-na- 'thirst', dhe'-na- 'milch cow', si-na- 'missile', sthii-na- 'post'.

-nas

action.

This suffix, which has the same meaning as -as and -tas, is used
in forming a few action nouns which have mostly acquired a concrete sense.
These are dp-nas- n. 'possession', dr-nas- n. 'flood', -bhar-nas-^^ 'bearing' (?),
rek-nas- n. 'property left by bequest' {ric- 'leave').
With connecting vowel:
drdv-i-nas- n. 'movable property' {dru- 'run'),
pdr-T-nas- m. 'abundance''
It also appears in the agent noun ddm-u-nas- adj. 'domestic',
{pr- 'fill').
m. 'friend of the house' {dam-).
160.

-ni

and agent.

action

161. This not very frequent suffix is employed to form m. and f. action
nouns as well as agent nouns (adjectives and substantives). Either the radical
vowel or the suffix may be accented; and the root in several instances takes
Guna. The feminines have rarely an abstract sense, having generally acquired
a concrete meaning.

'

For a

Probably from dha-

list

of these see below 576.

'place'.
1

In sahdsra-hharnas- 'thousandfold'.

Nominal Stem Formation.

IV".

1.

sre-ni-

The feminines
'line',

Primary Nominal Derivation.

127

axQ-.jUr-ni- 'heat', -jya-ni-'- (AV.) 'injury', me-ni- 'missile',

sro-ni- 'hip', sr-ni-

and

sr-ni- 'sickle';

masculines

are: ghf-ni-"^

'heat', yo-ni- 'receptacle'.

2. Agent nouns, adjectives and m. substantives, are: ag-ni- m. 'fire',

jur-ni- 'singeing', ti2r-ni- 'speeding', d/iar-n{- m. 'supporter', pfs-ni- 'speckled',^
pre-ni- 'loving' {VprT-), bhttr-ni- 'excited', vdh-ni- m. 'draught animal', vfs-ni-

and

vrs-nia.

The

'virile',

suffix

m.

'ram'.

occurs with a connecting

-nu
162.

With

-u-

in hrad-u-ni- f.(?)

'hail' J.

action and agent.

formed a small number of action and agent

nouns of all genders, but mostly masculine. The action nouns often have a
concrete meaning. As the suffix is almost invariably accented, the radical
vowel, with one exception, never shows Guna. This suffix, like -tu, is sometimes preceded by -a (which really belongs to present stems).
1. The substantives occurring are: ksep-ni'c- m. 'jerk' (x. 51*), dd-nu-^
m. f 'demon', f. 'dew', n. 'drop', dhe-nu- f. 'cow', bha-nu- m. 'light', vag-num. 'sound', vis-nu-^ m., N. of a god, su-w'e- m. 'son', stha-ni'i-^ m. 'pillar';
with connecting -a-: krand-a-nu- m. 'roaring', ksip-a-711'i.- m. 'missile', nad-a-mim. 'roaring', nabh-a-ni'c-'' m. 'fountain''.
2. Adjectives are: grdh-nu- 'hasty', dhrs-ni'i- 'bold'; with connecting -a-:
the

compound

this

suffix

vi-bhahj-a-nu- 'breaking to pieces'.

-pa

is

concrete substantives.

formed with this suffix, but the origin of all of

These zx&: pih-pa- n. 'flower', stu-J>d-^ (ys.)
m. 'tuft', stii-pa-^ m. 'top-knot'; perhaps also tdl-pa- m. 'couch', sds-pa- (VS.)
n. 'blade of grass', sil-pa (VS.) n. 'ornament', Mr-pa- (AV.) 'winnowing basket';,
possibly apu-pd- m. 'cake', I'da-pa- m. 'shrub', kuna-pa- (AV.) n. 'corpse"^^
163.

them

is

more

few words

are

or less obscure'.

-ma

action and agent.

164. This suffix forms a considerable number of action nouns (almost

exclusively masculine) as well as agent nouns, both adjectives and substantives..
Only a single neuter and one or two feminine substantives occur. The suffix

accented more than twice as often as the root. The vowel r always takesin the radical syllable; on the other hand, initial or medial i and u

is

Guna

never take Guna; when

final they only do so if the root is accented. Several

of these derivatives in -ma appear beside others in -man; some at least are
transfers from the latter; thus dkdr-man- 'ordinance' alone is found in the RV.,.
while dhdr-ma- appears beside it in the later Sainhitas.
I. Accented on the suffix: adjectives: e. g. /V/^-ywi- 'obhque', tig-md'sharp', das-md- 'wondrous', bhi-md- 'terrible', sag-md- mighty'; with redupHcation,.

In sarva-jyani- (AV.) 'complete loss of

The

origin

of the

cerebral n here

is

obscure.

property'.

Also nabh-amd.- f.
The Proper Name kr^-anii- is perhapsby -a-, much in the same way as -ii; but similarly formed, but with long -a-.
Liden, IF. 18,
9 Cp. Lindner p. 69;
as -ani has assumed a more independent
characteritiB treated above (122) as a separate 496.
10 Probably from a root siu- 'drip'; see
suffix.
3

Beside ghr-na- m. and ghf-na- f.

This suffix is in several words preceded

With

irregular accent.

Whitney, Roots.

11 yupa- m. 'sacrificial post'

Perhaps originally an adjective *vis-nu-,
with shift of accent on becoming a Proper derived from yuf- 'obstruct'.
Name. But cp. p. 85, note '.
5

is

probably-

128

I.

Vedic Grammar.

Allgemeines UND Sprache.

tutu-md- 'powerful'; substantives:

m.

'fuel', ghar-mdruk-md-' oxnaxaexit',

aj-md- 'course', idh-md-

'heat', //ar-a- 'breaker', (//Jz7-ii- 'smoke', fiar-md-{YS.)

'jest',

hi-ind- 'cold'.

root: substantives: m. e. g. fl-ma- 'friend' {ave-ma- (VS.) 'course', dhdr-ma- (AV. VS. TS.) 'ordinance', bha-ma'brightness', sdr-ma- 'flow', so-ma- 'Soma' ( ]/^,;-), stS-ma- 'praise' ( J^.f/-), hS-ma'offering'; f. hl-ma- 'winter'; n. bil-ma- 'chip'.

Accented on the

2.

'favour'),

a.

The

suffix

a present stem)

seems

in the

f.

to be added once with connecting -a- (which really belongs to

sar-d-md- 'the fleet one', N. of a goddess.

-man

action and agent.

165. This suffix forms a large

number of

derivatives',

which are almost

of these are neuters accented

on the root, but there are also a good many masculines accented on the
suffix.
Besides these occur a few agent nouns, mostly accented on the suffix,
both adjectives and masculine substantives, all of them, except brah-mdn'priest', of rare occm-rence.
The same word in several instances varies in
meaning according to the accent and gender^; e. g. dhdr-man- n. ordinance',

The

exclusively action nouns.

great majority

m. dhar-mdn-^ 'ordainer'. The root in these derivatives usually takes Guna;

in a few instances it has Vrddhi or lengthens a; sometimes it is weak. The
The derivatives
suffix is often added with the connecting vowels -i- or -T-.
are occasionally compounded with prepositions, which are then nearly always
accented.

Examples of action nouns

n. dd-man- 'food', e'-man- 'course',

jdn-man- 'birth', tra-man- 'protection',
dd-man- 'gift' {da- 'give') and 'bond' {da- 'tie'), nd-man- 'name', pdt-man- 'flight',
brdh-man- 'devotion', bhdr-man- 'table', bhii-man- 'world', vdk-man- 'invocation',
vdrt-man- 'course', ves-man- 'dwelling', sdk-man- 'power', ids-man- 'praise',
sdk-man- 'power', ho-man- 'sacrifice' {yhu-) and 'invocation' {Y hu-); with
connecting -/-: jdn-i-man- 'birth', vdr-i-man- 'expanse' (beside var-i-mdn- m.);
with connecting-/"-: (fi2>-r-/- 'destruction', dMr-T-man-'ordma.nce',/dr-t-fnan-i
1.

Jidr-man-

'action',

kars-man-

are:

'goal',

'abundance', bhdr-i-man- 'maintenance', vdr-i-man- 'expanse', sdr-T-man- 'course',

sdv-T-man- 'impulse'*, hdv-i-man- 'invocation'.
m. us-mdn- (AV. VS.) 'heat',
-o-mdn- 'favour', je-mdn- (VS. TS.) 'superiority', dragh-mdn- (VS.) 'length' (beside
dragh-i-mdn-), pap-mdn- (AV.) 'wickedness', bhu-mdti- 'abundance', vid-mdn'knowledge', svad-mdn- 'sweetness', he-mdn- 'impulse'; with connecting -/-:
jar-i-mdn- 'old age', prath-i-mdn- 'breath', mah-i-mdn- 'greatness', var-i-mdn-,
.vars-i-mdn- (VS.) 'height' (beside vdrs-man- and vars-mdn-),
har-i-mdn-

'yellowness'.
2.

Agent nouns accented on the

suffix

are:

dar-yndn-

'breaker'

dhar-mdn- 'supporter', brah-mdn- 'one who prays', bhuj-mdn'fertile', vad-mdn- 'speaker', sad-mdn- 'sitter', so-mdn- 'Somapresser'; accented
on the root: ds-man- 'stone', o-man- 'friend', je-man- 'superior', bhds-man-

jia-mdn-

'giver',

'chewing'5.
a. The following words are according to difference of accent neuter action nouns
or masculine agent nouns da-man- 'gift' and da-man- 'giver'; dhar-inan- 'ordinance' and
-dhar-man- 'ordainer'; brdh-man- 'worship' and brah-mdn- 'priest'; sad-man- 'seat' and

sad-man-

'sitter'.

Forlists of these see

buch 1730

f.;

Lindner

2
Somewhat in the
-derivatives in -as (126).

Also with anomalous

Also j-/c?-J-ia- 'spreading' used in the

an infinitive.
5
In a compound also s^ adu-ks dd-manway as the
'having sweet food'.

GRASSMANN.Worterp. 91

93.

same

loc. as

-e-:Jidr-e-man-[S'^''-.).
^

Nominal Stem Formation.

IV.

Primary Nominal Derivation.

129

b. In a few words diflference of gender and accent is not accompanied by difference

of meaning: vdrs-man- n. and vars-man- m. both mean 'height'; sv&d-man- n. and svadmdn- m. 'sweetness'; vdr-i-man- n. and var-i-man- m. 'expanse'.
c. In a few instances difference of accent is accompanied by a reversal of the
usual distinction of meaning: 7V-OTa?2- 'victorious', y.?-;fl- (VS. TS.) 'superiority'; 6-man-

m.

o-mdn- m. 'favour'.
few derivatives in -man both action and agent nouns are compounded with

'friend',

d.

vi-ga-man-

prepositions:

n.

'step',

'following after',

prd-bhar-man- n. 'presentation', prd-ya-man- n. 'de'flying through', dnu-v art-man- (AV.)

m. 'maintainer', vi-pai-man-'^
vi-sar-mdn-^ m. 'flowing asunder'.

parture', vi-dhar-man-

-mdna

agent.

This suffix is used to form the present^, future, and aorist middle
and the present passive participle*. It is always preceded by
a except in the anomalous perfect participle sasr-mand- (= sasr-and-)
166.

participle

'speeding'.

and agent.

-mi and -ml: action

-mi is used to form a few adjectives and masculine

substantives; it also forms (generally in the form of -mt) a few feminine
substantives with a concrete meaning: ur-mi- m. 'wave' {Vvr-^, -kur-mi'action' in tuvi-kur-mi- 'working mightily', j'a-mi- 'related', 'kinsman'; bhri-miand bhfi-mT- f. 'earth', laks-mi- f. 'sign', sur-mi- f. 'tube'; probably also ras-mim. 'ray' and the adj. krudh-mi-^ (RV'.) 'irascible'.
167. The

suffix

-min

168.

agent.

few adjectives have the appearance of being formed with a

suffix

are is-min- 'impetuous', bha-min- 'shining', ius-min- 'roaring'. They

may, however, be explained as secondary derivatives made with the suffix -in,
like dhum-in- from dhumd- 'smoke'.

They

-viin.

-ya

gerundive.

used to form a large number of future participles

is
probably has a primary character in other derivatives besides
these; but it is so difficult to distinguish them from those which are secondary,
that it is preferable to treat all but gerundives under secondary -ya (228).
This suffix

169.

passive^.

It

-yu

action

and agent.

170. This suffix forms a few action and agent nouns. The root remains
unchanged, while the accent varies. Action nouns are: man-yu- m. 'anger',
Agent nouns are: dds-yu- m. 'enemy', druh-yu-, N. of a
mrt-yu- m. 'death'.

man

sim-yu- 'enemy'; bhuj-yi'i- both adj. 'wealthy' and m. as N. of

Adjectives only are: ydj-yu- 'pious', hindh-yu- 'pure', sdh-yu- 'strong'.

('hostile'),

a man.

-ra

agent.

large number of derivatives are formed with this suffix?, which

accented, the root consequently almost always appearing with a
weak vowel. These words are mostly adjectives, but a few substantives
occur in all genders. The suffix is frequently added with the connecting
171.

usually

is

vowels
1

Or

a bird'
2

-a-,

-i-,

-T-,

-u-.

as a Bahuvrlhi 'having the flight of

With unusual accent on

the suffix in-

stead of on the preposition.

3 In the a-conjugation.
4 See below under those tenses, 427, 435,
512, 538; and cp. Delbruck,
442, 447;

Verbum 226; Lindner

Indo-arische Fhilologie.

72.
I.

*.

The only form

n.

pi.

(ot-).

might,

occurring krudhmi, N.

however,

come from krudh-

min-.
6 See
below. Future participles passive,
578; cp. Delbruck, Verbum 230; Lindner

76, p.
7
1

9699-

See Lindner 78,

p.

100102; Whitney

188.
9

I30

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

Vedic Grammar.

4.

Of derivatives accented on the suffix there are more than 60

1.
adjectives; e. g. ak-rd- 'swift', ug-rd- 'mighty', cit-rd- 'bright', tu-rd- 'strong',
mu-rd- 'stupid', s'ak-rd- 'mighty', suk-rd- 'bright', hims-rd- 'injurious', Substantives are: m. us-rd- 'bull', ksu-rd- 'razor', mrdh-rd- 'foe', rud-rd-, N. of
a god, vam-rd- 'ant', wf-ri-'man', sud-rd- 'man of the fourth caste'; n. abh-rd'cloud', krcch-rd- 'distress', kru-rd- (AV. VS.) 'wound', ksi-rd- 'milk', khid-rd'weight', rip-rd- 'defilement', si-rd- 'plough'; f. hi-ra- (AV. VS.) 'vein'.
With connecting vowel

a.

-a-,

drav-a-rd- 'running', pat-a-rd-

aj-i-rd-

dhvas-i-rd- 'stirring up',

is-i-rd- 'lively',

'swift',

(AV.)

i-rd- 'pleasing', rudh-i-rd-

sphi-rd-

'red',

with

'fat';

gabh-i-rd-

tree;

n. sar-i-rd- (VS.) 'wave';

with

u: amh-u-rd- 'narrow', vith-u-rd- 'tottering'.

Of stems accented on the root

2.

dhi-ra- 'wise',

'greedy', tiim-ra- 'stout',

m.

dj-ra-

'field',

n.

dha-ra- 'stream', sip-ra-

a seer,

with

'jaw',

si'i-ra-

With connecting vowel

a.

with

ds-i-ra- 'missile';

-U-:

m.

ds-u-ra-

badh-i-rd- 'deaf,

m.

khad-i-rd-,

a kind of

and gambh-i-rd-

the only adjectives are:

'deep';

grdh-ra-

substantives are:

vip-ra- 'inspired';

'spirit',

'intoxicating liquor'.

sthdv-i-ra- 'firm';

-/-:

sdv-T-ra- 'mighty';

-/-:

m.
n.

dng-i-ra-,

N. of

sdr-T-ra- 'body';

bdk-u-ra- 'trumpet'.

few of these derivatives are compounded with prepositions: m'-aVani-mrg-ra- 'attached'; m. a-kha-rd- 'lair', sam-ud-rd- 'sea'.
a.

/':

mad-

N. of a god, vdj-ra- 'thunderbolt', vdrdh-ra- (AV.)

rdndh-ra- 'hollow'^ svdbh-ra- 'pit';
dg-ra- 'point',

ind-ra-,

su-ra- 'hero';

'girth',
f.

T:

'flying',

with

ny-oc-a-rd- (AV.) 'suiting''; n. gambh-a-rd- 'depth', tas-a-rd- 'shuttle'^;

'attentive',

agent.

-//' :

172. This suffix forms adjectives as well as m. and f. substantives. It is

sometimes added with connecting -u-. The root is more frequently accented
than the suffix.

Adjectives are: bhu-ri- 'abundant', vddh-ri- 'emasculated',

with connecting -u-\ jds-u-ri- 'exhausted', dds-u-ri- 'pious',

1.

'beautiful';

subh-risdh-u-ri-

'mighty'.
2.

Substantives

su-ri- 'patron';

with

'rib';

f.

m.

are:

dbh-ri-

connecting

-u-:

(VS.)

dngh-ri-

(AV. VS.)

'foot',

ji-ri- 'flowing

water',

'hoe', ds-ri- 'edge', us-ri- 'dawn', vdnk-ri-

afig-u-ri- 'finger';

-ri

occurs in tand-ri- (AV.)

'weariness'.

-ru

agent.

173. This rare suffix forms adjectives and a very few neuter substantives.
is
added either directly to the root or with a preceding -a-, -a-, or -e-.

It

Either the root or the suffix

1.

Adjectives

are:

may be

accented.

cd-ru- 'dear', dha-ru- (AV.) 'sucking', pi-ru- 'causing

to swell' (^r-), bkt-ru- 'timid'; ar-d-ru- 'hostile', pat-d-ru- 'fl3ring'; jdb-a-ru-^

(RV'.) 'speeding', ply-a-ru- 'reviling', vand-a-ru- 'praising', sar-d-ru- 'injurious';

mad-e-ru- 'intoxicating', san-e-ru-'' 'obtaining'.

2. Substantives are: n. ds-ru- 'tear', smds-ru- 'beard'.
-la

to the latter,

bharvard-

agent.

a later form of -ra, is equivalent in sense and use

sometimes also interchanging with it. It forms adjectives and a

174. This rare

(of

suffix,

doubtful

meaning)

is

probably a secondary formation, and vdsard'matutinal' seems to be derived from vasar'moming'.

Also -fksard- 'thorn'

m.

in an-rksard-

'thornless'.
3

Perhaps for *jdv-a-ru- from jil- 'speed'.

The suffix is secondary in mitri-iv- 'ally'.

IV. Nominal Stem Formation.

Primary Nominal Derivation.

131

few masculine and neuter substantives. The radical syllable is accented in

two or three substantives only. The suffix is added either directly to the
root or with the connecting vowels -a-, -i-, -u-.
Derivatives thus formed are: -pa-Id- (VS.) m. 'guardian' in aja-pald- (VS.)
'goat-herd', suk-ld- (AV.) n. 'white colour' (beside suk-rd- 'white'), sthu-ld(AV.) 'thick' (beside sthu-rd-); with connecting -a-: trp-d-la- 'joyous', bhrma-ld- (AV.) 'torpid', mus-a-la- (AV.) m. 'pestle', sab-d-la- 'mottled', sdm-a-la(AV.) n. 'defilement'; with -/-: dn-i-la- m. 'wind', trd-i-ld- 'porous', sal-i-ld-

VS. 'flood'); with -u-: tan4-u-ld- (AV.) m.

(AV. VS.) m., a kind of fish.

'surging' (beside sar-i-rd-

iak-u-ld-

-//'

and

-lu

'grain',

agent.

175. The suffix -// occurs only once as the equivalent of -ri in ang-u-li(VS^.) f. 'finger' (beside ang-u-ri-).
Similarly -lu occurs only once as the
equivalent of -ru in pataya-lu- (AV.) 'flying', formed from the conjugation

stem patdya- (from pat-

'fly').

-va

agent.

176. This suffix forms about 20 adjectives and seven or eight substantives,
mostly mascuhnes with a concrete meaning. With one or two exceptions it
is
added directly to the root. The accent is rather oftener on the suffix
than on the radical syllable. The root hardly ever appears in a strengthened

form.

Accented on the

1.

suffix are the adjectives: Urdh-vd- 'upright', rk-vd'swift', dhru-vd- 'fixed', pak-vd- 'ripe', mal-vdyah-vd- 'swift', ran-vd- 'joyful', vis-vd-'^ 'all', sik-vd- (AV.) 'deft',
brown', hras-vd- (VS.) 'short'; the substantives: m. Ur-vd-

'praising', rs-vd-

(AV.)

'foolish',

sya-vd'stair,

'dark

'lofty',

tak-vd-

sar-vd- (AV. VS.), N. of a god, sru-vd- 'ladle';

f.

prus-va- (AV.) 'rime';

vidh-d-va-'^ 'widow'.

Accented on the root

are: fbh-va- 'skilful', S-va- 'quick', m. 'course',

pur-va- 'preceding', vdk-va- 'twisting', vis-va- 'all', sdr-va- 'all';
m. ds-va- 'horse', khdl-va- (AV. VS.), a kind of grain, srdk-va- 'corner of
the mouth'; f. dm-i-va- 'disease' 3.
a. A few such derivatives occur only compounded witli prefixes:
d-khar-va- 'not
2.

pi-va-

'fat',

shortened', ati-fadva- (VS.) 'too bald', vi-bha-va-

-van

'brilliant'.

agent.

used almost exclusively to form agent nouns +j both

which are mostly masculine, but sometimes neuter.
Though the root is regularly accenteds, it almost invariably appears in its
unstrengthened form. If it ends in a short vowel -t- is added before the
suffix.
The feminine of these words is regularly formed with -vari (179 a).
Examples of adjectives are: /^,^-&a- 'praising', kr-t-van- 'axiXiwe', druh-vanThis

suffix is

177.
adjectives

and

'injurious',

pdt-van-

substantives,

'flying',

pi-van-

'fat'^

ydj-van-

'sacrificing',

rd-van-

(VS.)

5
The only exceptions are two words
Cp. Brugmann, Grundriss 2, p. 126.
Cp. Roth, KZ. 19, 223; Brugmann, formed with the connecting vowel -i-, musi-van- 'robber', san-i-t<ian- 'bestower', and
Grundriss 2, p. 126.
from the reduplicated root,
3 Also n. ulba- 'caul' if this stands for two others
r&ra-van- 'liberal', cikit-van- 'wise'.
*ulva- from vr- 'cover'.
4 The only action nouns are the few
which in the active are employed as infini1

tives; cp.

Whitney 1169

e.

132

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

sdk-van- (VS.) 'able', su-t-van- 'pressing Soma'; substantives:

'road', dr-van- 'steed', grd-van- 'stone'; n. tug-van- 'ford', dkdnddh-vanm.
van- 'bow' and 'desert', par-van- 'joint', snd-van-^ (AV. VS.) 'sinew'.
a. Several derivatives with -van are compounded with prepositions; thus ati-skdd'bestowing',

van- (VS.) 'transgressing', upa-hds-van- 'mocking', vi-vds-van- 'shining forth', vi-mfg-van(AV.) 'cleansing', sam-bhf-t-van- (AV.) 'accumulating' 2.

-vana, -vani, -vanu

agent.

secondary forms of -van. They

-vana and -vanu on the final, -vani on the first
With -vana axe formed: vag-vand- 'talkative', sat-vand-, m. 'warrior'
syllable.
(beside sdt-van-), and from the reduplicated root suiuk-vand- 'shining' ( Ysuc^.
The suffix -vani seems to be preferred for derivatives from the reduplicated
root; thus besides tur-vdni- 'overcoming', bhur-vdni- 'restless', occur jujurvdni- 'praising', tutur-vdni- 'desiring to gain', dadhrs-vdni- 'daring', susuk-vdni'shining' {Y^uc-); the obscure word arharisvdni- 'exultant' seems to be derived
with this suffix from an irregularly reduplicated form of hrs- 'be excited'.
With -vanu is formed only vag-vam'c- m. 'noise'.
178.

are

These rare

three

all

suffixes are doubtless

accented:

-vara, -vala

action and agent.

makes a few masculine nouns (f -i) chiefly accented

and a very few neuter substantives accented
root.
The masculines are: i-t-vard- 'going', is-vard- (AV.) 'able',
Neuter subphdr-vara- 'sower', vyadh-vard- (AV.) 'piercing'^ {Yvyadh-^.
179.

on the
on the

This

suffix

final syllable of the suffix,

stantives are: kdr-vara- 'deed', gdh-vara- (AV.) 'thicket'. There are also
two feminines which have the appearance of being derived with this suffix,
ur-vdra- 'field' and ur-vdri- (AV.) 'filament', but their origin is uncertain.
This suffix appears with / instead of r in vid-vald- 'cunning'.
is used as the f. of adjectives in -van, with which
a. The f. of this suffix, -van
corresponds in accent and treatment of the radical syllable. There are about 25 of
it
,

these feminines in the

RV.

c. g.

-vas

This

very rare

ydj-van-

'pious', sf-i-varl- 'speeding'

4.

action and agent.

forms

only the neuter subtantive vdr-i-vasadjectives fbh-vas- 'skilful' (beside

The vocative
fbk-va- and fbh-van-) and sik-vas- 'skilful' (beside slk-van-).
kkid-vas (vi. 22+) 'oppressing' is probably from a perfect participle khidvSms-^ formed without reduplication, not from a stem khid-vas-.
180.

'wide

space' (beside

suffix

vdr-i-man-)

and the

-vams

agent.

This suffix is used to form a large number of perfect participles

active, being added with or without the connecting vowel -/-; e. g. cakr-vams'having done', fy-i-vatns- 'having gone'; sometimes without reduplication; e. g.
vid-vdms- 'knowing'^- This suffix, which is always accented, is in the weak
cases reduced to -us- before vowels 7.
181.

1 On
two or three doubtful derivatives nines occurring in the AV. see his Index
with this suffix see Whitney 1169 b.
Verborum 375.
2
Several others are compounded with
5 Cp. pw.; in BR. the
stem is given as
nouns; see Lindner p. 107.
khid-Tian-. According to WHITNEY 1173 b,
3
According to
the
Pada text vi- it is derived from \khad-.
adhvard:
6 For the forms occurring see below 492.
4 See Whitney 1171 b; for such femi7 See Declension, -vams stems, 347.

Nominal Stem Formation.

IV.

-vi

This rare

182.

Primary Nominal Derivation.

133

agent.

is used to form some half dozen adjectives and

one f. substantive, partly from the simple root (which is accented), partly
from the reduphcated root (of which the reduplicative syllable is accented).
The adjectives are: ghfs-vi- 'lively', jir-vi-'' (AV.) 'aged', dkn'i-vi- 'firm';
jdgr-vi-'w3XchM, di-dhr-vi- 'smtwamg', dt-di-vi- 'shining'^; f, ddr-vi-^ 'ladle'.

suffix

-vit

183. This

which

suffix,

the single form cikit-vit

is

(RV.)

agent.

perhaps an extension of

-vi with

-/,

occurs in

'dehberately'.

-sa
184. This suffix

agent.

used to form about two dozen adjectives and substantives of all genders. It is added to the root with or without the connecting
vowels -i- or --. The accent is sometimes on the suffix, sometimes on the
root, which is usually unstrengthened.
Many of these derivatives are of
obscure origin.
The suffix is added direct in: gft-sa- 'adroit', -dfk-sa-'' (VS.), prk-sd'dappled' ( iZ/rc-); ut-sa- m. 'fountain', kut-sa-, N. of a man, ghram-sd- m.
'sun's heat', drap-sd- m. 'drop', ruk-sd- m. 'tree'; bhx-sa-^ f. 'fear'.

The

a.

is

added with a connecting vowel

suffix is

(-?-,

-u-)

in: tav-i-sd-^

bhar-i-sd- 'rapacious', mah-i-sd- 'mighty'? ; rj-i-sd- 'rushing', rbi-sa-^ n.

'chasm', pur-i-sa- n. 'rubbish'; man-T-sd- f. 'devotion'; ar-ti-sd-^ 'red', as-us-a'strong',

voracious', tdr-u-sa- m. 'overcomer', pur-u-saang-U-sd- m. 'hymn', piy-u-sa- n. 'biestings'.

'

-sani

m. 'man',

mdn-u-sa-

agent.

This suffix is found only in the derivatives car-sani'people', and par-sdni- 'carrying across' {pr- 'cross').
185.

-sara
186.

This

appears

suffix

perhaps in sap-sardhomage'.

(i.

168")

'man';

'active',

f.

pi.

agent.

only in mat-sard- 'intoxicating' (Yviad-) and

'inspiring awe'(?) if derived from sap- 'do
-sas

action.

187. This suffix seems to be contained in vdp-sas- (RV'.) 'beauty' (?) ',
and possibly in tdr-u-sas- (RV.) 'superior' {Ytr-).

-sna
188.
adjectives

AV.
2

This

and m. or

From y^-'
XIV. lai.

The

suffix

age'; see

-The RV.

n.

agent,

substantives: tTk-snd- 'sharp' {YtiJ), de-snd-^^ n.

Whitney's note on
'ha.s

J iv-ri-.

derivation oi pra-pharvi- (RV'.)

uncertain.

(perhaps syncopated for -sand) forms some half dozen

'gift'

The f. is mahisT-.
The absence of cerebralization in the s,
together with the b, makes the origin of
this word quite uncertain ; it is most probably
7

is

borrowed.
In VS. ddrvi- in the vocative darvi.
9 The f. is artcsT-.
In i-dfk-sa- (VS.) 'looking like this'
1 This is Sayana's interpretation of the
'such' (from df^- 'see').
5 Only in the I. s. bhisa which is a con- word.
II Generally to be read trisyllafaically as
traction for bhiyasa.
3

The

f.

is idvisJ-.

da-isna-.

134

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

{da- 'give'), slak-snd-

{KV.)

4.

Vedic Grammar.

'smooth'; with connecting -a-: kar-d-sna- m. 'foie-

arm', mdt-a-sna-, n. 'lung', vadh-a-snd- n. 'deadly weapon'.

-snu

agent.

189. This suffix, which is always accented, forms adjectives, being added
with or without a connecting vowel to the simple root, or more usually with
connecting -i- to the causative stem.
1.
From the simple root: ji-sim- 'victorious', dank-snu- (VS.) 'biting'
(^ydams^, zVfl^--s'2^- 'sitting down'; z'sfl'/^-a-Jw?/- 'murderous', wr^/^-a-fwz^ 'joyous';
car-i-snu- 'wandering', d-mavisnu-'^ (x. 94") 'immovable {Ymutniv-).
2.
From the causative stem: tapay-i-snu- 'tormenting', namay-ism'i'bending', patay-i-snu- 'flying', paray-i-snu- 'saving', posay-i-pit'i- (AV.) 'causing
to thrive', maday-i-sni't- 'intoxicating', abhi-socay-i-snu- (AV.) 'causing torments'.

II.

Secondary Nominal Derivation.

LiNDNEK, Altindische Nominalbildung

p.

p.

114

52.

Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar

45480.

190. Secondary nominal stems are those derived from stems already
ending in a suffix. They, however, include derivatives from pronominal roots,
as i-tara- 'other', and exceptionally from indeclinable words or case-forms, as
antdr-vant- 'pregnant' {antdr 'within'), mima-ka- 'belonging to me' {mdma
'of me)'. The stem to which secondary suffixes are added is subject to certain
Thus final -a and -i vowels are regularly dropped before suffixes
changes.
beginning with a vowel or y, while final -u generally takes Guna; thus asv-in'possessing horses' {dsva-), khad-in- 'adorned with rings' (Jthadi-), vayav-ya'relating to the wind' {vayi'i^.
Again, the n or the a of stems ending in
-an is occasionally lost, e. g. vrsa-tvd- 'manly power', vfsn-ya- 'manly' (but
vrsan-vant- 'drawn by stallions'); while stems in -ant regularly appear in the
weak form of -at, e. g. vdivasvat-a- 'son of Vivasvant'. The commonest
change is, however, the strengthening of the initial syllable with Vrddhi^,
e. g.

dmitrd-

(prfhivi-),

bhdga-

{a-mitra-

'hostile'

maitravarund-

'enemy'),

'derived

pdrthiv-a- 'relating

from Mitra-varuna',

to

sdubhaga-

the

earth'

'luck'

(su-

'lucky').

As regards meaning,

great majority of secondary suffixes form

sense of 'relating to' or 'connected with'.
In
several, however, the meaning has become specific. Thus the suffixes -ayana,
-i, -eya, form patronymics or metronymics; -in, -mant, -vant express possession;
-tama and -tara imply degrees of comparison; -ta and -tva form abstract
substantives. The masculines and feminines of adjectives are frequently used
as appellatives, while the neuter is commonly employed as a substantive
expressing the attributive sense of the adjective as an abstraction.
a. The secondary suffixes are in their alphabetical order the following:
-a, -a, -aril, ayana, ayi, ayya, -i, -in, -ima, -iya, -i, -ma, -lya, -em, -enya, -eya,
-eyya, -ka, -ta, -tana and -tna, -tama, -taya, -taj-a, -tavya, -ta, -tat, -tati, -tya,
-tva, -tvata, -tvana, -tha, -na, -rii, -bha, -ma, -mant, -maya, -min, -mna, -ya,
adjectives

-yin,

-ra,

with

-la,

the

the

general

-va, -vat, -van, -vant, -vaya, -vala, -vin,

Thus derived

in pw.;

-vya, -sa.

BR. emended hand, extremely rare in secondary derivation,

Grassmann ex- as devd- 'divine' ((AV- 'heaven'), drona- 'wooden

in

to a-marisnu- 'immortal'; in

plained as ama-vimu- 'mit Ungestiim an- vessel' [dru- 'wood'), bhesaj-adringend'.

(bhisaj- 'healing'); op. 191 a a.
2 Strengthening with Guna is, on the other

'medicine'

IV.

Nominal Stem Formation.

Secondary Nominal Derivation.

135

19 r. With the suffix -a is formed a very large number of derivatives

which are primarily adjectives expressing the sense of relation to or connexion
with the primitive word; in the m. and f. they are, however, often used as
appellatives, and in the neuter as abstracts. The first syllable of the primitive
word, whether it is simple or compound is in the great majority of instances

strengthened with Vrddhi; e. g. mdrut-a- 'relating to the Maruts' (marut-),

mdghon-a-^ n. 'bountifulness' {maghdvan- 'bountiful') ', dasarajn-d- "battle of the
ten kings' {dasa-rSjmi-)''; jaitr-a- 'victorious' (Ji-tr- 'conqueror'), tvastr-d'belonging to Tvastr'; manav-d- 'belonging to man' {mdnu-), tinv-a-^ 'belonging
to the body' (tanu-); sarasvat-d- 'coming from the Sarasvati', aindragn-d(AV.^ VS. TS.) 'belonging to Indra and Agni' {indragni); yamun-d- (AV.)

'coming from the Yamuna'; vddhryasv-a-'' 'descended from Vadhryasva',

vaisvadev-d- (AV. VS.) 'sacred to all the gods' (vihd-deva-).
a.
comparatively small number of derivatives add the suffix without
taking Vrddhi. These are probably to a considerable extent due to transfers

from other declensions to the a-declension. Such are tamas-d- (AV.) 'darkcoloured', parus-d- 'knotty' {pdrus- 'knot'), hemant-d- 'winter'; dpak-a- 'distant'
(dpanc- 'behind'); hotr-d-

'office

of priest' {fwtr-); sakhy-d- 'friendship' isdkhi-

'friend').
a.
'two'),

With Guna

nav-a- 'new'

are formed tray-d- 'threefold' {in- 'three'), dvay-d- 'twofold' {dvi'now'); dev-d- 'divine' {div- 'heaven'), bhesaj-d- 'medicine' {bhisdj-

{nit-

'healer').

192. The suffix -a is used in a very large number of stems to form

the feminine of adjectives which in the masculine and neuter end in -a.
Thus ndv-a- {., ndva- m. n. 'new'; priy-d- f., priyd- m. n. 'dear'; gat-d- ,
gatd- m. n. 'gone'.

193. The suffix -a/7/" 5 is used to form the feminine from stems in -a,
designating the wife of the corresponding male being, or expressing a feminine
personification: arany-ani- 'Forest
Indra',

purukuts-ani- 'wife of Purukutsa',

'Varuna's wife'.
194.
first

Nymph' {dranya-

'forest'), indr-ani- 'wife of

urj-dm- 'Strength' (personified),
mudgal-dm- 'wife of Mudgala', varun-ani-

unndr-ani- 'Queen of the Usinaras',

The

suffix -ayana- forms a few patronymics

with Vrddhi

in the

syllable: anty-Syand- (NSi.TS.) 'descendant of Antya', amusy-ayand- {AN.)

'descendant of so and so' {amusya- gen. of adds), kanv-ayana- 'descendant

of Kanva', ddks-ayand- (VS. AV.) 'descendant of Daksa'; also the f. ramayani- (AV.) 'daughter of the Black One' {ramd-).
The derivative uksaftAyana-, N. of a man, being formed without Vrddhi is perhaps not meant for
a patronjTnic.
195. The suffix -ayT occurs perhaps only twice, forming the feminine from

two masculine stems

196.

The

(Jru- 'hear').

and designating the wife of the corresponding male

and vrsakap-ayi- (only voc.) 'wife of Vrsakapi'.

in -i

agn-ayi- 'wife of Agni'

suffix -ayya

forms gerundives*;

e. g.

There are also a few other derivatives

are used as ordinary adjectives or as neuter abstracts;

2
3

srav-dyya-

'glorious'

similarly formed,

which

thus nr-pdyya- 'guarding

the weakest stem maghon-. -a is added to stems in -a as to others (the

With syncope of the vowel of the suffix. finalvowel of the primitive disappearing before
Without Guna of the ii; similar ex- it) and not that derivation by Vrddhi alone

Formed from

ceptions in parsv-d- 'side' (pdrsu- 'rib'), takes place here; cp. Whitney 1208 i.
5 Cp. Leumann, KZ. 32, 294. ff.
paidv-d- 'belonging to Pedu', madhv-a- 'full
6 These are probably formed from dative
of sweetness' {mddhu-), yadv-a- 'belonging
-ya; cp. Brugmann, Grundinfinilives in -ai
to Yadu'.
t It is natural to suppose that the suffix riss 2, p. 1422 ; cp. also IF. 12, 2.

136

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

bahu-payya- 'protecting many'; purva-payya- 'first drink', mahay-dyyakunda-pdyya- and puru-mayya- as Proper Names; also formed
from nouns, ras-dyya- 'tasteful' {rasa- 'sap') and uttam-Ayya- n. 'summit' {uttatnamen',

'enjoyment',
'highest')'.

The

197.

Vrddhi

suffix

-/

forms

few patronymics from nouns in -a with

in the initial syllable: Agnives-i- 'descendant of Agnivesa', pdurukuts-i-

'son of Purukutsa', pratardan-i- 'descendant of Pratardana', prahrad-i- (AV.)

'son of Prahrada, sAmvaran-i- 'descendant of Sarnvarana'.
Similarly formed,
but with the sense of an ordinary substantive, is sArath-i- 'charioteer' (from

sa-rdtha-m 'on the same chariot'). Two other words add a secondary -i
without Vrddhi or patronymic sense: tdpus-i- 'burning' and sucant-i-, N. of a
man (seemingly an extension of the participle suc-dnt- 'shining')
198. Hundreds of adjectives are formed with the suffix -in from stems
in -a, but very rarely from stems with any other final; e. g. ark-in- 'praising'
(arkd- 'praise'), manis-in- 'wise' {mani-sA- 'wisdom'), arc-i7i- 'radiant' {ixrcisatagv4n- 'consisting of hundreds' (*saia-gva-), varm-in- 'clad in
'beam'),
armour' {vdrman-), svan-in- (VS.) 'keeping dogs' (Jvdn-).
With loss of final
ret-in- 'abounding in seed' {re'tas-) and perhaps in the Proper Name
-as:
{vdrc-as- 'power');

varc-in-

with

loss of -ya:

Jiiran-in-

'adorned

with

gold'

(hiran-ya-).

199. The suffix -ima is very rare, being employed to form adjectives
from the stems in -tra and from one in -ra: krtr-ima- 'artificial', khanitr-ima'made by digging', putr-ima- (AV.) 'purified'; agr-imd- 'foremost' {dg-ra'front').

200. The suffix -iya is employed to form some 20 adjectives (from

stems in -a).
It is only a modified form of -ya which is added for facility
of pronunciation after two or more consonants, the last of which is generally
r, rarely n, m or v; e. g. abhr-iyd- 'derived from the clouds' (abhrd-), samudriya- 'belonging
to
the sea' {samudrd)-,
indr-iyd'belonging to Indra';
krsn-iyd-, N. of a man {krsnd- 'black'); rgm-iya 'praiseworthy'; asv-iyd- 'consisting of horses', 'troop'.
201. The suffix -T is employed in a very large number of derivatives
to form the feminine of masculine stems; often from stems in -a^; e. g.
drus-T- 'ruddy' {arusd-), dev-i- 'goddess' {devd-); or in -u; e. g. prthv-i- 'broad'
or from stems formed with suffixes ending in consonants, as partiiprth-i'i-)
;

ciples
'eating'

in

-at

or

{ad-dnt-),

-ant,

gone';

comparatives

avitr-i-

'protectress';

in -vant,

e.

e. g.

piprat-T- /protecting' [pr- 'take across'),

mdd-ant-i 'rejoicing'
in -Tyains-,
in -mant,

or in -vams-,

ndv-iyas-i- 'new';

e. g.

ad-at-i-

jagm-us-i- 'having
stems in -tar, e. g.

e. g.

dhenu-mdt-i- 'abounding in nourishment';

g. dma-vat-i- 'impetuous'; in -an, e. g. soma-rajn-T- 'having Soma

as

king';

in

compounds of -han

in -in,

e. g.

arkin-T- 'radiant';

e. g.

'slaying',

e. g.

in -anc, e. g. arvAc-t- 'hitherward';

a-pati-ghn-i- 'not killing a husband', of

and of -pad 'foot', as a-pdd-i- 'footless'.

202. The suffix -Tna forms more than a dozen adjectives from the weak
stems of derivatives in -anc-, expressing direction without change of meaning;

-drs- 'look', as su-dfs'-T- 'well-looking',

e. g.

arvac-ina-

and arvac-ind- 'turned towards'

{arvaiic- 'hitherward').

It

also

forms six or seven adjectives from other words, expressing the general sense
of relation; e. g. anjas-ina- 'straightforward' {anjasa- 'straight'), visvajan-ina(AV.) 'containing all kinds of people'.

See Whitney 1218 a.

This is regularly the

case

in

stems

formed with Vrddhi

e.

g. jnanus-a-

in

'human',

the initial syllable;

f. manus-T-.

Nominal Stem Formation.

IV.

The

203.

Secondary Nominal Derivation.

137

suffix -lya forms fewer than a dozen general adjectives,

of

which only two

occur in the RV.; e. g. arjik-iya-, designation of a Soma

vessel, grha-medh-iya- 'relating to the domestic
sacrifice';
ahav-an-iya- (AV.)
'sacrificial fire', parvat-iya- (AV.) 'mountainous'.
This suffix also appears in
the three ordinals dvit-iya- 'second', trt-iya- 'third', tur-tya- 'fourth'.
204. The suffix -ena with Vrddhi of the initial syllable, occurs only
once, forming a general adjective, in its feminine form samidh-eni'relating
to fuel' {samtdk-).

205. The suffix -enya was doubtless originally formed by the addition
of -ya to derivatives made with -na, but it nearly always has a primary
value as forming gerundives; e.g. drs-inya- 'worthy to be seen'. It appears,
however,^ also in the two ordinary adjectives kirt-enya- 'famous' {ktrti- 'fame')

and

vir-enya- 'manly' {vird- 'hero').

206. The suffix -e/ff, with Vrddhi of the initial syllable, is employed
to form fewer than a dozen adjectives of a patronymic or metronymic value
and some half dozen adjectives of a general character, the latter occasionally
appearing in the neuter as abstract substantives; e. g. ars-eyd- 'descended

from a

seer' {fsi-), adit-eya- 'son

(purusa-), mdun-eya- 'position of a
are formed without initial Vrddhi,
roots ending in a like deya- 'to

from didrk-sa-

seeing' (as

'desire

of Aditi';

pdurus-eya-

sage' {muni-).

Two

'relating

words with

man'

to

this suffix

following the analogy of gerundives from

be given' {da- 'give'): didrks-eya- 'worth
to see') and sabh-eya- 'fit for an assembly'

{sabhd-).

207.

The very

rare suffix -eyya forms adjectives with a gerundive sense

and sapath-eyya- (AV.) 'worthy of cursing'. It

an ordinary adjective used as a neuter substantive, sahas-eyya-

in sius-eyya-"- 'praise-worthy',

also

forms

(- 'lie)'.
suffix -ka was

n. 'lying together'

208.

The

probably used originally to

form adjectives

expressive of connexion, but it has become so attenuated in meaning as often

to be added to substantives or adjectives without changing the sense; while
on the other hand it has become specialized as a suffix forming diminutives.
1. Examples of its significant use are:
dnia-ka- 'making an end' {dnta-),
rupa-ka- (AV.) 'having an assumed form' {rupd- 'form'); asmd-ka- 'our'

{asmd2.

'us'),

The

suffix

mdma-ka- 'my' {mama 'of me'); dnti-ka- 'near'

appears without changing the meaning in

{dura-

{dnti 'before').
e. g.

dura-kd-

vamra-kd- 'ant' {vamrd- 'ant'), sarva-kd- (AV.) 'all'

{sdrva-), and in the fem. form of -ka in
avi-ka- 'ewe' {dvi- 'sheep'), isu-kd(AV.) 'arrow' {hu-), dhenu-ka- (AV.) 'cow' {dhenu-). 3. The diminutive
sense appears in e. g. arbha-kd- 'small', kumara-kd- 'little boy', pada-kd'little foot',
putra-kd- 'little son'^. Sometimes a contemptuous meaning is
conveyed at the same time, as in anya-kd- 'other' {anyd-), dla-ka-m 'in vain'
'distant'

'far'),

{dla-m 'enough')^.

With Vrddhi

to the rains' {varsd-),

formed mama-kd-'- 'belonging

(AV. VS.) 'belonging
vdsant-i-ka- 'belonging to the spring' {vasantd-), and

in the fem. kairat-ikd-

(AV.) 'relating to the Kiratas'.

a.
to

{mama);

me'

209.

This

The

in the

first

syllable

and with connecting

-?-:

is

vdrs-i-ka-

rare secondary suffix -ia has an ordinal sense in eka-td- (VS.)

gerundive

is

probably based on

the infinitive stiise 'to praise'; cp. Brugmann,

Grundriss 2, p. 1422 (5).
2 The feminine of some of these diminuis formed with -ika iyatt-ikdtives
'so
:

small',

kumarika.- (AV.)

'little

girl',

ika- (AV.) 'mutilated', sakunt-ikd-

(AV.

Slid-

Whitney

521.

iit-ikd- 'cool'

kharv-

'little

bird',

'cold').

Cp.

Beside the more normal mdma-ka-.

138

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

dvi-td- 'Second',

'First',

Vedic Grammar.

Proper Names.

'Third' as

tri-td-

4.

also appears in

It

and muhur-td- 'moment'.

210. With the suffix -tana and

ava-td- 'well'

its syncopated
form -tna are made,
from adverbs or prepositions, a very few adjectives with a temporal sense:
mi-tana- and na-tna- 'present' {nu 'now'), sana-tdna- (AV.) and sand-tna- (AV.)

'eternal'

211.

{sdna 'from of old'), pra-tnd- 'ancient' {prd 'before').

The suffix -tama has two uses. It is employed to form superlatives

from nominal stems and from the preposition lid; &. g. puru-tdma- 'very many',
mddhumat-tama- 'very sweet', rathi-tama-'^ 'best charioteer'; ut-tamd-' 'highest'.
It is also used to form ordinals; e. g. sata-tamd- 'hundredth'.
212. With the suffix -iaya are formed only two adjectives from numerals
in the sense of 'consisting of so
ddsa-taya- 'tenfold'.

The suffix

213.

-iara

substantives,

adjectives,

or

is

the

many

cdtus-taya-

parts':

regularly

used to

preposition ud;

'fourfold'

and

form comparatives from

tavds-tara-

e. g.

vrtra-tdra- 'worse Vrtra';

rathi-tara- 'better charioteer',

{KM .)

'stronger',

ut-tara- 'higher'.

It

(RV.) 'diurnal' (diva 'by day'),

meaning of the suffix is somewhat

also forms

the ordinary adjective diva-tara-

and a few substantives in which the

obscure: asva-tdra-^ (AV.) 'mule' (f. -i), vatsa-tard-^ 'weaned calf's (f. -/).
214. The suffix -iau-ya, probably originating from the predicative use of
dative

infinitives

in -tav-e

and beginning to be used in a gerundive sense,

jan-i-tav-ya- 'to be born' and hims-i-tav-ya-

appears only twice in the AV.

'to

be

injured'.

215. The suffix -to. forms, from adjectives and substantives, some two
dozen abstract nouns expressing the sense conveyed by the English suffixes
-ness and -ship; e. g. bandhi'i-ta- 'relationship', vasu-ta- 'wealthiness'; ago-ta'lack of cattle', devd-ta- 'divinity', purusd-ta- 'human nature'; jand-ta- (AV.)
has acquired the concrete sense of 'mankind' *. Exceptional formation appears
in mamd-ta- 'selfishness' and tre-ta- 1 (VS. TS.) 'triad'. This suffix is probably

contained in su-nf-ta-^ 'gladness' also.

a. The suffixes -tati and -tai are related to -ta and have the same
sense.
With the former are made about a dozen abstract substantives; e.g.
a-ristd-tati- 'security', grbhitd-tati- 'the being seized', jyesthd-tati- 'superiority',
devd'tati-

'divinity',

substantives
adjectives

vasu-tati-

sarvd-tati-

'wealth',

'completeness'.

'good fortune' and satyd-tati-

sdm-tati-

meaning respectively

'beneficent'

and

'truth'

also

The

'truthful'.

The two
appear as
suffix -tat,

which seems to be an abbreviation of -tati and occurs only in the RV., is

employed to form four or five abstract substantives: upard-tat- 'proximity',
devd-tat- 'divine service', vrkd-tat- 'wolfishness', sarvd-tat- 'completeness'.

216.

The

suffix

-tya

forms

some

stantives

from prepositions and adverbs.

amd-tya-

'companion' {ama

nis-tya- 'foreign'

Name

home'),

gd-ta?na-.

The

superlatives tuvi-s-tama- 'strongest'

and surabhi'S-iania- 'most fragrant' insert a
sibilant before the suffix.
3 Perhaps 'more (like a) horse' (than an
2

assl.
I

Svis-tya-

sdnu-tya- 'secret' 9.

{nis 'out'),

Also in the Proper

'at

dozen adjectives and subThese are dpa-tya- n. 'offspring',

half

Probably 'more than a calf.

5 In ratham-tard-,
designation of a kind
of Saman, in which the case ending of the
ace. remains, the second part is doubtless

'manifest'

This suffix

{avis
is

'openly'),

added

also

to

the verbal -tara 'speeding' {t]'- 'cross').

karotard- 'filter' and kaulitard-, designation
of Sambara, are probably formed vifith -a

and Vrddhi.
6 Like 'humanity' in English.
7 Also
in tret-in-l- (RV.) 'the threefold
flame of three fires'.
8 Though it appears also as a neuter siinfta- 'gladness' and as an adjective 'joyful'.
9 Cp. sanu-tdr 'aside',
I

IV.

Nominal Stem Formation.

the substantive
'

Up-

'water'

to

Secondary Nominal Derivation.

form the two

adjectives

and

ap-tyd-

139
ap-tyd-

watery'.

217. With the suffix -tva are formed more than thirty abstract substanwith the same sense as those in -ta; e. g. amrta-tvd- 'immortahty',
aham-uttara-tvd- (AV.) 'assertion of superiority', bhratr-tvd- 'brotherhood',
maghavat-tvd- liberahty', raksas-tvd- 'sorcery'. The final syllable of the
primitive is lengthened in an-agas-tvd- 'sinlessness'j while it is shortened in
sadhani-tvd- ^ 'companionship'. Owing to the influence of the nominative, j is

tives

inserted before the suffix in su-praja-s-tvd- 'possession of many children' and

with initial Vrddhi in saupraja-s-tvd-^ {KV^.) 'possession of good offspring'.
a. The two suffixes -ta and -tva, identical in meaning, are pleonastically

combined in the form of -tva-ta.- in. the two derivatives isita-tvdta- 'excitement', and purusa-tvdta- 'human nature'.
218. The suffix -ivana, an extension of -tva with -na, appears in the
formation of some eight neuter abstracts occurring almost exclusively in the
RV. These are kavi-tvand- 'wisdoia', jani-tvand- 'state of a wife^ pati-tvand'matrimony', martya-tvand- 'the ways of man', mahi-tvand- 'greatness', vasu;

tvand- 'wealth', vrsa-tvand- 'manliness', sakhi-tvand- 'friendship'. All of these

except martya-tvand- have beside them the corresponding abstracts formed
with -tva^,
219. The suffix -iha forms a few ordinals from cardinals, and adjectives
from pronominal stems with a general numerical sense. Thus catur-thd (AV.)
sas-thd- (AV. VS.) 'sixth', saptd-tha- 'seventh'; kaii-thd- 'the how
'fourth',
manieth?'-

220.

The

rare

secondary suffix -na appears in one adjective derived

with initial Vrddhi from a substantive, strdi-na- 'feminine' {stri- 'woman), and
in three adjectives derived firom adverbs without any internal change pura-nd'ancient {puri 'before'), visu-na- 'various' i^visu- 'apart'), sama-nd- 'like' {samd:

'equal').

used to form the feminine oi pdti- 'lord' and

of several adjectives in -ta denoting colours.
Thus pdt-nT- 'mistress', pdrus-ni-, as N. of a river. The suffix is substituted
for -ta in e-ni- 'variegated' \e-ta-), rohi-ni- 'red cow' {rohi-ta- 'red'), syS-ni'white cow' (Jye-td- 'white'), hdriin- 'fallow' {hdri-ta-). In a few such words
-m is substituted for the final a, while k takes the place of the f-: dsik-ni221.

The

suffix

parus-d- 'knotty',

'black' (dsi-ta-),

as

-tiT

well

is

as

pdlik-m- 'grey'

{pali-td-),

hdrik-ni-

in

diminutive form

the

hdrikn-ika- (AV.) 'yellowish' {hdri-ta- 'fallow').

222. The suffix -bha forms half a dozen derivatives, all names of
animals except one adjective S: rsa-bhd- and vrsa-bhd- 'bull', garda-bhd- and
rssa-bha-^ 'ass', sara-bhd- (AV. VS.) 'fabulous eightlegged animal'. The one
adjective

223.
sitions,
'ten'.

is

sthula-bhd- {KSl'^^ beside sthuld- 'big'.

suffix -ma forms some eight superlatives, partly from prepo-

The

and the

ordinals from the cardinals for

The former

are

adha-md-

'lowest',

'five'

apa-md-

and

'seven', 'eight',

ava-md-

'farthest',

'nine',

'lowest',

4 See Brugmann, Morphologische UnterI

From sadha-ni- ('one who leads with
and Grundriss 2,
198,
him') 'companion', which is, however, ana- suchungen 2, p.
p. 315lysed in "the Pada text as sa-dhani-.
,
^
5 See Brugmann, Grundriss 2, p. 203;
s saubhaga-tva- 'happiness' is formed from
2.
note
'condition- of welfare', cp. p. 89,
soMbhaga- 'welfare'
,
,
6 Formed, with Vrddhi and accented on
not from su-bhdga- 'lucky', from which is
the initial syllable, from ras- 'roar', 'bray' etc.
formed subhaga-iva- 'welfare'.
3 Cp. Lindner 26 and 28.
.

140

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

'last',
para-md- 'remotest',
panca-md- (A.V. VS.) 'fifth',
sapta-md- (VS.) 'seventh', asta-md- 'eighth', nava-md- 'ninth', dasa-md- 'tenth'.
224. The suffix -mant forms in the Sainhitas between 80 and 90
possessive adjectives, like the parallel suffix -vant', with which it is to some
extent interchangeable. Unlike -vant, however, it never forms derivatives from
stems ending in -a except kdnva-mant- (RV'.) 'prepared by the Kanvas' and
ydva-mant- 'rich in barley'. Examples are asdni-mant- 'possessing the thunder-

upa-md-

dnta-ma-'^

'highest',

cara-md-

'nearest',

The

madhya-md- 'middlemost'.

ordinals

are:

dsadki-mant- (AV.) 'rich in herbs', krdtu-mant- 'having power', vadhti-mant'drawn by mares'(?), hotr-mant- 'provided with a sacrificer', go-mant- 'rich in kine',
?/m^/J-OTa^ 'gleaming', garut-mant- 'winged' (?), kakud-mant-^ 'provided with a
bolt',

hump',

cdksus-mant- 'possessed of eyes',

final -i is sometimes lengthened

vidyim-mant-'- 'containing hghtning'.

tvisT-mant- 'vehement'

(Ivisi- 'vehemence'),
dhraji-mant- 'gliding' [dhrdjidhraji- 'gliding motion'), hin-mant- 'tawny-horsed' (hirihdri- 'bay steed'); -'i- is inserted Kn jyotis-i-mant- (AV.)5 'full of light' (beside jy/oV/j-In the derivative susu-mdnt- (RV'.) 'very stimumant-), and s in iuci-s-mant-^ 'shining'.
The adverb dsu-mdt (AVi), formed
lating' the suffix seems to have primary value?.
from the neuter of this suffix, seems to follow the analogy of adverbs in -vat from
derivatives in -vant,

a.

225. The suffix -maya (f. -t) forms fewer than a dozen adjectives with
The suffix -as
the sense of 'consisting of, 'derived from', 'abounding in'.
remains unchanged before the m, but d is assimilated as in external Sandhi.
Derivatives thus formed are: ayas-mdya- 'made of metal', asman-mdya- 'made
of stone', kim-mdya- 'consisting of what?', go-mdya- 'consisting of cattle',
nabhas-mdya- 'vaporous', manas-mdya- 'spiritual', mrn-mdya- 'made of clay'

from dung', su-mdya-^ 'well-fashioned'.

-min was most probably due to the derivatives in -in
from nouns in -ma, like dhum-in- 'smoking' (dhumd- 'smoke') which are fairly
common. It has an independent character, however, in is-min- 'impetuous'
{mrd-), saka-mdya- 'arising

226.

and

The

suffix

rg-min-'^ 'jubilant with praise' {fc-).

The rare suffix -mna forms a few neuter abstracts from nouns or parseems to be an extension with -a of -man syncopated hke -tna for -tana.
The derivatives formed with it are: dyu-m?id- 'brightness' {dyu- 'sky'), nr-miid'manliness' {nr- 'man'), ni-mnd- 'depth' {ni 'down'), su-mnd- 'welfare' {su- 'well').
228. The very common suffix -ya'^ forms a large number of adjectives
227.

ticles.

It

a good many patronymics, and abstract substantives.

nearly four times as often as -ya. The feminine is usually
-ya, both in adjectives and abstract substantives; but in the former it is sometimes -r, as ar-i- and dr-ya- 'Aryan', ddiv-T-'^^ and ddiv-ya- 'divine'.
a.
All the patronymics besides a good many general adjectives, and
most of the abstract substantives are formed with initial Vrddhi; e. g.
of relation,

It is

including

pronounced

-ia

adit-yd- 'Son of Aditi',

sahadev-yd- 'descendant of Sahadeva'; grdiv-ya- (AV.)

(devd-god'), prajapat-yd- (AV.)

'relating to the neck' (grivd-), ddiv-ya- 'divine'

note

Once

(l.

anta-md-;

1655)

cp.

p.

89,

3.

Which is, however, about three times

common.
3 The VS. has kakun-mant- as in external

as

Sandhi.
+

With assimilated

Following

the

as in external Sandhi.
of tdvisT-mant-

analogy

'strong',

Occurring

sucis-mas.

only

once in

7 The word is analysed in the Pada text

as susu-mdn.
8 This derivative seems to preserve the
originally nominal character of this suffix.

9 In this derivative the original guttural

appears, though it has become sonant as in
external Sandhi.

1 See Whitney 1 210

1213 (p. 459 466)
and Lindner 36 (p. 138144).
the vocative
" These are evident instances of the re|duction of unaccented yd to 2; cp. 24 a.

Nominal Stem Formation.

IV.

Secondary Nominal Derivation.

141

to Prajapati'; adhipat-ya- 'lordship' {ddhi-pati- 'lord'), jdnaraj-ya(VS.) 'kingship' (Jana-rajan- 'king of the people'), vaimanas-yd- (AV.) 'dejection' {vi-manas-), samgramajit-ya- (AV.) 'victory in battle' {samgrama-jH'relating

KSr^ 'conquering

in battle'), sduvasv-ya-'' 'wealth in horses' {sv-dsva-).

formed without Vrddhi are mostly ordinary adjectives,

being about four times as numerous as those formed with Vrddhi. They are
made from stems with all kinds of finals. The following are examples: dh-yab. Derivatives

'relating

to

horses' {dsva-);

urvar-ya-

(VS.)

svaraj-ya- 'autocracy' {sva-rSj- 'sovereign')

vfsn-ya-^

{vfsan- 'male');

'virile'

'belonging

to

cultivated land'

karman-ya- 'skilful

sat-yd-'* 'true'

isdnt-),

in work' {kdrtnan-),
prac-ya- (AV.) 'eastern'

{prMc-); ayus-ya- (VS. AV.) 'length of life' {dyus^.

a. The final -a is retained before the suffix in hiranyd-ya- 'made of

gold' [kiranya-),
in aryam-ya- 'intimate' {arya-man- 'companion'). The suffix
is added pleonastically in avyd-ya- and dvya-ya- 'belonging to sheep' (beside dv-ya-) and
gavyd-ya- 'derived from cows' (beside gdv-ya-); also in forming a few possessive compounds, as su-hdst-ya- 'skilful-handed' (beside su-hdsia-)S. It is also used in forming a
few governing compounds, as ddhi-gart-ya- 'being on the driver's seat' [gdria-), abhinaih-yd-m, adv. 'near the clouds' {ndbhas-)^.
(S. In some adjectives
and substantives, the suffix has a primary appearance; e. g.

while -an

is

dropped before

it

pus-ya- 'flower', yuj-ya- 'related', niddh-ya- 'middle', mdr-ya- 'young man', sur-ya- 'sun',
f. sur-ya- 7 (svar- 'light').
Though as a gerundive suffix -ya must be regarded as primary, it is manifestly
)*.
secondary in certain adjectives which have a gerundive sense; thus a-vi-mok-yd- (AV.)
'not to be loosened', pari-varg-yd-^ (AV.) 'to be avoided'.
S. Akin to the gerundives are a few abstract feminines in -yd; e. g. k^-i-ya- 'action',
'enchantment', md-ya-9 (AV.) 'knowledge', deva-yaj-yi- 'worship of the gods'.

22g.

The

rare suffix

-y'ln^

like

forms

-in,

few possessive

adjec-

of which except one occur in the VS. They are atata-yin- (VS.)
'having one's bow drawn' {d-tata-), dhanva-yin- (VS.) 'bearing a bow' {dkdnvan-),
mara-yin-^ (RV'.), N. of a man, srka-yin- (VS.) 'having a spear' {srkd-),
svadka-yin-^^ (VS.) 'owning the Svadha'.
230. The suffix -ra forms four superlatives from prepositions and about
all

tives,

a dozen ordinary nouns, most of which are

adjectives.

The superlatives

dva-ra- 'lower', upa-ra- '^ 'lower'.

The
ordinary adjectives formed with the suffix have the sense of 'belonging to'
or 'connected with'. It is usually added direct; e. g. dhutn-rd- 'grey' {dhumd-

are ddha-ra- 'lower',

'smoke'),

asrt-rd-

Vrddhi

initial

car'.

As

if

'descendant

1204

It

'ugly',

i in

also

pamsu-rd-

{pamsi'i- 'dust', AV.),

'dusty'

and with
added

It is

medh-i-rA- 'wise' {medkd- 'wisdom') and rath-i-rd- 'riding

in a few substantives, some of which are of

occurs

from suvasvaof

'later',

igriidh-ra- 'belonging to the fire-kindler' {agnidk-).

with connecting
in

dpa-ra-

VyaSva';

like

vaiyasv-d-

cp.

Whitney

Cp.
Cp.

Whitney
Whitney

1212 m.
1213 e; and Roots, under

svar- 'sound'.

b, c.

8 Here the
guttural shows that these
secondary suffixes (190); prdiav-yd- 'to be words are derived from nominal stems
partaken of (pra-as-) and iirjav-yd- 'rich in -moka- and -varga-.
9 In the RV. only in the compound /aiiinourishment' (urj-) are formed without any
vidyd- 'knowledge of creatures'.
primitives praiu- and urju-.
' Perhaps meaning 'brilliant' or, according
3 With syncope in the suffix of the pri2

With Guna of

final -u

as usual before

mitive; cp. 190.

4 From the weak stem of the primitive;
cp. 190.
5

Cp.

Whitney 1212

c.

to Sayana, 'destroying' enemies.

11

The TS.

12

For dnta-ra

note

I.

IV. 4.

cp.

114 has svadha-vin:

above

p. 90,

39 and

142

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

doubtful etymology: karmd-ra-^ 'smith', muska-rd- (AV.), a kind of small

animaP, sdmbara-^, N. of a demon, /a/U'wra- (AV.) 'penis', sahds-ra- 'thousand'.
231. The suffix -la forms about a dozen adjectives with the same

meaning as those formed with -ra, with which it sometimes interchanges and
of which it is generally a later form. Examples are: aslt-ld- (AV.) 'ugly',
kapi-ld- 'brown',

jiva-ld- (AV.)

'lively',

tilvi-la- 'fertile',

bahu-ld- 'abundant',

(AV.) 'shiny'. This suffix also forms two or three

diminutives: vrsa-ld- 'little man', sihi-la- 'little child', and the fem. salaka-ld(AV.) 'small splint'.
232. The suffix -va forms a few adjectives: arwa-z/a- 'billowy', kesa-vd-

madhu-ld-

(AV.)

'sweet', seva-la-

'hairy',

ahji-vd- (AV.) 'slippery',

santi-vd- (AV.) 'friendly',

sraddhi-vd-

'credible'.

233. The suffix -vat forms seven feminine abstract substantives, with
a local sense, from adverbs or prepositions: arva-vdt-'' 'proximity', a-vdt(AV.) 'proximity', ud-vdt- 'height', ni-vdt- 'depth', para-vdt- 'distance', pra-vdt'height', sam-vdt- 'region'.
234. With the suffix -van, before which -a and -i may be lengthened,
are formed some twenty derivatives, nearly all adjectives with the sense of
The adjectives are: amati-vdn- 'indigent',
'possessing' or 'connected with'.
arati-vdn- 'hostile', fgha-van- 'impetuous', rna-vdn- 'indebted', dhitd-van-^ 'rich
in gifts', dhi-van- (AV.) 'clever', maghd-van- 'bountiful', srusti-vdn- 'obedient',
satyd-van-^ (AV.) 'truthful', samdd-van- 'warlike', svadhd-van-, f. -vari-'' 'faithful', hdrd-van- (VS.) 'hearty'; also the feminines sumnd-vdri- 'bringing favour',
sunfta-varT- 'joyous'. Somewhat anomalously formed are indhan-van- 'possessed
of fuel' {ind/iana-), saka-van-^ and sdho-van-"^ (AV.) 'mighty'. There are also
the substantives dthar-van- m.

'fire-priest',

mitsi-vdn-

m.

and sani-t-

'robber',

van-^ 'reward'.
235. The suffix -vant forms, from nominal stems of every kind, possessive
adjectives

numbering

lengthened before the

at

250 in the Sarnhitas. A final vowel is often

most frequently -a, but very rarely -u. Examples

least

suffix,

are: kesa-vant- 'hairy', dsva-vant- 'possessed of horses' (beside dsva-vant-);

prajd-vant- 'having progeny'; sdkhi-vant- 'having friends', sdkti-vant- 'mighty'
(Jdkti- 'might'); dydva-prtkivi-vant-'^^ (AV.) 'connected with heaven and earth';

visnu-vant- 'accompanied by Visnu', visu-vdnt- 'dividing' {visu- 'apart'); hdrit-

asan-vdnt- (AV.) 'having a mouth', roman-vant- and

Uma-vant- (AV.) 'hairy', strsan-vdnt- (AV.) 'having a head'; kakiibh-vant- (MS.
svar-vant- 'splendid'; pdyas-vant- 'containing milk',
I. 11') 'having a peak';
nas-vdnt- {KY .) 'having a nose'. With external Sandhi: //jafl?-j'3/- 'variegated''^.
a. Some of these derivatives, especially if formed from pronominal stems,
have the meaning of 'resembhng' instead of 'possessing'; thus md-vant- 'like
me', i-vant- ''SO great', ii-vant- 'how fa.i?', indras-vant-'^'^ 'like Indra', nila-vantvant- 'gold-coloured';

1 sevara'treasury' probably stands by

9 The only instance of external Sandhi
haplology for Uva-vdra-.
with this suffix.
1 With -i interposed, as after short radical
2 The
word occurs in TS. V. (B) as an
adjective meaning 'having testicles'.
vowel preceding primary -van; e. g. kf-t3 Probably a, foreign word.
van-.
11 Retaining the double accent of the pri4 From arva- 'hither' contained in arvahc-

and some other derivatives.

mitive.
12 In
The Pada text has dhitd-van-.
a few derivatives -vant has the
The Pada text has saiyd-van-.
vivds-vantappearance of a primary suffix
The fem. of the secondary -van being or vi-vasvani- 'shining', dr-vani- 'swift', yah-

'hitherward'
5
S
7

formed like that of the primary -van

177 and cp. 179 a.
8 The Pada text has sahd-van-.

see

vdnt- 'speeding'.
13

With the

of the nominative.

V. Compounds.

From

Form of Compounds.

143

is derived the use of the neuter

manus-vdt 'like Manus', 'as Manus did'.
236. The very rare suffix -vaya^ probably a noun in origin, seems to
be found only in one numeral adjective, cdtur-vaya- 'fourfold', and one substantive, drii-vdya- (AV.) 'wooden dish'.
237. The suffix -vala (cp. 179) seems to be used in the formation of
secondary derivatives only in krsi-^ald- 'peasant' {krsi- 'tillage') and in the

'blackish', nr-vdnt- 'manly'.

ace. as

an adverb of comparison,

this

sense

e.g.

fem. nad-^ala- (VS.) 'reed-bed'.

238. The suffix -vin is used in forming nearly twenty possessive adjectives
from stems ending in -a (which is lengthened), -a% -as; thus ubhaya-vin'partaking of both' {ubhdya-), astra-vin- 'obedient to the goad', yasas-vin{KSI^ 'beautiful'. To the analogy of the derivatives from stems in -as is due
the insertion of s in sata-s-vin- 'possessing a hundred'. The only derivatives
from stems ending in any consonant other than j are dhrsad-vin- 'bold'

and vag-vin-

{dkrsdt-)

(AV.)

'eloquent'

{vile-

'speech'),

both formed as in

external Sandhi.
derivative of the suffix -vya forming names of relationoccur in the Samhitas seems to be bkrstr-vya- (father's)
'brother's son'^
240. The suffix -sa forms eight or nine adjectives or substantives without
instances changing the original meaning. The adjectives are ita-samost
in
'variegated', babhlu-sd- (VS.) 'brownish', yuva-sd- 'youthful', and with possessive
sense roma-sd- 'hairy'. The substantives are ahku-sa- m. 'hook', kdsma-sa(AV.) m. or n. 'stupefaction' (?), kald-sa- m. 'jar', turvd-sa-, N. of a man,

239.

ship

The only

which

lopa-sd-^

m.

'jackal'.

COMPOUNDS.

V.

Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar

Benfey, VoUstandige Grammatik p. 245 282.
Reuter, Die altindischen nominalcomposita, ihrer betonung nach unter12461316.
Wackernagel, Altindische Grammatik, 21,
612.
sucht, KZ. 31, 157232; 485
Nominalkomposition, 1905 cp. Bartholomae, IF. 20, 162172 (Anzeiger).

The Vedic language has inherited from

241. Form of compounds.
the Indo-European speech the power of combining words into a compound
treated like a simple word as regards accent, inflexion, and construction.
Both in the frequency and the length of compounds the Vedic language
resembles that of Homer. In the RV. and the AV. no compounds of more
than three independent members occur; and those which consist of three
members are rare, such as ddabdha-vrata-pramati- 'superior-minded owing to
unbroken observances', purva-kama-kftvan- 'fulfilling former wishes', mithoavadya-pa- 'mutually warding off want', hdri-manyu-sayaka- 'stimulating the
mettle of the bays'.

unity of accent
members). There
The Sandhi between the two
are, however, exceptions to both these rules.
numbers is occasionally different from that between words in a sentence.
Generally speaking a
Occasionally also tmesis of a compound occurs ^

The two characteristic features

of a

compound

and use of the uninflected stem in the

first

member

The

seems

to

doubtful

add

word

-in to

interposed euphonic

are

(or

4 Frequently in dual compounds, as dyava

ha ksama 'heaven and earth'; occasionally
in others also, as simai cic chepam for iunahoccurs Hpam ; ndrd va sarnsam for ndra-iamsam ;

vy-ainuv-in- (VS'.)

the present stem with

-v-.

ipitf-vya- 'father's brother', 'uncle',

in the later language.
3 Cp. Gustav Meyer, IF. i, 328.

saptd

me

sapid for sapid-sapta me.

144

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

compound assumes

modified

and

4.

single

Vedic Grammar.

meaning as compared with the

e. g. krsna-sakuni- (AV.)
krsndh sakunih would mean 'black bird'. Compounding must
take place when a derivative has to be formed from the two words; as
ksditrapat-ya- 'property' beside kseirasya pdti- 'lord of the field'. Sometimes,
however, the case-ending remains while the compound accent is used, as
rayas-posa-dd- 'bestowing abundance of wealth', beside ray as pom- 'abundance
There is a tendency to compounding when the first of two
of wealth'.
syntactical words is indeclinable.
Thus beside /sot yos 'happiness and welfare' also appears iam-yos (i. 34*); and analogously the indeclinable form or
stem of a word takes the place of the case^ Sometimes compounds are
formed by the coalescence of inflected words occurring side by side in a
sentence. Thus visvaha (TS.) 'all days' beside aha visva (RV.) has become
visvsha 'daily' with a single accent.
Occasionally, when two compounds
have the same final member, the latter is used only once, as mitrotd'^
medhyatithim (i. 36'') for mitratithim utd medhyatithim; pataydn ma7idaydtsakham (i. 4?) for pataydt-sakham mandaydt-sakham. Sometimes one of the
members of a compound governs a case^ outside the compound, as drvato

same words used

in

juxtaposition

in

a sentence;

'raven', while

162'^) 'begging for the flesh of the steed'; in some instances

ganmani gand-patim (11.23') 'troop-leader of troops'. A caseform may agree with the first member of a compound when that member

mamsa-bhiksam

(i.

pleonastically, as

has the form or even only the sense of that case, as rayds-kanw visvdpsnyasya
(vii. 42*) 'desirous of wealth of all forms';
or a case-form may agree with
the second member, while coordinated in sense with the first, as maha-dhane
drbhe (1. 75) 'in great booty (and) in small'.
a. The gender of compounds is, in Copulatives (Dvandvas) and
Determinatives (Tatpurusas) ending in substantives, that of the last member"*;
but collective compounds are regularly neuter 5. Compounds ending in adjectives, possessives, and governing compounds have the gender of the substantives with which they agree or which they represent. The number in Determinatives is that of the last member. In Copulatives of the older types it is
dual or plural according to the total number meant by the combination,
while it is singular (and neuter) in the later type.
Collective compounds
(whether copulatives or possessives) are singular.
Compounds ending in
adjectives, possessives, and governing compounds, have the number of the
substantive with which they agree or which they represent.
.

A.

The

First

Member

of

Compounds.

242. Its form.

The first member of nominal compounds may consist
of nouns (including numerals and pronouns) or indeclinables suitable for qualifying nouns. Exceptionally an inflected form appears in this position qualifying
the second member in dependent determinatives and possessives.
This is
mainly due to words frequently in juxtaposition becoming permanently joined;
thus beside the two independent y^oxAs, jas pdtih (vii. 38") 'lord of the family'
1 Thus
for visnoh krdma- (AV. TS.) 'step
of Visnu' there appears in a B. passage of
the TS. (v. 2.1^) the compound /j-/5?-aza-.
2 The Pada text reads miira utd.

This seems to be almost restricted to

genitive in the Samhitas, but many
examples of other cases (ace, inst., dat.,
abl.) occur in the later language.
4 In a few Dvandvas the gender of the
3

the

member prevails (265, notes I and 2);

and a few Determinatives change the gender
first

of the final member, as paim-sala- (VS.) n.

{iala-) 'shed for the wives (of sacrificers)'
and agra-jikvd- (VS.) n. 'tip of the tongue'
{^jihva-\
5

Both Dvandvas

(290).

(266)

and Bahuvrihis

V. Compounds.

The

First

Member of Compounds.

145

we

find the .covrnpound yds-paiim (i. 185^)'. But it partly also arises from a
desire to express the syntactical relation of the words in the compound even

without antecedent juxtaposition; as in the verbal determinatives dhanain-jaydapsu-sdd- 'dwelling in waters'; or in possessives like raydskama- 'desirous of wealth'. Such case-endings show a tendency to encroach
beyond their legitimate sphere; thus the frequency of the ending -as before
-pati-, e. g. vac-ds-pdti- 'lord of speech',
led to its becoming the general
genitive sign before that word, as in rdtha-s-pdti- 'lord of the car' {rdtha-).
Similarly, according to apsu-ksi-t- 'dwelling in the waters' was formed apsu-ji-tbeside ab-ji-t- 'winning waters', where the locative is not appropriate. Ordinarily
the first member appears only in its stem form. As the stem cannot express
number it may mean either the singular or the plural. That it often indicates
the plural is shown by expressions like narAtn or jdnanam nr-patf- 'manguardian of men' or 'people'. The plural sense is also evident in compounds
like devd-krta- 'made by the gods', vird-jata- 'produced by men', nr-pdti'lord of men'.
In personal pronouns and cardinals the number is of course

'winning booty',

inherent in the stem

itself.

expressed in the first member only in as far as

is
feminine words retain their f stem when coordinated in copulatives or dependent on the final member in the sense of a case in determinatives; e. g.
patni-sala- (VS.) 'shed for wives'. The f suffix -a is, however, often shortened
to a^, as in armva-hdn- 'destroying suffering', amiva-sdtana- 'dispelling suffering'
{dmiva-). But when a feminine adjective as first member agrees attributively
with a feminine in the last member, it appears in the masculine stem-form^;
'one by whom a sacrificial fee {ddksina-) has been
e. g. prdyata-dakdna-

The gender

a.

presented' +.

243. If the

weak

in the

stem

cases.

is

Thus

liable to gradation, that

in the

vowel stems

form

-i,

-u,

is

-r,

used which occurs

appear; &.g.pdH-

justa- 'dear to a husband', vasu-vid- 'finding wealth', pitr-yajnd- 'sacrifice to

the manes'. Similarly dyu- (diu-) 'heaven' appears before consonants, as dyu-ksd'dwelling in heaven', dyu-bhakta- 'presented by heaven', but div- before vowels,
The two stems dart^- 'wood'
as div-it- 'going to heaven', div-isti- 'prayer'.
are reduced to dru- and ap-. dru-padd- 'wooden pillar', driitree'; ap-tiir- 'overcoming the waters', ab-jA- 'derived from
the
on
sdd- 'sitting
"waters'. The stem pumams- 'man' appears in the weak form pums- in pumscali' (VS. AV.) and pums-cala- (VS.) 'courtezan' ('running after men').

and Ap-

'water'

a. Stems in -an have -a not only before consonants 5, but also before
vowels^ and y, v" ; e. g. raja-putrd- 'king's son', uksAnna- 'devouring bulls'
{uksdn-), dsmasya- 'whose mouth is a rock' {dsman-), brdkmeddka- 'kindled
with devotion' {brdhman-), brahmaudand- (AV.) 'boiled rice (pdand-) for
Brahmans' {brahman-). Exceptions, however, are nemann-is- 'following the lead',
stallions', vfsan-vasu- 'having great wealth'^.
in -in seem to follow the same analogy, dropping the -n before
thus saci-gu- (only voc.) 'having strong cattle' and saci-pujana-

vrsan-ahd- 'drawn by
b.

Stems

consonants;

(only voc.) 'worshipping the strong'

9.

The compounding of such forms probably as metre' zxiAjagac-chandas- (AV. VS.) 'having
first members doubtless
often started from vocatives like sahasas putra JagatI as metre', the
represent neuter names of the metres.
treated as a unit in regard to accent.
5 As in rSja-bhis etc.
2
This, however, seems to be due to
6 Unlike rdj-n-e etc.
metrical influence.
1

An

exception in urvy-uti- 'giving wide

f. stem urvt- appears instead

where the
of the m. uru-.
aid',

In

irhdc-chandas- (AV.)

Indo-arisohe Philologie.

I. 4.

'having

BrhatI

-an as in rdjan-ya-, udan-vant-.

dsann-isu- 'having arrows in his
mouth' the first member is a locative.
9 Cp. Wackernagel 2', p. 54 /3, note.
7

Not

In

10

146

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

Vedic Grammar.

4.

Occasionally the weak grade stem used as first member does

c.
not occur as an independent word; thus ksd-pavant- and ksa-pivant- 'earthprotector' from ksdm- 'earth'; jnu-bddh- 'bending the knee' from jAnu- 'knee';
man-dhatf- 'devout man' from mdn-as- 'mind' (through *manz-), sdt-pati- 'lord
of the abode', probably from sdd-as- 'abode' (through *sats-).
204. When in the inflexion of a word two or more collateral stems
(not differing in gradation only) are used, the one which appears in weak
cases is mostly employed as first member in compounds,
i. Even though
the stem as-ya- 'mouth' is inflected throughout, the alternative stems of weak
cases as- and asan- are preferred: d-daghnd- 'reaching to the mouth', Ssdnn'having arrows in his mouth'.

tsu-'^

2.

uddn-^

'water' is preferred to z^a'a-zJa-

uda-grabhd- m. 'holding water', uda-pa- (AV.) 'purified by water', uda-meghd'water-shower'; uda-kd- appears only in uddkattnan-'- (AV.) 'having water for
its chief substance'.
3. Of the three stems pdnthan-, path'i-, pdth-, only the

middle one, which appears before consonant endings,

making', pathi-rdksi- 'protecting roads'.
4. sdkan-i

is
is

used: patki-kft-'^a&ipreferred to sdkrt-

(AV.) 'dung-smoke', saka-pindd- (VS.) 'lump of dung',

: saka-dhamasdka-puta- ('purified by dung'), N. of a seer.
5. sTrsdn- is preferred to s'lras'dung'

'head': sirsa-kapald- (AV.) 'skull', hrsa-bhidya- (AV.) n. 'head-splitting', hrsa-

mayd- (AV.) m. 'disease {amaya-) of the head'.

between pdd- and pdda- 'foot', mams-^ and mamsd-

6.

There

fluctuation

is

hfd- and hfdaya'heart' pad-ghosd- 7 (AV.) 'sound of footsteps', but pada-gfkya, ger. 'seizing
by the foot'; mams-pdcana- 'used for cooking flesh', but mamsa-bhiksd'begging for flesh', hrd-rogd- 'heart-disease', but hrdaya-vidh- 'wounding the
'flesh',

heart'*

245. Alternative adjective stems sometimes appear in the first member

Thus in the RV. mahi- interchanges with mahs-'^ 'great' in
of compounds.
Karmadharayas and Bahuvrihis, as mdhi-ksatra 'owning great sway', but mahafew stems in -z appear
dhand- 'great booty', mahd-manas- 'great-minded''".
instead of or interchanging with others in -ra: rji- in rji-pyd- and the
Proper Names rji-svan-^'^ beside r/>a- 'quick' mrjrdsva- ('having quick horses'),
N. of a man; *dabhi- in dabhiti- (for *dabhi-iti-) 'injurer', beside dabhrd'smair in dabhrd-cetas- 'of little wit'; sviti- in svity-dnc-''^ 'bright', beside svitrd-

(AV.) 'white'; saci- in saci-vid- 'belonging together', beside d-sk-ra-'^^ 'united';

perhaps also -kravi- for *kruvi- in d-kravi-hasta- 'not having bloody hands',
beside kru-rd-'"- (AV.) 'bloody'.
a. A few adjective stems in -i used as first member neither occur as uncompounded
nor have corresponding adjective stems in -ra: iuvi-jatd- 'mightily born',
tuvi-griva- 'strong-necked', luvy-ojas- 'very strong'; gabhi-sdk (AV.) 'deep dov?n'.
adjectives

See above

Inst. sing, iida, pi. udd-bhis.

Nom. n

With
NAGEL 21,
4

p.

145, note

8.

ace. udakdm.
irregular accent;
p. 56, note.

cp.

stems

Wacker-

Inst, sdka-bhis (TS.),

the

dsfj-

other hand,

and

asdji- 'blood',

faced'.

nom.

ace. sdkrt.
6 Beside vand- 'wood' (which is fully inflected and appears in vand-dhiti- 'layer of
5

On

of the alternative
only the nom.
ace. form is used; e. g. asrk-pavan- (AV.)
'drinking blood', dsrh-mukha- (AV.) 'bloody8

1
2

mahd- being the m., mahi- the n. nom.

beside the weak dat. mah-i etc.
10 The AV. has the stem mahdt- in the

ace. stem,

stem van- (gen. van-am, loc. Karmadharaya mahat-kdndd-, 'great section'.

11 Perhaps also in ^jlti- (= rji-iti-), cp.
perhaps used in vdni-saga- 'bull',
van-dhiira- 'car-seat', and van-dd- 'devouring Wackernagel^ 21, p. 59.

wood'),
vam-su)

the

is

wood' (?).
7

demon,
I,

man or
Wackernagel

Perhaps in pdd-grbhi-, N. of a
148

if
a.

fad-

= pad-,

cp.

12 Cp. siti-pad- 'white-footed',

siii-fj's/ha'white-backed'.
13 From sac- 'be attached' with syncope.

Cp.

Wackernagel

21,

p. 59.

V. Compounds.

The

First

Member of Compounds.

246. Extension of the stem sometimes takes place in the

The commonest addition is -a owing to the frequency of that

147
first

member.

ending: dura-dabhnd- (AV.) 'eluding doors', asvin-a-krta- (VS.) 'done by the Asvins';
visaujas-^ (VS.) 'ruling the people'; sad-a-rcd-' {AN.) 'collection of six
verses'.
An a-stem becomes one in -as in yaksmo-dha- (AV.) 'seat of a disease' {ydkstna-).
An extension with -d appears in satdd-vasu-^ 'having a hundred {satd-)

and in dn-atid-bhuta-^ 'unsurpassed'.

Shortening of the stem sometimes

treasures',

a.

of a final

takes place by the dropping

or j (preceded by a) or of the vowel -a; thus prsodard- (TS.

may also be an example, but it is more probably a modification of saspinjara- (VS. xvi. 17) by haplology for *saspa-pinjara-.
247. Adverbs often occur as first member of compounds. In several
instances a nominal stem in -a represents an adverbial case (ace, inst., abl.,
loc.) formed from that stem;
thus nitya-vatsa- 'having a calf continually'
(niiyani); satya-ydj- 'sacrificing truly' {satydm), samantd-siti-bahu- (VS.) 'whose
forefeet are white all round' (samantdm); sana-ja- 'born of old' (= sand or
sandt); upakd-caksas- 'visible from near at hand' (/a/J/ 'near'). Occasionally

a nominal stem which has no separate existence is abstracted from the adverb;
thus ard-manas- 'ready-minded' (from dram 'ready'), ard-mati- 'suitable prayer',

abhyardha-ydjvan- 'offering apart' (abhyardhds). A cardinal is sometimes

used instead of its adverb: try-arusa- 'reddish in three places' {tri-s),
dvi-jd- (AV.) 'bom twice' {dvi-s).
248. The case-ending is also preserved in several instances; thus
arain-kft- 'preparing',
sakam-uks- 'sprinkling together', sakam-yuj- 'joined
together' {sakdm), sayam-bhavd- (AV.) 'becoming evening'; pasca-dosd- (VS.)
'late
evening'.
Adverbs that are neither case-forms nor look like them
regularly remain unchanged; thus aksnayd-druh-^ 'injuring wrongly'; ittha-dhi'truly devout'; ida-vatsard- (VS. AV.) 'the present year', a particular kind of
year; pt'inar-nava- 'renewing itself, punar-bha- 'arising again'; visvdto-dhithus

'observing in

all directions',

in various directions'.

visu-rUpa- 'coloured variously' {visu-), visu-vft- 'rolling

nasal

is

added

in

maksu-m-gamd- 'approaching

quickly'

(maksu).
first member of a compound.
character they may qualify ordinary
adjectives or substantives like adverbs; thus dti-krsna- (VS.) 'excessively
dark', vi-mahi- 'very ^esX' ; prd-napai- 'great grandson', vi-vac- 'opposing shout';
and in Bahuvrihis: pra-srhgd- (VS.) 'having prominent horns', vy-amsa- 'having

249. Prepositions frequently occur as the

Owing

I.

to their originally adverbial

shoulders wide apart'.

2.

Owing

to their constant connexion with verbs they are very common

e.g. I'lpa-stu-t- and upa-stuti- 'invocation'; furo-hita-

before verbal nouns;

'domestic

priest'.

Owing to their frequent connexion with cases, they also appear in a

governing sense; e. g. ddhi-gart-ya- 'being on the car-seat', anu-pathd3.

'following the path'^

to the analogy of gav-isd5 According
(AV. VS.) satydujas'desiring cows'.
of vid-ojas-.
6 aksna-yavan- 'going across' stands by
2 Like paiicarcdpahca-fca.
Cp. WaCKER3 Influenced by the analogy ol paiicasdd- haplology for * akmayd-yavan-.
NAGEL 2', p. 128 d.
'50' etc., and viddd-vasu-, etc.
ati4 Due to a confusion of *ati-bhutabhuta- 'surpassed' and ddbhuta- 'marvellous'.
1

(=

For

visa-ojas-

like

saiya-ojas-^ instead

10*

148

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

member sometimes appear

in a shortened form ; thusM;from the crowd') 'isolated', 'wretched',

and in o-fasd- 'top-knot' ('that which is tied down', from pas- 'fasten'). On the other
hand, dnu several times appears lengthened to anu-: thus an-anu-krtyd- 'inimitable',
a. Prepositions as first
abhi^ in bhi-sdj-^: 'healer'; o-

= ava

in o-gand- ('away

an-anu-da- 'not giving way', dn-anu-disla- 'unsolicited', dn-anu-bhiiti- 'disobedient', dnu-sdk

'in constant succession'.

The preposition sdm is of very common occur250. Sam and sa-.

rence as first member. This is its form invariably before vowels, and
when accented originally always before consonants. Its unaccented form
sa- (^ s?n-) should phonetically always appear before consonants.
But the
proper use of sdm- and w- before consonants has begun to be confused.
a. In determinatives (i) when the final member is a verbal noun samalways appears before a vowel, as sam-ankd- (AV.) 'hook' (from aiic- 'bend'),
sam-idh- 'fuel'; and sdm- if accented predominates 3 before consonants, being
phonetic; e. g. sdm-gati- f. 'coming together', sdm-dhatr- 'one who puts
together', sdm-prkta- 'mixed',
sd-, however, also occurs in sd-gdhi- (VS. MS.)
f.
'eating together', sd-cyuti- (MS. 11. 7'^) 'falling together', sd-pTti- (VS. MS.)
'drinking together', sd-huti-

f.

'joint invocation'.

i.

preserved before accented verbal

simple root with or without -t, or with the suffixes
(2.)

sa-

is

'thinking',

sa-cit-

sa-badh- (TS.

iii.

2.

nouns formed from

the

-ana, -van, -in;

thus

-a,

i24) 'oppressed', sa-yuj- 'united', sa-vfdh-

iv. 3. 12^),
a kind of metre, sa-sydd'streaming together''*; sa-ksi-t- 'dwelling together', sa-sru-t- 'streaming's; sa-gm-d(VS.) 'coming to terms', sa-Josa- 'unanimous', sa-mddana- 'conflict'*; sa-yi-van-

'increasing

together',

'going along with',

sa-sh'ibh-

(TS.

sa-yug-van- 'united with',

sa-sthd-van- 'standing together',

(AV.) 'dwelling together'^.

(3.) Before ordinary adjectives sam- appears in sdm-vasu- 'fellow-dweller',
sdm-misla- 'commingling', sdm-priya- (VS.) 'loving one another', and even
when unaccented before ordinary substantives in sam-vatsard- 'year', samgramd- (AV.) 'assembly', but sa-pdtnl- 'co-wife'.
b. In Bahuvrihis when the meaning is (i.) 'together' (as in the verbal
use of the preposition) sam- appears, as sdm-hanu- (AV.) 'striking the jaws
together', sam-gavd- m. '(time when the) cows (are driven) together', and (as
usual before vowels) sam-udrd- m. 'sea'. But when the meaning is (2) 'united
with', 'accompanied by' what is expressed by the final member, sa- is almost
sa-ji-t-van- 'victorious'; sa-vas-in-

exclusively used (and nearly always even accented) ^, as sd-ceias- 'accompanied

by

jaw- occurs here only in jaw-j-a/^^zjra- 'accompanied

'accompanied by her husband's. In
this sense sam- still appears before vowels in sdm-agra- and sam-agrd- (AV.)
('including the top'), 'complete', sdm-anga- (AN .) 'accompanied by all limbs'^",
'complete', sdm-asir- 'accompanied by mixture', 'mixed'; but even here saonce in the RV. takes the place of sam- in the compound sasana- (x. pot)
intelligence', 'rational';

by a

thousand',

The

is lost

initial a-

and

of

in sdm-patni- (AV.)

some

other prepositions

in the later language

But

also

sam-gamd- 'coming together',

sam-cdrana- 'suitable for walking on'.

dhiddhi and vadva are post-Vedic,
7 With verbal
nouns otherwise formed,
2 See Wackernagel 21, p. 72 e, and cp.
as with -ira or -na only sam- occurs, as
Brugmann, KZ. 25, 214, note.
sani-hotrd- 'joint sacrifice', sam-prahid- 'inter3 sam- occurs more than three times as rogation'.
often as sa- before consonants, doubtless
8 With the usual Bahuvrlhi accent on the
owing to the parallel use of sam- with first member.
verbs.
9 In order to distinguish this sense from
4 But also sam-gir- 'assenting', sam-ydt- that of sa-pdim- *co-wife'.
10 Cp. also the adv. sam-antd-m
'contiguous'.
(AV.) 'in5 But also sain-ji-t- 'conqueror', sam-hd-t- cluding the ends', 'completely'.

'layer'.

//-

j&'(SB.);

v. Compounds.
'provided
Samhitasj

with

The

food' {ds'ana-),

First

'eating',

Member of Compounds.

149

and becomes common

in the later

sAnga- (AV.) 'accompanied by the limbs' {diiga-), sdntardesa(AV.)_ 'accompanied by the intermediate quarters' {antar-desd-).
When the
meaning is (3.) 'in common', 'same', 'identical' ' sa- ^ is very common before
consonants, zs, sd-keta- 'having the same intention', sd-laksman- 'having the

same

e. g.

while sam- appears only in satn-sUvari- 'having a calf

sdm-manas- {KSf.) 'being of the same mind', unanimous', sdmmatr- 'having the same mother'. In this sense sam- alone appears (as usual)
before vowels: sdm-anta- 'contiguous' ('having the same boundary'), sdm-okascharacteristics';

in^common',

common

'having a

abode', 'living together'.

251. Particles,

which

most part have no independent existence,

of compounds.
1.
The negative particle, the form of which in the sentence is na,
almost invariably appears in composition as a- J before consonants, and invariably as an- before vowels.
It completely reverses the meaning of the
frequently appear as

final

member;
As

first

for the

member

thus mitrd- 'friend',

'curse'+.

participles,

a-mitra- 'enemy',

infinitives,

and

gerunds

sasti- 'praise',

are

d-sasti-

nominal

forms,
with the privative particle: thus d-bibhyat- 'not
fearing', d-iudhya-mana- 'not waking', d-dasyant- (AV.) 'not about to give',
d-vidvams- 'not knowing' 5. The syntactical form of the particle is very rare
na-murd- (AV.) 'non-dying' (?) *. Perhaps also in nd-pat- 'grandson', if it

they

may be compounded

meant

originally

'un-protected' ?.

RV. very seldom used independently^,

which occurs as a prefix only, appear as first member
in determinatives and possessives;
e. g. su-kdra- 'easy to be done',
su-krta2. su-

and dus-

'weir, 'very', except in the

'ill',

'well-done',

'hardly',

sti-dd-

'giving willingly',

su-vasand-

coloured', sv-dsva- 'having excellent horses';

'fair raiment', su-varnd- 'fairdu-das- (AV.) 'not-worshipping',

dur-vdsas- Tiaving bad clothing',

dus-cyavand- 'difficult to be felled',

dur-ska {KV.) 'wail!' is formed as an antithesis to sv-dha 'hail!'.
3. There are a few prefixes beginning with k- which seem to be etymologically connected with the interrogative, and express depreciation, badness, or difficulty: ^tf-^in ^-^ri- 'wandering about', /^z<!-a^/4z'- (A V.) 'having
'irrehgious',

'ill-clad';

ku-namnamd- 'hard to bend', ku-yava- (VS.) 'bringing bad

had- in kat-payd- 'swelling horribly'; kim- in kim-Hld- (VS. TS. MS.)
(land) 'having small stones', kim-purusd-, a kind of mythical being ('somewhat like a man'); a collateral form kava- perhaps in kavari- 'stingy', kava.sakhd- 'selfish' ".
4. The particles -id and -cid make their way into the first member of
compounds in the company of pronominal words to which they may he
diseased

harvest'

nails',

';

1 samana- is also used in this sense:

6 na-pinisa-ka- 'neuter' also occurs in MS.
as
samana-bandhu- 'having the same relatives'. and SB.
2 sa- has the sense of 'one' in sahna- (AV.)
7 See LeumANN, Festgruss an Bohtlingk,
'lasting one day', sa-kft 'once', sa-divas and p. 77 f. For a few other doubtful compounds
with na- see Wackernagel 2', p. 78, note.
sa-dyas 'on one and the same day'.
8 sii occurs
as an independent particle
3 This
is the low-grade form (= ?2-) of
about 250 times (but never at the beginning
na-,
4 It frequently reverses the pregnant sense of a sentence) in the RV., rarely in the
of the final member, as vi-sastf- '(good) later Samhitas only 14 times in AV.
9 Often in adverbs such as ku-ias 'whence',
dissector', a-viiasif- 'bad dissector'.
5 See Knauee, Ueber die betonung der ku-tra 'where'.
10 On a few doubtful compounds with ku-,
composita mit a privativum im Sanskrit, KZ.
68; examples from the later Sam- see Wackernagel 2', p. 83, note.
27, I
11 Also in kdva-tiryahc- (TS.) 'directed
Delbruck, Altindische Syntax
in
hitas
p. 540 f., Syntaktische Forschungen 2, p. 530 f. somewhat across'.
:

15

I.

Allgkmeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

appended; thus tad-id-artha- 'directed to that particular

'effecting all

manner of

object';

ka-cit-kard-

things'; ku-cid-arthin- 'striving to get anywhere',

kuha-

cid-vid- 'wherever being'.

few interjectional or onomatopoetic words are compounded

5.
'sound', 'utterance', or -kartr- 'maker', to
with -kara- and -krti- 'making'
express the actual phonetic sound of those words: thus vasat-kard- (AV. VS.)

'the interjection vasaf,

the sound hifi ,

utters

svadhd-kard- 'pronouncing (the benediction) sva-dha',

with the call svaha', hiii-kartf- (TS.) 'one who
hih-kard- (VS.) 'the sound hifi
In has-kartf- 'enli-

'consecration

svaha-ki'ti-

has-kard- 'laughter', hds-krti- 'loud merriment', the first member

represents either an interjection connected with the verb has- 'laugh', or a
reduced form of *hasas- 'laughter' (like sdt-pati- for sddas-pati- through
vener',

*sdts-pati-).

B.

The Last Member

of

Compounds.

form. Practically

all nouns may appear in this position. But

252. Its
verbal nouns, especially participles, if used in their primary sense, are
found exclusively after indeclinables which are capable of being combined
with the corresponding verbs.
Some stems also occur as final members
though not used independently; such are verbal nouns formed from the
simple root with or without an added determinative -t; also derivatives like
'.
-jatiina- (AV.) 'belonging to the people {j'dna-) of
a. Change of ending.
When the gender of the final member is
changed, the -a of feminine words, even though radical, becomes -a in
masculine or neuter compounds; thus priyosriyd- 'fond of cows' {usriya-);
an-avasd- 'restless' (from ava-sS- 'rest'), a-sraddhd- 'unbelieving' (from srad-dhd'belief'), rtd-jya- 'well-strung' {iroisijyd- 'bowstring').
Even -?' in a few instances
becomes -a; thus ati-ratrd- 'performed overnight' and aho-ratrd- 'day and
night' (rdirf-);
api-sarvari 'early in the morning' and ati-sarvare or atisarvaresu (AV.) 'late at night' {sdrvarT-).
On the other hand m. and n. stems in -a regularly end in -a in the
feminine, as cittd-garbha- 'having evident offspring' {gdrbha- m.); and pdti'husband' in f. possessives substitutes -patm-; thus ika-patni- (AV.) 'having a
single husband', dasd-patnt- 'having demons as lords', sa-pdtrii- 'having one
husband in common', sdm-patni- (AV.) and sahd-patm- (AV.) 'having her
husband with her', su-pdtni- 'having a good husband'; also in the determinative vird-patni- 'wife of a hero'.
When in the inflexion of a word alternative
253. Alternative stems.
stems are used, only one of these, and as a rule the older one, appears as
final member of possessive compounds;
thus ddnt- 'tooth' (not ddnta-) in
satd-dant- (AV.) 'hundred-toothed', si'ici-dant- 'bright-toothed'; pad- 'foot' (not
pdda-)
a-pdd- 'footless', uttand-pad- 'whose feet are extended', ika-pad- ' 'onefooted'; nds- 'nose' (not ndsa-) in fju-nas-^ 'straight-nosed', N. of a man^;
adhan- 'udder' (not ftdhar-) in an-udhdn-'* 'udderless', rapidd-udhan- 'having
a distended udder', f. d-cchidrodhn-i- 'having an intact udder'; dhdnvan- 'bow'
(not dkdnus-) in abald-dhanvan- (AV.) 'having a weak bow', dvatata-dhanvan(VS.) 'having an unstrung bow', kdprd-dhanvan- 'having a swift bow', satd-

many

The AV., however, has

'

the nom. sing.

eka'pada-h,
*
According to Bloomfield also in
rujanas, for rujana-nas 'broken-nosed'; see
_

p. 59, note

According

to

Wackernagel 2!, p. 92(top),

a-nasikd- occurs in TS. (vil. 5. 121.

I.

Cp.

Wackernagel 2S

p. 93, note.

The Last Member of Compounds.

V. Compounds.

dhanvan- (VS.) 'having a hundred bows''; strsdn- 'head' (not

151

siras-) in a-sirsdn-

head of a Ruru
hfd- 'heart' (not hfdaya-) in its long-grade form -hard- in durMrd- (AV.) 'ill-disposed' and su-h&rd- 'good-hearted'.
a. Sometimes an alternative stem is used which has not been preserved
as an independent word; thus -jnu- 'knee' (weak form oi jdnu-) in asitd-jiiu(AV.) 'dark-kneed', VaV- 'firm-kneed'*; an q\A ^\.tva. -medhas- xa. su-medhds'wise' and puru-midhas- (SV.) 'wise' beside the regular compounds in -medha-

'headless', tri-itrsdn- 'three-headed'

antelope'

^,

f.

rurii-sirsn-T- 'having the

3;

(from medha- 'wisdom') such as puru-midha- 'having much wisdom'; -tvacas-^

(AV. VS.) 'having a skin bright as the sun' and hiranyatvacas- (AV.) 'having a golden skin', beside tvac- in sUrya-tvac- and hiranya-tvac-.
Some four stems appear in certain forms
254. Transfer stems.
changed to stems in -as from a misunderstanding of the nom. -s in -as (as
thus from profa- 'offspring', d-prajas- (AV.) 'having no offin su-prajd-s);
'having good offspring', ida-prajas-^ (MS. i. 5 J)
su-prajds-^
and
spring',
'descendant of Ida'; from ksa- 'dwell', divd-ksas- 'living in heaven'; from
da- 'give', dravino-dds- 'bestowing wealth'; from dha- 'put', vayo-dhds- (AV.
On the
VS.) 'bestowing strength' and uarco-dhds- (AV.) 'bestowing vigour'.
other hand, by the loss of final -J or -i a few consonant stems are transformed to a-stems; thus beside dn-agas- 'guiltless' appears dn-aga-, and beside
puru-ddmsas- 'abounding in wondrous deeds', puru-ddmsa-; urv-asthmd- (VS.)*,
n. du. 'thigh and knee', beside asthi-vdnt- m. du. 'knees ('bony'); ubhayd-da-^
'skin' in sUrya-tvacas-

(jaws)', beside ubhayd-dat-.

a. i. The low grade
255. Vowel gradation in final member.
vowel of the roots da- 'give' and da- 'cut' disappears when the past participles *dita- 'given' ' and dita- 'cut' and the action noun "^diti- 'giving' become
unaccented final members in a compound: thus dva-tta- (y?,.) 'cut off', devd-tta-

(AV.) 'having teeth in both

'given

by the

gods', vy-d-tfa-

(AV. VS.) 'opened', /aVr-Z/a- (VS.) 'given up'",

maghd-ttid-prati-tta- (AV.) 'not given back'; bhdga-tti- 'gift of fortune',

Unreduced forms, how'giving of presents', vdsu-tti- 'granting of wealth'".
in havyd-datiever, occur in tvd-data- and tvd-datta- 'given by thee' and
'sacrificial gift"^.

The vowels T and u in

a few instances reduced to
2.

in

the radical syllable of the final member is

and u; thus try-udhdn- 'having three udders'
mind' {ju- 'impel'), su-sird- 'having a good

{fldhan-\ dhi-ju- 'inspiring the

{su-ti- TB.), a-hutt- mchannel', 'hollow' (sira- 'stream'), su-suii- 'easy birth'
-i is reduced
Derivative
etc.).
invocation',
'joint
sd-hutivocation' (otherwise
(tdvh-i^
power'
unabated
'having
d-ni-bhrsta-tavidin
-i
to
1 The determinative indra-dhanus- 'Indra's
bow', occurs in the AV.
2 The AV. however has /;>-/,4-A>(ZJ- 'broad-

asthan- (beside asthi-, AV.) occur

both an-as(Mn- and an-astha- 'boneless'.
(VS.)
4 Other reduced stems are sa-gdhi'nest' (niArysad-).
'joint meal' f:Mghas-), nUa'united
upa-bd-i- 'noise' {upa^\pad-) a-sk-ra'best part of
([/sac-); perhaps pan-msd-

From

(dmia5

'part').

-t

of the

weak

the

-t

of the

weak

-dat-.

10 This phonetic form has otherwise been

ousted by the anomalous participle dat-tdmade from the weak present stem dad:

participle prd-tla- 'given up' also

II. 2. 8* (B).
12 pra-tti- 'gift' also occurs in TS. v. 4. 72
shares'
(B) and nir-dva-tti 'distribution of
11

The

occurs in TS.

Under the influence of this new stem

formed su-prajas-tva- 'possession of good

offspring' (for *su-praja-tva-).

_
with the a
7 In K. ida-prajas- (IS. 3, 463)

of idd- unshortened.

the

a}thT-vdt-.

Formed by dropping

.
,AI7^ in K.
Also in the derivative ivacas-ya- (AV.j

'being in the skin'.

is

Formed by dropping

stem

headed'.
3

stem

,.

of soman- 'chant is perhaps

reduced to ava.fk-sama-(^'i>i, /-^-sama- (TS.),
and /-d-sama-; cp. Wackernagel 2', 43 f.,
13

note.

The a

152

I.

The

3.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

of go- 'cow'

is

reduced

4.

Vedic Grammar.

to -u in ptisti-gu- 'rearing cows', N. of

a man, and su-gu- 'having fine cows'. The -ai of rdi- 'wealth', is reduced to
-i in brhdd-ri-'^ 'having abundant wealth'; perhaps also in rdhdd-ri-'^, N. of
a man.

and -u of the first member combine with the low grade

of np- 'water' in the last member to i and , in dvTp-d-^
stream', anup-d- 'pond'
{dvi-ap-), pratip-d-m 'against' {prati-) 'the
Final

4.

form

of

'island'

-/'

(atiu-ap-^.

the other hand, radical o in several instances appears lengthened

This occurs in several possessive compounds oi jdni- 'wife': bhadrajani- 'having a beautiful wife' (only voc), yuva-fatti- 'having a young wife',
and with shifted accent dvi-jdnivittd-jani- 'having found a wife', 'married',
'having two wives' and a-jani- (AV.) 'having no wife'. A similar lengthening
appears in prthu-jaghana- (only voc. f.) 'broad-hipped'; sahd-janusa- 'with
offspring' (Jamis-); 7ii-padd- 'low ground' (padd-); tvdt-pitaras (TS. I. 5. 10^),

On

b.

to a+.

pi. 'having thee as father'; su-vdcas- 'having good speech', 'very eloquent',
sd-vacas-^ (AV.) 'employing similar speech', vi-vacas- (AV.) 'speaking in various
ways' {vdcas-), vihd-s'arada- (AV.) 'occurring every autumn' {sardd-) 'annual',
satd-iarada- 'lasting a hundred autumns'*.
Adjective compounds not infrequently add
256. Adjectival suffixes.

N.

certain suffixes to

are -ka^
1.

in the

-i,

The
RV.

mark

-ya, -a,

more

their adjectival character

clearly.

These

suffixes

-in.

suffix -ka'' is thus

tri-kadru-ka- (only

used in only two somewhat obscure compounds

pi.),

designation

of certain

soma

vessels

and try-amia-ka- 'having three mothers' {amba voc); in the AV.

occur vt-manyu-ka- 'free from anger' and sahd-kanthi-ka- f. 'with the throat'

{kadrii-)

(kanthd-, B.)^.
2. In the final member of a few Bahuvrihis, the suffix -/ sometimes
takes the place of -a; thus prdty-ardhi- 'to whom the half (drdha-) belongs';
dnjana-gandh-i- 'having a smell {gandhd-) of ointment', dhumd-gandhi- 'smelling
of smoke', su-gdndki- or su-gandhi 'sweet-smelUng' krstd-rad/ii- {AN .) 'attaining
success [radha-) in agriculture'.
3. The suffix -ya is frequently added in Bahuvrihis; thus anyodar-ya'born from another womb' {uddra-), ddsa-mas-ya-^ 'ten months old', dirgha;

jihv-ya- 'long-tongued' ', mddhu-hast-ya- 'honey-handed', mayi2ra-sep-ya-^-^&z.coc!&tailed' ", visvd-jan-ya- 'belonging to all men', visvd-dev-ya- 'relating to all gods',
vihang-ya- (AV.) 'being in all Hmbs', sd-garbh-ya- (VS.) 'born from the same

In

the

dative brhddraye;

cp.

BB.

25,

adjectives,

as

anta-ka- 'ending'

from anta-

'end'.

250.

In

the

anomalous

gen. sing,

rdhad-

rayas.

In the YV. several examples occur;

WackIernagel 21, p. 102, quotes from the
8

3 Also nif-a- 'low-lying' [ni-ap- 'into which

TS. a-karnd-ka- 'earless', a-dantd-ka- 'toothan-aksi-ka- 'eyeless', a-fadd-ka- 'footless',
the water flows down') in K.
4 For a. phonetic explanation of this phe- less', an-asihi-ka- 'boneless', a-tvdk-ka- 'skinnomenon see Wackernagei, 2', 43 (p. 100); less', sdsTr-ka- 'accompanied by a blessing',
an-aifr-ka- 'lacking a blessing' ; from the MS.
and cp. I, 68.
a various reading sit-vacasas a-cchandds-ka-'ratirtXtss,', an-dstha-ka- 'bone5 There is
in AV. VII. 122, on which see Whitney's less'.
san-niasya- 'six months old', and
note.
9 Also
6 On vi-hayas- 'of extensive power', sdrva- safia-masya- 'seven months old' in K.
'o Also in TS. some compounds formed
hayas- (AV.) 'having all vigour', su-rama'delighting',
su-yama- 'guiding well', see with -deva-tya- 'having
for a deity' (devdtd-);
Wackernagel 2', p. 10 1 (middle).
nana-vis-yd- (MS.) 'consisting of various
7 This suffix, which is never accented, is villages'.

probably

identical

with

that

which forms

II

Also vi-Hsn-ya- (K.)

'tailless'.

The Last Member of Compounds.

V. Compounds.

womb', sa-dhan-ya- 'accompanied by

gifts',

153

sd-yuth-ya- (VS.) 'belonging to the

same herd', su-Mst-ya- 'fair-handed' (beside su-Msta-), hiranya-kes-ya- 'goldenmaned' (beside Mranya-keia-') '.
The suffix -ya is also common in governing compounds with prepositions as first member; thus ddhi-gart-ya- 'being on the car-seat', aniakparsav-yd- (VS.) and antah-parsv-yd- (VS.) 'being between the ribs', dnvantr-ya- (AV.) 'being in the entrails',

upa-trn-ya- (AV.)

'being

in

the

api-kaks-ya- 'situated near the arm-pit',

upa-mas-ya- (AV.) 'occurring every

grass',

month', pdri-rath-ya- (AV.)^ 'being around the car', n. part

also appears in the adverbially used governing compounds
'near the clouds' and ud-ap-ya-m (AV.) 'upstream'.
4. The final member of Bahuvrihis is very frequently
the suffix -a. In the RV. there are at least fifteen such stems;

It
of the car.
abhi-nabh-yd-m

extended by

thus aks- 'eye'

in aw-fl^j-a'-'eyeless', afl%_y-ffl/5.j-a- 'eye-witness', catur-aks-d- 'four-eyed', bhury-aks-d'many-eyed', sahasraks-d- 'thousand-eyed', hiranyaks-d- 'golden-eyed', aktaks-a-

(AV.) 'whose

eyes

are

anointed',

dn-aktaks-a-^ (AV.) 'whose

dhumaksd- (AY.) 'smoke-eyed', paryastaks-d- (AV.)

anointed',

eyes

are not

'with eyes cast

about', sanisrasaks-d- (AV.) 'having constantly falling eyes', hary-aks-d- (VS.)

'yellow-eyed'; *astk-^ 'bone' in an-asth-d- 'boneless' beside an-asthdn-; *udar'water' in an-udr-d- 'waterless'; go- 'cow' in su-gdv-a- 'having fine cows', sam-

gav-d- 'time

when cows come

together',

and

in atithi-gv-d-, a

name,

ita-gv-a-

'variegated', ddsa-gva-, N. of a mythical group, ndva-gv-a-^, N. of a mythical

group; janus- in sahd-janus-a- 'with offspring'; div- 'heaven' in brhdd-div-aand brhad-div-d-, N. of a seer, su-div-d- (AV.) 'bright day'; dur- 'door' in

a hundred doors'; dhur- 'yoke' in su-dhur-a- 'going

yoke' (beside su-dkur-), sd-dhur-a- (AV.) 'harnessed to the
same yoke'; nas- 'nose' in uru-nas-d- 'broad-nosed', pavT-nas-d- (AV.) 'having
a nose like a spear-head', vardhri-nas-d- (VS.) 'rhinoceros'; mrdh- in vimrdk-d-^ {KST.) 'warding off foes' (beside vi-mfdh-, VS.); rdi- 'wealth' in
d-ray-a- 'not liberal'; vdstu- 'dwelling' in ndva-vastv-a- 'having nine abodes';
satd-dur-a-

'having

under the

well

sardd- 'autumn' in satd-sarad-a- 'lasting

dvip-d-

a hundred autumns';

ap- 'water' in

'island'''.

In the later Sarnhitas several other final members extended with -a occur:
'day' in sahii-d- {KSi:) 'lasting a day'; re- 'verse' in eka-rc-d- (AV.)
of good
'consisting of one verse'; kmm- 'earth' in su-ksm-d- (VS.) 'consisting
as leader': pathearth'; netf- 'leader' in agni-netr-a- (VS. TS.)^ 'having Agni

dhan-

'road', in vi-path-d- (AV.),

'

in

'foot'

a kind of chariot

d-bd-a- (VS.) 'year';

old'; sam-drs- 'aspect' in

('fit

*vatas- 'year' in

for

untrodden

tri-vats-d-

(VS.)

paths');

pdd-

'three

years

mddhu-samdrs-a- (AV.) 'sweet-looking'.

The final member is also sometimes extended with -a after a

governing preposition; thus dnu-patk-a- 'going along the road', dntas-path-aa.

road', anup-d- 'tank' ('lying along the water'), upanas-d- 'being

paro-ks-a- (AV.) 'away from the eye' {aks-), puro-gav-d{-dnas-\
on the car'
'leader' ('preceding the cows').

'being

on the

See Wackernagel 2', p. 108 (bottom).

See Bloomfield, AJPh. 17, 422 ff.
6 Also the f. vi-mrdh-a- (TS. 11. 4. 21 B).
7 On a few doubtful instances see Wackerhorses'.
nagel
2', p. 109 (bottom).
-ya
is
in
words
tliese
2 Tlie
accent of
8 In TS. I. 8. 71
VS. IX. 35, 36 several
usually the same as it would be without the
other names of deities compounded with
suffix; for a few exceptions, see Wackerneir-a- occur.
NAGEL 21, 47 d (p. 108).
anaktdksa-.
3 The Mss. (AV. xx. 1286) read
'based on horses' is
1
aiva-budh-vaprobably for *dsva-budhn-ya- (from budhnabeside diva- budhna- 'borne by
'bottom')

4
5

154

I.

b.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

similar

4.

Vedic Grammar.

extension with -a occurs in collectives which are allied

to Bahuvrlhis: thus try-ayus-d- (VS.) 'threefold lifetime', dvi-raj-d- (AV.) 'battle

sad-rc-d- 'aggregate of six

sam-udr-d- 'collection of
('accompanied by
lightning'). Akin to these are compounds in which the first member expresses
a part of the last (with change of gender); thus ardha-rc-d- (AV. VS.) m.
'half-stanza', aparahii-d- (AV.) m. 'afternoon', ny-dhn-a- (AV.) 'decline of day',
purvahn-d- 'forenoon', prd-pad-a- 'tip of the foot'. There are further some
neuter determinatives which probably had originally a collective sense; thus,
with change of gender, tri-div-d- 'third heaven', su-div-d- (AV.) 'fine day';
From neuter stems in
d-path-a- (AV.) 'pathlessness', su-pdih-a- 'good path'.
-as,
deuainas-d- (AV.) 'curse of the gods', manusyainas-d- (AV.) 'sin {enas-)
of men'; brahma-varcas-d- (AV. VS.) 'divine power', hasti-varcas-d- (AV.)
'vigour of an elephant', brahmana-varcas-d- (AV.) 'dignity of a Brahman'.
c.
The ending -a frequently takes the place of -' in the final
member of Bahuvrlhis, collectives, and Karmadharayas; thus deva-karmd'doing divine work', visvd-karma- 'performing all work', vird-karma- 'performing manly work', priyd-dhama- 'occupying desirable places', chando-nama(VS.) 'named metre', 'metrical', vi-parva- 'jointless', dvi-vrsd-'^ (AV.) 'having
two bulls', aiiji-sakthd- (VS.) 'having coloured thighs', ut-sakthd- (VS.) 'lifting
up the thighs', lomasd-saktha- (VS.) 'having hairy thighs' 3, rk-samd- 'the Re
verses and the Samans', sad-ahd- (AV.) m. 'period of six days'; bhadrahd(AV.) n. 'auspicious day', eka-vrsd- (AV.) 'only bull', maha-vrsd- (AV.) 'great bull'.
d. The suffix -a takes the place of -/' in kava-sakhd- 'having a niggard
for a friend' {sdkhi-), in mandaydt-sakha- 'gladdening his friend', and in
dasanguld- 'length of ten fingers' {anguli-).
of two kings',

waters'

5.

{*udar-),

'sea',

sa-vidyui-d-

In Bahuvrlhis the

stanzas',

(AV.)

suffix -in is

'thunderstorm'

sometimes pleonastically added; thus

ku-nakh-in- (AV.) 'having bad nails', maha-hast-in- 'having large hands', yasobhag-in- (VS.) 'rich in glory', sa-raih-in- (VS.) 'riding on the same chariot'.
The Indian grammarians divided
257. Classification of Compounds.

compounds

into

three

main

classes according to their syntactical relations:

or those in which the members are coordinated, called

i) copulatives,
dvandva-^ ('couple'); 2) determinatives, or those in which the first member
determines the second, called tat-puriisa- ('his man') 5; 3) those which are
dependent on another word, called bahu-vrihi-^ The latter are usually
regarded as compounds of the determinative class transmuted to adjectives, which
would thus have a secondary character. They are often called 'possessives'
since their meaning can usually be rendered by 'possessing', as bahv-annd'possessing much food'. To these may be added three other groups in order
to treat Vedic compounds exhaustively:
4) governing compounds, or
those in which the first member governs the last in sense; e. g. ksaydd-vira'ruling men'; 5) a certain remnant of irregular combinations which are
best dealt with together; 6) iteratives, or repeated words which are treated
as compounds in the Samhitas inasmuch as they have only one accent and a
special meaning when thus combined; in these the second member is called
amredita- 'repeated' by the Indian grammarians.
.

The word

1 This -a probably started in stems ending

in -man, representing *-mn-a-; see Wacker-

of the TS.

KAGEL

'couples',

2', p.

118

C.

-vrsa- lor -vrsan- occurs in the

other numerals also.

3 For some doubtful examples see

NAGEL

2', p.

H6.

AV.

after

(l.

first

6. 94) in

and

in the

An example

occurs in a. B. passage
the form oi dvandvani

AB.

used as the name of the

class.

Wacker-

'Having much

as the

name

rice',

of the class.

an example used

V. Compounds.

I.

Iteratives.

Copulatives.

I5S

Iteratives.

Delbruck,
Wacker-

COLLITZ, Transactions of the Oriental Congress of Berlin 22, 287 ff.

Vergleichende Syntax, Dritter Theil (1900), p. 141
153: Iterativcomposita.

NAGEL

142148.

2', p.

The repetition of an inflected form with loss of accent in the second

very frequent in the RV. Such repetitions are treated in the Pada
texts as compounds the members being separated by the Avagraha. The word
thus repeated is generally a substantive and iteration is expressed chiefly
in regard to time or distribution in regard to space; e. g. dhar-akar, div^dive, dydvi-dyavi 'every day' ; grhe-grhe, dame-dame, vise-vise 'in every house'
diso-disak (AV.) 'from every quarter'. Substantives are also thus repeated to
express frequency or constant succession in other matters: sdtroh-satroh 'of
every foe'; dnnam-annam (AV.) 'food in perpetuity'; agnim-agnim vah samidha.
duvasyata (vi. 1 5^) 'worship Agni again and again with your fuel', yajndsyayajhasya 'of every sacrifice' (x. i^), dfigad-angat 'from every limb' (x. 163^),
pdrvani-parvani 'in every joint' (x. 163^). Adjectives repeated in this way
a dhavata
somam (viii. 2^5j
are less common; e. g. pdnyam-panyam
'cleanse Soma who is again and again to be praised'; prAcTm-pracim pradisam
(AV. XII. 3 7) 'each forward (eastern) direction'; lUtaram-uttaram sdmam (AV.
258.

word

is

'each following year', 'year after year'^.

XII. 1 3 3)

But the plural

originally used in the singular only.
beginnings of plural forms, as ekam-ekd iati daduh
But a word thus
(v. 5217) 'they have given a hundred each' (lit. 'hundreds, each one').
iterated seems never to be in the plural except in agreement with a plural.
b. The frequency of -e as locative of a-stems led to the occasional use of the
dative in consonant stems; div-e-div-e (for *div-i-div-i) and vU-i-vis-e (for *vis-i-vis-i).
c. The transition from iteratives to regular compounds, which appears in B., began
with numerals. Thus the eka-ekah of the RV. (ui. 2915) appears in the SB. as ekaika-;

The repeated word was

a.

meaning of

this repetition led to the

and from the dva-dva of the RV. (vm. 68h) we come to the adverbial dvan-dvdm 'in
MS., and finally to dvandva- 'pair' in the TS. (B).
d. Adjective compounds in which a word is repeated for emphasis are unconnected
with iteratives, differing from them both in sense and accent; thus mahd-mahd'mightily great'; esaisi- f- of *esaisd- {:= esa-esd-) 'very speedy' 3. Whether card-card- and
cala-cald- 'moveable' belong to this group is somewhat uncertain.
pairs' in the

2.

Copulative Compounds.

Reuter, Die altindischen nominalcomposita, KZ. 31, 17287: I. Copulative compoDelbruck, Altindische Syntax 31.- Richter, Die unechten Nominalkomposita
Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar 1252-61.
des Altindischen und Altiranischen IF. 9, 23 ff.

sita.

Wackernagel

21,

6274

(p.

149173).

This class consists of compounds

259. Classification of Dvandvas.
adjectives, the syntactical
commonly
less
consisting of two substantives, far
regarded
relation of which in the sentence is the same and which may be
connected in sense by 'and'. The successive stages in the developrnent
as

of

this class

First

I.

can be

we have

in

closely

the

RV.

traced from the beginning in the Samhitas.

the most numerous group (about three-fourths

Geldner, VS. 2, 15 the

3 According to
vocative repeated to express emthe inst. sing, of
is
not treated in the same way: form esaisya (RV'.)
of *esaisd-; but according to BR.
in aranydny dranydni (x. 146") both voca- esaisi- fGrassmann it is neut. pi. of esaisyatives are accented, the second being as and
U=i esa-esya-) 'to be striven for with desire',
emphatic as the first.
2 The only repetition of a verbal form in desirable'.
this way is fiba-piba (ll. II") 'drink again
1

phasis

is

and again';

cp.

above

88.

156

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

of all the Dvandvas) in which the compound consists of two co-ordinated

nouns in the dual, each with its own accent. 2. The first member assumes an
unchangeable form. 3. Only one accent remains and is restricted to the last
4. The first member assumes (but quite rarely
syllable of the final member.
5. The formation, becoming more general,
in the RV.) the form of the stem.
can assume plural endings (but the RV. has only a few examples in the last
6. In the later Sarnhitas this type becomes quite general, forming a
book).
7. The final stage (of which the
single category with the dual Dvandvas.
examples are few) is that of Dvandvas which are neuter singulars of a
collective character.

commonest and earhest type of the old Dvandvas each

dual in form and has a separate accent. This type seems to have
originated from tvvo grammatical practices frequent in the Vedas: (a) the juxtaposition of two coordinate words without ca; e. g. bhumano divas pari
'away from earth and heaven', krdtum ddksain (viii. 42^) 'under(ix. 735)
standing and will'; (b) the use of the elliptic dual^ which puts one of a
This origin
pair in the dual to express both, as dydva 'heaven and earth'.
is probable because the dual Dvandvas are found alternating with one or both
of these usages; thus mitrd-vdruna 'Mitra and Varuna' appears beside both
mitra. alone and mitro vdrunak (or mitro vdrunas ca and viitrds ca vdrunas
ca); matdra-pitdra 'mother and father' beside matdra or pitdra and pitre
matri and other cases, the VS. (ix. 19) having pleonastically even pitdramatdra ca meaning 'father and mother'. The transition from the syntactical
260. In the

member

is

prthivyds (vi. 30^) to a dual compound is seen in divdscollocation divds

prthivyos 'of heaven and earth' (occurring four times in the RV.) where the
second word is put in the dual to show clearly that an associated couple
.

RV. the two duals of the compound are often separated;

ha ksdma (x. 12^) 'heaven and earth'; dydva yajfidih prthivi
(vii. 53^);
indra -no dtra vdruna (iv. 41')^; d ndkta barhiJi sadatam usdsa
(vn. 425) 'let Night and Dawn seat themselves upon the litter'; i7idra nu
pusdna (vr. 57O 'Indra and Pusan'; indra nv agni (vi. 593) 'Indra and Agni',
indra yo agni (vi. 60') 3; cdksur mdhi mitrdyor dm
priydm vdrunayoh
(vi. 51') 'the great,
dear eye of Mitra and Varuna comes'. In two or three
meant.

is

In the

e.g. dydva

examples of tmesis the dual ending appears in the first member only, while
the singular remains in the second; thus mitra ...vdruna A (viii. 25^) and indra
yo vdm varuna'^ (vi.685) 'O Indra and Varuna'. Generally, however, the two
duals are in immediate juxtaposition, as indra-bfhaspdti 'Indra and Brhaspati';
dydva-prthivi 'Heaven and Earth'; agni-soma 'Agni and Soma'; gen. miirdyorvdrunayoh^ 'of Mitra and Varuna'.

The

vowel of the first member is -a^, as usdsa-ndkta

even ousts -i as in dgtia-visnu (AV.) 'O Agni and
Visnu'.
Beside this -a there sometimes appears a in the vocative, both in
tmesis, as in mitra rajdna varuna (v. 62 3) 'O kings Mitra and Varuna' (voc. of
rdjanS mitrd-vdruna, ill. 56"; x. 64^); and when the members are joined, as
characteristic final

(or ndktosdsa);

Cp.

hence

Wackernagel,

Reuter, KZ.

it

KZ.

23,

302

ff.,

176 fr., Delbruck, Altindische Syntax 58 (p. 98), Vergleichende

Syntax, Erster Theil 41 (p. 137 f.).
2 In each of the first 6 stanzas of IV. 41
indra and vdritna are separated by one or
two words of two or three syllables.
3 Also visnu agan vdntnd *Visnu and Varuna' in a Mantra in TB. II. 8. 45.
31,

The Pada text here reads vdruna;

vam varuna (iv. 41').

cp.

indra ko
5

Double duals

in -bhydm.

do not appear

to occur.
6

the

The ending
first

-au or -av never occurs in

member.

V. Compounds.

Copulatives.

157

in pdrjanya-vata

(vi.49^), voc. ol parjdnya-vata (vi. 50"), and always in indravayu^ 'O Indra and Vayu'. The ending -i appears in the first member in
agni-sSmau 'Agni and Soma'; and -u in krdtu-ddksau (VS.)^
261. These coordinate duals having early come to be regarded as a unit,
the commonest ending of the first member, that of the nom. ace, came to

be retained unaltered

other

in

cases and in derivatives 3.

Thus arose the

forms mitra-vdrunabhyam; mitrd-vdrunayos beside mitrdyor-vdrunayos, indravdncnayos; in the AV. dyava-prthivibhyam and dyava-prthivyos (instead of the
divds-prthivyos of the RV.).
262. In a minority of instances, but comparatively oftener in the later
Sarnhitas than in the RV., the first member loses its accent and only
the last syllable of the final member (irrespectively of its original accent) has
the acute'*; thus indra-pusnos (beside indra-pusdna); soma-pusdbhyam; bhavartidrdu (AV.) 'Bhava and Rudra', bhava-sarvdu (AV.) 'Bhava and Sarva'S;
vata-parjanyi. 'Vata and Parjanya' {parjdnya-); surya-candramdsa 'sun and

moon' {candrd-mas-).
a.

In the later Samhitas there are a few examples in which the nom. sing, of stems
doubtless owing to identity in form of the final vowel with the Vedic dual

in -tr has,

ending -a, become fixed in the first member: pita-puirdu (AV.) 'father and son'; nesfapotfbhyam (TS. I. 8. iS') 'to the Nestr and the Potr' 6. They doubtless started from syntactically coordinated nominatives

(like divas-pfthivyds

beside divas pj-thivyas,

VI. 4727)7.

Dvandvas with a single accent having established themselves, the

stem form began to encroach in the first member. The only two
examples from RV. i. ix, are indra-vaya (the transition being facilitated by
the more frequent occurrence of the vocative indra-vayu) and satyanrti^ (vii.
493) 'truth and untruth'. Two additional neuters occurs in book x: sasananasane
'what eats (sa-asana-) and does not eat' {an-asana-); a-YiA. rk-samdbkyam 'with
hymns and chant'. In the later Samhitas this becomes the prevailing type
263.

new formations; prasiotr-pratihartfbhyam (TS. 1.8. 18')

the Prastotr and Pratihartr'; krdtu-ddksau (VS.); daksa-krata (TS.), sudrarydu
(VS.) 'a Sudra and an Arya'9.
264. The stem form having established itself in the first member, the
compounding of Dvandvas became freer, and not only neuters but feminines
regularly followed in
'to

began

to

be admitted,

as

diksa-tapds-os (VS.) 'consecration

and

austerity'.

of the compound has the acute; the svarita of

the original word is, however, retained in brahma-rajanydu (VS. xxvi. 2 ; AV.
XI. 32^) 'a Brahman and a warrior'.
265. Dvandvas with plural ending are on the whole later than those
They would first have been used to express the plural
with dual ending.
thus sdl ahur dyava-prthivih (viii. 9^^)
sense of the pair in question,
'pairs of day-and-night'.
'they speak of six lieaven-and-earths'; aho-ratrdni

Here, too, the

final syllable

This Dvandva always has

u.

even in the

nom. indra-vayu.
2

are examples which may contain the stem

form in the first member (263).

also quotes
5 Wackernagel 21, p. 153,
is sometimes emphaby the addition of ubhdu 'both', as soma-rudrdyos (TS.), umiha-kakubhau (MS.).

The dual notion

sized

ubha miira-vdrund;

sUryd-candramasav ubha

On

tvasfi-varuirT see

Wackernagel

2',

(AV.).

64

(p.

154).'

7 The three divisions of Dvandvas treated

Like jeder-manns for jedes-manns m
3
German. B artholomae, IF. 20, i68(Anzeiger) above include masculines and feminines only.
regards these Dvandvas as abbreviations by Neuters of similar type first appear in the
dropping the common ending in the first Stltras, as idhmd-barhisi 'fuel and litter'.
8 This is the earliest example of a neuter
member.
4 This accentuation is probably due to Dvandva.
9 Wackernagel 21, p. 155, gives some
the influence of collective compounds which
are nearly allied to Dvandvas. Indragm, further examples from B. portions of the
indragntbhyam, indragnyos and agriindrabhyam later Samhitas.

iS8

I.

to

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

the use of plural Dvandvas,

that is, of pairs of groups, is

'O Indra and Maruts', where the dual notion is made
up of a singular on the one hand and a group on the other. The older
type of such plural Dvandvas (which express two coordinated plurals, the
first member retaining its accent and the archaic ending -a, like the -a of
dual Dvandvas) is represented by dnga-pdrumd 'limbs and joints' occurring in
Examples of the later type with one
a B. passage of the TS. (11. 5. 6').
accent are uktha-sastrdni (VS. xix. 28) 'recitations and praises', uktha-madani
(AV.) 'recitations and rejoicings', and probably uktharkd (vi. 34') 'reciThe latest type of these plural Dvandvas (like that of
tations and hymns".
the duals) has the stem form in the first as well as the acute on the last
The only examples of this type in the RV.
syllable of the final member.
ajavdyas 'goats and
occur in book x: aho-rdtranP 'days and nights',
sheep', dhana-bhaksisu 'in riches and enjoyments'. In the later Sarnhitas this
type becomes quite general, forming a single category with the duals; e. g.
deva-manusyas (AV. viii. lo?), bhadra-papds (AV.) 'the good and the bad',
priyapriydni (AV.) 'pleasant and unpleasant things'^.
a.
The expression dmrta mdriyanam (I. 269) appears to be an abridgment for
amftandm mdriyanam 'of immortals (and) mortals', amounting almost to a plural Dvandva
transition

made by indra-marutas

(^

amfia-martyanarn)

4.

266. A few Dvandvas appear in the Samhitas with a singular ending,

these being neuter only. The older type in which a dual or plural has been
turned into a singular at the end, only in order to express a collective
meaning, is represented in the RV. by ista-purtdm^ 'what has been offered
or given'j originally a pi. n. in both members (*ists-purtd) which has become
a singular to emphasize its collective character*. Both owing to the lack of
an early type of neuter Dvandvas and because of the desire to express a
collective sense, nearly all the neuter Dvandvas of the later kind are singular.
In most instances both members are neuter; e. g. krtakrtd-m (AV.) 'what has
been done and not done', cittakutd-m (AV.) 'thought and intention' {dkuta-),
bhuta-bhavyd-m (AV.) 'the past and the future', samista-yaji'is (VS.) 'sacrifice and
sacrificial formula'; bhadra-papdsya (AV.) 'of good and evil', ahjanabhyaiijana-m
(AV.) 'unction and inunction' {abhyanjana-), kasipupabarhand-m (AV.) 'mat

and

pillow'.

a. In a few instances the first member is a masculine or feminine: kesasmasru (AV.) 'hair and beard', isv-ayudhe (loc. sing.) 'arrows and weapons' (AV.).
267. Adjectives also occur as Dvandvas, but they are of rare occurThree types may be distinguished.
rence.
1. Adjectives of colour expressing a mixture: e. g. nila-lohitd- 'dark-blue
'dark red';
'dark red'; tamra-dhumrd- (AV.) 'red and black'
and red'
arund-babhru- (VS.) 'ruddy and yellow', dhumrd-rohita- (VS.) 'grey and red' ?.

1 Probably
uktha-arka, not uktha-arka,
the gender of the first member having prevailed over that of the last.
2 The
gender of the first member here
prevails over that of the second.
3 Some other examples from B. passages
of the Sarnhitas in Wackernagel 2', p. 157.
The oldest example of a Dvandva consisting
of three members is prdndpdnodanisu (TS.
VII. 3. 31) 'in the outward, the downward
and the upward airs', where the plural results
from the addition of three individual things
(not three groups).

Cp.

p.

Wackernagel

See WINDISCH

2', p. 157.
in Festgruss an Bohtlingk,

iisff.

^
idhma(2', 68) quotes
and
litter',
which
MS.,
'fuel
barhis from the
with its double accent as well as dual ending
in the first member represents a still earlier
6

Wackernagel

type.
in the
accentuation of the adjective
Dvandvas is the same as that of neuter substantive Dvandvas, that is, the last syllable
of the final member has the acute.
7

VS.,

Except in these colour adjectives

the

v. Compounds.
2.

and

Determinatives.

Adjectives expressing a contrast;

e. g.

159

utkala-nikula (VS.) 'going uphill

downhill'.

used with dual or plural substantives to express that each is

of one unit of the kind; e. g. padbhy&tn daksina-savy&bhyam (AV.
XII. i^^) 'with the right foot and the left';
or with the substantive to be
supplied, saptamasjamabhyam svaha (AV.) 'hail to the seventh and the eighth
(Angirasa)'; aghasamsa-duhsamsabhyam (AV.) 'by those plotting evil and those
plotting ill'; sahnatiratrau {KSl^ 'terminating with a day {sa-ahna-) and ex3. Adjectives

an attribute

ceeding a day' (ati-ratrd-).

268. As regards the order of the members in a Dvandva, the rule
seems to be that the more important or the shorter word comes first; thus
dydva-ksima, dy&va-bhUmi, dyava-prthivi'^ 'heaven and earth'; sUrya-mdsa and
surya-candramdsa 'sun and moon'; indra-vdruna 'Indra andVaruna'; ulukhalamusale (AV.) 'mortar and pestle'. Indra- regularly comes first in the RV.
and the later Sarnhitas in some dozen Dvandvas'; e. g. indragnt; otherwise
agni- always precedes; soma- comes after indra- and agni-, but before /Sja7
and rudra-. The longer word comes first, perhaps, as the more important,
in parjdnya-vdta^ 'Parjanya and Vata' and in turvdsa-yddu 'Turvasa and Yadu'.
This can hardly be the reason in sambadha-tandryas (AV.) 'oppressions and
The shorter word comes first in mitrd-vdruna, though Varuna is
weariness'.
the more important of the twct; in rk-samdbhyam the shorter word is at the

same time

the

more important.
Determinative Compounds.

3.

The

large class of determinative compounds in

determines or limits the sense of the last, is best
In the one, the final member is a verbal
divided into two main groups.
member
in meaning, and often even in form,
the
first
governs
which
noun
In the other^ the final member is an ordinary
as a verb governs its case.
noun (either adjective or substantive), the relation of which to the first member

269. Classification.

which the

first

member

a purely nominal one.

is

a.

The

270.

final

Verbal Noun as

member

are

-ana,

-i,

agent

member.
either

not occurring

not belonging to a type used as simple words:

or a verbal derivative formed with the suffixes
These nouns limited to use as final members
-in, -man, -van.
nouns; e. g. havir-dd- 'eating the oblation', sam-idh- 'flaming',

as a simple word or
either the bare roots
-a

is

final

often a verbal noun

at least

'producing light', abhi-hru-t- 'causing injury' go-ghn-d- 'cow-slaying',

'devouring
a-kar-d- 'scattering'; amitra-ddmbh-ana- 'injuring enemies', tuvi-gr-iauspicious
much', uru-cdkr-i- 'doing large work'; bhadra-vad-lti- 'uttering an
Occasionally
much'.
'giving
bhuri-dd-van-^
cry'; dsu-he-man- 'swiftly speeding',

jyotis-kf-t-

suffixes:
agent-nouns limited to use as final members are formed with other
vi-bhv-dn- 'skilprati-div-an- 'adversary at play', vi-bhv-an- 'far-reaching' and
(AV.) 'spontaneously frightened';
ful'; pra-py-asd- (AV.) 'swelling', sva-bhy-asd-

and

This form occurs 79 times in the RV.

prthivi-dyava, only once.

weakest form or, if

5 Appearing in its
ending in a. short vowel, with determina-

2
Otherwise only agmndribhyam (VS.) tive -1.
6 -mant and -vant occasionally appear as
'Agni and Indra'. Cp. the list of .dual divivariations for -man and -van, as vi-ruknities in Vedic Mythology, Grundriss III, I A,
mant- 'shining'; prana-da-vant- (AV.) 'lifep. 126.
giving' (cp. "Whitney on AV. iv. 355); see
vaia-parj'anya.
3 Once also
(middle). Reuter, KZ. 31, 560 f.
4 Cp. Wackernagel 21, p. i68

i6o

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

duh-ias-u- 'malignant',
vind-u-

vi-bhind-i'i-

cows',

'seeking

pra-yiy-u- 'used for driving', go'encompassing', pums-cal-a- (VS.)

(AV.) 'abounding

pra-cet-una-

The meaning

in

fat',

/-/^(?-,^a-

'whirlwind' ;

a wide prospect';

'affording

tuvi-kurm-i{n)- 'stirring

'going to heaven';
'washing clothes'.
a.

'splitting',

pari-tatn-iV (AV.)

'prostitute'; /z'z'a-J^/^a-Z'a'-"

bhahj-ani'i- 'shattering';

Vedic Grammar.

4.

mightily';

vasaf^-palpul-i-

of these agent-nouns restricted in use as final

vi-

div-i-tmant-

members

is

(VS.)
chiefly

But in those of them which consist of the bare root (with or without the determinative -i) it is often intransitive; e. g. namo-vfdh- 'growing by adoration'; it is not infrequently passive, as mano-yuj- 'yoked at will', su-yuj- 'well-yoked' yama-hu- 'called by
entreaties', indra-pa-tama- 'most eagerly drunk by Indra', tivra-su-i- 'pressed from the
active.

fermenting mass', hrdaya-vidh- 'pierced to the heart' ^ (AV.). The passive meaning also
'around
appears in one derivative formed with -a: pari-mar-d- (TS.) 'died around'
whom people die'. Final members formed with -a, -ana, [i)-tu when compounded with
su- or dus- also have a passive (gerundive) meaning expressive of the ease or difficulty
with which the verbal action is performed; e. g. su-kdr-a- 'easy to be done', su-mdn-tu-

'easily recognisable', su-ved-and- 'easily acquired'; dur-dp-and- 'hard to attain'; dur-niydn-tu- 'hard to restrain', dur-dhdr-T-tu- 'irresistible', du-ddbha- 'hard to deceive' ; also
an isolated derivative with 4, dur-gfbh-i- 'hard to catch', and one with -na, su-sru-na'easily heard' (beside su-sru-t- 'hearing easily').

271.

number of verbal nouns restricted to employment as final

formed from the simple root (with or without deteror with the suffixes -a, -ana, -tha are nouns of action; e.g.
certain

members which

are

minative -i)
srad-dkd- 'htYisi' , anr-dd- (VS. TS.) 'fulfilment of wishes', tip a-s(u-t- 'invocation',
pari-pad- 'snare', sani-nam- (AV.) 'affection'; ksudha-mar-d- (AV.) 'death by
hunger', papa-vad-d- (AV.) 'evil cry'; deva-hed-ana- 'offence against the gods',
baddhaka-moc-ana- (AV.) 'release of a prisoner'; go-pi-thd- 'drink of milk',
putra-kr-thd- 'procreation of sons', sam-i-thd- 'conflict',
kama-pr-d- is both a
noun of action, 'fulfilment of desires' (AV.) and an agent-noun, 'fulfilling
desires' (RV.)3.
a.
class of secondary nouns of action is here formed by adding the
suffixes -ya and -ya to agent nouns formed from the simple root (with or

These are abstracts (neuter and feminine respectively); e. g.

'enjoyment of the q\>\z.'C\ovIi;, pUrva-p&y-ya- s.nd^ purva-pe-ya- 'precedence in drinking' {purva-ps- 'drinking first'}, nr-pdyya- 'protection of men',
bahu-pdy-ya- 'protection of many', 'large hall', deva-ydj-ya- n. and -yaj-yd- i.
'adoration of the gods' {deva-ydj- 'adoring the gods', VS.), nr-sdh-ya- 'overcoming of men' (nr-sdh- 'overcoming men'), raja-su-ya- (AV.) 'royal consecration' {raja-sti- 'creating a king', VS.), madkyama-stkSy-ya- 'standing in the
middle' (inadhyama-sthd- adj., VS.); su-krt-yd- 'righteousness' (su-kf-t- 'righteous').
272. The close verbal connexion of these final members with the
roots from which they are derived, shows itself formally. Thus they retain
Again,
the palatal of the verb where the guttural would otherwise appear"*.
agent nouns of this kind are formed from almost every kind of present stem.
The following are examples of such nouns from present stems of: i. the
first class: cakram-a-sajd- 'stoppings the wheel'; 2. the sixth class: ut-tudd(AV.) 'instigator' {tudd-ti), sam-gird- (AV.) 'swallowing' {sdin girami). 3. stems
with -cha: go-vyacchd- (VS.) 'cow-tormentor' (from a lost present stem *vyaccka-)

without

-t).

/^aOT>-aV-_)'ff-

'

YoxpTvas-sp/idkd.;\iis Mss. rs3.Apibasphakd-m

{?z.&2.

IV.

pibah-phdkdm):

73.

see

Whitney on AV.

to

See
this

Wackernagel
would be

kard- (AV.) 'sun',

Exceptions
2', 76.
iuvi-kurmi-(n)- and diva-

if

But 'heart-piercing' (RV.).

from car- 'fare'.
3 Isolated examples of nouns of action
5 From a sajdmi
formed with other suffixes are su-papi-ani'good flight', sam-sres-ind- (AV.) 'conflict'(?).

these words are derived

'I

attach'.

V. Compounds.

Determinatives.

i6i

4. the fourth class or passive with -ya: akrsta-pacyd-'^ (AV. VS. TS.)
'ripening in unploughed ground', a-pasyd- 'not seeing', ugram-pasyd^'fierce-looking',

'^superintendent',

(AV.)
mam-pasyd- (AV.) 'looking at me', adhi-pasya- (AV. Paipp.)
punar-manyd- 'remembering' {mdnya-te 'thinks'), d-risanya-

'not failing' {risanyd-ti), bala-vi-jnayd- 'recognized by his

strength', a-vi-dasyd'not ceasing' {vi dasyanti 'they cease'),
a-vi-driyd- 'not bursting' {dr- 'split').

stems with -aya-, vacam-mkhayd- 'stirring the voice', samudram-lhkhaya(only voc.) ^'stirring the vat' {inkhdya-nii 'they shake'), visvam-ejaya(only voc.)
^x<^ring air {ejdya-ti 'sets in motion)', ati-parayd- 'putting across'.
6. the
5.

-ti

'reaching to the mouth' ^ {dagh-nu-yat

..

dura-dabhnd- (AV.) 'eluding doors'

'not to be kept by
bars and bolts' (dabhnuv-anti 'they deceive'), danu-pinvd- 'swelling with drops'
{pinv-and- 'swelling'), sada-prnd- 'always giving' {prnA-ti 'fills', 'bestows'),
a-mind-i (beside d-minant-) 'undiminishing' {mind-ti 'diminishes'), pra-mrnd_

'may

reach', K.),

'destroying'
7. the

'insatiable',

sixth

a-sunv-d-

pressing

'not

'destroy'),

Soma'

a-sinvd-''

(beside

(beside

d-sunv-ant-),

and seventh classes:

agnim-indhd- 'fire-kindling' {indh-dte 'they

vi-krntd- (VS.) 'cutting to pieces' {krntd-ti
(AV.) 'firmly fixed on the ground' (dfmha-ta 'make firm'),

kindle'), pra-krntd- (TS.iv.5.3')

'cuts'),

prd mrna

{pra-mrndnt- 'crushing',

d-sinvani-)

bhumi-drmhd-

and

(AV.) a kind of supernatural being (/ limpami 'I besmear', AV.).

the root class: vrdtya-bruvd- (AV.) 'calling himself a Vratya' {bruv-dnii
'they say').
the reduplicating class:
9.
anu-jighrd- (AV.) 'snuffing at'
{jighranti 'smelling'), sam-pibd- (AV.) 'swallowing down' {sdm pibami, AV.) 5.
a. In a few instances verbal nouns which are final members of compounds in the
RV. or the later Samhitas subsequently appear as independent words. Thus jata-vidya'knowledge of things', vidya- (AV. TS.) 'knowledge' 6. On the other hand, verbal nouns
derived from roots without suffix, which in the RV. appear both as independent words
and as final members of compounds, often^ survive in the later Samhitas in their compound form only; such are tier- 'racing', da- 'giver', sii- m. 'begetter', f. 'mother', siha'standing'.
As a rule verbal nouns which occur independently have the same general
meaning as when they form the final member of a compound. But those formed without
any suffix generally, and those formed with -a occasionally, have the sense of agent
nouns at the end of compounds, but of action nouns or of designations of things conni-linipd-

8.

ceiv

"

fiva-

Mara- 'bringing prosperity'. Sometimes

noun as well as Of an action noun; e. g.
adj. 'enjoying'

and

f.

the simple

word has the meaning of an agent

dfs- adj. 'seeing'

'enjoyment'; siubk- adj. 'shouting' and

and
f.

f. 'act of seeing';
'shout'; but at the

a compound these three words express the agent only. Similarly grabh-a- m.
(AV.) and 'grasp', but grava-grabh-d- 'handling the Soma stones'^.

bhiij-

end of

'seizer'

Several kinds of verbal nouns which

273. Independent verbal nouns.
are also capable of independent use occur as final member of compounds.
Among these the only ones of frequent occurrence are those in -ta which
are

adjectives

(often used as

substantives)

and the corresponding

Wackernagel 21, p. 179

abstract

ace. f. 'life-giving' (beside dyur-da-, AV. VS.

TS.): ddd-ati 'they give'.
6 For examples of verbal nouns which
2 -daghna- forms
the last member of assume an independent character in the
several other compounds in the later Sam- later language, see Wackernagel 21, 77 a.
hitas.
See Wackernagel 21, p. 181.
7 On the origin of these verbal compounds
3 Cp. Wackernagel 21, p. 181, note.
and the relation of the final member to the
4 From a lost root *si-nd-ti 'satisfies'.
independent word, see Wackernagel 2',
5 There is also a transition form (leading 78 b and note (p. 186 f.).
to the later -dada-) in ayitr-ddd-am (AV.)
1

the view that this -ya

of the gerundive.

is

(bottom), refutes
identical with that

Indo-arische Philologie.

I.

4,

.\\

l62

I.

substantives in
puro-hiti-

Allgemeines und Sprache.

e. g.

-ti\

4.

Vedic Grammar.

puro-hita- adj. 'placed in front', m. 'domestic priest';

'domestic priesthood'.

f.

Agent nouns.

Those which are formed with -aka and -snu are

with prepositions only: abhi-kros-aka- (VS.) 'one who cries out',
vi-l&y-aka- (VS.) 'melter'; abhi-socayi-snu- (AV.) 'causing heat', ni-sat-snu- 'sitting
Agent nouns in -tr may be compounded with adverbs, as pura-etffirmly'.
1.

compounded

'going before', purah-sthatf- 'standing at the head', and rarely with substantives, as nr-patf- 'protecting men', man-dhaif- ' 'applying (his) mind', 'thoughtful

Agent nouns formed with -u from secondary present stems are in a

man'.
few instances compounded with substantives: gir-vanasy-u- 'fond of hymns',
deva-pTy-u- (AV. VS.) 'hating the gods', rastra-dips-u- (AV.) 'wishing to injure
the country'.

A few action nouns formed with -a from adjectives

from secondary verbal stems, begin in late passages of the
RV. to appear in composition with a substantive: mamsa-bhiks-a- (i. 162")
'request for flesh', sraddha-manasy-a- 'faithful intent' (x. 1135); sajata-vanasy-a2.

Action nouns.

in -u derived

(TS.

II.

'desire to rule over

6. dP)

abstracts in

-ti

relatives'.

(corresponding to adjectives in

Much more common are the

which may be compounded

-to),

with indeclinables or nouns (adjective or substantive)^;

soma-ptti- 'drinking

of Soma',

dn-uti- 'no help',

e. g.

sd-huti- 'joint invocation', su-uti- 'good aid';

d-sasti- 'curse', nir-rti- 'dissolution',

soma-suti-

'pressing

Some

of Soma'.

becoming or have become agent nouns; thus jardd-asti-

are

of these

'attaining great

as well as 'attainment of old age'; vdsu-dhiti- 'bestowing wealth' as well

age'

but vdsu-mti- (AV.) only 'bringing wealth'. Others,

RV., approximate to the type of the non-verbal determinatives,

as 'bestowal of wealth';

even

in the

as dsu-niti- 'world of spirits',

rju-niti- 'right guidance',

devd-hiti- 'divine ordi-

nance', ndmo-vrkti- 'cleansing for adoration', purvd-citti- 'foreboding'

these can,

however, be understood as abstracts to corresponding compounds in -ta^.

3. Gerundives. The gerundives formed with -ya are ordinarily compounded
with adverbial prepositions, as puro-nuvakya- (sc. fc- AV.) '(verse) to be
repeated beforehand'. In the later Samhitas a noun here sometimes appears
as first member: nivi-bharya- (AV.) 'to be worn in a skirt', prathama-vasya(AV.) 'worn formerly'.
The Proper Names ku7ida-pdyya-, puru-mayya, vrstihdvya-, if they are formed with the gerundive suffix -ya, would be examples
from the RV.'*.
Gerundives formed with -arijya and -enya^ are compounded

with prepositions

and

car^iiya- 'suitable for

-iva are not

a-mantraniya- (AV.)

a{n)- only:

walking

compounded

on',

iz-ifz/zj-tf/z^a-

at all except

with

'to

be asked';

'not malevolent'.

sam-

Gerundives

in

()-.

Participles.

Besides prepositions and ()-, only indeclinable words

verlDS are found compounded with participles
(exclusive of the past passive participle): thus alala-bhdvant- 'murmuring'
(waters) and jahjana-bhdvant- 'crackling' (flame), astam-ydnt- (AV.) 'setting'
and astam-esydnt- (AV.) 'about to set', d-punar-diyamana- (AV.) 'not being
given back', avis-krnvand- 'making visible', dur-vidvams- 'ill-disposed, suvidvams- 'knowing well'.
4.

occurring

'

in

connexion with

From manas- through ''manz-dhaif-.

The verbal force is strongest when

(AV.)
the

preceding substantive has the sense of an

object.
3

As

gods'

of ordaining by tlie
devd-hita- 'ordained by the

devd-hiti- 'act

beside

gods'.
4

'uttering a single
spectre, and var-kdryain their formation.

The compounds amd-vdsyaof the new moon',

rdtrJ- 'night

(AV.) sc.
eka-vddya-

fevf

sound', a kind of
SS"*) are obscure

(l.

gerundives in -tavya begin to be'

compounded with prepositions

or particles
in the B. portion of the TS. and MS. pravastavydm (TS.) 'one should go on a journey'; a-bhartavyd- (MS.) 'not to be borne',
sv-etavyam (TS.) 'easy to go'.
:

V. Compounds.

Determinatives.

163

a.
By far the commonest verbal nouns occurring as final member are
past participles in -fa, which are compounded with nouns
as well as
prepositions and other indeclinables.
The meaning is mostly passive. It is,
however, sometimes active, but in the RV. almost exclusively
when a pre-

the

position precedes, as ud-iia- 'risen'; when a noun precedes,

only in sdr^atakta- 'speeding w^th a rush' and sdrga-pratakta'darting forth with a rush'.
In the AV. a noun appears also in uda-plutd- 'swimming in the
water'; occasionally even transitively governing the first member
in sense: krtd-dvista(AV.) 'hatmg what has been done' (by another)'.
b. The past participle in -na is less frequent and
occurs in the RV.
only compounded with prepositions, ()- and su-; e.
g. pdri-cchinna- 'lopped
around'; d-bhinna- 'not split'; su-purna- 'quite full'. But it is found
a few
times in the later Samhitas with a preceding substantive: agni-nunna(SV.)
'driven away by fire', resmd-cchinna- (AN .) 'rent by a storm'; and
with active
(transitive) sense gara-girnd- (AV.) 'having swallowed poison'.
5. There are besides some verbal adjectives in -ra or (after a vowel)
-ira, -la and -ma, the first of which occurs compounded with nouns as well
as prepositions: a-sk-ra- 'united'

% ni-mrg-ra- 'attached to', tanU-subh-ra- 'shining

hdri-scand-ra- 'shining yellow'; vi-bhr-tra- 'to be borne about in

in body',

various directions' ; a-mis-la-, ni-mis-la-, j-aw-wzY-Za;- 'commingling' ; dva-kss-ma(AV.) 'emaciated', uc-chtis-ma- (TS. i. 6. 2') 'hissing upwards', ni-sus-ma- (TS.
2^)

I. 6.

'hissing

downwards'.

Comparatives and superlatives

in -Tyams and -isiha having

verbal adjectives are found in composition with prepositions
and mm- when they still retain their verbal meaning: ud-yarniyams- 'raising
excessively', pdri-svajiyams- (AV.) 'clasping more firmly', prdti-cyaviyams6.

originally

been

'pressing closer against',

'coming

vi-klediyams- (AV.) 'moistening

more';

a-gamistha-

quickly', sdm-bhavistha- 'most beneficial'.

First

member

in

verbal determinatives.

274. a. Prepositions. At the beginning of determinatives prepositions

in accordance with their use in verbal forms; e. g. pra-ni- and
prd-niH- 'furtherance', pra-netf- 'leader', prd-mta- 'furthered', pra-neni- 'guiding
are

employed

constantly'. Even in the many instances in which the corresponding verbal combination has not been preserved, it may be assumed to have existed; e. g.
in abhi-pra-mur- 'crushing' and abhi-pra-bhangin- 'breaking'. Occasionally, however, the preposition has a meaning which otherwise occurs only before non-

verbal nouns; e. g. aii-yajd- 'sacrificing excessively'^. A preposition belonging

the second member is once prefixed to the first in sam-dhana-ji-t (AV.)
'accumulating (= sam-ji-t-) 'wealth'.

to

b.

Adverbs.

yavan- 'going

Various kinds of adverbs occur in

this position,

as puro-

before', a/j'aya-a'r?//4- 'injuring wrongly'; amutra-bhUya-{KS[.VS>^

'state of being there' (i. e. in the other world).

The privative a{n)- though
belonging in sense to the final member always precedes the first; e. g. dnagni-dagdha- 'not burnt by fire'; d-pakad-daghvan- 'not remaining behind';
d-dara-sr-t (AV.) 'not falling into a crack'.
c. Nouns. The first member, when a noun, expresses various relations
to

the

last.

1 Cp. Wackernagel 21, p.

Whitney on AV. vii. 1131.
2 From sac- 'be associated'.

195; but also

3 In TS. II. 5. 44 (B.) ad-yaj- means

pass over in sacrificing'.

11*

'to

164

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

I. the object, which is the prevailing meaning when the final

an agent noun or an action noun; e.g. ab-ji-t- 'winning waters', asvahayd- 'urging on steeds', nr-patf- 'protecting men', vaja-sati- 'act of winning

It

expresses:

member

is

booty', vrtra-hdtya- n. 'act of slaying Vrtra' '. When the final member is a verbal
noun formed from kr- 'make', the first member does not necessarily express

the product, but may mean the material with which the activity is concerned;
thus hiranya-kard- (VS.) is not 'gold-maker' but 'worker in gold', 'goldsmith'.
2. the agent when the last member has a passive sense; e.g. indra-pdtama- 'most drunk by Indra', soma-sita- 'excited by Soma'; occasionally also
when the final member is an action noun, as devd-hiti- 'ordinance of the
gods', parna-sadd- {K^l VS.)
.

'fall

of leaves',

mitra-tdrya- (AV.) 'victory

of

friends'.
3. the instrument, the source, or the locality when the final member
an agent noun or a past passive participle; e. g. ddri-dugdha-' 'milked
with stones', aritra-pdrana- 'crossing with oars'; go-jata- 'produced from kine',
tivra-su-t- 'pressed from the fermenting mass'; uda-plutd- (AV.) 'swimming in
the water', dhar-jata- (AV.) 'born in the day', puru-bha- 'being in many
is

places', bandhu-kd-t- 'dwelling

among

relatives',

pfsni-ni-presita-^ 'sent

down

to earth'.

an appositionally nominative sense, that as or like which the

member is performed; e. g. tsana-kr-t- 'acting as a ruler',
'dear by nature';
first', vamd-jata- 'born as one dear'
dhara-vakd- 'sounding like streams', syend-juta- 'speeding like an eagle'.
5. in the sense of a predicative nominative before a past participle,
or a predicative accusative before an agent noun expressive of 'saying'; e. g.
4. in

action of the final

pUrva-pd- 'drinking

bhaksdm-krta- (TS.) 'enjoyed', stoma-tasta- 'fashioned as a hymn of praise';

vratya-bruvd- (AV.) 'calling oneself a Vratya'.
6. adverbially the manner in which an action is done, sometimes by
means of a substantive, more often by means of an adjective; e. g. rtv-ij'sacrificing at the proper time', that is, 'regularly', sdrga-takta- 'speeding with
a rush'; asu-pdtvan- 'flying swiftly', dhruva-ksi-t- (VS.) 'dwelling securely', satyaydj- 'sacrificing truly'; with a numeral in dvi-jd- {PC<f^ 'twice-born'.
275. Before a verbal noun a nominal first member very often appears
generally with that which the corresponding verb
virith a case-ending
would govern in a sentence. The accusative is here the commonest case,
singular casethe locative coming next, while the other cases are rarer.
ending (the ace. or inst.) may here indicate a plural sense; e. g. dsvam-isti'seeking horses', puram-dard- 'destroyer of forts', hinesita- 'driven by dogs'
Plural (ace.) endings sometimes occur, but dual endings are never
(Ji'ina-).
found in these compounds.
The accusative case-ending is very common, generally expressing the
object of a transitive verb, as dhanam-jayd- 'winning booty'. But it also expresses other senses, as that of the cognate accusative; e. g. subham-yd-{va7i)'moving in brilliance'; or of an adverbial accusative, e. g. ugram-pasyd-^
"*,

I Wackernagel 21, p. 198,

quotes hkajit-am svargam ( AV. IV. 348) as sho win g that
the first member was felt to have an accu'winning the heavenly world'
sative sense
{svargam lokdm); but the Paipp. Ms. has the
reading svargyam, which Whitney regards
'world-conquering,
better,
translating
as
heaven-going'.
When the
first member is
a part of

the body
reference

it

to',

the sense of 'with

as bahu-jiita- 'quick with the

expresses

arms'.
3 The local sense here is that of the
accusative of the goal.
4 Cp. Lindner, Nominalbildung p. 28.
5 Occasionally the -m is inorganic, as in
maksum-gamd- and dium-gd- (AV.) 'going
swiftly'. In fatam-gd- 'hivi' , paiam- probably

V. Compounds.

Determinatives.

165

(AV^) 'looking fiercely'; or of a predicative accusative, e.

g. ayaksmam-kdrana(AV.) 'producing health', srtam-kartf- ^TS. iii. i.
4*) 'making cooked".
The
ace. pi. occurs in ka-cit-kard- 'doing all manner
of things', pdha-isii-^ 'desiring
kine', vipas-cit- 'understanding eloquence',
vipo-dha- 'granting eloquence',
cit-i 'intending evil't.

huras-

The accusative form is commonest before agent nouns ending in -a

which begin with a single consonant and the first syllable of which is
short; that is, the -m here appears in a syllable in which
rhythmic lengthening
would be alloweds. This accusative form is the regular rule in the RV.
when the stem of the first member ends in -a, being found before -karaa.

or

-i

'making',

-caya- 'collecting',

'cleaving',

-bhara- 'bearing',

whelming';

-jaya- 'conquering',
-ruja- 'breaking',

-tara- 'overcoming',

-sani- 'winning',

-dara-

-saha- 'over-

abhayam-kard- 'procuring security'. The only exceptions to

RV. are asva-hayd- 'urging on steeds', sukra-dugha- 'emitting
In the RV. the ending -im also occurs va. pusUm-bhard- 'bringing

e. g.

this rule_ in the

clear

fluid'.

and harim-bhard-^ 'bearing the yellow-coloured (bolt)'; and -urn

maksum-gamd- 'going quickly'. In the later Samhitas also occur
iram-madd- (VS.) 'rejoicing in the draught', duram-gamd- (VS.) 'going far',
devam-gamd- (TS.) 'going to the gods', yudhiin-gamd- (AV.) 'going to battle',
prosperity'

inorganically in

viivam-bhard- (AV.)

The

b.

sakam-bhard-^ (AV.) 'bearing ordure'*

is not uncommon before a final member
(coalescence of the two vowels being thus avoided); e.g.
'all-sustaining',

accusative form in

-am

with initial vowel

cakram-Ssajd- 'obstructing the wheel', visvam-invd- 'all-moving', dsvam-isti'desiring horses', vacam-ihkhayd- 'word-moving', samudram-Tnkhaya- (only voc.)
'stirring the vat', visvam-ejayd- 'all-exciting'; in -im: agnim-indhd- 'fire-kindler';
in -am: tvSm-ahuti- (TS.) 'offering oblations to thee'.
the final member is formed
connexion of such verbal nouns
with the verb; e. g. dhiyam-jinvd- 'exciting meditation', ugram-pasyd- (AV.)
'looking fiercely', mam-pasyd- {KSf?) 'looking at me'.
d. Apart from the conditions stated above (a, b, c) the accusative caseending rarely occurs in the first member of verbal determinatives; e. g.
vanam-kdrana-, a particular part of the body; dhiyam-dhd- 'devout', subhamya-{van)- 'moving in brilliance' '.
a. In the great majority of instances the first member, if it has the accusative
c.

The

accusative form

from a present stem,

is

owing

common when
to the close

case-form, ends in -am, mostly from stems in

stems {pur-am- etc.) i, and from one stem in

-a,

but also from monosyllabic consonant

Otherwise there are three or

-J [dhiy-am-).

nation of fiiam-cayd- and rna-cil- 'paying a

debt', khajam-kard- and khaja-kft- 'causing
origin of the nasal is
the din of battle', dhaiiam-jayd- and dhanaNAGEL 21, p. 202.
ji-i- 'winnmghooly', Janam-sa/id- 'overcoming
1 In B. this predicative accusative somebeings' and vrdta-saha- 'conquering crowds',
times comes to have the value of a prediBeside kavi-vrdhd- 'prospering the wise'.
7 Here the ace. of an a-stem is substituted
cative nominative when compounded with a
gerundive or a derivative of bhil-, as ij^tam- for sakdn-.
8 The compound nardm- dhisa- (VS.) is of
kftya- (TS.) 'to be made cooked', nagnambhavuka- (TS.) 'becoming naked'.
doubtful meaning and irregular accent.
2 pasvds ace. pi.
9 For several other examples occurring in
of the later Samhitas
3 Here kuras- might be a genitive as \/dt- Brahmana passages
see Wackernagel 2', p. 207 d, e.
governs that case as well as the ace.
10 In hrd-am-sdni- 'winning the heart' the
4 puro-ha 'destroying forts' may contain
an ace. ; also isa-siut- 'praise of prosperity', neuter hrd- is treated as if it were a masc.
or fern.
which the Pada analyses as isah-siui:
5 How much the use of these forms is
dependent on rhythm is seen in the alterrepresents
'fertile

IE.

while xa. puram-dhivfsan-dhi- 'bold', the

doubtful; cp.WACKER-

fetn-;

woman' and

fi

i66

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache

four in -im [agnim-

am

{tnam-, tvdm-).

in the

4.

Vedic Grammar.

one in -urn [makstim-), and two pronominal accusatives in

Polysyllabic consonant stems never have the accusative case-ending
etc.),

member i.

first

276. The locative case-ending is in the RV. almost limited to employment before agent-nouns formed from the simple root with or without
determinative -t: agre-gd- 'going before', agre-gii- (VS.) 'moving forwards',
agre-ni- (VS.)

'leader',

agre-pd- 'drinking

first',

agre-pi- (VS.) 'drinking

first',

member

of the body', rte-jd-'^ 'produced at

the sacrifice', krcchre-sri-t- 'running into danger', gahvare-sthd- (VS.) 'being at
the bottom', divi-ksi-t- 'dwelling in heaven', divi-ydj- 'worshipping in heaven',
divi-sdd- (AV.) 'sitting in heaven',
divi-srl-t- (AV.) 'sojourning in heaven',
dure-drs- 'visible afar', dosani-sris- (AV.) 'leaning on the arm', rathe-subh'flying along in a car', rathe-stha- 'standing in a car', vane-raj- 'shining in a
wood', vane-sdh- 'prevailing in woods', sute-grbh- 'taking hold of the Soma',
hrdi-spfi- 'touching the heart'*.
2. The RV. has only two examples of a locative before an agent noun
formed witli the suffix -a: divi-ksayd- 'dwelling in heaven', vahye-sayd- 'resting
ahge-stha-'^ (AV.) 'situated in

in a

litter'

5.

what

'killing

agre-vadM- (VS.)
on a couch', divi-card- (AV.)
divi-stambhd- (AV.) 'supported on the sky', dure-vadhd-

There are several others

is

in the later Sarnhitas:

in front', talpe-sayd- (AV.) 'resting

'faring in heaven',

In the AV. also

hara-iayd-^ (MS. i. 2^) 'resting in gold'.
occurs an example of the locative before an agent noun formed with -in:
parame-sth-in- 'standing in the highest (place)'.
3. The locative plural is much rarer than the singular in the first member:
apsu-ksi-t- 'dwelling in the waters', apsu-ja- 'born in the waters', apsu-ji-t- 'vanquishing in the waters', apsu-sdd- 'dwelling in the waters', apsu-vdh- (SV.)
'driving in water', apsu-samiita- (AV.) 'excited in the waters', gosu-yudh'fighting in (= for) kine', prtsu-tur- 'conquering in battles', bharesic-jd- 'pro(VS.) 'far-striking',

duced

in fights', hrtsv-ds- 'piercing to the heart'.

In these locative compounds the second member is most commonly -stha- or

The
the RV., while the first member is most usually agre-, dure- or vane-.
locative in -e is the predominant one, even displacing -z in pathe-sthd- 'standing on the
road' beside pathi-stha- (AV.).
a.

-stha- in

277.

member

The instrumental case-ending occurs

several times in the

first

ksama-card- (VS.) 'being in the ground',

gira-vfdh- 'rejoicing in song', dhiya-jur- 'aging in devotion', yuvd-datta- 'given
by you two', yuvd-riita- 'led by you two', yusmd-datta- 'given by you', ymmSmta- 'led by you', sunesita- 'driven by dogs' {h'ma). When the stem of the
here represents the
first member ends in -a there is some doubt whether -a
instrumental ending or lengthening of the vowel ?; thus sapha-ruj- may mean
'breaking with the hoof or 'hoof-breaker'; and in yuva-yuj- 'yoked by you
two' the vowel may be simply lengthened. In diva-kard- (KSl^ 'sun' the first
member is an old instrumental used adverbially*.
a. The examples of the ablative case-ending are rare:
daksinat-sddof verbal determinatives:

1 iakan- substitutes the ace. of an a-stem;

3 In sute-kara- 'active in (offering) Soma',
above p. 165, note 7.
the accent shows that the final member has
2 There are several other locatives com- an adjectival, not a verbal
sense.
In the

pounded with -sfha-.

3 There are several other
pounded with -ja-.
In nare-sfha- (RV'.), an
the first member may
(Sayana), but it may also be
(BR., Grassmann), 'serving
stand on'.
4

car,

name
locatives
epithet

matari-ivan- the

com- preted in RV.

RiCHTER, IF.

of the

be a locative
a dative of /for a man to

HI.

29"

first

as

member
a

is inter-

locative;

cp.

Macdonell,
247, note ;
Grundriss ni. I A, p. 72 (middle).
6 In VS. v. 8 hari-saya,-; hara- here is the
locative of hdri-.
' Cp. Wackernagel 21,
56.
8 See Wackernagel 21, 213 a, note.
9,

V. Compounds.

Determinatives.

167

(MS.

II. 63)
'sitting in the south'; divo-ja- 'produced from heaven', divo-dith(SV.) 'milking from the sky', divo-ruc- 'shining from the sky'.
b. The ending of the genitive would naturally appear only before derivatives from verbs governing the genitive.
There seem to be no certain

examples: divd-ksas-

b.

I.

'ruling

over the sky' {divas) however seems probable'.

Ordinary Adjective as

final

member.

278. Ordinary adjectives which are not of a verbal character may appear
as final member of determinatives much in the same way as past participles
in -ta and -na (273, 4).
But adjectives ending in -u are almost exclusively
compounded with the privative a{n)- and prepositions; e. g. i2;z-aj-M- 'not swift',
dn-rju- 'dishonest', d-daiu- 'impious', d-hhiru- 'not terrible'; pram- 'very {prd)
{asu-). The only final members otherwise compounded are -vasu- 'rich'
vibhd-vasu- 'radiant' and other compounds, and -raghu- 'swift', in maderaghu- 'quick in exhilaration'.
swift'

in

a.

The

the

last;

member may

first

be a substantive

in the relation of a case

body', yajha-dhira- 'versed in
sacrifice', vakmaraja-satya- 'faithful to the ordainers of hymns', visvd-sambhu'salutary for all'. The relation is sometimes expressed by the case-ending
the

to

e. g.

tanii-subhra-

'shining

in

locative in gdvi-sthira- (AV.) 'strong

{gdvi)' as a

in kine

name,

mdde-raghu'quick in exhilaration', sute-kara- 'active in (offering) Soma', sumnd-api- 'united

affection

in

{sumni)';

instrumental

dhiyd-vasu-

in

'rich

in

devotion',

vidmanSpas- 'working iapds-) with wisdom {vidmanaf

The first member may
also appositionally express a comparison as representing a type: h'tka-babhru.

(VS.) 'reddish like a parrot'^.

b. The first member may be an adjective qualifying the final member
an adverbial sense; thus aprami-satya (voc.) 'eternally true', urdhvd-prsni-^
(VS.) 'spotted above', try-arusa- 'reddish in three (parts of the body)', mahanagni-^ {AY .) 'courtezan' ('very naked'), maM-mahi-vrata- ^xnYingYtry ja\^'d\y',
in

maha-vaturin- 'very broad', visvd-scandra- 'all-glittering'*c. Adverbs and particles often appear as first member;

on one

'not swift', anydta-eni- (VS.) 'variegated

ready

{dra-)', duh-siva- 'unfavourable',

e. g.

an-asu-

side {anydtas)', evara- 'quite {evd)

punar-nava- 'renewing

itself,

sato-mahant-

'equally {sa-tds) great', sato-brhatt- (VS.) 'the equally great' (a metre), satydm-

ugra- 'truly mighty', su-priya- (AV.) 'very dear'.

d. Several prepositions appear as first member, mostly with their original
adverbial meaning; e. g. dti-krsna-^ (VS.) 'very dark'; d-misla-tama- 'mixing
very readily'^; upottamd- (AV.) 'penultimate'; ni-dhruvi- ('fixed down') 'persevering',

praii'i- 'very swift',

pra-

has also been otherwise explained;

4 Here the adjectival stem is used for the
2', p. 213 c, note; who adv. urdhvdm.
5 From this is formed the m. mahd-nagndquotes a-kasya-md- 'knowing nothing'

But

nis-kevalya- (VS.) 'belonging exclusively';

it

Wackernagel

cp.

also

from the MS.

(AV.) 'paramour'.

The word jatu-sfhira- probably

an old instrumental

contains

'naturally solid'; in
nabha-nedistha- 'nearest in kin' as a name,
the first member though looking like a locative,

probably represents an

Ilr.

stem nabha-;

The compounds
cp. RlCHTER, IF. 9, 209.
fcT-sama-, an epithet of Indra, and ghaseajra- (VS.) are Bahuvrlhis.
3
transition to this compound use appears
in mano jdvisfham (RV. VI. 9 5) 'very swift as

thought'.

The meaning

of sddhv-aryd- 'truly faith-

which occurs only once, is doubtful;

Wackernagel 2S p. 237 (top).

ful' (?),

cp.
7

the sense of 'very' does not occur

but in the later Sarnhitas it is
commonest of the prepositions com-

ati in

in the RV.,

the

pounded with

adjectives.

'Very slightly mixed', Geldner, VS. 3,

181.
a-tura- 'suffering' is obscure in origin.
8

i68

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

sardha- (voc.) 'bold'; vi-mahT- 'very great', vi-sama- (VSO 'uneven', vi-sadrsasdm-vasu- ,'d.welling together',
vy-lni- 'variously tinted' (dawn)
dissimilar',
;

'

sdm-priya- (VS.) 'mutually dear'.

Ordinary Substantive as

b. 2.

final

mernber.

Determinatives with ordinary non-verbal substantives as their final

are not common in the earliest period of the language. In the first
nirie books of the RV., except the frequent compounds in -pati- and -paint-,
there are not many more than three dozen examples^; the tenth book has
quite two dozen more, and the AV. seven dozen more.
279.

member

'

The

first

member

is

frequently a substantive also.

Its

relation to

genitive sense in the Sarnhitas.

This genitive sense appears when the final member is a word expressive of
relationship, or -pati- 'husband' or 'lord'; e. g. raja-putrd- 'king's son', mrtyubdndhu- 'companion of death', vis-pdti- 'lord of the tribe'. It sometimes exthe final

member seems

to

be hmited

to the

presses the material, as dru-padd- 'post of wood', hiranya-rathd- 'car of gold'

In deva-kilbisd- 'offence against the gods' we have an
or 'car full of gold'.
example of an objective genitive. There seems to be no instance in the RV.

of a Proper Name appearing as the first member of a determinative in the

genitive sensed except in indra-send- {'X.102^) 'Indra's missile'"*, which compound
is itself perhaps
a Proper Name 5. In camasadhvaryu- (AV.) 'the priest of
the cups', the first member expresses quite a general genitive sense of
relation
'the priest who is concerned with the cups'.
280. As in determinatives with verbal noun as final member, the caseending may appear in the first member. But it is less common here, and
owing to the purely nominal character of the final member, is almost restricted
The ending of this case is very common before -patito the genitive.

'lord'

or 'husband'

amhas-as-pati- (VS.) 'lord of distress', N. of an intercalary

month, gna-s-pdii-^ 'husband of a divine

bfh-as-pdti-^

power',

vioms.'a', Jd-s-pdti-

and brdhman-as-pdH-'\ox& of devotion',

vdn-as-pdti-^ 'lord of the wood',

vastos-pdti- 'lord of the dwelling',

'tree',

'lord of the family',

tndnas-as-pdti- 'lord of mental

vac-ds-pdti- 'lord of speech',

subh-ds-pdii- 'lord of splendour',

sddas-as-

According to the analogy of these compounds which end in -s-pati-, were also formed from a-stems rta-s-pati- (only
The word
voc.) 'lord of pious works' and rdtha-s-pdti- 'lord of the car'.

pdti-"^ 'lord

of the sacrificial

seat'.

ddm-pati- may stand for *ddm-s-pati-'^ 'lord of the house' (dam-, the gen.
of which, dam-Am, occurs).

pi.

from this word after the etymology had

been forgotten, as conversely the m. sapainabeginning; hence combinations which appear 'rival' was formed from sa-fdtnT- 'co-wife'.
7 *bfh- here is synonymous with brahman-,
as Bahuvrihis in the older period, are often
only found later as Tatpurusas, the latter brahmanas-pdti- being a parallel and explanabeing thus occasionally affected by the tory formation. On bfhas-pdti- and cognate
1

as

Bahuvrihis

final

with ordinary substantives

member were common from

the

compounds see Otto Strauss, Brhaspati im

formal peculiarities of Bahuvrihis.
2 See Wackernagel z', p. 241 (97 note). Veda (Leipzig 1905), p. 14
17.
8 van- 'wood' appears also in the pi. G.
3 If this compound is a Proper Name, it is
the only instance with the stem-form in the van-am, L. vdm-su.
first member; but the genitive case-ending
9 It is unnecessary to assume the existence
appears in the first member of a few deter- of a stem sad- to explain sddas-fdti- and
sdt-pati- since the stem sadas- occurs ; nor
minative Proper Names; see below, 280 a.
4
'Indra's mi.ssile' (BR.), 'Indra's army' is radh- necessary to explain rddhas-pati(Grassmann).
(only voc.) as radhas- is frequent.
10 PiscHEL, vs. 2, 93 ff., 307 ff., rejects any
5 This is the
opinion of Geldner, VS.
2, 1, and ofDELBKUCK, Vergl. Syntax 3, p. 202. connexion between ddmpati- and dam- 'house'.
6 An anomalous f. gnas-fatni- was formed Cp. Wackernagel 2', p. 249 e, note.

V. Compounds.

Determinatives.

169

a. These compounds in -pdii- are treated by the Pada text in tliree different ways:
gnaspati-, bfhaspati-, vdnasfati-, vispdti- (and vispdlm-) appear as simple words; 2. gnahpdlnJ; jdh-pdti-, sdci-pdti-, j^ia-paie (voc), radhas-pate (voc), and those with a single accent
(except vispdti-') as compounds separated by the Avagraha sign; 3, all other doubly
I.

accented compounds

(e. g.

written rdthak \pdiih

as

brdhmanas-pdti-) as two separate words;

were a nom. sing, i

even rdthas-pdtis

is

if rdthah.

Otherwise the genitive ending appears only two or three times in

divo-dasa- 'Servant of heaven' (?), si'mah-sSpa-^
'Dog's tail', and (with gen. pi.) ndra-sdmsa- (for *ndfam-sd>nsa-)^ 'Praise of
men', an epithet of Agni.
The VS. has also rayas-posa- 'increase of wealth*
in rayas-posa-da- 'bestowing increase of wealth' and rayas-posa-vdni- 'procuring
increase of wealth'.
b. Other case-endings are very rare in such determinatives. The locative
appears in svapne-dusvapnyd- (AV.) 'evil dreaming in sleep'"*; the instrumental
a.

the

RV. in Proper Names:

who makes mischief by '^is words'; the

'Wolf to the Dasyu', N. of a man; and possibly
ddsyave sdhah (i. 36'*) may be meant as a name with double accent.
281. In a few instances the first member is a substantive used appositionally to express sex or composite nature: purusa-mrgd- (VS.) 'male
antelope'; uluka-yatu- 'owl demon' (= demon in form of an owl), susuhikayatu- 'owlet demon'; furusa-vyaghrd- 'man-tiger', a kind of demon, vrsdin vacd-stena- 'thief

dative

by

speech', 'one

in dasyave-vrka- (voc.)

kapi- 'man-ape'.

282. An adjective may appear as first member determining the sense

of the following substantive. This type, which is called Karmadharaya by
Among the oldest
the Indian grammarians, is uncommon in the Samhitas.
are candrd-mas-^ '(bright) moon'* 3.j\& pilrnd-mas-a- (TS. 111.4.4') 'full moon'.
Besides these occur eka-vird- 'unique hero', krsna-sakuni- (AV.) 'raven' 7,
nava-jvard- 'new pain', maha-gramd- 'great host', maha-dhand- 'great booty',
maha-vTrd- 'great hero'^ sapta-rsdyas 'the Seven Seers', N. of a group of
ancient sages (beside the separate words saptd fsayah and fsayah sapid in
Books i-ix), sapta-grdhrih (AV.) 'the seven vultures' 5.
a. A variety of karmadharaya is that in which the first member expresses
a part of the last: adhara-kanthd- {Y^.) 'lower part of the neck', ardha-devd-^"^
'demi-god', ardha-masd- (AV. VS.) 'half-month', madhydm-dina- 'midday'; also
with change of gender: agra-jihvd- (VS.) n. 'tip of the tongue {jihvA-y with
the suffix -a: ardha-rc-d- (AV. VS.) 'hemistich', /zZrt'a/^w-a- 'forenoon'".
283. Prepositions frequently occur as first member, all except pra
Those which are thus used in the RV.
in their ordinary adverbial senses.
;

See

Wackernagel

2',

p.

241

(97 a a,

mean 'moon'

as an abbreviation of candrd-

mds:
change
7 With

note).

of meaning from 'black

s
This name occurs once with tmesis,
bird'.
sunas cic chepam (v. 2').
8 In K.
appears the dative visva-devaya,
3 Cp. naram nd idnua- (l. 1 739 etc.) and
idmso naram (vi, 242); see Wackernagel 2', the expression visve devtih having become a
p.

d, note.
hrade-caksus

248

'mirrored in the lake' is

regarded by Geldner (VS. I, 173) as a Tat'eye in the lake'. For one or two
purusa
doubtful examples of locative pi. see Wacker4

nagel

249 (bottom).

21, p.

a very old combination is

fact that mas- 'moon' occurs
almost exclusively in compounds (surya-masa
three times
3.T\d. piirnd-mds, SB.), only two or
alone (though often in the sense of 'month'),
and is therefore obsolescent in the RV.
6 In the later Samhitas candrd- comes to

That this
shown by the
5

is

Karmadharaya.
9

Translated by

Whitney (AV.

vin. 918)

as a Bahuvrlhi, 'seven-vultured'.
10 ardhd- 'half is here used in a figurative

sense.
II pitd-mahd- (AV. TS. VS.) and taia-mahd(AV.) 'grandfather' and prd-pitamaha- (VS.
TS.) and p-a-iatdniaha- (AV'.) 'great grandfather' (only voc.) are probably notKarmadharayas, but formed in imitation of makamahd- which appeared to be a gradation of
mahani-; cp. Wackernagel 21, p. 255. note.

170

I.

Allgemeines vai) Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

dMi 'over', ni 'down', /arz 'around', prd 'forward' ', 'front part of ', 'extreme'
(of high degree), 'great' (in names of relationship), /raV 'against', w/ 'asunder' 5,
sdm 'together' (also sa- in the same sense); and in the later Sarnhitas, anidr
'between', dj>a 'away', d 'at hand', t'td 'up', i/-pa 'beside', j'/pari 'above'. The
following are examples in the alphabetical order of the prepositions: ddhi-pati(JiN
VS.) 'over-lord', ddhi-patni- (AV.VS.) 'sovereign lady', ddhi-bhojana- 'additional
gift', adhi-rajd- 'supreme king'; antar-desd- (AV.) 'intermediate region', antahpatrd- {Kyi.') 'inner (= interior of the) vessel'; dpa-rupa- (AV.)t 'absence
(VS. MS. i. 2?) 'the lord here'.; *ut-suryaa-patiof form', 'deformity';
'sunrise' in otsurydm (AV.) 'till sunrise' {a-utsurydm); upa-pati- (VS.) 'paramour'
'sub-husband'); upari-sayand- (AV.) 'elevated couch'; ni-dhdna- (AV.)
(lit.
'conclusion', ni-paksati- (VS.) 'second rib', ni-padd- 'low ground', ny-dhna-^ (AV.)
are

'close of day'; pdri-pati- 'lord (of all) around', pari-vatsard- 'full year'; pragathd- (VS.) 'fore-song', a kind of stanza, pra-dis- 'region' and (AV.) 'intermediate quarter', pra-dhdna- 'prize of battle', pradhvand- ('forward course',
ddhvan-) 'bed of a river', prartha- (AV.) 'preparation', 'implement'; prd-pada-^
prd-napat'tip of the foot', prd-iiga- 'forepart of the shafts (of a chariot)' 7;
'great-grandson', pra-tatamaha- (AV.) and prd-pitamaha- (VS. TS.) 'greatgrandfather'; pra-div- (AV.) 'third (or fifth) heaven', prd-patha- 'distant path',
prd-maganda- 'arch-usurer', prd-vira- 'great hero', prayus- (MS. i. S^) 'long
prati-jand- (AV.) 'adversary', prati-divan- 'adversary at play';
life' (ayus);
vi-manyu- 'longing'*,
vi-dis- (VS.) 'intermediate region', vi-madhya- 'middle',
vi-vac- 'opposing shout', 'contest', vy-odana- (RV^) 'different food' 9; sa-pdtm'co-wife', sam-gramd- (AV.) 'assembly', 'encounter', sam-amkd- 'battle-array' ',
sam-bdndhu- 'akin', sam-vatsard-'^^ 'full year'.
284. Other indeclinables sometimes occur as first member, but very
rarely in the RV. They include a few adverbs and the particles a()-, dus-,
SU-, kim-, ku-: pasca-dosd- (VS.) 'late evening', puro-agni- (VS.) 'fire in front';
a-mitra- 'enemy', d-hotr- (AV.) 'incompetent Hotr'; duc-chuna- 'calamity''^;
su-brahmana- (AV.) 'good Brahman', su-bhesaja- (AV. TS.) 'good remedy',
su-vasand-^^ 'fair garment'; kim-purusd- (VS.) a kind of mythical being, kuiara- (RV.), a kind of reed.

4.

Bahuvrihi Compounds.

285. The term Bahuvrihi, employed by the Indian grammarians to

designate this type, is perhaps the most convenient name for these secondary adjective compounds, as it represents their general character both
in form and meaning.
For the final member is practically always a substantive, and the relation of the first member to the last is mostly attributive

I Without perceptibly changing the meaning

of the final member.
^ This and the following meanings do not
occur in the combination ai pra with verbs.
3 Expressing separation, extension, deri-

Once prd-pad-

Probably for fra-yuga-.

From manyu- 'zeal'.
This is Sayana's explanation [vividhe

'nne) of the
10

vation.

word

From dmka-

in

AV.

in viii. 52^.
'front'.

11 sdm in this compound expresses comIn apa-kama- 'aversion' the final member
a verbal noun. There seem to be no cer- pleteness.
12 Cp. sundni 'with success'. On the Sandhi
tain instances of this kind of compound with
apt: cp. Wackernagel 2', p. 259 p, note. see p. 31, note 4.
13 Though vasana- has a concrete sense
5 In ny-arthd'destruction' the second
member is a verbal noun. On the relation here, the compound may have arisen when
of ny-hrbuda- (AV. VS.) and ny-arbudi- (AV.) the word had a verbal meaning.
to arbuda- and arbudi-, see WACKERNAGEL
+

is

2', p.

260

(top).

V. Compounds.

(Karmadharaya),

less

Bahuvrihis.

171

commonly dependent (Tatpurusa), and very

The best name otherwise is 'possessive'',

coordinative (Dvandva).

meaning

their

is

in the vast majority of instances.

rarely
as this

In a few examples, how-

more general sense of 'connected with' (which may usually be expressed more specifically) is required to explain the relation between the
substantive and the Bahuvrlhi which agrees with it; thus dha-prstha- 'borne
on horse-back', devd-psaras- 'affording enjoyment for the gods', parjdnya-retasever, the
_

'sprung from the seed of Parjanya', visvd-krsti- 'dwelling with all peoples',
vihd-nara-" 'belonging to or existing among all men', vird-pastya- 'belonging
to the abode of a hero', satd-sarada- 'lasting a hundred autumns', sura-v'ira(AV.) 'characterized by heroic men'
'making men heroic' (amulet).
285. Attributive Bahuvrihis.
The commonest form of Bahuvrlhi is
that in which an attributive noun is the first member.
It is most frequently an adjective, as ugrd-bahu- 'powerful-armed', urvy-Uii-^ 'giving wide
s.\6! jTvd-putra- 'having living sons', sukrd-varna- 'bright-coloured'
The first
member is also often a past passive participle in -ta or -na, the action
expressed by which is usually performed by the person denoted by the substantive with which the Bahuvrlhi agrees; e. g. prdyata-daksina- 'he by whom
the sacrificial fee has been presented', ratd-havis- 'who offers an oblation' 5.
The action is, however, not infrequently supposed to be performed by
others, always in the case of hata- 'slain'; e. g. hatd-vrsn-i- 'whose husband has been slain', hatd-matr- 'whose mother has been slain'. Both senses
appear in ratd-havya- 'he by whom' and 'to whom offerings have been made'.
An outside agent is sometimes expressed by an additional member at the
beginning of the compound, as jivd-pxta-sarga- 'whose streams have been
drunk by the living'^. A present participle occasionally occurs as first
member; e. g. a-ydd-vasu- (AV.) and sam-ydd-vasu- (AV.) 'to whom wealth
comes', bkrSjad-rsti- 'having glittering spears', rusad-vatsa- 'having a shining
calf, sucdd-ratha- 'having a brilliant car'?; also a perfect-participle in dadrsand-pavi- 'whose felly is visible', yuyujand-sapti- 'whose steeds are yoked'.
a. The first member is further often a substantive used predicatively;
e. g. dha-pania- 'horse-winged'
'whose wings are horses' (car); indra-satrujWhose foe is Indra'j tad-id-artha-^ 'having just that as an aim', dronahavajwhose pail (ahavd-') is a trough', sisnd-deva- 'whose god is a phallus',
siirodaka- (AV.) 'whose water is spirit' {sura-).
The final member is here
sometimes a comparative or superlative (including pdra-) used substan'topsy-turvy' ',
avaras-pard-9 (VS.) 'in which the lower is higher'
tively:
'chiefly bone', indradsthi-bhuyams- (AV.) 'having bone as its chief part'
iyestha- 'having Indra as chief, 'of whom Indra is chief, yamd-srestha- (AV.)
'of whom Yama is best', soma-srestha- (AV.) 'of which Soma is best'.

"*.

6 Cp. Whitney 1299 a.

For other names see Wackernagel 21,
7 Cp. Whitney 1299 b.
273 (107 a, note).
8 Here
2 For several other examples formed with
a pronoun appears instead of a
substantive in the first member.
vihd- see Whitney 1294 b.
1

p.

Cp.
Cp.

The

145, note 3.
1298.
sense is thus identical with verbal

p.

Whitney

determinatives or verbally governing compounds such as vajam-bhara- and bharddvaja- 'bearing booty'. In vili-hotra- 'having

'inviting to
an invitation sacrifice'
a stem in -A' is used almost
fice',

past participle in

name.

-ta;

9 Here the first member retains the -s of

the nom. surviving from the use of the two
words in syntactical juxtaposition; the first
member also is used substantively in this

compound.
1

On

eka-para-

like

(said

of dice)

see

now

LuDERS, Das Wiirfelspiel im alten Indien

a (Abh. d. K. Ges. der Wiss. zu Gottingen

sacri-

cp. vTia-havya- as a

9, 2) p.

64.

172

I.

Allgemeines und Speache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

A comparison is sometimes implied between the first substantive and the

second: varsdj'ya (AY.) 'whose rain is like butter', vrksd-kesa- 'tree-haired'
'wooded' (mountain).
'whose trees are like hair'
The first member further sometimes expresses the material of which the
second consists; e. g. rajatd-nabhi- (VS.) 'whose naval is (made of) silver';
hiranya-nemi- 'whose fellies are (made of) gold'; or something closely
connected with and characteristic of it, as niyiid-ratha- 'whose car is (drawn
by) a team'.
The first member is dependent on the
287. Dependent Bahuvrihis.
last in the sense of a case-relation, the case-ending being sometimes retained.
a. It has often a genitive sense ', as pdti-kama- (AV.) 'having desire for a
husband'; with genitive ending, rayds-kama- 'having a desire of wealth'. Here
the first member often implies a comparison (when it never has the caseending) agni-tejas- (AV.) 'having the brightness of fire', 'fire-bright', fksa-grTva(AV.) 'having the neck of a bear' (demons), gS-vafus- 'having the form of a
cow', jnati-mukha- (AV.) 'having the face of (= like) relatives', mdno-javas'having the swiftness of thought'
'swift as thought', mayiira-roman- 'having
the plumes of peacocks' (Indra's steeds).
b. In a few instances it has the sense of, and then always the ending of,
the instrumental: d-giraukas- 'not to be kept at rest {okas-) by a song
(gird)', krdtva-inagha- 'constituting a reward (gained) by intelhgence', bhasd-

ketu- 'recognisable

by

light'

^."

The locative

sense is more frequent, being often accompanied by

the case-ending: asdnn-isu- 'having arrows in his mouth', divi-yoni- 'having
origin in heaven'; also several formed with dure- 'in the distance', as dureanta- 'ending in the distance', duri-gavyuti- (AV.) 'whose sphere is far away' 3.
There are further examples in which the last member has the locative
c.

when it is a part
member appears in or on

of the body and what is expressed by the first

asru-mukht- (AV.) 'having tears on her face',
'tear-faced', kildlodhn-i- (AV.) 'having sweet drink in her udder', ghrtd-prstha'butter-backed', pdtra-hasta- (AV.) 'having a hand in which is a vessel', manigrtvd- 'having pearls on the neck', mddhii-jihva- 'having a tongue on which
is honey', vdjra-bahu- 'having an arm on which is a bolt'.
288. Coordinate Bahuvrihis.
No example is found in the RV. and
hardly any in the other Sarnhitas of the first and last members of Bahuvrihis
being coordinated in sense. The VS. has stSma-prstha- 'containing Stomas
and Prsthas'; also dhar-divd- (xxxvm. 12) 'daily', which is a kind ofDvandva
Bahuvrihi, being formed from the adverb dhar-divi 'day by day'. The form
somendrd- 'belonging to Soma and Indra', occurs only in B. passages of later
Sainhitas (TS. MS. K.).
In a number of Bahuvrihis
289. Indeclinables as first member.
the first member is not a noun, but an indeclinable word, either a preposition
or an adverb.
a. Prepositions are common as first member of Bahuvrihis, expressing
the local position of the final member in relation to the substantive with
which the Bahuvrihi agrees. Some sixteen prepositions are thus used, the most
frequent being vi which occurs as often in the RV. as all the rest put
together.
They are dti 'beyond', ddhi 'on', antdr 'within', dpa 'away', abhi
sense

it:

^ An accusative in sense and form appears

in tvdm-kama- 'having a desire for thee'.

not a Bahuvrihi with apas- 'work'; cp. 278 a

and 91 B.

3
On a few doubtful instances of such
\vidmdna) is probably a determi- locative compounds see Wackernagel 2',
native formed with the adj. apds- 'working', p. 278 (bottom).
2

with

The compound vidmanapas- 'working

skill'

V. Compounds.

Bahuvrihis.

173

and ^'toward', dva 'down',

'around'

'away', s 'near', ud 'upward', tipa 'near',

pari 'around', prd 'in front', 'very', prdti 'against', vi
'apart', sdm 'together'.
Of these upa is used thus in the RV. only, while
antdr, dva, ni appear in the later Samhitas only. The following are examples
of compounds thus formed in the alphabetical order of the prepositions:
dty-urmi- 'overflowing', dti-cchandas- (VS.) 'having redundant metres' (verse);
ddhi-nirnij- 'having a garment on', ddhy-aJzsa- 'having an eye on', 'overseer';

'down',

nis 'away',

antar-davd- (AV.) 'having

seasonable';

abhl-vira-

fire within';

dpodaka-

apa-rtu- (AV.) 'un-

'waterless',

and abhi-satvan- 'having heroes around',

abhi-rupa-

(AV.) 'beautiful', abhi-send- 'directing arrows'; ava-kesd- (AV.) 'having hair

hanging down', dva-toka- (AV. VS.) 'miscarrying'; d-deva- 'having the gods
near', 'devoted to the gods', A-manas- (AV.TS.) 'kindly disposed'; ut-saktha(VS.) 'having the thighs raised', ud-ojas- 'highly powerful'; upa-manyii- 'having
at hand',
'zealous',
tips-vasu- 'bringing riches near'; ni-manyu- (AV.)

zeal

'whose anger has subsided', ni-vaksas- (TS.

ni-kuld- (VS.) 'going

which

down

sin has subsided');

v. 6.

23') 'having a sunken breast',

from

ni-kilbisd- 'deliverance

hill',

nlr-jarayu- (AV.) 'having

('that

sin'

in

nir-mdya'powerless', nir-hasta- (AV.) 'handless' ; /flrz-wara- (TS.v.6.21') 'having death

around'
'round whom people have died', pari-manyii- 'very angry'; pra-srngd(VS. TS.) 'having prominent horns', prd-tvaksas- 'very energetic'; prd-manas(AV.) 'very thoughtful'; prdti-rupa- 'having a corresponding form', 'like', prativartmdn- (AV.) 'having an opposite course', prdti-vesa- 'neighbour' ('living
i'/
opposite');
'apart'
vi-karnd- (AV.) 'having ears far apart', vi-sakha(AV.) 'branched', vy-amsa- 'having the shoulders apart', 'broad-shouldered';
'extensive': vi-manas- 'wide-minded', 'sagacious', vi-hayas- 'of extensive
power';
'divided': vy-adhvd- (AV.) 'having a divided course'
'being
midway between zenith and earth';
'various': vy-ailaba- (AV.) 'making
all kinds of noises';
'divergent': vi-pathi- 'following wrong paths', vivrata- 'refractory';
'distorted': vi-griva- 'having a twisted neck', vy-aAga(AV.) 'having distorted limbs';
'different': vi-rupa- 'having a different
form', vi-vacas- (AV.) 'speaking differently';
'devoid of, 'less': vi-mdya'devoid of magic', vy-enas- 'guiltless'; sdtn-hanu- (AV.) 'striking the jaws
cast

its

skin',

together'.

b.

Adverbs with a

also frequently appear as

meaning, which are akin to prepositions,

member of Bahuvrihis, being generally speaking

local

first

equivalent in sense to predicative adjectives. Examples of such Bahuvrihis in

the alphabetical order of the adverbs are the following: adhds 'helow' adkdvarcas- (AV.) 'powerful below'; dnti 'near' dnti-mitra- (VS.) 'having friends
dnti-sumna- (AV.) 'having benevolence at hand', dnty-uti- 'having
at hand',
aid at hand'; avds 'down' avo-deva- 'attracting the gods down'; are 'afar'
are-agha- 'having evil far-removed', ari-satru- (AV.) 'whose foes are far away';
:

'helping from hence';

ihd 'here' iheha-matr- 'whose
the one here, the other there'; ihd-kratu- (AV.) 'whose will is
hitherward', ihd-citta- (AV.) 'whose thought is hitherward'; fdhak 'apart'
fdhan-mantra- (AV.) 'having a special sacred text' '; kuhaya 'where?' kuhayadaksinatds-kapardakrti- (only voc.) 'where active?'; dakdna-tds 'on the right'
itds 'hence'

mothers

itd-uti-

are,

nua 'downward'

rucA-vayas- 'whose
puro-rathd- 'whose car is in front', purovasu- (TS. III. 2. 5') 'preceded by wealth' (only voc); pracA 'forward' pracAiihva- 'moving the tongue forward', praca-manyu- (only voc.) 'striving forward'.

'having

coil

strength

is

low';

of hair

purds

on the

'in

front'

right';

According to Whitney on AV.

v. i^; BR.,
pw. 'lacking
distinguished meditations'.

speecli';

Ludwig

'of

174

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

formed with a few adverbs of another kind as first member

such thought', 'devout', nana-sirya- 'illuminated by various suns', punar-

a, Bahuvrihis are also

ittha-dhJ- 'having

magha- (AV. TS.) 'repeatedly offering oblations', /r(2'/ia-/?-fl^7^a:- 'having various aspects',
There are also several formed with sa/td-, sunidd-, smdd-^
sadyd-iii- 'helping at once''.
'together with', as sahd-gopa- 'having the cowherds with them', sahd-furusa- (AV.) 'accompanied by the men', sumdj-jani- 'accompanied by his wife', smndd-gti- (AV.) 'accompanied
by the cows', smid-ablilsu- 'provided with reins', smad-ista- 'having an errand', sniddiidhan- 'provided with an udder'.

Certain particles frequently appear as the first member of Bahua- or an-, ku-^ expressing depreciation, dusan-udakde. g. a-pdd- 'footless', a-sapatnd- 'having no rivals',
'iir, su- 'well';
'having no water', 'waterless'; ku-yava- 'causing a bad harvest', dus-pdd'ill-footed'; su-parnd- 'having beautiful wings'.
290. Bahuvrihis are very frequently used as m. (sometimes f.) substantives in the sense of Proper Names, in many instances without the
adjectival sense occurring at all; thus brhdd-uktha- m., as the N. of a seer
and adj. 'having great praise'; brhdd-diva- m., N. of a seer {brhad-diva- f.,
c.

These are the privative

vrihis.

N. of a goddess)
('to

whom

and

sacrifice

'dwelling in high heaven';

adj.

dear')

is

and vamd-deva- m.

('to

but priyd-medha- m.

whom

the gods are dear')

only as the names of seers.

a. Bahuvrihis are further not infrequently used as neuter substantives
with an abstract and a collective sense, especially when the first member
is
the privative particle a- or an- and sdrva- 'all'; e. g. a-satri'i- 'free from
a-sapatnd- 'having no rivals', n. (AV.)
foes',
n. (AV.) 'freedom from foes',
'peace', a-sambadhd- (AV.) n. 'non-confinement', a-skambhand- (AV.) n. 'lack
of support', an-apatyd- 'childless' (AV.), n. 'childlessness', an-amitrd- (AV.)
sarva-rathd- 'the whole line of
'foeless',
n. (AV. VS.) 'freedom from foes';

(AV. TS.) 'whole property'; ni-kilbisd- n. 'deliverance

pitr-bandhu- (AV.) 'paternal kinship', matr-bandhu- (AV.) 'maternal
rikta-kumbhd-'> (AV^) 'empty-handedness', su-mrgd- (AV.) 'good

chariots', sarva-vedasd-

from

sin',

kinship',

hunting' 5.

category of Bahuvrihis used as substantives are those in

They exis a numeral from dvi- 'two' upwards^.
press a collection or aggregate and are singular neuter ? except those formed
with -ahd- 'day', which are singular masc; e. g. tri-yugd- n. 'period of three
lives', iri-yojand- (AV.) n. 'distance of three Yojanas', try-udayd- n. 'threefold
approach to the altar', dasanguld- n. 'length of ten fingers', dasantarusyd- n.
'distance of ten stations', dvi-rajd- (AV.) n. 'battle of two kings', pancayojand- (AY.) n. 'distance of five Yojanas', sad-aAd-{AY. TS.) m. 'series of
six days'.
These numeral collectives always end in accented -d^.
Considering that Bahuvrihis, which are
291. Origin of Bahuvrihis.
adjectives, are far commoner than the corresponding determinatives, which
are substantives, it cannot be assumed that the former always passed through
b.

which the

special

first

member

The Bahuvrihi compound

of uncertain
21, p.
2

meaning;

see

avir-rj'ika- is

Wackernagel

n.

287 (middle).

Compounds formed with

'safety' (adj.

hrdaya-

these

three

'free

from danger'),

'lack of courage'.
are called Dvigu by the

and

vi-

(.A.V.)

These

Hindu

grammarians, and are classed by them as a

words might also be explained as belonging subdivision of Tatpurusas.

7 A few numeral collectives are determito the 'governing' class.
3 Also the cognate kirn- in kim-sild- (VS. natives used in the pi.
and the original
gender: sapiarsdyas 'the seven seers', sapiaTS.) (land) 'having small stones'.
%''.
grdhrds 'seven vultures' (AV.); iri-kadric-ka4 See WmxNEY's note on AV. XIX.
5 Accentuation of the final syllable (as in
the cognate singular Dvandvas) prevails in
these n. Bahuvrihis; exceptions are d-bhaya-.

'three soma-vessels' (from kadru-

pl.
8

n,

With the

suffix -j/a is

f.).

"

formed sahasrdhn-ya-

(AV.) 'a thousand days' journey'.

v. Compounds.

Governing Compounds.

175

the process of transmutation from the latter. They must in the vast majority
of instances have been formed directly and independently in conformity with
the type of these secondary adjectives which had come down from the Ilr.
periods Wackernagel (2', 112) adopts the view that the origin of Bahuvrihis is not to be explained by transmutation from determinatives, but from
the predicative or appositional use of groups of words characterizing a sub-

This use he exempH&es by the following quotations from the E.V.

uruh kdkso nd gangydh iyi. 45^') 'like the broad shoulder dwelling on the
Ganges', that is, for *uru-kaksah 'Broad-shoulder' as a Proper Name; sd
iayase sdho mahdt (v. 11*) 'thou art born a great power' (^ *2a,^5-i'(3:,^a^ 'one
having great power'); ivdcam krsnSm arandhayat (i. 130^) 'he delivered over
stantive ^.

the black skin' (that

cid vdcasa anavaya

is,

'those having a black skin', 'the black-skins')

droghaya

6 2 9) 'to Anava, deceitful speech', that is, 'who utters

deceitful speech' 3; and narim
sdmsa/i (11.34^) 'praise of men' as representing an earlier stage than ndra-sdmsa- 'receiving the praises of men' as a
(vi.

Appositional Bahuvrihis, he thinks, similarly arose from explanatory

gods having Indra as their mightiest' from
devah indro jyisihah 'the gods
Indra their mightiest'. The first step here
would have been assimilation in case and number to the main substantive,
involving change to a compound (with stem-form and single accent), followed
by assimilation in gender. The change to the Bahuvrihi had already become

Bahuvrlhi.

clauses, as indra-jyestJia devah 'the

the rule in the pre-Vedic period.

5.

Governing Compounds.

292. In a considerable number of compounds the first member governs

the last in sense, being either a preposition (prepositional adverb) or a verbal
noun. These compounds being adjectives are allied to Bahuvrihis.
I. In the prepositional group the first member is a preposition or adverb

capable of governing a case. There are about twenty examples in the RV.
In some instances they seem to have arisen from the corresponding syntactical
combination, as ddhi-ratha- n. 'wagon-load' from ddhi rathe (x. 64") 'on the
wagon'. In other instances they seem to have originated from the corresponding
adverb; thus the adjective va. pra-div-a ketuna (v.eo^) 'with long-existing light'
has been changed from the adverb pra-divas 'from of old' to agree with a
substantive in the instrumental. The ending of the second member has been
preserved for the most part only when it was -a; otherwise the suffix -a or
Like Bahuvrihis, compounds of this type may
-ya is generally added.
become neuter substantives; thus upanas-d- 'being on the wagon', n. (AV.)
'space in a wagon'.
All prepositions which govern cases (except dva) as well as prd
a.
(though it never governs a case), besides several adverbs capable of being

used with a case, are employed as first member in these compounds*. The
following are examples of prepositional governing compounds: ati-matrd(AV.) 'beyond measure', ati-ratrd- 'lasting overnight', dty-ainhas- (VS.) 'beyond
'being
the reach of distress', dty-avi- 'running over the wool'; ddhi-gart-yaadhas-pad-d'being
from
cows';
'derived
(AV.)
adhi-gav-don the car-seat',
1

18,
2

Cp.

63

On

2, p.

88; IF.

substantives used instead of adjec-

similar

in

vrihis;

the

different,

form to the prepositional Bahumeaning, however, is quite

as

in

the

latter

the preposition

does not govern the following member, but

to the substantive with
Cp. drogha-vdc- 'uttering deceitful speech'. refers adverbially
Bahuvrlhi agrees.
Tiiis type of governing compound is which the

tives cp.
4

Brugmann, Grundriss

ff.

Brugmann, Grundriss

2, p. 89.

176

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

under the feet', adho-aksd- 'remaining below the axle'; dnu-path-a- and dnuvariman- (AV. VS.) 'along the road', anu-kamd- 'according to wish', dnuvrata- 'obedient'; dntas-path-a- 'being within the path'; api-prSita- 'being on
(= accompanying) the breath', api-sarvard- 'bordering on night' (JdrvarT-);
abhi-dvu- 'directed to heaven', abhi-rastra- 'overcoming dominion'; a-Jaras-d-"-

'occurring every month'; updri-duMna- 'la.issda.bove the gionnd', updri-martya'being above men'; urdhvd-nabhas- (VS.) 'being above the clouds', urdhvd-barhis(VS.) 'being above the litter'; tiro-ahn-ya- ('being beyond a day' =) 'belonging
to the day before yesterday'; pari-panth-in-'^ ('lying around the path') 'adver-

pari-hastd- (AV.) ('put round the hand') 'hand-amulet'; paro-matrabeyond measure') 'excessive', parS-ks-a- (AV.) ('lying beyond the eye')
'invisible'; puro-gav-d- ('going before the cows') 'leader'; prati-kamya- (AV.)
'being in accordance with desire'; sam-gayd- 'blessing the household'.
2.
In verbal governing compounds the first member is either an
sary',

('being

agent noun or an action noun governing the last member as an object.

The abnormal position of the verbal form before the object in this class is
probably to be explained by the first member having originally been an
imperative, which usually has this position. These compounds are an old
formation, two types going back to the Indo-European period, and one to
They are adjectives, but the final member never adds a
the Indo-Iranian.
compositional suffix except in siksa-nar-d- 'helping men'. Three types are to

be

distinguished.

a. The first member consists of a present stem or the root, which

probably represents an imperative^; of this type there are few examples:
trasd-dasyu- m., N. of a man ('terrify the foe'), rada-vasu-'' (only voc.)
sthi-rasman-^ 'loosening
'dispensing wealth', siksa-nard-'' 'helping men',

bridles'

Examples of the second type are more numerous. Here the first
in -at, but the participle, being formed from present stems
in -a, -d or -aya, which appears in these compounds, in a few instances
does not occur in independent use. This type, which is almost entirely
It seems to have taken the place of
restricted to the RV., is also Iranian.
the older one (a), which owing to its form was apt to be confused with
The form which they
Bahuvrihis though differing from them in meaning.
assumed was probably aided by the analogy of Bahuvrihis with a present
participle as their first member, like sucdd-ratha- 'having a brilliant car',
which are formed from intransitive verbs, while those in the governing compounds are of course transitive. Examples of this type are the following:
rdhdd-ray-^ ('increasing wealth') m., N. of a man, and rdkdd-vara-'' 'increasing
b.

member ends

goods', ksaydd-vira^ 'ruling men', codaydn-mati-^ 'stimulating devotion', /(ZwaV-'"

1

Occurs only in the dative as an advevb

is

doubtful;

it

may be

a simple Bahuvrihi;

'having firm bridles' (Grassmann).

meaning 'up to old age'.
6 krpa-nlda- would be another example if
2 Formed with the suffix -in which is not
properly attached to compounds; cp.WACKER- it means 'arranging his abode', but the
meaning of the first member is doubtful.
NAGEL 21, 53 (p. 121 bottom).
7 fdhdt3 See Brugmann, IF. 18, 76; Delbruck,
is
an aorist participle of rdhVergleichende Syntax 3, 174; Jacobi, Com- 'increase'.
8 From ksdyati 'rules'.
positum und Nebensatz (1897), 46 82;

Wackernagel

21, p.

315.

Rhythmically lengthened for ;-arfa-,te-.

5 The Bada has sthdh-raiman-. The meaning
4

1
'go'.

From

codayati 'urges'.

Jamdi-

a palatalized

form from gavi-

V. Compounds.

Syntactical Compounds.

177

agni- ('going to Agni'), N. of man, tardd-dvesas-'' ''OYtrcoxam.giots', dravaydtsakha-^ 'speeding the comrade', dharaydt-kavi- 'supporting the wise' and
dharaydt-ksiti-i 'supporting men', bhardd-vaja- ('carrying off the prize') m.,
N. of a man, and a-bhardd-vasu-'' 'bringing wealth', mamhayid-rayi-^ 'lavishing
wealth', manddd-vira-^ 'gladdening men', *viddd-asva-^ 'possessing steeds',
viddd-vasu-'^ 'winning wealth', iravaydt-pati- 'making his lord famous', and
sravaydt-sakki-9 'making his friend famous', sandd-rayi- 'bestowing possessions'
and sandd-vaja-^ 'bestowing booty', saddd-yoni-^'^ 'sitting in one's place', sprhayddvarna-^'^ 'striving after lustre'. Two such governing compounds are once combined in such a way that the final member common to both is dropped in
the first: pataydn mandaydt-sakham (i. 4^) 'causing his friend to fly {patdya-)
and to be glad' {manddya-)^^.
c. In the third type, which goes back to the Indo-European period '*, the first
member is a noun of action variously accented. There are some half-dozen

examples

in the

RV.

N. of a man, rity-ap-

'S

dati-vara- 'giving treasures', pusti-gu- ('rearing kine') m.,

'causing waters to flow', viti-rddhas- 'enjoying the oblation',

vitl-hotra- 'enjoying the sacrifice', vrsti-dyiv- 'causing the sky to rain'

6.

'*.

Syntactical Compounds.

293. There are some irregular formations in which words not in coordinate, attributive, dependent or governing relation are compounded owing to
constant juxtaposition in the sentence.
The relative word yat (abl.)
1.
superlative in

RV. m. 53":

utibhih

...

'in

so

far

as'

is

compounded

with a

yac-chresthabhih'-^ 'with the best possible

The adverb yad-radkyam

lit. 'with aids in so far as (they are) the best'.
38^) 'as quickly as possible', lit. 'in so far as possible', is analogous.
The initial words of a text begin to be compounded in the later
2.
Samhitas as a designation of that text; thus ye-yajamahd- (VS.) in the nom.
pi. m. means the text beginning with the vioxd% ye ydjamahe^^.
aids',
(11.

3. Phrases, almost always consisting of two words, used in connexion

with certain actions are compounded; thus aham-uttard-^^ (AV.) 'dispute for
precedence', from the phrase used by each disputant ahdm t'lttarah 'I (am)
higher' ; mama-satyesu 'in disputes as to ownership', in which every one says
mama satydm '(it is) certainly mine'; mam-pasyd- (AV.) as the name of a
plant used by a woman to secure the love of a man with the words m&yn
pasya 'look at me'^^"- Similarly in connexion with persons, as kuvt-sa- 'some
1

From
From
From

14 See Wackernagel 21, p. 320 (bottom).

'overcomes'.
15 This is the only example recognized
dravdya- causative of dru- 'run'.
dharaya- causative of dkr- 'sup- by BR. as belonging to this type; Grass-

tdra-ti

MANN

port'.
+

From bhara-ti 'bears'.

From mamhaya- causative

of

mamh-

'be

great'.
6

the
7

From
wrong

vidnda-ti 'gladdens'. The SV. has

variant vandad-vlra-.

To be

inferred

from the patronymic

vdidadasvi-.
8 From vidd-ti 'finds'.
9 From iravdya- causative of sru- 'hear'.
JO From sdna-ti or sand-ti 'wins'.
11

Lengthened

12

From

for sadad-

from

sdda-ti's\\.%'

j^^/^aya-tf .'desires'.

13 On the doubtful examples arcdd-dhiima-,

kridd-vasu, fraidd-vasu, bhuvad vdsuk (VUI.
1937), vrsad-anji- (voc.) see Wackernagel
21, p. 319 note.
Indo-arische Philologie.

I,

4.

explains them all as Bahuvrihis.

Brugmann, if. 18, 70 f., explains these
compounds as having originated in imperatives, while Jacobi, Compositum und Neben16

f.,
thinks the first member represents an original 3. pers. sing.
17 In AV. VII. 311 yavac-chresthabhis is a
corrupt variant. Compounds formed with
yavai- do not otherwise occur till the Sutras.
18 In the TS. also occurs iddm-madhu- m.
evd
as a designation of the text iddm
saraghdm. tnddhu. This kind of compound
becomes common in the ancillary literature
when particular hymns are referred to,
19 Used in the locative only.
2 One or two doubtful examples are dis-

salz p. 64

cussed by

Wackernagel

2', p.

327
12

(top).

178

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

This type is more commonly based

'is it he?'on phrases used by people about themselves; thus dham-sana'^ (voc.) 'rapacious', that is, one who says ahdm saneyam {dhdnani) 'may I obtain (wealth)';
akam-purvd- 'eager to be first', that is, one who says aMm parvah (syam)
'I (should be) first'; kim-tvd- (VS.) 'asking garrulously' that is, one who conone' from the phrase kuvit sd

tinually says 'what (are)

you

(doing)?'.

DECLENSION.
Grammatik 707 780. Whitney,
VI.

VoUstandige

Benfey,

Declension means the

294. General character.
stems by means of endings which express the various
by what are called cases. The stems belonging to the
are most conveniently divided, owing to difference of

Grammar

261

526.

inflexion of

nominal

relations represented

sphere of declension
meaning, form, and
Pronouns have to be treated
use, into nouns, pronouns, and numerals.
separately because they have certain peculiarities of inflexion, besides to some
Numerals again show other pecuextent lacking the distinction of gender.
Nouns are divided into
liarities of form as well as partial lack of gender.

But
things and adjectives as names of attributes.
of demarcation can be drawn between substantive and
adjective in any of the classes of declension in the Vedic language, these two
categories are nowhere treated separately in the present work.

substantives

no

as

as

definite

names of
line

I.

Lanman, Noun-inflection

in the

Nouns.

Veda, JAOS.

vol.

(1880), p.

325600.

Owing to considerable divergencies of inflexion, nominal stems are

grouped in the two main divisions of consonant and vowel deStems ending, in semivowels form a transition fi'om the former to
clension.
the latter. The stems contained in the two main classes have further to be
sub-divided, owing to difference of derivation and, in part, consequent variety
of inflexion, into radical and derivative stems.
a. Like other Aryan tongues, the Vedic language distinguishes in declension the three genders, masculine, feminine, and neuter. It also distinguishes
three numbers, the singular, dual, and plural, the dual being in full and
295.

best

regular use^b. There are eight cases: nominative, vocative, accusative, instrumental,
and unrestricted use. The same

dative, ablative, genitive, locative, all in regular

ending, however, is to a limited extent employed to express the sense of two and
sometimes of three cases. Thus the! eight cases of the dual have among
them only three endings; in the plural the single ending -bhyas does duty
for both dative and ablative; while in the singular the same ending -as appears
for

both ablative and genitive

in all but the a-declension.

The normal endings

of cases are the following:

c.

Singular: nom. m. f -.r, n. none; voc. of all genders, none; ace. m. f.

am, n. none; inst. -a, dat. -e, abl. gen. -as, loc. -i.
Dual: nom. voc. ace. m. f -a, -au, n. -T, inst. dat. abl. -bhyam, gen. loc. -os.
Plural: nom. voc. ace. m. f. -as, neut. -z; inst. -bhis, dat. abl. -bhyas,
gen. -am, loc. -su.
the 'hieratic' parts of the RV. see Bloomcp. ahdm sand v. 752.
But while the employment of the dual FIELD, Johns Hopkins University Circular for
generally strict, the plural is often used 1905, p. 18 f., Oliphant, ibid. p. 22
31.

RV. vm. 6l9;

is

instead

of

the

dual

of natural

pairs

in

VI. Declension.
d.

Consonant Stems.

179

is often made in the stem between strong (or full)

reduced) case-forms. It appears in its full development
derivative consonant stems, affecting the suffixes -am'; -an, -man,

and weak
only in

Nouns.

distinction
(or_

-van;

-ant, -mant, -vani; -tar; -yams; -varns.

The strong form of the stem
appears in the masculine nom. voc.^ ace. singular and dual, and in the nom.

voc. plural; and in the neuter nom. voc. ace. plural only.
The weak form
of the stem appears in the remaining cases.
But in the first four and in
the last of the above suffixes the weak stem which appears before endings
with initial consonant is further weakened before endings with initial vowel.
e. The way in which the normal endings are attached to the strong
and the weak stem with accompanying shift of accent, may be illustrated by
the inflexion of the stem ad-ant- 'eating' in the masc:
Singular: N. ad-dn. V. dd-an. A. ad-dntam. I. ad-at-a. D. ad-at-l
Ah. G. ad-at-ds. L. ad-at-L
Dual: N. A. ad-dnt-a, -au. V. dd-ant-a, -au. I. D. Ab. ad-dd-bkyam.
G. L. ad-at-ds.
'

Plural: N. ad-dnt-as. V. dd-ant-as. A. ad-at-ds. I. ad-dd-bhis. D. Ab. adG. ad-at-S.ni. L. ad-dt-su.

The neuter differs only in the N. A. V. of all numbers Sing. N. A. ad-dt;
V. dd-at. Du.: N. A. ad-at-i. PL: N. A. ad-dnt-i.
dd-bhyas.

A. Consonant Stems.
296. Among these stems there are none ending in gutturals 3 and only
two ending in the cerebral d. Those which end in the labials /, bh, m are
fairly numerous.
The majority end in dentals, the only class of consonants
in which every sound contained in the group {t, th, d, dh, n) is represented.
Of the semivowels, y is represented by one stem, v by three stems, and r
by a large number of stems. There are many stems ending in the sibilants
s, s, s,
and several in the breathing A as representative of both a new and
an old palatal.
I.

Palatal Stems.

I. Radical stems in -c.

All uncompounded stems (being
297.
of course monosyllabic) are, with very few isolated exceptions, feminine
substantives. The exceptions are: tvdc- 'skin', otherwise f., occurs twice in
the L. sing, tvaci as a m.; drc-, in its only occurrence, I. sing, arc-d, is a
m. adj. in the sense of 'shining'; and kri'mc-, 'curlew' (VS.) is a m. sub-

stantive.

Compounds,

as

being adjectives, are often m.; but excepting those

n. is a-pfk (from pre- 'mix'), used adverbially.

formed with anc- the only

Compounds ending in -anc'' regularly distinguish strong and weak forms.

This distinction elsewhere appears to a limited extent only in compounds
ending in the three roots vyac- 'extend', vac- 'speak', sac- 'accompany': the
first
by nasalization in uru-vydncam^ 'far-extending', the other two by
lengthening the radical vowel in several compounds.
I

aiic

Though

(as

distinguished

is

and

/^i).

in origin a radical element,

practically a suffix; cp. 298.

from the old palatals yi

These compounds formed with the root

will, owing to the peculiar changes
to the accent invariably shifting to the which the stem undergoes, be treated apart
from other words ending in radical t.
initial syllable in this case.
influence of compounds
5 Through the
3 The gutturals as finals of nominal stems
having become the new palatals c,j'' and h^ formed with -anc, like fraty-dncam.
'
The voc. sing., however, generally
assumes a somewhat shortened form owing

aiic-

12*

i8o

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

Inflexion.

The forms

actually occurring,

if

made from

vac-

f.

'speech',

would be

the following:

N. V. vak. A. vacant.
Dual: N. A. V. vaca and vdcau.
I. vagbhis.
A. vicas and vacds.

Sing.

I.
I.

D.

Ab. G. vacds. L. vaci.

vagbhySm (VS.).
Plur.: N. V. vdcas.
D. vagbhyds (VS).
Ab. vagbhyds (AV.).
vacA.

vace.

G. vacam.

The forms actually occurring are:

Sing. N. f. rk (AV.) 'stanza', tvdk 'skin', vak 'speech', h'lk (AV. VS.)
'flame', sruk 'ladle'; ni-mruk (AV.) 'sunset', purusa-vak (VS. xxiv. 33) 'humanvoiced', puro-ruk (TS.vir. 3. 13') 'forward light', j-a;-i/5 (VS. ix. 12) 'argument'.
m. /5r7? (VS. XIX. 43) 'curlew'; anrta-vAk {AM.) 'speaking untruth', upa-pfk
'adhering to', tri-suk (VS. xxxviii. 22) 'having triple light', yatd-sruk 'extending
the ladle', sUrya-tvak (AV.) 'having a covering (bright) as the sun', hiranyatvak 'coated with gold'.
A. f. ream, tvdcam, ri'icam (VS. TS.) 'lustre', vscam, si'icam (AV.),
sicam 'hem', srucam (AV.); a-sicam 'oblation', vi-mt'ccam 'unyoking', sUryatvacam.
m. amho-mucam 'delivering from distress', ddrogha-vacam 'free
from treacherous speech', kuya-vacam 'speaking ill', ianu-rucam 'brilliant in
person', dhdnarcam 'shining {ream) with booty', puro-rucam 'shining in front',
a.

madhu-pfcam 'dispensing

sweetness',

mrdhrd-vacam 'speaking

injuriously',

su-

su-vacam 'very eloquent', surya-tvacam (Kh. iv. 63).

With strengthened stem: uru-vydncam; satya-vacam 'truth- speaking'; apatyasacam 'accompanied with offspring', abki-sdcam 'accompanying', drona-sdcam
ri'icam 'shining brightly",

'clinging to the trough',

gifts'.

I. f.

dhama-sdcam 'keeping

(VS. XX. 36) 'forward

light',

su-ri'ica.

m. arcA

G.

m.

f.

f.

brightly',

L.

f.

tvacds,

srucd; puro-ruca

sicd,

'shining'; uru-vydca, sUrya-tvaca.

z/ai;/

amho-muce (TS.

i.

(VS.xxii. 23),

6. 1 2 3),

tidyata-

visva-iuce 'all-enlightening'.
ni-mrucas.

srucds (AV. VS.);

vi-mucas {napat, V.).

reds, tvacds, vacds;

m. puru-rucas

'shining

su-rucas.
tvaci,

'crying aloud'.

rati-sicam 'bestowing

.;>-^/(VS.xiii.39), /^/ 'offspring', tvace'{NN.), ruce,

D.f.

suce (VS. XXXIX. 12); uru-vydce (AV.).

sruce 'extending the ladle', yatd-sruce,

Ab.

his place',

n. (adv.) a-pfk 'in a mixed manner'.

rca, tvaca, inrca 'injury', ruca, vaca, suca,

vaci,

m.

sruci;

a-tuci 'evening',

tvaci 'skin'

(ix. 6 9

3,

ud-rci 'end',

ni-mruci,

vi-vaci

loi'*).

V. m. dkrtta-ruk 'possessing unimpaired lustre' (x. 84+).

Du. N. A.V. f. vdcau, sicau; ghrta-prca 'sprinkling fatness', tanu-ruca.
With strengthened stem:
satya-vdea.
m. kriincau (VS. xxx. 6);

sam-pfcau (VS. ix. 4) 'united'.

I. m. ati-ri'igbhyam (VS. xxv. 3) 'fetlocks'.
PI. N. f. fcas, prcas 'food', ri'icas, vdcas, sicas (AV.), sriicas'; a-preas
'filling'
(viii. 40 9)^,
divo-ri'icas 'shining from heaven',
ni-mrucas (AV. VS.),
vi-mucas (AV.), V. bhadra-vacas 'speaking auspiciously'.
m. dudhrd-vacas

tanu-ri'ica, yatd-sruca,

su-vdca;

'speaking confusedly', yatd-srucas, vasu-rucas 'bright as the Vasus', vi-pfcas

(VS. XIX. 11) 'parted', z/Z-z/acay, j-aw-j'/iraj- (A V.) 'shedding together', sam-pfcas
(VS. XIX. 11), su-rucas, su-vdeas, suktd-vacas 'uttering good- speech', V. suryaWith strengthened stem: abhi-sdcas, dyajna-sacas 'not performing
sacrifice',
drogha-vdcas 'speaking maliciously', V. nr-sacas 'befriending men',

tvacas.

AV. once

srucas.

(xtx. 422) with

wrong accent

According to BR.,

'satiate oneself.

infinitive

of a-pfc-

VI. Declension.

Consonant Stems.

Nouns.

i8i

ranya-vacas

'speaking agreeably',
rayi-sacas 'possessing wealth',
raii-sdcas,
smdd-rati-sacas 'attended by liberal men', hari-sicas 'occupied
with the tawny (Soma)'.
A. f. rucas, vacas and (once) vacds, sucas (AV.), skas (AV.), srucas
and (once) srucas {AN^^ dur-vAcas (AV.) 'having a bad voice', mrdhrd-vacas,

satya-vacas,

m.

su-rucas.

vacas 'talking

an-rcas 'hymnless',

idly',

a-rucas

'lustreless',

vi-vacas.

mrdhrd-vacas, vddhri-

f._
rgbhis.
D. f. srugbhyds (VS. ii. i).
Ab. f. rgbhyds (AV.)
ream, tvac&m (AV.); madhu-pfcam (AV.).
2g8. Stems in -ano. A considerable number of compounds is formed
by adding as final member the root anc- 'bend', which almost assumes the
character of a suffix ' expressing the meaning of '-ward'; e. g.pranc- {= prd-aiic-)

I.

G.

f.

'for-ward'.

Strong and weak forms

are regularly distinguished, the nasal

which appears in the former being always lost in the latter.

If -anc is
preceded by a word ending in i or u, the syllables ya and va thus produced
are further weakened to t and i( before vowel endings, and if bearing the accent,
shift it to those endings ^; e. g. Sing. A. m. pratydncam, N. n. pratydk, G.pratTcds.
In these compounds -anc is added to words ending in i, a, with which it coalesces
adhardnc- 'tending downward' {ddhara-)i, dpafic- 'backward' {dpa), arvaiic- 'hitherward'
(arvd-\ dvanc- 'downward' (dva), asmatraiic- 'turned toward us', ghrtahc-\ 'filled with
ghee' (ghrtd-), devanc- 'directed toward the gods' [devd-), pdrdnc- 'turned away' {pdrd),
prdnc- 'forward' {pro), visvdnc- 'universal' {visva-^i, sairdnc- 'going together' {satra)^.
2. -i: akiidhrydnc- 7 'going nowhere' (aku-dhri-\ asmadryanc- 'turned towards us' [asmad-ri-Sl
itdahc-^ 'turned upward' {ud), kadrydhc-l (turned towards what' (kdd-), tirydnc- 'going
across' {iiri-)9, a'i2a'/4j/ar- 'sprinkling curds' [dddhi-), devadrydnc-7 'turned towards the gods'
[devd-), nydnc- 'turned down' (ii'i), pratydnc- 'turned towards' {prdli), madryaiic-l 'turned
towards me' (mad-ri-), viivadryanc- 'going everywhere' [visu-a-dri-), svitydnc- 'whitish'
[ivit-i-"), sadhryanc- 7 'co^r\g together' [sa-dhrt- 'the same goal'), samydfic- 'going together'
(sam-i-).
3. -; anvdnc- 'going after' (ffiw/), r/J'cw- 'moving straight forward' (/^'k-)^ visvahc'going in all directions' [visu-), svdiic- 'going well' [su). The two feminines puritc-t'abundant' and uriic-i- 'far-reaching' presuppose similar stems i^puru-diic- and *urti-dne:-).
:

Inflexion.

These stems are inflected in the m. and n. only, as they form a

in -f from the weak or contracted stem, e. g. prdnc-, prdc-i-; pratydnc-,
f.
f. prattc-i-.
The only cases occurring in the pi. are the N. A. and in the
du. the N. A. and L.
The forms actually found, if made from pratydnc-, would be as follows:
Sing. N. m. pratydn, n. pratydk. A. m. pratydncam. I. praticd. D. pratice.
Du. N. A. m. pratydncd, pratydncau (AV.),
Ab. G. praticds. L. pratici.
L. m. praticos.
PI. N. m. pratydncas.
A. m. praticds and
n. pratici.
299.

praticas (AV.).

The forms actually occurring are the following:

Sing. 'ii.m, adhardn {KV), dpah, arvdn, azwz (TS.iii.
a.

2. 5^),

tida7i{AN'),

The f. nardc-i- [PC<I), N. of a plant, is

1 Cp. Whitney 407;
Lindner, Nominalbildung, Addenda p. 167, prefers to treat doubtless based on a similar stem formed
from ndra- 'man', with shift of accent.
anc as a suffix.
2 The
The suffix -ri- in these compounds
7
accent is similarly shifted to the
suffix -t with which the f. of these stems is perhaps spread from sadhri-anc- (the dh also
formed (cp. 86 B II, p. 87)). This rule of to akudhrydnc-), while the d of deva-dryaiicaccentuation applies to the RV. only, not to and visvadrydhc- may be due to the prothe later Samhitas; cp. A. pi. below (p. 182). nominal forms mdd- and asmdd-.
8 The weak stem tidic- being formed as
3 With shifted accent.
4 In this and some other of these com- if from *ud-i-anc-.
9 tiri- appearing instead of iirds- 'across'
pounds only the weak unnasalized form of
from which the weak stem tirdsc- (= tirds-ac-^
the stem occurs.
5

With

shift

of accent.

is

formed.

l82

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

tirydn (AV.), dadhydn ^, nyah,

n. Nearly
(Av.), su-prdn.

pdran

4.

Vedic Grammar.

(AV.), pratydn

',

prdn,

the following forms

all

visvafi,

sadhryan

are used adverbially:

akudhryak, adharik (AV.), dpak, drvak and arvak (AV.), asmadryak, udak,
pdrak (AV.), pratydk, prfik, madryak, visvak, visvadryak,
sadhryak, samydk^.
A. m. adharmcam (AV.), anvdncam (AV.), dpaiicam (AV.), arvdncam,
nydncam, pdrancam (AV.), pratydncam,
t'tdancam, tirydncam (VS. x. 8),
prmcam, madryancam, visvancam, samydncam, svdncam.
I. m. arvdca.
n. devadrtca, satrdca; used adverbially with shifted
accent: tirascd, nicd, pracd^.
tirydk (AV.), nyak,

D. m.

dadhice, svitice.

Ab. m.

praticds.

G. m.

dadhicds, visvdcas^.

L. m. prdci.

Du. N. A. m. dpancau (AV.), arvdnca and arvancau (AV.), visvancau

n. pratici, samicf
(A v.), sadhryanca, samydiica and samydiicau (AV. VS.).
(VS.

31, TS.
PI. N. rri.
I.

IV.

I.

3^).

L.

m.

visucos.

adhardncas (AV.), dpancas (AV.), arvdiicas^, asmairdncas,

pdrancas, pratydhcas,
asmadryahcas, udaiicas, rjvdncas, tirydncas (AV.),
prdncas, visvancas, svitydncasT, sadhryancas, samydncas, svdncas.
A. m. adhardcas, anUcds and arnicas (AV.), dpacas, arvdcas, dvScas,
udicas, nicas (AV.), pdracas, praticds and praticas (AV.), prdcas, visucas,
satrdcas.

Radical stem in

Only one stem ending in ch, which occurs

has been found. This is made from the root
N. du. m. bandhu-pfcch-a 'asking after kinsmen'.
stem also appear as infinitives in the forms
greet'; vi-prccham and sam-pfcchatn 'to ask'.
Stems in radical -j.
These stems are inflected in all three
301.
genders alike. The neuter would of course differ in N. A. V. dual and plural,
but these forms do not occur.
When uncompounded these stems are
f. substantives except yi'ij- and rdj-, which appear as m. also; bhrdj-, which
occurs as a m. adj. as well as a f. substantive; dj'-, which is found once
(AV.)*, and vij- twice as a m. only.
Neuter cases occur from bhdj-, yuj'-,
rdj- and vrj- as final members of adj. compounds, but no distinctively
neuter forms (N. A.V. du. pi.) are met with even here.
The only stem showing traces of the distinction of strong and weak
cases is //-, which has the nasalized form yi'mj- beside the unaltered stem
in the N. A. sing, and du.
In the N. sing, the /, when derived from a guttural, appears as k, but
when it represents an old palatal, it becomes the cerebral / except in rtv-ij'^
'priest'; but before the -su of the L. pi. both alike ^ become k.
300.

-ch.

a single form as a noun,

prcch; 'ask', in the compound
The D. and A. of the same
prcche 'to ask', sam-pfcche 'to
in

see

On the doubling
Lanman 456.

of the n before vowels,

6 The weak form arvdcas seems to be

used for arvdficas in VII. 48'.
7 A transition form, N. m. sviticayas (x. 46')
sviiydncas,
is
made from an i- stem
ivitici- based on the regular f. hitici-.
8
In AV. XIX. 50^, where the reading
djam is somewhat doubtful; see Whitney's

pratydnk- before s- in TS. I. 8. 21 '.

The forms ivadAk, madrikax^&madryadrik,
ytivadrik, 'towards thee,
me,
you', are
doubtless shortened forms of -drydk, which
pronunciation is favoured by the metre in
some instances Lanman 456 (bottom).
note.
4 prdca is
probably used adverbially in
9 Which is derived from yaj- 'sacrifice'
III. 31' also.
As an adj. the form, being a riu-ij- 'sacrificing in due season'.
10 See above 34, I.
compound, would be accented pracd.
5 N. of a demon, formed with -aiic, from
visva-^ an extension oivisu-^ asm-visva'dryafic-.
2

VI. Declension.

Nouns.

Consonant Stems.

183

Inflexion.

302. Sing. N. I. with -k-.ra.. yi'm^ (VS. x. 25) 'associate'; a-bhuk -'not
haying enjoyed', ardha-bhdk (AV.) 'sharer', rta-yuk 'duly harnessed', rtv-ik
'priest', ghrtd-nirnik 'having a garment of fat', candrd-nirnik 'having a
brilliant
garment', para-yfk 'outcast', bhi-sdk' 'healing', satd-bhisak (AV.) 'requiring
a hundred physicians', sam-vrk 'overpowering', sa-yuk 'companion', hiranyasrak (AV.) 'having a golden garland'. f. lirk (VS. iv. 10) 'vigour', nir-nik^
'bright garment', hiraiiya-nirnik.
n. N. A. sv-d-vrk 'easily acquired', su-yuk

'well-joined'

(adv.).

with

-if:

m.

bhraf^ 'shining', rat 'king'; eka-rdt 'monarch.', jana-rdt

in a wood', vi-bkrdt 'resplendent',
vi-rdt 'ruling far and wide', visva-bhrdt 'all-illuminating'; satra-rdt (VS. v.
2)
'king of a Soma sacrifice',
sam-rdt 'universal ruler', sarva-rdt (VS. v. 24)
'ruler of all', sva-rdt 'self-ruler'.
With anomalous loss of the final of the
root and retention of the N. -s: dva-yas^ (i. 162=), a priest who offers the
share of the oblation {ava-ydj-).
f. rdt 'mistress'; vi-rdt.
With anomalous
loss of the final of the root {yaj-) and retention of the N. -s:
ava-yas^
2.

(VS.v. 24) 'lord of men', vane-rdf 'shining

'share of the sacrificial oblation'

A. m. djam (AV.)

(i.

173'^).

yunjam^, yi'ijam; rtv-ijam, j'yestha-rdjain

'sovereign', tri-bhujam (AV.) 'threefold', deva-ydjam (VS. i. 17) 'sacrificing to
the gods', para-vfjam, pi'iskara-srajam (VS. 11. 33) 'wearing a lotus wreath',
purya-bhdjam 'first sharer', prtandjam 'rushing {-djam) to battle', praihamabkdjam 'receiving the first share', pratar-yujam 'yoking early', bhi-sdjam (VS.
XXV111.9), yuva-yi'ijam 'yoked by both of you', ratha-yi'ijam 'yoking to a chariot',
'driver',

vi-rdjam, sapha-ri'ijam 'destroying with hoofs', satya-ydjam 'worshipping truly',

sam-rdjam, sa-yi'ijam, su-tydjam 'easily letting loose', su-ydjam 'worshipping
well',
su-yi'cjam 'well-yoked', su-srdjam (AV.) 'wearing a beautiful garland',
sva-rdjam, sva-vfjam 'appropriating to oneself.
f. flrjam, tujam 'offspring',
bhujam 'enjoyment, bhrdjam (VS. iv. 17) 'splendour', srdjam 'garland'; upaspijam'^ (x. 88'*) 'emulation', nir-nijam, pari-vfjam 'avoiding', pra-yujam
(VS. XI. 6G) 'impulse', mano-yi'ijam 'yoked by thought', vi-rdjam, sahdsranirnijam 'having a thousand adornments', sva-rdjam (AV.).
bhi-sdjd (VS. AV.), mano-yi'ija, vaco-yi'ija 'yoked by a mere
I. m. yujd;
word',
sa-yuja (AV.),
sahdsra-nirnija,
su-ydja (VS. TS.) 'good sacrifice',
f. urjd, tujd, bhrajd 'lustre'; nir-nija, mano-yuja (AV.), vi-rdja.
su-yuja.
n. svatra-bhdjd 'strengthening'.
D. m. yuje (AV.); mrtd-bhraje^ (AV.) 'whose virility is dead', rakso-yi'ije
'associated with demons', vi-rdje (VS. AV.), sam-rdje, sva-rdje'^.
f. urji,
tuje^^, bkuje; nir-nije.
Ab. m. yujds; vi-rdjas.
f. nir-nijas.
f. urjds,
bhrajds " (AV.) 'virility', yujds;
G. m. sam-rdjas, sva-rdjas.
n, sva-rdjas.
pra-yi'ijas 'team', ratna-bhdjas 'dispensing gifts', vi-rdjas (AV.)

Yor yunk; cp. VPr. IV. 1 04.

Probably 'one wlio conjures',

later language,

abhi-sajaii 'utters

Strong form (301).

According to Sayana, used adverbially

cp. in the

an impre- in the sense of 'emulously'.

9 -bkraj- is probably a reduced form of

Brugmann, Grundriss 2, p. 8,
bottom; Uhlenbeck, Etymologisches Wor-

bhrdj-

terbuch, rejects this etymology in favour

of a derivation connected with Av. -bis

'lustre'.
10 There is also

'healing'.

(VS.

cation';

3
4

cp.

From

nir-nij-

There

is

'wash

also

transition

See Lanman 463.

See above 66 c |S

cp.

(v.

61).

later

meaning

46^) from tuj-i:

Probably a reduced

'lustre'.
(p.

the

of

tejas~-

VIII.

12

bhraja-s (ix. 170^).

5

form

the transfer form bhrajaya

40) 'for the bright one'.
11 There is also the transfer form tujaye

out'.

the

Cp.

form of bhrajvn. 902.

Whitney on AV.

i84

Vedic Grammar.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

L. m. dsva-nirniji 'adorned with

V. m. ghfta-nirnik, satfi-rSt.
Du. N. A. V. m. yunja ', yi'ija;

horses'.

sam-sfji

f.

'collision'.

tanu-tydja 'risking

riv-ija,

one's

life',

much',

puskara-sraja, pratar-yitja,
brahma-yi'ija
'harnessed by prayer', bhi-sdja, mano-yuja (VS. AV.), vaco-yi'ija, sam-rSja,
anu-vfjau (AV.) a part of the
sa-yi'ija, sakam-yuja 'joined together', su-yuja;
aptias), bhi-sajau
body near the ribs, apna-rajau 'ruling over wealth' (apnasam-rajau, sa-yi'ijau (AV.), su-yi'ijau (AV.).
f.
aiva-yi'ijau (AV.)
(V.),

puru-bkuja

'enjoying

(V.)

'harnessing horses'.

G. m. sam-rajos.
D. m. bhi-sdgbhyam (AV.).
PI. N. m. yi'ijas; a-yujas (AV.) 'joining on', rtv-ijas, V. riv-ijas (AV.),
krtd-dhvajas 'furnished with banners', giri-bhrdjas' 'glittering on the mountains',
ghrtd-nirnijas,
tanu-tydj'as,
divi-ydjas 'worshipping in heaven',
dur-yujas
nih-sfjas 'pouring out', pitu-bhAjas 'enjoying food',
'difficult to be yoked',
purva-bkdjas, prtanajas {-ajas), pra-yujas (AV.), brahma-yujas, bhi-sdjas, manoratha-yi'ijas, varsd-nirnijas 'clothed
yfijas,
mitra-yiijas 'joined in friendship',
with rain', vama-bhajas 'partaking of goods', viha-sfjas (AV.) 'all-creating',
sam-rSyas, V. sam-rdjas, su-yi'ijas, sva-yiijas 'aUies', sva-rAjas, hdrita-srajas (AV.)
f.
lirjas, tujas, bhi'ijas;
abhi-yujas 'assailants',
'wearing yellow garlands'.
go-bhsjas 'bestowing cows', nir-nijas, prksd-prayajas 'in which oblations begin
stana-bki'/jas ^ 'enjoying the
to be offered', pra-yujas, m-rajas (VS. xvii. 3),

udder', sv-a-yi'ijas 'easy to yoke'.

A. m.

vijas

f.

team

tujas, bhujas, srdjas;

I.

m.

ddhi-nirnijas

(at play);

'stakes'

catur-yujas 'yoked as (a

of)

'covered over',

sapha-ri'ijas,

four',

sa-yi'ijas,

aiva-yujas,

su-yujas.

abhi-yujas.

ariina-yi'igbhis 'furnished with

ruddy

(rays)',

rta-yvgbhis, vi-yugbhis''

(AV.), su-yugbhis, sva-yugbhis.

Ab. m. bhi-sdgbhyas (AV.)
D. f. pra-yiigbhyas (VS.xxx. 8) 'impulses'.
G. m. rtv-ijam, bhi-sdjam. - f. urjam, bhujam; nir-majam^.
L. f. sraksu;

pra-ydksu (AV.) 'offerings' ^303. Stems in derivative

formed with the

substantives

or

van-ij-

m.

There

'trader'.

is

There
-aj

suffixes

sandj- 'old';

dhrsdj- 'bold',

trsndj- 'thirsty',

-j.

etymology, but the -j of which

occurring are the following:

is

Du. N. f.
PI. N. m.
A. m. usijas.

sandja.

G.

I.

m.

usigbhis.
2.

occurs

in

ragkdvas^
1

There
the

f.

A. m.

bhurijos.

bhiir-ij-

f.

'arm',

The forms

suffix.

uHjam, trmdjam, vanijam

G. m. usljas.

trsndje, vanije.

L.

f.

of obscure

is

bhurtjos.

usigbhyas.

G.

f.

usijas.

usijam.

Cerebral Stems.

only one doubtful derivative stem in -/, raghdt-, which

single form raghdtas (AV. viii. 7^*), possibly a mistake for

'swift'.

Strong form (301).

Occurring once (x.

68'),

ihraj- being a

cp.lD.

m.

virid-bhraje,

bhrajds (AV.); cp. p. 183, notes 9 and

The Pada text reads stana-bhuj as.

See

m.

D. m.

WmTNEV's

'2.

note on AV. Vll. 41.

5
A word of doubtful derivation and
meaning, occurring only once (via. 420),
4

us-ij 'desiring',

is

reduced form of dhraj~j

G.

-ij:

usljas, trsndjas, d-trsnajas, dhrsdjas, d-svapnajas.

304.

f.

and

probably a reduced

n. dsrk.
Sing. N. m. usik, vanik.
D.
(AV.)
I. usfja (VS. XV. 6) 'ghee'.

and f. adjectives
d-svapnaj- 'sleepless',

are seven m.

the n. dsrj-'' 'blood', which

also

TS.
7

Tlie corresponding form is fra-ydtsu in

iv. I. 8 and VS. xxvu. 14.
Cp. Brugmann, Grundriss 2, p. 559,

560.
8 See Lanman 466,
on AV. vm. 724.

and Whitney, note

VI. Declension.

Nouns.

Consonant Stems.

There are besides only two radical stems ending in

and

id-" 'refreshment'.

latter

only the smg.

I.

Of

the former occurs

idd and the G. idds^.

only the

i8S

-(/,

id-''

sing.' I.

tda;

'praise'

of the

Dental Stems.

3.

305. Stems ending in all the dental mutes as well as the nasal are of
frequent occurrence except those in -th.
There are radical stems ending in
each of the dentals, but no derivative stems in -th or -dh. The
distinction

of strong and weak appears

stems in -ant and -an.

with slight exceptions

only in the

derivative

306. Stems in radical -t.

The only four monosyllabic stems occurring
are feminine substantives: dyut- 'splendour', nft- 'dancing', ///- 'battle', vrt-''
'hostile array'.
There are also two reduplicated stems, which are primarily
adjectives: cik'it- 'knowing' {Ycit-) and didyi'it- 'shining'.
The rest are com-

pounds, used mostly in the masculine or feminine. Neuter cases occur from
only four of them:
aksi-pdt- 'falling into the eye', dn-apa-vrt- 'not turning
away', tri-vft- 'three-fold', sam-ydt-^ 'continuous'.

Inflexion.

The forms occurring would, if made from tri-vft-, be as follows:

Sing. N. m. f. tri-vft (also n.).
A. m. f, tri-vftam.
I. m. f. tri-vfta
(also n.).
D. m. f. tri-vfte.
Ab. G. m. f. tri-vftas.
L. n. tri-vfti (AV.).
Du. N. A. m. f. tri-vfta, tri-vftau.
L. f. tri-vftos.
PI. N. A. m. f. tri-vftas.
I. n. tri-vfdbhis (AV.).
G. m. f. tri-vftam.
L. f. tri-vftsu.
V. m. f, tri-vrias.
The forms actually ocurring are the following:
Sing. N. m. ana-vft 'not returning', dbandhu-krt^ (AV.) 'not cutting off

6*a-jr/ (A V.) 'one-fold', 'simple', ^'/JiV'knowing','

kin',

pra-vft (VS. XV.

9),

/r?-z'r/'( VS.

manas-cit 'thinking in the mind',

x. 10)

'triple',

mida-kft (AV.) 'cutting

roots', vipas-cit 'inspired', vi-vft (VS.xv.9), visu-vft 'rolling in various directions',

sa-vft (VS. XV. 9),

(AV.) a noxious

su-vft 'turning well'.

insect,

didyi'tt 'shining',

as adv. aksi-pdt 'a

tri-vft:

A. m.
ghee',

a-cttajn

little'

'unthinking',

f!,

cit

(VS.1v.19) 'thought';

vi-dyut 'flashing'.

and dnapa-vrt
eka-vftam

apa-cit

n. eka-vft (AV.),

'unremittingly'.

ghrta-scutam 'sprinkling

(AV.),

dus-citam (AV.) 'thinking evil',

madhu-sci'itam 'distilling
sweetness', vipas-citam, visU-vftam, su-vftam, huras-dtam 'plotting deceit'.
f. dyi'dam, vftam;
a-vftam 'turning home', ghrta-scutam, vi-cftam 'loosening',
vi-dyutam, vipas-citam, sam-ydtam, sam-vftam (AV.) 'approach',
sam-cftam
tri-vftam,

'union'.
I.

m.

vipas-cita (VS. iv. 32), su-vfta.

f. dyuts,
vrtd;
a-cita
pra-cdta 'with concealment' (adv.), vi-dyi'iia.

tri-vfta,

'attention', ghrta-sci'ita, tri-vfta,

n. sam-ydtd,

D. m.
(VS. XV.

9),

Ab. m.
'
2

is

p.

tri-vfta (AV.).
tri-vfte (VS. xv. 9),

a-cite,

Cp. above 17,

5.

'refreshment' which
of very frequent occurrence; cp. above

Derived from

35, note

is-

I.

This form is regarded by Grassmann in

one passage (vil. 47 1) as an A. pi.: cp.
3

Lanman
4 vft-

jective.

pra-vfte (VS. xv.

9),

vipas-cite,

vi-vfte

f. vi-dyute.
sa-vfte (VS. xv. 9), su-dyiite.
f. didyutas.
tri-vftas (VS. xiii. 54), vi-dyi'dasT .

466.
occurs once in the dual as a fem. ad-

From
From

yat- 'unite'.

krt- 'cut';
but
relative-making' (kr-t); see
6

on AV.

IV.

it

may be

'not

Whitney's note

191.

The Ab.

didyot (TS. I. 8. I41) and vidyot

(VS. XX. 2) are probably irregular formations
due to parallelism ; cp. Lanman 468.
7

86

I.

G. m.
f.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

Vedic Grammar.

tri-vftas, vipas-citas, sa-citas 'wise', su-dyutas 'shining beautifully'.

L.

vi-dyutas.

n. tri-vfti (AV.).

Du. N. A. V. m.
madhu-sci'ita,

PI.

4.

vipas-cita (V.), isu-kfta'^ (1.1843).

vi-cftau (AV.).

N. m.

L.

f.

f.

vftau; a-vfta,

vi-cftos (AV.).

rsti-vidyutas 'glittering with spears',

eka-vftas (AV.),
sam-ydtas, surya-svitas
'bright as the sun', svd-vidyutas 'self-lightning', hraduiiT-vftas 'bringing hail'.
N. f. apa-citas (AV.), a-vftas (AV.), upa-vftas
V. rsti-vidyutas, vi-dyutas.

ghrta-ici'ctas,

a-vftas,

dui-citas

(AV.),

vi-dyutas,

vipas-citas,

(VS. AV.)

A. m.

(VS.

ghrta-scyutas

ghrta-scuias,

'return',

madhu-scyi'itas (VS. xvii. 3),

vi-dyutas, sam-ydtas.

xvii. 3),

V.

madhu-scutas,

dpa-citas (AV.).

a-dyutas 'lacking brightness', ghrta-sci'das, vipas-citas, huras-

a-citas,

nftas (AV.), vftas; tri-vftas (AV.), daksina-vftas, didyi'itas, puruvftas (AV.) 'moving in various ways', madhu-sci'ctas, vi-dyiitas, visu-vftas (AV).,
sam-ydtas, sam-vftas (AV.).
f.
apa-citam (AV.), viI. n. tri-vfdbhis (AV.).
G. m. vipas-dtam.

citas.

f.

dyutam (AV.).
L. f. prtsu^^
Derivative nominal stems are
307. Stems in determinative -t.
formed from nearly thirty roots ending in the short vowels /, u and r by
means of the suffix -t^. The roots adding it are i- 'go', kr- 'make', ksi- 'dwell',

gu- 'sound',

ci- 'pile', 'note',

//- 'swell', pru- 'flow',

cyu- 'move', ji- 'conquer', dhr- 'hold', dhvr- 'injure',

mi-

bhr- 'bear',

'fix',

yu-

'join'

and

'separate',

ri- 'flow',

vr- 'cover', sri- 'resort', sru- 'hear', su- 'press', sr- 'flow', stu- 'praise', spr- 'win',

hvr- or hru- 'be crooked'.

Two other
modified so as to end in short a
(representing the sonant nasal) before adding the suffix: -gd-t and hd-t.
These stems are mostly m. and f. Neuter cases are very rare, occurring
from five or six stems only. The inflexion is exactly the same as that of

hu-

sru- 'flow',
roots,

gam-

hr-

'sacrifice',

and han-

'go',

the stems in radical

'take',

'strike',

are

-/.

Inflexion.

308.

Sing. N.

m. with

abhisti-kft 'giving help',

lord',

rsi-kft

aji-kft

'making into

'causing

-kri:

anukama-kft 'acting according

to

desire',

a contest', Tsana-kft 'acting as

khaja-kft 'causing the din of battle',

'instituting
seer',

tanu-kft 'preserving life', pathi-kft 'path-making',

puru-kft 'doing much', pUrva-kft (VS. xx. 36) 'active from of old', bhadrakft 'bestowing blessings', uloka-kft 'procuring free space', vayas-kft 'creating
youthful vigour', varivo-kft 'bestowing freedom', vijesa-kft 'procuring victory',
jyotis-kft

light',

steya-kft 'committing theft', syona-kft 'causing comfort',

(VS. II. 9) 'offering right sacrifice';
with -jii: apsu-jit 'conquering in the waters', ab-jit 'winning waters', abhimati-jit (VS. xxvii. 3)
'conquering foes', asva-jit 'winning horses', rta-jit (VS. xvii. 83) 'winner of
right', go-jit 'winning kine',
dhana-jit 'winning booty', ranya-jit 'winning in

su-kft 'acting well',

svista-kft

ratha-jit 'winning chariots', visva-jit 'all-conquering', samsrsta-jit 'conquering combatants', satya-jit (VS. xvii. 83) "winner of truth', satra-jit 'wholly
victorious', samarya-jit 'winning battles', sahasra-jit 'conquering a thousand',
sena-jit (VS. xv. i g) 'conquering armies', svar-jit 'winning heaven', hiranya-jit
'winning gold'; with other roots: acyuta-ksit (VS. v. 13) 'dwelling immovably';
acyuta-cyiit 'shaking what is firm'; d-dara-srt (AV.) 'not falling into a crack';
a-ksit 'dwelling';
rna-cit 'avenging guilt',
rta-cit 'observing sacred order';

battle',

I
isu-kfieva here may, however, be a
3 This suffix -i partakes of the character
D. sing, for isukHe va; see Lanman 468.
of a root determinative, as roots in -i -u -r
^
With double ending once (l. 1294) are hardly ever used without it as nominal
1

i>fim-su.

stems.

VI. Declension.
kilbisa-spft 'removing sm'

dhft 'preserving men'

'heard

Consonant Stems.

Nouns.

187

ksatra-bhft (VS. xxvii. 7) 'holder of sway'; carsani'heard afar',

deva-srt'it (VS. xxxvii. 18)

dlrgha-srt'd

by the gods';

'dwelling firmly';

dhana-spft 'winning booty';

dhruva-ksit (VS. v. 13)
pari-hrut 'overthrowing'; puta-bhft (VS. xviii. 21) a kind
bhara-bhft 'bearing a load'; mada-cyut 'reeling with excite-

of soma vessel;
ment'; madhu-sut 'emitting sweetness'; yaksa-bhf-t 'supporting pursuers' (?),
vajra-bhrt 'wielding a thunderbolt'; vaja-sH 'running for a prize'; sapatna-kslt
(VS. I. 29) 'destroying rivals'; /:/'3r;z-V (VS. xxvii. 45) 'heaped up like the
bird Suparna'; soma-si'it 'pressing Soma'; sva-srt 'going one's own way'; havanasriit

'hearing invocations'.

f.

upa-bhft (VS.

ir.

6) 'sacrificial ladle';

upa-mit

'prop'; rta-cit; pari-sriit (VS.xix. 15) 'fermented liquor'; prasasta-kft 'bestowing

praise'.
N. A. n. visva-jit; dirgha-iri'it, nava-gdt (AV. TS.) 'first-bearing',
purTtdt^ (VS. xxxix. 9) 'pericardium'; as adverbs: upa-sjut 'invoked', dyu-gdt
'going to heaven', sa-krt ('one-making') 'once'.
A. m. adhi-ksitam 'ruler', adhvara-kftam (VS. I. 24) 'performing sacrifice',
arno-vftam 'enclosing the waters', uktha-bhftam 'offering verses', uda-pridatn

rna-cyutam 'inciting to (fulfil) obligations', carsam-dhftam,

pungent (juice)', trsu-cyutam 'moving greedily', dirghasri'Uam, dus-kftam 'acting wickedly', dveso-yutam 'removing hostility', dhanajitam (VS. xi. 8), dhana-spftam, nadi-vftam 'stream- obstructing', pari-sri'ctam
'flowing around', pratar-jltam 'conquering early', mada-cyi'dam, mithu-kftam
'fallen into trouble', vayas-kftam{^%.u\.\Z), vaja-jitam (VS. 11. 7) 'winning spoil',
sravo-jitam 'winning renown', sam-jitam 'conqueror', satya-dhvftam 'perverting
satra-jitam (VS. xi. 8), sahas-kftam (VS. iii. 18) 'bestowing strength',
truth',

'swimming

in water',

tivra-si'ctam 'pressing

chants', su-kftam, svar-jitam, svista-kftam (VS. xxi. 47),

f. aram-kftam 'making
havana-sri'Uam, havis-krtant 'preparing the oblation'.
ready', upa-prutam 'flowing near', deva-srutam, ni-yiitam 'team', pari-srutam.
I. VQ.. abhi-jita (^S.yiW]) 'victorious', upari-pri'ita (VS. vii. 3) 'falling from
f. ni-yutd,
above', carsam-dhfta, brahma-kfta 'offering prayers', soma-suta.

sama-bhftam 'bringing

pari-sruta '{YS.ynyi.&z), pari-hvrtd' (viii. 47^) 'deceiving'.

D. m. aram-kfte, dus-kfte, dharma-kfte 'establishing order', brahma-kfte,
su-krte; ab-jite, asva-jite, urvara-jite 'winning fertile fields', go-jite, dhana-jite,
nr-jite

conquenng men

satra-jite,

visva-jite,

mountains', parvata-cyi'de 'shaking mountains',

svar-jite;

giri-ksite

soma-bhfte (VS.

'dwelling in

v. i)

'bringing

Soma'.
pari-srutas (VS. XIX. 75) 'foaming', brahma-krtas, sarva-hidas
abhi-hrutas 'injurious'.
f.
carsant-dhftas, vaja-jitas (VS.ix. 13), virya-kftas (VS.x. 25) 'doing

Ab. m.

'offered completely'.

G. m.

mighty deeds',

'

sam-jitas,

su-kftas,

havis-kftas.

f.

isa-sti'das^,

deva-stidas

'praising the gods', pari-srt'das (AV.).

L. m. mada-cyidi, go-jiti, vasu-jiti (AV.) 'winning goods', sam-dhana-Jiti^

(AV.) 'winning booty together'.

V. m.

uru-krt 'making wide', rta-cit, khaja-krt, puru-krt,

vandana-srut 'listening to praise', vaja-jit (VS. 11. 7),
(AV.), rdsjra-bhrt (AV.)
f. upa-bhrt
havis-krt (VS i. 15).

acyuia-cyut,

rana-krt 'causing
sahasra-jit,

joy',

'bearing sway'.
1 The second part of the word may be
derived from tan- 'stretch' like -ga-i- from

gam- 'go'.
2 With anomalous

accent; but the form may

beL. oipari-hvrti; the normal accent of which
would he-pari-hurti-; seeLANMAN 502 (bottom).

3 isa-

Pada

is-

'refreshment',

text reads isah-stutas,

isak (before
regards isa
4

BR.; but the

and GRA.SSMANN

si-)

Instead of *dkana-sam-Jiti.

as G. of

z';-.

88

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

Du. N. A. V. m. go-jita,

Vedic Grammar.

4.

divi-ksUs 'dwelling in the sky', pari-ksita 'dwelling

around', mada-cyuta, j-z^-inz/a 'hearing well', havana-sruta, Y. pdt/ii-krts {KV.);

d-dns-krtau, krsna-pri'itan 'moving in darkness', sa-kfiau (AV.j 'acting at once',

sa-ksHau

G.

'dwelling

(AV.).

f.

together',

ugra-jitau (AV.)

sii-kftau

bhadra-kftau (AV.), su-sri'dau

(name of an Apsaras).

(AV.),

'fierce-conquering'

su-kfios, pari-ksUos.

f.

N. V. m.

PI.

with

citas (VS.

i.

iS)

-krt: aram-kftas, isana-kfias,

dudhra-lftas 'boisterous',

dus-kftas,

'heaping up', hrutas 'stumbling-blocks';

karma-kftas (VS. iii. 47) 'skilful in work',
dhanya-kftas'^ 'preparing grain',

brahma-

krtas, yajna-nis-kftas 'preparing the sacrifice', vayas-kftas, su-kftas, havis-kftas;

with

-cyiit:

dhama-cyutas 'shaking the ground',

with

immovable', parvata-cyi'itas, mada-cyiitas;

dhruva-cyutas 'shaking the

-ksit: apsu-ksitas 'dwelling in

the waters', uj>a-ksttas 'dwelling near', vraja-ksitas (VS. x. 4) 'resting in their

with other roots: adhva-gdtas (AV.) 'travellers', arthetas'
(VS. X. 3) 'swift', uda-prutas, urdhva-ciias (VS. i. 18) 'piling up', krcchre-sritas

station', sa-ksitas;

'undergoing danger', grama-jltas 'conquering troops', carsam-dkftas, janabhftas (VS. X. 4) 'supporting people', divi-sritas (AV.) 'going to heaven', devasriitas (VS. VI. 30), dveso-yutas, ni-gutas 'enemies', pari-cUas (VS. xii.46) 'piling
up around', pitu-bhftas 'bringing food', purva-citas (VS. xxvn. 4) 'piling up
mano-dhftas 'inteUigent', V. vaja-jitas (VS. ix. 9), vi-citas (VS. iv. 24)
first',
visva-bhftas (VS. x. 4) 'all-nourishing', satya-sriitas 'hearing the truth',
su-kftas (VS. xxxiii. 16), su-sriitas, soma-suias, sva-sftas, havana-

'sifting',

satra-jilas,
s'rutas.

f.

tnitas 'posts',

'praises';

sttitas

uda-pri'itas,

pitu-bhftas, sam-hatas 'layers', sa-srutas 'streaming'.

renowned' appears to be used as a n.

A. m. hrutas and hrutas"^ (AV.);

pi. in

ni-yutas,

agreement with vrata

a-pitas 'not swelling',

kftas, dus-kftas, ni-gutas, mada-cyutas, su-kftas.

pari-sri'das,

N. A. n. dXrgha-srut
f.

(viii.

'far-

25^^)3.

go-jitas, jyotis-

ritas 'flowing'; I'lpa-stutas

'invocations', dirgha-sri'itas, ni-yutas, bali-hftas 'paying tribute', varuna-dhri'itas

'deceiving Varuna', vi-sftas 'flowing asunder', sa-srutas.

I.

m.

soma-sudbhis.

f.

antariksa-prudbhis 'floating over the atmosphere',

ni-yudbhis.

D. m.

isu-kfdbhyas (VS. xvi. 46) 'arrow-makers', dhanus-kfdbhyas (VS.

bandhu-ksidbhyas 'dwelling among
46) 'bow-makers', pathi-kfdbhyas,
Ab. n. tanu-kfdbhyas.
kinsmen'.
G. m. agni-hotra-hutam (AV.) 'offering the oblation to Agni', isu-bhftam
(AV.) 'archers', mantra-kftam 'composers of hymns', su-kftam.
f. abhi-hrictam,
upa-citam (VS. xii. 97) a kind of disease, upa-mitam (AV.), ni-yutam, parimitam (AV.) 'rafters', prati-mitam (AV.) 'props', ratha-jitam (AV.).
XVI.

L. m. su-kftsu.

Derivative Stems in

-vat,

-tat,

-it,

-ut

and secondary

-t.

309. The following stems are formed with the suffix (i) -vat^: arva-vdif 'proximity', a-vdt- (AY.) i. 'proximity', ud-vdt- f 'height', ni-vdt- i. 'depth',
para-vdt- f. 'distance', pra-vdt- i. 'height', sam-vdt- i. 'region';
(2) -tat^:
upard-tatsatyd-tat-

'

f.
f.

'vicinity',

'reality',

devd-tat-

sarvd-tat-

f.

i.

'divine service',

dhanya-kfias in the Pada text.

That is, 'going [i-t) to the

See Lanman 503 (bottom),

the N. A. pi. n.
3

With

irregular accent.

and 474 on

f.

i.

'wolfishness',

'contiguous', div-it-^

See above, secondary nominal derivation,

233-

Cp. above 215 a.

In this word the suffix -it probably consists of the root /- 'go' with the primary
(determinative) -t (307).
6

[drtha-].

vrkd-tat-

(3) -it: tad-it-

'totality';

VI. Declension.

'gomg to the

sky', yos-It-

Consonant Stems.

Nouns.

'young woman', roh-it- f. 'red mare', sar-U- f. 'stream',

mar-ut- m. 'storm-god'; (5) with secondary -i:
the two neuters ydkr-t--" (AV.) 'liver', Ukr-t-^ 'excrement',
and perhaps the
etymologically obscure m. ndpati 'descendant', all three of which are supple-

/lar-it-

mented

The
-/

'fallow';

f.

in the

inflexion

(4)

weak

f.

-ut;

by the stems yakdn-, sakdn- and ndptr- respectively.

^/ stems is the same as that 'of the radical

cases

of this group of

stems.

Inflexion.
310. Sing.
'great-grandson'.

N. m.

i.

tdnu-ndpat 'son of himself, ndpat, prd-napat

paravdt, pravdt, rohit, sarii (VS. xxxw. 11).
n. vdjirf
taiit,

(VS. AV.), Jdkri.

A. m. tdnu-ndpatam, ndpatam.
f, arvavdtam, pardvdtam,
yositam, rohitam {KS[.), samvdtam (AV.).

I.

m.

divita.

udvdta,

f.

devdtsta^,

nivdta,

pravdta,

pravdtam,
satydtata^,

sarvdtata'i, harita.

D.

f.

There

devdtate.

is

also the transfer

form avirat-e (from a-vira-ta-

'lack of sons').

Ab.
G.

f.

f. arvavdtas, udvdtas^, nivdtas^, paravdtas, pravdtas, samvdtas.

pravdtas.

L.

f.

arvavdti, upardtati, devdtati, paravdii, vrkdtati.

V. m. tanu-7iapat, napat^.
Du. N. A. V. m. ndpata.
Pi. N. m. ndpatas, marutas,

f.

G.
dvdtas

harita.

haritas.

paravdtas (AV.), pravdtas, yositas (AV),

f.

f.

haritos.

(AV.), udvdtas, taditas,

saritas, haritas.

paravdtas, pravdtas,
m. marudbhis. pravddbhis. D. m.
pravdtam.
Ab. m. marudbhyas. G. m.
m. marutsu.
pravdtsu.
A. m. marutas.

f.

udvdtas, nivdtas,

yositas (AV.),

rohitas, samvdtas, saritas, haritas.

I.

mari'idbhyas.

f.

tnariitam.

Li.

f.

udvdtsu, nivdtsu,

V. m. indra-marutas 'O Indra and

Participial
311.

of stems

f.

Stems

the Maruts'j

in -at

and

napatas, marutas.

-ant,

Participles in -at are almost limited to the present active form

made

intensives (545).

with reduplication, viz. those of the third class (457) and of

The old reduplicated participle (from ga- 'go') jdgat- 'going',

'living', is used chiefly as a n. substantive meaning 'the animate world'.

The
analogy of these participles is followed by a few others formed from unreduplicated stems dis-at- 'worshipping', sis-at- 'instructing' ^ also ddksat- and
dhdksat-, the aor. participle of dah- 'burn'.
A few others, again, originally
participles, having come to be used as substantives, have shifted the accent
to the suffix: vah-dt-^ 'stream', veh-dt-^ (AY. YS.) f. 'barren cow', vdgh-dt-^
m. 'sacrificer', srav-dt-^^ f. 'stream'; Hke the regular participle sds'c-at- (from
sac- 'accompany'), which as a substantive becomes sak-dt- m. 'pursuer'.
In
:

6 Perhaps marut in evaya-marut.

Cp. Lat. jecur.
Cp. Brugmann, Grundriss 2, p. 559.
7 Lanman
505, would place dasat- 'in3 The suffix may here have been a pri- juring' here, but there is no evidence, as
mary -t added to the root pa-: cp. Leu- only a weak case, dasatas G. sing., occurs.
mann's etymology (1888), Festgruss an Boht8 But vdh-ant- 'carrying'.
lingk 77 f.; Brugmann 2, p. 366.
9 The derivation of this word is obscure.
10 In one or two passages vdghdt- still
4
These forms might be locatives of
'

devdtati-, salydtati-, sarvdtati-.

5

These forms might be A.

retains
pi.

"

its

participial sense.

But srdv-ant-

'flowing'.

190

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

but only about half a dozen neuter forms

class masculines are frequent,

this

Vedic Grammar.

occur, and the feminines are limited to three substantives' and the adjective
The inflexion is like that of the radical -t stems, the
a-sascdt 'unequalled'^.
accent never shifting to the endings.

Inflexion.
312. Sing. N. m. i. reduplicating class ^ : clkyat, jdhat, j'uhvat, dddat,
2. intensives : kdnikradat and
dddhat, bdpsat ( Ybhas-), bibhyat, bibhrat.
kdnikrat, kdrikrat {kr- 'do') and {a-)cdrikrat (AV.), ghdnighnat and jdilghanat

{Y han-),

cdniscadat {Yscand-), cdrkrsat, cakasat {Ykas-), cdkitat (j^c/V-),

dMisat, didyat, ddvidyutat, dodhuvat,
jcigrat,
tdvitvat, ddrdrat,
ddvidhvat, ndnadat, ndnnamat, pdniphanat, bhdribhrat, mdrmrjat, mdrmrsat,
me'myat, rarajat, rMhat, roruvat, vdrivrjat, vdvadat, vdvidat, vhisat, sosucat,
idrbhurat,

vaghdt,
sdnisyadat {Ysyand-), sesidhat.
3. non-reduplicating verbs:
aor. ddksat and dhdksat.
N. A. n. I. jdgat, ddvidyutat, pepisat,
s'dsat;
ydyuvat (AV.).
N. f. vehdt (AV. VS.).
2. kdrikratam{hN.),
A.m. 1. d-sascatam {1.112'^), dddatam, Mbhratam.
f. a-saicdtam
gdnigtnatam, dtdyatam, ndnadatam, pdnipnatam, rSruvatam (AV.).

(11.

vehdtam (AV.).

3 2 3);

m. dddata, sosucata.
D. m. 1. jujosate, juhvate,
I.

3.

vaghdte. n.

Ab. m.
G. m. I.

I.

a-sascdta.

n. jdgata (AV.).

dddhate, bib/irate, sdkate.

7,.

ghdnighnate.

jdgate {KSf^.

2. kdnikradatas.

jigatas, dddatas, dddhatas, bdpsatas.

dodhatas, vevisatas.
2.

f.

3. vaghdtas, sdsatas,

dhdksatas

2.

jdnghnatas, tdritratas,
n. i.jdgatas.

(aor.).

a-vdrvrtatas (AV.), vdvadatas.

L. n. jdgati,
Du. N. A.V. m. a-sascdta, bdpsata, bibhrata; tdritrata; sasata; dddhatau,

bibhratau.

f.

N. m.

a-sascdta.

G. m.

pipratos.

juhvatas, titratas, dddatas, dddhatas, pipratas, bdpsatas,

2. kdrikratas, j'dgratas, j'ohuvatas, ddvidhvatas, didhyatas,
bibhratas, sisratas'^.
{.a-sascdtas,
dddhatas, nonuvatas, mdrmrjatas, sSsucatas.
3. ddsatas, vaghdtas.
PI.

I.

vahdtas, sravdtas.
A. m.i. jdksatas

l/^/zaj-).

1. j'dgratas

(AV.), dddhatas (AV.), sdsvasatas,

ndnadadbhis, popruthadbhis, vdvadadbhis, sdsvasadbhis.

m.
sravdtam.
vaghddbhts. G. m. Jdgatam, bibhyatdm (AV.); vaghdtam.

sdsucatas (AV.).
I.

3.

f.

sravdtas.

sascdtas;

2.

f.

V. m.

jagatas, vaghatas.

313. Participles in -ant are formed from all present stems (except
those of the reduplicating class and of intensives and the few others that
follow their analogy), from all future stems, and from aorist stems. Their
analogy is followed by rhdnt- 'weak', pj-sant- 'spotted', brhdnt- 'great', riisant'brilhant', which have lost their participial function; also by ddnt-^ m. 'tooth'.

The

adjective

mahdnt-

'great',

having

lost

its

original

participial

meaning

deviates from the participial declension in lengthening the vowel of the suffix
in

the strong forms.

In the inflexion of

this

group the distinction between

1
The f. of the regular participles is
5
This word is probably an old pres.
participle of ad- 'eat', with prehistoric loss
formed by the suffix -i.
2 But d-sascant-i from sdscat-.
of the initial a like s-dnt- 'being' from.fw3 See below. Verb, 461.
'be' (25, I). The RV. has one transfer form,
There occurs once an anomalous N. pi. N. dania-s (starting from the A. ddnt-am);
with -ant from a reduplicated stem vavfdh- the AV. has others, ddntas and ddntais.
dntas.
See below, Perfect, 492, note on
:

vdvfdhvams-.

VI. Declension.

Nouns.

Consonant Stems.

191

strong and weak forms is regularly made, -ant appearing in the former
only and being reduced to -at in the latter, which shift the accent, if resting
on the suffix, to the| ending. These participles are declined in the m.
and n. only, as they form a special f. stem in -r\ The m. and n. forms
are the same,

except of course in the N. A.;

the former are very frequent,

the latter rare.

Inflexion.

The forms

314.
follows

occurring,

made from

if

bhdvat- 'being', would be as

N.m. bhdvan ^
n. bhdvat.
A. m. bhdvantam.
I. m. n. bhdvata.
Ab. m. n. bhdvatas.
G. m. n. bhdvatas.
L. bhdvati.
Du. N. A. V. m. bhdvanta and bhdvantau.
n. bhdvati.
D. bhdvadbhyam.
G. m. n. bhdvatas.
PI. N. m. bhdvantas. n. bhdvanti.
A. m. bhdvatas.
I. bhdvadbhis.
D. m. bhdvadbhyas.
Ab. m. bhdvadbhyas. G. m. n. bhdvatam.
L. m. n. bhdvatsu.
Sing,

D.

bhdvate.

Forms actually occurring are the following. It is unnecessary to enumerate

the m. N. and A. forms, as in the RV. alone 228 forms of the N. sing.,
121 of the A. sing., and 166 of the N. pi. 3 occur.
Sing. N. m. Examples are: drcan, sidan; ghndn, ydn, sdn; pdsyan;
icchdn; krnvdn, sunvdn; bhanjdn; jandn; jandyan; yuyutsan; karisydn. Also
dan, 'tooth' "*; mahan^.
n. andt, dsat^, isndt, ejat, e'saf, kulaydyat, cdrat,
citdyat, trpdt, dhrsdt, pdtat, patdyat, mindt, ydt, raghuydt, vdrdhat, sdmsat,
Hksat, svdyat, sdt, sunvdt; adj. brhdt, mahdt, rusat; aor. sdksat (y'j-a/i-);
all

As adv. with

of accent: dravdt 'swiftly' {dru- 'run'},

from drh- 'be firm').
A.m. Examples are: cdrantam; ydntam, usdntam, sdntam; yudhyantam;
vidhdntam; krnvdntam; prncdntam; grndntam; dltsantam; ddntam; brhdntam,
fut. bhavisydt (AV.).

drahydt

'firmly'

shift

(irregular formation

mahdntam.
1. m. d-ghnata, dvata., d-sunvatd, cdrata, janati, tuj'atd, pusyata, bhindats,
vanusyatd; data, syavd-data (AV.) 'dark-toothed', brhatd, mahatd, rusata.
n. d-drpyata, d-sredhata, d-hedata, dsata^, usatd, gavyats, tvayatd, dhrsatd
(adv.), sucatd, sravasyatd, samaryata, sumnayatd; brhatd, mahatd, rusata.

D. m.

I.

firom

isudhyat^,

isayate,

stems accented on the

isuyat^,

jurati, janati, tvdyate,

usate,

rjUyate,

suffix:

rtayate,

avasyate,

asvayate,

kpwate, gavyate, grnat^,

devayate, dvisate, dhiyayate, dhunvate, prnate, prcchate,

brahmanyate, mahayati, mdnavasyate, yajndyate, yate, vanvate, vidhate, srnvate,

sravasyatd, sakhiyate, sati, sificati, sunvate, stuvate; rhate, brhate, mahatS;
fut. avisyate.
2.

n.

sucate, sanayate.

from stems accented on the radical or the penultimate

d-ghnate,

a-coddte^, d-tninate,

drcate,

drhate,

iyaksate,

cdrate,

syllable:

cetate,

tdrate.

1 On the difference in the form of this f.

regarded by Benfey as N. sing. m. (Gottinger
Nachrichten 1878, p. 190).
stem see 201, 377, 455, 461, etc.
6 For a-sai (vil. 10412);
2 On the Sandhi of such nominatives see
the Pada reads

Lanman
3

506.
Lists of

asal.

the

participle

stems will be

The Pada reads

a-hat (x. 8914).

8 Once (IV. 514) with lengthened initial for

found below under each of the conjugational
classes, under the secondary conjugations, a-sat-a 'not being', also once asatasi;ya.. 1048);
the Pp. has asata and asaiak. See Grassand under the future.
also in several compounds MANN, Worterbuch, under d-sat.
4 Occurring
Wrong accentuation (in v. 442) for
9
a-ddn 'toothless', etc.; ubhay&-dam.(kN.v, 192)
d-codaie; see Lanman 508 (top).
must be emended to -dann.
5 maham in II. 24", iv. 23', IX. 1097 is

192

I.

trsyate,

Allgemeines und Sprache.

Vedic Grammar.

ddsate, fdcafe, pipTsate, pusyate, ydjate, yi'idhyati, rajate, risate, vddafe,

sdmsate, sdrdhate, sisasate, hdryate; a-ddte'^ 'toothless'.

Ab. I. m. krnvatds, prnatds, vanusyatas; brhatds.

2.

m. d-bhuhjatas, d-vadatas, jighamsatas,

G. m. I. aratJyatds, undatds, usatds,

risatas.

n.
n.

rgkSyaids,

brhatds, wahatds.
d-satas.

risyaids,

krnvatds,

ksiyatds, grnatds, tujatds, turatds, turanyatds, tvayatds, durhanayatds, dvisatds,

brahmanyatds, minatds, misatds, yatds, rudhatds,

satds, saparyatds, sunvatds, stuvatds, huvatds;

dhrsatds, piiuyatds, prnatds,

vapusyatds, vidhatds,
brhatds, mahatds;
1.

cdratas,

fut. karisyatds.

jdratas,

jdyatas,

drcatas,

d-sunvatas,

jigharnsatas, jij'yasatas, jivatas,

dhdmatas, dhrdjatas, piyatas,

tfsyatas, didasatas, drdvatas,

ririksatas,

d-bhunjatas,

d-juryatas,

d-ghnatas,
cetatas,

sucatds,

inaksatas,
turvatas,

bhiisatas, yudhyatas,

vdyatas, vdrdhatas, ve'natas, sdrdhatas, socatas, sisasafas,

rebfiatas,

sidatas, hdrsatas; n'csatas.

n.

L. m.
n.

I.

brhatds, mahatds.

krpayatds, pranatds'^, misatds, yatds, satds;

I.

2. asatas^, cdratas, bhdvatas, ve'natas,

yati,

I.

mahatl.

mahatl.

sunvati;

sisasatas; ri'csatas.

2.

irdyati,

ubhaya-dati (AV.).

2. d-sati.

Du. N. A. V.

forms in

i.
accented on the suffix: ainanta,
-a.
gavydnta, dasasydnta, disdnta, duhdnts, pants,
pundnta, prncdnta, bhujdnta, mindnta, misdnta, ydnta, yanta, vanvdnts, vasnaydnta, vajaydntd, ly-dnta, vrdhdnta, srnvdnta, sdnta, saparydnta, sumnaydnta;
2. accented on the penultimate or antebrhdnta, brhanta (V.), mahdnta.
penultimate:
d-mardhanta, d-yatanta, drhanta, isdyanta, ksdyantS, cdranta,
coddyanta, jandyanta, jdranta, drdvanta, dhdmanta, pardyantd, pipanta,
mddanta, rddanta, vddanta, vdpants, vdhanta, vajdyanta, venanta, sddanta,
sdpanta, sdhanta, sadhantl, hdyanta.
ai7idntau, tirdntau, ydntau, vrdhdntau, sdntau;
b) forms in -au.
i.

irajydnta,

usdnta,

a)

gmdnta'',

mahdiitau.
rAjantau.

2.

isdyantau,

kridantau,

ksdyantau,

mddantait (AV.), ydjantau,

D. m. mrdayddbhySm; mahddbhyam.
N. A. n. yatt; brhati.
n. sam-yatos (AV.) 'going together'.
G. m. jdratos.
PI. N. m. From the very numerous forms occurring the following maybe quoted: mddantas; gh7idntas, ydntas, sdntas; pdsyantas; icchdntas; bhinddntas;

aor. krdntas^,
krnvdntas; gpidntas; devaydntas, vajaydntas; dipsantas^;
bkiddntasT ; pfsatas (VS. xxiv. 11), maha.ntas'^.
V. usantas; mahantas.
N. A. n. sdnti'^; brhdnti (AV. vm. g'), mahinti.
A. m. I. usatds, rghdyatds, grnatds, tarusyatds, tvayatds, prnatds,
prtanyatxs, bhandandyatds, manayatds, yatds, rudatds, vanusyatds, vajayatds,

vidhatds, srnvatds, sravasyatds, srudhiyatds, sakhiyatds, satds, sasatds, stuvatds;

brhatds, mahatds; datds.

2.

pdtatas,

d-prnatas,
rdyatas,

sisrpsatas;

d-prayucchatas,

risatas,

ri'iruksatas

ksdyatas, dhdvatas, dhrdjatas,

Yruh-^, vddatas, vrddhatas, sdrdhatas,

drcatas,
(

syavd-datas (AV.).

1
On the accent see 90 B
of ad-dni- 'eating', would be

c.

The

ad-ai-i.

dative

^ gmdntas should perhaps be read for

gmdnta in I. 12211.
7 On the anomalous N. pi. perf. participle,

That is, pra-anatas.

For dsaias according to tlie Pada text. vavrdhdntas, see above p. igo, note 4.
8 ubhaya-datas
In one
participle of gam- 'go'.
in X. go'o is perhaps a,
4 Aor.
passage (l. 122") the Pada reads gmanta; metrical shortening for -ifa;'(Zj'; cp. Lanman
the sense seems to require the pi. gmdntas. 509 (bottom). The AV. has the transfer form
ddntds; cp. p. 190, note 5.
See Lanman 509.
9 The Pada text reads sdnii; see RPr.
5 Desiderative of dabh- 'injure'; cp. LanIX. 25.
man 508 (gen. masc).
2

"VI.

I.

m.

Declension.

d-nimisadbhis,

Nouns.

Consonant Stems.

d-prayucchadbhis,

d-sredhadbhis,

193

usddbhis,

citdyad-

bhis, tujdyadbhis, devayddbhis, dhdvadbhis, patdyadbhis, rebhadbhis, vddadbhis,

vajayddbhis,

vrdjadbhis,
sucddb/iis,
sucdyadbhis,
subhdyadbhis, socadbhis;
brhddbhis, mahddbkis, rusadbhis; dadb/iis^.
n. sucdyadbhis, standyadbhis
brhddbkis, mahddbhis, rusadbhis.
D. m. iisddbhyas, ksudhyadbhyas, grnddbhyas, tvayddbhyas, pdsyadbhyas,

prayddbhyas, vddadbhyas, vdhadbhyas, sunvddbhyas; brhddbhyas, mahddbhyas;

dadb^ds (AV.).
Ab. m. para-yddbhyas.
G. m. I. adhvarJyatam, usatam, rjUyatdm, grnafdm, ghnatam, juratdm,
devayatam, dvisatsm, yatdm, yatdm, vanusyatdm, vajayatam, satrUyatdm,
srnvatdm, sravasyatdm, sakhTyatdm, satdm, sasatdm, sunvatdm, stuvatdm,
sthatarn',
brfiatdm, mahatdm;
datdm (AV.).
2. d-sunvatam,
cdratam,
jdyatam, nrtyatam, pdtatam, vivasatam, sdrdhatam.
n. ratkiraydtam^.

L.

m. gnuUsu,

devaydisu, patdyatsu, mahdtsii.

Stems
As

315.
inflected

in -mant

these two suffixes have the

and
same

n. j&ryatsu.

-vant.
sense, that of 'possessing',

and

stems formed with them are best treated

together in declension.
These stems are used in the m. and n. only*, as
they form a separate f. by adding -r to the weak stem. They are inflected
like the participles in -ant except that they lengthen the vowel of the
suffix in the N. sing. m. and never shift the accent from the suffix to
the ending in the weak cases. Strong and weak forms are as strictly
The regular vocative of these stems
distinguished as in the -an( stems s.
ends in -mas and -vas in the RV., but the AV. has neither* in any inare

exactly alike,

the

dependent passage, and the VS. has only bhagavas and patnivas. The RV.
has also three vocatives in -van, and the AV. adds five others; but no voc.
in

-man occurs.
Three stems

in -vant and one in -mant have case-forms supplementing

the inflexion of stems in -an and forming transitions from the latter declension
to the former. Thus from maghdvant- 'bountiful' alone are formed the pi. I.:
maghdvadbhis, D. maghdvadbhyas, L. maghdvatsu; also the N. sing, maghdvan
beside the usual tnaghdva from maghdvan-; from sdhavant- the N. sdhavan
beside sahdva; from yuvant- 'young', the A. n. yuvat beside the N. m. yuvd;
from varimdnt- the I. m. sing, varimdta beside forms from varimdn- 'width' 7,

Inflexion.
316. Sing. N.m. i. from stems in -vant: aksanvdn^, agnivdn, dngirasvan>
dnnavan, d-pavtravan, dmavan, drvan, asirvan, idavan, isdvan, fghavan,
ksapdvan and ksdpavan, ghfmvan, jdnivan, tdpasvdn,
etdvafi, kaksivan,
tarsydvdn, tdvasvdn, tdviswdn, tdvdn, tuvirdvSn^, tvdvan, damsdndvdn, ddksina-

has the transfer form kratumata (x. 59'), N. du. m., indravatas (iv.
274), N. pi.; see Lanman 516.
6 In AV. XIX. 348 the Mss. read bhagavas
2 From the aor. stem stJmt- 'standing'.
emended to samabJiavas in the
3 With irregular accent on the suffix in- which is
printed text.
stead of the ending, from rathird-yat-.
7 On the other hand, arvant- 'steed', has
4 In two or three instances the m. form
seems to be used for the f., as havismata two forms representing a transition to the
see Lan- -an declension: N. arva, A. anidnam.
{I. 1282) and rdthavate (l. 122");
8 On the Sandhi of these forms, see LanMAN 515 (bottom).
5 There seem, however, to be two or man 517.
9 Probably for *iuvl-rdva-vdn.
three instances of a weak form used instead
of a strong: ksuviati (iv. 218), A. pi. n.,
1

The AV.

(xi. 337)

dintais.

Indo-ariscbe Philologie.

I.

4.

13

194

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Gr-\mmar.

van^, datravan, dsnavan, ddsvan, durhdndvan, devdvan, dev&van, dyumndvan,

ndmasvan, niyutvan, nilavSn, pdyasvdn, pavHravdn, pdviravan, pastyavan,
pi'iramdhivan, pusanvan, praj&van, prdyasvan, pravdtvan, prahAvan, bhdgavan,
maghdvan, matdvan, matsardvan, mdnasvan, mari'dvan, mdhasvan, maydvdn,
mahinavan, mehdndvan, ydsasvdn, yatumavan, rdbhasvdn, rdsavdn, revdn,
vAjavdn, vajinivan, vivakvan, vivdsvan, vfsanvan, vrsnyavdn, sdcivdn, sarddvdn,
sdsvan, sipravan, siprinivan, simTvdn, sdkhivan, sabksvan, sdrasvdn, sdhasvdn,
sahavan and sdhavan, sutsvan, sunrtsvan, stavdn', svadh&vdn, svddhitivdn,
svarvdn, hdrivan, hitdvdn, hemydva7i.
2. From stems in -/ufltnf: abdiman, dviman, asdniman, isuman, udanimSn,

kakudmdn, krdtuman, gari'itmdn, gStnan, iuvismdn, tvdstrmdn,

dyumdn, dhrdjiman, nadanumdn, parasumdn, pasumdn, pitumdn,
barhismdn, mddhuman, vdsuman, viri'ikmdn, vrstimdn, sdrumdn, socisman,
susumdn, havismdn, hiriman.
N. A. n. I. apdsthdvat, dmavat, arcivdt, dsvavat, dsvdvat, atmanvdi,
avftvat, iravat^ fghdvat, etdvat, ksditavat, gopsvat, grdbhanavat, ghrtdvat,
candrdvat, tdvat, tokdvai, tvdvat, ddksinavai, dyumndvat, dhanavat, dhvasrbkumdn,

tvisimdn,

ndmasvat, nilavat, nrvdt, padvdt, pdyasvat, pastydvat, pfsadvat,

barhdndvai, ydvat, yuvat^, rdthavat, rdsavat, revdt, vayunavat,
vayundvat, vdjavat, vipfkvat, vivdsvat, visdvat, vTrdvat, satdvat, s'apkdvat,

manvdt,

prajdvat,

sdsvat^, sahdsravat, sdhasvat, sinavat, svarvat, hiranyavat.

rbhumdt, ketumdt, krdtumat, ksumdt, gomat, jyotismat,

ddnumat, dyumdt, nidhimdt, pasumdt, pitumdt, pustimdt,
mddhumat, manyumdt, ydvamat, rayimdt, vdsumat, svastimdt.
A. m. I. apidhdnavantain, apupdvantam, drvaniam, dsvdvantam, asthanvdntam, dtmanvdntam, indrasvantam^, urjasvantam, lirndvantam, eidvajitam.
enasvantam, ojasvantam, omanvantam, omydvantam, kaksivanta?n, ghrtdvantam,
ddsvantam, devdvantam, dhdndvantam, dhivantam, nrvdntam, padvdntam,
pdrasvantam, prajdvantam, bhdsvantam, marutvantam, mdhisvantam, rdinavantam, revdntam, vapdvantam, vaydvantam, vdjavantam, vdravantam, vivasvantam, virdvantam, vfsanvantam, satdvantam, sdsvantam, sacandvantam,
sdrasvantam, hdrivantam, hdstavantam, hiranyavantam.
2.
rbhumdntam, kdnvamaniam, ketutndntam, ksumdntam, gomantam,
jyotismantam, tdvinmantam, dyumdntam, nidhimdntam, piiumdntam, bdndhutnantam, bhdnumdntam, mddhumantam, vdsumantam, vdsimantam, vrstimdntam,
srustimdntam, havismantam, fiotrmantam.
2.

tvisTmat,

abkistimdt,

dasmdt,

1. I. m. drvatd, dsvdvatd, udanvdtd, fkvata, kaksivata, niyt'itvatd, nrvdtd,

marutvatd, ydsasvatd, revdtd, visvddevyavatd, visuvdtd, subhrdvata, sdhasvatd.
n. etdvatd, candrdvata, prajdvatd, barhdndvatd, vivdsvatd, sunrtdvata, hdrit-

vatd, sdsvata.
2.
m. gomatd, jyotismatd, divitmats, dyumdtd, bhrstimdtd, varimdtd^,
vdsumata, viriikmata, havismatd.
n. divitmatd, viriikmatd, havismatd; as

adv.

sdsvata'^.

D.i.m.

drvate, dsvdvate, kaksivate, afe'te'wSz'a^^ 'adroit'

and 'bestowing

gifts',

datvdte, ddsvate, niyutvate^, pusanvdte, maridvate, mdvate, yuvdvaie, rdihavate'^,

1

Representing two words

{daksina- 'right hand');

2.

I. 'dexterous'
'possessing sacri:

6
Transfer
variman-.

form

from

the

-an

stem

See Lanman 518 (bottom).

Erronously unaccented (l. 135').
ystan-; see Grassmann, s. v.
9 The f. raihavatyai should perhaps be read
3 Transfer form from the -an stem j/uz)an-.
for rathavate in I. 122^1, as the latter form
4 Also
the Amredita compound idsvac- agrees with a f. substantive, and the former
fical gifts' [daksina-).
2

To be read

siavan 'thundering',

from

chahiai,
5

With

is

the N.

-j-

anomalously retained.

favoured by the metre; cp.

Lanman

5 19.

VL
vivdsvate
hdrivate.
^

and

vhasvaie,

Consonant Stems.

Nouns.

sdclvate,

idsvate,

sdhasvate,

n. padvdte, revdte, sdsvate.

gdmaie, cdksusmate, tvisTmate,

m.

2.

Declension.

divitmate,

195

sunrtsvate,

dyumdie,

svarvate,

barhismate,

kavismate.

Ab.
G.

m. tvavatas, vivdsvaias, vfsnyavaias.

m. drvatas, dsvavatas, kaksivatas, jdvatas,

I.

I.

dasvatas,

devdvatas,

dhivatas^,

niyutvatas,

tvavatas, dadhanvdtas'-,
nrvdtas, prajavatas, marutvatas,

mavatas, mehdnavatas, ydiasvatas, revdtas, vdyasvatas, vsjavatas, vivdsvaias

and vivasvatas, virdvatas, sdcivatas, sdsvatas, sdrasvatas, sdhasvatas, sutdvatas,

surdvatas, svadhdvatas, hfsivatas.
n. etdvatas, ydvatas, visuvdtas, sdsvatas.
ksumdtas, gomatas, dyumdtas, havismatas.
2.
n. gdmatas.

m.

L.

m.

ddksinavati 'bestowing gifts', nrvdti, pastyhvati, ydsasvatif vdnanvati, vivdsvati and vivasvati, saryandvati.
n. dsvavati, simivati,
svarvati.
2. m. gomati.
I.

drvati,

V. m.

The normal form

occurs in sixteen examples: rsivas,

bhagavas (VS. TS.), marutvas,
rayivas, vajrivas, viravas, saktivas, sacTvas, sarasvas, sahasvas, svadhavas,
harivas.
Of the later V. ending in -van, the RV. has three examples:
arvan, satavan^, iavasavan. In the AV. the following five additional forms
occur: marutvan^, vajinivan, vrsnyavan, svadhavan, harivan^. The MS. has
patnivanT.
2. There are six examples of the form in -mas: tuvismas, dyumas,
bhamtmas, mantumas, sucismas, havismas.
No vocative form in -7nan occurs.
Du. N. A. V. m. I. with -a: dngirasvanta, dnasvanta, drvanta, indravanta, kdsavanta, kesavanta, dhdrmavanta, ndmasvanta, niyi'ttvanta, pavitravanta, mari'itvantd, mitravdrimavanta, vdjavantd, visnuvanta, vydcasvanta,
sdsvanta^, sdptivanta; with -au: asthtvdntau, ydvaniau (AV.), romanvantau,
gnavas'^,

I.

tavistvas,

in -vas'^

niyutvas, patntvas (VS.),

sdhasvantau (AV.), V. svddhdvantau (AV.).

krdtumanta^, vadhftmantd.

2.

arcimdnta,

rbhumdnta,

Ab. I. m. asthivddbhydm.
G. i. m. vdjinivatos, simtvatos, sdrasvatwatos.
Plur. N. V. m. i. aksanvdntas, dnasvantas, dmavantas, drvantas, dsvavantas, asirvantas, iddvantas, indravantas, mdravantas (TS.iv. y. 14^)^, lirjasenasvantas,
kaksivantas,
kdrnavantas, ghrtdvantas,
vantas,
casdlavantas,
ddkdnavantas'\>^^\amag^i\, dsmanvantas, duvasvantas (VS.xvi. 6$), drdvinasvantas, dhtvantas, ndmasvantas, niyutvantas, nrvdntas, pdtnivantas, padvdntas,
pdyasvantas (VS.xx1.42), pavitravantas, pdjasvantas, pustdvantas, pUsanvdntas,
prajdvantas, prdyasvantas, pravdivantas, bhdgavantas, mari'itvantas, mdhasvantas
(VS.xx1.42), yajndvantas, vacandvantas, vdyasvantas (VS.iii. 18}, vdrmanvantas,
virdvantas,

vrctvantas,

vantas, srkdvantas (TS.

sdsvantas,

sdktlvantas,
iv. 5. 11^),

svadhdvantas

simivantas,

sdptTvantas, sutd-

himdvantas,

(V.), svdrva?itas,

kfsivantas.
2. anjimdntas, dyusmantas (TS.), isumantas, rstimdntas, ksumdntas,j'ydtismantas, tvdsirmantas (VS.xxvii. 20), tvisimantas, dyumdntas, mddhumantas,
1

'containing curds';

Also the Amredita

cp.

Lanman

compound

513.
dhivato-

The Pada

text reads sata-van; cp. RPr.

IX. 10.
6 These

two forms occurring in passages

Elsewhere ten vocatives in -vas and -mas taken from the RV. are substituted for
occur: five from perfect participle stems in marutvas and harivas of the RV.
7 That is, patnlvdin.
-vams: khidvas, cikiivas, titirvas, didivas,
8 The mysterious form satapanta (x. 106^)
midhvas; four from stems ending in -van:
riavas, evayavas, p-atarituas, matarihas; and should perhaps be corrected to sdtavanta
pumas from pumdms-. There are also two saia-vanld ?
9 The weak form kratuviatd seems to be
in -yas from comparative stems in -yavis:
used for kratumantd in x. 591.
ojiyas and jyayas.
10 The weak form indrdvatas seems to be
4 In II. l5 gnmjos should probably be read
used for indravantas in IV. 27
gnavas as a vocative.
dkvuaias.
3

13*

196

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

Vedic Grammar.

4.

midhusmantas yavamantas, rayimantas, vadhihnantas, vdstmantas, sisumanias,

harmmdntas, havismantas.
2. pasumdnti. The Padapatlia reads -afiti in these
N. A. n. 1. ghrtdvanti.
The weak
forms, and the lengthening of the vowel seems to be metrical ^
form ksumdti (used with, yuthd) seems to be used for ksumdnti in iv. 2'*.
,

sthivimdntas,

A. m.

I.

drvatas,

'

indravatas,

krsandvatas, jdnivatas, tdpas-

rtviyavatas,

vatas, trsydvatas, tvavatas, nrvdtas, pdtnTvatas, pdrasvatas (VS. xxiv. 28) 'wild
asses',

pastyavatas, posyavatas, prajavatas, bhanguravatas, ydsasvaias, yatuma-

rdbhasvatas, rayivdtas, revdtas, vdnanvatas, vfctvaias, saryandvatas,

simTvatas, stddvatas,
sUnrtdvatas, hiranyavatas,
Msasvatas.
rtumdtas (VS. xix. 61), gjmatas, jyotismatas, dyumdtas'^, prdsiimatas,

vatas,

sdsvatas,
2.

mddhumatas, vadhAmatas, virnkmatas,

stlnutndias, svastimdtas.

m.

drvadbhis, ddksinavadbhis, pdtmvadbkis, maghdvadbhis'', rdbhasvadb/tis, revddbhis, vdjavadbhis, sdsvadbhis, simlvadbhis, sutdsomavadbhis.
barhlsrstimddbhis, krldumddbhis, gomadbhis,
n. ghrtdvadbhis.
2. m.
I.

I.

n. mddhumadbhis.
madbhis, bkanumddbhis, vidyumiiadbhis, havismadbJiis.
D. I. m. dicvasvadbhyas (VS.ix. 35), bhdgavadbhyas{PiS[ .), maghdvadb/iyas^,
mujavadbhyas (AV.), somavadbhyas (AV.).
2. m. asimddbhyas (VS.XVI. 21),
n. vibhuisumadbhyas (VS. xvi. 22), matrmddbhyas (AV.), yltumddbhyas.

mddbhyas.

G. m.

I.

drvatatn, ddksinavata7n, datvdtam (AV.), bhangurdvatam,

yatumd-

2. gdmaiam(AY.).
vaiam, sdsvatam, simTvatam, sutdvatam, himdvatatn (AV.).
2. dyumdtsu.
L. m. I. dmavaisu, drvatsu, magkdvatsu^, yusmdvatsu.

Stems

in radical -th.

There are only three stems

317.
path', with

its

Among them

compound
these

su-pdth-

three furnish

.'fair

kdprth-^ n.

in -th:

'penis',

and abhi-sndth-

path',

examples of

all

adj.

path-^ m.
'piercing'.

the cases in the singular,

but there are no dual forms, and in the plural only the A. and G. occur.
Sing. 'H. kdprt; K.kdpri''; I. paikd^, supdtha; D. pat/ttf (VS.); Ab.
pathds, abhi-sndtkas; G. pathds^; L. pathl.
PI. A. pathds^; G. pat/idm^'^.

Stems

in radical -d,

About a hundred stems ending

318.

in

are

made

in

the form

of

compounds

(only seven being simple stems) from the twenty roots aif- 'eat', ksadchad- 'cover' and 'please', pad- 'go', mad- 'be exhilarated', sad- 'sit',

'divide',

syad- 'move on';

ud- 'wet',

'find';

chid- 'cut
ttud-

off',

'push',

nid- 'revile',

mud-

'rejoice',

1 As
also in the only N. pi. n. of the
present part, in -anl, santi (3 14). The SV.
also has the short a.
2 Cp. Lanman 521.
3 In VI. 1714 the Padapatlia reads dyumata
indra as dyumatah; Grassmann explains it
as a D. dyumatc agreeing with rayi.
On
the other hand dyuinanta\Ji\ in AV. xvni.
1^7
should
probably
be
emended to

dyumatah;
4

cp.

Forms transferred from the -van

de-

-th

is

vid- 'know',

vid-

sUd-

sud- 'enjoy',

but it is suffixal if the word is connected

with Lat. caper (cp. Uhlenbeck, Etymologisches Worterbuch, s. v.).
With this
possible exception there are no derivative

stems in -th.
6
This stem

supplements paniha-

and

palhi-.
7

kapfthd-m occurs once as a transfer form.

Once (i. 1299) nasaliaed before a vowel

with the radical

(11. 24)
lengthened, pathas.
10 Accented as a weak form.

The

derivation of this word is uncertain:

radical if the word is derived
from prath- 'extend' (see Grassmann, . v.);
5

rud- 'weep',

Whitney's note, and Lanman patham a-.

9 Once

clension.

the

bhid- 'cleave',

'I

in

The

TS.

IV.

vowel

transfer form paihTndm also occurs

2.

55.

VI. Declension.

Nouns.

Consonant Stems.

197

trd- 'pierce', mrd- 'crush". Of tliese roots only seven occur as

monosyllabic substantives: nid- 'contempt', bhid- 'destroyer', vid- 'knowledge',
lid- 'wave', mi'id- 'joy', mrd- 'clay', being f., and pad- 'foot', m. There is also
the monosyllabic n. hfd- 'heart'
Strong and weak forms are not distinguished except in pad-; and
the inflexion is the same in all genders except, of course, the N. A. n.

'put in order';

and

du.

pi.

The following pecularities or irregularities

The weak reduplicated present stem dad- of da-

declension are to be noted.

once treated as a root in
the form dyur-ddd-am (AV.) 'giving long life'.
2.
The vowel of mad- is lengthened
in sadha-mdd- 'drinking companion', and so?>ia-m&d- 'intoxicated with Soma', of both of
which, however, only strong cases occur.
The vowel of pad- is lengthened not only
in the strong cases, but occasionally in others also: dvipat, N. sing, n., beside dvipdt,
D. dvipadei, L. pi. dvipdtm, while the N.pl. m. is once dvipddas {KSI .).
3. The euphonic
combination is irregular in the I. pi. ai pad- which is padbhis'' beside the Ab. &u. padbhyam.
Its place is taken in the
4. The stem hfd- is found in weak cases only^.
N. A. sing. pi. by hfd-aya-, which is also used in other cases {hfdaydt, hfdaye, kfdayesu),
though in the RV. almost entirely in late passages.
5. There are ii few transitions to
the a-declension in the inflexion of these stems. Starting from the strong A. pad-am
are formed the N. ^vag. pada-s and the N.pl. pddas, both in late passages of the RV.6.
Similarly, starting from the A. sadha-mdd- am are formed the locatives sadha-made and
sadha-mhdesu. Beside nid-as, the ordinary Ab. of nid-, the form nidayas occurs once.
a.

I.

of

tliis

'give', is

Inflexion.

The inflexion of these stems

The forms actually occurring,

319.
stems.

-i

m.

n.

'finding',

would be

is

identical with that of the radical

if

made from pad-

and

'foot',

-vld-

as follows:

padd,

A. pddam, -vidam.

L. padi,
G. padds,
D. pade,
V.
padbhydm. Ab. padbhydm.
Du. N. A. V. psda, m.

pados.
padds.
L.
G.
padbhis (AV.),
A. padds, m.
PI. N. pddas, m.
G. paddm, -vidam. L. patsu,
D.
f.

Sing. N. pit,
-vide.

n. -vH.

-vtt.

Ab. padds,

-vida.

I.

-vidas.

-vidas.

-vidi.

{sdrva)-vit.

i.

f.

I.

-vi'da.

-vidas.

f.

-vidas.

I.

-vidbhyas.

-vidbhis.

-vitsu.

The forms actually occurring are the following:

Sing. N. m. i. with lengthened vowel: pdd- with
a.

its

compounds and

sadha-mdd-: pdt (AV.); a-pdt, eka-pat, eka-iiti-pat (VS. xxix. 58) 'having one
white foot', cdtus-pat, tri-pdt, dvi-pdt and dvi-pat (AV.), viivdtas-pat, siti-pdt
{KSf^, sdrva-pat (AV.), sahdsra-pat; sadha-mat (iv. 21') and the abnormal
sadha-mds'' (vii. 18').
2. with unchanged vowel, being compounds ending in various roots:
from ad- agdhdt (TS. iii. 3, 8''), karambhdt, kravydt, visvdt, havyat; from
chad- -.prathamacchat^; from pad- anu-pdt (VS.xv.8) 'coming to pass'; from
:

chidvid-:

ukha-cchit;

d-ksdra-vit,

from bhidas'va-vit,

adri-bhit,

Jzratu-vit,

ud-bhit,

ksetra-vit,

gotra-bhit,
gatu-vit,

pur-bhit;

go-vit,

from

dravino-vit,

5 Its high grade form -hard occurs in the

N. sing. m.
6 Probably also the A. sing. m. panca2
this word, hard-,
1
appears in composition with dus- and su-. padam; see Lanman 47 2.
7 See above 55.
Another word for 'heart', srad- (Lat. cord-)
8 'appearing first', 'typical' (x.8li); accordn. occurs only in the A. sing, with the verbs
'covering
ing to Sayana from chad- 'cover'
kr- and dha-.
3
The lengthening here is, however, first'.
I

Compounds formed with

-vid

and -sad

commonest.
The strong form of

are the

metrical.
4
I.

to the confusing influence of the

padbhis from pas- 'look'.

Owing

pi.

igS

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

natha-vit (AV.),

nabho-vit,

Vedic Grammar.

pasu-vh (AV.), purana-v'it (AV.), praja-vit (AV.),

vayund-vlt,

vaco-vit,

rayi-v'it,

4.

varivo-vit,

sruta-vit, sarua-vit (AV.), svar-v'it,

vasu-v'it,

hiranya-v'it;

vXra-vit

visva-v'tt,

(AV.),

from sad- adma-sdt, antariksa:

sdt, upastha-sdt, rta-sdt, turanya-sdt, daish/a-sdi {YS. xxKvm. 10), durona-sdt,

duvanya-sdt, pragharma-sdt, 7>ara-sdt, vyotna-sdt, su-sam-sdt; camU-sdt, dru-sdt,
Also su-kdri^ (AV. 11. 7^) 'friendly'.
nr-sdt, vedi-sdt, suci-sdt.

2. a-cchdt (VS. xv. 5), pra-cchdt (VS. xv. 5) 'covering';

f. I. a-pdt.
su-yavasst (-ad); sain-v'it; sam-sdt, su-a-sdt (AV.)'.
N. A. n. I. -pad- appears with both unaltered and lengthened vowel:

and

dvi-pdt, cdtus-pat

hrt (TS.

2.

quickly'

tri-pst,

IV. 4. 7');

dvi-pat, cdtus-pat.

prakala-vit 'knowing very

little';

raghu-sydt 'moving

(j\f syad-).

a-pAdam, tri-pddam^, dvi-padam (VS. xm. 47), Uti2. from

sahdsra-psdam; sadha-mddam; dur-hArdatn (AV.).
ad- kravysdam, vihddam; from pad- dvi-pddam (VS. xxviii. 32) a metre
from chid pra-cchidam (VS. xxx. 16) 'cutting to pieces'; from bhid- ud-bh'idam.
gotra-bkldam, pur-bh'idam \ from vid- ahar-v'idam, kratu-vidam, ksetra-vidam

A.

pddam

in.

I.

pddam;

(AV.),

gatu-vldam, go-v'idam, varivo-vidam, vasu-vldam, visva-vidam, saci-vidam, svarvldam, hotra-vldam; from sad- garta-sddam, su-sam-sddam; apsu-sddam, dru
sddam, dhur-sddam, barhi-sddam'' vanar-sddam; from -syad- rag/tu-syddam
havana-syddam.
f. 2. n'ldam^, mrdam (VS. xi. 55; TS. iv. 1.5'); ayur-dddani
(AV.)^, upa-sddam, go-vidam (AV.), ni-v'idam, pari-pddatn 'snare', pari-sddam
(A v.), pitr-sddam, barhi- sddam'', vaco-vidam, visva-vidam, sam-^uidam, sam:

sddam, sa-mddam

m. pad&T

I.

'battle'

('raging together').

dpa-dtis-pada, cdtus-pads, dvi-pdda; ksetra-vida, varivo-v'ids,

su-sdda (AV.).

svar-vida,

f.

uda,

mudS, vida;

upa-vida,

ni-vida,

Jii-sdda,

pra-muda (VS. xxxix. 9), pra-vida, sam-sdda, svar-vida.

n. hrda; cdtuspada (AV.), dus-pdda, dvi-pdda. With adverbial shift of accent: sarva-hrda.
D. m. a-pdde, kuhacid-vlde, kravyAde, cdtus-pade, tad-vide (AV.), vedisadana-sdde,

sdde,

pra-mdde (VS. xxx.

n. lirde;

pitr-sdde,
nide^ mudd;
sam-pdde (VS. xv. 8).

sarva-vide (AV.), svar-vide.

8), pra-mude (VS. xxx. 10),

cdtus-pade, dvi-pdde^.

f.

uttand-padas, sam-vldas
Ab. m. padds (AV.); dvi-pddas.
f. nidds'^;
(A v.).
n. hrdds; sdt-padas (AV.).
G. m. ika-padas (AV.), dur-hardas (AV.), nr-sddas, yavAdas {-adas),

raghic-syddas (AV.), siiar-vidas.

cdtus-padas, dvi-pddas.

f.

pra-mudas, sain-sddas (AV.).

f. ni-sddi,
m. padl; svar-v'idi.
V. m. visva-vit, sdrva-vit (AV.).
Du. N. A. V. m. I. pAda; pAdau.

L.

sam-sddi.

' This seems to be the preferable reading

(suh&rt tend); the Pada has su-hah.
Otherwise the N. appears as su-har in MS. IV. 2'
see LaNMAN's
(p. 26, 1. 19) in suhar nah;
note in Whitney's AV. Translation on xix.

452,

and Grammar 150

b.

also nisdi in AV. XX. 1326- 7,

where the edition has vanlsdd.
3 pdnca-pada-m
(l. 16412)
is
probably a
transfer to the a-declension; see Lanman
4712.
4 For barhis-sddam; see above 62.
2

Perhaps

In

nidam.

the

Amredita

2.

n.

hfdds;

n. hrdl^.

V. ahar-vida, kavi-cchdda 'delight-

6 From a secondary root dad- formed

from the present stem of da- 'give'.
7
BR. take sddd in AV. IV. 47 as I. of
sad- 'position', but owing to the accent it
must be taken as an adv. 'always', see
Whitney's note on the passage.

Beside dvi-pade occurring eleven times,

occurs once (I. 121^), when the
lengthening is metrical.
9 The transfer form n'lddyas occurs once,
'o On the possibility of hrdi representing
an A. sing. n. in two or three passages, see
8

dvi-pade

compound nldam- Lanman

4731.

VI. Declension.

Nouns.

Consonant Stems.

Ab. m, padbhyam. G. m. padSs (AV.) \

ing in sages', kratu-vida, vasu-vida, visva-vida,

f. ud-bhida, barhi-sddd^ \
sranta-sddau (AV.).
I.

L.

m.

m. padbhydm
pados.

PI.

(AV.).

199

svar-vida'' ;

atma-sddau.

prd-pados (AV.).

f.

N. V. m.

a-pddas,

I.

cdtiis-padas,

dvi-padas^,

siti-psdas^

sadha-

midas, soma-mSdas] su-hdrdas (AV).

2. lirjadas, puru-sddas, madhv-ddas,
yavasddas, somddas, havir-ddas; d-tfdas^, V. pra-trdas; deva-nidas; ud-bhidas;
obhTmoda-mudas (AV.), svadu-sam-mudas (AV.); anna-vidas (AV.), ahar-vidas,
V. gatu-vidas (AV.)j ni-vidas (AV), ni-vidas (AV.), nitha-vidas, brahma-vidas
(AV.), yajur-vidas (AV.), vaco-vidas, varivo-vidas, vasu-vidas, viha-vidas
(AV.), svar-vidas, kotra-vidas; adma-sddas, antariksa-sddas (AV.), apsu-sddas
(TS.

upa-sddas (AV.), pascat-sddas (VS. ix. 36), purah-sddas, sartnasabha-sddas (AV.), svadu-sam-sddas
camu-sddas, divi-sddas (AV.),
dhur-sddas, barhi-sddas, V. barhi-sadas, vanar-sddas, vedi-sddas (VS. 11. 29);
raghu-syddas.
f.
I. dur-hdrdas {KSf^;
nidas, mudas;
agha-rudas (AV.),
amddas {-ddas), upa-sddas (AV.), nis-pddas, pra-mi'cdas, visva-su-vidas, samsddas, suhutddas {-ddas), svar-vidas.
A. m.7 padds; dur-hdrdas (AV.), su-hdrdas (AV.); apsu-sddas (AV.),
kravyddas, cdtus-padas (AV.), tva-nidas, deva-nidas, dvi-pddas (AV.), /ar?sddas, pastya-sddas,
bahu-ksddas, sattra-sddas (AV.).
f.
nidds, bhidas;
ni-vidas, pra-tnudas, vasu-vidas, vi-niidas, sa-mddas, sa-syddas, havya-sudas.
I. m. padbhis (AV. TS. VS.), padbhis in RV. and VS. 8; gharma-sddbhis,
I.

4. 10^),

sddas,

satd-padbhis.

n. hrdbhis.

D. m. antarikm-sddbhyas

(AV.),
daksina-sddbhyas (VS. ix. 35), ^zV?sddbhyas (AV. TS.), pascat-sddbhyas (VS. ix. 35), prthivi-sddbhyas (AV.).
G. m. su-hdrdam (AV.); adma-sddam, cdtuspadam (VS. TS. AV.), </pddatn, barhi-sddam (VS. xxiv. 18), s'vd-padam (AV.), su-sddam (AV.).
f. upa-sddam (VS. xix. 14) a kind of ceremony, pari-pddam, sranta-sddam (AV.),

L. m. patsu.

f.

sa-mdtsu.

n. hrtsu.

Steins in derivative

-d,

320. There are some six stems formed with suffixal -d, seemingly all
feminines 9, which with one exception {sardd-) are of rare occurrence. They
are drsdd- and dhrsdd- (RV^) 'nether millstone', bhasdd- 'hind quarters', with
its compound su-bhasdd- 'having beautifiil buttocks', vandd-'^ (RV'.) 'longing',
sardd- 'autumn'; kakud-^'^ 'summit', with its compound tri-kakud- (AV.) 'threepeaked', kakud- 'palate'. The inflexion is like tiiat of radical -/ stems. The
forms occurring are the following:
m. tri-kakut (VS. AV.).
Sing. N. f. ka/kiit, kakut, dhrsdt, bhasdt, sardt.

In AV. xvui. 2^4 occurs the ungrammaform pathi-sadi an imitation of fathirdksi of RV. X. \^'^.
2 The form rapsudd, occurring once, is of
uncertain meaning and origin,
3 This form is used with an ablative
sense in AV. I. 182.
4 AV. X. 26 has dvi-pddas.
5 The transfer form padds occurs once in
the RV. (I. 1639).
1

tical

Cp. Lanman 474.

n. pi.
8 Four times in RV.

13) owing to confusion with padbhis,

of pas- 'look'.
9 Except the adj. iri-kakud- (AV.), Htikakud- (TS.) 'white-humped' and possibly
vanad-.
1 This stem occurs only once (n. 4^) in
the form vanadas, N. pi. m. 'Verlangen' (from
van- 'desire') according to BR.; G. sing. m.
of van-ad- 'wood-consuming' according to

(xxm.

I. pi.

Grassmann.
II

Used

as ablative infinitive.
7 There are no N. A. V. forms

in the

the

The

Lanman
and once

in VS.

origin of this -d is obscure.

On
of this word to kakuik- see

relation

471*.

20O

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

A.f. kaki'idam, drsddam, bhasddam (AV.), sarddam.

m. tri-kakudam (AV.).
D. f. sardde.
I. f. drsdda, safdda (TS. iv. 4. 122).
Ab. f. kakudas.
PL N. f. vanddas, sarddas.
L. f. kakudi ^{AN' .), sarddi.
A. f. iarddas.
L. f. sardtsu (AV.).
I. f. iarddbhis.
G. f. sarddam (AV.).

Stems

in radical -dh.

Stems ending in -dk are all radical, simple or compound. There

2,7.1.
are some fifty derived, with only two or three exceptions, from the following
sixteen roots; badh- 'oppress', sad/i- 'succeed'; idh- 'kindle', vidk- 'pierce'
(^ vyadh-), sidh- 'succeed', sridh- 'blunder' (?); ksudh- 'be hungry', budh'waken', yudh- 'fight', rudh- 'grow' and 'obstruct'; rdh- 'thrive', mrdh- 'neglect',
vrdh- 'grow', sprdh- 'contend'.
In this declension there occurs no stem distinguishing strong and weak
cases. Masculines and feminines are inflected exactly alike. No distinctively
neuter forms (N. A. du. pi.) occur, and only four case-forms (G. L. sing.) are
found as neuters. There are two monosyllabic m. nouns: vfdh- 'strengthening'
and (perhaps) badh-'-; besides seven f substantives: nddh-^ 'bond'; sridh- 'foe';
ksudh- 'hunger', yudh- 'fight'; mfdh- 'conflict', vfdh- 'prosperity', spfdh- 'battle'.
Neuter cases occur in the sing. (I. G.) of compounds of -vidh, -yudh, and -vrdh.
a. Three or four stems are of doubtful origin
agnidh- is probably to be explained
as agni-dh- 'priest who prepares (dka- 'put') the fire', rather than as a shortened form of
:

agnidh-

(from idh- 'Icindle') which

perhaps a shortened form of

does not

'fire-kindler'

'offering' (RVi.) is

obscure in meaning and origin; iurudhsrdh- 'be defiant' with Svarabhakti ^.

f.

nis-sidh-

occur

the RV. ^; isidhprksudh- (RV'.) is

perhaps derived from
in

'offering"*;

'invigorating draught' is

Inflexion.

322. Sing. N. m. agnit, anu-rut (VS.) and anu-ri'it 'loving'; usar-bhiit

'waking {budh-) at morn', yaviyiit^ 'eager to fight', sva-vit {KSI VS.) 'porcupine'
('dog-piercer', Yvidh-), sam-it 'flaming'.
f. ksut (AV.);
pra-vft 'growth',

sam-iV 'fuel'.
A. m. vfdham, and its compounds:

vt-rut 'plant' (AV.),

anna-vfdham 'prospering by food',

gira-vfdham 'delighting in praise', tugryavfdham 'favouring the Tugryas', namo-vfdham 'honoured by adoration', payovrdham 'full of sap', parvata-vfdham 'delighting in pressing stones', madhuvfdham 'abounding in sweetness', yajna-vfdham (AV.) 'abounding in sacrifice',
vayo-vfdham 'increasing strength', sadyo-vfdham 'rejoicing every day', sahovrdham 'increasing strength', su-vrdham 'joyous'; agnidham, anu-rudham (VS.
XXX. 9), a-sridham 'not failing', usar-budham, gosu-yudham^ 'fighting for kine',
marma-vidham (AV.) 'piercing the vitals', yajna-sddham 'performing sacrifice',
hrdaya-vidham (AV.) 'wounding the heart'.
f. ksudham, yudham, sridham;
a-sridham, usar-biidham, nis-sidham, vTrudham, sam-riidham (AV.) 'check' (in
gambling) 9, sam-idham.
f. ksudhd (AV.),
I. m. su-vfdha.
yudhd, vrdha; sam-idha, su-bi'idha
(AV.) 'good awakening', su-vfdha (AV.), su-sam-idha 'good fuel'.
n. payovfdha, yavtyudha, sakain-vfdha 'growing together'.
ahutl-vrdham 'delighting in

sacrifices',

I In badhas A. pi. in VI. Ili (Grassmann);

BR. do not acknowledge a m. use of bhdh-,
and in VIII. 4510, ix. 1096 they would join
the word with the preceding pari.
2 In
nddbhyas (x. 606) if derived from

nadh-

nah- 'bind' (BR. s. v. ndh-); but it

is more probably
*ndbd-bhyas from napt-,
weak stem of ndpat-, as also indicated by
the accent.

3
4

5
fi

7
8

See above

p. 18, note 6.
Cp. is-kfti- for nis-krii-.
Cp. above 21.
From the intensive stem oiyudh- 'fight'.
In the Amredita samit-samii.
With the L. pi. gosu instead of the

stem
9

go-.

Cp. Whitney's note on AV. vn. 50^.

VI. Declension.

D. m.

Consonant Stems.

Nouns.

usar-budhe, rta-vrdhe 'fostering

truth',

201

puru-nissidhe 'repelling

mahi-vfdhe 'greatly rejoicing', vi-infdhe (VS. viii. 44)

sam-fdhe (AV.) 'welfare', sa-vrdhe (VS. xvi. 30) 'growing'.
(foes)',

many

'dispeller of foes',

f.

ksudhe,

yudM

(AV.)% vrdhS, sam-idhe.

Ab.

ksudhds, yudkds, sridhds.

vi-mrdkds'- 'foe',
sumatv-vrdkas
'delighting in prayer'.
f. ksudhds.
n. hrdaya-vidhas.
L. f. mrdki, yudhi, sprdhi; pra-h'idhi 'awaking'.
f.

G. m. gosu-yudhas,

Du. N. A. V. m.
yudha

'fighting

in

12)

a-sridha, rta-vfdha, V. rta-vrdka, namo-vfdhs, puro-

rta-vfdhau.

front';

ghrta-vfdha 'rejoicing
sam-idhau (AV.).

(VS. xxir.

in

fatness',

f. fdu-vfd/iS
'increasing sweetness',
payo-vrdha, vayo-ifdha,
sakam-vfdha;

PI. N. V. m. rta-vfdhas, V. rta-vrdhas, tugrya-vfdhas, payo-vfdhas, parvatavfdhas, vayo-vfdhas, J-w^^-w/^/^aj 'rejoicing in good progress', su-vfdAas; a-sridhas,
ayur-yudhas (VS. xv:. 60) 'struggling for life', usar-biidhas, gosu-yudhas, jnubadhas 'bending the knees', pra-yudhas 'assailing', vrsa-yudhas 'combating
men',
surMhas, soma-pari-badhas 'despising Soma'.
ksiidhas (AV.),
f.

mfdhas,

sridhas (VS. xxvii. 6) 'foes'; amitra-yudhas 'fighting with

enemies', a-sridhas, isidhas, rta-vfdhas, nis-sidhas, pari-bddhas 'oppressors',
pari-spfdhas 'rivals', vT-rudhas, V. vT-7-udhas, surudhas, sam-idhas.
A. m. badhas; rta-vfdhas, tamo-vfdhas 'rejoicing in darkness', rayi-vfdhas
'enjoying wealth',
usar-budhas,
suri'idhas.
f.
mfdhas, ytidhas, spfdhas,
sridhas^; vT-ri'idhas, surudhas, sam-idhas, sam-fdhas, sa-vfdhas 'increasing
spfdhas,

together' +.
I.

sam-idbhis,

f.

vJ-rudbhis

(AV.).

D.

f.

ndd-bhyas^.

rt'tdbhyas (AV.).

G. m. vrdhdm; rta-vfdham, pra-budham 'watchful'.

sprdham; nis-sidham, vT-ri'idham, vT-rudham^ (AV.).
L. f. yutsu, vT-rutsu.

Stems
The

323.

from tan-

f.

f.

vi-

yudham^ (AV.),

in radical -n.

radical stems ending in -n are formed from half a dozen roots:

ran-

'stretch',

substantives

Ab.

meaning

van- 'be pleasant', are formed monosyllabic

from svan- 'sound'

'rejoice',

'succession', 'joy', 'wood', respectively;

formed the adj. svan-^ 'sounding' and the compound tuvi-svdn- 'roaring
from sa7t- 'gain', the compound go-sdn- 'winning cows'. From these
But from han- 'strike' no fewer than
six nouns very few case-forms occur.
35 compounds are made in the RV., and all the singular cases as well as
several of the du. and pi. cases are formed. All the stems formed from these
six roots 9 are m. except tan-, which is ', and only a single n. case-form
occurs from a compound of han- {dasyu-ghnd). The distinction between strong
and weak forms is made in -han- only. Here in the weak cases a as

is

aloud';

The
the

to

yudhaye

infinitive

/-declension,

there

is

transition

being no

stem

yudhi:
2
3

With irregular accent cp.LANMAN477(top).

;

Fifteen

times

accented sridhas,

once

718) sridhas.
4 In VIII. 454, IX. 1056 pari-badhas should
perhaps be read instead of fari badhas.
5 If from nah; according to BR. (cp. aksd(ix.

nahas (A.

p. f.);

according to Weber,

It is probably
109, from nap:
napat. See above 321, note on
napi-

13,

IS.

from
nadh:

6 In the V.

yudham

fate.

In the V. virudham pate.

8 The accent of the monosyllabic stems
irregular in remaining on the radical
is
syllable except tana (beside tana) and vanam:
7

Lanman

479* and above 94, I a.

Other roots in -n used as nominal stems
have gone over to the a- or a-declension;
thus Jan- becomes -Ja- or -Jd-.
10 -han- forms a separate fem. stem in -?
from its weak form -ghn-i-.
cp.

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

representing the sonant nasal appears for an before consonants, while before
vowels the root, by syncopation of its vowel, assumes the form of -ghn-.
The N. sing. n. of -han is -ha-m, a transition to the a-declension ' (for -ha,

which does not occur).

Inflexion.
324. All forms are represented in this declension except Ab. sing., the weak
cases of the du., and the D. Ab. pi. The forms made from -han- are: Sing. N.
Du. N. A.
-^<^^ K.-hdnatn, I. -gk?ia, D. -ghnJ, G. -ghnds, L. -g/ini, V.^ -han.
PI. N. -hdnas, A. -ghnds, I. -hdbhis. The G.
-hdns, -hdnau (VS.TS.), V. -hana.
would be -ghnim and the L. -hdsu according to the analogy of other stems in

The forms of radical -stems which occur are the following

Sing. N. m. aghasamsa-ha 'slaying the wicked', adrsta-ha 'slaying
abhimati-hd 'destroying adversaries', amitra-hd 'killing
unseen (vermin)',
enemies', amiva-hd 'destroying pains', ariisa-ha 'striking the dark (cloud)',
this declension.

d-vira-ha 'not slaying men', asasti-hd 'averting curses', flj-wra-z^i 'demon-slaying',

ahi-hd 'killing the serpent', krsH-hd 'subduing nations', go-hd 'killing cattle',
dasyu-hd 'destroying the Dasyus', dtirnama-hd (AV.) 'destroying the ill-named',
nr-hd 'killing men', puro-hd 'destroying strongholds' 3, //'/z~/^i (A V.) 'slaying
mano-hd (AV.) 'mind-destroying', musti-hd 'striking
the speckled (snake)',
with the fist', yatu-hd (AV.) 'destroying witchcraft', rakso-hd 'destroying demons',
vasar-hd 'destroying at dawn', vrtra-hd 'Vrtra-slaying', sarya-hd 'killing with
satra-hd 'destroying entirely', sapatna-hd 'slaying rivals', sapta-hd
arrows',
vrtra-hd-m and
'slaying seven'.
n. Only two transition forms occur:

satra-hd-m^

A. m. d-pra-hanam^

abhimati-hdnam, ahi-hdnam, tamorakso-hdnam^,

valaga-hdnam
dasyu-hdnam,
'destroying secret spells' (VS. v. 23), mano-hdnam (AV.), vira-hdnajn^ (VS.
XXX. 5) 'homicide', vrtra-hdnam^, satra-hdiiam^, sapatna-hdnam (AV.).
tana (once) and tana''
f.
n. dasyu-ghnd.
I. m.
vftra-ghnd^

hdnam

'dispelling

'not hurting',

darkness',

(19 times).

D. m. rdneT ; abhimati-ghni {NS.vi. ^z), asura-ghne^, ahi-ghn^, nr-ghnd^,

f. tdne'.
tnakha-ghni (TS. iii. 2. 4. ^' ^), 'slayer of Makha', vrtra-ghne^.
G. m. go-sanas (in the V. gosano napat); asura-ghnds^ vrtra-ghnds^
Li. m. svdtii^ (ix. 669), tuvi-svdni; bhruna-ghni (AV.) 'killer of an embryo'.
Without an ending: rdn'i.
V. m. amitra-han, ahi-han, vrtra-han.

Du. N. A. V.

taino-hdna, rakso-hdna^, vrtra-hdtia,

vrtra-hana^. With

rakso-hdnau (VS. v. 25), valaga-hdnau (VS. v. 25; TS. i. 3. 2^).

a-bhog-ghd?ias'^
'striking the niggardly
V. tuvi-svanas
PI. N. V. m.
'destroying
one', punar-hdnas^ 'destroying in return', yajna-hdnas (TS.)
-au

sacrifice',

satru-hdnas'^ 'slaying enemies'.

A. m. sata-ghnds (AV.)

and valaga-hdnas (VS.

I.

m.

vrtra-hdbhis.

v.

'gain-destroying',

25; TS.

G. m.

i.

3. 2').

vandm.

With strong form: rakso-hdnas^

L.

m. rdmsuT, vdmsuT.

1 The forms made from -ghna-, viz. -ghnds,

5 See above 47, A b 2 (p. 39J.
6 See above p. 38, note 4.
-ghnam, -ghnaya, -gnasya, -ghne, are probably
7 Against
the rule of accentuation in
to be explained as transition forms starting
monosyllabic stems (94).
from the weak stem -ghn-.
2 Formed like
8 This form may, however, be the 3, sing,
the N. of derivative -an
stems (327).
passive aor. See below 501, note on sadi.
3 That is, puras, A. pi. of pur-, the 'case
9 With loss of the loc. ending as in the
termination being retained.
an declension (325).
'^
4 The normal forms would be ^vftra-ha
-ghdnas for -hdnas, see above 80, 81.

and

*saira-hd.

VI. Declension.

Consonant Stems.

Nouns.

Derivative stems in

-an, -man,

203

-van.

T*^^^ declension embraces a large number of words, the stems

325-van being by far the commonest, those in -an the least frequent. It is
almost limited to masculines and neuters; but some forms of adjective stems
serve as feminines, and there is one specifically f stem, yJs-an- 'woman".

in

The distinction of strong and weak forms is regularly made. In the

strong cases the a of the suffix is usually lengthened, e. g. ddhvan-am; but
half a dozen -an and -man stems it remains unchanged; e. g. arya-man-am.
In the weak cases the a is often syncopated before vowel endings, though

never when -man and -van are preceded by a consonant^, e. g. I. sing, gravn-a^ from grd-van-, 'pressing stone"*, while before consonant endings the
final n disappears 5, e. g. raja-bhis.
In the RV. the syncopation never takes
place in the N. A. du. n., nor with one exception (Jata-davn-i) in the L. sing.
As in all other stems ending in -n, the nasal is dropped in the N. sing.
e. g. m. ddhva, n. karma.
But there are two peculiarities of inflexion which,
being common to these three groups, do not appear elsewhere in the consonant
declension. Both the L. sing, and the N. A. pi. n. are formed in two ways. The
ending of the L. sing, is in the RV. dropped more often than not, e. g.
murdhdn-i and murdhdn, the choice often depending on the metre*. The
N. A. pi. n. is formed with -ani from 18 stems and with -a from 19 stems'
in the RV.; seven of the latter appear with -a in the Samhita text, but with -a
like the rest in the Pada text. The evidence of the Avesta indicates that there
were in the Indo-Iranian period two forms, naman and namani, the former
losing its -71 as usual when final after a long vowel.
On this ground the -a
form of the Samhita, though the less frequent, would appear to be the older *There are here many supplementary stems and numerous transitions to
the a-declension.
I.

Stems

in -an.

They
326. These stems, which are both m. and n., are not numerous.
include some which at first sight have the appearance of belonging to one
of the other two groups: yu-v-an-'^ 'youth', sv-dn- 'dog', rji-sv-an'^ N. of a
man, matari-sv-an-^ N. of a demi-god, vi-bhv-an-^'^ 'far-reaching'; pdri-j'm-an-^^
'going round'.
The n. sirs-dn- is an extended stem from siras- 'head'

sir{a)s-dn-.
a.

Besides the N.

pi.

yosan-as 'women', six or seven forms of this declension appear

be feminine as agreeing with f. substantives: vfsa 'raining' [kam, vdk), vfsanam

{ivdcani), vrsana [dyava-prthivt], pdri-Jmanas 'going round' [vidyutas), rapsdd-udhabhis 'having
distended udders' {dhenubhis)'^'i, vaja-karmabhis (SV. TS.) and vdja-bharmabhis (vin. 1930J
to

'bringing rewards'

f.

in

The stems
-ziarT,

e. g.

{iiiibhis).

in -van regularly form their

fi-van, pt-varl; those in -an

the

48 locatives (occurring 127 times) have

45 (occurring 203 times) drop it. See

i,

and -man by adding -J to the syncopated Lanman 535.

7 But those in -a, occur nearly twice
stem at the end of compounds; e. g. sdtna-

as

pdnca-nimn-i- (AV.).
often.
8 Cp. Brugmann, kg. 483 and Lanman
2 This exception does not apply when -an is
preceded by two consonants, e. g. sakth-nd, 538.
9 Cp. the comparative yav-iydn and the
3 But also G. sing, vrsan-as (AV.). The syncopation nearly always takes place in -an stems Avestan yvan.
10 -svan in both these compounds is probably
and in nearly half of the -man and -van
derived from iu- 'grow'.
stems.
" From bhu- 'be'.
4 When the accent is on the suffix it is
12 From gam- 'go'.
thrown on the ending in these syncopated
13 The f. of -an stems at the end of
forms, e. g. mahna from niah-dn-.
5 That is, a here represents an original compounds is formed with -i in dcchidraudhn-t- 'having a faultless udder', sam-raJn-Tsonant nasal, see p. 17, note =.
rajn-i-,

204

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

b. In the strong forms the stems j-bhu-ksdn- 'chief of the Rbhus', piisdn-, and the
ySsan-, retain the short a, while uksan- 'ox' and vfsan- 'bull' fluctuate between a and a.
The words svan- and yiivan- form their weak stems before vowels with Samprasarana,
In
sun-, ytin-; the latter is once used in the N. du. m. ioxrsx yiina instead oi yuvand.
f.

the

weak cases syncopation always takes place' except xn'CasioTxas uksanas s.n&.vfsanas.
A number of -an stems have supplementary forms from other stems aksdnc.
:

from aksi-; asihdn- from dsthi-; dhan- from dhas- and dhar-; dsdn- from asya-, as-, and asa-;
uddn- from ud- and uda-kd- ndhan- from udhas- and udhar- ; dadhdn- from dddhi- ; dosdnfrom dos-; yakdn- from ydkri-; yosan- from yosand- 2caA yosa-; sdkan- from Idkrt-; sakthdnfrom sdkthi-. As no stem in -an has been found in the N. A. sing, u., such forms appear
to have been avoided and to have been purposely replaced by forms from supplementary
stems. These forms are the N. A. n. dksi, dsthi (AV.), dhar, asydm, udakdm, udhar, ydkrt
(AV.), sdkrt, sdkthi; also yiivat instead of *yuva, as well as siras and strsd-m (AV.) in;

stead of ^sTrsd^,
The A. sing, pusdn-am
d. There are here several transitions to the a-declension.
The N. A. pi. n. is
is the starting point for the '^. piisdn- a- s and the G. pUsand-sya-^.
the starting point in other instances the two pi. forms s7rsa and sirsani give rise to the
L. sing, iirsi (AV.i) beside sirsdni, as well as to the du. N. A. iTrse and the N. A. sing.
sJrsd-m (AV.) ; similarly the two plurals dhd and dkdni led to the G. pi. dhdndm beside
dhndm; and yiisdni, the pi. oi yiisdn-, which has the appearance of a pi. of a stem
yiisd-, led to the formation of an I. sing, yiisena (TS.) beside the regular yiisna (VS.).
Again, the weak forms din-as, ahn-ds etc., gave rise to the transition stems dsna- and
dhna-, from which are formed the I. pi. dsnais and the L. sing, piirvahni.
Transition o-stems often take the place of -an stems at the end of compounds.
Thus -aksd- appears in several compounds for -aksdn-, and -vfsd- (AV.) for -vfsan-; anasthdn- once forms the N. sing. m. an-asthd-s (VIII. 134); beside the N. sing. m. bj'hdd-uksa
appears the D. brhdd-uksaya (VS.); beside rajanani is found the A. m. adhi-rajd-m
(X. 1289) 'over-lord'; and beside saptdbhis 'seven', the compound tri-saptdis''
:

Inflexion.
327.

The normal

forms,

if

made from

rsjan- 'king' in the m.,

dhan- 'day' in the n., would be as follows:

1. m. Sing.
N. rAja.
A. rdjanam.
I.
rsjna.

D. rdjne.

and from

Ab. rdjnas.

L. rdjani and rdjan. V. rnjan.

G. rdjnas.
Du. N. A. rdjana and rdjanau. I. rdjabhyam. D. rdjabhyam. G. rdjnos.
PI. N. V. rdjanas. A. rdjnas. I. rdjabhis.
D. rdjabhyas. Ab. rijabhyas

(A v.). G. rajham. L. rajasu.

2. n. Sing. N. A.
s.
i. dhna.

D. dhne. Ab. G. dknas. L. dkani axid

A. dhani.
PI. N. A. dhani. I. dhabhis.
G. dhnos (AV.).
D. Ab. dhabhyas. G. dhnam. L. dhasu.
The forms actually occurring are the following:
dhan.

Du. N.

Sing. N. m. aji-asthd 'boneless', dyah-sTrsa 'iron-headed', a-sirsd 'headuksd 'bull', rji-sva N. of a man, tdksa 'carpenter', tdpur-tnurtiha 'burningheaded', try-udhd^ 'three-uddered', dvi-bdrha-JmS'' 'having a double course',
pdri-jmd 'surrounding', pusd 'Pusan', plihd (VS.) 'spleen', brhdd-uksa 'having
great oxen', majjd (VS. AV.) 'marrow', matari-sva 'Matarisvan', murdhd 'head',
less',

yuva

'youth',

rdja

svd

vi-bhva 'far-reaching', vi-rdja (TS. v.

sahdsra-sirsa 'thousand-headed'.

'king',

'dog',

'queen', soma-rdjil-T- 'having Soma as king',

'whose lord has been slain', rui-usTrsn-h 'deer-headed',
saptd-iirsn-T'seven-

With

On

7. 4'*)

'sovereign',

shifted accent.
the other hand there are two transitions from the a-declension to the a-deheaded', eka-niiirdhn-i- (AV.) 'having the clension in ni-kdmabhis beside ni-kdmais and
head turned in one direction', sindhu-rajii-T- nakid-bhis for ndktam, but these forms are
(AV.) 'having Sindhu as queen'.
due to somewhat artificial conditions; see
1 The
restoration of the a seems to be below, I. pi. p. 206, notes 3 and 4.
metrically required in a. few instances: see
5 Only supplementary forms
occur: see
Lanman 525.
Lanman 530 (bottom).
S The metre seems
2 The N. sing. n. of the
adj. vfsan- is
to require try-udhh
avoided in several ways see Lakman 530 (III, 563).
(bottom).
7 Here bdrhabdrhas-.
hatd-vj-sn-i-

VI. Declension.
A._

m. ukssnam, taksanam

tri-sirsdnani

Consonant Stems.

Nouns.
(VS. xxx.

205

tri-murdhanam 'three-headed',

6),

pdnthanam

'three-headed',

(VS. AV.)
'path',
pdri-jmxnam,
prthu-gmdnam ' 'broad-pathed', plikinam (AV.), majjdnam, matarl-svanam,
murdhanam, yuvanam, rdjanam ^, vfsanam, svAnam, sapta-sTrsanam 'sevenheaded'.
With short a: uksdnam, rbhu-ksdnam'^ 'chief of the Rbhus',

pUsdnam, vfsanam *.
I.

m.

fjl-svana, matari-svana, vi-bhvdna.

I.

pUsnA, plihna (VS.),

With syncope:

2.

ds'na^,

majjna (AV.), mUrdhna (VS. xxv. 2), rajha, vfsnS.

3. With Samprasarana:
hina^ (AV.).
n. asni (VS. xxv. 9) 'blood',
dhna 'day', asnA 'mouth', udnA 'water', dadhiiA 'curds', mahnA 'greatness',
yaknA (VS. xxxix. 8) 'liver', yusnA (VS. xxv. 9) 'broth', vi-krsna (Kh. I. iit)
'headless', saknA (VS.) 'excrement', sirsnA 'head', sakthnA (VS.) 'thigh'.

D. m.

rji-svane, pdri-jmane, matari-svane, vi-bhvdne, vfsane (TS. ill.

pusne, prati-divne 'adversary at play', murdhni (VS. xxii. 32),
rAjne, vfsne^.
n. i. dharv-ane 'hurting'.
2. dhne, asne, hrsne.
3. yane.
Ab. m. 2. plihnds (AV.), murdJinds, vfsnas'^.
n. 2. aksnds 'eye',
dhnas, asnds^, udnds^^, ttdhnas, yaknds 'liver', zf/j/zaj- 'shedding rain', lirsnds.
G. m. I. durgrbhi-svanas 'continually swelling', pdri-jmanas, matari2. 5^)7.

svanas
(or n.),

I.

2.

(VS.1. 2), vfsanas'^^ (AV.).

rAjnas, vrsnas.
3. ydnas,

uksnds, pusnds, yumds

aksnds (VS. iv. 32; TS.),
dhnas., udnds, dadknds, vrsnas,

dsnas^^,

2.

simas.

n.

asnds^* (AV.) 'blood', asthnds (AV.) 'bone',

saknds (AV.), hrsnds'^i.
L. m. I. rji-svani, matarl-svani, murdkdni, rajani.
i.jmdn '-viz.y', pdrij'man, matari-svan (AV.), murdhdn.
n, i. dhani, asdni, uddni, udhani
'udder', ksAmani 'earth', rajdni, sirsdni; dhni (AV.).
2. dhan, asdn, uddn,
Udhan, ksAman'^^, gdmbhan (VS. xiii. 30) 'depth', sTrsdn'^'i.
V. m. I. uru-jman (AV.) 'extension', pari-j'man, prthii-jman (AV.), pusan,
murdhan (VS.xviii. 55), yuvan, rSj'an, vrsan, s'aia-murdAan (VS.xvn. y i TS.)

'hundred-headed', satya-rajan (VS. xx. 4) 'true king'.

2. matari-svas'^^
Du. N. A. V. m. I. pdri-jmana, V. mitra-rajana 'ye kings Mitra (and
Yaxuna)', yuvana, Y.yuvanS, rAjana, svAna. With short vow^el: indrd-pusdna,

pUsdim, vfsanS, V. vrsana, somS-pusana.

ior yiivdna (probably through _yz'fl5).
ivAnau; V. vrsanau, soma-pusaij,au.

With weak Stem: yunS (ix. 6 8 5)

With au: rAjdnau, vfsdnau (AV.),

2.

N. A. n. dham, cdksaiu (AV.)

I.

pusnos.

m.

D.
vfsabhy3m.
n. dhnos (AV.).

-gman-

= -jman-

There

is

also

'eyes', dosdni (AV.) 'fore-arms' ''.

soma-pusdbhyain.
G. m. pdri-Jmanos, indrdL. n. aksnos (Kh. i. 11^).

'path'.

the transfer form adhi-

rajd-m (x. 1289).

ksi- 'possess'.
3 Perhaps from ksa4 In the RV. vfsanam occurs 53 times,

vfsanam only

twice.

This form (occurring thrice) may possibly

be shortened for asmana (which occurs
twice) from dsman- 'stone'.
6 For *sa-an-a; hence no shift of accent
as in monosyllabic stems.
7 Also usdn-e (vi. 20") according to Benfey,
Orient und Occident 2, 242.
8 There is also the transition form brhdduksaya (VS. VIII. 8).
9 Benfey, Gott. Abh. 19, 261, regards
Ab. vibhvdna^.
vibkvdna (x. 765) as
^
10 Also the supplementary forms asyat, as as.
5

m.

i^

Also the supplementary form udak&t.

For vfsa-nama (ix. 97^*) GrassmANN
would read vrsano nd; cp. Wackernagel 2',
68 a, note (p. 160).
ij This
form (occurring once) may be
shortened for dsmanas (occurring four times).
14 With supplementary stem dsf-j-.
>2

The G.piisandsya, occurring once, seems

be a transfer form starting from the A.

'S

to

pusdnam
iS

{yi(i dj.

There

are also the transition forms

piirvjhni: see LanmAN 536.
17 The compound nemann-is'following
guidance' probably contains a loc.
18 Following the analogy of some stems in

sTrse,

van.
19

Also the transition form sirsL

206

I.

N. V. m.

PI.

iAV.\

J>,int/ia>:as

vo'wel

ui::t>i'U7s.

N. A. n.
2.

I.

4.

A. m.
of men',

r/xnas.

I.

(VS. xxiv. 13), fi^mii-mBn/ASfias 'sharp-edged',

yik\inas, nijilnas, irdfias.
With short

u/:.f,i':tis

rMu-i'sJ/Ms, r/sa/uis.
cd-sJrii,

asf^iini (,TS. iv. 7. 1)', ,i/t,7m, sTfsdni, sa^fAdni.

u/:siitias, v/sa'itts.

w<TA?r/-.>'r'(7(j'f,

im/Jiids (A^^"),

m.

Vedic Grammar.

mlirJ/uinas,

si/y,!'-

li/tti,

I.

d Speache.

Allgemkines

a. ufynt}s,j'a/ia-rii//las Tcing

mli/t/AnJs, yamii-rJ/'/ias 'subject to

Yama',

riijyhis.

3. yiifias, sr'mas.
uJ!:s,il>/us\

yihaMis, nijaMis, r/saMis,

fPiii/th

(Kh.

v. iS')*-

n. a^.fM/iis, ast/ttid/iis, li/iaMis, ifsddAis, ui/iiMis, liMabfu's, tnaAdbhis, r/saMis,

sJiad/iis (TS. v. 7. 23*\ su-h'tti-iariaMu (Kh. m. 12.') 'doing good deeds'-\
D. m. /j7v-<7/'/i'j'''-'' (VS.), ma/jdd/iyas (TS. VS. xxxix. 10), y.rraMyas,
rjjab/iyas, h\ihM\is (,AV. VS.).
lihitbhyas.

Ab. m.

G. m.

r/\y.i~"".

n. asthib/iyas (VS. x.xxix. 10; TS. v.

n.
maJJiibAyas yX\'.).
rtij'~hJm (VS. .\V.), suium

L. m. majjiisu (AV.),

a.

Stems

n.
n.

{XW).
(AW), nijasu.

yuMii-rii/as;/

2. 12^),

,}/inb/tyiis.

<}/i/nlm^-

Masu,

Jlrsdsu.

in -man.

3a8. These stems are about equally divided between the masculine and
the neuter gender, tlie former being agent nouns, the latter verbal abstracts.
These stems seem to ha\-e been used normally for the f. as well as tlie m.;
for though no simple stem in -maf) occurs as a f , about a dozen of them
are used as f. at the end of compounds, while no certain example appears
A peculiarity of
in tlie RV. of a f. being formed by adding -7 to -man''.
tlie inflexion of tlie stems in -wrf//, as compared with those in -an and -van,
of the I. sing, several words drop the /,
is that in the sjTicopated forms
while two drop the // of the suffix; e. g. ma/iind^ for mahimnii, and rastnd

rasmnd.
a. The f. forms which occur

for

compounds

Sing. N. /ifrti-lirm.l (VS.

ifyii/ti,>\i;imiiniim (y. So')
'having a shining course' [iisdsaHi); sH-tdrma(iam (Till. 42'') 'easily conveying across'
[tiiiz'ii/H), sii-f/iimiifiam (X.6^^^^) 'protecting well' (/>//;h^im^, ji/-Jii/)/itl>i,iJ>i (X. 63'"') 'granting
secure refuge' (di/itim) \ V. drif/a-d/iarmaii (vui. lS+) 'yielding security' (,ijV.v\ pi-thu-y'iman
(VI. 644) 'having a broad path' [dii/iilar); Du. N. sii-Jmimani^ (1. 160^) 'producing fair things"
(d/iisaite);
PI. A. s!'(d-/,!'imant)s (VI, 393) 'of radiant birth' {iisiisos): I. ftya-MnrmitMis
X. 9) 'giving

wide

shelter"

(aV/A'-'l,

.it

the end of

.ire:

sd-Za/tfrntl (x. lo') 'similar';

A.

193) 'winning rewards' [iitiMis\ sit-l&riHiiMiis (IX. 70'M 'skilful' (fingers)j G. hihasadinanSm (vl. 47^) 'having a bright dwelling-place' (imisain)'^. Yrom /liiman- 'name" the
Jio--nAin>iT- 'WL'
AV. forms with -i the f. stem -iidmul- at the end of five compounds
named', /(w7(-<7.-(7/r- 'having five names', w<i/;<5 //.im//.'- 'great-named', vlh\i-n'>mm-'\iK\'\\\^
all names', sa/idsni/nimnT' 'thousand-named". The f. ..'/i;.)'/rt-/- (VS. II. 20) 'noxious food'
is perhaps similai-ly formed".

(VIII.

In

the

corresponding passage

of VS.

(xvilt. 3) dst/iTni.
'

Both these might be formed from the

transition o-stems d/ia-, .find-.

This is perhaps the reason why these are the only two
plurals of this declension which retain the
a in the Pada text; d/m appears in I. 92^.
3
The form ni-iamai/iis 'eager' for /-

7 The AV, has five stems thus formed at

the end of compounds,
8 Cp. Bloomfield, BB. 23, 105 ff,, AJPh.

]6,

409434;

Bartholomae

if. S,

An-

j;eiger 17,

With the ending of the neuter;

Lanman 433
'o

see

(top).

Possibly also

w-^wmo

(tl.

32') 'bearing

weir but it is derived from *sii-ma- according

in X. 92'.
to BR. and Grassmann.
>' The f. I'ld/tmt- (ix. 335) formed from
4 There is also a transition form dsiiais
dian-.
/iid/iman- is quite exceptional, being due to
'stones", beside the stem
The
5 The unique form /nii/d/'/iis (as if from a a play on words (see Lanman 528).
stem ntii/dn-) is doubtless used for metrical form /mdiij'i
tmdiia in sense, occurring
reasons instead of ndktaiii in Vli. I04'8.
twice in the RV., may be an I. sing. f. of
6 There
is
also
the
transition
form ImdnT-: cp, GrasSMANN and BR.
/aw/fl/j'is

due

to the parallelism

oi cvayavathh

d/ianam.

VI. Declension.
In

Nouns.

Consonant Stems.

207

strong forms aryaman- 'Avyaman', iman- 'self, taidL jimaii- 'victorious'

vowel of the suffix. In the weak forms, even when the suffix is preceded
^y _} _vo_wel, ^about a ^dozen forms do not syncopate the i: I. omdnd, pravad-yamana,
bhiimdna,^lihumana, syumand, hemina; D. tramane, damane; Ab. G. bhumanas; G. maidmdnas, damanas, y&manas, vydmanas. The forms which, besides syncopating, drop the
m or the of the suffix are: prathina, prena, bhunci., mahina, varini; draghmh, raima.
c.
Beside the -man stems there are several transfer stems in -ma, which are,
however, of rare or late occurrence: rfflwm'- 'destroyer' beside darmdn-; dhdrma-{PC<f. etc.)
'law' beside dhdrman-;
ima- (VS.) 'course' beside Iman-; hdma- (VS. AV.) 'offering'
beside homan- (RV.); djma- 'course' beside djman-; y&ma-^CQyas,e h&^\Az yaman-; priyddhama- (I. 1401) 'fond of home' beside priyd-dhdman- (AV.); and occasional forms of
karma- at the end of compounds beside the regular -karman-: vTrd-kanna-m (x. 61') 'doing
manly deeds'; viivd-kaivuna (x. 1 644) 'all-creating' beside vihd-liai'mand, etc.
b.

tlie

retain tlie short

Inflexion.

The normal forms

actually occurring would, if made from dimanm. and from karman- 'act' in the n., be as follows;
Sing. m. N. dsma. A. dsmanam'. I. dimana^. D. dsmane'^. Ab. dhnanas^.
G. dsmanas^.
L. dsmani and dsman. V. dhnati.
Du. N. A. V. dsmana'^.
L. dsmanos.
PI. N. V. dsmanas. A. dsmanas. I. dsmahhis. D. dsmabhyas.
G. dsmanam. L. ds'masu (AV.).
Sing. n. 'N. A. kdrma^. I. kdrmanH^. D. kdrmane^.\b. kdrmanas^.
G. kdrmanas^. L, kdrmani and karman.
Du. N. A. kdrmani. G. kdrmanos.
PI. N. A. kdrmani, karma, kdrma.
I.
kdrmabhis.
D. kdrmabhyas.
Ah.- kdrtnabhyas.
G. kdrmanatn^.
L. kdrmasu.
Forms which actually occur are the following:
Sing. N. m. a-karma 'wicked', d-brahma 'lacking devotion', aryamS.
'Aryaman', dsma 'stone', a-sremA 'faultless', atmh 'breath', asu-hema 'speeding
swiftly',
istd-yama 'going according to desire', usrd-yama 'moving towards
brightness",
rtd-dhama (VS. iv. 32) 'abiding in truth', krtd-brakma 'having
performed devotion', jarimd 'old age', jata-bharma 'ever nourishing', jema
(VS. XVIII. 4) 'superiority', trpdla-prabharma 'offering what is refreshing', darmd

329.

'stone' in the

'demolisher', damd 'giver', dur-ndma 'ill-named',

dur-mdnma 'evil-minded',
dyutdd-yama 'having a shining path', draghimA (VS. xviii. 4) 'lengtli', dvijdnma 'having a double birth', dharmd 'arranger', dhvasmd 'dai-kening', pdkastkamS N. of a man, papmd (VS. vi. 35) 'misfortune', prthii-pragama 'widestriding',

prathimd (VS.

'abounding in

valleys',

many

mahimd

ydma

births',

'width',

xviii. 4)

bhUmd

'greatness',

brahmd 'devout man',

bhufmd^

bhdri-janma 'having
yajnd-manma 'ready for sacrifice', raghu-

(TS.

vii. 3.

13')

'plenty',

resmd (AV.) 'tempest', vadmd 'speaker', varimi 'width',

mV^ (VS. xviii. 4) 'height', visvd-karma^a^\.-cx&aXox', visvd-sama (VS.xvm. 39)
'having the form of all Samans', vfsa-prabharma 'to whom the strong (Soma)
is
offered',
satdtma 'possessing a hundred lives', satyd-dharma 'whose laws
are true', satyd-manmd 'whose thoughts are true', saptd-nama 'seven-named',
sahdsra-yama 'having a thousand courses', sadhu-karma 'acting well', su-kdrms
'working skilfully', su-jdnima 'producing fair things', su-trAma 'guarding well',
su-dy6tmU 'shining bright', su-brdAms 'accompanied by good prayers', sumdntu-nSmU 'bearing a well-known name', su-mdnma 'benevolent', su-vdhma
'going quickly',

I The vowel has also to be restored in

several other forms (see Lanman 524 f.).
With short vowel asyamd^am, tmdnam,

Also with syncope, mahimnds, etc.

Also with short vowel aryamdna,j(mand.
7 Sometimes kdrmd in the Samhita text.
8 Also with syncope, namnd, etc.
3 Without syncope after vowel bhumanS,
9 bhujma (I. 65s) should probably be read
etc. ; with syncops niaAimn&,maAin&, drdghma,
bhujmh; see BR., Grassmann, Lanman 530
etc.
(top).
4 Also with syncope, mahimni, etc.
S

"

208

I.

'driving

Allgemeines und Sprache.

su-idrmd (VS.

well',

viii.

8)

4.

Vedic Grammar.

'good protector',

firm support', svadu-ksddma 'having sweet food' '.

N. A. n. djma 'track', ddma 'food', ema 'course',
ksddma 'carving knife', cdrma 'skin', jdnima
'goal',

tjkma 'young blade of

ndma
bhiima

'na.me',

pdtma

'earth',

corn',

'flight',

mdnnia

ddma

'cord',

brdhma

karma
'birth',

dhdrma 'ordinance',
bhdsma (TS. VS.

'prayer',

mdrma

'thought',

su-sthama 'having a

'vital

part',

ydma

'deed',

kdrsma

jdnma 'birth',
dkdma 'abode',
xii.

35) 'ashes',

'course',

loma

vdrtma 'path' (Kh. v. 2'), vdrma 'mail', vdsma

(TS. VS. XIX. 92) 'hair',
'garment', vema (VS. xix. 83) 'loom', vesma 'house', vyoma 'sky', sdkma 'power',

sdrma 'refuge', sddma 'seat', sdma 'chant', sdma 'wealth', sthdma 'station',
With final vowel
syuma 'strong', svddma 'sweetness', homa 'oblation'.
lengthened in the Samhita text: kdrma, j'dniml, dhdma (AV.), bhdma,

vyoma^ su-stdrlma^ (TS. v. i. 11^) 'forming an excellent couch', svddma^.

A. m. dsmqnam, a-sremdnam, atmdnam, usmdnam (AV.) 'heat', ojmd?iam
'power', omdnam'ia.fOUT\ klomanam (VS. xix. 85) 'right lung', yar/?aa/, tuvibrahmanam 'praying much', darmdnam, damdnam 'gift', dur-mdnmanam, dyutddyamana?n, dvi-jdnmanam, dharmdiiam,pdka-sthamanam, papmanam (VS.xii. 99;
TS. I. 4. 41'}, puru-tmdnam 'existing variously', pziru-natnanam (AY.) 'having
many names', bra/imdnam, bhumdnam, mahimdnam, resmanam (VS.xxv. 2),
varimdnam, varsmdnam 'height', visvd-karmanam, vi-sarmdiiam 'dispersion',
satdtmanam^ satyd-dharmanam, sadmdnam 'sitter', sahd-samanam 'accompanied
by songs', su-tdrmanam (TS. i. 2. 2") 'crossing well', su-dyjtmanam, su-brdhmanam, su-sdrmanam, somdnam 'preparer of Soma', stamdnam (AV. v. 135)
With short a
'track' (?), svadmdnam 'sweetness', harimdnam 'jaundice'.

aryamdnam, tmdnam

'breath'.

atmdna (VS. xxxii. 11), usmdna (VS. xxv. 9), tmdna,

bhdsmana 'chewing', majmdna 'greatness', varsmdnS,
visvd-karmana.
I.
omdna, pravdd-yamana 'having a precipitous course',
bhumdna 'abundance', satd-yamaiia (AV. SV.) 'having a hundred paths'.
2. aryamnd (AV.), pamnd (AV.) 'scab', bhumnd (VS. in. 5), mahimnd, varimnd''

I. m. dsmana,
papmdna (VS. xix.

11),

(VS. AV.), satd-yamna.

varind (TS.)'; drag/imd,

3.

prathind'^,

prend^

'love',

bhundT,

mahind^,

ralmd 'n. kdrmaria, jdrimana, dhdrmana

mdmnana,
'ordinance', pdtmana, brdkmana, bhdsmana (VS. vi. 21) 'ashes',
vdrmana, vidmdna 'wisdom', vi-dharmana 'extension', sdkmanS, sdrmana,
i. bkiimana
sdkmana 'might', svd-ja?imana 'self-begotten', hdnmana 'stroke'.
2. ddmna (AV.) 'tie',
dkdmna, ndmna,
'earth',
syiimana, hemdnd 'zeal'.
lomna (AV.) 'hair', sdmna, sutrdmna (ySi.y:.^. :^^) 'protecting well'.
D. m. I. atmdne (VS. vii. 28), takmdne (AV.) a kind of disease, tmdne,

pdpmdne (AV.

bhtiri-karmane 'doing much', visvd-karmane

jarimne, bhumne (VS. xxx. 13) 'plenty',
mahimne;
dn-usra-ydmne 'not going out during daylight',
usrd-ydmne,
su-trdmne (VS. x. 31), su-sdmne N. of a man ('having beautiful songs'],
suhdvltu-namne 'whose name is to be invoked successfully'.
n. kdr(TS. VS.

VIII.

brahmdne,

VS.),

45).

2.

aryainne,

8 mahina occurs 35 times, mahimna only

su-dharma (VS. XXXVIII. 14) 'well supportseems to be meant for a V. (wrong 3 times.
9 Beside vanmna (AV.). The TS. twice has
accent), but perhaps su-dharma should be
varina, which in the corresponding passages of
read.
2 susiarlma in the Pada text.
the VS. is replaced by varimna; cp. Lanman
3 See Lanman S3I'5331= In these two forms the m being preceded
4 Once also the transfer form varimata,
according to the declension in -inant.
by a consonant remains, the n being dropped:
5 For prathimni, from prathimdn-.
draghmna 'breadth', and raimna 'rein'.
6 For premna from p-eman-.
Probably also ddtia for ddmna 'gift', and
dsmani.
7 For bhumna beside bhumdna.
possibly ami
1

ing'

VI. Declension.

Nouns.

Consonant Stems.

209

mane, fdnmane, dhdrmane, brdhmane, dAdrmane'supTpoTt', vidmdne, vi-dharmane,

sdrmane.
i. tramam 'protection', damane.
2. dkSmne, simne 'acquisition'.
Ab. m. dsmanas, atmdnas, usmdnas (VS.vi. 18), satyd-dharinanas {KSf).

klomnds (AV.), jarimnds (AV.), varimnds (AV.).

n. cdrmanas, Jdnmanas,
dhdrmanas, tndnmanas, vdsmanas 'nest', sddmanas.
i. bhumanas.
2. dimnas,
dhdmnas (VS. vi. 22) ^, Umnas.
G. m. a-mdrmanas 'having no vital spot', brahmdnas, vi-patmanas 'speeding
away', vipra-manmanas 'having an inspired mind', mci-janmanas 'of radiant birth',
su-sdrmanas, visvd-karmanas (VS. xxxi. 1 7).
i. mahimdnas.
2. aryamnds,
jarimnds (AV.), mahimnds, sthird-dhamnas (AV.) 'belonging to a strong race'.
n. kdrmanas, jdnmanas, dhdrmanas, brdhmanas, mdnmanas, vdrmanas.
I. damanas,
bhimanas, ydmanas, vyomanas.
2. dhdmnas, samnas.
L. m. I. dsmani, atmdni, tmdni, brahmdni, mahmdni (AV.) 'greatness', susAmani.
2. dsman, tmdn, atmdn (VS. AV.).
n. i. djmani (AV.), kdrmani,
cdrmani (AV.), j'dnmani, dAmani, dirghd-prasadmani 'affording an extensive
abode', dhdrimani 'established usage', dhdrmani, dhAmani, pdrTmani 'abundance', prd-bharmani 'presenting', prd-yamani 'setting out', brdhmani, mdnmani,
mdrmani, yAmani, Idksmani (TS. vii. 4. 19^) 'mark', vdkmani 'invocation', vidharmani, ve'smani {KY.), vyomani, sdrmani, JaVJwa??? 'current of air', sdvTmani
'impulsion', su-samdni, stdrimani 'strewirig', hdvTmani^ invocation', homani 'offering' and 'invocation'.
With syncope: l6mni{KY.), vijAmni{KV.) 'knuckle' (?),
sthAmni (AV.).
2. djman, d-yjman 'no expedition', e'man (VS.TS.), odman
(TS. VS.) 'flooding', kdrman, kArsman, cdrman, jdniman, j'dnman, ddrlman
'destruction', dhdrman, dhAman, pdtman, brahman, bhdsman (VS. TS.) 'consuming', bhArman 'table', mdnman, mdrman, yAman, vdriman, vdriman 'width,
vdrsman, vij'Aman 'related to each other', vi-dharman, vyoman, sdrman, sdsman
'song of praise', sdkman 'attendance', sddman, sAman, svAdman, hdvTman.
V. m. aryaman, dsman (TS.iv. 6. i'), Asu-he7nani!Y'S,.\.'j.']'^),takman (AV.),
tri-naman (TS. AV.) 'three-named', papman (AV.), puru-naman, puru-hanman
N. of a seer, brahman, vi-dharman, visva-karman, visva-saman N. of a seer,
vrsa-karman 'doing manly deeds', satya-karman 'whose actions are true',
sahasra-dhaman (AV.) 'having thousandfold splendour', su-daman 'giving good
gifts', su-yaman (AV.), sva-dharman 'abiding in one's own customs'.
Du. N. A. V. m. brahmdna, satya-dharmana, sa-namand 'of the same
kind', su-sdrmana; aryamdna, jemana 'victorious', sAmatmana (Kh. iii. 2 2 5;
cp. TB. II. 8. 9') 'endowed with chants', su-kdrmand (VS. xx. 75).
N. A. n. sdrmani, jdnmanT, sddmani.
I. dhAmarii, sdmani (VS. x. 14).
2. nAmni (AV.).
G. n. sddmanos.
L. m. dsmanos.
PL N. V. a-ddtnAnas 'unbound' and 'not giving gifts', a-dhvasmAnas
'undarkened', dnu-vartmdnas {yS.'Xwii.?i(i) 'followers', d-brahmdnas, a-rasmAnas
'having no reins', Sha-brahmdnas 'conveying sacred knowledge', jarimAnas,
brahmAnas (VS. xxvii. 2), bhrAjajjanmdnas 'having a brilliant birthplace',
mahimAnas, sucij'anmdnas, sdtya-dharmdnas, ja'-Za/wwawaj (TS. 1.3. lo"^) 'having
the same marks', su-kdrmdnas, su-jdnimdnas, su-rAmdnas (VS. xxi. 42) 'very
delightful', su-sdrmdnas, sthA-rasmdnas 'having firm reins', svddmAnas.
With
short o: aryamdnas, mahdtmdnas (Kh. iii. 12^) 'high-minded'.
N. A. n. I. r/J-j-awzaw? (VS.xviii. 43), kdrmani, cdrmdjii, Jdnimdni, jdnmdni,
dAmani (AV.), dhdrmdni, dhAmani, nAmdni, pdksmdni (VS, xix. 89) 'eyelashes',
brdhmani, mdnmani, mdrmdni, romdni 'hair', Umdni (AV.), vdrtmdni, vdrmdni
(Av.), sdrmdni, sddmani, sdmani.
2. kdrma", j'dnima, j'dnma, dhdrma,
2.

1 BR. and Eggeling

suggest that this is
a corruption for daninas 'bond'.
2 This and the following forms have

Indo-arische Philologie.

I.

4.

short

final

Samhita

a in

the

Pada

as

text.

14

well

as

the

210

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

Vedic Grammar.

4.

dhima, nSma, brdhma, bhiima, mdnma, roma'^, sdrtna, sddma.

3. jdnima',
dhdnna, fiSmS, brdhma^ bhiima, roma, sddma^.
2. dur-ndmnas (AV.).
A. m. dhnanas, takmdnas (AV.), brahmdnas.

m.

d-khidra-yamabhis 'unwearied in course', a-dhvasmdbhis, dsmabhis,

dima-hanmahhis 'strokes of the thunderbolt', asu-Mmabhis, omabhis, klomabhiS'
(VS. XXV. 8), brahmdbhis, maytira-romabhis .'peacock-haired', vTlu-pdtmabhis
n. djmabkis,
'flying strongly', su-kdrmabkis, su-mdnmabhis su-sdrmabhis.
emabhis, kdrmabhis, tJimabhis (VS.xix.8i), trdmabhis, dMrmab/iis, dkdmabhis,
ndmabhis, pdtmabhis, brdhmabhis, bhdrimabhis 'nourishment', mdnmabhis,
yamabhis, vdrimabhis, vdja-karmabhis'' (SV. TS. ni. 2. 11^) 'active in war',
vdja-bharmabhis (viii. 19^) 'bringing reward', vi-gamabhis 'strides', sdkmabhis,
sdmabhis, hdvimab/iis.
Ab. n. Umabhyas.
n. dhdmabhyas.
D. m. brahmdbhyas.
n. dhdrmaiiam, brdhmanam,
2. dur-iidmnam (AV.).
G. m. brahmdnam.
I.

2. dhi-namnam^ 'animals named snake',

mdnmanam, mdrmanam (Kh.i. 5^).
sdmnam (AV.).
dhdmasu, vdrmasu,
n. kdrmasu, Jdnmasu,
L. m. dsmasu (AV.).

sddmasu.
3.

330.

They

The -van stems

Stems

in -van.

far the most numerous of the three groups.

and are almost exclusively declined in the
Hardly a dozen of them make neuter forms, and only five or

are

by

are chiefly verbal adjectives

masculine.

forms are used as feminines.

a.
The few feminine forms are cases of adjectives agreeing with f. substantives.
They are: %va^.'^. sa-yiigva (x. 130"^) 'companion' [gdyairt), an-arva (11. 40*) 'irresistible' [ddHis);
six

A. an-arvdnam (X. 9214) 'irresistible' (aditim); du. N. sam-sthavana (VUI. 374) 'standing
together' {rodast); pi. I. indhan-vabhis'^ (11. 34^) 'flaming' (dhenubhis); G. sahasra-davnam
(I.
17^) 'giving a thousand gifts' isitniatTnani). The f. of these stems is otherwise formed
with -I, which is however never added to -van, but regularly to a collateral suffix -vara ^.
Twenty-five such stems in -varX are found in the RV. and several additional ones in the

'

It is perhaps most convenient to enumerate them here: agrHvarl-^ (kS .)

later Samhitas.
'going in front', abhi-kftvarJ- 'bewitching' (AV.), abhi-bhuvar'i- 'superior', abhiivarT-9 (TS.
VS.) 'attacking', uUdna-sivarl- (AV.) 'lying extended', ri'oz'a;-J- 'regular', eva-yavari- 'going
quickly', kftvarl- (AV.) 'bevifitcher', talpa-Hvari- 'lying on a couch', nis-sidhTjari- 'bestowing',
pivarl- 'fat', purva-javarl- 'born before', pra-suvari- 'furnished with flowers', bahti-suvarT'
'bearing many children', bhuri-davari- 'munificent', w^a/aW-Mz'iZ?-/"- 10 'being with her mother',
7ndiari-svari- 11 (AV.) 'mother-growing*, ^j/iJ/z/arJ"- 'worshipping', vdkvari- 'rolling', vahya-stvarJ(AV.) 'reclining on a couch', vi-bhhvari- 'brilliant', vi-mfgvar> (AV.) 'cleansing', sdkvari('powerful') a kind of metre, sdrvarl-'^^ '(star-spangled) night', iruslJvdrJ- 'obedient', svetaycivarT- 'white-flowing', satn-sisvan- '3 'having a calf in common', sa-jiivan- 'victorious',
sa-yavarT- 'accompanying', sumndvdrt- 'gracious', sutiridvarl-'^^ ^^oi\o\is\ sfivarl- 'streaming', svadh&vart- 'constant'.

Perhaps singular.
The Pada text has always a in

the following forms.

The

f.

atharvt-,

formed from dtharvan-

this

and

"fire-priest", is
I

That

is,

quite exceptional,

agra-i-t-varT-.

9 That is, abhi-i-i-vart-.

This lengthening is found in neither
10 From what only seems to be a, -van
van stems nor -an stems, except dhd and
-bhil-an-.
sirsd, which may be formed from transfer stem which is really
I' This seems to be a corruption in AV.
stems and in which the Pada as well as the
V. 2' of nidtaribhvart- in the corresponding
Samhita text has the long vowel.
4 vdJa-karmabhis is a v. 1. of vaja-bharmabhis, passage of the RV.
12 The f. of sarvara- 'variegated' occurring
and both adjectives 'as agreeing with iitibhis
in api-sarvard- n. 'early morning'; a stem
have the value' of feminines.
5
The G. chando-naminam (VS. IV. 24) sdr-van- does not occur.
13 The f. of what only seems to be a stem
'named metre' seems to be a transfer to
siiu-an-.
in -van but is really
the a-declension.
6 Formed from indhana- 'fuel', with loss
14 Also sunrtdvatT-,
3

of the final vowel.

VI. Declension.

Nouns.

Consonant Stems.

211.

In the strong cases there

is one instance in which the a remains short;

anand two others in which the wealiest stem is used: A. sing, maghdnam
(VS. XXVIII. 9) instead of maghavanam, N. pi. maghonas (VI. 44'2) instead of maghavanas'^.
In the weak cases when the suffix is preceded by a vowel, the a is always syncopated
in the Samhita text except in the forms davdne, vasuvdne (V.S.), and rtavani, but it may
have to be restored in one or two instances ^.
c. The three words fk-van- 'singing', maghd-van- 'bountiful', saha-van- 'powerful'
make a few forms from supplementary stems in -vant: I. sing, fkvaia; pi. I. niaghdvadbhis, D. viaghavadbhyas, L. magkdvaisti; N. sing, sahavan and sdhavan.
Beside dadhikravan-, N. of a mythical horse, also occurs the stem dadhi-krd-.
d. Eight or nine words in -van show transitions to the a-declension by extending
the stem with -a or, more commonly, by dropping the n. Thus saivand-m and satvandis
occur beside the numerous regular forms from ja'tofflw- 'brave'. The N. sing. m. anarvdn-a-s
(V. 51", VIII. 3112) may have started from the A. anarvdn-am (X. 92'4), while the n.
anarvd-m (l. 1642) may have been due to the f. (ddiiir) aitarva which appears like the f.
Other transitional forms are rkvd-s beside fkvan-; ftikva-m
of the a- declension.

b.

arudnam'i

(X. 921+),

takvd-s 'swift' beside tdkvan-;

'dexterous' beside fbhvan-;

vdkvan-; vibhava-m

'brilliant'

vdkvas, N.

beside vibhavan-; iikvd-s (AV.)

'skilful'

pi., 'rolling' beside

beside sikvan-.

Inflexion.
if made from grsvan- 'pressing stone'
m. and from dhdnvan- 'bow' in the n., would be:
Sing. m. N. gr&va. A. grdvanam. I. gr&vna. D. gr&viie. Ab. gr&vnas.
Du. N. A. V. grcivand
V. grdvan.
G. grdvnas. L. grdvani and grAvan.
PI. N. V. grdvanas.
and gr&vanau. I. grdvabhyam (AV.). G. grdvnos.
G. grdvnam. -L. grdvasu.
A. grdvnas. I. ^rdvabhis. D. grdvabhyas.
Sing. n. N. A. dhdnva and dhdnva. I. dhdnvana. D. dhdnvane. Ab. G.
PI. N. A. dhdnvani, dhdnva,
dhdnvanas. L. dhdnvani and dhdnvan.
dhdnva (AV.). I. dhdnvabhis. D. dhdnvabhyas (VS.). Ab. dhdnvabhyas (AV.).

331.

The normal forms

occurring,

in the

G. dhdnvanam (AV.).

Forms

L. dhdnvasu.
actually occurring are the following:

Sing. N. m. agra-ydva 'going in front', dtharva 'fire-priest', adma-sddva

'companion at a meal', ddhva 'road', an-arvd'^ 'irresistible', abhi-yugva (VS.
abhisasti-pdva 'protecting from curses', abhi-satva 'surXVII. 86) 'attacking',
rounded by heroes', abhyardha-ydjva 'receiving sacrifices apart', amativd
drva 'steed',
'suffering want', arativd 'hostile', d-ravS 'not giving', 'hostile',
dvatata-dhanva (VS. ill. 61) 'whose bow is unbent',
ugrd-dhanva 'having a mighty bow', fkva 'praising',
ydva 'pursuing guilt', rnavd 'guilty', rt&va 'pious',
dhva 'having a black track' {adhva), kratu-prdva

asu-pdtva 'flying

swiftly',

fghava 'impetuous', r7iafbhva 'dexterous', krsnd'granting power',

ksiprd-

tdkva 'bird of prey',

dadhi-krdva N. of a divine horse, deva-ydva 'going to the gods', dru-sddva
'sitting on the wood', nr-sddva 'sitting among men', pdtharva N. of a man,
pdtva 'flying', puru-kftva 'doing much', purva-gdtvd 'leader', purva-ydva 'leader',
pra-tdkva (VS. v. 32) 'steep', pra-rikva 'extending beyond', prana-ddva^ (AV.)
in the morning', badha-sftva 'striding
'breath-giving', pratar-itva 'coming
mightily', brhdd-grava (VS. i. 1 5) 'like a great stone', bhuri-ddva 'giving much',
maghdva^ 'bountiful', mddva 'exhilarating', mraksa-kftva 'rubbing to pieces',
ydjva 'sacrificer', ydva 'aggressor', yuktd-grava 'having yoked the pressing
raghu-pdtva 'flying swiftly', rdrava 'giving abunstones', yudhva 'warlike',
dantly', rdva (VS. VI. 30) 'giving', vdkva 'rolling', vasu-ddva 'giving goods',

dhanva 'having an

elastic bow',

gravd

'pressing stone',

a transition to the a4 an-amdn-a-s is

1 This seems to be a metrical shortening;
according to Grassmann it is an A. of a declension.
Emendation for prdna-davdn in AV.
5
transfer stem an-arvdna-.
2 The form kflvanas in AV. XIX. 35^ as IV. 35^.
6 Also once maghd-van, transition form
2.
N. pi. m. is a conjecture; cp. p. 213, note
from a stem in -vant.
3 See Lanman 524 (bottom).

U*

2 12

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

vaja-dava 'granting wealth', vi-jsroa 'bodily', 'own', vi-bhdva 'brilliant', vibhftva 'bearing hither and thither', vrsa-parva 'strong-jointed', vyoma (VS.
subham-ykva 'flying swiftly', h'lbhva 'bright', syena-patvd
IV. 23) 'heaven'',
'borne by eagles', srutarva N. of a man, srustlvd 'obedient', satina-satva
'truly brave', satyd-madva 'really exhilarated', satva 'brave', samddva 'eager
for battle', sakava' 'mighty', sutva 'Soma-pressing', su-dhdnva 'wielding a
good bow', iftva 'speeding', soma-pdva 'drinking Soma', soma-sutva 'pressing
Soma', stubhva 'praising', hltva 'speedy'.
N. A. n. dhdnva^ 'bow' and 'desert', pdrva (AV.) 'joint', vi-vdsva 'bright
flame', sndva (AV.) 'sinew'.
A. m. ddkvanam, an-arvSiiam, d-yajvanam 'not sacrificing', drvSriam,
fjisvanam N. of a man, riiav&najn, rtAvJnam, gravanam, dadhi-kravanam, dhitavanam 'bountiful', pivanam 'fat', puru-nissidkvatiam 'bestowing many gifts', puroydvanam 'going in front', pratar-ydvanam 'coming in the morning', maghdvanam,
musivdnam 'thief, satd-yavanam (Kh.i. 3^) 'having a hundred ways', srustTvdnam,
sa-jitvanam 'victorious', sdtvanam, sa-ydvanam 'accompanying', sahdvanam,
sfkvanam 'corner of the mouth', hdrdvanam (VS. xxxviii. 1 2 ) 'strengthening hearts'.
I. m. I. dtharvana, abhi-yugvana, cikiivana 'wise', satd-parvana 'having a
hundred joints', sikvana (TS. 11. 5.12^) 'skilful'.
2. grdvna.
n. I. dhdnvana,

pdrvana.

sndvna (AV.).
D. m. I. ddhvane, d-pakad-daghvane 'not staying behind', kftvane 'active',
jdsvane 'needy', druhvane 'hostile', prstha-ydjvane 'sacrificing on the ridge',
mddvane, ydjvane, vasuvdne (VS. xxi. 48) 'winning of wealth', sdkvane (VS.
V. 5) 'skilful', satd-dhanvane (VS. xvi. 29) 'having a hundred bows', srutdrvane,
sdtvane, su-kftvane ''g\ovis,\ su-dhdnvane (VS. xvi. 36), st/iird-dAanvatte ''ha.Vvag a.
strong bow'.
2. d-ravne, rtdvne, osistha-ddvne (TS.i. 6. 12^) 'giving immedia2.

vfsa-prayavne 'going with

'giving abundantly', soma-pdvne,

tely',

'victory',

Ab.
sincerity'.

suta-pdvne 'Soma-drinker', su-ddvne

sva-dhdvne 'independent'.
n. i. turvdne
davdne 'giving', dhdnvane (VS. xvi. 14).
m. I. ddhvanas (VS. xxvi. i TS.), paka-sutvanas 'offering Soma with

stallions',

2.

d-ravnas, puru-rdvnas (VS. ill. 48) 'loud-roaring'.

n.

i.

dhdnvanas

(AV.), pdrvanas.

G. m.

dtkarvanas, ddhvanas, d-yajvanas, d-strta-yajvanas 'sacrificing

vy-adhvanas 'striding through'.
2. d-ravnas, dadhikrdvnas, bhuri-ddvnas, yuktd-gravnas, suta-pdvnas, soma-pdvnas; maghonas^.
I.

indefatigably', ydjvanas,

dhdnvanas 'bow'.
L. m. I. dtharvani, ddhvani, rtdvani, srutdrvani, su-kftvani.
2. sataddvni^.
n. i. tugvani 'ford', pdrvani.
3. W^ithout ending: ddhvan.
3. an-arvdn, a-parvdn, dhdnvan, pdrvan (AV.).
V. m. I. atharvan {AN.), asva-davan 'giving horses', davan {P^h-V.^.^^^),
maghavan, vasu-ddvan, visvato-davan (SV.i. 5.2. i') 'giving everywhere', visvadavan (AV.) 'giving everything', satya-satvan 'truly strong', satrd-davan 'giving
everything', sahasdvan 'strong', suta-pdvan, soma-pdvan, sva-ddvan 'having good
n.

I.

taste',

sva-dhavan, sva-ydvan 'going one's

own

way'.

2.

With -vas:

rtdvas,

eva-ydvas 'going quickly', prdtar-itvas, vibhava^.

1

As a masculine.

Also sahavan and sahavan from a stem there

however the a must be metrically restored;

are no examples in the -an or -man
stems, but the AV. has one in the former
the and three in the latter.

in -vant.

3 Once with final vowel lengthened in

Samhita text, dhanva.
4 Sometimes to be read as magha-vanas

is perhaps best taken

stem khid-vams-\ BR. and LanmAN
see Lanman 534.
explain it as from khid-van-. The V. matarisvas
5 The only example of syncopation in the is formed as if from matarU-van- instead of

L. of this declension in the

RV.

(v. 275),

where

6 khid-vas (vi. 224)

as V. of a

maiari-iv-an-; cp. p. 2IO, notes '

and

'3.

VI. Declension.

Consonant Stems.

Nouns.

213

Du. N. A. V. m. agradvana 'eating {advan-) first', a-druhvdna 'not hostile',

rtdvanS, grdvdna, pratar-yAvana, maghdvana, ratha-yavand 'driving in a car',
subhra-ydvann 'driving stately', srustivdnd, sa-jitvdnd.
With -au ^tSvdnau,

gravdnau (AV.).
PI. N. V. m.

I.

m. grdvabhyam

(AV.).

G. m. maghonos.

aksna-ydvdnas 'going across', dtharvdnas, an-arvdnas,

d-yajvdnas, upa-hdsvdnas 'mocking', urdhvd-grdvdnas 'lifting the pressing stone',
fkvdnas, rtdvdnas,grdvdnas,g/irta-pdvdnas{y'&.vi. 19) 'drinking ghee', driihvdnas,
'deceitful', pari-sddvdnas 'besetting', pivanas (TS. iii. 2. 8S), prdsthdvanas 'swift', prdtar-yavdnas, maghdvdnas, raghu-pdtvanas, vdnivanas^
iubham-ytivanas,
'demanding', vasd-pdvdnas (VS. vi. 19) 'drinkers of fat',
Weak
irustivdnas, sdtvdnas, su-dhdnvdnas, su-h'ckvanas 'shining brightly'.
form for strong: maghiinas (vi. 44")'.
2. dhdnva, pdrva^;
N. A. n. I. dhdnvani, pdrvdni, sndvdni (AV.).
with long final vowel only pdrvd (AV. xii. 5'*^).
2. d-rdvnas, evaA. m. I. ddhvanas, d-yajvanas, driihvanas (AV.).
ydvnas, grdvnas, prdtar-ydvnas; maghonas.

ni-kftvdnas

I. m. ddhvabhis, d-prayutvabhis 'attentive', fkvabhis, eva-ydvabhis, grdvabhis,

prdtar-ydvabhis'^ , ydjvabhis, rdnvabhis 'agreeable', sikvabhis, sdtvabkis, sanitvabhis

'bestowers', sa-ySvabkis, su-pra-ydvab/iis's'pet<i.mg^elV, sva-yi'igvabhis'aWits'.

n. pdtvabhis, pdi^abhis, vivdsvabhis, soma-pdrvabhis 'times of Soma offerings'.

T).\a. dtharvabhyas, grdvabhyas, ghantia-pdvabkyas (yS.-i^'Kxyiii.i'^) 'drinkAb. n. sndvabhyas (AV.).

5.
n. sndvabhyas (VS. xxxix. 10).

ing hot (milk)'

G. m. I. ddhvandm {ySi.v.T,^,), an-arvdndm, d-yajvandm, sdtvandm.

n.
grdvndm, rdrdvnam, vdja-ddvndvi^, soma-pdvndm; maghmdm.

2.

dhdnvandm

(AV.).

L. m. ddhvasu, kftvasu, gravasu {YLh.i.i2^)T, ydjvasu^.

pdrvasu.

Stems
332.

The

suffixes

-in,

in

I.

n. dhdnvasu,

-min, -vin.

-in,

-min, -vin,

which have the sense of

'possessing',

are used to form secondary adjectives. The stems in -in are very common,
those in -vin are fairly frequent, numbering nearly twenty, but there is only
one in -min: rg-jnin- 'praising'. They are declined in the m. and n. only 9;

but the neuter forms are very rare, amounting to fewer than a dozen altogether.
The vowel of the suffix
inflexion presents hardly any irregularities.
remains accented throughout'", and is not liable either to syncope or to
As in
It is lengthened in the N. sing. m. only".
lengthening in the G. pi.
m. n.
all derivative stems ending in -n, the nasal disappears in the N. sing.

The

and before terminations beginning with consonants.

There are a few transition forms to the a-declension starting from the
a.
'most
A. sing. m. in -in-am understood as -ina-m. Such z.ie. faramesih-ina-m (AV. XIX. 9*)
and
exalted', N. sing, n.; the V. mahin-a and the G. mahina-sya from mah-in- 'mighty',
'

From the intensive of \van-.

The form kHvano in AV. xix.

3S5 is a
conjecture for the lirsndvo of the Mss.
3 In Pada as well as Sarnhita.
4 Also the supplementary form maghavad2

bhis.
5

f.

The form sahasra-davnam

in

17^
Accented gravasu
There is also the

vatsu.

I.

is

in the edition.

transfer

They form
c.

g.

from

a special f. stem by adding

asv-tn- 'possessing horses'

asvin-T-.
10 Except .irin-,

sakin-,

sarin-,

and

the

kdru-laiin-, maha-vafurin-, indramedin-, from each of which a single form

compounds

occurs; also the compounds formed with

the negative a-; e. g. a-namin-.
" It would doubtless be lengthened in the
read as a
N. A. n. pi. also if that form occurred.

Also the supplementary form maghavad-

bhyas.

9
-T;

form magha-

'214

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

vanina-ni (x. 665]i from van-in- m. 'forest-tree'. The isolated form mandi-m
a transition to the -declension, starting probably from the I. sing, mandin-a
'exhilarating' understood as mandi-na.
the n.

(l.

pi.

92) is

Inflexion.
case-forms are represented in the m., but in the n. the
As only eight or nine n.
three singular case-forms, N. A., I, and G. only.
forms occur, they may most conveniently be enumerated separately:
Sing. n. N. d-nami 'unbending', ubhaya-hasti 'filling both hands', tsari
(AV.) 'hidden', patatri 'winged', vajl 'vigorous' (Kh. iv. 6^), sakalyesi (AV.)
'seeking shavings'^.
I.
kjrina 'praising', su-gandhina^ 'fragrant'.
G. prahosinas 'offering oblations'*.
The m. forms actually occurring, if made from hast-in- 'having hands',
All

333.

would be

the

as follows:

Sing.

N. hasti.
A. hastinam.
I.
hastlna.
D. hastine. Ab. hast'inas.
V. hdstin. G. hast'inas.
L. hastini.
Du. N. A. hastlna and hastinau.
I. D. hastibhyam.
PI. N. hast'inas. A. hastlnas. I. hast'ibhis.
G. L. hastinos.
D. hastibhyas (VS. AV.). G. hastinam. L. hast'isu.
a. The forms actually occurring are
Sing. N. I. Stems in -in: anki 'possessing a hook', ati-vyadkf (VS.

abhya-varti 'coming near',

arthf 'active', asvi 'possessed

85) N. of one of the Maruts, udri
'abounding in water', rjipi 'moving upwards', rjisi 'receiving the residue of
Soma', ekaki (VS. TS.) 'solitary', kapardi 'wearing braided hair', kdrU-lati^
'having decayed teeth', kamt 'desirous', kidayi (TS. iv. i 9^) 'forming a nest',
kevaladf 'eating by oneself alone', ken 'having long hair', krTdi (VS. xvii. 85)
'sporting', grha-medhi (VS. xvii. 8 5 ) 'performing the domestic sacrifices', candri (VS.
XX. 37) 'golden', tsari 'hidden', (i^7J 'majestic', nis-sapi 'lustful', pakthi' cooYmg
the oblation',/3/fl/'r/(TS. 1. 7. 7^} 'winged', /ara/^^-j//^/ (VS. viii. 54) 'most exalted',
pari-panthi 'waylayer', prsty-amayt 'suffering from a pain in the side', pra-ghdst
(VS. XVII. 85) 'voracious', pra-bhafigi 'destroying', pra-vepanf 'causing to tremble',
bahu-sardhi 'relying on his arms', brahma-cari 'practising devotion', brahmavarcasi (VS. xxii. 22) 'eminent in sacred knowledge',
bhadra-vadi 'uttering
auspicious cries', manisi 'thoughtful', manthi (VS. vn. 18) 'stirred Soma juice',
mandi 'exhilarating', marayi 'destructive' (?j, maha-hasti 'having large hands',
mayi 'crafty', medi 'ally', rathi 'possessing a car', rambhi 'carrying a crutch',
rukmf 'adorned with gold', vajri 'armed with a bolt', varmi 'mailed', vast
'having power', vajl 'vigorous', vi-rapsi 'copious', sata-svi 'having a hundred
possessions', sakt^ 'strong', sipri 'full-cheeked', jWjot/ 'roaring', //c^/ 'sounding',
svaghni 'gambler', sodas i (VS. TS.) 'having sixteen, parts', sdri^ 'hastening',
sahasri 'thousandfold',
sad 'companion', somt 'offering Soma', svabdt
'bellowing', hastt 'having hands'.
2. stem in -min:
rgmi 'praising'.
XXII. 22)

'wounding',

of horses',

iri^

'powerful',

uj-jest (VS. xvii.

3.

stems

in -vin\

d-dvayavi

'free

from

duplicity',

d-yudhvi^ 'not

fighting',

astravt 'obeying the goad', tarasvi (VS. xix. 88) 'bold'.

A. I. atrinam 'devourer', adhi-kalpmam (VS. xxx. 18) 'gamble-manager'.
1 Instead of vanin-as, probably due to the
metre.
2 The Pada text reads sakalya-esi; but the
Paippalada recension has the better reading
sakalyem 'among the shavings' seeWHiTNEY's

6
7

RV.

With abnormal accent.

Accented like a Bahuvrihi.
Thus accented VS. xvn. 85, but
I.

518:

the latter

is

saki

probably an error

as the suffix is accented in the three other

note on AV. I. 252.
forms ^akinam, ^akine, ^akinas.
8 B6HTHNGK(pw.) regards this as a gerund:
3 But this form might be from su-gandhi-.
4 The isolated form krudhmi (vil. 568) d-yud-dhvT 'without fighting'.
agreeing with nidnamsi is a N. pi. n. of a stem
krudh-mi-, rather than of krudh-min- 'angry'.
:

VI. Declension.

abhi-prasninam (VS. xxx. lo)

ava-krakdnam

'praising',

adar'mam

Consonant Stems.

Nouns.

'inquisitive',

'rushing down',

2IS

abhi-matinam 'insidious', arkinam

d-vajinam 'a bad horse', asvinam,

ayinam (TS. ii. 4. 7') 'hurrying up', isminam

uktha-samsmam 'uttering verses', ukthinam 'praising', udritiam,
rjtsmam^, kapardinam, karambhinam 'possessing gruel', kalpinam (y?>.y.yiyi. 18)
'designing', kalmalikinam 'flaming', kaminam, karinam 'singing', kulayinam,
'breaking open',

'speeding',

kucid-arthinam 'striving to get anywhere', catinam 'lurking', jana-vadinam

(VS. xxx. 17) 'prattler', tri-sthinam (VS. xxx. 14) 'having a threefold footing',

dhaninam

dyumninam,

ni-yaymam'

'wealthy',

'passing

over',

paksinam

'w'mgQA!,patatrinam{y^.y.iK.io), pari-panthinam, p'ltha-sarpinam (VS. xxx. 21)

putrinam 'possessing

purTsinam 'possessing land', pra-vadinam

prasn'mam (VS. xxx. 10) 'questioner',
bahu-vadinam (VS. xxx. 19) 'talkative', nianis'inam, manthmam, mandinam^,
manyu-savinam 'pressing Soma with zeal', tnaytnam, medinam (TS. iv. 7. lot),
rathinam, vamsa-nartinam (VS. xxx. 21) 'pole-dancer', vajrinam, vaninam
'bountiful',
vaninam 'forest tree', vayak'inam 'ramifying', varcinam N. of
a demon, vajinam, vi-rapi'mam, vi-stuninam (VS. xxiii. 29) 'wetting', satagvinam 'hundredfold', saiinatn 'hundredfold', sakinam, susminam, irhginam
'horned', svaninam (VS. xxx. 7) 'keeping dogs', sahasra-posinam 'thriving a
thousandfold', sahasrinam.
3. d-dvayavinam, ubhayavinam 'partaking of
'cripple',

(VS. xxx. 13)

'speaking

sons',

pleasantly',

tarasvinam, namasv'mam 'reverential', mayavinam 'employing deceit',

medhdvinam (VS. xxxii. 14) 'possessed of wisdom', raksasvinam 'demoniacal'.
I. I. arcina 'shining', as'vtna, kimidina 'evil spirit', kir'ina 'praising' *, balina
(TS. HI. 3. 8^) 'strong', mandlna, mah&-vaturina'> 'very wide', vaturina 'wide',
vdjina.
3. raksasvina.
D. I. abhya-vartme, a-mitrine 'hostile', ava-bhedme {YS.'XNi. :^^) 'splitting',
d-yudhine (VS. xvi. 36)
a-tatayine (VS. xvi. 18) 'having one's bow drawn',
'warrior', upa-vitine (yS.'^vi. 17) 'wearing the sacred cord', usnisine (VS. xvi. 22)
'wearing a turban', kapardine, /^fli7(rzW (VS. xvi. 35) 'mailed', karine, kimidine,
tantrayine (VS. xxxviii. 12) 'drawing out rays', ni-vyadhine (VS. xvi. 20)
both',

'piercing', ni-sarigine (yS.'^i.Yi. 20) 'sword-bearer', //-a-i-a/Jj/w^ 'victorious',

(VS. XVI. 35)

bhatnine 'angry',

'having a helmet',

manidne,

bilmine

mantrine (VS.
varuthine (VS.

XVI. 19) 'wise', mandine, mahUie 'mighty', rathine, vajrine,

XVI. 35) 'wearing armour', varmine (VS.), vi-namsine (VS. ix. 20) 'vanishing',
vi-rapsine, vy-asnuv-ine^ (VS. xii. 32) a genius of food, vyadhine (VS. xvi. 18)
sdkine,

'piercer',

XVI. 36) 'having

Ab.
VS.

XIII.

G.
(TS.

I.

siprine,

hesmine,

good weapons'.

sodas'me (VS.

viii.

sv-ayudhine (VS.

33),

3. raksasvine.

abhi-prabhahginas 'breaking completely', patatrinas, manthinas (TS.

57), sominas.
I. arthinas, rjistnas, kapardinas (TS.VS.xvi. 10), dkaninas, patatrinas

IV. 7. 13'))

parninas 'winged', pra-gardhinas 'pressing onwards', bhurimanthinas iySi.vii. i?>), mandinas, mayinas, ratninas

/(^j/^aj- 'much-nourishing',

'possessing
'bountiful',

gifts',

raj/waj- 'juicy', r^/Z^a.?'

vaninas

'forest tree',

1 fjisdm in I. 32'^ is possibly a metrically

shortened form iorfjisinam: op. Lanman 543 2.
2 As this
compound occurs only once
beside the simple adj. yayi-, which occurs
several times, the former is perhaps a trans-

from the /-declension.

3 mandi-m (I. 92) is probably a transition
form; but BR. regard it as a contraction in
pronunciation of mandinam.
fer

'abounding in seed',

varcinas,

vajinas,

Grassmann

vaj'rinas,

vaninas

vi-rapsinas, vilu-harsinas

in

i.

100' proposes to read

kirine.
5

P-

Accented

like

BahuvrThi;

but

cp.

^S4=6

Formed from

the present stem of

vi-as-nuv- in-,
7

From

reta- for rstas- 'seed'.

j/aJ-

2i6

I.

'refractory',

sominas.

L.

I.

Allgemeines UND Sprache.

Vedic Grammar.

4.

vrandinas 'becoming soft', sailnas, susminas, srnginas, sahasrinas,

3. d-dvayavinas, dvaydvinas 'double-dealing', namasvinas.
dvipini (AV.) 'leopard', parame-sthini (AV.), brahna-carini (AV.),

mayini, vajbii, somini.

V. I. dna-bhayin 'fearless', abhya-vartin (VS.xii. 7), amatrin 'having a large
drinking vessel', rjTpin, rj'isin, tuvi-kurmin 'working powerfully', pra-pathin

'roaming on distant paths',

s'usmin,

siprin,

'mighty',

Du. N. A. V.

I.

yaksin

sahasm

asvifiS,

'living',

'mighty'.

vajrin,
3.

vajin,

virapnn,

savasin

ubhayixvin.

V. asvina and dsvina, kumarina 'having children',

kesina, V. pajra-hosina 'having rich oblations', parnina, putrlna, purislna,

pra-

saksina, manthina, V. mayina, vajriria, vajina, V. vSjina, vi-ghanina 'slaying',

susmina, sarathina(ySs.yix.v/^.'j;T'S>^ 'driving in the same car', sama-carina (Kh.

2 2 5) 'faring with chants'.

Forms with -aw': asvinau,
3. mayavina.
V. dsvinau and ahinau, patatrinau (VS. xviii. 52), vajinau.
indra-medibhyam (AV.) 'whose ally is Indra'.
I. asvibhyam,
D. asviIII.

bhyam.

G.

asvinos.

L.

asvinos.

PI. N. V. I. ankusinas 'having a hook', atrinas, arkinas, arcinas,

arth'mas, avarokinas (VS. xxiv. 6) 'brilliant', isminas, ukthlnas, upa-mantrinas
rjisinas,
kapardlnas, kabandhinas 'bearing casks',
'persuading',
kaminas,

karinas,

kirinas,

krsanmas 'adorned with

pearls',

kesinas,

khadinas 'adorned

with rings', ganinas (TS. i. 4. 11') 'having attendants',

gathinas 'singers',
gdyatrinas 'singers of hymns',
gharminas 'preparing the Gharma offering',
dasagvinas 'tenfold', drapsinas 'falling in drops', dhutninas 'smoking', ni-karinas
(TS. VS. xxvii. 4) 'injurers', ni-iodiiias 'piercing', ni-rdminas 'lurking', ni-sahg'mas,
paksmas, patatrinas, pari-panihmas, pari-parinas (VS. iv. 34) 'adversaries',
parninas, pasinas 'laying snares', purisinas, pra-kndinas 'sporting', pra-saksinas, balinas, manismas, mandinas, mahinas, mayinas, medinas, raih'inas

vaninas
rokinas

'bountiful',

vaninas

'forest trees',

varminas,

vdjlnas, vi-raps'inas,

vi-

visaninas 'holding horns' (a people), vrata-carinas 'performing

vows', satagvinas, satinas, sdkinas, susminas, sahasrinas, sominas, svaninas
'resounding', hastinas, hiraninas 'golden'.
2. rgminas.
3. tarasvinas,
dvaydvinas, dhrsadvinas 'bold', namasvinas, mdydvinas.
'brilliant',

A.

I.

atrinas, a-rajinas 'lacking splendour', arthinas, asvinas, uktAa-samsinas,

kaminas, karinas, grathinas 'false', dyumninas, paksinas, pra-ghasinas (VS.

HI. 44), bhdminas, ma?idinas, mdyinas, mitrinas 'befriended', rathinas, vaninas
'bountiful',
vaninas 'forest trees', vdjinas, vrandinas, sahasrinas, sominas
hastinas (VS. xxiv. 29),

hiraninas.

asvibhis,

kesibhis,

rukmibhis,

vajibhis,

susmibhis,

D.

I.

rta-vddibhyas (VS.

grha-medhibhyas (VS. xxiv.

3. raksasvinas.

ni-sangibhis, patatribhis,

I.

I.

hastibhis.

v. 7)

2.

manlsibhis,
rgmibhis.

mandibhis,

'speaking the truth', kridibhyas (VS. xxiv. 16),

dhanvayibhyas (VS. xvi. 22) 'carrying a bow'

rathibhyas (VS. xvi. 26), sikhibhyas (AV.) 'peaked', svanibhyas (VS. xvi. 27)
JT'/Iray/Mjvflj' (VS.xv1.21) 'having a spear', svadhayibhyas (VS. xix. 36) 'owning
16),

the Svadha'.

G. I. kdrindm, mdyindm, vasindm (AV.), vajindm, srngindm.

3. stukdL. i. khddisu, dvarisu 'obstructing', hastisii (AV.).
vindm 'shaggy'.

4.

a.

Labial Stems,

Stems

in (radical) -p.

334. These stems are inflected alike in the masculine and feminine,
there being no neuters.
All the monosyllables are feminine substantives.
I

According

to

Lanman 544

the -a forms occur 369 times, the -au forms 32 times.

VI. Declension.

They

a>

are:

rup-

'earth',

'water',

vip-'^

Nouns.

kfp- 'beauty',

Consonant Stems.

ksdp-

ksip- 'finger',

'night',

Feminine are also the compounds

'rod'.

217
rip- 'deceit',

a-tdp- 'heating',

pati-rip- 'deceiving a husband', vi-stdp- 'summit', rta-sdp- 'performing worship'.

All other compound stems are masculine.
They are: agni-tdp- 'enjoying the

warmth of fire',

{AN .) 'excessively whimpering', asu-tfp-i 'delighting

'obeying the will (of another)', pari-rdp- 'crying around',
pasu-tfp-'>' 'delighting in herds', pra-sup-^ 'slumbering', rity-ap- 'having streaming
in lives',

(riii-)

abhi-lapa-ldp-''

keta-sdp-

water'.

The

distinction of strong and weak forms appears in dp- and its compound
welL as in the two compounds of sat>- 'serve', rta-sdp- and kela-sap-.
The
strong form dpas is used a few times in the A. pi., but the long vowel in pari-rapas as
A. pi. is due to the metre; on the other hand, the weak form ap-ds appears twice in the
a.

rity-ap;

AV.

as

as N. pi.

b. The A. pi. apds is nearly always accented on the ending as a weak case;
ksapas similarly appears two or three times, and vipds once.
u. No N. sing. m. or f. occurs, but a n. transition form once appears in this case
vistdpa-m (IX. Il3'"j, a. form which doubtless started from the A. sing. f. vhldp-avi. The
n. pi. of the same transition stem occurs once as vistapa (Vlli. 80^).
Two other transition
forms are ksapabhis and kdpabhis.

Infiexion.

The forms

335.

Sing. A.

actually occurring are the following:

Ab. apds;
rupds. L.
na. pasu-tfpam.

kj-pA, ksaps, vipA.

ksapds, ripds,

f.

f.

f.

vi-stdpam.

m. vipd
G. m. vipas

I.

'priest'.

apd,

f.

5.

f.

apds,

vi-stdpi.

Du. N. m. rity-apa; asu-tfpau^.

PI. N. m. rta-sApas, keta-sspas, V.
Idpas (AV.),

a-tdpas, vi-stdpas.

pra-supas.

rlti-apas; vipas; agni-tdpas, abhl-lapa-

Apas, V. Spas, rta-sApas; ksipas,

A. form apds occurs twice in the AV. for the N.?.
ksapds and ksdpas^,
A. m. asu-tfpas, pari-rApas*.
f. apds and Apas^,
vipds and vipas ", ripas.
'D. f. adb/iyds" (VS.VI.9).
I. f. adbkis".
Ab. f. adbhyds".
G. m.
asu-tfpas,

vipas,

ripas; pati-ripas.

vipim.

The

apAm

f.

'-3,

f.

ksapAm, vipAm.

L.

f.

Steins in (radical)

b.

apsu '+.

-bb.

336. Both masculines and feminines occur in this declension, but there
The stems comprise five monosyllables formed from roots,
are no neuters.
together with compounds of three of the latter {grabh-, subh-, stubh-), and
kakubh-. The stems are: ksubh- f 'push', grbh- f. 'seizing', ndbh- f. 'destroyer',
subh- f. 'splendour', stubh- adj. 'praising', f. 'praise'; jTva-gfbh- m. 'capturing
alive', 'bailiff',
sute-gfbh- 'taking hold of the Soma', syuma-gfbh- 'seizing the
I

vip- as

an

adjective

is

used

a m.

as

also.

An

irregular intensive formation.

Cp. Kluge, KZ. 25, 31 if.

From map-

3 times.
11 vipas thrice, vipds once in

'sleep'.

12

With

irregular accent.
6 Cp. Lanman 482 (middle).
7 There is also the transition
5

Metrical

for pari-rapas,

By

dissimilation for

RV.

*ali-bhis,

*ab-bhyds;

in

Johansson, IF. 4, 134146. See Lanthe man 483.

There are also the two transfer
forms ksapabhis and ksipabhis, each occurring

is

the

cp.

form

n. vi-sfdfd.
8

times in books I and X of the RV., and 16

times in the AV. ; it also occurs in Kh. III. 9.
10 ksdpas 6 or 8 times in RV., ksapas 2 or

which

once.

13 On the metrical value of apani see Lanreading of the Pada text in II. 233' 14; see
man 484 (top).
RPr. IX. 26.
14 BR. regard apdsu in viii. 414 as
apsu
9 apds is the regular form occurring 152
times in the RV. and 26 times in the AV. with inserted -a-. See Lanman 484.
The strong form apas is used half a dozen

2l8

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

Vedic Grammar.

4.

reins'; rathe-sabh- 'flying along in a car'; anu-stuhh- f. 'after-praise', a metre^

fta-stubh- 'praising duly', tri-stubh- 'triple praise', a metre, pari-stubh- 'exulting
on every side', sain-stubh- (VS.) 'shout of joy', a metre, gharma-stubh-

'shouting in the heat',

chandah-stubh- 'praising in hymns',

kakubh-

'uttering a shrill cry';

aloud', su-stubh-

f.

'peak',

vrsa-stiibh- 'calling

tri-kakubh- 'three-

pointed'.

and weak forms does not appear except in

The inflexion of these stems is incompletely
of ndbh-.
represented, there being no dual forms, and no plural forms the endings of
which begin with a consonant.

The

a.

distinction of strong

and A.

the N.

pi.

Inflexion.

337. The forms occurring are:

Sing. N. m. stup; tri-kaki'ip.
II'), tri-stup; kaki'ip (VS. AV.).

2.

A. m.

f.

am-sti'ip (VS. AV.),

anu-sti'ik

(TS. v.

sute-gfbham.
gfbham, subham; rta-stiibham,
kakubhain.
I. m. stubhA; su-stiibka.
f. ksubka, grbhd, subhA; atiu-sticbha, tri-sttibha
(VS. XVII. 34; TS. II. 2. 48); kaki'tbha (VS. xxviii. 44).
f.
subhe (AV. VS. xxx. 7); anuD. m. gharma-stubhe, syuma-grbhe.
stubhe (VS. XXIV. 12), tri-stubhe (VS. xxiv. 12); kakubhe (VS. xxiv. 13).
anu-stubhas (VS. xiii. 54),
Ab, m. jiva-gfbhas.
f. grbhds (VS. xxi. 43);
tri-stubhas (AV.).
iubhds'^ (in subhds pdtT, du. N. A. and subhas
f.
G. m. su-stubkas.
rathe-si'ebAam,

anu-sti'Mam, tri-stubham

pan,

v.).

L.

f.

tri-stubhi (VS. xxxviii. 18};

N. m.

PI.

nsbhas',

f.

A.
G.

chanda/i-stubkas,

subhas,

kakubhi (TS. m.

vrsa-sii'cbkas,

3. 9";

VS. xv.

pari-sh'tbhas,

4).

su-sti'cbhas.

stiibhas.

stubhas; tri-stubhas, pari-stubhas;

f.

fidbhas,

f.

kakubham.
c.

Stems

kakiibhas.

in -m.

338. There are only about half a dozen stems in -m which among them
muster a few more than a dozen forms. All are monosyllables except a
compound of nam- 'bend'. Neuters are sdtn- 'happiness' and perhaps ddm'house'.
A possible m. is him- 'cold'; and there are four feminines: ksdm-,
gam-, and jdm-, all meaning 'earth', and sam-ndm- (AV.) 'favour'. Strong
and weak forms are distinguished in ksdm-, which lengthens the vowel in the
strong cases, and syncopates it in one of the two weak cases occurring;
gdm- and jdm- are found in weak cases only, where they syncopate the vowel.
The forms occurring are the following:
Sing. N. A. n. sdm.
I. f. ksama, jma;
m. him-S.^.
Ab. f. ksmds,
gmds, j'mds.
G. f. gmds, Jmds^; n. ddn^.
L. f. ksdmi^Du. N. f.
ksama, dyava-ksama 'heaven and earth'.
PI. N. f. ksimas; sam-ndmas (AV.).

G.
1

n.

and

ddbhas in v. 19

Grassmann

as

is regarded
N. sing. m.

Lanman 485 thinks it may be

a G. sing. f. with wrong accent.
2 Strong form.
3 This is the only form, occurring twice,
from a possible stem him-, beside himena,
from himi: It might, however, be an I.
'destroyer'.

from the

damSm.

The form

by BR.

latter stem.

Cp. 372.

Cp.

Brugmann, Grundriss

For *dam-s

2,

580.

d-gan for *d-ffam-s)

occurring only in the expressions pdtir dan
axiipdilddn and equivalent to ddm-patih and
ddm-patX at the end of a tristubh line. Cp.
Brugmann, Grundriss 2, 453.
6
With irregular accent; cp. above 94 a.
5

(like

VI. Declension.

5.
I.

a.

Consonant Stems.

Nouns.

Stems

Stems

219

in Sibilants.

in radical *

and

s.

In radical stems ending in s and s, the sibilants are identical in

origin, both being alike etymologically based on the dental s, which remains
after a, but is cerebralized after other vowels and after k.
In the RV. there
are of radical ^--sterns some 40 derived from about 15 roots; of radical
j-stems, some 50 derived from about 15 roots; in both groups taken together
there are nearly 20 monosyllabic stems, the rest being compounds. Masculine
and feminine stems are about equally numerous; but there are altogether
only 7 or 8 neuters.
a.
The distinction between strong and weak forms appears in three words
piimams and Jiums- 'male'; nds- and nas- 'nose'; ui(Aa-sas- a.nd n/e^/ia-sds- 'utteiing verses'.
TheA.pl. has the accentuation of weak stems in the ina.sca\\aes jnas-ds, pums-ds, mds-ds
and in the feminines is-ds, tis-ds, dvis-ds.
b. The stem as- 'face' is supplemented in its inflexion by the an- stem as-dnthe stem is- is supplemented before consonant endings by idd-'^; and dos- 'fore-arm' is
supplemented by dos-dn- in the dual form dosdnl (AV. IX. 7').

339.

Transitions to the a- or a -declension appear in forms made from as- 'face',

kas- 'cough', nas- 'nose', mas- 'month', d-sds- 'hope', ni-mis- 'winking'.
I. From as-, beside and probably through the influence of the I. sing. ds-&, is formed the
adv. dsaya 'before the face of (as from a stem ds&-, and with adverbial shift of accent
and the supplementary
2. Forms like G. is-ds gave rise to isd-m;
instead of *dsdyd).
stem ida- probably started from the I. sing, id-a, which itself was probably due to idthe form assumed by is- before bk- endings; the stem is- further shows a transition to
3. From kas- 'cough' there is the transition V. kdse
the i- declension in the D. isdye.
(A.V.).
4. The strong dual form nas-d furnished a transition to an a- stem, from which
5. As pad-am gave rise to a, new N. pada-s, so from
is formed the dual nase (AV.).
mas-am arose the new stem masa-, from which are formed the N. sing, m&sa-s and the
6. In the RV. the stem a-sds- alone is used; but in the AV. appears the
A. pi. masdn.
A. dsam (perhaps a contraction for d-sdsam) which, understood as dsd-m, was probably
From ni-mis7.
the starting point of the dsa-, the only stem in the later language.
'winking' there appear, beside the regular compound forms A. d-nimis-am, I. d-nimis-a i.
'non-winking', the transition forms N. a-niviisd-s, A. a-nimisd-m, I. a-nimisina, N.pl. a-nimisas,
adj. 'unwinking', with the regular Bahuvrihi accent (90 B c).
c.

'refreshment',

is-

Inflexion.

340. In the N. sing, the sibilant is of course dropped if preceded by

Otherwise s remains, while s
as an-dk 'eyeless', pitman 'man'.
consonant,
a
becomes t^. Before bh- endings, .r becomes d in two forms which occur
j'{mad-bkis, mad-bkyds)^ and r in the only other one (dor-bhydm); while
becomes d in the only example occurring {vi-prud-bhis).
The forms actually occurring, if made from mas-'- m. 'month' as an

and from dvis- f. 'hatred' as a j-stem, would be as follows:

dvisd.
D.
I. masa;
Sing. N.S mis; dvit. A. mdsam; dvisam.
Du. N. A.
dvisl Ab. tnasds ; dvisds. G. mas as; dvis as. 'L. masi; dvisi.
PI. N. masas; dvisas. A. masds;
dvisa. G. masds. L. masSs (AV.TS.).
and dvisas. I. madbkis; dvidbhis. D. madbhyds (AV.). Ab. madbhyds
stem,

s-

masi;

wi^a;
dvisas
(AV.).

G. masSm; dvisdm. L. masst'i (AV.).

The forms actually occurring are:
Cp. J. Schmidt, KZ. 26, 340.
In this word (derived from md- 'meathe s is really secondary, probably
2 It (becomes ^only in the n. form dadhfk sure')
md-as-);
-as {mas'boldly', used as an adv. from dadhfs-, if the representing the suffix
Vord is derived from dhrs-'he bold'; but the cp. Brugmann, Grundriss 2, p. 398.
5 The only V. occurring is pumas.
word is perhaps more probably derived from
I

As

ksdp-

and

ksip-

by ksapa- and

ksipd-

drk- 'be firm', see BR.

Bartholomae,

respectively.

s. v.

dadhHi, and cp.

IF. 12, Anzeiger p. 28.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

Sing. N. I. m. piiman^ 'male'; candra-mas 'moon', durS-bhas' 'shining to

f. d-jhas 'having no kindred',
a-sts^
a distance', su-dds^ 'worshipping well'.
'prayer'.
n. bhss 'light', mis 'flesh'; dos 'arm', yos 'welfare', sam-yus 'luck
2. m. an-dk^ 'blind', edhamana-dvit^ 'hating the insolent'.
and welfare'.
f. vi-pri'U (AV.) 'drop'.
A. I. m. mdsa7n 'month', pi'imamsam; a-ySsam 'dexterous', uktha-sasami

suddsam, su-bhdsam 'shining beautifully', sv-asisam'- 'wellsv-dsam 'fair-mouthed'.

f.
kdsam^ (AV.) 'cough'; a-slsairf^, prasisam + 'precept' 5.
2. m. ghrta-pn'isam 'sprinkling ghee', jara-dvisam 'hating
decrepitude', brahma-dv'isam 'hating sacred knowledge', visva-pi'isam 'all-nourishdvisam 'hatred', prksam 'satiation'; d-nimisam
ing'.
f. isam 'refreshment',
'non-winking', dosani-srisam (AV.) 'leaning on the arm', hrdaya-srisam (AV.)
'clinging to the heart'. Also the adverbial A. a-vy-usdm (AV.) 'till the dawn'.
verses',

'uttering

praising',

n. dadhfk 'boldly' as adv.

f. kasd (AV.), nasd (AV.) 'nose', sasd 'ruler' "; abM-sdsa"

m. masd.
ava-sdsd (AV.) 'wrong desire', d-sdsa 'hope', a-sisa, nih-sdsd 'blame',
n. asd 'mouth', bhasd.
pard-sdsa (AV.) 'calumny', pra-sisa (AV. VS.).
f. isd, tvisd 'excitement'; d-nimisa, prd-rfsd (AV. TS.)
2. m. visva-pt'isd'^'^.
n. gfirtaprusa.
'rainy season', press'' ^ 'pressure'.
n. bhase'iyS:. xiii. 39).
2. m. d-prdD. I. m. pumse (AV.); su-ddse.
d-vi-dvise (AV.) 'for non- enmity', rsi-dvtse 'hating the
yuse'^'' 'not careless';
seers', brahma-dvise; gav-ise 'wishing for cows', pasv-ise 'wishing for cattle'
sdkam-ukse'-^ 'sprinkling together
tvise, prkse,
rise "mjury, prdse
(VS. V. 7).
^
kasds (AV.)
f.
n. asds.
2. f. isds,
ivisds.
Ab. I. m. pumsds.
dvisds, risds; abki-srisas 'ligature', ni-misas 'winking'.

1. 1,

'blame',

G.

I.

IV. 6. 6^).

m. pumsds; a-sdsas 'not blessing', su-ddsas, sv-dsas.

f. isds, usds
2. m. srfrga-vrsas'^^ a man's name.

prksds; abhra-prusas 'sprinkling of the clouds', ni-tnisas.

nasi (VS.);
f. iipdsi 'in the lap',
L. I. m. pumsi, mdsi.

2. f.
(A v.).
V. m. pumas^^.

pra-sisi

Du. N. A.

I.

m.

ni-mtsi, prd-ifsi,

vy-i'isi

d-sisas (TS.

d-Hsi (AV.),

'dawn'.

uktAa-sdsd'"^, siiryd-mdsa^ 'sun

f.

'dawn', dvisds,

and moon'.

f.

ndsa".

G. i. f. nasus.
L. i. f. nasos (AV. TS.).
n. dorbhydm (VS.xxv. 3).
PI. N. I. m. a-ydsas, V. aydsas, uktha-sdsas'"^, su-sams'dsas'^ (AV.)
a-s'Isas, pra-sisas,
vi-shas (AV.) 'explanations'.
f. d-sdsas;
'well-directing'.
I. I.

On

Lanman

13 Accented thus as a monosyllabic stem

instead of pylsa [= pra-is-d).
14 From pra-\-yu- 'separate' with s as root
2 See Lanman 495'.
are also the transition forms determinative.
3 There
15 Perhaps also drani-ise (vili. 46' 7) 'hastenmdsa-s and a-nimisd-s.
4 The root in a-sis- and pra-iis-, being a ing near', Pada dram ise; cp. Lanman 496'.
16
Also the transfer to the ;-declension
reduced form of sas- 'order', is here treated
isdye.
as belonging to the j-class.
17 In a compound vocative with napal.
5 From an-dks- 'eyeless'.
18 In the f. are found the transfers to the
6 The N. of is- would be*2/': its place is
a-declension ide and kdse (AV.).
supplied by the extended form idd.
19 Strong forms; Pp. tckiha-sdsd, -sdsas.
sams- 'pro7
Strong stem from sas20 This might be from the transition stem
claim'.
-mdsa-,
8 Accented iSsdm (AV. v. 22").
There is also the transition form
9 Also the transition forms a-nimisdm and
ndse (AV.).
asam (AV.).
22 There
1 Cp. Lanman 495 (bottom).
are also the transition forms
11 From sasnidsds, a-nimisas.
sams- 'proclaim'.
12 There
form
is
also the transition
1

the Sandhi of this N. see

49S'-

"

a^nimisena.

VI. Declension.

sam-sisas (AV.) 'directions';

'falling

off easily',

Nouns.

Consonant Stems.

vi-srdsas- (AV.)

'falling apart',

221
su-srdsas (AV.)

svayam-srdsas (AV.)

'dropping spontaneously'.
2. m.
md.ksas 'flies', mfisas 'mice'; anrta-dvisas 'persecuting untruth', V. a-saca-dvisas
'hating non-worshippers',
gav-isas,
ghrta-pricsas, pari-pr'isas
'sprinkling',
brhad-uksas 'shedding copiously', brahma-dvisas, yajna-mtisas (T3. ill.
5. 4')
^

'sacrifice stealer',

vata-tvisas 'having the impetuosity of the wind'.

f. isas,
pfksas\ dn-a-dhrsas (AV.) 'not checking', ghrta-prusas, ni-mlsas {KSl.),
fiemann-isas^ 'following guidance', pati-duisas 'hating her husband', vy-usas
(AV.), sam-isas 'darts', sakam-i'cksas, su-pfksas 'abounding with food'.
A. I. m. jnasds 'relatives', pumsds, mlsds 3; an-ssas 'faceless', dn-urdhvabkzsas 'whose splendour does not rise',, a-ydsas, a-s'dsas, hrtsv-dsas 'throwing
tvisas,

into the heart'.

2. m. brahma-dvisas.
f. Isas
camrisas", vi-prusas (AV.).
1. 1, m. madbhis.
2. f. vi-pruiibhis'' (VS.).
D. i. m. tnadbhyds (AV.).
Ab. I. m. madbhyds (AV.).
G. i. m. pumsam (AV.), masdm, vasdm^
'abodes'; a-ydsam.
2. f. isdm, dvisdm.
L. i. m. pumsii'^ (AV.).

and

f.

a-sdsas;

isds^, usds, dvisas

a-s'isas,

and

I.

pra-iisas.

dvisds^, pfksas;

b.

Stems

in derivative

Stems

in

-is

and

341. The stems formed with the suffixes

together, as their inflexion is identical.
The

-s.

-us.

-is
-is

and

-us

stems,

may best be treated

numbering about a

dozen, consist primarily of neuters only'"; these when they are final members
of compounds are secondarily inflected as masculines also, but only in a

form (N. sing, svd-socis 'self-radiant')

numbering sixteen (exclusive of compounds)
single

as

feminine.

The

-us

stems,

RV., include primary

masculines (two also as f.) as well as neuters; three of the latter as final
members of compounds are also inflected as feminine. Eleven of the -us
stems are neuter substantives, all but one accented on the radical syllable;
four of these are also used as m. adjectives'' accented in the same way {drus-,
Three of those -us stems which are exclusively m.
cdksus-, tdpus-, vdpus-).
are adjectives accented en the suffix, while two are substantives accented

on the root
a.

the

{ndh-us-, mdn-us-)^^.

The N. A.

lizing the

in

pi. n.

vowel of the

are

distinguished as strong forms by lengthening and nasa-

suffix (as in the -as stems), c. g.

jyoCimd and cdhumsi.

Among

these stems appear a number of transitions to, and a few from, other
declensions, i. The N. sing, n., as in soc-is and cdks-us, having in some passages the
appearance of a N. sing. m. sods and caksu-s, led to formations according to the /- and
u-dedension. Such are N. pi. socayas (AV.) 'flames', V. sing, pavaka-soce 'shining brightly',
bhadra-soce 'shining beautifully', sukra-soce 'shining brilliantly'; N. pi. arcdyas 'beams',
The form of krav-is- 'raw flesh' in the compound d-kravi-hasia- 'not having
I. pi. arci-bhis.
bloody hands' is probably due to the same cause. From cdks-us- 'eye' is once formed
the Ab. cdkso-s and the V. sakasra-cakso (AV.) 'thousand-eyed'. From tdp-us- 'hot' is once
b.

8 This word, occurring in this form only,

1 The Mss. read vi-srasas; see Whitney's
might be a f.
note on AV. xix. 343.
and
9 mdssu- occurs Pane. Br. iv. 4. i
2 neman- is here probably a locative.
3
There is also the transition form masu (like pumsu for punis-su) TS. vir. 5. 22.
The f. transition form idasu occurs as the
masan.
4 isas occurs 63 times, isas 7 times in the L. pi. of is-.
10 There seems no reason why
dm-isRV.
5 dvisas occurs 39 times, dvisas 4 times occurring in L. s. only, should exceptionally
be regarded as m. (BR., Lanman, Grassin the RV.
6 The meaning of this word is perhaps MANN).
One of these, tdpus- 'hot', has a single
'libations in ladles'.
du. tdpusa.
7 There is also the transition form iiabhis f. form, A.
12 See above p. 84, 19.
as an I. pi. of is-.
'

T-1-

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

formed the G. iafo-s; from z;a-j- 'desiring', as if vanii-s

vaniin; from ay-us- 'life' occurs not only the L. sing,

pi.

in N., the K.Aag.vand-m and

ayu-n-i, but several compound

forms, V. dtrghayo 'long-lived', adaidhayo (VS.) 'having unimpaired vigour', A. vrddh&yu-m

'full of vigour', n. Z'Wz'iyz; 'all- quickening', A. m. viivayu-}n, Tl. visvayave, G. vUvayo-s'^.
2.
There are also some transition forms from three masculines in -iis, by extension of
the stem, to the a- declension: from ndh-tis- 'neighbour', starting perhaps from the G.
nahus-as taken as a N. sing, ndhusa-s, are made the G. nahusa-sya and the L. ndhuse;
from man-ns- 'man', starting from the N. pi. manus-as taken as a N. sing, mdnusa-s, come
^^Vi.mdnusaya and \!az G.mdnusa-sya; from vdp-us- 'be3.i\ty' once T>. vdpusaya beside the
there are a few transitions from the
frequent vdpis-e.
3. On the other hand,
declension of /- and u- stems to that of stems in -is and -us. Beside su-rabhi- 'fragrant',
the superlative form su-raihu-{ama7n^ occurs once; and beside numerous compounds
formed with tuvi- appear the stems iuvis-mant- 'powerful' and tuvis-fama- 'strongest'^.
Beside the G. dhdkso-s and ddkso-s't 'burning', there appears once the form daksus-as^,
which is doubtless due to the false analogy of forms like tasthusas. Though mdn-iis'man' may be an independent formation beside mdn-u-, the probability is rather in favour
of regarding it as secondary (starting from a N. nidnu-s), because nidnu- shows eight
case-forms, but minus- only three". The stem d-prayiis-, occurring only once beside the
less rare d-prayu-, probably represents a transition from the latter stem.

Inflexion.
342.

The

The

becomes j before vowel endings, and r before -bh.

is the same as that of the m. except in the A. sing.,
The only f. forms occurring are in the N. or A. They

final

inflexion of the n.

N. A. du. and

pi.

are the following; N. sing, svd-socis 'self-radiant'; cdksus 'seeing', d-ghora-caknis

'not having an evil eye', hradi-caksus 'reflected in a lake'; citrayus 'possessed
of wonderful vitality'; A. du. tdpusa 'hot'; A. pi. gj-vapusas 'having the form

of cows'.

The actual forms occurring, if made from sods- 'glow' in the n., and
from -socis- in the m. (when it difiers from the n.), and from cdksus- 'eye' as n.
and 'seeing' as m., would be as follows:
1. Sing. N. socis.
A. socis; m. -socisam. I. sociss. D. socise. Ab. socisas.
G. socisas. L. socisi. V. socis.
Fl. N. A. sociinsi; m. -socisas. I. socirbhis.
D. m. -socirbhyas. G. socisam. L. socissu.
cdksusam.
2. Sing. N. cdksus. A. cdksus; m.
I.
cdksusa.
D. cdksuse.
Ab. G. cdksusas. L. cdksusi.
Du. N. A. cdksusT; m. cdksusa. D. cdksurbhyam
PI. N. A. cdksumsi; m. cdksusas. I. cdksurbhis. D. cdksurbhyas (VS.).
(VS.).
G. cdksusam.
The forms which actually occur are the following:
Sing. N. m. i. d-havis 'not offering oblations', krsnd-vyathis 'whose path

black'; citrd-jyotis (VS. xvii.80) 'shining brilliantly", sukrd-jyoiis (VS.xii. 15)

is

shining',
satyd-jyotis (VS. xvii. 80) 'truly brilliant',
su-jyotis (VS.
XXXVII. 21) 'shining well'; citrd-socis 'shining brilliantly', duroka-socis 'glowing
unpleasantly', sukrd-socis 'bright-rayed'; jivd-barhis (AV.) 'having a fresh litter',

'brightly

su-barhis (VS. xxi. 15) 'having a goodly litter', stirnd-barhis 'who has strewn the
svd-rocis 'self-shining'; sv-arcisi 'flashing beautifully'.
2. cdksus 'seeing',
vdpus^ 'beautyful', vidus 'attentive' 9; d-dahdha-caksus (AV.) 'having undamaged

litter';

sight',

ksitdyus 'whose

'malignant',

life

vi-parus (AV.)

sdrva-parus (AV.) 'having

goes to an end',
'jointless',

all joints',

sahdsrayus (AV.)

'
There is probably insufficient reason to
assume a primary independently formed stem
-a;/-K- beside ay-us-; cp.LANMAN569(bottom).

Retaining the

vant-.

j-

dirghAyus 'long-lived',

visvdtas-caksus 'having eyes

of the N. like indras-

Desiderative

'living
adj.

duh-sasus

on

all sides',

a thousand years'.

from dah-

'burn'.

The Pada

text has dkaksusas.

6 Cp. Lanman 570, (bottom).
'
There are also the transition
5

arci-s

and

forms

neuters becoming masdeclension.

soci-s,,tbe

3 luv-is- as an independent formation would culines of the ibe irregular, since the radical vowel otherwise
8 Also the transition forms
5 This may be an -stem:
shows Guna before the suffix -is (134).

cdksu-s, tapu-s.
vidu-s.

VI. Declension.

N. A. n.

I.

arcis 'flame',

'fence', jyotis 'light',

barhis

Nouns.

kravis (AV.) 'raw

'litter',

vards

chadis 'cover',

c/iardis

vydthis 'course', sods 'lustre',

vailvanard-jyotis (VS. xx. 23) 'light

havis 'oblation';
(TS. iv. i. 93),
(AV.) 'wound', ayus

sukrd-jyotis

heaven'.^ 2. drus
dhdnus 'bow', /arj-

flesh',

223

'circuit',

ja/^>/j 'clarified butter',

of Vaisvanara',

Consonant Stems.

svar-jyotis
'life',

cdksus

(VS. v. 32) 'light of

'eye',
^i/wj 'glow',

'joint', ydjus 'worship', vdpus 'beauty', sAsus 'command';

indra-dham'is (AV.) 'Indra's bow', sv-ayus'' (VS. iv. 28) 'full vigour'.
A. m. I. d-grbhita-socisam 'having unsubdued splendour', ajird-socisam
'haying a quick light', urdhvd-socisam 'flaming upwards', citrd-socisam, dirghAyu_

soci?am
socisam

'shining

through a long

'sharp-rayed',

life',

sukrd-socisam,

pavakd-socisam 'shining

sird-

iDrightly',

srestha-socisavi

'most brilliant'; citrdbarhisam 'having a brilliant bed', vrkid-barhisam 'having the litter spread',
su-barMsam, stirnd-barhisam (VS. xiv. 49); daksina-jyotisam (AV.) 'brilliant by
the sacrificed gift', hiranya-j'yotisam (AV.) 'having golden splendour'.

janusam

dlrghdyusam, purv-ayusam 'bestowing much vitality',

satdyusani^ 'attaining the age of a hundred'.
I. I. n. arcisa,
kravisa, chardisa (VS. xiii. 19), jyotisa, barhisa (VS.
XVIII. 63; TS.), rocisa 'brightness', socisa, sarpisa, havisa.
m. manthi-socisa
(VS. VII. 18) 'shining like mixed Soma', sukrd-jyotisa (VS.).
2. n. dyusa,
cdksusa, janiisa, tdpusa,
dhdnusa (Kh. in. 9), pdrusa, yd;'usa, satAyusa^
satnista-yajusa (VS. xix. 29)
'sacrifice and formula',
sv-ayusa (VS. iv. 28)
'full vigour of life'.
m. tdpusa, ndhusa 'neighbour', mdnusa 'man', vanusa
2.

'birth',

'eager'.

D.

n. arcise (TS. VS. xvii. 11), jyotise (VS. AV.), barhise (VS. 11. i),
m. tigmd-socise 'sharp-rayed', pavakd-socise, sukrd-socise,
vrktd-barhise, sttrnd-barhise, ratd-havise 'liberal offerer', su-hdvise 'offering fair
^

socise,

I.

havise.

ayuse (VS. AV.), cdksuse, jani'ise, tdpuse (AV.), ydjuse (VS.

cdksuse, mdnuse, vanuse^.
Ab. I. n. j'yjtisas (AV.), bar/dsas, havisas.
2. n. dyusas (TS. iv. i 4^),
cdksusas (TS. v. 7. 7'), janusas, pdrusas (TS. iv. 2. 9^), vdpusas.
m. ndhusas,
mdnusas, vdpusas.
G. I. n. kravisas, chardisas, jyotisas, barhisas, socisas, sarpisas, havisas.
oblations'.

I.

30),

2. n.

m.

vdpuse.

Ta..pavakd-socisas, vrddAd-sodsas'hlnzmg mightily', vdsu-rodsas 'shining brightly',

vrktd-barhisas''

vdpusas.

2.

n. dyusas, cdksusas, tdpusas, tdrusas 'superiority', pdrusas^

va. cdksusas, ndhusas, mdnusas, vanusas^; istd-yajusas {VS.wiii. 12)

'having offered the sacrificial verses'.

L. I. n. arcisi, Smisi^ 'raw flesh', jyotisi, barhisi, sddhisi (VS.'X.iii. i,^)
'resting-place', havisi; tri-barhisi 'with threefold litter'.
2. n. dyusV, tdrusi,
pdrusi, vdpusi.
V. I. n. barhis^; deva-havis 'oblation to the gods' (VS. vi. 8).
2. m.
e'kayus^ 'first of living beings'.
Du. N. A. 2, n. cdksusT (AV., Kh. iv. 11 'Oj jani'isi.
m. cdksusa,
D. 2. n. cdksurbhyatn (VS. vii. 27).
jay?isa 'victorious'.

1 Also
the transition form visvayu 'allquickening'.
2
Also the transition forms vanu-m,
vfddh&yu-in, visvayu-m.
3 Transition forms: vihayave; mdnusaya,
ziapusaya; d-prayuse 'not careless'.

Also perhaps a transition form hce-s;

cp.

Lanman
5

568.
Also the transition forms tapos, visvayos;

nahusasya; mdnusasya; dha&sustis{24l'b,'p.222).

6 Accounted a m. by BR., Grassmann,

Lanman.
7

Also the transition form ayuni; and

m<

ndhuse.
8 Also
the transition forms pavaka-soce,
bhadra-soce, sukra-soce.
9 Also the transition forms adabdhayo (VS.),

dlrgkayo, sahasra-cakso (AV.).

224

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

dgrbhita-socisas, ajird-socisas, vAta-dhrajisas (Kh. I. 3^)

PI. N. m. I.
'having the impulse of wind', vrktd-barhisas, V. vrkta-barhisas, sddma-barhisas
'preparing the litter', V. su-barhisas, su-jykisas and su-jyotisas, svd-rocisas '.
2. ndkusas, mdnusas, V. manusas, vanusas, vdpusas.

N. A. n.
Ayuinsi,

2.

I.

arcimsi, jySttmsi,

cdksumsi, januinsi,

vdpumsi.

(VS. AV.),

A. m.

barhtmsi (VS. xxviii. 21), socfmsi, havimsi.

tdfumsi, pdrumsi (TS. VS. AV.), ydjwnsi

mdnusas, vant'esas^.
dhdnurbhis (AV.), ydjurbhis (VS.iv.i), vdpurbhis.
D. I. m. urdhvd-barhirbhyas (VS. xxxviii. 15) 'being'above the litter'.
2. n. ydjurbhyas (VS. xxxvm. 11).
2. n. cdksusam (AV.), janusam,
G. I. n. jyotisam, havisam (AV.).
ydjusam (AV.), vdpusam.
m. vanusdm, msvd-manusam 'belonging to all men'.
L. I. n. havissu.
I.

I.

I.

su-j'yotisas.

n. havirbhis'^.

2.

ndkusas,

2. n.

^.

343.

Stems

in -as.

Primarily this declension consists almost entirely of neuters, which

as mdn-as- 'mind'; but these as final members of
compounds may be inflected in all three genders, as N. m. f.

are accented on the root,

adjective

su-mdnas 'well-disposed'.
There are besides a few primary
which are accented on the suffix, being either substantives, as
raks-ds- 'demon', or adjectives, some of which occur in the f. also (as well
as n.), as ap-ds- 'active'; and one feminine, us-ds- 'dawn'*.

su-mdnas,

n.

masculines,

a.
Strong cases are regularly distinguished only in the N. A. pi. a., where the
vowel of the suffix is lengthened and nasalized' (as in the -is and -us stems), as
dmhamsi 'troubles'. Otherwise the stem usds- shows in the A. sing., N. A. du., N. V. pi.,
strong forms with lengthened vowel in the suffix, which occur beside the unlengthened
forms 6, the latter being nearly three times as frequent in the RV. The long vowel is
here required by the metre in 20 out of 28 occurrences, and is favoured by the metre in
the rest'; so that the lengthening may be due to metrical exigencies. The strong form
usasasi occurs once (X. 39') for the weak usdsas as the G. sing, or A. pi. There is further
the single strong form N. du. m. iosasa'^ 'bestowing abundantly''".
b. Supplementary stems ending in -as beside -an are fbhvas- 'skilful' (as well as
fbhva-) beside fbhvan-, and sikvas- 'strong' (as well as sikva-) beside Hkvan-.
c.
There is here a large number of transition forms both to and from the 5declension. Many pairs of stems in -a and -as are common in both forms and seem
therefore to be of independent derivation. But there are also a good many such doublets
of which the one is the normal stem, while the other has come into being through
mistaken analogy or metrical exigency, i. In the transitions to the a- declension several
may be explained as starting from the misleading analogy of contracted forms. To this
group belong the following: from dngiras-, a name of Agni, L. sing, angire besideN.pl.
dngirds', from dn-dgas- 'sinless', A. pi. dn-dgdn beside A. sing, dn-agdm and K. pi. dn-dgds;
from ap-sards- 'water-nymph', apsardbhyas (AV.), apsardsu (AV.), apsard-paies (AV.) beside
apsaram (AV.); from tisds- 'dawn', N. du. use (VS.), usabhydm (VS.), beside A. sing, usam
and pi. usds; irora /ards- m. 'old age', f. smg.N. jara (AV. VS.), T). jarayai{A.V.), beside

Also

the

transition

forms

arcdyas,

See Arnold, Vedic Metre,

p. 130, II (a);
546.
2 Also the transition form vanun.
8 The Pada text has usdsah.
3 Also the transition form arci-bhis.
9 Here the long vowel appears in the
4 The derivation of a few stems ending Pada text also. This is the only form made
in -ajis obscure; as a/cV- 'lap' (only L. sing, ), from the stem tolas- (from ius- 'drip').
1 The form sa-psarasas 'enjoying in comand risddas- 'destroying enemies'.
5 On the origin of this form as a common (?)', occurring once, must be the pi.
bination of -dn-i and -ds-i see Johansson, of sa-psard- (BR., Grassmann), not of *saBE. 18, 3 and cp. GGA. 1890, p. 762.
psards- (Lanman S46, Geldner, VS. 3, 197),
1

Lanman

iocdyas.

cp.

The lengthened vowel never occurs in

the Pada text in these forms (excepting of
course the N. usas).

because

never accented in Bahuvrihi

2', p. 301 d
note, su-medhds- 'very wise' is not a Bahuvrihi.
-as

is

compounds; see Wackernagel

;:

VI. Declension.

Nouns.

Consonant Stems.

225

A. jardm

i
from sa-josas- 'united', N. du. sa-jasau beside pi. sa-j6?Ss. There is a further
;
group of transitions to the a- declension starting not from contracted forms, but from the
N. sing, n. understood as m.J. From avas- 'favour' is thus formed I. dvena; from krdndas'battle-cry', D. krandayal (AV.),
and the compound suci-kraiida-m 'crying aloud'; from
mrdhas- n. 'troop' the m. forms sardka-m, idrdhena, sdrdhaya, idrdha-sya, sdrdha7i\\ from
hidas- n., once (l. 94") hila-s N. m., hence A. hida-m (AV.j, L. hile; also the compound
forms N. f. du. a-dvese 'not ill-disposed', beside dvesas- 'hate'; dur-oka-m (vtl. 43) 'unwonted' beside okas-^ 'abode'; vi-dradlu (iv. 3223) 'unclothed' (?) beside drddhasT (TS.)
garments'; prthu-jrdya-m (IV. 441) 'far-extending' h&%\i.z jrdyas 'expanse'; puru-pesasu

'multiform' beside pesas 'form'

The second

2.

class,

^.

comprising transitions

to the -as declension, consists

of the

two groups of transfers from the radical -a stems and the derivative -a stems. The
former group embraces forms of compounds made from km- 'abode', pra-ja- 'offspring',
-di- 'giving', -dha- 'bestowing', besides mas 'moon', starting from the N. in as which is
identical in form with that of stems in -as.
The forms of this type are the following
N.pl. divd-ksas-as beside N. sing. divd-Asds 'having an abode in heaven'; A. sing, d-prajas-am
(AV. VS.) 'childless', A. pi. f. ida-prajas-as (TS. MS.), A. sing, su-praj ds-am (AV.), N. pi. m.
su-prajds-as (AV. TS.) 'having a good son' beside N. sing. m. su-prajas; V. dravino-das^
beside N. sing, dravino-dd-s, A. drav'mo-dd-m 'wealth-giving'
varco-dds-au (VS.) 'granting
vigour'; yf&-a'/4aj--aj (VS.) 'impregnating' beside N. sing. m. reto-dhas; A.ziayo-dhds-am{yS.),
I. vayo-dkds-d(y?i.), vayo-dhds-e (VS.), V^.vayo-dhas, N. pi. vayo-dhds-as {kV ) beside N. sing.
vayo-dhas 'bestowing vigour'; D. sing, varco-dhds-e (AV.) beside N. sing, varco-dka-s [kV.)
and A. sing. f. varco-dha-m (VS.); of candrd-mds-7 'moon' all the forms occurring, except
the N. sing, which is their starting-point, are transfer forms: A.. candrd-masamiyS.'X.'X.ni.t,^^,
I. candrd-masd (AV.), D. candrd-mase (VS.), G. candrd-masas, L. candrd-masi (AV.), V. candranias (AV.), N. du. candfd-masd, surya-candra-mdsd and suryd-candra-mdsazt.
3. There are further several sporadic transition forms from -as stems occurring
beside the ordinary corresponding -a stem. These may sometimes have started from
an ambiguous N. sing., but they seem usually to be due to metrical exigencies. Such
forms are the following: ddksas-e, ddksas-cis, putd-daksas-a and puid-daksas-as beside very
dosds-as 8 (AV.) once beside forms of dosa- 'evening'
frequent forms of ddksa- 'skill'
(viivdyu)-posas-am beside the common posa-; N. sing, sd-bhards, A. visvd-bharas-am beside
the frequent bhdra- 'supporting'; wa'j--fflj 9 (AV.) beside vesd- 'neighbour'; sepas as A. sing,
in AV. (XIV. 2-3*) for the sepam of the RV., from sepa- m. 'tail', N.sing. sepas; N.sing.m.
su-sevds occurs in the AV. as a variant for su-seva-s 'very dear' of the RV.; sahdsra-sokds
occurs once as N. sing. m. beside the common soka- 'ilame'; A. sing, tuvi-svands-am and
N. pi. iiivi-svands-as, beside svand- 'sound' A. pi. f. gharmd-svaras-as beside svard- 'roaring'
also the D. dhruvds-e (vil. 701) for dhnivdya to which it is preferred owing to the metre
and the influence of infinitives in -dse, and similarly vrdhds-e (v. 64^) parallel to vrdhaya
;

(vilt. 836).

The occurrence of
4. There are besides a few quite abnormal transition forms.
the very frequent N. pi. m. of vi- 'bird' with a singular verb -(l. 1418) and once as an
A. pi. (1. 1041) may have produced the impression of a n. collective vdyas- and thus
led to the n. pi. vdyamsi (AV.), helped perhaps by the existence of the very frequent nstem vdyas- 'food'. The isolated form N. sing. m. sv-dncds is probably lengthened for
The
sv-diica-s (like su-sevas for su-sevas) which started from the A. sing. m. sv-dhc-am.
G. du. rodas-os occurs once (ix. 22^), evidently on account of the metre instead of the
ordinary

rodasJ-os'^^.

that medha- 'wismedhdyd, '^.^l.medh&s,

I. medhabhis started from medham as contracted A. of medkas- found in su-medhds-.
This seems doubtful to me.
taken as
2 In VI. 66* rokas might be
N. sing. m. (as Grassmann takes it) beside
1

Lanman

552

dom' va.'^.medha,

rokds,
3

thinks
I.

m.

Cp. also the D. carayai

cardse

(l.

92'',

v. 47*),

(vil.

771) beside
(u. 1312)

and tdrdya

7 From mas- (A. mds-am, etc.), where the

belongs to the stem. It is formed probably
with -as from ma- 'measure' {md-as), being
thus in origin a contracted -as stem, in which,
however, the N. vias giving rise to the
transition
forms was understood as the
lengthened form of *mas.
S
In usaso dosdsas ca (AV. xvr. 4^) obviously due to parallelism with usdsas.
9 Clearly owing to the metre instead of

vesasas.
beside idrase (ill. iS'').
10 Similarly aks-6s occurs in AV. v. Ii'o
4 Cp. Lanman 353 and 554, 8.
On
also an -as ^ stem extended (but contrary to the metre) for aksT-os.
5 There is
with -a in the D. d-jarasaya (x. 85*-') 'till the transition forms of the -as declension

old age', based on the adv. compound

a-jaras-dm (B.)
6 Cp. Brugmann, Grundriss 2, p. 398.
Indo-arische Philologie.

I. 4.

cp.

Lanman 546558,

15

226

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

Inflexion.

The N. sing. m.

344.
dngiras'^,

i.

usas.

In

f.

about a

lengthens the vowel of the suffix; e. g. m.

dozen compounds the long vowel appears

(owing to the influence of the m.) in the n. also; e. g. tirna-mradas 'soft as

Before endings with initial bh the suffix -as becomes -0^. The forms
actually occurring, if made from dpas- n. 'work' and apds- m. f 'active', would

wool'.

be as follows:
I. dpasa;
apdsa.
D. dpase;
Sing. N. dpas; apds. A. dpas; apdsam.
apdse.
Ab. dpasas\ apdsas. G. dpasas; apdsas. L. dpasi; apdsi. V. dpas;
Du. N. A. V. dpasi; apdsJ and apdsau^. D. apibhyam (VS.).
dpas.
A. dpamsi; apdsas.
I. dpobhis;
PI. N. dpatnsi; apdsas.
G. dpasos (VS.).
apdsani.
G. dpasam;
Ab. dpobhyas.
apobhis.
D. dpobhyas; ap5bhyas.

L. dpassu; apdssu^.

The forms actually occurring are as follows:

Sing. N. m. dngiras^ an epithet of Agni, ddmunas 'domestic', nodhds
name of a seer, yams 'glorious', raksds 'demon', vedhds 'ordainer'; compounds a-cetds 'senseless', dty-amhas (VS. xvn. 80) 'beyond distress', ddri:

barhas 'fast as a rock', d-dvayas 'free from duplicity', dn-agas^ 'sinless',

an-udhds 'udderless', dnuna-varcas 'having full splendour', an-ends 'guiltless',
d-pracetas 'foolish', abhibhuty-ojas 'having superior power', dmitaujas 'almighty',
dsamaty-ojas 'of
dvayata-helas 'whose anger is appeased',
a-rapds 'unhurt',
unequalled strength', a-hands 'exuberant', uru-cdksas 'far-seeing', uru-vydcas
'widely extending', fsi-manas 'of far-seeing mind', rsvdujas 'having sublime
karu-dhayas 'favouring the singer', kftti-vasas (VS. iir. 61)
(rsvd-) power',
'wearing a skin', keta-vedas 'knowing the intention', khddo-arnas 'having a
devouring flood', gabhird-vepas 'deeply moved', gurtd-manas 'having a grateful
mind', gurtd-sravas 'the praise of whom is welcome', go-nyoghas 'streaming
among milk', ghrtd-prayas 'relishing ghee', jatd-vedjs 'knowing created beings',
tdd-apas 'accustomed to that work', tad-okas 'rejoicing in that', tdd-ojas 'endowed
with such strength', tardd-dvesas 'overcoming foes', tigmd-tejas (VS. i. 24) 'keenedged', iri-vayas 'having threefold food', dabhrd-cetas 'little-minded', dasmdvarcas 'of wonderful appearance', dirghd-tamas N. of a seer, dlrghdpsas
'having a long fore-part', dur-osas 'hard to excite', devd-psaras 'serving the
gods as a feast', devd-sravas 'having divine renown', dvi-bdrhas 'doubly
strong', nd-vedas 'cognisant', nr-cdksas 'watching men', nr-mdnas 'mindful of
men', ny-okas 'domestic', pavakd-varcas 'brightly resplendent', puru-rdvas (VS.
V. 2) N., prthu-jrdyas 'widely extended', /rZ/zw^^i/S'S' 'far-shining', /ra-^/aj 'attentive', prd-vayas 'vigorous', bahv-ojas 'strong in the arm', brhdc-chravas 'loudsounding', brhdd-ravas (VS. v. 22) 'loud-sounding', brhdd-vayas (TS. I. 5. 10^)
grown strong', bodhin-manas 'watchful-minded', bhari-retas (VS. xx. 44)
'abounding in seed', bhfiry-ojds 'having great power', mddhu-vacas 'sweetvoiced', mdno-javas 'swift as thought', maha-yasAs (Kh. iv. 8*) 'very glorious',
mitrd-mahas 'rich in friends', raghu-pdtma-jamhas 'having a light-falling foot',
,

The stems

5 The
of the N. sing, is perhaps lost in
and sv-dvas- form
and sv-dvan, VS. usdna; but this form may be a transition,
starting from the A. usdnxm (= usdnasam)
usddbhis and m. sfvd- after the analogy of the f. another instance

sva-iavas-

J-

the irregular N. svd-tavan

sv-dva.
2

Except

in

f.

tavadbhyas (VS.); op. Brugmann, Grundriss 2,

p. 713 (bottom).
3 The ending -au is here very rare and
occurs chiefly in the later Samhitas.
4 Represented in f. by apsardssu (Kh.) and

m.

apdsu. if for apdssu.

perhaps an-eha (x. 6 1 12).

6
The form dn-avayds (AV. vii. 90'),
meaning perhaps 'not producing conception', may belong to this declension.
See
is

Whitney's note. Lanman 443,

under radical -d stems.

places

it

VI. Declension.

Nouns.

Consonant Stems.

227

rdthaujas (VS. xv. 1 5) 'having the strength of a chariot', risadas 'destroying

enemies', vdsu-sravas 'famous for wealth', v&ta-rmnhas 'fleet as wind', vi-cetas
'clearly seen', vi-manas 'very wise'j visvd-cakms 'all-seeing', visvd-dhayas 'allsustaining', visvd-bharas'' (VS.xi. 32)' all-supporting', visvd-bhojas 'all-nourishing',

visvd-manas 'perceiving everything', visvd-vedas 'omniscient', visvd-vyacas (VS.

XIII. 56) 'embracing all things', visvdujas 'all-powerful', vi-hayas 'mighty', viludvesas 'hating strongly', vilu-haras 'holding fast', vrddhd-makas 'of great might',
'of great power',
vrddhd-sravas 'possessed of great swiftness',
satd-tejas (VS. I. 24) 'having a hundredfold vital power', satd-payas (TS. VS.)
'having a hundred draughts', iukrd-varcas 'having bright lustre', sraddha-manas

vrddhd-vayas

'true-hearted', sri-manas (VS.) 'well-disposed', sd-canas 'being in

harmony

with',

sd-cetas 'unanimous', sa-josas 'united',

satyd-radhas 'truly beneficent', satydu/'as

(AV. VS. TS.) 'truly mighty', sa-prdthas 'extensive', sdm-okas 'dwelling together',
sahdsra-caksas 'thousand-eyed',
sahdsra-cetas 'having a thousand aspects',
sahdsra-pathas 'appearing in a thousand places',
sahdsra-retas 'having a

thousandfold seed',

sahdsra-sokas'^ 'emitting a thousand flames',

sahdsrapsas
'performing splendid actions', su-mdnas 'welldisposed',
su-medhds'^ 'having, a good understanding',
sii-rddhas 'bountiful',
su-reknas 'having fair possessions',
su-retas 'having much seed',
su-vdrcas
'splendid',
su-vdsas 'having beautiful garments', suma-caksas (TS. 11. 2. 12+)
'looking like Soma', stoma-vahas 'receiving praise', sparhd-radhas 'bestowing
enviable wealth', sv-dncas ' 'going well', sv-dpas 'skilful', svdbhuty-ojas 'having
energy from inherent power', svd-yaias 'glorious through one's own acts',
svar-caksas 'brilliant as light', svar-canas 'lovely as light', sv-ojas 'very strong'.
j(?j- 'dawn';
aVzVir/zflWifaj' (TS., VS. xxi. 22) a metre, d-dvayas, ap-sards
f.
'water-nymph', a-repas 'spotless', a-hanAs, uru-vydcas, Urna-mradas 'soft as wool',
dvi-bdrkas, mca-vayds 'whose strength is low', nr-mdnas, prd-cetas, mddku-vacSs,
yavaydd-dvesas 'driving away enemies', vi-cchandas (TS. v. 2. 11') 'containing
various metres', vi-hayas, vf-sa-manas 'manly-spirited', sukrd-vasas 'bright-robed',
sd-cetas, sd-cchandas (TS. v. 2. 11^) 'consisting of the same metres', sa-josas,
sahd-yasas (TS. IV. 4. 12^)
sd-bharas^ 'furnished with gifts' (?),
sa-prdthas,
'glorious', su-ddmsas, su-pesas 'well-adorned', su-mdnas, su-medhds^, su-vAsas.
N. A. n. dmhas 'distress', diijas 'ointment', a-dvesds 'without malevolence',
dnas 'cart', an-ehds 'without a rival', dndhas 'darkness' and 'plant', dpas
'work', apds 'active', dpnas 'property', dpsas 'hidden part of the body', dmbhas
'water', dyas 'metal', a-raksds 'harmless', a-rapds, drnas 'flood', dvas 'favour',
'thousand-shaped',

su-ddinsas

dgas 'sin', apas 'religious ceremony', I'lras 'breast', adhas 'udder', e'nas 'sin',
okas 'abode', ojas 'strength', ksodas 'rushing water', cdnas 'delight', dtas
(VS. XXXIV. 3) 'intellect', chdndas 'metrical hymn', jdmhas 'course', ji'cvas
'quickness', jrdyas 'expanse', tdd-apas, tdpas 'heat', tdmas 'darkness', tdras
'velocity', tejas 'sharp edge', tydjas 'abandonment', ddmsas 'marvellous power',
duvas 'worship', drdvinas 'property', dvesas 'hostility', ndbhas 'vapour', ndmas
'obeisance', pdksas 'side', pdyas 'milk', pdsas (VS. xx. 9) 'penis', pAjas 'vigour',
pAthas 'place', ptvas 'fat', puru-bhojas 'greatly nourishing', pesas 'ornament',
prdthas 'width', prdyas 'enjoyment', psdras 'feast', bhdrgas 'radiance', bhasas
'light',

mdnas

'mind',

mdyas

'joy',

mdhas

'greatness',

mahds

'great',

mfdhas

ydsas 'fame', rdksas 'damage', rdjas 'region of clouds',

rdpas 'infirmity', rdbhas 'violence', rAdhas 'bounty', reknas 'wealth', retas 'flow',
ripas 'stain', rodhas 'bank', vdksas 'breast', vdcas 'speech', vdyas 'bird' and
'disdain',

medas

'fat',

Probably a transition form (p. 225, 3, 4).

Perhaps a transfer form from medha.-,
since the latter stem is common, while the
1

in su-medhdsam (once)
and su-niedhasas (four times in a, refrain).

as stem occurs only

15*

22 8

I.

'food',

Allgemeines und Sprache.

vdrivas 'space',

vdrcas 'vigour',

4.

vdrpas

Vedic Grammar.
'figure',

vag-ojas (VS. xxxvi. i)

'speech-energy', vdsas 'garment', vdhas 'offering', vidas 'wealth', vepas 'quivering',

vydcas 'expanse', vrdyas 'superior power', sdrdhas 'troop', sdvas 'power', Eras
sa-josas, sddas 'seat',
sdnas'^ (Kh.
'head', sesas 'offspring', srdvas 'renown',
sa-prdthas, sa-bAdhas 'harassed',
'gain',
sdras 'lake', sahas 'force',
III. 15'^)
sahdujas (VS. xxxvi. i) 'endowed with strength', su-retas, srotas 'stream',
svd-tavas 'inherently strong', hdras 'flame', hilas 'passion', hvdras 'crookedness'.
Ending in -as^ (like m.): asrT-vdyas^ (VS. xiv. 18), uru-prdthas (VS.

XX. 39) 'far-spread',

arna-mradas, gUrtd-vacas 'speaking agreeably', devdvyacas 'affording space for the gods', dvi-bdrhas, visvd-vyacas (AV.), vispardhas (VS. xv. 5) 'emulating', vird-pesas 'forming the ornament of heroes',
vJlu-karas, sa-prdthas (AV. VS. TS.), siimdnas (TS. iv. 5. i^)"*.
A. m. jardsam 'old age', tavdsam 'strong', 'strength', tyajdsam 'offshoot',

ddmunasam,

pdrinasam{\(>o)''2h\\.'a.&sia.c, bhiydsam '{ea,r', yas'dsam, raksdsam^

vedkdsam; a-cetdsam, dnasta-vedasam 'having one's property unimpaired', dnagasam, dnu-gayasam 'followed by shouts', an-endsam (TS.i. 8.5-5), an-ehdsam,
apdsam, d-pratidhrsta-savasam 'of irresistible power', abhibhuty-ojasam, ardmanasam 'obedient', a-radhdsam 'not liberal', a-repdsam, arcandnasam 'having
a rattling carriage' (iST. of a man), a-kandsam, I'lccaii-sravasam (Kh. v. 14^)
'neighing aloud' (N. of Indra's horse), upakd-caksasam 'seen close at hand',
uru-cdksasam, uru-jrdyasam 'extending over a wide space', uru-vydcasam,
tirna-mradasam (VS. 11. 2), urdhvd-nabhasam (VS. vi. 16) 'being above the
clouds', ksetra-sAdhasam 'who divides the fields',
gathd-sravasam 'famous
through songs', gayatrd-cchandasam (VS.viii. 47) 'to whom the Gayatrl metre
belongs', gayatrd-vepasam 'inspired by songs',
gir-vanasam 'delighting in
invocations',
gir-vahasam 'praised in song', gUrtd-sravasam, gj-arnasam
'abounding in cattle', go-dhayasam 'supporting cows', cikitvln-manasam 'attencitrd-mahasam 'possessing excellent bounty', citrd-radhasam 'granting
tive',
excellent gifts', jdgac-chaiidasam (VS. viii. 47) 'to whom the Jagati metre
belongs', Jaid-vedasam, tuvi-radhasam 'granting many gifts', tuvi-svandsam.
-^

tuvy-jjasam 'very powerful', tristup-chandasam (VS. viii. 47),

dandukasam 'delighting {pkas-^ in a sacrificial meal', dyuksd-vacasam 'uttering
heavenly words', dvi-bdrhasam, dvi-savasam 'having twofold strength', dhrsnvojasam 'endowed with resistless might', ndryapasam 'doing manly {ndrya-)
deeds', nr-cdksasam, pahkti-radhasam 'containing fivefold gifts', puru-pesasani
'loud-sounding',

'multiform', puru-bhjjasam,

puru-vdrpasam 'having many

forms',

puru-vepasam

prd-tvaksasatn 'energetic', brdhma-vahasam 'to

whom prayers are offered', bhttri-caksasam 'much-seeing', bhfiri-dhayasam
'nourishing many', mdno-javasam (TS. 11. 4. 7'), yajnd-vanasam 'loving zz.cr\fice' yajnd-vahasam 'offering worship', risddasam^, vdja-sravasam 'famous for
wealth', vi-cetasam, vi-josasam 'forsaken', vi-dvesasam 'resisting enmity', visvddhayasam, visvd-bharasam' , visvd-vedasam, visvd-7!yacasam, visvayu-posasam''
'causing prosperity to all men', visvAyu-vepasam 'exciting all men', vi-hayasam,
viti-radhasam 'granting enjoyment', sd-cetasam, sa-josasam, satyd-girvahasam
'much-exciting',

prd-cetasam,

'getting true praise',

satyd-radhasam (VS.xxii. 11), satyd-savasam

Though sdnas does not otherwise occur

m. is found as last member of a

{sana-

Lanman 560; see

Lanman 445 (mid).

Cp.

in as,

'truly vigorous'.

also the neuters

compound), the context in Khila III. 1515

5 For this form, TS. lU. 3. II^ has erroneseems to require an A.; ahdm gaizdhdt-va- ou.sly tuvis-manasam.
6 Also the transition form vayo-dhdsam
rupena sdna a vartaydmi te.
2 Cp. Lanman 560.
(VS.) 'bestowing strength'.
3 Of doubtful meaning;
the form may
7 Probably to be explained as a transition
possibly be N. pi. of asrivi-.
Cp. BR.
form (p. 225, 3).

VI. Declension.

sddma-makhasam
(VS. XXI. 3),

'performing

Nouns.

sacrifice

in

samudrd-vasasam 'concealed

Consonant Stems.
a

sacred

229

precinct',

in the waters',

sa-prdthasam

samndrd-vyacasam

'extensive

as the sea',
sdrva-vedasam (VS. xv. 55; TS. iv. 7. 134) 'having
complete property', sahdsra-caksasam, sahdsra-bharnasam 'a thousandfold',
sahdsra-varcasam 'having a thousandfold power', su-cetasam 'very wise', suddmsasam, su-pe'sasam, su-praydsam 'well regaled', su-bhojasani 'bountiful',
su-medhdsam ', su-radhasam , ste-re'tasam, su-vdrcasam (TS. ill. 2. 85), su-srdvasam
'famous', srprd-bhojasam
'having abundant food', svd-yasasam, sv-dvasam
'affording good protection', hdri-dhayasam 'giving yellow streams', hdrivarpasam 'having a yellow appearance'.
Contracted forms: usdnam
N. of a seer, maksm, vedham.
f.
usdsain and usasam^, dhvardsam 'deceiving'; dn-agasam, an-ekdsam,

a-raksdsam,
a-repdsam^
dsva-pesasam 'decorated with horses', ud-ojasam
'exceedingly powerful', uru-vydcasam, cikitvin-matiasam, puru-bkojasam, yavaydddvesasam, vsja-pesasam 'adorned with precious gifts', visva-dofiasam 'yielding all things', visvd-dhayasam, visvd-pesasam 'containing all adornment',
visvd-bhojasam,
'brightly

satdrcasam 'having a hundred supports'

adorned',

Contracted forms
ap-saram (AV.)

sahdsra-bharjiasam,
:

usdm, jarsm, medhdm

(reds-),

svd-yasasam,

si'ici-pesasam

hdri-varpasam.
'wisdom', vaydm 'vigour'; dn-agam,

^.

m.

jardsa, tdrusasa 'giving victory', tavdsa, tvesdsa 'impulse', pdrinasa,

bJiiydsa'', yasdsa,
sdhasa 'mighty', havdsa 'invocation'; an-ehdsa, a-raksdsa,
go-parmasa 'having abundance of cows', prtku-psjasa, mdno-javasa, visvdpesasa, su-pesasa, su-srdvasa, sv-dpasd (VS. xxv. 3).
f. usdsa,
yajdsa 'worshipping'
dti-cchandasa (VS. i. 2 7), a-repdsa, urucdksasa (VS. iv. 23).
n. dnjasa, dnasa, dndhasa, dpasa, apdsa, a-raksdsa, drnasa, dvasa, urasa
(VS.TS.), enasa, ojasa, ihasa'-^xos^tc'i, ks6dasa,gd-arnasa, ira/Jjizj^ 'brightness',
cetasa,
chdndasa (VS. TS.), jdvasa and (once) javdsa^ 'with speed', tdnasa
'offspring'^ tdpasa, tdmasa, tdrasa, t^jasa, tydjasa, tvdksasa 'energy', ddmsasa,
dohasa 'milking', dhayasd 'nourishing', dhrdjasd 'gliding power', ndbhasa,
ndmasd, pdyasa, pajasa, pjvasa, pesasd (VS. xx. 41), prdyasa, bahvojasa,
bhrsjasd 'lustre', mdnasa, mdhasa, me'dasa, yasdsa^ 'glorious', rdksasd,
radhasd,
reknasa,
retas'a,
vdcasd,
vdnasd 'enjoyment',
rdjasa,
rdpasa,
vdyasaT, vdrcasa, vdrpasa, vSsasa, vihasa, ve'dasa, vepasd, sdvasd, sirasd
(Kh. I. 9^), sesasa, srdvasa, sdhasU, su-ddmsasd, su-retasa, srotasd, hdrasa,
hesasd 'vigour'^.
D. m. tavdse, duvdse 'worshipper', yasdse, raksdse, vedhdse, sikvase 'adroit',
sdhase 'mighty'; abhisti-savase 'granting powerful aid', ukthd-vahase 'offering
verses', uru-vydcase, rtd-pesase 'having a glorious form', gayatrd-vepase, gir-vanase,
gir-vahase, ghord-caksase 'of frightful appearance's, jatd-vedase, tdd-apase, tdddtrghd-sravase 'famous far
okase, dirghd-yasase 'renowned far and wide',
I.

1 Perhaps to be explained as a transition

7 Also the transition form vayo-dkdsa (VS.
XV. 7).
form starting from N. su-medhi-s.
8 A few forms in -as appear to have the
' In Pada text usasam.
3 Cp. J. Schmidt, Heteroklitische nomina- value of instrumental as agreeing with a
tive singularis auf -as in den arischen spra- word in that case: vdcas (I. 262 etc.), yajiiachen, KZ. 26, 401409; 27,284; Collitz, vacas (AV. XI. 319), savas (l. 81''); edhas (AV.
XII. 32);
cp. Bloomfield, SBE. 42, 645;
BB. 7, 180; Prellwitz, BB. 22, 83.
* Also contracted to bhlsA with adverbial see Lanman 562^ and cp. Caland, KZ. 31,

shift of accent occurring 3 times {bhiydsa

261.

9 Also
the transition
(VS. xxx. 21).

times).

In IV. 271.
6 Cp. Grassmann,

,5

s. v.

yasds:

form candrd-niase

230

and

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

dyumnd-sravase 'producing a clear sound',

wide',

prthu-jrdyase,

puru-rdvase,

prthu-pdjase,

vr-cdksase,

prd-cetase, prd-tavase

brdhma-vahase, mrktd-vahase 'carrying off what

vahase\

Vedic Grammar.

is

ny-okase,

'very

injured', N. of a seer,

strong',

yajhd-

sahdsra-caksase,

svd-tavase,

vrdhdse 'furtherance'; dti-cchandase (VS. xxiv. 13),

parjdnya-retase 'sprung from the seed of Parjanya'.

dur-vdsase

visvd-caksase,

vi-/iayase,

satyd-rSdhase,

svd-yaiase.
f.

usdse,

'ill-clothed',

n. apdse,

a-pesdse 'formless',

dvase,

oj'ase,

cdksase, j'avdse, tdpase, tdmase,

dhruvdse 'stopping', ndbhase

ndmase, pdjase, prdyase, psdrase, mdtiase, mdhase (VS. xix. 8),
ydsase (VS. xx. 3), ysdase (VS. xxx. 20) 'voluptuousness', rdksase, rSdkase,
/aVa.fif (VS. xxxvm. 15) 'skin of boiled milk', sdvase,
re'tase, vdcase, vdrcase,
tdrase, tejase (VS. xv. 8), ddksase 'ability', dhdyase,

(VS.

VII.

30),

srdvase, sdhase, svd-yaiase, hdrase.

Ab. m.
usdsas.

{.

a-radkdsas, Jardsas,

tavdsas, pdrTnasas,

raksdsas^, sdhasas.

n. dmhasas^, dnasas, dndhasas, dpasas, drnasas, dgasas (TS.

iv. 7.

15^), enasas, okasas, ujasas, ksodasas, Jrdyasas, tdpasas, tdmasas, drdvinasas,

pdyasas, pdjasas, prdthasas, bhdmsasas 'intestine', mdnasas"', rdjasas, radhasas,
ve'dasas, sddasas, sdrasas, sdJiasas.
G. m. dfigirasas, apdsas, dpnasas, tavdsas, pdrTnasas, raksdsas, vedhdsas;
dn-agasas, dpaka-caksasas 'shining from afar', abhi-vayasas 'refreshing', a-raksdsas,
upafiid-sravasas 'most highly famed', krsnd-jamhasas 'having a black track',
danapnasas 'having abundance of gifts', dlrghd-sravasas, dvijatd-vedasas,
bdrhasas, nr-cdksasas, pdri-dvesasas 'enemy', puru-bhojasas, prthii-srdvasas 'farfamed', prd-cetasas, prd-tna/iasas 'very glorious', praydsas (TS. iv. i. 8^), bhdtvaksasas 'having the power of light', vi-cetasas, vidmandpasas 'working with
wisdom', visvd-manasas, vfka-dvarasas^, satyd-radhasas (TS. in. 3. 1 1 '), satydsavasas (VS. iv. 18) 'having true impulsion', sa-bddhasas, su-praydsas (VS.

xxvii. 15), svd-yasasas.

f. usdsas^.
n. dmhasas, dnasas, dndhasas, dpasas, dyasas, drnasas, drs'asas (YS-XiLgj)

dvasas, enasas (VS. viii. 13), okasas, Sjasas, gj-arnasas, tdpasas (VS.
26; Kh.iv. 11'^), tdmasas, tydjasas, ddksasas'', drdvinasas, ndbhasas, ndmasas,
pdyasas, pdjasas (Kh. i. 7^), pr dyasas, mdnasas, me'dasas, rdjasas, r dpasas,
rddhasas, re'tasas, vdcasas, vdpsasas 'fair form', vdyasas, vdrpasas, vdsasas,
sdvasas^, sr dvasas, sddasas, sdrapasas^, sdhasas, hdrasas"^.
Contracted
'piles',

IV.

form:

nr-mdnas

(x. 92''*).

L. m. dngirasi^ (VS.iv. 10), go-arnasi, jatd-vedasi, ddmunasi, prthu-srdvasi,

yajhd-vahasi (VS.ix. 37), satyd-sravasi 'truly famous', N. of a man.
f. iisdsi.
n. dmhasi, dnjasi, apdsi, dvasi, dgasi, okasi, krdndasi 'battle-cry', cdksasi,
tdmasi, ndmasi, pdyasi, pathasi (VS. xiii. 53), mdnasi, rdjasi, rddhasi, ritasi,

srdvasi, sddasi, sdrasi, hedasi (TS.

V. m.

iii.

10).

In VI. 31 amhas is probably the stem

used instead of the very frequent Ab. dmhas-as, rather than the Ab. of dmh-, as this
would be the only form from such a stem,
and the accent would be irregular.
4 Also the adv., in the sense of the Ab.,
medas-tds (VS. XXI. 60).
5 Of uncertain meaning.
3

3. 1 1*).

dngiras, fiodhas, vedhas; uktha-vahas, iipama-sravas, karu-dhayas.

' Also
the transition form vayo-dhasely5.
XXVIII. 46).
2 Also the transition form reio-dhdsas (VS.

vili.

6 Once the strong form iisasas (x. 39') for

the weak.
7 This, as well as the D. n. ddksase, is a
transition form (p. 225, 3).
8 The stem savas in Vlil. 36 may be used
for the G.
Perhaps also sddas-pdii- stands
for sddasas-pdli-.
Cp. Lanman 563*.
Transition forms are sdrdhasya, nir9
candrd-masas,
avdsya;
reio-dhdsas
(VS.);
ddksasas, dosdsas (AV.).
10 Also the transfer forms dhgire, hile;
candrd-masi (AV.).

VI. Declension.

gir-vanas,
nr-caksas,

gir-va/ias^,

Nouns.

jsta-vedas,

Consonant Stems.

deva-sravas,

231

dhrsan-manas 'bold-minded',

nr-manas, puru-ravas, pra-cetas'', brahma-vahas, mitra-mahas,

vaja-pratnahas 'superior in strength', visva-caksas, viiva-dhayas, vis'va-manas,
vrsa-manas, satya-radhas, su-dravinas 'having fine property', su-mahas 'verygreat',

sva-tavas,

sv-ojasi.

f.

usas;

a-kanas,

tigma-tejas

(AV. VS.).

n. dravinas, sdrdhas.

Du. N. A. V.

m.

tavdsa, tosasa'^ 'showering', yasdsa, vedhasa;

neighing horses', Tya-caksasa 'of far-reaching
sight',
uru-cdksasa, krsty-ojasa 'overpowering men', gambhiracetasa 'of profound mind', go-parinasa, jatd-vedasa, tdd-okasa,
na-vedasa,
nr-cdksasa, nr-vahasa 'conveying men', puru-ddjnsasa 'abounding in wonderful deeds', puru-bhojasa, putd-daksasa^ 'pure-minded', prthu-pdksasa 'broadflanked', prd-cefasa, prd-makasa, bodhin-manasa, ^za^a-z/a^aja 'heeding prayers',
mano-javasa, yajna-vahasa, risddasa, vatsa-pracetasa 'mindful of Vatsa', vicetasa, vi-paksasa 'going on both sides', vipra-vakasS 'receiving the offerings
of the wise', visvd-bhojasa, vihd-vedasa, vy-masa 'guiltless', srestha-varcasa
'having most excellent energy', sa-josasa, V. sdtyaujasa (TS. iv. 7. 15^),
sd-manasa 'unanimous', samand-varcasa 'having equal vigour', sdm-okasa,
sd-vayasa 'having equal vigour', sd-vedasa 'having equal wealth', sindhu-vahasa
'passing through the sea'(?), su-ddmsasa, su-praydsa, su-radhasa, su-re'tasa,
su-vdcasa 'very eloquent', sv-dvasS, hitd-prayasa 'who has offered an oblation
of food', h'lranya-pesasa 'having golden lustre'^.
With au: a-repdsau,
V. jata-vedasau (TS. i. 3. 7^j, nr-cdksasau, prd-cetasau (VS. xxviii. 7), vis'vdsardhasau 'forming a complete troop', sd-cetasau (VS. v. 3;' Kh. iii. 15'^), sajosasau (VS. xil. 74), sd-manasau (TS. I. 3. 7O, sdm-okasau (TS. I. 3. 7^)''.
ndktosdsa 'night and morning', an-e/idsa, uru-vydcasa,
f. usdsd and usdsa^,
nr-cdksasa (AV.), bhfiri-retasa, bhciri-varpasa 'multiform', visvd-pesasa, sdW^ith -oui: ap-sardsau (AV.),
cetasa, sd-manasa, su-ddtnsasa^, su-pssasd.
a-repdsau, usAsau (VS. xxi. 50), yasdsau; nr-cdksasau, visvd-sardhasau, vyn. dndhasT, krdndasT, j'dnasi, drddkasT (^S. iii. 2. 2^) 'garenasau (AV.)^.
ments', ndbhasi {KS! .'), nddhasT 'refuges', pdksasT{KN .), pajasJ, rdjasT, vdcasT,

a-repdsa,

asu-hesasa
uktha-vahasa,

apdsiz,

'having

vdsasi

(TS-.

I.

5.

10^).

D. m. sa-josobhyam

(VS.

vii. 8).

G. n. diksd-tapdsos'^^ (VS. iv. 2) 'consecration and penance'.

PI. N. V. m. diigirasas, apdsas, tavdsas, ddmunasas, duvdsas
mrgaydsas

less',

'wild

animals',

yasdsas,

raksdsas,

vedkdsas,

'rest-

sikvasas;

d-giraukasas 'not to be kept back by hymns' {gird), a-cetdsas, a-coddsas

ddbhutainasas 'in whom no fault {inas) is visible', an-avabhrdan-ekdsas,
a-repdsas,
dn-agasas,
'giving
undiminished wealth',
rddhasas
d-vicetasas 'unwise', a-sesasas 'without descendants', dhia-radhasas 'equipping
horses', d-sdmi-savasas 'having complete strength', d-hanasas, ukthd-vahasas,
uru-vydcasas (VS. xxvii. 16), ksetra-sddhasas, gambhird-vepasas,
tid-ojasas,
'unurged',

I
In VI. 246 Grassmann would
gimavahas, as N. ; cp. Lanman 5642.

read

7 Also the transition forms sUrya-candramdsau, varco-dasau (VS. VII. 27), sa-josau.
8 In the Pada text usasa.
9 In VII. iy puru-ddmsa is perhaps a con-

z TS.1. 5. i\^\i:>s p7'aceto rajan; the original

passage, RV. I. 241'*, has praceld rajan (Pada,
tracted form.
pracetak); see Lanman 554'5.
1
Also the transition forms use (VS.),
are sd-praiha (TB.),
3 Transition forms
a-dvesi, vi-dradhe.
candra-mas (AV.), vayo-dhas, dravino-das.
II There are also in the f. the transition
4 With lengthened vowel.
5 Probably to be explained as a transition forms usabhydm I. and rodasos G.

form

(p.

225, 3).

Also the transition forms candramasa,

suryd-candramasa.
6

232

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

ghrsvi-radhasas
ance',

'granting

citrd-radAasas,

nd-vedasas,

with

tdd-okasas,

joy',

4.

Vedic Grammar.

ghord-varpasas

tuvi-svandsas'^,

'of

terrible

dvi-bdrhasas,

appear-

d/irsnv-hjasas,

nr-cdksasas, pathi-rdksasas (VS. xvi. 60) 'protecting roads',

putd-

daksasas\ prtku-psjasas, prd-cetasas, prati-jiiti-varpasas 'assuming any form

according to impulse', prd-tavasas, prd-tvaksasas, prd-sravasas 'farfamed', bahvN. of a people, mddku-psarasas 'fond of sweetness', mddhyecchandasas (TS.iv. 3. 1 13) 'sun' or 'middle of the year' (Comm.), yajna-va/iasas,
yutd-dvesasas 'delivered from enemies', risddasas, rukmd-vaksasas 'wearing gold
ornaments on the breast', vdruna-sesasas 'resembling sons of Varuna', vitaramhasas, vdta-svanasas 'roaring like the wind', vi-cetasas, vidmandpasas,
vidyun-mahasas 'rejoicing in lightning', vipra-vacasas 'whose words are invi-inahasas 'very glorious', vis'vd-dhayasas, visvd-mahasas 'having all
spired',
vi-hayasas,
splendour', visvd-vedasas,
vi-:pardhasas 'vying',
vrddhd-iavasas
ojasas, bhalanasas

'of great strength',

sre'st/ia-varcasas,

sa-josasas,

sd-cetasas,

satya-savasas,

sa-

sd-manasas, sdtn-okasas, sd-vayasas, sd-srotasas (VS. xxxiv. 11)

'flowing',
sahd-cchandasas 'accompanied by metre', sahdsra-pajasas 'having
sahdujasas (VS. x. 4), su-cdksasas 'seeing well',
a thousandfold lustre',
bharasas'-,

stt-ddmsasas,

su-cetasas,

su-pivdsas 'very

fat',

su-peiasas,

AV.) 'having a good

su-prdcetasas

'very

su-mdnasas, su-mahasas,
su-medhasas^, su-rSd/iasas, stira-caksasas 'radiant as the sun', sUrya-tvacasas
(VS. X. 4) 'having a covering bright as the sun', siirya-varcasas (VS. x. 4)
'resplendent as the sun', stoma-vahasas 'giving praise', svd-tavasas, sv-dpasas,
sv-dpnasas 'wealthy', svd-yasasas, sv-dvasas, hitd-prayasas.
Contracted
forms: diigiras, dn-agas*, ndvedas, sajosas.
f. apdsas,
usdsas and usSsas^,
yasdsas; agni-bhrajasas 'fire-bright', an-ehdsas, ap-sardsas, uru-vydcasas (TS.
trsu-cydvasas 'moving greedily', dhdnv-arnasas 'overflowing the dry
IV. I. 8^),
land', nr-pesasas 'adorned by men', prd-cetasas, prd-svadasas 'pleasant', mddkvariiasas 'having a sweet flood', vi-cetasas, su-peiasas, siida-dohasas 'milking
sweetness', sv-dpasas, svd-yasasas.
Contracted forms: medhds; d-joms
wise', su-praj'dsas' (TS.1. 6. 2^;

son',

'insatiable',

nd-vedas, su-rAdhas.

N. A. n. dnthainsi, dnkamsi 'bends', dndhamsi, dpamsi, drnamsi, dvSmsi,

Sgamsi, enamsi, okatnsi, ojamsi, kdramsi 'deeds', chdndamsi, jdvamsi, jrdyamsi,
tdmamsi, tvdksamn, ddmsamsi, di'tvainsi, dvesamsi, pdySmsi, pajamsi, pdthamsi
(VS. XXI. 46), pesamsi, prdyamsi, bhd.sam.si, mdnamsi, tndhatnsi, rdksamsi,
rdjamsi, rdpamsi, rddkamsi, rdtamsi, rodhamsi, rohamsi 'heights', vdksamsi,
vdyamsi,
vdcamsi,
vdramsi 'expanses', vdrivamsi, vdrcavisi (VS. ix. 22),
vdrpamsi, vasamsi, sdrdhamsi, sdvamsi, srdvdmsi, sddamsi, sdramsi, sdhamsi,
skdndhamsi 'branches', helamsi, hvdramsi.
A. m. dfigirasas^, dhvardsas, yasdsas, raksdsas, vedhdsas; dn-agasas,
an-ehdsas, d-pracetasas, a-radhdsas, uru-cdksasas, tuvi-rddhasas, putd-daksasas^
prd-cetasas, brhdc-chravasas, yajnd-vanasas, risddasas, vi-mahasas, vi-spardhasas,
sa-josasas (VS. in. 44), sd-manasas (VS. vii. 25), su-pesasas, su-rddhasas, svContracted forms: dn-agas, su-medhds"^
dpnasas^f. apdsas, usdsas'^,
yasdsas; a-javdsas 'not swift', an-apndsas 'destitute of wealth', an-ehdsas, apsardsas, ari-dhayasas 'wilhngly yielding milk', gharmd-svarasasi 'sounding like
(the contents of) a boiler', tdd-apasas, bhUri-varpasas, vdja-dravinasas 'richly

Probably a transition form (p. 225, 3).

7 Probably a transition form (p. 225, 3).
8 Also the transition forms sardhan, anProbably a transition form (p. 225, 2).
3 Probably a transfer form; see'p. 227, note .
agan.
4 Perhaps also an-ehas (x. 6112); see Lan9 It is somewhat doubtful whether this is
MAN 551'.
a contracted A. pi. (vH. gi^J.
10 Once also usdsas.
5 In the Pada text usdsas.
In in. 6' and VJII.
6 In I. 11218 Lanman would take ahgiras 41^ Lanman (566) would take usasa&A.-pl.
sa A. pi. m. -without ending.
without ending.
^

VI. Declension.

rewarded',

vdja-sravasas,

tracted form: usds

I.

m.

Nouns.

Consonant Stems.

233

visvd-dohasas, visvd-dhayasas, su-pesasas"-

Con-

(ix. 415).

dhgirobhis;

agni-tdpobhis 'having the heat of fire', svd-yasobhis.

-ad- for -0-: usddbhis (44 a, 3).
n. d-yavobhis (VS. xit. 74) 'dark halves of the month', drnobhis, dvobhis,
ojobhis, chdndobhisi^.v.i''), tdpobhis, tdmobhis, tdrobhis, ddmsobhis, dvesobhis,
dhayobhis, ndbhobhis, ndmobhis, pdksobhis (VS.xxix. ; TS. v. 1. 1 1^), pdyobhis,
5
prdyobhis, mdkobkis, rdjobkis, radhobhis, vdcobhis, vdyobhis, vdrobhis, sdvobhis,
srdvobhis, sdhobhis.
f.

svd-yasobhis;

with

D. m. dhgirobhyas; with -ad- for -0-: svd-tavadbhyas (VS. xxiv. 16).

n. medobhyas (VS. xxxix. 10), rdksobhyas, vdyobhyas (AV.), sdrobhyas (VS.
XXX. 16).
Ab. n. dvesobhyas.

G.m.

dngirasam, apdsam, tavdsam, yasdsam, vedhdsam; ddbhutainasam,

dastnd-varcasam, mahd-manasam 'high-minded', stjma-vahasam.
f. apdsam,
usdsam; ap-sardsam, ndksatra-savasam 'equalling the stars in number'.
n.^ c/idndasam, tdrasam (AV.), ms'dasSm (VS. xxi. 40), rdksasam (VS. 11.
23),

rddhasam, ve'dasam^L. f. ap-sardssu (Kh.

iv. 8^).
n. dmhassu^ (AV.),
vdksassu, vdyassu (AV.), srdvassu, sddassu^.

1^.

345.

The primary

suffix

lidhassu,

rdjassu,

Steins in -yams.

-_j'a;j-

(137),'

is

used to form comparative stems.

added either directly or with connecting -i- to the root, which is always
accente(J. There are seven duplicate stems formed in both ways tdv-yams- and
tdv-Tyams- 'stronger'; ndv-yams- and ndv-iyzms- 'new'; pdn-yams- and pdnTyams- 'more wonderful'; bhayams- and bhdviyams- 'more'; rdbhyams- and
rdbhiyams- (VS.) 'more violent'; vdsyams- and vdsiyanis- 'better'; sdk-yams- and
sdhi-yams- 'mightier'. Strong and weak forms are regularly distinguished.
In the latter the suffix is reduced by loss of the nasal and shortening of the
vowel to -yas. These stems are declined in the m. and n. only, as they
form their f. by adding -i to the weak stem; t. g. preyas-i- 'dearer'. No forms
of the dual occur, and in the plural only the N. A. G. are found.
It is

Inflexion.

The V.

346.

sing.

made from kdntyams-

m.

ends

'younger',

The forms

in -as'^.

would be

actually occurring,

if

as follows:

N. m. kdtiTym, n. kdniyas.
A. m. kdniyamsam, n. kdniyas.
kdniyasa. D. m. n. kdniyase. Ab. m. n. kdniyasas. G. m. n. kd7ityasas.
kdriiyasi.
V. m. kdniyas.
PL N. m. kdniyamsas. A. m. kdniyasas.
N. A. n. kdniyamsi.
G. m. kdniyasdm.
The forms which occur are the following:
Sing. N. m. d-tavyan'' 'not stronger', ojlyan 'stronger', kdniyan, jdvTyan
'swifter', jy&yan 'mightier', tdriyan^ 'easily passing through', tdviyan 'stronger',

Sing.

m.
L. m.
I.

n.

tdvyan

'stronger',

ydjiyan

bountiful',

'imparting more',
1

Also

the

fast',
ndvTyan 'new', mdmhiyan 'more
yodhiyan 'more warlike', vdniyan
'worshipping more',
vdriyan 'better', vdrnyan (VS. xxiii. 48) 'higher', vdsyan

dhdviyan 'rimning

transition

(TS.i.S.6';MS.l.S^p.
2

for

Tiie form

vayasam

vayam
(l.

is

1651S

forms ida-prajasas for m. apassu; cp.

"-

70).

perhaps contracted
etc.);

see

552^3 All the Mss. read amhasu; see

note on AV.
4

Lanman

Whitney's

vi. 352.

The form apdsu

(vill.

414)

is

perhaps

Wackernagel

I, p.

Ill,

note.
5 Cp. J. Schmidt KZ. 26,
IF. 12, 201 f.
6 As in the -mant, -vant

On the Sandhi of these

Lanman 514 (middle).
7

377400

Hirt,

and -vams stems.

nominatives see

Cp. Keichelt, BB. 27, 104 f.

234

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

vediyan 'knowing better', sreyan 'better', sdniyan (TS. in. 5. S'J) 'winning
much', sdhiyan 'mightier', skdbhiyan 'supporting more firmly'.
N. A. n. fjiyas 'straighter', ojiyas, Mnfyas', jyayas, tdvtyas, ddviyas
drdghiyas 'longer', ndvtyas, ndvyas, n^dtyas 'quite near', preyas
'farther',

'better',

bhiiyas" 'more',

'dearer',

vdriyas,

vdrsiyas,

vdsiyas (TS. VS.),

vdsyas,

sreyas

svadiyas 'sweeter'.

(TS. VS.),

A. m. jydyamsam, tdvyamsam, drdghiyainsant, ndvyamsam, pdnyamsam

'more wonderful', vdrfiyamsam (AV.), sdhyamsam 3 'more frequent', sreyamsam,
sdhiyamsam (AV.).

m.

n. tejlyasa
jdviyasa, ndvyasa, bkiiyasa, sdhiyasa (Kh. i. i').
tvdksiyasa 'very strong', ndviyasS, ndvyasa, pdnyasa, bhdvTyasa
'more abundant', bhiiyasa, vdsyasa, sdhiyasa.
D.m. tdtyase, ndvXyase, pdniyase,pdnyase, bdliyaseiKY.) 'mightier', vdrsTyase
I.

'keener',

(VS. XVI. 30), ir.y/aj-d' (VS. XXXI. 11), sdnyase''o\&sx\ sdkiyase'^, sdhyase, hdniyase
n. ndviyase, ndzyase, sdnyase.
(VS. XVI. 40) 'more destructive'.
Ab. m. tdviyasas, rdbhyasas 'more violent', sdhiyasas, sdhyasas.

n. bktiyasas.

G. m. kdmyasas,

PI.

N. m.

sreyamsas.

vi.

tiksmyamsas

11),

sdhiyasi.

(AV.)

ndviyasas,

ndvyasas,

V, m.

ojiyas, jydyas.

(TS. VS. AV.),

bhiiyamsas

'sharper',

bhiiyasas.

n. ndvyarnsi.

A. m. kdmyasas,
vdsyasas,

(AV.),

idvyasas,

j'ydyasas,

n. ndvyasas.
L. m. vdrstyasi (VS.

?ie'dTyasas,

bhiiyasas, rdbhiyasas (VS. xxi. 46), vdrstyasas

sreyasas (VS. TS.).

vdliiyasas 'driving better',

G. m. d-stheyasam 'not firm' (137). The f. form ndvyastnam is twice used

owing to metrical exigencies instead oi ndvyasam in agreement with marictam^.
.

Stems

in -vdrps.

347. The suffix -vams^ is used to form

ciple active.
Strong and weak stem' are

the stem of the perfect partiregularly distinguished;

but
followed by a vowel
or a consonant.
The suffix is reduced before vowels, by loss of the nasal
and Samprasarana, to -us which becomes -us; before a consonant (i. e. bh)-,
it
is
reduced, by loss of the nasal and shortening of the vowel, to -vas,
which becomes -vat^. The latter form of the stem occurs only three times
in the RV.
There are thus three stems employed in the inflexion of these
participles: -vams, -vat, -us.
The weakest form of the stem {-us) appears
instead of the strong twice in the A. sing. m^. and once in the N. pi. m.
The accent rests on the suffix in all its forms except in compounds formed
with the negative a- or with su- 'well' and dus- 'ill', where it shifts to these
particles. This declension is restricted to the m. and n., as the f. is formed
by adding -i to the weakest stem, as jagmus-i- 'having gone'. There are
altogether (including compounds) about 75 stems in -vams in the RV.
the latter assumes two different forms according as

it

is

Inflexion.
348.

No

specifically n. forms

has been met with in any number;

1

The

{o\-!a

j avTyas

No

L.

weak cases are wanting

in

occur except two in the A.

all

occurs in VS. XL. 4 (I5a

the other
6

On

this suffix cp. J.

sing.

Schmidt, KZ. 26,

Up.).
to be read bhaviyas: Lanman 514
of this perfect stem,
7 On the formation
Comparative of the root from which see above i8i and below 491.
sds-vai- 'constant' is derived.
8 This form was transferred to the N. A.
4 To be read sdhyase in I. 71*.
sing. n. in whicli no consonant (-M or -s)
5 See Lanman 515.
followed; cp. 44 a, 3.
2
3

Once

,,

VI. Declension.

Nouns.

Consonant Stems.

235

dual as well as the D. Ab. in the plural. The V. sing. m. is regularly

-vas^.
The forms actually occurring, if made from cakrvdms'having done', would be the following:
Sing. N. m. cakrvdn.
A. m. cakrvdmsam,
cakricsU.
cakrvdt.
I.
n.
D. m. cakruse. Ab. cakrusas. G. cakrusas. V. m. cakrvas.
Du. N. A. m.
cakrvdmsa.
PI. N. m. cakrvdmsas.
A. m. cakrusas. I. m; cakrvddbhis.
G. m. cakrusam.
the

formed with

The forms actually occurring are the following:

Sing. N. m. d-cikitvan' 'not knowing', d-prosivan 'not gone away' 3,
d-rarwan 'not liberal', d-vidvan'> 'not knowing', cqkrvdn 'having done', cikitvdn
'having noticed', jaganvdn 'having gone', jaghanvdn 'having slain', jajnivdn^
'having recognized', /z^rwiw* 'having conquered', jujurvdn 'having grown old',
jujusvdn 'having enjoyed', jujuvdn 'having sped', tatanvdn 'having stretched',
tasthivan 'having stood',
dadasvdn^ 'having bitten', dadasvdn 'become exhausted', dadrsvdn 'having seen', dadvdn 'having given', dadhanvdn * 'having
streamed', dadhrsvdn 'having become bold', dasvdn'^ 'worshipping', didivdn
'having shone', nir-jagmivdn (TS. iv. 2. i*) 'having gone out', papivdn 'having
drunk' 9, pupusvdn 'having made abundant', babhuvdn 'having become', bibhivdn
'having feared', niamrvdn 'having died', mJdkvdn'' 'bountiful', yayivdn 'having
gone', rarivdn 'having given', ru7~ukvdn 'having shone', vavanvdn 'having
accepted', vidvdn^ knowing', vivikvdn^ 'having divided', vividvin 'having
found', vividkvdn'^^ 'having wounded', susukvdn'^'^ 'having shone', susruvdn,
'having heard', sasavdn 'having won', sasahvdn 'having conquered', sakvdn''
'having overcome'.

A. m. lyivdmsam
'having gone', cakrvdmsam, cakhvdmsam " 'stretching
cikitvdmsam, jagrvdmsam 'waking', jujuvdmsam, tastabhvdfnsam 'having
'-5

out',

held fast', tasthivdmsam, dasvdmsam*', dldivdmsam, di'tr-vidvamsam ^i][-dL\s'^o%td.'

papivdmsam'^^, paptivdmsam 'having flown', pTpivdmsam 'having swelled',

mamrvdmsam, ririhvdmsam 'having licked', vavrvdmsam 'having enclosed',

vavrdhvdmsam 'having grown strong', vidvdinsam'', {pra-)vivisivdmsam(^?i. lY.
'having increased', sasavdmsam, sasrvdmsam 'having
.7.15'), susuvdmsam
sped',
sasahvdmsam, si'i-vidvamsam'' 'knowing well', susupvdmsam 'having
Weak forms for strong:
slept', susuvdmsam 'having pressed (Soma)'.
cakrusam (x. 137') for cakrvdmsam; emusdm (viii. 66')'^ 'dangerous'.
A. n. tatanvdt 'extending far', sam-vavrtvdt 'enveloping'.

I.

m.

d-bibhyusa

'fearless',

cikitiisa

'wise',

vidiisa^.

n.

d-bibkyusa,

bibhyusd.

D. m.
jigyi'ise,

d-raruse, uciise'^'' 'pleased', cakrt'ise, cikituse, jagmi'ise ^hsNing gont'

dadak'tse 'worshipping', dah'ise^^, bibhyuse, milhi'ise^^, vidi'tse'^^, seduse^'^

'having sat down'.

Ab. m. d-rarusas, jujurusas.

Cp.

and -vant

the -mant

and the -yams stems

2 On the Sandhi
Lanman 512.
3 From p'a and
4

stems

n.
(3 1 6)

tastkiisas'.

11

12

(346).

of these nominatives see

13
14

15

vas- 'dwell'.

iS

Without reduplication.

From jM- 'know'.

6 From ji- 'conquer'.
7 From dams- 'bite'.
8 From dhanv- 'run'.
9 Lanman adds paprivdnlj).
10 From vie- 'separate'.
5

From vyadh- 'pierce'.

From sue- 'shine'.
From i- 'go'.
From a root kha-.
Lanman adds faprivhtnsamij).
From am- 'be injurious', with weak

stem, together with anomalous accent,

*em-i-vavjsam; cp. Lanman 512^.
17

From

uc- 'find pleasure'.

Unreduplicated form.
19 From sad- 'sit down'.
20 This may be A. pi. m.
18

for

236

Ali.gemeines

I.

G. m. d-ddsusas

und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

d-rarusas,

'not worshipping',

lyi'isas,

cikitusas, jagmi'isas,

jaghmisas, janusas'^ 'knowing', jigyusas, tatarusas 'having crossed', tasthusas,

dadusas, dasusas^, didiyi'isas, papusas, bibhyusas, mamri'isas (AV.), milMsas^,
vividiisas 'having found',

V. m.

With

sedi'isas,

-van

n. vavavri'isas^ 'enveloping'.

cikitvan ^ (AV.).

Du. N. A. m.

to', jaganvamsa, jagrvimsa, tasthivavanvSmsa, vidvamsa^ susuvdinsa, susruvamsa.

okivnmsa'' 'accustomed

viimsS, didivSmsa, papivSmsa,

With

susuviisas.

cikitvas 'seeing', titirvas 'having crossed', didivas 'shining', miihvas^.

au: vidvdmsau^.

PI. N. m. d-vidvamsas, cakrvdmsas, cikitvdmsas, jaksivdmsas (TS. i. 4. 44^)

'having eaten', jaganvdmsas, Jagrvatnsas, jigivamsas, tasthivamsas, titirvamsas,
tustimdmsas 'having praised', dadrvdmsas 'having burst', dasvamsas \ papivdmsas
(TS. I. 4. 44^), paptivdmsas, midkvdmsas^, ririkvdmsas^ 'having abandoned',
vidvdmsas ^, hdukvdmsas, susuvdmsas, sasavainsas, sasrvamsas, sasahvamsas,

su-vidvamsas (TS.
(i. w^).

sahvdmsas^,

strong:
vdmsas^

m.

A.
vidusas^,
I.

iv. 6. 5^),

d-bibhyusasi

m.

jagmt'csas,

cikitiisas,

sedi'isas.

jagrvddbhis.

G. m.

Weak form for

susvpvdmsas.
has the hybrid form bhakti-

AV.

The

Jigyusas,

tasthusas,

dasi'isas^,

d-dasusam 5,

Jigyusaiti,

dadusam, miUiiisam ',

mllkt'isas^,

vidiisam 5.

2.

This

349.

Radical Stems in

declension comprises only radical stems,

sixty.

Some
in

forty of these occur in

the

n.

both monosyllabic

numbering altogether about

the m., nearly thirty in the f and half a

and compound, formed from some dozen

dozen

-s.

roots,

Nine monosyllabic stems are

f,

viz.

dds- 'worship',

dis-

dfs- 'look', nds- 'night', pds- 'sight', pis- 'ornament', prds-"^ 'dispute',
vis- 'settlement', vris- 'finger'; but only two m., viz. //- 'lord' and spas- 'spy';
'direction',

about 20 of which are formed from drs-.

same in all genders: the only n. forms which would
from the m. and f. (N. A. du. and pi.) do not occur.
a.
The only trace of the distinction of strong and weak forms appears

all

The

the rest are compounds,

inflexion

is

nasalization
'look'

the

of

the

stem in the N.

sing.

differ

in the

m. of some half dozen compounds of

-drs-

10.

As the s represents an old palatal (40), it normally becomes the cerebral d

terminations beginning with bh, as vid-bhis; but in dis- and -drs- it becomes a
guttural, owing doubtless to tlie influence of the k in the N. sing, and L. pi. It regularly
becomes k before the -su of the L. pi., where it is phonetic (43 b 2); it usually also
becomes k in the N. sing, (which originally ended in -A But in four stems it is represented
by the cerebral /, e. g. vit, owing to the influence of forms in which the cerebral is
phonetic. \t\ puro-das 'sacrificial cake', the palatal is displaced by the -j of the N.i^
b.

before

Unreduplicated form from jna- 'know'.

With anomalous additional

reduplicative

syllable.
3

AV.

VII.

97^

for

cikitvas

sponding verse of the RV.

of the corre(ill.

2916), as if

from a -vant stem.

4

From

Without reduplication.

From He- 'leave'.

See Lanman 513^.
In AV. VI. 793 for

7
8

uc- 'be wont'.

edition bhaJdivavisah
bhaksiniahi.

the reading of the

syama the Paipp. has

9 From p-as- 'question'.

Lanman would
correct the reading of AV. II. 27? to pi'asi,
explaining the word as a compound (pra-as-),
where the accent prdsi would be regular.
10 That is, -drn, which in its three occurrences in the RV. appears before vowels
and doubles the n: -drnn.
" It cannot, however, have been directly
ousted by the N. -j (the former existence of
which in consonant stems must have been
long forgotten), but was doubtless due to
the influence of a- stems, such as draviriodd-s.

VI. Declension.

''"

^""^

and

(VS. XIX. 85)

D.

^"^^

Nouns.

Consonant Stems.

237

forms to the a-declension from puro-das- furoiaiena

(AV. XII. 4^5) 'having a sacrificial cake as a calf'.' The

^'" transition

purodasd-vatsa.

infinitive drsaye is

a transition to the -declension, for

drs-eT-.

Inflexion.

350. The normal forms actually occurring, if made from vis- f. 'settlement', would be as follows:
Sing. N. V. vit.
A. viiam.
I.
vim.
D. vise.
Ab. visas.
G. visas.
L. visi.
Du. N. A. visa and visau.
PI. N. visas. A. visas. I. vidbhis.
D. Ab. vidbhyds.
G. visam.
L. viksL
Forms which actually occur are the following:
Sing. N. m. i. with nasalized stem: ki-dnt^ 'of what kind?', sa-drni
'resembling'; in VS. xvii. 81: anya-dfh 'of another kind', i-dni 'such', prdtisadpi 'similar''*.
2. ending in -k: i-drk (AV.), eta-drk 'such', ta-drk 'such',
divi-spfk 'touching heaven', ni-sprk^ 'caressing', ya-dfk 'of what kind', ranvdsamdrk 'appearing beautiful', svar-dfk 'seeing light', hiranya-samdrk 'resembling
gold', hrdi-spfk 'touching the heart'.
3. ending in -f: spdt; vi-spdt 's^y'.
4. ending in -S: puro-dds 'sacrificial cake' (occurs twice).
f. 2. ending in -k: dik (VS. AV.),
ndk; dn-apa-sprk (AV.) 'not refusing',
upa-drk 'aspect', ranvd-satndrk, sam-drk 'appearance', su-drsTka-samdrk 'having
a beautiful appearance'.
3. ending in -i: vit\ vi-pat ('fetterless') N. of a river.
N. A. n. eia-dfk^, su-samdrk 'handsome'; ta-dfk may be a neuter in v. 44".
A. m. spdsam; puro-ddsam; upari-spfiam 'reaching above', divi-spfsam,
hrdi-spfsam; tvesd-samdrsam 'of brilliant appearance', pisdhga-samdrsam 'of
reddish appearance', ranvd-samdrsam, su-samdrsam; dUre-dfsam 'visible far
and wide', su-drsam 'well-looking', svar-dHam; dUrd-adisam'' 'announcing far

and wide'.
f. disam, prdsam (AV.), visam;
a-disam 'intention', rta-spriam
'connected with pious works', pisdnga-satndrsam (AV.), pra-disam 'direction',
vi-pasam, hikra-pisam 'radiantly adorned', sam-dfsam.

m.

I.

pra-disa.

visva-pisa 'all-adorned', su-samdfsa^.

n. divi-spfsa, dure-dfsa.

D. m.
Ab. m.
XXXVIII.

on the car',
(AV. VS.),

dnar-vise 'seated
dure-dfse.

'irreligious',

svar-dfsas.

f.

dise
f.

disds (AV.),

f.

visds;

sam-dHe^.
sam-drsas,

G. m. upa-spfsas (AV.)

'touching', divi-spfsas, prdti-prasas" (AV.) 'counter-

Mranya-samdrsas, hrdi-sprsas.

n. sadana-sprsas 'coming

L. m.
(AV.),
sam-dfsi. V. m. tvesa-samdrk.
Du. N. A. V. m.

'appearing
visas.

disi

f.

rta-sprsa,

alternately',

drsi.,

prdsi (AV.),

disds (AV.),

divi-spfsa

and

divi-sprsa,

Lanman

f.

4901.

kidfnn i- (x. 108^).

^ sadfnh always before a- in RV. In TS.
final k is preserved before
II. 2. 8* (Bj the
s: sadfnk samandis.
4 Also sadHi: all four before ca.
Cp.
Lanman 4561 and 4631.
5 From ni-spfs-, BR., Grassmann, Lanman;
ni-spfh- 'desirous

of

vi-pasi,

mithu-dfsa

With -au: visau.

mithu-dfsa^
upari-spfsas (AV.), rta-spfsas, divi-spfsas, mandi-ni-

svar-dfsa.

from

f.

visi; pra-disi,

PI. N. m. spdsas;
spfsas 'fond of Soma', ratha-spfsas "touching the chariot',

(pw.).

into one's house'.

divi-spfsi.

Cp.

sam-spfsas (VS.

11).

disputant', su-dfsas, svar-drsas,

du-ddse (AV.)

divi-spfse,

i-dfse,

vise;

dasd^, disd, pisd, visd;

(loc),

Bohtlingk

hrdi-spfsas;

dure-

6 The form manandk (x, 6l6), perhaps the

same as manak 'a little', is explained by
Grassmann as maita-nds 'dispelling wrath'.
7 For dm'i-d-disain,
8 In the
Isa Upanisad (VS. XL. l) also
occurs lid.
9 Cp. Lanman 490 (bottom).
10 There is also the transition form drsdye.
" Cp. Whitney's note on AV. II. 271. The
accent should be prati-prams.

238

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

dfsas, yaksa-dfias 'having the appearance of a Yaksa', su-dfsas, svar-dfsas;

tvesd-samdrsas, su-samdfias; visva-pisas, su-pisas 'well adorned' ; st'i-sadrsas
a-disas, ud-diias (VS. vi. 19) 'upper quarters',
f. disas, visas;
'handsome'.

upa-sprsas, pra-dUas, vi-dUas (VS.

vi. 1 9)

A. m. spdsas; ahar-dfsas 'beholding

'intermediate quarters', sam-dfsas.

the day',

bhimd-samdrsas 'of

terrible

a-disas,
f. disas, visas, vrisas;
appearance', svar-dfsas, hiranya-samdrsas.
pra-disas, sam-dfsas.
padbhis' (iv. 2'^) 'with looks', vidbhis.
f,
I. m. su-samdfgbhis.
G. f. disim,
Ab. f. digbhyds, vidbhyds.
D. f. digbhyds (VS. vi. 19).
L. f. diksi'i (AV. VS.), viksu.
viiani; a-disam.

6.

Radical stems in

-A.

This declension comprises some 80 stems formed from about a

dozen roots. All three genders appear in its inflexion; but the neuter is rare,
Of monosyllabic
being found in only two stems and never in the plural.
All the remaining stems are
stems six or seven are , one m., and one n.
compounds, about three-fourths of which are formed from the three roots
The origin of the two stems
druh-, vaJi- and sah- (over 30 from the last).
351.

usnih- (AV.) a metre, and sardh-^ 'bee'

obscure.

is

in compounds of vtth- and sah-^,

vowel being lengthened in the N- A. sing, and N. pi. m.; also in the N. A. du. m.
forms indra-vaha, indra-vahau, anad-vahau; and in the f. sing. N. daksind-vat and A.
havya-vaham. The strong stem -vah- twice appears in weak cases, while it is metrically
a.

The

distinction of strong

and weak appears

tlie

The word anad-vah- 'ox' (lit. 'cart-drawer')

shortened
18 times in strong cases*.
distinguishes three stems, the strong one being anad-vah-, and the weak anad-uh- before
vowels and anad-ut- ^ before consonants.
b. As h represents both the old guttural aspirate gh and the old palatal//^, it
should phonetically become g and d respectively before bh. But the cereJDral appears
for both in the only two case-forms that occur with a -bh ending: sarddbhyas from
sarah-, and anad-iidbhyas (AV.) from anad-vah-, where the dental d takes the place of
the cerebral by dissimilation. Before the -su of the L. pi., k would lie phonetic; but
here again, in the only form occurring, the cerebral appears: anadutsu^^. On the other
hand the phonetic k appears in the N. sing, in the six ioxn\s-dhak, -dhuk, -dhruk', -ruk,
spfk, usnik{A\.)i; while the unphonetic /appears in the two forms t'a/ and -j-a/^. The
word anad-vah- forms, instead of *anad-vat, the anomalous anadvan as if from a stem
in -vant,
c.

The stem mahd-

perhaps a transfer to the a-declension from the far more

Several cases are formed from it: sing. N. maha-s,
The D. sing, mahdye,
N. maha and mahani, n., G. mahanam.
is

frequent but defective mah-

'great'.

G. mahasya, L. mahe; pi.

used as an infinitive, is a transfer to the i-declension from mah-.

Inflexion.
352.

The forms

actually occurring,

if

made from

sdh- 'victorious',

would

be as follows:
Bloomfield

is of opinion that here, as

the 5 other passages in which
this form occurs in the RV., it means 'with
feet': Johns Hopkins University Circular, 1906,
1

well

as

in

1519.
That the h here represents an original
guttural is shown by the N. pi. saraghas
and the derivatives sardgha- and
(SB.)
P-

saragha- (TB.).
3 The Pada text has always vah- on the
one hand, but sah- on the other.
4 Cp. Lanman 498 (middle).
5 For anad-ud- by dissimilation.

6 The dental
the cerebral t.

again by dissimilation for

7 Occurring respectively in usa-dhak 'burning with eagerness', in three compounds of

duh- 'milk', and in five compounds of druhThese three forms, together with
'injure'.
usar-bhut, are the only examples of the restoration of initial aspiration in the declension
of the RV.
8 The derivation of this word (AV. VS.),
it occurs in the RV. only in
is uncertain ;
the extended form of usniha.-.
9 When the final h becomes /, the initial

J is cerebralized.

VI. Declension.

Nouns.

Consonant Stems.

239

Sing. N. sat. V. m. f. sat. A. m. f. sd/tam. I. saM. D, sahL Ab. sahds.

G. saMs. L. saAi.
Du. N. A. V. m. f. sd/iS and sMau. N. A. n. sahi.
PI. N. V. m. f. sdAas.
A. m. sd^as and i-a/ia'j, f. sdAas. D. m
sad-bhyas^.
G. m. sahdm. L. m. satsi'i'^.
The forms actually occurring are the following:
Sing. N. m. i. with -k: usd-dhak 'burning with eageni
go-dhuk

'milkman', prati-dhiik^ (AV. TS.) 'fresh milk'; aksnaya-dhruk 'injuring wrongly',

a-dhruk 'free from malice', antaka-dhruk 'demon of death', abhi-dhru'k
'inimical',

asma-dhruk

with

-i:

'inimical to us'.

sat;

abhi-sdt 'overpowering', rsi-sdt 'overcoming the seer',

'overcoming men', tura-sdt 'overpowering quickly', nis-sdt 'overpowering', ni-sdp (AV.) 'overcoming', piira-sdt 'victorious from of old', prtandsdt 'conquering hostile armies', prahi-sdt 'finishing swiftly', bhuri-sdt^ 'bearing
much', rayi-sdt 'ruling over wealth', vane-sdt 'prevailing in woods', vira-sdt^
'ruling men', visva-sdt^ (AV.) 'all-conquering',
vrtha-sdt 'conquering easily',
satrU-sdf (AV.) 'overcoming foes', satra-sdt 'always conquering'; ttirya-vdf
(TS. IV. 3. 3^) 'four-year-old ox', ditya-vdt^ (VS. xiv. 10; TS. iv. 7. 10') 'twoyear-old ox', pastha-vdt (VS. xiv. 9) 'four-year-old ox' ', madhyama-vdt 'driving
at middling speed', havir-vdt 'conveying the oblation', havya-vdt 'conveying
the offering'.
Irregular form: anad-vdn (AV. TS. VS.) 'ox' ;.
f. I. usnik (VS. AV.) a metre, garta-ruk^^ 'ascending the car-seat', sabar2.^

jana-sdt

dhuk

'yielding nectar'-

spfk 'much desired'!

A. m. I. Strong

2.

daksina-vdt 'borne to the

n.

i.

puru-

forms with -vdham and -saham

(after I or f):
anad-vdkam, turya-vdham
xxviii. 25), pastha-vdham (VS. xxviii. 29),

vdham

right' ".

havya-vdham

'bringing welfare',

(after a) or -sdham
(VS. xxviii. 28), ditya-vdham (VS.
vira-vdham 'conveying men', svasti-

(also

f.);

pra-sdham

'victorious',

yajna-

saham'^^ 'mighty in sacrifice', visva-sdkam, satra-sdham; abhimati-sdham 'conquering adversaries', rti-sdham 'subduingassailants', nr-sdham 'overcoming men',
prtana-sdham 't.
With metrical shortening of -sdh- or -sdh- rti-sdham,
prtana-sdAam^^ ; carsam-sdham'^^ 'ruling over men', pra-sdAam, vibhva-sdham
'overcoming the rich', sada-sdham 'always holding out'.
2. a-druham, puru-

spfham.

f.-

guham

'hiding-place',

driiham

'fiend',

miham

'mist';

umiham

(VS. XXVIII. 25); parT-ndham 'enclosure'.

I.

m. dhanva-sdha

in various parts'.
sdhd'^''

'might',

D. m.

f.

vi-sruhd

druhe^^,

To be

'plant'.

make;

carsanT-sdhe'^^, saira-sdhe
1

'skilled in

archery',

guM^^, druhd, mahd

^.

n.

There

viahd.

a-druhe, abhi-druhe, abkimati-sdhe'^9 (TS. v.

f.

make; usnihe (VS. xxiv. 12); go-duhe ^'.

inferred from anadudbhyas and

12

The N.

in TS. V.

anadutsu.
2

puru-spfha, visu-druhd 'injuring

usnika {WS. xxi. 13); prd-

'great';

is

no evidence

to

show

the gender

3.

2. 7^),

n. make.

ol sarah- 'bee', occurs as sardt

122 (B) and in SB. xiii. 3. i*.

For yajna-sUham.

With unphonetic cerebral after 5 owing

to the influence of the N. prtana-sdt.
For ni-sat.
15 The s is here not cerebralized after i.
4 For bhiiri-sdt.
16 guhd which occurs 53 times (beside
5 For vTra-sdf.
guhd, once) is used adverbially, 'in secret',
6 For vUva-mt.
with retracted accent.
7 For satru-sdt.
17 From prd-sdh, beside pra-sah-.
8 Here ditya- seems to be == dvitiya-.
iS This form is perhaps f.
prsfha- 'back'.
9 Probably from pastha19 Strong form for weak.
The TS. (iv. 3. 32 etc.) has pasfha-vat with
20 Strong form for weak (11. 21=), but the
dental t for cerebral /.
10 There is also the transfer form mahd-s, Pada text has satrd-sdhe.
21 There is also a transfer to the z-desupplying the place of a N. of mdh-.
clension: t/iahdye (as an infinitive).
" For garta-ruk.
14

of this word.
3

240

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

Ab. m. druhds, mahds;

G. m. drukds, makas";

L. m.

V.

I.

a-driihas,

anadi'ihi (AV.)*.

m.

Vedic Grammar.

f. druhds'^
n. mahds.
anaduhas (AV.), prtana-sdhas; with
drukds, mihds; prd-sdhas.
n. mahds;

rti-sdhas.

strong form: abhimati-sahas^.

puru-spfhas.

4.

f.

f.

upa-ndhi (AV.)

'shoe',

pari-ndhi (AV.).

prtana-mt (AV.), havya-vat.

tura-sat (VS. x. 22),

2.

m.

go-

Ld-d/iruki.
dhuk {AN.).
Du. N. A. V. I. m. anad-vdhau, indra-vdha and indra-vdkau 'conveying
Indra', dhur-sahau (VS.iv. 33) 'bearing the yoke'; shortened: carsani-saka,

2. m. a-druha, dn-abhidruha 'not inimical',

ratha-sdha 'drawing the chariot'.
puru-sprha.
f. a-driiha, a-druha.
n. mahf.
PI. N. V. I. m. anad-vdhas (AV.), indra-vdhas, turya-vdhas (VS. xxiv. 1 2),
ditya-vdhas (VS.), pastha-vdhas (VS.), prsti-vdhas (AV.) 'carrying on the
vajra-vAhas 'wielding a thunderbolt', vira-vdkas, saha-vahas 'drawing
sides',
together', susthu-vdhas 'carrying well', havya-vdhas; abhimaii-sdhas, satru-sdhas;
shortened: V. carsani-sahas.
2. m. drtihas, mahds^; a-druhas, V. a-druhas,
go-diihas, puru-spfhas, V. puru-sprhas.
f. ? mihas, riihas'&'g'roxiXs' a-druhas, a-rI'lhas {KV yshoot5\ ghrta-di'thas^ gvvmg
ghee', puru-driihas 'injuring greatly', puru-spfhas, pra-ruhas (AV.) 'shoots',
mano-muhas (AV.) 'bewildering the mind', vi-sruhas.
A. m. druhds^, mahds*, a-druhas, anaduhas (AV.), puru-spfhas.
mihas, riihas (AV.); aksa-7idhas
nihas'^ (AV. VS.) 'destroyers',
f. dri'ihas,
a-druhas, upa-riihas 'shoots', pra-ruhas (AV.), sam-dihas
'tied to the axle',

'mounds'.-

D. m. anadi'idbhyas (AV.)
carsani-sdham (VS. xxviii. i).

7.

Stems

in

f.

L.

sarddbhyas

m.

'bees'.

G. m. mahdm ^,

anadi'itsu.

semivowels

r, y, v.

353. This group forms a transition from the consonant to the vowel
declension inasmuch as the stem often assumes a vocalic form before endings
with initial consonant, and in some cases takes endings which otherwise appear
The -r stems are nearest the consonant
in the vowel declension only.
declension as their radical division conforms almost without exception to that
type; their derivative division, however, has several points in common with
the inflexion of vowel stems.
I.

Stems ending

in

-p.

Here the stems ending in radical r must be

354. A. Radical stems.
from those in which the r belongs to a suffix. The radical
stem numbering over 50 are formed from some sixteen roots, the vowel of
which is nearly always i or u. Only three of these stems contain a and
Nearly a dozen are monosyllabic, but the rest (numbejing
only two a.
over 40) are compounds, almost a dozen of which are formed with -tur.
distinguished

^ With irregular accent.

probably not an Ab. of
does not occur else7 There are no neuters except the transwhere), but by haplology for dmhas-as, which ition forms maha and mahani.
8 With irregular accent as if weak forms.
is very frequent.
2 There
transition
form Cp. above 94, note ^ and LANMAN501 (middle).
also
the
is
mahdsya.
9 The derivation of this word is uncertain:
3 The Pada text has -sahas.
it is explained by Mahldhara as
nihanir-.
4 There is also the transition form make Whitney (AV. 11. 6^) would emend to nidas.
There is also the transition form
{m. n.).
5 See Whitney's note on AV. vii. 736.
mahanani.
1

amhas

(vi. 31) is

anih- 'distress' (which

VI. Declension.

Consonant Stems.

Nouns.

241

is the same in all genders except the N. A. neuter.

A peculengthening of the radical i and tt when a consonant ending
follows or originally followed '-

The

inflexion

the

liarity is

a.

The

distinction of strong

and weak appears

to dur- in weak cases; in tdr- and sldr- 'star',

and in the n. svar 'light' two weak cases, the

in dvar- f. 'door', which is reduced

from which are made tdras and stfbhis;
D. and G. sing., are formed from the con-

tracted stem sm-:

b. There are here a few transitions to the a-declension: iaia-dm^asya and iatddurestt 'leaving a hundred doors', which started from weak cases like duras; su-dhura-s,
N. sing. m. 'well-yoked', due to the A. su-dhur-am; perhaps also the A. sing. f. dn-apasphura-m 'not pushing away', which occurs beside the N. pi. dn-apa-sphur-as^. On the
other hand the N. pi. m. vandhiir-as 'car-seats' seems to be a transition from the
a-declension, as vandhiira- is probably the older stem.
c. The form yan-tur-am 'guide', which occurs twice for yan-tdr-am has been formed
as if from -tur owing to the parallelism with ap iuram which once appears beside it 3.

Inflexion.

The forms

355.

would be

actually occurring,

if,

made from pur-

f.

'stronghold',

as follows:

G. purds.
D. pure. Ab. purds.
A. puram. I. purd.
A. puras.
PI. N. V. pitras.
A. pura and purau.
I. purbhis.
D. purbhyds (VS.). G. purim. L. pursu.
The forms actually occurring are as follows:
Sing. N. m. gtr 'praising', v&r'^ 'protector'; muhur-gir 'swallowing
suddenly'; diir-ahr 'badly mixed'; raJas-tar 'traversing the air', ratha-tur
'drawing a chariot', visva-tiir 'all-surpassing', su-pra-t&r 'very victorious' 5.
f. gir 'praise', dvar (AV.) 'door', dhilr 'burden', pfir; ama-jiir 'aging at home',

Sing. N. pUr.

L. puri.

Du. N.

a-str^

(AV. TS.)

'mixture'.

N. A. n, var 'water', suar'' 'light' ^ siivar (TS. 11. 2. 12').

A. m. tiiram 'promoter'; ap-turam'^ 'active', aji-turam

'victorious

rajas-turain, ratha-ti'cram, vrtra-turam 'conquering enemies';

battles',

in

a-juram

apa-sphuram 'bounding forth', rta-jdram 'grown old in (observing)

the law', gdvasiram 'mixed with milk', ydvdsiram 'mixed with corn', sahdsra'unaging',

f. giram,
dvaram 'having a thousand doors', su-dhuram 'well yoked'".
dvSram{hY.), dhuram, piiram; a-siram, upa-stlram' coy er\ sain-giram'a.sstiA'.

I.

m.

bdndhura'''^ (AV.) 'binder' (?).

'crushing', abhi-svdra

i.gird, dhura,pura; abhi-pra-mura

'invocation', a-sira.

n. viha-tura.

f. upa-stire.
D. m. gire; nis-ture 'overthrowing'.
Ab. f. dhurds; ni-juras 'consuming by fire'.
G. m. gdvasiras, ydvasiras, radhra-turas 'encouraging

ama-jiiras.

f.

That

is,

the

-s

the obedient'.

n. suras "; rdsasiras 'mixed with juice'.

of the N. sing. m. and

f.

This

is

the

only declensional form of

word occurring in the AV.

8
Neuter compounds ending
from avoided; thus the AV. has the

also applies in var (I. 1322) if

GkassMann is right in explaining .this form

This

n. sure.

rule

this

as a N. sing. m. meaning 'protector',

vdr- {vr- 'cover'); but BR., s. v. vdr-, regard
this form as a corruption.

in -r

are

transition

form ndva-dvdra-m, N. n.
9 For ap-{a)-s-iuram 'getting over work'.
10 There
also the anomalous form
is
2 In the later language dvar- f. and pur- f.
went over to the a- declension as dvara- n. and yaniuram for yantdram.
" Probably a transfer from the a-declenpura- n., while var- n. went over to the ision.

declension as vari-.

Lanman 486

(bottom).
4 If this form is not a corruption.
5 There is also the transition form su-

See

dhura-s.
6

From

sr- 'mix'.

Indo-arische Philologie.

I.

With

the accentuation of a dissyllabic

In viu. 6l'7 for sura a the
Pada text has sure a, but it is probably the G.
In I. 66', 69' the uninflected form
suras.
suar seems to be used in a G. sense.
12

stem

{siiar).

18

242

I.

Lr.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

d/iuri,

f.

f.

puri.

m.

Du. N. A.

n.

si'car^.

vrtra-titra,

m.

N. V.

giras,

'long

sana-ji'ira

dvdra; mithas-tura 'alternating';

PI.

Vedic Grammar.

4.

grown

old',

su-dhi'ira.

gi?-as,

muras

'destroyers';

ap-ti'tras,

a-mi'iras

'destroyers'; gdvasiras, try-asiras 'mixed with three (products of milk)',

dur-dhuras 'badly yoked',

dsiras 'mixed with curds';

devotion',

in

nis-turas,

vrtra-turas (VS.vi. 34).

giras, giras {KY.), tAras

dddhy-

dhiya-juras 'grown old

vandhuras

bandhiiras (AV.),
f.

with au: dvarau, dkurau.

'seat

'stars'^,

of the chariot',
dvSras^, dvaras,

puras; dn-apasphuras 'not struggling', ama-juras, mithas-turas.

A. m. giras;

su-dhuras.

(VS. AV.),

i.

a-jituras,

giras,

I.

m.

ratha-tarbhis.

vdrbhyds (VS.).
tursu.

f.

girsi'c,

f.

pursi'i.

'expansion',

vi-stiras

strbhis^

purbhis'',

girbhis,

G. m. sdm-dsirdm
dhursu,

ydvasiras,

sam-giras,

dkuras, puras, psuras^ 'victuals';

para-piiras^ (VS. AV.),

traction'.

mithas-turas,

gdvasiras,

duras*,

'mixed'.

i.

n. prtsu-tdrsu

ni-puras^

sam-stiras
'stars'.

girdm, puratn.

'con-

D.

n.

L. m.

'victorious in battle'.

Derivative stems ending in r consist

356. B. Derivative stems.
of two groups, the one formed with the suffix -ar, the other with -tar.
The
former is a small group containing only eight stems, the latter is a very
large one with more than 150 stems.
Both groups agree in regularly
distinguishing strong and weak cases.
The strong stem ends in -ar or
-ar, which in the weak forms is reduced to r before vowels and r before
consonants.
Both groups further agree in dropping the final of the stem in
the N. sing. m. f., which case always ends in -5"=.
They resemble the vowel
declension in adding the ending -n in the A. pi. m., and -j in the A. pi. f.
and in inserting n before the -am of the G. pi. They have the peculiar,
ending -ur in the G. sing. ".
a.

Stems

in -ar.

357. There are only five simple m. and f. stems in -ar, viz. us-dr- 1.
'dawn', dev-dr- m. 'husband's brother', ndnand-ar- f. 'husband's sister', 7idr-^' m.
'man', svdsar-^'^ f. 'sister'; and the two compounds svar-nar- m. 'lord of heaven'
and saptd-svasar- 'having seven sisters'. Of these, usdr- shows only caseforms according to the consonant declension, while ndr- and svdsar- have
some according to the vowel declension also. Of ndnandar- only the G. and
L. sing, and of devdr- only the A. sing, and the N. and L. pi. occur. Nearly
all case-forms are represented by these five stems taken together. There are
also the three neuters dh-ar- 'day', adh-ar- 'udder', and vddh-ar- 'weapon',
which occur in the N. A. sing. only. The first two supplement the -an stems
dh-an- and lidh-an- in those cases.

1 This form is used 5 times as a L. sing,

dropping the -z like the -an stems, as ahan
beside ahani.
2 Strong form of iarstar- 'star'.
The
gender is uncertain.
3 Once the weak form duras.
4 The
strong form dvaras is once used.

The accentuation of a wealc

case,

duras,

n. sing,

occurs once.
5 Occurring only in X. 26^;
according to BR.

The meaning and

it is

derivation of these two

words is uncertain; see Whitney's note on
AV. xvui. 2^8.
6

From

pur- 'stronghold' and pur- 'abun-

dance'.

Weak

form, accented like a dissyllabic

In Kh. I. 116 normally accented, but
spelt with ri as stribhis.
9 With L. pi. ending kept in the first
8

stem.

member.
1 In this they resemble the N. m. of nouns
of the -an declension.

" Except
12

nar-as and usr-ds.

This word

is

probably derived with the

suffix -ar; cp. Brdgmann, Grundriss 2, p. 359.

^' Here -sar is probably a root; cp.

Brugmann,

op.

cit.,

2,

p. 8,

footnote.

VI. Declension.

Consonant Stems.

Nouns.

243

Inflexion.

Sing. N. m. hatd-svasa (AV.) 'whose sisters have been slain'.

f. svdsa; saptd-svasa 'having seven sisters'.
n. dhar, ttdhar, vddhar.
A. m. devdram, ndram.
f. svdsaram.
I. f. svdsra.
D. m. ndre;
svar-nare.
f. svdsre.
Ab. f. svdsurK
G. m. ndras.
f. usrds,
ndfiSfidur (AV.), svdsur.
L. m. ndri.
f. usri' and usrdm 3, ndnandari''.
358.

L.

V. f. usar.
Du. N. A. m.

ndrd,

V. nard and narau.

f.

svdsdrd and svdsarau.

svdsros.

f.

PI. N. m. deimras, ndras, V. naras, suar-naras.

f. svdsaras.
A. m. r5.
f. tcsrds,
svdsfs.
I. m. nfbhis.
f. svdsrbhis.
D. m. fifbhyas.
Ab. m. nfbhyas.
G. m. naram^ and nrndmT.
f. svdsram^ and svdsfnam.
L. devfsu, nfsu.

b.

Stems

in -iar.

This group includes two subdivisions, the one forming its strong
the other in -tar.
The former consists of a small class of
five names of relationship: three masculines, pi-tdr- 'father', bhrd-tar- 'brother','
ndj>-tar-^ 'grandson', and two feminines, (/^/^z'-ZaV- 'daughter', and ma-tdr- 'mother';
and the m. and f. compounds formed from them. The second class consists
of more than 150 stems (including compounds), which are either agent nouns
accented chiefly on the suffix, or participles accented chiefly on the root.
These are never used in the f., which is formed with -i from the weak stem
of the m., e. %. jdnitr-T- 'mother' (377).
a. This declension is almost restricted to the m. and f. gender. The only n. stems
are dhar-iar- 'prop', dhnia-tdr- 'smithy', Ji'/ia-ZoV- 'stationary', vi-dhar-tar- 'meting out'; and
from these only about half a dozen forms occur. The only oblique cases met with are
the G. sthatitr and the L. dhmatarl (Pada -tdri). The N. A. sing, which might be expected
to appear as -tar, seems to have attained to no fixity of form, as it was of extremely
rare occurrence. It seems to be represented by the following variations sthatar iyi. SfCi^),
359.

stem

in -tar,

sthatfn

(l.

IX. 474)

9.

726),

sthatiir

(l.

585, ggi^ 70'], dhartari (IX. 86*^;

II.

2317), vi-dharlari (vill. 592;

Inflexion.

360. The inflexion is exactly the same in the m. and f. except that the
A. pi. m. ends in -tfn, but the f. in -tfs.
The form's actually occurring, if made from matdr- f. 'mother'^ as representing a name of relationship, and from janitdr- m. 'begetter', as representing an agent noun, would be as follows:
Sing. N. mati; j'aniti. A. matdram; janitAram. I. matrd; janitrS.
D. mdtre; janitrL Ab. mati'ir; janitur. G. mati'ir; janitur. L. tnatdri;
V. mdtar; jdnitar.
janitdri.
Du. N. A. matdrd and mdtdrau; janitAra and janitsrau. I. janitfbhyam
(VS.).
D. janitrbhyam. G. mdtros; janitros. L. matros; janitros.
1

The ending

appears

to

xA-Z^jCgJ-ANMAN
2

-tir

represent

The metre

426,

declension
this
in
original -rz through

BRUGMANN, KG.

requires usa7i.

As

p.

381

to the sr

6 The only two forms in the derivative -(^ar

declension in which -am is added direct to
the stem.
7 Often to be read as nfnani; see Lan-

MAN

43.

the RV. this stem occurs in weak

from the forms only, being supplemented in the strong
The TS. (l 3. 41) however has
requires usardm in by napat.
Ithe strong form naptaravi with long vowel,
which -am is added direct to the stem.
like svdsaram.
+ The metre requires nandndri (x. 8546).
9 See Lanman 422 f.
5 On nfn as a metrically shortened form
for other' cases see Pischel, VS. I, p. 42f.
cp. 57,

The ending -am is a

declension. The metre

In

transfer

]6*

244

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

PI. N. matdrds; janitdras.

A. matfs; janitfn. I. matfbhis janitrbhis.
D. matrbhyas janitrbhyas. Ab. matrbhyas; janitrbhyas.
G. matnidm; janiV. mdtaras; jdnitaras.
L. maffsu; janithu.
tfndm.
Forms actually occurring are the following:
Sing. N. I. m. pits, bhrata; ddksa-pita (TS. iv. 3. 4'; VS. xiv. 3) 'having
;

Daksa

as father', tri-mata 'having three mothers', dvi-mata. 'having two mothers',

hatd-bhrata (AV.) 'whose brothers have been slain', hatd-mSta (AV.) 'whose
mother has been slain'.
f. duhita,
tnata; a-bhraUi 'brotherless', sindhumatri ' 'having a stream as mother'.
2^ ,m. az/-5-^ir/(i (VS.xvni. 59)3, awVi? 'protector', upa-sattd {T^.YS. kY
'attendant', krostd 'jackal' ('yeller'), janitd, jaritd 'praiser', tratd 'protector',
tvdstd 'fashioner', djtd 'giver', dhartd 'supporter', iietd 'leader', prati-grahita
(VS. VII. 48) 'receiver', prati-dhartd (VS. xv. 10) 'one who keeps back', pra-

IV. 8*) 'speaker', vodhd and vidha 'driving'; etc.

A. I. m. pitdram, bhrdtaram; ddri-mataram 'having a rock for a mother',
jd-mataram 'son-in-law', sindhu-7nata?:am.
inatdrain, saptdf. duhitdram,

vaktd (Kh.

mataram

'having seven mothers'.

2. m. adhi-vaktdram 'advocate', anu-ksattdram (VS.xxx. 11) 'doorkeeper's

mate', abhi-sektdram (VS.xxx. 12) 'consecrator', abhi-sartdram (VS.) 'assistant', ava-

satdrani 'liberator', avitdram, dstaram 'shooter', a-yantdram 'restrainer', is-karta-

ram

(VS.xxx. 12) 'churner', upa-sektdram (VS.xxx.

kdrtaram 'agent', ksattdram (VS. xxx. 1 3) 'door-keeper', gdntaram
'going', goptdram (Kh.v. 3 5) 'protector', cettdram 'attentive', janitdra?n (WQ.yjM.
51), jaritdramj'etdram 'victorious', jostdram (VS.xxviii. 1 o) 'cherishing', tarutdram
'victor', fratdram, tvdstaram, datdram 'giver', ddtdram 'giving', dhartdram, nidatdram 'one who ties up', nis-kartdram (TS.iv. 2. 73) +, netdram 'leader', panitdram
'praising', pari-vestdram (VS. xxx. 12) 'waiter', pavitdram 'purifier', pura-etdram
1

'arranging', upa-manthitdrain

2) 'pourer-out',

(VS. XXXIII. 60) 'leader', peiitdramiy ^.yx^i. 12) 'carver', pra-karitdrani(y?).:&y.^.

12) 'sprinkler', pra-netdram 'leader', pra-ddtdram (VS.vii. 46; TS.) 'giver', prahetdram 'impeller', bodhayitdram 'awakener', bhettdram (TS. 1.5.6'') 'breaker',
maiidhdtdram 'pious man', marditdram 'comforter', yantdram 'ruler', ydntdram

ydtdram 'pursuer', yoktdram (VS. xxx. 14) 'exciter', raksitdram

vanditdram 'praiser', vi-bhaktdrain 'distributor', vi-moktdram (VS.xxx.
14) 'unyoker', samitdram (VS. xxviii. 10) 'slaughterer', srtam-kartdram (TS.
III. I. 4'')
'cooking thoroughly', srotdram 'hearer', sanitdram 'bestower', sameddhdram^ 'kindler', savitdram 'stimulator', stotdram 'praiser', hantdram 'slayer',
has-kartdram 'inciter', hetdram 'driver', hotdram 'invoker'.
I. I. m. ndptrd, pitrd, bhrdtrd (AV.).
f. duhitrd, mdtrd (VS. AV.).
'restraining',

'protector',

2.

vs\.

dstrd, tvdstrd {KS[ ^,

savitrd.

(//^a/rr?

'estabhsher', /rfl-jawVri (VS.x. 30) 'impeller',

'

D. I. m. ndptre, pitre.
krostrd {KV.),

f.

duhitre, mdtre.

2.

m.

dstre (AV.), kartri (AV.),

/aritre, jostre (VS.xvii. 56), /z/aV/r^ (VS. xxii. 20), ddtre,

dhartri

(VS.xvii. 56; TS. IV. 6. 3^), dhdtre (AV.), prati-grahitre (VS. vii. 47), raksitre
(.A. v.),
vi-dhdtre (AV.) 'disposer', samitre (TS. iv. 6. 3^), sdvitre, stotri, hantre

(VS. XVI. 40), hotre.

Ab. I. m. pitur,
m. dstur, tvdstur

2.

On

bhrdtur, vi-jdmdtur 'son-in-law'.

(AV.),

dhdti'cr,

the Sandhi of these nominatives in

Lanman 423 5.
The nominatives of

see

the m. agent nouns

are so numerous (140 in the RV. alone) that
examples only can be given here.
an example of in3 Used -with the A.,
2

f.

dukitur

mdti'cr.

savitur, hotur.

cipient use as a periphrastic future:

='will

follov^'.

no

4 RV. X. l4o5
and VS. xii.
have
is-kartaram in the same passage.
5 For * edk-laram , from idh- 'kindle'.

VI. Declension.

Nouns.

Consonant Stems.

245

I. m. ndptur, pitiir, bhratur.

f. dufiitur, ndnandur (AV.), matiir.
abhi-ksattur 'carver', avitur, dstiir, utthaticr (AV.) 'resolving', karti'ir (Kli.
IV. s^- ^^), cettur (AV.), janitur, jaritiir, tratiir, tvastur, datur, dhatur
(VS. TS.
AV.), ni-dhatur 'one who lays down', neti'ir, nestur 'leader', mandhstur, yantur
(VS. IX. 30), vanditur, vavatur 'adherent', vidhur'' 'draught-horse', samitur,

G.

m.

2.

sanitiir, savitur, sotur 'presser

of Soma', stotur, hJtur.

duMtdri, matdri.
2. m. netiri, vaktdri (AV.)
'speaker', sotdri.
With metrically protracted -7: etdri^, kartdri, vaktdriK
V. I. m. j'amatar, pitar, bhratar.
f. duhitar, matar.
2. m. avasfiartar 'preserver', avitar, janitar, jaritar, tratar, tvastar, dartar 'breaker',
dosa-vastar 'illuminer of the dark', dhartar, dhatar, netar, nestar, pra-netar,
pra-yantar 'bringer', yajna-hotar 'offerer at a sacrifice', vi-'d/iartar 'ruler',
vi-dhatar, vi-sastar (AV.) 'slaughterer', sanitar, savitar, su-sanitar 'liberal giver',
sotar, stotar (VS.xxiir.7; TS.vn.4.20), sthatar 'guider', hotar.
Du. N. A.V.'* I. va.,pitdra, bhrdtara; iMha-matara 'whose mother is here
and there', ddksa-pitara, matdra-pitdra^ 'father and mother', sindhu-matara.
f. duhitdra,
matdra, sam-matdra 'twins'.
With -au: m. pitdrau, sammatdrau (AV.).
f. duhitdrau (AV. Kh. 111.15 ^3)^ matdrau.
2. m. avitara,
a-snatara 'not (fond of) bathing', ustAra 'ploughing bulls', gdntara, coditdra
'instigators', janitara, dhartdra, ni-cetara 'observers', pretara 'lovers', yantara
'guides', raksitdra, samitara, sthdtara, hjtara.
^A^ith shortened vowel:
manotdra 'disposers'.
With -au: anu-sthatdrau (AV.) 'undertakers',
ksattdrau (AV.) 'carvers', goptdrau (AV.), datdrau, raksitdrau, hotarau (VS.
XX. 42), hotarau (TS. iv. i. 8=^).
With shortened vowel: dhdnutamu^
'running swiftly', savatdrau (VS. xxviii. 6) 'having the same calf'?.
I. 2. m. hotrbhyam (VS. xxi. 53).
D. i. m. pitrbhyam ^.
G. i. m. pitros.
f. matros.
2. m. pra-iastros (VS.) 'directors'.
L. r. m. pitros.
f. matros'^.
PL N. I. m. pitdras, Y. pUaras, bhrdtaras; ddksa-pitaras^ ddksa-piiaras'^''
(TS. I. 2. 3'), go-mataras 'having a cow for mother', pfsni-mataras 'having
Prsni for a mother', sindhu-mataras, su-matdras 'having a beautiful mother'.
matdras, V. mdtaras; a-bhratdras and a-bhrdtaras (AV.).
f. du/iifdras,
2. m. agni-hotaras 'having Agni for a priest', abhi-ksattdras, abhi-svartdras
'invokers', dstaras, upa-ksetdras 'dwelling near', gdntaras, cetdras 'avengers',
jaritdras, jostdras, tratdras, ^ai/zVaVai' (VS. vii. 14) 'keepers', datdras, dkartdras,
dhdtaras, ni-cetdras 'observing' and 'observers', ninditdras 'scorners', nr-patdras
'protectors of men', netaras and netdras, panitdras, pari-vestdras (VS. vi. 13),
pavitdras ''pmih&rs', pura-etdras (VS. xvii. 14; TS. iv. 6. 1'*), pra-/natdras 'conductors', pra-netdras, pravitdras 'promoters', pretdras, yantdras, raksitdras,

L.

I.

m.

pitdri.

f.

vantdras

'enjoyers',

saiiitdras,

sotdras,

vi-dhatdras,
stotdras,

For *vah-iur, from vah-

Grassmann

VI. 12*J as

or asks'.

a N.

f.

takes this
of etar- 'one

vi-yotdras

'separators',

8 No form in -bhyam with the Ab. sense

form (v. 411; occurs.
as well as svdsros
9 These G. L. forms
who approaches
must be pronounced trisyllabically in the RV.

'draw'.

3 The Pada text has i in all these forms.

Cp. Neisser BB. 20, 44.
4 In the RV. the ending -a occurs 176
times, -ati only 10 times: Lanman 427 (mid.).

except mairos in vii. 3'. See Lanman 428.

10 With long grade vowel.
" The form vasu-dhdtaras (AV. V. 276) may
be N. pi. with shortened vowel, but Whitney regards it as a comparative N. sing,
See his note
'greater bestower of wealth'.

in which both
5 A Dvandva compound
members are inflected.
6 The shortening is probably metrical.
on AV.

This is the interpretation of the commentator; but the derivation of the word is
7

obscure.

samitdras, srotSras,

sthatdras, svdritaras 'roaring', hetaras, hotaras'^^.

V. 276.

246

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

A.

m.

I.

Kh.

iv. 53),

m.

2.

m. n rptrbhis,

and

sotrb/iis,

off',

I.

m.

hotrbhis.

hetfbkis,

raksitfbhyas {AM.),
Ab.
m. pitfbhyas.
D.

matfs'^.

pitfbhyas.

matrbhyas.

f.

rioteers',

2.

m.

asini,

stotfn, sthatfn, hotfn.

pitrbkis, bhrdtrbkis; saptd-matrbhis.

2.

'with aids',

dstrbhis, kartrbhis, dhatfbhis, pai'tfbhis

soti-bhis

f.

goptrn (AV.), jarithi, trairn, datfn, patfn

(AV.) 'drinkers', pra-vodhhi 'carrying

I. I.

pitrn'^; ddksa-pitrn, pfhii-mdtfn.

a-snatrn, kartfn (AV.;

Vedic Grammar.

4.

m.

f.

matfbhis.

setfbhis 'bindings',

ksattrbhyas (VS.xvi. 26) 'cha-

stotrbkyas, sam-grakttf-bkyas (VS.xvi. 26) 'drivers'.

f. matrbhyas.
2, unnetfnam (VS. vi. 2) kind of Soma priests,
pitnidm^.
With _/: I. pitrndm
;aritrmim, datPnSm'' (AV.), dhatfndm, stotPndm, hotrnam.
(TS. I. 3. 6' etc.); 2. dhatrndm (TS. iv. 7.' 14^), netrndm (TS. I. 3. d^)^.

I.

G. m.

L.

1.

I.

m.

pitfsu (AV.).

2.

f.

matfsu.

Stems

in

2.

/ and

m.

hotrsu.

v.

361. These stems, of which there are only five, form a transition to the
vowel declension because, while taking the normal endings like the ordinary
consonant declension, they add -s in the N. sing. m. f. and show a vowel
There are no neuter forms *before the endings with initial consonant.

Stem

a.

in -ay {-ai).

362. This type is represented by only one word, usually stated in the
form of rdi-, which never appears in any case. This word, which is both
m. and (rarely) f, means 'wealth', being in origin doubtless connected with
the root ra- 'give'. The stem appears as ray- before vowels and ra- before
consonants. The forms occurring are: Sing. A. rdm. I. rayd. D. raye.
PI. N. r&yas.
Ab. ray as. G. rdyds^.
A. rayds^.
G. rdydm.
a. The inflexion of ray- is supplemented by 7-ayi-, m. f., from which occur the addi-

I. rayyd and rayind'^ pi. I. rayibhis, G. rayTnam.

There are three forms which seem to be irregular compounds of ray- sing. G.
rdhad-rayas ('increasing wealth') N. of a man, D. brhdd-raye 'having much wealth', and
du. N. said-rd 'having a hundred goods'.
In the first two forms the vowel of the stem
has probably been shortened metrically'; in the third form, the stem as it appears before
consonants has been used.

tional cases siog. N. rayis, A. rayini,

b.

b.

Stems

in -av (-0)

and

-av {-au).

363. There are two stems in -a?', viz. gdv- m. 'bull', {. 'cow', and
dydv- m. f. 'heaven', 'day'. Both distinguish strong forms, in which the vowel
is lengthened; both take -s in the N. sing, before which the end of the stem
assumes the form of -au. Both show various irregularities in their inflexion.

1 On the Sandhi
Lanman 429.

2
3

of these accusatives see

Once with m. ending mdifn (x. 352).

With n before the ending -dm as in the

7 The G. a few times

has the irregular
accent rdyas.
8 Accented thus 22 times as a weak case
in the RV., and four times rdyas as a strong
case (also VS. 11. 24). The SV. 1. 4.1. 41 has
the A. pi. rds in the variant adhad rah for

vowel declension, and accent shifted to the

ending as in the i- and u- declension when
those vowels are accented.
adhatta of RV. via. 96' 3.
4 See Whitney's note on AV. v. 24^.
9 According to BR. and Grassmann, they
5 Also udgatj-ndm (TS. III. 2. 9') and bhraare formed from the stems i^hdd-ri- and
trndm (TS. II. 6. 6=). See Benfey, Vedica, rdhdd-ri-. Cp. Lanman 431.
p.

138;
6

IS. 13,

loi;

Lanman

430.

Except the isolated dyavT occurring once

as V. du. of dydv- 'heaven'.

VI. Declension.

Nouns.

Stems in Semivowels.

247

The inflexion of gav-, which is almost complete (the only forms not
represented being the weak cases of the dual) is as follows:
Sing.
N. gdus.
A. gdm.
I.
gdva.
Ab. gos,
G. gos.
D. gave.
L. gdvi.
Du. N. A. gava and gavau.
PI. N. gavas. A. gas. I. gobhis.
D. gobhyas. G. gdvam and gjnam. L, gosii. V. gavas.

a.
Three of these forms, gam, gas, gos must, in the RV., be read as dissyllables
few instances, though this is doubtful in the case of ,^ds^.
b. The normal G. pi. gdvdm, which is by far the commoner, occurring 55 times in
the RV., is found only 3 times at the end of a Pada (which in two of these instances
ends iambically); the irregular G. gojtam^, occurring 20 times in the RV., is found at
the end of a Pada only.
The use of the latter form thus seems to have arisen from

in a

metrical exigencies.
c.
It is to be noted that from tl^e point of view of accentuation the stem is not
treated as a monosyllable, since the Udatta never shifts to the ending in weak cases.
d. There are three compounds formed from this stem: d-gos^ G. sing. m. 'having
no cows'; pfsni-gavas'^ N. pi. m. 'having dappled cows'; rusad-gavi L. sing. f. 'having
bright cows'.

The strong form of

364.
read as /)

dydv-

which appears

is dydv-,

as

(in

which the

dydu-

before the

has often to be
-s of the N., and

with loss of the final u, in the A. sing, dydm 5. The normal stem dydv- appears
in the contracted Ab. G. dyos^ and the L. dydvi; it is
otherwise entirely displaced by the Samprasarana form div- (from which the
accent shifts to the ending in weak cases) before vowels and dyi'i- before
consonants.
The weak grade stem div- has not only entirely ousted dydv- from
in weak, cases only,

I. D. sing., and largely from the Ab. G. L. sing., but has even encroached
on the strong forms: divam occurring (21 times) beside dydm (79 times),
and divas (once) beside dyavas (22 times) in the N. pi. Similarly dyu-^ has
displaced dydv- in the weak plural forms A. dyftn (for *dydvas) and I. dyi'ibhis

the

(for *dyo-bhis).

The inflexion of dyav- is less complete than that of gdv-, the D. Ab.
G. L. pi. being wanting as well as all the weak cases of the dual. The forms
occurring are the following:
Sing. N. dydus. A. dydm; divam. I. div A. D. dive. Ab. dyos; divds^.
Du. N. A. V.
G. dyjs; divds'^. IL. dydvi; divi^. V. dydus and dydus^"^.
dydva^^; dyavT^^.
PI. N. V. dyavas; divas'^^ (once). A. m. dydn; f. divas'^^

I. m. dyubhis^^.
The A. dyam seems

(twice).
a.

The form

dydus

doubtless made its

quent weak cases
the RV.

gavas
II.

pronunciation in a few instances.

The form divam
Ab. instead of dyos.
way into the A. sing, owing to the influence of the very fredivas etc., which taken together occur more than 350 times in
to

once

occurs

718)

as

an

9 In the RV. dyos occurs 4 times as

See Lanman 431 (bottom). The form
for the A, in Kh. divds I So times.
is actually used
10

6'5.
i

dissyllabic

require

(l.

Formed on

the

dydvi occurs 12 times, divi

G.,

118 times

analogy of the vowel in the RV.

11 dyaus, that is, diaus occurs only once

This might be formed from the reduced and is to be read as a dissyllable.
12 In the G. du. of the Dvandva divdsstem a-gu:
4 There is also from the reduced stem prihivyos, the G. sing, lakes the place of
gu- the A. sing. m. pfsni-gum, as the N. of the G. du., which would be divos.
13 The neuter form used once for the m.
a man.
14 Also twice in AV.
5 For *dya[u]m like gam for *gd[u\m.
15 Also 3 or 4 times in AV.
6 Like gh for *gavas.
16 dytin and dyuhhis occur only in the RV.
7 Based on ditf-.
8 In the RV. dyos occurs
only twice as or in verses borrowed from the RV.

declension.
3

Ab., divas 50 times.

248

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

a transition stem diva- according to the a- declension

occur the forms diva-m 'heaven' and dive-dive 'every day',
and in compounds tri-divd-m (AV.) 'third heaven', iri-divc, su-diva-7n (AV.) 'bright day'.
c.
It is to be noted that the accentuation of forms from div- foUov^fs the rule of
monosyllables, while that of forms from dyav- and dyii-, as may be inferred from dyavi
and dyubhis, does not, being the same as that of gav-.
d. The follo^ving case-forms of compounds of rf/di'- occur: '\n%.'^. pra-dyaus [^.)
'highest heaven', I. pra-divS, Ab. pra-divas, Y,. pra-divi; ahar-divi 'day by day'; du. N. A.
p]-thivt-dyava 'earth and heaven', dydva-ks dnia, dydvd-pfthivl, dydva-bhiimi 'heaven and
earth', vr^ti-dydva, 'having a raining sky'; pi. N. vrsti-dyavas, su-divas.
b. Starting

came

from div-as

into being.

From

etc.

tliis

nav- {ndu-) f. 'ship', and glav- {gldu-)

very incomplete, as no dual and only two
plural forms are found; but as far as can be judged from the forms occurring
The
it is quite regular,
the accentuation being that of monosyllabic stems.
forms of ndv- are:
Sing. N. ndiis. A. nsvam, su-ndvam 'good ship' (VS. xxi. 7). I. navd'^.
I. ndubhis.
G. navas.
L. navi.
PI. N. nAvas.
From glAv- occur only the two forms N. sing, glaus (AV.) and I. pi.
glaubhis (VS. xxv. 8) ^

365. There are two stems in

m. or

f.

'lump'.

The

inflexion

-av, viz.

is

B.

Vowel

stems.

366. The vowel declension comprises stems ending

and

short.

These

in a,

i,

zi,

both long

considerably in their inflexion according as they are

The radical stems, which virtually all end in the long

differ

radical or derivative.

z,
u^, axe aUied to the consonant declension in taking the normal
but they add -s in the N. sing. m. f. The derivative stems, which
end in both long and short vowels, modify the normal endings considerably;
though they for the most part add -s in the N. sing. m. f those in -a and -i
regularly drop it.
a. Stems in radical -a.
I.

vowels

a,

endings;

367. Radical ei- stems are frequent in the RV., but become less common
in the later Sarnhitas where they often shorten the final vowel to a and are
then inflected like derivative a-stems.
The great majority of the forms
occurring are nominatives or accusatives, other cases being rare and some
not occurring at all.
In the RV. the N. sing, forms with a occur ten times
oftener than those with the shortened vowel a, and five times oftener than
the forms with a in the AV.
On the other hand, the AV. has only slightly
more forms with a than with a, and no m. forms at all from a- stems in the
obhque cases*. This tendency to give up the a forms in the later Samhitas
may be illustrated by the fact that the forms of the RV. N. sing, carsaniprd-s 'blessing men', nama-dhd-s 'name-giver', prathama-jd-s 'first-born', V. somapa-s 'soma- drinker', are replaced in the AV. by carsmii-prd-s, nama-dhd-s,
prathama-jd-s^, V. soma-pa respectively.
This declension includes stems formed from about thirty roots. Of these,
four appear as monosyllables in the m.: jd- 'child', /ri- 'protector', da- 'giver',
sthd- 'standing'; and seven in the f ksd-^ 'abode', -khd- 'well', gnd-'' 'divine
:

1 There is also the transition form according to the d- declension I. sing, ndvayd, the
accentuation of which indicates that it
started from nava.
2 The
N. pi. gldvas also occurs in the

AB.
These, however, by
often appear secondarily
they are inflected like
Radical l u and j- stems
3

consonant declension by almost always

adding the root determinative -t.
4 See Lanman 435'.
5 The form prathama-j as, however,
also
occurs in the
6

being
as

a,

it,

AV.

ksd-

ksi- 'dwell', 'rule'.

Perhaps formed with suffixal d from a

when root *gan- and sometimes to be pronounced
stems. as a dissyllable [gazta-], but inflected as if

shortened
i,

From

derivative
have joined the

a radical stem.

"

VI. Declension.

Nouns.

Vowel

Stems.

249

woman', jd- 'child', jyd- 'bowstring', ma- 'measure', vrd- ' 'troop'; the rest appear
.only at the end of compounds: -/jr(?-^ 'doing', -Z'r'- 3 'scattering', -^j(?- 'ruling',
'digging', -/J^ji- 'seeing', -^- 'going', -^(?- 'singing', ^(i-'born', ^/m- 'knowing',
-jyd- 'power',_ -ta- 'stretching', -da- 'giving', -drd- 'sleeping', -dhd- 'putting', -dhd'sucking', -pd- 'guarding', -/<?'- 'drinking', -frd- 'filling''*, -bhd- 'appearing', -md-/^y^^-

'measuring',

-yd- 'going',

-vd- 'blowing", -sd- 'winning's,

sthd- 'standing', -snd-

'bathing', -hd- 'starting'.

These stems are inflected in the m. and f. only. There are no distinctively
forms ^, as the stem shortens the radical vowel to a, in that gender and is
consequently inflected according to the derivative a-declension.
a.
Three anomalously formed m. derivative stems in -a follow the analogy of the
^

n.

radical a-stems.
i.
From the adverb td-tha 'thus' is formed the N. sing, a-tatha-s 'not
saying "yes"'. 2. usdna-, N. of a seer, forms its A. iisdnam and D. tddnel; the N. sing,
being irregularly formed without -s, has the appearance of a N. sing. f. from a derivative
asteni8. 3. Tlie strong stem of pathi- 'path' is in the RV. pdniha- only: N. sing.
pdntha-s (+ AV.)^ A. pdniha-vi {+ AV.), N. pi. pdnthas. The AV. also uses the stem

pdnthan-, from virhich it forms N. sing, pdiithd (once), A. fdnthanam (once), and N. pi.
pdnthanas. Though the stem pdnthan- never occurs in the RV., the evidence of the
Avesta points to its having been in use beside pdniAa- in the Indo-Iranian period 9. The
A. pdniMmi, as a contraction oi pdnlkdnam, may have been the starting point of the

N. sing, pdniha-s.

Inflexion.
368. The forms occurring in the oblique cases are so rare that some
endings, such as those of the L. sing., G. L. du. and G. pi. are not represented
at all. The m. always takes -s in the N. sing., but the f. often drops it, doubtless owing to the influence of the f. of derivative ^-sterns. Excepting the few
forms occurring in the D. and G. sing. ", the N. sing, with -s is the only case
in which the inflexion of the radical stems can be distinguished in the f.
from that of the derivative a-stems in form '3. The forms actually occurring
would, if made from jd- 'offspring', be the following:
Sing. N. m. f jd-s^ f. also jd. A. m. f. jd-m. I. I. j-d. D. m. f. j-6.
G. m. j-ds.
V. m. jd-s.
Du. N. A. V. m. jd, jdu. I. jd-bhyam '"*.
PI. N. m. I. jds.
A. f jds.
I. m. f jd-bhis.
D. f. jd-bhyas. Ab. lii.
jd-bhyas.

'

L. jd-su.

The forms actually occurring are the following:

Sing. N. m.yi-j-'S 'child', dd-s'^^ 'giver', stkA-s 'standing'.
1

From an extended form

of the root vr-

An
An

extension with -a of kr- 'do'.

extension with -a of kf- 'scatter'.
4 The root mid- 'soften' occurs in the
modified form of -mnd- in^ carma-mnd2

'tanner'.
5 Four of these roots, khd-, gd-, jd-, sd-,
are collateral forms of others ending in a
nasal, khan-, gam-, j an-, san-; cp. Delbruck,
Verbum, p. 92 f., Lanman 442.
6 Five N. sing. m. forms with -s are found

in agreement with n. substantives.

7 There is also a L. sing, usdne, which is
formed as if from an a-stem.
8 The starting-point of this may have

been usdndm as a contracted A.

9 See Lanman 441.

ition forms L. sing,

and puro-dhdydm

'surround'.

for usdnasam.

10 The analogy of pathi- is followed by

mathi- 'churning-stick', which once has the

A. form mdntha-m.
I' There are otherwise only the

f.

trans-

dadhi-krd-s''T

dpaydydm, N. of a

river,

(AV.).

sing, with -s is about as common

without it in the RV., the latter
occurring in late hymns; in the AV. the
former are less common.
13 But on etymological grounds other cases
may commonly be distinguished as belonging
to either one group or the other; thus
A. f. d-gopdm 'having no herdsman' must be
regarded as a radical a-form, because the
m. is almost without exception go-pd-m, and
not as a derivative f. from go-pd-.
14 Contrary to the rule generally applicable
to monosyllable stems, the accent remains
on the radical syllable throughout.
15 Lanman 443 thinks gas in x. 1278 is a
N. sing, 'singer' {gd- 'sing'), but it is probably
the A. pi. of go- 'cow'.
16 Also dha-s in TS. II. 6. 44.
17 These compounds are arranged according to the alphabetical order of the roots.
12

as

The N.

that

250

I.

Alt.gemeines

N. of a divine horse.

up

lotus fibres'.

und Sprache.

Vedic Grammar.

4.

rhhu-ksh-s 'lord of the Rbhus'.

agre-gA-s (VS.xxvii. 31

Kh.

v. 6')

Hsa-JzhA-s 'digging

'going before', an-a-gA-s

sama'not coming', furo-ga-s 'leader', samana-gA-s 'going to the assembly'.

adri-jA-s 'produced from stones', apsu-jA-s 'born in
gA-s 'singing chants'.

the waters', ab-jA-s 'born in water', abhra-jA-s {KSl !) 'born from clouds', rta-jA-s

'produced at the rite', go-jA-s 'born from the cow', tapo^A-s

(VS. xxxvii. 16) 'born from heat', divi-jA-s 'born in the sky', deva-jA-s 'godborn', dvi-jA-s 'twice-born', naksatra-jA-s (AV.) 'star-born', nabho-jA-s 'produced
'truly born', rte-ja-s

from vapour', nava-jA-s 'newly born', furd-jA-s 'primeval', purva-jA-s 'born

prathama'jA-s 'first-born', bahu-pra-jA-s 'having numerous progeny',

before',

manusya-jA-s 'born of men', vane-jA-s 'born in woods', vata-jA-s (AV.) 'arisen

from wind', sana-jA-s 'born long ago', saha-jA-s 'born together', saho-jA-s 'produced by strength', supra-ja-s 'having good offspring', hiranya-ja-s (AV.)
parama-jyA-s
'sprung from gold'.
rta-jna-s 'knowing the sacred law'.
'holding supreme power'.
apana-da-s (TS. VS.) 'giving the downward air',

atma-dA-s 'granting breath', ayur-da-s (TS. VS ) 'granting long life', asir-da-s

(VS.xviii. 56) 'fulfilling a wish', ojo-da-s 'granting power', go-dA-s 'giving kine',
caksur-dA-s (TS.iv.6.i5) 'giving sight', dravino-dA-s 'giving wealth', dhana-dA-s
'giving booty', prana-dA-s (VS. TS.) 'life-giving', bala-dA-s 'giving power', bhiiridA-s 'giving much', rastra-dA-s (VS.x. 2) 'giving dominion', varivo-da-s (VS. TS.)
'giving space', varco-dA-s (VS. TS.) 'giving vigour', vasu-da-s (AV.) 'giving
wealth', vyana-dA-s (VS. TS.) 'giving breath', sahasra-da-s 'giving a thousand',
saho-dA-s 'giving strength', svasti-dA-s 'giving happiness', havir-da-s (AV.)
'giving

oblations',

hiranya-dA-s 'yielding

'surrounding', Mye-dhA-s

gold'.

'containing much',

abhi-dhA-s (VS. xxii. 3)

cano-dJiA-s (VS.

viii.

7)

'gracious',

dJiama-dhs-s 'founder of dwellings', dhiyam-dhA-s 'devout', nama-dha-s 'namegiving',

bhaga-dha-s (TS. iv. 6. 3^) 'paying what is due', ratna-dhA-s 'procuring wealth',
vayo-dhA-s 'bestowing strength',
reto-dha-s 'impregnating',
varco-dha-s (AV.) 'granting vigour', visvd-d/ia-s (VS. 1.2) 'all-preserving', sarva-

dha-s 'all-refreshing'.
the downward breath',
pA-s'^

'protecting

gladdened',

with

adhi-pA-s

apana-pA-s (VS. xx. 34) 'protecting

'ruler',

abhisasti-pA-s 'defending

ayus-pA-s (VS. xxii. i)

from imprecations',

(VS.

aprita-pA-s

assistance',

'life-protector',

viii.

57)

abhisti-

'guarding

when

'guarding divine
devd-gopa-s 'having

rta-pA-s

go-pA-s 'herdsman', d-gopa-s 'lacking a cowherd',

gods for guardians', su-gopA-s 'good protector', soma-gopa-s 'keeper of
Soma'; caksus-pa-s' (VS. 11. 6) 'protecting the eyesight', tanu-pA-s 'protecting
the person', nidhi-pa-s (AV. VS.) 'guardian of treasure', paras-pA-s ^ 'protecting
order';

the

pasu-pA-s 'keeper of herds', prana-pA-s (VS. xx. 34) 'guardian of breath',

'observing ordinances',
sevadhi-pA-s 'guarding treasure',
stipA-s
'protecting dependents', svapA-s^ (AV.) 'protector of his own'.
dn-riupas 'not drinking in time', rtu-pA-s 'drmking at the right season', purva-pA-s
'drinking first', suta-pA-s 'drinking the Soma-juice', soma-pA-s 'drinking Soma',
hari-pA-s 'drinking the yellow (Soma)'.
a?itariksa-prA-s 'traversing the air',
kratu-prA-s 'granting power',
carsani-prA-s 'satisfying men',
rodasi-prA-s'^
heaven and earth'.
'filling
rna-yA-s
'exacting
obligations',
eva-yA-s
afar',

vrata-pa-s

'going

quickly',

tura-yA-s 'going

ap-sA-s 'giving water',

deva-ya-s 'going

swiftly',

asva-sA-s 'giving

horses',

to the gods'.
dhana-sA-s "winning wealth',

vaja-sA-s 'winning booty', sata-si-s 'gaining a hundred', sahasra-sA-s 'gaining

a thousand'; go-sA-s 'acquiring

cattle',

In abhistipasi (11. 20=), where the Pada

reads abhisti-fa asi.
See Lanman 443
(bottom).
2 On the Sandhi in this compound cp. 78 c.

nr-sA-s 'procuring men', su-sA-s 'gaining

The Pada

sva-pdh ;
su-apah;

text

^~^ox

text

of

AV.

lu. 31

divides

but the correct division

see WHrrNEV's note.

may be

rodasi-prd-s.

VI. Declension.
easily',

Vowel

Nouns.

Stems.

251

'winning light'.
ddhara-stha-s^ (Kh. n. 8^ 'subordinate',
(AV.) 'standing right', rocana-sth&s 'abiding in light', sUpa-stha-s^
(VS. XXL 60; TS. L2. 2 3) 'forming a good lap'; ahge-sthA-s (AV.) 'situated in
a member of the body', adhvare-sthd-s 'standing at the sacrifice', giri-stha-s
jz/ar-j-fi-j-

rta-sthii-s

'mountain-dwelling', ni-stha-s 'excelling', piiru-ni-sthcl-s 'excelling among many',

bhuvane-stha-s'^ (AV.) 'being in the world', mamhane-sthA-s 'X^oxaS: madhyamesthA-s (AV.yS. TS.) 'standing in the middle', rathe-stha-s 'standing on a car',
,

vandane-stha-s 'mindful of praises', vandhure-sthA-s 'standing on the car-seat',

savya-stha-s'^ (AV.), hari-stha-s 'borne by bay horses'.
ghrta-sna-s 'sprinkling
ghee'.
Also the abnormal forms d-tatha-s 'not saying "yes" ', pdntha-s 'path'.
f. /5j^-j 'abode', gnA-s 'divine woman', vra-s^ (l 124^) 'troop'.
rtapA-s,

'

kula-pA-s (AV.) 'chief of a family', go-dJiA-s^ 'sinew', go-pd-s (AV.)

'female guardian', go-sa-s, divi-fd-s, divo-jA-s 'born from heaven', vane-jA-s,

rte-jA-s,

vayo-dhA-s (AV.),

Without

-s in

vasu-dA-s (AV.),

sata-sa-s,

the Pada but with

samana-gA-s,

sahasra-sA-s t.

hiatus in the Sainhita^:

jya 'bowstring';

ni-drA 'sleep', pra-pA 'place for watering', srad-dhA 'faith', sva-dhA'^ 'selfpower'; un-mA (TS.) 'measure of height', prati-ma (TS.) 'counter-measure',
pra-mA (TS.) 'fore-measure', vi-ma (TS.) 'through-measure' 'Without -5
as in the derivative a- declension: jA {KY.), mA (TS. iv. 3. 7') 'measure'.
dpa-ga^^ (AV.) 'going away', abhi-bhA 'apparition', d-samjna (AV.) 'discord',
upa-jA (AV.) 'distant posterity', go-d/iA'^, dur-gA (AV.) 'hard to go upon', devdgopa, dyu-ksA 'heavenly', pra-jA 'offspring', /ra/i-wi 'image', pra-pA(KY.m.^o^),

pra-mA

'measure', madhu-dka'^i 'dispensing sweetness', s'rad-d/iA{KN.), sana-jA,

svd-gopa 'guarding oneself, sva-dhA.
n. With -s and agreeing with n. substantives: sthA-s 'stationary'; indrajA-s (AV.) 'descended from Indra', saia-sA-s, su-pra-yA-s 'pleasant to tread on',
soma-jA-s^^ (AV.) 'Soma-born'.
A. va..jAm, trAm 'protector', sthAm.
dadhi-kram, rudhi-krAm N. of a demon.
tamo-gam 'roaming in the darkness', tava-gAm 'moving mightily', svasti-gAm
'leading to prosperity'.
sama-gAm,
agra-jAm 'first-born', ab-jAm, nabhojAm, pura-jAm, prathama-jAm, bharesu-jam 'existing in battles'.
dn-asiia-dam
'not giving horses', dn-anr-ddm 'not giving a blessing', a-bhiksa-dAin'^^ 'giving
without being asked', upa-dAm (VS. xxx. 9) 'giving a present', jani-dAm 'giving
a wife', dravino-dAm, dhana-dAm, rabho-dAm 'bestowing strength', vasu-dAm,
sako-dAm, havir-dAm (AV.).
ratna-dkAm {hY.,YQ.iv. 2^), reto-dhAm (VS.

viilio),

dhAm

vayo-dMm, varivo-dhAm

'inspiring'.

'granting space', varco-dhAm (VS.iv. 11), vipo-

abhisasti-pAm, go-pam, tanii-pAm, ni-sikta-pAm 'protecting the

ahjas-pAm 'drinking instantly', srta-pAm 'drinking

infused (semen)', vrata-pAm.
antariksa-prAm, kaksya-prAm 'filling out the girth',
boiled milk', soma-pAm.

The Ms. reads

That is, su-upa-sthd-s.

While Kh. m. 222 has

bhfwiane-sthak
4

The Pada

adhira-stha nmasat.

and

in the

same verse

(sic).

reads savya-sihdh; see APr. n.

cp.

The derivation is
The above are

uncertain.
the only N. sing. f.
forms written vifith -s in the Pada text.
8 It may therefore be assumed that the
6

1655) i.-a&.svadhdmitd{\.T,\'^),

where

it

must

be pronounced with hiatus.

Whitney's note on AV. vni. S^''.

5 N. sing. Grassmann and Lanman, N. pi.
Roth and Sayana.
95,

(l.

"> All these four compounds of md- 'measure'

occur in TS. IV.4.ll3; see TPr.x.13, IS. 13,
104, note '.
I' BR. would accentuate apa-gd; cp. Whitney's note on AV. \. 34^.
12 Probably i"-(i'/5ir in X. 2811; cp. Lanman

....

44S'3

Also marydda

the derivation

is

'limit' if viaryd-dd,

but

doubtful.

14 These forms must be regarded as m.

used as n. Cp. the -as forms of -as stems used
N. was formed with -s.
9 Cp. RPr. IL 29. With regard to sva-dha, as n. (344).
15 According to the Pada text alhi-ksa-ddm
the Samhita text is inconsistent, writing it
contracted with a following vowel in svadhaslt ('destroying').

252

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

carsani-prdm, ratha-pram

'filling

car',

4.

Vedic Grammar.

rodasi-prdm

'.

ap-ssm, urvara-sam

'granting fertile land', ksetra-sdm 'procuring land', dhana-sam, sada-snm 'always

svar-mm.
rocana-sthdm, sv-asa-stMm (VS. 11. 2)
a good seat'; giri-stham, 7iare-stham 'serving for a man^ to stand
on', ni-sthdm, karma-nisthdm 'diligent in religious acts', pathi-stham (AV.) 'being
on the way', pathe-st/uim^^ 'standing in the way', pari-sthdm 'surrounding',
parvate-sthdvi 'dwelling on the heights', barhi-sthdm t 'standing on the sacrificial
gaining', sahasra-sam; go-sim,
'offering

grass',

the

rathe-sthdm, rayi-sthdm (AV.) 'possessed of wealth', hari-sthdm.

derivative forms pdntham, mdntkam 'churning-stick'.

abnormal

Also

ksam, kham 'well', gndm, jam, jydm, vrdm.

d-gopam, antariksaava-sdm 'liberation', dsva-sdm, upa-vdin (AV.) 'act of blowing upon',
uru-sdm 'granting much', rta-jiidm, tiro-d/idm (AV.) 'concealment', dicr-dhdm
'disarrangement',
dkana-sdm, pra-jdm, prati-dJidm (AV.) 'draught', pratisthdm 'standpoint', pra-vdin (AV.) 'blowing forth', pra-hdm 'a.dva.nta.ge:', yaksmodhdm^ (AV.) 'maker of disease', vaja-sdm, srad-dMm, sabhdm^ 'assembly',
su-prajdm, sva-jdm 'self-born', sva-dhdm, svar-sim.
I. f. apa-dhd 'concealment', abhi-khyd 'splendour', a-sthd 'without standing' t ,
asir-dd (VS.) 'fulfilment of a wish', prati-dhd, prati-sthd^, sva-dhd.
D. m. de; kilala-pe 'drinking (the beverage called) kilala', dhiyam-dhe
f.

prd/n,

'devout', pasu-se 'bestowing cattle',

rdyas-posa-de (VS. v. i) 'granting increase

of wealth', suci-pe 'drinking the clear (Soma)', subham-ye 'flying swiftly along',
havir-de.

srad-dhe'i.
f. kse;
Also the infinitives pi-a-khydi 'to see', vi-khydi 'to
look about'; para-ddi 'to give up'; vayo-dhdi 'to strengthen'; prati-7ndt' 'to
imitate'; ava-ydi 'to go away', a-ydi 'to approach', upa-ydi 'to come near',
pra-ydi 'to go forward; ava-sdi'^^ 'to rest'"G. m. krsti-prds 'pervading the human race', pasu-sds'^i.

V. m. rta-pa-s (TS.iii. 2.8"), rtu-pa-s, puro-ga-s (TS.v. 1. 1 it), bhUri-da-s,

sukra-puta-pa-s 'drinking bright and purified (Soma)', suci-pa-s, srotra-pa-s (VS.
XX. 34) 'protecting the ear', suta-ps-s, soma-pa-s^''

Du. N. A. V. m. kaksya-prd, go-pa, gharmye-stJzd 'being in a house',

chardis-pd 'protecting a house', jagat-pd 'protecting the living', tanu-pd, taptes-pd
'drinking warm beverage', dravino-dd '5, paras-pd, pura-jd, puru-tra 'protecting

much', vaja-da 'bestowing vigour', Juci-pa, su-gopd, soma-pd, sti-pd.

With
-au: d-krau'^^ 'inactive', a-doma-dhdu (AV.) 'not causing inconvenience', adhvagdu 'travelling', go-pdv, go-pau, madhu-pau 'drinking Soma', rayi-ddu 'bestowing
wealth', suta-pau^T
1

For

The D. case-form

Used adverbially

Cp.

12

See below, the Dative Infinitive, 584.

The form jas- in Jas-pati- {l. 1 858) 'lord
retained in the compound.
of the family' is probably a f. G. of jd3 The L. of the sXtra paiha- ^^ pathi- being and gnas probably G. of gna- in gnas-paiiretained in the compound.
'husband of a divine woman'. There are
4 barhi- for bayhis-; see 62.
also the transition forms jydyas and p'a5 With the N. case-form retained in the Jdyds.
compound; see Whitney's note onAV.lx.S'.
'4 There are also in the f. the transition
6 The derivation of this word is uncertain. forms gaiige, srad-dhe, iiro-dhe (AV.) 'concealrodasl-prctvi^

Lanman

of

4471.

;//-

'man'

being

'at once'.

There are

ment'.
also the

transition forms jyaya, prajaya.

9 Also the transition form prajayai.
10

The

infinitive prati-mi

is

13

15
^^

The Pada text reads dravino^dau.

Some of these duals in -au may be

formed from radical stems with shortened

probably a a; cp.

locative.

'7

Lanman 450'

There are

also

the

f.

transition forms

These dative infinitives are formed by rdu-pe 'drinking what is sweet', piirva-jc
combining the full root with the ending -e, 'born before', sv-dsa-slhe 'sitting on a good
'

while in the ordinary datives the radical a

is dropped before the ending.

seat'.

VI. Declension.

Vowel

Nouns.

Stems.

253

I. Only four compounds of -/^z in TS.in. 2. lo': kratu-pabhyam

'watching
one's intentions',
caksus-pabhyam,
vak-pAbhyam 'protecting speech', irotra^

pdbhyUm ^.
PI. N. V. m.

rbhu-ksUs.
agni-jds (AV.) 'fire-born', d-pra-jas 'childless',
apsu-jas {KS[), osadhi-jas (AV.) 'born among herbs', khala-jds {KSl) 'produced

on a

threshing-floor', deva-jAs, purd-jAs, prat/iatna-Jas, pravate-jAs

airy place', raglm-jAs

'produced from a

'grown in an
saka-dhuma-jAs (AV.) 'produced
rta-jnAs, rta-Jnas, pada-jnAs 'knowing

racer',

from cow-dung',^ su-pra-jAs, sva-jAs.

the track'.
asva-dAs 'giving horses', asir-dAs {ySi.Nm..^), go-dAs, dravino-dAs,
dhana-dds, vara-dds (AV.) 'granting boons', vastra-dAs and vaso-dAs 'giving

garments', hiranya-dds.
jani-dhAs'- (x.295),
dh&s, vayo-dhAs.
payo-dhas 'sucking milk'.

dhiyam-dhAs, ratna-dhas, retokula-pAs 'heads of the family'; go-pas,

indra-gopas 'protected by Indra', devd-gopas, vdyu-gopas 'protected by Wind', su-gopAs; tanu-pAs, pas'u-pAs, vrata-pAs.
agre-pds 'drinking

anjas-pds, payas-pds 'drinking milk',

first',

mant/ii-pas^ (VS. vn. 17) 'drinking

sJma-pis (AV.), havis-pds 'drinking offerings'.

the stirred Soma', soma-pds,

carma-mnds''
sahasra-sds.

jma-yds

on the
prthivi-sihds^ 'standing on the

'tanners'.

sthds^ 'dwelling in the house'.

abnormal

'going

ghrta-snds

earth'.

earth',

dhana-sds,
harmye Also the
sadd-sds,

rathe-sthds^

'sprinkling

ghee'.

derivative pdnthas''.

f. gnds, vrds.
d-gopds, ava-stJiAs 'female organs', dki-gopas 'guarded by
the dragon', a-tas 'iiaxats' , rta-jnAs {AN.), gin-jds 'mounta,m-horn', jarani-prds',
devd-gopds, deva-yds, pada-jfids (AV.), pra-jds, praihama-jds, pra-yas 'advance',

manusya-jds

(AV.),
vaksane-st/ids 'being in Agni'(?),
vdja-dds,
'bestowing strength', su-gopds, soma-pds, svayain-jds^ 'self-born'.

A. m. There

hisma-dds

no certain example: vane-jds

(x. 79^) is possibly one 9.

dn-agni-trds 'not maintaining the sacred fire', anusthds 'following in succession', asva-dds, deva-yds, pari-jds (AV.) 'places of
origin', pari-sthds 'impediments', pra-jds, manusya-jas, vi-sthds 'positions', sahdis

ksds, gnds, jds.

f.

gopds 'accompanied by herdsmen', su-gas 'easy to

m.

I.

agre-pdbhis.

gndbhis;

f.

traverse', sva-dhds.

rtic-pdbhis,

ratna-dhdbhis,

prajabhis,

srad-dhdbhis, sva-dhdbhis.

D.
L.

pra-jdbhyas.
Ab. m. bhuri-ddbhyas'^
ksdsu, gnasu, jasu; d-tdsu'^^, pra-jdsu, sabhdsu.

f.

f.

b.

Stems

in Radical -a.

369. These consist almost entirely of stems in radical a which has been
shortened to a. With the exception of khd-'^^ 'aperture' they occur at the end of

compounds

only.

They

are: -ksd- 'dwelling', khd-, -gd- 'going', -gd- 'singing',

-jd- 'born', -jya- 'bowstring',

-dM-

-dd- 'binding',
1

In

-i'a-

'stretching', -//-a- ^^ 'protecting', -afa- 'giving'

'putting', -pd- 'guarding',

-pd- 'drinking', -prd-

8
L. du. there also occur the f.
There
forms janghayos (AV.) and sva- ndva-gvas,

the

transition
dhayos,

Cp.

is

also

Lanman

the

f.

'filling',

transition

"t,

-mndform

451*.

1 In the G. occur the f. transition forms

Of doubtful meaning.
The stem is maniAi-pd- ncccrding to BR. pra-Jndnafn (AV.) 'fore-knowing', vi-bhandm

From ym/d-:

Pj^Aivi-

'softening hides'.

pj'thim-.

With the L, ending retained in the first

member of ihe compound.
7 The form panthAsas also occurs once.
6

'radiant'.
11
12

Probably from tdtan- 'stretch'.

The nominatives dra-s ^nAvrd-s'va.hN.

XI. 73 (also nyd-s, 74) are of

(see WmxNEY's note).

unknown meaning

13 Cp. Gaebe in KZ. 23, 476, 480.

doubtful whether the plurals dyii-ksasas
'4 Perhaps
also -dra- 'running' in krsnaand priya-sasas are to be regarded as formed
from a- stems. Such plurals are probably drd-m (AV.).
made from a- steins.
It is

254

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

'thinking', -mla-'^ 'softening', -sd- 'winning', -sthd- 'standing'; also -grd-' 'swallow-

M-'* 'slaying'.
These stems are inflected in the m. and
assumed in the n. by all radical a-stems (367).

ing',

-gva-^ 'going',

only.

n.

This

is

the form

Inflexion.
370.

The

inflexion of the

radical

a-stems

is

identical with that of the

The forms which occur are the following:

derivative (2-stems (371).
su-khd-s 'having a
Sing. N. m. dyu-ksd-s 'dwelling in heaven'.
(axle) hole'.

good

agre-gd-s 'going in front', asum-gd-s (AV.) 'swift-going', rju-gd-s

(AV.) 'going straight on', patam-gd-s^ 'going by flight', vala-gd-s (AV.) 'hidden
(AV.xi. 5'^) 'white-goer', su-gd-s 'easy to traverse'.
ddsaa-jd-s 'unborn', adhri-ja-s
gva-s 7 'going in tens', ndva-gva-s ' 'going in nines' ^.
eka-jd-s (AV.) 'produced alone', jarayu-jd-s (AV.) 'viviparous',
'irresistible',
samudra-jd-s (AV.)
ni-jd-s (AV.) 'familiar' 9, prathama-jd-s (AV.) 'first-born',
an-anu-dd-s 'not giving way', danu'sea-born', stamba-jd-s (AV.) 'shaggy' (?).
dd-s 'dripping', daya-dd-s (AV.) 'receiving {a-da-) inheritance {daya-)\ prana-dd-s
nama-dhd-s (AV.) 'name-giver'.
akuti-prd-s (AV.) 'fulfilling
'life-giving'.
wishes', kama-prd-s (AV.) 'fulfilling desire', carsani-prd-s (AV.) 'satisfying men',
prthivi-prd-s (AV.) 'earth-filling''".
apnah-sthd-s 'possessor', go-sthd-s (AV.)
satru-hd-s (AV.) 'slaying
'cow-pen', puru-nisthd-s 'excelling among many'.
enemies', sahasra-hd-s (AV.) 'slaying a thousand'.
a-doma-ddm (AV.) 'not causing inconvenience',
N. A. n. khdm 'aperture'.
antdri-ksam 'air', krsna-drdm (AV.) 'black runner' (?)'', tuvi-ksdm 'destroying
many', dur-gdm 'impassable', dyu-ksdm, prathama-jdm (AV. VS.), vAta-gopam
(AV.) 'guarded by the wind', vrtra-hdm 'slaying foes', satra-hdm 'always
destroying', sadhd-stham 'abode', su-gdm , su-mndm 'benevolent'.
A. m. atithi-gvdm ('to whom guests go') N. of a man, an-anu-ddm,
arati-hdm (AV.) 'destroying adversity', as'va-pdm (VS. xxx. 11) 'groom', d-svagani (AV.) 'homeless', eka-Jdm, garbha-dhdm (VS. TS.) 'impregnator', grhapdm (VS. xxx. 11) 'guardian of a house', go-pdm 'herdsman', carma-mndm (VS.)
'tanner',
tri-sthdm 'having three seats', ddsa-gvam, dava-pdm (VS. xxx. 19)
'forest-fire guard', dyu-ksdm, patain-gdm, prathama-jdm (VS. xxxiv. 51), madhtipdm 'honey-drinker', vana-pdm (VS. xxx. 19) 'wood-ranger', vala-gdm (AV.),
vitta-dhdm (VS. xxx. 11) 'possessing wealth', su-khdm, su-gdm (AV.), hasti-pdm
(VS. xxx. 11) 'elephant-keeper'.
n. antdri-ksena, rtd-jyena
I.
m. rathe-sthena 'standing on a car'.
'whose bowstring is truth', kama-prena, su-gena (AV.), su-mnena.
D. m. atithi-gvdya, dyu-ksdya, fatam-gdya, ratke-sthdya'^'.
n. pardsAb. m. rsya-ddt (x. 39**) 'pit
paya (VS.) 'protecting from afar', su-mnSya.
in a cave'*, sitivi-gd-s

for antelopes'.

n. antdri-ksai^^, dur-gat, sadhd-sthat.

In the form ai-mna- in carma-mna- 'tanner'. Bloomfield, AJPh. 17,42227; cp. above
An extension of gr- 'swallow'; cp. -kra- p. 153 (mid.).
8 The compound puro-gava-s 'leader' posand vra- among the radical a- stems.
*puro-gvd-s
3 In its original form perhaps -gva-;
a sibly
but it is probably a
reduced form -gu- appears in vanar-gii- 'forest- governing compound; cp. above, p. 176'.
1

roaming'
4 A reduced form of han- 'slay'.
5 See Bartholomae, BB. 15, 34 and

9 See Whitney's
10 Also fam-sa-s

cp.

note, on
(v. 411)

AV.

ill.

if it is

52.

N. sing,

and not a G. oi pasu-sa-.

"

Cp. Whitney's note on AV. ix. 7*.

(AV.) is analyzed by the Commentator as sva-jdya 'self-born', but is exwhat doubtful; cp. IS. 4, 304.
plained by Whitney (AV. vi. 562) as 'con7 These two compounds as well as atiihigvd- and eta-gz'a-, are with more probability strictor' (from svaj- 'embrace').
13 See Lakman 337.
derived from a reduced form of go- 'cow' by

BB.
6

18, 12.

The etymology and meaning

are some-

12 svaj'dya

VI. Declension.

Vowel

Nouns.

Stems.

255

G. m. a-j'dsya, atithi-gvdsya^
n. antdri-ksasya, asthi-jdsya (AV.) 'produced in the bones', tanu-jdsya (AV.) 'produced from the body', su-mndsya.
L. m. ddsa-gve, ndva-gve, ratha-samg^ 'encounter of war-cars', sam-stM
.

'presence', sam-ge 'conflict', su-khe, svar-ge 'going to heaven'.

khe.

karanja-he 'pernicious to the Karanja

situation', sadhd-sthe, su-mne.

V. m.

tree', dur-ge,

eka-ja, dyu-ksa,

(AV.) 'drinking Soma'.

n. antdri-kse,

bhayd-sthe 'perilous

patam-ga (AV.), soma-pa

Du. N. A. m.^ ita-gva

N. V. m. ajya-pas

'going swiftly'.
A. n. sadhd-sthe.
(VS. xxi. 40) 'drinking clarified butter', ha-gvas,
tanu-jas (AV.), tapo-jds (AV.) 'produced by austerity', ddsa-gvas, ndva-gvas,
patam-gds, vala-gas (AV.), su-gas.
Also four forms with asas ddsa-gvdsas,
dyu-ksdsas, ndva-gvasas, priya-sAsas^ 'granting desired objects'.

PI.

N. A. n. I. dmsa-tra 'armour protecting the shoulder', antdriksa, dur-gi,

prathama-ja"' (AV.), sadhd-stha, su-ga, su-mtia.
2. khsni.
antdri-ksani,
ararin-dani^, dur-gini, sadhd-sthani, su-gani, sii-mndni.
A. m. go-pin^ tapo-Jsn, dur-gin (AV.), patam-gan, purva-jAn (TS.) 'born
before', srta-pAn 'drinking boiled milk', saha-jan (TS.) 'born at the same
time', su-gAn, soma-pAn (AV.).
I. m.
I. tuvi-grebhis
'swallowing much', mitho-avadya-pebhis 'mutually
averting calamities', ratna-dhebhis 'preserving wealth', sama-gibhis {SSf^ 'reciting
chants', su-gebhis.
2. A-tais^ 'frames', ddsa-gvais, ndvagvais, dhana-sdis
'winning wealth', ndva-gvais, patam-gdis, su-khdis.
n. i. madhu-pebhis,
su-gebhis, su-mnebhis.
2. su-mndis.
G. m. dvi-janatn (AV.) 'twice-born', sakamD. m. purva-jebhyas.
janam 'being born together'.
L. m. dravino-desu 'giving wealth', su-khesu.

n. dur-ge'su, sadhd-sthesu,

su-ge'su,

su-mne'su.

stems in

2 a. Derivative
Benfey, VoUstandige Grammatik
112

(p.

116).

p.

293317.

Lanman, Noun-Inflection 329

354.

-a.

Whitney, Grammar 326

334

371. This is the most important of the declensions as it embraces more

It is also the most irregular inasmuch
one-half of all nominal stems.
as its ending diverge from the normal ones more than is elsewhere the case.
This is the only declension in which the N. A. n. has an ending in the singular.
Here the I. D. Ab. G. sing, are peculiar; and in the plural, the A., the G.,

than

do not take the normal

I. and of the N. A. n.
vowel of the stem is also modified before the endings
with initial consonant in the du. and pi. Three of the pecuhar case-ending'^
of the sing. (I. Ab. G.) are borrowed from the pronominal declension, while
in the pi. two of the case-endings (G. and N. A. n.) are due to the influence
fof the stems in -n. This is the only declension in which the Ab. sing., as a
/result of taking the pronominal ending, is distinguished from the G. As elsewhere in the vowel declension, the N. sing. m. here adds the ending -s throughout;
but the V. sing, shows the bare stem unmodified. This declension includes
one

forms

of the

endings.

The

of the

final

is according to fanthdsas, occurring once beside the ordinary

not sva-jasya 'self- panikas formed from the anomalous derivative a- stem. puK/Ad-, proves nothing regardborn'; cp. p. 254, note 12.
2 Some of the m. duals given under the ing radical 5- stems.
4 This is the reading of the Pada text,
radical a-declension ought possibly to be
1

svajasya in

Whitney

AV.

X. 41- '5

'constrictor',

placed here.
3

There

is

no reason

to

suppose that any

of these are plurals of a- stems, since the

as a- stems only and
first three appear
p-iya-sa- does not otherwise occur. The pi.

the Samhita having -jd r- (70 a).

word of uncertain meaning.
5
6 Two other forms, atas and dtasu are
formed from the f. stem of this word, d-ta-,
which is probably a radical a- stem.

256

I.

m. and
There

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

stems only, as the corresponding f. follows the derivative a-declension.

here no irregularity in the accent, which remains on the same
syllable in every case except the V., where it of course shifts to the first.
n.

is

Inflexion.

The

from that of the m. in the N. sing,

and pi. only. In the G. L. du. y is inserted between the
The forms actually occurring, if
final -a of the stem and the ending -os.
made from priyd- 'dear', would be the following:
Sing. N. m. priya-s, n. priyd-m. A. priyii-m. I. priyena and priya.
372.

and the N. A.

inflexion of the n. differs

du.

L. priyi.
V. priya.
D. priyaya. Ab. priyat.
G. priydsya.
Du. N. A. m. priyS and priydu, n. priye. V. m. priya and priyau.
I. D. Ab. priyabhyam.
G. L. (friyi^^.
A. m. priydn,
PI. N. m. priyAs and ffiySsas, n. priyd and priydni.
and priyShis. D. Ab. priyebhyas. G. priI. priydis
n. priyd and priydni.
ydnSm. L. priyesu. V. priyas and priyasas.
Owing to the enormous number of words belonging to this declension,
only forms of commonest occurrence will be given below as examples under
each case.
Sing. N. m. This case is formed in the RV. by 1845 a-stems and
occurs more than 10 000 times. The most frequent substantive is indras N.
of a god, found more than 500 times; next in order come somas (220) N. of
a plant, devds (203) 'god', mitrds (132) N. of a god, vdrunas (94) N. of a god.
A. m. After the N. sing, m., the A. sing. m. is the commonest declensional
form in the RV., being made from 1357 stems' and occurring nearly 7000
times. The nouns most frequently found in this case are indram (335), somam,
(212), yajildm (183) 'sacrifice', vdjam (123) 'vigour', sttryam (90) 'sun',
hdvam (88) 'invocation', vrtrdm (82) N. of a demon, stomam (77) 'praise'^.
N. A. n. This is the only declension in which these cases take an
ending. They here add -m, being thus identical in form with the A. sing. m.3.
They are very frequently used, being formed from about 950 stems and
Examples are: rtdm (70)
occurring, taken together, more than 4000 times.

ghrtdm (47) 'clarified butter', paddni (46) 'step', rdtnam (44)

sakhydm (43) 'friendship', drdvinain (41) 'wealth', satydm (40) 'truth'*.

'sacred order',
'wealth',

I. m. n. I. The usual form of this case ending in -ena, is very frequent,

being formed from more than 300 stems nearly equally divided between m.
and n. The commonest forms are; m. sAryena (37), indrena (34), vdjrena
n. ghrtena (31)5.
(33) 'thunderbolt', yajiiena (13).
The final vowel appears lengthened in about twenty-five forms:
a.
amftena (AV.) 'ambrosia', d-sivena 'malevolent', djyena 'melted butter', riena,
kdvyena 'wisdom', ki'disena 'axe', peivena 'ram', tavisina 'strong', ddksinena
'right', ddivyena 'divine', bdkureiia 'bagpipe', bhadrena (AV.) 'excellent', mdrtyena
'mortal',
mdruiena 'consisting of storm-gods', ravdthena 'roar', vdrunma,
vithurena 'staggering', vi-ravena 'roar', viryena 'heroic power', vrjdiiend 'might',
vrsabhena 'bull', sahasyena 'mighty', sdyakend 'missile', s&ryena, skdmbhanena

the
2

fore

509

RV.

On

the occasional elision of the -m beiva and subsequent contraction, see

Lanman
3

tarn and yam mining whether a word

and 259 times respectively in Lanman 331 (middle).

The pronominal forms

occur

For

stances

331.
this

not

reason
sufficient

there

is

evidence

in

some
for

in-

deter-

is

m. or

n.;

cp.

4 On
occasional elision of the final -m
and subsequent contraction, see Lanman 331.
5
The final vowel is twice nasalized
ghaninam ikas (l. 334) and tijanenmli ekam
(I.

no').

Declension.

VI.

Nouns.

Vowel

Stems.

257

These forms regularly occur where the metre at the end of a Pada
e. g. skdmbhanena jdnitn (in. 31'^), but kdmbhanena
skdbhiyan (x. iii5); on the other hand, the long vowel appears to be used
'support'

'.

favours a long vowel;

arbitrarily at the

more

frequent.

beginning of a Pada, though the short vowel here is much

the a seems to be a survival and not to be due to

Hence

metrical exigencies.

more than a dozen forms made with the nominal

are no quite certain examples beyond yajfia;
The
possibly also krana 'acting', ghani 'club', dand 'gift'^, camasa^ 'cup'.
n. forms are kavitvA and kavitvand 'by wisdom', taranitvd 'by energy',
mahitvd and mahitvand 'by greatness', ratna-dheya 'by distribution of wealth',
There are

2.

ending

-a.

In

also

the m. there

rdthya 'belonging to a car', vTrya 'with heroism', sakhyd 'with friendship',

sarva-rathd 'with the whole line of chariots', su-hdva 'with good invocation'*.
This ending is also preserved in a few instrumental adverbs:
and. 'hereby', uccd 'above', pakd 'behind', sdna 'from of old' 5.
D. m. n. This case, which has the abnormal ending -aya, is of very
frequent occurrence, being formed in the RV. from over 300 stems in the
m. and from nearly 150 in the n. The commonest forms are: m. mdrdya
(188), mddlya (76) 'exliilaration', devdya (26), mdrtyaya (25), mitrdya (23);

Tarun-lya (23), ydjamanaya 'sacrificing', s'iryaya (11); n. stivitaya (34) 'welfare',

sakhydya (29), tokdya (21) 'offspring', tdnayaya (18) 'line of descendants'*.
a. The normal form would have been for example *>'a/77fl7 =>'a7Ho'-i?'. This would
Sandhi have become *yajnay, which was ultimately extended with -a, owing to the
frequent combination with a following a- in Sandhi (e. g, yajvay-a fi iox yajnay api), or
with the shortened form of the preposition d^.

in

Ab. m. n. These are the only nominal stems in which the Ab. is
Instead of the normal ending -as, they
formally distinguished from the G.
declension (e. g. md-d 'from
pronominal
the
in
appears
which
the
-d
take
formed in
me'), lengthening the -a of the stem before it?. This Ab. in -ad is
and n.
m.
between
divided
equally
nearly
stems,
200
the RV. from over
Some of the n. fonns are used as adverbs. Forms of common occurrence
are: m. samudrdt (15) 'sea', updsthat (9) 'lap', indrat (8); n. antdri-km^
(15) 'air'; durdt (19) 'from a distance', /a/ra/ (26).
G. m. n. These are the only nominal stems in which the G. sing, does
" which is
not end in -x". Instead of the normal ending -as, they add -ya
1 In all these forms the Pada text has the
short final vowel a; see RPr. vut. 21 andcp.

APr.

111.

16.

The pronominal forms

tena,

yend, svend also appear, and always with the

short vowel in the Pada text on the other
hand, end is always ena in the Pada, while
the unaccented end, beside ena, has the
short vowel in the Pada. See Lanman 332
;

(bottom).

fore

vowels:

iad-vasaymfi

savayam evd (l. 1 13').

7 The normal ending
in

-e

em
is

the pronominal declension,

tasma-e.
8 See Johansson, BB. 20, 96

(11.

14=)

and

actually used

g.

tdsmai

and Barff.
THOLOMAE, Arische Forschungen 2,69-; 3,63.
9 Cp. Johansson, BB. 16, 136 and BrugMANN, Grundriss 2, 588.

10 This is really a radical a- stem; see

above, 370.
11 In the G. sing, of stems in -ar and -tar,
the final r seems to represent original -s;
see above 358, note on svasiir.
12 The y is never to be read as i; possibly
however about five times in the pronominal
asyd. The final -a in two or three instances
cp. Lanman 334 (middle).
nicais; but undergoes protraction of a purely metrical
cp.
'below',
nwd
also
Perhaps
5
character: see Lanman 338-5.
nyanc-.
it may be the I. of
,
,.
benasahzed
twice
are
6 Such D. forms

See Lanman 334 (ntiddle).

Pada
3 Nasalized in camasam iva (x. 254),
camasin. On these forms see Lanman 335.
also appears
4 This form of the instrumental
beside the
a few times in the pronoun iva
usual ivdyd; it also occurs in a few compounds,
'given by thee';
as tvd-datta- and tva-ddtaz

17

Indo-arischs Philologie.

I.

4.

2s8

I.

Aligemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

otherwise found in the pronominal declension only. This case is very common,
being formed in the RV. from over 500 stems in the m. and 175 in the n.,
occurring altogether over 3300 times'. Among the frequent forms ^ are:

m. indrasya (123), sAryasya (93), somasya (88), devasya (60), yajhdsya (55),
sutdsya (53) "pressed"; n. rtdsya (187), bhiivanasya (39) 'world', amftasya (35)^.
L. m. n. This case is formed with the normal ending -/, which combines
It is formed in the RV. from 373 stems
with the final -a of the stem to -e.
in the m., and over 300 in the n., occurring altogether about 2500 times.

Among

the frequent forms are: m. adhvare {6?>) 'sacrifice', sufe (^3), upd-sthe
(49), 7ndde (48), dame (40) 'house', indre (33), yajiie (28), jdne (26) 'man',
grhe (23) 'house'; n. viddthe (49) 'assembly', dgre (43) 'front', sddane (35)

duroni (31) 'abode', mddhye 'middle' (29).

this case the bare stem (always accented on the first
employed. It is formed in the RV. from about 260 stems, occur-

pade

(33),

V. m.

n.

'seat',

syllable)

is

In

2500 times in the m.; but in the n. there is no undoubted

The AV. however has four or five n. vocatives. Among the
commonest forms are: m. soma and soma (240), deva (132), sTira (94) 'hero',
pavamdna (63) 'bright Soma', ptcru-huta (49) 'much invoked', varuna (45)1
ring about

example*.

mitra (35), yavistha (29) 'youngest',

vrsabha (27)

'bull',

iigra (23)

'mighty',

amrta (i2)5; n. antariksa'^ (AV. vi. 1301), trdikakuda 'coming from the threepeaked (mountain)' and devanjana (AY. xix. 44*) 'divine ointment', fa/pa (AV.
XII. 2*'') 'couch', visa (AV.iv.63) 'poison'?.
Du. N. A. V. m. The ending of these cases in the RV. is ordinarily
-a, much less frequently -au^.
The former is taken by over 360 stems
occurring about 1150 times, the latter by fewer than 90 stems occurring about
170 times. The ending -d is therefore more than seven times as common
as -au. The rule is that -a appears before consonants 5, in pausa at the end
of a Pada '", or within a Pada in coalescence with a following vowel; while
-au " occurs in the older parts of the RV. only before vowels in the Sandhi
form of -Sv, within a Pada. Examples of this rule are (d vam (i. 184');
rtJvrdhx
(i. 47^'');
dasrdf^^ (i. 116^') for dasrd dt; mitragnim (i. 142) for
mitrd agn'iin; but tdv'^^ apardvi (1.184'). Hiatus, when the metre requires two
\

The pronominal

tdsya, ydsya,

occur over 900 times

RV. cp. Lanman 338.

The commonest G. in -sya

in the
2

genitives asya and asya,

-jisvasya

is

tlie

pro-

nominal asya which (accented or unaccented)

occurs nearly 600 times in the RV.
3 The final vowel
is
once nasalized at
the end of a Pada in rtasyam ekam (viii. 89')
cp. RPr. II. 31.

Cp.

Lanman

339.

5 There are two instances of the final -a

being nasalized: ugram okas (vil. 254) and
puru-stutam eko (vili. 153- "); cp. RPr. XIV. 20.
There is a purely metrical lengthening of
the final vowel in vrsabha (viii. 4522. 38]^
sima.
(VIII. 41),
and hariyojana (1. 61 16);
perhaps also marya (I. h^); cp. Lanman

3396

Properly a radical a- stem.

By

ca^ is

a syntactical peculiarity the N. indras

some ten times coupled with a vocative

vayo, agne etc.

8

In the

common

AV.

.See

Lanman 340

-au is
as in the RV.

(topV

more than twice

;

it

is

as

there some-

times a various reading for -a of the RV.

In the independent Mantra portions of the
TS. there are at least seven forms in -a and
fourteen in -au. In the Khilas -a is nearly
three times (32) as common as -au (12).
9 -au occurs 23 times before a consonant
within a Pada; mostly in passages showing
signs of lateness.
Cp. Lanman 576.
10 -au occurs
5 times at the end of an odd
Pada before a, consonant; and 4 times as
-av at the end of an odd Pada before a
vowel. At the end of an even Pada -au
occurs 4 times.
11 Lanman
343 enumerates the forms in
-au which occur in the RV.
12 At the end of an odd Pada -a is always
written in the Samhita contracted with a
following vowel, but must always be read

with hiatus.
13 This is the normal use of -au, which in
70 per cent of its occurrences is found as
-av before a vowel within a Pada; in the
AV. the percentage is only 26.

VI. Declension.

Nouns.

Vowel

Stems.

259

syllables, is thus removed' by the use ol-av, except

when ic or u follows ^ In
the latter case the Samhita text writes -a u-\ e.
g. ubkd upamh'c (x. 83?), though
the Pada always has -au u-.

There are seven or eight passages of the RV. in which -a is written with
hiatus before other vowels (a- i- o-Y, but those passages
are all obscure or
corrupt 5.

About a dozen forms, occurring altogether some 20 times, shorten the dual -a
mostly owing to the metre, but in a few instances against the metre. In the forms
asura,^adUya, deva, dhrla-vrata, mitra, varuna, indra-varuna, mitra-varuna^
the Pada text
has -a; but in paura (v. 74'*) and vlra (vi. 6310) the short vowel appears in the Pada
also
A similar shortening occurs in the first member of the dual compounds indrcia.

to a,

v.iyu

(l.

and mitra-rajdna

2')

N. A.

(v. 623).

This form takes the normal ending -i^ which combines with
the final -a of the stem to -e. It is made in the RV. from about 30 nominal
stems.
The vocative does not occur. Only seven of these n. forms are
found more than once, ifhge 'two horns' being the commonest (5) I
^.'^^^ " ^^^^''' 'night' is irregular in forming its du. N. as a m. in the compound
,j usasa-ndkta 'dawn and night', in agreement with which a f. adjective is used, owing
doubtless to the predominance of 'Dawn', in the combination. Vnw. y)'^,yugiva nabhyeva
'like two yokes, like two naves', though analyzed by the Pada as yuga iva and nabhya
iva, must be explained as regular n. forms yuge and ndbhye-\-va.
n.

I. D. Ab. Before the normal ending -bhyam^ which forms these cases,
the final -a of the stems is lengthened, e. g. msatyabhyam.
In the RV. this
form is made from only about a dozen nominal stems in the m. and three
in the n.
The cases can of course only be distinguished exegetically.
I. m, kdrnabhyam (AV.) 'ears', ddmsirabhyam (TS. AV.) 'teeth', daksmasavyabhyam (AV.) 'right and left', ddsa-sakhabhyam 'having ten fingers',
mitra-vdricnabhyam'^ yuktsbhyam 'yoked', vrihi-yavdbhyam (AV.) 'rice and
barley', subhrabhyam 'shining', surya-candramdsabAyam (AV.) ' 'sun and moon',
hdstabhyam 'hands', haryatdbhyjm 'desirable'.
n. rk-samdbhyim 'hymn and
,

chant', srfigabhyam (AV.).

D. m. tvesdbhyam 'violent', JidsatyabhyJm 'truthful', nicirdbhyJm 'attentive'.

Ab. m. dinsabhyam 'shoulders', kdrnabhyxm.
n. parsvdbhyam (AV.)

prd-padabhyjm 'tips of the feet', mdta-snabhyam certain internal organs.

G. L. These cases take the normal ending -os, between which and the
stem y is inserted. In the RV. only eight nominal" forins occur with the
genitive sense, and twelve with the locative sense.
One form, dhvasrdyos
(ix. 58^), seems to be used as an Ab.
There are one or two others which
anomalously drop the final -a of the stem, instead of inserting y, before the
'sides',

ending

-os'^'^.

In two instances hiatus is removed by

ufdstham eka (i. 356) sxiAJdnam

nasalization

'

The shortening

of the du. -a at the end

r, occurring in four
passages (11. 3?; vi. 682; -viii. 66"; x. 66^^)
is due to Sandhi; see 708 These neuter duals are enumerated by
7

of

odd Padas before

dsamd (vi. 67').

2 There are 40 instances of this in the
RV.; see Lanman S7S3 This is also the practice of the Brah- Lanman 343.
9 To be read -bhiam
manas; see Aufrecht, AB. 427; cp. Sarvanukramanl, ed. Macdonell, p. x. In the forms.
(as in the later language) -av u- is
regularly written (except miiskd updvadhlt,
XX. 1362).
4 See Lanman 341*.
where devd osadhXsu
5 Except VII. 70*
(Pada devau) is written, 0- being treated like

AV.

U-,
6

perhaps owing to its labial character.

See KPr. iv. 39, 40.

in

two or three

10 In this compound only the second dual

takes the proper case-ending.
11 There are also
the pronominal forms
G. L. m. ayos, ubhdyos, idyos, ydyos; Idyos also

as G. n.
12

y-os.

Also the pronominal forms

Cp. Lanman 344.
1;

av-6s, en-bs,

26o

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

The forms occurring are:

G. m. indra-variinayos, Tsanayos 'ruling',

devdyos, mitrdyos, mitra-vdrunayos,

n. pasy-hs
vdrunayos, vaikarnayos 'descendants of Vikarna'.
(for *pasyci-y-os) 'pressing stones', piirixn-y-os'^ (for *purand-y-os) 'ancient'.
L. m. dmsayos, divayos, upakdyos 'closely connected', kdrnayos (AV.),
jdmbhayos (TS. iv. i. lo^) 'jaws', iuvi-jatdyos 'of powerful nature', ddmstrayos
(A v.), naddyos 'roarers', mitrdyos, muskdyos 'testicles', vdrunayos, vdhisjhayos

yaindyos

'twins',

'drawing best', vt-vratayos 'refractory', s.thurdyos 'strong', hdstayos.

PI. N. V. m. Here there are two forms. In the more common form
the normal ending -as coalesces with the final of the stem to -as, e. g. devds.

form appears to be made by adding the normal ending

devds-as.
The form in -as is about twice as frequent
in the RV. as that in -asas"-', the former being made from 808 stems, the
latter from 403. In the original parts of the AV. -as is 24 times as frequent
Both
as -asas, the former occurring 1366 times, the latter only 57 times'*.
forms frequently occur side by side, the choice of the one or the other being
often no doubt determined simply by the metre; e. g. brhda vadema viddthe
suvirah (11. i '*) 'abounding in heroes we would speak aloud in the assembly',
but suvtraso viddtham a vadema (11. 12 '5) 'abounding in h;roes we would
speak to the assembly'.
Examples of the most frequent forms made with the two endings are:
I. devdsas {S16), Jdnasas {^i), s6masas{^i), sntasas {2()), adifydsas{2^) 'Adityas',
2. de'vls and devas (311), somas {^2),
yaj/uyasas {21) 'holy', amrtjsas {11).
adityas (39), siitds (27), jdnas (24), amftas (22), yajhlyas (10).
N. A. n.5 Here, as in the N. m. there are t%vo forms, a shorter and
a longer, the former being the older and original, as well as the more frequent one. The older form is made not by adding the normal ending -/,
but by lengthening the final -a of the stem, e. g. havya 'oblations'*.
The
later form ends in -ani and is doubtless due to transitions from the stems
in -an^ which form the n. pi. N. A. with both -a and -ani, e. g. ndma and
namani. The form in -a is in the RV. made from 394 stems, that in -ani
from 280, the proportion of the occurrences of the former being roughly
three to every two of the latter. The proportion in the AV. is almost exactly
reversed, the form in -a being there made from 102 stems, that in -ani from
158^. The two forms are so common side by side that when two n. plurals
occur in the same Pada, the one generally ends in -ani and the other in -S*;
e. g. ya te bhimdni dyitdka (ix. 6i3) 'thy terrible weapons'.
This phenomenon

The

less

common

-as over again

e. g.

^,

With y inserted though -a is dropped. a collective; this would account for the
See Brugmann, Grundriss 2, p. 661, agreement of the singular verb with this pi.
where several examples are given of endings in Greek; cp. also sarva ta
astu (RV. i.
1628); see Brugmann, Grundriss 2, d. 682.
being repeated in other languages.
3 The form in -asas seems to be an Indo7 The G. ahanam
is
an example of the
1

Iranian innovation, as there are no certain

traces of it in other Indo-European languages

Brugmann

cp.

1.

c.

In the original Mantra portions of the

TS. the pi. in -as is very numerous, but I
have noted only 1 1 forms in -asas. In the
Khilas, forms in -as are three times (30) as
4

numerous as in -asas (10).

5 There
is
no example of a V.
RV.,

AV.
6

to

and

only one, ciUdni (III. 2"*),

where the Mss. have cittani.

in

the

in the

This form in -a is commonly supposed

have started from a N. sing, f, in -a as

transference of another case from an -an

stem.
8 In the independent Mantra portions of
the TS. the forms in -a seem to outnumber
those in -atii in about the same proportion
as in the RV.
there are at least 20 forms
of the former and 14 of the latter. In the
Khilas the two forms are almost equally
divided, as 10 examples of -li and 12 of -ani
occur.
9 Similarly, the form in -5 appears beside
n. pi. forms in -Jni, -iini or even -amsi,
Jmsi, -I'/mfi; e. g. Ihiinni bhadra (I. 166');
:

VI. Declension.

Vowel

Nouns.

Stems.

261

clearly due to the influence of metre.

The -a here seems never to be
shortened to -a, as is so frequently the case in the N. A. n. pi. of -an stems \
Nor does it avoid hiatus (like the -a of the N. A. du. m.), though coalescence
with a following vowel sometimes takes placed
Examples of the commonest forms are i. /lavyd (44), bhuvaiia (36), duritd

is

(31) 'distresses', sdvana (30), uktha (25) 'praises'.

2. bhuvanani (57), vrtr&ni
vratcini (34) 'laws', havydni (25), krtani (20) 'done'.
(36) 'foes',
A. m. The ending of this case is not the normal -as, but -, before
which the final vowel of the stem is lengthened^, e. g. dsva-n. The form is
frequent, being made from more than 250 stems in the RV. That the ending

was

originally -tts is shown by

becomes -am before vowels and
c- and t-'^.

the

treatment

of -an

in Sandhi,

where

it

the sibilant itself occasionally survives before

I. m. n. In this case there are two forms, the one adding the normal
ending -bhis (before which the final vowel of the stem becomes -e), while the
other ends in -ais (which does not appear in any other declension).
The
form in -ais is only slightly commoner in the RV., being made from 221
stems, while that in -bMs is made from 211. In the AV., however, the former
is 5 times as frequent as the latter 5.
The two forms* often appear in the
same Pada; e. g. upamebhir arkdis (i. 33^) 'with highest songs'. The choice
is often
due to the metre; e. g. yatdm dhebhir asvina (vin. 5') 'come with
your steeds,
Asvins', and aditydir yatam asvina (ym. 2,$^^) 'with the Adityas

come,

Asvins'.

RV. the m. forms are roughly twice as numerous as the n.

Examples of the most frequent forms are: i. arkdis (43)' uktkdis (35), yajiidis
In

the

2. devebhis (52), stomebhis (26),

(34), devdis (31), dsvais (30), stomais (25).
vojebhis (21).
D. m. n. This case is formed with the normal ending -bhyas, before

which the final -a of the stem appears as -e. In the RV. it is made from
over 40 stems in the m., but from only one in the n. In about half the
forms occurring the ending has to be read as a dissyllable -bhias. The forms
occurring are: ajdrebhyas 'unaging', dmavattarebhyas 'mightier', dranebhyas
(Kh. V. I ^) 'foreign', arbhakibhyas 'small', adityebhyas, asin^bhyas 'aged', asv-apastarebhyas 'working more quickly', tlmebhyas 'helpers', gdrbhebhyas 'infants',
grhe'b/iyas,jdnebkyas,jTvebkyas '\iwmg\jnate'b/iyas{Kh..iii. 16') 'known', tavak^bhyas
'thy', ddsa-kaksyebhyas 'having ten girths', ddsa-yoktrebhyas 'having ten traces',
ddsa-yojanebhyas 'having ten teams', dev^bhyas, pajribhyas 'strong', pdrvatebhyas
'mountains', pasprdhanebhyas 'striving', pitu-kfttarebhyas 'procuring more nourishment', pisunebhyas 'treacherous', putrebhyas 'sons', pi'irusebhyas 'men', ptlrvebhyas
'former', badhitebhyas 'oppressed', bharatebhyas 'descendants of Bharata', mdrtye-

5 In the independent Mantra portions of

sdvana ptruni{\M. 368) iirdhvd soclni si frdsthila
the TS. the proportion is about the same
rdjamsi (III. 44); rabhasa vdpiimsi (m. 18).
1 There
seems no sufficient reason to as in the AV. The following four forms with
assume that in visved aha (l. 92'') as com- -bhis occur: etasebhis (l. 2. 4'), devebhis (ill.
pared with aha viha (I 1302), aha is formed I. 4''), rudrebhis (ll. I.II), su-ydmebhis (iv. 7.
from the transition stem aha- rather than 15^). In the Khilas 5 forms in -ais to 7 in
;

from dhan-;

cp.

Lanman

p. 348.

-ebhis

occur.

The

latter are: amiva-cdtanebhis

probable mistakes made by (l. 1 1 7), artavebhis (lir. 166), uklhibhis (V. 6^),
the Pada in contracted forms see Lanman rsvebhis (ni. i'), kdmarebhis (l. 51), rathebhis
saraghibhis (I. 1 1 '). In the later
(l. 11''),
348.
language the form in -bhis survives in the
3 This lengthening is at least Indo-Iranian:
pronominal ebhis alone.
Brugmann, Grundriss 2, p. 6722.
6 On the origin of the two forms cp.
4 See above 77 ; and cp. Lanman 346 on
Brugmann, Grundriss 2, p. 717.
the Sandhi of -an in general.
2

On some

262

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

bhyas, fnanave'bkyas'mQn', manusebkyas^-catn', ^za^^iJ/^j/ffj 'descendants of Mana',

yajatibhyas 'adorable', yajniyebhyas, rdthebhyas 'chariots', vidiistarebhyas 'very
wise', viprebhyas 'seers', vy-ahebhyas 'horseless', sasamanebhyas 'toiling', suvidatriyebhyas 'bountiful', soma-rabhastarebhyas 'intoxicated with Soma', somyebhyas
'preparers of Soma', stenibhyas 'thieves'.

n. bhuvanebhyas 'beings'.

D. with the normal ending -bhyas

from nearly two dozen stems in the RV. about equally divided between the
m. and n. In more than half of these forms the ending must be pronounced

Ab. m.

n. This case

spirits',

like the

The forms occurring

as a dissyllable.
'divine

formed

is

grhebhyas,

iigrebhyas,

are:

m.

dntebhyas 'ends', dsurebhyas

jdnebhyas, jivebhyas

'living

beings',

deveMyas, pdrvatebhyas, makhebhyas 'vigorous', viprebhyas, siirebhyas, syenebhyas 'eagles'.

n. anyd-krtebhyas 'done by others', antrebhyas entrails',
duritibhyas,
nakhebhyas 'nails', padebhyas, parlhivebhyas 'terrestrial spaces',
bhuvanebhyas, mrdhribhyas 'contempt', vdnebhyas 'forest trees', harmyebhyas

'houses'.

G. m. n. Instead of the normal ending -am these stems almost invariably

add the ending -nam, before which the final vowel is lengthened as in the
-i, -u and -r stems.
This ending (like -ani in the n. pi.) must have been due
to the influence of the -n stems'- The case is thus formed in the RV. from
over 100 stems in the m. and over 20 in the n. In nearly half these forms
the final syllable may be metrically read as aam'^. Two-thirds of these resolutions are, however, not necessary as they occur at the end of octosyllabic
Padas which may be catalectic; but many undoubted resolutions are required
within the Pada3.
Among the forms of most frequent occurrence are m.
devdnam (148), jdnanam (34), yajniyanam (12), aditycinam (11), ad/ivarSnam

(10).

dhdnanam

n.

(13).

Not
e. g. from devd- would have been devdm (= devd-am\
more than three or four^ examples of this survive in the RV., and only two of these
seem undoubted: yiithyam dsvandm (vill. 56'*) 'of horses belonging to the herd' and
a.

The organic form

cardtham

gdrbhas ca sthatdm gdrbhas cardthdvi

'offspring of things that are

(l. 70^)
There are further some half dozen forms
of things that move^"*.
devafi jdnina
written with final -an or -an which seem to stand for the G. pi. in -am
(l. 71^; VI. 11^) 'the
race of the gods' (Pada devan); devan jdnmatid (X. 64'4) 'with the
race of the gods' (Pada devan); visa d ca mdrtdn (iv. 2-^) 'and hither to the dwellings of
mortals' (== ntdrlam); coskiiydle visa indro manusydn (vi. 47'^) 'Indra protects the tribes
of men'.
in

offspring

stationary,

L. m. n.

This case adds the normal ending -su before which (as before
-e takes the place of the final vowel of the stem and cerebralizes the following sibilant. It is formed from some 123 stems in the m.
and some 92 in the n. 5 It is almost invariably* to be read with hiatus,
-bhis

and

-bhyas)

even before

Among

u-t.

the most frequently occurring forms are:

m.

devesu (99), vdjesu

n. viddthesu

(41), yajiiesu (35), adhvaresu (27), mdrtyesu (25), sutesu (16).

(33), vdnesu (20), sdvanesu (14), bhuvanesu (12), ukthesii (10).

riss

See

Lanman 352

2, p.

c;

Brugmann, Grund-

69 u

The gender

is

doubtful

in

some"

in-

stances.

2 Lanman (352, bottom) enumerates the

6 The only undoubted exception to this
rule in the RV. occurs in a late hymn fx.
forms in which resolution takes place.
3 Lanman 3524, gives a list of the forms
I218), where devesv ddhi must be read. Cp.
in which resolution is required; cp. Arnold, Lanman 354.
Vedic Metre 143 fp. 92).
7
On the probable origin of the ending
4 Perhaps also hinisandm (x.x^i^^M G. pi.
su cp. Brugmann, Grundriss 2, p 700.
of a participle himsana-, and sdsdm if G. of

iasd- 'ruler'

(II.

2312).

vanam

of van- rather than vdna-.

(x.

Cp.

46')

is

G.

Lanman

pi.

353.

T-

>

VI. Declension.

Nouns.

2 b. Derivative

Vowel

Stems

263

in -a.

Lanman

Stems.

Noun-Inflection 33S-365.
WmTNEY, Sanskrit Grammar
Cp. COLLITZ, die herkiinft der 5-deklination, BB.
114.
29, p. 8
[

p.

131-137.

373- The derivative a-declension corresponds to the derivative a-declenm. adjectives of which it furnishes the f. stems. It includes more
femmmes than any other declension. Like the a-declension it has many
irregularities of inflexion, every case in the singular,
except the A., and two
cases in_ the plural showing some abnormal feature. The N. sing,
shares with
sion, for the

the_ derivative r-declension the peculiarity of not adding

th e ending -s ; the
sing, has an alternative form borrowed from the pronominal
declension;
the D. Ab. G. L. sing, are formed under the influence of the derivative rI.

stems; and the V. sing, ends in -e instead of appearing in the form of the
bare stera^ In the plural the N. has to a limited extent the same alternative
form in -asas as the m. of the a-declension, and the G. is similarly formed
with -nam.

As

in the a-declension, the accent remains in the

except the V., where

it

of course

shifts

to the

first

same

position throughout

syllable.

Inflexion.

374. The forms actually occurring,

if

made from/nji-

'dear',

would be

as follows:

Sing. N. priya. A. priydm. I. priya and friyaya. D. priydyai.

L. priydyam.
V. pr'iye.
Du. N. A. priyL I. Ab. priydbhyam. G. I., priydyos.

Ab. G.

priyayas.

PI. N. priyds and priydsas. V. 'priyas. A. priyds. I. priydbhis. D. Ab.

priydbhyas.
G. priydnam.
L. friydsu.
Sing. N. This case never adds the normal ending -.f. It is formed in
the RV. from 424 stems and occurs more than 1000 times. Examples of the
most frequent forms are: yosa (24) 'maiden', ddksina (24) 'good milch cow',
ila (17) 'refreshment', jayd (17) 'wife', su-bhdga (13) 'beautiful', sunrta (10)
citrd (9)

'joyful'j

'brilliant'.

At the end of odd Pad as the final -a of this N. is regularly written with Sandhi,
but must always be read with hiatus; coalescence with e- and r- is, however, twice
avoided by nasalization 2, while twice'' the -a is shortened before r-.
b. Within a Pada the -5 is written with Sandhi in 160 instances in the RV., but
is pronounced (unlike the -a of the N. A. du. m.) with hiatus in 23 of these instances;
while the nominatives Isd 'car-pole' and mariisa 'devotion' are written as well as pronounced with hiatus*, the former once, the latter four times.
a.

A. This case, which is formed

made from over 200 nominal stems
most frequent forms

of the
'distress',

yosam

(7),

yosanam

are:

with the normal ending -m, is in the RV.

more than 400 times. Examples

occurring

mantsdm

(21),

jay am (n),

dmtvam

(9)

(6) 'maiden'.

case is often identical in form with the L. sing. f. of stems in -J; thus
the A. of pHrvyd- 'previous' or L. of pHrvt- 'much'. In one instance at
least elision of the -2, followed by contraction, takes place ^: saiatamavivesih (VIL 1 9' j for
a.

piirvyam

This

may be

The stem^- 'woman', though

originally manisd iyani (v. II ' ; VII. 70^) ; manlsa asmat (vil.
be regarded as a radical 341); cp. RPr. II. 29. Lanman 356 suggests that
a-stem and accordingly forms its N. sing. the comparative frequency of this hiatus justifies the restoration of the augment in Padas
gtia-s [w. 9*)..
2 sasadanam '^id (l. 1 23') and_j'am rnamcayi
short of a syllable; e.g.prdsd [a]vdd{yu. ^8^).
5 On some contractions in which -m has
(V. 30"*)3 p-iya^f- (l. IS I*), rju-hastaW- (v. 41'^). probably been elided but explained wrongly
by the Pada as containing nominatives in -a,
Cp. ^o
4 t^a dk}0 (vm. 529); mamsa abhi (I. loi^); see Lanman 356.
'^

dissyllabic,

came

to

'

264

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

iafatamam

avivcsVi.

In two or three instances

4.

Vedic Grammar.

metre seems

llie

to require

-am

to be read

as aam'^,

There are two forms of this case. In the one, the normal ending
added direcdy to the stem and, by contracting with its final -a, produces

I.

-a

is

a form identical in appearance with the N., e. g. Jihvd {^ jihva-a) 'tongue'.

In the other, y is interposed between the ending -a and the final -a of the
The latter form is due to the instem, wliich is shortened, e. g. jihvd-y-a.
fluence of the regular pronominal I. sing, f, e.g. tdya^. This form is already

more common in the RV.J^ being made from 113 stems* as

compared with 95 which take the older form with -a. In the later Samhitas
the I. in -a is very rare in original passages, the AV. using only five such
forms independentlys. Both forms are (unlike the N. pi. m. in -asas and -as)
comparatively seldom made from the same stem, a&jihvA a.ndijihvdya. Two
thirds of the total number of 95 stems which have the older form, end in
the suffixes -tCi and -ya, as purusd-ta 'after the manner of men', hiraiiyayd
shghtly the

The

'golden'.

choice of the alternative forms

is,

as elsewhere,

often deter-

mined by the metre ^

Examples of the commonest forms are; i. dosA (13) 'evening', barhdna
(13) 'might', manisA (13), viamhdna (11) 'willingness', sravasyA (7) 'desire to
Also asTr-dayA (TS. m. 2. 8^) 'fulfilment of blessing', visvd-psnya
praise' 7.
2. dhAraya (53) 'stream', jihvdya (24),
(TS.i. 5. 3^; VS. XII. 10) 'omniform'.
maydya (20) 'craft'.

There are some instrumentals sing. f. formed from derivative a- stems, whicli
a.
are used as adverbs with shift of accent to the ending. Sucli are: a-dairayd 'without a.
riaya 'in the right way' (rta-), daksina
gift' [a-dalra-), ubhaya 'in both ways' (ubhaya-),
'on

the

samana

right' (daksina-), naktaya 'by night' (iiakla-), madhyd 'in the middle' [mddhya-],
'together' {sdi?iana-), svapnaya (AV.) 'in dream' (sviipia-)^.

This case is anomalously formed by adding -yai to the stem, e. g.

It is not of common occurrence, being made from only 14 nominal'"
a-gotayai 'lack of cows', a-virastems in the RV. The forms occurring are
/aya? 'lack of sons', tikhAyaii!T'S>.\N.\.<^^)'-^ot\ uftanAyai {IS. lY. 1.4^ Kh.v. 16^)
'supine', ghjsayai N. of a woman, carAyai 'for going', j'arAyai (AV.) 'old age',
tvd-yatayai 'presented by thee', diicchi'inSyai 'mischievous demon', piitrd-ka7iiayai
(Kh.iv. 13') 'desiring sons', putd-kratayai N. of a woman, mMiAyai 'eagerness',
viipdlayai N. of a woman, sivAyai 'auspicious', svetanAyai 'dawn', sunftayai
'joy', suryAyai 'sun-goddess'.
a.
Two forms have been preserved in which the D. is made by adding the
normal ending -e directly to the stem with the -a of which it coalesces to -ai: mahlyai
'greatness', sv-apa/yai^^ (I. 54") 'accompanied with fair offspring'. These are
(i. 113^)
formed like the D. infinitives from radical rt-stems such as vi-khyai (584).
In one passage (vu. I'9) the form a-vlra/e, for a-viratayai 'lack of sons',
b.

D.

jarA-yai'^.

See Lanman 357 (top).

Cp. Brugmann, Grundriss 2, p. 629, 783.
corresponding later form in the
3 The
Avesta is much commoner than the older:

7 Lanman 358 enumerates the homophonous instrumentals.

8 These forms may have been due to the
influence of the pronominal adverb a-ya
'in this way' (with adverbial shift of accent,
Brugmann 2, p. 629.
4 This number given by Lanman 357 in- cp. tdyd etc.); see J. Schmidt, Pluralbildung
eludes some pronominal stems. Brugmann's 212 ff., and Brugmann, Grundriss 2, p. 629
statement (2, p. 629) that the form in -aya is otherwise Bartholomae, BB. 15, 20 f.
9 Formed
the Indo-Iranian period, proless common than the form in -a in Vedic,
bably under the influence of the derivative
is not applicable even to the RV.
5
The forms are daksiita, devdta, dosd, stems in -T originally -ya, i. c. -yai for -yd-e.
' Also svdyai from the possessive pronoun
sumnaydf vitia-kamyd'y only the last is peculiar
1

to the AV.
6 Euphony also has

sva-.

some

hiranyayaya does not occur.

influence; thus

I Brugmann,
this

Grundriss

2, p.

600, thinks

form may be shortened for

sv-apatyayai.

VI. Declension.
takes the ending
declension '.

Ab. This

-e

direct,

but

Nouims.

Vowel

witli elision of tlie

Stems.

265

stem vowel, as in the radical

a-

case

is formed anomalously by adding the ending -yas to the

being made in the RV. from only seven stems, the AV.
having three additional examples. The forms occm-ring are: urdhvayas (AV.)
'upright',
kanayas 'maiden', jikvdyds, daksinjyas, dur-evayas 'ill-disposed',
dur-hiinayas 'mischief, ddivyayas 'divine', dhruvdyls (AV.) 'firm', nidayas 'disgrace', vy-adhvdyas (AV.)-! 'lying half-way'.
G. This case is formed in the same way as the Ab., but is much more
frequent, being made from 26 stems in the RV.
The forms occurring are:
dghnyayas and aghnyAyas 'cow (not to be killed)', ilayls, ukhayas, usriyayas
'ruddy cow', drmyayas 'night', kamiyas, Mslhayas 'course', Jikvdyas, ddksinayas,
darsatSyjs
'conspicuous',
diirvayas
'Durva grass',
dhisdnayas
'offerTng',
dkisamanayas^ 'longing', pdjrayas 'vigorous', pdritakmyayas 'wandering',
mahinayas 'mighty', rasAyas a mythical river, vayAyas 'branch', vis'pdiayas,
sasvattamAyas 'most recent', slphayas N. of a river, sucAyas 'pure', sabar-di'ighayas
'yielding nectar', sc/ianAyas^ 'victorious', surayls 'intoxicating liquor', suryAyiis.
L. This case is formed by adding the anomalous ending -yam to the
stem, e. g. bhadra-yam.
It is not common, being formed from only 16 or
17 stems in the RV. The forms occurring are: apayAyam^ N. of a river,
amAyam 'raw', uttanAyam 'outstretched', usrlyayam, {A)-gataySm 'come', grlvAyam
'neck', jumayam 'ancient', ndvayam 'new', pdri-taktnyayam, b/iadrAyatn 'beneficent', yamunayam N. of a river, varairAyam 'thong', vdsayam (Kh.ii. lo?) 'cow',
simsdpayam N. of a tree, slrinayam 'night', sabhAyam (TS.L8. 3') 'assembly',
surayam, su-somayam''"ii. of a river, hariyupiyayam N. of a locality.
V. This case has the abnormal ending -e^ and is in the RV. formed from
over 50 stems; e. g. ahe. The original form must have been the bare stem
with the final vowel shortened; e. g. *ds'va. but of this there is no certain
survival.
The form amba which occurs in the RV. three times (unaccented)
may originally have been an exclamation, and it can have this sense alone
in one of the three passages of the RV. (x. 97^), where it is used with a
plural. In the two other passages it may very well mean '0 mother' (ir. 41'^;
X. 867).
The VS. (xxiil x8) and the TS. (vii. 4. 19') have the V. dmbe as
from a stem dmba 'mother''.
The forms occurring are: dg/myasye^ (Kh. iv. 5'- j^) 'cow-faced', aghnye,
apve N. of a disease, amartye 'immortal', dmbike (TS. VS.) 'mother', ambitame
'most motherly', as've 'mare', asva-sUnrte 'rich in horses', Aditya-varne'^'^ (Kh.
istake
iL (fi) 'sun-coloured', arjikiye N. of a river, ile goddess of devotion,
mighty sons', nttare 'mightier',
ugra-putre 'having
(TS. IV. 2. 9^) 'brick',
uttana-parne 'having extended leaves', tiru-vraje 'extending afar', urmye,
rsve 'exalted', kadha-priye 'ever pleased', kane 'one-eyed', kdma-dughe (TS.
krtye (Kh. iv. ^5) 'magic', ghora-rttpe (Kh.iv. 5"*)
IV. 2. 9^) 'cow of plenty',
gange 'Ganges', ghore 'awful', citre, ciira-maghe 'having
'of awful form',
deva-jute 'impelled by the gods'
brilliant gifts', jaye, durve (TS. iv. 2. 9^),

stem'.

It

rare,

is

This forms a transition to the consonant

like dcvaiafe beside devdtataye;

declension
cp.

Lanman

3S9=.

2 Like the D. it is due to the influence

of the stems in derivative -X, to the fuller
form of which, -ya-, the normal ending -as

was added.

Perfect participle middle oisah- 'conquer'.

transition form from the radical adeclension, see p. 249, note i'.
7 Also the pronominal form svayam.
8 The origin of this ending is uncertain
5

cp.
9

Brugmann
This

is

2,

541.

common stem

Sanskrit.
Also the pronominal svayas 'own'.
1 The ed. has aghnyasye.
4 Participle, perhaps desiderative, of dhi" The ed. has adityd-vartte.
'thiak'.
3

in post-Vedic

266

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

dhisane 'goddess of devotion', nadt-tame 'best

'most divine',
of rivers', pathye 'path' (as goddess), fastye 'goddess of the house', putrakame, puru-priye 'much beloved', frthu-jaghane 'broad-hipped', prthn-stuke
'having broad braids of hair', priye (TS. vii. i. 6*), brahma-samsiie 'sharpened
by prayer', marud-vrd/te N. of a river, yamune, rake N. of a goddess,
vapustame (Kh. iv. 7') 'most beautiful', vdra-rupe (Kh. iv. 5^*) 'of excellent
form', vi-kate 'monstrous', vivasvad-vate (TS. iv. 4. 12't) 'desired by Vivasvat',
visva-rupe (TS. iv. 2. 5^) 'omniform', visva-vare 'possessed of all goods',
saravye 'arrow', sTtike 'cool', iufige (Kh. v. 15*) N. of a goddess, subhre
'shining',
sa-danve 'associated with demons', sarame N. of a goddess, sTite
devi-tame'^

'furrow',

su-jate

'well-born',

su-putre 'having

good

sons',

'easy to win', su-snuse 'having fair daughters-in-law',

IV.

'sun-coloured',

77)

(Kh.

stoma-trayastrimse

surye,

hiranya-pame (Kh.

15') 'yellowish',

V.

iv. 7?)

su-bhage,

su-nrfe,

(TS.

iv.

4.

su-labhike

surya-varne (Kh.
12't),

'gold- winged',

hdriklike

hladike

're-

freshing'.

Du. N. A. V. These cases are identical in form, having final -e which

doubtless contains the same dual ending -r as N. A. V. du. of the a- declension ^
They are of frequent occurrence, being made from over 130 stems
in the

RV. The ending

with an appended

but V.

sing.

f.

///

-e is

Pragrhya, being distinguished by the Pada text

e of the V. sing, f ;
e. g. V. du. f. subhre Hi,

from the

subhre.

Examples of the most frequent forms are: ubhe (66) 'both', su-me'ke^ (8)
'well-established', devd-putre (7) 'having gods as sons', vi-rupe (7) 'of different
forms', sipre (5) 'cheeks'. The compound sitasite 'black and white' occurs in
a Khila
I.

(p. I7i5).

Ab. These

with the

I.

cases,

D. Ab. m.

n.

made with the ending -bhyam, are identical in form

of the a- declension. They are represented by only

two forms in the RV. siprabhyam

nasikabhyain (x. 163') 'nostrils', Ab.

which seems to be I.'', and

form with a D. sense occurs.
G. L. Both these cases add, with interposing -y-, the normal ending
-OS to the final -a of the stem, which is shortened.
They are thus identical
in form with the G. L. du. m. n. of the a- declension.
There are only four
nominal forms in the RV. and AV.
in the G. sense jdnghayos (AV.) 'legs',
yamdyos 'twins'; and in the L. sense uttandyos, svadhdyos 'homestead'-.
PI. N. V.
The regular form ends in -as and is very common, being
formed from nearly 260 stems in the RV. Examples of the commonest forms
are: bhadras (19), dhdras (16), mamsas (10)*.
There is, however, a second form in -asas which occurs nearly 20
times in the RV.
Considering the rarity of this form here, while it is the
commoner as N. pi. m. in the a- declension, the probability is that its introduction was due to those very numerous masculines.
The forms occurring
are: d-tandrasas 'indefatigable', a-mftasas (AV.) 'immortal', dur-mitrdsas 'unfriendly', pasprdhanasas 'vying'', pdrthivasas^ 'terrestrial', pavakasas 'pure',
:

(x.'

105^)

No

bhejanSsas^ 'having obtained', vanvanasas'^ (SV.) 'having obtained', vasSsas,

I
6 In two or three passages the Pada text
Superlative of devt, the final being
sboitened as in the simple vocative devi.
seems to confuse forms in -as with others in
^ Cp. Brugmann, Grundriss 2, 286 (p. 643).
-a; see Lanman 362.
3 Cp. WiNDiscH in Festgruss an O. v. B6ht7 Perfect participle middle of \5prdh-.
8 Cp. Lanman 362.
LINGK II4f.
4 The pronominal form tdbhydm (x. 88'^)
9 Perfect participle middle olbhaj- 'share'.
10 The variant of the SV. for bhejanasas
has a locative meaning.
5 There
are also the pronominal forms of the RV.

ayos and ydyos.

In III. 542 the Pada
reads dyds probably for ayos.

text

VI. Declensions.

vasrasas

'roaring',

Ncuns.

vidanisas' 'being found',

Vowei, Stems.
vrd/iasas 'helping',

267
a-iusanasas

'

sughamsas^ 'swiff, sdmmitasas{hN)''coxxt%^oxi&m^ ^smdyamanasas

'smiling', hdvamanasas 'calling'*.
A. This case is formed with the normal ending -as which coalesces with
'stimulating',

the final of the stem to

-as,

e. g.

sunrtas.

It

is

very frequent, being

made

from more than 160 stems in the RV. Examples of the commonest forms
are:^
mayas (22\ pf-tanas (13) 'battles', usrAs (12) 'dawns', dhAras (11),
usr'iyas (10)^.
Two instances occur of forms in -asas being wrongly used
as A. pi. f.: samvidanAsas (x. 30"^) 'united' and aram-gamAsas (AV. xiii. 2)
'ready to help'.

This case

always formed by adding the ending -bhis directly to the

It is made from over 80 stems in the RV. Examples
of the most frequent forms are: mayAbhis (13), citrAbhis (8), dhArabhis (7),
h'jtrabhis (7) 'libations',
ilabhis (6).
The form drAgJiisthabhis (in. 62'') 'for
longest times'^ is used adverbially.,
I.

stem,

e. g.

is

suiirta-bhis.

D. Ab. These cases are formed with the same ending -bhyas (sometimes
be read as two syllables) added directly to the stem. In the RV. only
4 datives and 11 ablatives occur from nominal stems ^ The forms occurring

to

are:

D. aghnyAbhyas,

usriyabhyas, diicchunabhyas, devdtabhyas (TS. iv. 2. 9*)

vrtAbhyas 'movements'.
Ab. ddhardbhyas 'lower', Ambhyas 'regions',
uttarabhyas, usnihabhyas 'nape of the neck', kikasabhyas 'cartilages of the
breast-bone',
gudabhyas 'intestines', grivAbkyas,
damsdnabhyas 'wondrous
powers',
dhisdnabhyas 'Soma bowls', vaksdnabhyas 'bellies', iyavyhbhyas
'deities',

'darkness'.

G. This case being made with the abnormal ending -nam is identical
form with the G. pi. m. of the a- declension. It is formed in the RV. from
22 stems. There is no certain example here of forms with the normal ending
-dm which is found in a few genitives of the a- declension (372). There are
only a couple of instances in which the resolution of the final syllable as
-aam seems required by the metre ^. The G. of kanyh,- 'girl' always appears
in the contracted form of kaninam ' (occurring five times) in the RV. ^
The forms actually occurring are: dksaranam 'speech', dgfmyanaw,
a-nivesanAndm 'affording no place of rest', d-bkaysiiam 'free from danger',
dsma-vrajanam 'whose pen is a rock', Asandm (TS. iv. 4. 12^), urvdranajti
'arable fields', usrAndm, usriyanam, kAsthanam, krtyAnam (Kh.iv. ^i),ji/t//iAnam
in

'transverse',

dwyAnam

'heavenly', di'ighanam 'milch kine',

a'ifZ'ffVa'7;^2

(Kh.ii. 4'),

deva-senAnam 'hosts of the gods', dhisdnanam, ndvdnam, navyAnam 'navigable

rivers', fiastydnam 'abodes', mamsAndm, rAmyanam "nights', sdmdnam 'years',
sunftdndm 'songs of joy', stiyanam 'still waters'.
L. This case is formed by adding the ending -su directly to the stem.
The final -u though always combined with a following vowel both at the end
of an internal Pada or within a Pada, is invariably to be read with hiatus
1

Participle middle, with passive sense, of

Cp. aparibhyas

'for future times'.

There are also the pronominal forms

2 Participle middle of yhas:
abhyds and a bhyas, ia bhyas, yabhyas.
8 dhandnam
in VIII. 59'^ 3,nd p^tananam
3 This word (AV.) is
of uncertain deriin VIII. 59'. In sunftandm (i. 3") the metre
vation.
seems to require the shortening of the final
4 There are besides two or three doubtful
instances which may be m.; see Lanman 362. of the stem: sunftanam; Lanman 364.
9 This is a form of some importance as
5 In several instances -as is most probably
see showing how the suffix -i arose from -yd.-,
to' be read where the Pada text has
10 It also occurs once in Kh, r, 5',
I.ANMAN 363. In a, few forms the resolution
of -as as -aas or -ads seems necessary;
vid- 'find'.

-.-f,

Lawman

1.

c.

I Allgemeines und Sprache.

68

Vedic Grammar.

4.

RV.; e.g. svisu unuirasu (x. 50^) for svdsurvdrasu \ This case is
formed from over 50 nominal stems in the RV. The forms occurring
aghdsu 'evil', amftSsu, dvarasu 'later', dmdsu, Srtanasu 'uncultivated',
are:

in the

ilasu,

I'iparasu

'neighbouring',

kdsthasu,

krs/idsu

pregnant',

citrdsii,

urvdrasu,
(TS.

grivfisu

'black',

jagmandsu^ 'having

usriyasu,

iv.

2.

gone',

jatSsu

cended from Tugra', duryasu 'abodes', dcvdtdsu (TS. i.

dhruvdsu 'unchangeable', ndvasu^ pathydsu^

places',

pastydsu, pduca-janyi3su

'relating

the

to

five tribes',

kanydsu,

rirmyasu\
cittd-garbhasu

52),

'born',
6. 4^),

'visibly

tiigryasu 'des-

dhisnyasu

pddyasu

'fire-

'footsteps',

puru-pisasu 'multiform',

pftanasu, pradhanyasu 'forming the spoil', priydsu, mddyasu

'fond of exhilaration', madhyamdsu 'middlemost', manusySsu 'human', mandrasu
(TS.iv. 1.8^), mdrtyasu 'mortal', mahinttsu ^mighty', yaj my asu 'devout', (prd-)yatasu 'presented', ydsanasu, rdmyasu, ropandkdsu a kind of bird, vaksdnasu
'bellies',
vrddhasu 'great', vrdJiasandsui 'growing', sayasu 'resting-places',

pnrvasu

suskasu
'blessing
regions',

'earlier',

'dry',

sdnayasu

srutasu 'famous',

syavfisu 'nights',

3.

Stems

a.

Lanman, Noun-Inflection 365

in radical

400.

'old',

saptd-sivasu

su-vrjdnasu 'dwelling in

seven (worlds)', sirAsu 'streams',

hdvyasu 'to be invoked'.
the

fair

-T.

Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar 348359.

375. This declension consists primarily of fewer than 50 m. and f. nouns

derived from 9 roots.
Only four of these words appear as monosyllables,
the rest being compounds. The analogy of this primary group (A) is closely
followed both in inflexion and accentuation by a second group of about 80
polysyllabic stems which, though formed with derivative -t, are for the sake
of clearness best treated as a division (B) of this declension.
The normal
endings as they appear in the inflexion of consonant stems are taken throughout
this declension.
The G. pL, however, with the exception of a single form
occurring only once {d/iiydm), takes the ending -?wj and the N. sing, always
adds -s. Accentuation on the final syllable of the stem is characteristic of
this declension; and except in monosyllabic stems the acute remains on that
syllable throughout*. Before vowel endings the -i is split to -iy in the monosyllabic nouns; e. g. dhiy-am; this is also the case in compounds formed
with these nouns, except -dhi when it is accented, e. g. jana-sriyam, ndnadhiyas, but S-d/uayn; in compounds formed with roots it is split only when
two consonants precede; e. g. yajna-priyam, but yajiia-niam; in the secondary group it is split in samiidri- and partly in cakri-, e. g. samiidr'iyas and
cakriyaii, but cakr'ias.
Otherwise the T is always written as y, but is in the
RV. invariably 5 to be pronounced as a vowel; e. g. nadyam pronounced

nadiam ^.
A. The stems belonging

to the primary group are: i. the monosyllabic

feminines dhi- 'thought', bhi- 'fear', srt- 'glory'; and the m. vi- 'receiver' (which
occurs only once in the N. sing.).
2. Compounds (mostly Bahuvrihis)
formed with the first three: a-dhi- f. 'care', itthd-dhi- 'right devout', dirghddhi-

verse

(vil.

Cp. the L. pi. of the o-declension.

Perfect participle middle of gam- 'go'.
3_ Participle middle from vrdh- 'grow'.
4 There are one or two exceptions to this
rule in compound words in the
group,
and a few others, in the AV., in the B
group.

(cp.
50'').

Lanman 379') and N. pi.

The AV. has six such

nadyas
forms;

aivataryas, nadyas, naptyas, nadyas, fippalyas,

vfksa-sarpyas.

6 The resolved forms are therefore always

given below, spelt with i in this declension.
This will not lead to any confusion with the
5 There
are only two exceptions in the written forms of the Sarnhita text in which
RV. A. sing, siaryam (vil. 688) in a late the < of the stem always appears as iy ox y.
:

VI. Declension.

Nouns.

Vowel

269

Stems.

'having a far-reaching mind' {a-dh':-), dur-a-dhl- 'malevolent', dard-adhi-'"-\ox\g\vig

for the distance', sv-sdhi- 'attentive', du-(ih'i- ^ 'malevolent', nina-dki- 'of various
mitn^, vihdto-dhl- 'all-attending', su-dhi- 'devout'; avadya-bhf- f. 'fear of blame';
agni-sri- 'fire-bright',

adhvara-srl- 'adorning the sacrifice', ksatra-srt- 'blessing

dominion', ghrta-sri- 'glittering with ghee', jana-sri- 'blessing men', darsata-iri'of beauteous splendour', mdrya-sri- 'adorned like a wooer', yajha-sri- 'beautifying the sacrifice', sii-srt- 'glorious', hari-sri- 'of golden glory'.
3. Com-

pounds^ formed with the roots kri- 'buy', m- 'lead', prX- 'love', mX- 'diminish',
VI- 'move' and 'cover', sT- 'lie', in- 'mix': pra-krt- {AN .) 'purchasable', sadyah(AV.) 'bought on the same day'; agre-ni- (VS.) 'leading', rta-ni- 'leading
grama-ni- 'leading the community', padci-nl- (AV.) 'following the steps
of another', pra-ni- f 'furtherance', pra-neni-'< 'powerfully furthering', mana-ni'spirit-leading', yajha-nf- 'leading the sacrifice', vaia-nf- m. 'commander', vratant- 'carrying out the ordinance', sadha-ni- 'accompanying', seni-ni- rn. 'leader
of an army', skambha-nt- {yS>.) 'furnishing a prop'; abhi-pri- 'gladdening', kadhapri- 'gladdening whom?', pari-pri- 'dear', hrahma-prt- 'prayer-loving', yajna-pr':'sacrifice-loving'; manyu-mt- 'rage-obstructing', vdta-pra-mT- 'surpassing the wind';
kri-

the

rite',

takva-vt-

m.

vf-

m.

'(swiftly darting)

'leader',

bird', deva-vi-

pama-vi- 'moving with

and

deva-vi- 'god-refreshing',

wings',

pada-

pratT-vt-^ 'gladly accepting',

hiranya-vi- 'gold-bringing'; pra-vi- (VS.) 'wound round'; jihma-si- 'lying prostrate', patsu-tas-si-^ 'lying at

the

feet',

madhyama-si-

'lying in the midst', syona-st-

on a soft couch'; abhi-srt-i 'admixture', gana-sri-'' 'mixing in troops'.

B. This secondary group comprises upwards of 80 polysyllabic stems,
accented on the final vowel, which are all substantives except about half a
dozen. It includes fewer than a dozen masculines. Of the remainder, which
are feminine, more than half are names of female beings; about 30 are the
form of m. stems that are not accented on the final vowel, as purusif.
'woman' beside purusa- 'man'. There are also some f adjectives corresponding
This derivative group
to m. in -j/a, as svart- beside svarya- 'resounding'.
closely follows the analogy of the third division of the radical group (compounds
'lying

ending in roots with

less

final

accented

-i)\

it

joined the radical declension doubt-

owing to the accentuation of the final vowel.

The m. stems are: ahi- 'serpent', upavi-(yS>.) ^ 'encouraging',

/raz//-

daksi->'> 'flaming';

'attentive', dus-pravi- 'unfriendly', su-pravi- 'very attentive'; jc^y/-'" 'going';

rathi- 'charioteer', d-ratki- 'not a charioteer'; sahdsra-starT- 'having a thousand

barren cows', hiranya-vasi- 'wielding a golden axe'.

The f. stems are: athari- 'flame', atharvi- 'priestess' (m. dt/iarvan-),

d-durmangall- 'not unlucky', apart- pi. 'future days' (m. dpara-), apast- (VS.)
'industrious' (m. apdsya-), ambi- 'mother', arayl- 'demoness' (m. draya-), arunt'dawn', asvatarl- (AV.) 'she-mule', asta-karnf- 'cow with notched ear', a-pathi'impediment', eni- 'doe' (m. eta-), onf- 'breast', kalyaiit- 'fair woman' (m. kalydna-),
kavasf- 'creaking' (m. kavdsa-), kilasi- 'spotted deer' (m. kilAsa-), kumart(AV.) 'girl', kudi- (AV.) 'fetter', krmigandharvt- 'female Gandharva', gauri-

For

'

From

dilre-adhi:
t/us-if/it:

'night', ksoni-

'buffalo cow',

'flood',

formed by adding the

L. pi. oi pad- 'foot'.

Formed

khari- 'measure',

cakri- 'wheel',

suffix

-tas

tandrt-

to

the

directly from the root irTand not from the subbtantive in-.
8 From upa and pra-{-av- 'favour'.
ni9 To be assumed as the stem of the V.
'lead'.
5 'Coming towards', prd/i, with lengthened dahi, Pad a text dhaksi.
10 The final vowel is here perhaps radical
final vowel.
6 From patsu-tas, an adverb anomalously in origin.
3

Mostly Tatpurusas, generally with accu-

sative sense ; some Karmadharayas.

An intensive formation from
4

'mix',

270

Allgemeines imB Sprache.

I.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

(AV.) 'weariness' (m. tdndra-), tapanf- 'heat' (m. tdpana-), tila-pinji-'^ (AV.)
N. of a plant (m. iila-pihja), t'lksna-s'rngf- (AV.) 'sharp-horned' (m. tlksndsi-figa-),

dati- 'messenger', dehi- 'dam', nadi- 'stream', napti- 'daughter' (m. ndptr-),

nadt- 'pipe', nandipippali-

(A v.),

N. of Indra's mother, palali-^ {kN ?j 'stalk',

'woman' (m. purusa-), prapharvi-

nistigrt-

'joy',

'berry' (m. pippala-), purusf-

'voluptuous girl', mandukf- 'female frog' (m. mandaka-), mayuri- 'peahen' (m.
maytira-), mahi-nadi- 'great stream', mahisi- (TS.) 'buffalo cow', inest- 'ewe', yaml'YamT',_;'(7j'/-^ ^o;m.Q!&: yatudhani- 'sorceress' (xa. yatud/idna-), rai/d- 'female charioteer' (m. rdtha- 'car'j, laksmt- 'mark', lalami- 'speckled mare' (m. lalAma-), vaksf'flame', vi-kesi- {KSI ) 'shaggy hog', viball- N. of a river, vi-liptt- (AV.) 'cow',
,

(AV.) 'female monster', visva-rupi- 'brindled cow' (m. vihd-rupa-),

(m. vrka-), vrksa-sarpi- (AV.) 'tree-serpent', vest- 'needle',
vyasta-kesi- (AV.) 'shaggy hog', sakati- 'cart' {sdkata-), sabaU- (TS.) 'cow of
plenty' (m. sabdla-), sakthi- 'thigh' (n. sdkthi-), sasarpari- 'trumpet', sahasraparni- (AV.) N. of a plant (m. sahdsra-parna-), simhi- 'lioness', su-mangall-^
vi-lidlii-

vrki-

'she-wolf

'lucky

woman' (m. su-mangdla-)^

cow', sphigl-

sUrmi- 'pipe', srni- 'sickle', start- 'barren

hastmt-^ (AV.) 'female elephant', hiranya-ke'ji- 'gold-haired'

'hip',

(AV.) (m. hiranya-kesa-).

a.

f.
adjectives in -J from m. stems in -ya: dpisamudri-^ 'belonging to the sea' (m. samudriya-), svari-

There are further a few

'watery' (m. dpya-),

'resounding' (m. svarya-).

There are a few transition forms from the /-stems: karharyas^ (A.V.) from
a.
karhari- 'lute' (karkari-); N. sing, arhl (VS. VI. 36) from art- 'faithful' beside the usual art-;
and the stems yayt-, saktht-, srni- also occur beside yayi-, sakthi-, sfni- respectively. The
only certain transition from the derivative T- declension to the radical T- declension is
represented by stj-t- 'woman', originally a dissyllables, from which occur the forms
A. sing, striyam, N. A. pi. striyas, I. slribhis. Other transition forms are probably ffsanias
G. sing. N. pi., yahvias A. pL, suparnias'^ N. A. pi.

Inflexion.

The

376.
srt-

m.

forms actually occurring

'adorning the

f.

'charioteer' respectively,

A.

I.

sing.

sacrifice',

sena-ttt-

made from dht- 'thought', yajnam. 'leader of an army', rathi- m. f.

if

would be the following:

N. dhis.

A. dhiyam.

I.

D. dhiyL

dhiya.

G. dhiyds.

L. dhXsu.
I. dhibhis.
G. dhinam
A. dhiyas.
A. yajna-sriyam. I. yajna-sriyS. D. yajfia-sriye.
sing. N. yajha-srts.
PI.
Du. N. A. yajha-sriya and yajna-sriyau (AV.).
G. yajtia-sriyaa.
I. yajha-srtbhis.
A. yajha-sriyas.
N. yajna-sriyas.
Du.
A. sena-niam.
D. sena-nie.
G. sena-nias.
3. sing. N. sena-nts.
PI. N. seni-nias.
A. send-nias.
D. senaG. sena-nios.
N. A. sena-nia.
nibhyas.
G. sena-ninam.
B. Sing. N. rathts. A. rathiam. I. rath'ia. D. rath'ie. G. rathias.
'.

PI. N. dhiyas.
2.

Du. N. A. rathia.
V. rathi.
A. rathias.
PI. N. rathias.
L.

f.

I. f.
I.

G.

rathtbhyani.

rathibhis.

D.

f.

f.

rathios.

rathtbhyas.

L. rathios.

G. rathtnam.

rathts u.

5 Grassmann regards this as a f. of an

these words the accent is shifted
adjective samudia-.
vowel ending in weak cases.
6 See Whitney on AV. iv. 3 7 5.
2 The final vowel in this word is perhaps
7 See Lanman 371 '.
radical in origin (from ya- 'go').
8 In I. 122' starts seems to be the equi3 The V. pi. su-kastias (ix. 46*), presupposes
a stem su-haslt-, but as the form is a m., valent of sirt. See pw. s. v.
9 Cp. Lanman 372^.
the reading ought perhaps to be emended
10 The form
dhmam occurs 7 times in
to suhaslias with BR.
^ hastiiii- (ix. 3'?) means
'having a hand'. the RV., dhiydni' Qx\^ once.
1

to a

In

The forms

Vowel

Nouns.

VI. Declension.

271

Stems.

actually occurring are the following:

Sing. N. A.

m.

I.

vfs.

f.

dhts, bhls, iris.

m.

2.

itthdd/us, ksatra-

mdrya-srls, vUvdio-dkis, sv-adhls.

f. abhi-sris.
3, m. agre-nis (VS. vl 2), grama-nis, takva-vfs, deua-vis and
deva-vis, patsu-tas-sis, pada-nfs (AV.), pada-vis, pari-vts (VS. vi. 6), parna-vfs,
ghrta-sris,

sr'ls,

darsata-sris,

durd-adkis,

pra-krts (KSI^, pra-nenis, madhyama-sis, manyu-mis, yajna-nis, yajna-pris (VS.

XXVII. 31), vasa-nfs, sadyah-krfs, sena-nfs, skambha-nis (V^. i. 19), syona-Hs.
f. pra-kris (AV.), vrata-nis.
B. m. d-rathis'^, pravts, supravis, raikis'
sakdsra-starTs, hiranya-vahs.
d-dur-mangalis, arunts, kalyanis, kfsnfs,
f.
ksonts^, gandharvts, gaurh, Jatrfs^ (AV.), tandris (AV.\ dutis, naptis, nSdis,
mahisis^ (TS. I. 2. 12^), yamts, yatudhanh (AV.), rathfs, laksmfs, lalamfs,
vilva-rupfs {TS.l,$. 6''), vrkis, sakatis, sabalis (J^Q.iv. ^.ii^), sasarparis, simhis

(TS.

I.

2.

12^), su-mangalis^, startsT.

2. m. dur-adhiam, sv-adhiam,
I. f. dhiyam, bkiyam, sriyam.
adhvara-sriyam, ksaira-sriyam, ghrta-sriyam, jana-sriyam, yajna-sriyam, susrlyam, hari-snyam^.
f. abhi-sriyam.
3. m. gatha-niam, grama-niam
(VS. XXX. 2o)j yajha-niam; deva-viam, prati-viam; abki-priyam, ghrta-priyam
B. m. rathiam, su-praviam.
(AV.), brafima-priyam.
f. deva-viam'^.
arayiam, kumariam (AV.), kadlain (AV.), gauriam, nadlam,
f. atharviam,
naptiam, nandiam, prapharviam, yamiam, laksmiam (AV.), lalamiam (AV.),
vibaliam, viliptiam (AV.), vilidhiam (AV.), visva-rupiam, vrkiam, shnklam,
surmiam, stariam ', spkigiain, svariam.

Ace. A.

I.

A.

I.

dhiya,

f.

bhiya,

sriya.

m.

2.

du-cihia.

f.

avadya-bhiya'-^,

palslUi''' (AV.),^
f. ti/a-pinjia" (AV.),
B. m. rathia.
a-dhia" (AV.).
The form iapant
mandukia, vesia, sahasra-parnid^^ (AV.), sUrinia, sphigla.
may be a contraction for iapanla^K

D. A.
a-dhie.

f.

I.

f.

dAiyJ, sriye.

m.

3.

2.

m.

iti/id-d/iiye,

dur-adhie,

du-dhle.

gana-sriye (VS. xxii. 30), yajna-priye; jihma-sie,

sena-nie

f. nandie, mes'ie, vrkie.

B. m. rat/iie, su-pravie'^''.
(VS. XVI. 17).
n. sv-adhias'^^.
2. m. du-d/uas, su-dhias.
G.'5 A. I. f. dhiyds.
B. m. ahias, su-pravias.
3. m. gana-sriyas; gatha-mas, manyu-mias'^T
f. atkarias, dpias'-^, nadias, nisti-grias, prsanias, mesias; srnias.
L. f. gaurt (ix. i23) and sarasi (vii, 103') may be locatives containing

the

normal ending

-i.

agreement with ivacam (ix. 74^).

This form is once (vil. 688) pronounced
2 On rathha occurring once or twice for siarydm, being one of the two only examples
in the RV. of the f in this declension being
rathir iva, cp. Lanman 375 (bottom).
3
The N. sing, once (l. 180^) appears pronounced as y before a vowel.
11 Accented as \i -bhiya were used indepenwithout the -s as ksont This word has
other forms also according to the deri- dently; the form occurs in a late hymn
1

(VS.

There

Ivative
(bottom).

t-

also

the

transition

form

arTs

cp.

cp.

declension;

Lanman

372

Lanman 377

with

13

Irregular accentuation of the ending.

Otherwise it may be an I. of the deri-

vative f-declension.
14 Cp. Lanman 382-'.
15
16

There is no example of an ablative.

This seems to be the only actual n.

form of

(top).

There are also the

agreement
in
^gotrdm).

(x. 1073).
12

The reading

transition forms aratls

(VI. 45), sakvaris (TS. iv. 4. 4'). devts (AV. Vl.
metrical
592); variants (l. 140^) is a purely
lengthening; cp. Lanman 377=.
8 This form is also once (Val. 11. lo) used
7

9 In
10

of the Mss. in AV. XX. 482

jairXs; the edition has jdnis.
5 This is a transition from the derivative
declension for the mdhi^T of the RV.
6 The AV. has su-mangali three times;
4

is

is

VI. 36).,

neuter

substantive

17

this declension in the

RV.

ahi-ghnyds (AV.) is a transition

shift of accent from the deri-

The form

form with

vative f-declension.
18

The form arums

tracted for aritnias.

(l.

121^)

may be

con-

272

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

V. B. m. daksi'^.
Du. N. A. A. 2. f.

f.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

arayi, mahe-nadi', yami, laksmi (AV.).

3. m. mana-nid, sadha-nia;
f. abhi-sriyau (AV.).
senani-grSmanyau (VS. xv. 15).
B. m. rathia.
cakriyan (SV,), nddyhc (AV.),
f. cakriya, nadia, naptid, yamid, sakthid, srnid;

sakthiau (AV.)^.
I. B. f. ksonibhydm.

ab/ii-sriya, ghrta-iriya.

G. A.

3. m.yajna-?iios.

L. B. f. onios, naptlos.
PI. N. V. A. I. f. dhiyas, sriyas^.
dudh'ias^
srlyas.

7uina-dhiyas, sic-dhiyas,

pada-vias,
f.

f.

SdMas, vycidhias^ (AV.).

sadha-nias;

sv-Sdhias;

B.

m.

2.

su-hastiasT

onios'^, cakrios.

duradhias,

adhvara-sriyas,

m. grama-nias

su-

(AV.), devd-vias,
kadha-priyas, gana-sriyas, pari-priyis.

abhi-priyas,

f.

f.

dirghcidhiyas,

agni-sriyas

3.

vdta-pramiyas.
B. m. a/das, apath'ias,
apaslas (VS. x. 7), ardylas (AV.), aruntas, enias,

ab/ti-sriyas, d-priyas (AV.), pra-nias,

rdthias^

kavasias (VS. xx. 40, 60), gatirias, tiksna-srfigias, ftadias, ndd'icis

(AV.), mayUrias^ yatu-dhdnias (AV.), ratkias, laksmias (AV.), vaksias, vi-kesias
With
(AV.), vyasta-kesias (AV.), samudriyas^ sahasra-parnins{ AV.), starias.
T pronounced as /: once nadyhs (vii. 50*) and 6 forms in the AV.,
asvataryas, nadyas, naptyas, nddyas, pippalyas, vrksa-sarpyas.
VS. xxvii. 7),
Ace. A. I. f. d/iiyas, b/i'yas (AV.), bkiyds (TS. iv. i. 7^
sr'iyas.
f. ddhias (AV.).
2. m. durddhias, dud/das, su-sr'iyas^3. m.
sad/ia-nlas.
'B.m.akias, dusprdvias, rat/das.
t. ardyias {A.W.), asta-karnias,
kilds'ias,
khdrias, dehias, nad'ias, tiaptias,
medas, yam'ias, yatu-dhdnias,
samudn'yas, sambddha-tandrlas (AV.) 'affliction and exhaustion', starias'^.

kalyan'ias,

I. A. I. f. d/nb/ds, srlb/iis'".
2. m. sv-ddhibhis.
3. m. gana-sribhis'^'^.
B. m. hlranya-vdhbhis.
f. kalydnfbhis, ksonibhis, nadibhis, naptlbhis.
D. '^ A. 3. m. rta-tiib/iyas^'^, sva-rdbhyas'^^ (VS.xvi. 27), send-ntbkyas'^'' (VS.
XVI. 26).
B. f. aparibkyas, nadfbhyas (VS. xxx. 8).
f. hiranya-vindm.
G. A. I. f. dhinam and dhiydm, srindm.
3.
B. m. ah'indm, nadindm 'invokers', rathinam'^'^,
f. arunfndm, krimtndm (AV.),

nad'mdm, piiriisindm, svarindm.

B.
L. A. I. f. dJiisn.

f.

3. b.

Stems

aparfsu, arimhu, nadisu'"'.

Lanman, Noun-Inflection 365400.

in derivative -T.

Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar 362

366.

377. I. This declension embraces a very considerable number of stems

which are formed by means of the suffix -i (originally -yd) and, except seven
masculines, are restricted to the f gender. It largely supplies the f. form ot
words requiring inflexion in more than one gender. Feminine stems are thus
made from nouns in -a, e. g. devi- (m. derd-); from adjectives in -u; e. g.
prihv-t(m. prthu-); from present participles in -ant; e. g. mad ant- 1-

Pada

y=

dhaksi; cp. RPr. iv. 41.

tive J-declension deva-h-isi^'^. IV. 6.
VS.
Treated as a compound in the Pada xvir. 56) 'worshipping the gods'.
(vui. 74.15) though malie is "V.
Also the transition form slriyas; on
9
3 The AV. shows no example of -ia.
It yahvlas and suparnias see 375 a a.
' Also the transition form slribhis (accented
has three transition forms aiidiau,phalgiinyau,
aksyau.
as a monosyllabic stem).
n Metrical shortening; see Lanman 3722.
4 Cp. APr. ni. 61.
12 There is no example of an Ab. m. or f.
5 Also the transition form striyas.
6 This would be vya-dhiyas in the RV.
13 The accent of the G. atas'mtxm 'beggars'
where in compounds ending in -dJii- the 2 would seem to require a stem atasi- and
if unaccented is split.
not atasi-.
7 See above, 375 B a a, note 3,
'4 There is also the transition form strT^u
8 Also the transition form to the derivaaccented as a monosyllable.
1

VI. Declension.
(m. mddant-),

-ant,

from

participles

perfect

e. g.

comparatives in -yams,
avitr-f-

Nouns.

adat-i- (m. addnt-),

in
e. g.

-vams,

Vowel

Stems.

or

t. g.

-at,

273

piprat-i-

{va..

piprat-);

jagmus-t- (m. jaganvams-); from

ndvtyas-T- (m. ndvTykms-); from words in -tar
e. g.

(m. avitdr-);

from adjectives in -tnant, e. g. dhenu-mdt-i(m. dhenu-mdnt-), and -vant, t. g. dma-vat-i- (m. dma-vant-); from nouns in
-a, e. g. sam-rijn-T- (m. rajan-), -van, e. g. rta-var-i- (m. rta-van-);
from
e. g.

i-^r),

adjectives^' in -r, e. g. arkin-i- (m. arkin-); from compounds ending in -af,

e. g. arvac-t- (m. arvdnc-), in -</;-/, e.
e. g. a-pdd-i-, and
g. su-dfs-T-, in -/a^,
in -^a, e. g. d-pati-ghn-i-.
2. There is besides a large group of miscellaneous f. stems of an
independent character, having no corresponding m.^, e. g. sdc-i- 'might'.

3.

Ndmt-,

The seven m.
Fft/iT-,

sterns^, of which five are proper names, are:

Matali-, Sobhari-; rdstri- 'ruler', siri- 'weaver'.

Tiraki-,

a. The stems of this declension (in contrast with those of the B group of the
radical i- declension) do not normally accent the suffix.
The exceptions to this rule
are of a definite character.
1. When in the first f. group there is a corresponding m. accented
on a final syllable
which is liable to be reduced in such a way as to be incapable of bearing the accent,
the acute is thrown forward on the -T; e. g. m. uru-, f. urv-i-; m. 7ietdr; f. netr-t-;

m. ad-dnt; i. ad-at-l- ; to., praty-anc-, f. praiic-t; m. -Man-, f.-gkn-t-. When the m. ends in
a, the accent also in several stems remains on the corresponding -T; thus m. devd-,
f. devT--,
papa- 'evil', i. papT-'i; \n. puro-gavd- 'leader', i. piro-gavi-; m. ramd- 'night',
f. rami-; m. vamrd' 'ant', f. vamri-.
More usually, however, the accent of such feminines
is thrown back on the first syllable 5; thus m. ayasd- 'made of iron', f. ayast-; m. aritsi'red',
f. arusT-;
xa.. gdndharvd- 'belonging to the Gandharvas',
f. gandharvi-;
m. tavisd'strong', f. tdvisJ- 'strength'; m. parusa- 'reed', f. parumi- 'reedy', N. of a river; m. paliid'grey', i. pdliknJ-; m. mahisd-(' 'buffalo', f. vidhisT-; m. rohiid- 'ruddy', f. rohiiu- 'ruddy
cow', m. sam-gayd- 'procuring prosperity for the household', f. sam-gdyl-; m. iydvd- 'brown',
syavi-; m. syetd- 'white', f. syem- 'white cow'.
f.
2. Again, the miscellaneous group of feminines hardly ever accents the final -T of the
stem except when it is a proper name, a shift of accent having here probably taken
place to indicate a change of meaning; thus a?-a^am~- 'Forest-goddess', arundhaii-^ (AN .)
N. of a plant and a star, indrant- 'Indra's wife', rodast- N. of the Asvins' wife, vadhrimati- N. of a mythical female, varunam- 'Varuna's wife', savast- N. of Indra's mother,
sinivaR- N. of a goddess; and the river names, anjast-, asikni-^ (but asikni- 'black' and
'night'), go-mat-i- (but go-mat-l- 'rich in cows'), sutudn-.

Inflexion.

378. The inflexion of the derivative i- stems stands in marked contrast

with that of the radical f- stems in three respects: (i) no -s is added in
the N. sing, masculine or feminine; (2) the endings diverge considerably
from the normal ones, the Sing. A. taking -m, the D. -ai, the Ab. G. -as,
the L. -am, the du. N. A. -i, the pi. N. A. -s; (3) stems accented on the
final vowel shift the acute to the ending in the weak cases of the sing.,
in the G. L. du., and the G. pi.

ending in -a do not form

unless they are accented on the
final syllable, when the accent almost always
shifts to the first syllable ; e. g. drusi- from
arusa-; but papa- has papt- beside papa-.
2
list of these is given by Grassmann,
Adjectives

their

f.

in

-*

Worterbuch 1722 23.

3 Cp. ZuBATY, zu den altindischen mannlichen J'-stammen, Sitzungsberichte d. Bohm.

and

all participles ending in -a

with -a.
5 This is the converse of the accentuation
in the B group of the radical -i declension,
where the m. in unaccented -a throws the
acute on the final -t of the f.

adjectives
their

form

f.

6 Similarly varfdf- 'protector',

Ges. d. Wiss. 1897, XlX (treats also of the

the river.
radical <-stems used in the masc).
The great majority of
4 Beside papa-.
IndO'-arische Philologle.

I.

4,

f.

varuir-i-.

Originally a present participle * d-ntndhat-i'not hindering'.

8 dsikni- also occurs once as the N. of
7

18

274

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

The forms

actually occurring,

if

4.

Vedic Grammar.

made from

devi- 'goddess',

would be

as follows:

Sing. N.
L. devyain.

Du. N. A.
PI. N.

A. devim.

devi.

D. devydi.

Ab. devyds.

G. devyas.

D. Ab. devibhyam. G. L. devyos.

I.
devibhis.
D. devibhyas. Ab.

devibhyas.

I.

devyi.

V. devi.
devi,

V. devT.

A.
L. devhu.

isVz'/f.

devis.

V. afewfj'.
Forms actually occurring are the following:
Sing. N. The m. forms are: ndmi, pftki, mdtali, rdstrl, sobharT. The
f. forms
are very common, being made from nearly 300 stems in the RV.
Among the most frequent are: prthivi 'earth' (57), devt (48), sdrasvati (43)
N. of a goddess, mahf 'great' (35), ucchdntt 'shining' (16), yati 'going' (14),
jdnitrT 'mother' (10),
brhati 'great' (10), ghrtdcT 'filled with ghee' (9),
maghoni 'bountiful' (9), stri^ 'woman' (3)^.
A. m. ndmim.
The f. is formed from over 100 stems in the RV.
Among the commonest forms are: prthivim (62), ma/iim^ (35), devim (18),
G. devind?n.

tdvistm (13), urvim (9) 'wide', pipyi'inm'' (9) 'swelling' '.

I. This case is formed with the normal ending -a.
The only m. form is
ndmya. But there are about 40 f forms in the RV. In more than two-thirds
of these the suffix is pronounced as a vowel* -ia (in oxytones -id), in the rest
as a semivowel -ya (in oxytones -yd).
The stem sdmi- 'labour' has, beside
sdmya, the contracted form sdmT, which also appears in the compound su-sdml
'with great care'.
At the end of a Pada and before vowels'' this I. sdmT is
shortened to sdmi^- The forms occurring are: i. dnvya 'subtile', asvabhidhdnya
(AV.) 'halter', dsvavatya 'furnished with horses', dsiknya'^ (AV.), kundrndcya
'house lizard', kumbhyd (TS.iii. 2.8'*) 'jar', gstu-mdtya 'spacious', gayatryd (TS.
ir. 2.4^)
a metre, ghrtdcya, citdntya 'observing', citdyantya 'appearing', /ff^^O"'
(TS. 11. 21.4*), a metre, tmdnya 'by oneself, ddvidyiitatya 'glittering', devdcya
'directed towards the gods', ddivya (AV.) 'divine', 7idvyasya 'new', pdtnya 'wife',
mddhu-matya 'accompanied by sweetness', rShinya, vdsvya 'good', vdjavatya
'rich in treasure', vdsya (AV.) 'knife', visvd-bhesajya (AV.) 'all-healing', visvdcya
'universal', visvya 'everywhere' (adv.), idcya 'might', sdmya, sarmaydntyd 'protecting',
simya 'work', satracya 'attentive', samicya (Kh. iii. iqS) a goddess,
sdrasvatyd (AV.), soma-vatya 'accompanied with Soma', stibhantyd 'praising',
hdrinya 'yellow', hiranydya'^ 'golden'.
Oxytones with shift of accent:
annadyd (AV.) 'proper food', asiknyd, devyd, puranyd 'ancient', prthivyd,
mahyd, samlinyd 'similar', sadkaranyd^^ 'common', sucyd 'needle', sautrdmanyd
(AV.) a kind of Indra sacrifice.
The TS. and VS. also have urvyd as an
adverb 'afar', which in the RV. appears only in the modified form iirviyd.
D. The ending looks like -ai, e. g. devy-di; but it is doubtless in
origin the normal ending -e fused with the suffix -7a, i. &. -yai^-ya-e'^^. Only
13 forms (all f) occur in the RV. These are, besides a few others from the later

Cp. Wiedemann, 86.27,211, footnote.

This also occurs in the compound
7
In the AV. there are also the transition tirvi-iiiik (vi. 242), if tirvithe adv. inslr.
forms a-durmangali, su-mangali, nadu In RV. urvyd.
I. l8o5 ksont has perhaps dropped its -j owing
8 The compound su-sdmi also occurs once
to the following .;-.
in the TS. VS. as well as the RV.
3
Perhaps to be read uncontracted as
9 Probably
an error for asiknyas; see
mahiam in X. 50^; vaifim (11. 1 18) is also to Whitney on AV. v. 138.
^o For hiranyayya.
be read as vdjiiavi.
4 Perfect participle oi J>T- 'swell'.
Cp. Lanman 368 (top).
12 An indication of this origin is perhaps
5 There is also the transition form nadtm
(AV.).
to be found in the fact that of the 13 stems
6 The vocalic pronunciation seems to be the in
the RV. taking this dative only one,
commoner in the AV. also; cp. Lanman 381. patnyai, has the vocalic pronunciation -iai
1

"

VI. -Declension.

Samhitas:

i.

Nouns.

Vowel

Stems.

275

arvacyai (VS.XXIL24) 'hitherward', dvacyai (VS.xxn. 24) 'downward',

a'-z/jya^a? 'not desiring', iyatyai 'so great', </:/?'

(VS. xxii. 24) 'northern', y^aif/ai

(VS. XXIV. 12), jarydi (TS.iii. 2.2^) 'mistress', juryantyai 'aging', jyayasyai 'elder',
dhenumatyai 'yielding milk', parjdnya-patnyai' 'having Parjanya for a husband',
pasumdtyai 'consisting of cattle', praticyai (VS.xxn. 24) 'western', /wVj'a/. (VS.
XXII. 24) 'eastern', yaso-bJiaginyai (VS.ii. 20) 'rich in glory', rdiryai
(VS.xxiv. 25)
'night', vajavatyai, vis-pdtnyai, Ja/^a-Za/wyaz' (A V.) 'united
with the husband'.

Oxytones: ifiifranydi (VS.xxilyiu.s), urzydi {YS.xxii.2'j), iafysnydi' (AV.)

'good', g-ayatrydi (VS.xm.S4), devydi, frthivydi, brhatydi, mahydi, nljasatidydi
(VS. XIX. 16) 'Soma stand', sinivalydi, striydii (AV.), hiranya-kesydi'< (AV.)
'gold-haired'.

2.

Ab.

The ending

looks like -as, e. g. prthivy-as; but it is doubtless

fused with the suffix -yd, i. e. -yas
-ya-as^.
Only
five forms occur in the RV., besides a few others in the later Samhitas:
avadydvatyas (AV.) 'disgraceful',
urvdsyas N. of a nymph, jdgatyas (VS.
XIII. 56), jivantyasi 'living',
dur-admanyas (VS. 11. 20) 'bad food', pdtantyas
'flying', prthivyds, brhatyas (AV.), mahyas^.
G. The ending is the same as in the Ab. and of similar origin.
m. tiraicydsT, pfthyas, sobharyas.
f. The forms occurring in the RV.^ are:
1. amsu-mdtyas'^ N. of a river, ainhu-bhedyas (VS.xxiii. 28) 'having a narrow slit',
a/fwaVafyaj N. of a people, urjdyaiityas 'vigorous', osadhyas (VS.L2 5) 'plant',

normal ending

the

-as

danumatyas

tdvisyas,

vivdsvatyas

'shining',

u?~vyds 'earth',

2.

'rich in

mdms-pdcanyas

drops',

sdmyas, sShicatyas

devyds,

prthivyds,

'flesh-cooking',

rdtryas,

mahatyds

'great',

'about to bear'.
yatyds, yatyds 'going',

'shining', siisyaniyas

vadhrimatyds N. of a woman, siriyds'^.

L. This case seems to be formed with the ending -am, e. g. devy-dm;
but it may be due to the fusion of a particle *-am'^^ with the suffix -ya. It
is formed from 15 stems in the RV.,
where the pronunciation -iam is conthan half as common'^ as -yam.
Forms occurring are:
ucckdntyam, udicyam (TS. IL 4. 14')^ jdgatyam (VS. xxxviii.
18), jahndvyam 'race of Jahnu', drsddvatyam N. of a river, ndryam (Kh.
IV. 133). 'woman', pdrusnyam N. of a river, prdcyam (TS.11.4. 14^), yavydvatyam
'rich in streams',
rdtryam, varandvatya?n (AV.) N. of a river, vasdvyam
'treasury', sdcyam, sdrasvatyam N. of a river, soma-krdyanyam (VS. viii. 54)
'serving as the price of Soma'.
2. aranyanydm, astrydm 'fire-place', asandydm
(AV.) 'stool', gavtnydm (Kh. iv. 133) 'groin', gayatrydm (VS. AV.), catvarimsydm
'fortieth', jyesthaghtiydm. (AV.) N. of an asterism, devydm, naracydm (AV.) N.
of a river, prthivydm, striydm (AV.)^3.
siderably

less

dsiknyam,

r.

(and

here

the

is

preceded by two con-

dhtityas, krsyds, deva-keiyds, rairyds, sirsaktyds;

probably also yonyas

sonants).
1

To be pronounced

This

is

-iai.

an emendation for the reading

kalyanyai of the edition; cp. Lanman 3832.

3 With split t as in the radical T- stems.
also the transition forms
4 There are
bhiydi, irzyaV (VS. XIX. 94), /iriya'z (VS. Xiv. 35)
from the radical T- declension, and from the
nirrtyai,
deva-hiilyai,
turydi,
i- declension

Pronounced

ZDMG.

(vi. 121''),

tiraicias.

But

Y3.&3.

yonyd.

cp.

RoTH,

48, 115 (bottom).

This case is formed from more stems

AV. than in the RV. ; cp. Lanman 355.
9 In about 15 per cent of the following
genitives the ending is pronounced -ids.
10 There are also half a dozen transition
forms from the 2- declension in the RV.
anumdtyns, drdiyds, nirrtyas, ffsnyds, bhutnyds
pusfyai, bhujydi, bhftyai, srutyai.
with crasis in bhumyopari x. 753^
5 -yds is read -ias 4 times out of 25 in (once
the RV. prihivias 3 times s.n& jtvantias once, yuvatyds; there are many others in the AV.;
always for metrical reasons, cp. Lanman 384 a.sjdmyas (also Kh. v. 5 19); see Lanman 3852.
" Cp. Brugmann, Grundriss 2, 265 (p. 619).
(top).
12 It is much less common than this is
6 There are also the transition forms from
the z-declension, ndbhyas, bhumyds, hetyds; and in the AV.
13 There are
also two transition forms
from the AV. a-bhiiiyds, d-rdtyds, d-iasiyds,
8

in the

18*

276

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

V. This case is formed, by shortening the final, from 38 stems (all f ) in the
RV. Examples are: devi {2'^), sarasvati {16), prtkivi{ii), maghom{g), vibhavari
From the TS.: dmbali (vii. 4. 19') 'mother', kdmpila-^
'radiant' (8), mahi (6).
vasini

(vii. 4.

mdnduki

19'; VS.) 'living in KampTla', darvi (1.8.4') 'ladle', ///

(iv. 4. i2't),

VS.) 'frog', deva-yajani (VS.) 'whereon gods are adored'.

Du. N. A. V. This form in the RV. ends in -i exclusively, being made
probably with the ending -i (like the f. du. of the derivative -a stems), which
coalesces vifith the -t of the stem '- There is only one m. form, the V. madhvX
'fond of sweetness', an epithet of the Asvins. The f. is very frequent, being
(iv. 6. i"";

76 stems in the RV. and from over 20 in the VS. The commonest
forms in the RV. are: ridasiiZ']) 'the two worlds', dyiva-prt/iivi {6^) 'heaven
and earth', maki {2']), urvi (20), prthivi (20), devi {i^,), samici (11) 'united',
brhati (10), yahvi (6) 'active', aksi (6) 'eyes', prthvi (5).
From the TS.: N.
chdndasvati 'desiring' and sUrya-patm (iv.3.ii') 'having the sun as husband',
V. iirvi, rodast, patnt (iv. 7. 15*).
a.
The -J is twice metrically shortened in frthivi (11. 31^; lU. 54^) and in mahi

made from

56^; X. 931).
b.
In the AV. three stems of this declension form transition duals = according
to the radical i- declension: aksyau, dniiyau, phalgunyau^
in other texts: ^ avTnyaii [TS.m.
3. lo') 'the groins', painyau (VS. xxxi. 22), rcbhatyau and su-parnyau (Kh. I. 37).
(IV.

I.

aksibhySm {KY.), kumbhibhyam (VS.x1x.27), jostribhyam (VS.xx1.51)

'cherishing',

m&dhucibhyam (VS.)

D. rodasibhyam.

'sweetness-loving',

mddhvibhyam

(VS.).

Ab. aksibhydm, dydvaprthivibhyam

(VS. xxxvii. 18).

G. aksyos'' (AV.; TS. ill. 2.5=), Artniyos (TS. iv. 5. 2^) 'ends of the bow',
drtnyos (VS.xvi. 9), divas-prtkivyos^, ninyos'' ^secret' pari-nrtantyos {KM.) 'dancing
round', rodasyos^.
L. aksyos (AV.), ardnyos, drjunyos, dy&vaprthivyus (VS.
XX. 10), pdtantyos, rodasyos, samicyos.
PI. N. V.
The ending seems to be simply -s, but it is doubtless the
normal ending -as, which originally coalesced with the suffix -ya to -yas, the
latter then contracting to -is.
In the m. the only example is siris. But the
f. is very frequent, being tormed irom 166 stems in the RV., and occurring
in the independent parts of the TS. at least 25 and of the VS. at least 40
times. The commonest forms are: devis (43), purvis (36) 'many', osadhis (27),
vdnis (12) 'songs', pdtnis (11), mahis (11), bhatis (8) 'shining', yahvis (7),
devaydntXs (6) 'serving the gods', vdsvis^ (6). In the Khilas occur the 7 forms
a-Iaksmis {11.6^), anis (iv.S'), devis {iii.xo''), pavamanis (ill. 10') N. of certain
hymns, bahvis (11. 8^ etc.) 'many', svastydyams (iii. 10'), hiranydyis (v. 15").
,

from

the radical T- declension are almost unknown to the

example, sjii prsanyas and stipamyas are probably such;
the tendency to use such transition forms is only incipient even in the AV. 9, where
Kyafi(once) and /fl?a{yaj- (once) occur II. In the Khilas also, occur the 'Caxe.&iotms ghftacyas
a.

RV.

Transitions

this

to

striyas is the only certain

5 With the first member of the Dvandva

from the radical T- declension sriyam (AV.)
and dutyam; five from the i- declension: inflected in the sing. G.
6 Either the
puramdhydm,
bhumyani^
bhftydm, yuvatG. of nint- (m. nitiyd-) or
yam, samgatyam; besides at least 10 addi- shortened for ninydyos.
tional ones from the AV. dvydm, dkiliyam,
7 Once
(vi. 24>5) used in the sense of an
ciUyain, devd-hutydm, nabhydjn (4- VS. XXIV. l), Ab.
8 ika-patnis (AV. X. 8^^) 'having one huspfstydm, bhutydm, yonydm (-j-VS.), vedydviy
sdviitydvi.
band' is N. pi. f., not N. sing. m.
1 Cp. Brugmann, Grundriss 2, 287 (p. 644).
9 There seem to be no such transitions
2 There are also the transition forms from
in the TS. ; but there are at least 3 to the ithe radical I- declension ksoni and once nadi. declension: osadhayas (iv. 1.44), revdtayas
i This form in -yau becomes universal in (iv. 2. Ill), pdinayas (v. 2. 112).
1 Beside urvis which occurs 9 times,
the post- Vedic language.
n And yet this form is the only one in
4 The Mss. in AV. v. 410 read aksos; see
Whitney's note.
the post-Vedic language.
:

VI. Declension.

Vowel

Nouns.

Stems.

277

'^' ^f^""'"'J'^ ("' 1')The vs. has about lo such forms; devym
vvvl',, .fr'l ..
f"'""^"! C^^"'- 36) beside/fl/ri- (VI. 34), phalavatyas {X.KI1. 22), bahvyas
vf^ . ; 1^
f""' mahanamnyas
beside bahvis,
IX1X.44J
(XXUI. 35), mailravarunyas (xxiv. 2), maitryas (yiyiiv .
8),
j/fl^js/optw (XXIV. 5), V. vamryas (xxxvii.
4J, z^aijj/a./^z/vaf (xxiv. 5), sarasvatyas (xxiv. 4).
b. Ihere are no transitions from the
radical T- declension to this one in the RV.,
and in the AV. only nadis (beside nadyas) and laksmts (beside
laksmyas). But the transitions irom the > declension are numerous: angulls
(AV.), avanTs, ajdms, utts,
dhamams {Xy.), naktJs, nabhJs (AV.), nirrtis, niskrtTs, pdrsiiis (AN.), PuramdhTs, fsifs (AV.),
ifslis[KN.\
'-<-'>.
/'
bhumis, visva-krstTs, irimsT-, sdyonls.

-A^

'

A. This case
similar.

RV.

It

The

form with the N., and its origin is doubdess

is
very frequent, being made from more than 100 stems in the
conimonest forms are: purvfs (40), osadhis (24), mahfs
(18),
is

identical in

brhatis (12), ddsis (g) 'demonesses', pdinfs

I.
This case is fairly frequent, being

pf^atls (7)= 'dappled mares'.

made from 32

stems in the RV.

tdvinbhis (13), idmJbhis (8),
osadhibhis (6), prsatlbhisi (5). The TS. has also ilmibhis (v. 2. 12'), sucibhis
(v. 2.11'-^); the VS. amnibhis (xn.74), jdgatibhis (i.
21), sthalibhis (xix. 27)

The
.

(7),

commonest

forms

are:

sdcibhis

(36),

'cooking-pots'.

D.

This case

and a few others

bands',

is rare,
being formed from only three stems in the RV.
in the later Samhitas: avyadhinlbJiyas (VS.xvi. 24) 'assailing

osadkibAyas,

kesinibhyas

AV.) 'having Gandharvas

tisthantlbhyas

(VS. xxn.

mdnusibhyas (TS.
male',

iv.

i.

(AV.)

'hairy',

gandharvd-paimbhyas (VS.

for spouses', ghosinibhyas (AV.) 'noisy', tdvinbhyas'^,

25) 'standing', <r2/^//Mj/aj- (VS. xvl 24) 'piercing',

43;

VS.

xi.

45) 'human', vrsanydntibhyas 'desiring a

srdvanttbhyas (VS. xxn. 2 5) 'flowing',

sasvatfbhyas^ (AV.) 'everlasting',

hradunlbhyas (VS.IxxiL 26) 'hail'.

Ab. Only three forms of this case occur in the RV.: osadhibhyas,
padvdtlbhyas 'possessed of feet', brhatlbhyas.
G. This case, which as is usual in the vowel declension takes the ending
-nam, is found in only one m. form, sobharlnam; but it is fairly common
in the f., being formed from 34 stems in the RV.
The oxytones which
number only six^, throw the accent (as in the /-declension) on the ending:
bakvfndm, bhahjattndm 'breaking', bhatlndm, bhurijatindm 'gladdening', mahmdm
yatindm. This rule does not, however, hold in the SV. and VS., which have
mahinam (VS. i. 70; iv. 3); nor in the AV. where the forms narasamsfnatn
'eulogies' and rathajiteytnam 'chariot-conquering' occur.
Of the remaining
28 genitives in the RV. * the commonest are: sdsvatmam (10), osadkinam^
">,

(9),

mdnusTnam

idcmam

(8),

(4),

iyi'mnam'' (3) 'having departed'.

From

the

VS.: dvyadhininam. (xvi. 21).

L. This case is fairly common, being formed from 30 stems (all f) in the
RV. The most frequent forms are: osadhisu (20), mdnusisu (8), i/4j-fjz^ 'neighbouring', jdgatisu (2) 'females', tdvistsu {2), yakvtsu (2), rohinisu'^'^ (2). The rest
occur only once 'each '^ From Khila iii. 15'': siiddha-dantisu 'white-toothed'.
1 This
8 The
form should perhaps be read as
G, ndvyasTnam is once used in
agreement with the m. marutdm.
srenayas in v. 597.
2 Also the transitions from the radical r9 kamnam, with contracted -yd-, is the
only G. pi. of kanya- in the RV., kanyandm
declenslon arums and yatudhanu (AV.).
occurs once in the AV. ; see Lanman 399
3 The stems forming this case in the RV.
(top).
are enumerated by Lanman 396.
1 Perfect participle of i- 'go'.
nari- 'woman', by shortening its final
4
11 There is also the transfer form from
vowel, forms its D. according to the ithe i- declension svdkdkriisu, in which the
declension ndribhyas.
On the
5 Irregularly accented on the final of the long vowel is perhaps metrical.
other hand sirJsu (accent) is a transfer to
stem, otherwise, sdsvaiT-.
6 Or 7 including stri- strtnam.
the radical T-declension.
12
Lanman enumerates the stems, 399
the exceptions mahinam (x. 1341),
7 On
:

yattnam (l. 158^), devayatmam

J.ANMAN 398 (bottom).

(l.

361),

see

(bottom).

278

I.

Allgemeines vnv Sprache.

Vedic Grammar.

Radical stems in

a.

4.

4.

-/.

-z,
No nominal
(some six or seven) have all joined the consonant declension by
adding a determinative -f- There are, however, about a dozen stems in
which i is probably radical in 'a secondary sense, as representing a reduced
form of roots ending in -a'. These are with one or two exceptions m. comMa- 'put': api-dhi- 'covering', a-dhi- 'pledge',
pounds formed with -dM

/-stems are derived from roots originally ending in

379.

these

as

utsa-dhi- 'receptacle of a spring', vda-dhi- 'receptacle of water', upa-dhi- 'part

and

of the wheel between nave

pari-dJii- 'fence',

perhaps

sd-dhi- 'abode';

'treasure',

felly',

garbha-dh'i-

ni-dhi- 'treasury',

'nest',

prati-dhi- 'cross-piece of car-pole', pra-dhiosa-dhi- f

also

as

'felly',

seva-dhi-

a shortened form of

Besides these there is prati-sthi- f. 'resistance', from sthaand probably the redupUcated stem yayi- 'speeding', in which the -i
is secondarily reduced through the older form yayi- from the -a of the root
ya- 'go'. These few stems have nothing distinctive in their inflexion, which
osa-dhi- 'plant'.
'stand',

follows that of the derivative i-stems in every particular.

The forms which occur from these words are the following:
Sing. N. a-dhi-s, osa-dki-s, nidhi-s, pari-dAi-s, prati-sihi-s, yayi-s,
A.

utsa-d/ii-m,

uda-dki-jjt,

sd-dhi-s.

6sa-dhi-m, garbha-dhi-m, ni-dhi-m, pari-dhi-m, pra-

Ab. uda-dhes.
dki-m, yayi-in, seva-dhi-m.
I. yayina.
Du. N. upadhi, pra-dhi.
PI. N. Ssa-dhayas, ni-dhdyas, pari-dhdyas, prati-dhdyas, pra-

dhdyas.
dhibhis.

A.

api dhin,

G. ni-dhinAm.

uda-dhin,

4. b.

Lanman, Noun

i-

pari-dhin,

Derivative stems in

Inflection 365

Reichelt, Die abgeleiteten

ni-dhin,

pra-dhin.

I.

343.

ni-

L. ni-dhisu.

400.

-/.

Whitney, Grammar 335340,

und z^-slamme, BB.

25,

238

252,

Cp.

380. This declension embraces a large number of m. and f stems.

There are comparatively few neuter stems; and, except the N. A. sing, and
pL, neuter forms are rare, not occurring .at all in several cases. The regular
practically the same in all genders, except that the N. A. sing,
is

inflexion

differ from the m. and f , and the A. pi. m. and f differ from each
There are several peculiarities here as regards the formation of the
The final vowel of the stems shows
stem, the endings, and accentuation.
Guna in three of the weak cases of the singular (D. Ab. G.) as well as in
while it is abnormally strengthened in the
the V. sing, and the N. pi. m. f
The normal ending -as of the Ab. G. sing, is reduced to -s, while
L. sing.
Oxytone stems, when the vowel is changed to
that of the L. sing, is lost.
throw the accent on a following vowel not as Svarita but as Udatta; and
even on the -nam of the G. pi., though the stem vowel in that case does

and

pi. n.

other.

_)>,

not lose

its

syllabic value.

The only word which

distinguishes strong forms is sdkhi- 'friend', which takes

strong stem sdkhay-. These strong forms are frequent: Sing. N. sdkha^,
A. sdkhdyavi. Du. N. A. sdkhdya ^ and sdkhdyait. PI. N. sdkhdyas. This word has two
further irregularities, the simple stem sdkhi- adding -e in the D. sdkhy-e, and the abnormal
ending -ur in the Ab. G. sdkhy-ur. The other forms occurring are regular: Sing. I.
sdkhya, V. sdkhe. PI. A. sdkhin, I. sdkhibhis, D. Ab. sdkhibhyas, G. sdkhTnam. Eight compounds in the RV. ' are inflected in the same way (also soma-sakhdj VS. IV. 20); but of
four others, which have joined the a- declension, there occur the forms A. drdvaydlsakha-m (x.39">), 'H. ydvayai-saihd-s [yi. 26^), h. pataydtiy-sakha-ni) and jnandaydi-sakha-m {1. 4^).
a.

Vrddhi in

2
3

its

See above, stems in derivative -i (307).

4 sdkhayd occurs 6 times (also VS. xxvm. 7),
Cp. Lindner 56 and Lanman 453.
sdkhdyau only once.
See J. Schmidt, KZ. 29, 526, note '.
5 See Lanman 400 3.

"VI.

Declension.

Nouns.

Vowel

Stems.

279

The stem path, when it means 'husband' and is uncompounded,

shows
irregular inflexion in the Sing. D. and G. (like
sakhi-) and the L.: T). pdtye, G.pityur^,
L. patyau When it means 'lord's or is compounded,
it is regular: D. tataye, b^hasPaiaye,
G. pates, praja-pates(TS.), L. gd-patau.
z. The stem ya;-. 'wife' also takes the abnormal
exiAing -ur in the G. sing.: Jdnyur^.
This stem has the further irregularity of forming
Its JS. smg. jam according to the
derivative F- declension.
The stem ari- 'devout'
3.
IS irregular in forming several cases like
the radical t- stems (except in accentuation)
Sing. A. aryam (beside arim), G. arydsK
PI. N. A. m. f. aryds.
The VS. has also the
N. sing. a7'is beside the arts of the RV.
c. Twenty-seven stems in the RV. show
forms according to the derivative /- declension
the D. Ab. G. L. sing. f. 4, perhaps from a desire to add
a distinctively f. ending
in a declension which does not distinguish genders
in these cases.
There is a steady
increase of such forms in the later Samhitas; thus while the
RV. has only 7 datives in -ai
from 2- stems, the VS. has about 40.
d.
In the RV. 4 or 5 stems show the inHuence of the n- declension
in the
incipient use of the ending -m in the N. A. n. du., and {l)-ni
in N. A. n. pi. ; and in the
I. sing., stems
taking the ending -na are already 5 times as numerous as those adding
the normal -a.
b.

I.

Inflexion.
381.

The N.

m.

always takes -s\ the A. simply -m. The D. Ab.

G. y. gunate the suffix, to which the Ab. G. add only -s instead of -as. The
L. sing, has an altogether abnormal form ending in -a or -au. The N. pi. m.
f
gunates the -i, to which the normal ending -as is added. The A. pi. in the
m. adds -n, in the f. -s, before which the vowel is lengthened. The G. pi.
always takes -nam, lengthening the preceding vowel. The frequent adjective
Slid- 'bright' may be used to illustrate the forms actually occurring
the
three genders:
Sing. N. m. i. suds, n. Slid. A. m. i. suctm, n. si'ici. I. m. si'icya, s'lidna,
sing.

f.

f.

sucT, siid.

si'icya,

L. m.

f.

n.

siica,

D. m.

{.

n. sucaye.

V. m.

sucau.

Ab. m. f

si'tces.

G. m. f n.

Du. N. A. V. m. f n. suet. I. m. i. n. sudbhyam.

D. m.
Ab. m. f si'idbhyam. G. m. f. si'tcyos. L. m. i. n. si'tcyos.
PI. N. m. f. sucayas.
N. A. n. sue I, Slid, sucmi.
A. m. site,
I. m. f. si'idbhis.
D. m. i. si'icibhyas. Ab. m. f n. si'icibhyas. G. m,
L.

m.

f.

n.

Forms

Slices.

suce.

f.

si'icibhyam.

I.

sucis.

si'idsu.

actually occurring are the following:

Sing. N. m.

This form is very frequent, being made from nearly 250

stems in the RV. The commonest examples are; agnis (389) 'fire', kav{s (90)
'sage', hdris (58) 'tawny', brhas-Jtdtis (52) 'Lord of Prayer', suds (38) 'bright',
rsis (32) 'seer', brdhmanas-pdiis (23) 'Lord of Prayer', dtithis (20) 'guesf.
a.
The stem vi- 'bird', besides the regular N. vis, which occurs 6 times, has the
anomalously gunated form ve-s'^ which occurs 5 times in the RV.
b. The pronominal forms nd-ki-s (50) and ma-ii-s (13) 'no one' are old nominatives
which have become indeclinable.
,

N.

f.

This form

is

The commonest examples

frequent,
are:

being

made from 136

dditis (78) 'freedoin',

stems in the RV.

su-matis (22) 'bene-

'gift', nabhis (19) 'navel', waZ/j- (18) 'thought',

'maiden', bhUmis (12) 'earth', prd-matis (11) 'providence'^.

volence', ratis (22)

j'z'a/'/f

(18)

'
This ending is probably due to the
5 Except the irregular m. sdkha and the
analogy of the words of relationship, fitur i.jdnT{jdms in AV. XX. 482 is an emendation).
6 There is also the transition form from
etc.; cp. KZ. 25, 289 and 242 f.
The VS., however, has pdtye visvasya the radical t- declension vesa-sri-s 'beautifully
adorned' (TS.).
bhumanas 'lord of the whole world'.
7 Cp. Reichelt, BB. 25, 250.
3 Cp.BB. 25,242; Oldenberg, ZDMG. S4i
8 Also the transition forms from the 49-78.
4
Cp. Reichelt, BB. 25, 234 238, and declension aranyanis, osadhis, napiis (AV.),
ratris (AV., VS. xxxvu. 21).
Schmidt, KZ. 27, 382.
J.

28o

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

N. A. n. This form has no ending'. It is made from 37 stems

RV. The commonest examples are: mdhi (84) 'great', bhilri (47) 'much',

in the
sv-asti

(35) 'welfare', kdi-di (9) 'heart'^ From other Sarnhitas: dtt-abkisasii (yS.y s)
'blameless', -<?/ (.VS. xxxviii. 14) 'not casting', ax/'/^/ (AV., VS.) 'bone', a-sthuri
(VS. II. 27) 'not single-horsed', atma-sdni (VS. xix. 48) 'life-winning', eka-nemi
.

(AV.) 'having one

ir/w'(VS.x.2o)

felly',

'active'(?), /&ja/'ra-z/7Z2(VS.i. 17)

'devoted

'moving in GayatrT measures',

dddhi (AV., VS., Kh.iii. 16=) 'sour milk', pasu-sdni (VS.x1x.48) 'cattle-winning',
pfsni{PiN) 'dappled', brakma-vdni {NS.l.^^) ^dtvoted. to Brahmans', loka-sdni
(VS. XIX. 48) 'causing space', vddhri (AV.) 'emasculated', vari^ (VS. xxi. 61)
to warriors', gayatrd-vartani (TS.iii. 1. 10'; VS.xi.-8)

'choiceworthy', sajata-vdni (VS.

I.

17) 'conciliating relations'.

A. m. This form is very frequent, being made from 205 stems in the
RV. and occurring more then 1200 times. The commonest examples are: agnim
(269), rayim (180) 'wealth', yonim (61) 'receptacle', pdtim (49) 'lord' or 'husdhim (40) 'serpent', ddrim (30) 'rock', kavim (28), dtithim (25),
band',
brhaspdtim (25), hdrim (24), urtnim (23) 'wave', puramdhim (8) 'bountiful',
yayim (2) '(speeding) cloud', arim^ (2) 'devout' s.
156 stems in the RV. and
f. This is a frequent form, being made from
occurring more than 600 times. It is thus about half as common as the m.
The examples occurring oftenest are: su-matim (41), su-siutim (35) 'excellent
praise', vrstim (26) 'rain', matim (22), ratim (20), bkumim {ig), puramdhim (5),
rayim

(4)*.

m. This case
normal ending
I.

is

formed

in

two ways.

i.

Five stems in the RV. add

generally pronounced as y,
but half a dozen times as a vowel: pdtya 'husband', sdkhya, urmyiT, pavyd
2. Owing to the influence of the /z-declension 25 stems in the
'felly', rayyd^^
RV. add -na instead of the normal -a: agnina^ dfighrina (VS. 11. 8) 'foot',

the

a,

before which the

-i

is

ddrinS, aslnS 'sword', dhina, urmind, kavina, kasind 'fist', kiki-divind 'blue jay',
seer, devdpina N. of a man, dhasind 'draught', panind

jamddagnina N. of a

pdprina 'delivering', paridh'ind (VS.xviii. 63; TS.v. 7. 7^)

// (VS. 1. 1 6) 'hand', /// (Kh.iii. 15'), bfhas-pdtind, manina^g&ai',
yayind, rayina, rasmina 'rein', vddkrind, vavrind 'vesture', vasiznd (VS.xxv.'j)
'niggard', pdtind 'lord',
'fence',

'bladder', vfsa-nabhind 'having strong naves', vrsnind 'strong', si'icind, sdsnind

'bountiful'.
if.
This case is formed in two ways,
add the normal ending -a, before which the

About 30 stems
is pronounced
form, and as y

-i

in the

as a

RV.

vowel

in the rest'.
about three-fourths of the occurrences of this
occurring are (a) oxytones: ahtya 'eighty', utyA 'aid', kTrtyd^
(AV.) 'fame', panktya (VS. xxiii. 33) a metre, pHya 'draught', pustyd (AV. TS.)
'prosperity', matyd, mithatyd 'emulation', vasatyd 'abode', vrstya, sanyd (VS.
su-kirtyd 'praise', su-matyd, su-stutyd, svastys. (VS.
v. 7; TS. IV. 2. i^) 'gain',
in

The forms

' The only i- stem taking -m is the pronominal ki-m, probably owing to the false
analogy of ka-in.
2 Lanman 377 enumerates the forms.
According
3 The Pada text reads vari.
to BR. vary a here stands for vdryam a.
arydm formed like a radical i4 Also
stem (though differently accented).
5 There are also the transitions from the tdeclension pfthini and sdbharim.
6 Also the transfers from the u declension

aranyanim,

onim,

snthilifn (SV.).

6adhim,

ratrim

(AV.),

Pronounced Urmia, sometimes alsopdtia,

sakhia.

ghfnlva (n. 336) possibly stands for

ghfni-iva (Pada -i-iva), ghfnl then possibly
being a contracted I. ioz ghrnya; cp. Lanman
8

379 (middle).

On

the other hand -ya is pronounced

as often as -ia in the AV.; see
Lanman 380.
'o AH the
Mss. but one read kiriya or
klriya; see Whitney's note on x. 6^7.
9

S times

VI. Declension.

Vowel

Nouns.

281

Stems.

vm. 15; TS.

(b) otherwise accented: abhi-sastya (AV.) 'curse',
4. 44');
aratya (A V.) 'malignity', dvartya 'distress', asdnya 'thunderbolt', akutya 'purpose',
I.

dbhuiya

htya

jdlpyJ 'whispering', tfptya (AV.) 'satisfaction',

of the gods', dhrajya 'impulse';
nabhya (VS. xxv. 9), p&rmya 'heel', piiramdhya, pustya (TS. in. i. 5'), prdntatya,
bhi'ttya
(AV.) 'growth', bh&mya, rdmhya 'speed', r/ijya, 'direction',
rucya (AV.) 'lustre', vicya 'seduction', sdkiya (VS. xi. 2; TS. iv. i. 53) 'power',
su-bhutya (AV.) 'welfare',
stnya 'sickle', svddhitya (AV.) 'knife', hdrsya
tvisyS

'ability',

'sacrifice',

devd-hutya

'brilliance',

'invocation

'excitement'.

2.
contracted form in -/' is made by 35 stems in the RV. and
occurs more than twice as often as the uncontracted -ya. The forms occurring
a'-V/r 'thoughtlessness',

are:

dhuti

'oblation',

S//,

d-prabhuti

rju-nXti

'right

'favour', didhiti 'devotion', du-stuti

ni-siti

'XxViSs.

and

pdri-vistT 'attendance',

'kindling',

effort',

guidance',

visti 'effort',

'felly',

puro-jiti

guidance', su-mati,
su-stuti,

j-z/-^??/?

hdsta-cyuti

'with swift flight' (in

'missile'

the

and

Pada

viti 'enjoyment',

sd-huii 'joint invocation',

'vi^illingness',

-isfi

(i.

as hetih^

'understanding',

justi

du-stuti 'faulty hymn', dhiti^ 'thought',

'previous

niti 'guidance', prd-bhuti 'violence', prd-yati 'offering',

variant

a-zya//i/ 'sure-footedness',

cittl

vrsd,

acquisition',

prd-

prdyuti 'absence', wa/'/,

sakti and idkti, srusti^

su-diti 'bright radiance',

sii-niti

'good

'being well fixed', su-sastf (Kh.ii. 10') 'good recitation',

motion of the hand'.

Also su-papiani {i.\Z2^Y
-z")
perhaps also the two forms heti {yi. 18')
;
i8o<) 'desire', which occurring before r- axe given by

'quick

Pada with

and

-istih.

This form is further shortened to -/" in about a dozen words* in

the RV., occurring altogether some 25 times: isdni 'setting in motion', upa-sruti
'giving ear to', updbhrii 'bringing near', tri-visd 'thrice' (= adv.), ni-tikti
vdsat-krti 'exclamation vasat', sadhd-stuti 'joint
'haste', prd-yukti 'impulse',
praise', su-vrktl 'excellent praise', su-sasti 'good praise', sv-asti, havh-krti 'preparation of the oblation'. Perhaps also d-smrti (AV.vii. 106') 'through forgeta.

fulness'.

dhasina
few forms follow the analogy of the m. in adding -na
'advance'.
(VS.
xv.
pretina
nsbkina,
6)
'abode',
n. There is no certain instance of a neuter I.: sucma (11.38^) is perhaps
an example, but it may be taken as a masculine.
D. m. The stem regularly takes Guna before adding the normal ending
This is a form of frequent occurrence, being made from 44
-e; e. g. rsay-e.
RV.
The commonest examples are: agndye (48), dtraye{i2) N. of
the
stems in
a seer, sandye (12), ghfsvaye (6) 'gladdening', dabhttaye (5) N. of a man?.
b.

the VS.: brshmaye 'holy', bhuvantdye (xvi.19) 'earth-extender' (?), vrstivdnaye (xxxviii.6) 'rain-winning', sandhdye (xxx. 9) 'agreement'.
a.
The only two stems not taking Guna are paii- 'husband' and sakhi-, which
make patye and sakkye^. When compounded pdti- 'lord' forms its D. regularly as

From

-paidye;

e. g.

bfhas-pataye'^, fraja-pataye (VS. XI. 66) 'Lord

of Creatures',

Lanman

amhasas-pataye

380'*.

except in two instances,

Cp.

written with y before 3., but is to be read

with hiatus; it coalesces in the written text
with i or i, but is not always to be so pro-

These occur eight times

a line or stanza,

nounced.
2 This

times within a Pada before vowels.

form this dative are
7 The stems which

This form

is,

an internal Pada

at the end of
four times at the end of
before vowels, two or three

is the only contracted form occurenumerated by Lanman 382.

ring in the independent parts of the AV.
8 These words are never pronounced as
3 The form sadhri (n. 13^) is probably an
adverb 'to the same goal' from sadhri- paiie and sakhie,
9 This is the only compound in the RV.
(LlNDNER p. 112), or it might be an inst. f.
formed with 'he P, o^ pdti-.
sadhn- (Lanman 38o3).

of

See^RPr. v.

15.

282

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

(vs. VII. 30) 'Lord of distress', bhuvana-faiaye (VS. II. 2) 'Lord of the world', bhuva-fataye
(VS. II. 6) 'Lord of the atmosphere', vacas-pataye (VS.VH. 1) 'Lord of speech', sanwesa-patnye
VS. II. 20) 'Lord of rest' also in the expressions kseirasya pdiaye (AV.) 'Lord of the Field' and
{hhiiiasya pataye (AV.) 'Lord of the world', which are virtually compounds i; similarly dUam
pataye (VS. XVI. 17) = ; h-at p aye's viivasya bhumanas (VS. XVII. 78) 'Lord of all the earth'.
;

It is very frequent, being

f. This form is made like the m.; e.g. istdy-e.
formed from 50 stems and occurring over 500 times in the RV. The
commonest examples are: utdye {?,?>), pTtdye {6"]), soma-pitaye (49) 'draught of

Soma', vdja-saiaye

(24.) 'winning of booty', j-a^aji? (34) 'acquisition', vTtdyei^i),

devd-vitaye (22) 'feast for the gods', istdye (20) 'impulse'*.
a. The form vii is frequently used as a dative, similarly an-iiiJ'no help' once and
vTii twice,
svasii occasionally has this value at the end of a Pada and when it alternates with svastaye in v. 51'=. 13, but it may be intended for an adverb 5.
b. In the RV. seven stems in -i (all but 2 of which occur in Mandala x), follow
the analogy of derivative t- stems and take the ending -a'l: turyai 'victory', devdhfdyai 'invocation of the gods', nirrtyai 'dissolution', puslyai, bhujyai 'favour', bhftydi
'support', sruiyai 'blessing'.
The AV. forms such datives from at least II stems; the
TS. has d-samartyai (ill. 3. 8^) 'non-injury', dicr-istyai (ill. 2. Ifi) 'failure in sacrifice',
sdkiyai (iv. i. 11); the VS. has nearly 40: d-httyai (vi. 28) 'imperishableness', ddityai
(i. 30) 'Aditi',
dnu-matyai (xxiv. 32) 'assent', d-bhittyai (xi. 64) 'not bursting', abhi-sastyai

d-bhutyai (xxx. 17) 'wretchedness',

d-raddhyai (xxx. 9) 'mischance', d-ri^fyai (ll. 3)
dva-rtyai (xxx. 12) 'distress', d-hatiiyai (xvi. 18) 'non-killing', dkHiycii (iv. 7),
ariyai (xxx. 9. 17) 'trouble', utkrantyai (xv. 9) 'upstriding', etyai (xxvil. 45) 'arrival', krsydi
(ix. 22) 'tillage',
dur-istyai (11. 20), dhrajyai (vi. 18), nabhyai (XXXIX. 2), nisk^tyai (xxx. 9)
'atonement', pahktydi (xm. 58), prdti-sthityai (xv. lo) 'firm footing', prd-sityai^' (IL 20
(11.

5),

'safety',

'attack', prayas-cittyai (xxxix. 12) 'expiation', pretyai (xxvii. 45), bhiityal (XII. 65),
bhumya
(xxiv. 26), matydi (xxiv. 39), mahydi (xxil. 2o), rayydi (ix. 22), vkiiktyai (XXX. 13) 'separation',
vfsfyai (XVIII. 28), vidyai (xix. 16) 'altar', vyustyai (xxil. 34) 'ilawn', vyrddhyai
(xxx. 17) 'failure', santyai (in. 43) 'quiet', su-ksitydi (x.xxvir. 10) 'secure dwelling', hetydi
(xvi. 18) 'missile'.

The only form which seems to occur is sucaye.

Ab. m. The stem takes Guna, to which -s only, instead oi-as, is added;
g. ddres. It is not common, being formed from only 8 or g stems in the
n.

e.

RV.:

agnis (TS.

iv.

2.

10+; Kh.

iv.

6 5),

dhes,

udadhes 'water-receptacle', gires

'mountain', ghf?ies 'heat', tiraki-rajes (AV.) 'striped across', parna-dhes (AV.)

'feather-holder',

vrsd-kapes

prajapates (TS.

'man-ape',

iv.

n't),

pluses

(AV.)

'granting

hundred

i.

satd-m-utesi

'intestine',

yones,

sdm-rtes

aids',

'conflict'.
f.

This form

the RV.:
'injury',

is

made

dpites

ddites,

same way

in the

'entering

{iti-)

as in the m. from

into

(cipi)\

dmates 'indigence', drates, ahutes (AV.),

abki-sastes,

90M), bhiimyas

(l.

stems in

abhi-hrutes

dhase's 'abode', dhurtes 'injury',

(A v.), pdri-sutes 'oppression', bhiimes (AV.), vasate's,

a.
The RV. has three forms according to the derivative t-

nftes'^

(x.

1 1

srute's 'course'.

declension: nabhyas
Besides these the AV. has: d-bhUiyas, d-rdtyas,
deva-heiyas 'divine weapon', iirsakiyds 'headache';

80*), heiyas (x. 87'9).

d-sastyds 'imprecation', ahutyds, Jirsyas,

probably also ydnyas in yonyeva

(vi.

121*) for

yonya

iva.

G. m.

The regular form of this case is identical with that of the Ab.,
but is much more frequent, being made from 42 stems in the RV. The
commonest examples are: agnes{^<^), ve's (14), ddres {lo), pa?u's{?>), brhas-pdtesifi),
sures (5) 'patron', dtres (4), kaves (4), dhase's (4) 'draught', bhfires (4); fdtes 'lord'
6 Used in the sense of the ablative with
pahi 'protect from'.
2 And a number of other epithets in VS.
7 Cp. RiCHTER, IF. 9, 5.
8 This
XVI. 1723.
form nftes is probably an error
for dftes 'skin'; see Whitney's note on AV.
3 pdtye otherwise means 'husband'.
4 Lanman 382 enumerates the stems which
VI. iS^.
'

Equivalent to

kseira-pati- (K.)

pdti- {AV.).

take this dative.

5 Cp. Lanman 383

(top).

and

bhiita-

VI. Declension.

Nouns.

Vowel

Stems.

283

occurs once.
Elsewhere are found: jamad-agnes (VS. m. 62; Kh. v. 3^),
praj^pates (TS. III. i. 4'; Kh. m. t'^''^), yayes"- (Kh. \. lo^.
a.
The two stems ari- and avi- 'sheep' do not take Giina, and add the normal
ending -as: aryds' which occurs nearly 40 times, and dvyas which occurs nearly 20 times.
The stem pd/i-, when meaning 'husband', and sdMi- do not take Guaa either, but add
the anomalous ending -ur: pdtyur, sdkhyur^.

This case, identical in form with the m.,

f.

the

RV.:

ddites,

pfsnes,

puste's,

8 stems in the

abhl-sastes,

vrste's,

dmates,

istes,

is

This form

vratdtes 'creeper'.

made from

krstes 'tillage',
is

also

11 stems in

deva-vites,

nlrrtes,

made by

at least

AV.

stems in the RV. form genitives according to the derivative T- declension,

occurring 17 times altogether: dnu-maiyas, draiySs, nirj'tyds, pfinyas, bhumyas, yuvatyas.
In
the AV. svich forms are made from at least 16 stems and occur
over
50 times jdmyas 'akin' etc. One of these, ddityds, occurs also in the TS. (l. 6. %A and
VS. (I. II).
a.

Six

The only example is bhtlres, which occurs 16 times.

L. This case in all genders ends very anomalously in -a or -au- The
latter, ending occurs more than twice as often as the former in the RV.
(272 times to 126), while in the N. A. dual -a is nearly 7 times as frequent
The general conditions under which the
as -au (1145 times to 171)*.
are the same as apply to the dual
parallel L. forms -a and -au occur '
-a and -au: -a appears before consonants, -au (as -dv) before vowels, e. g.
vir yona vasatav iva (ix. 6 2 '5) 'a bird in the receptacle as in a nest'.
But
while the dual -a is the regular form at the end of a Pada, the L. -au is
almost exclusively found in that position*. As in the dual N. A. and the
It is most properfect sing, i and 3, the a-form is doubtless tlie earlier.
bably derived from a locative form with Guna (like the D. Ab. G. V. sing.),
e. g. *agndy-i, which dropped the ending (like some other locatives), *agniy
then losing its y'' before consonants and lengthening its -a: agnd. The later
form agndu must have been due to the influence of the u- stems, the inflexion
of which is closely parallel to that of the i- stems, through the Sandhi form
-a which is common to both*.
m. r. The -a form is made from 7 stems and occurs 40 times in
agni, ajA 'contest', Urmi, kuksd 'belly', ghfna, ydna, su-rabha^
the RV.:
'fragrant'. The AV. TS. VS. have no -a form in independent passages, but Kh.
n.

has agnd.

'9
1 5

III.

in -au is taken by 27 stems in the RV.: agndu, ddrau,

'manager', aratndu 'elbow', ajdu, andu 'pin of the axle', urmdu,
gdbhastau 'hand', girdu, go-patau 'lord', jTrdu " 'stream', trksdu N. of a prince,
dhvasdnau 'sprinkler', ndimccau N. of a demon, nlpatithau N. of a man,
2.

The form

aratdu''

pandu,
'lord

prt-sutdu

of

'hostile

sacrifice',

yonau,

rdthavitau

Emendation for yaydis.

Once or twice to be pronounced
Cp. Wackeenagel, KZ. 25, 289 f.

Cp.

1
2

See
dual 340
5

The

Lanman 514.
Lanman 385
ff-

ff.;

and

who

is

beside Agni';

the

Lanman

THOLOMAE, IF. 9, 25$ f10 BR. would read aratnau.

11 jiri- may be f. as there is nothing
the two
show the gender of the word.
12 The form vdnaspdtau occurs in Kh.
The old

L. -a appears only 5 times

at the

end of a Pada, and then only in

forms dmdtata and sarvatdta.
7 Cp. the N. sakhd for *sdkhci.y.
L. may be preserved in feminines
la, 3-

Cp. Meringer, BB. 16, 224.

3882, suggests the possibility
of restoring djdyi in I. 1 1210 and ydnayi in
X. 46*. The n. L. a-prald is used adverbially
'without recompense' (vill. 3216); cp. Bar8

arias.

for

cp.

and 574576.

as;nay-i- 'she

medhyatithau N. of a seer, yajnd-patau

N. of a man, vdnas-pdtau'^^ 'lord of

attack',

like

cp. IF.

id' also.

to

ir,

284

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

forest', salmaldu 'silk-cotton tree', sanitau 'attainment', samvaranau 'descendant of Sarnvarana', syama-rasmau N. of a man, svddhitau. The AV.
also forms the L. in -au from at least 16 stems; among them appears
the uncompounded pdtau (AV. iii. 18^) 'husband"
as a variant lor jane
in the corresponding passage of the RV. (x. 145'').
The TS. has dhau

the

(v. 6.

AV. III. 13').

The form in -a

I"
I.

f.

bed', aja,

cows',

I'idiia

tokd-sata

'sunrise',

made from

is

21 stems in the RV.: avdna 'river-

ksetra-sata 'acquisition of land', go-satd 'winning of

'attainment

of offspring',

devd-tata

'worship

of the

gods',

dyumnd-sata 'obtainment of strength', mbha, nr-sata 'capture of men', nemddhita 'conflict', pTta, prd-bhrta 'offering', medhd-sata 'receiving the oblation',

yama-huta
'perfect

'invocation

prosperity',

has nabha
iox sdmtati

62');

(vii.

by

sUra-sata

prayer',

'battle',

sdm-rta,

sata^, sruta, svar-sata 'attainment of heaven'.

and

the SV. reads sdmtata 'beneficent',

as

sarvd-tstd

The AV.
a variant

ofRV.vm. 18'. The TS. and VS. have no independent L. f in -5.

The form in -au is more than twice as frequent, being made from
49 stems in the RV. The commonest examples are satdu (17), vilja-satau {16),
2.

vyustau (16) 'flush of dawn', abhistau (10) 'help', su-tnatdu (14), gdvistau (7)
'fight', istdu (6), raidu
The AV. makes
(5), purvd-hutau^ (5) 'first invocation'.
this form from 7 stems in independent passages. The TS. has uditau (1.8. 12 3),
purvd-cittau

(iv.

nave', ratrau

2.10=)

(xxm. 4)

'first

thought'; the VS. ratha-nabhdu (xxxiv. 5) 'chariot

'night';

and Kh.

i.

ii^ s'dra-satau.

There are J locatives f. formed according to the derivative f- declension with

the ending -am
puravidhyam, bhuTnyam, bk^tydm, yuvaiydm, sdni-gatyani 'assembly'.
The AV. has 9 more: dvydm, dkutyam, cittyam, devd-hiUyam, prstyam 'rib', bhutyam,
yonydm, vedydm (+ VS. XXVUI. 12), sdmitydm 'assembly'.
The VS. has sanyam
a.

(vill. 54).

b. The locative vedl^ occurring twice (vi. n"; 11. 3'') is the only one formed from
an i- stem with the normal ending -i [= vidi-i). The form prdnTil may also possibly be
a L. in III. 51^.

L. n. The only form in -a

(used adverbially), and the only

is

a-prata

one

in

(viii.

-au

is

'without recompense'
saptd-rasmau (AV. ix. 5'S)

32'^)

'seven-rayed'.

V. This case regularly gunates the final vowel in the m. and f. It is

very frequent in the m., being formed from 72 stems and occurring over
1 100 times in the RV.
In the f. it is not common, being formed from only
II stems and occurring only 27 times in the RV.

m. The commonest examples are: dgne^ {"]<)<)), pate{2,^, bfhas-pate^ {7,2),

kave (26), brahmanas-pate (17), vanas-pate (14), aghrne (13) 'glowing', satpate (13) 'lord of the seat', sakhe (11) 7.
In Kh. I. 5? the anomalously
formed compound bhuvanas-pate''' 'lord of the world' occurs; in the VS.
anghare (iv. 27) a guardian of Soma, dfte (xxxvi. 18) 'bag', drApe (xvr. 47)
'causing to run', bdmbhare (iv. 27) a guardian deity of Soma, bhuvas-pate (iv.
34) 'lord of the earth', sdtesudhe (xvi. 13) 'hundred-quivered', sapte (xxix.2)
'steed'.
a.
The V. sobhare is a transfer from the t- declension; and the compounds
pdvaka-soce, bhadra-soce, htkra-soce are transfers from the -is declension, doubtless meant
to avoid the unusual form -iocis in the V.

The RV. has

only

the

form patyau

'husband'.
2 For this form in vi. 461 the SV. and
VS. have the variant saidu.
3 This form occurs also in AV. v. 11.
4 Cp. R?r. L 28; n. 35.
5 Written with Pluti VS. VIII. lo: dgnaii.

Once

(IX. 801)

with double accent bfhas-

pdte.

In make-male '0|.great-souled' (Indra), the

member is anomalously gunated as well
as the second; cp. mahe-nadi 'O great stream'.
7

first

Formed

like vanas-faie.

VI. Declension.

Nouns.

Vowel

Stems.

28s

The forms occurring in the RV. are: adite, anumate, asu-nite 'spirit- world',
upa-mate'' 'granting (of wealth)', .r/'f/,? 'radiant', bhume, mate, yuvate, satyatate^
f.

tste,

sv-angnre 'fair-fingered'.
There is also the transfer

'truth',
a.

The AV. has

osadlie

from the

darve^ 'spoon'; the VS. svadhite.

r-

declension.

Du. N. A. V. This form

alike. The m. is very frequent,

ends in -r^ and can be used in all genders

being made from 72 stems in the RV. The
commonest examples are: indragni {]%) 'Indra and Agni', hdri (j%), pdti
(33),
subMs-J>dn {21) 'lords of light'. Elsewhere also occur: sa-tdti (TS.iii. 2. 2^) 'continuous'; bAtiri-rasml {Kh.V7. 22^) \n3.n.y-xs.Ye6.'; viha-vdj>an {K.h.iU22^) 'extending (?) everywhere'. The final vowel is shortened in saksdni (x. 32') 'united'.
f.
The forms occurring in the RV. are: itd-utl 'extending from hence',
uti, fjitT, jami, ddrvJ, dySva-bkiimi 'hQa.Ytn and earth', dharaydt-kavt
'^TO\.&c\!mg
the wise', puramdfu, bhuji 'patrons', yuvatt, vdsu-dhitl 'treasuries', iiict, sd-yoni
of the same origin', su-prdturti 'very victorious', srut'i.
n. The only two regular forms are sua'' and tigmd-heti (AV.) 'having a
keen thrust'; also mdhi (with shortened final)5. There are besides one or
two secondary forms with -tti made under the influence of the n- declension:
aksifii (AV.) 'eyes' and perhaps hdrini (ix. '^o^) from hdri'^.
I. m. indragnibhyam, ddmpatibkya>u{hN .) 'husband and wife', hdribhyam.
f. vartambkyam, sronibhyam (VS.xxv.6) 'hips'.
n. sdkthibhyam 'thighs'.
D. m. indragnibhyam, indra-brhaspdtibhyam (VS.vii. 23) 'Indra and Brhas-

hdribhydm~i.

pati',

Ab. m.

kicksibhyam (AV. VS.) panibhyam (AY.).

f. pdrsnib/iyam,
f. yuvatyos.
G. m. indragnyds, hdryos.
L. lii. kuksyds, gdbhastyos^, hdryos.
f. Jamyos; gavlnyos (AV.) 'groins',
pdrsiiyos (AV.).
n. sdkthyos (VS. xxiv. i).
PI. N. V. This form gunates the final vowel of the stem, adding the

sronibhyam.

normal ending -as in the m. and f.; e. g. agndy-as, utdy-as. It is of very

frequent occurrence, but is nearly twice as common in the m. as the f.
m. This form is made from 109 stems in the RV. and occurs 523
times. The commonest examples are: kavdyas (45), vdyas (38), surdyas (36),
hdrayas (31), agndyas (27), ddrayas (26), fsayas (26), si'icayas {1?,), pdtayas
(16), ras'mdyas (16), vdhnayas (15) 'conveyers'. In the VS. also occur: ajavdyas

and sheep' (in. 43), vfsa-panayas (xxix. 44) 'strong-hoofed', vrihdyas

12) 'rice-plants'.
a.
The stem //-, being the only i- stem that does not take Gu^ia, forms its
N. pi. like the B group of the radical i- stems (except the accent): ary-as, which occurs
'goats

(xviii,

16 times in the RV.

b. The form a-hrayas 'shameless' is a transfer from the radical
sobharayas 'descendants of Sobharl' from the derivative i- declension.

T-

declension, and

made from 66

stems and occurs 290 times in the RV.

utdyas (42), dhitdyas (21), matdyas (20),
dratayas (18), ratdyas (18), krstdyas {^i), ksitdyas (13) 'mcts', jdnayas (12),
vrstdyas (12).
aiy-ds, which occurs
a. The stem ari- has the same anomalous form as in the m.
4 times in the RV.
f.

The

This form

is

commonest examples

are:

Agreeing with a^e.

The VS. (u. 49) has dan/i from darvTddrvi: The VS. (viu. 43) also has vi-iruti
which seems
pw.

srute; cp.

to
s.

be an irregular V.

for vi-

v.

stems are
3 The derivative -i, -u and
the only ones which do not take -a or -an
in the dual.

Occurring in x.85'2 and possibly Iv. 56^.

Occurring X. 9754 and perhaps also iv. 56*.
6 BR. and Grassmann place this form
under harita-.
7 No n. forms occur in the D. Ab. dual.
This word may be f. also.
4
5

i^

286

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

b. About 10 i- stems in the RV. have also N. pi. forms according to the derivative
declension: avdnls"^ 'streams', ajanls 'births', nits'' ndkfJs 'nights', nirrtTs, niskj'fts,
puramdhis, bhiimts', visva-krstls''- 'dwelling among all men', sd-yonls. The AV. also has:
aiigiills, fstts 'spears', dhamanls 'tubes', nabhJs, pdrsms, fj^sps.
The stems yayi- 'speeding', iuhhri- 'shining', karkari- 'lute' form their N. pi.
c.
according to the radical '- declension yayiyas, subhriyas (AV.), liarkaryds (AV.).
Some z-stems have transfer forms according to the /-declension: ambdyas,
d.
arundyas, kiondyas; osadhayas, sdL-varayas (TS. V. 4. 12^; VS. XVHI. 22). The TS. has also
garbhiriayas (ir. I. 26), pdtnayas (v. 2. il^ etc.), revdtayas (v. 2. 1 1'), varutrayas (iv. I. 6 j.
/'-

The normal form, in which the ending -/ coalesces

a-prati^
-i, is made from 4 stems in the JvV.
kri'tdhmi 'irascible', tri 'three', sua. The final vowel of this

N. A.

n.

I.

with the final of the stem to

'irresistible',

form

shortened

further

is

aprati,

in six stems:

a-sthuri 'not single-horsed',

sdmi^ 'work', siLrabhi. The AV. has also mdhi (besides aprati
and bhiiri). The forms in -i and -i (which are of about equal frequency)
taken together occur about 50 times in the RV.
2.
There is a secondary form (following the analogy of the -steins)
in -Tni, which is taken by 4 stems having the primary form also: apratini,
bhi'irini, h'lcini, surabktni.
These forms occur about 14 times. The AV. has
also dksini and dsthini; the latter form occurs in the TS. as well (v. 7. 2');
the VS. has iifiglni (xxxix. 8) 'entrails'.
A. m. The ending -n here (as in the -a and -u declension) represents
original -ns, which in one half (42) of the total occurrences (84) of these
forms in -in in the RV. is preserved as -ins or (before vowels) -inr. This
The commonest examples are
A. is made from 31 stems in the RV*.
sarin (14), vdnas-pdim (ri), fanin (9), rasm'in (6), sdkhln (5), girin (4)^.
The TS. also has ddhi-patln (i, 6.' 6^) 'lords', dhm (iv. 5. i^; VS. xvi. 5); the VS.

jami,

has

bhtiri,

(xxiv. 20)

tittirm

(xxiir. 8)

(xxiii. 8)

lAjin'^

'parched

grain',

iacin^

ari- is the only one -which does not take -n, but adds the normal
the A. aryds (which occurs 7 times in the RV.) being thus identical
The stem vi- in its only occurrence (i. 104') in the A. pi. uses the

The stem

a.

ending

'partridges',

'groats'.

-as instead,

with the N. pi.

N. pi. form vdyas.

This form, which is made by adding simple -s (instead of -as), e. g.

occurs from 42 stems in the RV.
The commonest examples are
dratis (16), krstis (16), ksitis (8), carsanis (7) 'people', /ra;a'/4w (7), avdiiTs (6),
dsastts (5)'. The TS. has abhistis {v./^.i/^^), dinatis (iii..i.4't), yonis {i. <,. 2,''),
vyiistTs (iv. 3. 11*); and sdcTs occurs in a Khila (p. 171, 6) ^
f.

bhamis,

a.

As

in

the

m.,

the

citrotayas (x. 140-') 'granting

stem

ari-

wonderful

has

gifts'

aryds [occurring

and sucayas (AV.

Two N. forms,
appear to be used

times).

v. i^),

for the A.
I.

m.5
RV.

is made with the

The commonest- examples

This form

regular ending -bhis from! 40 stems

ddribhis (43), rasmibhis (36),

sdkhibhis {1^), suribhis {i/(), agnibhis (\6),
anjibhis (10) 'ornaments', fsibhis (10), vibkis'^ (9).
From the VS.: plasibhis
(xxv. 8).
the

in

/a//z/Mw (28)

are

'paths', hdribkis {22,),

Beside avdnayas,

iildyas, bhilmayas, visvd-

kystayas.

5 On
the Sandhi of the
form see Lanman 394 f.

final -n in this

6 Written with pluti in the text as idjhn,

The Pada text has aprati.
BR. set up a n. stem sdmi- beside f. sdciin,
idnii-.
Grassmann recognizes sdmT- only,
7 The stems which take this form in the
making sdmi always the I. sing, with short- RV. are enumerated by Lanman 3953.
8 See ScHEFTELOWiTz' note, p. 171 (bottom).
ened final vowel. Cp. the I. sing, of sdmis

above
4

(p, 274).

Lanman 395 enumerates

which take

this accusative.

the

stems

9
10

No

n.

form occurs.

Not accented

as a monosyllabic stem.

VI. Declension.

Vowel

Nouns.

Stems.

287

f.
This form is made in the same way as the m. from 48 stems in
RV. The commonest examples are: utibhis (100), svastibhis (82), matibhis

the

(37). dhitibhis (27), su-vrktibhis (18).

a. The form uii is used
9 times as an I. pi. in the RV., as is shown both by the
sense and by the forms agreemg with it ; e. g. Ivabldr iiit (ii. 20=) 'with thine aids'.
-

b.

transfer from the ^-declension is aranibhis 'tinder-sticks'.

D. m. This form

is made with -bhyas from 9 stems in the RV.: dsvapatibhyas (VS. xvr. 24) 'masters of horses', fsib/iyas\ gand-patibhyas (VS. xvi.
25) 'lords of troops', ddsavanibhyas 'having ten C0MTSt5\ pdtibkyas, ydtibhyas
N. of a race, ras'mMyas (VS. xxu. 28), vi-b^yas', vrAta-patibhyas (VS. xvi. 25)
'lords of companies', siicibhyas, svd-patibhyas (VS. xiv. 28) 'masters of dogs',
sdkhibhyas, sambkyas, sandhibhyas (VS. xxiv. 25), suribhyas.
f. ksitlbhyas, carsantbhyas, deva-jamibhyas (VS. xxiv.
24) 'sisters of the
gods'.
There is also the transfer from the "-declension mribhyas 'women'.
Ab. m. This case, identical in form with the D., is made from 12 stems
in the RV.
agnibhyas, dtribhyas, kavaribhyas 'niggardly', girlbhyas, panibhyas,
pavlbkyas, plasibhyas, yonibhyas (VS. xiii. 34),
vdnas-pdiibhyas, vibkyas',
sdkhibhyas, sanibhyas, sthivibhyas 'bushels'.
f.
amhatlbhyas 'distresses',
angi'dibhyas (AV.), ksitibhyas, carsanibhyas, jdnibhyas, dhamdnibhyas (AV.)
'blasts'.
n. asthtbhyas^ (AV. n. 33^).
G. m. This form is made from 28 stems in the RV. (a) oxytones
are agnindm, kavinam, girindm, carsamnAm, deva-jaminam (AV.), nidhmdm
'treasures', panindm, pathindm, maninam (AV.), mathindm'', rayincim, vapinSm^
(Av.), vmdm, sanJnd7n^; (b) otherwise accented: dtrinam, dvfnam, dhmam,
fsTndm, gandhdrinam N. of a people, cardninam 'active', tuvisvdntnam 'loud_

roaring',

dhunXnam

'roaring',

mahi-svdninam

'very noisy',

muninam

'seers',

vdnas-pdilnam, vi-mahinam 'very great', vydtinam 'steeds', mcmam, sdkhlnam,

hdrinam, havir-mdthinanii 'disturbing sacrifices'. Aho grhd-patxnam (y'Si.\yi.2,9)

dhdrma-patinam (VS. ix. 39) 'guardians of law'.

is made from 18 stems in the RV.': (a) oxytones: kavindm,
krstmam, ksitindm, carsanindm, jammdm, dur-matlndm 'hatred', dhautindm
'wells', pustJnam, maffnam, raytndm, su-ksitindm,
su-matmAm, su-stutinAm;
(b) otherwise accented: aratinam'^ (K.h. l 55), upa-stutmnm 'invocations',
jdninam, nirrtinam, mdnanam 'particles of light', si'icinam.
L. m. This form is made with the ending -j-^/, which becomes -su, from
16 stems in the RV.: d-kavisu 'not wise', agnisu, anjisu, d-samatisu 'incomparable',
'householders',

f.

This form

apisu 'kinsmen', fsisu, khadisu

ajisu^

girisu, nidkisu, pathisu, pavisu,

'rings',

yonisu, rasmisu, subhrisu, sUrisu.

f.

This form

is

made from

21 stems,

jdmi-, subhri-) end in -H-: abhi-maiisu

krstisu,

ksitisu,

'distresses',

n.

but three of which [a-vyathi-,

a-vyathisu,

isiisu,

iitisu,

rstisu,

gdv-istisu, jamisu, div-istisu 'devotions', devd-hUtisu, pdristisu

pustisu,

prd-mtisu,

prd-sastisu (TS.i. 7.7'; VS.

satisu.

all

'plots',

prd-turtisu

'speedy

motions',

prd-yicktisu,

ydma-huHsu, ratisu, vyiistisu, subhrisu,

a transfer from the T- declension.

ix. 6) 'praises',

The form ndrisu'^

The only example

is

that occurs

is

bhurisu.

3 See Whitney's note on AV. xix. 246.

j^sibhyas in Valakhilya
6 Also the numeral trmdm.
doubtless an error.
2 Not accented as a monosytlabic stem.
7 In about a dozen out of 128 occurrences
3 With wrong accent for dsthibhyas; cp. resolution of -am to -aam seems necessary.
8 Resolution of -am to -aam seems to be
asthabhyas (VS. xxiu. 44).
necessary in 4 out of 98 occurrences.
4 Val. 58 ; BR. and Grassmann would read
9 Wrong accent for aratmam.
maiinam, which is actually the reading of
1 On the other hand svdha-kriisu is a
the Kashmir Ms. Scheftelowitz, Die Apotransfer from this to the ?-declension.
kryphen des Rgveda 40.
1

XL

Once accented

6,

288

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

Vedic Grammar.

Radical u-stems.

5. a.

Lanman, Noun-Inflection 400

4.

Whitney,

419.

Grammar 348 352.

This declension comprises strictly speaking only m. and f. stems;

few distinctively n. forms which occur are made only from stems in
which the u is shortened and which therefore in form belong to the u- deThe normal endings, as they appear in the inflexion of consonant
clension.
stems, are taken throughout
The G. pi., however, adds the ending -nam to
compound stems'; and the N. sing, always has -s.
This declension contains seven monosyllabic stems, one of which is m.,
five , and one m. and f ; two reduplicated i. substantives and one adjective;
and about 60 compounds, almost exclusively adjectives, made with the roots
382.

for the

;u- 'speed', dyu- {diu-) 'play', pa- 'purify', bhu- 'be', su- 'swell', su- 'bring forth',
hu- 'call', and with the modified forms kru-, gu- 'go', dru- 'run', snii- 'drip',

which may be treated as

m. j'li- 'speeding', 'steed',
sa-

'mother',

sytt-

roots.

The stems

su- 'begetter';

'thread'

(VS.),

occurring are
f du- 'gift', bha-

sra-

'stream'.

monosyllables

i.

alphabetical order of the roots)

(in the

stems:

reduplicated

2.

jukii- 'tongue', j'uha- 'sacrificial spoon', jogii- 'singing aloud'.

bkra- 'brow',

'earth',

compounds

3.

api-ja- 'impelling', kaso-jii- 'hastening

N. of a man, dhi-Ja- 'inspiring the mind', nabho-jn- 'cloudimpelling', mano-jii- 'swift as thought', yatu-Ju- 'incited by 'demons', vayo-ja'stimulating strength',
vasu-jii'procuring goods',
viha-ja- 'all-impelling',
sadyo-jii- 'quickly speeding', sena-ja- 'swift as an arrow'.
eka-dyti- m. N. of
a seer, kama-dyii- f. N. of a woman.
agre-pii-^ 'drinking first', uda-pa'purified by water', keta-pa- (VS. TS.) 'purifying the will', ghrta-pu- 'clarifying
ghee', madhu-pri- 'purifying itself by sweetness', vata-pu- 'purified by the wind',
visna-pti- m. N. of a man, su-pu- 'clarifying well',
sva-pii- 'broom'.
dnabhu- 'disobedient', abhi-bhu- 'superior', a-bhii- 'present', pari-bhu- 'surrounding', punar-bhd- 'being renewed', puro-bhic- 'being in front', pra-bhu- 'excelling',
to the

water

(?)',

7nayo-bha- 'causing pleasure',

vi-bhu- 'far-extending',

where', vihd-samb/iU- 'beneficial to

ciate',

su-bhu-

sura-sU-

'good',

svayam-bhu-

with liquor'.

'exultant

'self-existing',

yama-su-

forth',

secretly',

raja-sU-

'bringing

'king-creating',

sv-abhii-

'not bringing

a-su-

'barren', nava-sii- 'having recently calved',

'bringing

viiva-bhti- 'being every-

sam-bAii- 'beneficent', sac'a-bhu- 'asso-

all',

'helping well'.

forth',

a-susii-

purva-sU- 'bringing forth

forth

twins',

viiva-sU-

raha-sd-

'all-generating',

first',

pra-stl-

'bringing
vira-sU-

bearing', sakrt-si'i- 'bringing forth once', su-sd- 'bringing forth easily'.

(AV.)

forth

'heroa-hii-

u-hd-^ 'crying aloud', varsa-hii- (VS.) f, sumna-hii- (TS.) 'invoking

favour', su-hd- (VS.) 'invoking well'.
mitra-krd- i. a kind of demon.
agre-gd-'' 'moving forwards'.
raghu-drd- 'running swiftly' 5.
ghrta-snu'dripping ghee"".
'invoking',

Vocalic pronunciation. Before vowels the ii has regularly a vocalic value in

In monosyllabic stems it is always written as -uv; generally also in
compounds even when preceded by a single consonant. In the minority of compounds
(some 9 stems in the RV.) it is written as v, but pronounced as a vowel. In the latter
instances it is always given as u below; c. g. vibhva as vibhua.
b. Accentuation.
Except in the monosyllabic stems, which follow the general
rule, the accent remains throughout on the same syllable, which is almost always the
a.

pronunciation.

radical one.
1 The monosyllabic and the reduplicated
stems, on the other hand, added -am, as far
as can be inferred from bhnvdm &ndJ6guvdm,
the only examples which occur.
2 -pii- here
-pa- 'drink'.

Perhaps an onomatopoetic word.

4 -gu-

Cp.

here

= ga-

'go'.

Lanman

402.
6 About a dozen of the above compounds
(all but 3 or 4 of them being formed with
bhu-) also shorten the final of the stem,
5

which

is

then inflected like an - stem.

VI. Declension.

Vowel

Nouns.

Stems.

289

Inflexion.

383. The

inflexion is identical in the m. and f. Several of the cases do

not occur at all in the m,, viz.
Ab. L. V. sing., 'l. D. Ab. G. L. du., D.
A.b. pi. In the monosyllabic stems several cases are wanting
in both genders,
viz.
A. D. V. sing., and all the cases of the pi. except the N. A. G.
The
forms actually occurring, if made from bha- i. 'earth' and the adjectives

a-bha- 'present' and ri-bhii- 'far-reaching', would be as follows:

1. Sing.
N. bhus. I. bhuva. Ab. bhuvds. G. bhuvds. L. bhuvi (VS.).
Du. N. bhuva. I. bhubhyam (VS.). L. bhuvos. PI. N. bhi'was. A. bhuvas.
G. bhuvam (VS.).
2. Sing.
N. abhus; vibh&s.
A. abhuram; vibhuam. I. abhuva; vibhua.
D. ablmve; vibhue.
Ab. i. vibhiias (AV.). G. m. abhuvas.
Du. N. A. abhuva. PI. N. abhuvas; vibhuas. A. m. f. abhmas; f. vibhi'.as.
I. m. f. abhiibhis.
G. m. f. abhiinam.
L. m. I. abhiisu.
The forms actually occurring are:
Sing. N. m. jtis (VS. iv. 17), stts; eka-dyis.
uda-ptis (AV.), keta-pih
(VS. IX. I ; TS. V. I 1 3), madhu-pUs ( AV.), vata-pas (AV.).
abhi-bhis, pari-bhiis,

_.

puro-bhUs, pra-bhtls (AV.), mayo-bhtts, vi-bhus (AV.), visvd-sambhus, s'am-bhds (VS.

AV.), saca-bhUs, su-bhds (VS. AV.), svayam-bhtls.
sumna-hih (TS. iv. 6. 3+),
su-hiis (VS. I. 30) 'invoking well'.
f. bhh, sds, syds (VS. v. 21); j'uhds (AV.
VS.).
kama-dyds.
abhi-bhds (AV.), picnar-bhtts, pra-bhns (VS. AV.), mayobhus, sam-bhds (AV.).
pra-sds (AV.), yama-sds, raha-sds, vira-siis, su-siis.
varsa-hds (VS. xxiv. 38) 'frog'.
A. m. I. kaso-jicvam, mano-juvam, vasu-juvam; abhi-bhuvam (AV.),
a-bhiivam,
mayo-bhiivam, visvd-sambhuvam, sambht'ivam, saca-bhuvam, svabhuvam; 2. vunJ-ptiam; vi-bhi':am, su-bhuain.
f.//47j/ 'sacrificial spoon';

1.

kama-dyiivam,

7'iha-ji'ivam,

saca-bhuvam;

2.

a-s-jani^,

saki't-slam.
I.

m.

'tongue'
IIL

47).

I.

D. m.
2,

mano-Ji'tva,

and

visna-pue,

Ab.

'spoon';

n.

I.

I.

sena-juva.,
i.

mayo-bhuva;

2.

su-pua (VS.

2.

vi-bhiia.

I.

f.

(AV.),

bhuva; juhua.
i.
8. 3'; VS.

3).

vi-bhine (VS. xxii. 30),

su-bhue.

mayo-bhuva (TS.

punar-bhi'tva (AV.),

abhi-bhuve,

vi-bhi'ie,

sv-abhi'tva;

visva-si'iam

visva-bhure,

saca-bhure;

bhuvds; a-susuas (AV.).

G. m. sam-bhi'ivas, sacd-bht'ivas'.
f. bhuvi (VS.).
V. f. Juku (AV.).
Du. N. A. m. mano-Juva; mayo-bhuva, sam-bhuvd, saca-bhuvd; ghrtasni'tva^.
f. sri'ivd; apT-jiivS; punar-bhuva, visvd-sambhuvd, viivd-sambhuiau
(VS. X. 9), sambhiiva, sacd-bh'iva.
I. f. bhrubhyam (VS.).
L. f. bhruvos.
PI. N. m. juvas; I. d-duvas, d-bhuvas, u-huvas, nabho-ji'mas, pari-bhuvas,
mano-juvas, mayo-bhiivas, raghudrdvas, vayo-juvas, sam-bhi'ivas, V. sacdbhuvas (VS. in. 47), sadyo-juvas, su-bhuvas, sv-dbhuvas^; 1. vi-bhuas, sic-bhuas;
f. duvas, bhuvas; juhi'ias 'tongues' and 'spoons'; i. V. agre-gtivas
surd-Mas.
(VS.), V. agre-puvas {yS,^, dhi-Juvas, punar-bhuvas, mayo-bhuvas, mitra-kri'a as;
V. visva-sambhuvas (VS. iv. 7); 2. ghrta-puas, nava-suas, pra-suas, vi-bhuas,
f.

f.

L.

bhuvds.

su-bhuas.

A. m. dn-dbhuvas, mayo-bhuvas^.

f.

diivas,

bhuvas; d-bhuvas, d-huvas.

1 The transition
3 Cp, Lanman 413 (middle).
form a-sum (VS.) under
4 There are also the transfers from the
the influence of the derivative T- stems also
The form ayogum (VS. XXX- 5) is a- declension d-prayuvas, madhyayuvas, initraoccurs.
yuvas, sramayuvas.
perhaps of the same kind.
2 The AV. has
5 In n. 143 Jus is perhaps contracted for
also the transition form
jiias.
punar-bhuv-as.

Indo-arische Philologie.

I,

1.

19

290

1.

Allgemeines und Spkache.

mayo-bkuvas,

ghrta-snuvas,

creating', vi-bkuas^.

sana-juvas\

4.

Vedic Grammar.

pra-suas,

raja-sicas

(VS. x. i) 'king-

i, juhfibhis 'tongues' and 'spoons'; sva-pubhis.

m. a-bhiibhis.
bhuvam' (VS. xxxvii. 18); purvaf.
G. m. joguvam; yatu-janam
sUnam.
f. pra-sasu.
L. m. a-bhttsu, puru-bMsu 'appearing to many'.

I.

5. b.

Lanman,
362364.

Noun-Inflection

Derivative u- stems.

400419.

Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar 355

359,

384. This declension is almost entirely restricted to f.^ stems, which (like
or B group of the radical i- declension) accent the final
vowel and in inflexion are practically identical with the radical stems. The
stems which it comprises may be divided into two groups. The first
f.
contains about 18 oxytone f. substantives corresponding in several instances
to m. or n, stems in -u accented on the first syllable: a-grii- (m. d-gru-)
'maid', kadrii- (m. kddru- 'brown'J 'Soma vessel', kuhii- (AV.) 'new moon',
gugguli- (n. guggulu-) (AV.) N. of an Apsaras, guiigii- N. of a goddess,
camii- 'bowl', jatti- (n. jatu-) (AV. VS.) 'bat', tana- 'body', dhana- {dhdnu-)
'sandbank' (AV.), nabhami- 'well', nrta- 'dancer', prdakd- (m. pfdsku-) 'serpent'
svasra- (m. svdsura-)
( AV.), prajana- (AV.) 'organ of generation', vadha- 'bride',
also kySmbu-^ (n. kiydmbu-) an,
'mother-in-law', saranyA- N. of a goddess;
The second group comprises oxytone i. adjectives
aquatic plant (AV.).
corresponding to m. oxytones: ainkoyii- 'troublesome', aghayii- 'malicious',
the

derivative

apasyii-

'active',

abhi-dipsii-

'wishing

to

deceive',

asita-jmi- (AV.) 'black-kneed', ayti- 'active',

'movable',

avasyii-

'desiring favour',,

udanyu- 'seeking water',

carismi- 'moving', jighatsa- 'hungry', tana-

'thin',

caranya-

didhisa- 'wishing

dzir-hanay ri- 'meditating harm', duvasyu- 'worshipping', devayii- (VS.)'

'devoted to the gods', dravitmi- 'speeding', patayalil- 'flying', panasyi- 'glorious',
parayisna- 'victorious', prtanayii- 'hostile', prsanayU- 'tender', phalga- 'reddish',
babhrii- 'reddish brown', bibhatsA- 'loathing', makhasyti- 'cheerful',
madka-^
matidrayii- 'gladdening',
makiyU- 'joyous', mumuksa- 'wishing to
'sweet',
vi-panyu- 'admiring',
sundhyu- 'radiant', sanayuvacasyu- 'eloquent',
free',
to gain',

'wishing for gain',

sudayitna- 'yielding sweetness';

also su-drii- 'having

good

wood' {dru-Y.
Vocalic pronunciation. Before vowels the - has almost invariably a vocalic
a.
value in pronunciation. It is written as uv in the substantives agru- and kadrii-, and in
adjectives when the -il is preceded by y, also in bTbhatsu- ^.
Otherwise though always
written as v it is (except four or five times at the most in the RV.)8, here also to be
pronounced as a vowel. Hence the >forms written in the Samhita with simple 'i are
given below with u.
The derivative ;7-stems not only accent the final syllable^ but
b. Accentuation.
1 VS. XXIV. 25 has the form sTca-pUs a kind
6 Also as a substantive f, 'good beam'.
BR. and pw. however regard su-dri'iam as A.
of bird.
2 In the V. viivjsam bhuvam pate.
of a m. substantive su-dru- 'starkes Holz'.
3 There are only five m. forms: 'ii.prasus
7 This is the regular practice in the TS.
'guest', cfc//(7-i'aK!7j 'whose body is not cooked', even when a single consonant precedes the
sdrva-taniis (AV.) 'whose body is entire'; -it, e. g. iaHuv-am; cp. IS. 13, I05 f.
8 ianvas 3 times,
camvbs once, ianvam
A. krka-dasuam a. kind of demon; I. pi.
maksiibhis 'swift'.
perhaps once; cp. Lanman 408 (top).
liydmbii- (AV.) and the
4 This is the only f. stem in this declen9 Except the
f.
sion not accented on the final vowel; but two m. Bahuvrlhis dtapia-tanu- and sarvaTA. VI. 41 has the normally accented kyambu-. tanii'.
5 The corresponding m. in this instance
is not oxytone, madhu-.

VI. Declension.
retain the. accent

Vowel

Nouns.

Stems.

291

on that

syllable throughout their inflexion.

In this respect they agree
of the radical i- declension and differ from the ordinary derivative
declension.
c.
Transition fprms. There is an incipient tendency here to be affected by
the analogy of the derivative z"-stems. The only certain example in the RV. is the L.
ivasruam (x. 8546) for *ivasrm; the 1. dravitnua is perhaps another instance i. But the
AV, has at least 10 such forms: A, kuhum, ianum, vadAum; D. agruvai, vadhvai, svasruai;
Ab. punar-bkuvas; G. uniaruas^ 'gourd', prdakuas, svasruas; L. ianudm. The VS. has
A. pumscalu7n, D. tanvai, G. tanvas.

B group

with the
I-

Inflexion,

In the L. sing, the -i may be

385.
Samhitas -m sometimes appears in the
occasionally taken as the endings of the
-am appears once in the RV. also. The

dropped

in

A. for -am,

the

RV.

and

-ai,

In the later
-as,

-am are

D. G. L. respectively. The ending

forms actually occurring, if made

from tami- f. 'body', would be as follows:

Sing. N. tamis. A. tanuam. I. tanua. D. tanue. Ab. tam'ias. G. tanuas.
L. tanui and tana. V. tdnu.
Du. N. A. tam'ca. D. tanabhyam. L. taniios.
PI. N. tani'ias. A. tanuas. I. tanubhis. D. taniibhyas.
G. tandnam.
L. tanusu.

The forms actually occurring are:

Sing. N. m. prasiis, d-tapta-tanus,

sdrva-tanus (AV.).
f. asita-jnUs
guggulas (AV.), gufigas, jatas (VS.),
nrtUs, patayalcis (AV.), prdakas (AV.), phalgUs (VS.

(AV.)j kuhus (TS. AV.),

kySmbus ^

{KSf.),

dhantls (AV.),
XXIV. 4), madhUs (AV.), vadhiis, sundhyiis, svasrds, saranyds.
A. m. krkadasuam^.
f.
carism'iam, jighatsi'iam (AV.),
tanuam^,
prdakuam^ (AV.), vadhuain, su-druamT; avasyuvam, dur-hanayi'tvam, devayuvam (VS. I. 12), makhasyuvam, vacasyuvam, sundhyicvam, su-dri'cvam (SV.).
With ending -m for -am: kuhnm (TS. AV.), tandm (TS. AV.), pumstands,

calam (VS. XXX.

I.

f.

5),

vadhum (AV.

Kh.

tanua^, vadkiia; duvasyuva.

iv. 5').

D.

f.

tant'ie^.

With ending

-a/:

agruvai (AV.), tanvai (VS. xxiiL 44), babhrvdi (VS. xx. 28), vadhvdi^ (AV.),
svasrudi (AV.).
Ab. f. kadri'cvas; tanuas.
''
With ending -as: tanvhs
G. f. agri'ivas, sundkyuvas; tamias^^, vadAuas.

17), prdakuas (AV.), svasruds (AV.).

Without ending: camd'^^,
L. f. catm'd, tani'd^^.
ending -am-. svasruAm; tanvsm''^ (A^-)) tanuvam^^ (TS. l

(VS.

III.

V.

f.

tand^^.

With

7. 12^).

bdbhru, vddhu.

1 Because
the accent is shifted to the times. The TS. has tanuva (i. i. los etc.)
ending as in the derivative t- declension; In RV. X. 241 camu is once perhaps a contracted I.; see Lanman 409 (top).
cp. Lanman 404.
2 See Lanman 41 i'.
9
The AV. has tanue 6 times, tanve
The TS. has tanuve.
3 The TA. has the normal accentuation 7 times.
1 The AV. has vadhvdi and vadhuai once
ky ambit-; the corresponding stem in the RV.

kiydmbu- n.
That the word is m. is probable because
sdrvam seems to agree with it (i. 297). The
A. m. abhTruam 'fearless' is a transfer from
the u- declension.
5 The AV. has tanvam once, tanuam 1 6 times.
The TS. regularly \xs.stanuvam[}..%. lo^, etc.).
6 The
read prdakvam ; see
.Mss.
all
Whitney's note on AV. x. 4'^.
7 As an adj. in vil. 322, 'made of good
wood'; as a subst. in x, 288 'good beanj'.
8 The AV. has
iamiS 4 times, ianva 5
is

each.
11

The AV, has tanuas 10 times,

The TS. has tanuvas.

tanvas

4 times.
12

Three or four times

ianuT,

metrically

lengthened (the Pada has z); cp, Lanman

411 (bottom). The TS. (iv.3.131) "Wsstaniivi.
J3 camu occurs 6 times, camui once.
14 tanu occurs once, tanui 3 times.
15 This should doubtless be read tanvam
\

see

Lanman

412.

J 6
This form in TS. iv. 2. 6^ is a variant
for the G. sing, tanvas of RV. x. 9710.

19*

292

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

Du. N, A. f. camua,

tam'ta.

D.

Vedic Grammar.

4.

haniibhyam'^ (TS.

f.

16').

vii. 3.

L. camuos^.

N.

agruvas;

jatiias (AV.), tamias'*, prdakuas (AV.),

apasyuvas, avasyi'ivas, ayuvas, udanyiivas,
carariyi'ivas{PiM .), didhisuas, panasy'ivas, parayisntias, prtanay'ivas, prsanayuvas,
bihhatsnvas, makhasyi'ivas, mandrayuvas, niahiyuvas, mumuksuas, sanSyiivas,
sudayitniMs.
yuva-yhs (iv. 41^), agreeing with N. f. dhlyas, appears to be
a contracted form for -yii-as^.
A. f. I. agruvas; tanuas^, nabkamias, vadkuasT.
2. abki-dipsuas,

PI.

prajatii'tas

I.

f.

(AV.).

2.

cami'ias,

ainho-yiwas,

dravitniias ; vi-panyuvas, sundhyiivas^

D.

tannbhyas.

f.

G.

f.

L.

camusu, tanihu.

I.

f.

6.

I.

m.

2.

2.

f.

ianubhis.

aghayfmam

'

(AV.),

babhrusu.

Radical

a.

maksiibhis'^.

tanUnam, vadhiinatn

i.

babhrunam, bibhatsi'mam.

u-

stems.

385. There are not many u- stems derived from roots originally ending
as several of these (about nine) have joined the consonant declension
by adding the determinative -/''. Some eight stems .are, however, formed
from roots in -u, all of them but one {dyu-) being compounds. These are:
dyu- 'day', abhi-dyu- 'heavenly'; mitd-dru-^^ 'firm-legged', raghu-dru- 'running
in -u,

d-pra-yu-'^^

swiftly';

roaming';

'assiduous';

ddhri-gu-'^* 'irresistible',

There

are

vanar-gi't-

some

'forest-

12

stems in
which u is radical in a secondary sense as representing the shortened form
of the vowel of three roots ending in -u^^. These are: dhi-ju- 'inspiring the
mind', from ju- 'impel'; su-pu- 'clarifying well', from pu- 'purify'; and compounds of ^/^S- 'be': d-pra-bhu- 'powerless', <j^/4/-M,'/- 'superior', a-bhu- 'empty',
ud-bhu- 'persevering', pari-bhu- 'surrounding', puru-bku- 'appearing in many
places', pra-bhu- 'powerful',
mayo-bhu- 'delighting', vi-bhu- 'far-extending',
sam-bhu- 'beneficent', su-bhu- 'good'.
387. The inflexion of these words is identical with that of derivative
u- stems.
Forms which occur are the following:
Sing. N. m. ddkri-gus,
d-pra-bhus, pra-bhi'ts,
mayo-bhus, mitd-drus,
su-sti'i-

'highly praised''^.

besides

vanar-giis, vi-bhus, sam-bhus'^T

n. d-pra-bhu, d-prayu, a-bhu, ud-bhi'i (AV.),
pra-bhu, mayo-bhu, raghu-dru, vi-bhu, sam-bhu, su-bhu.
A. m. ddhri-gum, abhi-dyum, abhi-bhi'nii(AN.), a-bhum,pra-bhum, vi-bhum'^^.
I. m. mayo-bhuna.
n. su-puna (AV.).
.

There are

two m. transfers from

9 This is only a metrical lengthening of
madhuyuva and pasva; the stem vowel (Pada u),
10 Cp. Lanman 418^.
cp. Lanman 403 and 413 (mid),
11 See above, stems in derivative
^ This
is
really a transition form from
-^(307).
12 From dru- 'run'. On sddru- see Whitthe derivative u- declension.
3 camuos occurs 14 times, camvds possibly
ney's note on AV. xv. 71,
I

the

II-

once

also

declension,

13

(ix. 962').

ianvas; see Lanman 408 (top).

The TS. has tanuvas.
5 On raiha-yus (x, 70^) standing
possibly
iox -yus
yu-as, see Lanman 4152.
6 RV. 20 times, AV. 3 times tanuas; RV.
twice, AV. once ianvas. The TS. has tanuvas.
On Weber's conjecture (IS. 13,58) visvas as

Once

A.

pi.
7

(=
*

see

of

see Lanman 41 6^.

of the AV. once read badhvas

*vi'su-

The Mss.

vadAuas).
On ratha-yus (vil. 2^) for -yus

Lanman

416''.

The VS.

14

From yu- 'separate', 'keep away'.

'going unrestrained', hora. g^u- ^a' =gd-,
'

15

The words

sabar-dhii- 'yielding nectar',

and a-smrta-dhru- 'not caring for enemies',

seem to be compounded with -duh [-dhtik)
and -druk [-dhruk see pw.).
:

They

are therefore transfers from the

radical 2J- declension, all the N, A. neuters
of which are thus formed.
17 sabar-dhus (VS. V, 26 ; Kh, IV. 520) ==
"6

sabar-dhiik.
yiias,

(xxi. 25) \^%jatus.

18

sabar-dhum A.

f.

= sabar-duham.

VI. Declension.

Vowel

Nouns.

Stems.

293

D. m. dd/iri-gave, abhi-dyave.
G. m. pra-bhos, su-stos.
L. n. ud-bhdu (VS. xv. i), mitd-drau.
V. m. adhri-go, pra-bho (AA. iv. i
Kh. v. 4)'.
Du. N.^A. V. m._ ddhri-gu\ abhi-dyu (Kh. l s*), pari-bhu (AV.), puru-

i>kii,

puru-bhu, vanar-gii, sam-bha, sam-bhu.

N. m. ddhri-gavas^, abhi-dyavas,

PI.

V. vi-bhv-as^.

A, m.
I.

mayo-b/iiin,

m.

d/il-jdvas,

mitd-dravas'', vi-bhdvas,

n. mayo-bhu.

dyubhis;

dyiiti,

vi-bhiin (VS. xx. 23J.

d-pra-yubhis, abki-dyubhis, vanar-gubhis (AV.), vi-bhubhis.

6.

b.

Derivative

Lanman, Noun-Inflection 400419.

u-

stems.

WHITNEY,

Sanskrit

Grammar 335346.

388. This declension embraces a large number of nouns of all genders.

The masculine stems greatly preponderate, being about four times as numerous
as the feminine and neuter stems taken together; while the neuters considerably outnumber the feminines.
Thus the N. and A. sing, are formed by

about 430 stems

The normal
the N. A.

sing,

by 68

in the m.,

inflexion

du, pi.

which
n.,

is

is

in

the

n.,

practically

and by 46
same in

the

closely parallel

to

that

in the in the

genders,

all

of the

i-

stems

RV.

except
(380).

The stem takes Guna in the same cases; but while in the 2- declension only
one word [ari-) ever uses the unmodified stem, 8 or 9 words may do so
here.
The endings, too, are closely analogous; but while in the i- declension
the ending of the L. sing, is always dropped, it is here retained in several
words; and while the n- declension has affected only the I. sing, of the ideclension, it has here affected all the other cases of the singular which
take vowel endings. Finally, the accentuation is exactly parallel to that of

of the

stems.

i-

Adjectives in -u often use

otherwise they form tlie f. in -?7, as
a.

'broad', prthii- m., prthv-i-

(VS.)

f.

this

stem for the feminine also

tanii-ra,, ianil-i,

'broad', bahu-

bahv4-

'thin'; or in
f.

-r,

e. g. cam- 'dear'
as ?- m., itrv-i-i,

'much', mrdu- (AV.) m., mrdv-t-

f. .'soft'.

b.

The

normal endings

stems wliich

are

to the unnltered

to ari- in having forms that attach the

are: pah't-, pitu-; kfiu-, krdiu-, madhii-, vdsu-, sisu-,

analogous

stem

sahasra-baku-.
c. Oxytone stems when the final vowel is changed to v, throw the accent on a
following vowel not as Svarita but as Udatta; they also shift it to \.\it-nam of the G. pi.
even though the stem vowel does not in that case lose its syllabic value; e.g.pahl-nam.
d. Transition forms,
i.
There are in the RV. only three forms which follow the
analogy of the derivative T- declension: D. isv-ai, G. isv-as, su-vasiv-as, all in late passages;
the AV. also has rajjv-d7n^,
2.
Transitions to the ii- declension appear in the A.
d-bhTrvam, from d-bhTru-, and in several words formed with the suffix -yu which make
their N. pi. or du. as -yuvas, -yuva.
3. Besides some 46 I. forms m. and n. sing., there
are several transitions to the n- declension in the remaining cases of the sing., all neuter
forms (except the m. G. cdninas): D. mddkune; Ab. mddhnnas, sdnunas; G. cdi-unas,
ddnunas, druijas, mddhunas, vasunas; L. dyuni, sdnuni; also a few other forms from the

later Saiphitas.

Inflexion.

The N. sing. m. f always takes -s, the A. simply -jn. The D. Ab.
sometimes attach the normal endings to the unmodified stem; but

389.
G.
1

sing,

In the

f.

u of the stem

V. prihic-sto 'broad-tufted', the

stu-

= stukn-

'tuft'

may be

radical.

the radical
druvas.

il-

declension d-prdyuvas, raghu-

5 See Lanman 4142.

d-smr/a-d/tnl == dsmria-druhd.
6 The Mss. in AV. vi. 1212 read rdjvam.
For ddhri-gavas owing to the false anathe only form of this word which occurs in
logy of gdvas 'cows'.
4 There are also the forms according to the RV. is the N. sing, rdjjiis.
2

94

I-

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

they generally gunate the stem, which then adds only -s instead of -as in
Ab. G. The L. sing, sometimes gunates the stem and adds -t, but
The V. always gunates the stem.
generally' takes Vrddhi without an ending.
The N. pi. m. f. nearly always gunates the -2(, to which the normal ending
The A. pi. in the m. adds -n, in the f. -s, before which the
-as is added.
vowel is lengthened. The G. pi. always takes -nam, lengthening the preceding vowel. The N. A. V. du. m. f. have no ending, simply lengthening the
The adjective mddhu- 'sweet' may be used to illustrafe the
final vowel.
forms actually occurring:
Sing. N. m. f. mddhus, n. mddhu. A. m. f. mddhum, n. mddhu. I. m. f. n.
the

mddhva, m. n. mddhuna. D. m. f. n. mddhave, m. mddhve. Ab. m. f. n. mddhos,

m. n. mddhvas, n. mddhunas. G. m. i. n. mddhos, m. n. mddkvas; n. mddhunas.
L. m. f. n. mddkau, m. n. mddhavi, n. mddhuni. V. m. f. mddho, n. mddhu.
Du. N. A. V. m. f. mddhu, n. mddhvT. I. m. mddhubhyam. D. m.
mddhubhyam. Ab. m. n. mddhubhyam. G. m. mddhvos, n. mddhunas (AV.).
L. m. f. mddhvos.
PI. N. V. m. f. mddhavas; mddhvas. N. A. n. mddhu, mddhu; mddhuni.
A. m. mddhun; t?iddhvas, f. mddhus; mddhvas. I. m. f. n. mddhubhis. D. m.
mddhubhyas. Ab. m. f. mddhubhyas. G. m. f n. mddhunam. L. m. i. n.
f. n.
mddhusu.

The forms actually occurring are the following:

Sing. N. m. This form is very frequent, being made from 250 stems
in the RV. and occurring nearly 900 times.
The commonest examples are:
mdus (64) 'drop', visnus (34; 'Visnu', su-krdtus (32) 'skilful', vdsus (25) 'good',
ketus (23) 'brightness', rbhus (21) 'deft', vayi'is (20) 'wind', visvdyus (18) 'kind
to all men', suni'is (18) 'son', sindhus (17) 'river', cams (16) 'dear', asmayus

(16) 'desiring us', devayiis (15) 'devoted to the gods',

isus 'arrow', otherwise f., is once (vm. 66') m.
a.

The

(JAOS. 1906,

form, yiis 'moving'

p. 72)

would read,

mdnus

(15) 'man'.

perhaps a corruption in VIII. 18'^, where Bloomfield

for ririsisla yur, ririsTstdyur
HrisTsia ayur.

is

In vn. 86^ didrksiipo perhaps stands for didfksus-\-upo; but the

didfksu, and desiderative adjectives otherwise accent the final syllable; cp.
b.

Pada reads

Lanman 405

(bottom).
f.
This form is made from 31 stems and occurs 73 times in the RV.
The commonest examples are dhem'is (22) 'cow', sindhus (11), sdrus (4)

'arrow',

vasuyus (3) 'desiring goods',

jivdtus (2)

isus (2), gatus (2) 'course',

cdrus

(2),

'life' '.

N. A. n. This form, which has no ending, is made from 68 stems and

occurs over 400 times in the RV. The commonest examples are mddhu {t])
('sweetness'), vdsu (77) 'wealth', uru (51) 'wide', caru (27), snnu (18) 'summit',
J)rthu (15)

'broad',

tri-dhatu (13) 'threefold',

puru

(13)

'much'.

The RV.

once has pdsu and the VS. (xxni.30) pani 'animal'. In other Samhitas occur
tdlu (VS.) 'palate', trdpu (AV. VS.) 'tin'.
a. The final -u is metrically lengthened in puru (i2 timesj, milhu (twice) 'wrongly',
and uru (once) 2.
b. The metre seems to require the forms ayu illx. i^fj^'), jaramj-tyu (AV. XIX. 30'),
jimu (AV. HI. 19'), parayisnii (AV. VIII. 2^8), bahu (AV. XX. 135'^), instead of the corresponding forms with -s, ayus etc., of the Samhita text.

A. m. This form is made from 179 stems and occurs over 700 times
RV. The commonest examples are: krdtum (55) 'ability', keti'im (34),
gatum (33) 'course' and 'song', indum (27), sisum (26) 'child', sindhum (22),
in the

Lanman 406 enumerates

form

the stems which

The Pada

text

here

this

N.

mithu, uru.

Cp. RPr.

always )a2js, puru,

19, 31; ix. 3.

VII. 9,

VI. Declension.

This form

f.

fflV;4,??<2

N. of a

river,

made from

is

no

'yielding

Vowel

Stems.

15 stems and occurs 50 times in the RV..

'of ruddy appearance', hum, kri'mum

arund-psum

milk',

drum, jdsum

'sprinkling ^abundantly',

Nouns.

'resting-place',

Jmitum, dhdnum

jigatnum 'speeding', jTrddanum

'sandbank', dheniim, bhujyutn 'viper',

vasuyum, sdrum, sindhum.

I. m. This case is formed
the
as
the

in two ways. i. Four stems in the RV. add

before which the -u is almost invariably pronounced
pasv-d; krdtv-a^, Usv-a.
2. Owing to the influence of
30 stems in the RV. add -na instead of the normal -a:

normal ending
v. parah-d 'axe',
declension

11-

-a,

amsi'ml, aktuna 'light',

an-aiuna 'not swift', a-bandhuna 'kinless',
isuna (Kh. iv. 73)^,
uri'ma,
rjund 'straight',
rtuna 'fixed time',
krdtuna 3, cetuna 'heed', Jisnuna 'victorious', tri-dhdtuna, dhumd-ketuna
bannered', dhrsnt'ma 'bold', pasi'mS, bkanuna, mdnuna, manyima,
'deceiver',
'splitting',

vagnuna
visnuna,

ceti'ma 'benevolence',

'roar',

vahati'ma 'bridal procession',

vayuna,

induna,
ketuna,

'smokeripi'ma

m-bhinduna

vfsa-psuna 'of strong appearance', sadhuna 'straight', suxis'zifwa (TS.iu. 2. 2 ') 'bridge', stanayitntma 'thunder', smina^

'summit'.
is made from 7 stems in the RV. by adding the normal
before which the u is pronounced as a vowel in five stems cikitvd
(AV.), panvd 'praise'; d-dhenva, isva (AV.; Kh. iv. 5 3 '), mddhva, mehatnvd
N. of a river, rdjjva (AV.) 'rope', sdrva, su-sdrtva N. of a river, hdnva 'jaw'-

This form

f.

ending

-a,

a. Six oxytone stems and also millm- form instrumentals with interposed -y-; they
are used adverbially with shift of accent to the ending anu-sthuya 'immediately', amuya
:

asuyd 'quickly',

'thus',

dhrmuya

boldly',

raghuya

'swiftly',

sadhuya

'rightly';

mithuya

'falsely'.

made

two ways. i. The normal ending -d is added

formation there is only one example: mddhva''
'honey'.
2. Owing to the influence of the n- declension 15 stems in the
RV. add -na: iiruna, krdhuna 'defective', ghrtd-snuna 'dripping with ghee',
jardyuna, 'after-birth', titauna 'sieve', trsima 'greedy', tri-dkdtuna, ddnund
'fluid', druna^ 'wood', dhrsm'mJ, pururima 'far and wide', prthunU, mddhund,
vdsunl, sdnuna, svadi'ma 'sweet'.
D. m. This case is formed in two ways. i. The ending -e is added to
the unmodified stem in three words in the RV. krdtve^, sihe, sakdsra-bahve''
'having a thousand arms'.
2. The ending e is added to the gunated final
vowel in over 60 stems in the RV. The commonest examples are: mdnave
(36), vaydve (23), visnare (13), manydve (12), aydve {\q) 'living', sundve {10),
ddsyave (g), ripdve (7), mrtydve (6) 'death', purdve (5)' 'man'.
This case is made in the same way as the second form of the m.
f.
from only three stems in the RV: Jivdtave, dhendve, sdrave.
n. This case is formed in three ways. i. The ending -e is added to the
n. This case

is

directly to the stem.

Of

in

this

Twice out of 59 occurrences pronounced

The form

krdtva occurs VS. xxxiir.

72 and twice in the Khilas (III. 162; v. d^);
and in Kh. iv.536 kartva is perhaps meant
for krdtva,
2 For the isvd of AV. v. 54.
The form kratuna, occurs 12 times,
3
kraiva 59 times, in the RV.
4 This form also occurs in VS. XX. 56 etc.,
TS. IV. I. 81 (twice) and Kh. v. S*.
kratud.

5 The words snu- and dric- are not accentuated as monosyllabic stems because they
are the reduced form of the dissyllables
sdnu- and ddrii-,
6 krdtve also occurs VS. xiv.8; xxxvill. 28.
7
8

Pronounced -bahue.
Lanman 409 enumerates the stems which

take this dative.

296

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

Vedic Grammar.

4.

2. The ending -e is added to

unmodified stem in one word: pdsv-e^.
the gunated stem in two words: urdve, visvdyave.
3. Owing to the influence of the n- declension -ne is added to the stem
The AV. also has kaiipune 'mat'.
in one word in the RV.: mddhune.
Ab. m. This case is formed in two ways. i. The normal ending -as is
added to the unmodified stem in one word only: pitv-ds 'draught'.
2. The ending -s is added to the gunated stem in 20 words in the RV.

amhos

'distress',

adhvaryos

ksipanos 'archer',

archer,
'thunder',

devayos,

'officiating

priest',

gdntos 'course',

ninitsos 'wishing

to

rtjs,

krsSnos N. of a

tanayitnos 'thundering',

blame',

puros,

babhros

(Kh.

divine

tanyatos
v.

5
1

")

'brown', manyos, mrtyos, ririksos 'wishing to injure', ranisthos 'intestine', vayos,

insnos,

sdtros, sindhos, snos.

This case is made in the same way as the second form of the m.
The only two examples are: dhdnos and vdstos 'dawn'. There is also one
transition form due to the influence of the T- declension: isv-as.
n. This case is made in three ways.
i. The
ending -as is added to
the unmodified stem in one word only: mddhvas.
2. The ending -s is
added to the gunated stem: uros, drJs'^, mddhos (Kh. iv. 12'; TS. iv. 4. 12'),
sdnos, svados.
Under the influence of the n- declension -nas is
3.
f.

added to the stem: mddAimas, sdnunas.

G. m. This case is made in two ways. I. The ending -as is added to
the unmodified stem in six words: pasvds, pitvds; krdivas, tnddkvas, vdsvas,
sUvasi.
2. The prevailing form is made by adding -s to the gunated stem,
and appears in 70 words. The commonest examples are': ayos (22\ visnos
(14), sindhos (13), aktos (11), vayos (10), ddsyos (8), mdnos (8), sdtros (5),

karos (4) 'singer'.

a. There is a single
occurs only once (vni.

transition

form according to the

n- declension

cd}~unas,

which

514).

This case is formed in one way only, like the second form of the
5 stems: aktos, dhenos, vdstos, sardyos N. of a river, sindhos.
n. This case is made like the Ab. n.
i. mddhvas'^, vdsvas.
2. The
commonest form, made from 8 stems in the RV. uros, ksos 'food', guggulos
(AV.) 'bdellium', cdros, mddhos i^- AST.), vdsos ( + AV.), vastos{-{- PCVy&fitWmg',
sadhos, svSdos.
3. ciirunas, danunas, drunas^ mddhunas'' vdsunas^.
L. m. This case is formed in two ways. i. The normal ending -/ is
added to the gunated final vowel in 7 stems: dnavi 'non-Aryan man',
trasddasyavi N. of a king,
druhydvi N. of a man, pdvlravi
ddsyavi,
visnavi,
sundvi.
2.
N. of a man,
More usually the ending is
dropped, leaving the final stem vowel with Vrddhi instead of Guna.
This form of the L. is taken by 19 stems in the RV.
aktdit 'at night',
aydu, Urdu, krdtau, cardu 'pot', druhydu, pdrsaii N. of a man, pasdu.
f.

m., from

The stem

pasu- occurs once in the N.

and pdsve must owing to the
accent be taken as the D. of that stem;
the m, stem is pasu-, D. fasdve,
2 The form d7'6s also occurs in Kh. iv, 5".
3 Possibly 4 other words written with -os,
should be pronounced with -uas: dhfsm'ias
1

as a neuter,

(x. 22^), ripuas {pi .'i^^'),

pipruas

(vr. 22'),

visnuas

(vni. 31^).
4 Lanman 410 gives a list of the stems
taking this form of the genitive.
5 Pronounced madhuas twice
out of 67
occurrences.

6 There is no certain evidence as to the

gender of dru- 'wood', but, as it is a
reduced form of dam- which is n., it may be
assumed to be n. There is also the form

drSs.
7 madhvas occurs 67 times, madhos 13 times,
mddhunas 9 times in the RV. The VS. has

three forms in independent passages,

vdsvas occurs 38 times, vdsos 8 times,
vdsunas 1 1 times in the RV.
all

VI. Declension.

Nouns.

Vowel

Stems.

297

pu?tt-gau N. of a man, putdkratau N. of a man,

purdu, mdnau and maniu \
yadau N. of a man, srihti-gau N. of a man, sindhau, setau 'bond',
^
.fz/aVa
'sacrificial post'.
f. This case is made in one way only,
like the second form of the m. The
only example in the RV. is sindhau; the AV. has sarau^ and sntau
'birth'.
n. This case is formed in three ways. i. AVith the ending -/ added
to
the gunated stem only in sanavi, which occurs 9 times.
When the adjective
djya- or avyiya- 'made of sheep's wool' immediately follows, the L.
of this
word appears as sAno. The Pada here always has sfinau, but as the metre
requires a short syllable it seems likely that the ending has been
dropped
to avoid a disagreeable sequence of syllables in sanavy dvye, but
without
leaving the lengthened form of the stem {sdnsv) because of the metre.
A parallel form appears to be vdsto in the formula vdsta usrds 'at break of
dawn', which occurs 5 times in the RV.".
2. As in the m., the usual form
is that in -au formed from 8 stems:
a-rajjdu 'not consisting of ropes', vrdu,

ghrsau

'lively', prthdu, mdd/iau, vdsau, vildu 'stronghold', sAnau.

3. According to the n- declension; Ayuni, diruni (AV.), druni (Kh. l 5 "j, sanuni^.
V. m. This case, which gunates the final vowel, is formed from 58
stems.
The commonest examples are: indo (144), vaso (62), sata-krato (47)
'having a hundred powers', vayo (43), suno (36), su-krato (22)*.
f. This case which has the same form as the m., is made from
6 stems:
adri-sano 'dwelling on mountain tops', diir-hano 'ugly-jawed', prthu-sto 'having

a broad

tuft

of

hair',

sindho,

su-blho 'having strong arms',

sva-bhano

'self-

luminous'.
n. The V. n. seems to have been identical in form with the N. judging
by the only example which occurs: guggulu'' (AV. xix. 38^).
Du. N. A. V. m. This form, which is made by lengthening the final
vowel, occurs from 69 stems. The commonest examples are: indra-vayii (22)
'Indra and Vayu', vajlni-vasu (21) 'rich in swift mares',
baha (20) 'arms',
vfsan-vasu (18) 'possessing great wealth', indra-visnu (13) 'Indra and Visnu'.
The TS. has also dgna-vimu (l8. 22') 'O Agni and Visnu'. There are
besides two forms in which the final vowel is shortened ': jigatnu (vn. 65
')
'speeding' and su-hdntu (vii. 19'') 5 'easy to slay'.
f.
This form is made in the same way as the m. but is much rarer,
occurring from 5 stems only: jigatntt, dhentt, sd-bandhu 'akin', samandbandhu 'having the same kin', hd^iu.
n. This form adds the regular ending -f. The only example in the RV.
urv-i.

is

I.

The VS. has according

m. amsubhyam

an-amayitnubhyam 'curative', vr-bahubhyam

hdnitbhyam (VS. xi. 78)'".
indra-vayubhyam (VS. vil 8), indra-vimubhyam (VS. vii. 23),

'man's arms', blhi'ibhyam.

D. m.

to the - declension janu-n-t (xx. 8) 'knees'.

(VS.vir. i),

f.

bahubhylm.
1

Accented mandu only when followed by

ddhi.

5 sdnavi occurs
9 times, sdno {dvye) %
times, sdnau 10 times, sdnuni once.
6 The V. vibhdvaso in Kh. 11. 8^ is wrongly
accented.

possible m, L. with n would be rajjiini,

7-ajani of the Mss. (AV.
7 The Mss. read guggulu or guggulo. See
XX. 1333). For the reading of AV.xx. 13112
vanisthdu the Mss. have vanisjha which, if Whitney's note on the passage.
8 In both Samhita and Pada text.
correct, would be a unique example of -5
9 The RV. three times has the curious
in the L. of the u- declension.
bdhii apparently from
3 Emendation for sdrau of the Mss.; see A. m. du, bahdva
a stem bahdva-,
WHtTNEy's note on AV. v. 25'.
'o hdniibhyam, a transition to the ii- stems,
4
See Kaegi, Festgruss an Bohtlingk
in TS. IV. I. I02; Vll. 3. 16'.
48 f.
2

an emendation for

298

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

Vedic Grammar.

4.

n. janubhyam (AV.).
Ab. m. uri'ibhyam 'thighs', bahubhyam.
n. according to the - declension: jAnu?ws {KV.).
G. m. urvos^, bahvos'^.
f. hdnvos'-.
L. m. urvos (AV.), baAvos^.
PI. N. V. m. This case is formed in two ways. i. The ending -as is
added to the unmodified stem. Of this formation the only example is
mddhv-as (occurring 4 times). 2. The ending -as is added to the gunated
stem, e. g. aktdv-as. This form is very frequent, being made from 161
The commonest examples
stems and occurring over 700 times in the RV.

hidavas (67), rbhdvas (57), vdsavas (46), suddnavas (42) 'bounteous',

asdvas (30), adhvarydvas (27), aydvas (27), kardvas (18),
mitd-jhavas (2) 'firm-kneed'.
i. Of this forf. This case is formed in the same two ways as the m.
mation there are only two examples: mddhv-as, sata-kratv-as.
2. The
regular form is made from 1 5 stems in the RV. an-asrdvas 'tearless', d-bhiravas
'fearless', a-rif^az'fl'j' 'dustless', isavas, tri-dhstavas, dhendvas,pdrsavas, vasuydvas,
sdravas, sanisydvas 'desirous', sd-manyavas and sa-manydvas 'unanimous',
sindhavas, su-ketdvas, svd-setavas 'forming one's own bridge', hdnavas.
N, A. n. This form is made in two ways. i. Twelve stems take no
ending, four of them also lengthening the final vowel sometimes. These
forms occur 76 times altogether in the RV., 48 times with short, 28 times
with long vowel.
The words occurring are: uru, rju, cSru, tri-dkstu, puru',
bakti, mdd/iu, vdsu, vTli'i, sdnu, su-dhatu 'manifold', su-hdntu; urU, purU^,
vdsu'^, Vila.
The Pada text always has the short vowel.
2. The more
usual form follows the n- declension, adding -/?/, before which the final
are:

si'ndhavas (34),

is lengthened.
It is made by 14 stems ^ and occurs 127 times altogether in the RV.
aghayuni (Kh. iv. 5 3) 'malicious', aniini (AV.) 'minute',
alabuni (AV.)* 'gourds', dsruni (AV.) 'tears', karkdndhuni (VS. xix. 23) 'jujube

vowel

danuni 'fluid', daruni, devayani, purdni, prthuni,

mddhUni, yuvayani 'longing for you both', vdsuni, vdstuni, smdsruni,

berries', caruni, tri-dhatUni,

bahilni,

sanuni.

A. m. This case is made in two ways. i. The normal ending -as is

added to the unmodified stem. The only two examples of this formation
are pasv-ds and kftv-as^ 'times'.
2. The usual form is made from 43 stems
.

the vowel is lengthened.

The original
-mr 45 times before vowels and once as -ms
before ca^. The commonest examples are sdtrun (43), ddsyun (27), sindhun
(23), aktun (9), rtiin (8), pasttn (5)5. From the VS.: akhUn (xxiv. 26) 'moles',
nydnkun (xxiv. 27) 'antelopes', madgm (xxiv. 22) 'diver-birds', malimlun
(xi. 78; TS.) 'robbers', rurun (xxiv. 27) 'antelopes'.
From the Khilas: isUn

with

the

ending

(ill.

ending

-ns

still

-n,

before which

survives

as

168).

f.
This like the m. is formed in two ways. i. The only example is
mddhv-as, which occurs twice.
2. The ending -s is added, before which
The only two examples in the RV. (occurring 5
the vowel is lengthened.

'

To be pronounced

in the

uruos, bahuos, hanuos

RV.

6
1

The Mss. in AV. xx. 1341 read dlabiitii.

The A. of a noun kfiu- 'making', used

^ piru seems to be the only form of this

kind in theAV., where it occurs once (xix,

times',

49*).

times', ddsd

furu occurs 24 times, purii 12 times

but once at the end of a Pada).
3

(all

occurs twice, vasu 19 times (12

times at the end of a Pada),
5 Half of these also take the form without
n in the RV.
4

vdsii

adverbially: bhiiri ifivas (ni. 18*) 'many

sdivat kflvas (ill. S41) 'innumerable

On

un

kHvas (AV.

the Sandhi

see

Lanman

XI. 2^) 'ten times'.

of these accusatives in
415 (bottom) and 41^

(top).
9

Lanman 416 enumerates

form

this

A.

the stems which

VI. Declension.

Pronouns.

Personal Pronouns.

299

times) are: hus and dhmis. The Khila after RV.

x. 9 has the form vdrenyakratns 'mtelhgenf, but the text of Kh. iil 13' reads vdrenya-kratus
\
I. m. This form is frequent, being
made from 50 stems and occurring
over 200 times. The commonest examples = are: vdsubhis
(24), aktubhis {I'j),
rtubkis{i^), asubkis{i2), /5;'/i3/^?>(i 2) 'protectors', bidubhis
{\\), bkam'Mis{-j),
rbhiibhis (6), sindhubhis (5), snubhis^
(5).
f.
This case, formed in the same way as the m., is rare^ only
3 examples
occurring in the RV. eka-dhenubhis 'excellent cows', tri-dkitubkis, dhmiibhis.
:

a-rm^^,^zj 'dustless', dsrubhis {YS.yiyiV.()), karkdndhubhis i^^.y.yn.'^z),

jarayubhis (AV.), bahubhis, mddhubhis (Kh. i. 11
vdsubhis, smdsrubhis
7),
(VS. XXV. I ; SV.) 'beards', su-mdntubhis 'benevolent'.
n..

D. m. a-satriibhyas 'foeless', rtubhyas (y'&.-yiy.ii.i^), rbhubhyas, guhgi'ibhyas

'descendants of Guhgu', tftsubhyas 'the Trtsus' (a tribe), ddsabhlsubhyas,
'having ten reins', ddsyubhyas, pasubhyas, purubhyas, bahubhyas, mrgayubhyas
(VS. XVL 27) 'hunters', vdsubhyas, sindhubhyas.
f. There is no example in theRV.
The AV. has two: isubhyas, dhenubhyas.
n. sdnubhyas (VS. xxx. 6).
Ab. m. aktubhyas, jatrubhyas 'cartilages of the breast bone', jighatsiibhyas
{KS[>j 'seeking to devour', ddsyubhyas, bahubhyas, bhfgubhyas 'Bhrgus', mrtyubhyas

(A v.), sd-bandhubhyas (AV.).

f, dhdnubhyas, sindhubhyas.
G. m. This case is formed from 23 stems in the RV., 12 being oxytones and 11 otherwise accented: i. rtunim, rbhundm, rsundm 'flames',
carundm, devayundm, pasundm (AV. VS. TS.), pitUndm, purundm, prasundm
'very swift', babhrundm, bahundm, yjtundm 'spectres', ripundm, stayundm (VS.)
'thieves'.
2. abhi-kratunam 'insolent', abhtsunam 'reins', ahy-drsunam 'gUding
like a snake', krdtUnam, tftsunatn, ddsyunam (AV.), piyarunam (AV.) 'mischievous', bhfgUnam, mdnunam, vdsunam, sdtrunSm, sd-bandhunam (AV.), sindhunam,
svdrunam 'sacrificial posts'.
f.
dhenUndm; sindhunam.
n. mddhunam,

ydsunam
L.

m. amsusu

(AV.), puri'isu,
'all-illumining',

vdstusu,

'embraces', vdsunam.

(VS. vin. 57), aktusu, dnusu,

bahusu, yddusu, vi-bandhusu (AV.)

sdtrusu,

sindhusu.

smdsrusu, sdnusu,

sni'csu^

II.

f.

vdstusu,

(p.

185

199).

druhyiisu, pasiisu

'kinless',

visvd-bhanusu

n.

urusu,

WmTNEY,

Sanskrit

sindhusu'^.

(VS. TS.).

Pronouns.

Benfey, Vollstandige Grammatik 773780

Grammar 490526

ast'isu,

(p.

333340).
35, 714

ZDMG.

716.

Delbeuck,
Brugmann, KG. 494525, and Die Demon-

Pischel,

Syntaktische Forschungen 5, 204 221 ; cp.

strativa der indogermanischen Sprachen, Leipzig 1904.

390. The pronouns occupy a special position in declension, as being'

derived from a limited class of roots with a demonstrative sense, and as
These peculiarities are
exhibiting several marked pecuHarities of inflexion.
in some degree extended to a certain number of adjectives.
I.

Personal Pronouns.

These are the most peculiar of all, as being for each person
391.
derived from several roots or combinations of roots, as being specially
anomalous in inflexion, as not distinguishing gender and, to some extent.
1

The m. A,

sindhitn occurs oace (x, 352

in the sense of a

f.

2
Lanman 416 (bottom) enumerates the
stems taking this case.
3 Accentuated like a dissyllable as elsewhere.

4 ayusu (t. ^%^) is perhaps a transfer

for ayusu; cp. Lanman 4191,
5 With dissyllabic accent as usual.

form

300

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

not even number. Some resemble neuters in form a few have no apparent
case-ending; in two of them the ace. pi. masc. does duty as fem. also.
The forms of the first and second person' which occur are:
N. ahdm'^. A. miim, ma. I. may a. D. mdhyam, mdhya, nie^'.
1. Sing.
Ab. fiidd''. G. mdma, me. L. mdyi^.
Du. N. v&m (RV").6. A. nan. D.7 nau. Ab. avdd (TS.). G.^ nau.
nas^.
D. asmdbhyam, asmi
I. asmsbkis.
PI. N. vaydm. A. asmSn'^,
(RV.), 7ias. Ab. asmdd. G. asmakam^, asmska^^ (RV.), nas. L. asm^, asmssu''^.
(RV.).
D. tiibhyam,
I. tvdya, ivd
2. Sing. N. tvdm'^i.
A. tvSm, tva.
Ab. ivdd. G. tdva, te. L. //'5 (RV. VS.), tvdyi (AV. VS. TS.).
tubhya, te^K
Du. N. yuvdm. A. yuvatfi, vam. I. yuvdbhyavi, yuvAbfiyam. D. z/aw.
Ab. >'^z'aV (RV.). G. ji'z^wj (RV. and Kh.i.i2'}, yuvdyos (TS.iii. S.4O, 'vam.
A. yusmdn^T, f yusmds (VS'.), z/aj-'*. D. yusmdbhyam,
PI. yuydm''^.
vas.
Ab. yusmdd. G. yi/smd/iam^, yusmdka (RV^), z/^zx. V,. yusmi.
;

usual steins representing these personal pronouns in derivation or as first

of a compound are ma-, asma-; iva-, yuva-, yusma-; e. g. ma-vani- 'like me',
aa-rf;/4- 'hating us', iva-vant- 'WVe. thee', iva-yata- 'presented by thee'; jcaz/a-^M- 'desiring
you two', yiivi-dhita- 'established by you two', yuva-daita- 'given by you two'; )'usmayant- 'desiring yow' , yusmd-il/a- 'supported by yoxs.' ; yusmd-datia- 'given by you' '9.
b. The forms mad-, asmad-, ivad- occur a few times as first member of compounds;
thus mat-kria- 'done by me', viat-sakhi- 'my companion', mat-tas (AV.) 'from me'; asmdtsakhi- 'having us as companions', asviad-rdta- (VS.) 'given by us'; tvat-piti'- (TS.) 'having
thee as father'; ivad-yoni- (AV.) 'derived from thee', ivdd-ij,vScana- (TS.) 'having thee as
a.

The

member

umpire'.

aham-, mam-, mama-; asme-;

;
thus aham-uttara- (AV.)
aham-yu- 'proud'; mdm-p:tsydfirst',
ownership'; asme-hili- 'errand for us' ;
c.

compounds

tvam- are also sometimes found as first member of

'struggle for precedence', aham-furva- 'eager to be
(AV.) 'looking at me'; mama-satyd- 'dispute as to
^mff;-ia?3- 'desiring thee', feaOT-a;^K,'!- (TS.) 'offering

to thee'.

2.

Demonstrative Pronouns.

392. Td- 'that', which also serves as the personal pronoun of the third
person, 'he', 'she', 'it', is typical, in its inflexion, of the adjectival pronoun.
It has the special peculiarity of using the stem sa- for the nom. masc. and
The general
fem. sing, and, in the RV., for the loc. sing. masc. and neut.
peculiarities of the adjectival pronominal declension, as distinct from

Cp. Gaedicke, Akkusativ 1214.

the formation of ahdm cp. J. Schmidt,
KZ. 36, 405 ff,
All the nominatives of the
personal pronouns are formed with -am as
also the N. sing, of the demonstrative aydm and the reflexive svaydm,
3 The unaccented forms of the personal
1

On

pronoun

may

according

to

the

nominal declension; cp,

Brugmann, kg. 519, 2, note.

1 asmakam and yusmakam

are properly
ace, n. of the possessives asmdka-, ytcsvidka-;
cp,
11
12

BRUG.MANN, KG. 524, 4.

Occurs only in I. 1731.
asmdsti

is

new formation according

to

be accompanied by the inst. asmd-bhs.

13 ivdm must often be read as iuavi.
accented words in agreement with them;
'4 te, originally only loc., is
e. g. le jdyatah 'of thee when conquering'
used as
vo vrtdbhyah 'for you that were confined'
dat. and gen.; similarly me; the loc. asmi
nas tribhydk 'to us three'.
is also used as dat.
15 Cp, Bartholomae, loc. cit.
mad is two or three times unaccented
^^ Originally *yui-dm where y was substiin the AV.
tuted for the sibilant owing to the influence
5 Cp. Bartholomae, ZDMG. 50, 725.
6 This seems to be the only nom. form of vaydm;
cp. Bartholomae, op, cit. 726,
Samhitas. The note; Brugmann, KG, 513 and note 3, 518,
(vi. 55') occurring in the
17 yusman is a new formation according
nom. in the SB. is avdm, in the AB. dvdm
the ace. in the SB. is avdm. The iorravdm to the nominal declension (like asman).
i^The inst. was originally in all probability
must be an abbreviation of avdm.
7 The AB. has dvdhhydm.
yusma (like tva), which later he.c3.m.i yusmdbhis
8 The SB. has dvdyos.
(like asmdbhis).
19 This compound may preserve the old inst.
9 asman and yusman are new formatives
(85)

VI. Declension.

Pronouns.

Demonstrative Pronouns.

301

the nominal a- declension, are that i. in the singular they take -d instead of
-m in the nom. and ace. neut.; the element -sma- in the dat., abl., loc. masc.
and neut.; the element -sya- in the dat., abl, gen., loc. fern.; the suf&x -in in
the loc. masc. and neut.'; 2. in the plural they take -e for -as in the nom.

masc;

n in the gen. before -am.

s for

The inflexion of

1.

ii- accordingly is as follows:

N. m. sd-s'-, i. sd, n. td-d.
A. m. id-m, f. id-m, n. td-dI. m.
tdya.
D. m. n. td-smai, f. td-syai.
Ab. m. n. td-smii, f. td-syas.
td-sya, f td-syas.
L. td-smin'-, sd-smin (RV.), f td-syam.
N. A. m. td, tdu, i. te, n. te.
I. m. f. ta-bhyam^.
Ab. m. td-bhyam.

Sing.
te'na^,

f.

G. m.

n.

Du.
G. m.

n.

PL
te-bhis,

G. m.

idyos.

te'-sam,

m.

I^.

N. m. te,
tdis (AV.;

Kh-

A. m.

n. td, tdni,

iC),
L. m.

11.

td-sam.

f.

The stem

tdyos.

tds,

I.

tdri,

D.

td-bhis.

f.

/ij-j^^,

f.

f tds, n. td, tdni. I. m. n.

m. n. te-bhyas, f td-bhyas.

ta-su.

frequently used in derivation, especially that of adverbs; e. g.

td-tha 'thus', ia-vani- 'so great', id-ti (AV.) 'so many', and in the compound td-dfi- 'such'.
b. The neuter form tad is often used as the first member of a compound ; thus
tdd-anna- having that food'; tad-apas 'accustomed to that work'; tad-id-artha- 'having
just that as an object'; iad-okas- 'delighting in that'; tdd-ojas- 'possessing such power';
tad-vasd- 'having a desire foj- that'; tad-vid- (AV.) 'knowing that'.
a.

It

is

Two

a. One of
Other demonstrative pronouns are formed from td-.
formed by prefixing the pronominal element e-^, means 'this here'.
The forms
inflected exactly like td- and is of common occurrence.

2.

them,

is

to'-

etd-,

which occur are

m. Sing. m. N.
Ab. etdsmai (AV.). G.

eteb/tis,
f.

N.

etds.

Sing. N.
A.

D.

(AV.).

etdis

etds.

esd

(AV.).

A. etdm.

Du.

N.

etd,

I.

ete'na.

etdu.

elebhyas.

A. etdm.

esd.
I.

or

esds
e'tdsya

I.

etdya.

etdbhis (AV.).

L. etdsyam.

D. etdsmai (TS,).

PL N.

Du.

ete.

N.

A. etdn.

ete.

PL

L. etdsu (AV.).

PL

N. etd ( + VS.), etdni.

n. Sing. N. etdd.
a.
The stem used in derivation and composition is eta-;

thus etd-vant- 'so great';

eta-dfs- 'such'.

b. The other secondary demonstrative, tyd-, is derived from td- with

It is
common in the RV., but rare in
the suffix -ya^ and means 'that'.
It is used adjectivally, being nearly always accompanied
the later Samhitas*.
by its substantive. It is never found at the beginning of a sentence except

when followed by u, cid,

The forms occurring

mi, or

sii'^.

are:

PL
Du. N. tyd.
N. syd' ( + VS.). A. tydm. G. tydsya.
A. tydn. I. tyebhis.
A. tydm. I. tyd (for tydya). G. tydsyas. Du. N. tye.
f. Sing. N. syd.
tyds.
tyds.
A.
PL N.
PL tyd, tydni.
n. Sing. N. tydd ( + TS.).
393. The demonstrative which appears as ayam in in the nom. sing.
m. Sing.

N.

tye'.

masc. and means

modifications)

i-

'this

in

its

here',

employs the pronominal roots a- and (in various

the latter being used in nearly all the

inflexion,

5 In IX. 562 this form (f.) seems to have

This suffix is once found in the RV.,
form oi-min, attached io yadrs- 'having a loc, sense; see Lanman 3434.
6 According to Brugmann, KG. 495, 6,
what appearance', though the stem ends
note 3, originally loc. sing, of a-.
1^ lV
<^ Hf-^'-^
in a consonant.
7 Cp. Brugmann, KG. 401 and 495, 2.
2
On the Sandhi of si- and esd- see
8 It occurs two or three times also in B.
1

in the

The Pada

text always reads iena.

nearly half as often as

sdsmin occurs
idsmin in the RV.
4

9 Cp. Grassmann, s, v. tyd-.

10 syd- and tyd- are often to

Vyuha.

be read with

302

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

4.

Vedic Gr.\mmar.

nom. and ace. forms, the former in the other cases. The ace. sing. mase.
the ace. of i-, and is followed by the nom. ace.
and fem. starts from i-m
du. and pL, all these forms having the appearance of being made from a
stem zma-. The nom. sing. fem. is formed from i-', and the nom. ace.
sing. neut. from z-d (the N. A. n. of z-), both with the suffix -az added.
The nom. sing. mase. is formed from a- with the suffix -am and interposing
-y-.
The remaining cases formed from a-^ are inflected throughout like id-.
The inflexion of this pronoun is accordingly as follows:
Sing. N. m. a-y-dm, f. i-y-dm, n. i-d-dm. A. m. im-dm, im-Sm, n.
i-d-dm.
I. m. e-na'^,
f.
aya''.
D. m. a-smdi^, i. a-sydi. Ab. m. a-smdt^,
a-syds.
f.
G. m. a-sydT, f. a-syds.
L. m. a-smin, f. a-sydm.
Du. N. A. m. imd, imdu,
ime, n. ime. D. m. a-bhydm (RV.). Ab. m.
a-bhydm.
G. m. a-y-os (RV.)'*.
L. m. a-y-os'^ (RV.).
PI. N. m. ime, f. imds, n. imd, imdni.
A. m. imdn^ I. Unas, n. imd,
imdni.
I. m.
e-bhis, f. a-bkis'^.
D. m. e-bhyds, f. a-bhyds.
G. m. e-sdm,
f.
a-sam. L. m. e-su, f. a-j-.v.
394. The corresponding demonstrative employed to express remoteness,
'that there', 'yon', appears in the nom. sing. mase. fem. as asdu.
The pronominal root employed throughout its inflexion is a-, but always in an
extended form only. The fundamental stem used in every case, excepting
the nom. sing., is a-m, ace. mase. of a-; this is extended by the addition of
',

f.

the particle ic to amu-, which has become the stem in the oblique cases of
the sing, (with long u in the ace. fem.); in the plur. amd,- is the fem. and amfthe mase. stem (except the ace).
The nom. sing, forms are quite peeuHar.

In the mase. and fem. the pronominal root a- seems to be compounded

with sa- extended by the particle u: a-sd-ti and a-sd-u"; while the neut. has
the pronominal -d extended with the suffix -as: a-d-ds.
Only one dual form

been noted, and several plural case

found in the Sarnhitas are the following;
has

forms are

The forms

wanting.

m. Sing. N. asdu. A. amum. I. amuna (VS.). D. atnu-smai. Ab. ami'ismat (AV. TS.). G. amu-sya''^. L. amu-smin (AV.).
PI. N. amP^. A. amUn
(AV.).
D. amibhyas (AV.). G. ami-sam.
f. Sing. N. asdu.
A. amum. I. amiiyd'^''. D. amu-syai (VS.). G. amusyas (AV.).
Du. N. amU (AV.).
PI. N. amis. A. amiis.
n. Sing. N. adds.
PI. N. ama (AV.).
395. A defective unaccented pronoun of the third person meaning 'he',
'she',
and in the AV. 'it', is e-na-'s. it occurs almost exclusively in the

Cp. Brugmann,

From

the neut.
3

z-

also

is

i-d,

both

The Pada

unaccented

etta

kg.

495, 10.

formed the

ace. i-m
used as particles.

always reads ena (the

occurs twice). This and all

text

cases formed from a-, when

used as nouns may lose their accent; see
85 (3 3; cp. Grassmann, s. v. iddm. On ay dm
see Brugmann, KG. 498, 3.
4 This inst. is fairly frequent intheRV.
instead of it andyd occurs twice (ix. 6512.27),
being probably a later correction to obviate
the hiatus.
Otherwise no forms of ana(anena, andyd, andyos) occur in the Sarnhitas, But anena (n.) occurs in Kh. III. l6'.
5 asmai
and asya are accented on the
first syllable, the former four or five times,
the latter about ten times, when specially emphatic at the beginning of a Pada in the RV.
other

oblique

The

according to the nominal deused as a conjunction.

The form imdsya also occurs once,
To be read as Byds,
Seems to be wrongly read as dyos in

and clension,
7

the

abl.
d(,

Pada

is

text; cp.

10 dlikis

Lanman 344^

occurs ten times in the RV,;

it is

thrice accented dbhis and thrice unaccented:

cp, note 5.

Cp. Brugmann, KG. 495, 6; 498, 4,

This is the only instance of -sya being
added to any but an a- stem.
13 This form
is
Pragrhya (70). On its
11

12

origin cp, IF, 18, 64, note.

14 Used adverbially, with
15

The tame

e-

(loc,

'one', f-i'a 'thus'; cp,

of

shifted accent,
as in i-ka-

a-)

Brugmann, KG.

495, 6.

Interrogative and Relative Pronouns.

VI. Declension.

303

majority of occurrences being masc. sing.).

Otherwise it is
in the inst. sing, and three or four times in the gen. dual.
The forms occurring are: rn. Sing. A. mam. I. enena (AV.).
Du. A. enau
G. ems (RV.), enayos (AV.).
PI. A. enan.
(AV.).
f. Sing. A. enl7n^. Du. A. ene. PI. A. enas.
n. N. enad{KS[.; Kh. iv. 6^).
396. Another demonstrative found nearly twenty times in the RV., but,
otherwise occurring only once in the AV., is the unaccented pronoun iva- ^
ace.

(the great

found only twice

meaning

'many a

one',

generally repeated,

in the sense of 'one

N. tvas. A. tvam. I. tvena.
f. Sing. N. tva.
D. tvasmai. PI. N. tve^.
D. tvasyai.
n. Sing. N. tvad.
a.
The pronoun avd-'^ 'this' is found two or three times in the RV.,
'one',

The forms

another'.

occurring

are:

m. Sing.

and only in the gen. du. form, avas in combination with vam, meaning 'of
you two being such' (used like sa, e. g. sd tvdm 'thou as such').
b.
The pronoun dma-^ 'this' occurs only once in the AV.: dmo 'ham
asmi (xiv. 2 7"), 'this am I'.
3.

397. The

and

Interrogative Pronoun.

interrogative ka-,

'who?',

'which?', 'what?' used both as sub-

its declension, excepting the alterneuter form ki-m^, which instead of the pronominal -d has the
nominal -m (never elsewhere attached to a stem in -i). The forms occur-

stantive

adjective,

quite regular in

is

native

ring are:

m. Sing.
f.

A.

N. kds. A. kdm.

Du.

L. kdsmin.
Sing. N. kd.

kdsya.
kAs.

A.

kdu.

kirn.

D. kdsmai. Ab. kdsmat (AV.). G.

N. ke. I. kebhis. L. kesu (VS.).
kdya. G. kdsyxs (AV. VS.).
PI. N. kss.

I.

ke'na.

PI.

I.

L. kisu.

PI. N. A. ka and kani.

n. Sing. N. A. kd-d' (RV.) and ki-m.
a. In forming derivatives, which are numerous, the stem of the interrogative
employed is not only ka-, but also ki- and ku-; c. g. kd-li 'how many?'; ki-yant- 'how
great?'; kit-ha 'where?'. The neuter form kim is twice used in this way kini-yic- 'desiring
what?'; kim-mdya- 'consisting of what?'.
in kat-faydb. In the formation of compounds kad occurs twice as first member
kim is similarly used a few
'greatly swelling', and kdd-ariha- 'liaving what purpose?',
times in the later Samhitas; thus kim-Hld- (VS. TS.) 'being in stony ground', kim-kard:

(AV.) 'servant'.
4.

398.

The

Relative Pronoun.

pronoun ya-

relative

'who', 'which', 'what'

is

perfectly regular

The forms

occurring are:
m. Sing. N. jaV*. A. ydm. I. yina.^ Wi.ii.yina. D. ydsmai. Ah. ydsmat^.
Du. N. A. ya, ydu. D. ydbhyam. G. ydyos. L. ydyos
G. ydsya. L. ydsmin.
PI. N. ye. A. y&n. I. yebhis, ydis (AV.; Kh. i. 9"). D.
and yds"-"- (RV.).

in

its

declension.

yebhyas.

G. ye'sam.

L. ye'su.

1 This form occurs once (viil. 6'9) at the

fied form in nd-kis and md-kis 'no one',
beginning of a sentence and is then accented 'nothing', 'never'.
7 The relative frequency of kdd to kivi in
as endm,
2 The
unaccented adverb tvaddmm (MS. the RV. is as 2 to 3,
8 yds is the commonest declensional form
IV, 2^) 'sometimes', is derived from this
in the RV., occurring more than 1000 times.
pronoun.
9 yind is twice as common in the RV, as
3 See Whitney's note on AV. vixi. <y in
yena; the Pada text, however, always reads
his translation.
4 This pronoun also occurs in the Avesta; yena (cp. Lanman 332).
JO The ablative according to the nominal
op. Brugmann 495, 10.
5 From this pronoun are derived the inst. declension, yat, is used as a conjunction.
II yds for ydyos, like yuvds for yuvdyos;.
and abl. adverbs (with shifted accent) ama
cp. BB. 23, 183 ; ZDMG. 50, 589.
'at home' and aiiat 'from near at hand',
6 The nom, masc. is preserved as a petri-

304

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

Sing. N. )a. A. ySm.

f.

(TS. AV.).

G. ydsam.

G. ydyos.
L. ydsu.

L. ydyos.

N. A. ydd.

n. Sing.

I.

ydya.

PI.

Du.

ye.

Vedic Grammar.

4.

G. ydsyas. L. ydsyam.
N. yds. A. yds. I. ydbhis.

PL

Du. N. ye
D. ydbhyas.

yd, ydni.

used in the formation of many derivatives; &. ^. yd-tha 's.%^

The neuter form
it also appears as first member of a compound in yd-dfs- 'which lilce'.
yad is once used similarly in tlie RV. yat-kdma- 'desiring what'.
The relative receives the indefinite meaning of 'whoever'' by the addition of
b.
kds ca, kds cid, or cid alone; c. g. ydd vo vaydm cairnia kdc cid dgah (11.2714} 'whatever
sin we have committed against you'; ydt kirn ca duritdm mdyi (l. 2312J 'whatever sin (there
is) in me'; ye cid dhi ivam rsayah purva iidye jiihiiri (1.48'*) 'whatever early seers have
called on thee for aid'.

The stem

a.

oi yd-

is

Indefinite Pronouns.

5.

In the RV. there are found the two simple indefinite pro399.
nouns sama (unaccented) 'any', 'every' and simd- 'every', 'all'. The six
forms of the former which occur are: m. Sing. A. samam. D. samasmai.
From simd- are
PI. N. same.
Ab. samasmSt. G. samasya. L, samasmin.
met with the five forms: Sing. V. sima. N. simds. D. simdsjnai (neut).
Pi. simL
Ab. simdsmat.
b. Compound indefinite pronouns are formed by combining the
particles ca, cand, or cid with the interrogative; thus kds ca 'any', 'any one';
kds cand ^djoy ont 50t\tr\ 'every'; kds cid 'a.T\y'., 'some'; 'anyone', 'someone'.
a.

Reflexive Pronouns.

6.

400. I. The reflexive adjective is svd- 'own',- which

and second as well as the third person of all numbers; e.
mddathaJi sve durone

own

(i.

108') 'when,

Indra and Agni,

refers to the

first

ydd, indragni,
ye rejoice in your
g.

abode'.

The

2.

substantive

reflexive

sva-y-am

is

'self,

which

derived from

is

svd- with the suffix -am and interposing y (as a-y-dm from a-). It is properly
used as a nom. referring to all three persons; e. g. svaydm yajasva divi, deva,

devdn

(x. 7*)

Somepronoun is forgotten and svaydm

sense with another case; e. g. vatsdm
svaydm gatum

'do thou thyself,

god,

worship the gods in heaven'.

times, however, the nominative nature' of the

used agreeing

is
.

icchdmanam

in

(iv.

18') 'the calf himself seeking a way'.

Other cases than the nom. are regularly expressed in the RV. by
svaydm gatum tanva icchdmanam (iv. i8') 'himself
e. g.
seeking a way for himself (tanve)^; yajasva ianvam (x. 7^) 'worship thyself;
md hasmahi prajdya, ma tandbhih (x. 1285) 'may we suffer no harm with
3.

'body';

tanu-

(regard

to

our)

possessive gen.
'Agni, worship

or

offspring

ourselves'.

may be added; e.
thine own self'^.

g. dgne,

The

reflexive

adjective

ydjasva tanvam tdva svdm

and
(vi.

a
11^)

RV. of the incipient use of

bdlam dddhana atmdni (ix. 113')
'putting strength into himself; ydksmam sdt~vasmad atmdnas
vi vrhami
(x. 163*) 'I expel the disease from (thy) whole self.
The ace. atmdnam,
though not met with in the RV. as a reflexive, is frequently found so used
in the later Sarnhitas ; also in Kh. in. 10 3.
a.
In the formation of compounds sva- several times appears in the substantive
4.

atman-

There are one or two instances

'soul' in

a reflexive

sense;

in the

thus

-^

as well as the adjective sense as first member; c. g. svd-yukta- 'self-yoked'; sva-yugvan'own companion', svaydm is also thus used in a few compounds; thus svayam-ja- 'self-

born'; svayam-bhii- 'self-existent'.

I

Si

Cp. Delbruck, Syntaktische Forschungen

57.

5^9

2 Cp. Delbrijck op. cit. 135, and GrassMANN, s. V. svd- and tanu-.
See Delbrijck op. cit. 155,
I

VI. Declension.

7.

Pronouns.

Pronominals.

305

Possessive Pronouns.

401. Possessive pronouns are of rare occurrence because the genitive

of the personal pronoun is generally used to express the sense which they

convey.

The possessives of the first person are mdmaka- (RV.) 'my', mamakd(both formed from the genitive of the personal pronoun mdmay
and
asmika- 'our'. The commonest form of the latter is the N. A. neut. asmikam,
which is used as the gen. plur. of the personal pronoun ^ The other forms
occurring are asmikena, asmSkasas, and asmakebhis.
The VS. also has the
form asmakds (iv. 24) 'our' from a secondary derivative 3.
b. The possessives of the second person are tavakd- (RV.) 'thy',
^
(from tdvd), met with only in the form tavakebhyas;
tvd-* (RV.) 'thy',
found only in the inst. pi. tvabhis (11. 20^); and yusmika- 'your', the N. A.
neut. of which is used as the gen. pi. of the personal pronoun of the second
personj it otherwise occurs only in the RV. in the two forms yusmakena and
a.

'my',

yusmikabhis.
c. Besides being used reflexively, sva- is fairly often employed as a
simple possessive, generally as that of the third person, 'his', 'her', 'their',
but also of the second, 'thy', 'your', and of the first, 'my', 'our'. It is,
however, inflected like an ordinary adjective, having only two isolated forms
according to the pronominal declension 5. The forms which occur are:
m. sing. N. svds. A. svdm. I. svena and svena^ D. svdya. Ab. svat.
G. svdsya. L. sve and svdsmin (RV.).
PI. N. svAs (AV.). A. svan (AV.).
I. svebhis and
svdis.
D. svSkyas (Kh. v. i^). G. svanam (AV.; Kh. 11. lot).

L. svisu.
f.

(RV.).

A. svim. I. svdya. D. svSyai. Ab. svdyas.

N. sv3s. A. svas. I. svabkis. L. svasu.
PI. A. svd.
N. A. svdm.

sing. N. svS.
L. svayam.

n. sing.

8.

PI.

G. svdsyas

Pronominal derivatives and compounds.

402. A certain number of derivatives are formed from the roots or

stems of simple pronouns by means of suffixes which modify the pronominal
There are also a few pronominal compounds.
sense.
With the suffix -ka^ conveying a diminutive or contemptuous
a.

meaning, derivatives are formed from the pronouns td-, yd-, sd-, and asdu;
little',
of which the forms A. sing. m. takd-m and n.
takd-d occur; yd-ka- 'who', 'which', the only forms met with being N. m. yakds,
f yaka (VS. xxiii. 22, 23), and N. pi. m. yake (RV.); sa-kd- (RV. AV.) 'that
of which only N. sing. f. saka occurs; N. sing. f. asakdu 'that little'
little',
thus fa-Ad- (RV.) 'that

(VS. XXIII. 22, 23).

b. With the comparative suffix -tara

derivatives

are formed from

z-,

from the latter two;

ya-tard'who
or which of two';
'which
of
two?';
ka-tardthus i-tara- 'other';
ka-tamd- 'who or which of many?', ya-tamd- 'who or which of many'.
c. With -ii derivatives with a numerical sense are formed from kd-,td-,

and

kd-,

_>>-;

and ^a-; thus

and with the superlative suffix

kd-ii

'how many?', td-ti (AV.)

words occur.

'so

-fama,

maxif ; yd-ti

'as

many'.

No

inflected forms of these

3
4

Cp. Brugmann, kg. 524, 2.

Op. cit. 524, 4.
Formed like mSniakd- beside md?naka-.
Used as a possessive probably under

Indo-arischc Philologie.

I.

4.

the
op.

influence
cit.

524,

svd-;

cp.

Brugmann,

svdsyas and svdsmm.

text always reads svrna.

That

The Pada

is,

of

2.

20

3o6

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

With -yanf, expressing the quantitative meaning of 'much', derivatives

are formed from i- and ^t-: i-yant- 'so much' (n. N. sing, iyat, pi. iyanti;
iyatyai); ki-yant- 'how much?' (sing. N. n. adv. kiyat, D. m. kiyate,
f. D. sing,
d.

L. kiyati for kiyati; N. f. kiyati).

With -vant are formed
e.
the sense of

'like',

'attached

to',

derivatives from personal pronouns with

and from others in the quantitative sense

of 'great'; thus tvA-vani- 'like thee', md-vant- 'hke me'; yuva-vant- (RV.)
'devoted to you two' (only D. yuvivate); yusmi-vant- (RV.) 'belonging to
you' (only L. pi. yusmdvatsu); eta-vant- and ta-vant- 'so great'; yd-vant- 'as
great'; i-vant- 'so great' (sing. N. n. ivat, D. m. n. ivdte, G. ivatas; pi. A. m.
ivatas); ki-vant-

'how

far?'

(G. kfvatas).

formed the following pronominal compounds: i-dfksa- (VS.) andV-^r/- (VS. TS.) 'such'; eta-dfksa- (VS.) and eta(N. sing. m. kldffi);
dfs- 'such' (N. sing. n. etadf-k); ki-dfs- 'what like?'
ta-dfs- 'such' (N. sing. m. ta-dfk); yd-dfs- 'what like' (sing. m. N. yadfk, L.
yddfsmin).
f.

With

-drs,

-drsa, -drksa are

9.

Pronominal Adjectives.

adjectives derived from pronominal roots or allied to

conform in varying degrees to the pronominal declension.
1.
The adjectives which strictly adhere to the pronominal type of
inflexion are anyd- 'other', and (as far as can be judged by the few forms
occurring and by the usage of the later language) the derivatives formed
with -tara and -tama from kd- and yd-.
The specifically pronominal cases
of the latter which have been met with are: sing. N. n. katardd (AV.),
yatardd; katamdd, yatamdd {AN.); D. m. katamdsmai (y^.); G. f. katamdsyas
No
(AV.); L. f. yatamdsyam (AV.); PI. N. m. katame (AV.), yatame (AV.).
such form of Uara- has been found. The forms of anyd- which occur are:
m. sing. N. anyds. A. anyd?n. I. anye'na. D. anydsmai (AV.). G.
anydsya. L. anydsmin.
PI. N. any A. anydn. I. anyebhis and anydis.

403.

Certain

pronouns

in sense

D. anyibhyas (AV.). G. anyisam.

L. atiyesu.
f.
sing.
N. anyd. A. anydm. I. anydya. D. anydsyai. G. anydsyas.
L. anydsyam.
Du. N. anyL
PI. N. anyds. A. anyds. I, anyabhis. G. anydsam.

L. anydsu.

N. anydd.

Du.

anydbhydm (AV.).

PI. N. anyd.
sdrva- 'whole' are partially pronominal, following this declension except in the nom. ace. sing,
Thus sing. G. f. ekasyas, L. m. ekasmin^,
neut., which takes the nominal -m.
sing. D.
visvasmai^, Ab. visvasmai'-,
pi. N. m. eke., but sing. N. n. ^kam;
L. visvasmin', pi. N. m. visve, G. m. visvesam, f. vUvasam, but sing. N. n.
visvam; sing. D. m. sdrvasmai (AV.), f. sdrvasyai (AV.; AA. iii. 2 5), Ab. m.
n. sing.

2.

The

I.

three adjectives eka- 'one',

visva-

'all',

sdrvasmat, pi. N. m. sdrve, G. sarvesam (AV.), f. sdrvasam (AV.), but sing.

N. n. sarvam.
3. More than a dozen other adjectives which have pronominal affinities
in form or sense occasionally show pronominal case-forms (but never -d
in the N. A. sing. n.).
a. A few adjectives formed with the comparative and superlative suffixes
-ra and -ma have such endings; thus dpara- 'lower' has dpare in the N.

m. beside dpardsas;

pi

'

see

iittara- 'higher', 'later',

The AV. once has ike as a loc.

Whitney's note on AV. xix. 56=

translation.

.sing.

in his

forms the L. sing.

The RV. has

v'livdya,

uttarasyam

the nominal forms D.

L. visve, once each;
also occurs Kh. II. 6'8.

Ab. vihat,

visvat (n.)

f.

VI. Declension.

(AV.),

m.

Numerals.

Cardinals.

307

Ab. L. sing, itttarasmat and uttarasmin beside

upara- 'lower' has upare beside uparas and uparasas in
m.; avamd- 'lowest' has L. sing, f. avamdsyam; upamd- 'highest'

N.

pi.

uUarat and

N. pi.
has sing. L.

the

uttare;

nttare;

upamdsyam; paramd- 'farthest' has sing. f. G. paramdsyas and

( + VS.); madhyamd- 'middlemost' has sing. L.f. madhyamdsyam.
b. A few other adjectives with a comparative or pronominal sense
have occasional pronominal endings. Thus jooz-a- 'ulterior' has sing.D. m.pdrasmaz
(A v.), Ab. m. pdrasmat ( + AV. VS.), G. f. pdrasyas, G. pi. m. pdremm; L. sing. m.
pdrasmiti beside pdre\ and N. pi. m. pdre beside pdrasas. purva- 'prior' has
sing. m. D. pArvasmai, Ab. pArvasmat^ G. pi. iji. purvesam,
piirvasam and the
N. pi. m. piirve is very common beside the very rare pArvasas. nema- 'other' ^
has m. L. sing, nemasmin, N. pi. ne'me, but N. sing. n. ne'marti and G. pi. m.
\,.

f.

paratndsyam

f.

nemanam

(unaccented),

has once

sing. G.f.

svi- 'own', otherwise following the nominal declension

svdsyas and once L.n.svdsmm.

samand- 'similar', 'common',

has once Ab. sing. n. samandsmat beside samandt.
c. A few adjectives which are numerical in form or meaning have
occasional pronominal forms; ikms, prathamd- 'first', has G. sing. f. prathamdsyas
(AV.); trtiya- 'third' has L. sing. f. trttyasyam' (AV.); I'lbhaya- 'of both kinds'
has m. pi. G. I'lbhayesam, and N. I'lbhaye beside ubhayasas and iibhayas^;
kevala- 'exclusive' has once N. pi. m. kevale.
III.

Numerals.

Benfey, VoUsiandige Grammatik 764

Cp. Brugmann, kg. 441 451.

404. The

771. Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar 475 488.

of the numerals is based on the decimal system of

of the first ten cardinals, which are of an adjectival
character, form the foundation of the rest either by compounding or derivation;
the ordinals and numerical adverbs being further derived from the correspondseries

The names

reckoning.

ing cardinals.

A. Cardinals.

The names

405.
tri-

'three';

ndva

cati'ir-

'nine';

ddsa

of the

'four';

fir,t

pdnca

ten cardinals

'five';

are: eka- 'one'; dvd- 'two';

saptd 'seven';

sds- 'six';

add

'eight';

'ten'.

a. The numbers intermediate between 'ten' and 'twenty' are Dvandva

compounds formed by prefixing the accented unit to ddsa 'ten': eka-dasa'*

('one

dvd-dasa^ 'twelve'; trdyo-dasa'' (AV. VS. TS.)

'eleven';
cdtur-dasa^ 'fourteen'; pdnca-dasa 'fifteen'; s6-dasa^ (VS. TS.)
saptd-dasa (TS.) 'seventeen'; astA-dasa (TS.) 'eighteen'; ndva-dasa

and

'thirteen';
'sixteen';

ten')

(VS.) 'nineteen'.
b. The remaining cardinals are substantives. The names of the decades
from 'twenty' to 'ninety' are either old Dvandva compounds or derivatives
formed with the suffix -ti. They are vim-sad- 'twenty'; trim-sdt 'thirty';
5 Here the N. m. du. form dvd is retained
Cp. Neisser, BB. 30, 303.
The pronominal endings are recognized instead of the stem form dva-.
6 In this and other numeral compounds
as alternative in the later language as regards
dvidya- and trtiya-; the Bjfhaddevata (vili. 95) the N. m. plural form remains in every case
irdyas-trimsatam a vaha (l, 452)
e. g. tan
has pratkamasydm as well as dvifiyasyam.
'bring those thirty-three',
3 iibhd- 'both' is declined in the dual only
7 As first member of a compound caturN. A. m. ubha and ubhau, f. ubhc, I. ubhabhyam
is regularly accented cdttir-,
(once in RV.), G. ubhdyos (twice in RV,).
8 For sas-dasa, see above 43, b, 3;
56, b.
4 With ckd- for eka- under the influence
of dvd-dasa.
20*
1

Allgemeines und Sprache.

3o8

I.

catvarim-sdt

'forty';

fanca-sdt

'fifty';

The

'eighty'; nava-ti- 'ninety'.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

sas-ti- 'sixty';

last four

safia-ti- 'seventy';

asi-ti-

are abstract fern, nouns derived from

simple cardinal (except ah-ti-) ^ and meaning originally 'hexad etc. (of
The others are fem. compounds, the first member of which is 'two',
'three', 'four', or 'five', and the second a remnant of the IE. word for 'ten';
vimsati- was probably in origin an old
thus trim-sat meant 'three tens',

the

tens)'.

dual of this formation which ended in -i but was transformed by the influence
of sasti- etc. to a singular fem. in -ti'^c. The numbers intermediate between these decades are Dvandva
compounds formed by prefixing the accented unit to the decade; thus astdvimsati- (VS.) 'twenty-eight'; eka-trimiat (VS.) 'thirty-one'; trdyas-trimiat 'thirtyndva-sasti- (TS.)
'sixty-nine';
ndva-catvarimsat (TS.)
'forty-nine';
three';
ndvasiti- (TS.) ' eighty- nine ; pdnca-navati- (TS.) 'ninety-five'; sdn-navati- (TS.)
'

'ninety-six'; asta-navati- (TS.)

'ninety-eight'.

a. In the TS., the number preceding a decade is also expressed by ikait na 'by
'nineteen'; ekan na
'minus one'; thus ekan na vimsati- 'twenty less one'
one not'
calvdnmidt 'thirty-nine'; ekan na sasfi- 'fifty nine';- ekan ndstii- 'seventy-nine'; ekan na satdvi
'a hundred less one', 'ninety-nine' 3.
numbers may also be expressed by adding together unit and
^. Intermediate
decade with or without ca; c. g. niva ca navatim ca 'ninety and nine'; navatim ndva

'ninety-nine'.

d. The numbers expressing 'a hundred' and its multiples are satd- '100';
sahdsra- '1000'; a-yi'tta- (AV. TS.) 'loooo'; ni-yuta- (TS.; Kh. iv. 12*) 'looooo';
pra-yi'ita- (VS. TS.) '1000 000'; drbuda- (TS.; Kh. iv. 12*) '10 000 000'; nyarbuda(AV. VS. TS.) 'loooooooo't.
a. Intermediate numbers are compounded in the same way with sata- as with the
preceding decades; e. g. eka-satam 'a hundred and one'; cdtuh-satam 'a hundred and four';

trimsdc-chatam 'a hundred and thirty',

Multiples may be expressed in two ways. Either the larger number is put in
j3.
the dual or plural multiplied by the smaller one used adjectivally; e. g. dve sate (VH. 1822)
'two hundred'; sastim sahdsra (VI. 2 6^) 'sixty thousand'; irtni said tri sahdsrani Irimsdc ca
ndva ca (lu. 99) 'three thousand three hundred and thirty-nine'.
Or the multiplier
may be prefixed to the larger number, forming with it a possessive compound accented
on the final syllable; e. g. trdyasirimsat tj-i'satah safsahasrah (AV.) 'six thousand three
hundred and thirty-three'. Numbers below a hundred are sometimes used multiplicatively
in these two ways; c. g. navatir ndva (l. 84^3) 'nine nineties'
'eight hundred and ten';
iri-sa/td-^ 'thrice seven'; tri-navd- (VS.) 'having thrice nine'.

Inflexion.

406. With regard to their inflexion, which in many respects is pecuhar,

the cardinals may be divided into three groups.
a. The first group comprises the first four numerals.
These are the
only cardinals which, like other adjectives, distinguish the genders. They also
distinguish the numbers as far as the sense admits: dka- 'one', while inflected
chiefly in the singular, forms a plural also in the sense of 'some'; dvd'two' is of course inflected in the dual only; and tri- 'three' and catur- 'four'
in the plural only.
I.

eka-

is

declined like

The only form of

the

the abl. sing.

second group of pronominal adjectives^.

met with follows the nominal declension,

we may infer from the first

few that each successive number is equal to
2 Cp. Brcgmann, kg. 443, I.
ten times the preceding one cp. Whitney
I In the TS. (B.) are also met with ekasman 475, c.
The contents of TS. VII. 2, 11 20
na pahcasdt and ekasyai nd pancdsdt (vil. 4. 7'') are almost entirely numerals.
1

56,

asT- is

radically

related

to

asfdu,

cp.

in succession:

a.

'forty-nine':
4

by

In TS.

Whitney
vii. 22"

b.

477,
these numerals, followed

samtidrd-, tnadhya-, dnta^, pardrdhd-, occur

inst, irisaptdis,

Inflected according to the a- declension

See above 403,

2.

VI. Declension.

Numerals.

Cardinals.

309

used in the compound numerals dkan nd trimsdt 'twenty-nine' etc.

in the TS.
A single dual case, from eka- in the sense of 'a
certain', appears in ike yuvati (AV. x. 7t=') 'a certain pair of maidens'.
The
forms to be found in the Samhitas are
m. sing. N. ekas. A. ekam. I. ekena.
G. ekasya. L. ekasmin; pi. N. eke. D. ekebhyas.
f.
N. eka. A. ekam.
ikat,

viz.

occurring

ekaya.

I.

pi.

G. ekasyas; du. N. e'ke{kY.);

pi.

N. ekas (AY.).

n. N. sing, ikam;

e'ka.

dvd-

declined in the dual only, is quite regular.

The forms
N. dvd, dvdu. I. dvabhyam.
G. dvdyos. L. dvdyos.
f. N. dve.
I. dvdbhyam.
n. N. dve. L. dvdyos.
a.
The dual form dvd is retained in the first member of the numeral compound
dvd-dasa 'twelve'. Otherwise dvi- is used as the stem of dva- in derivation, c. g. dm-dhd
'twofold'; and as the first member of compounds, c. g, dvi-fad- 'biped'.
2.

'two',

m.

occurring are;

The

3.

regular

i-

tisrnam

The

(though the

m.

are:

cardinal tri- 'three'

stem.

N. tray as.

fem. stem
r

A.

N. tisrds. A. tisrds.
n. N. A. tri, trini.
f.

is

in the

I.

metrically)'.

D. tribhyds.

tribhis.

tisfbhis.

masc. and

tisf-: the gen. pi.

actually long

tr'in.
I.

is,

is

D. tisfbhyas.

is

neut.,

once

inflected like a
(v.

69^) written

The forms
G. trindm.

G. tisfnam''.

L.

occurring
trisii.

L. tisfsu.

a. The stem used in derivation and compounding is regularly tri-, e. g. tri-dha 'in
three ways'; iri-pdd- 'three-footed'. But tr- appears in tr-ta- (AV.) 'third', as a N., and
in the secondary ordinal tr-t-iya- 'third'; and in numeral compounds irim appears in
trini-sdt 'thirty', and irayas in irayo-dasa 'thirteen', and trayas-trlmsat 'thirty-three'.

4.

caiur-

'four'

has the stem catvdr- in the strong forms of the masc,

and neut. In the gen. it has the peculiarity of taking n before the ending
The fem. stem is cdtasr-, which
am, though the stem ends in a consonant
is inflected like tisf- and shifts its accent YikQ pdnca. The forms occurring are:
-5.

m.

1.

f.

I.

N. catvdras. A. caturas.
N. cdtasras. A. cdtasras.

D. caturbhyas {KN .). G. caturndm"^.

caturbhis.

catasfbhis^.

The stem used in derivation and compounding is regularly catur- ;

four ways'; calur-dasa 'fourteen'; cdtus-pad-^ 'four-footed'. But
catvarim- (from the n. pi.) in the numeral compound catvarimidi 'forty'.
a.

dha

'in

b.

n. N. A. catvdri.
e. g.

catur-

is

once

it

The second group, comprising

though used

adjectivally,

the cardinals from 'five' to 'nineteen',

does not distinguish gender, and takes no ending
These numerals also share the same peculiarities of

the nom. and ace.

accentuation 7.
5. N. A. pdnca 'five'. I. paiicdbhis. D. pancdbhyas. L. pahcdsu.
I. sadbhis.
D. sadbkyds^.
6. sds- 'six': N. A. sat.
D. Ab. saptdbhyas. G. saptandm.
I. saptdbhis.
7. N. A. saptd 'seven'.
8. That the cardinal for 'eight' was an old dual 5 is indicated by its
forms in the N. A. astd, astdu and in the only other cases occurring, I. astaAccording to the analysis of the Pada text in a
bhis, D. asta-bhyds (TS.).
late passage of the RV. (x. ay'S),' astottarattat contains the N. astd, doubtless Ijecause it is preceded by saptd and followed by ndva and ddsa.
in

a. The stem used in compounding has mostly the dual form asia; thus as{d-pad'eight-footed', asta-vandhura- 'eight-seated' 10 asta-dasa- (TS.) 'eighteen', astd-vimsd- (AV.)
;

See above

12,

und Verwandtes
2

the
not
4

the
5

On

13;

cp.

Benfey, Vedica

4.

the accentuation, see 94, 2 a.

shares this peculiarity with san-ndm,
gen, plur, of sds-, which however does
seem to occur in any of the Samhitas.
With accent on the final syllable like
genitives of pdnca etc.
G. catasrnam and L. catasf?" occur in B,
It

On

That

the Sandhi, see above 78,

is, of accenting -a before the terminations -bhts, -bhyas, -su, and the final
See above, 93.
syllable in the gen.
8 Cp, note 3.
9 Cp. Brugmann, kg. 441, 8.
10 These are the only two occurrences in
the RV for in asfa-karnd- (x. 62') the first
member is doubtless a past participle.

310

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

'twenty-eightfold', asta-cakra- (AV.) 'eight-wheeled', arfa-^ate- (AV.) 'eight-sided', asla-yogd-^

(AV.) 'yoke of eight'. The form asia- begins to appear in the AV. in the derivative asta-dhd
and in the compounds asta-kftvas 'eight times', asfa-yoni- 'having eight
'in eight ways';
wombs', asia-vrsd- 'eight times chief.

g.

N. A. ndva

10. N. A. ddsa

'nine'.
'ten'. I.

I.

navdbhis.

D. navdihyas (TS.).

G. navandm.

dasdbhis. D. dasdbhyas (TS.). G. dasanim. L. dasdsu.

N. A. ekadasa 'eleven'. D. ekadasdbhyas (TS.).

A. dvddasa 'twelve. D. dvadasdbhyas (TS.).
13. N. A. irdyodasa 'thirteen'. I. trayodasdbhis (TS.). D. trayodasdbhyas (TS.).
14. N. A. cdturdasa 'fourteen'. D. caturdasdbhyas (TS.).
15. N. A. pdncadasa 'fifteen'. D. pancadasdbhyas (TS.).
16. N. A. sodasa (VS.) 'sixteen'. D. sodasdbhyas (TS.).
17. 18. The N. of the cardinals for 'seventeen' and 'eighteen' does not
seem to occur in Mantras. D. saptadasdbhyas (TS.); astadasdbhyas (TS.).
11.

12. N.

ig. N. A. ndvadasa (VS.) 'nineteen'. I. navadasdbhis (VS.). D. eka7i nd

vimsatydi (TS.).
c. The third group of cardinals, comprising the numbers from 'twenty'
onwards, are substantives inflected regularly according to the declension of
the stem final; e. g. N. vimsatl-s 'twenty', A. viinsati-m, I. vimsaty-d; N. trimsdt
The decades 'twenty' to
'thirty',
A. trimsdt am, I. trimsdt- a, L. trimsdt-i.
'ninety' and their compounds are fem. and nearly always inflected in the
sing.; but if the sense requires it they may be used in the plural; e. g. ndva
tiavatih 'nine nineties'; navanam i^avat'inSm (i. 191'-') 'of nine nineties'.
a. sata- 'a
all

numbers;

e.

hundred' and sahasra- 'a thousand' are neuters, which may be declined
dve iale 'two hundred'; saj>td satdni 'seven hundred'.

in

g.

Syntactical

employment

of the Cardinals.

407. a. The numerals from 'one' to 'nineteen' are used adjectivally;

trdyo virdh (iii. 56") 'three heroes'; saftdbhih futrdih (x. 72') 'with seven
soTii' ; Jdnesu paticdsu (m. 37') 'among the five races'. The bare stem (in the
numerals of the second group) is, however, sometimes used in the oblique
cases; e.g. saptd hotrbhih (in. ict) 'with seven priests'; ddhi fdnca krstisu
e. g.

(11.

2')

'over the five tribes'.

0. Exceptionally these
e. g.

ddsa kaldsandm

numerals

are,

however, to be met with governing a genitive;

(xv. 3219} 'ten jars'.

b. The third group of numerals (from 'twenty' upwards), as singular

substantives, is treated in two ways.
1. They may govern a genitive;
e.g. pancasdtam divanam (v. i85) 'fifty
horses'; sastim dsvanam (vnr.46^') 'sixty horses'; satdm gdnam (i. 126") 'a hundred
kine'. So also when satd- and sahdsra- are in the du. or pi.
e. g. gdvam satdjii
(vii. 103') 'hundreds of kine'; sakdsrani gdvam (viii. 51^; 'thousands of kine'.
2. They may, remaining singtilar, agree in case with the following plural,
being then used adjectivally (not appositionally, because they always precede
the substantive in this use);
e. g. trimsdd
devdk (iii. 9?) 'thirty gods';
trimsdtam yjjanani (r. 123') 'thirty leagues';
trimsdta hdribhih (11. iS^) 'with
sate'na hdribhih (11. 18'') 'with a hundred bays'; satdm pur ah
thirty bays';
(iv. 27') 'a hundred forts'; sahdsram hdrayah (iv.46^) 'a thousand bays'.
The
following word, agreeing with sahdsra-, may be in the singular as a ^collective
thus h'lnas cic chepam niditam sahdsrad yfipad amuncah (v. 2I) 'Sunahsepa,
who was bound, thou didst release from a thousand posts'.
;

a. satd- and sahdsra- have, in their adjectival use, the peculiarity of sometimes either
being put in the plural themselves or retaining the N. A. neuter sing, form (like pdnca)
when in agreement with an inst.pl.; e.g. said piiraA. (l. S3*) 'a hundred forts'; sahdsrany

VI. Declension.
adhirathani

Numerals.

Ordinals.

Derivatives.

311

thousand wagonloads'; satam piirbhih (vi. 48*) 'with a hundred

(l. 189*) 'with a thousand seers'.
The numeral pronouns kdti 'how many?', tali 'so many', ydti 'as many', remain
p.
uninflected in agreement with nominatives and accusatives plural, which are the only
cases found occurring with them in the Samhitas'.

forts';

(x. gS^) 'a

sahasram fsibhik

B. Ordinals.
408. The ordinals, being all adjectives ending in -a, are declined
throughout in the masc. and neut. according to the nominal a-declension.
The feminine is formed with -Z"^, except in the first four, which take -a, viz.
pratkami-2, dvitiya-, trttya-i, turfya- (TS.). The ordinals may best be divided
into four groups according to the formation of their stems.
1. The ordinals from 'first' to 'tenth' are formed with various suffixes,
viz. {-i)-iya, -tka, -thanid^ -md, the first four in a somewhat irregular manner.
a. pra-thamd- 'first' was doubtless formed from pra- with the superlative
suffix -taina^, meaning 'foremost', the initial of the suffix being probably
changed under the influence of other ordinals formed with -tka {sasthd-, etc.).
b. The next three ordinals are formed with the suffix -Tya: dvit-tya'second', trt-tya- 'third', secondarily through dvi-td- 'second', and tr-td- 'third',
both used as names; tur-iya- 'fourth' for *ktur-iya- (beside catur-tkd-). The
latter when used in the fractional sense is accented turXya- (AV. ) 'quarter's.
c. The ordinal for 'sixth', besides the alternative forms for 'fourth' and
'seventh',
is
formed with -tha: sas-thd- (AV. VS.), catur-tkd- (AV. VS.),
saptd-tka- (RV.).
d.

The

ordinals for

panca-md- (AV. VS.),

'fifth'

and

'seventh' to 'tenth' are

sapta-md- (VS.) beside saptd-tka-,

formed with -ma:

asta-md-,

nava-md-,

dasa-md-.

The stems

of the ordinals for 'seventh' to 'nineteenth' are the

of the cardinals, except that they are accented on the final
syllable. In inflexion they differ from the cardinals in following the ordinary
nominal a- declension; thus from ekadasd- 'eleventh' are formed: sing. m. A.
ekadasdm; pi. N. ekadasdsah, A. ekadasSn, I. ekadasdis.
The ordinals for 'twentieth' to 'ninetieth' (including their com3.
pounds) seem, judged by some three examples met with in the Samhitas
(and some four others in B.), to have been abbreviated forms of the cardinals, ending in -a: eka-vimid- 'twenty-first' (B.) 'consisting of twenty-one' (VS.),
2.

same

as those

catvarimsd- (RV.) 'fortieth', asta-catvarimsd-{VS.) 'forty-eighth'; catus-trimsd- (B.)

'tlairty-fourth', dva-pancasd- (B.) 'fifty-second', eka-sastd- (B.) 'sixty-first'.
4. The ordinals for 'hundredth' and 'thousandth' are formed with the
superlative suffix -tama: sata-tamd-; but sakasra-tamd- has been noted in B.
passages only (TS. SB.).

Numeral Derivatives.

C.
409.

number of

derivatives,

chiefly adverbs,

are

formed from the

cardinals.
a.
-a,

-ya,

There are a few multiplicative adjectives derived with the

-taya,

-vaya;

thus

tray-d^ 'threefold' (from tri-);

ddsa-taya- 'tenfold'; cdtur-vaya- 'fourfold'.

b. Multiplicative adverbs are formed in three different ways.
1
2

Cp. Delbruck 50.

Inflected like stems in derivative

4
-/:

377.

3 Both frathama- and tritya- have one

form each according to the pronominal de-

clension in the

AV.

(403, 3,

c).

Cp. the

ace.

'Once'

pra-tamam

(B.)

See Brugmann, KG. 447, i.

Similarly in B, passages caiurtha- quarter',

'specially'.
5

adverbial

suffixes

dva-yd- 'twofold';

tfitya- 'third'.

312

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

expressed by sa-ktt, which originally seems to have meant 'one making'.

next three are formed with the suffix -s\ dvl-s 'twice'; tri-s 'thrice', catus
(AV.) 'four times' (for *catur-s, cp. Av. cathru-ly. Others are expressed by the
'makings', ace. pi. of */i}lt(-),
cardinal and the form kftvas 'times' (probably
which, except in a.^la-kftvas (AV.) 'eight times', is a separate word; thus
ddsa Iftvas (AV.) 'ten times', bhfiri kftvas (RV.) 'many times' "-

is

The

Numeral adverbs of manner

c.

thus dvl-dha

'in

two ways or

parts';

are

formed with the suffix -dha;

and tre-dhd, catur-dha,

similarly tri-dhs

paiica-dhd (AV.), xodki^, sapta-dhd (AV. VS. TS.), asia-dhd (AV.), nava-dhci
(AV.), sahasra-dhd.

VII.

THE VERB.

BENFEY.VollstandigeGrammatik 788 920. Whitney, SanskritGrainmar 527 1073.

Avery, Contributions to the history
Das altindische Vcrbum, Halle 1874.
of verb-inflection in Sanskrit, JAOS. X. (1876), 219-276; 311324.
Jul. v. Negelein,
Zur Sprachgeschichte des Veda. Das Verbalsystem des Atliarva-Veda, Berlin 1898.

DELBRiicK,

Tlie verbal system comprises the

410. General characteristics.
two groups of forms which include, on the one hand, the finite verb and,
on the other, the nominal formations connected with the verb, The former
group represents the forms made with personal endings, viz. indicative, subThe latter group consists of
junctive, injunctive, optative, and imperative.
infinitives (nouns of action) and participles (agent nouns). These differ from
ordinary nouns inasmuch as they participate in the characteristics of the verb,
governing cases, being connected with particular tenses, being used in different

and being liable to tmesis when compounded with prepositions.

A. The finite verb distinguishes the primary conjugation of the root
and the secondary conjugation of derivative formations, viz. desiderative,
intensive, causative, and denominative. The latter class does not, however,

voices,

origin from the former; but doubtless because (in contrast with the
present stems of the primary conjugation) it preserves the distinctive meaning
of the stem, it extends the form of the present stem beyond the present
system to the whole conjugation.
differ in

The

finite

verb further distinguishes voice, tense, mood,

number,

and

person.
a.
There are two voices, active and middle, which are distinguished
throughout the inflexion of the verb (largely also in the participle, though not
The middle forms may be employed in a passive sense,
in the infinitive).
except in the present system where there is a special passive stem inflected
with middle terminations.
Some verbs are conjugated in both active and
middle; e. g. krno-ti and krnu-ti 'makes'; others in one voice only, e. g. ds-ti
'is'; others partly in one and partly in the other;
e. g. pres. vdrta-le 'turns',
but perf vavdrt-a 'has turned'.
b. There are five tenses in ordinary use, viz. the present, the imperThe terms imperfect, perfect,
fect, the perfect, the aorist, and the future.
and aorist are here used in a purely formal sense, that is, as corresponding
in formation to the Greek tenses bearing those names.
No Vedic tense has
an imperfect meaning, while the perfect sense is generally expressed by the
aorist.

c.

Beside the

indicative

injunctive, the optative,

Cp.
C^.

Brugmann, kg.

Whitney

there

450,

I.
I

1 loj, a,

four

are

and the imperative,

and

all

moods,

the subjunctive,

the

formed from the stem of the

For faf-dhd;
p. 307,

note

cp,

above 43,

b, 3; 56, b;

VII. Verb.

present, the perfect,

Personal Endings.

Finite Verb.

and the

The

aorist.

only modal form occurring in the future

313

imperfect has no moods; and the

is the unique subjunctive karisyds,

from kr- 'make'.

d.

The

finite verb is, as in other languages, used in three persons in

and moods excepting the imperative, where the first persons are
supplied from the subjunctive. As in declension, the three numbers, singular,
dual, and plural, are in regular use throughout.
B. The nominal verb-forms comprise:
a. Participles. The tense-stem of the present, future, aorist, and perfect
each forms an active and a middle participle; e. g. gdcchant-, gdccha-mana'going'; karisydnt- 'going to ^q\ yaksyd-mana- 'going to sacrifice'; krdnt-, krandall

tenses

'making'; cakrvSms-, cakrand- 'having done'.

participles, present, perfect,

and

future.

The

Besides these, there are passive

present form is made from the

passive stem in -ya\ e. g. siUyd-mSiia- 'being praised'.

The perfect passive
participle, on the other hand, is formed from the root; e. g. kr-td- 'made';
as is also (with few exceptions) the future passive participle or gerundive;
e. g.

vdnd-ya- 'praiseworthy'.

Gerunds. These are stereotyped cases (chiefly instrumentals) of verbal

nouns, and have the value of indeclinable active participles with a prevailingly
past sense; e. g. qatvi and gatvAya 'having gone'.
c.
Infinitives.
There are about a dozen differently formed types of
infinitives, which are cases of verbal nouns made directly or with a suffix
from the root, and hardly ever connected with a tense stem; e. g. idh-am
'to kindle'; gdn-tavdi 'to go'.
b.

A.

The

Finite Verb.

may be classed under four groups

'
present system, comprising the present tense together with its moods
and participles, and its augmented past tense, the imperfect; (2) the perfect
system, comprising the perfect tense together with its moods and participles,
and its augmented past tense, the pluperfect^ (494); (3) the aorist system,
comprising the aorist tense together with its moods and participles; (4) the
future system, comprising the future tense ^ together with its participles,
and its augmented past form, the conditional*.
411.

All forms of the finite verb

(i) the

Personal Endings.
412.

The

characteristic

feature

of the

These are divided

finite

verb

is

the addition of

and middle; in each of

which groups, again, primary and secondary forms are to be distinguished.
The primary forms appear throughout the present and future indicative, but
The secondary forms appear
in the middle only of the perfect indicative^.
in augmented indicatives, in injunctives (which are identical in form with unaugmented past indicatives), in the imperative (several forms of which are
identical with the injunctive) ?, and in the optative. The subjunctive fluctuates
between the primary and the secondary endings, but the latter are about
personal

endings^.

1 Over 18000 occurrences

of verb-forms
have been noted by Avery (221) in the

RV.

into

this
5

active

There

is only a single
occurrence of
formation in the Samhitas.
Cp. Avery 225 f.;
Brugmann, KG.

used in a purely formal 771798.

6 The 3.
sense, as this rare tense has not a pluperre.
fect meaning.
2

This

There

Saiiihita^

term

is

is

no periphrastic

future in the

Cp.

pi.

has here the peculiar ending

Brugmann, KG.

729.

314

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

The

twice as frequent as the former".

4.

Vedic Grammar.

perfect indicative active has

some of

the regular secondary endings {-va, ma, -ur), but the rest are of a peculiar type.

Active endings.

Primary.

Sing.

-masi, -mas^.

PI. I.

Secondary.
-ma.

PI. I.

2.

i.

-?m'.

2,

-tha,

Sing.

i.

2. -si.

-m.

-tana^^.

-/a,

-thanaT

i. -vas'^.

2.

-thas^.

3. -tas^.

-anti^.

3.

-j-9.

2.

3.

Du.

3. -ti^.
.

3.

-t'^.

Du.

-va.

i.

2.

-tarn.

3.

-tarn.

-, -ur".

Middle endings.
Primary.
-ma/ie^T.

PI. I.

Sing.
2.

Secondary.
-atam'^.

3.

PI. i.

i. -e.

-dhve'-^.

2. -se^^.

Sing. i. -?^.

-mahi.

2.

3.

Du.

-/<?"*.

1. -vahe'^^.

2. -at/ie^^.

3. -a^^'^.

-ante'^'^.

3.

3. -;?"-

2. -t/ias'^'-.

-dkva?ti'*.

3.

Du.

i. -z/(7/?/.

2.

-atham^^.

-ania^^.

a.
Beside the perfect endings containing r, act. du. 2. -aihur, 3. -//-, pi. 3. -Zii?-,
middle -r(?, some verbs have endings with initial ?- in the 3. pi. mid. ind. and opt. of
most tenses. These endings are -re and -rate in the pres. ind.; -rire in the perf. ind.;
ran in the opt. pres. and the ind. imperfect, pluperfect, and aorist; ra7n in the ind. aor.
ranta in the pluperfect; -rata in the opt. In the AV. -ram and -ratam appear in the

impv. mid. 26.

b. More than twenty roots have forms in which certain endings are added to the
root with the connecting vowel / or less commonly 7.
These roots are an- 'breathe',
am- 'injure', as- 'be', id- 'praise', Is- 'rule', cud- 'impel', jan- 'beget', tit- 'be strong', dhvan3. pi.

'sound',

brii-

'speak',

vam-

'vomit',

vas- 'clothe',

vrs- 'rain',

snath- 'pierce',

sru- 'hear'.

13 In the AV. -sai is the only form of the

Avery 227 (middle).
The subjunctive has -ani and instead of subjunctive (Whitney 561, a).
14 -tai occurs once in the RV. for 'ie in
it (13 times) -a;
cp. AvERY 225 (mid.) and
Brugmann, kg. 772.
the subjunctive it is the usual form in the
3 The perf. ind. has the peculiar endings AV.
In the RV. -e sometimes occurs for
I

- or -au,

I.

2.

-tha,

3.

-a

or

-au

in

the

te in the ind. pres.;

it

is

the only ending

in the perf. ind.

sing.

This ending does not occur in

RV.

'5

The

16

In

subjunctive has -vahai.

the a- conjugation -ethe and -etc;
The perf. act. du. has the peculiar aithe and -aite appear in the RV. as sub5
endings 2. -athur, 3. -alur.
junctives in several forms; -aite occurs once
6 -masi occurs 109 times in the RV., being as an indicative;
cp. Whitney 547, c and
more than 5 times as frequent as -mas (cp. 561, a; Delbruck, Verbum 106 and p. 45
WmTNEY 548 ; AvjiRY 226), but in the AV. (mid.).
17 -mahai is the usual form in the sub-mas has become commoner than -masi in
the proportion of 4 to 3. On these endings junctive in the RV. and AV.
'8 In the RV. once -dhvai in the subcp. Neisser, BB. 30, 311315.
7 In
the RV. -tha occurs more than 6 junctive.
'9 In the impv. -antam and -atdm.
times as often as -Ihana (AVERY 226). The
20 In the optative {iy)-a.
perf. ind. has the pecuUar ending -a.
21 In the impv. -sva.
8 The an is replaced by a (for the sonant
22 In the impv. -tarn.
nasal) in reduplicated verbs and a few others
23 In the a-conjugation -etham and -etam.
treated as such; cp. Delbruck, Verbum p. 51
2) Once -dhva in the RV.
(mid).
25 In the impv. -antdm; both this ending
9 The impv. act. adds -dhi, -hi, -ana, -tat
or no ending.
and -anta lose their n under the same con10 The 3. impv. has -tu instead of -t; in ditions as -anti.
The perf. ind. has -re.
26 See Delbruck, Verbum 7678; Avery
the RV. and TS. also -tat; see 418 b.
It In the RV. -ta occurs
more than 4 226; Brugmann, ICG. 797; cp. also Bollentimes as often as -tana (560 occurrences to SEN, ZDMG. 22, 599; KuHN, KZ. 18, 400;
125: Avery 226).
Benfey, Ueber die Entstehung und Verwen12 In the ind. perf., the ind. j-aorist, and
dung der im Sanskrit mit r anlautenden
the optative, -ur always appears, sometimes Personalendungen, Abh. d. Ges. d. Wiss. zv.
also in the imperfect; cp. DELBRUCK, Verbum Gottingen 15, Gottingen 1870; Windisch,
p. 52. The impv. has -antu, which loses its n Berichte der sachsischenGesellschaft d. Wiss.
under the same conditions as -anti.
1889, p. I ft; ZiMMER, KZ. 30, 224 ff.
4

cp.

Delbruck, Verbum

p. 24.

tlie

Vn. Verb.

Finite Verb.

Augment.

Formation of the Moods.

315

svas- 'breathe', sidA- 'repel', sian- 'thunder',

stambh--^ 'prop'. There are also a few 3. plurals
in -i-re, viz. rwire, pinvire, srnviri, sunvire and
hinvire, in which the connecting vowel i

appears 2.

The Augment.
413.

The augment^

consists of the syllable

(originally doubtless

a-,

which

is

an independent temporal particle)

prefixed to the imperfect, pluperfect, aorist,

and conditional, giving to those forms the signification of past time. It invariably bears the acute when the verb is accented, like
the preposition
immediately preceding a verb in a principal sentence (in). The augment
sometimes appears lengthened before n, y, r or v, the only examples being
a-nat,^ from nas- 'attain'; d-yunak (beside a-yunak),
A-yiikta (beside d-yukta),
and a-yuksatam, from ynj- 'join'; d-rinak and d-raik, from ric- 'leave'; d-var,
from wr- 'cover'; a-vrni, from /-- 'choose'; d-vrnak, from z'.;f7- 'turn'; a-vidhyat
(beside d-vidhyat), from lyadh- 'wound'. The only one of these forms written
with a in the Pada text is d-var (but once also a-var).
There is also one
passage (ii. i7-9) in which the metre seems to require ihiA. yds ti 'vidhat
should be read yds ta dvid/iaf^.
a. With the initial vowels /, u, r the augment irregularly contracts to

the Vrddhi vowels

ai, au, ar;

e. g. dicckas,
2. sing, imperf. of is- 'wish';
dunat, 3. sing, imperf. of lid- 'wet'; drta, 3. sing. aor. of r- 'go'.
This appears
to be a survival of a prehistoric contraction of a with i, u, r to ai, au, ar,
which is otherwise almost invariably represented by e, 0, ar^.
b. The augment is very often dropped.
This optional loss is to be

explained as a survival from the Indo-European period when, being an independent particle, the augment could be dispensed with if the past sense
was clear from the context. In the RV. the number of examples in which
the augment is wanting (about 2000) is considerably more than half that of
forms in which it is prefixed (about 3300), more than one half of these unaugmented forms being aorists. In the AV. the number of forms which lose
the augment is less than half that of those which retain it, more than four
fifths of these unaugmented forms being aorists.
In sense, the forms which
drop the augment are either indicative or injunctive. The indicatives have
for the most part a past, but often also (generally when compounded with
prefixes) a present meaning.
In the RV., the indicative and injunctive unaugmented forms are about equal in number*; the injunctives being used in
nearly one-third of their occurrences with the prohibitive particle md. In the
nine-tenths of the unaugmented forms are injunctive, some fourfifths of these being construed with md.

AV. about

Formation of the Moods.

414.

RV. and

I.

Subjunctive

?.

The

subjunctive

is

a very

common mood

the AV., occurring three or four times as often as the optative.

in the
It is

formed from- the present, the perfect, and the aorist*. The stem is formed
by adding a to the indicative stem. When a strong and weak stem are
distinguished, the a is attached to the former; while it coalesces to a with
Thus the subjunctive stem of
the final of the stem in the a- conjugation.
1

2
3
t

Avery 226.
Avery 227 (top).
Cp. Avery 225; Brugmann KG.
Whitney 585, a.
Cp. above 19

a, 4.

J-

have

historical

626.

Whitney

5S7,

a.

in

488 instances

7 See especially W. Neisser, Zur vedischen

Verballehre (Inaugural-Dissertat.), Gottingen
BB. 7 (1883), 211 241.
1882
8 Only a single form of the future sub-

According to Avery
225, the unaugmented forms of the RV. junctive occurs.
6

sense

only.

3i6

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

the root duh- 'milk'

is

Vedic Grammar.

4.

doh-a-; of yuj- 'join' yundj-a-; but of bhu- 'be' bhdv-a-.

other verbs sometimes add a

The subjunctive is on the
brav-a-thd from bru- 'speak''.
whole inflected like an indicative, but with fluctuations between the primary
and the secondary endings, besides some variations in the endings themselves.

Owing

to the analogy of the a- conjugation,

instead of

a,

e. g.

Thus in the active, (i) the ending of the i. sing, is -ani, of which the ni is
dropped thirteen times in the RV., e. g. doh-ani, yundj-ani, bhdv-ani; bhdv-a;
(2) the I. du. and i. 3. pi. have the secondary endings -va, -ma, -an only;
e.g. dok-ava, dSk-ama, dih-an; bkdv-ava, bkdv-ama, bhdv-an; (3) the 2. 3. sing,
may take the secondary endings as well as the primary; e. g. doh-a-si or

doh-a-s; bhdv-a-ti or bkdv-a-t'-

the middle, (i) the only secondary ending is found in the 3. pi.,
which occurs beside and more frequently than -ante; (2) the ending -at,
which is normal in the i. sing, (being
+ ), has spread from that person
to forms in which e would be normal. Thus the i. du. has -avahai only; in
the I. pi., -amahai is the usual form in the RV. and AV. beside the rarer
-amahe; in the 2. sing.^ -sai always appears for -se in the AV., though it does
not occur in the RV.; in the 2.pl., -dhvai occurs once for -dhve^ in the RV.-;
in the 2. 3. du., -aithe and -aite occur several times in the RV., being doubtless
intended for subjunctive modifications * of the indicative -ethe and -ete of the
a- conjugation; in the 3. sing., -tai occurs once in the RV. for -te, and is the
usual form in the AV.
a. The subjunctive endings in combination with the -a of the stem

In

-anta,

are accordingly the following:

Middle

Active
du.

pi.

-a

-a-va

-a-tna

sing.
1.

ani,

2.

-a-si^,

-a-s^

-a-thas

-a-tha

2.

-a-se,

-a-sai

3.

-a-ti'^,

-a-t

-a-tas

-a-n

3.

-a-te,

-a-tai

415. Injunctive.
sometimes called

du.

pi.

-a-vahai
-aithe

-a-makai, -a-mahe
-a-dhvai
-a-dhve,

-aite

-a-nte,

sing.
i.

-ai

The unaugmented forms

-a-nta.

of past tenses used modally^

but they are more suitably

improper subjunctives^,
appear to have originally expressed an injunction.
This is borne out by the fact that since the IE. period the second and third
persons imperfect (except the 2. sing, act.) had come to be used as regular
imperatives expressing a command 9.
But the unaugmented forms of the
imperfect that could be distinguished from the regular imperative (as bhdras,
bhdrat, bharan) and especially unaugmented aorists'" are often used in a sense
fluctuating between that of the subjunctive (requisition) and of the optative
(wish) ". Thus bhdratu 'let him bear', but bhdrat 'may he bear', bhiit 'may
he be'.
This mood, which is comparatively rare in the Sam416. Optative.
hitaSj is formed from the present, the perfect, and the aorist.
The stem is
formed with -yd or -T, which, when strong and weak stem are distinguished.
are

termed

Cp.

injunctives,

as they

Whitney 560 e Brugmann, KG. 719.

;

The

subjunctive in a is in origin an old

injunctive: Brugmann, KG. 716 (end).
3 In the form madayadhvai 'may ye rejoice'.
^

krnvait!, however, appears once as an

indicative; see Deleruck, Verbum p. 45.
5 In the aor. subj., -si occurs
only once
in the RV.
4

In the

dsif 'ds,

a-

conjugation a appears throughout

etc.

In the aor. subj.,

in the
8

-ti

occurs only six times

RV.

Whitney
The

563.

and pi., e. g. bhdrat-u and

bharant-u, are explained as injunctives and the
particle u: Brugmann, KG, 729, i.
'o The aorist injunctives were probably
used originally with the prohibitive particle
ma only: Brugmann, KG. 716, 2 (end).
i

Cp.

3. sinsj.

Whitney

S7S-

VII. Verb.

Formation of the Moods.

are attached to the

latter.

a to

in other verbs -T is

throughout;

e)

In the a- conjugation

added

-f is

in the

317

added (coalescing with

middle only, and -yi

be read as -id) in the active only'Roots ending in a usually change that vowel to e before -ya: e.g. de-yam
(perhaps to be explained as ddiianiY 'I would give'. But a is sometimes retained, as
in ya-yam 'I would go'.
b. The endings are the secondary ones.
There are, however, some irregularities
in the I. sing, and the 3. pi. i. The 3. pi. mid. always takes -ran instead of -an. 2. The
3. pi. act. always takes -ur, before which the a of -ya. is dropped, while in the a- conjugation y is interposed between ^^ and -ur. 3. The I. sing. mid. has the peculiar ending
a with y interposed between it and the modal -;. 4. The i. sing. act. of the a- conjugation attaches -am instead of -m (the termination -em being unknown), interposing
y
between it and the ^"^ of the stem.
(often to
a.

The endings of the optative

a.

in

combination with the modal

suffix

are accordingly the following:

I.

Graded conjugation.

Active
1.

2.

Middle

sing.

du.

-yd-m
-yds

-yd-va

-yd-ma

1.

-t-y-d

-i-vdhi

-yd-tam

-yd-ta

2.

-T-thds

-i-y-atham

-yd-tam

-y-i'ir

3.

-i-td

-i-y-dtatn

3- -ya-(

smg.

pi.

2.

du.

pi.

-i-mdhi
-t-dhvdm

a- conjugation.

1.

-e-y-am

-e-va

-e-ma

i.

-e-y-a

-e-vahi

2.

-e-s

-e-tam

-e-ta

2.

-e-thas

-e-y-atham

-e-mahi
-e-dhvam

3. -e-t

-Ham

-e-y-ur

3.

-e-ta

-e-y-atam

-e-r-an.

417. Precative.

a form of the optative which adds an -j- after

the modal suffix in several persons, and is made almost exclusively from
aorist stems. ' In the RV. there occur a few forms of the precative in three
persons (i. 3. sing., i. pi.) active, and in two persons (2. 3. sing.) middle;
thus active:
i. sing,
bhu-ya-s-am (aor.) 'may I be'; 3. sing, as-yas (for
*as-y3-s-f) 'may he attain' (aor.); babhu-yas 'may he be' (perf.); i.pl. kri-ya-s-ma

This

is

'may we do' (aor.); middle: 2. sing. mam-s-T-s-tkds (aor.) and 3. sing, mam-s-i-s-ta
(aor.), from man- 'think'.
This mood has no mood-sign of its own, as all the
418. Imperative.
first persons
are subjunctives and the second and third persons are mostly
old injunctives. The purely injunctive forms are the 2. 3. du. and 2. pi. active
and middle, ending in -tarn, -tarn, -ta; -atham, -atam, -dhvam. The 3. sing,
modipi. act. in -tu'' and -antu^, and the 3. pi. mid. in -antam^ may be
fications of injunctives.

own
and

in the

The

2. sing, act.:

imperative has, however, distinctive forms of its

and in the middle: 2. sing, -sva

-dhi, -hi, -ana, -tat;

or -am.
sing. act. in the a-conjugation has no ending, employing the
bare stem (like the vocative singular of the a- declension); e. g. bhdra
In the graded conjugation, when a
'support'; nesa 'lead' (aor. of Ym-).
strong and weak stem as-e distinguished, the ending is attached to the latter:
-dhi is added after both consonants and vowels, -hi (the later form of -dhi^
i-hi 'go',
after vowels only;
thus ad-dhi 'eat'; sru-dhi and srnu-dhi '\izzx'
jagr-hi 'awake', pipr-hi 'save', sfnu-hi 'hear'. In the na- class, -hi is added
3. sing, -tarn

a.

The

2.

3 The e (for a) is here probably due to

the influence of the other forms -es, -ei, etc.

IF. 18, 71
4 Cp. Brugmann, ICG. 729, i
Delbruck, Vergl. Syntax 2, p, 357.
5 The ending -antu and -aniam lose their
under the same conditions as -anti (p. 314,

Brugmann, KG.

note

'

On the

'

Cp.

accentuation cp. above 9 and 24

Brugmann, kg. 555

728.

a.

(bottom).

*).

3i8

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

when the root ends in a vowel, but -ana'' when it ends in a consonant;
pu-mhi 'purify', but as-dna 'eat'.
b. The ending -tat occurs some twenty times in the RV. When strong
and weak stem are distinguished, it is added to the latter; e. g. vit-tit 'thou
only

thus

shalt regard',

dhat-tat 'thou shalt place',

'thou shalt purify', etc.

once 3 found
once as 2. du.

however,

use

.Its

in

kf-nu-tst 'thou shalt make', puni-tat

almost

is

restricted

RV. and once

the

in the

to the

2. sing.

It

is,

TS. in the sense of the

in the RV., once as 2. pi. in the TS., and once as

appears to have the value of a future imperative, expressing an injunction to be carried out at a time subsequent to the present.
It
may originally have been identical with the abl. tad 'after that', 'then';
3. sing.,

sing, in

I.

AV.+.

It

knm-tdt would thus have meant 'do

(it)

then' 5.

The Present System.

I.

This group consists of a present indicative together with a suban injunctive, an optative, an imperative, and participles, besides a
past augmented tense called the imperfect because formed analogously to
the Greek tense.
This is the most important system, as its forms are about
three times as common as those of the three other systems taken together *Hence roots are generally classified according to the manner in which their
stems are formed in the present system.
Here two distinct conjugations
may be conveniently distinguished.
The first or a- conjugation, all the stems in which end in -, retains
the stem unaltered (like the a- declension) in every tense, mood, and parti419.

junctive,

ciple,

and

accenting the same syllable throughout the present indicative,

its

moods

unaugmented imperfect?. The secondary con-

participles, as well as the

jugations in -a (desideratives, intensives, causatives, denominatives) as well as

the future^, follow this conjugation in their inflexion.

The second or graded conjugation is characterized by shift of accent

between stem and ending, accompanied by vowel gradation. Minor differences
consist in the loss of n in the 3. pi. middle, in the addition of another suffix
{-ana instead of -mana) in the middle participle, in the employment of an
ending in the 2. sing. impv. act, and in vowel gradation, with shift of accent,
modal

in the

suffix of the

a.

optative.

The

first

or a- conjugation.

The special characteristics of this conjugation are:

The -a of the stem is lengthened before the endings of the

420.
X.

pi.

which begin with v and

a of the endings of the

i. du. and
jayamasi 'we conquer'; while the initial
-ante, -an, -anta, is dropped; e. g. bhdra-nti

e. g.

3. pi. -anti,

'they bear'.

The

2.

optative sign

present stem to

The

3.

e;

e. g.

2. sing.

is

throughout

impv.

act.

has no

instances (about sixteen) in which -tat

'

On

the origin of this peculiar imperative

form cp. Brugmann, KG. 839, 5.

2 See Delbrijck, Verbum 38.
3 Op. cit. 77; Whitney 571, b.

however
5

(225, bottom), states that

RV. as a 3. sing.

times in the
t

Whitney,

loc.

cit.

-T,

which combines with the -a of the

bhdves.

ending except the comparatively few

added.

is

Brugmann, KG.

Whitney
But when

occurs

732.

a.

augment was added, it

accent just like the verbal preposition in a principal sentence (the verb
itself remaining unaccented).
8 Also aorist stems ending in -a.
7

Avery, received
it

600,
the

tlie

Present System.

VII. Verb.

4.
e. g.

2.

The 2. 3. du. mid. substitute e for the a of the endings -athe, -ate;
vahethe 'ye two travel', 3. vardhete 'they two thrive'.
The middle participle regularly ends in -mana.
Five classes or types may be distinguished in

5.

a.

319

the a- conjugation. These are:

strong grade accented vowel';

the present stems of

which the radical syllable has a

2. Stems in
e. g. bhdra-ti, from bhr- 'bear'.
which the radical syllable has a weak grade vowel, the thematic a being
accented'; e. g. rujd-ti, from ruj- 'break'.
3. Stems formed with the suffix
-ya, being either (a) ordinary transitive or intransitive verbs 3,
e. g. ds-ya-ti
'throws';
or (b) passives, e. g. m-yd-te 'is led'.
4. Stems ending in -ay a,
being either (a) causatives {-dya) or (b) denominatives {-ayd)''. 5. Stems
formed with the suffix -sa, added to the reduplicated root, being desideratives
e. g. pi-pa-sa- 'desire to drink'. The last two classes, which retain the present
stem throughout their inflexion, constitute three of the secondary conjugations
which will be treated separately below (541
570).

Stems

i.

in

The

radically accented a- class {bhava-").

commonest type of the a- conjugation, about
300 such present stems occurring in the SamhitasS. The radical vowel takes
Guria, unless it is medial and long by nature or position; thus from/?- 'conI.

421. This

by

is

m-

far the

bodk-a-;
ndy-a-; bhu- 'be' bhdv-a-; budh- 'awake'
jinv- 'quicken' -.jinv-a-; krid- 'play' krid-a-. Roots
with medial a remain unchanged, e. g. vad- 'speak' vdd-a-.
a. There are, however, several irregularities in the formation of the present stem:
1. iih- 'consider' takes Guna: oka- (but iih- 'remove' remains uncharged: iiha-); guh- 'hide'
lengthens its vovifel: gilha-; kram- 'stride' lengthens its vowel in the active: krama- (but
2. The roots
krama- in the middle); krp- 'lament' retains its vowel unchanged: kfpa-.
3. gam- 'go', yam- 'reach',
dams- 'bite' and sahj- 'hang' lose their nasal: ddsa-, saja-.
gaccha-, yaccha-, yuccha-.
4. Four
yu- 'separate' form their stem vfilh the suffix -chastems are transfers from the reduplicating class 6; piba- from pa- 'drink', tistha- from
stha- 'stand', sfda-'' (for *si-sad-a-) from sad- 'sit', sasca-^ ({ox*sd-sac-a-') from sac- 'accompany'; four others 5 are transfers from the mi- class, being either used beside or having
entirely superseded the simpler original stems: i-nv-a- from i- 'send', beside i-n6-ti;
&- 'impel', beside hi-no-ti; finv-aji-nv-a- itoxa ji- 'quicken', beside /V-wo'-m; hi-nv-a- ixora
1.
'fatten' was doubtless originally *J>i-7iu- from the root pT.

quer'

fdy-a-;

srp- 'creep'

'lead'

sdrpa-;

h\it

422.

Present indicative. The forms of

bhdva-, would be as follows:

if

made from

2.

bkdva-thas,

3.

bhdva-nii.

Active. Sing.

Middle.

3.

i.

bhdva-mi,

bhdva-tas.

Sing.

r.

2.

PI. i.

bhdv-e,

2.

this tense

which actually occur,

bhdva-si, 3. bhdva-ti. Du. i. bAdva-vas (TS.),

bhdva-masi
bhdva-se,

3.

zx^ii

bhdva-tnas,

bhdva-te''^.

2.

Du.

i.

bkdva-tha^\
bhdva-va/ie,

2. bhdva-dhve, 3. bhdva-nte.
PI. i. bhdva-inahe^^
bhdv-ete.
The forms which actually occur are the following:
,

3.

The

first

class

of the Indian

gramma-

The

sixth class of the Indian

gramma-

fourth class of the Indian

gramma-

The

rians.

The nominal preceding

the

-ya

is

sometimes dropped or changed to a

or I. See below 562. Some of these verbs
having lost their special stem
in -aya,
here

meaning, are treated as a class (the tenth)

12

The RV. once has

sobhe as 3. sing, fof

p. 30 (top), AverY
Whitney 735, b, and GrassmanN,
under man 'think', give manamahe (ix. 41^),
13

See Whitney 214216,

cp, 744.
occasionally appears for
dad-aregular dadd-, from da- 'give'.
5

of its reduplicative origin

the loss of the nasal (the sonant becoming a)
sascati, sascata.
in the ending of the 3.pl.
9 rnv-a-, beside f-no-ti from ?'- 'send', is
a similar transfer to the sixth class.
1 See Whitney, Roots, under pinv.
11 vada-ihana is the only example of the
ending -thana in the indicative of the aconjugation.
is

sobhate.

of primary verbs.
6

See RozwADOWSKi, BE. 21, 147.

A reminiscence

rians.
3

rians.

the

Delbruck, Verbum

p. 235,

32

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

Vedic Grammar.

4.

Present Indicative.
Active. Sing. i. acdmi, drcami, avami, uhdmi (AV. VS.), khdnami,
gdcchsmi{P^.), carami, codami, jdnami, jayami, tapami {KSf .). tisthami {hSf .),
dahami, dhavdmi (AV.), ndyami (AV. TS.), pacami (AV.), patumi, pibami^,
bkajdmi, bhdraini, bhavdmi (AV.), mdndaini (TS. iv. 2. 6'j, yacchdmi (AV.),
yajdmi (AV.), yacami, rapdmi, rdjaini, rohxmi (AV.), vdddmi, vapdmi (AV.),
vd/idmi, sdmsami, siksami, sumbhami, sajami, sapami, sidjmi (AV.), svadami,
'

hardmi.
arsasi,

atasi,

1.

invasi

arkasi, dziasi,

ksayasi,

iihasi,

^,

cdrasi,

jayasi,

Jinvasi'^, Jiirvasi, tapasi(AY.), iarasi, tis/Aasi\ tfirvasi, ddsasi, dhanvasi, dksvasi,

ndyasi, pdtasi, pinvasi^, plbasf, bhdvasi, bkilsasi, madasi{KV.),ydcchasi, ydj'asi,

varsasi (AV), vdhasi,

harasi (AV.).
dnati{AN^.), ayati, drcati, ardaH{kN'.), arsati, arkati,

rdksasi, rajasi, rohasi, vancasi (AV.),

s'amsasi, siksasi, sdrpasi (AY.),

acati{A.Y), djati,

3.

dvati, tnvati^, isati, ihati

vapasi,

{i^h..\i.'Lo'>),

ukati, ejati, osati, krdndaii,

kramati{KN .),

ksdyati, ksarati, khanati (AV.), khildati, gdcchati, gUhati (AV.), cdrati,

krllati,

j'dyati, jinvati^, Jivati^Jurvatijjrayati, tapati, tdrati, tisthati

ce'tati,

', tsdrati (AV.),

dahati (AV.), d<isati, ddsati, dhdmati, dhdvati 'runs' and 'washes',
ndndati (AV.), ndyati, navati (AV.) 'praises', pdcati, pdtati, pinvati^,

dadati^,
ndksati,

pibati

',

piyati, bodhati, bhdfati, bkdnati, bkdrati, bhdrvati, bhdvati, bhdsati (AV.),

bhiisati,

(TS.

vddasi^

sas'casi', sidasi^,

bhe'dati,

VII. 4.

radhaii,

19^),

rijati,

mddati, mdrdkati, mehati (AV.), ydcckati, ydjati, ydtati, yabhati

ydmaii, yacati (AV.), yucchati, rdksati, rddati, rapati^ rdjati,
rSdhati,

rebhati,

rohati^ vdncati (AV.), vdddti, vdpati,

rosati,

varjati, vardhati, varsaii (AV.), vasati 'dwells', vahati, vAsati,

siksati,

sundhati,

h'lmbhati, iocati

sfdati'^, se'dhati,

skandati,

stobhati,

sdsatii,

(Kh.

IV.

5").

Du.

karsathas,

i.

5. 10').

ksdyathas,

ve'nati,

samsati,

sarjati, sdrpati, sadhati,

sphurjati (AV.), sredkati, Adrati, himsati'<

cdravas (TS.

I.

invathas'^,

(AV. TS.),

2. acathas,

gdcchathas,

drcathas, arhathas, dvathas,

ghosathas,

Jlnvatkas', jivatkas, jurvathas, tisthatas^, dhdmathas,

pdtathas, pinvathas^, bhdrathas, bhdvathas, bhusathas,

cetathas,

janathas,

naksatkas,

nayathas,
yajathas,

mddatkas,

ydtathas, raksathas (AV. TS.), rajathas, ro/iat/ias, vanathas, varathas, vahathas,

siksathas, sadathas, sddkatAas, sidathas^, svddathas.
3.

invatas^,

ejatas (AV.),

khadatas (AV.), gdcchatas (AV.),

dravatas (AV.), dhdvatas 'wash', naksatas,

ksayatas,

ghosatas, cdratas, tisi/iatas^ (AV.),

pdcatas (AV.), pi?ivatas', pibatas'', bhdvatas, bhflsatas, 7nanthatas, mardhatas,

yacchatas (AV.), yucchatas, raksatas, rdjatas, vardhatas (AV.), vasatas, vdhatas.
PL I. drcamasi^ drhamasi, khanamasi{AN), cdrdmasi and cdramas{KY.),
janamasi, Jayamasi, taramasi, ddyamasi (AV.), dahamasi (AV.), namdmasi
(A v.), ndyamasi and naydmas (AV.), pibdmas^ (AV.), budhdmasi, bhajdmas
(AV.), bharamasi, mddamasi and madsmas, methamasi, ydjdmasi and ydjdmas,
vdddmasi and vaddmas, vasdmasi (AV.), Jamsamas (AV.), sajdmasi (AV.),
hardmasi (AV.) and hdrdmas (AV.).
dvatka, ejatha, krilatha, ksdyatha, khddaika, gdcchatha,
djatha^,
2.
cetatka, jinvatha^,
caratha (AV.),
tdksatha,
tiirvatha,
dhdvatha (AV.),
ndyatha, nasatha, patatha, pinvatha'' (TS. ill. i. 11*), bhdratha, bhdvatha,
bkiisatha, mddatha, mosatka, rdksatha, rdjat/ta, rejatha, vahatha, sdrpatha.
With -thana only vddathana.

3.

but

acanti (AV.),

this, is

due

standing for

'li

A
A

transfer
transfer

to

Sandhi

manamahe

drcanti,

ajanti,
(108),

manamahe

aii (Pp.).

from the reduplicating

from the nu- class.

drsanti,
3
4

class.

drhanti,

transfer

dvanti,

from the root

krandanti,

class for

sasti.

A transfer from the infixing class,

The Samhita lengthens the final vowel

in at least ten of the following forms.

VII. Verb.

Present System.

321

kramanti (AY.), krilanti, krosaiiti, ksdranti, ksodanti, khananti (AV.), khadanti

(^^), gacchanti^ gdmanti, guhanti, cdranti, jdyanti, jdranti, jinvanti'^, jivanti,
tdksanti, tdpanti, taranti, tisthanti^, trdsanti, tsdranti, dabhanti, dahanti, dasanti

(AV.), drdva?iH, dhanvanti, dhdmanti, dhavanti, dharvanti, naksanti, nandanti,

namanti, ndyanti, naianti 'they attain', nlksanti (AV.), nindanti, pdcanti, pdtanti,

pinvanti^, ptbanti', ptyanti, bhajanti, bhananti, bkdranti, bMvanii, bhusanti,

majjanti, mddanti, mdnthanti, maranti, mard/ianti, mimanti' {ma- 'bellow'),
mehanti, ydcchanti, ydjanti, yacanti (AV.), yodhanti (AV.), rdksanti, rdnanti,
rddanti, rajanti, reb/ianti, rohanti, vddanti, vananti, vdpanti^ vdrdha7iti, vdrsanti,
valganti{hN.)^ vdsanti, vasanti{KV.), vdhanti, vananti, idmsanti, siksanti, socanti,
scotanti, sapanti, sarpanti (KS[ .), sfdanti^, sedhanti, skandanti, stobhanti, srdvanti,

svddanti, svdranti, hdranti (AV.), khnsanti^.

Indicative Middle.

Sing.

dme, arce,

fkse, gacche (TS. i. i. 10^), daye (AV. TS.), 7iame,

nikse (AV.), badhe (AV.), bhdre, bkikse, mande, yd/e, rabhe, Idbhe (AV.), vade,
vdnde, varte, sraye (AV.), sdhe (AV.), stdve, svaje (AV.), hdve.
1. arsase {AST.), chase, garhase,ga/iase,dksase,cayase,jarase,josase{AV.),
I.

aje,

pinvase ', bddkase, bhrajase,

modase, yacchase, yajase, yamase, raksase, ramase (AV.),
rocase, rohase, vdrdkase, vahase, sumbhase, sobhase, sdcase, stdvase, harsase.
3. ajate, ay ate, tksate (AV.), tsaie, hate, ejate'^, edhate, ohate, krpate, kalpate
(AV.), kramate, kridate (AV.), gacchate, gahate, guhate, ghosate, cdyate, ce'tate,
codate, cydvate (AV.), jdrate, jrmbhate, tandate, tistkate', tej'ate, tosate, ddksate,
dadate^ (hS .), dadhate^ {T'Si.ii.2.12''), djhate^, dyotate (AN.), dhavate, ndksate,
ndtnate, ndyate (AV.), ndsate, ndsate, pdcate (AV.), pdyate, pdvate, pinvate ', pibate',
prdthate, pldvate, bid/iate, bhdjate, bhandate, bhayate, bhdrate, bhiksate, bhojate,
bhrdjate, bhresate, mdmkate, madate (AY.), mdrate, modate, ydjate, yatate, yamate,
yoj'ate, ramhate, raksate, rapsate^, rdmate, rambate, rejate, rocate, rohate, Idyate
{AY.), vancate (AV.), vadate, vanate, vdndate, vapate, vdrate 'covers', vdrtate,
vdrdhate, varsate (AV.), vas ate (x. 3 7 3), vdhate, ve'pate, vyathate, sapate (AV.),
tisthase^, tosase, dohase, naksase, nayase, pavase.,

mamhase,

siksate,

mandase,

h'lmbhate, srayate (AV.),

sdcate,

sakate,

sadhate,

se'cate,

se'vate,

stdrate,

sayate, stdvate, smayate, sydndate, svadate, hdrsate, hdvate, hasate~, hvdrate.

With

-e for -te: Jose,

Du.

I.

tose'^,

make,

sdye,

se've,

stdve.

sdcavahe.
raksethe, varethe, vahethe, srayethe, sacethe.

2. jayethe, jarethe,
3. carete, javete,

tarete,

bJdhete (AV.),

namete,

yatete, rejete, vddete, vartete, vardkete,

vepete,

bliayete,

bharete,

viethete,

vyathete, sacete, smayete, havete.

PI. I. ksadamake (AY.), cdyamahe'^ (KY .), jaramahe, ndksamahe, ndvamahe,

ndsdmahe, badhamahe, bhdjamahe, bhdyamahe, bharamahe, mdnamahe^ mdndamahe, maramahe, ydjamahe, yacamahe, rabhamahe, vdnamahe, vdndamahe,
sahamahe (AV.), staramahe, stdvamahe, svajamahe, hdvamahe.
cayadhve, dhavadhve, badhadhve, bhdradhve, mandadhve, vdhadhve,
1.
sayadhve, sdcadhve (AV.).
,

Transfer from the -nu

class.

transfer form from the reduplicating

form of /i- 'leave'(ix. 275; x.1273); cp.p.322,

note 3. This form is given by Avery 258 as
subjunctive of the

class.

s-

aorist of ha-.

With

irregular accent, lilie that

of similar forms in the graded conjugation.
9 Conjecture for caydsmahe, AV. XIX. 481

transfer from the infixing nasal class.

+ In dfejate iniv. 482, V. 64'': V-p. dpaljate.
5 dohdte (x. 1 337), Delbruck, Verbum 97,
and Avery 233, is a mistake for dohaie (a

see Whitney's note on the passage in his

transfer from the root class).

Translation.

6
7

Cp. Bartholomae, if. 10, 18.

From has- 'go emulously', a secondary

Indo-arische Philologie

I. 4,

8 (iv. 381).

10

note

See note on bhdvamahe, above,

'3.

21

p. 319,

322

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

dyante, Tksatite{KY.T?>.), isante, edhante, ksjda?ite, gdcchante{TS.w.2. G''),

cydvante, jdyante, jarante 'sing', dsthante'', dddante'^ (AV.\ dhavante,

3.
citante,

naksante, namante, navante, pdvante, pibanie'', piavante (AN .), bddkante, bhajante,
bhdyante, bharante, bhrajante, modante{kS .), ydjante, yatante^ydcante, raksante,
rante^, rapsante (AV.), rabhante, ramante, rejante, rjcante, vadante, vdrante,
vdrtante, vdrdkante, vahante, vyathante, sayante, h'lmbhante, srayante, sdcante,

spdrdhante,

stdvante,

sahante,

sdpante,

svajante,

svadante,

hdrante,

Mvante,

hdsante^^ (AV.).

Present Subjunctive*.
423. Active. Sing. I. ajani (TS.vii. 4.19'; VS. xxiii. 19), carani, jivani
tarani (AV.), ndyani, pacani, bhajani, rdjani, vddani (AV.), vdAani,

(AV.),

hdrani (AV.).
a.

2.

Without

With-s/:

djasi,

-ni: area.

gdccAasi (AY.), jayasi, iistAasi^ (AY.), nayasi (AY.),

pibasi^, bhdjasi, bhdvasi, bhasasi (AV.), ydjasi, vadasi, vahasi.

b. With -s: dvSs, gacchas, jdyas, jivas (KY.), jdrvas^, tisiMs'^, bhdrSs,
vadiis (AV.), vdnas (AV.), vdrdhas, iiksas.
-ii: djati, ejati (AY.), gdcchati, jayati,jivati, tdpati, tisthati'^,
3. a.

With

dabhati, dahati, dhanvati, ndyati, pdcati, pdtati, padsti, pibati ', bodkati, bhdjati,
bhdrati, bhdvati, marati, ydjati, raksati (AV.), vadati, vahati (AV.), sdmsatiy

sdpati (AV.), sumbhati (AV.), srdyati (AV.), sidati ', svddati, svarati.
b. With -t: drcat, drsat, drhat, dvat, invSt^, ejat, gdcchat, ghosat, jandi
(AV.vi. 8 1 3), jivat, tisthat \ ddsat (AV.), ddsat, dhavat (AV.), ndylt (AV.), nindat,
pdtat, piblt\ bhajat (AV.), bhdrat, bhusat, ydcchat, yajat, resat (AV.),
rjhatyNY.), vdrdhat, vahat (AY. TS.), sdmsat, sdpat (AY.), siksat, sarpat (KY.),,
skdndat (TS. :. 6. 2-), smdrat (AV.), hdrat (AV.).
Du. I. cdrava, jdyava, pibava ', vdnava, sdmsava.
2. dvathas, tarSt/ias (AY.), tisthdthas', ndyathas (PN .), plbat/ias^, bhdvathas
(A v.), vadathas, stnarathas.

pdcat,

3. cdrdtasi , pibatas'-,

PI.
v.'].\''),

thama,

vdkatas, sdpatas.

drclma, krdmama, khdnama (TS. iv. 1.2^), taksama, namama (TS.

patdma (Kh. p. 171. 6), bhajama, bhdrama, bhdvama, madama, manmarama, yajama, radhama, vadama, vardhama, vdsama, sresama^,
I.

hdrdma.
dvdtha, gacckatha, jaydtha, jivdtha (TS. v.

2.

7. 4'') 9, yacchixtJia

(AV.),

vdhdtha.
3.

drcdn,

krildn,

yacchan (AV.),

patan,

karan (AV.).
Middle. Sing.
nayasai (AV.).
svajdte;

i.

gdcchdn, ghjsdn, cdrdn, jivan (AV.),

vdddn, vdrdhdn'^, vahan, siksdn(AY.),

gdcchai (AV.), mdnai, marai, stdvai.

3. jarate,

tisthate

',

pavate, bhayute, ydjdte,

ddsan (AV.),
sfd.in' (AV.),

2.

vardhase;

vdhate, srdyate,.

cardtai(KY .), jaydtaii^Y'&.KY ), yajdtai, srayatai(KY.), svajdtai(KY.).

transfer form

from the reduplicating

5
7

class.

transfer from the -nu class.

Delbruck, Verbum 82, gives

tisthatas,

According to Roth, ZDMG. 20, 71, for but I cannot trace it.
8 Perhaps from -His- 'clasp':
cp.
*ran-anie; WHITNEY, Roots
r-anie, under
Whitney, Roots.
f 'go' also Grassmann, under root ar.
9 Delbruck 48 gives pibatha also.
3 From /las- 'go emulously'; see Whitney's
JO vdrdhan (I. 70''; VI. 1711) as well as drcan
note on AV. iv. 36^
4 No
forms of the 2. 3. pi. subj. middle (iv. 552; V. 31^) are given as indicatives by
occur in this class.
Delbruck, Verbum 91 ; cp. p. 327, note 3.
5 Delbruck p. 37 (top) gives tdk^as, which
2

cannot trace.

VII. Verb.

Du.
PI.

I.

I.

Present System.

323

rabhavahai (TS.iv.4.7=), sdcavahai, sahavahai.

3.
ndsamakai, bhajamahai (AV.), ydjamahai, vdnamahai.

ydtaite.

Present Injunctive.
424. Active.

Sing.

cydvam, taksam,

i.

bhojam, yojam.

tistham'^,

dvaa, esas (AV.), osas, guhas, caras, tisthas^ (AV.), dd/ias, tiamas (AV.),
tnadas (AV.), yamas, vadas (VS. xxin. 25), vanas, vapas, vdras, vasas, venas,
2.

socas.

arcat, arsat {KSI .y^ , karsat, krandat,

3.

codat, janat, jdyat, josat, taksat, tandrat^,

ddbhai,

ddsat,

pinvaf,

pibat^,

madat

(AV.),
rodhat,

ddsat,

dAsat,

prothat,

bjdhat,

{KSf.)^, minat,

vddat,

vdrat,

drdvat,

nayat,

ndksat,

bhdrat,

ydmaf,

carat, ceiat,

bhavat

nasat,

(AV.),

dadaf^

pdcat,

bhasat,

pdtat,

bhramsat

ranaf, rddat, rdpat, radhat, re/at, resat,

vdrdhat,

vdrtat,

krdmat* {AN.), ksarat,

tapat, tamat, tdrat, tisthaf^

vdsat,

sakat, iardhat, siksat, sndthat,

sramat, sadat, sdrpat, sascaf^, svdjat.

PI. 3. arcan, cdran, dabhan, dhavan, ndksan, ndsan ('lose' and 'reach'),
b/iaran {AN.), bkavan{KN.), yaman, rdnati, vaman, vardhan, sSsan, sadhan^,
sidan^.

Middle.
isata,

3.

Sing.

2.

guhathas (AV.), bddhathas, rabhathas (AV.).

bharata, rocata, vdrdhata, sacaia, sMhata.

dmanta, dyanta, caranta, cyavanta, janania, dsthanta'-, naksanta,

ndyanta, navanta, nasanta, nasanta, pinvanta'^ pravanta, bhdjanta,
bhananta, bhdranta, bhiksanta, yaksanta, yavanta, rananta, ranta (i. 61'';
VII. 39^)9, ramanta, r^janta, vanta^, vdranta ('cover'), vardhanta, vradhanta,
socanta, sdcanta, sapanta, sSdhanta, stdvanta, smayanta, hdvanta.
PI. 3.

namanta,

Present Optative.
425. Active. Sing.

(Av.), sikseyam.
caret,

PI.

I.

dves,

bhaves, tnadei, vanes.

12^),

vadheyam

gdcchet (AV.),
Idbhet (AV.), vadet (AV.),
3.

dvet,

bhdvet (AV.), yacchet (AV.),

Du. 3. grdsetam.

pdtet,

taret,

vasef^ (Av.),

2.

careyam {AY .), bhavey am (^Q.iy.t.

I.

sravet, haret (AV.).

kramema, ksayema (AV.), khanema (TS.

iv. i. 2*),

gacchema (AV.
patema (TS.

TS.), cayema, carema, jdyema, jivema, tdrema, tisthema ', dasema,

bhareina (AV. TS.), bhdvema, bhdsema, mddema, mahema, yatema,

vatema, vadema, siksema, sapema, sideina^ (AV.),
{KS!.),
hdrema (AV.).
3. tdreyur, ydceyur (AV.), vaheyur, saheyur (SA. xii. 32).
Middle. Sing. i. saceya.
3. ajeta, kalpeta {?ih..'s.\i. 20), ksameta, jareta,
rv. 7.

1 3''),

rohema

rapema,

bhikseta, yajeta, vadeta, sdmseta (AV.), saceta, saheta (SA. xii. 20), staveta.

Du.
PI.

I.

I.

sacevahi (AV.).

gahemahi, bhajemahi, bharemahi, ydtemahi, rabhemahi, sdcemahi.

With ending

3.

-rata: bharerata.

Present Imperative.
426. Active. Sing. 2. aca, dja, area, drsa, dva, inva'^, uha (AV.), Ssa,
karsa, kranda, krama, ksdra, khada (AV. TS.), gdccha, gada (AV.), cdra,
8
Delbruck, Verbum 89 (p. 63), takes
Transfer form from the reduplicating class.
hdran as an unaugmented imperfect, but it
A transfer from the -nu class.
3 AV. X. 4', some Mss. risat: see Whit- seems to occur only as a N. sing. m. participle.
ney's note in his Translation.
9 According to Delbruck 113 for *ranfor ksamai, AV. vil. 63'
4 Emendation
aiita; Whitney, Roots, ?--aKto. Cp.p.322,note 2.
see Whitney's Translation.
1

30', perhaps to be emended to tandat.

AV. XX. 492 emendation for mada.

Delbruck 56

II.

(top)

adds

raksat.

">

DelbAUCK

II

AV.

1.

XII. 4=7:

Cp. p. 324, note

c, for *van-an.ia.

should probably be

5.

21*

vaset.

324

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I-

4.

Vedic Grammar.

tara, tistha^, daia (AV.), daha,

drava, dhanva, dJiama, dhava, nama, ndya, niksa (AV.), pata,
pava, pinva ', piba ^, protha, bodha, bhdja, bhdra, bhdva, bhUsa, mada, mantha
(A v.), manda, myaksa, mrada, ydccha, ydja,ydbha (KY.),yoJa, rdksa, rdna, rdda,
raja (AV), roha, vada, vadha (AV.), vapa, vdrdha, vasa^ (AV.), vasa(AV.),
vdha, vincha'' (AV.), sdmsa, sdrdha, siksa, sumbka, soca, sraya (AV. TS.),
sdra, sarpa, saha (SA. xii. 31), sidAa, sfda^, sedha, skanda (AV.), stana{hN.),

jay a, jmva^, jTva, jurva, josa, tdpa,

coda,

dhnha

(AV.),

srava,

svada,

svapa,

svara,

hara,

hinva'^.

With ending

-tai:

avatat,

bhavatat,
osatat, gacchatat {AN.),jinvatat^{K^.), dakatat, dhSvatat {KV .) 'xnxi
yacchatat, yacatat, rdksatat, vahatat, srayatat (TS. vii. 4. 19^).
3. ajatu, ahcatu {KSI)-, arcatu, arsatu (AV.), dvatu, invatu'^, Tsatu (AV.),
,

esatu (AV.), osatu (AV.), krandatu, kramatu (TS. vir. 3. 11^), krosatu
gacchatu, caratu {hN.), jayatu, jinvatu\ jivatu (AV.), tapatu, tisthatu^,
dahatu (AV.), drrnhatu (AV.), dravatu (AV.), dhavatu, naksatu (AV.), nayatu,
paiatu (AV.), pibaiu^, bjdhatu, bhavatu, bhUsatu, manthatu (AV.), tndndatu,
ejatu,

{hS .),

yacchatu, yajatu, rdksatu, rajatu (AV.), rohatu, vadatu (AV.), vapatu (TS.
AV.), vdrdkatu, varsatu (Kh.ii. 13*), vasatu (AV.), vahatu, siksatu, socatu,
With ending -iai: gacckatst,
sarpatu, sidatu", sedkatu, Ainvatu^.

smaratat (AV.).

Du. 2. ajatam, dvatam, invatam^, osatam, gdcchatam, jdyatam, jaratam,

jinvatam ', taksatam, tdpatam, tlsthatam ^, tiirvatam, dahatam (AV.), dMvaiam, nayatam, patatam, pinvatam, pibatam % badAatam, bAajatam, bAdratam,
bAdvatam, bAusatam, mamAatam (Kh.i. 10^), yaccAatam, ydtatam, rdksatam,
roAatam (TS. I. 8. iZ''), vdnatam, vardAatam, vdAatam, venatam, siksatam,
.

sidatam^, sedhatam.
3. ayatam (AV.), dvatatn, invatam^, krosatam (AV.), gaccAatam, cetatam,
jdyatam (AV.), jivatam (AV.), drdvatam, pibatam'' (AV.), bAaratam (AV.),
bAavatam, madatam, meAatam (AV.), yaccAatdm, raksatam, vdAatam, vestatam

(AV.),

sidatam'.

PI. 2.

drcata,

arsata

jayata, jinvata"^, jtvata,

^,

avata, gaccAata, guAata, carata, codata, janata,

tapata, tarata, tistAata'-, trasata, daksata,

taksata,

dAavata, ndyaia, nindata, pdcata, patata (AV.), pinvata ', pibata ',
bAd/ata (AV.), bAdrata, bAdvata, bAusata, madata, tndntAata, ydccAata, yajata,
yacata, rdksata, roAata, vadata, vanata, vapata, vardAata, vaAata, vrajata
(AV.), samsata, sundAata (KJa..iu.. 16^), sumbAata, socata (AV.), sacata, sarpata,
With ending
sascata^, sidata'^, sedAata, stobAata, sredAata, Aarata (AV.).
df-mAata,

-tana: bAajatana.
drcantu, drsantu, dvantu, kasantu (AV.), krosantu (AV.), ksarantu,
3.
gaccAantu, carantu, jdyantu, jivantu, taksantu, tapantu (AV. TS.), tistAantu',
trasantu (AV.), daAantu, drdvantu, dAanvantu (AV.), dAavantu (AV.), dAurvantu,
namantu (AV. TS.), nayantu, pacantu, patantu, pibantu', bjdAa'tiu, bAajantu
(AV.), bAarantu (AV.), bAdvaniu, matAantu (AV.), madantu, mantAantu (AV.),
mdndantu, ydccAantu, yajantu, yiucAantu, rdksantu, radantu, roAantu, lapantu
(AV.), vddantu, vapantu, vardAantu, vdrsantu (AV.; Kh. 11.5), vasantu (AV.),
vdAantu, vancAantu, sundAantu, sumbAantu (AV.), srosantu, sajantu (AV.),

sarpantu (AV.), sidantu ', sedAantu, stobAantu, sravantu, svddantu, svarantu,

Aarantu (AV.).
Middle. Sing. 2. dcasva (AV.), edAasva (AV.), kalpasva, kramasva,
gaccAasva (AV.), codasva, cyavasva (AV. TS.), jdrasva, tapasva, dayasva (AV.),

1
2

Transfer from the - class.

Transfer from the reduplicating class.
AV. in. 4^, perhaps to be read vasa.

4
5

Avery 243 adds vena{1).

The form arsata in AV. VI.

tion: see

Whitney's note

282

is

a corrup-

in his Translation.

Vn. Verb.

Present System.

325

naksasva, nabhasva (AV.), namasva, nayasva, pdvasva, pinvasva ', pibasva ',
praiAasva, plavasva 3 (Kh. 11. 1 6), bddhasva, bkajasva, bhdrasva, madasva (AV.),
mandasva'>, yajasva, yatasva, raksasva, rabhasva, ramasva, vadasva, vdndasva,
vdrtasva, vdrdhasva, vdhasva, socasva, srayasva, hancasva, sdcasva, sdhasva,
sidasva-, sevasva (AV.), syandasva, svajasva (AV.), svddasva, hdrsasva.
3. edhatam (TS.vii. 4. 19^), kalpatam (AV.), gacchatam,jaratam, tisthatam"
(AV.), dadatam', dayatam{KY.), dyotatam (AV.), nabhatJm (AV.), pdvatam,p'.nvatam^,prathatam, bddhatam, bhayatam (AN.), yajatam, rabhatam (AV.), ramatam
(AV.), rocatam, vanatam, vartatam, vdrdhatam, srayailm (AV.), sacatam, saha-

tam (Av.).

Du.

2. kalpetham (TS. iv. 2. 5'), gahetham (AV.), cjdetham, cyavetham

jaretham, bAdhetham, yajetham, rabhetham (AV.), vartetham (AV.),
vdrdhethdm, vahetham, srayetham, sacetham (AV.), smaretham.
3. kalpetSm (TS. iv. 4. 11^), srayetam, sacetam.

(AV.),

PI. 2. ajadhvatn, ksdmadhvam, gacchadhvam, cyavadkvam {TS.iv.'j.i^^),

^, nayadhvam,
namadhvam, pavadhvam, pinvadhvam ', pibadhvam ^,
badhadhvam, bhajadhvam (AV.), bharadhvam, modadhvam, yacchadhvam,
yajadhvam, rabhadhvam, rdmadhvam, vadadhvam, vartadkvam, srayadhvam,
sacadhvam (AV.), sdhadhvam, syandadhvam (AV.), svajadhvam, harsadh%iam
(Av.).
With ending -dhva: ydjadhva.
ayantam (AV.), kdlpantam (TS. iv. 4. 11'), JayantSm, tisthantam'
3.
namantam, pdvantam^, badhantam (TS. iv. 2. 6*), bharantam (AV.), yajantam,
yatantam, radantam (AV.), rabhantam (AV.), ramantam (AV.), layantam,

tisthadhvam

vardhantam,
hdrsantam (AV.).
vartantam,

srayantam,

sacantam,

syandantam,

sadhantam,

Present Participle.
427. a. The active form made with the suffix -mit^ is very common.
Stems of forms which occur are: djant-, dtant-, drcaiit-, drsant-, drhant-,
dvant-, invant-

',

uksant-,

ejant-,

e'sant-,

Sdant-, osant- (AV.), kdlpant-

'

(AV.),

ksdyant-,
ksdrant-,
krSmant-, krilant-, krosant-,
khdnani- (AV.), kh&dant- (AV.), gdcchant-, gUhant-, ghSsant-, cdtant-, cdrant-,

knjant- (AV.),

krdndant-,

cetant-, cestatit- (AV.), jdjhjhant-, jdnjant-, jdyant-, jdrant-, jinvant-'^, jivant-,

jarvant-, tdksant-, tdpant-, tdrant; tisthant-^, tfcrvant-^, ddsant-, ddhant-, dssant-,
drdvant-, dhdmant-, dhavant-, dhttrvant-, dhrdjant-, ndksant-, nddaiit- (AV.),
nay ant-, ndvant-, pdcant-, pdtant-, pinvant- ', pibajit- ^, pfsant-, prothant-, bhdjant-,
bhdrant; bhdrvant-, bhdvant-, bkdsant-, bhUsant-, bhrdjant-, mddant-, mivant(AV.), tnehant- (AV.), mrocant-, ydksant-, ydcchant-, ydjant-, ydtant-, yacant-,

yucchant-, yesant-, rdksant-, rddant-, rdpant- (TS.vii. 1. 11'), rdjant-, ribhant-'^,

rihant; Idpant- (AV.), vdiant-, vddant-, vdpant-, vdrdhant-, v drsant- (AV.),
sdmsant-,
vrAdhant-,
sdpant-,
ve'sant-,
vrdjant-,
vasant-, vdhant-, ve'nant-,

idrdhant-, sasant-, siksant-, socant-, hdyant- ', sdnant-, sdpant-, sdrjant- (AV.),
sadhant-, sShant- or sdhant-, sfdant-^, se'dkant-, skdndant- (AV.),
stobhant-, srdvant-, sredhant-, hdyant-, hdrant-, hdrsant-, hhant-.
b. The middle participles almost invariably formed with the suffix -mana are
sdrpani-,

also numerous: dtamana-, dmamana-{AN.), dyamana-, iksamana-{KN .), isamana-,

kdlpamana- (IS.IY. 2. 10^), kfpamana-, krdks&mana-, krosamana-, ksdmamana-,
is with WHITNEY
7 If kalpat, AV. XI. 526,
Transfer from the -nu class.
Transfer form from the reduplicating in his Translation emended to kalpan.
8 From tiirv- a secondary form of tur-,
class.
1

3
4
5

9 Fern, rebhatyau (Kh.

Accented plavasva.

Avery 243 a.iAs yacchasva(^).

Avery 246 adds pinvantam (?).
On the declension of these stems

I.

The form svdyat, vn.

regarded by Delbruck (p.
10

see 314.

injunctive of

ivi-.

37).

501,
56,

seems

to

be

middle) as an

326

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

cdyamana, jdnamana-, jdramana-,

khdnamana-, gAhainana-, guhamana-,
tiinjamana',
tejamana-,
'singing' and 'approaching', Jdsamana-, jehamana-,
tosamana- (AV.), ddksamana- (AV.), ddsamdna-, dyJtamana-, dhavamana-,
ndksamdjia-, ndmamana-, ndyamana-, ndvamana-, nadhamdna-, pdvamSna-,
p'mvanidna- ', ptbdamdna-, prdthamdna- (AV. TS.), prothamana-, badhamana-,
bkdiida?iiaJia-, bhdyamdna-, bkdramana-, b/iiksamSria-, bhrdjamdna-, mdmhatnatia-, mandam ana-, me'gkamdna-, modamana-, ydcchamana-, yajamana-, ydtamdna-, yiicamana- i^KN .), yddamdna-, rdtnhaindna-, rdksa7nana-, rdbhamana-,
rdmbamana-, rdsamdna- (AV.), rejamSna-, rocamdna-, vdndamana-, vdrtamdna-,
vdrdhamdiia-, vdhamana-, vepamdna- (AV.), vydthamdna-, siksamana-, si'imbhamana-, sobhanidna-, srdyamdna-, Irosamdna-, svdncamdna-, sdcamdna-, sdhamana-, sidvatnd?ia-, spdrdhamdna-, smdyamdna-, sydndamana-, Mrsamdna-,
hdvamdna-, hfisamdna-.
a. A few middle participles in -ana instead of -mana, seem to be formed from
present stems ofthis class; thus cydvdna-^ pratha7id-, ydtdna- ?Sii. yaidnd-, suinbhdna-^ but it
is probably better to class them as somewhat irregular or isolated root aorist participles*.
\

Imperfect Indicative.
be noted that the longer ending of the 2. pi. active never
the imperfect of this or any other class of the a- conjugation.
Unaugmented forms are fairly common; used injunctively they are in the
428.
occurs in

It

is

to

very nearly as frequent (424) as the regular subjunctive^ (423).

3. sing,

Active sing. i. dgaccham (AV.), acaram, ataksam, ataram, anamam,

anayani, apinvam ', abharam, abhavam, abhedam, arodkam, aroham, asidam
dvaiii;

yamam.

dkrandas, aksaras, agacchas, dcaras, dfanas, djayas, dtaras, dtist/ias^,

ddahas, adhamas, dnayas, dpinvas'-, apibas^, dbhajas, dbkaras, dbhavas, dmadas,
dyafas, dramhas, dradas, avadas, dvapas, dvahas, diiksas, dsadas, dsarpas
(AV.), asTdas'^, asedkas, asravas; djas, dvas; tapas (AV.), bhdras.
3. dkrandat, dkramat, dksarat, akhaiiat (AV.), dgacchat, dguhat, dcarat,
2.

dcalat {AN.), acetat, djanat, djayat, ajinvat^, dtaksai, atapat, atarat, dtistkat^,

ddahat, addsat, ddnnhat (AV.), ddravat, adhamat, anamat,

dpatat (AV.), dpinvaf^, dpibat', abhajat, abkarat, dbhavat,
dbhusat, dmadat, amaiitkai, dmandat, dmurc/iat (AV.), dyacchat, draksat,
arapat, aroAat, dvapat, dvasat, dvasat, dvahat, dvenat, dsayaf, dsasat^ (Kh.
I. <)''),
dsocat, asajat, asadat, dsidat^, asedkat, askandat (AV.), dharat (AV.);
djai, arcat, dvat;
dirat {']^Tr-)7, auhat {uh- 'push'); krdndat, carat {KV.),
iaksat, tsdrat, drmhat, naksat, nayat, pibat', bkdrat, rebhat, vdhat.

ddadat' (AV.),
dnayat,

dpacat,

Du.

djinvatam'^, dtaksatam (AV.), dpinvatam'^, dprathatam, dbkavatam,

2.

dmantAatam,

aradatam,

airatam''

'set in

(Tr-

atisthatdm'- (AV.),

3.

auhatdm (AV. VS.

PI.

(TS. V.
6. i^),

3.

"

I.

6.

dbkavatam (TS.

dbhardma

dtaksdma,
i^),

dsascatam^, dsTdatam';

TS.).

d?iayata,

(AV.).

dpinvata'-, dbhavata,

akrdman^

dkasan (AV.),

iv. 7.

2.

15^),

dvatam;

avardhatdm;

avatdm;

dtaksata,

dtisthata',

dnadata

avartaia (AV.), dvalgata (TS.

6
7

WmTNEY

741

Nominalbildung 54 (top).
4 Cp. Root Aorist 506.

a,

akhanan (AV.),

dksaran,

(A.V.),

Transfer from the -nu class.

Transfer form from the reduplicating
Cp.

ajatam,

v.

dsarpata; dvata; auhata (AV).

class.
3

dsiksatam,

motion').

See Whitney 743.

Transfer from the root
Transfer from the root

and Lindner, the verb Fr8 akramus

is
is

aguhan.

class.

class,

in

which

also middle.

given by

impf. of this class with

Avery 249

-us,

but

it

is

as an
doubt-

VII. Verb.

Present System.

327

dcaran (AV.), acalan (AV.), ajanan, djayan {KSl), dtaksan, dtaran, dtisthan
\
atrasan,
ddasan, adravan,
adhrajan, anaksan, dnaman (AV.),
dnayan,
aptnvan^, apiban^ (AV.), dbharan, dbhavan, dbhusan, dmadan, dmandan,
dyacchan (AV.), dyacan (AV.), draksan, drajan (AV.j, dvadan, dvapan (AV.),
dvardhani, dvahan, mesan

{\fvis-),
dsthivan'* (AV.), dsredhan, dsvaran;

dsamsan,
Ajan,

asiksan (AV.), asrayan {Kv}),

ayan (AV.), arcan^, avan^, dijan

(tf/- 'stir'),^ auhan^ (AV.);

jinvan, tdksan, tsdran (AV.), dddan'' (AV.), bharan,
bhusan, srosan, sTdan t
Middle. Sing. i. aththe' (AV.).
2. dgahathas (AV.),
dpavathas,
dmandathas, drocathas; gdhathas (AV.).
3. akalpata^{AN.)^ ataksata, apinvata', abadhata, dmamhata'^, dmanthata,
dmandata,^ dramhata, araksata, drocata, dvartata, avardhata, dvalgata (AV.),
diapata; djata, dyata; dtksata'' {KY), auhata {ah- 'xtraowe'); caksata, janaia,
naksata, nimsata, badhata, rejata.
Du. 2. dbadhetham, drabhetham (AV.).
akrpetam, aprathetam,
3.
dbkyasetarn" drejetam; diksetS7ti'^.
PI. 3. dkalpanta (AV.), akrpanta, dkhana7ita, dgacchanta, ajananta,
atisihania'^, ddadanta^, adhavanta'^^, anamania (TS.tv.6.2^), dnayanta, dnavanta, apacanta, aprathauta, dbkajanfa, abhayanta, dbharanta, dyajanta, aramanta, drejanta, avadanta, dvartanta, dvardhanta, avepanta (AV.), dvradanta,
dsamanta (TS. IV. 6. 3^), dsacanta, dsapanta, dsahanta; diksafita'^ {KY TSi.)
isanta, krpanta, jananta, navanta, prathanta, bhdjanta {KN.), bhananta, mananta,
vapanta.
.

The

2.

suffixally accented a- class (tucfd-)^K

429. Nearly one hundred roots belong to this class. The radical vowel
almost always medial, being regularly 2, u or ;. If the vowel is final,
which is very rare, it is almost invariably short. As the -a is accented, the
radical vowel appears in its weak form; e. g. huv-d- (but according to the
radically accented class, hdv-a-) from hu- 'call'.
a.
There are, however, some irregularities in the formation of the present stem.
I. Several roots instead of appearing in their weak form, are nasalized: kri-'ciit' -.krntd-;
is

trmpa- ; fis- 'adorn' pimsd-; muc- 'release'

tfp- 'be pleased'
lup- 'break' lumpd-; vid- 'find': vindd-; sic- 'sprinkle' sincd-,
:

muncd- lip- 'smear' limpd- ;

few other roots occasionally
:

have nasalized forms according to this class: thus tundate, beside the regular /rfa7/ etc.,
from tud- 'thrust'; dfmhethe, beside dfmhata, etc., from drh- 'make firm'; sumbhdnt:.
less

an aorist:

see

WmTNEY,

Roots, under

ykram.
1

Transfer

form from the reduplicating

Transfer from the -nu class.

3 urcan (iv. 552; V. 31') and vdrdkan are
given as indicatives by Delbruck 91,
followed by AvERY 249. Cp. p. 322, note 1.
2

From

'shine'.
8

class.

originally *siATv- cp.

the root is there
v. Negelein 24, note 6;
wrongly given as sfTv.
4

of vas- 'shine' with ending -ran (not ava-sran:

accent!}.
Cp. Whitney, Roots, under vas

sfhTv- 'spue',

Delbruck 176

and

Avery 247

give

akj'nvata as (once) a 3. sing. If this is correct,

the form would be a transfer for akrniUa.
9 dmata is given by Delbruck ioi and

Avery 247 as belonging to this class

(presumably from the root am-), but it is
doubtless 3. sing. mid. aor. of man- 'think';
see Whitney, Roots, under \inan.

I" From tks- 'see'.

asihan (AV. xiil. I^) is given by v. NEGE" From bhyas- 'fear'.
18, note I as imperfect of as; but see
12 VII. 18'S: from dhav- 'run'
dhanv-.
Whitney's note on AV. xiii. i^.
13 Cp. E. Leumann, Die Herkunft der 6.
6 akrpran being formed with the ending
-ran (Delbruck 124) is doubtless an aorist; Praesensklasse im Indischen (Actes du x.
Roots under ykrp-. See Cong. Intern. Orient. IL i, 39 44; IF. 5,
cp. Whitney,
3

LEIN

below, 500.
7 sran (iv. 2'9)

Verbum 89 fp.

Anz. 109; KZ. 34, 587

according to Delbruck,

63, middle), followed

249, for *asara-n;

but avasran

by Avery

is 3. pi. aor.

ff-)-

328

Allgemeines und Sprache.

1.

Vedic Grammar.

4.

beside sumbhate and sobhate, from hibh- 'shine'; srnihaii (TS^.), beside the isgvlar h'athnas
2. Four roots form their stem with the suffix rhd: is- 'wish':
etc., from iratk- 'loosen'.
r-cchd-; prds-'^ 'ask' .prccha-; vas- 'shine' u-cchd-.
3. Two stems are
i-cchd-; ^- 'go'
transfers from the nasal class of the second conjugation: /ra'-, beside //--^/a-, from /r'fill'; mrnd; beside mr-nd-, from mr- 'crush'; r/rjd- 'stretch' has become the regular stem
beside 3. pi. fiijaie; and j.. pi. umbha-la (AV.), appears beside ubh-nd-, from ubh- 'confine'.
Beside the normal -nu stem f-nu, the root r- also has the transfer stem fnv-d-.
4.
5. While roots ending in i or u change these vowels into iy or uv before -a (e. g. kdy-d-,
from hi- 'dwell', yuv-d- {rom yu- 'join'); the TS. has ksy-dnt- beside RV. ksiydnt- 'dwelling'.
The present stems chyd- (AV.) 'cut up', dyd- (AV.) 'divide', syd- 'sharpen', sydb.
'bind', though regarded by the Indian grammarians as belonging to the -ya class, should
most probably be classified here, because the a is accented, z appears beside a in various
forms from these roots, and -yd is here often to be read as -ia, while this is never the
case in the -ya class.

The inflexion

430.

exactly the

is

same

The forms

as that of bhdva-.

which actually occur are the following:

Present Indicative.
Active. Sing.

i.

uksami (AV.), kirdmi (AV.), khidami (AV.)

dhuvami
rujami, limpami (AV.), vinddmi, visami (AV.)

icchami,

girami'^ (AV.), crtami (AV.), tirami, dyami (AV.), disami (TS. AV.),
(AV.), prcchAmi, muncAmi,
vfscdmi (AV.), vrhami, sincdmi, sulami (TS.VII.4.
syami {KST TS.).

suvami, srjdmi, sprsami.

19''),

ucchasi (TS. iv. 3. iiS),

2. icchasi (AV.),
prcckasi, tnynasi, vindasi, vrscasi, suvdsi.
3. andti

(AV.),

icchati,

ucchati,

tirasi,

rcchati (AV.),

ksipasi (AV.)j trmpdsl

rnvaii,

krntdti (AV.),

kr?ati (TS. IV. 2. s*), ksiyati {AV.), khiddti, girati {KM'), chyati (TS. v. 2. 12'),
dyati (AV.), pimsati, prcckati, prndti, misati, muncati (AV.), yuvdii, rujdti,
vinddti,

ruvdti,

(A v.),

sphiirdti

Du.
3.

visati (AV.),

vrscati,

vrhati,

sincati (AV.),

suvdti,

srjdti,

syati.

2. rnvathas, bhasathas,

muncathas, visathas (AV.), vrhaihas, srjdthas.

icchatas (AV.)j muncatas (AV.), sincatas.

PI. I. giramas (AV.), crtdmasi (AV.), tiramasi, dyamasi (AV.), nudamasi

(AV.) and nudamas (AV.), prcchamas (AV.), mrsamasi, vrhamasi (AV.) and
vrhamas (AV.), suvamasi (AV.), srjamasi (AV.) and srjamas (AV.), spriamasi.
2. muncdtha, sincdtha (TS. AV.).
3.

atidnti (AV.),

icehdnti,

uksdnii,

ucchdnti,

khiddnti (AV.), crtdnti, tiranti,

miincanti, mrsdnti, rujdnti, vindanti,

rcchdnti,

rnjdnti,

ksiydnti (AV.),

iunjdnti, prcchdnti,

mucdnii,

visdnti,

rsdnti,

misanti,

sumbhdnti,

vrscdnti,

sincdnti, suvdnti, srjdnii, sprsdnti, sphurdnti, syanti.

Middle. Sing,

i-

ise 'send',

nude (AV.), prcche, munce (AV.), mrje, vindke,

vise (AV.), suse, since, huve.

jusdse (AV.), prcchase, mrsdse, yuvase, vinddse, sincdse.

2.

icchase, rnjdse,

3.

icchate (AV.), uksdte, rnjdte, kirate, krsdte{KV?), tirdte, tundate, turdte

(TS.ii. 2. 12''),

nudate(KS[), pimsdte, prcchate, prncdte, muncate, mrsate, yuvdte,

vinddte, vindhdte, visdte, vrscate (AV.), srjate.

Du.

2.

With ending

drmhethe, nudethe (AV. TS.), yuvethe, vindethe (Kh.

-e: huvS.
i.

12*).

3. tujete.

PI.

I.

nudamahe

3. icchante (AV.),

(AV.), yuvamahe, risdmahe, sicamahe, huvamahe.

zcksdnte,

tirdnte,

vijdnte (AV.), vindante (AV.), visdnte,

vfscante (AV.), srjante (AV.).

The

-cha has in this instance purposes /S^'a^c/;- (}axA pras-nd- 'question'); cp.
throughout the conjugation prec-or and posco for '^forc-sco in Latin.
^ From gr- 'swallow'.
to the root, which thus becomes for practical
I

attached

suffix

itself

Vn. Verb.

Present System.

329

Present Subjunctive.
^431- Active.

Sing.

i.

srjani; mrksA.

sincas.

suvati,^

srjati (AV.); icchat, ucchdt, rcchat,

3. iirsii,

bhrjjati,

mrfati,

muncat{AN.), mrlAt, mrsdt (AV.),

Du.

I. visava (AV.).
PI. 2. visaiha (AV.).

Middle. Sing,
prcchai,
Du. prv-M^he.
i,

Urate.

2.

kirasi,

2.

tnrdhati,

muncasi (AV.), rujasi;

vanati,

nudat (SA.

visSti (AV.),

vidhati,

xii.

29),

^ccMt,

prndt,

vrscdt, sincat, srySt, sprsat (AV.).

3. mrlatas.
3.

ucchan, prcchcin, sphurdn.

visdi (TS.iii.s.6').
3. yuvdiie.

PI.

i.

yuvase.

2.

z-

Mate,

sincamahai.

Present Injunctive.
Active.

432.

Sing.

icchas (AV.),

2.

guhas,

ruj'ds,

vrhas,

vrscas,

sicas, srjds.

ucckat, krntdt, ksipdt, khidat, jusdt, mrnat (AV.), rujdt, rudkat,

3.
ruvdt, vidhat, visat, vr/iat, sincat, srjdf^, sprsat (AA. v. 2=^), sphurat, huvat.
PI. 3. trpdn, vidhdn, vindan.

Middle. Sing.
tirdnta,

PI. 3. icchdnta,
3. jusata, tirata.
nuddnta, bhurdnta, yuvanta, vidhanta, srjanta.

isanta,

jusdnta,

Present Optative.
433. Active. Sing.

udeyam

(AV.), tireyam (Kh.

I. 95),
vindeyam (Kh.
lumpet (AV.), sincet (AV.),
srjit (A v.).
Du. i. vrheva.
2. tiretam.
PI. i. isema, ksiyema (AV.),
rujema, ruhema (Kh. 11. 4^), vane'ma, vidhema, visema, huvema.
2. tireta

II.

6=).

i.

Middle. Sing.
I.

tiretana.

PI.

"

3. iccket, ucchet (AV.), khidet (AV.), prcchet,

i.

huveya.

vanemahi, vidhemahi.

3.

iccheta (AV.), jusSta.

3. juserata.

Present Imperative.
434. Active. Sing. 2. icchd, ucchd, ubja{KV), kira, krntd{KV.), ksipa,
ksiya (A v.), khida (AV.), crta, chya (AV.), tira, tuda, trmpd, nuda (AV.), pimsd
(AV.), prccha, prnca^{KSf.), prna, prusa, muncd, mrnd, mrld, mrsa, yuva,
rikha, rujd, ruva, visa, vinda, vrscd, vrkd, srna (AV.), sihca, suva^, srjd,
sprsa, sphura, sya.

(TS.

'With ending

-iai:

mrdatat (AV.), vrhatat, visatat

suvatat.

vix. I. 6*),

3. icchatu, uksatu (AV.), ucchatu, ubjatu (AV.), rcchatu, kirdtu (TS.

3.1 15), krsatu(KS.), crtatu{AN.), tiratu(Kh..ii. 11^), trmpatu, dis'atu{KY.),
dyatu (A v.), nudatu (AV.), pimiatu, tnuncatu (AV. TS.), mrlatu, visdtu (AV.
III.

TS.), vindatu (AV.), vrscatu (AV.), sincatu, suvatu, syatu.

(Kh.

IV. 6';

With

-iai: visatat

83).

uksatam, ubjdtam, tiratam, trmpatam, nudatam (AV.), brhatam

2.
muncdiam, mrldtam, visatam {KSl.), vrhatam, sihcatam, srjdtam,
sphuratam (AV.), syatam.
3. Jusatam (Kh. i. 3'), trmpatam, dyatam (AV.), muncatam, visatam (TS.
vn. 3. 13'), suvatam (AV.), syatam.

Du.

(AV.),

prhca is to be inferred from the fem. part.

prncat-i- (RV. AV.), though the AV. has also
meant.
2 With
Samprasarana. This verb other- pfncat-i-,
4 In AV. VII. 14^ Suva appears in the Pp.
wise follov?s the radically accented a- class.
3 Transfer from the infixing nasal class as sva.
(Vpfc-): that it would have been accented
1

Avery adds

injunctive sridhat

srdhat(f): perhaps the aor.

is

33

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

PI. 2. icchata, uksaia, ucchata, umbhata (AV.), rnjdia, khuddta, gr^ta

{KSf^^ tirata, tudafa {AN .), nudata, pimsata, prcchdta, prnata, muiicdta, mrldta,
mrndta (AV.), visata (AV.), vrhafa, sundhata, sincata, srjdta, spridta.
uksantu (AV.), ucchdtttu, ubjantu, rcchantii, rdantu, krsanhc, chyantu
3.

(TS.v. 2.12"), tirantu, tudantu (AV. TS.), disantu (Kh.m. 10'), midantu (AV.),
bhurantu, muiicantu, mrlantu, visaniu, sincantu, suvantu, srjantu.

Middle. Sing.

icchasva, krsasva, gurasva, jusasva, nuddsva, prcchasva

mrsdsva, yuvdsva, vinddsva (AV.), visdsva, vrsasva,
silica sv a, srjasva, sprsawa (AV.); syasva.
3. icchatam(KS[?j, jusdtam, nudatam{AN.; SK.'xii.C)), prnatam, muncatsm
(AV.), visatam, srjatam (AV.).
Du. 2. ukse'tkam, jusetham, nudetham, prnethsm, vrsetham, srjetham (AV.

(Kh.

TS.).

13'),

II.

2.

pnidsva,

3. jusetatn.

krajuddhvam (TS. iv. 6. 5^), j'usddkvam, tiradhvam, pfnddhvam,

visadhvam (AV.), sincddhvam, srjddhvam, syadhvam.
3. jusdntam, muhcantam (AV.), risantam, vijantam (AV.), vrs'cantam (AV.),
sprsantam (AV.).
PI. 2.

Present Participle.
435. Active,
krsdnt-,

ksipd/it-,

tujdnt-,

tuddnt-,

prusdnt-

(AV.),

uksdnt- (AV.), ucchdnt-, ubjdnt-, rsdnt-, krntdnt-,

khiddnt- (AV.), guhdnt-, citdnt-, jurdnt-, tirdnt-,
trpdnt-, disdnt-, drmhdnt- (AV.), nuddnt-, nuvd/it-, prcckdnt-,
icchdnt-,

ksiydnt-,

bhujdnt-,

mithdnt-,

misdnt-,

muncdnt-

mrjdnt-,

risdnt-, riijd?it-, rudhdiit-, ruvdnt-, vidkdnt-, visdnt-, vrscdnt-, meant-,

mrsdnt-,

sumbhdnt-,

and svasdnt-, sincdnt-, suvdni-, srjdnt-, spkurdni-, kuvdnt-^ {hu- 'call';.

Middle, icchdmana-, uksdmana-, usdmana- ( Y'vas-), usdtnana- {vas'wear'), guhdmana-, jusdmana-, dhrsdmana-, nrtdmana-, prcchdmana-, bhurdmSna-, muncdmana- (AV. TS.), ytivdmStia-, vijdtnana- (AV.), sucdmana-.

s'usdnt-

Imperfect Indicative.
436. Active.

Sing.

atir^m (TS. iv. i. io3), dprcc/iam, drujam.

anudas, aprnas, dmuncas, amrnas, arujas, avindas, avrkas,
dsrjas, dsphuras, dsyas (AV.); dicchas, ducchas; vindas, vrscas, srjas.
i.

dtiras,

2.

dkrntat,

akhidat,

aprnat,

dmuficat,

amrnai,

dvrscat,

dsincat,

3.

asuvat,

duksat, ducchat, aubjat;

djusat,

dsrjat,

ttidat,

aduhat (TS.

dtirat,

amrsat (AV.),
asprsat,

arujat,

iv. 6. 5''),

dvidhat,

asphurat,

asyat;

dpimsat,

dvindat,

dvisat,

dicchat

(AV.),
trmhdt, rujdt, likhat (AV.), vmdat, vrscdt, syai,

sincat, srjdt.

Du.

2. atiratam, amuncatam, dmrnatam, avindatam (Kh. I. 3'), asincatam.

dmuiicatam, dsincatani (AV.).
PI. I. dicchama.
2. dpimsata ( l//z/-), aprcchata, dmuhcata, asrjata.
3. dpimsan, dpTsan^ {KS.v^.(i^), dvindan, dvisa7t{AY), dvrscan^KSl), dsincan,
dsjy'an, aspfsan (AV.); ardan (yrd-); duksan; uksan, rujan.

3.

Middle. Sing. i. djuse (AV.), avije, dhuve.

2. amuiicathas, avisathas
(A v.).
3. ajusata, amuncata, dsincata (AV.), asrjata; drmhata.
Du. 2. afiudetkam, dvmdetham.

PI.

2.

ajusadhvam.
3. djusaiita, atiranta, atvisanta, dnudanta (AV.),
dyuvanta (AV.), avindanta, avisanta, dsrjanta, asprsanta
disaiita {is- 'send'); grnanta, jusanta.

amuncanta (AV.),
(A v.), dhuvanta;

The fem. is regularly formed from the

strong stem in -ant; but the weak stem in
at appears in sihcai-t-, beside dncani-i-.
'^

Anomalous form

'crush'.

for *apimsan, ixorapis-

"VII.

Verb.

Present System.

The

3.

ya- class

331

'.

437. The present stems formed with this suffix fall into two groups.
In the first, consisting of about 70 transitive or intransitive verbs, the suffix

unaccented; in the second, consisting of rather more than 80 verbs with

a passive meaning, the suffix is accented. In all probability both groups were

is

identical

in

with the accent on the

origin,

suffix.
This is indicated by the
though accented in the first group appears in its weak
form; and that this group consists largely of intransitive verbs and to some
extent of verbs with a passive sense. The latter are manifestly transfers from
the -yd or passive group with change of accent. Thus jdyate 'is born' is an
altered passive beside the active jdnati 'begets'. The accent moreover occasionally fluctuates. Thus the passive tniccydte 'is released' once or twice occurs (in
the RV. and AV.) accented on the root; and there is no appreciable difference
of meaning between ksiyate and ksiydte 'is destroyed'; jiyate and jiydte 'is
overcome' ; pdcyate and pacydte 'is cooked'
miyate and miydfe (AV.) 'is infringed' ^

that

fact

the

root

A.

The

radically accented ya- class.

The

root nearly always appears in a weak form. Thus roots that

otherwise contain a nasal, lose it: drink- 'make firm' dfh-ya-.
The root
vyadh- 'pierce' takes Samprasarana: vidh-ya-. The root spas- 'see' loses its
initial: pds-ya-.
Several roots ending in a shorten the vowel before the suffix:
dka- 'suck' d/iaya-; ma- 'exchange' maya-; va- 'weave' vdya-; vyd- 'enve-

438.

lope'

vydya--, hva- 'call'

hvdya-i.

a. Several other roots usually stated as ending in a remain unchanged: gd- 'sing'
gaya-; gla- 'be weary' gldya- (AV.); ira- 'save' traya-; pyd- 'fill up' -.fyaya-; ra- 'bark'
:

raya-; vd- 'blow' ; vdya-; ird- 'boil' srdya-''.

b. The root iram- 'be weary' lengthens its vowel: srdmya-^.
c. The final of roots in -f sometimes becomes both -6 and Hr; thus jf- 'waste
away' becomes ywya- ^tvA jTrya- (AV.); tf- 'cross' : iftrya- and ttrya-'^ (A-V.). The root
pf- 'fill' because of its initial labial becomes purya- only.
;

439.

The forms

Active. Sing.

actually occurring in this class are the following:

i.

Present Indicative.
asyami{KV), isyami, 7iakyamt, pdsyami {KY), vidhyami

(AV.), hvdyatni.
dsyasi,

2.

isyasi, ucyasi

{Yuc-), gdyasi, ndsyasi, pdsyasi, piisyasi, rdnyasi,

rayasi, risyasi, haryasi.

isyati,
krudhyati (AV.), gdyati, jiryati (AV.),
ddhyati (AV.), diyati, divyatl (AV.), dusyati (SA.
xn.23), dhayati, nasyati, nfiyati {AM.), pdsyaii, pi'isyati, raytyati, risyati, vayati
(AV.), vayati, vidhyati, vyayati, simyati (TS. v. 2. 12'), susyati (Kh. iv. 53^),

3.

'

dsyati,

jUryati,

iyati (RV'.),

tanyati,

ddsyati,

sidhyati, haryati, hrsyati, hvdyati.

Du.

diyathas, ranyathas.
3. asyatas (AV.), nasyatas, pdsyatas,
2.
pusyatas, risyatas (AV.), vayatas (AV.)^ vdyatas, sramyatas (AV.).
1

grammarians as ending

122.
Cp. LoRENTZ, IF. 8, 68
Also in Brahmana passages of the TS.
'is left' beside ricydie (V.), lupyate 'is
beside lupyate [AN.], hiyaie 'is left' beside

to the a- class.

ricyate
lost'

hiyaie (V.).

The

and belonging
form is preferable

in -ai

latter

from the point of view of gradation. Cp.

27, a, i ; BB. 19, 166.
S In B. this analogy is followed by several

These are reckoned by the native gram- roots in -am.

6 In the a- class -f becomes -ir, e. g.
marians as ending in e and belonging to the
This seems preferable from the tf- lira-.
a- class.
7 Only in an emendation aya-tiryati (AV.
point of view of vowel gradation: see 27, a, 3.
dvatik yam.
4 Such roots are reckoned by the native xix. 98) for dvatiryaiis, Pada
'

j
'

332

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

Vedic Grammar.

4.

asyamasi, pdsyamasi and pasyamas

PI. I.
vyayamasi{KN .^%^, haryamasi, hvdyamasi.
2.

dsyatha, pdsyatka, pusyatha, risyatha, hdryatha.

3.

dsyanti (AV.),

Sryanti,

gdyanti, juryanti,

vidhyamas (AV.),

(AV.),

dasyanti,

diyanti,

dhdyanti

(AV.), naiyanti (AV.), ndhyanti, nftyanti (AV.), pdsyanti, pusyanti, rdnyanti,

risyanti, vdyanti, vayanti, vidhyanti (AY. TS.), sramyanti, hdryanii, hvdyanti.

Middle.

Sing.

hye,

i.

padye (AV.), g&ye, nahye (TS.

i.

i.

10^),

mdnye,

mrsye, vyaye (AV.), hvaye.

iyase

2.

(z- 'go'),

Jdyase, trdyase, ddyase, pdtyase, pyayase, mdnyase, mfyase,

mucyase.
isyate,

3.

iyate,

rjyate, ksiyate, Jsyate, Jiyate, trsyate (AV.)j ddyate, dipyate

{AN .),

(AV.), pdcyate, pdtyate, pddyate, pdsyate, pusyate

iniyate, mrsyate, rfyate, haryate.

Du.

3. jayete

(AV.), hvdyete.

budhyate (AV.), manyate,

hvdyamahe.
2. trayadhve.
3. tyante, ksfyanU, jayante, trayante,
pddyante, manyante (AV.), maya7!te, mrsyante, yiidhyante, riyante, hvdyante.
PI.

I.

Present Subjunctive.

Sing. i. pdsyani (AV.).

2. pdiyasi, haryasi (AV.);
440. Active.
pasyas (AV.); risyas, hdryas.
3. risyati; pdsyat, pusyat, risyat (TS.i. 6. 2^).
PI. I. pdsyama (AV).
3. pdsyan.
Middle. Sing. i. yudhyai.
2. pasyasai (AV.).
3. manyate, miicyatai
(A v.).
PI. I. hvayamahai (AV.).

Present Injunctive.

Active. Sing. 2. divyas.

PI. j,. pdsyan.
3. gSyat, diyat, pdsyat, vidhyat.
Middle. Sing. 2. manyathas.
PI. 3. ddyanta.
3. Jayata, manyata.

Present Optative.
Active.
risyet.

Sing.

Du.

3.

i.

vyayeyam.

hvayetam (TS.

iii.

2. pasyes.
2. 4').

3. dasyet,

PI.

I.

dhayet (AV.),

pdsyema, pusyema,

budhyema (AV.), risyema.

Middle. Sing. 3. /a/jrfa, many eta {P^.), miyeta (SA.xii.

20).

PI.

I.

jdyemahi.

Present Imperative.
441. Active, Sing. 2. asya, gsya, dtya, dfhya, nasya, nahya (AV.),
nrtya (AV.), pdsya, yudkya, vaya, vidhya, susya (AV.), sivya (AV.), karya,

hvaya.
3.

With ending

-idt: asyatat (AV.).

asyatu, ucyatu (AV.), trpyatu (AV.), nasyatu, nrtyatu (AV.), rddhyatu

(A v.), vidhyatu (AV.),

susyatu, stvyatu, hvdyatu (AV.).

asyatam, isyatam (KN .), diyatam, nahyatamiKY.), pusyatam {AY.),
vidhyatam, hdryatam.
3. asyatam (AV.TS.), nahyatam (SA.xii. 32), vidhyatam.
PI. 2.
isyata, gayata, jasyata, ndsyata (AV.), tiahyata (AV.), pdsyata,
pusyata, muhyata (AV.), vayata, vidhyata, haryata.
With ending -tana:
nahyatana.
3. gayantu (AV.), trpyantu (AV.), nasyantu (AV.), pusyantu, muhyantu,
midyantu, vyayantu{PiN.), Hmyantu (TS.v. 2. 11'), haryantu (AV.), hvdyantu{KY .).
Middle. Sing. 2. jayasva, trdyasva, dayasva, drhyasva, nahyasva (AV.),
padyasva, pasyasva, pyayasva, budhyasva (TS. AV.), majtyasva (TS. AV.),

Du.

2.

vyayasva, hvayasva (AV.).

3. rdhyatam, jdyatam, trdyatam, dipyatam (TS.Vf.T.iT,^), padyatam (AV.),
pyayatam (TS. AV.), manyatam (TS. AV.), medyatam (AV.), rddhyatam (AV.),
siyatam. (AV.) 'lie', hvayatam (AV.).

VII. Verb.

Du.

Present System.

333

trayethatn, manyeikam, hvayetham (AV.).

3. trayetam.
asyadhvam, jayadhvam (AV.), trayadhvam, dayadhvam, nahyadhvam{hN'.), budhyadhvam, sivyadhvam.
3. jayantam, trSyantam, padyantam
{KY:), pyayantatn, manyaniam {KM.TQ.), vyayantam (TS.ni.3. ii3), hvayantam
2.

PI. 2.

(TS.

III.

2. 4').

Present Participle.
Active,

dsyant; isyant-, fjyant-, {a.-)kupyant- (AV.), ksudyant-,

442.
gfdkyant-^, thyant-, diyant-, nftyant-, pasyant-, ptyant-, pusyant-,
ydsyant-,yudhyant-, rdyant-, {d-)lubkyant-{AN'.), vayant-, vidhyani-{KY.), vydyant-,
simyant- (TS. v. 2. 12'), sivyant-, hdryant-; and the compound dn-ava-glayantgayarit-,

(AV.) 'not relaxing'.

Middle.
iyamana-,
kayamana-, cdyafnana-, jdyamana-, trayamana-,
dayamana-, ndhyamana-^ pdtyamana-, pddyamana-, pdsyamana-, piiryamana-,
pydyamana-, budkyamana-, mdnyamana-, yudhyamana-, rddhyamana- (AV.),
vasyamana- (AV.), Adryamdna-, hvdyamana-.

Imperfect Indicative.
443. Active. Sing. I. adiyam, dpasyam, avyayam.

2. apasyas, dyudhyas.
agayat, adkayat, anrtyat (AV.), dpasyat, ayudhyat, avayat (AV.), dvidhyat,
avyayat^ dharyat, dhvayat; dsyat.

3.

Du.
PI.

dpasyatam.
dpasyama.

3.

I.

3.

ajuryan^, dpasyan, dvayan {KST.), a/ivayan{NY.);

asyan (AV.).

Middle. Sing. 2. djayathas, aharyathas;jdyathas.

3. djayata, apatyata,
amanyaia, arajyata (AV.) jayata.
Du. 2. dhvayethdm (AV.).
3. dhvayetam.
PI. 3. djayanta, dnahyanta (AV.), apadyanta (AV.), dpasyanta, dmanyanta, ahvayanta; jayanta, ddyanta.

The suffixally accented yi- class (passive).

Verbum 184 (p. 166 169).
Avery, Verb-Inflection 274 275.
Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar 768 774; Roots 230 231. v. Negelein 38 40.
B.

Delbruck,

444. Any root that requires a passive forms its present stem by adding
accented -yd (which never needs to be pronounced -ia). The root appears in its
weak form, losing a nasal and taking Samprasarana; thus anj- 'anoint': aj-ydbe anointed'; vac- 'speak' uc-yd- 'be spoken'. Final vowels undergo the
changes usual before -ya in verbal forms: final i and u being lengthened,
a mostly becoming r, r being generally changed to ri, and f becoming ir^.
Thus mi- 'fix' miya-; su- 'press' suyd-; da- 'give' di-yd- (but ya- 'know'
jna-yd-); kr- 'make' kri-yd-; sf- 'crush'
sirya-.
a..
The root tan- 'stretch' forms its passive from td- id-ya-. Similarly jan- 'beget'
makes its present stem from ja- :jdya-te, which has, however, been transferred to the
:

mri-ya-te 'dies' i^mr-)

radically accented ya- class,
though passives in form, are not so in sense 5.

445.

The inflexion

is

class in the middle, differing

are found in the

RV.

or

identical with

from

it

'.

and dhriyate (^dhr-)

'is

steadfast',

that of the radically accented ya-

in accent only.

AV. The forms

1 d.va(iryaiis[KN, XIX. 9?) is a corrupt reading

see Whitney's Translation; cp. p. 331, note
2 Avery 249 adds adkayanif).
3 No example of ilr seems to occur in
in the Sainhitas, but pur-ya- from pf- 'fill'
is found in the -ya class.

"

No

forms of the optative

actually occurring are the following

This root has a transitive sense ('crush')

its secondary form mrn-, and in the
AV. in the imperative forms mrnlhi and
4

only in

tnrnita.
5

Cp. above 437.

334

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

Present Indicative.
Sing.

and

hiye {ha- 'leave').

I.

2.

acyase

'bend', AV.),

{aiic-

ajydse

'Yanj-), idhydse, ucydse {Yvac-), luyase, puyase, badhydse (AV.),

stuyase,

huydse

rudhyase {rudh-

ricyase,

(AV.), mrj'ydse, yiijydse,

sicydse,

'call'}.

{/lu-

'hinder';,

sasydse {Ysa/ns-),

{Yaj- and Y^'V)! asyate

and vad- 'speak'), upydte

aj'ydte

3.

( Yajmucydse

idhydte, ucydte ( ]/''z'ac-), udyate {ud- 'wet'

{Yvap-), uhyate {Yvah-), rcydte {arc- 'praise'), kriydte, kslydte 'is destroyed',
gamy ate (AV.), grhyate (AV.), chidyate (AV.), jiydte (AV.)^ tapyate,

{KSl),

dabhyate,

tujydte,

i3ydte,

diydte

'is

given'

dukyate, drsyate, dhamyate, dhiyate {dha'is

(AV.),

'put'),

diyate

dhriyate,

divided'

'is

my ate,

(AV.),

pacydte, piyate

drunk' {AM.), puyate, prcydte, badhydteXYbandh-)", 7nathydte{KN .), mucydte,

mriydte, yujydte, ricyate, ribkyate^, lupydte {AS[?j, vacydte ( l/waw-),

mrjydte,

vidydte

suydte

pressed',

Du.

sains-), Hsyate, sTryate, sruyate, sicydte,

sasydte {
Y^u-), srjydte, hanydte, huydte 'is called'.

found', vrj'ydte^,

'is

'is

ucyete

3.

(
{

\f vac-).

panyamahe.

tapyamahe (AV.),

{Yvap-), rcydnte,
dahyante (AV.), duhydnte
(A v.), bhriyante, miydiite 'are fixed' ( /wr-, AV.), mriyante (AV.), yuj'yante,
vacydnte{Yvanc-, KY.), viyante {Yvi; AN.), sasydnte{Y sams-), sTryante{KY.),
PI.

I.

j-dhyante (AV.),

kriydnte, jnayante,

3.

upydiite

trhydnte {KSf),

srjyante (AV.), hanydnte, hilyante.

Present Subjunctive.
Sing.

446.

Du.

3.

uhyate, bhriyate, sisyatai^

(AV.).

2. uhydthe^.

Present Injunctive.
Sing.

3.

suyata

Ysu-).

Present Imperative.
idhydsva (AV. TS.), dhiyasva (AV.), dhriyasva (AV.), mucyasva
(Kh. II. II*), mriydsva (AV.), vacyasva {Yvanc-).
rdhyatam (AV.), tayatam (AV.~), dhiyatam (AV.), dhuyatam (AV.),
3.
dhriyatam {KSl), prcyatam, badhyatam (AV.), mucyatam (AV.), hanydtam (AV.),
hlyatam.

Sing.

2.

TS.), yujyadhvam, vicyadhvam (AV.).

trhyantam {Pi>J), prcyantam (AV.), badhyantam,
Ybhanj-, AV.), vacyantam, vrscyantam, hanyantam (AV.).

prcyadhvam (AV.

PI.

2.

3.

tapyantatn (AV.),

bhajyantam

Present Participle.
447. acydmana- (AV), ajydmana-, idhydmdna-, udydmana- {j/vad-,
AV.), upydmana- {Yvap-, KS[ .), uhydmana-, rcydmana-, krtydmana- (AV.),
kriydmana-, {d-)ksTyamana-, glydynana-, guhydmana-, tapydmana-, taydmana-,
tujydmana-, trhydmana-, dadydmana-T, diydmana- (AV.), duhydmana- (AV.),
dhiydmaiia-, nahydmana- {AN .), nidydmana-, niyd7?iana-,pacydmana-,pisydmana{AN ), puydmana-,pfcydmana-, badhydmana-, bhajydmana-, mathydmana-, madydmana-, miydmana- {mi- 'fix'), mrj'ydmana-, yamydmana-, vacydmana- { Yvahc-),
1

From

bhidyate,

llyate,

The forms

appear

\jya- or |//T- 'scathe'.

AV. XX. 1 3 1 ', is an emendation.
AV. XX. 1343 4, is an emendation.
vrscate,

occasionally to

vrsc}>ante,

vricante,

stand

vrscantam

for

vrscyantam in the AV. See

vrscyate,
v.

LEIN 40; Bloomfield, SBE. 42, 418.

Nege-

Emendation

in

AV.

II. SI'',

ior uchisaiai,

the reading of the text.

6 A 3. pi. mid. in -antai once occurs in
the TS. in the iorm jay antai: Whitnev 760 a.
the weak present stem dad- of
7 From
da- 'give'.

Vn. Verb.

Present System.

335

viydmana- {PiS[.), sasydmana-, skydmana-, srjydmana-, stuydmana-, hanydmana{KS[\ himsydmana-, huydmana- {hu- 'call'); from the causative of Ybhaj-:bh3jydmana- (AV. xit. 4'*).

Imperfect Indicative.
448. Sing. 3. aiiiyata, dmucyata, aricyata.
afacyanta, aprcyanta, dsicyanta (AV.)j acyanta.
b.

The second

PL

3.

dtapyanta (AV. TS.),

or graded conjugation.

449. The chief characteristic of this conjugation is vowel gradation

in the base ' consequent on shift of accent.
The base has a strong grade

vowel

in the singular indicative (present

subjunctive,

and

and imperfect)

throughout the
peculiarities are:

active,

Minor

in the 3. sing, imperative active.

loss of n in the endings of the 3. pi. mid. {-ate, -ata, -atrini)

2. formation
of the 2. sing, imperative active with a suffix, generally -dhi; 3. vowel
gradation in the modal suffix of the optative (act. -ya; mid. -i); 4. formation
of the middle participle with -ana.
I.

a.
The second conjugation comprises five distinct classes falling into
two main groups in which a) the vowel of the root (simple or reduplicated)
is graded;
^) the vowel of the suffix (nearly always containing a nasal) is

graded.
a.

I.

The

root class.

450. The base is formed by the root itself, to which the personal
endings are directly attached (in the subjunctive and optative with the intervening modal suffix). The radical vowel is accented and takes Guna in the
strong forms.
More than a hundred roots are comprised in this class ^.
a. A good many irregularities are met with in this class, with regard to both the
base and the endings, i. Vrddhi is taken in the strong forms by mrf- 'wipe' (e. g.
marj-mt), and before consonants by roots ending in -u,
e. by ksnu- 'whet', nu- 'praise',
i.

stmi-mi^, d-slau-l'', but d-stav-am.

z. The Guna
vowel, along with the accent, is retained in the root of si- 'lie' (middle) throughout the
weak forms; e.g. sing. I. say-e, 2. si-se. In the 3. pi. this verb at the same time inserts
r before the endings: si-rate, si-re (AV.), si-ralam, d-se-rata, d-se-ran^.
3. Several roots

yu-

'unite' (AV.),

siu- 'praise';

e. g.

form a base with the connecting vowel

or

z'

before

consonant endings.

The

roots

an-^ 'breathe', rud-^ 'weep', vam 'vomit', svas- 'blow', svap-'^ 'sleep' insert / before all
terminations beginning with a consonant, except in 2. 3. impf., where they insert J: e. g.
The roots id- 'praise' and is- 'rule' add i in some forms
dni-H, anl-i; avamT-t; svasi-ti.
of the 2. pers. middle; tdi-sva; isi-se (beside tk-se), isi-dkve. The 3. pi. tsi-re is, owing to
Occasional
its accent ^o, probably to be accounted a present rather than a perfect i'.
(imperative sing.) forms with connecting i from other roots also occur: jdni-sva 'be born',

The root brii- 'speak' regularly

vasi-sva 'clothe', snalhi-hi 'pierce', stani-hi 'thunder'.
inserts i in the strong forms before terminations beginning with consonants; e. g.
brdvl-mi. The same i also appears in the form tavT-ti from tii- 'be strong'; in am'i-si and
in the TS. '* amJ-ti, ami-sva, dniT-i from am- 'injure'; and in saml-sva (VS.), from sambesides sT- retain the accent on the radical
Cp. Brugmann, kg. 211.
See 97, 2 a.
Several roots of this class show transfers syllable throughout.
6 This I is, however, in reality originally
to the a- conjugation: cp. Whitnev 625a.
cp. Brugmann,
3 The RV. has once 2. sing, sto-si (X. 22*), part of a dissyllabic base:
a form which Avery 275 takes to be a KG. 212, 2.
also forms according to7 The AV. has
3. sing. aor. pass, injunctive.
4 Vrddhi on the other hand once appears the a- conjugation: dna-ii, etc.
8 The RV. has no such forms from rudeven in the weak form 3. pi. impf. andvan.
1

On the Vrddhi in these verbs, cp. v. Nege- and svaf-.

9 The AV., however, has the form svap-tu.
LEIN 10 a.
10 See
97, 2 a and 484.
5 There are some transfer forms according
! The 3. sing. impf. of this verb is in the
to the a- conjugation from the stem sdy-a-,
including the isolated active form dsayat, MS. aisa (like aduha), cp. Whitney 630.
" Whitney 634.
which is common. Nearly a dozen roots

336

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

'labour'.

loses

vowel

4.

Vedic Grammar.

few roots undergo peculiar shortenings in the weak forms: as- 'be'
(except where protected by the augment) 2, e.g. s-mds 'we are'; han-^
'slay' in the weak form."; loses its ?i before terminations beginning with consonants (except m, y or v), but syncopates its a before terminations beginning with vowels, when h
reverts to the original guttural gh-; e. g. ha-thd, but han-yama; ghn-anti, part, ghn-ant-;
the root vas- 'be eager', takes Samprasarana; e.g. I. pi. us-masi, part, ui-and-'t, but I. sing.
vds-mi. The root vas- 'clothe' similarly takes Samprasarana once in the participle us-dnd(beside the usual vdsdna-).
5. With regard to endings, the root sas- 'order' loses the
n in the 3, pi. active (as well as middle) and in the participle, being treated like roots
of the reduplicating class (457)5: 3. pi. impv. iSs-atu (TS.), part. sas-ai-(>. The root duA'milk' is very anomalous in its endings: middle impv. 3. sing, dtih-dm, 3. pi. duh-rcim and
duh-ratdni ; ind. 3. pi. mid. dith-re and duh-rdte beside the regular duh-atc (with irregular
accent)'; active imperf. 3. sing, d-duh-a-t^ h&%i&&d-dhok, 3. pi. a-drih-ran beside d-duh-an
and duh-ur'^ ; and in the 3. opt. the entirely anomalous sing. duh-T-ydi (RV.) and pi. duhlydn (RV.) (for duh-ydt and duh-yur).
its

4.

Present Indicative.

final or prosodically short medial radical vowel takes Guna in

451.
the singular; elsewhere it remains unchanged, excepting the changes of final

vowels required by internal Sandhi, and the irregular shortenings mentioned

The ordinary endings are added directly'" to the root. But
4).
the 3. sing. mid. ends in -e nearly as often as in -te; and anomalous endings
appear in the 3. persons of the roots is-, duA-, sas-, sT- ".
The forms actually occurring would, if made from i- 'go' and brii- 'speak',

above (450, a

be

as follows:

Active.
PI. 1.

i'tndsi

Middle.

Sing.

i.

e'-mi.

and i-mds.
Sing.

i.

2.

2.

bruv-e.

e'-si.

i-thd
2.

and

3.

e'-ti.

i-thdna.

bru-se.

3.

Du.

2.

i-thds.

3. y-dnti.

bru-te

and

bruv-e.

3.

i-tds.

Du.

2.

bru-mdhe.
2. bru-dhve.
3. bruv-dte.
The forms which actually occur are the following:
Active. Sing. i. ddmi, dsmi, e'mi, kmaumi, dvesmi {hN^^pami 'protect',
marjmi, ySmi, yaumi {AY.) 'join', vasmi, vami, sasmi (AV.), staumi {A.Y. TS.),
hanmi, harmi.
With connecting T-: brdvimi.
2. dtsi, dsi, e'si, kdrsi (AV.), caksi {= *caks-si), chantsi ( \/'cha7id-), ddrsi
{dr- 'pierce'), pdrsi (pr- 'pass'), pdsi ('protect'), bhdsi, yssi, vaksi {vas- 'desire'),
vSsi {Yvi-), sassi, sdtsi, stosi^^, hdmsi. With imperative sense 'J; ksesi
{ksi- 'dwell'), j'e'si, josi (== *jos-si -.jus- 'enjoy'), ddrsi, dhdksi {dak- 'burn'),
jiaksi {nai- 'attain'), nesi, pdrsi, prasi, bhaksi {bhaj- 'divide'), matsi, masi,
ydksi (yaf- 'sacrifice'), ydmsi {yam- 'reach'), yasi, yotsi {yudh- 'fight'), rdtsi
{rad- 'dig'), rdsi, vdksi {vah- 'carry'), vesi {Yvi^, s'rosi, saksi {sah- 'prevail'),
bruv-athe.

3.

bruv-ste.

PI.

i.

sdtsi,

hosi {hu- 'sacrifice').

With connecting

J-

amisi, brdvisi.

1 It is, however,
8 Transfer to the a- conjugation.
preserved in an altered
form in the 2. sing. impv. act. e-dhi for
9 The MS. has further anomalous end*az-dhi (62, 4, 6, p. 57).
This verb has the ings in the imperf. mid.: 3. sing, a-duh-a
further anomalies of losing its
in
the and 3. pi. a-duh-ra, probably as parallel to
2. sing. pres. a-si,
and in inserting l in the the present duke and diihre: Whitney 635.
10 Excepting the few forms of roots which
2. 3. sing. impf. dsT-s, dsT-i. It has no middle.
2
Cp. v. NeGELEIN 83; VAN WlJK, IF. may take connecting i or T (450, a 3).
11 See above
18, 59.
cp. Johansson,
450, a 2, 3, 5
3 Limited to the active in this conjugation
KZ. 32, 512; Neisser, BB. 20, 74.
12
in the RV.
See 450, a I, note '.
4 The only middle form.
13 Some of these have no corresponding
There are also some transfer forms root present or root aorist; cp. Whitney,
5
according to the a- conjugation
Sanskrit Grammar 624
3. sing.
Bartholomae, IF.
idsati.
2,271; Neisser, BB. 7, 23off., 20, 7off. Brug6 Similarly from das- 'worship' the part. MANN, IF.
18, 72; Delbrijck, Verbum 30;
dds-ai-.
Syntaktische Forschungen 5, 209.
7 In the
middle participle the k of the
root reverts to the guttural gk: dugh-dna-.
:

j-

Present System.

VII. Verb.

337

3. dtti, dsH, eti, kseti, takti {tak- 'rush'), dati {da- 'share'), dasti {das'worship'), dvesti, pdti, bhdrii, b/iSti, marsti (SA. xii. 9), yati, rasti {raj- 'rule'),
reiki {rih- 'lick'), vasH {vas- 'desire'), v&ti, veti, stauti (AV.; Kh. v. 3^),

With

Mnti.

connecting

or

-/-

-7"-:

dniti,

svdsiti; amiti (TS. VS.), taviti

{hi- 'be strong'), brdviti.

Du.
hathds

3.

pathds,

krthds,

ithds,

2.

bhuthds, yathds,

sthds {as- 'be'),

vJikds,

Y han-).
attas,

yatas, vatas,

(AV.),

etas^

ksitds, dvistas (AV.),

patas, psatds (AV.), bhUtas,

snatas, hatds, hmitas.

stas,

PI. I. admasi (AV.), imdsi, usmdsi^ { ]/'vas-), stumdsi, smdsi, hanmasi

(AV.); dvismds, brumds (AV.), mrjmas (AV.), ySmas, rudkmas (AV.), vidmas
(Kh. IV. 533), stiimas (AV.), smas, hanmas.
2.

gathd (RV'.)3,

krtha,

itha,

nethd'',

pathd

hathd; pathdna, yathdna, sthdna.

3. adanti, amdnti, usdnti, ksiydnti, ghndnti

yathd,

'protect'',

stha,

han-), danii {da- 'cut'),

{
duhanti, dvisdnti (AV.), panti^, bntvdnti, bhanti, mrjdnti, ydnti, ydnii, rikdnti,
ruddnti, vanti, vydnti { Yvi-), sdnti.
yuji,

Middle. Sing. i. iye

yuve {yu- 'join'), suve

ikse, krse,

she.

3.

aste,

2.

{i-

cakse (=
With connecting
itte

Yi4~)>

'go'),

tie,

{su- 'beget')

^rfi?,

is'e,

uve'T,

Du.

2.

vitse {vid- 'find'),

isise.

iste

l/w-),

cdste

With
hate (SA. xii. 27).
'perceive'), duke, bruve, vide ('finds'), sdye'^^.
Uhkte^ {Ysinj-),

duke, bruve, mrje (AV.),

knuve.

dkukse {AV.), bruse,

*caks-se),
-/-:

^,

sute,

dsathe, isathe, caksathe, vasathe.

Ycaks-),

ending

brut^, vdste, saste,

-e:

ise'',

citd {cit-

3. asate, iyate, diihate, bruvate,

sayate, suvate.

PI.

I.

ismake (AV.),

make,

sasmake, se'make (AV.), hUmdhe.

3. Asate,

irate,

ilate,

isate,

Skate

limahe (AV),
2.

mrjmdhe (AV.), yujmahe,

With connecting

{Y uh-),

-/-

tsidkve (AV.).

grkate'^^, cdksate, duhate'-^, dvisdte

With
(AV.), nimsate, bruvdte, rihate"^^, vdsate, sasate, suvate.
duhre, sere (AV.); with -rate: duhrate, se'rate (AV. TS.).

ending

-re:

Present Subjunctive.
452. In the AV. several forms are irregularly made with a, as if following
the a- conjugation. No examples of the 2. du. and pi. mid. are found. The
forms which actually occur, if made from bru- 'speak', would be:
Active. Sing. i. brdvani, brdva. 2. brdvasi, brdvas. 3. brdvati, brdvat.
PL i. brdvama. 2. bravatha.
Du. I. brdvava. 2. brdvathas. 3. brdvatas.

brdvan.

3.

Du. i. bravavahai.
2. bravase.
brave.
3. brdvate.
brdvamakai, bravamake.
3. brdvanta.
The forms which actually occur are the following:
Active. Sing. i. dsani (AV.), brdvani; aya, brava, stdva.

Middle.

3. brdvaite.

Sing.
PI.

i.

i.

placed here rather than in the a- class; onWith irregular strong radical vowel.
this form cp. Oldenberg, ZDMG. 59, 355 ff.;
Once anomalously smdsi.
Neisser, BB. 25, 315 ff.
3 With loss of nasal as in \/han:
9 Hnte (Av.).
strong radical vowel:
4 With irregular
10 Avery 234 gives fse only, apparently
cp. V. Negelein 33.
instead of ise. The form Tsi would be 3. sing,
5 Once from pa- 'drink', in I. 861 ?
1

Thirteen times from pa- 'protect', once

from/a- 'drink' (probably subj. aor.).
form occurring only once in the
7 This
RV. seems to be formed from a doubtful root
M 'proclaim'; cp. Whitney, Roots, under u.
8 Auve, sing. I. and 3., should perhaps be
6

.(II.

Ili'l)

Indo-arische Philologie.

I. 4.

mid. perfect.
" On these forms cp. v. Negelein 102;
Neisser, BB. 20, 74.
12 Placed by Whitney, Roots, doubtfully
under the aorist of ygrak-.
13

With

irregular accent.

22

338

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

dyas (AV.), dsas, ksdyas {ksi- 'dwelFj,

2. ayasi (AV.), dsasi, bravasi;
ghdsas, ddnas, parcas, bravas, vedas, sdkas, hdnas; with -a-: dyas (AV.).
adat (AV.), dyat, dsat,
3. dyati, dsati, vayati ( Ym-), vMati, hanati;
iraf^, ksayat, gkasat, cayat, de'hat, dohat (i. 164^), dvdsat (AV.), pat ('prove'dat {vid- 'know'), stdvat, hdtiat (AV. TS.);
with -a-: ayat
asat (AV.), rodat (Kh. 2. 11').
Du. I. kd?iava.
2. dsatkas, vedathas.
3. patas 'protect' (iv. 55^).
PI. I. ayama, dsdma, ksdyama, dvesama (AV.), brdvama, stdvama, hdnania.

brdvat,

tect'),

(Kh.

i''),

III.

bravatha (AV.), kanatha{AN'.).

2. dsat/ia', stavatha; with -a-:

brdvan, yavaii

('join',

Middle. Sing,
(TS.

ending

i,

stusi'^.

2.

asase.

-ta: Tsata.

mahai; tlamahe.

3.

3. ayan, dsan^

3. asate, idhate'', dohate, dvesate

with -ia'r. dyatai (AV.), dsatai

Du. I. bravavahai.
3. brdvaite.

vdrjate;

IV. I. io3),

ddan (AV.), ayan (AV.).

AV.iii. 17^), kdna?t (AV.); with -a-:

(AV.); with secondary

i. ilamahai, brdva-

PI.

hdnanta.

Present Injunctive.

Active.

Sing. 2. vis.
han.
PI. 3. yan, san.
Middle. Sing. 3. vasta,

rat,

3.

staut;

vet (x. 53?),

suta.

without ending:

PI. 3. ilata, vasata.

Present Optative.
Active.

453.
adyJt (AV.),

3.

Du.
PI.

Sing.

iyJt, bruyat,

vidydt, syst,

bruyatam (TS. iv. 7. 15*), vidyatam, syatam.

iyama, turyAma, vidydma, sydma, kajiydma.

2.

I.

3. adyur,

vidyi'ir,

Middle.

syi'ir.

Sing.

i.

bruvJia, sdyita, stuvitd.

3.

syatlm.
sydtana.

2. sydta;

isiya,

2. syds.

yayam, vidyam, syam.

hanyat (AV.).

iyani,

i.

PI.

dan,

sdyiya (AV.).
3. asita, tlita, isita,
i. bruvimahi, vasimahi, stuvimahi.

du/iJta,.

Present Imperative.
454. The endings are added directly to the root, which appears in its'
weak form except in the 3. sing, act., where it is strong and accented 5. In
the 2. sing, act., -dhi is added to a final consonant, -hi to a vowelj -tat,
which occurs only three times, may be added to either a consonant or
a vowel. In the mid., -am 3. sing., -ram and -ratam 3. pi., occasionally appear
.

and -atam^.
Active. Sing. 2. add/ii, edhi {as- 'be'), tal/ii {ytaks-), psahi (AV.),
mrddhi (AV.), viddhi ('find' and 'know'), sadhi (Ysas-); ihi, jahP, pahi
'protect', brUhi, bhahi, yShi, vahi, vihi*',
vihi, stuhi, snahi (AV.);
with,

for -tarn

connecting

-/'-:

anihi (VS.

iv.

-tat: brutat (TS. 1.6.4 j), vittdt,

25),

vJtat.

snathihi,

3.

svasihi (AV.),

attu,

stanihi;

dstu, etu, dvestu (AV.),

with
patu

psatu (AV.), marstu (AV. TS.), yatii, vastu ( Yvas-), vdtu, vitu, vettu
(A v.), sastu, staiitu (AV.), snautu (TS. in. 5. 5^), svdptu (AV.), hdntu; with
'protect',

connecting

-7"-:

brdvitu.

1 Avery 230
here adds rdhat,
regard as a root aor. subjunctive.
2

vidaiha,

AV.

I.

32',

seems

to

which

be a cor-

Whitney's note.
Avery 238 Delbruck,

ruption for vldatha; cp.

3

For

Verbum

stus-a-i;

p.

cp.

Oldenberg, ZDMG.
4

from

280;

55, 39.

irregular accent and weak root

for *indliate, beside inadhaie formed
\idh- according to the in6xing nasal

"With

(vil. 18)

class.

181^; Neisser, BB. 27, 262

5 This is also irregularly the case in six

or seven forms of the 2. pi., before both -ta
and -tana: Ha, neta, stota; ctana, bravitana,
soiana, hantana.
6 In duham, vidam (AV.), sayxm (AV.);
diihram (AV.), duhratam (AV.).
7 For *jha-hi, from Ask- 'slay': see 32, 2 c,

and
8

cp. V.

Negelein, Zur Sprachgeschichte 8^

Metrically shortened for vfhi, from \vt-^

VII. Verb.

Present System.

339

Du. 2. attam {KS[>j, itam (AV. TS.), patdm 'protect', briitam (AV.),
_
yatdm, vittdm^ vitdm, statu {as- 'be'), stutam, hatdm.
3. itam, dugdham
{Yduk-), patam^ 'protect', sastam, stam (AV.), hatam (AV.).
PI. 2. attd, ltd and eta, paid 'protect', bruta, yatd, sasta (sas- 'cut'),

(VS. AV.),
sastdna, sotana
sta

with -iana: attana, iiana and e'tana, yatdna,

hantana; with connecting -T-: bravitana.
adantu, ghnantu, drantu, pantu 'protect', bruvantu, yantu, yantu,
3.
vantu (A v.), vydntu {Yvi-) and viyantu (TS.), sasatu (TS.v.2. 12'), svdsantu
(AV.), santu, svdpantu (AV.).
Middle. Sing. 2. irsva, caksva (= *caks-sva), trasva, dhuksva'', mrksva
{Ytnrj-, AV.), stusvd (AV.); with connecting -/-: ilisva, jdnisva, vdsisva.
3.

aj2"aw,

stota,

{sic-

hatd;

'press'),

yutam (AV.), vastSm,

/ayaw (AV).

s'etam

(AV.);

with

-fi/n:

duhdm, vidam

{vid- 'find', AV.),

Du.
3.

2.

(AV.).

iratham, caksatham (TS.), duhatham (AV.), vasatham (TS.).

PI. 2. adhvam ^ ( l/aj--), Trdhvam, trddhvatn, mrddhvam
3. Tratam, stuvatam (AV.); with -/-a/n: duhram (AV.); with

duhatam (AV.).

-ratam: duhratam (AV.).

Present Participle.
455. The

is formed by adding -i^3 to the weak root;

thus y-dnt- from z- 'go'; diih-dnt- from a'w/z- 'milk'; s-dnt- from j-- 'be'. The
strong stems of the participles of das- 'worship' and sas- 'order' lose the n:

active participle

das-at-'^ and sds-at-^.

The middle participle is formed by adding the suffix
-and to the weak form of the root; thus iy-and- from l/z-; us-and- from
Yvas-; ghn-and- (AV.) from "lA/zara-. In a few examples, however, the radical
vowel takes Guna; thus oh-and- from uh- 'consider'; yodk-and- from yudk'fight'; say-ana- from si- 'lie'; stav-and- from stu- 'praise'. The final of Y'^uh-

reverts to the original guttural in dugh-ana- beside the regular duhana-. The
as- 'sit' has the anomalous suffix -ina in ds-ina- beside the regular

root

as-and-.

Several of these participles in -ana alternatively accent the radical

final vowel of the suffix;
thus vid-ana- beside vid-and-

vowel instead of the

'finding'.

Active,
duhdnt-,

addnt-,

dvisdnt-,

andnt-,

usdnt-,

ksiydnt-^

dhrsdnt-, pant- 'protecting',

'dwelling',

bruv-dnt-,

ghndntbkdnt-,

( l/"/5a-),

ydnt-, ydnt-,

rihdnt-, ruddnt-, vdnt-^ (AV.), vydnt- {Y111-), sdnt-, sasdnt-, stuvdnt-, sndnt-,
svapdnt-; ^vith loss of n: ddsat-, sdsat-.
Middle, adand-, asand- and dsfna-, indhana-, iyand- (VS. x. 1 9 TS. I.
8. 14O) liana-, irana-, //(2a- and (once) isand-, usand-^, usand-^ {vas- 'wea.r'),
;

okana- and ohand- { Yuh-), ksnuvand- ^, ghndnd- (AV.), dihand-, di'ighana- and
duhand- and duhana-, dhrsand- (AV.), nijand-, bruvand-, mrjand-, yuvand- {yu1 Delbruck 61
and AvERY 242 wrongly
5 As in 3. pi.
6 ksyantam TS. IV. I. 2^.
give this form as duksva.
2 In AV. (iv. 142) and TS. (iv. 6. 51) some
7 apa-van KM.ynYi.tfi'' is probably N. sing,
Mss. read addhvam. VS. XVII. 65 has adhvam. of this part.; see Whitney's note and cp.
3 The feminine is formed with -t from Lanman 4842.
8 The RV. has once the transfer form
the weak stem ; thus ghnai-f-, duhat-i-, yat-i-,
yat-i-, bhat-T; rudat-i-, sat-l- (AV.), snat-t-. tdamana-,
But the AV. has yantJ- (beside yaii-) and
9 Once, beside the regular vdsana-.
The
has also once the transfer form
svafanti-; see Whitney, Index Verborum RV.
usdmana-.
374410 The form grhana (x. 10312), doubtless
4 The verb das- may have lost its nasal
in the 3. pi. act., but there is no evidence 2. sing. impv. of the na- class, is regarded
of this, as the only form preserved according by Grassmann as a participle.
to the root class is 3. sing, ddsti.

22*

34

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

Vedic Grammar.

4.

vyand-(]/'vT-),
^]o\ri), yodkand-, rihand-, z/a'Ma- 'wearing', vidSna-sxidividand-,
sdyana-, s'dsana- (AV.' TS.), siaiana- {su- 'bring forth', AV.), stuvand- and
siavand-, svdnd- {su- 'press', SV.)^

Imperfect Indicative.
456. Active. Sing. I. adoham (Kh. v. 15'+), apam ('protect'), dbravam,
avedam, akanam; adam (VS. xii. 105), ayam, asam, airam {Yir-).

dnit,

-/-: abravTs

without ending: dhan; han.

dpat, dyat, avat (AV.), astaut;

3.

avamit;

from

with connecting

dpas, dyas; dis (AV.); ves iVvT-);

2.

(AV.); asis;

asTt^;

with connecting

dit^\

without ending: adhok,

as- 'be'); kan'^.

dbravtt,

-/-:

dvet (AY.), dhan; as

(=

*as-f,

3. abrUtam {AN .);

Du. 2. dyatam, ahatam; astam, ditam; yatam {KY.).
dttam (VS. xxi. 43), dstam, aitam (AV. VS.).
2. atasta; dita; abravtta; dyatana, dsastana;
PI. I. ataksma, dpama.
ditaiia; dbravJtana.
3. ddikan{KY), anSvan, abruva7i, avyan {Yvt-)\ Ay an
2
(z-'go'), dsan; aj-a5 (aj- 'throw'), -^"-/^wa/z (Kh. 1. ^) ; with ending -tfr: atvisur,
apur {pa- 'protect'); asur {as- 'throw', I. 179^); cdksur, duhur.
Middle. Sing. 3. acasta, atakta, dvasta (AV.), dsuta; ditta {Ytd-);

mrsta

(i.

174"*), suta.

PI. 2. drddhvam.
asasata;

asata, dirata.

3.

aghnata (AV.), acaksata, ajanata, dmrjata (AV.),

VV^ith

a. 2.

ending -ran: aduhran

The

(AV.), aseran.

Reduplicating Class.

457. This class is less than half as frequent as the root class, comprising
fewer than 50 verbs. The endings are here added to the reduplicated root,
which is treated as in the root class, taking Guna in the strong forms. The
stem shows the same peculiarity as the desiderative in reduplicating f {= ar)
and a with z. Here, however, this rule is not invariable. All the roots with
r except one reduplicate with i. They are r-^go' :i-y-ar-^; ghr- '^\^':jighar-;
bibhar-; sf- 'run' :
tr- 'cross'
titr-; pf- 'fill' and /r- 'pass' pipar-; bhr- 'bear'
vavart-.
While nine roots reduplisisar-; pre- 'mix' piprc-; but vrt- 'turn'
The latter are: ga- ^go' :jiga-; ghracate a with a, thirteen do so with /.
'smeir jighra-; pa- 'drink' -.piba-; ma- 'measure' mima-; }?ia- 'bellow': mimd-;
tistha-; ha- 'go forth' jihi-'' ; vac- 'speak'
sa- 'sharpen': sisa-; stha- 'stand'
:

'accompany' sisac-'^;
han- 'strike' -.jighna-. Three of these, however, pa-, stha-, han-, have permanently gone over to the a- conjugation, while a fourth, ghra-, is beginning
Contrary to analogy the accent is not, in the majority of verbs
to do so.
belonging to this class, on the root in the strong forms, but on the reduplicative syllable. The latter is further accented in the 3. pi. act. and mid., as
well as in the i. du. and pi. mid. Doubtless as a result of this accentuation,

vivac-; vas- 'desire'

vivas-^; vyac- 'extend'

vivyac-; sac-

the verbs of this class lose the n of the endings in the

e. g.

3. pi. act.

and mid.

bibhr-ati'^ 3.nd jihafe.

1
5 Unaugmented form IV. 31.
To be pronounced thus in the RV.,
6 With -y- interposed
though always written suvand-.
between redupli2 The form aitat (AV. xvm. 34) seems to
cation and root.
be a corruption aiait; see Whitney's note in
7 With f for a;
inflected in the middle

his Translation.

only.

Cp. V. Negelein 81 ; Reichelt BB. 27,

VS. vm. 46 has the transfer form dsat.
89.
4 arudat (AV.) is a transfer to the a- conjugation. In I. 772 vis, 3. sing., seems to be
3

an aor. form

*vi-s-i.

Also vavas-,

9 Also sasc;
10 That is, a

replaces the sonant nasal.

:;

VII.

Verb.

Present System.

341

a.
There are a number of irregularities chiefly in the direction of shortening the
root in weak forms, i. Roots ending in a drop their vowel before terminations beginning
with vowels I e. g. y^a: mim-e, 3. -pi. mim-ate. yds- axiiydha-, the two commonest verbs
in this class, drop the a in all weak forms.
2. The root vyac- takes Samprasarana
e. g. 3. du. vivikids ; analogously kvar- 'be crooked', makes some forms with Samprasarana,
when it reduplicates with u; e. g. jukirihds, 2. sing. mid. injunctive.
3. The verbs
bhas- 'chew', sac- 'accompany', has- 'laugh', syncopate the radical vowel; thus babhas-at,
3. sing, subj., but baps-ati, 3. pi. ind. ;
sasc-ati, 3. pi. ind. pres., sasc-ata, 3. pi. inj. ; jdks-at-,
pres. part.
4. The & of sa- 'sharpen',
via- 'measure', ma- 'bellow', ra- 'give', ha- 'go
away' (mid.), and (in AV.) ha- 'leave' (act.) , is usually changed to 7 before consonants;
e. g. H fmasi,
mimJie, rariihas^, j'ihite, jahtia (AV.); while the roots da- 'give' and dhd'pul' dr op their vowel even here 4; e. g. dad-mahe, dadh-mdsi.
initial of ci5. The
'observe' reverts to the original guttural throughout; e. g. dkhi (AV.).
6. When the
aspiration of dadh-, the weak base of dha-, is lost before t, ih, s, or dhv, it is thrown
back on the initial; c. g. dhat-sva.
dM- 'think', pi- 'swell',
7. The roots di- 'shine',
reduplicate with 7; e. g. ddidet; ddidhet; apTpet.
8. There are a number of transfers
from this to other classes. Thus cais- 'see', originally a syncopated reduplicative base
{= *cakas-), has become a root inflected according to the root class; jais- 'eat', also
originally a reduplicated base (Jaghas-), has become a root from which is formed the
past passive participle jag-dha-, and which in the later language is inflected both in the
root class and the a- class. The weak bases dad- and dadh- show an incipient tendency
to become roots ^, from which a number of transfer forms according to the a- conjugation
are made, such as 3. sing. mid. dada-ie, 3. pi. ind. act. dadhanti, 3. pi. impv. act. dadha-ntu,
The roots pa- 'drink', siha-, han-, form only
3. sing. mid. dadha-ie, 2. du. dadhethe (AV.).
transfer stems according to the a- class: piba-, tisfha-, jighna-; while ghrd-, ma- 'bellow',
ra-, bhas-, sac- make occasional forms from transfer stems according to the a- class
jighra-, mima-, rdra-, bdpsa-, sdsca-.
:

Inflexion.

The forms

458.

actually occurring would,

if

made from

be

'bear',

b/ir-

the following:

Active. Sing.

3.

bibhrtas.

2.

bibhrAthe.

Middle.

The

Sing.

bibharmi.

i.

Pi. i.

2.

bibharsi.

bibharti.

3.

bibhrmdsi and bibhrmds.

i.

bibhre.

2.

bibhrse.

3.

2.

Du.

bibhrthd.

bibhrte.

Du.

bibkrmahe.
2. bibhrdhve.
forms which actually occur are the following:
3.

bibhrAte.

PI.

2.

bibhrthds.

bibhrati.

3.

i.

bibhrvahe.

3. bibhrate.

i.

Present Indicative.
Active. Sing. i. iyarmi, jdhami, jigharmi, j'uhomi, dddami, dddhami,
piparmi ('fill', AV.), bibharmi, vivakmi ( l/waf-)) sisami.
2. iydrsi, cikesi

{KST .),jdhasi

{K^.),jigasi,

mamatsi, vavdksi (yvas-), viveisi^

3.

(vis-

iyarti, jdhati, jigati, jigharti, juhSti,

'passes', bdbhasti (AV.),

bibharti

dddasi, dddkSsi, piparsi, bibharsi,

'be active'), sisaksi

and (once)

mimati

bibhdrti,

sisarsi^.

i/jai;-),

dddaW^, dddhati, piparti

'fills'

'bellows',

and

mimed

{ma- 'bellow', SV.), yuyoti 'separates', vavarti (= vavart-ti, 11. 38^), vivakti,
vivasti {Yvas'-), vivesii (vis- 'he active), sdsasii (YS.) a.nd sasdsti (TS.vii. 4.19''),
sisakti (Ysac-), sisarti.

Du.2.

dhatthds, niriithds, piprihas, bibhrthds.

3. dattds (AV.),

dddhatas^

(AV.), bibhitds (AV.), bibhrtds, mimttas, viviktds (Yvyac-), vivistas.

PI. I. juhumdsi, dadmasi, dadhmdsi, bibhrmdsi, sistmdsi; jahimas'^'^ (AV.),
2. dhatthd,
juhumds, dadmas (AV.), dadhmas, bibhrmas (AV.), vivismas.

This of course does not take place in the

transfer verbs according to the a- conjugation.

2 In the RV. hd- 'leave', has only forms
with a (never 7).
3 But rarasva (AV.).
4 The vowel of ha- 'leave' is also dropped
in the 3. pi. opt. act. jahyur (AV.).
From the former is made the past
5

passive participle dai-td- 'given'.

This

is

the accentuation in

and Aufrecht's
and Padapatha.

editions,

Max Muller's

both in Samhita

Cp. Neisser, BB. 30, 303.

With imperative

sense.

9 Also the transfer form dddati.

10 With strong base, for dhaitds.

"

With base weakened

to jaki- hrjahi-.

342

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

Vedic Grammar.

4.

3. j'ahati, jighrati (AV.), juhvati, dddati, dddkati^, didyati'

{KY.), piprati, bapsati (l/^/^aj-), bibhrati^, sdscati.
Middle. Sing. i. jiihve, dade (AV. TS.), dad/ie, mime.
2. datse (AV.),

piprtAd, bibhrthd.

dhatse.

(+AV.).
Du.

I.

3- Jihtte, juhute,

dddvahe.

datte'-^,

dadhathe.

2.

I.

jihidhve (AV.).

2.

-e:

mimate^

3. jthaie, dad^dfe'^,

dddmake, inimimahe (AV.).

dadkate^, mimate ('measure'), sisrate.
PI.

with

dhatte^, mimiie, sisite^;

Present Subjunctive,

dadhi
(v. 82^).

3. jihate,

2. juhuras,
459. Active. Sing. i. dadhani, bibharani (TS. I. 5. 10').
dddas, dadkas, didhyas (AV.), vivesas.
dadat, dddkat, didayat,
3. plprati;
didayat'^ (AV.), babhasat, bibharat (AV.), yuydvat 'separate'.
Du. 2. dddkathas, bapsathas (Kh. I. 1 1^').
PI. I. jakama, juhavama, dadhama.
3. dddan (AV.), ddd/ian, yuyavan.
Middle. Sing." 2. dddhase.
3. dddhate; with -tai- dadatai (AV.).

Du.

I.

dadhavahai (TS.

i.

5.

10').

PI.

i.

daddmahe.

Present Injunctive.
Active.

Sing.

2.

dadas (AV.), bibkes (AV.).

^. Juhuranta'^'.

3. Jigat,

dadat (AV.),

vivyak.
I. ynyoma^i (AV.).
Middle. Sing. 2. juMrtkas

PI.

Y^W')-

3- jihita.

PI. 3. sascata.

Present Optative^*.

Active. Sing. 2. mimiyas (x. 56^).

'i- jahyat^'^ (SA. xii. \i); juhuyat
(AV.), dadyat (AV.), bibhiyat, bibhryat, mamanyat, mimiyat {ma- 'measure').
Du. 3. yuyuyatam.
PI. i. juhuydma.
3. jahyiir'^^ (AV.).
Middle. Sing. 3. dddhita and dadhitd.
PI. i. dadlmahi, dadhTmdhi.

3. dadiran.

Present Imperative.

Active. Sing. i. jdhani (AV.).

2. daddhi, piprgdhi ( Yprc-),
mamaddki, mamandki, yuyodki, vividd/ii {Y'^^?')j sisadhi.
W^ith -A/': ciklhi
(ci- 'note', AV.), didihi and didi/ii {y dl-), dehi {Y^^')j dhehi., piprhi, bibhrhi
(AV. TS.), mimihi {ma- 'measure'), ririM^^ ( l/ra-), sisihi.
With -tat: jahitat
460.

(AV.), dattat, dhattai, piprtat{i:S.Vf./^.

12'').

3. cikitu {TQ.m.7,.11^), Jdhaiii,

dddatu, dddhatii, pipartu

(AV.TS.), mimatu., yayastu, yuyotu, sis'atu, sisaktu.

jigatu, juhotu (TS.

iii.

3. 10'),

('fill'

and

'pass'),

bibhartu

11 sahiacdi (RV. III. 3310) is probably sing, i

perfect sabj. (p. 361); but occurring beside the
as an intensive.
aorist form namsai, it may be an aorist, to
3 There
is
also a transfer form mimanii which tense Whitney, Roots, doubtfully
'bellow'.
assigns it.
12 dJdayante (AV. XVIII.
t Also the transfer form dadaie.
373) is perhaps a
5 Also the transfer form dadhate.
subjunctive.
6 There is also the transfer form rarate
13 With the strong base yuyo- for yuyu-.
14
from \ra-.
Avery 24.1 gives here several forms
7 Also the transfer form dadhete (AV.).
which it is better to class as optatives per8 By Avery 2374 given
as 3. sing, sub- fect.
unctive middle.
'S With weak base jah-, for jahT-, which
9 TS. 1. 5. 10*,
III. \. 82 has
the transfer here loses its final vowel like dadd- and
form dddante.
dadha-.
'" Pp. didayat;
16 The only form in which ]/?-a- reduplicates
see Whitney's note on
1

Also the transfer form dddhanti.

Regarded by Delbruck, Verbum p,

AV. m. 8l

1333,

with

i.

Verb.

VII.

Du.

Present System.

jahitam (AV.), jigatam,

2.

343

dattdm, dhattdm, pipridm, mimitdm,

sihtdm, sisrtam.
3. cikitam {ci- 'note', AV.), datiam,
dhattam, piprtam, bibhrtatn, mimitam, sihtSm.
PI. 2. iyarta', jahlta (AV.), jigata, juhuta mAjuhoia\ dattd and dddsta*,
dhattd and dddkata^, niniJda i\^mj-}, piprkta, piprtd, bibhjta (AV.), bibhrta
(TS. iv.2.3'), yuyota^, sisTia, sisakta; jigatana, juMtanai, dadatana'^, dhattana

yuyutdm and yuyotam

',

and dddhatana^, pipartana^,

bibhitana,

mamattdna, yuyStana'', vivaktana.

3. dadatu (AV.), dadhatuT.

Middle. Sing. 2. jihisva, datsva (AV.), dkatsva, mimisva (AV.),

^
rarasva (AV.).
3. jihltam ^.
Du. 2. jihatkam (TS. I. i. 12'), didhitham (AV.), mimatham, raratfiam.
PI. 2. juhudkvam {T?i.\Y.6.i^), raridhvam.
j,. jihatam, dadhatam,
sisratam (Kh. i. 3^).

Present Participle.
Active. As the suffix -aitt drops its n (like the endings of the
3. pi. act.) strong and weak stem are not distinguished. The feminine stem of
course lacks n also; e.g. Mbhrat-i-. Stems occurring are: cikyat- (cz- 'note')
5,
461.

jdhat', jlgat; jiihvat-,

titrat-

\tr-

dddat-,

'cross'),

and

bdpsat-, bibhyat-, bibhrat-, sas'cdi- ('pursuer')

Middle,
ptpana- {pa-

('helping'), sisrat-^\

dddana-, dddkana-, didyana-, didhyana-,

AV.) and pipand-'^', pf/yana-^^ (ypi-), niimana-, rdrana-'^''

j'ihsna-,

'di'mk',

dddhat-, didyat-, didhyat-,

sdscat-'^

jithvana-,

sisana-.

Imperfect Indicative.
All

the

of

this class
occurring in the 3. pi. act. take the
except bhr-, which has the normal -an. The verbs da-, dha-, hashow the irregularity (appearing elsewhere also) of using the strong instead of
the weak base in the 2. pi. act.
Active. Sing. i. adadam, adadham.
2. ddadas, ddadhas 's, ddides,
dvives {Y'vis-); bibhes (AV.), vive's (jAwzj-), sisas.
3. aciket {yd-), djahat,
aj'tgat, ddadat^^, ddadhat, ddidet, dbibhar, abibhet, dvivyak'^'', asisat; vives {Yvis-).
Du. 2. adattam, adhattam.
3. dviviktam, dmimatam (AV.)''.
PI. 2. ddadaia'-^, ddadhata'^'^ and ddhatta; djahatana^'^, ddattana.
3. abibhran; ajahur, djukavur, adadjir, adadhur, dmamadur, avivyacur; jahur,
dadur. didhyur (AV.), vivyacur.
Middle. Sing. 2. ddhatthas, dmimithas; didithas (AV.).
3. dj'iktia,
adatta, adhatta, dpiprata^, dmimiia; sihta.
PI. 3. ajihata, djukvata".

462.

ending

verbs

-tir

With strong base yuyo- for yuyu-.

With strong base iyar- for *iyf-;
V. Negelein es^f.
3 With strong base for weak.
4

With irregular accent.

The anomalous transfer form
mana- takes the place of *bibhrana-.
12

cp.

Strong base ddda- for dad-.

Strong base dadha- for dadh-.
Strong base pipar- for pip/ -.
Also the transfer form dadhantu.

13

bibhra-

14

But perfect rarand-.

There is no sufficient reason for regarding

3. sing. (AVERY 248;

Delbruck, Verbum 50, 59).
6 There is also the transfer form dddat.
7
8 There is also the 3. sing, transfer form V. Negelein 672 gives dddhat {KV. AV.) which
seems a misprint for dddhat.
dadatam.
17 There is also the unaugmented transfer
9 cikyat (iv. 38*), nom. sing, m,, is given
by V. Negelein 772 as dkyat and explained form vivydcat.
5

as a pluperfect form.
10

When compounded

particle,

the negative
unchanged in the

with

sakat- remains
accented a-sascdt-,

but has n if
accented on the prefix: d-sascant-J-.
1' For inflected forms of these stems see
fern,

312.

if

ddadhas in X. 739, as a

18 WmTNEY, Sanskrit Grammar

665, quotes
ajahiidm from the TS. (mantra?).
'9 With strong base instead of weak.
20 Anomalous form instead of *dpifrta.
21 Also the transfer form adadanta. Whitney
658 also mentions the unaugmented 3. pi.

Jihata.

344

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

The

I.

^.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

infixing nasal class.

463. This class, which includes fewer than 30 verbs, is characterized by

accented syllable nd preceding the final consonant of the root in the
strong forms. That syllable in the weak forms becomes a simple nasal varying
according to the class to which the following consonant belongs.
I. The infix, appearing in forms outside the limits of the present stem, has become

the

part of the root in anj- 'anoint', bhanj- 'break', and hinu- 'injure'.
z. There are a few
transfers to the a- class, in which some of these verbs come to be inflected in the
later language i, and in which several verbs are regularly nasalized in the present stem
3. Instead of the regular -na-, the root irh- 'crush' infixes -ne- in the
{429, a, 1).
strong forms; thus 3. sing, trne-dhi.
4. In the 3. pi. ind. mid. irregular accentuation of
the final syllable occurs exceptionally in each of the forms anjati, indhaie, bhuiljaii^.

Present Indicative.

The forms

464.

actually occurring,

if

made from

the following:

Active.
3.

Sing.

yundjmi.

i.

2.

yundksi.

Middle.

Sing.

PI. 2.

yunje.

2.

yufikse.

yuhgdhve.

3.

yimjdte.

i.

3.

'join',

Du.

yundkti.

3.

yunjdnti.

3. yufijate.

yuj-

yunkte.

PI.

i.

2.

would be
yuhjmas.
yunjAthe.

The forms which actually occur are the following:

Active. Sing. I. anajmi {AN .), ckmadmi{KV.), trnadmi{Yird-),bhinddnii,
yundjmi^ runadhmi (rudh- 'obstruct').
2. prndksi ( Yprc-), hhindtsi, yunaksi,
vfndksi

3. anakti, undtti {Y^'^-), krnatti (krt- 'spin'), grnatti^

ckindtti{KY.), tniatti, pindsti{Ypis-), bhandkti^yf bhanj-), bhindtti,

(z'r;- 'twist').

(AV.x. 7''3),
yundkti (AV.), rindkti (Yric-), rundddhi, vrndkti, hindsti {Yhims-, AV. SA.).
PI.

I.

aiijmas.

yunjdnti, viiicanti {vie-

3.

'sift'),

anjdnti,

unddnti, pimsdnti, prncdnti,

bhinddjiti,

vrnjanti.

Middle. Sing. i. anje, rnje {rj- 'direct'), prnce (AV.), yuiije, vriije.
yuhkse (AV.).
3. ahkte'', itidhe {= ind-dhe, y'idh-), prnkte, yunkte^, rundhi
With ending -e: vrhje.
(= rund-dhe, AV.), vrnkte, himste^ (AV).
Du. 2. anjathe (Kh. v. 6"*; VS. xxxiii. 33), yunjathe.
3. anjate (VS.
XX. 61), tuiijate, vrnjate (AV.).

2.

PI. 2.

afigdhve.

tuhjdte, prncdte, bkunjdte

indhdte and indhate, rnjate,

3. anjdte and anjati,
and bhunjate, yunjdte, rundhate (AV.), vrnjate.

Present Subjunctive.
465.

The weak base

afij-a-tas for *anaj-a-tas;

is
once used instead of the strong in the form
and the AV. has once the double modal sign a in

the form trndh-an.

Du. I.
3. rnddhat, bhinddat, yundjat.
PI. 3. andjan, yu7idjan, vrnajan; trndhan (AV.).
Middle. Sing. 3. inddkate, yundjate.
PL i. bhundjamahai, runadhaActive. Sing.

rindcava.

2.

bhinddas.

3. aiijatas.

mahai.

Present Injunctive,
Active.

Sing.

2.

pindk (V/w-), bhindt.

3.

pinak, prndk, bhindt,

rinak {Yric-).

Middle.

PI. 3. yunjata.

1 Thus ud- 'wet'

undtti is inflected as
unda-ti in B. and S. ; and yuj- 'join' .yundkti
2L%yuhja-ti in U. and E., beside the old forms.
2 In the RV. anjati
occurs once, anjdte
12 times, indhate 4 times, indhdte 15 times,
while bhuhjate and bkunjdte occur once each.
:

3 ud grnatti 'ties up', is here only a corruption of the corresponding ut krnatti of

RV. X. 1302, seemingly a form of ^aM- 'tie'.
4
5

AV. ante.
AV. yunte.
With irregular

accent.

VII. Verb.

Present System.

345

Present Optative.
Active. Sing.

3.

bhindyat (AV.).

Middle. Sing.

3. prncTtd.

Present Imperative.
466. The only ending of the 2. sing, act, is -dhi, no form with -tat
having been met with. As usual, the strong base sometimes appears in the
2. pi. act.: undtta, yundkta; anaktana, pinastana.
Active. Sing. 2. ahdhi^ {Yanj-), uiidhi (= unddki), chindhi (= chinddhi\ trndhi {= trnddhi), prhdhi {= prngdhi), bhahdhi {^ bhangdhi), bhindhi
(= bhinddhi), yundhi (= yuhgdhi, AV.), rundhi (= rutiddhi, AV.), vrAdhi
(= vrngdhi).
3. andktu, chindttu (AV.), trnedhu^ {KS[ .), prndkiu, bhanaktu
(AV.), bhinattu (AV.), yundktu (AV.), vinaktu ( Yvic-, AV.), vrnaktu, hindstu
(Kh. IV. 5^5).
Du. 2. antam (= anktam, AV.), chintdm (= chinttdm, AV.), prhktdm.
_

anktam (VS.

3.

tana.

22).

11.

PI. 2. undtta^, bhintta (TS. iv. 7. 13^), yundkta, vrhkta; anaktana, pinas3. anjantu, undantu (AV.), yunjdntu (AV.), vrnjantu (AV.).

Middle. Sing.

(=

3.

2.

ahksva'^ (AV.), ywiksvd, vrnksva (AV.).

inddham, AV.), yuntam

Du. 2. yunjdtham.
indhatam.

(= yuhktam,
PI. 2.

AV.),

indhvam

3.

iiidham^

rundham (= runddham, AV.).

(=

inddhvam),

yuhgdhvdm.

Present Participle.
467. Active, anjdnt-, unddnt- and udat-t- (AV.), riijdnt-, rndhdnt-,. krntati(AV.), pimsatf-, prncdnt- 2sA priicati-^ bhanjdnt- and bhanjatt-, bhinddnt- and
,

bhindatt- (AV.), bhunjatt-, yuhjati-, vihcdnt-, {d-)himsant-.

Middle, anjand-, indhana-, tunjand-, tundand-i {KN .), prncand-, bhindand-,
yimjand- (TS. iv. i. i'), rundhand-, sumbhand-^, hlmsana-.

Imperfect Indicative.
468. Active. Sing. 2. dtrnaf^ (AV.), abhanas^ (AV.), dbhinat, arinak
{Yric-), avrnak; unap {Yubh-), rnak (Kh.iv.69), pinak, bhindt.
3. dtpiat,
aprnak (Ypr^-), dbhinat, ayunak and ayunak, avinak (Y'V'c-, AV.), dvrnak
Du. 2. atrntam (= atrnttain).
{}fvrj-); dunati^ud-); bhindt, rindk, vrndk.
PI. 3. dtrndan, dbhindan, av^nj'an; an/an, ayunjan (TS. I. 7. 7^).
Middle. Sing. 3. ainddha ( Y^dh-, AV.).
PI. 3. aytmjata, arundhata
(AV.); unaugmented; anjata.

^.

Delbruck, Verbum
Sanskrit

Grammar

63-64;

94-

p.

254

2.

The

154 157.
260; Roots 213.
p.

nu- class.

Avery, Verb-Inflection 232 ff.

Whitney,
v. Negelein, Zur Sprachgescliichte 57 60;

469. More than thirty verbs follow this class in the Samhitas. The stem
in the strong forms, the accented syllable
is formed by adding to the root,
-no, which in the weak forms is reduced to -nu.
1

the

For

ending
2

ahg-dhi.

root

is

The

regularly

final

consonant of in

-dhi.

Cp. V. Negelein, Zur Sprachgeschichte

the transfer form umbhaia

(yubh-) according to the a- class.
4 AV. XIX.455: dksva emended to d-anksva;
see Whitney's note on the passage.
5 v. Negelein 6^, note ', thinks this form
may be the starting point- of the ending -am

The AV. has

imperatives

3.

sing,

vid-am

and

AV.

\tud- otherwise follows the a- class.

ysubh- otherwise follows the a- or a-

6l3.
3

the

dropped before the diih-am.

also ffncati-.

class.

From \trd-. The MSS. have atrinat:

Whitney's note on AV. xix. 32*.
10 For *abhanak-s i^bhanj-): see WHITNEY,
Grammar 555, and his note on AV. IIL 6^.
9

see

Cp. above 66,

c,

;8

(p. 61),

346

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

a. Several irregularities occur with regard to root, suffix, and ending, i. The root
sru- 'hear' is dissimilated to sr-'^ before the suffix: s^-nu-, sr-no-.
2. The root c/"'cover' assumes the anomalous form of iir- (with interchange of vowel and semivowel):
3. Four roots ending in -n, tan- 'stretch', manur-nu; beside the regular vr-nu-^.
'think', vati- 'win', san- 'gain', seem to form their stem with the suffix -u, being assigned
by the Indian grammarians to a separate class, the eighth; but this appearance has
probably been brought about by the -an of the root having originally been reduced to
In place of the regular and very frequent
the nasal sonant: ta-nii- for "^tn-nu-^.
4.
kr-nu-, there appears in the tenth book of the RV. the anomalous stem kuru-, once in
the form kur-mas (X. 5l'\ I. pi. pres. ind., and twice in the form kuru (x. 192, 1452),
2. sing. impv. act. The strong form of this stem, karo-'', which has the additional anomaly
of Guna in the root, appears in the AV., where however the forms made from k}'n6-,
irnu- are still upwards of six times as common as those from karo-, kuru-^. The isolated
form taru-te 'attains', which occurs once in the RV. (x. 76^), seems to be analogous in
formation to karo-ti, but it may be connected with the somewhat frequent nominal stem
iaru-6.
in all the few forms which occur in the
5. The u of the suffix is dropped,
kur-mds, kfn-mdsi (AV.},
1. pi. ind. act. and mid., before terminations beginning with /n:
lan-masi (TS.), hin-mas (AV.), hin-masi (AV.); krn-viahe, man-niahe^
When the -nu is
preceded by a consonant, the u becomes uv before vowel endings; e. %. asnuv-anti '^vX
sunv-dnd).
6. In the 3. pi. mid.,
six verbs of this class take the ending -reS with
connecting vowel -i- inv-ire, rriv-ire, pinv-ire^, irnv-iriy sunv-ire, hinv-ire. The connecting
vowel -i- is also taken by sru- in the 2. sing. mid. srnv-i-se (for *srnu-se) used in a
passive sense.
7. Five stems of this class, i-nu-, r-nu-, ;i-nu-, pi-nu-, hi-nu-, have come
to be used frequently even in the RV. as secondary roots following the a- conjugation.
Of these ftnv-a- occurs almost exclusively in the RV. as well as the AV. ; mv-a- alone
is
met with in the AV.
and jinv-a- and hinv-a- are commoner in the RV. than ji-nu-

and

hi-nu-.

Present Indicative.
470.

The forms

actually occurring,

if

made from

as follows:

Active.
3. krnutds.

krnomi.

Sing.

i.

PI. i.

krnmdsi and krnmds.

Middle. Sing.
PL I. Jzrnmahe.

i. /^r?//.
3.

The forms which

2.

2.

krnosi.

krnuse.

^.

3.

krnoti.

kr- 'make',

Du.

2.

would be
krnu(/ids.

krnuthd. 3. krnvdnii.
krmtte s.nii. krnve.
Du. 2. krnvaihe.
2.

krnvdte'^''.

actually occur are the following:

Active. Sing. i. urnomi (AV.), rnomi, krnomi, ksinomi (AV. TS.), minomi
{mi- 'fix', AV.), vrnomi ('choose', Kh. 11. 65), saknomi (AV.), srnomi, hinomi.
With -U-: karomi (AV. TS.), tanomi.

2.

apnosi (AV.),

inosi,

krnosi, jinosi, strnosi, hinisi; tanosi, vanosi.

3. ahioti {as- 'attain'), apnoti (VS. AV.), inoti, unoti

fdknoti,

krnoti,

cinoti 'gathers',

(RV.), Urnoti,

vrnoti, saknoti (AV.), srnoti, siinati,

ianoti, vanoti, sanoti.

Du. 2. asnitthas (Kh. i. 9^), urmcthas, krmithds, vanuthds.

urnutds, krnutas, sumttds; taniitas (Kh. iii. 22*).
Pi.

(TS.
J

I.

krnmdsi (AV.),

IV. 5. II').

Cp. Delbruck,
Cp. Brugmann,
Cp. Brugmann,

p. 156.
4 Perhaps

2.

rnoti,

dunoti (AV.), dhunoti, minoti (AV.),

skunoti (AV.), hinoti; karoti (AV. TS. VS.),

dasnoti,

3.

ahiutds,

hinmas (AV.), hinmasi (AV.); kurmds, tanmasi

asnutha, krnvthd, dhumcthd, sumithd.
3. asnuvanti.

Verbum p. 154*.
(Delbruck 174, Brugmann, KG. 673) of this
kg. 674.
phenomenon. There is no example in the
KZ. 24,259; Delbruck Samhitas of the I. du. in -vas and -vahe; but

starting

from the

and following the analogy

Brugmann, ICG. 656, 3.

aorist d-kar
of krtto-; cp.

*irn-vds, *krn-vdhe must be presupposed to

account for the loss of the -u before -mas

and -make: Brugmann, KG. 673.

S Like duh-re in the root class.
Whitney 715.
9
This is the only form (besides the
6 Occurring in idru- 'swift' (?), taru-if- 'con- participle/'Z'-fla- unA pinv-dnl-, pinv-ai-im
in
queror', tdru-lra- 'victorious', tdru-sa- 'victor', A V.) in which the stempinu- appears. All others
and the verbal stem idrusya-'cross\ 'overcome'. are made from the transfer stem pinva-.
"o Sometimes accented
7 Thus krn-mahe is not the only example
kfnvaie.
s

VII. Verb.
rpvdnti,^ krpvdnti \ cinvdnti (TS. 1.

Present System.

347

1 7 ^), dabhnuvanti, dunvanti (AV.), prumuvanti,

saknuvdnti (AV.), srnvdnti, sunvdnti, hinvdnti; kurvanti (AV.), tanvdnti.
Middle. Sing. i. asnuve, krnve, hinvi; kurve (AV.), manvi (AV.), vanve.
2. amuse,
urnuse, krnusi, cinuse, dhunuse;
tanuse (AV.).
With
.

connecting vowel

-/'-:

irnv-i-se.

3. asnute, urnute, krnute, dhunute, prusnute, srnute; kurute (AV.), tatiute,

tarute, vanuti.
ending -e: irnve, sunvej hinve.
Du. 2. tativathe.
PI. i. krnmahe, mantnahe.
3, asnuvate, krnvdte,

With

vrnvdte and vrnvate, sprtwate, hinvdte; kurvdie (AV.), tanvati

and ianvdte
(AV.).
With ending -re: inv-i-re, rnv-i-re, pinv-i-re, srnv-i-re, sunv-i-re,
hinv-i-rS.

Present Subjunctive.
Active.

Sing.

471.
i. krnava, hinava; sandvani {KSf^.
2. rndvas,
krndvas, trpndvas, srndvas; karavas (AV.).
3. asnavat^, krndvat, cinavat,
dhunavat, prusndvat, s'rndvat, sundvat; vandvat.
With double modal
sign a: karavat {AN.), kniavat (AV. xx. 1325).
With ending -iai:
asnavatai^ (AV.).
Du. i. ahiavava, krnavava.
PI. I. aindvama, krndvama, minavama, sakndvama, sunavama, sprnava?na.
2. sandvatha; with double modal sign: kpmvatha{YSi.).
j,. asnavan,
krndvafi, srndvan.

Middle. Sing.
2.

Du.
PI.
3.

I.

amavai

(VS. xix. 37), krndvai, sundvai; mandvai.

krndvate; mandvate.
krnavavahai; tanavdvakai.
2. asndvaithe.
3. krnvaite''.
i.

krnavase; vanavase.

asndvamahai

I,

3.

97 '7)5,

(x.

krndvamahai,

stpiavamahai (AV.).

asnavanta, krndvanta.

Present Injunctive.
Active. Sing.*

fnos.

2.

vanvan.

Middle. Sing.

2.

tanuthas.

3. lirnot.

3. rnutd.

PI. 3. rnvan, minvdn, hinvdn;

PI. 3. krnvata; manvata.

Present Optative.

Active. Sing. i. sanuyam.

3. srnuydi (AV.).
srtiuyama; vanuyama, sanuydma.
Middle. Sing. 3. krnvitaT; manvTta (AV.).

PI.

I.

cinuyama.

Present Imperative.

Sing. 2. srnudhi.
With ending -hi^: aksnuM {aks472.
'mutilate', AV.), asnuhi, apnuhi (AV.), inuhi, urnuhi, krnuhi, cinuhi, trpnuhi,
dabhnuhi (4-V.), dhunuhi, dhrsnuhi, srnuhi, sprnuhi, hinuhi; tanuhi, sanuhi.

Active.

W^ith ending -iai: krnutat, hinutat.

Without ending: i7iu, urnu, krnu,
dhUnu (Av.), srnu, sunu, hinu; kuru, tanu.
3. asnotu, apnofu (AV.), urnotu
(A v.), krnotu, cinotu, minotu, srnotu, sunotu; karotu (TS. VS.), tanotu {KSf^,

sanotu.

Du.

2.

asnutam, krnutdm, trpnutdm, srnutdm, kinStam^.

,

3.

asnutam

(AV. TS.), krnutam (AV.).

6 The injunctive form asnavam, AV. XiX.
1 skrnvanti aitev pari-.pariskrnvdnti (1X.142),
pari skrnvanti (ix. 6423).
556, is a conjecture; see Whitney's note
2 The form arnavat, AV. v. 28 (]//'-), is a on the passage.
a.'O.A urnu7 iirnvTtd occurs in TS. VI. I.3
corruption of avrnot in RV.
3 The TS. has once asnavatai (Whitney vita in K. (Whitney 713).
8 Cp. Whitney 704.
701).
9 With strong stem.
4 Irregular for krnavaite.
5

Omitted by Avery 238.

348

I.

With

4.

Vedic Grammar.

urnuta, kniutd and krnota ', trpnuta, dhunuta, srnuid and srnota ',
sunota'-,
hinuta (AV.) and hinota^; tanota^ (AV. TS.).
ending -tana: krnotana^, sj-notana'^ sunotana^, hinotana' (x. 30').

PI.
suttutd

Allgemeines und Sprache.

2.

and

3. asnuvantu, unnivantu, krnvdntu^ cifiva7itu (^S.y. 2. 11^), srnvdntu, hinvantu;

vanvdjitji, sanva?itu.

Middle.

Sing.

krnusvd,

urnusva,

2.

cinusva (AV.),

dhunusva (AV.),

asnutam (AV.), krnutam; tanutam (TS.

manutam, vanutam (AV.).
Du.
krnvatham (AV.). PI.
krnudhvdm, sunudJivam; tanudhvam,
vanudhvam (AV.).
rnvatam (AV.); kurvatam (AV.), tajivdtam (AV.),
tanusva, vanusva.

srniisvd;

3.

I.

6. 33),

2.

2.

3.

vanvatam (AV.).

Present Participle.
473. Active, urnuvdnt- zxA urnvdnt-,
cinvdnt-,

f.

-vatl-,

srnvdnt-,

f.

-z/(7//-,

tanvdnt-,

f.

-paz"/-

i.-vatl-,

rnvdnt-, krnvdnt-^,i.-vati-,

du?ivdnt- (AV.), dkunvd?it', pinvdnt- (AV.), minvdnt-, vf?ivdnt-,

sunvdnt-, hinvdnt-,
(AV.), vanvdnt-.

f.

-vatl-;

kurvdnt- (AV.),

f.

-z/a//-

(AV.),

Middle, urtivand-, krnvand-, cinvand- (TS.iv. 2. 10'), dhunvand-, pinvand-,

sunvand-, hinvand-; kurvand- (AV.), tanvand-, manvand-, vanvand-.

Imperfect Indicative.

2. dkrnos, dvrnos, dsrnos,

474- Active. Sing. i. airnavam; krnavam.
dsaghnos, ainos, durnos; akaros (AV.), dvanos, dsanos.
3. dkrnot, ddkufiot,
avrnot, apnot (AV. TS.), ardhnot (AV.), ainot^ durnot; akarot (VS. AV.),
atanot, asanot.
Du. 2. akrnutam, adhunutam.
PI. 2. akriiuta and akrnota; akrnotana.
3. dkrnvan, acinvan (AV.),
asaknuvan, asr?tvan{AY^; rnvan, minvaii; akurvan {AN.), avanvan, dsajtvan.
Middle. Sing. 2. adhunuthas kuruthas (AV.).
3. akrnuta, ddhunuta;
krnuta; akuruta {KSf^^ atatiuta (AV.), dmanuta.
PI. 2. dkrnudhvam.
3. dkrnvata^, avrnvata; akurvata{KS[ .; Kh.ii 135),
dtanvata, amanvata, avanvata (AV.).

^.

Delbruck, Verbum

3.

The

153.

na- class.

Avery, Verb-Inflection 232 ff.

WHrrNEY,
Sanskrit Grammar p. 260 263; Roots 214.
v. Negelein, Zur Sprachgeschichte 49
Cp. J. Schmidt, Fesigruss an Roth 179 ff.; Bartholomae, IF. 7, 5081; Brug57.
MANN, IF. 16, 509 ff.
p.

151

475. Nearly forty verbs belong to this class in the Samhitas. The stem
formed by adding to the root, in the strong forms, the accented syllable
-nd^, which in the weak forms is reduced to -ni before consong,nts and -n
is

before vowels.
a.

and the
ways.
jin&mi,

There are some irregularities with regard to the root, the suffix,
endings,
i.
The root shows a tendency to be reduced in various

The

roots /r- 'overpower', /5- 'hasten', /i7- 'purify', are shortened; e.g.
The root grabh- 'seize' and its later form grah- take

;u?tasi, pundti.

With strong stem

instead of weak.

Thus

alter-

skrnvani- in pari-skfnvdn (ix. 39').

In X. 134 akrnvata has the appearance
native strong form ; and in one other {ianoia) of being used for the 3. sing. (= akrnutd).
the strong is the only form occurring.
5 The
suffix may originally have been
2 Thus all the forms occurring with -tana
-nai of which -rii would be the weak grade
have a strong stem. Whitney 704 also (27); but Brugmann, Grundriss 2, 597, note,
mentions karota besides the 2. du. krnotam, disagrees with this view. He thinks -/ has
but I do not know whether these forms displaced earlier -ni, KG. p. 512.
occur in mantra passages.
1

in four out of

seven verbs there

is

an

VII. Verb.

Present System.

349

e. g, grbhmmi and grhn&mi (AV.). Four roots which, in forms

outside ^the present system appear with a nasal
^ drop the nasal here; thus

Samprasarana;

danM-

badhnami (AV.); manth- 'shake' mathnami (AV.); skambhskabhnati; stambh- 'prop' stabhn&ti {KSf). The root jna- 'know',
also loses its nasal; e. g. ja-na-mi\
2. The strong form of the suffix,
'bind'

'make

firm'

appears in certain 2. persons impv. act., which should have the weak
form -ni; e. g. 2. pi. puna-ta for pum-td. On the other hand -nJ appears
once instead of -na in 3. sing. injv. viinit^ (AV.).
3. A few roots ending
in consonants take the peculiar ending -ana in the 2. sing.
impv. act.; e. g.
-na,

grh-and'<.

Transfers

4.

These are rare

to the a- conjugation

in the case of ^r- 'sing'

made from

are

five roots.

grna-ta 2.pl. ind., grna-nta 3.pl. impf.;

amina-nta 3. pi. impf.; jr- 'crush' only srna
:

mi- 'damage' tnina-t 3. sing, injv.,

(AV.) 2. sing. impv. But pr- 'fill' and mr- 'crush' form the regular a- stems
prnd- and mrnd- (beside priia- and mrna-), ten forms being made from the
former, and five from the latter in the RV.s
:

Present Indicative.

The forms

476.

actually occurring,

if

made irom grabh-

'seize',

would be

the following:

Active.
3.

grbknitds.

3.

grbhndnti.

3.

grbhndte.

Sing.

Middle.

grbhnami.

2.

grbhmmdsi

3,-ad

\.

V\. i.

Sing.

grbhni.

i.

The forms which

Active.

2.

grbhnasi.

grbhnise.

3.

Du. 2. grbhntthas,
grbhnitha s^-aA. grbhnithdna.

grbhnAti.

-i.

grbhmmds.

2.

grbhnite.

PI. i.

grbhnTmdhe.

actually occur are the following:

asnami ('eat', AV. VS.), istiami (AV.), ksinimi (AV.),

grnami (AV. vi. 7i3, gr. 'swallow'), grbhmmi, grkndmi
(AV. TS.), janami, jinami, punami, prnami (AV.), badhndmi^ {bandh- 'bind',
AV. TS.), mathnami (AV.), minami, rinami (AV.), s'rndmi (AV.), sinami (AV.),

grnami

Sing.

i.

{gr- 'sing'),

stabhnami, strnami (AV.).

2. asndsi (AV.), imasi, junasi, prndsi, ritiisi,
srnasi. -^ 3. asndti, krmati, ksinati {ksi- 'destroy'), grndti, grbhndti, grhndti
(AV.), janiti, jindti, junati, pimdti, pr7idti, mindti, musnati (AV.), rindti,
^

sfndii, sinati, skabhnSti, stabhndti (AV.), hrunati.

Du.

2.

rinithas.

3. grnitds, prnitas.

PI. I. grnimdsi,junimdsi, mimmdsi, srnimasi (AV.); jammds.

I. janJtha;
sfrnithdna (AV.).
3. aindnti (AV.), ksindnti, grndnti, grbhndnti, grhndnti
{KN.'TS.), Jandnti, jinanti, jundnti, pundnti, prndnti, prlnanti, badhndnti (AV.),
bhrindnti'i, mindnti, rindnti, srindnti, strndnti.
Middle. Sing. i. grn^, grbhne, grhne (AV.), vrne.
2. gfntse'^, vrms^
(A v.), srinTse, hrnise.
3. krmite (AV.), ksimte (AV.), grnite, punite, prinlti,

rinite,

vrnite, srathnite, strnite, hrnite.

PI.

I.

grhntmahe (TS.

v. 7. 9'),

Cp. Brugmann, Grundriss 2, 627.

Originally "'jana- with nasal sonant, *jnna-; see Brugmann, KG. 666 (p. 511).
3 On this form see V. Negelein 56, note I.
4 On the origin of this ending see BrugI

'

With

-e for

punimahe (Kh.
7

-te:

grne.

10*),

iii.

The only form

vrnimdhe^.

occurring

of the root

bhrJ- 'consume'.
S

The form grnisi

also occurs in the

RV.

being formed
from an anomalous aorist stem gfra-f-.
mann, Grundriss 2, p. 975.
According to Whitney 719, once
9
5 Beside seven present stems of this class vrnimahi,
with reference doubtless to RV.
there appear denominative stems in -aya v. 2o3, where, however, vfnimahe 'gne is
from the same roots. Cp. v. Negelein 50 52. only the Sandhi accentuation for vj^mmahe
6 Given, along with a number of cognate agne (see above 108 and p. 319, note '3).
forms, as from the root badh-, by v. Negelein 57.

as a

I.

sing, ind.,

'I

praise',

35
3.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

as'nate'^,

4.

Vedic Grammar.

pundte (AV.) and punate, badhndte,

grb/inate, grhtiate (AV.), janate,

rinate, vrndte.

Present Subjunctive.
subjunctive forms are indistinguishable from the
formed with primary endings, and from the injunctive, if
formed with secondary endings, as the modal sign a is merged in the strong
stem; thus grbhnati may be 3. sing, indicative or subjunctive; grbhn&s may be

In the

477.

2. 3. sing.,

indicative present,

2. sing,

if

In such forms therefore the sense or concan alone decide their value. These as well as un-

injunctive or subjunctive.

struction of the sentence

mistakable subjunctives are rare in this class.

3./.ra/z
Active. Sing. 2. grbhnS.s,jtmas.
PI. I. junama, minatna.

Middle Du.

i.

krinavahai (TS.

I.

8. 4').

(x. 2*, c^.2i),J>rnat{AN'.).

PI.

I.

Janamahai (AV.).

Present Injunctive.

Active. Sing. I. ksiitam.

2. rinSs (AV. xx. 135").
minify (AV. vi. iio^).
PI. 3. minan, rindn (viii. 7^*), Jcamnan.
Middle. Sing. 2. hrnithas.
3. grnfta, grbhnita, vrnita.

2. janst',

PI.

i.

stniimdhi''

Present Optative.
some forms of the optative cannot be distinguished from
unaugmented forms of the imperfect, as the modal sign -i is merged in the
suffix -m.
The forms actually occurring are very few, being found in the
In the middle

2. 3. sing.

only.

Active. 3. asniyat (AV.), grhniyat (AV.), jiniyat (AV.), prniydt.

z/rZ"/a, VS.iv.8).
Middle. 2./a7//^aj-(Kh. iv. 5^).
3. z/r;i'a (TS.1. 1.2'

Present Imperative.

The

478.

regular

ending

of the

2. sing. act.

is

-hi,

while -dhi

never

One

of these, grak-, and three others

ending in a consonant, as-, bandk-, stambh-, take the peculiar ending -and.
Active. Sing. 2. ^ri?/z2 ^ (TS. iv. 4. 12^), grmki, grbknihi {AN.),grknaki^
(AV.), janihi, puncihi^ (SV.), pumhi, ;pritihi (AV.), mrnihi, srnahi^ (SV.),
srnihiT, strnihi^ (AV.).
With -tat: grhiiitat (AV.)/ janttah (TS. AV.),
punitat.
With -ana: asana^, grAana^ (x. 103'^), badhana {KN^,
stabhand (AV.)
3. grnatu, grhnatu, janatu (AV.), punatu, prnatu (AV.),
badhnatu (AV.), srnaiu (AV.), sinatu (AV.).
Du. 2. asnitdm, grnitam (TS.iv. i. 8^), grhnttam (AV.), prnitdm, srnitdm,
strnitdm.
3. grnitam, puniiam (AV.).
occurs.

Three verbs take

-tat as well.

'

LEIN

grnati (AV.
as a finite

given by v. Nege5 With

form grnate (unaccented), grhmhi.

IV. 21=),

strong

base

instead

of grnVii,

6 With strong base and irregular accent.

accented jdnat in the Khila
7 Also the transfer form j?-a(AV.Xlx. 451).
8 Whitney 723 quotes sirnahi from the
(m. 21) after RV. x. 103 (Aufrecht's Rigveda^,
682), but it is correct in the corresponding TS. [VI. 3. 14
passage of the AV. (in. 26J.
9 V. Negelein 57> line 6, seems to regard
3 For fjiindt,
jhaidt (AV. XIX. 156), given as jnatdt (un4 There seems to be no certain example accented), as an anomalous imperative; but
of a 3. pi. Avery 240 gntsgrbhnaia, but this it is the ablative of the past participle.
10 Both forms are omitted by Avery
form (ix. 14^) appears to have an imperf.
243
sense; he adds vrnata with a query, but I the latter is regarded by Grassmann as a
cannot trace the form.
participle.

is

the dat. sing, of the participle.

This form

is

VII. Verb.
"PI.

(AV.),

Perfect System.

grmta'',

7..

grbhnlta, jinitd,
(AV.), strmta (AV.).

mputa

srvfltana.

puniti

mathmta

ptmlta', prmtd,

a.n6.

With

351

-iana:

pumtdna, prmtana,
grhnantu (AV.). janantu

3. ainantu (AV.), grnantu (AV. TS.),

(AV.), pundnfu, mathnantu (AV.), badhnantu (AV),
sfnantu, srXnantu (AV.),
smantu (AV.).

Middle. Sing.
3. strnitam,

2.

grbhnisva (Kh.

iv. 5^^),

hrnitam.

'P\. 2.

janrdkvam

479-

Active,

/r?2w^' (Kh.ii. 8'), /-"-z'.

(AV.), vrnidhvdm.

2-

janatami, vrnatam (AV).

Present Participle.
^

jandnt;

f.

mindnt-,
-//-

f.

f.

jlndnt- (AV.),

-atf-,
-a//-,

f.

asndnt-,

mumant-,

-//- (AV.), imdnt-, usndnt-, grndnt-, grhndntpundnt-, f. -0:2^/-, prndni-\ prindiit-, maikndnt-,

mrndnt-,

rindnt-,

Middle,

srindnt-,

skabhndnt-,

>

>

stmdni-,,r

(AV.).

dpnana-, isnand-, grnand-, grhnand- (AV.), janand-, drUnand-,

rinand-, vrnand-, srnand-, irathnand- {KSI.)^

punand-, prmand-, minand-,

srmand-, strnand-, hrnand-.

Imperfect Indicative.

480. Active. Sing. i. ajanam, asnam.

2. dkdnas, agrbknas, aprnas,
dminas, amusnas, aramnas, arinas, astabhnas; ubhnas, rinas, srathnas.
3. agrbhnat, agrhnat (AV.), ajanat (AV.), dprnai, aprJnat, dbadhnat, dmathnat,
aminat, amusnat, dramnat, drinat, asrnat, dstabhnat, dstrnat; as'nat (AV.),,
aubhnat; janat, badhnat (AV.).
Du. 2. dmusmtam, arimtam, avrnitam.
PI. 2. drinita.
3. akrJnan
(Av.), agrbhnan, agrhnan (AV. TS.), ajanan^, aptinan, dbadhnan. asrathnariy
dstpian; asnan^ (AV.); dsnan (x. 176^), rindn (x. 138').
Middle. Sing. i. dvrni.
3. dbadhiiita (TS.i. i.io^), dvrmta, dsrinita.
PI. I. avr?iTma/ii.
3. agrbhrtataT, djanata (TS. 11. i. 11^); grbhnata.

The

11.

Perfect System.

Benfey, VoUstandige Grammatik p. 372 381,

Delbruck, Verbum 112 134.
Avery, Verb-Inflection 249253.
Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar p. 279296 ; Roots 219
221.
V. Negelein, Zur Spracligeschichte 7078.

481. Like the present system, the perfect has, besides an indicative, theoptative and imperative moods, as well as participles and an,
augmented tense, the pluperfect. It is of very frequent occurrence, being taken
by nearly 300 verbs in the Samhitas. It is formed in essentially the same-'
subjunctive,

vsray

from

all

roots,

its

I.

characteristic feature being reduplication.

The

Reduplicative Syllable^.

482. The reduplicative vowel

more than
:

ca-klp-;

ta-trp-;

gr- 'wake' :j3-gr-;

trs- 'be thirsty'

is

as

These are kan-

thirty verbs.

a rule short. It is, however, long in,

ca-kan; kip- 'be adapted'

'be pleased'

grdh- 'be greedy' -.ja-grdh-;

ta-trs-;

dhr- 'hold'

da-dhr-;

trp- 'be pleased'

nam-

'bend'

na-nam-;

Also the transfer form according to the (the participle nom. sing. m. jdnan is
common).
grndta (AV. v. 279).
6 In prasnan (AV. XI. 332) the Pada text
2 With strong instead of weak base.
reads pra-dsnan.
3 In Khila 11. lO^ wrongly JanJtam.
the transfer forms aminania andi
7 Also
4 With fem. prndnii-, a transfer to the
grnania (vill. 37).
a- class.
8 On the reduplicative syllable see v. Nege-5 V. Negelein 57 also gives the unaugmented
form /anan (RV. AV.), which I cannot trace LEIN 70; cp. Brugmann, Grundriss 2, 846.
1

a- class,

352

I.

mah-

Allgemeines und Sprache.

'be liberal'

vrdh- 'grow'
:

va-vrdh-; vrs-

skambh- 'prop'

sa-sah-;

'be strong'

tu-tu-; su-

va-vas-; vrj- 'twist'

'rain'

ca-skambh-; di- 'shine'

'swell'

va-vrj-;

va-vrs-; sad- 'prevail'

'be hos'die

Aid-

pr- 'swell' :/f-/r-;

va-vas-; vas- 'roar'

'clothe'

Vedic Grammar.

ma-mrs-;
'touch'
mrs- "toucli'
mrj- "wipe' ma-mrj-;
ran- 'rejoice' ra-ran-; rabh- 'grasp' ra-rabh-;
vasva-vasvan- 'win' va-van-; vas- 'desire' va-vas-;

ma-mah-;

ra-radk-;
vane- 'be crooked' va-vak-;

radh- 'be subject'

4.

Ji-kid-

va-vrt-;

sa-sad-; sah- 'prevail'

dt-dl-;

(AV.);

vrt- 'turn'

dhl- 'think'

di-dht-;

fu- 'be swift' :/->-;

tu-

su-su-^.

ar) and / (= al) is always a''; e. g. krja-grdh-; kip- 'be adapted' ca-klp-.
b. The reduplication of a, t, u is made with a, t, u respectively; e. g.
khad- 'chew' ca-khad-; bin- 'fear' bibhi-; budh- 'know' bu-budh-.
There are, however, certain exceptions to this rule.
Roots containing ya or va and liable to Samprasarana in other forms (such as
1.
the past passive participle), reduplicate with / and u respectively-'. Those with j' are:
vi-vyac-; syand- 'move on'
i-yaj-; vyac- 'extend'
ti-tyaj-; yaj- 'sacrifice'
tyaj- 'forsake'
si-syand- (AV.).
Similarly cyu- 'stir' ci-cyu-'^ (beside cu-cyu-), and dyui- 'shine' didyut-''.
Those with va- are: vac- 'speak' u-vac-; vad- 'speak' ti-vad-; vap- 'strew' u-vap-; vah-

The

a.

'make'

reduplication of r

(=

cakr-; grdh- 'be greedy'

roots yam- 'reach', van- 'win', vas'wear', however, have the full reduplication; ya-yam-, va-van-, va-vas-; and vac- 'speak'
a. The roots bhu- 'be', su- 'generate'^ and
has it optionally: va-vac- beside u-vac-^.
ba-bhu-; sa-su- (beside su-su-, AV.); sa-it- (in the participle
il- 'lie', reduplicate with fl:
'carry'

u-vah-

svap-

'sleep'

su-svap-.

The

three

ia-say-ana-)

^.

In roots beginning with vowels, the reduplication coalesces with the

of the root to a long vowel; e. g. an- 'breathe' an-; av- 'favour' av-;
as-; ah- 'say'
ah-; r- 'go' ar- (= a-ar-); ap- 'obtain'
as-; as- 'be'
as- 'eat'
uh-. But if the
ir-; uh- 'consider'
id-; Tr- 'set in motion'
: ap-;
id- 'praise'
root begins with i or u, the reduplicative syllable is separated, in the sing,
3. pi.
act., from the strong radical syllable by its own semivowel: i- 'go'
uc- 'be pleased': 2. sing. mid. uc-i-se, but 3. sing,
ty-iir, but 2. sing, i-y-e-tha;
c.

initial

act. u-v-oc-aT.
a. Five roots beginning with prosodically long a, reduplicate not with a, but with
the syllable an-. Only two of these, both containing a nasal, viz. ams~ 'attain' and anj'anoint', make several forms; the former, 3. sing, dn-dms-a and an-ds-a, pi. I. dn-as-ma,
2. dn-as-d, 3. an-as-ur; mid. sing. 1.3. dn-as-i; subj. pi. I. dn-ds-d-mahai; opt. sing. I. dn-asydm^; the latter, dn-ahja (VS. VIII. 29; TS. III. 3. 10"); mid. sing. I. dn-aj-e, pi. 3. dn-aj-re;
The root ^dh- (reduced from ardh-) 'thrive',
subj. sing. I. dn-aj-d; opt. 3. sing, dn-aj-ydt.
which has a nasalized present stem 9, makes the forms dn-rdh-iir (AV.) and dn-rdh-e.
Through the influence of these nasalized verbs, their method of reduplication spread to
two others which show no trace of a nasal anywhere. Thus from arc- 'praise' occur the
forms dn-rc-icr and dn-rc-i; and from arh- 'deserve', dn-rh-ur (TS'.) beside arh-ire
(RV'.). There are besides two isolated forms of doubtful meaning, probably formed from

1 The
quantitative form of the stem is
Due to the vocalic pronunciation of the
governed by the law that it may not contain y: ciu- and diut-.
This root thus shows the transition
(except in the I. sing, act.) two prosodically
5
short vowels; the only exceptions in the from the full to the Samprasarana redupliweak stem being the two irregular forms cation.
6 Cp. Brugmann, Grundriss 2, 846.
iatane, I. sing, mid., and jajam'ir, 3. pi. act.
Thus sah- reduplicates sdsah- and once sasdh7 These are the only two examples to be
(weak).
Cp. Benfey's articles 'Die Quanti- met with in the Samhitas of this form of
tatsverschiebungeu in den Samhita- und Pada- reduplication.
8 Beside dsaiur, dsdthe, etc., from as-, the
Texten', GGA. 19 f.
2 In most of the forms from a- and r- unnasalized form
of the same root.
Cp,
4-

Pada text has a.

Brugmann, Grundriss 2, p. 1211*.
These verbs originally had the full redu9 Thus fnddhat, rndhydm, rndhdnt-, accordplication ya- and va- as is shown by the ing to the infixing nasal class.
evidence of the Avesta, which has this only;
cp. Bartholomae, if. 3, 38 (S 59).

Toots, the
3

Vn. Verb.
nasalized roots
2. pi. act.,

an-j-j-ur (AV'.),

from

Perfect System.

353

rj- 'attain' (with present

perhaps from amh- 'compress'

stem

r"j-)

'i

and an-ah-a

2,

^.

This form of reduplication evidently arose from a radical nasal having originally
been repeated along with the initial vowel, which is lengthened as in many other stems
(cx-kan
etc), while the root itself is shortened by dropping the nasal*.
In the modal
forms dnaj-a, dnaj-yat, dn-as-amahai the reduplicative vowel seems to have been shortened
because an- came to be regarded as containing an augment (like anat, aorist of nai,

'attain'jS.

d.
few irregularities in regard to consonants also appear in the
formation of the reduplicative stem.
The root bhr- 'bear' reduplicates
i.
with j (as if from Yhr-), making the stem ja-bhr-, forms from which occur
nearly thirty times in the RV., beside only two forms from the regular stem
ba-bhr-.
2. In forming their stem, the five roots ci- 'gather', ci- 'observe',
cit- 'perceive', /:'- 'conquer', han- 'smite', revert to the original guttural (as in
other reduplicated forms) in the radical syllable ci-ki-, ci-kit-, ji-gi-, ja-ghan-.
e. The root vid- 'know' loses its reduplication along with the perfect
sense*.
Thus vM-a '1 know'; vid-vAms- 'knowing'. Some half dozen other
roots show isolated finite forms without reduplication; and four or five more
have unreduplicated participial forms. Thus taks- 'fashion' makes taks-athur
and taks-ur; yam- 'guide' -.yam-dtur; skambh- 'prop' skambh-dthur, skambh-urT;

cet-atur
cit- 'perceive'
nind- 'blame' nind-ima'';
arh- 'be worthy' arh-ire;
(AV. VS. SV.) *. Three unreduplicated participles are common das-vsmsand das-i-vdms- (SV.) 'worshipping', beside the rare dadas-vdms-; midh-v&ms'bountiful'; sah-vAms- 'conquering', beside sasah-vAms-. There also occurs once
the unreduplicated jani-vams- (in the form vi-janus-ah) beside jajhivAms'knowing' (firom Yjha-); and the isolated vocative khid-vas may be the equi:

valent of *cikhid-vas, from khid- 'oppress' 9.

2.

The

Root.

483. Like the present and imperfect, the perfect is strong in the
sing. act. Here the root, as a rule, is strengthened, while it remains unchanged in the weak forms. But if it contains a medial a or a final a, it
remains unchanged in the strong forms (except that a is lengthened in the
3. sing.), while it is reduced in the weak.
In the strong stem, the radical vowel takes Guiia, but in the 3. sing, a

vowel takes Vrddhi instead of Guna"-

final

druh- 'be

hostile',

dudroh-,

krt- 'cut',

Thus

cakart-;

vis-

'enter'

but bhi-

makes

viv^s-;

i.

bibhe-,

'fear',

2.

kr- 'make', i. 2. cakdr-, 3. cakar-''K

3. bibhdi-; sru- 'hear', 1.2. iusro-, 3. susrdu-;

In

the

vivis-,
a.

weak stem, on the other hand, the root remains unchanged;

dudruh-, cakrt-, bibhi-, susru-, cakr-.
Some

irregularities occur in the treatment of the

According to both the infixing nasal

and the a- class, 3. sing.

class, 3. pi. rnjate,

}-hjati.

2 Probably for *dnaha; cp. the weak stem

sasah- beside sasah-.
3 Cp.DELBRUCK.Verbum 145, and Whitney,
Roots, under ahh 'be narrow or distressing'.

Except in the form an-dmia

beside dn-asa {= -^yo/t-e).

Cp. the Greek aor. inf. iv-eyK-etv and the

Tcu)

(cp. fiveyK-

radical vowel,

i.

thus

The verb

root beside caskaih-and- {PiN .), and ninid-ur.

8 With strong radical syllable.
9 Delbruck, Verbum 148, adds dabhur,
but this is rather aorist (beside perf. debhur],
10 On the origin of this distinction between
the I. sing, and the 3. sing. cp. J. Schmidt,

KZ.

"
and

25, 8ff. and Streitberg, IF. 3, 383386.

This distinction is invariable in the RV.,
the rule seems to be the same in the

AV. Whitney 793 d mentions cakdra

as

an

exception, but this form is 3. sing, in all

perfect iv-^veyK-rea,
6 Cp. Bezzenberger, GGA. 1879, p. 818; the passages given in his AV. Index; and
Schmidt, KZ. 25, 3; Brugmann, Grundriss /fl^oAa(AV.lll.l8^) is evidently a corruption;
J.
see Whitney's note and cp. p. 356, note 9.
2, 848.
the
7 With the strong (nasalized) form of
23
I. i.
'

Indo-arische Philologie.

354

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

instead of Guna throughout the strong stem: mamarj-^.

the strong stem being used in weak forms occur in the RV.
3. The radical vowel of
pi. I. yuyopma and 3. vivesur' beside the regular vivisur.
bhu- remains unchanged in the strong as well as the weak forms, interposing v before
4. The weak stem of if- 'cross' appears
vowels; thus sing. 2. babhu-tha, -pX. 'i. babhii-v-ur.
in the RV. as /iiir- and iuiur-; thus sing. 3. /a/ar-a, but p\. 3. /itir-ur, -paTt. titir-vams-, opt.

mrj- 'wipe' takes Vrddhi

2.

Two

instances

of

sing. 3. tiUur-ydt^.

Roots containing medial a leave

the radical syllable unchanged in

lengthening the vowel in sing. 3.; they reduce it in the weak stem
by contraction; syncopation, or loss of nasal.
1. The roots with initial ya- and va-, which reduplicate with the vowels
i and ti'' respectively, take Samprasarana, the result being contraction to
T and u.
Thus liova. yaj- 'sacrifice': strong stem i-ydj-, weak tj- (= i-ij-)^;
vac- 'speak'
u-vdc- and uc- (= u-uc-);
vad- 'speak' u-vdd- and ud-\ vap'strew'
u-vap- and up-; vas- 'dwell' u-vds- and us-; vah- 'carry' u-vdh- and
The root va- 'weave' is similarly treated in the form pi. 3. u-v-ur
uh-.
(= u-u-v-ur). Samprasarana of the root also appears in the weak stem of
svap- 'sleep' and of grabh- and grah- 'seize' su-svdp- and su-sup- ; ja-grdbh-,
ja-grdh- 3,T\d.ja-grbh-,ja-grA-. The roots yam-^, van-, z/a.?- 'wear' have the full
reduplication throughout; yam- taking Samprasarana and contracting in the
weak stem, van-' syncopating its a, and vas- retaining it throughout: ya-yamaxid yem- {= ya-im); va-vdn- and va-vn-; va-vas- (both strong and weak).
2. More than a dozen roots containing a between single consonants and
reduplicating their initial without change, contract the reduplication and root
to a single syllable with medial e.
The type followed by these verbs was
doubtless furnished by sad- 'sit', which forms the weak stem sed- (= *sazd-),
beside the strong sa-sdd-, and supported by yam-, with its weak stem yem{= ya-im) beside the strong yayam-T The other stems showing this contraction
are formed from tap- 'heat', dabA- 'harm', nam- 'bend', pac- 'cook', pat- 'fall',
yat- 'stretch', yam- 'guide', rabh- 'seize', labk- 'take', sak- 'be able', sap- 'curse',
a.

sing. I. 2.,

The roots tan- 'stretch' and sac- 'follow' also belong to this class
AV., but not in the RV. The root bhaj- 'divide' though not reduplicating with an identical consonant in its strong stem ba-bhaj-, follows the
analogy of this group in forming the weak stem bhej-.
Four roots of this form, however, simply syncopate the radical a
3.
without contracting. These are jan- 'beget' -.jajh-, stroagjajdn-; pan- 'admire'
papn-, strong papan- ; man- 'think' mamn-^; van- 'win' vavn-, strong vavan-.
Three others have this syncopated as well as the contracted form: tan- 'stretch'
tatn- and ten- (AV.); pat- 'fall' papt- and pet-; sac- 'follow'
sasc- and sec(AV.).
Syncopation of medial a also takes place in four roots with initial
guttural: khan- 'dig' cakhn- {KN?j, strong cakhdn-; gam- 'go' -.jagm-, strong
jagdm-; ghas- 'eat' -.jaks-, strong jaghds-; han- 'smite' -.jaghn-, strong jaghdn-.
In a few roots with medial a and a penultimate nasal, the latter
4.
is lost in the weak stem 9.
Thus krand- 'cry out' cakrad-; tarns- 'shake' :
tatas-;
skambh- 'prop' caskabh- (AV.), strong caskdmbh-; stambh- 'prop'
sap- 'serve'.
in the

1 The
6 The analogy of yam- is followed by
same irregularity appears in the
present stem.
yaj- in the one form yeje (beside ye); cp.
2 Cp. Brugmann, Giundriss 2, p. 12231.
note 5.
3 Cp. V. Negelein 741.
7 See Bartholomae, Die ai. ^-Formen im
4 But they had the full reduplication in schwachen Perfect, KZ. 27, 337366; Brugthe Ilr. period; cp. Brugmann, Grundriss 2, mann, Grundriss 2, p. 1222; cp. v. Negelein
p. 1220^.
71^.
5 In
the one form yeje (beside tje), yaj8 The strong stem does not occur.
follows the analogy of yam-, preserving a
9 Cp. Brugmann, Grundriss 2, p. 1217''.
trace of the old reduplication ya-.

Vn. Verb.

Perfect System.

355

strong tastdmbh-.
Similarly, from dambh-, the nasalized form of
dabh-^ 'harm', is formed dadabh-, strong daddmbh- (AV.); and from rambh-, the
nasalized form of ^a^i-^ 'seize', rarabh-. From (/aw/- 'bite', only the participle

tastabk-,

dadahdms- occurs. The root bandh- 'bind', both loses its nasal and contracts,
forming the weak stem bedh- (AV.) beside the strong babdndh- (AV.).
b. Roots with final a retain that vowel in the strong stem, but in the
weak reduce it to ^ before consonants and drop it before vowels. Thus dha'put' employs dadha- in the strong forms, dadhi- and dadh- in the weak.
3.

Endings.

484. The endings in the indicative active are all peculiar (excepting
the secondary -wa* and -ma), while in the middle they are identical (excepting
the 3. sing, -e and 3. pi. -reY with the primary middle endings of the present.

They

are the following:

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

3S6

4.

Vedic Grammar.

3. Roots with final -r add the endings -fM, -ma, and -se direct (excepting two or three forms), but -re always with connecting -i-; thus ^r- 'do'
Connecting -i- before the other
cakdr-tha, cakr-ma, cakr-s^, but cakr-i-rd.
endings appears in Sr-i-tka, ar-i-ma (r-'go'); and va. jabhr-i-se {b/tr- ''htax').
Roots with final consonant add -tha, -ma; se, -re direct if the
4.

of the stem is prosodically short, but with the connecting vowel

Thus tatdn-tha\ jagan-ma, jagrbh-md, yuyicj-ma;
is long'.
dadrk-se, vivit-se; caklp-re', tatas-re, duduh-re', pasprdh-re, yuyuj-re, vivid-re' and
uc-i-md, papt-i-md, sed-i-ma;
others;
but as-i-i/ia, uvoc-i-tha, vived-i-tha;
last syllable

-i-

if

that syllable

tatn-i-se;

The

jagm-i-re, tataks-i-re^, yet-i-re.

ij-i-re,

only exception

is

vit-tha,

which as an old form inherited from the IE. period (Greek oia-'ha.) without
reduphcation, remained unaffected by the influence of reduplicated forms.
Six roots ending in consonants add rire'^ instead of -re: cikii-rire (beside the
cikit-re), jagrbh-rire (once beside the aiv.iS. j agrbh-ri), bubhuj-rire (once), vividrire (once beside vivid-re), sasrj-rire (once), and diiduh-rire (once in the SV. for the
common duduh-re of the RV.)*.
o.

more usual

Vowel

endings.

vowels

are

beginning with vowels final

preceded by one consonant,
becomes y, if preceded by more than one, iy\ e. g. from bhi- 'fear', bibhy2. Final w ordinarily becomes
atur, bibhy-ur; but from sri- 'resort', sisriy-e.
But
susruv-e; su- 'swell' susuve.
uv ; e. g. yu- 'join' yuyuv-e; sru- 'hear'
u becomes v in ku- 'call', e. g. ju-hv-e; and iiv in bhu- 'be' and sU- 'bring
forth', even in strong forms 5; e. g. 3. sing, ba-bhuv-a, sasuv-a^.
3. Final -r
becomes r; e. g. from kr- 'make', cakr-d, cakr-e. But -f becomes ir in titir-ur
from tf- 'cross', and in 3. sing, tistir-e, part, tistir-and-, from sir- 'strew' (the
only root with a r vowel preceded by two consonants that occurs in the
b.

radical

Before

terminations

variously treated,

I,

i.

if

perfect).

Perfect Indicative,
4.85.

The

forms actually occurring,

made from

if

the following:

Active.

Sing.

I.

cakdraT.

2.

cakdrtha.

cakrdiur. - - PI.

I.

cakrmd.

2.

cakrd.

Middle,

Sing.

cakre.

2.

3.

cakrse.

3.

cakdra.

kr- 'make', would be

Du.

2.

cakrdthur.

cakrur.
3.

cakre.

Du.

2.

cakrCithe.

cakrmdhe.
2. cakrdhve.
3. cakrire^.
The forms which actually occur are the following:
Active. Sing. i. asa, uvdpa (TS. i. 5. 3^), cakara, ciketa [cit- 'observe'),
jagama, jagrdbha, jagrdha {P^ .)'), jaghdsa (AV. vi. 117^)", jihTla'^^, tatdpa,
dudroka, papana, babkuva, bibkdya, mitnaya (mi- 'diminish'), rarana, rirebha,
vivesa, ve'da", sisraya, susrdva. The TS. (111.5. 5') has the Vrddhi form z/awara
cakrdte.

PI. I.

{vr- 'cover').
1 This Is in accordance with the rhythmic
rule that the stem may not have two prosodically short vowels in successive syllables.
2 The strength of this rhythmic rule is
well illustrated by the same root vac- having
the two collateral forms vavak-se and Hc-i-se;

Instead of the normal dv.

This is the only perfect form of ysii-

occurring.

both
7 The I. and 3. of dha- 'put' would
be dadhau; of vid- 'find', both vivida.
8 The 3. pi. of vid- 'find' would be vividre.
cp. also the unique lengthening, in a weak
9 AV. UI. 18^ reads jagraha, but this must
form, of the radical a in sa-sah-i-se (beside be emended to jagraha; see Whitney's
the usual sasah-) and the Guna \a yuyop-i-md. note.
^ j'aghasa here is a misprint iorjaghdsa:
3 The additional r may have come into
use under the influence of forms from roots see Whitney's note on the passage.
" Also in AV. IV. 32^ but written jThida
in r^ like dadhr-ire from \dhr:
4 The ending -rire is once also added to in the Samhita text, but ji- in Pada.
See
a root ending in a vowel: dad-rire, from Whitney's note.
12 Unreduplicated form.
yda-.

VII. Verb.

Perfect System.

357

2. iyatha^ and iyetha, cakdrtha, jagdntha {gam- 'go'), jaghdnthajabhartha,

jigetha {ji- 'conquer'), tatdntha, dadatha, dadhdrtha {dhr- 'hold'), dadhatha,
ninetha, papatha {pa- 'drink'), papratha ', babhatha, yayantha {yam- 'guide'),

yaydtha, vavdntka, vavdrtha {vr- 'cover'), vivydktha {vyac- 'extend'), vdttha ',
sasdttha {sad- 'sit').
With connecting -/-: apitha (AV.), aritha {r- 'go'),
ivifha {av- 'favour'), asitha {as- 'be'), uvocitha {uc- 'be pleased'), cakartitka

{krt- 'cut'), tatdrditha {trd- 'split'), dudohitha, dudrohitha (AV.), babhavitha,

rurojitha, rurodhitha, rurohitha (AV.), vavdksitha, viveditha {vid- 'find'), vivesitha.

3.

ana, andmsa and anaia {ami- 'attain'); dpa, ara {rdsa {as- 'be' and as- 'throw'), aha {ah- 'say'), iyaya

{as- 'eat'),

'go'),

ava, Asa

uvdca
uvdsa {vas- 'shine'), uvaha, uvdca {uc- 'be pleased'), cakarta
{krt- 'cuf), cakdrsa {krs- 'be lean', AV.), cakira, cakrdma, cakhdda, cakhSna
(VS.V.23), cacdksa, cdcarta{crt-'hm.A\KY.), cacdra{hN,), cacchanda, caskdnda,
caskdmbha, cikdya {ci- 'gather'), cikaya {ci- 'observe'), ciketa^ (cit- 'perceive'),
jagdma, jagrAha, jaghdna, jaghAsa, jajAna, jajdra (AV.), jabhdra^, jigAy a
{i- 'go'),

{vac- 'speak'),

jujosa, juhava {hu- 'call'), tatdksa, tatarda, taiarha (AV.),

taiAna, tatApa, tatara, taisara {tsar- 'approach stealthily'), tastdmbha, tatana
(RV\), tityAj'a, tutAva {tu- 'be strong'), tutSda, daddmbha {dambh- 'harm',
{ji- 'conquer'),

daddrsa, daddbha {dabh- 'harm'),

dadara {dr- 'split'), dadAs'a {dasdadharsa, dadhAra, dideva (div- 'play', AV.), didesa (AV.), didyota (AV.),
didaya (VS. xii. 34), nanasa {nas- 'be lost'), nanAha^ (AV.),
nanama, nindya, papaca (AV.), papata (AV.), papada, paprA^, pipe'sa, pipesa,
babdndha (VS. AV.), babarha {brh- 'make strong', AV.),
pipaya, puposa,
babhdnja ' {bhanj- 'break'), babhdja, babhuva, bibhaya, bibheda, mamanda {mand'exhilarate'), mamdrsa, 7namAtha {math- 'shake', AV.), mamada {mad- 'exhilarate'),
mamara {mr- 'die'), mamArja {mrj- 'wipe', AV.), i. mimaya {ma- 'bellow'),
2. mimAya {mi- 'fix'), 3. mimaya {mi- 'damage'), mimdya {mi- 'damage', AV.),
mimetha {mith- 'alternate'), mimydksa, mumoda, yayama, yuydja {KST.), yuyddha,
yuyopa, rardksa, rarAda, raradha, rireca, ruroca, rurSja, ruroha (AV.), vavaksa,
vavanda, vavdrta, vavdrdha, vavarha, vavaca^ {vac- 'speak'), vavara {vr- 'cover'),
vavrAja, vavdrta, vavana, vivAya {vT- 'be eager'), vive'da, vive'sa, vive'sa, vivyaca,
sasaka (AV.), sasApa (AV.), sisraya {sri- 'resort'), susoca, sus'rava,
ve'da^,
sasarja, sasAda, sasana, sasAra, sasuva, sasaha, sisedha, sisaya, susAva {suWith the ending -au: tastkdu, daddu, dadhdu, papdu (pa'press').
'drink'), paprdu, yaydu.
Du. 2. aratkur, avdthur, asathur, lyathur, isdthur, updthur {Yvap^,
uhdthur { Yvah-), cakrdthur, cakhyathur {khya- 'see'), jagrbhdthur, Jagmdthur,
jigyathur {ji- 'conquer'), jijinvdthur^, taksathur^, tasthdthur, daddthur,
dadhathur, ninyathur, papdthur {pd- 'drink'), paprathur, pipinvdthur '^, pipyathur
{pi- 'swell'), petathur {Ypat-), babhuvdthur, mimiksdthur, yayafhur, yemdthur
Yyam-), riricdthur, viddthur'^, vividdthur, vivydthur {vyd- or vi- 'envelope'),
{
seddthur {Ysad-), skambhdthur^.

AV.),

'worship'),

1
The irregularity of this form which
occurs once in the RV. and once in the AV.
beside the regular iyeiha is hard to explain.
2 In VI. 177 this form stands for the 2. sing.
oi p-ath- 'extend'; see Neisser, BB. 30, 302.
3 Occurs twice in the RV. also with the
irregular accent cikeia.
4 It is very doubtful whether/o.4ovni. 4537
is 3. sing, perfect of ha- 'leave' (cp. Delbruck,
Verbum p. 124), X\kepapra. Pischel, Vedische
Studien I, 163 f., thinks this word with the
following ko should be read/a/ia/Jo 'abandoning'. Roth thinks {pw.);ahd is an interjection.

5 Overlooked by Whitney, Roots, under

ynak- AV. VI. 1331.
6 The only occurrence of a for au unless
:

Jaha

is

a verbal form.

Omitted by AVERY 250.

8 RVi. beside the ordinary uvdca.
9 From Jinv- 'quicken', a secondary root
starting from the present stem ;i-nu- of ji7

'quicken'; see 469,

10

a, 7.

Unreduplicated form.

From Jiinv- 'fatten', which started from

a present stem of the -nu class; see 469,
11

a,

7.

358

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

Du.

3.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

apatur, avatur, asatur {as-'aXXain'), asaiur, lydtur, uhdtur{Y'^'^^')>

{ci- 'observe'),
cetatur\ jagmatur, jajhdtur {jan- 'beget'),

cikyatur

cakratur,

Jahatur{ka-'\^a-wt'}, taiaksdtur, tastkdtur, dadatur, paprdtur {pra-'iiW), petdtur,

babhuvdtur,

mamdtur {ma-

yematur (yyam-),

'measure';,

vavaksdtur,

mimiksdtur {miks-

seddtur {Ysad-).
PI. I. anasma {ami- 'attain');

^)>

yamdtur^,
sisicatur,

cakrmd, jaganma,

Ystka-), dadhi-md, yuyujma, rarabhmd, rari-md {ra'With connecting -/susruma (AV.), susuma.

'mix'),

sasratur^ iV^f'^

vavj'dhatur,

jagrbhmd, tasthi-md
vavanmd, vidmd^,
arimd, dsimd {as- 'be',

'give'),

AV.), ucimd{Yvac-), udimd (Yvad-), usimd (waj- 'dwell', AV.), cerimd {Y ('^^-j
AN.), jaghnimd {Yhan-, AN.), Jihimsimd (AV. TS.), dadasimd, nindima^,
mnima^ (TS.iii. 2.8''), paptima, babhiivima {AN .), yuyopimdT yemimd, vavandima,
vidmd^, sekimd {Y sak-, AV.), sascima, susudima {Y^ud-), sedima^ {Ysad-).
2. anaha'^ (RV.), anasd {ami- 'attain'); usd {vas- 'shine'), cakrd, jagmd^
(AV. TS.VS.), dadd, babhuvd, yayd, vidd'^, iasasd, seka{Yiak-), sedd {V sad-).
anrci'ir {Y^''^-), anrdhur (AV.), anrhur (TS.
3. anaiur {ami- 'attain'),
III. 2.8');
api'tr, arur, aiur {ai- 'attain'), asur {as- 'be'), ahur, ly'ir, isur {is'send'), uci'ir, udur {und- 'wet', AV.), uvur {va- 'weave'), usur {vas- 'shine'),
uhiir {Yvah-), cakramur, cakrur, cakhiii'ir {khan-, PN .), cSklpur {AN .), cikitur,
cikyur {ci- 'perceive'), cerur {Year-, AV.), jagrbhiir, jagrhi'ir {PN .), jagmi'cr,
jaghnur {]//ian-, AV.), jajanur'^^ axid jaj'iiur {Jan- 'htgtt!), j'abkrur {Y bhr-),
jahur {ha- 'leave'), jaharur'^'- {Y hr-, AV.), jagrdhur, jigyur {ji- 'conquer'),
jugupur'^^, jujumr, jujuvur {Yju-), takmr''^, tataksur, tastabhur, tasthur, tatrpur
(AV.), tstrsur, titirur{Ytr-), tustuvi'ir, dadsiiir, dadi'ir, dadhtir, dadhrsur {AY .),
didyutur (TS. 11. 2. 12^),
duduhur, dudruvur (AV.), debhur {dabh- 'harm'),
nanaksur, ninidur, papiir {pa- 'drink'), papt'ir {pat- 'fall'), paprur {pra- 'fill'),
pipiiur, pipyur {Yp'^')i babhuvur, bibhidur, bibhyur {bhT-'it.ax'), bedhur {bandh-,
AV.), mamur {ma- 'measure'), mamrur {mr- 'die'), mSmrjur, tnamriur, mimiksi'ir
{Y myaks-), mimyur {mi- 'fix'), yamur'^^, yayur, yuyudhur, yemur, raradhur
{Y>'adh-), riripur, ruruc'ir, ruruhur, vavakmr, vavrjur, vavrur {vr- 'cover'),
vavaiur {vai- 'desire'), vavrtitr, vavrdhur, vidur^, vividur, viviiur and (once)
vivesur'^^, vivisur, iaiasiir, iairamur, iaiadi'tr, iiiiuvur, iekur {Yiak-), saicur,
syand-, AV.), sisicur, susupur { Ysvap-), susuvur (VS. xx. 63),
sasrur, sisyadur {
susruvur (AV.), sediir (Ysad-), sepur, skambhur''*.
,

Middle. Sing.
<rai/(/^a-

sider'),

dade,

titvise,

AV. m.

i.

ije,

idhe {idh- 'kindle'), isi

= /Ja- 'be pleased'),

mame

212; SV.

I.

^a/Jrtf, /V'jji?

2. 2. 110,

explained by
without

3- da. perf.

reduplication. Whitney, note onAV.ni. 212,

thinks it is a corruption for cetaiu, but quotes
Weber as taking it for 3. du. perf. from cat'frighten into submission'.
2 Unreduplicated form with present meaning
(VI. 671).
is an anomalous 3. du. pres.
according to the reduplicating
class with perfect ending instead oi*sis)-tds.
4 The form vivisma which Avery gives
with a query is probably an error for

3 sisralur

(RVi.)

s}'-,

vivismas I. pi. pres. (vi. 235' *).

5 Cp. IF. 3, 9f.; ZDMG. 48, 5196 The
metre requires ninJma (see

under

tit-

'move'), uhe {uh- 'con-

{ma- 'measure'), mamahe, rare {Yra-), iepe

Benfey, SV. Glossary, as

ind. of

{is-

(/z- 'conquer'), tataiie^^, tasthe,

'lead').

With strong

Unreduplicated form.

radical syllable.

saice.

(vi. 48') may be 2. pi. from

amh- for *anaha.
Cp. Whitney's note on AV. vi. 974.
This form without syncope occurs once

This form

a root
1
^^

in the
12

RV., jajiiur twice.

Whitney on AV.

this irregular form,

the

96 would
reading of

Iil.

emend
all

the

Mss., to jahrvj-.
13 This is the only finite form of this
secondary root, and it occurs in a late hymn
(vii. 1039); the
past participle gupita- also
occurs twice in the tenth book. This ^gup-

was doubtless evolved from the denominacowherd'.

Unreduplicated form occuring once.
15 With irregular strong vowel.
16 With unsyncopated vowel
occurring
once; 3. sing, tatne.

tive gopa-yd- 'act as a

'

BR.

{Y icp-),

VII. Verb.
i.

cakrsi,

yuyukse

Perfect System.

tastM-se (AN.),

cicyuse,

Vyuj-, AV.),

rari-se,

'choose'), vivitse {vid- 'find').

dadfksi

ririkse

With

Vric-),

{dfi-

359
dadhi-si, paprse>
Yvac-), vavrse {vrucis^ ( jAa^r- and Yvac-),
'see'),

vavaksi

connecting

-/-

upise iYvap-), uhise {Yvah-), Jajnise {YJan-), Jabhrise, tatnise, bedhise{hN),

iepisi {Ysap-, AV.), sasahise\
3.

Snaje

anase

Y<^nj-),

Yams-),

iVyj-), iU_{Yid-), idhe (YtdA-),

anrce,

anrdhe; ase {as- 'throw'),

ij'e

tsi (is- 'move'), uce {uc- 'be pleased'), upe

uhe"" {uk- 'consider'),

cake ( Yka-), cakrade ( Y^rand-), cakrame,
( Y^'^P-),
cakre, caksadi (ksad- 'divide'), caklpe (AV.), cikiti Y^t-), cuksiibM {ksubh(
'quake', AV.), cucyuve, jagrhe^, Jagme {Ygam-), jajni {\fjan-\ jabhre Ybhr-),
(

jigye

jihTle

( l/yV-),

'stretch'

Yf>-^4-),

//a-), tatne

jujuse,

Ytan-\

juhve {hu-

'call'),

tatre [tra- 'protect'),

tatakse,

tasthe

tate

Ystka-),

Yta-

titvise,

tistire'^ {str- 'strew'),

dddrse, dade, dadhanvS'^, dadke, dadhre {dhr- 'hold'),
dadhvase {dhvams- 'scatter'), duduke, dudhuve ( Ydhu-, AV.), nanakse'-, nunude,
netne {Ynam-), paprkse'^, pape' (pa- 'drink'), pdprathe (RV.) z.n6. papratke
(RV^ AV'.), papre^ ( //ra-, AV.), paspase [spas- 'see'), pipise, pipise, pipile,
pipye (;>r-'sweir), pece ( Ypac-), babadhe, babhre ( Ybhr-), bedhe{ Ybandh-, KSf^,
bheje {bhaj- 'divide'), mami (ma- 'measure'), mdmahe, mamrje, mimikse^,
yuyuje, yuyuve {yu- 'join'), yeje'^ iYyv'-), yeme (l/>a/-), rarapse, rarabhe
{Y^'^'^bh-), ririce, ruruce, rebhi (ifrabh-, AV.), vavakse {Y'"'^^'?-)^ vavande,
vavni ( Yvan-), vavri {vr- 'cover'), vavase {vas- 'desire'), vavase (viii. 4*, vas-

'clothe')", vavrje, vavrie, vavrdhe, vide {vid- 'know'), vivide (vid- 'find'), vivye'
{vya- 'envelope'), vivye (vT- 'be eager'), s'asame'(YS.xx.xiii.8y), sasrathe, sasre
{sr- 'crush'),

sisriye {sri- 'resort'),

Du.
cakrathe,

2. a/a^/5e
cike'tke'^^

susuve [su-

susruve,

AV.), sasahe^'^ and sasahe^^, sasrje, sasre

{Y^yind-, AV.), susuvi {su- 'bring forth').

{sr- 'flow'),

'swell'),

sasvaje,

s'epe' (

sisice,

Y^<^p-,

sisyade

|Aa/- 'attain'), tjatke{K^.), uhySthe''^ {vr.e,6^), cakramathe,

{ci-

'note'), dadtithe,

dadhdthe,

mamnathe

{Yftian-), rarathe

{ra- 'give'), riricathe, sasrathe {Ysr-).

3. dsate'^,

cakrate,

dadhate, pasprdhdte,

bhejate {bhaj- 'divide'),

mamite

{ma- 'measure'), mamnate {man- 'think'), yuyudhste, yemste { Yyam-), rebhate

{Yrabh-, AV.), vdvrdhste^^, sasvajste.
PI. I. bubhujmdhe, mumucmdhe, vavrmdhe {vr- 'choose'), sdsadmahe {sad'prevail'),

sasrjmdhe.

2. dadhidhve.

3. Snaj're{Y^nj-); caklpre, cikitre'{Y':ii-), jagrbhre^', jahi-re

{ Yha-, AV.),
juhure, juhiir^, tatasre { tarns-), tasthi-re, dddrsre, dadhi-re, dadhre, duduhre,
nunudre, pasprdhre, pipisre, mami-re {ma- 'measure'), mumucre, yuyujre, riricre,

With strong

9 yeje occurs three times in the RV. (only

with a- and /r<7-), ije occurs twice as 3. sing.,
2 With passive sense.
once as I. sing.
1 Whitney, Roots, under vas- 'clothe'.
3 Omitted by Avery 250.
4 From dhanv- a transfer root from dhan- This form is placed by BR. and Grassmann
under a root vas- 'aim'.
'run'.
Cp. Whitney, Roots 8r.
" X. 10410 (Avery sasahe), Pada text sasahe.
naks- 'attain', a secondary form
5 From
12 VIII. 9615, (Avery sasahe), Pada text sasahe
of nas- 'attain'; cp. Whitney, Roots 87.
6 rv. 437.
This form (which is perhaps cp. RPr. 580, 582, 587, 589.
13 This seems to be an anomalous form
rather to be taken as l. sing.) may be formed
from p-a!is-, a secondary form of prach- for iihathe [uh- 'consider'; cp. Grassmann).
14 Irregular form (RV'.) for *ciky-athe.
'ask'; cp. Benfey, O. u. O. 3,256; Del13 Thus irregularly accented v. 66^. This
BRUCKp. 126'*; Whitney, Roots, and BR. s. v.
form, asaie, also occurs five times unaccented.
prach-.
>6 The AV. has also the transfer form
7 papre, given by Avery 250 with a query,
vavrdhele.
does not seem to occur in the RV.
17 See notes on AV. xviii.346 in Whitney's
8 From miks; a desiderative formation
Translation.
from mis- ; cp. Whitney, Roots.
1

note

2.

radical vowel: cp. p. 356,

360

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

rurudhre, vavakre {vatic- 'move crookedly')', vavas're' (vsJ- 'bellow'), vivijre,

(?> (Kh.

11'),

With

idkire (Yidk-),

tjire

{Yyaj-),
AV.), ucire {Yvac-, AV.), Hhire (
jagmire, jajnire ( YJan-), jabhrire
I.

sasadre.

vivisre,

vidre^, vividre, vivipre,

connecting
trire'^,

arhire^,

-/'-:

cakrire, cacaksire (VS. XL. 10

]Az/a/5-),

'send',

(is-

tsire'^

Up.),

hid-), tataksire, tatnire

Ybhr-), jihilire (
dadhanvireT dadhire
AV.),
teniri
VS.
TS.
AV.),
tastrire^
Yti^n-,
/j-Zf-,
Ytan-),
(
(
(
(Kh.i. 43), dadhrire{Y dhr-), papire (pa- 'di'mk'), bedhire(Ybandh-,KSr), bhejire
mimiksire ( Y>niks-^ma!, and Y^y(iks-),yetiri( Yy'it-),yemire ( Yyam-),
( Ybhaj-),
rurucire (K.\i.i.i2^), rebhire (Yrabh-), lebhire (Y labh-), vavaksire, vavandiri,
(

vavasire, sascire
-r'we

cikitrire

(Y sac-),

secire

(Ysac-, AV.), sedire (Ysad-).

Ycit-), jagrbhriri, dadrire

Moods

With ending

Yda-), bubhujrire, vividrire, sasrjrire.

of the Perfect.

486. Modal forms of the perfect are of rare occurrence in the Samhitas
except the RV. They are made from the perfect stem in the same way as
from the present stem. It is, however, not always possible to distinguish
modal forms of the perfect from those of other reduplicated stems (present
reduplicating class, reduplicated aorist, and intensive) either in form (because
the reduplication is in many instances the same) or in meaning (because the
perfect

is

often used in a present sense).

Perfect Subjunctive.
487.

The normal method of forming

the stem

on the radical

is

to

add

-a-* to the

In the active the

secondary endings are more usual; e. g. tiistdv-a-t. If the primary endings
are added in the active, the reduplicative syllable is in several forms 9
accented, as jt'i;'os-a-si^. In about a dozen forms, nearly all with secondary
endings, the weak stem " is employed, but whether the reduplicative syllable
was then accented is uncertain, because the examples that occur are unaccented. Middle forms, numbering not many more than a dozen, occur only
in the 3. sing., with the ending -te, and in the 3. pi. with the ending -anta.
cakradas,
Active. Sing. I. anaja'^^.1. jujosasi, diddyasi, paprcasi^^
cakdnas, cikitas (Y cit-), Jiijosas, tatanas, dadasas, diddyas, paprdthas, piprayas,
bubodhas, mamddas, mamdhas, mumucas^^, rardnas, sasdhas, si'isudas.
strong

perfect

stem,

accented

syllable.

3.

ciketati

bubodhaii,

jaghdnat,
tustdvat,

(Y cit-),

jiijosati,

dddasati,

dadhdrsati,

didesati^^,

didayati,

mumocaii, vavdrtati;
cakdnat, caklpat (AV.),
ciketat ( V^V-),
jabhdrat, jugurat (gurgr- 'greet'), jujosat, j'ujuvat^^, tatanat,
dadhdrsat, paprdthat,
dddasat,
dadhdnat,
paspdrsat, piprdyat,

mamddat (KN .), mamandat,

mumocat, rdrdnat,

tnumurat (inurvavanat (TS. 11. 4.

diddyat, mumucat'^'',

vavdrtat and vavrtat^*,

= mr-'' crasW),
5'),

vividat^^,

susravat, susuvaf^^, sasdhat, susudat.

1
2

With reversion to the original guttural.

With shortening of the radical vowel.
Without reduplication.
In RV. regularly erire. Pp.

Cp. the accentuation of the reduplicating

class.
1

Except the forms diddyasi, didayati,

dadhdrsati and vavdrtati.
11
in I. 6^ for erire the accentuation should be
The two roots muc- and dhfs- make suberire
d Trire). The AV. has once sam-Thire junctive forms from both the strong and
(xiv. 146).
weak stem.
12 RV. V. 541: this form (Pp. anaja) is
5 isire with irregular
accent is probably
to be regarded as a present (450, 2).
regarded by Delbruck ize*" and Avery
6 IF. 8, Anzeiger 13.
251 as a 2. pi. ind.
13 With double modal sign -a-.
7 From the secondary root dhanvdhan14 With weak radical syllable.
'run'.
8
15 Always d-didesati in relative clauses.
Two subjunctive forms with double
modal sign -a- occur: paffcasi and vavfdhati.
3

a-Trire

(but

Perfect System.

VII. Verb.

Du.
PI.

2. ciketathas, ji'ijosathas; ninithas'-

(i.

361

181').

cakdnama,

tatdnama, susdvama.
2. fuj'osatha, bubodhatha.
^. jujusan'^, jujosan, tatdnan, paprdthan, mamddan.
Middle. Sing. i. sasvacdi^ {Ysvanc-).
^.ji'cjosate^, tatdpate, dad/irsate^,
yuyojate, vavrdhate^ sasdmate {sam- 'labour').
PI. i. andsamahai.
I.

Perfect Injunctive.
488. There are a few singular active and 3. pi. middle forms which must
be classed as injunctives, being identical in form with the corresponding unaugmented persons of the pluperfect. These are: Sing. 2. sasas{= *sasas-s).
3. dudhot (dhu- 'shake'), siset^ (si- 'bind'); sasvdr (= *sasvar-t, from svar'sound'); with connecting -T-\ dadharsit.
PI. 3.
cdkramanta, cakdnanta, tatdnanta, dadabhanta, paprathanta,

mamahanta, rumcanta^,

vavrdhd7ita'^, vivyacanta.

Perfect Optative.
489. This

mood

is

formed by adding the accented optative modal

suffix

combined with the endings (416 a) to the weak perfect stem. The active forms
axe -the commonest, occurring more than twice as often as those of the middle.
There are a few irregularities in the formation of this mood. i. The radical
a.
vowels of pa- 'drink', sru- 'hear', and kr- 'make', being treated as before the -ya of the
passive (444), the stems of these roots appear before the optative suffix as papT-, susru-,
shortened (as if
is
2. The vowel of the reduplicative syllable anand cakri-.
3. A connecting -i- is interposed in
contained the augment) in anajyat {ya)!/-).
it
4. A transfer
jalis-t-yat, while the radical i is combined with the ending in iisrlta.
according to the analogy of the a- conjugation is ririses; possibly also siset^'.

Active. Sing. i. anaiyam; jagamyam, paprcyam, riricyam, vavrtySm.

gr- 'gxtti'),pupusyas, pupuryas {pur- =pr-,
2. cakriyasT , juguryas (gur-

babhuyas, rtirucyas, vavrtyas, vivisyas, lusruyas^.

3. anajyat; cacchadyatjakfiyat^ {ghas- '&aX'),jagamyat, jagayilt {ga-'go'),
tf-), ninTyat^, papatyat (AV.),
jagrbhyat, juguryit, tutujyAt, tuturyit {Yturpapiyat'^'^ (/;> 'drink'), paprcyat, babhuyat, mamadyat, riricyat, vavrtySt, sasadyat
'fill'),

(AV.), sasrjyat, sasahyat.

Du.

2.

jagamyatam, miruyitam.

tuiuryama, vavrtyama, susuydma, sasahyama.

3. jagamyur, tatanyur, dadhanyur, mamrdyur, vavrjyur, vavrtyttr.
^.jagrasita,
2. caksamithas, vavrdhithas.
Middle. Sing. i. vavrtxya.
PI.

I.

vavrtita, sisritd {sri- 'resort'), susucita.

dudhuvita, mamrjxta,
PI. I. vavrtimahi.
There also occurs

the

in

middle

one

precative

form:

Sing.

2.

sasah-i-s-thas.

Perfect Imperative.
tive

490. The regular perfect imperative is formed like the present imperaof the reduplicating class, the 3. sing, active being strong. Hardly more

1 Abnormal form without modal sign or

strong radical vowel; cp. HiRT, IF. 12, 220.
2

With weak

radical syllable.

This form occurs only once (ill. 3310)

beside the j-aor. namsai, and may therefore
3

be an irregular redupl.

aorist,

to

which

it

of the root si-) according to the reduplicating

class; or a reduplicated aorist injunctive

(Grassmann and Whitney 868

6
7
8

See note

on

a).

this form.

Cp. v. Negelein 66.

With lengthened radical vowel.
With interposed -l-.

9
by WmTNEY 863 a.
10 Cp. HiRT, IF. 12, 220.
SV. jujosate,
" With change of the final radical vowel
5 This form, however, might be a transfer
present optative from sa- (the collateral form a to I.
is

doubtfully assigned

362

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

than twenty regular forms occur, nearly all of them being active. There are
also some irregular imperatives, being transfer forms which follow the analogy

made from

of the a- conjugation,

Active.

Sing.

either the strong or the

weak

perfect stem..

2. cakandhi, cikiddhi {]/ cit-), dididdhi^

{Ydis-), piprihi,
yiuc-).

mumugdhi

( Ymuc-')^ sasadhi ( y/aj- 'order'), susugdhi (

cakantu, didestu\ habhutu'^, mamdttu, mumoktu, rdrantu.

3.

Du.

2.

jajastdm

mumuktam, vavrktam.

(Jas- 'be exhausted'),

jujustana, didistana {Ydis-), vavrttana^.

Middle. Sing. 2. dadkisvd, mimiksvd^, vavrtsva^-

PI.

0,.

Pl. 2. dadhidhvam, vavrddkvam^ (viii. 20'*).

ending -ram: dadrsram (AV.)* 'let be seen'.
a. The transfer forms are:
PI.
Active. Yiu. 2. j'ujosatam, mumocatam.

(I.

3.

With the unique

2. mumocata'^,

rarandta^"

171').

Middle.
PI. 3.

Sing.

2.

piprdyasva,

mamahasva,

vavrdhasva, vavrsasva.

mamahantam.
Perfect Participle.

Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar 802

807.

Delbruck, Verbum 229.

Lindner

84 and 216.

There is an active and a middle participle, and both occur freBoth are formed from the weak stem of the perfect, being accented
on the suffix. The strong form is made by adding the suffix -vSms to the
491.
quently.

unstrengthened perfect stem; e. g. cakr-vS7ns-, jaghan-vams-.

If the stem is
reduced to a monosyllable, the suffix is nearly always added with the
connecting vowel -z- ", zs papt-i-vdms- ixom. pat- 'fall'. Unreduplicated stems,
however, do not take the connecting vowel '^ as vidvdms-.
The weak stem
of the active participle is identical in form with the 3. pi. ind. act. if written with
-us instead of -ur; e. g. cakrus-. The middle participle is formed by adding
the suffix -aa to the weak perfect stem; thus from cakr- is made cakr-and-.

Active.
492. cakrvStns-'^i, cakhvams-'^^, cikitvains- (f cikitisi-), jaganvdms- (f j'agmusi-), jagrbhvdms-, jagmivdms- (TS. iv. 2. i* for RV. x. i^ jaganvdms-),
jaghanvdms- (f d-jaghnusi-), janivdfns-'^^, JigTvdms- {fi- 'conqa.&x'), jujurvdms1

this

Whitney, Roots

73,

doubtfully assigns

and the cognate forms

didesati, didista

to the reduplicating present class.

2 With
ii
unchanged, as elsewhere

strong forms.

10

2. pi.

in

Owing

vowel this
be regarded rather as a
subjunctive. (The final vowel is long

should

to the strong radical

perhaps

in the Pada text also.) The accent of these

transfer forms was perhaps, except when

Whitney, the radical syllable was strong, normally on

3 Beside ind. jajasa (AV.j.
Roots 53, assigns this form to the redupli- the thematic -a-. Cp. Whitney, Sanskrit
cated aor. beside

3. sing. ajTjasata (SB.).

Grammar

815.

'I Not, however, in dadvdms-, nor in the

Given by AvERY 268 as a reduplicated
problematic form cakhvamsam (ll. 14'*), which
aorist in the form of vavftana (sic).
Whitney, Roots 120, seems to be formed from a root kha-.
5 For "mimiks-sva.
12 Except visivdnu- (AV.).
assigns this form to the reduplicating present
13 With the weak stem in the ace. sing.
class.
6 Whitney, Roots 164, assigns this form cakrusam (x. 137').
14 Without connecting vowel.
to the reduplicating present class.
15 Only the weak stem of this participle
7 Written vavrdhvam.
8 Cp. Whitney's note on AV. xii. 333.
occurs in the form vi-jdnus-ah; cp. above
9 Perhaps also susiiddla (AV, 1. 26*) placed 482 e.
by Whitney, Roots 188, under the perfect,
but, Sanskrit Grammar 871, doubtfully under
4

the reduplicated aorist.

";

VII. Verb.

{jur-

=jr-

Perfect System.

363

'waste away'),

jujusvdms-, jujuvAms-, tatanvams-, tastabhvcitm-,

tustuvams- (l/'j/-),
dadasvams- {dams'bite'), dadasvams-, dadavims-' (AV.), dadasi'is-, dadivdms- (AV.), dadrvAms(f. dadrusX- 3, AV., dr- 'pierce'), dadrsvams- (f. dadrsusT-), dadvams- {da- 'give'),
dadAanvdms; dadkrsvims-, didivSms-, papivams- {pa- 'drink'), paprvdms{i. papriisTpr-^hW), pipivams- {L pipyHSi-;pi-''s-vft\V), pupusvAms-, babhuvams(f. babhuvi'isi-), bibhivAms- (f. bibhyusi-), mamand'm-, mamrvAms- (f. mamrusTtasthi-vams-

(f.

tasthusT-),

titirvims-'^ ,

mr-

yayi-vAins- {sfya-), rari-vAms- (f. rari'isl-, AV.), ririkvdms-'' {Yric-),

rurukvAms-'' {Yruc-), vavanvAms-, vavarjiisi-^, vavrvAms-^ {vr'cover'), vavrtvams-, vavrdhvAms-T ,vivikvAins-* {vic-'siK), vividvAjns-, vividhvAms'die');

ririhvams-,

{Yvyadk-), susukvams-^ {Ysuc-), susruvAms-, susuvAins-, sasavAms-^, sasrvAms(f. sasrusT-), sasahvams-, susupvAms- {Ysvap-), susuvAms-, sedi'is- {sad- 'sit').
a.
With connecting -/'-: arivAms- presupposed by f. ari'm- {r- 'go'),
tyivAms- (f. Tyi'm-), usivAms- {vas- 'dwell'), zZjiJjf- (TS. iv. 3. iiS; vas- 'shine'),
okivims-^ (weak stem uc-us-, Yuc^, jaksivAms- {ghas- 'eat', VS. AV. TS.),
jajmvams-^ {YJna-), paptivAms-, viviswAms- {TS.iv.y. 1^'). Also the negative
compound d-sascivams- presupposed by the feminine d-sascun-.
b. Without reduplication: dasvAtns-, vidvAms- (f. vidusf^, sahvAms-;
perhaps also khidvams- in the voc. khidvas. Similarly formed is midhvAms(f. mTlkusT-) 'bountiful',
though the root is not found in independent use.
With irregular connecting -i-: dssivdms- (SV.), visivdms- (AV.), and the negative
compound d-varjivdms- presupposed by the f. d-varjusT- (AV.).

Middle.
493. aksdnd- {Ydks-), anajand- {Y anj-), dnasdnd- {Y<^fns-, KV.), ardnd-,
apand-, tjand- {Yyaj-^, Ucand- {Yvac-), cakamand-^^ (AV.), [cakand- {Ykd-),
cakramdnd-, cakrand-, caksadand-, caskabhand- (AV.), cikiiand- { l/aV-), jagrasand-j^ jagmand-, jajndnd- {YJan-), jahrsdnd-, jihiland-, jujusand-, juhurdndtatrddnd-, tastabhdnd-, iasthdnd-, tdtrpand-, tatrsand-,
{ Y^^-)t jujuvdnd-,
titvisdnd-, tistirand- {Ystf-), tustuvdnd-, tutujdnd-'^i, tepand- {Yi'^p-)> dadand-,
dadrsand-, dadrand- {dra- 'run'), dddrhand-, didyutand-, duduhand-^ papand{pd- 'drink'), paprathdnd-, paspasdnd-, pasprdhdnd-, pipriydnd-, pipydnd-,
babrhdnd-, babhrdnd-, bubudhdnd-, bhejdnd-, mdmakdnd-, mumucdnd- (AV.),
yuyujdnd-, yemdnd- { Yytim-), rardnd-, rdraksand-, rdrahdnd- {ramh- 'hasten'),
1. vdvasdnd- {vasriricdnd-, rurucdnd-, rebkdnd- (AV.), kbhdnd- {Y^dbh-),
'desire'), 2. vdvasand- {vds- 'bellow'), i. vdvasdnd- {vas- 'wear'), 2. vdvasdnd{vas- 'dwell'), 3. vdvasdnd- {vas- 'aim'), vdvrdhdnd-, vdvrsdnd-, vivydnd- {Yvyd-),
s'as'amdnd-", sas'aydnd-'^* {st- 'lie'), sas'dnd- {s'd- 'sharpen', AV.), sasramdnd-.

1 There
from \tf-.

also occurs the

weak stem

iatarus-,

to

be read sasanvams- (cp. the f. sasanusTArnold, Vedic metre p. 1442.

With strong radical vowel and reversion

in B.); see

9
With strong stem instead of weak.
Given under dra- 'run' in the AV. Index to the original guttural.
' The i may here perhaps more correctly
Verborum, but translated by WmTNEV, AV.
be regarded as a reduced form of the basic
V. 138, as from dr- 'pierce'.
2

With reversion to the original

With strong radical vowel.

The anomalous

guttural.

gen. sing, with an addi-

vowel, as in dadi-,
11 The a is not

tasthi- etc.

syncopated in kam- or

mm-.

12 Doubtfully assigned by Whitney, Roots,

reduplicative syllable, va-vavrus-as
appears once (l. 1735); cp. ZDMG. 22, 605. to the reduplicating class.
13 More frequently with the intensive accent
7 There occurs once(lv.2'7) the anomalous
vavrdkdntas iutujana-.
pres. suffix
participle with
14 With the double irregularity of strong
(Grassmann, Aorist).
8 From san- 'gain'.
The metre seems radical syllable and reduplication with a.

tional

almost invariably to

require this participle

364

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

sUriyand-

'prevail'),

(sad-

is.sadana-''

Vedic Grammar.

4.

{sri-

'resort'),

susucand-,

sshijajia-',

stistwana-i, sasrjand-, sasrand-^, sasvafand-, sasahafid-^, sismiySnd-, sisvidand-,

susupatid-

Ysvap-), susvand- (su-

sehand-

'press'),

Y ^o-^-)

Pluperfect.

Abhandlungen der konigl. Gesellschaft

Benfey, Vollstandige Grammatik p. 353.
Delbruck, Verbum 419.
Avery,
154.
der Wissenschaften zu Gottingen 75, p. 151
Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar 817 820.
Verb-Inflection 253.

494, This tense, which is a pluperfect in form but not in meaning, is

an augmented preterite made from the perfect stem. As in the perfect, the
strong stem is used in the singular active, the weak elsewhere. The endings
are the secondary ones; in the 3. pi. -ur always appears in the active and
-Iran in the middle. There is some difficulty in distinguishing this tense from
the imperfect of the reduplicating class and from the reduplicating aorist*.

forms may usually

both tenses) by
the fact that the verb in question is not otherwise conjugated according to the
reduplicating present class. On the other hand, the sense helps to distinguish
the pluperfect from the aorist, when the reduplication would be identical in
both tenses. With the aid of these criteria some sixty forms may be classed
as belonging to the pluperfect.
The augment is, as in other past tenses,

Though

its

sense

is

the

same

as that of the imperfect,

its

be distinguished (when the reduplication would be identical

dropped

in

several

The

instances.

and

-s

of the

-t

2. 3.

in

sing,

are in

some

forms preserved by an interposed -i- (as in the aorist). Several transfer forms
according to the a- conjugation are met with in this tense.
Sing. r. acacaksam, ajagrabkam, atustavam; dpiprayam^
495. Active.
(TS. V. I. ii3; VS. XXIX. 7); cakaram, ciketam {Y cit-), Jagrabkam (AV.).
dj'agan^
2.
dtyes^ (v. 2*); cakdn, nandmas.
'With -7-: dbubhojis,

dvivesis; jihitnsis'^ (AV.).

dvivesis,
3.

With -/-: acucyavif^^, djagrabhit,

With thematic -a-: acakraf, acikitat and

djagan'^^, aciket iydt-^; rardn'^'^.

dvavacit,

arirecTt,

avavarit^^.

aciketat {Y<:it-), adadhavaf^^ 'ran', asusravat'^'^ (MS.),

jagrabhat (VS. xxxii. 2), tastdmbhat (i. I2i3).
Du. 2. dtatamsatam'^T amicmuktam; mumuktam.

dsasvajat;

'desire').

PI. 2. djaganta; djagantana, ajabhartana'^^

3.

dcucyavur, dsisrayur, asusravur'^'^

Middle. Sing.

DUi

2.

i.

dsusravi.

dpasprdhetham

3.

didista

avavaktam

3.

With -7-

dblbhayur (Kh.

i.

cakradat,
{vai-

acucyavTtana^^.

75).

Y dis-^.

''.

With the intensive accent.

perfect of i- 'go' {= d-iy-e-s), WHITNEY, Roots,
With the intensive accent and regarded as pluperfect of is- or es- 'move' (= d-iy-es).
by Whitney, Roots 174, and by Lindner, Roth and Grassmann as aorist of \Ts:
10 With irregular accent.
Nominalbildung p. 54, as an intensive.
" For *d-jagam-t.
3 With the intensive accent and assigned
1

by Lindner, 1. c, to the intensive, but by

Whitney, Roots 175, to the perfect.
4
Once also anomalously with -tiiana
sasrmdnd:
5 sasahana- once in RV., sehand- thrice,
from ^sah-.
6 On such
doubtful forms see specially
Delbruck, Verbum 158 (p. 135 f.).
Whitney 866 also quotes apiprayan
7
from the TS.
8 For *d-jagam-s.
9 Benfey (p. 152) and Delbruck, Verbum
p. 123 and 128, regard this form as a plu:

12

13
14

From ran- 'rejoice' (l. 1 2212).

Cp. Whitney 868 a.
From vf- 'cover'; cp. Delbruck, Verbum

p. 122''.

Whitney

regards this form as an aorist,

reduplicative vowel is that of the
pluperfect, while the sense (ix. 877) does
not seem decisive.
16 Whitney 866.
17 Transfer form.
18 With strong radical vowel.
'9 These three are, however, classed by
Whitney 861, and Roots, as aorists.
1

but

the

VII. Verb.

Aorist System.

365

PI. 3. dcakriran, ajagmiran, dpeciran{Ypac-,hN^;avavrtran; dsasrgram^.

Transfer forms according to the a- conjugation: dtitvisanta, ddadrhanta,

ddadrmhanta (TS. iv. 6. 2*), dvavasanta {vas- 'bellow'); cakrpdnta, dddhrsanta
(Av.), vavaianta {vas- 'bellow').
With ending -ranta: avavrtranta.

Periphrastic Perfect.
496. This formation made with the reduplicated perfect of kr- 'make'
which governs the ace. of a fem. substantive in -a derived from a secondary
(causative) verbal stem, is found only once in the Mantra portion of the
Vedas: gamayam cakara (AV. xviii. 2^^) 'he caused to go' (lit. 'he made a
causing to go').
In the Brahmana portions of the Samhitas (TS. MS. K.),
such periphrastic forms (made even with an aorist) are occasionally met with.^

III.

The

Aorist System.

is of frequent occurrence in the Vedas, being made from

about 450 roots. An augmented tense taking the secondary endings and
forming moods and participles, it is distinguished from the imperfect by lack
of a corresponding present 3 (e. g. 3. sing. aor. d-kar, 3. sing. imp. d-krnot,
3. sing. pres. krnoti) and by difference of meaning {dkar 'he has done', dkrnot,

497. The

aorist

'he did').

There are three

distinct types of aorist.

aorist adds the endings to the root either directly or
It thus resembles the imperfect of the rootwith the connecting vowel -a-.
This type of aorist is formed by nearly
class or of the accented d- class.
170 roots. Some nine or ten roots have, beside the regular forms of the
simple aorist, a certain number of other forms which have the appearance
of indicatives present. They seem to represent a transition to the formation
1.

The simple

of a new present stem. The most striking example is the aorist stem vocafrom which the 3. sing, vocati occurs several times.
2. The reduplicated aorist resembles the imperfect of the reduplicating
present class. It is, however, distinguishable from the latter not only in
meaning, but by a certain peculiarity of reduplication and by being nearly
always formed with a connecting -a-. This type of aorist is taken by about

85

roots.

an added -a, between

3. The sigmatic aorist inserts -s-, with or without
It is taken by rather more than 200 roots.
the root and the endings.
Thus each of the three types has one form following the analogy of the
graded conjugation, and another following that of the a- conjugation. The
sigmatic aorist has, however, further subdivisions.
Upwards of 50 roots take more than one form of the aorist. One verb,
from two of
aorist;
budh- 'wake', has even forms from five varieties of the
second, e. g.
the
of
from
one
budhd-nta;
and
d-bodk-i
e.
type,
g.
the first
bodh-i-s-a-t.
a-bUbudh-a-t; and from two of the third, e. g. d-bhut-s-i and

3 There are, however, sometimes sporadic

forms from the same stem as the aorist
beside the normal ones; thus the 2. du. pres.
a See Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar 1073 a, b
numerous regular
jAC0Br,KZ.35,S78 S87;B6htlingk,ZDMG. kr-thas occurs besides the
Syntax forms of the nu- class.
52, article 11; Delbruck, Altindische

With reversion

to

the

original

gut-

tural.

426''

f. ;

Ges.

d.

LUDWIG, Sitzungsber.
W.,

d.

kgl.

phil.-hist. Kl. Nr. xill.

Bohm.

'

366

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

Simple Aorist,

A. Root Aorist.
Grammatik 840.
Avery, Verb-Inflection 253
Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar, 299 304; Roots 222 f. AV. Index Verborum 380.

Benfey, Vollstandige

256.

498. This form of the simple aorist is taken by about 100 roots (and
by more than 80 of these in the RV.), the commonest being those with
medial a (nearly 30 in number). It is inflected in both the active and the
The root is strong in the indicative active singular, but weak
middle voice.
elsewhere. Roots ending in vowels, however, show a tendency to retain the
strong vowel throughout the indicative active except the 3. plural.
a. Roots ending in a, of which there are some eight, retain the a throughout
the indicative active except the 3. pi., where they drop it before the ending
which in these verbs is invariably -ur. In the middle indicative, the radical
vowel is weakened to ^
The forms which occur from these roots, if made from sthd- 'stand',
would be the following:
Active. Sing. i. dstham. 2. dsthas. 3. dsthat.
Du. 2. dsthstam. 3. dsthatam.
PL I. dsthama. 2. dsthata. 3. dsthitr.
Middle. Sing. 2. dsthithas. 3. dsthita.
PI. i. dsthimaJti. 3. dsthiran.
b. Roots ending in r, of which there are some ten, take Guna throughout
the indicative active except the 3. pi.
Roots ending in f and a (of which,
however, few dual and plural forms occur) show the same tendency. The
root bhu- 'be' retains its u throughout (as in the perfect), interposing v between
it and a following a.
The forms met with from kr- 'make' are the following:
Active. Sing. i. dkaram. 2. dkar. 3. dkar.
Du. 2. kartam (AV.).
PL i. dkarma. 2. dkarta. 3. dkran.
3. dkartam.
Middle. Sing. r. akri. 2. dkrthas. 3. dkrta.
PL 3. dkrata.
The forms which actually occur are the following

Indicative Active.

dkaram, dgamam'-, agam {ga- 'go'), dgrab/iam, adJiam, dfiam^

(/a- 'drink'), abhuvam^, abhedam, ai'odham (rz^i//^- 'hinder'), dsravam, astham.
(AV.) karam, gamam, gam (AV.), dam^, dham (AV.), vam^ {vr- 'cover').
499. Sing.

I.

2.

agas, adasT, dpas, apras,

^A^ith

sthas.

{vr- 'cover'),

dbhus, aires, dsthas;

gas, das,

dMs,

bhus,

loss of ending: akar, dkran (Ykrand-), dgan^, dghas, avar

aspar; dnap, avar {vr- 'cover'); kar, kran^ {ykrat?i-), bhet

{Ybhid-), vdr, vdrk^'^.

3.

{dha-

dgat,
'suck',

acet" {ci- 'collect'),

ddat^^,
AV.), dpat, aprat (AV.), dbhut,

'
As in the perfect before consonant
endings and in the past passive participle,

ddhat
dsret

{dha{Ysri-),

'put'),

adhat

dsrot,

dsthat,

126=), which though not analyzed in

the Pada text, appears to stand for a-adam
e. g. ia-sihi-se (AV.), and sthi-ta- from stha- as indicated by both sense and accent.
6 For varam formed by false analogy as
'stand'.
" This might also be the sing. I. of the a
first
person to 2. sing, vah (for *var-s)
thematic aorist agama-t etc.
appearing as if formed with the -s of 2. sing.
3
No forms of pa- 'protect' are made
7 There is
also the transfer form ados
according to this aorist, while pa- 'drink' (l. 1218), which though not analyzed in the
(present stem piba-^ has no forms from the Pada text, is shown by both sense and accent
root in the present system except pdnii (RV'.j to stand for a-adas.
8 For * a-gams.
and paihds (AV.), but perhaps even these
are rather to be taken as meant for aorist
9 For *d-nai-s from nas- 'attain', where
forms cp. p. 369, note i and p. 368, note 10. *anak would have been phonetic (54, 6).
10 For *kram-s.
4 With the usual absence of Guna in this
I' For *varj-s from yvrj-.
root; later abhUvam.
12 There is
5 There is also the transfer form adam
also the transfer form adat
;

(l.

Aorist System.

VII. Verb.

367

viii. 28); gat, ddt, dMt'', bhut, sthlt.

With loss of ending:
dkar, akran^ {Ykram-), dkran {Ykrand-), agan, aghas, dcet {cit- 'observe'),
atan, adar {dr- 'pierce'j, abhet, dbhrat ( ybhraj-), amok \\fmuc-, AV.), dmyak
{Ymyaks-), dvart^, avrk^ (AV.), dstar; anat, dvar; kar, gan, nat {Ynas'attain', AV.), bke't, vdr, vark, skan
( Y^kand-).

asraf (VS.

Du.

amuktam (Kh.

2.
agatam (AV.), dbhutam,
(AV.), datam, dhatam, spartam.

gatam

i.

12^);

kartam (AV.),

dkartam, agatam (AV.), ddhatam (VS. xx. 57), dnastam ('reach'),

3.
dpatam (VS. xxxviii. 13), abhutam; gatam (AV.), datam.
PI. I. dkarma, dganma, dgama, ddarsma {TS.iii. 2. ^*), adama^, dpama,
dbhumaT, asthama (AV.), dhema {Yhi^; dhama, bhuma (AV.).
2.
dkarta, agata (AV.), dbhuta; abhutana, dketana; karta (AV.) and
krta^ (AV.), gata (AV.), sthata (AV.).
3. dkran (Y^r-)) dksan^ iYs^'^^')! dgman, dhhuvan, avrjan, avrtan'^
(AV.), avratt, dsriyan (]//-), dsravan {AN.), asvitan, ahyan {Y hi-), asthan'^'^
(AV.); kran (AV.), ksan {Yghas-), gman, vran.
"With ending -ur:
dkramur, dgur, ddur, ddhur, apur (i. 164'), dyamur, dsthur; gur, dabhur,
diir, dhur, nrtur'^^, mandur, sthur.

Indicative Middle,
akri, ajani, ayuji, avri {vr- 'choose'), akvi ( |//5s-, AV.).
500.
2. dkrthas, agathas (VS. iii. 19), adhithas, dyukthas, dsthithas.

Sing.

3. akrta,

I.

dgata (AV.),

aprkta

adhita,

ddista,

amrta (AV.), dyukta, dvrkta (Y^Tj), avrta

('choose'

(l//.r/-),

and

dmata

(|/(Z-),

'cover'), dsrsta, askrta

(x. 1273), dsthita, dspasta (Vj/a/-), dsita {si- 'sharpen'); iyukta; arta (r- 'go'),
asta {as- 'attain'); arta {r- 'go'), krta, gurta {gur- 'greet'), gdha^^', mrta (AV.).
Du. 1. gdnvahi.
3. ad/tltam^^ {ydka-).
PI. I.
dganmahi, adimahi (TS. I. 8. 6') and adima/ii'^ (VS. ill. 58)'5,

adhimahi^'' {Ydha-), apadmahi (VS.

iv.

29),

dmanmaki, ayujmahi, dhumahi;

{Ydha-).
2. dcidhvam {ci- 'note'), dmugdhvam^ ( Y^^^c-), ayugdhvam.
With
3. akrata^^, dgmata, atnata; arata, ds'ata {as- 'attain'); yujata.
abudhran,
ddriran,
apadran,
ajusran,
agrbhran,
akrpran^T,
ending
-/an
the
d/iTmahi'^*

dyujran, az'aj-ra'*(z'aj--

1276,

(l.

'shine'),

dvisran, avrtran, dsrgran^'^, dsthiran, asprdhran.

'With ending -ram: ddrsram, dbudhram, dsrgram^^.

II.

text,

For

Also

acrtan in the text of AV.

311 see Whitney's note.
11 Transfer form probably for asthur iiom.
JP. 12, 439; IF. 5, 388;
dhai j/M- 'stand'; see
KZ. 22, 435 ; Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar
III.

for d-adai.
I

9 For agh(d)san.
10 Misprinted as

though not
appears to stand

124, V. 328) which,

analyzed in thePada

Sandhi p. 6l3.
form {J>rdii)
transfer

*asras-t: see

the

(IV. 275).

847, and his note on AV. xili. l^.

3 For *akram-i.
12 This form might be regarded as an un4 For *avart-t from vrt- 'turn'.
5 Seemingly with anomalously weak root augmented perfect.
13 For gh{d)s-ia, from yghas-; cp. p. S6> 3But the form really stands by
for *avri-t.
14 With t for i; cp. BrugmANN, Grundriss
haplology for the 3. sing. mid. avrkta afavrk
iamah (AV. XIII. 29) 'he has wasted away 2, p.896; v.Negelein 6'; Oi,denberg,ZDMG.
:

the darkness':

5476

see

Wackernagel, KZ.

40,

63, 297.

544

adama (v. 30' 5), which though

not analyzed in the Pada text, must stand
That

is,

in

for a-addma.
7

arudhma

is

(I.

15

From

16

There

da- 'share'.
is also the transfer

form

k7-ania

I4i^j.

17 Cp. Bloomfield, Johns Hopkins Uniquoted in Whitney's Roots versity Circular, Dec. 1906, p. 10.

as occurring in the
8 Emendation for

MS. [I. 65; 94, 6].

kriam (AV. Xix. 44^)-

18

Cp. p. 327, note

19

With reversion

7.

to the original guttural.

368

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

Passive Indicative of the Root Aorist.

Delbrhck, Verbum

S45

Roots 240.
390; HiRT, IF. 17, 64 f.

842

l8i^.

V.

Avery, Verb-Inflection 275. Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar

Cp. Osthoff, IF. 3,
Negelein, Zur Sprachgeschichte 4.

501. There is a peculiar middle form, made from about 45 roots in the
Samhitas (40 of them occurring in the E.V.), which is used with a predominantly passive meaning'. When it is formed from verbs with a neuter signification, like gam- 'go', the sense remains unaltered (as in the past passive
participle). It is a 3. sing, indicative, in which the augmented root takes the
ending-?. This -i, otherwise the ending of the i. sing, middle, appears to be
used in the regular 3. sing, perfect middle (e. g. dadhe, 1. and 3. sing.), and
sometimes in the 3. sing, present middle (e. g. sdye, i. and 3. sing.). The
characteristic feature of this passive form is the strengthening of the
root as compared with other middle forms, e. g. dkari beside akri (i. sing.

mid.)^
a. A prosodically short medial i, u or r takes Guna, while a is normally
lengthened; a final i, u or r takes Vrddhi, while final a interposes aj before
The accent in unaugmented forms is always on the root. The
the ending.
forms actually occurring are: Sing. 3. dkari, agSmi, dceti, dcchedi, djani^,
dj'nayi, dtapi, ddarsi, ddhayi, dpadi (AV.), dpayi ('drink'), aprayi (AV. VS.),
dbodhi, dbkrSji, amayi {^va.tasu.x&'), dmodi, dmyaksi, dyatni, i2>'az'2''(VS.xxviii. 15),
dyoji, dradhi, aroci, avahi (Kh. v. 153), avaci, dvari ('cover'), avedi ('find'),
ceti,
dsoci, dsrayi (Ys'ri-), dsarji, dsadi, dsavi (jAj'a:^-), dstdri, dstavi, dhdvi;
jdnijani, tari, darsi, dayi{^g\Y&'),ddyi{%m.&!), dhdyi, pddi, ve'di ('find'), sadi^.
Used injunctively: ghosi, ceti, chedi, tari, dhdyi, bhari, bhedi (VS. xi. 64),
mod (A v.), yoji, reci, rod, vandi, varhi, vaci, samsi, sari, sesi {sis- 'leave', AV.),

srdvi, sarji, sadi, hayi {ha- 'leave', AV.); also the

unique form jaray&yi

him be embraced', from the secondary stem jara-ya-

'let

'play the lover'.

Root Aorist Subjunctive.

2. kdrasi; kdras,
502. Active. Sing. I. kdrani,gamani,gani, bhuvSni.
gamas, gSs^, tdrdas, das, d/ids, pdrcas, pAs (iv. 20'* 'drink'), prds, bhi'ivasT
yamas, vdras ('choose'), sdsas, sthds.

3. karaii,

varjati,

sthdti;

darsati (AV.), ddti, dhati, padsti^, bhidati, radhati,

kdrat, gdmat, garat {gr- 'swallow', AV.), gat, Josat, ddt, dkdt,

fosati,

padat^ (AV.), rndtkaf) {KY.vii.

vdrtat, srdvat,

^o^),

yamat, yodhat, radkat, vdrat {'choose'),

sdghat, sat, sthat, spdrat.

Without Guna;

fdhat, bhuvat,

sri'wat (RV'.).

Du.
sravathas.

2.

karathas, gamathas, darsathas, pathds'^ (AV. vii. 29'), bhuthds'^'^,

3. karatas, gamatas, bhutas''^, srdvatas, sthdtas.

In one or two passages this form seems from roots ending

have a transitive meaning; cp. Whitney, from injunctives.

to

Sanskrit
2 Cp.

Grammar 845

(end).

Brugmann, Grundriss 2, 1054, 3.

3 This augmented form always occurs in
the RV. with short radical vowel, beside
the unaugmented jani as well as jani.

From yu- 'separate'.

The form svani (vi. 46M) may be

in 5 cannot

Formed without Guna

be distinguished
as

in

the

ind.

and perfect.
8 With double modal sign -a-.
9 This form has a subjunctive sense ('might
shake'); it might otherwise be an injunctive
aor.

of the a- aorist.
10 Assigned by Whitney, Roots, to the
the
3. sing, passive aorist (BR. and doubtfully present of the root class.
Ji Both bhuthas (vi.675) and bkutas (x.27')
Whitney, Roots 201), but Grassmann, s. v.
svani, regards it as a neut. substantive in -i. seem to be meant for subjunctives formed
Cp. Neisser, BB. 30, 305 ff,
anomalously without mood sign, instead of
6 The 2. 3. sing, with secondary endings *bhuvathas and *bhuvatas.
4
5

Vll. Verb.

Aorist System.

369

kdrama, gamdma, gama, dJiama, radhama.

3. karanti, gdmanti,
gdman, garaji, ddrsan, bhuvaii, yaman.
Middle. Sing. 2. kdrase, josase {KSi:).
3. idhate'' (RV.), kdrate,
bkojate, yojate, vdrjate, stdrate.
Du. 2. dhethe^, dhaithe.
PI. i. kdramahe,
gdmamafiai, dhamahe, manatnahe (VS. iv. 1 1), staramahe.
3. yavanta {yuPI.

panti'^

I.

II'*); kdran,

(11.

'separate').

Root Aorist Injunctive.

i. karam (AV.), gam,
dham

Sing.
503. Active.
ihojam, yojam, sthani.
1. jes,

ending:

thus, bhes

kar (TS.

i.

bkuvam,

With ending

Sing.

20),

(/Mr-, VS. 1.23 etc.; TS.iv. 5. 10').

With loss of
dhak {dagh- 'reach'}, bhet {ybkid-), rok {Vruj-,

vark, skdn ( Y^kand-), stan'-.

PI. I. gama, chedma^, daghma,

Middle.

i.

3. 7^),

VS.), var ('cover'), vark {YvrJ-), star, spar.

3. bkat, sret, ut-thdt (^ stha-, Kh.ii. ii^).
(VS. XXVII. 31; TS. V. 6. I*), dhak {Ydagk-),

3. bhuvan, vrdn.

(VS.

With

loss of ending: gan

nak and naf

(nas- 'attain'), vdr,

homa^

bhuma, bhema^,

{ku-

'call';.

-ur: kramur, gur, dabhur, dur, dhiir, sthur.

ndmsi {naminas- 'attain').

2. dhrthas (AV.),
mrthas {mr- 'die'), mrsthas {Y^r?-), rikthas
iYric-), vikthas {Yvij-, VS. 1.23).
3. arta (Yr-), asta {as- 'attain'), vukta
(TS.iv. 3. 1 1*), vikta iy^'V'-), WtC' iw- 'choose').
PI. i. dhimahi^ (j/'a'/Sa-).
nutth&s,

i.

bhitthas (VS. xi. 68),

3. asata (SA. xii.

9).

Root Aorist Optative.

504. Active. Sing. I. asydm {as- 'attain'), rdhyam (AV.), deyamT, dheyam^,
vrjyam, sakyam.
2. avyas, asyas, rdhyas, gamyas, jneyas, bhuyds, mrdhyas,
ssahyas.
3. bhuyat^ (AV.).
Du. I. yujyava.
3. yujydtam.
PI. I. asydma, rdhydma, kriyama, bhuydma, vrjydma, sahydma"^, stheyamaT
3. asyur {as- 'attain'), dheyur, sahyur.
Middle. Sing. i. asiya, muriya {mr- 'die', AV.).
3. arita {Yr-)

uhita-^ {Yva/i-), vurita {vr- 'choose').

Du. 2. rdhathe.
PI. I.
asimdhi,
nastmahi ('reach'),
idhimahi, rdhimdhi,

prcTmahi, mudimahi, yajnimahi, simahi^'^

nasTmahi,

{sa- 'bind').

aorist are common in the active, being

twenty roots in the Samhitas.
Active. Sing. I. apyasam'^^ {KK.y.Ti.^i) rdkyasam (VS.viii.g), jivydsam
(AV. VS.), pr/y3sam ^3 {AY.), bhuydsam, bhraj'yasam {KY.), bhriyasam (yS.ii.?,),
radhyasam (VS. xxxvii. 3), vadhyasam (VS. AV.), srUyasam (AV.).
3. avyas,
asyas ('reach'), rdhyas, gamyds, daghyas, peyas {^Arvak!), bhuyds, yamyas, yuyas'^^

a.

Precative forms of the root

made from about

yzi-

'separate'), vrjyas, sruyas, sahyas.

1
Assigned by WHITNEY, Roots, to the
present of the root class.
2 With weak and unaccented root.
3 A transfer form for *dhdthe.
t This form may,
however, perhaps preferably be classed as an imperfect injunctive
along with stanihi as pres. impv., as in
Whitney's Roots. These are the only forms
of the simple verb beside the aor. astamt (AV.).
5 With strong radical vowel.
6 Probably to be explained as the injunctive corresponding to the augmented
it
indicative adhimahi (see 500, note '+);
might, however, be the I. pi. opt. mid. with
Joss of a before the modal -i-.

Inclo-arische Fhilologie.

I.

4.

For da-iyam,

The RV. has no forms

in -yai,

but

only

^ha-iyam, stha-iydma.

the

precatives in -yds
9

With

of the

3. sing,

somewhat numerous

'-yas-t.

irregular

strong radical

vowel,

Padapatha sahydma; cp. RPr. IX. 30.

Aor. opt. in Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar
but pres. opt. in 'Roots' 157.
11 With loss of d before the modal -J-.
12 Accented apydsam in the ed. (B. I.).
10

837

13

this

b,

Whitney,- in AV. in.

form to bhriydsam
:

54,

see

would emend
his note on

that passage.
14

According

to

Avery

241,

opt.

24

3. sing. pres.

370

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

PL i. rdhySsma {KY .), kriyasma, bhuyasma

Du. 2. bhuyastam (VS. 11. 7).
2. bhuyasta"- (TS. in. 2. 5*).
(AV. VS.), radhyasma (AV.).
Middle. Sing. 3. padistd, mucista'.

Root Aorist Imperative,

The

505.

active forms of this

mood

are fairly numerous,

occurring

in

and 3. persons; but middle forms occur in the 2. pers. only, ten in
the sing, and two in the pi. In the 2. persons active of all numbers, several
forms irregularly strengthen the root, which is then nearly always accented.
Active. Sing. 2. krdhi, gadhi, bodhii, yandhi ( Yycn-), yodki^, randhi
{=rand-dhi; Yrandh-), viddhi {Yvis-, AV.), vrdhi 'cover', sagdhi {Ysak-),
srudhi, sprdhi.
With ending -hi: gahi, pahi (AV.), mahi 'measure',.
the

all

2.

sahi 'bind'.
3. gantu, datu, dhatu, patu (AV.), bhfitu, sroiu, sotu (su- 'press').
Du. 2. kartam'^ (AV.) and krtdtn, gatdm axid gantdm^, jitam^ datam,
dhaktam {Y dagh-), dkatam, patam{KY.), b/iutdm, bhrtam {YS.xi. 2,o),yantdm^^
riktam {Yric-), varktam^ iYwJ-), vartam'" {vr- 'cover'), volkdm^, saktam,

srutdm, sitam

'bind'),

(si-

sutdm, sihatam, sprtam.

gantam^ (VS. ix. 19), ghdstam (VS. xxi. 43), dataj?i, patam, volhdm^.
PI. 2. kdrtai and krta, gata and gdntaT gatd, data, d/idta^, pata (AV.)^
bhutd, ydnta^, varta'^ (Yw^-), sasta ( l/"/azj--), sruta and sr6ta'^, sota^ {Y^u-),
sthata, heta^ (Y ^^')With ending -tana: kdrtana^, gdntana^, gatana,
dkatana, dhetana^^, patana (AV.), bkutana, yantana^, sotana {Ysu-).
gdmantu, dantu (da- 'cut', AV. xii. 3^), dhantu, pantu (AV.)j
3.
3.

sruvantu.

Middle.

Sing.

dhisvd (Ydhd-), yuksvd;

krsvd,

2.

mdtsva, ydksva,
unaccented disva (da-

root:

rdsva,
'give',

vdmsva

VS. xxxviii.

vodhvam '^

PI. 2. krdkvam,

(van- 'win'),

masva

3),

accented on the

sdksva'^^

(i.

j/jac-);

42',

'measure'.

(VS.).

Root Aorist Participle.

506. Of

the active form of the participle of the root aorist few examples

But the middle

occur.

with in the

RV.

form

is

The accent here

common,

nearly forty examples being met

on the final syllable of the

generally rests

but in several examples it is on the radical syllable.

rdhdnt-, krdnt-, gmdnt-, citdfit-, psni-, bhiddnt-, sthdnt-; also
dyutdnt-^* as first member of a compound.
Middle, arand-, idhand-, urand- 'choosing', I'lhana- (Yvah-), krand-'^^^
citana-, cydvana-, jusand-, trsand-, drsand- and dfsana-, dyutand- and dyutana-,
dAuvand- (TS.i'v./\..i2i), nidand-, pisand-, prcand-, prathand-, bud/iand; b/iiyand-,
manand-, mandand-, (vi-)mdna- (TS. iv. 6. 32), yatand- and ydtana-, yujand-^
suffix -ana,

Active,

AV.

xvffl. 486

bhiiyaslha;

see

has

corrupt

the

Whitney's

note

reading
on that

passage.
the

I. pi.

beside
ind. agrabhtsma according to the
is

2. pi. injv.

From both

bttdh-

'awake'

RFr.

bhii-

*bhu-dhi and
instead of *bud-

'be' for

for *b6d-dhi

dhi.

(vi. 49^') accented gantd.

the accent of strong forms.

For ziart-ta (like Tjarti for

Always sruid or iroia;
VII.

vari-ti).

also

sold

(cp,

14 f.).

'With e for a.
sdksva (III. 377) is from ysah-, being an
s- aor. form,
for *sah-s-sva beside I. sing,,
mid. asdksi and sdksi,
12

For *ySd-dhi instead of *yuddhi.

13

With strong

'4

For vah-iam, vah-iam through *vazh-tam,

^vazh-tam.

Once
With

"

aorist.

is-

The form graihtsta

root.

For vah-dhvam through *vazh-dhvam.

In

dyuiad-ydman-

track'.
15

Cp. BB. 20, 89,

'having

shining-

VII. Verb.

rucand-,

ruhana-,

and sumbhana-,
srjand-,

vdsana- 'dwelling',

svitand-,

sjirdhand-,

-hrayana-'!'

Aorist System.

sacand-,

371

vrand- 'covering',

vipand-,

and svand- (SV.)

As members of compounds only,

hiySnd-^.

suvand-'^

subhand-

(su- 'press'),

-cetana-

and

occur.

B.

a- Aorist.

Avery, Verb-Inflection 256 f.

Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar p. 305308; Roots 224
AV. Index Verborum 380.
v. Negelein, Zur Sprachgeschichte 3234.

507. This form of the simple aorist is taken by nearly 60 roots, chiefly
by such as contain a medial vowel. In the RV. less than half as many verbs
form the a- aorist as form the root-aorist and it is more frequent in the AV.
than in the RV. The root generally appears in the weak form, the stem
being made with an added -a, which in unaugmented forms is normally
accented.
This form of the aorist therefore resembles an imperfect of the
d- class.
Middle forms are of rare occurrence in this aorist.
;

a.

radical

certain

vowel of

number of

irregularities occur in the formation of

tlie

stem.

The

i.

reduced to /*, e. g. sisat^ (iv. 2').

2. Some half dozen
roots containing a medial a followed by a nasal, drop the nasal; these are krand- 'cry
out', tarns- 'shake', dhvams- 'scatter', bhrams- 'fall', randh- 'make subject', srams- 'fall'.
3. On the other hand r- 'go' and sf- 'flow' take Guna and accent the radical syllable,
as dranta (unaugmented 3. pi.) and sarat.
4. Several roots form transfer stems from
the root aorist.
Some half dozen do this by reducing a final radical a to a. This
ias- 'order' is

regularly the case in khya- 'see', vya- ,'envelope', hva- 'call'; e. g. akhyat, dvyat,
ahvat; but from da- 'give', dha- 'put', and stha- 'stand', only occasional transfer forms
occur; thus adat; adhat [SV.) and dkai; dsihai [AN^.). On the other hand, occasional
transfer forms are made from kr- 'make', and gam- 'go', in which the radical syllable
remains strong; e. g. dkarat (AV.) and dgamat.
is

Indicative.

508.

The forms of

would be as
Active. Sing.

'find',

3.

the indicative actually occurring,

follows:
1.

dvidam. z.dvidas.

t,-

dvidan.

Middle.

Sing.

dvide.

i.

The forms which

3.

dvidata.

dvidat.

PI.

i.

if

made from

V\.i. dvidama.

vidamahi.

3.

2.

vid-

dvidata.

dvidanta.

actually occur are the following:

Active. Sing. i. dkhyam, agrbham (Kh. iii. 155), dtrfam (AV. TS.),
airham (AV.), anijam (AV.), dmucam (AV.), druham (TS. VS. AV.), dvidam,
dvrdham (Kh. iv. 8^), asakam (VS. ii. 28), dsanatn, dsaram, ahyam^ {V hi-,
AV.), ahvam (AV.); dpam (AV.); aram, vidam.
2. dkaras (AV.), dkrtas {krt- 'cut'), dkhyas (TS. AV.), druhas, dvidas, asadas
(TS. VS. AV.), dsaras; dfas; kdras,guhas, drukas, bMvasT, mucas {KV.),vidds.
3. dkarat^ (AV.), akramat (AV.), dkhyat, dgamat^ (AV.), dgrdhat, acchidat
(AV.), atanat, dtasat{YS. AV.), adrpaP (AV.), adhaf {Ydha-, SV.), dmucat.
1 Always written thus in the RV., but to be
follow the root-aorist (dhema, ahyan, etc.),
this is probably to be regarded as a transfer
pronounced svdna-.
2 Hardly any of these participles occur form, since the regular form according to
rucdnd- the root aorist ought to be *dkayam.
any of the other Sainhitas
in
:

(VS. xn.

l),

ruhdna- (TS.

IV. I. 2*),

svdna-

transfer

form,

bhuva-s,

following

from a stem bhuva-.

8 Transfers from the root aorist, following
3 In d-cetana- 'thoughtless', and a-hrayanathe 1. sing, dkar-am, dgam-am.
'bold'.
9 Emendation in AV. XX. 136^.
4 As in the weak forms of the present
10 Transfer
from the root aorist for
stem.
5 At the same time accenting the radical a-dMi.

bhuv-am as

(SV.).

if

syllable.
f>

Though the

other

forms

from yU24*

372

Allgemeinks und Sprache.

I.

drudat

{KS[?i,

4.

Vedic Grammar.

arudhat, drukat, dvidat, avrtat {KM.), avrdhat, avyat^ iV^y^-)>

ahicat, dsramat{AM.), dsadai, dsanat, dsarat, dsicat{TS. 111.2. ?>^),

dhvat^; ddat' {Vda-), apat, arat, astkafi (AVK); trsat (AV.),
(AV.),
dsrpat
dhaf- {)fdha-), bhuvat\ viddt, sadat {hSI), sdnat, sdrat.

ds'a/eat (AY.),

PI.

(AV.

I.

V. 1 9).

aruhama (VS.

viii.

dvidama,

52),

dhvama;

dsanama,

vfdhama^

dvyata'; arata.

2.

akhyan, akraman (AV.), agaman (AV.), acchidan (AV.), ddrsan (TS.

arudkan (AV.), druhan, dvidan, avrjan, avrdhan (VS. xxxiii. 60),
asakan (AV.), dsadan, asanan, asaran, asican; ipan, arafi, astkan^ {AY .-xm. i5);
khydn, dhvasdn^, viddn, sadan.
3. akhyata, dvyata''; arata; vyata'.
Middle. Sing. i. dhve; hve (AV.).
PI. I. Hsamahi {yias-).
3. avidanta (AV.), ahvanta; dranta, krdnta''.
3.

IV. 5. i^),

Aorist Subjunctive.

a-

The

509.

of

forms

mood

this

the active.

Active. Sing.

Du.
PI.

I.
I.

2.

viddsi; vidds.

ahnost restricted to

and

rare

are

3. mucati; vidat.

gamatas (AV. x. 7^^).

2. gamatha (AV.),
arama; radhama, risama, sadama.
ruhdva.

2. vidathas.

3.

risatha,

vidatha; risathana.

Middle. Sing.
PI.

I.

3. mucate, sisstai^ (sis- 'leave',

sisamahe'i

(AV.

AV.

312).

11.

SV.).

a- Aorist Injunctive.

Active. Sing. i. aram, kkyam, ddrsain, radkam, risam, ruhdm,

510.
vidatn, sanam.
2. kradas, krudhas (AV.), khyds, guhas, grdhas (AV. VS.), druhas (AV.),
mucds, vidas, risas (VS.xi.68; TS.iv.1.9^), sisas ('leave'), sadas, srpas (AV.).
3. ksudhat (A v.), khyat, grdhat (AV.), tanat, tamat, trsat (AV.), dasat,
dhrsdt (Kh.iv. i), bhrasat, }nucat, risat, rudhat, ri'ihaf", viddt, sisat^'^, sramat,
srisat, sriivat^'', sadat, sdnat'', srpat (AV.), sridhat.
PI. 3, aran, khyan, gdman (VS. xvii. 78), trpdn, trsan (VS.vi. 31), drsan,

druhan, risan, vidan, sakan (AV.).

Middle. Sing. 3. vidata (AV.
PI.

I.

xiii. 23^).

aramahi (AV.); grhamahi.

3.

aranta,

budhdnta, tnrsanta,

viddtita.

a-

Aorist Optative.

This mood is rare and confined to the active in the RV., though
three or four middle forms occur in the later Sarnhitas.
Active. Sing. i. apeyam'^^ (AV.), gameyam, drseyam, bhideyam (AV.),
511.

Transfer form.

transfer

form

see p. 366, note

See p. 327, note '.

^ prati dhat (iv. 27^).

i^.

With accent on

From

the radical syllable.

with accent on the

sas- 'order',

root.

'
11

WHlTNEy, note on AV.

stead of dvim vrdkatna

dvTvj'dhama.

v. l',

read

12 It is hard to decide whether this form,

which occurs only once (l. 127^) beside the
Paipp.) regular srdvat, should be classed here as an
injunctive of the a- aorist, or as an irregular

would

(with.

in-

6 A transfer form from ystha- ; cp. Whitney's note on AV. XIII. I^.
7 With loss of medial nasal, from ydAvams-.
8 This form is probably a corrupt reading
for the passive sisyaiai see WfflTNEY's note
:

on AV. II. SI-'.

9 For sisamahi of RV.

VIII. 241.

subjunctive of the root-class following the

analogy of hhiivat (cp. 502).
13 In prdpeyam (AV. III. 20^), analyzed in
the Pada text asprd dpeyam; cp. Whitney's
note on the passage.

VII. Verb.

Aorist System.

373

videyam^ (AV.), sdkeyam

(Kh.iv.S't), saneyam.
2. games (VS.).
3. rdhet
(AV.), garnet, yamet"- (AV.), videt, sanet, se(i (VS. ix.
5, 6).
PI. I. asema ('attain'), rdheina (AV.), gamema, drsema (AV.), pusema,
bhujema, ruhema, videma (AV.), sakima, sadema, sanema and sdnema, srasema^.
Middle. Sing. i. videya (VS. iv. 23).
PI. i. gamemahi. There is also
one precative form: 3. sing, videsta (AV.) 'may she find'.

a- Aorist Imperative.

mood

512. This

is

also of rare occurrence

and

is

restricted to the active,

excepting two middle plural forms.

Active. Sing.

2.

sada, sdna^, sdra.

kara^ (RV'.), bhuja (TS.

iv. 5. it),

muca, ruha (AV.),

3. sadatu.

Du.

2. aratam, karatanP (RV.), khyatam, ruhdtam, vidatam, sddatam.

aratam, karatam *, sadatam.

3.

PI. 2. khydta, sadata; sadatana.

3. sadantu.
Middle. PI. 2. mucadhvam.
3. sadantam (AV.).

a- Aorist Participle.
There are hardly more than a dozen certain examples of the

a.

parti-

ciple of this aorist.

Active,
guhdnt-

trpdnt-, dhrsdni-, rlsant- or rUant-^, vrdhdnt-, sisdnt- (sas- 'order'),

',
sdnant- ^; and as first member of compounds
krtdnt-,

sddant-

sncdnt-,
,

viddnt-

'
'

Middle, guhdmdna-, dhrsdmana-, firtdmana-, sucdmana-; possibly also

ddsamana-^'. Probably three participles in -ana are to be regarded as belonging
to this aorist: dhrsand- (AV.), vrdhand-, sridkSjid-.
2.

Delbruck, Verbum 143

Grammar 856 873; Roots

Zur Sprachgeschichte 68 f.

Reduplicated Aorist.

Avery, Verb-Inflection 266 268. Whitney, Sanskrit

224; Atharvaveda, Index Verborum 380.
Negelein,
f.

v.

513. This type of aorist is formed from nearly 90 verbs in the Sarnhitas.
it has come to be associated with the secondary conjugation in -dya

Though

not in form (with a few slight exceptions) connected with

made directly from the root. It is, however, in sense
connected with the causative, inasmuch as it has a causative meaning
when the corresponding verb in -aya has that meaning. As an augmented
reduplicated form, it has affinities with the imperfect of the reduplicating
present class and with the pluperfect. It may, however, be distinguished from
the imperfect by the long reduplicative vowel, by the thematic -a- which
nearly always appears in the stem, and often by the meaning; and from the
(causative),

that

stem,

it

is

being

Emendation

in

AV.XIX.42

see Whitney's note.

2
probable conjecture for
xvill. 2 3.

V.

From

sa- 'gain',

as

Negelein 34.
With loss of the

if

for vide yam;

yame

in

AV.

sa- [sa-tt).

radical nasal,

and

transfer from the root aorist (otherwise krdhi). Avery 243 adds g-aviaij).
6 With accent on the root instead of the
14. 19. 33-

transfer

form

from the root

aorist

kj-tarri).

transfer form from the root aorist.

Once with

the short, six times with the

Cp. long vowel in the Samhita text (Pp. always t)
see APr. 583, 584, 588.
30 With accent on the root as also risantfrom

second syllable; always sdnd:

ysrams;
5

(otherwise

cp. RPr. vii.

risant-.

11

In kridd-vasu- 'disclosing wealth', ^a^ai/avadya- 'concealing faults', vidad-vasu- 'winning wealth'.

12 As occurring beside the a- aorist injunctive form dasat (510).

374

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

pluperfect by difference of reduplication

4.

when

Vedic Grammar.
the root contains a or

r,

and

by meaning.

often

a. The characteristic feature of this aorist is the almost invariable

quantitative sequence of a long reduplicative and a short radical vowel
(_o). The vowels a, f, /', as well as ?, are reduplicated with i^, which (unless
it becomes long by position) is lengthened if the radical vowel is (or is made)
prosodically short; e. g. d-jijan-a-t from jan- 'beget'; d-vTvrdh-a-t from vrdh'grow', but ciksip-a-s from ksip- 'throw'.
In order to bring about this trochaic rhythm, the radical vowel has to be
shortened or the nasal dropped in the roots vas- 'bellow', sadh- 'succeed',
hid- 'be hostile', krand- 'cry out', jambh- 'crush', randh- 'subject', syand- 'flow',
srams- 'fall' ; e. g. avTvasat, acikradat. In jihvaratam (TS.) the reduplicative
vowel, being already long by position, is unnecessarily lengthened.
1.
In a few forms the reduplicative vowel is, contrary to the prevailing rhythmic

jigrtam sxii. jigrta (beside djlgar); didhrtam and ririsas (beside ririsas).
the other hand, in the isolated injunctive form didipas^, the radical vowel remains
long, and in dmTmet both the reduplicative and the radical syllable are long (beside
nilmayat with the regular rhythm).
2. The p of the causative stems jna-paya-, stha-paya-, ha-paya, ar-faya- (.r- 'go'), is
retained in the aorist, the radical vowel being at the same time reduced to i in the first
three: ajijnipaHJ^S.), dtisthifat, jihipas; the s of the causative stem bhJsaya- is also retained:
rule, left short:

On

blbhis-as (TS.).

In the aorist formed

3. The root dyut- 'shine', reduplicates with i: adidyutat''.
from the causative stem arpaya-, the reduplicative 2 appears after, instead of before, the
radical vowel, doubtless owing to the difficulty caused by the initial a and the augment:
arp-i-p-am (AV.).
The initial a also led to the anomaly of reduplicating the whole of
the root am 'injure', and then prefixing the augment dm-am-at.
and
4. There are three anomalous aorists formed from nas- 'be lost', pat- 'fall',
vac- 'speak', in which besides an irregular reduplicative vowel, the radical a is syncopated
[a-pap-t-at, d-ne-s-an) or contracted {d-voc-af). As beside the former two the regular reduplicated aorists apipatai and anlnasat occur, and as all three have the regular reduplicative
vowel a of the perfect 5, they appear to have been originally pluperfects which before being
shortened had the form of *d-papai-at^, *d-nanas-at, *d-vavac-ai^. But they all came to
be regarded as aorists. This is imdoubted in the case of dvocat owing to its numerous
mood forms; dpaptat, moreover, has an imperative form beside it; and dnesan (TS VS.)
has a distinctly aoristic meaning.
:

The reduplicated aorist in the great majority of forms makes its

with a thematic -a-. Before this, a final r regularly, and r and u

b.

stems

two or three forms, take Guna;

e. g. adidhar-a-t ( Ydkr-), bibhay-a-t ( ybkl-),

dudrdv-a-t ( dru-).
The inflexion of this aorist stem is
like that of an imperfect of the a- conjugation.
c.
About a dozen roots, however, have occasional forms from stems
made without thematic -a-, the inflexion then being like that of an imperfect of the reduplicating class.
These roots are ma- 'bellow'; sri- 'resort';
tu- 'be strong', dru- 'run', dhu- 'shake', nu- 'praise', pu- 'cleanse', yu- 'separate',

in

cucyav-a-t

( j/Vj'w-),

In yklp-,

the

only

root

in

which

it

occurs.
2 In the reduplicating present class
f is
almost invariably, and a predominantly, reduplicated with z (457).
3 In form this might be a pluperfect.
A
similar reversal Of the ordinary rhythm appears
in the three forms dtaiamsatatii (i. I20'),
adadhdvat (ix. 877), vavdksat (SV. I. I, 2, 2, 3
var. lect. for vavdksa of RV. X. 115') each
occurring once, but owing to the reduplicative vowel they should rather be accounted
pluperfects.
Cp. p. 364, note 'S.
4 See 514, note '.

5 That is, nes- for nanas-, on the analogy

of sed- for *sazd- in the perfect: this form
of contraction would be unique in an original

aorist.
6 Like a-sasvaj-at; becoming a-papi-at like
a-cakr-ai beside cakar-am.
7 The cause of
may be due to

the anomalous contraction

the awkwardness of combining the augment with the reduced reduplicative syllable a- of the perfect (*a-uvac-a().
The accentuation of the augment would also
favour the second syllable taking Samprasarana: d-va-uc-at.

VII. Verb.

Aorist System.

375

su- 'generate', srz(- 'flow'; gr- 'waken', Mr- 'hold'; svap- 'sleep'; e.
g. asis're-f
(TS.), ddudro-t, djTgar, sisvap.
Beside forms made thus, occur others made
from several of these roots with the thematic -a-; and those made from the
roots ending in u (the majority), cannot be distinguished in form from
plu-

The number

perfects.

classed as aorists
d.

but

no

of forms

of

this

type which

therefore very small.

the indicative all the moods

can with certainty be

is

Besides
participial

form

are represented in this aorist,

has been found.

Reduplicated Aorist Indicative.

The forms actually occurring would,

514.
with thematic -a-, be the following:
Active.

Sing. i. djTjanam.

djijanama.

PI. I.

Middle.

2.

2.

djTjanata.

djijanas.
3.

if

3. djijanat.

made from

Du.

2.

jan- 'beget'

ajtjanatam.

djijanan.

Sing. 3. djijanata.
PI. 2. djijanadhvam.
3. djjjananta.
actually occurring (including those made without thematic -a-) are:

The forms
Active.

Sing.

i. acikrsam, ajigamam (TS. VS. AV.), ajijabham (AV.),

adudusam (AV.), aninasam, apiparam (pr- 'pass', AV.),
dmimadam (AV.), avocam, dsisamam (Jam- 'be quiet', AV.); arpipam (AV.),

atisthipam

(AV.),

2. acikradas, djijanas,

dtisthipas,

dtitaras (AV.), atitrpas (AV.), aninasas

('be lost', AV.), apiparas (AV.),

(AV.),

dvivrdhas (AV.),

abubhuvas (AV.), dmimadas (AV.), arurupa^

dnsamas (AV.); jihvaras {KSf.), didyutas\ rurupas

Mucas

(TS. iv. i. 43), sisvapas.

Without thematic -a-: tutos'',
ajTgar^ {gr- 'swallow'), djigar [gr- 'waken'); didhar, sisvap.
3. acikradat, aciklpat (AV.), acicarat (AV.), dcukrudhat, acucyavaf- (K.),
ajijnipat i!Y'Ss.ii.\.ii.i), djijanat, djiMdat{KY.), dtisthipat, ddidyutat^, adidharat,

(AV.),

susros;

adudusat, dninasat, dpaptat axiA dpipatat, abubud/iat, amUmuhat{AN.), drtramat,

drurucat, avivasat ('has bellowed', Yvas-), avivipat, avivrtat, dvTvrdkat, dvocat,
asisriyat^ (AV.),
dsisvitat,
dsTsamat (AV.), asisyadat (Ysyajid-); amamat

{Yam-);

jijanat, didyutat{YS.:^-x.-xviii. 22), didharat, dudrdvat, nesat^, bibhayat,

Without thematic -a-: ddudrot, dnunot, dpupot,

vavrtat, vocat, sisndtkat.

dmimef (wa-

asusot (Ysu-, MS.), dsusrot (VS. xviii. 58; TS.

dudkot {dku- 'shako'); djigar {gr- 'waken'), asisnat {Y snath-);
didhar.
Du. 2. drurujatam (Kh. i. 5').
PL I. dtrtrpsma (yS:.mi.2ci), atitrsama, apaptSma (Kh.iii.iC)), apipadama
(A v.), dvtvrtama (AV.), dvocama.
2. djijapata"^ (VS. ix. 12), arurucata (VS. xxxvir. 15).
3. dcikradan, djijanan, atitrasan (AV.), adidharan (AV.), aninasan (AV.),
!?/ (VS. XVI. 10; TS. IV. 5. it),), apaptan, apiparan {pr- 'cross'), dmimrnan
(Av.), dvTvatan, avTvaran (AV.), avivasan {vas- 'bellow'), avtvipan, dvivrdhan,
dvocan, dsTsaman (AV.), dsusubhan, asisrasan ( Y^rams-, AV.), astsadan { Ysad-,
VS. XII. 54; TS. IV. 2. 4t); jijanan, paptan.
V- 7- 7')j

'bellow'),

dsisrefi,

tutot,

1 -Reduplicated with i owing to the vocalic (= SV.) and for sisriye in TS. I. 5. 3'.
See
pronunciation of the y (diui-) as in the per- Whitney's note on AV. vi. 3l'5.
6 This form occurs once in the RV. (vi. IJ7)
fect: see 482 a I.
2 Classed by Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar as a, past tense (along with three other un858 a, as an aorist, but Roots 63, as plu- augmented forms rocaia, aria, tisfhai) and
twice as an injunctive. Bartholomae, KZ.
perfect; similarly tiiioi below.
VS. 27., 360, note ij regards it as a, pluperfect.
3 Occurring only in RV. I. 163'
7 Whitney 868 a; v. Negelein 691.
XXIX. 18
TS. IV. 6. 7^.
8 Occurs TS. I. 8. 102 with other aorists.
4 Whitney 866 (Mantra?).
9 From the
causative stem japaya- of
5 This form occurs only once (AV. vi. 31^),
as
a variant for dhiyate in RV. x. iSg^S ji- 'conquer'.
:

376

I.

Middle.

ending

-/

Allgemeines und Sprache.

Sing.

for -ta:

3.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

dvivarata {vr- 'cover', AV.; TS.

atitape.

v. 6. i^).

With

dbJbhayanta,
3. dtitrpanta (VS. xix. 36),
PI. 2. dvivrdhadhvam.
dmimadanta, dvivasanta ( Yvas-), dvivrdhanta, dvocanta, dsisyadanta ( Ysyand-),
dsusudanta (TS. I. 8. lo"^) ; jijananta.

Reduplicated Aorist Subjunctive.

mood

of rare occurrence, only about a dozen forms having

is represented in all the persons of the sing, and
the I. pi. only; the middle by a single dual form.
2. tUapasi (AV.), vocasi (VS.xxiii.si).
Active, Sing. i. raradha, voca.
3. aklpsti, pisprsati'^, vocatP, vocati, stsadhati^ [ysadh-).
515. This

been noted.

The

is

active

I. cukrudhama, rtramama, vocama, slsadhama

Middle. Du. i. vocavahai.

PI.

Y sadh-).

Reduplicated Aorist Injunctive.

516. Forms of this mood are of common occurrence in the active, in
which voice more than fifty have been found; but in the middle only five
have been noted.
Active. Sing. i. cukriidhatn, j'lj'anam, didkaram, vocam.
2. cikradas, ciksipas, jihvaras, jlhipas {c2x&.

ha-paya^, iiirsas (TS.

ill.

2. ^i),

nfnasas, paptas, pisprias, piparas {prmimrsas, riradhas, ririsas, vTvijas, vocas,

didtpas, didyufas, didharas,

riinafnas,

bibhisas (TS. iii. 2. 5^),

'cross'),
sUnathas, sisrdthas, susucas (AV.), sTsadhas {Y-sadk-).
3. cucyavat, tistkipat, didharat, dudravat, dudusat,

nesat, paptat (AV.),

TS. i. 6. i23),
piparat {pr- 'cross', RV.) and pipdrat {pr- 'cross', RV.
piparat {pr- 'fill'), mimayat'', riradhat {Yrandh-), ririsat, vocat, Hsrathat,
Without thematic -a-: nunot {nu- 'praise'), yuyot {yusisvadat {Ysvad-).

'separate'), susrot.

Du.

2.

jihvaratam^ (VS. v. 17) z.-a.Ajihvaratam'=

(TS.' 1.2.13^),

rTradhatam^.

VS. xxv. 22).

PI. 2. riradhatai, rJrisata^ (i. 89''
3. ciksipan (AV.), papian, riraman, vocan, suhccan (VS. xxxv. 8).
2. btbhisatkas^
Middle. Sing. i. voce.

PI. 3. jijananta, vacanta, sTsapanta (sap- 'serve').

Reduplicated Aorist Optative.

517. The forms of this mood are rare, numbering altogether (including
a precative) not more than a dozen. The majority of these come from vac'speak', and the rest from two other roots, cyu- 'stir' and ris- 'hurt'.
2. ririses, voces.
Active. Sing. i. vociyam.
3. vocet (AV.).

Du.

2. vocetani.

PI.

I.

vocenia^.

3.

vociyur.

Pl.i. cucyuvimdAi^, vocemahi.

Middle. Sing.i. voceya.
3. cucyavTrata^,
There is also the precative sing.3. rtris-T-s-ta'^ (vi.517) or riris-T-s-ta{yiii.i?>'^i).
6 Formed from the causative stem bhisayaif from an indicative 3. sing, '^apisffk.
of bhl- 'fear'.
Like an indicative present in form.
3 These
7 This form occurs six times in the RV.,
forms refute the statement of
HiRT, IF. 12, 214 f., that the reduplicated, three times unaccented and three times
as well as the root and a- aorist, has no sub- accented vocima. Avery 268 wrongly states
junctive, but only injunctive forms. Cp. 502, 509. vodma to occur five times and vocema (sic)
once.
t This form seems to have an injunctive
8 Without thematic -a-.
sense in RV. x. 2722, its only occurrence.
5 Reckoned here an injunctive form (not
9 In the Pada text riristsfa.
imperative) because accompanied by ma:
cp. Delbruck, Altindische Syntax p. 361'.
I

'

As

VII. Verb.

Aorist System.

377

Reduplicated Aorist Imperative.

518.

Forms of

They occur

mood

this

Active. Sing.

vocatat.

2.

didhrtam, vocatam.
susuddta (AV. i. 26'') ^

PI.
3.

numbering hardly more than a dozen.

are rare,

in the active only.

3. vocatu.

Du.

2. jigrtdm (gr- 'waken'),

paptata ' (i. 88'), vocata,

didhrta,

jigrtd,

2.

pupurantu {pr-

'fill'),

Hsrathantu.

Sigmatic Aorist.

3.

The

general tense sign of this aorist is an j added to the root.

This s in the vast majority of verbs (more than 200) comes immediately
before the endings.
When such is the case, the stem may be formed in
three different ways: the j being added i. direct to the root, e. g. a-jai-s-am
519.

iji- 'conquer');

with a connecting -i-, e. g. a-kram-i-s-am {kram- 'stride');

s- prefixed to the connecting -z-, e. g. a-ya-s-i-s-am (ya'go').
The inflexion of these three varieties (A) follows that of the graded
conjugation.
In a small number of verbs the stem is formed by adding -s
extended with a thematic a; e. g. d-rnk-sa-t {ruh- 'mount'). The inflexion of
this fourth form (B) of the sigmatic aorist is like that of an imperfect of the
a- conjugation.
Of the four varieties of the sigmatic aorist, the first two, the j- aorist and
the is- aorist, are very common, each being formed by nearly 100 roots.
3. with

The

2.

an additional

other two are rare, the sis- aorist being

from only nine roots.

made from

only

six,

and the

WrnxNEY,

sa- aorist

A.

I.

The

aorist.

s-

Avery.
Sanskrit Grammar 878 897; Roots 225 226;
Negelein, Zur Sprachgeschichte 83 84.
Delbruck, Verbum 177179,

Verb-Inflection

257259.

Index Verborum 380.

Atharvaveda,

V.

form

of the sigmatic aorist, the radical vowel as a rule

in the active. In the middle, on the
other hand, excepting final I and u (which take Guna), the radical vowel
remains unchanged. Thus in the active there occur the forms i. sing.
a-jai-sam{YJi-)i (i-bkar-sam{Ybhr-), ^. sing, d-rai/i (Yrit:-), 3. pi. d-cchant-sur
while in the middle we find i. sing, a-vit-si (Yvid-), d-bhut-si
(j\f chand-);
( Ybudh-'), a-srk-si ( Y^TJ-)-, a-nu-si {nu- 'praise'), beside forms with Guna from

520.

In

this

takes

Vrddhi

roots

ending in

I.

{a being lengthened)

or

Zi!

such as

a-he-s-ata {Yhi-).,

3. pi.

a-ne-s-ata {Yni-),

sing, a-sto-si (]Ajz'-).

There are, however, some irregularities, i. In a few active injunctive forms

2. In two or three
appears instead of Vrddhi, e.g. sing. 2. /V-j (l/^V-), pi. l.fe-sma.
middle forms of saA- 'overcome', the a is lengthened, c. g. sing. I. sak-si^.
3. The
root is shortened in a few middle forms; thus the a of da- 'cut', is reduced to i in
sing. I- opt. di-s-Tya, and the nasal of gam- 'go' and man- 'think' is dropped in the forms
a-ga-smahi and ma-sTya.
4. After a consonant other than n m r, the tense sign s is
dropped before i, ih, and dh; thus a-bhak-ta beside d-bhak-s-i l^bkaj-); fat-ihas (AV.)
beside fat-s-i {\/j>ad; AV.); a-sto-dhvam^ Instil-), where the s on becoming z cerebralized
the following dental before disappearing \*a-sto-z-dhvam).
a.

Guna

In addition to the indicative,

occur.

There

iS

also

all

participle, but

1 An
imperative form like this justifies
the classification of afaptat etc. as an actual
aorist, apart from its possible origin as a

the
it

is

188),
short.

moods

of

this

form of the

aorist

rare.

though

the

reduplicative

vowel

is

362, note 9.
3 Also
in the active subjunctive form
sdksdma, where the a would normally remain
pluperfect.
2 Pada text susuddta. It is perhaps better short, as the radical vowel in this mood
to class this form here (cp. Whitney, Sanskrit takes Guna only.
4 The only example in this aorist of the
Grammar 871) than as a transfer form of

the

perfect

imperative

from

y/siid-

Cp.

p.

(Roots ending -dhvam.

378

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

Indicative.
521. The only point in which the inflexion differs from that of the imperfect of the graded conjugation is that the 3. pi. active invariably ends in -ur.

The following peculiarities and irregularities are moreover to be noted. 1. In the

a.
active; in the RV. ^ the endings -s and -t of the 2. 3. sing, disappear, and the tense sign
also, unless the root ends in a vowel; e. g. a-kar{KS^, 3. sing. Irorayhr-, =*a-har-s-i, but
*a-ha-s-t.
The AV. and TS., however, less often than
a-ha-s, 3. sing, from ha- 'leave'

not, insert a connecting -t- before these endings, thus preserving both the latter and the
e. g. a-naik-s-i-t [\/niJ-, AV.), a-tam-s-T-t (ytan-, TS.).
s of the tense stem;
In four forms
in which the -t- is not inserted, the -s and -/, as distinctive of the 2. and 3. persons,

abnormally take

stem

or the final consonant of the root:

a-va-i (AV. viu. 121)
for *a-vas-i^ (vas- 'shine'); 2. sing, srii-s (AV.) for *srdj-s-s^ {V'fJ')T^^^ K.V. also has
a-yd-s for *a-yaj-s-s {yaj- 'sacrifice') beside the phonetically regular form in the 3. sing.
2. In the middle nine first and one or two third persons singular
a-ydf for *a-ydj-s-i.
appear in which the stem is made with the addition of -s, but which have both the
ending and the meaning of the present; and the -s is added to a present stem and
not to the aorist form of the root. Thus formed are from a present stem of i. the
a- class:
arca-s-e 'I praise', yaja-s-e 'I worship' (vni. 25');
2.
the a- class, nasalized:
rnja-s-e'' 'I strive after'; 3. the ya- class: gdy-i-se^ 'I sing'; 4. the nd- class: gfiti-s-i^
'1 pia.ise'
pum-s-e T purify'; 5. the root class: kr-s-e 'I make', hi-s-e 'I impel', stu-s-c^
;
*1 praise' ;
6. the intensive:
carkr-s-e which (like stusi'^ in I. 122^) is a 3. sing, with a
passive sense: 'is praised'.
a-h-ai-t

the place
(AV.) for *a-srai-s-t

of the

-s

of the

a-hai-t (AV.) for *d-Aai-s-( (yhi-);

{]/sri-);

522.

The forms of

the indicative actually occurring wouldj

and

if

made from

middle, be as follows:
Active. Sing. I. dbharsam. 2. dbhar, ab/iSrsis {AN.). 3. dbhar; abharsit
(AV.TS.).
Du. 2. dbharstam. 3. abharstam.
PL i. dbharsma. 2. dbharsta.

bhr-

'bear' in the active

stu-

'praise' in the

dbharsur.
Middle. Sing.

3.

PL

i.

dstosi.

2.

dstosthas.

3.

dstosta.

Du.

3.

dstosatam.

dstodhvam.
3. dstosata.
The forms which actually occur are the following:
Active. Sing. I. akarsam (AV.), ajaisam ( 1//V-), dpraksam ( Yprach-, AV.),
>abharsam, dyamsam ( Yyam-), ayasam, dsparsam {spr- 'win'), dharsam ( Y^f)2. akran {Ykrand-), agkas^ {Yghas-, AV. xx. 129'*), a'/4aj- (/4a- 'leave',
AV. II. 10'').
With irregular -s: aySs {Yyv'-)^ ^^3s {Y^rj-i AV.).
With connecting -/"-: aratsis (ra;//^- 'succeed', AV.), avatsis^^ (z^aj-- 'dwell',
AV.); bhaists (AV.).
3. With loss of the ending -t: ajais^^ (Yji-), apras {Ypf^-)> (^has {hd'leave').
With loss of both tense sign and ending: dkran^^ {Y krand-),
dksar ( Yksar-), acait ( lAV-), acchan ( Y chand-), atan ( !/'/-), atsar ( Ytsar-),
ddyaut ( Ydyut-), adhak ( ^ dah-), aprak {pre- 'mix', AV.), aprat Yprach-),
{
abhar, ayat ( j/ya/'-), dyan { Yyam-), araiit "t ( Yrudh-, AV.), dvat Yvah-),
{
avails {vas- 'shine', AV.), as'vati {Ysvit-), asyan {Ysyand-), dsrak
(Y-^.r/-),
dsvar {Ysvar-), ahar {Yhr-, AV.); draik {Yric-); dyaut, vat {Yvah-).
I.

dstosmahi.

2.

and the Kathaka, Whitney 888.

in one passage (l. 122"), however, it appears
In avdt the t may, however, represent to be a 3. sing, with a passive sense: 'is
the final s of the root, the form possibly praised'.
standing for *a-vdt-s-i; see above 44 a 2,
9 On stusi in
general, see Oldenberg,
and Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar 167.
ZDMG. 59,3S5ff-. Neisser, BB. 30.315325.
3 The phonetically regular form would be
1 Cp. above 499, dghas sing. 2.
3.
''srdi.
Cp. p. 61 (middle).
" Cp. V. Negelein 83, note S; above
4 Also the participle rfijas-dnd-.
a
I.
44,
12 For *ajais-t.
5 From gdya-, with -i- for -a-.
6 From the weak stem.
13 For *akrdnd-s-t.
7 These
three forms seem to represent
H For *araudk-s-i.
the transition of aorist stems to employment
IS Cp. avdt-s-T-s (AV.) from vas- 'dwell'.
as present stems.
Cp. note 2 and p. 36 (top).
8 The form stusi is frequent as a I. sing.;
1

VI. Verb.

Aorist System.

379

With irregular -f:

asrait ( )fsri-, AV.), dhait ( Yhi; AV.).

With connecting
-/-: atamsit {ytan-, TS.iv. 7. 135; VS.xv.
53), anaiksit (Vnij-, AV.): rautstt

iYrudk; Kh.1v.75).

Du.
(

2.

dsrastam^ iV^rj; AV.).

V^jz/or-).

3.

abkarstam {WS.xxvlll.l^), asvarstam

Pl.i. djaisma, dhhaisma.

2. dcchania^ {Ychand-), anaista (TS.v.7.2*).
dcchantsur, dbhaisur, amatsur {Yinad-), ayasur, dvaksur
(Y^^^-t AV.)3.
Middle, Sing. i. ddz/esi iYi^i^'-), ddhi^ {da- 'give',' AV.), anusi (Ynu-),
dbhaksi {Y^haj-), dbhutsi {Ybudh-),
dmasi {ma- 'measure', AV.), dmuksi
{Ymuc-, AV.), avitsi {vid- 'find'), asaksi^ {Ysak-), asrksi, astosi; mamsi
{Yman-), vrksi^ ^Y'^VJ-, AV.), saksi^.

3.

2.

djnasthas (AV.), dtapthas'' (AV.IX.5*), aprkthas {Yprc-, AV.), dmukthas

{Ymuc-, AV.).
3.
(

dbhakta {Ybhaj-), dmamsta (VS V. 40),

(V>.rc-),
amatta
ayamsta {Yyam-), ayasta {YyV'), dramsta {Yram-), drabdha

apr^ia

yza(/-),

{Yrabh-), asakta {Y^aj-), dsrsta {Y^V'-), astosta.

Du. 3. anusstam, amamsatam (VS. xxxviii. 13), dyuksatam {Yy*/')PI. I. agasmahi^{Ygam-), aprks}naM{Yprc-, AY.), abhutsmahi {Ybudh-),
dviksmahi {Y^is-), asrksmahi {Y^fj-, TS. i. 4. 45^; VS. xx. 22).
2. dstodhvam (for *d-stos-dkvam from s(u- 'praise').
3. akramsata (AV.), ddrksata {Ydrs-), ddhuksata {Yduh-), ddhursata"^
{dhvr- 'injure'),
adhusata,
dnusata,
anesata { YnT-),
dbhutsata { Ybudh-),
amamsata ( Y^^n-), amatsata ( Ymad-), ayamsata { Yyam-), ayuksata { Yyu/-),
aramsata (AV.), drasata, alipsata, dviksata (lAwz/-), avrtsata {Yvrt-), avrsata
{vr-

'choose',

AV.

iii.

asaksata

38),

dstosata, ahasata, ahUsata {hu-

s-

'call'),

'accompany';,
dsrksata {YsTJ-)i
ahrsata { Yhr-), ahesata { Yhi-).

{sac-

Aorist Subjunctive.

523. This mood is quite common in the RV., but decidedly less so
other Sarnhitas.
Its forms are, however, frequent only in the active,
The middle is much
in which all persons are represented except the i. du.
only one of these is
less common, about 20 forms occurring altogether;
found in the dual, and two in the plural. The root regularly takes Guna
throughout before the tense sign", in the middle as well as the active. The
primary endings are frequent, being used almost exclusively'^ in the du. and
in the

the

2. pi.

In the middle 3. sing, and pi. the exceptional ending -tai occurs in two
forms in later Samhitas (AV. TS.).
darsasi {dr- 'split'); jesas {Yj^')i
Active. Sing. i. stosani.
2.
vdksas {Y'vah-).
3. nesati {YnT-{, parsati {pr- "'take across'), pasati
matsati {Ymad-), yosati {yu- 'separate'), vaksati {Y^ah-), sak('protect'),
hsesai
{ksi'dwell'),
AV.); dksat {as- 'attain', x. 11 7),
sati {Ysah-,
chanisat ( Y'^hand-), jesat { 1//V-), ddrsat {dr- 'split'), dasat {da- 'give'), drasat

AV.
2

Emendation
IV. 28'*; see

for asrasfrani of the Mss.,

note.

Whitney's

For * acchant-s-ia.

the form avesan, which

occurs twice in the RV., regarding it doubtless as an s- aorist of yvJ-. It would as such
have the double anomaly of absence of
J

Avery 257 adds

Vjddhi and the ending

-an.

It is

probably

impf. oi\vis- in both passages (l. 1702

GrA-SSMANN in X. 114' regards it
X. 114').
as aorist of \vi-.
3. pi.

Cp. V. Negelein 834.

With anomalous long vowel.
See Whitney's note on AV. vi.

For * d-tap-s-ihas.

4
5

302.

8 With loss of the radical nasal {a taking

the place of the sonant nasal).
9 With interchange of the radical vowel
and semivowel: see 50, b.
10 The a of sak is lengthened in the forms

sdksama and saksate.

" Excepting only the

3.

du. act. yaksatam.

38o

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

Vedic Grammar.

4.

nhat ( YnT-), pdksat ( Ypac-), pdrsat ('take

bhaksat {ybkaj-), bharsat {Ybhr-), tndtsat {Ymad-),
ydmsat {Yyam-), ydksat {Yyaj-)-, yasat, yosat (yu- 'separate'), rasat, vdmsat
{Yvan-), vdksat ("l/z/a/^-), valsat (Kh. v. 15'^), vesat^ (l^^r-)^, saksat {sac'accoinpany' ^ and sah- 'overcome'''), satsat {Ysad-), sarsat (j/^jt-, AV.),
stosat, sraksat ( Y^U'i ^S. xxi. 46).
Du. 2. ddsatkas, dkasathas, pdrsathas (j>r- 'take across'), vdksathas
AV.), varsathas (vr- 'cover').
( Y^ak-,
3. pasatas ('protect'), yamsatas {Yyam-), yaksatas (Vj'^/-), yosatas (yuWith -tarn: yaksatam {Yyv'')'separate', AV.), vaksatas (Y'^"^-){dra- 'run'), naksat [nas- 'reach'),

/rd'W

across'),

(l//rr-);

"PI. 1.

j'e'sSma {YJi-)i

(j/z/aw-),

sdksama^ {Y^ak-), stosama.

nesatha^ pdrsatha ('take across'),

dkasatha,

2.

across'),

vdmsama

yamsan {Yy^'^');

mdtsatha.

^dsan, vdksan, sesan

{si-

3. parsafi ('take

'lie').

2. dfksase^, prksase^
Middle. Sing. i. namsai, mdmsai (l/"OTa;z-).
darsate {dr- 'split'),
trasate,
mamsase ( Y^^<^ii-).
3. krainsate,
( YPr'^')i
mdmsate (Ywan-), yamsate ( j/j/aw-), yaksate ( lA'^'-), rasate, vamsate ( l/waw-),

With

saksate^ {Ysah-)T.

Du.
(]/?-).

2.

ending

With

ending

mdsatai (AV.).

-iai:

mdmsante

PI. 3. ndmsante ( Y^am-^,

-tai: mamsatai^ (TS. vii. 4. 15').

trasathe (for *trSsait/ie).

5-

Aorist Injunctive.

524. Injunctive forms are of fairly common occurrence, especially after

Judged by the extremely few accented forms occurring, the accent was
on the radical syllable. All the forms occurring in the i sing. act. are irregular
in one way or another: nearly all of them take Guna instead ofVrddhi, while
yusa7n (AV.) only lengthens the radical vowel {yu- 'separate'). Three first
persons from roots in -a substitute e"^ for that vowel, as yesam from ya- 'go';
the same substitution takes place in the i.pl. gesma (AV.), desma (VS.), and
vii.

sthesur (AV.).

3. pi.

Active.

Sing.

i.

j'esam''"

{Yp-, VS.

AV.), stosam'^; from roots ending in

{ya- 'go'), sthesam 9 {stha- 'stand', VS.

11.

ix.

13

etc.),

gesam {ga-

-a:

yUsant {yu- 'separate',

'go',

VS.

v. 5),

yesam

8).

'separate'), Avar {Yhvar-,

connecting -T-: hasTs (Kh. iv. 85; AA. 11. 7).
3. dhak{Ydah-), bhak{Ybhaj-), bhar{Ybkr-), mauk{Ymuc-, VS. I. 25),
iai-" {ha- 'leave').
With connecting -7-: tapsit (VS. xiii. 30), vaksTi
{Yvah-, AV.), Msit (TS. vii. 3. 13'; AV.), hvarfit {Y hvar-, VS. i. 2).
2. jes'^;

VS.

I.

2).

bhak {Ybhaj-), yat {YyV-)) yo-us {yu-

With

Du. 2. taptam
AV).

{Ytap-^ VS.

yausta?n

v. 33),

srastam

{yu- 'separate'),

{Ysrj-,

As appearing

with

prhat

(I.

in

immediate juxtaposition
form appears to be

180S), this

subjunctive of m-, not a present

injunctive of yvis- {pesaii).
2 Avery 258
gives sisai, among these
forms, as occurring _ once.
He doubtless
means ni-sisat (iv. 2') which occurs beside
But it
the subjunctives bharat and udtrat.

an

Weak

radical

vowel instead of Guna.

Avery 258 adds

Grammar 893 a; but
7

hasate,

also

form

Whitney,

In I. 12910 ('accompany').
In V. 306 ('conquer').

doubtless
mid. pres. of has- 'hasten', a secondary form of ha- 'leave' according to the aclass; also hasanie (AV. IV. 36^). Cp. p. 321,
note 7.
8 See Weber's ed. of the TS., p. 310,
15,
note ".
9 Made perhaps from an i- form of roots
ending in -a. Cp. Whitney, Grammar 894 c.
"> Formed perhaps under the influence of
the subjunctives jesat and stosat,
II Unnecessarily regarded by Delbrijck,

With lengthened

Verbum

aorist

cannot
siksat).

aorist

an s- aorist (which would be

Whitney, Roots, takes it as an aof Hs- 'leave', Grassmann, Worter-

be

buch 1392,
3

as an aorist oisas-. Cp.

above 510.

radical vowel.

this

is

3. sing.

p.

60 (80) as from

/5/--

'take'.

VII. Verb.

PL

Aorist System.

381

yausma {yu- 'separate', VS.1v.22).

With Guna only: gesma"^
AV.), j/sma {Yji-), desma-" {da- 'give', VS. 11.
2. naista
3 2 J.
iYni-), yausta (Yyu- 'separate', AV.)^ ss^ta' (TS. iii. 3. 9').
3. jahur
{Yji; AV.), dkasur, yausur {yu- 'separate'), sthesur"- {KST. xvi. 4?), hasur.
I.

(ga- 'go',

Middle. Sing.

bhakd {YbhaJ-,

vi[.

i.

gasi {ga-

41^),

'sing'),

niksi

Ynij-, AV.), patsi

rnesi (mi- 'diminish',

( Ypad-, AV.),
AV.), yamsi {Yyam-), yaksi

iVyu'-), vdimi {Yvan-), vrksi {Vvrj-).

2. cyost/ias{Y':y^i-), chitihas[Yckid-, AN.), pattkas
(Ypad-, KSf.), bhitthas
(TS. IV. I. 9^),
mamsthas {Yman-, AV.; VS. xiii. 41), mestMs {Yii-, AV.),
ramstkas (Yram-, AV.), hasthas {ha- 'go forth', AV.).
3. ksesta {ksi- 'destroy', AV.), nesta { Ym-, AV.), pasta {pa- 'drink', AV.),

mamsta {Yman-,
hasta {ha- 'be

Du.

KSf.),

left',

mamsta^ {Yman-, AV.

xi. 2^),

mesta (wr-

'fail',

AV.),

AV.).

srksatham {Y^TJ-, VS.-xix. 7).

yutsmahii {Y'yudh-, AV.), hasmahi {ha- 'be deprived of).
nusata,
3, dhuksata {Yduh-),
matsata {Ymad-), muksata {Ymuc-),
saksata {Ysac- 'accompany').
PI.

2.

I.

525. This

Aorist Optative.

mood

occurs in the middle only in this form of the sigmatic

aorist.
The 2. 3. sing, always appears with the precative s excepting
the one form bhakstta in the SV. (i. i. 2. 4^).

Sing.

distya'- {da-'-cxA'),

I.

bhakstyd{Ybhaj-), masiya^
{Y str-, AV.)

{y man-),

muksjya,

rasiya, saksTya^ {Y^ah-, AV.), strsiya

mamsisthds {Yman-).
2.
mamsista (Yman-), mrksista {mrc-

Du.

2.

3.

darsTsta

{dr- 'tear'),

bhakstta (SV.),

'injure').

trSsitham (for *tras-iyatha.m).

dhuksTmdhi {Yduh-, TS. i. 6. 4^), bhaksTmdhi {YbhaJ-), mamsimdhi

{Yman-), vamsimdhi and vasimahi^ {Yvan-, ix. 72*), saksTmdhi {\fsac-).
PI.

3.

I.

mamsTrata.
s-

526.

No

Aorist Imperative.

certain regular forms of the imperative

occur in the active.

yaustam, naista, might have been classed here, but as
they occur with mS. only, they have been placed among the injunctives. There
are, however, the two transfer forms in the 2. sing, nesa {Ym-, AV.) and
parsa {pr- 'take across') 7. The only forms of the imperative occurring in
the middle are three made from ra- 'give' and one from sah- 'conquer'.
Middle. Sing. 2. siksva.
Du. 2. rasatham.
3. rasatam.
PI. 3.
rasantam.
s- Aorist Participle.

Two

or three, such

z.%

527. Only two or three forms of the active participle are found. These
are ddksant- and dhdksant- from dah- 'burn', and sdksant- from sah- 'prevail'.
In the middle there are no regular forms. There is one doubtful example

which the stem

in

is

extended with

-a-

and accordingly adds the

suffix

-mana,

as in the a- conjugation: dhi-s-a-mana- {dhi- 'think').

There

are, besides,

root with an intermediate

I

See
For

p. 380,

note

a dozen stems irregularly formed by adding j' to the

-a-, and taking the regular ending -ana.
These forms

9.

sap-s-ta.

3
A somewhat doubtful reading see
Whitney's note on AV. vii. 52^.
t With the radical a weakened to i.
:

5 Root weakened by loss of nasal (a taking

the place of the sonant nasal).
^ With irregular lengthening of the radical
vowel.
7

See WfflTNEY, AV. Index Verborum 382.

382

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

may be accounted
in the

RV.

They

4.

Vedic Grammar.

as belonging to the s- aorist.

arsasand-

are:

'injuring',

All but

dhasana-

two of them occur

{]fuh-')

'lying in wait',

dhiyasand- (^dhi-) 'attending', namasand(Ynam-) 'rendering homage' (AV.), bhiydsana- iybhi-) 'fearing' (AV.), mandasand(T/mand-) 'rejoicing', yamasand- (yyam-) 'being driven' (with passive sense),
rabhasand- i^rabh-) 'agile', vrdhasand- ^vrdh-) 'growing', savasand- (]/"/-)
'strong', sahasdnd- (^sah-^ 'mighty'.

jrayasand- (Yjri-) 'far-extending',

A.
Delbruck, Verbum
Sanskrit

910;

Grammar 898

Zur Sprachgeschichte

179

p.

86.

2.

The

is-

iSo. Avery,

Roots 226

227;

Aorist.
Verb-Inflection 259

AV. Index Verborum

261.
380.

Whitney,
v.

Negelein,

85-

528. About 80 roots take this form of the sigmatic aorist in the RV.
and about a dozen others in the AV.
The -s is here added to the root with the connecting vowel -i-. The
radical vowel as a general rule takes Guna throughout; but in the active
No
a final vowel takes Vrddhi and a medial -a is sometimes lengthened.
roots with final -a and few with final -t take this aorist. The terminations are
the same as those of the s- aorist, excepting that the 2. and 3. sing. act. end
Active and middle forms, though frequent,
in -IS (= is-s) and -it (= is-t).
are rarely both made from the same root, occurring thus in about fifteen
verbs only. This is the only aorist from which a few forms are made in the

secondary conjugation ^.

no

Besides the indicative, all the moods are represented in

participial forms have been met with.

this

aorist,

but

Indicative.
529. In the active
but in the middle only
(Kh.), du. 3.

and

pi. 3.

persons are represented except du. i. 2. and pi. 2.;

sing. 2. and 3. occur besides a single form of sing, i

all

(VS.).

i. The
few irregularities occur in the formation of this tense''forms atarima (beside the normal dtarismd) and avadiran^ (AV.), are probably
to be regarded as irregular forms with abnormal loss of the aoristic -s.
2. The root grabh- 'seize' takes the connecting vo'wel 7^ (as it does in other
verbal forms) instead of -z-, as agrabhisma.
3. In the sing. i. act., the
ending -Tm appears instead of -isam in the three forms dkramlm, vddhtm,
and agrabhim (TS.), doubtless owing to the analogy of the 2. and 3. sing, -is
and -if-.
4. The abnormal ending -aii appears in the 3. sing, in dsarait^
(AV.) beside asarit (AV.)"^.
The normal forms occurring, if made from kram- 'stride', would be as

a.

follows

Active.

Sing.

i.

dkramisam.

PL i. dkramisma.
Middle. Sing. i. dkramisi

mistam.

2.

dkramis.

3.

dkramit.

dkramimr.
(Kh.). 2. dkramidhas.

Du.

3.

3.

dkramista.

3.

dkra-

Du.

3.

dkramisatam.
PI. 3. dkramisata (VS.).
The forms which actually occur are the following:
1 From causatives dhvanayti, ailayit (yH-,
4 Cp. Delbruck, Verbum p. 188.
AV.), from a desiderative trlsTs {\/rdh-, AV.).
5 This
abnormal ending also occurs in
2 The weak form of the root appears in
the secondary conjugation in the denomithe injunctive nudisfhas (AV.) and the opta- native aor. dsafaryaii [AM .): see below 570.
6 Both these forms also show the irregulive rucisTya (AV.) and gmislya (VS.), which
syncopates the radical vowel as in the root larity of taking Gu;ia instead of Vjfddhi.
aor. and the perfect of this verb,.
3 Cp. Whitney 904 d.

VII. Verb.

Aorist System.

383

Active. Sing. i. akanimm, akarisam, akramisam, acayisam (AV.),

acarisam, abharisam {ybhr-, AV.), avadkisam (AV.), avadisam (AV.), ds'amsisam, asanisam; aiisam {as- 'eat', AV.); ravisam.
VVith ending -Jm:
akramtm, agrabhim (TS.); vddhim.
2. akramts, adrmhis (VS. vi. 2), dvadhis, avarsis \ asiaris (Ystr-, AV.)
asis' (as- 'eat', AV.), du^sTs {uks- 'grow'); kramis, vddhis.
3. dkarit, dkramit, dgrabhit, dgrakft{P^Y.), dtarit, adrmhit (MS. iv. 13^),
anaylf {Yni-, AV.), dmandit, ayastt, dyodhit, aravit, dvadktt, dvarsit (^vrs-^
AV.), dsamsit, asarit'^ (AV.), asavit, astanit (AV.), dsvanit; avit, ant (as'eat', AV.); jarvit
{jurv- 'consume'}, tarit, vddhit.
With ending -aitx
asaraii^ (AV).

Du.

dtnanthistam; jdnistam.
agrabhisma, dtarisma and atarima^, dvadhisma (VS. ix. 38).
3. ataksisur, dtarisur, adhanvisur, dnartisur, dnindisur, apavimr, dmandisur, atnadisur, arSjisur, aranisur {ran- 'rejoice'), dravisur, avadisur, asavisur;
aksisur^ (i. 163'), anisur {\fan-, AV., TS.), dvisur (}fav-).
With -ran-^
avadiran (AV.).
PI.

3.

I.

Middle. Sing. i. aiksisi (Kh. i. i': Yiks-).

2.
djanisthas {KSl .),
asamisthas {sam- 'labour'), asayisthas, dsramisthas; jdnisthas.
3. akrapista {\fkrp^, djanista, adhavista, anavista, aprathista, arocista
(VS. XXXVII. 1 5), avasista {vas- 'wear'), dsamista, dsahista; duhista {uh- 'con^.
sider'); krdmista, jdfiista, prdthista, mdndista, yamista.
Du. 3. dmandhatam.
PI. 3. dgrbhisata (VS. xxi. 60).

Aorist Subjunctive.

/s-

mood

are fairly common, but are almost

Middle forms are very rare, occurring
only in the pi., where not more than four examples have been noted.
Active. Sing. i. davisaniT.
2. avisos,
k&tiisas, tarisas,
raksisas,
vddhis as, vAdisas (AV.), vesisas, samsisas.

530.

Active

forms

of

exclusively limited to the

2.

this

and

3. sing.

kdrisat,

3.

jambhisat, josisat,

nindisat

tSrisat,

(AV.),

pdrisat

('take,

across'), bodhisat, mdrdhisat, yacisat, yodhisat, raksisat, vanisat{KY.), vyathisat

(VS.

VI. 18),

samsisat (TS.

v. 6. 8^),

sanisai, savisat^ {su- 'vivify').

PI. 3. sanisan'^ (AV. v. 35).

Middle. PI. i. yacisamahe, sanisamahe.

3. vanisanta'^ (J^S. iv. 7. 14'),

sdnisania.
is-

Aorist Injunctive.

531. Forms of the injunctive are commoner than those of the subjunctive.
In the active they are found almost exclusively in the 2. 3. sing., 2. du. and
in the

2. 3. pi.;

middle nearly a dozen forms occur, all but one in the sing.
this mood have the accent on the root (as in the un-

The forms of

augmented indicative).
Active. Sing. i. sdmsisam, himsisam (VS.

i.

25).

avarkis as occurring once.

7 Cp. V. SCHROEDER, WZKM. I3, II9 122.
8 This form occurs also in two passages
See Whitney's note on AV. xi. 3=6.
3 With. Guna instead
of Vrddhi of final of the AV. ; in a third (AV. I. 182J savisak
appears instead of it. Cp. Whitney's note,
vowel; cp. Bartholomae, Studien 2, 165.
4 See Whitney's note on AV. vi. 662, on this passage, and his Grammar 151 a.
1

Avery 259 adds

where the reading aiar'ti is better supported;

cp. his note on AV. vi. 65'.
5

With

From

loss of the aoristic

aks- 'attain'

(WHITNEY, Roots

a secondary form of Vas-;

aorist

from

as- 'attain'.

-s.

otherwise

a.

i)
sis-

The corresponding passage

has

vanusanta,
(IV. 7- 14') vanisanta.
10 See preceding note.
(x. 128'')

and

of the

RV.

of the

TS.^

384

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I-

4.

Vedic Grammar.

taris, barhls, mdthis, mardkts, mosTs,

(AV.), rand/tls, lekhis (VS. v. 43), vddhis, /(7irr.f (VS.x1.45),
With -ais\ sarais (-[fs'r-, AV.).
savis, spharJs, himsTs (VS. AV.).
carit, jTvit (AY.), tarit, dasit {das(^r'swallow'),
(a/'eat'),
^arf/
3. asti
'waste'), barh% mdtkit, vadhit (TS.iv. 2. 9'; VS. xiii. 16), vent, svanit, himsit.
Du. 2. tdristam, mardhistam, himsistam (AV. VS.).
2. grabhista, vadhista, himsista (AV. TS.); mathistana
PI. I. sramisma.

kramis (AV.), jivTs (AV.),

2. avis,

yavis, yodliis, raksis

3. jarisur (jr- 'waste away'), jivisur

(AV.), rdnistana (Yran-), vadhistana.
(A v.), tarisur'' (AV.), vadhisur (AV.), vadisur (AV.), hbnsisur (AV.).
2. ksanisthas'' (AV.), nudisthas^
Middle. Sing. i. radhisi (AV.).
vyathisthas (AV.).
vadhisthas (Kh. 11. 1 1^),
marsisthas i:\fmrs-),
{AV.),

3. panista, pavista, badhista.

PL

vyathismahi (AV.).

I.

Aorist Optative.

/s-

532. This mood is rare, occurring in the middle only and being formed
from hardly a dozen roots. Though the ending is accented, the root appears
The 2. and 3. sing.
in a weak form in gmisTya^ (VS.) and riicisiya (AV.).
take the precative -s-.
Middle. Sing. i. edhisiyd (AV.), gmisiya^ (VS. iii. \^), janinya (AV.)5,

3. janisista, vanisista.
2. modisTsthas (AV.).
PI. I. edhisimdhi (AV.), tarisTmaki, mandiusahisivahi (AV.).
mahi{y'Si.Yi.\i\\ TS.i.2.3' etc.), vandistmdhi, vard/itsimdM {YS.ii.i4,xxxviii. 21),

rucinya^ (AV.).

Du.

I.

sahinmahi (AV.), sahisimdhi (Pada

is-

text sakisTtndki).

Aorist Imperative.

533. Forms of this mood are rare, occurring in the active only and
being made from six or seven roots at the most. Among these forms, two
only are distinctively imperative, aviddhi and avisiu; a few others can be
distinguished by having the accent on the ending; the rest, being unaccented
and used without ma, cannot be distinguished from injunctives.
Du. I. avistdm, kramistam, gamistam,
Sing. 2. aviddhi.
3. avistu.
^anistdm, cayistam {ci- 'gather'), yodhistam (;\fyudh-), vadhistam, hiathistam.

3. avistam.

Delbruck, Verbum

Grammar 911

916;

534. This

by only

or

six

Pi. 2. avitd) avistdna, inathistana.

p.

3.

Roots 227.

which

is

aorist,

seven

The

A.
179.

roots

sis-

Aorist.

Avery, Verb-Inflection 261.

Whitney, Sanskrit
v. Negelein, Zur Sprachgeschichte 86.
inflected exactly like the

the

in

Samhitas.

is-

aorist, is

Middle forms occur

formed
in

the

optative only.

Indicative.

Sing.
sista.

ayasisam.
3. agasisur {gaI.

Du.

3.

'sing'),

aySsistam (VS. xxviii. 14).

PI. 2. dya-

ayasisur^.

Subjunctive.
Sing.

3.

gasisat (ga-

'sing'),

yasisai.

S This may be regarded as a form irregu1 With accent on tlie ending instead of
the root,
larly lacking s
avistd.
2 Cp. Brugmann, KZ. 24, 363 f.
7 dksimr is formed from as- 'attain', accord3 With weak form of root.
ing to Delbruck, Verbum p. 179; according
4 Cp. ZiMMER, KZ. 30, 222.
to Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar 913, and
5 The Kathaka lias
the forms janiseyavi Roots I, from the secondary root aks-; see
s^ndjaniseya made from a secondary -a- stem above p. 383, note 6.

.(Whitney

907).
|

VII. Verb.

Aorist System.

Optative.

Middle.
PI.

I.

Sing. i. vamsisiya'^ {vanpyasisimahii (AV.; VS. 11. 14; MS.

AV.).

'win',

38s

2. yasisistkas^.

9' [p. 181, 9]).

iv.

Injunctive.

Sing.
(AV.).

Du.

ramsisam'' (SV.i. 4.
PI. 2. hashta (AV.).
I.

2.

yasistdm.

Delbruck, Verbum

Du.

2.

hasistam (AV.).

3. hasistam

3. hasisur (AV.)."

Imperative.
PI.

p. 179.

Grammar gi6 920; Roots

i. 25).

227.

2.

yasTsta^

(i.

i65'5).

B.

The

Avery, Verb-Inflection 262.

Whitney, Sanskrit
v. Negelein, Zur Sprachgeschichte 86.

sa- Aorist.

535. In the Samhitas this form of the sigmatic aorist is taken by only
nine roots, which end in / s s or h and contain the medial vowels i u or r.
The thematic a doubtless came to be employed in these few verbs to avoid
a difficult agglomeration of consonants when the endings were added. The
inflexion is like that of an imperfect of the d- class of the first conjugation,
the -sd- being accented* in unaugmented forms. Besides the indicative, only
forms of the injunctive and imperative occur, altogether fewer than a dozen.
No subjunctive, optative, or participial forms have been noted.

Indicative.
536. Neither forms of any person of the dual nor of the 2. pi. occur in
the indicative of this type of the s- aorist
The active forms greatly predominate, the middle being represented in the 3. sing, and pi. by only three
or four forms altogether.
Active. Sing. i. avrksam {\fvrh-).
2. adhuksas (Y^uh-, VS. i. 3),
aruksas {^ruh-, AV.); ruksas {Yruh-, KSf.).
3. dkruksat i^fkrus-), aghuksat
{\fguh^, aduksat^ and ddhuksat {}fduh-), dmrksat (Ymrs-, AV.) druksat
PI. i. amrksama {YmrjiYruh-), dsprksat {]fsprs-, AV.; VS. xxviii. 18).
duksan^ and
'wipe'),
aruksama {Y^ruh-, AV.).
3. ddhuksan (Ydu^-);

dhuksdn (Y^duh-).
Middle. Sing.

3. ddhuksata'^;

duksata^ and dhuksata.

PI.

3.

amrksanta

(Ywj-)Injunctive.

Active. Sing. 2. duksas, mrksas (ymrs-).

3. dviksat (^dvis-, AV.).
PI. 2. mrksata {Ymrs-).
Middle. Sing. 3. duksata^ and dhuksata {Yduh-), dviksata {Ydvis-,
AV.).
PI. 3. dhuksdnta {Yduh-).

Imperative.

Active. Du. 2.
(Y^mrj-).
Middle. Sing. 2. dhuksdsva {yduh-).

mrksatam

3.

yaksatam yyaj-).

6 Three forms occur accented thus

the
In the Mss. vajnsisTya;
see Whitney's
root is, however, accented in dhuksata.
note on AV. IX. IH.
7 See above 32 b.
2 With precative s.
8 See above 32 b.
3 In the Mss. pyaHsiviahi; see Whitney's
'
9 In IX. 1 108 the form adhuksata seems
note on AV. VII. 81^.
to be a 3. pi.
4 Variant for rasiya of the RV.
5 With for i. AVERY 261 gives the form
;

as yasisid,
Indo-arische Philologie.

I.

1.

25

386

AlXGEMEINES UND SPRACHE.

I.

183184.

p.

VeDIC GRAMMAR.

The Future System.

IV.
Delbruck, Verbum

4.

Sanskrit Grammar 931941; Roots 228

Zur Sprachgescliichte 86 87.

f.

Avery, Verb-Inflection 262.

AV. Index Verbonim

380.

Whitney,

v.

Negelein,

The Stem

formed by adding -syd^ or (rather less frequently

is
537.
connecting -?'-) -isyd^ to the root, which gunates a final or a prosodiAs the subjunctive frequently has a future sense,
cally short medial vowel.
and even the present indicative may have it, the occasion for the use of
actual future forms seldom arises in the RV., which forms a future stem from
only fifteen roots, while the AV. does so from more than thirty (about eight
There is only one subjunctive and
of these occurring in the RV. also) '
one conditional form, but some twenty participles occur.
a. In the following sterns the suffix -sya is added direct: isi- 'abide'
dah- 'burn' dhak-syd-; yaj- 'sacrifice' -.yak/ese-syd-i; ji- 'conquer' -.je-syd-;

with

syd-; vac- 'speak'

/-

'go'

da- 'give'

gop-sya-;

ya-

'go'

vak-syd-; su- 'bring forth

krt- 'cut'

e-syd-;

ya-syd-; yuj-

kram-

kari-sya-;

da-syd-;

vak-syd-; vrt- 'turn'

ni-

'lead'

av-isyd-'^;

jan-isya-; bhu- 'be'

as- 'shoot'

bhav-isyd-;

ne-sya-;

AV.

also occur:

kram-syd-; gtip- 'protect'

mt/i- 'mingere'

mek-syd-^;

radh- 'succeed' rat-sya-; vah- 'carry'

sak-sya-^;
sat-sya-; sah- 'prevail'
bhant-syd-.
ho-syd-. In the VS. bandh- 'bind'

sad-

'stride'

'join' yyok-sya-'^;

-vart-syd-T

ha- 'leave' ha-sya- ; hii- 'sacrifice'

b. In the following stems the
av- 'favour'

In the

sii-sya-''.

man-

'fall'

suffix

is

'think'

added with connecting

kr- 'do'

as-isyd-;

-/'-:

kar-isyd-; jan- 'beget'

man-isyd-; va- 'weave'

vay-isyd-'^

san- 'acquire' san-isyd-; sr- 'hasten' sar-isyd-; stu- 'praise' siav-isyd-. From
causative stems: ^/4/-- 'support' dharay-isyd-; vas- 'clothe oneself vasay-isyd-.
:

The AV. has

'maintain'

the following additional stems:

dhar-isyd-; nas- 'disappear'

7nar-isya-\ vad- 'speak'

isyd-'^^;

han-

'slay'

isya-; vr- 'cover'

'go'

'fly'

gatn-isya-; dhr-

pat-isyd-; inr- 'die'

vart-isya-}^ ; svap- 'sleep'

From causative

stems:

dus- 'spoil'

svap-

dusay-

varay-isya- 'shield'.

538. a. Subjunctive.
in

nas-isja-; pat-

vad-isya-; vrt- 'turn'

hati-isyd-.

gam-

The

only subjunctive form occurring

is

kar-isyd{-s)

IV. 30^^. '3

The only example occurring is formed from bhr- 'bear'

was going to bear off' (11. 30^).
Participles. A good many participial forms occur. The following

b. Conditional.
:

d-bkar-isya-t 'he
c.

stems are met with:

Active.

av-isyd7it-^^, as-isydnt-, e-sydnt-{K}I)^^, kar-isydnt-, kse-sydnt-,

Man-

isydnt- (TS.), je-sydjit-^'' (AV.), da-sydnt- (AV.), dhak-sydnt-, pat-isydnt- (AV.),

1 On
the origin of this suffix see Brug7 See Whitney's note on AV. xv. (P
8 An emendation
MANN, Grundriss 2, 747 fp. 1092), who consee note on saksye.
nects the -isya form with the is- aorist; and
9 Cp. Delbruck, Verbum p. 184.
'o Op. cit.
V. Negelein, Zur Sprachgeschichte 85.
p. 183.
n In the form dnvartisye for dmt-variisye;
2 According to Whitney 937 the future
from
over
60 roots in the TS. but see p. II, 18.
is formed
12 See Whitney's note on
I am uncertain how many of these occur
AV. xix. 479.
13 The form karifya (l. 1659) is probably to
in independent Mantra passages.
3 This is the only stem in which -sya is
be explained as the same
subjunctive
to be read -sia ksesidntas.
(= karisyds) cp. BR. sv. karisya.
14 Cp. Delbruck, Verbum p. 183.
stem has the double irregularity
4 This
15 \-a praisydn (AV. V. 2214), Pp. p-a-esydn,
of accenting the root and not taking Guna:
:

cp. the perfect sasiiva.

5

The

1021: cp.
6

Mss.

read

Whitney's

but

meksami in AV.

vli.

note.

Doubtful reading see noKe.^ ^.>,%'] onyoksye.

16

Whitney

= fra-isyan.

In AV. XV. 201 nearly all the Mss. read

jyesydn (as if from yjyd-) iox jesydn.

VII. Verb.

Future System.

387

bhar-isydnt- (TS.), bhav-isydnt- (AV. VS.), ya-sydnt- (AV.), vac- 'speak'

vak-sydnt-,

vay-isydntr, san-isydnt-, sar-isydnt-, sU-syant-, han-isydnt-.

Middle, kramsyd-mana- {KY.), Janisyd-mana-

(y?,.-i^vm.e,),

yaksyd-mana-,

stavisyd-mana- (AV.).

Future Indicative.
539. The future

is

The forms

of the a- conjugation.
if

made from

actually

be the following:
karisydmi. 2. karisydsi. ^. karisydii.
T>m.2. karisyatkas
karisyatas (AV.).
PI. i. karisydmas and karisydmasi (AV.). 2. kar3. karisyanti (AV.).

Active.
(TS.).

both active and middle, Uke the present

met with in the Samhitas would,

inflected, in

3.

isydtha.

kr- 'do',

Sing.

Middle.

I.

Sing.

The forms

karisye.

i.

karisyase.

2.

karisyate.

3.

actually occurring are the following:

Active. Sing. I. esyami(AY.), karisyami{KV.), karisyamiiNN.), carisyatni

(VS. 1.5), jesydmi,

bhantsydmi

VS.

(lAi^i^W/J-,

xxii. 4)

',

meksyimi'^

(AV.),

vaksydmi (Yvac-), stavisydmi.

2. karisydsi, jesyasii^S.y.ysii.^l), b/iavisyasi{A.Y.), marisyasi{KY.), ratsyasi {Yradh-, AV.), vaksyasi {^vac-, TS.11.6. i25), sanisyasi, hanisyasi (AV.).
nasisyati (AV.), nesyati (AV.), patisyati
3. karisyati, gamisyati (AV.),

(AV.),
VI. 2),

bhavisydti, marisyati (AV.),

hanisyati (AV.).

Du.
iYvak;

karisyathas

2.

(TS.

iv.

vadisyati (AV.),

i. 9^).

3.

sanisyati, sthasyati (VS.

marisyaias (AV.),

vaksyatas

KSf.).

PI.

1.

bharisyamas (VS.

xi. 16),

vaksyAmas (Yvac-), svapisydmasi (AV.).

2. karisydtha, bhavisyatha, sarisyatha (AV.).

3. gofsyanti ^^gup-, AV.), satsyanti i^sad-, AV.), hasyanti i^hd-, AV.).

Middle. Sing.
jfl/^jjifS

(y'j-a/^-j

i.

AV.).

dharisye (AV.), manisye, yoksye^ (AV.), vartisye^ (AV.),

2.

stavisyase.

3. janisyate, stavisyate (AV.).

Periphrastic Future.

common in the later language, there seems to be an

TS.v.7.7': anvaganta yajndpatir vo dtra 'the
example inVS.xviii. 59
sacrificer is following after you here', a modification of AV. 1.123'anvaganta
yajatnanah svastl, which Whitney translates 'the sacrificer follows after wellOf this

540.

formation,

incipient

^'-

being' *-

V. Secondary Conjugation.
As opposed

541.

to the

primary conjugation, there are four derivative

formations in which the present stem is used throughout the inflexion of

the verb and is everywhere accompanied by the specific sense connected
with that stem. The forms which occur outside the present system are, how-

The

ever, rare.

the causative,

four derivative formations are the desiderative, the intensive,

and the denominative.

I.

Delbruck, Verbum
Sanskrit

Grammar

542.
derative

1026

Though
is

The

Desiderative.

Avery, Verb-Inflection 230, 268 270.

Whitney,
184 186.
v. Negelein, Zur Sprachgeschichte 8890.
1040; Roots 2335.

p.

the least frequent of the secondary conjugations, the desiwith first, as being akin in derivation and

perhaps best dealt

3 All the Mss. in AV. xix. ly- read yokse

1
In AV. III. 95 Roth and Whitney's
edition reads bharisyami; but Whitney, note (but Paipp. yoksye).
4 In anvartisye (AV. XIV. 156) given under
on that passage, would emend this to
bhantsyami {]/bandh-), and Shankar Pandit the root art- by Whitney, AV. Index Verborum; see p. 386, note ^i.
reads bhatsyami.
2

Whitney's emendation for meksami of

see his note on AV. vil. 1021.
J

the Mss.

The

Cp.

IMss. in AV. 11. 27s read sakse.

Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar 946.

25*

388

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

the last of the primary verbal formations treated

meanino- to the future',

Vedic Grammar.

4.

is formed from the root with an accented

and the suffix -sa, which expresses the desire for the
action or condition denoted by the root; e. g. pa- 'drink' pi-pa-sa- 'desire to
Desiderative stems from fewer than sixty roots are met with in the
drink'.

The

desiderative

540).
above (537
reduplicative syllable

Samhitas.

which appears in all

The characteristic reduplicative vowel is
stems except those formed from roots containing u (which reduplicate with u)
and the root generally remains unchanged. Thus jha- 'know' -.ji-jna-sa- (AV.);
jya- 'overpower' ji-jya-sa-; da- 'give' di-da-sa-; pa- 'drink' pi-pa-sa-; tij- 'be
/',

sharp'

nid- 'blame'

ti-tik-sa-;

mi-mik-sa-;

'hmt'

ris-

ri-rik-sa-

bhid-

ni-nit-sa-;

'\e&d'

jit-

'split'

U-ihit-sa-; mis- 'mix'

guh- 'hide' ju-guk-sa-'^ ; duh- 'milk' du-duk-sa-''; mucyudh- 'fight' yu-yut-sa-; ruh- 'ascend' ru-ruk-sa-; bhu:

'pierce'

trp- 'dehght'

ti-trt-sa-;

vi-vrt-sa-; srp- 'creep'

a.
'cross'

'be'

di-drk-sa-;

with a long vowel:

man-

bi-hhat-sa-;

'think'

trd-

vrt- 'turn'

fur-

(=

//-)

mt-mam-sa- (AV.)

the other hand, two desideratives abbreviate the reduplicaconsonant; thus yaj- 'sacrifice' i-yak-sa- for
its

by dropping

syllable

mii-muk-sa-;

bii-bhu-sa- ;

si-srp-sa-.

bad/i- 'oppress'

On

drs- 'see'

tl-trp-sa-;

few desideratives reduplicate

tii-tur-sa-;

'investigate'.

tive

'release'

pri- 'lovs' .pi-pn-sa-;

ni-ni-sa-;

perhaps through the influence

of iyak-sa-; and the RV. has one desiderative form from ap- 'obtain' in which

*yi-yak-sa-

nas- 'attain'

the reduplication

i-nak-sa-, for *ni-nak-sa-,

dropped altogether: ap-santa.

The radical vowel

b.

becoming

latter

is

yi'i-yu-sa-;

ir);

thus

sru- 'hear'

'win'

kr- 'make'

i,

'conquer'

ci-ki-sa-; ji:

ci-kir-sa-

or

u,

is

(AV.);

final

yu-

-.ji-gl-sa-;

(the

'unite'

hr- 'take'

du dhur-sa- with u because vowel and semi-

roots with medial a followed by n or m lengthen the

Mn- 'smite' :ji-gMm-sa-; gam'thiak' .mt-mam-sa- (AV.)
ji-gaTU-sa- (AV.); two others do so after dropping the nasal, viz. va7i-

A few

ft..

vowel;
:

su-sru-sa-;

dhvr- 'injure'
vowel have interchanged*.

ji-hir-sa- (AV.);

'go'

lengthened when

is

'see'

ci-

thus

man-

vi-va-sa-;

and san-

'gain'

si-sd-sa-^.

on the other hand, the radical vowel

In nearly a dozen roots,

c.

is

weakened.
is reduced to T and, in one instance,
even
(SV.); pa- 'drink' pi-pi-sa- (RV.) beside pi-pa-sa-;
ha- 'go forth' ji-hT-sa-i (AV.); dha- 'put' di-dhi-sa- (RV.) beside dhit-sa-.
2. Half a dozen roots containing a ox a shorten the root by syncopation
resulting in contraction with the reduplicative syllable; da- 'give'
dit-sa-, for
dha- 'put' dhi-t-sa-, for di-d/i-\aYsa-, beside didl-d\a\-sa-, beside di-da-sa-;
dhi-sa-; dabh- 'harm' di-p-sa-, for di-d\a\bh-sa-; labh- 'take'
li-p-sa- (AV.), for

In a few roots final a

1.

ga-

i^; thus

'go' -.ji-gT-sa-

li-l\d\bh-sa-; sak- 'be able'

similarly

sl-sia^k-sa-;
'thrive'

iri-sa-

a. In a

si-k-sa-,

initial

(AV.) the

initial

ap- 'obtain'

in

for si-s[a"\k-sa-; sah- 'prevail'

is

treated as

zp-sa-^

if it

(AV.);

were

si-k-sa-,

and

in

for

fdk-

ar-^.

few roots the consonants undergo exceptional changes; thus palatals revert

to the original guttural in

ci-

'note'

d-ki-sa-;

cit-

'perceive'

ci-kit-sa-; ji-

'conquer'

-.ji-gT-sa-;

Cp. V, Negelein %(i.

5 As in the past participle 574, 2 a.
See above 32 b.
6 As in the past participle
574, 3.
3 Cp. V. Negelein 68, note 2. The i being
7 In AV. XX. 1272 the Mss. read jihisate
the reduplicative vowel, cannot be explained probably for jihTdate.
in the same way as that of the perfect
8 Cp. Brugmakn 2, 854, 1027.
i-yaj- for '*ya-ya,j-, where i- has the nature
9 V. Negelein (89, note ) thinks irisd- can
of Sanaprasarana.
only be explained from i-irdh-sa-.
4 Cp. ydlvdyii-ta- etc., below 573 a.
1

Future System.

VII. Verb.
kan-

's\3.y'

ji-ghdm-sa-.

In ghas-.

Secondary Conjugation.

the final

'eat'

j-

becomes

before the

389
of the suffix:

ji-ghat-sa-^ (A^V.).

The

p.

desiderative suffix -sa is never added in the RV. with the connecting vowel
one example of this formation in the AV,, viz. pat- 'fly' -.pi-pat-i-sa-^.

->; but there is

Inflexion.

The

543.
tion

desiderative

inflected regularly like verbs of the a- conjuga-

is

both voices, having the moods and participles of the present

in

No

as well as an imperfect.

tense,

forms outside the present system occur in the RV.

with the exception of the perfect from mis-, mi-miks-iir^ etc. (in which, however, the desiderative stem is treated as a root) besides two aorist forms and
oiie passive participle in the AV. *.
The forms of the present indicative, active and middle, which actually

would
Active.

occur,

vivasatas.

3.

if

Middle.

made from

Sing.

vi-va-sa-

'desire to win',

be

vivasami. 2. vivasasi. 3. vivasati.

i. vivasamas.
3. vivdsanii.

i.

PI.

Sing.

vivase.

i.

2.

vivasase.

3.

vivasate.

as follows;

Du.

2.

PI. i.

vivasathas.

vivUsamahe.

v'wasante.

544. Forms occurring elsewhere in the present system are the following:
Subjunctive. Active. Sing. 3. jighamsat (TS.), tUrpat, dipsat

a.

PI. 3. iyaksan, titrtsan, vivasan.

(TS. AV.), nlnitsat, vivasat.
Middle.
b. Injunctive. Active. Sing. 3. inaksat, cikitsat, vivasat.
PI. 3. apsanta, didhisanta, siksanta.
3. vivaset.
Active. Sing. i. ditseyam, vivaseyam.
c. Optative.
PI.

didkisema, vivasema.

I.

d.

Imperative.

3. cikitsatu (AV.).

Middle. Sing.

i.

didhiseya.

Active. Sing. 2. cikitsa, dipsa (AV.), mimiksa, vivasa.

3. mimiksatam.
2. mimiksatam, sisasatam.

Du.

3. didhisantu.
PI. 2. cikitsata (TS.), vivasata.
Active, inaksant-, iyaksant-, ipsant- (AV.), trtsante. Participles.
(AV.), cikitsant-, jighamsant-, diisant-, dipsant-, duduksant-, pipisant-, bubhusant-^
yuyutsant-, yuyusdni-, ririksant- {Yris-), ruruksant- i^ruh-), vlvasant-, sisasant-,
Middle, lyaksamana-, trtsamana- (AV.), Ji^tsamana-,
sisrpsant-, stksant-.

mumtiksamana-, lipsamana- (AV.), siksamana-iTS.), susrusatnana-; and with

-ana: didhisana-.
f.

Active. Sing.

Imperfect.

2.

dsisSsas.

3. ajighamsat, asisasat.

PI. 3. dyuyutsan, dsisasan; duduksan, bibhitsan.

Sing. 2. acikitsis (AV.), irtsis (AV.).
g. Aorist.
No finite form of the passive seems to occur in the Samh. Passive.
occurs, mimamsydmanahitas; of participles, no certain form of the present
one form has been
only
past
of
the
and
6'*)^
conjecture;
being
a
(AV.'ix.

noted: mimamsitd- (AV.

ix. 6^*)^.

Gerundive. Two regular forms occur: didrks-enya- 'worthy to be

There are also one or
susrus-enya- (TS.) 'worthy to be heard'.
and
seen'
paprks-inya- 'to
two irregular formations: didrks-iya- 'worthy to be seen' and
i.

be asked'
k.

(unless

from

aorist stem)?.

Verbal adjective.

the RV.)

considerable

number (more than a dozen

with the
of verbal adjectives are formed from the desi derative stem

Cp. Whitney's note in his translation;

grammar 1039 he quotes rurutsyamana
lyrudA-) from K. 37, 12 {apa-).
^Whitney 1037 quotes the gerund wamamdes. of
3 According to Grassmann, perf.
sitva from K.
mih- 'mingere'; cp. Whitney, Roots, s. v. miks.
7 See below, Gerundive 580.
lost
4 In all these forms the stems have
cp.
meaning:
desiderative
distinct
their
J

See above 44

a,

The

Whitney

1033.

I.

desiderative of 7Woccurs in VS. XL. (Ts'a Up.).

2

'live', /yTw-j-ja-,

in his

39

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

suffix

They have

-u.

of a

value

the

Vedic Grammar.

4.

participle governing a case;

present

thus iyaks-u- 'wishing to sacrifice'; y^^^J-^^ 'wishing to conquer'; didhis-t'i- 'desiring

to win'; dips-u- 'wishing to injure'; vivaks-u- (AV.) from vac- 'speak'; sisas-u'eager to win'

'.

2.

Intensives.

Delbruck, Verbum p. 130 134.

Avery, Verb-Inflection 230, 270272.
Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar 1000 1025; Roots 232 f.
v. Negelein,
Zur Sprachgeschichte 7880.
Lindner, Altindische Nominalbildung 10 (p. 48) and 21 c (participles).
BuRCHARDi, Die Intensiva des San.skrit und Avesta. Teil I. Halle 1892;
Teilll. BB. 19, 169-225.

The

545.

intensification

common
stem

intensive or, as

or

is

also often called, the frequentative implies

by

expressed

sense

made from over 90

being

formation,

it

of the

repetition

the

root^.

It is

The

roots in the Samhitas.

by means of a reduplicative syllable, the

that it always has a strong form.
The
reduplicative syllable may be formed in three different ways
r. radical i u
are always reduplicated with a Guna vowel, and a and r (ar) often with a;
2. roots
containing r or a followed by r I n m more usually reduplicate
with a and liquid or nasal; 3. a considerable number of intensives interpose
the vowel between the reduplicative syllable and the root.
1. a. Roots containing f or u reduplicate with e or 0; thus a'/- 'perderived from the root
feature of which

is

characteristic

is

ceive'

m-

cekit-;

'lead'

pis- 'adorn'

'tremble'

vij-

rih-;

'be sharp'

tij-

ne-ni-;

de-dis-y

mi- 'damage'

pe-pis-;

vid- 'find'

ve-vij-;

dis- 'point'

ti-tij-;
:

vi-vid-;

vis-

'wash'

nij-

me-mi-;

ne-nij-;

rih- 'lick'

'be active'

ve-vis-;

re-

vt-

se-sidh-; gu- 'sound' -.jo-gu-; dhu- 'shake'

do-dhu-;
pruth- 'snort' po-pruth- ; hhu- 'be' bo-bhu-; yu- 'join'
yo-yu-; yu- 'separate' yo-yu-; ru- 'cry'
ro-ru-; ru- 'break'
ro-ru-; sue- 'gleam'

'enjoy'

ve-vi-; sidh- 'repel'

nu- 'praise'

no-nu-;

so-su-; sku- 'tear'

co-sku-; hu- 'call' jo-hu-.
a dozen roots with medial a (ending in mutes or sibilants,
and one in ni), as well as three with final -r, reduplicate with a: kas'appear' ca-kas-; gam- 'go' -.ja-gam-; nad- 'sound' na-nad-; pat- 'fall' -.papat-; badh- 'oppress'
ba-badh-; raj- 'colour' rA-raj-; randh- 'make subject'
raraiidh-; rap- 'chatter' ra-rap-; lap- 'prate' la-lap-; vac- 'speak' va-vac-;
:

so-suc-; su- 'generate'

b.

More than
:

vad- 'speak' va-vad-; vas- 'be eager' va-vas-; vas- 'bellow' vA-vas-; svas'blow' sa-has-; gr- 'wake' -.ja-gr-; dr- 'split' da-dr-; dhr- 'hold' da-dhr-;
:

also cal-

'stir'

ca-cal- (AV.).

All other roots containing r (and dr- and dhr- alternatively) and
medial a followed by r /, or a nasal, reduplicate with -ap,
-al or -an, -am.
Thus:
kr- 'commemorate'
a.
car-kr- and car-kir-;
krs- 'drag' car-krs-; gr2.

several

with

'swallow' -.jdr-gur-

zxA

jal-gul-;

tr-

'cross'

(RV.);

tar-tr-

dr-

'split'
ddr-drdhr- 'hold' ddr-dhr-; brh- 'make strong' bdr-brh-; bhr- 'bear'
.jar-bhr-i; mrj- 'wipe'
mar-j>irj'-; mrs- 'touch'
mar- mrs-; vrt- 'turn' var-

and

dar-dir-;

vrt-; sr-

'flow'

sar-sr-; hrs- 'be excited' \jar-hfs-.

b. car- 'move' car-car- (AV.); cal- 'stir' -calcal- (MS.) beside -ca-cal(AV.); phar- 'scatter' (?) par-phar-; kram- 'stride' can-kram-; gam- 'go' -.jafigam-; jambh- 'chew up' jan-jabh-; tarns- 'shake' tan-tas-; dams'- 'bite' : dandas-; nam- 'bend' nan-nam-; yam- 'reach' -.yam-yam-; stan- 'thunder' /;:

Stan- (AV.).
I
Grassmann, p. 1727, gives a list of the
desiderative adjectives in -sii occurring in
the RV. (about 15); four occur in the AV.:
cikitsu-, jighatsu; dipu-, bibhatsu- ; cp. WHITNEY 1038.

The specific meaning of the formation

wanting in the intensives of gr- 'wake',

"
is

cU- 'perceive', nij- 'wash', vis- 'work'.

3 The palatal/ in the reduplication is like
that of Mr- in the perfect formya-Mara (482 d).

VII. Verb.
"

391

show

intensives

Secondary Conjugation.

irregularities in the reduplicative syllable; thus r- 'go'

f^"".
/-ay- (dissimilation); g-aA- 'plunge' -.jah-gah(from a root which otherwise has no nasal
in inflected forms) i; bddh- 'oppress': bad-badh(only example of a final mute being reduplicated); gur- 'greet' and bhur. 'quiver'
reduplicate with a: jar-gur- a.nA Jar-bhur-K
In
a
few
roots containing r or r the radical syllable varies; thus gf- 'swallow' :
p.
jar-gur- 3.-a6.jal-gul-; car- 'move' car-cur- beside car-car-;
ir- 'cross' tar-tur-hes\Ae iar-lar-.
:

Over twenty roots with final or penultimate nasal, r, or u, interpose an / (or i if the vowel would be long by position) between the reduplicative syllable and the root:
a.
krand- 'cry out' kan-i-krand- and kan-i-krad-; gam- 'go' gan-T-gam(but gan-i-gm-at); pan- 'admire' pd7i-i-pan-; />/5a- 'spring' pdn-i-phan-;
icand3.

'shine'

can-i-scad- ; saji- ^ 'gain'

i-skad-; syand- 'flow'

san-i-san-; skand- 'leap'

sdn-i-syad-; svan- 'sound'

kan-i-skand- and can-

san-i-svan-; han- 'slay'

ghan-

iar-t-tr-;

bhr-

i-ghan-.

b.
'bear'

kr- 'make'

bhar-i-bhr-,

and

kar-i-kr-

vr- 'cover'

car-i-kr-

var-t-vr-;

(AV.)

tr- 'cross'

3;

vrj- 'twist'

vdr-i-vrj-

vrt- 'turn'

var-i-vrt-.

C.
z-2^-;

/- 'be strong'

(^^

'shine'

tdv-I-tu-;

dhu- 'shake'

ddv-i-dhu-;

nu- 'praise'

aV

ddv-i-dyut-.

a. Primary Form.
Present Indicative.
546. With the exception of eight or nine verbs, which take a secondary
form (inflected in the middle only and identical in appearance with a passive),

the intensive
is

that

inflected like the third conjugational class. The only difference

inserted between the root and terminations beginning with

is

may be

consonants; it is common in the i. and 3. sing. ind. act., and is also sometimes found to occur in the 2. 3. du. ind. and the 2. 3. sing, imperative and
imperfect activet.
The forms actually found, if made from the intensive of

would be the following in the indicative:

Active. Sing. i. nenej-mi and nenej-t-mi. 2. nenek-si. 3. nenek-ti and
nmej-i-ti.
Du. 2. nenej-i-thas^. 3. nenik-tds.
PI. i. nenij-mas and ne?iijmasi (AV.). 3. nenij-ati.
Middle. Sing. i. nenij-e. 3. nenik-te.
Du. 3. nenij-ate.
PI. 3. nenij-ate.
The forms actually met with are:
Active. Sing. i. carkarmi, vevesmi (AV.); cakasinii, johavimi, dardarnij- 'wash',

fmi.

alarsi, jagarsi (Kh.

2.

kranti, ganiganti, janghanti,

11.

3),

ddrdarsi, ddrdharsi.

varivarii

and vdrvarti^;

3. dlarti,

-calcaliti

kdni-

(MS.m. 13');

carcariti (AV.), cdkasiti, jarbhuriti, jalgulUi (TS.), johaviti, tartariti, dardariH,

ndnnamTti t,

dodhavtti,

nonaviti, papatiti, bobhaviti, yamyamiti, rarajtti (AV.),

rarapTti, roraviti, lalapTti (AV.), vavaditi, sosavTti.

Du.

2. tartarJthas^.

PI.

I.

3. jarbhrtds.

nomemas and nonumasi (AV.).

nanadati, bkarib/irati, vdrvrtati.

Middle.

Sing.

i.

joguve.

Though it has in nominal derivatives;

Whitney, Roots, s. v. gah; cp. BurCHARDi, BB. 19, 179; V. Negelein 79-

3.

2
3

Cp. p. 390, note 3.

In the participle kdrikr-at and -cdrikr-ai

(AV.).
4

This f never occurs

contains t:
but never

thus

if

the reduplication

no-nav-i-ti

*navi-nav-t-ti,

and nav-i-no-t,
Delbruck,

Cp.

p. 13 1; v. Negelein 79.
For *nenik-thas; the only 2.

Verbum
5

occurs

is

du.

iartar-i-ihas for *iartf-thas.

s.

3. jfrgrati (AV.),

tetikte,
6

see

v.
7

For

de'diste,

ddvidyutaii,

ndnnate^,

vdrvart-ti, varTvai-i-ti; cp.

nenikte.

Grassmann,

vri.

See note
Cp. note

9.
5.

sonant nasal) for

9 With loss of nasal [a
*ndnnan-te{i. 1406). AuFRECHT, RV^., and Max
MULLER, K\^.,\ixitendmna-te{a\so Padapatha)
but the participle ndnnamat (via. 438), AUFRECHT ndnn-. Max Muller ndmn-; the3.sing.

ndnnamitHy. %'^) AuFRECHT^, ndvinamiti Max

which MULLER2 ; similarly ndnnamdne (x, 82') AUFRECHT, ndmnanidne Max Muller (also Pp.).

392

I.

with

sarsrte;

yoyuve, sarsrl

Allgemeines und Sprache.

-e for

-^e:

Du.

c^kite,

3. sarsrate.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

jdngahe, joguve,

and babadhe,

badbadhi^

PI. 3. dedisate.

2. jagarasp
janghdnani.
carkrsat, cekitat, jdnghanat,
jagarat (AV.), dardirat, davidyutat, parpharat, bdrbrhat, mdrmrjat, marmrsat,
PI. I. carkirama, veviddma.
3. carkiran,
Du. 1. Jahgka'nava.
sanisvanat.
('commemorate'), cakasan'^ {hN .), papatan, Usucan.
PI. 3. jdnghananta, jarhrsanta, tionuvanta,
Middle. Du. 3. iantasaite.

547. a. Subjunctive.
(AV.); janghanas, jalgulas.

Sing.

Active.

i.

3. caniskadat,

marmrjanta, sosucanta.
No
b. Optative.

form occurs in the RV. 3, and only two or

PI. I. jagryama (VS.
Sing. 3. vevisyat (AV.).

certain

other Samhitas:
TS. MS.), jagriyama (TS.
three

in

c.

I.

7. 10').

Examples

Imperative.

of

of

forms

all

the

2.

and

3.

persons are

pL, but no middle form has been met with.

2. carkrdhi (AV.) 'remember', jagr/ii, dardrhi, dadrhi,
7ienigdki {KY.), barbrki^; janghamhi (AV.), cakasihi (VS. TS.), iamstamhi
3. dardartu, marmartu, vevestu
(Av.).
With -iat: carkrtat, jagrtat^.

found excepting the

Active. Sing.

3.

Du. 2. jagrtam.
3. Jagrtam
vavaditu (AV.), johavitu (AV.).
(AV.).
PI. 2. jagrta (AV.), caiikramata^
548. Participle. Active, kdnikradat-, kdrikrat-, ghdnighnat-, -cdrikrat(AV.);

(AV.), cdkasat-, cikitat-, fdnghanat-, jdrbhurat-,jdgrat-, ddridrat- (IS. iv.e,. 10''),

ddvidyutat-, ndnnamat-, ndnadat-, pdnipnat-, pdniphanat-, p^pisat-,
bobhuvat- (AV.), mdrmrjat-, yoyuvat- (yu- 'ward oif'), rerihat-, rSruvat-, vdvasat-

ddrdrat-,

(vas- 'roar'), ve'visat-, sosucat-, shidhat-.

ana-,

{yu-

Middle?, cikitana-, jdnjabkana-{KV.), JdrbhurSna-, j'drkrsana-, ddndasndnnamana-, pepisana- (AV. TS.), bdbadkana-, mimyana-, yoyuvana'join'),

rorucana-, iostecana-, sdrsrana-.

participles badbadhand- and marmrjand- (beside mdrmrjana-),

though irregularly accented, unmistakably belong to the intensive, kdnikrat
once (ix. 63^) appears as an abbreviated ioxra oi kdnikrad-at. The participle
jdnghan-at- syncopates the radical vowel in the gen. sing.: jdhghn-at-as; another form of the intensive participle from the same root syncopates the radical
vowel throughout: ^/^iw^/4-a/-; a\so pdnipn-at-. The obscure form ^5,4iz (x. 29')
may be the nom. of an intensive participle with anomalous accent for cdkan-at^.
Altogether (including unaugmented forms, some of
549. Imperfect.
which are used injunctively) about thirty forms of the imperfect occur, among
them only four examples of the middle. In the active all persons are represented except the i. du. and the 2. pi.; but in the middle only the 3. sing,
and pi. are met with.
2. ofagar, adardar; dardar.
Active. Sing. i. acakasam dedisam.
3. adardar, adardhar, avarlvar; kdniskan, dardar, ddvidyot, ndvinot; djohavlt,
a.

The

dyoyavtt, droravtt, dvavacit.

Du. 2. adardrtam.
3. avavaktam.
(A v.), djohavur, adardirur, anonavur.
I

With irregular accent.

With double modal sign.

PI.

The

I.

marmrjmd.

3.

acarkrsur

participles rdrah-ana-, raraks-ana-,

and jahfs-ana- (beside JdrArs-ana-) are pro3 Cp. Whitney 1009 a.

bably perfect participles, although no other
4 For barbrh-hi, the final h being dropped perfect forms with a in the reduplicative
after being cerebralized before -dhi *bari^z- syllable occur from these roots (ra/i-, rah-,
'

dhi (58,

I b,

e).

This form occurs once in the AV, as a

person: cp. Whitney ion a.
6
With anomalous connecting -a- for
5

I.

; 62, 4

^cahkran-ta.

^r?-); cp. Whitney 1013.

8 I regard it
as 3. sing. perf. inj.
*cakdn-i(4,%,Z). Cp. Bartholomae, IF. 7, ni,

Grassmann, under the root kd-; Whitney,

Grammar 1013 b; Roots 17.

Sanskrit

VII. Verb.

Secondary Conjugation.

393

Middle.

Sing. 3. ddedista, dnannata^.

PI. 3. marmrjata'.
550. a. Perfect. A few perfect forms with intensive reduplication and
present sense are met with:
Active. Sing. i. jagara.
davidhava {dku- 'shake'),
3. jagara,

nSnava^ (nu-

'praise').

The only perfect participle occurring is jagrvdms-.

b. Aorist.
The only trace of an aorist being formed from the intensive
is cdrkr-s-e 'thinks of, 3. sing, mid., formed like hi-s-e and stu-s-e.
It occurs
three times in the RV., always with a present sense.

c. Causative.
causative formed frona the intensive is once found in
the participle varJvarj-dyant-i- (AV.) 'twisting about' (l/w/7-).

b.

Secondary Form.

551. The rare secondary form of the intensive is identical in meaning

with the primary.
In form it is indistinguishable from a passive, the suffix
-yd being added to the primary stem and the inflexion being the same as
that of the passive.
Altogether about a dozen forms have been met with

from nine

The only persons represented

roots.

and there

indicative;

3. pi.

is

are the

2.

and

3. sing,

The forms

also a present participle.

and

actually

occurring are the following:

Present indicative. Sing. 2. coskuydse.
dedisydte (AV. VS.),
3.
neniydte (Y^.), marmrjydte, rerihydte, vevij'ydte, vevtyate.
PL 3. tarturyante
(/Vr-), marmrjydnte.
Participle. carcurydmSna- {\^car-), nentydmana-, marmrjydmana-.

3.

Delbruck, Verbum
Sanskrit

Grammar

552.
action

The

p.

379

p.

The

Causative.

Avery,

Roots 235

209 216.

386;

f.

262268.
Negelein 4448.

Verb-Inflection
v.

causative verb expresses that

its

object

is

Whitney,

caused to perform

undergo the state denoted by the root; e. g. pdram evd

paravdtam sapdtnim gamayamasi (x. 145*) 'we cause our rival to go to the
far distance'. It is by far the commonest of the secondary conjugations, being
formed from over 200 roots in the Sarnhitas; but of about 150 causative
the

stems

or

to

appearing in

The stem

the

RV.

at

least one-third lack the causative

meaning.

formed by adding the suffix -dya to the root, which as a rule

Those verbs in which the root, though capable of being
is strengthened.
strengthened, remains unchanged, have not a causative"* but an iterative sense,
being akin in formation to denominatives s (which sometimes even have the
causative accent). The whole group may originally have had this meaning,
from which the causative sense was developed till it became the prevalent
one*. This may perhaps account for an iterative formation, the reduplicated
Both the iterative
aorist, having specially attached itself to the causative.
and the causative form are occasionally made from the same root; e. g.
patdya-ti 'flies about' and patdya-H 'causes to fly' beside the simple verb
is

,'

pdta-ti

'flies'.

*
MS. (l. 8^); the latter form is irregular in
p. 391, note 9.
Cp. B6htlingk's Lexicon, o. v.
avavasanta (yvds-) is probably a plu- accent.
perfect (p. 365, top).
3- I'4 Cp. Whitney 1042 b.
3 Whitney 1018 quotes also dodravaidnt5 Cp. V. Negelein 44.
and yoyava (ytc- 'sepa'run',) from the TS.,
6 Cp. Brugmann, kg. 698.
rate'), and lelaya {it- 'be unsteady') from the

See

394

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

The root

553.

and position of
'perceive'

cit-

'be hurt'
:

res-dya- 'injure';

not long by position) take Guna ; thus

meh-dya- 'cfeiise to rain'; risvid- 'know' ,?;/-;/- 'cause to knbw'; vip- 'tremble'
/

(if

cd-dya- 'teach'; mih- 'mingere'

ways according to the nature

in different

vowel.

its

medial

or

Initial

a.

strengthened

is

Vedic Grammar.

4.

vep-dya- 'shake'; vis- 'enter'

ves-dya- 'cause to enter'; vist- 'wrap'

(AV.) 'involve'; snih- 'be moist' sneh-dya- 'destroy';

b. kup- 'be agitated' kop-dya- 'shake' krudh- 'be angry'

vest-dya-

rage';

'be agitated':

/Jjwi/-

cud- 'impel'

^j-(7a'-ffya-

'shake'; ghiis- 'sound'

krodh-dya- 'en-

^/^^j-aya- 'proclaim';

cod-dya-, \^.; jus- 'enjoy' jos-dya- 'caress'; x^'^ 'shine' -.jyot-dya(AV.) 'enlighten'; tics- 'drip' tos-aya- 'bestow abundantly'; dyiit- 'shine' dyotaya- 'illumine'; pus- 'thrive' pos-aya- 'nourish'; budh- 'be awake' bodh-dya'waken'; muh- 'be dazed' moh-dya- 'bewilder'; yudh- 'fight' yodh-dya- 'cause
rudto fight'; yup- ^QEa.ct' yop-dya-, id.;
roc-dya- 'illumine';
rue- 'shins'
lubh- 'desire
'weep' rod-dya- 'cause to wail';
ruh- 'rise' roh-dya- 'raise';
eagerly' lobh-dya- 'allure';
soc-dya- 'set on fire'; subh- 'shine'
sue- 'flame'
:

sobh-aya- (AV.) 'adorn'; sus- 'grow dry'

c. rd- 'dissolve' (intr.)

trp- 'be pleased'

'dance'

'make

sos-dya- (AV.)

dry';

ard-dya- 'destroy'; krs- 'be lean': kars-dya- 'emaciate';

tarp-dya- 'delight';

nart-dya-

'cause to dance';

dars-dya- (AV.) 'show'; nrtbarh-dya- 'thrust';

'tear'
marj-dya-, id.; vrj- 'turn' varj-aya-

drs- 'see'

brh- or vrh-

mrc- 'injure' marc-dya-, id.; mrj- 'wipe'

(AV.) 'cause to turn'; vrt- 'roll' vart-dya- 'cause to revolve'; vrdh- 'grow'
vardh-dya- 'augment'; vrs- 'rain' vai-s-dya- 'cause to rain'; srdA- 'be bold'
sardh-dya- 'cause to be bold'; hrs- 'be excited' hars-dya- 'excite ;
d. kip- 'be adapted' kalp-dya- 'arrange'.
554. The following verbs, mostly lacking the causative ineaning, leave
the root unchanged: il- 'be quiet' il-dya- (AV.) 'cease'; cii- 'observe' cit:

dya- 'stimulate' (also cet-dya-^;

vip- 'quiver'

vip-dya- 'agitate' (also vep-aya-)

iuj- 'be eager'

:

ius-dya-

'shine'

tuj-dya- id.;

id.;

dyut-

ruc-aya-

id.

is

'shine'

tier-

ris-aya-

dyut-aya-

id.

(beside res-dya-');

'overwhelm'

tur-dya- id.; tus- 'be content'

ruc-

(beside dyot-aya- 'illumine');

id.

(beside roe-dya- 'illumine')

sue- 'shine'

sue-dya-

id.

(beside

subh- 'shine' subh-dya- id. (also sobh-aya- 'adorn' AV.).

dus-dya- id.
in dus- 'spoil'

soe-dya- 'illumine');

The vowel

ris- 'be injured'

lengthened

krp-dya- id.; mrd- 'be gracious' mrl-dya-'^ id.; sprh- 'be

eager' sprh-aya- id. In the case oi grabk- 'grasp', the root is even weakened:
grbh-dya- id.
krp- 'lament'

a.
Vowels long by nature or position remain unchanged, but the
stem, in this case, usually has the causative sense: ing- 'move' ing-dya- 'set
in motion'; iks- 'see'
iks-dya- 'cause to see'; mkk- 'swing'
inkh-dya- 'shake';
Tr- 'set in motion'
ir-dya- id.; jXv- 'live' jiv-dya- 'animate'; dip- 'shine' dipdya- 'kindle'; pid- 'press' -.pid-aya- (AV.) 'distress'; vi4- 'be strong' (in vil-ii:

'strong')

vTl-dya-

uks-aya- 'strengthen'; kud- (does not occur in the simple

sundh-aya- id.; sud- 'make pleasant'
sphurj- 'rumble' : sphurj-dya- id.;
:

kul-aya- 'scorch'; sundh- 'purify'

sud-dya-

id.;

'make strong'^;

uks- 'grow up'

form)

drmh- 'make

firm'

drmh-aya- (AV.) 'hold

fast';

Two

roots with medial f take Guna; srlv- 'fail' srev-aya- beside sriv-aya-i (AV.)
'lead astray';
hid- 'be hcstile' helaya- in the participle d-helayani- 'not angry';
while
a.

Negelein

'

Cp.

Delbruck

V.

denominative.

189, 4

46, note

regards

i.

vildya-

as

In

srtv-.

AV.

VI.

73=

all

the Mss. but one have

Vn. Verb.
two others already have
med-dya-

it

Secondary Conjugation.

in the root:

rej- 'tremble'

395

rej-aya- 'shake';

med- 'be

fat'

'fatten'.

An

medial a

not long by position) is lengthened

am-dya- 'be injured'; kam- 'desire'
kam-dya- 'love'; cat- 'hide oneself cat-dya- 'drive away'; chad- 'cover" chaddya- id.; tan- 'stretch' tan-aya- (AV.) 'make taut'; tap- 'burn'
tap-dya- (AV.)
cause to burn';
tras- 'be terrified'
tms-aya- (AV.) 'terrify'; nas- 'be lost'
nas-dya- 'destroy'; pad- 'go', 'fall' pad-dya- 'cause to fall'; phan- 'bound' phanaya- 'cause to bound'; bhaj- 'divide' bhaj-aya- 'cause to share'; bhras- 'fall'
bhras-dya- 'cause to fall'; man- 'think' man-ava-'' {KSf.) 'esteem'; yat- 'stretch'
yat-dya- 'unite'; yam- 'guide' -.yam-aya- CP^.ydm-) 'present'; tap- 'pra.ts' lap-aya(AV.) 'cause to cry'; 7'at- 'apprehend' vat-dya- 'inspire'; vari- 'win' van-ay a(AV.) 'conciHate' (Pp. z/aw-); vas- 'dwell, wai--aya- 'cause to stay'; z/aj- 'wear'
vas-dya- 'clothe'; vas- 'shine' vas-aya- 'illumine'; sat-^ 'cut in pieces' s'at-dya(AV.) id.t; s'vas- 'snort' svas-aya- (AV.) 'cause to resound'; spas- 'see' spas-dya'show'; svap- 'sleep' svap-aya- 'send to sleep'.
a.
Five or six other causatives optionally retain the a: gam- 'go'
555-

in

some

or a

initial

am-

thirty roots:

(if

'be injurious'

gam-dya- and gam-aya- (RV.) 'bring'; das- 'waste away' das-ay a- and das-ay a(AV.) 'exhaust'; dhvan- 'disappear' dhvan-aya- (RV.) and dhvan-aya- (RV.)
:

'cause to disappear'; pat-

'fall'

pat-dya-

'fly

about' (in

RV. only

once,

i.

169?,

and pat-dya- 'cause to fall'; mad- 'be exhilarated' wa(/-a>a- (AV.)

and mad-dya- 'rejoice'; ram- 'rest' ram-dya- and ram-dya- 'cause to rest'.
556. Some twenty-five roots with initial or medial a (short by position)
remain unchanged, as the causative meaning is mostly absent: an- 'breathe'
'cause to

fall')

-an-dya- (AV.) 'cause to breathe'; chad- 'seem'

jan-dya:

dam-dya-

chad-dya-

id.;

jan- 'beget'

'make haste' tvar-dya- (AV.) 'quicken'; damdhan- 'set in motion' dhan-dya- id.; dhvas- 'disperse'

tvar-

id.;
id.;

'control'
(intr.)

nad-dya- 'cause to resound'; nam- 'bend'

(tr. ~and intr.)
nam-aya- 'cause to bend', 'strike down'; pan- 'admire' pan-dyaprath-dya- id.; mah- 'be great' mah-dya- 'magnify'; rajid.; prath- 'spread out'

dhvas-dya-

'scatter'

(tr.);

nad-

'roar'

raf-aya- (AV.) id.; ran- 'rejoice' ran-dya- id. and 'gladden'; vyathvyath-dya- 'cause to fall'; sam- 'be quiet' sam-dya- (AV.) 'appease';
snath- 'pierce' snath-ay a- id.; srath- 'loosen' srath-dya- id.; stan- 'thunder'
stan-dya- id.; svad- 'enjoy', 'sweeten' svad-dya- id.; svan- 'sound' svan-aya'colour'

'waver'

id.

svar- 'sound'

svar-dya- (AV.)

id. s

long by nature or position medial

causative sense being more often lacking than
a.

If

remains unchanged,

a.

present: thus arc- 'shine'

the
arc-

ay a- 'cause to shine'; kas- 'appear' kas-dya- (AV.) 'cause to be viewed';

krand- 'roar' krand-dya- 'cause to roar'; caks- 'see' caks-aya- 'cause to appear';
chand- 'sQQxa! chand-aya- {&..; jambh- 'chew up', 'crash' .Jambh-dya-iA.; tamstams-dya-\^.; dambh- 'destroy' dambh-dya- id.; badh- 'oppress'
'set in motion'
badh-aya- (AV.) 'force'; bhaks- 'partake of bhaks-dya- id.; mamh- 'bestow'
mamh-dya id.; mand- 'gladden' mand-dya- 'satisfy'; yac- 'ask' yac-dya- (AV.)
'cause to be asked for'; ramh- 'hasten' ramh-dya- (AV.) id.; randh- 'make
raj-aya- (AV. TS.) 'be king'; radh- 'succeed'
raj- .'rule'
subject' randh-dya- id.
radh-aya- (AV.) 'make successful'; vaks- 'grow' vaks-aya- 'cause to grow';
:

4 No form or derivative of the simple

1 Finite forms of the simple root chad- do
not occur; the part, channa- is found in B. root sat- occurs in V. ; see Whitney, Roots,
2 In AV. XV. 102 the
reading should be s. v. sat.
5 Occurring only in the participle svarayanimanayet; see Whitney's note.
3 In AV. IV. 184 sapaya, vifhich would be am (AV. XIII. 22), which Whitney translates
the causative of iap-, is probably a wrong 'shining'.
reading; cp. Whitney's note.

396

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

sa7ns- 'proclaim'

Vedic Grammar.

sams-dya- 'cause to proclaim'; svanc- 'spread' svanc-dya- 'cause

syand-aya- id.; srams- 'fall' sramsaya- (AV.)
'flow'
:

syand-

to spread out';

'cause to

4.

fall'.

557. Final /, u, r take Guna or Vrddhi, the latter being commoner.

a. The only example of a causative stem from a root ending in an zvowel is that of /esi- 'possess', which takes Guna: ksay-dya- 'cause to dwell
securely'.

Guna

b. Final u takes
'run'

drav-aya-

or Vrddhi; cyu- 'waver'

and drav-dya- 'cause

'flow'

drubhav-dya-

cyav-dya- 'shake';

to flow'; bhu- 'become'

(AV.) 'cause to become'; ^?i!- 'se^paxaXe yav-aya- a.nd yav-dya- id. ; s'ru- 'heax'
srav-dya- and srav-dya- 'cause to hear'; jV-' 'dissolve' srav-dya- and sravaya- (Pp. h-av-) 'cause to move'; srii- 'flow' sravaya- (AV.) 'cause to flow'.
c. Final r usually takes Vrddhi; thus ghr- 'drip' ghar-aya- (AV.) 'cause
dhar-dya- id.; pr- 'pass' par-dya- id.; fr- 'fill' pur-dyato drip'; dhr- 'hold'
(AV.) 'fulfil'; inr- 'die' mar-dya- (AV.) 'kill'; vr- 'confine' var-dya- id. Two
causatives have the Guna as well as the Vrddhi form; jr- 'waste away' -.jar:

dya- and jar-dya- (Pp. jar-) 'wear out', 'cause to grow old'; sr- 'flow' sar-dyaand sar-aya- 'cause to flow'. One root in -r takes Guna only: dr- 'pierce'
:

id.
:

dar-dya-

558.

'shatter'.

Roots ending in

-a.

form

ksa-paya- (AV.) id.;

da- 'give' da-pay a- (AV.)

thus ksa- 'burn'

stem

their causative

gla- 'be weary'

by adding

gla-paya-

-pdya;

(Pp. gldp-)

dha- 'put' dha-pdya'cause to give';

dha-pdya- 'suckle'; mla- 'relax' (intr.) mla-pdya(AV.) 'relax' (tr.); va- 'blow' va-pdya- 'fan'; stha- 'stand' stha-paya- 'set up';
sna- 'wash' (intr.) sna-pdya- 'bathe' (tr.) ^- In three roots the a is shortened
jna- 'know' -.jha-paya- (AV.) 'cause to know'; sra- 'boil' sra-pdya- (AV.
TS.) 'cook'; sna- 'wash' sna-pdya- (AV.) beside sna-pdya- 'bathe' (tr.).
a.
A few roots ending in other vowels take -paya. Two stems are
formed by adding the suffix to the gunated root: ksi- 'possess' kse-paya'cause to dwell' beside ksaydya-; r- 'go' arpaya- 'cause to go'. In the VS.
two roots in i substitute a for that vowel before -paya ji- 'conquer' ja-paya'exhaust';

'cause to put'; dha- 'suck'

'cause to win'; sri- 'resort'

{icd-)sra-paya- (VS'.)

'raise'.

Two roots with initial p and ending in -a do not form their causative stem with
but add the ordinary suffix -aj/a with interposed^: pa. 'drinlc' .p'iy-dya-, 'cause to
AraiW ; pya- 'overflow' (a-'pydy-dya- (AV.) 'fill up'. This seeming irregularity is doubtless
a.

-paya,

due

to the original

form of the root^.

Inflexion.

The

559.

causative

is

inflected regularly like the verbs

of the a- con-

be noted, however, that in the i. pi. pres.

the termination -masi occurs in the RV. and AV. ten times as often as -mas;
that in the 2. pi. no forms in -thana axe met with; and that in the 3. sing,

jugation in both voices.

It is to

mid. e never appears for -aU.

a. The forms of the present indicative active and middle, which
actually occur, would if made from kalpdya- be the following:

Active.
dyathas.
3.

3.

Sing. i. kalpayami.

kalpayatas.

PL

i.

2.

kalpdyasi.

ia/payamasi

kalpdyanti.

Middle.

yethe.

,3.

a.nd

kalpdyati.

Du.

ia/pdyamas.

2.

2. kalpkalpdyatha.

2. kalpdyase.
Du. 2. kalpd3. kalpdyate.
kalpayamahe. 3. kalpdyante.
Forms that occur elsewhere in the present system are the following:
3.

Sing.

kalpdytte.

i.

'

kalpdye.

PI. i.

I This
root, of which only three forms
occur in the RV., seems to be only a varied

spelling for sru- 'flow'.

The

causative stem ha-paya-, from hapresupposed by the aorist/7/4z^ar.

3 See above 27 a l and 4.
"

'forsake' is

VII. Verb.

b.

Secondary Conjugation.

397

Subjunctive. Active. Sing.i.

cetdyani{i:S.iii. 2.10=; MS. iv. 5^), randharandkdyasi{NN.), variayasi{TQ.Yn.^.2o^); jandyas

(Av.), yavayas{KN .), yodhdyas. 3. arday3H{KY.), kalpdyati, tarpayati{A.W.),
padayati (AV.), parayati, purayati (AV.), mardyail (AV.), mrldyati, rajayati (TS.
11. 4. 14^), sudayati; kalpaydt{KY.), coddyat, pardyat, marcdyat, sadayat, saydyjt
(TS. I. 8. 6^).
Du. I. Trdyava.
2. dhapayathas (AV.), padayathas (AV.),
vasayatkas{KY.), sSdayai/ias{AY.).
PI. i. irayama, dharayama.
3. kulayatas.
2. chaddyatka, vardhayatha (AV.).
Middle.
3. srapdyan (TS.:v.i.s').
Sing. 2. kamdyase, coddyase, josdyase, maddyase, yatayase, madayathas (AV.
IV. 25^).
3. codayate, ckandayate, dharayate, maddyate, vartayate; tnkhdyatai
(AV.)j cetdyatai (TS. i. i. 13^), dharayatai (AV.), rajayatai (AV.), varayatai
(AV.).
Du. I. ihkhayavahai, kalpayavahai, janayavahai (AV.).
3. maddyaite.
PI. 2. kamdyadhve, inadayadhve; madayadhvai.
c. Optative. This mood is very rare^ only four forms occurring in the

yani.

2. coddyasi, mrldy'asi,

RV. and two

in the

AV.

Sing.2.y(za>'^j'(Kh.ii. io4), dharayes.

3. 2aaj/if/

(A v.), vadayet {h.A\TL.2.tj), vesayet{AN.), sprhayet.

P\,x. citdyema,marjayema.
d. Imperative. Forms of this mood are common, nearly 120 occurring
in the RV.; of these, however, quite one half are in the 2. sing. act.
No
forms of the 3. sing, and du. mid. are met with in the RV. No impv. in -tai
is found in the RV. and only one in the AV.
2. sing. dharayataV.
The
forms actually occurring, if made from kalpdya-, would be the following;
Active. Sing. 2. kalpdya and kalpayatat (AV.). 3. kalpayatu.
Du. 2.
kalpdyatam.
PL 2. kalpdyata. 3. kalpdyantu.
3. kalpayatam.
Middle. Sing. 2. kalpdyasva.
Du. 2. kalpdyetham.
PI. 2. kalpdyadhvam. 3. kalpayantam.
e. Participles. The active participle in -aw/, with fem. in -r, is common;
e. g. jan-dyant-, f. jan-dyanf-i- 'producing'.
The middle participle, which is
always formed with -mana, is rare. In the RV. are found only mahdyamana- 'glorifying', yatdya-mana- 'reaching', vardhdya-mana- 'increasing', and
in the AV. only kamdya-mana- 'desiring'; in the TS. (iv. 2. 6^) catdya-mana-.
f. Imperfect.
Forms of this tense, both augmented and unaugmented,
are frequent. In the RV. some 130 occur in the active, about two-thirds of
which are in the 2. and 3. sing. Middle forms are rare except in the 3. pi.
In the active the i. and 3. du., and i. and 2. pi. are wanting; in the middle
all the I. persons and the 3. du. are unrepresented.
Some 50 unaugmented
forms are used as injunctives in the RV. ^ The forms actually occurring, if
made from jandya-, would be the following:
Active. Sing. i. ajanayam; janayam. 2. djanayas; jandyas. 3. djanayat;
PI. 3. djanayan; janayan.
jandyat.
Du. 2. djanayatam.
Middle. Sing. 2. ajanayathas; jandyathas. 3. djanayata; janayata.
PL 2. ajanayadhvam. 3. djanayanta; jandyanta.
Du. 2. djanayetham.
560. Outside the present system very few causative forms occur.
These are found in the following formations.
Only four forms occur in the RV. and AV. Active.
a. Future.
Middle. Sing. 2. vasayisydse
3. dharayisydti.
Sing. I. dusayisyimi (AV.).
3. varayisyate (AV.) 'will shield'.
'wilt adorn thyself.
The only example of a periphrastic perfect occurring in
b. Perfect.
the Sainhitas is made from a causative stem: gamaydm cakara (AV.).
The reduplicated aorist has attached itself to the causac. Aorist.
the intensive character of the reduplicated form became
because
probably
tive,
:

I In K. the iorms yamayatat and cyavayatat

occur; and in pL z. the unexampled ending
dhvat in varayadhvat; Whitney 1043 d.

See

Avery

264.

398

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

associated with the originally iterative meaning of the causative. But in form
unconnected with the causative stem, being derived directly from the
is

it

and more than one-third of the verbs which form it in the RV., and
about one-fifth in the AV., have no causative stem in -aya. There are, however, eight forms which are actually made from the causative stem: Sing. i.
arp-ip-am (AV.) from ar-paya-; 2. jihip-as from ha-paya-'^ 'cause to depart';
atisthip-as and ^. dtisthip-at horn siha-paya- 'ia&texi.' ; ajijnip-at (Jl^.) from /paya- 'cause to know'; PI. 2. djijap-ata (VS.) from japaya- 'cause to conquer'
root;

Sing. 2. act. bibhis-as i!TS>.) and mid. bTbhis-athas from bhi-saya-: 'frighten',
anomalous causative of bhi- 'fear'.
a. There are besides three /s-aorists formed from the causative stem:
vyathay-Js (AV.) from -vyathaya- 'disturb'; ailay-it (AV.) from ilaya- 'has quieted
down'; dkvanay-Tt' from dhvanaya- 'envelope'.
561. Nominal derivatives,
a. The only present passive participle
appears in the form bhaj-yd-mana- (AV. xii. 5^'). There are also a few past
-ves-i-ta- (AV.)
ghar-i-ta- (AV.) 'smeared';
participles:
cod-i-td- 'impelled';
(]///-);

'caused to

enter'.

few gerundives in -ayya are formed from causative stems: trayayayya- 'to be guarded'; panay-dyya- 'admirable'; sprhay-ayya- 'desirable' 3.
c. Ten infinitives formed with -dhyai from the causative stem are met
with in the RV.: isdyad/iyai, irdyadhyai, tamsayddhyai, nasayddhyai, mandayddhyai, madayddhyai, risayddhyai, vartayddkyai, vajayddhyai, syandayddhyai''
d. Four gerunds formed with -tva from causative stems are met with
in the AV.: arpay-i-tvd, kalpay-i-tvS., saday-i-tvs, srainsay-i-tvB.
e. Finally several ordinary nouns are derived from the causative stem
with various suffixes; a few verbal nouns in -ana: drp-ana- (AV.) 'thrusting';
-bhi-s-ana- 'frightening'; one or two agent nouns in -if, f. -tr-t coday-i-tr-i'stimulator'; bodhay-i-tf- 'awakener'; a few adjectives in -a as second members
of compounds: a/Z-Zaraya- 'putting across' wzV/zaraya- 'patting down'; vacamThkhayd- 'voice-impelling'; visvam-ejaya- 'all-stimulating'; an adjective in -alu:
b.

patay-alu- (AV.)

'flying';

five

adjectives

-isnu:

in

tapay-isnu-

'tormenting';

namay-isnu- 'bending'; patay-isnt'i- 'flying'; paray-isnu- 'rescuing'; maday-isnii'intoxicating';

seven adjectives in -itnu: -amay-itnu- 'making ill'; tanay-itnu'thundering'

(//-az/oy-zV^i/-

'speeding'; posay-iinii- 'nourishing'; maday-itm't- 'intoxi-

cating'; suday-itmi- 'streaming sweetness'; stanay-itnu-

adjectives

in

-u:

dharay-u- 'streaming' 5;

m. 'thunder'; and three

manday-u-

bhavay-i'i- 'animating';

'rejo icing'.
4.

The Denominative.

Delbruck, Verbum p. 201209, 216218.

Avery, Verb-Inflection 272274.
WrnxNEY, Sanskrit Grammar 1053 1068.
v. Negelein, Zur Sprachgeschichte 4044.
Cp. Brugmann, kg. 693 696.

The denominative is nearly always formed from a nominal stem

562.
with the suffix -ya.
The latter is normally accented; but a certain number
of unmistakable denominatives, such as mantrd-ya-te 'takes counsel', have the
causative accent and thus form a connecting link between the regular denominatives and the causatives''
The formation is a frequent one, more than a
hundred denominative stems occurring
I

The stem

ha-paya- does not itself otherwise occur in V. ; cp. p. 396 note 2.

The TS. IV. 6. 92 has instead dhvanayit.
3

585,
5

See below 579.

Cp. DelbrtJck, Verbum
s.

the RV.,

and

2n; and below

v. dh}-;

according to

and

Grassmann

in the
to

be

AV. about
analyzed

as

dhara-yu-,
6

There can be

nominative

7.

Whitney, Roots,

in

BR.

little

suffix -ya

is

doubt that the deidentical with that

of the causative as virell as that of the verbs

of the fourth class; cp. Whitney 1055 a;
V. Negelein 44; Brugmann, KG. 690, 694.

VII. Verb.

Secondary Conjugation.

399

about fifty if those which form present participles or derivative

nouns only are included). The general meaning of the denominative is that
the subject expressed by the inflexion stands in some relation to the noun
from which the stem is formed. It may usually be rendered by 'be or act
thirty (or

like';

'regard or treat as'; 'turn into or use as'; 'wish

for'.

Denominatives formed with -ya are best classified according to the final
of the nominal stem to which the suffix is added.
563. Steins in -a, which usually remains unchanged; thus amitra-ydenemy', 'be hostile'; indra-ya- 'behave like Indra'; ksema-yd- 'take
jara-ya- 'treat like a lover', 'caress'; deva-yd- 'serve the gods';
yusma-yd- 'seek you'; vasna-yd- 'deal with the price', 'bargain'.
With the causative accent: {pary-)ankhd-ya-^ 'clasp (round)'; arthd-ya'have as a desire'; rtd-ya- 'act according to sacred order'; kulayd-ya- 'build
a nest'; nild-ya- 'bring together'; pald-ya- (AV.) 'act as guardian', 'protect';
mantrd-ya- 'take counsel'; mrgd-ya- 'treat as a wild animal', 'hunt'; vavrd-ya;
'put in hiding', 'shrink from'; vajd-ya- 'act like a steed', 'race' (beside vaja-yd-)vJrd-ya- 'play the m,an'; sa-bhagd-ya- (AV.) 'apportion'
a. One or two denominatives are from nominal stems extended with -a: is-a-ya'act like atf

rest';

'have strength'

The

iirj-d-ya-

(jV-)^j

'have strength' {urj-)^.

often lengthened: agha-yd- 'plan mischief;

ajira-ya- 'be swift'; amitra-yd- (AV.) 'be hostile' (Pp. -dyd-); asva-yd- 'desire
horses'; rtd-yd- 'observe sacred order' (beside r/a'^ya-); tilvila-yd- 'be fertile';
tuda-yd- (AV.) 'thrust'; dhupa-yd-^ {MS.
'be like smoke', 'fume'; priya-yd.)
a.

-a

is,

however,

KY

'become

matha-yd- (AV.) 'shake'; musa-ya-^ (AV.) 'steal'; yajna-yd'sacrifice'; rathira-yd- 'be conveyed in a car'; randkana-ya-'' 'make subject';
vrsa-yd- 'act hke a bull'*; sama-yd- 'be active' {sdma-); subha-yd- 'be beautiful' 9;
sratha-ya- 'make loose' (Pp. -aya-)^";
satvana-yd- (AV.) 'act like a
warrior'; sumna-yd- 'show benevolence'; skabha-yd- 'make firm'.
In most of
these examples the Pada text has a short a.
a.

friends';

The denominative

oja-ya-

'employ force'

is

formed from

shortened for

oja-,

ojas-

'strength'.

b. The -o. of the nominal stem is sometimes changed to -7: adhvari-yd'perform the sacrifice' (adhvard-);
caram-yd- 'follow a course' {cdrana-),
'pursue';
tavisl-yd- 'be strong' {tavisd-); putrT-yd- 'desire a son' {putrd-);
rathi-yd- 'drive in a car' (rd(Aa-); sapathi-yd- (AV.) 'utter a curse' {sapdtha-).
In nearly every instance here the Pada text has t. Even in the Sarnhita text
the AV. has putri-yd- 'desire a son', and the RV. the denominative participle
(with shifted accent) dnni-yant- 'desiring food' {dnna-).

For the

a.

-a

nominal stem

of the

substituted

e is

in vare-yd- 'play the

wooer'

(vara-), 'woo'.

c.

The

'perform

s. V.

final -a

sacrifice'

Regarded

of the nominal stem

adhvari-yd-);

as a causative

by Grassmann,

sometimes dropped "

is

krpan-yd- 'be eager';

(beside

6
7

afikh.

"adhvar-yd-

tavis-yd-

See Whitney on AV. iv. 21 2.

Based on randhana an assumed
,

'be

deri-

regards the form vative of the root randh-.

8 Beside vrsan-yd-, from vj'sa-, the form
hastayatas as a denominative ; but the accent
would be unique: its explanation by BR. which vr;an- assumes before terminations
and Grassmann as a compound, hasia-yatas or before second members of compounds
'wielded by the hand', is doubtless the beginning with consonants.
9 From subha-, an assumed derivative of
correct one.
'

DelbrOck

189,

Cp. Delbrucic 189, 2.

Grassmann regards this verb as
causati ve: see Worterbuch, s. v. urjay.
5 See Whitney's note on AV. iv. 196.

suhh- 'shine'.

from
J'

There

is

also a causative

sraih- 'loosen'.

Cp.

V,

Negelein

40.

form

srathdya-,

400

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

daman-ya-^ 'overpower';
tavisT-yd-); turan-ya- 'be speedy';
bhuran-yd- %& 2.Q.'as ; vMur-yd- 'sUggev' ; saran-yd- 'h.a,sten' There are several
other denominatives which presuppose nouns in -ana: thus dhisan-yd- 'pay
The
ruvan-ya- 'roar'; huvan-ya- 'call'.
risan-yd- 'commit faults';
attention';
derivation of isan-yd- beside isana-ya- 'impel' is perhaps similar; but the

mighty' (beside

nominal stem on which this denominative is based may be isdni- 'impulse'^564. Stems in -a, which usually remains unchanged: gopa-yd- 'act as
herdsman', 'protect'; /wa-_yi- 'speed to earth'; ducchuna-yd- 'desire mischief 3;
prtana-yd- 'fight'; bhandana-yd- 'strive for glory'; mana-yd- 'feel^attachmenf;
Similar stems are to be assumed in
rasana-yd- (AV.)' 'put on a girdle'.

and dhiya-yd- 'pay

rgha-yd- 'tremble', and hrna-yd- 'be wrathful';

dht- 'thought'.
is based on dhiya- ^

attention'

The

denominative
prtan-yd-

-a of the nominal stem is

and different from the

if krpa-yd- (RVi.) 'mourn'6 is a

The a is dropped in
causative krpdya- (554)-

once shortened,

beside frtana-yd-.

'fight'

There are more than a dozen denominatives with a preceding -ya-,

without any corresponding noun in a; thus asa-yd- 'attain' 7; tuda-yd- (AV.)
'thrust';
dama-yd- 'tame' 7; nasa-ya-* (x. 40'') 'reach'; pana-ya- 'boast of;
Seven such denomivasa-yd- 'invest oneself with'; vrsa-ya- 'cause to rain' 9.
natives, however, appear beside present bases according to the ninth class in
a.

'shsikt' {math-nd-); prusa-yd- 'drip'

sratha-ya- 'loosen' (Jrath-nd-);
(mus-nd-);
skabha-yd- 'fasten' [skabh-nd-); siabha-yd- 'support' {stabh-na-).
565. Stems in -/, which is nearly always lengthened (though usually

na: grbha-yd-

'seize'

{prus-ndnt-, VS.);

short

in

the

(grbh-ns-);

musa-yd-

Pada

text)

matka-yd-

'steal'

arati-yd-

(RV. VS.)

'be malevolent', but arati-yd-

(AV. and RV. Pp.); kavi-yd- 'be wise'; jani-yd- 'seek a wife', \iM\. jani-yd(AV.); dur-grbhi-ya- 'be hard to grasp'; mahi-yd- 'be delighted'; rayi-yd'desire wealth'; sak/iT-yd-^" 'seek friendship'.
a. In a few instances the i is either treated as a or tal<es Guna of which the final
element is dropped (-a-j/d ^=-ay-ya): thus isana-ya- 'set in motion' (isdni- 'impulse'); iir/d-ya(AV.) 'make mention of (iirii-); ahttna-yd- 'resound' (dhicni- 'sounding'); susva-yd- and
susvd-ya- 'flow' {susv-i-'^^ 'pressing').
Perhaps formed in the same way are intdhJ-yd'obey' and hrm-yd- 'be angry'12.
^. pdiya- 'be a lord', 'rule', probably in origin a denominative ol pdti- 'lord', is
treated like a verb of the fourth class as if from a root pat-.

566. Stems in
always short in Pp.):
intellect';

gatu-yd-

-u,

which (except gatu-yd- twice)

ffJ'S-^a-

is

always long (though

'grumble'; rju-yd- 'be straight'; kratu-yd- 'exert the

and gatu-yd-

valgu-yd- 'treat kindly';

'set in motion'; pitu-yd- 'desire nourishment';

vasu-yd- 'desire wealth'; satru-yd- 'play the enemy',

sukratu-ya- 'show oneself wise'.

Moreover, isu-ya- 'strive', may
be derived from tsu- 'arrow'; and nouns in -u are presupposed by ahku-yd'move tortuously', and stabhu-yd- 'stand firm'.
a.
In go-, the only stem in -0, the diphthong becomes -av before the
denominative suffix: gav-yd- 'desire cows'.
'be hostile';

' From an assumed adjective derivative

damana-.
2 Cp. Delbruck 189, 4.

The Pada

Delbruck,

regards nasaya- (x. 406)

as causative of nas-.
be distinguished from vj'sdyd- 'act
1.

1.,

as a denominative,
9

To

BR.

wrongly ducchunayd-.
like a bull'.
'o Cp. V. Negelein 41 (middle).
4 Cp. Whitney's note on AV. xiv. a^*.
11 From the reduplicated root su- 'press'.
5 Which perhaps became an independent
12 According to Delbruck 205, p.
noun through the influence of the instru57, also
mental form in such compounds as dhiya-jiir- duhiya- in the forms duhiydt and dnhiydn
'growing old in devotion'.
(optatives Grassmann,
Worterbuch,
and
3

6
7

text

Cp. Grassmann, s.
Cp. Delbruck 199

v. k)-pay.
(p.

217, middle),

Whitney, Roots,

s. v.

duh).

Cp. 450, a

5.

Secondary Conjugation.

VII. Verb.

Consonant stems
The only stem ending

567.
a.

unchanged before the

usually remain
in -j

bhisdj- 'physician'

is

401

suffix.

bhisaj-yd- 'play the

physician', 'heal'.
b. There is one denominative, isudh-yd- 'implore', which seems to presuppose a stem in -dh, viz. isudh-^, but is probably a denominative from
isu-dhi- (like pdtya- 'from pdti-) 'put in the arrow', 'aim'^'
c. Denominatives formed from stems in -n are uksan-yd- 'act like

udan-yd'act like

brahtnan-yd- 'be devout' ('act like

z.

brahman!)

bull';

vfsan-yd-^

'be lustful'.

bull',

denominative formed from a stem in -or is vadhar-yd{vddkar-).

Stems in -ar are further presupposed in rathar-yd-

d.
bolt'

'irrigate';

car'; irathar-yd-

'become

'hurl

'ride in

loose'; sapar-yd- 'worship'.

The consonant stems most

frequently used to form denominatives are

those in -as: apas-yd- 'be active'; avas-yd- 'seek help'; canas-yd- 'h^ %2X\%'ii&A'
duvas-yd- "^adore"; namas-yd- 'pay homage'; nr-manas-yd- 'be kindly disposed
to men'; manas-yd- 'bear in mind'; vacas-yd- 'be audible'; varivas-yd- 'grant
space'; sravas-yd-^ 'hasten'; sa-canas-yd- 'cherish'; su-manas-yd- 'be gracious';
e.

Stems

sv-apas-yd- 'act well'.

in -as

are

further

presupposed by iras-yd- 'be

angry'; dasas-yd- 'render service to'; payias-yd- 'excite admiration';

sacas-yd-

few denominatives have further been formed from stems in

-a following the analogy of those in -as;
thus makhas-yd- 'be cheerful'
(makhd-) and su-makhas-yd- (TS.) 'be merry'; manavas-yd- 'act like men'
{manavd-). The stem avis-yd-, appearing in the participle avisydnt- 'helping
willingly', apparently a denominative (beside avisya- 'desire', avisyi'i- 'desirous'),
dv-as- 'favour' 5.
seems to be formed from *av-isf. A few denominatives are formed from stems in -us: tarus-yd- 'engage
'receive care'.

vapus-ya- 'wonder'
followed by uru-s-yd- 'seek wide space'

in fight' (fdr-us-); vanus-yd- 'plot against' (van-iis- 'eager');

(vdp-us- 'marvellous').

This analogy

is

from a stem in -u {uric- 'wide').

568. There are a few denominative forms made without a suffix direct
from nominal stems, but they nearly always have beside them denominative
stems in -ya; thus bhisdk-ti (viii. 79^) 'heals' 3. sing, from bhisdj- 'act as physician' (also m. 'physician'); a-bhisnak (x. 131'), 3. sing, impf oibhimaj- 'heal'.
Similarly there appear the forms sing. 2. isana-s, 3. isana-t, pi. 3. isana-nta
\)QS\A^isan-yd-; pi. 3. krpdna-nta beside krpan-yd-; pi. i. taruse-ma, 3. idrusa-nte,
tarusa-nta beside tarus-yd-; pi. 3 vanusa-nta beside vanus-yd-. Possibly the form
vdnanvati is a denominative meaning 'is at hand', from a noun "^van-anu-, beside

the simple verb van- 'win'^.

Inflexion.

569. The denominative is regularly inflected throughout the present

system according to the a- conjugation in both voices. The commonest form
the

is

3. sing, active

and middle.

The forms of the present indicative

occur would, if made from manas-yd- 'bear
Active.

Sing.

i.

manasyami

manasydtas.

Du. 2. manasydthas. 3.
3. manasydnti.
2. manasyatha.
Middle. Sing. i. manasyL
manasyethe.
1
2

3
4

3.

(AV.).

manasydte (AV.).

Cp. DELBiucK 194.

Cp. Grassmann, s. v. isudhy.
Beside vrsaya-; cp. p. 399, note
According to BR. derived from sravas-

Indo-aiische Philologie.

I,

4.

2.

PI. i.

PL

manasydsi.

from
from
6

3.

manasydti.

manasyamasi and manasydmas.

3.

manasydte.

manasyamahe.

i.

and middle that actually

be the following:

in mind',

manasydse.

2.

active

sru-

sru-

3.

'flow'^

Du.

2.

manasydnte.
but

GrassmANN

sru- 'hear'.

Cp, Grassmann, b. v. avisy.

Cp. Delbruck p, 218.
26

402

I.

Forms

Allgemeines und Speache.

actually

that

4.

Vedic Grammar.

occur elsewhere in

the

present

following:

are

system

the

Active. Sing. i. namasya.

2. urusySs, kirtdyas
a. Subjunctive.
(A v.), sravasyds.
3. apasySt, arafiyit (TS. IV. i. io3; VS. xi. 80), aratiydt
(A v.), urusydt, caranyat (AV.), durasyit (AV.), duvasyif, prianydt, vanusyAt,

sravasydi,

vasUySt,

vareydt)

saparyst.

Du,

Middle.

prtanyan (AV.), saparydn, saranydn.

varivasydtas.

3.

Sing.

PI. 3.

2. arthdyase, nildyase.

3. ahkhdyate.
PI. 3.
b. Injunctive. Active. Sing. 2. irasyas, risanyas, ruvanyas.
Middle. Sing. 3. panayata.
turanyan, duvasyan, namasyan, saparyan.
PI. 3. rghaydnta, rfayanta, krpdnanta, tarusanta, dhunayanta ', rucayanta,

vanusanta, susvdyanta.

Active.

Optative.

c.

1.8.22'),

duvasyet.

dasasyet,

Sing.

2. dasasyes.

PI.

I.

isayema,

3. urusyet, caranyet (TS.

tarusema,

saparyema.

Middle. Sing. 3. manasyeta (AV.).

Active. Sing. 2. isanya, urmyd, gatuyd, gurdhaya,
d. Imperative.
gopayd (AV. TS.), grbhaya, daiasyd, duvasya, namasya, varivasyd, vajaya

3. urusyatu, gopayaiw^ (AV.), bhisajyatii

urusydtam, gopaydtam, canasydtam, dasasydtam.
PI. 2. isanyata, urusyata, grbhaydta (AV.), gopayata (AV.),
3. urusydtam.
dasasyata, duvasydta, namasydia, risanyata, saparyata.
3. urusyantu,
gopayantu (AV.), varivasyantu.
Middle. Sing. 2. arthayasva, vTrdyasva
(AV. TS.), vrsayasva (AV.).
PI. 2. tilvilayddhvam,
vtrdyadhvam.

(TS. I.
(TS. V.

7. 8'),

irathaya,

2. 12^).

Du.

saparya.

2.

dhunayantam.

3.

common,

a.

ydnt-,

The present participle active in -ant (with fem. -ant-i)

while the middle form in -mana, occurs fairly often.

Participle.

e.

very

is

Examples of the active are aghaydnt-, ankuydnt-, adhvariydnt-, amitraasvaydnt-, isanydnt-, isdyant- and isaydnt-, isuydnt-, udan-

aratlydnt-,

rghaydnt-,

gavydnt-, gopaydnt- (AV.),

namasydnt-, paldyant- (AV.),
putriydnt-, prtanaydnt-, prtanydnt-,
bhandanaydnt-, bhuranydnt-, mathaydnt-,
musaydnt-, yajhaydnt-, yusmaydnt-, rathiraydnt-, rathiydnt-, vasUydnt-, vasna~
urjdyant-,

ydnt-,

iavisTydnt-,

dasasydnt-,

rtdyant-,

duvasydni-,

rtaydnt-,

devaydnt-,

and vajaydnt-, vrsanydnt-, satrUydnt-, sTkaydnt- (VS.) 'dripping',

satvanaydnt- (AV.), saparydnt-, sumnaydnt-, susvdyant-, hrnaydnt-

ydnt-, vajdyant-

sakhiydnt-,
'angry'.

Examples of the middle are rghaydmana-, rjuydmana-, ojaydmana-,

^.
kanduydmana- (TS.), kaviydmana-, caranfydmana-, tavisydmana-, priyaydmana(AV.), {d-prati-)manyuyamana- (AV.), rasanaydmana-, vrsaydmana-, samanaydmana-, sumakhasydmana- (TS.), sumanasydmana-, stabhuydmana-, svapasydmana-, hrniydmana- 'angry'.
f.
Imperfect. Active. Sing. 2. arandhanayas.
aprtanyat,
3.

dskabhayat (AV.); urusyat, damanyat, dhupdyat (AV.); abhisnak.

Du. 3.
urusydtam.
PL 3. anamasyan, asaparyan; turanyan, vapusyan, saparyan
(TS. II. 2. 12*).
Middle. Sing. 3. dpriyayaia.
Du. 2. avirayetham.

PI. 3. isanayanta.

570.
the

Outside the present system no denominative form occurs in

( + AV.), 2. sing, m- aorist (used injunctively with ma)

RV. except unayts

The form bhurdjanta (iv. 43^)

according

declension {go-pd-) occur in the RV. To

the denominative must be due the seconroasted').
dary root gup- 'protect' [jugupur once, gupitd2 This denominative is derived from the
twice in the RV.). Cp. p. 358, note i3. How
very frequent go-pa- 'cowherd', of which gup- should be a denominative of go- 'cow'
two transition forms according to the a- (v. Negelein 43, note 5) is not clear.
1

to

pw.

= bhrajanta

is

for bhrajjanta {bhraj'j- *be

Cp. note in Oldenberg's Rgveda.

::

Vn. Verb.

Nominal Verb Forms.

from unaya- 'leave

Past Passive Participles.

403

unfulfilled' {una-).
few otlier forms occur in the later
Samhitas.
Thus the AV. has the peculiar form dsaparyait (AV. xrv. 2=)%
]probably 3. sing, aorist, with -ait ioi -n\ The VS. (n.31) has
the 3. pi. aorist
a^-vrsay-is-ata 'they have accepted". The TS. has the 2. pi. aor. pspay-is-ia
lead mto evil' (used injunctively with mi). The TS. (iii. 2. 83) has also the
future participles kanduyisydnt- 'about to scratch', meghayisydnt'about to be
cloudy', hkayisydnt- 'about to drip', with the corresponding
perfect participles
passive kanduyitd-, meghitd-, stkitd-.

B. Nominal Verb Forms.

number of nominal formations partake of the verbal

571.
character inasmuch as they express time (present, past, or fiiture); or the
relations between subject and object, implying transitive or intransitive action,
and active, middle, or passive sense. Such formations are participles (including verbal adjectives), infinitives, and gerunds. The participles formed
from tense-stems having already been treated
only those that are formed
large

-5,

from the root remain to be dealt with. These are the verbal
adjectives which have the value either of past passive participles or of future
directly

passive participles (otherwise called gerundives).

Past Passive Participles.

a.

572. The past passive participle is formed by adding, in the great

majority of instances, the suffix -fo'i (with or without connecting -?-), or far
less commonly the suffix -no. (direcfly) to the root.
When formed from a
transitive verb, it has a passive as weU as a past sense;
e. g. as- 'throw'
as-td- 'thrown'; da- 'give' dat-td- 'given'. But when formed from an intransitive verb, it has a neuter past sense; e. g. gam- 'go' ga-td- 'gone'; pat- 'fall'
.pat-i-td- (AV.) 'faUen'.
:

When

-id

added

direct,

the root tends to appear in its weak

form in which the root is generally
stated, if ending in vowels, remains imchanged, while those ending in consonants are usually modified only in so far as is required by the rules
of internal Sandhi; thus y^/a- mla-td- 'softened'; Yy^'-y^'^'^' 'gone'; jAra'given'; YJ^' '-ji-td- 'conquered'; ]/"/- sri-td- leaning on';
: ra-tdYP"^'
pri-td- 'rejoiced'; Y^hi- bhi-td- 'frightened'; Yy^' i- 'yoke' and 2. 'ward oflf'
-yu-ta-; j/'jra- sru-td- 'heard'; y^J^stu-td- 'praised'; Y^hubhu-td- 'become'; Yhu- : hu-td- 'called'; |A^- kr-td- 'made'; Y^^T' -bhr-ta- 'borne';

573.

Very

form.

is

frequently, however,

the

Y'VT'

'

sik-td:

"vr-td-

'covered'

'poured

out';

and
Y^V'

mrs-td- 'rubbed'; Y^tj-

Ykrudh-

'

tik-td-

Yw^'
'sharp';

'

]A/a/-

dis-td- 'shown'; "[/^a/-

'gladdened' dxA jus-ta- 'welcome'; y^>'split';

Ys^f^-

'bumf; Y^i^-

'

g"--^^^-^ 'hidden';
'

mrk-td-^ (RV.) 'injured'; ]/"V- :

YyW' ' yuk-td- 'yoked'; Y^TJ:

krud-dhd- 'angry';

'besmeared'; |A^?/-

'

^{-fd- 'discharged'; l/aV- cit-td- 'perceived'; jAz/r/mat-td- (AV.); Y^^^- id-dhd- 'kind-

jAwa^- 'be exhilarated'

vrt-td- 'turned';
led';

'

'chosen';

'

tap-td- 'hot';

Y^P"

'

rip-td-

(RV.)

nas-td- 'losf ; YJ^?' '-jus-td- (RV.)

/z>-/i- 'crushed'; i/"yJaj- : z/Z-iaj-Za-

tr-dhd- 'crushed'; Y^ah- : dag-dhd-^

dig-dhd- (AV.) 'besmeared'; Y^^^' dug-dhd- 'milked'; y^//r^-

Y^rh-

NEGSLEIN 41 ; BOHTLINGK, ZDMG.

S Only in the compounds d-mrkta- and

m-fkta-vahas:
* In roots in -h which cerebralize the
AB. form agrahhaisam beside
suffix, the vowel is lengthened as compenagrahhit; cp. v. Negelein 41, note 2.
3 See under declension 311
313, and in sation for the loss of the cerebral z
cp.
the account of the various tenses (present, p. 51, note 2.
7 In the RV. only in agni-dagdha- 'burnt
perfect, aorist, future).
with fire'.
4 Cp. Reichelt, BB. 27, 9S 97.
1

Cp.

V.

52, sioff.
2 As in the

26*

;:

404
dr-dhd-

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

ydruh- drug-dhd-

'firm';

'hurtful';

y^ja/:-

Ynah- nad-dhd- 'bound';

:

Yrih-

{KSi:) 'bewildered';

mug-dhd- and mu-dhdru-dhd- (AV.) 'ascended';

Vedic Grammar.

4.

/ot/4-

ri-dhd- (RV.) 'licked'; /r-4-

sa-dhd- 'overcome'.

Occasional irregularities in the form of the root are not due to the ordinary
semi-vowel:
rules of internal Sandhi. Thus some roots show an interchange of vowel and
div '^\&f dyii-ta- (AV.); sw- 'sew' syii-td-; mtv- 'push' -muia- (VS. AV.) instead of
*j7-/-i; Avr- 'make crooked' has Am-td- 'crooked', beside the regular -hvr-ta- (RV.);
sometimes a long vowel appears in the root:_ svad- 'sv/eeten' svai-id- ; gur- 'greets
root; dagiir-ta-; sr- 'mix': -nr-ta-, hes\Ac m-id- from srJ- 'mix', the usual form of the
always
'give', beside the regular form -da-ia- in Iva-data- (RV.) 'given by thee', otherwise
has dat-id; formed from dad-, the weak form of the present base.
a.

Roots which contain the syllables ya, ra, va (initial or medial)

weakened by Samprasarana; those which contain a nasal
those which end in a oi ya, by shortening
final), by dropping it;

574.
are

generally

(medial or

the former to f or

bhras-

'fall'

Thus:

r.

vyadh-

is-td-;

'pierce'

prach-

vid-dhd-;

bhrs-td- beside bhras-td- (AV.); vac- 'speak'

vas-

up-td-;

the latter to

i,

yaj- 'sacrifice'

1.

'shine'

vah-

us-td-;

'carry'

svap-

u-dhd-;

'ask'

prs-td-;

uk-td-; vap- 'strew'

'sleep'

sup-td-

(AV. VS.).

u.

shortening akin to Samprasarana appears in av- 'favour'

ir-td- beside srd-td-.

u-td-; ira- 'boil'

2.

medial nasal is dropped in anj- 'anoint'

dams- 'bite' das-td- (AV.); bamh- 'make

ub-dkd-;

'purify'

n and

Final

sud-dhd-.

'weave'

-u-ta-; va-

dropped

are

ak-td-;

firm'

umbh-

'confine'

sundh-

-ba-dha-;

a representing the
man- 'think' wa-jfi-

(the radical

sonant nasal) in ksan- 'wound' -ksa-ta-; ian- stxetcV :(a-id-;

han- 'smite' ha-td-; gam- 'go' :ga-td-; nam- 'bend' na-td-; yam- 'reach'
:

'

few roots

in -an

3.

pa

Final a

shortened

is

mi-td-;

'dig'

ham-

'be ytt.^.xf

dham- 'blow' has the

irdn-td-;

to T in ga- 'sing' -.gi-td-; dha- 'suck' dhi-td-;

-dhi-ta- and hi-td-;
-di-ta-; dha- 'put'
:

drink' -.pT-td-^; to i in da- 'bind'

ma- measure

-.ya-td-.

kha-id-; jan- 'be born'

san- 'gain' : sa-td-; while some roots in -am and one in -an,
d/ivan- 'sound' dhvdntd- (VS. XXXIX. 7) ; kram- 'stride' kran-td-

have a instead of -an^: khan-

a.
ja-td-; van- 'win' : -va-ta-;
retaining the nasal, have an
(AV.); sam- 'be quiet'; sdn-td- (AV.);
irregular dhmd-td- and dham-i-td-.
:

sa- 'sharpen'

si-td-;

sa- 'bind'

si-td-;

stha- 'stand'

sthi-td-.

Final ya
'envelope'

is

shortened

to

vi-td-; syS- 'coagulate'

i
:

jya- 'overpower'

in

jT-td-

(AV.)

vya-

h-td-.

a. Internal shortening of 5 to i appears in sds- 'order' sis-fa-; and medial a entirely

disappears in ghas- 'eat' -gdha- (TS.) and in the compounded form of dattd- 'given',
deva-Ud- 'given by the gods'; vy-a-ita- (AV. VS.), n. 'the opened
which becomes -t-iamouth'; fdri-tta- (VS. IX. 9) 'deposited'; -pratJ-tta- (AV.) 'given back'. The same syncopated
form appears in the compound participle of da- 'divide' dva-tta- (VS.) 'cut off'.
:

575. When -ta is added, as it is in many verbs, with connecting -/-,

the root is not weakened (excepting four instances of Samprasarana)'*. It is
thus added to a number of roots ending in consonants and to all secondary verbs.

The roots

to which it is thus regularly added are those that end:

uks-i-td-;
in t'wo consonants: thus uks- 'sprinkle'
ubj- "'force'
nind- 'revile' nind-i-td-;
raks- 'protect' : raks-i-td-; sumbhubj-i-td- (AV.);
-sumbh-i-ta- (AV.); hims- 'injure' hims-i-td- (AV.); but taks- 'fashion'
'beautify'
a.
I.

has

tas-td-;

In grbh-i-td- iiom.grabh- 'seize' and gf'h(AV.) from grah- id. ; uks-i-id- from vaks'increase'; ud-i-td- from vad- 'speak'; srth-

See above 50 bRepresenting the long sonant nasal.

T-ia-

3 The more correct way of stating these

roots would be gai-, dhai-, pai-; cp. 27 a.

i-td-

from

srath- 'slacken'.

;:

VII. Verb.

Past Passive Participles.

405

in voiceless aspirates: likh- 'scratch' likh-i-td- (AV.); grathnath-i-td-; math- 'stir'

math-i-td-;
3. in cerebral d: id- 'praise'
il-i-td-; hid- 'be hostile'
hil-i-td-;
4. in semivowels: car- 'movt'
car-i-td-'^; Jiv- 'Ywt' -.jlv-i-td-.
2.

grath-i-td-; nath- 'seek aid'

'tie'

b. The suffix is also added with -i- to a number of roots ending in

simple consonants, especially sibilants, about which no "rule can be stated.
Such are the following participles arranged according to the final of the root

yac- 'ask' :yac-i-fd-(kY.); pat- 'fall' pat-i-td- {KSf .); rad- 'dig' rad-i-td- (AV.);
vad- 'speak' ud-i-td-; vid- 'know' vid-i-td- (AV.)% dudh- 'stir up' di'idh-i-ta(RV.); nadh- 'seek aid' nadh-i-td-; badh- 'oppress' badh-i-td-; pan- 'admire'
pan-i-td-; kup- 'be agitated' -kup-i-ta-; gup-^^ protect' gup-i-td- beside gup-td(AV.); yup- 'obstruct' yup-i-td- (AV.); rup- 'break' -rup-i-ta-; drp- 'rave'
:

zxA

-drp-i-ta-

grah- 's6.ze

dham-

-drp-ta-; /a/- 'prate'

as- 'eat'

grabh-

'seize'

grbh-i-td-

{KY.); skabh- '^xo^' skabh-i-td-; stabh-'-gxo^'

dham-i-td- (beside dhma-td-);

-.grh-T-td-

'blow'

{KY.)

lap-i-td:

and

-.stabh-i-td-;

as-i-td-; pis- 'adorn' pis-i-td- (AV.) beside pis-ta-;

is- 'send'
'move' -is-i-ta-; tvis- 'be stirred' tvis-i-td-; dhrs- 'dare' dhrs-i-tdbeside dhrs-td-; prus- 'sprinkle' prus-i-td-; mus- 'steal' mus-i-td-; hrs- 'be excited' : hrs-i-td- ; gras- 'devour' gras-i-td-.
is-i-td-;

IS-

a. The verb ha- 'leave' forms its past participle anomalously (like da- 'give') from
the reduplicated present hast: Jah-i-td- (cp. the pres. part. /a^-ni;-).
^, In the AV. is once (rx. 638) found a past passive participle extended with the
possessive suffix -vant, which gives it the sense of a perfect participle active
ai-i-tavani- (Pp. aiiid-vant-) 'having eaten'.
:

Secondary verbs,

almost exclusively causatives*, add -ita after

thus arp-aya- 'cause to go' arp-itd- and drp-ita-; inkh-dya'cause to quake' Inkh-itd-; cod-dya- 'set in motion' cod-iid-; vil-dya- 'make
strong' vil-itd-; snath-ay a- 'pierce' snath-itd-; svan-aya- 'resound' -svan-ita-.
The only past passive participle formed from a denominative is bham-itdc.

dropping -ay a-;

from bhdma-

'enraged',

The

'wrath'.

is always attached directly to the root,

which
a rule remains unweakened. Among roots ending in consonants, it is
taken by those in d, besides two or three in the palatals c and /; among
roots in vowels, it is taken by those ending in the long vowels a, T, f, besides

576.

suffix -na

as

one in
a.
'cut off'
'pvish'

U.

The
:

final

of roots in -d

chin-nd-; tud- 'pvLsh'

is

assimilated to the n of the suffix; thus chid-

tun-nd- ; trd- 'pieics'

-ftun-na- (SV.) beside nut-td-\

pad-

^go'

-trn-na- (VS.xx.XYi. 2); nud-

pan-nd- (AV.); bhid-

'split':

vin-nd- (AV.) beside vit-td-; sad- 'sit' san-nd- (VS. AV.)

beside sat-td-; shand- 'leap' skan-nd-; syand- ^move on' : syan-nd-; svid- 'sweat'
The original participle of ad- 'eat' survives only (with change of
svin-nd-.
bhin-nd-; vid-

'find'

accent) in the neuter noun dn-na- 'food'.

b. The roots in palatals which take -na are pre- 'mix' -prg-na- (RV.)
beside prk-td-; vrasc- 'cut up' vrk-nd-; ruj- 'break' rug-nd-.
c. Roots in -a remain unchanged or weaken the final to I: drd- 'sleep'
: -dra-na- (AV.);
da- 'divide' di-nd-; ha- 'leave' : hi-nd-; final -ya is shortened
:

to

-i:

sya- 'coagulate'

d.

Roots in

-T

st-nd- (VS.) beside si-td-.

and

-u remain unchanged: kst- 'destroy'

1 Also ar-i-td- if derived from a somewhat

doubtful root ar- 'praise'; cp. Whitnev,
Roots, s. v. dr.
2 mad-itd- is probably from the causative
of mad- 'be exhilarated'.

See

p.

No

examples

-ksi-na-

(AV.)

402, note 2.
of past participles from
desideratives (except mimamsitd-, AV.) and
intensives seem to occur in the Samhitas.

4o6

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

(AV.); bit- 'crush' -Ml-na- (AV.); ll- 'cling' -li-na- (AV.);

du-nd- (AV.).
e. Roots in -r change that vowel to -ir or (generally when a labial
precedes) -ur before -na: gf- 'swallow' gir-nd-; jf- 'waste away' -.jir-nd- (AV.)
and yar-a-; tf- 'pass' itr-nd-; pf- 'fill' pur-nd- beside pur-td-; mr- 'crush'
mur-nd- (AV.); if- 'crush' sir-nd- (AV.) beside sur-td- (RV. I. 174*)'; stf'strew'
sttr-nd- beside -str-ta-.

PT- 'swell'
du- 'burn'

/>f-i-

b.

Future Passive Participles (Gerundives).

577. Verbal adjectives formed with certain suffixes have acquired the
value of future participles passive, expressing that the action of the verb is
or ought to be suffered.
There are four forms of such gerundives in use
in the RV.: that derived with the primary suffix -ya, which is common, and
those derived with the secondary suffixes -dy-ya, -in-ya, and -tv-a, about a
dozen examples of each of which are met with. In the AV. are also found
two instances each of gerundives in -tavya and -aniya.
578. By far the most frequent form of gerundive is that in -ya, about
40 examples occurring in the RV. and about 60 in the AV. This suffix is
nearly always to be read as -ia, which accounts for the treatment of final
radical vowels before it. The root, being accented, appears in a strong form,
excepting a few instances in which there is the short radical vowel i u or r.
1. In the following examples a final short vowel remains unchanged,
a -t-' being interposed: -i-t-ya- 'to be gone'; apa-mi-t-ya- (AV. vi. 117O 'to
be thrown away' (? mi- 'fix') 3; sru-t-ya- 'to be heard'; -kr-t-ya- 'to be made';

be praised' (kr- 'commemorate').

Otherwise final r, u, r regularly take Guna or Vrddhi, the final
element of which always appears as y, v, r as before a vowel; thus from
a-lAy-ya-'' , an epithet of Indra; nu- 'praise'
ll- 'cling'
ndv-ya- 'to be praised';
bhu- 'be' bhdv-ya- and bhav-yd- 'future'; hu- 'call' hdv-ya- 'to be invoked';
car-kf-t-ya- 'to
2.

vdr-ya- 'to be chosen'.

Final -a coalesces with the

vf- 'choose'
3.

between which and -a

'to be given';
(AV.).
In the RV., how-

of -ia to

initial

a phonetic y is interposed; thus da- 'give'

khya- 'see' -kkye-ya- (AV.); ma- 'measure'
ever, the form Jiia-ya- once occurs in the
'to be recognized by his might'.

de'-ya-

me'-ya-

e,

(^

compound

da-i-y-a-)

bala-vi-jha-yd- (x. 103^)

A medial vowel either remains unchanged or, if short, may take

4.
Guna, and a is sometimes lengthened; thus fd-ya- 'to be praised'; guh-ya- 'to
be hidden'; -dhrs-ya- 'to be assailed'; dvh-ya- (AV.) 'to be hated' i^dvis-);
yodh-ya- 'to be fought' {}/yudh-); drdh-ya- 'to be completed' {^frdh-); mdrj-yato be purified' {\finrj-);
cdks-ya- 'to be seen';
ddbh-ya- 'to be deceived';
rdmh-ya- 'to be hastened'; rddh-ya- 'to be won'; vdnd-ya- 'praiseworthy';
sdms-ya- 'to be lauded'; -sdd-ya- from sad- 'sit'; -mad-ya- from mad- 'be exhilarated'; v&c-ya- 'to be said' iyvac-).
Hardly a dozen gerundives, almost restricted to the RV., are
579.
formed with -dy-yai (which with one exception is always to be read -dyid):
daks-ayya- 'to be conciliated'; pan-dyya- 'to be admired';
vid-dyya- 'to be
The form -sTr-ta- is
Whitney, Roots, s.

found in the
yir- 'crush'.
roots ending in

4 Cp. Grassmann,
V.
5 Cp. Lindner, Nominalbildung 22; Deladded to
BRUCK, Verbum 233; Whitney 966 c; Bar-', -, -r to form nominal stems
THOLOMAE, BB. 15, 179 n. I; BB. 20, 85.
(308),
3 The meaning is
uncertain
Whitney
translates the word by 'borrowed'.
See his
1

MS.
2

Cp.

the

-t

also

v.

notes in his Translation.

,.

VII. Verb.

found';

irav-ayya- 'glorious';

407

'to be denied'.
few are formed
causatives: trayay-ayya- 'to be guarded' {Ytrd-) ';

-hnav-ayya-

from secondary verbs from

;

Infinitive.

panay-ayya- 'admirable' {Ypan-); sprhay-ayya- 'desirable' {^fsprh-); from a

desiderative:
di-dhi-s-ayya- 'to be conciliated {ydha-);
from an intensive:
vi-tan-tas-Ayya- 'to be hastened' {;}[tarns-).
Akin to these gerundives is the
anomalous form stusi-yya- 'to be praised', derived direct from the infinitive
stusi 'to praise'^.

580, More than a dozen gerundives are formed with -en-ya (generally
be read -enid): tks-Snya- 'worthy to be seen', il-inya- 'praiseworthy', -care'nya- 'to be acted',
drs-enya- 'worthy to be seen', -dvis-enya- 'malignant',
a-bhus-Snya- 'to be glorified', yudh-enya- 'to be combatted', vdr-enya- 'desirable'.
From the aorist stem is formed -yams-inya- 'to be guided' iyyam-); and
perhaps paprks-enya-^ 'desirable' {:)fprach-).
A few are also derived from
secondary verbs; from desideratives
didrks-Snya- 'worthy to be seen'
iydrs-), susrus-enya- (TS.) 'deserving to be heard'; from intensives: marmrj-enya- 'to be adorned', vavrdh-enya- 'to be glorified'; from a denominative: sapary-enya- 'to be adored'.
581. About a dozen gerundives, almost restricted to the RV.t, end in
-iv-a (generally to be read as -tu-a), which seems to be the infinitive stem
in -tu turned into an adjective by means of the suffix -a: kdr-tva- 'to be
made', jdn-i-tva- and jdn-tva- 'to be bom', ji-tva- 'to be won', ndn-tva- 'to be
bent', bhdv-T-tva- 'future', vdk-tva- 'to be said', sdn-i-tva- 'to be won', s6-tva'to be pressed', sni-tva- 'suitable for bathing', hdn-tva- 'to be slain', he-tva'to be driven on' (|//z/-).

to

AV. there begins

gerundive in -tav-ya. It probably started

which was turned into an adjective
by means of the suffix -ia^. The only examples of this formation are jan-i-tav-ya- 'to
be born' (AV. IV. 237) and hims-i-tav-ya- 'to be injured' (AV. v. 186).
b. There are also two examples in the AV. of a new gerundive in -an-lya, which
is
derived from a verbal noun in -ana with the adjective suffix -Tya. These are
upa-jiv-aniya- 'serving for subsistence'
'to be subsisted on' (AV. VIII. 1022);
a-maniraniya- 'fit for address' [a-mdnirana-) == 'worthy to be addressed' (AV. viri. 10^)6.
a.

In the

from the stem of the predicative

to appear a

infinitive in -tav-e,

c. Infinitive.

A. LuDWiG,

Der

Infinitiv

im Veda, Prag

1871.

J.

Jolly, Geschichte des

Infinitivs

Delbruck, Das altim Indogermanischen (Munchen 1873), especially p. Ill 137.

indische Verbum (1874), p. 221
228; Altindische Syntax p. 410425. AvERY, VerbBrunnhofer, tjber die durch einInflection in Sanskrit, JAOS. 10,275276 (1876).

der wurzel gebildeten infinitive des Veda, KZ. 30 (1890), 504 513.
v. Negelein,
Bartholomae, Zur bildung des dat. sing, der a-stamme, BB. 15. 221 247.
Fritz Wolff, Die infinitive des Indischen
Zur Sprachgeschichte des Veda (1898), 91.
und Iranischen. Erster teil Die ablativisch-genetivischen und die accusativischen infini-

fache flectirung

tive, Giitersloh 1905.

The infinitive, all the forms of which are old cases of nouns of
very frequently used, occurring in the RV. alone about 700 times.
The case-forms which it exhibits are those of the accusative, dative, ablativeOnly the first two are common, but the dative is
genitive, and locative.
by far the commonest, outnumbering the accusative in the proportion of 12
Infinitives are
to I in the RV. (609 to 49)", and of 3 to i in the AV.*
582.

action,

is

5 Cp. Brugmann, KG. 809.

s. v., and Whitney 105 i f.
6 The gerundive meaning in these two
See Brugmann, KG. 809.
3 See Benfey, Vollstandige Grammatik verbal adjectives is probably only incipient.
The second is expressly connected with the
904 and 860.
4 A
few of these are also found in B., verbal noun d-mantrana-.
7 AvERY 231.
also an additional one, ho-tva- 'to be sacri1

Cp. Grassmann,

ficed', in

the MS. (l

93).

Whitney

986.

4o8

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

Vedic Grammar.

4.

from radical stems or stems in -tu, only a few dative and

being made from other stems. It is somewhat remarkable
that the ace. form in -turn which is the only infinitive in the later language,
hardly occurs in the RV., being found there only five times'', while the
dative infinitive, which is more than seven times as frequent as all the rest
in the RV., has almost disappeared even in the Brahmanas. The formations
which are restricted to the infinitive meaning are the datives in -tavai, -dhyai,
and (the very few) in -se, besides a small number of locatives in -sdni. In
other forms it is often difficult to draw a strict line of demarcation between
the infinitive^ and ordinary case uses 3.

formed

chiefly

forms

locative

Dative

I.

Infinitive.

which when added to the a of a root

or stem combines with it to -at. It has the final meaning of '(in order) to',
'for (the purpose of)'^.
This dative is commonly used without an object;
hence a dative often appears beside it by attraction instead of an accusative; e. g. asmdbhyam drsdye sUryaya punar datum dsum (x. r4'^) 'may they
two grant us life again, for the sun, that we may see (it)', i. e. 'that we may
see the sun' (= drsdye siiryam).
When used with kr- 'make' or verbs of
wishing, and when predicative, this infinitive acquires a passive meaning; e. g.
agnim sam-idhe cakdrtha (i. 1 1 39) 'thou hast made (= caused) the fire to be
kindled'; ydd im ustndsi kdrtave (x. 74*) 'what we wish to be done';
brahmadvisah
hdntavd u (x. 1823) 'Brahma-haters (are) to be slain' ^.
584. From roots are formed some 60 dative infinitives.
a.
About a dozen are made from roots ending in long vowels,
chiefly -a, and one in -i. All of these are found only compounded with
prefixes, excepting bhu-, which appears once in the simple form. Two of them
drop a before the -e^. These infinitives are: vi-khydi 'to look abroad'; para-ddi
This

583.

'to

and

in

-<?,

give M^' ; prati-mdi 'to imitate' (in. 60I); -ydi 'to go'; a<7-j7 (111.53") 'to

rest';
'to

ends

infinitive

s'rad-dke {1.102')

'to trust'

form'; pra-hye (x. logJ)

-bhv-e 'to be' (ybhu-)

(with the dat. particle

send' (^hi-); -mly-e

'to

cross'

-tir-e 'to

Ytf-)

kdm); pra-mi

{pi.'jo'')

diminish' (l/?r-); bhuv-i

-stir-e {^stf- 'spread').

'to
;

The rest are formed from roots ending in consonants. The uncompounded forms are: tvis-i 'to arouse', drs-e 'to see', bhuj-e 'to enjoy',
mah-i 'to be glad', mih-i 'to make water', tnud-e 'to rejoice', mus-e 'to rob',
b.

tnuh-e 'to be bewildered', yuj-e 'to yoke', yudh-e 'to fight', ruc-e 'to shine', vrdh-i
'to thrive', subh-e 'to shine'.

The compounded forms

drive', -idh-e 'to

much more

are

-krdm-e

kindle',

'to

-Hr-e 'to cross', -tuj-e^ 'to procure',

-dhrs-e 'to

'to see',

attain',

-niks-e 'to pierce',

'to

-ydks-e 'to speed',

speak'

(l/"z/a<r-),

-vrj-e 'to
'to

AvEE.y 230.
Whitney 970

Cp.
Cp.

'to

-vid-e 'to

find',

'to

'to

thrust',

(TS.

injure',

i.

'to

-pfc-e 'to

2. 3')

'to

'to seize',

-dis-e 'to point',

-dfs-e

bend', -nds-e (-l-VS.)''to

-pfcch-e 'to ask';

fill',

awake',

-mfse

-ri'ij-e

break', -vdc-e 'to

'to

'to

forget',

-vidh-e 'to pierce' {Yvyadh-), -vis-e 'to seize',

-vft-e 'to turn', -sds-e 'to proclaim', -sdd-e 'to

-skdbh-e

'to

prop',

-spfs'-e 'to

touch',

sit',

-sud-e

-sydd-e 'to

embrace'''.

1;

of the

Brugmann, KG. 805811.

Whitney

-dj-e 'to

-ddbh-e

yoke', -rdbh-e

Wolff p. i.
Whitney 982. On the uses

infinitive, cp.
t

-bitdhe

-skdd-e 'to leap',

flow', -svdj-e 'to

1

-yi'ij-e

put round',

enjoy',

-ni'id-e

(AV.),

bind'

are:

-grdbh-e 'to seize', -cdks-e 'to see',

be bold' (H- AV.TS.), -ndm-e

-bddh-e

They

frequent.

stride',

982, a

substantive.

d,
7

5 That
srad-dM and pra-me, which
is,
might, however, be explained as locatives.
6 In viil. 415 the dative,
accented tuj-e,
occurring independently, appears to be a

Cp. the

list

in

Ludwig

p.

5658.

Vn. Verb.

One

0.
(in.

31^3)

'to

infinitive

409

formed from a reduplicated root: Hmdth-e

according to Grassmann' it is the locative of a

also

is

but

attack';

Infinitive.

substantive meaning 'attack'.

585. The remaining dative infinitives are formed

derived with nine different suffixes.

Some 25

1.

following: ayas-e

rnjds-e 'to strive

javds-e'-

(iii.

dh&yas-e

of these are

datives

after',

ksddas-e^

'to

dhruvds-e

live',

'to see',

are the

'to

praise',

cards-e 'to fare',

tujds-e 'to hurl', dohds-e 'to milk',

sit firmly',

'to

They

-as^.

be worthy of, rcds-e

partake of, cdksas-e

50^) 'to speed', jivds-e 'to

'to cherish',

stems in

of

5 7 3) 'to go', arhds-e 'to

(i.

from verbal nouns

pusyds-e

'to thrive',

bhdras-e^

'to

bear', bhiyds-e 'to fear', bhojds-e 'to enjoy', rajds-e 'to shine', vrnjds-e 'to turn

vrdhds-e

aside',

sdhyas-e^
'to

'to

'to further',
sobhds-e 'to shine', sriyds-e 'to be resplendent',
conquer', spdras-e 'to help to', spurdhds-e 'to strive after', hards-e

seize'.

a. Three roots form an infinitive stem with -S only instead of -as: ji-s-i 'to conquer', upa-prak-s-i^ (v. 476) 'to unite', stu-s-i 'to praise' '.

2.

Some

half dozen are

tuj-dy-e (v. 46^)

refresh',

yudh-dy-e

'to

fight',

Four or

3.

pi-tdy-e 'to drink',

(nfn)

'to

san-dy-e
five

are

vT-tdy-e

formed
breed',

'to

'to

firom

stems

drs-dy-e 'to

in

mah-dy-e

'to

'to

rejoice',

win'; cit-dy-e^ (VS.) 'to understand'.

formed from stems in

'to

is-dy-e^ (vi. 52''S)

-/':

see',

enjoy',

-ti:

sa-tdy-e 'to win';

is-tdy-e

perhaps

'to

refresh',

also u-tdy-e

help (his men)'.

Over 30 dative infinitives are formed from stems in -tu (added to

the gunated root, in some instances with connecting vowel), from which ace.
and abl. gen. infinitives are also formed:
4.

o.

dt-tav-e 'to eat',

ds-tav-e 'to attain',

weave'

ds-tav-e (VS.;

TS.

iv. 5. i^)

'to

make', gdn-tav-e
and gd-tav-e 'to go', da-tav-e 'to give', prdti-dha-tav-e 'to place upon', dhd-tav-e
'to suck', pdk-tave (AV.) 'to cook', pdt-tav-e 'to fall', pd-tav-e 'to drink', bhdrtav-e 'to bear away', mdn-tav-e 'to think', ydn-tav-e 'to present', yds-tav-e 'to
sacrifice', ys-tav-e 'to go', yo-tav-e 'to ward off'', vdk-tav-e 'to speak', prd-vantav-e 'to win' (y^z/aw-), vdr-tav-e 'to restrain', vds-tav-e 'to shine', vd-tav-e (AV.)
shoot',

e-tav-e 'to go',

6-tav-e 'to

{\fva-),

kdr-tav-e

'to

weave', v^t-tav-e (AV.) 'to find', v6-lhav-e 'to convey', pdri-iak-tav-e 'to overcome', sdr-tav-e 'to flow', sU-iav-e 'to bring forth', se-tav-e (AV.) 'to bind', jt?'/tep-i? 'to press', sto-tav-e 'to praise', hdn-tav-e 'to slay'.
'to

^. dv-i-tav-e 'to refresh', cdr-i-tav-e 'to i2xt\ jiv-d-tav-e (TS. iv. 2. 65;
xvixi.

67)

'to

live',

sdvi-tav-e

bring

'to

srdv-i-tav-e 'to flow', hdv-i-tav-e 'to

5.

Over a dozen

like -fe to the

infinitives

forth',

(AV.)

stdr-t-tav-e

'to

VS.

lay low',

call'.

are formed from

stems

in -fai^a (added

gunated root), which are doubly accented.

a. e'-tavdi 'to go' (also dty-, dnv-, etavdi), 6-tavdi 'to weave', gdn-tavdi 'to
go' (also upa-gantavdi), dd-tavdi 'to give', pdri-dha-tavdi (AV.) 'to envelope',
dpa-bhar-tavdi 'to be taken away', mdn-tavdi 'to think',
pd-tavdi 'to drink',

md-tavdi

'to

/az/aV 'to

slay'".

s.

low',

sdr-tavdi 'to flow',

V. iisnatha.

As a

rule the suffix, but in half a

instances the root, is accented.
2

sa-tavdi (AV.)

'to

bring forth'),

/^i-

prdkse.
Cp. Oldenberg. Rgveda, note on
dozen V. 47^7 See Delbruck p. 181 (I, 5); cp. above,

According to Grassmann, 2. sing, middle. p. 378, note I.

8 Cp. however, Delbruck 207.
According to Gkassmann, dat. of the
9 Perhaps more probably a substantive,
substantive javas meaning 'swiftness'.
'for understanding'.
5 According to Grassmann, dat. of the according to BR.:
3
4

10 The MS. has

Delbruck, Verbum, and Avery accent 982 d and Wolff 7

comparative sahyas.
6

kdrtavai,
(p. 9),

cp.

WHITNEY

4IO

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

^. jiv-i-tavdi
'to

(AV.)

4.

Vedic Grammar.

(Pp. -ta vdi), ydm-i-tavdi

'to live'

srdv-i-tavdi

'to guide',

flow'.

There seems to be only one certain example of a dative infinitive

6.
formed from a stem in -iya: i-tydi 'to go".
Some 35 dative infinitives almost limited to the RV.' are formed
7.
from stems in -dhya added to verbal bases ending in a (generally accented),
and seem to have the termination -dhyai: iyd-dhyai 'to go' (^i-), ird-dhyai^
'to seek to win', isd-dhyai and isdya-dhyai 'to refresh', irayd-dhyai 'to set in
motion', ksdra-dhyai 'to pour out', gdma-dhyai 'to go', grnd-dkyai {Kk. v. 2. i")
'to praise', card-dhyai 'to fare', jard-dhyai 'to sing', tamsayd-dhyai 'to attract',
tard-dhyai to overcome', duhd-dhyai 'to milk', dhiyd-dhyai 'to deposit' {Ydha-'),
nasayd-dhyai 'to cause to disappear', piba-dhyai 'to drink', prnd-dkyai 'to fill',

bhdra-dhyai 'to bear', mandd-dhyai 'to delight in', mandayd-dhyai 'to rejoice',
madayd-dhyai 'to delight in', ydja-dhyai'> 'to worship', risayd-dhyai 'to injure
oneself, vandd-dhyai 'to praise', vartayd-dhyai 'to cause to turn', vdha-dhyai 'to
guide', vajayd-dhyai 'to hasten', vavrdhd-dhyai (from the perfect) 'to strengthen',
vrjd-dhyai 'to turn to', sayd-dhyai 'to lie', sucd-dhyai 'to shine', sacd-dhyai 'to
partake', sdha-dhyai 'to overcome', stavd-dhyai 'to praise', syandayd-dhyai 'to
flow', huvd-dhyai 'to call'.
The TS. has also one of these infinitives ending
in

gamd-dhye

-:

8.

3. 6^).

(i.

Five dative

are formed from stentis

infinitives

da-man-e

dhdr-man-e

(x. 88^)

in -man:
support',

trd-man-e

bhdr-man-e

'to

protect',

'to

preserve', vid-mdn-e^ 'to know'.

'to

Three dative infinitives are formed fi'om stems in -van: tur-vdn-e

9.
overcome' (lA^?^-), da-vdn-e 'to give', dhur-van-e 'to injure' (lA^/^w--).

give',

'to

2.

Accusative

'to

Infinitive.

586. This infinitive is an accusative in sense as well as in form, being

It is primarily employed as a supine
used only as the object of a verb.
It is formed in two ways.
with verbs of motion^ to express purpose.
a.
More than a dozen radical stems in the RV. and several others in
the

AV. form an accusative infinitive with the ending -ani^

The root nearly always ends in a consonant and appears

in

its

weak

not always easy to distinguish these infinitives from substantives,

but the following include all the more certain forms: sam-idham 'to kindle',
vi-cft-am 'to unfasten', pra-tir-am {ytf-) 'to prolong', prati-dkam 'to place upon'
form.

It is

(A v.),

{vi-,

sam-ypfcch-am

'to

ask',

pra-miy-am

'to

neglect' (Ymi-),

ydm-am^

a-rdbh-am 'to reach', a-ri'ih-am 'to mount',

a-vis-am 'to enter', mbh-am 'to shine', a-sdd-am 'to sit down's.
b. Five accusative infinitives from stems in -iu (of which the dative
'to

guide', yi'idh-am. (AV.)

'to fight',

X. 106*

hhujydi, occurring beside

doubtless a substantive; other
cases of the word are also met with: see
Grassmann, s. v. bhuji. The MS.1. 6^ has also
sadhyai(ixQ\a. sah-\-ti); rohisyai, which occurs
in the TS.l.3.io=is doubtless a substantive;
see Delbrijck 201 and Whitney 977.
2 This infinitive
form occurs once only
in the AV. in a. Rigvedic passage.
3 An intensive formation i\ora.\radh-{(>if, 1).
1

In

fusfyai,

is

yajadhyai TS.

IV.

(>.

Whitney 974 also

Cp, Wolff 32, 40.

2,^;

VS. XVII.

57.

quotes ddr-mane.

The only

roots in vowels taking

it

are

dha-, mi-, if-.

Occurs three times in the RV., always

dependent on sakema.
9 Perhaps also sam-oh-am (strong radical
vowel) and ufa-spij-am.
Cp. the list in
Wolff, p. 87 90. There are several quite
doubtful examples from the AV., as nih8

kkid-am (conjecture), pra-idnk-am, sam-riidham. See Whitney's notes in his Translation

on AV.

IV. 162; V. 18^; VII. 50^.

Vn. Verb.
form

is

much commoner) ' occur

others in the AV.: dt-tum (AV.)

Infinitive.

411

RV. and about

the same number of

6-tum 'to weave', kdr-tum (AV.) 'to
overcome', khdn-i-tum (VS.xi. 10) 'to dig',

in the
'to

eat',

make', ni-kartum (Kh. iv. s'S) 'to

da-tum 'to give', drds-tum (AV.) 'to see', prds-tum 'to ask', prd-bhar-tum 'to
present', yAc-i-tum (AV.) 'to ask for', dnu prd-volhum 'to advance spdrdh-i-tum
(AV.) 'to contend with'^
,

3.

Ablative-Genitive Infinitive.

infinitive is formed in two ways, Hke the accusative infrom a radical stem or from a verbal noun in -tu (from which
a dative and an ace. infinitive are also formed) 3. The former, therefore, ends in
-as, the latter in -ios.
As these endings are both ablative and genitive in
form, the cases can only be distinguished syntactically.
The ablative use is
by this criterion shown to preponderate considerably.
a. The -as form has the ablative sense almost exclusively, as is
indicated by its being employed with words governing the ablative, viz. the
adnominal prepositions rte 'without', purd 'before', and the verbs pa- 'protect'

This

587.

either

finitive,

It occurs with the same kind of attraction as appears

with the dative infinitive: thus trddhvam kartdd ava-pdd-as (11. ag*)* 'save us
firom the pit, from falling down (into it)'. There are six such ablatives in the
E.V.: a-tfd-as 'being pierced', ava-pdd-as 'falling down', sam-pfc-as 'coming in

tra- 'rescue', bhi- 'fear'.

contact', abhi-sris-as 'binding', abhi-svds-as 'blowing', ati-skdd-as 'leaping across'.

There seems

a.

at least one example (11.28^) of the genitive

able to wink', the construction of lAw- being
Another instance is
as with the genitive infinitive in -tos (b a).

use, viz. ni-mis-as

the

same

perhaps a-pfc-as
b.

Of

'to

be

also to

Ue

fill'

'I

am

409).

(viii.

the infinitives in -tos occurring in the

by the construction to be ablatives.

They

RV. some six

are

shown

are: ^-tos 'going', gdn-tos 'going',

jdni-tos 'being born', ni-dha-tos 'putting down', sdr-i-tos 'being shattered', s6-tos
'pressing', hdn-tos 'being struck'; perhaps also vds-tos (i. 17 4^) 5.
a. Three infinitives in -tos have the genitive sense, viz. kdr-tos

madhya) ^, dd-tos 'giving', and yo-ios 'warding off' (both with is'have power'). In two passages in which tse governs the infinitive attraction
of the object appears as with the dative infinitive: tse raydh suvfryasya dates
(vii. 4^) 'he has power over wealth (and) brave sons, over giving (them)', i. e.
tse . . yotos
.
'he has power to give wealth and brave sons'; also ydsya
'doing' (with

(vi.

18'^)

'whom he can ward

4,

off'?.

Locative Infinitive.

588. This form of the infinitive is rare, since thirteen or fourteen examples
at the most occur. Several of these are, however, indistinguishable in meaning
from ordinary locatives of verbal nouns*.
a. Five or six of these locatives are formed from radical stems: vy-us-i
sam-cdks-i 'on beholding', drs-i and sam-drs-i 'on seeing',
'at the dawning',
waking'.
As these nearly always govern a genitive, they are
budh-i 'at the
preferably to be explained as simple locatives of verbal nouns.
it
governs the ablative rather than the
See above 585, 4.
genitive.
See the list in Wolff p. 68 -71^ See Delbruck, Altindische Syntax p. 418,
3 Above 585, 4 and 586.
4 Cp. also vnr. Ii=: pura jatrubhya a-tfdas and cp. Wolff 58.
8 Cp. DELBRtJCK2I2(p.227) and WfflTNEY
before the cartilages being pierced'.
985.
i See Wolff n.
1

On

this

word see Wolff

14,

who

thinks

412

I.

One

b.

locative infinitive

and vi-dhar-tar-i

support'

Eight

c.

stems in -san
cross',
'to

Allgemeines und Sprache.

in

ne-sdfi-i 'to

swell',

a.

sak-sdn-i

The form

the

RV.

lead',
'to

formed from a stem in -far: dhar-idr-i

is

genuine

They

par-sdn-i

are:
'to

infinitive

meaning are formed from

gr-nf-sdn-i^ 'to sing',

pass',

abhi-bhu-sdn-i

abide' {\/sac-Y, upa-str-ni-sdn-i'^

isdn-i

(11.

'to

bestow'.

'to

with

locatives

Vedic Grammar.

4.

'to

'to

su-sdii-i

aid',

spread'.

seems to be derived from

2 9),

tar-T-sdn-i 'to

is-

'emit' for

is-sdn-V^.

Gerund.

d.

number (upwards of 120) of forms ending in -ivi, -tvs,

-tvdya, -tya, -ya occur in the RV. and AV. in the sense of gerunds expressing
an action which accompanies or more often precedes that of the finite verb.
They are doubtless old cases + (the first most probably a locative, the rest
589.

considerable

instrumentals) of verbal nouns formed with

employed in the formation of infinitives'.

-tu,

-ti,

-i,

all

of which are also

The first three are formed from

the simple root, the last two from the compounded root.
590. A. a. Of the gerunds formed from the simple root, those in -ivi
are the commonest in the RV., there being fifteen altogether in the RV.
They hardly ever occur in any of the other Sarnhitas. They appear to be old
-tu, which
two instances with connecting

locatives^ of stems in

as a rule

is

added

directly to the root, but

They

are kr-tvt 'having made', kha-tvi

(TS. IV. I. I*) 'having dug', ga-tvt 'having gone', gu-dhvi 'having concealed',
jani-tvi 'having produced', jus-tvT 'liking', pT-tvi 'having drunk', pu-tvi 'having
in

-/-.

cleansed',
bhu-tvi 'having become',
vr-tvi 'enclosing',
vrk-tvi 'having overthrown' {Ywj-), vis-tvi 'working' i^vis-), vrs-tvt 'showering', skabhi-tvi 'having
propped', ha-ivi 'having smitten', hi-ivi 'having abandoned (^M-).

b. The gerund in -iva, an old instrumental of a verbal noun in -tu, is

formed by nine roots in the RV. and about thirty more in the AV. Those
found in the RV. are: pi-tvA 'having drunk', bhit-tvd 'having shattered', bhu-

iva 'having become', mi-tvd 'having formed' {y/mS-), yuk-tvi 'having yoked',
vr-tvi 'having covered', sru-tvd 'having heard', ha-tvd 'having slain', hi-tva
'having abandoned' {Yha-).
The forms occurring in the AV. include two

formed from secondary verbal stems and three others formed with the
connecting vowel --. They are: is-tvA 'having sacrificed' iyyaj-), kalpay-i-tva
'having shaped',

kr-tvd 'having made',

grh-i-tvd 'having seized', jag-dhvd

gathered',

cay-i-tvd 'noting',

krt-tvd 'trading', ga-tva 'having gone',

'having devoured' i^jaks-),

ci-tvd.

'having

'having

crossed' (l//f-), tr-dhvS. 'having

shattered' 7 ()/"/r//-), dat-tvd 'having given', drs-tvA 'having seen', pak-tvA 'having
cooked', pu-tvA 'having purified', bad-dhvA 'having bound', bhak-tvA 'sharing',
tir-tvA

mrs-tvA 'having wiped off', ru-dhvA 'having ascended', lab-dhvA 'taking', vit-tvA
'having found', vrs-tvA 'cutting off' {Yvrasc-)^, sup-tvA 'having slept', stabdhvA 'having established', stu-tvA 'having praised', sna-tvA 'having bathed',
sramsay-i-tva 'letting fall', hims-i-tvA 'having injured'. One gerund in -tva also
occurs though compounded v/ith a prefix: praty-arpay-i-tvA (AV.) 'having sent
^

Formed from the present base.

From ysac-, BR Delbruck, Verbum

Bartholomae, loc, cit.

AV. XIX. 346

is probably to be
213; from \sah-, Whitney 978.
read tris fiia 'thrice thee'; see Whitney's
3 See B6HTLINGK, pw. s. V. isdni, and cp, Translation.
Whitney 978, Oldenberg, note on 11. 2^.
8 See note on AV. viii. 32 in Whitney's
4 Cp. v.Negelein, ZurSprachgeschichte 91. Translation (RV. has vrk-iva).
Cp. Bartholomae, BB. 15, 227, 239;
5
Brugmann, Grundriss 2, logo.
7

irs-tva in

Vn. Verb.
in opposition'.

From

Gerunds.

413

KMas j'anay-i-tvd (1.4*); from the VS. i-tvd (xxxii.

'having known', spr-tvd (xxxi. i) 'pervading'.
gerund in the RV. is that in -ivaya, being formed from
the

12), vid-i-tva (xxxi. 18)

The

c.

rarest

only seven roots. It appears to be a late formation, occurring only in the

tentli Mandala, excepting one example in the eighth (viii. 100*) in a hymn
which is marked by Arnold'' as belonging to the latest period of the RV.
Two of these gerunds {gatvaya and hatvaya) recur in the AV, which, however, has no additional examples of this type. These forms have the appearance
of being datives of stems in -tva, but the use of the dative in this sense is
in itself unlikely, as that case is otherwise employed to express the final
meaning of the infinitive. Hence Bartholomae^ explains the forms as a
metrical substitute for a fem. inst. in -tvdya (from the stem -tva), or for a loc.
of -tva with enclitic a added. There seems to be another possible explanation.
Three of the seven forms occurring appear instead of the corresponding
forms in -tva of the older Mandalas. Owing to this close connexion and
the lateness as well as the rarity of these forms, we may here have a tentative double formation, under the influence of compound gerunds formed with
-ya which end in -aya, such as a-ddya 'taking'.
The forms occurring are /^r-Zz/ajca ( VS. xi. 5 9 ; TS. iv. i. 54) 'having made',
ga-tvdya 'having gone', jag-dhvdya 'having devoured', ta-tvdya (VS.xi. i) 'having
stretched', dat-tvdya 'having given', drs-tvdya 'having seen', bhak-tvdya 'having
attained', yuk-tudya 'having yoked', vr-tvdya (TS. iv. i. 2^; VS. xi. 19) 'having
covered', ha-tvdya 'having slain', hi-tvdya 'having abandoned'.
591. B. "When the verb is compounded, the suffix is regularly either
-ya or -iya.
In at least two-thirds of these forms the vowel is long in
the RV.+
a. Nearly 40 roots in the RV. and about 30 more in the AV., when
compounded with verbal prefixes, take the suffix -ya^. Four roots take it
also when compounded with nouns or adverbs. The forms occurring in the
RV. are in the alphabetical order of the radical initial: a-dc-ya 'bending',
fra-drp-ya 'setting in motion', prati-is-ya 'having sought for', abhi-i'ip-ya 'having
enveloped' i^vap^, vi-kft-ya 'having cut in pieces', abhi-krdm-ya 'approaching*,
abhi-khyd-ya 'having descried', abhi-g&r-ya. 'graciously accepting', sam-gfbh-ya
'gathering', prati-gfh-ya. 'accepting', anu-ghi'cs-ya 'proclaiming aloud', abhi-cdks-ya

prati-cdks-ya 'observing' and vi-cdks-ya 'seeing clearly', ni-cdy-ya

pari-tdp-ya 'stirring up' (heat), vi-tur-yd 'driving forth', a-dd-ya 'taking'

'regarding',
'fearing",

and pari-dd-ya 'handing

over",

ati-div-ya 'playing higher',

anu-dfs-ya 'looking

along', abhi-pdd-ya 'acquiring', pra-pruth-ya 'puffing out', vi-bhid-ya 'shattering',

abhi-bhu-ya 'overcoming', vi-md-ya 'disposing' and sam-md-ya 'measuring out',

sam-mil-ya 'closing the eyes', vi-muc-yd 'unyoking', a-mus-yd 'appropriating',
anu-mfs-ya 'grasping', a-yU-ya^ 'taking to oneself, a-rdbh-ya 'grasping' and
sam-rdbA-yd 'surrounding oneself with', ni-ri'idh-yd 'having restrained', abhivft-ya 'having overcome' and a-vft-ya 'causing to roll towards', abhi-vldg-yd
'pursuing', ni-sdd-ya 'having sat down', vi-sdh-ya 'having conquered', ava-sd-ya
'having unyoked', sam-hd-ya 'preparing oneself {hd- 'go'). Compounds formed
with adverbs are: punar-dd-ya 'giving back', mitha-spfdh-ya 'vying together';
and with nouns, karna-grh-ya 'seizing by the ear', pdda-gfh-ya 'grasping by
the foot', hasta-grh-ya 'grasping by the hand'.
1

tvd:

The MS. has also

Whitney 990 a.

the form sam-iray-i-

Vedic Metre p. 283.

BB. IS, p. 239, 12.

Cp.

Whitney 993

On

the gerund in -ya cp. Neisser, BB.

30,308311.

a.

-yu-ya

is

also

compounded with

ni-

and

414

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

The additional roots thus compounded in the AV. are: ud-iik-ya

'having carried up', a-krdm-ya 'stepping into' and pari-krdm-ya 'striding about',
sam-gir-ya 'swallowing up', sam-grh-ya'^ 'having grasped'^, vi-cchid-ya 'having
cut asunder', upa-ddd-ya 'putting in' {da- 'give') 3, abhi-dhA-ya 'encircling',
vi-dhii-ya 'shaking off', para-ni-ya 'leading away', a-pdd-ya 'arriving at' and prapdd-ya 'going forward', sam-pd-ya 'drinking

up', vi-bhaj-ya 'having apportioned',

immerged' {)fmajj-),
apa-ma-ya 'having measured off''', apa-mfj-ya 'having wiped off', sam-rdbh-ya
'taking hold together', a-ri'ih-ya 'ascending', satn-lup-ya 'having torn up'S,
(caus. oiYbhaj-)^ sam-bhii-ya 'combining', ni-mdjj-ya 'having

upa-vii-ya 'sitting down',

a-sdd-ya

sam-sd-ya 'sharpening',
down', sam-sic-ya 'having poured
sam-siv-ya 'having sewed',
nih-sfp-ya

pari-vis-ya 'attending upon',

upon' and ni-sdd-ya

'sitting

'sitting

apa-s'idh-ya 'driving away',

'having crept out', ati-sthd-ya 'excelling', prati-sthd-ya 'standing firm', ut-thd-ya
'arising'.
From the VS.: ni-Hr-ya (xvi. 13) 'having broken off', sam-sfj-ya
(xi. 53) 'having mingled', ati-hd-ya (xxv. 43) 'having missed'.

together',

b. Roots which
nasal,

add

pounded.
gone'

end

in a short vowel, either originally or after losing a

in RV.) or -tya instead of -y&, when com-

(nearly always

-iya.

The

following gerunds are thus formed in the RV. -i-tya 'having

abhi- and a-, -i-tya with abhi- and prati-; a-gd-tya 'having
:

with a/z-,

come' iYg'^'n-), a-df-tya 'regarding', a-bhf-tya 'bringing', vi-hd-tya 'having

driven away' iyhan-)\ and with adverbial prefixes aram-kf-tya 'having made
From the Khilas: aty-d-hr-tya (iv. 5^9).
ready', akhkkalT-kf-tya 'shouting'.

The AV. has

'separating'

(?)'',

the following gerunds from nine additional roots nir-f-tya

and sam-ji-tya 'having wholly

abhi-ji-tya 'having conquered',

conquered', a-td-tya^ 'having expanded', apa-mi-tya 'having borrowed' ()/"/-),

'lifting up', pra-d-vr-tya 'having enveloped', upa-sru-tya 'having overheard', ud-dhf-tya 'having taken up' i^hr-)\ also in composition with a substantive: namas-kf-tya.
The VS. has upa-stu-tya (xxi. 46) 'having invoked'
and pra-stii-tya (xxi. 46) 'having lauded'.
ud-yd-tya

VIII.

INDECLINABLES.

I. Prepositions.
Der Akkusativ im Veda (Breslau 1880),

210.
Whitney,
p. 193
Sanskrit Grammar 1077
DELBRUCK.Altindisclie Syntax p. 440 47 1.
1130.
1089,
Cp. Benfey, VoUstandige Grammatik 241 and 784.
Brugmann, KG. p. 457 480,
J. S. Speijer, Vedische und Sanskrit-Syntax, Grundriss i. 6, 87.

Gaedicke,

H23

Two classes of prepositions are to be distinguished. The first

embraces the genuine or adverbial prepositions. These are words with
a local sense which, being primarily used to modify the meaning of verbs,
came to be connected independently with the cases governed by the verbs
thus modified.
They show no signs of derivation from inflexional forms or
(except tirds and purds) forms made with adverbial suffixes.
The second
class embraces what may be called adnominal prepositions. These are words
which are not compounded with verbs, but govern cases only. As regards
form, they almost invariably end in case terminations or adverbial suffixes.
592.

class

-grhya also appears compounded with

and prati-.
The gerund d-ghra-ya (AV. xix. 8^),
the reading of the text, is not found in the
Mss. and is doubtless wrong ; cp. WfflTNEY's
Index Verborum.
i
From the present base of ydd-, cp,
Whitney 992 a.
ni-, vi2

afa-ma-ya

is

a conjectural reading.

and

v.

Negelein 92 gives

-sus-ya

as

occurring

-vidh-ya (]/vyadh-]
in the AV., but

they are not to be found in Whitney's

Index verborum.
6 See note on AV. x. 2^ in Whitney's
Translation.
Conjectural reading in AV. XX. 136-';
7
see Whitney's Index Verborum

Adverbial Prepositions.

VIII. Indeclinables.

415

A. Adverbial Prepositions.
593. Of the twenty-two included in this class', eight are never used
adnominally, viz. dpa^ 'away'; ud 'up', 'out'; ni 'down', 'into'; nis 'out'; /ara
'away';

Three

pra

vi

'forth';

others, for the

'asunder' (often

'away');

'dis-',

most part employed adnominally, are

sdm^

'together'*.

restricted in their

adverbial use to combination with particular verbs, viz. dccha 'towards', tirds
'across', purds 'before'. The remaining eleven, being employed both adverbially
and adnominally, are: dti 'beyond'; ddhi 'upon'; dnu 'after'; antdr 'within';
dpi 'on'; abhi 'against'; dva 'down'; a, 'near'; upa 'up to'; pari 'around';
prdti 'towards'.
a. When combined with verbs ^ these prepositions are not compounded
in the principal sentence^. Generally speaking, they immediately precede
the verb; but they are also often separated from it, e. g. s. tva visantu (i. s')

'may they enter thee'. Occasionally the preposition follows the verb, e. g.
indro gS. avrnod dpa (viii. 633) 'Indra disclosed the cows'. Two prepositions
are not infrequently combined with the verb''; no certain instances of three
being thus used can be quoted from the RV., though a few such instances
occur in the AV. ^ On the other hand, a preposition sometimes appears quite
alone 9; the verb 'to'^be', or some other verb commonly connected with it,
can then be supplied without difficulty; e. g. d, ta na indra (i. 10") 'hither,
Or the preposition appears without the verb in
pray, (come) to us, Indra'.
one part of the sentence, but with it in another; e. g. pari mdm, pdri me
prajdtn, pdri nah pahi ydd dhdnam (AV. 11. yt) 'protect me, protect my projeny, protect what wealth (is) ours'. As the verb normally stands at the end
of the sentence, the preposition would naturally come after the object. Hence
as a rule it follows the noun governed by the verb (though it is also often
found preceding the noun). Primarily used to define the local direction expressed by the verb which governs a case, prepositions gradually became
connected with particular cases. In the RV. it is still often uncertain whether
the adverbial or the adnominal sense is intended. Thus das'vimsam upa
gacchatam (i. 4 7 3) may mean either 'do ye two go-to the pious man' or 'do
ye two go to-the pious man'. When used adnominally the preposition only
I On the relative frequency of these prepositions in the RV. and AV. see WmTNEY,

Sanskrit
'

On

pdri to

Grammar 1077
the

relation

of

a.

dpa,

api,

upa,

ni,

that practically all verbs except denominatives were capable of combining with prepositions.
On the other hand, some verbs
occur only in combination with prepositions

corresponding Greek prepositions (Delbruck,

loc. cit.).

6 dccha, tirds, purds seem never to be

Schmidt, KZ. 26, 21
3 sdm
seems in a few passages to have compounded with the verb even in depenattained an independent prepositional use dent clauses ; see Delbruck p. 469 (mid.).
there are two, pdrd always im7 When
with the instrumental: sdm usddbhih (I. (>\
sdm pdifiibhih (n. 16'), sdm fkvabhih _(vm^ mediately precedes the verb; a and dva
always; ud, ni, prd usually. On the
9712), sdm jyotisa jyotih (VS.11.9), sdm ayusa nearly
invariably the
(TS. I. I. 102); iDUt in all these examples the other hand, abhi is all but
dnu are nearly
case perhaps depends on the compound first of the two; ddhi and
sense of the verb, BR, do not recognize always so, upa and prdti usually; cp. Del-

see

flf.

J.

the prepositional use, cp, Delbruck p. 459;

on the other hand, see Grassmann s. v.
sdm and WHITNEY 1127. sdm is used with
the inst. in Kh. I. 47.
4 The adverbs avis and pradur 'in view'
are used with ^as-, ybkii- and \kr- only,
5 Though a certain number of verbs are
never actually met with in the RV. and
AV. in combination with prepositions (cp.

Delbruck

p. 433), there

can be

litte

doubt

bruck

234.

Delbruck 235. Three prepositions

combined with a verb are common in B.;
8

Cp.

is then almost invariably a or dva.

the elliptical imperative use of prepositions cp. PiscHEL, VS. I. 13, igf.; BrugMANN, IF. 18, 128; Delbruck, Vergleichende

the last
9

On

Syntax

3, 1 22

f.

4i6

Allgemeines xotd Sprache.

I.

defines
case,

local

the

meaning of the

perhaps when

except

case.

a 'up

Vedic Grammar.

4.

It

cannot be said to 'govern' the

are connected with

or purds 'before'

to'

the ablative.

594. The fourteen genuine prepositions which are used adnominally

almost entirely restricted to employment with the accusative, loca-

are

tive,
dtiu,

and

Six are used with the accusative only,

ablative.

abhi, prdti

and

tirds;

one

(dpi) with the locative only;

viz.

dccha, dti,

one iava) with

the ablative only (and that very rarely).

The remaining six take the accusative

and one or both of the other

two cases: pdri takes the ablative also; upa the locative also; ddhi, antdr,
The first two^ of
d, purds take both the locative and the ablative also.
these six belong primarily to the sphere of the accusative, the last four to
Thus it appears that the genuine prepositions were at
that of the locative.
The ablative
the outset practically associated with these two cases only.
came to be used secondarily with pdri in the sense of 'from (around)'; and
similarly with locative prepositions,
ddki
'from (upon)', antdr
'from
'from (on)'. In all these, the sense of the ablative case com(within)', s
bined with the original meaning of the preposition to form a new double
But in purds 'before' and in s, when it meays 'up to', which are
notion.
both used before the case, the ablative sense has completely disappeared.
The following is a detailed account of the genuine prepositions in their

alphabetical order.

accha 'towards'.
of motion and of speaking "^ dccka^
the way) to'*.
Used adnominally
with the same meaning, it takes the accusative, which either precedes or
follows.
It is rare except in the RV. ^ Examples of its use are: prd yatana
sdkhimr dccAa (1.16^^^) 'proceed hither to your friends'; I'cpa pragat
dccha
pitdram matdram ca (i. i63'3) 'he has come forward hither to his father and
mother'; kdm dccha yunjathe rdtham (v. 74^) 'to (go to) whom do ye two
yoke your car?'; dccha ca tva^ena ndmasa vddamasi (viii. 21^) 'and to thee
we speak with this devotion'; prey dm agad dhisdna barhir dccha (TS. 1.1.2'
MS. I. i^ == K. I. 2) 'this bowl has come forward hither to the litter'.
In

595.

expresses

combination with verbs

direction

in

the sense of

'(all

aii

'beyond'.

596. Adverbially dti is frequently used in the sense of 'beyond', 'over',

with verbs of motion.
Whether it is used adnominally with these
and cognate verbs is somewhat uncertain.
There are, however, a few
distinct instances of such use^ of dti in other connexions with the accusative; e. g. satdm dasam dti srdjah (vni. 56^) 'a hundred slaves (beyond =)
'through',

addition

in

kdd
1

to

garlands';

asya^dti vratdm

In regard to

iifa

purvtr

cakrma

the

dti

ksdpah (x. 77=) 'through many nights';

have we done (beyond =) contrarv

(x. i25) 'what

sense of 'motion

locative

in

the

v.

r.

sadanesu

accha

iaz

seems to be the primary one; for it is sddanani accha (RV. IX. gn),
used twice as often with the ace, and its
5 It is used with
over twenty roots in
position before the loc. is less primitive.
the RV. and with only two in the AV.
2 It is
once (vm. 3313) also used with (Whitney 1078). In the TS. it occurs with iiru- 'hear' in the sense of 'listen to'.
'go' (IV. 1. 81; 11.2. 1 2^) and with vad- 'speak'
3 The final a is short only at the end of (IV.
VS. XVI. 4).
s. i
a Pada and in I. 3117 and ix. 106'; other6 The adnominal use survives through
wise always dccha,
the Brahmanas into the Mahabharata.
4 In the SV. it is once
used with the
to'

VIII. Indeclinables.

to

ordinance?';

his

beyond

Adverbial Prepositions.

y6 devo mdrtyam

dti

(AV. xx. 1277)

417

'the

god who

(is)

mortals'.

adhi 'upon'.

The

general meaning of ddhi in its adverbial use

'come upon', then 'find out', 'learn'.

597.

gam

ddhi

is

'upon',

e. g.

adnominal use

In

the proper sphere of ddhi is the locative, with

almost always connected.
Here, however, there is sometimes an
uncertainty whether the preposition belongs to the verb or the noun; e. g.
nakasya prsthd ddhi tisthati (i. 1255) 'he stands upon the ridge of the firmament'.
When referring to a person ddhi means 'beside', 'with' (from the
notion of wielding sway over); e. g. ydn, nasaiya, paravdti ydd va stho ddhi
turvdse (i. 47?) 'when, O Nasatyas, ye are at a distance or with Turvasa'.
a. From the locative the use of ddhi extended to the ablative, with
which it is less frequently connected. It then primarily has the compound sense
'from upon'; e. g. dtah ... d gahi divd va rocandd ddhi (i.69) 'thence come,
or from the bright realm of heaven'.
Often, however, the simple ablative
meaning alone remains; e. g. hfdaydd ddhi (x. 1633) 'from the heart'; pi'irusad
ddhi (VS.xxxii. 2) 'from Purusa'. A somewhat extended sense is occasionally
found; e. g. ydm
kdiiva idhd rtsd ddhi (i. 36") 'whom Kanva kindled
(proceeding from =) in accordance with sacred order'; md panir bhur asmdd
ddhi (1. 333) 'be not niggardly with regard to us'.
b. From the locative the use of ddhi further spread to the accusative,
though in a very hmited way, to express the sphere on or over which an
action extends; e. g. prthu prdtikam ddhy Mhe agnih (vii. 36') 'Agni has been
kindled over the broad surface'. Otherwise, when taking the accusative in
the sense of 'upon' with verbs of motion, ddhi nearly always belongs to

which

is

it

the verb.
In the RV. only, adhi is used seven times with the (following) instrumental
or plural of snCl- 'height', to express motion along and over
'across'; e. g.
cakrdm . , ddhi snund brhatd vdrtavianajti (iv, 282J 'the wheel rolling across the mighty
height'.
This is probably to be explained as the instrumental of the space (by =)
through which motion takes place (e. g. vdto an:driksena yaii 'the wind goes through
the air', I. 16114), the preposition that regularly means 'upon' being added to define
the action as taking place 'over' as well as 'along'. The VS. has the regular locative of
snU' with ddhi -.Jifihivyd ddhi snusu (xvu. 14) 'on the heights of the earth'.
a.

singular

anu
598.
after',

In

its

'follow';

'after'.

adverbial use dnu primarily

from

this

means

'after',

e. g.

dnu

i-

'go

fundamental sense are developed various modifications

such as 'along', 'through'.

In its adnominal use dnu takes the accusative only. When the influence
of the verb is still felt, it means 'after', 'along', 'throughout'; e. g. pdra me
yanti dhitdyo gSvo nd gdvyUtir dnu (i. 2 5 '*) 'my prayers go abroad like kine
(seeking) after pastures'; t'cpa prd yanti dhitdyah rtdsya pathya dnu (m. 12 7)
'forth go my prayers along the paths of sacred order'; ydt pdnca mdnusam
dnu nrtnndm (viii. 9^) 'the might which (exists) throughout the five peoples';
similarly prthivtm dnu (VS. xiii. 6) 'throughout the earth', vdnaspdtimr dnu
(VS. xiii. 7) 'in all trees', pradiso 'nu (VS. xxxii. 4) 'throughout the regions'.
When used in closer connexion with nouns dnu expresses:
a.

sequence

dnu pray atim

days'

(i.

(i.

in time:

12 65)

'day after day'.

'after'

'after

the

or (with plurals) 'throughout'; t.g.parvam

presentment'; dnu dyUn 'throughout the

first

e. g. svdm dnu vratdm

'in accordance with';
b. conformity: 'after'
128") 'according to his own ordinance'; amftath dnu (VS.iv. 28) 'after the
Indo-arische Fhilologie. I. 1.
27

4i8

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

manner of immortals'; dnu josam (TS.

This

thy enjoyment'.

is

the

i.

i.

4.

13^

Vedic Grammar.

= VS.

commoner independent

11.

17) 'for (=

to suit)

use.

aniif 'between'.
599.
'within',

is not frequent, antdr means 'between',

antas car- 'move between or within'; antdh pas- 'look, into';
'go between', 'separate'; antar-vidvSn 'knowing (the difference)

In

'into';

its

adverbial use, which

e. g.

antdr gabetween', 'distinguishing'.

The fundamental and by for the most frequent adnominal use of

antdr is connected with the locative in the sense of 'within', 'among'; e. g.
antdh samudre 'within the ocean'; apsu^antdr 'within the waters'; antdr devhu
'among the gods'; gdrbhe antdh (VS.xxxii.4) 'within the womb'; matrtamasu^
VS. x. 7) 'in the best of mothers'.
antdh (TS. i. 8. 12"
a. From the locative its use extends in a few instances to the ablative
e. g. antdr dsmanah 'from within the rock';
in the sense of 'from within';
esii yayau paramad aittdh ddreh (ix. 87*) 'it has come from the highest stone'.
b. From the locative its use further extends, in several instances, to the
accusative, in the sense of 'between' (expressing both motion and rest),
generally in connexion with duals or two classes of objects; e. g. mahan
sadhdsthe dhruvd i nisatto 'ntdr dydva (in. 6*) 'the great one who has
sat down in the firm seat between the two worlds'; indfa it somapA e'kah
antdr devan mdrtyams ca (viiLat) 'Indra is the one Soma-drinker (between =)

among gods and

mortals' '-

dpi 'upon'.

600. In its adverbial use with verbs of motion dpi generally means 'into',
e. g. dpi gam- 'go into', 'enter'; but this sense assumes various modifications
which may be expressed by 'on', 'over', 'up' ; e. g. dpi dha- 'put upon', 'close
'blind'.
up'; dpi nah- 'tie up'; dpi-ripta- 'smeared over'
In its adnominal use, which is rare, dpi is connected with the locative only. It then has the sense of 'on'; e. g. ay dm, agne, tve dpi yam

yajndm cakrma. vaydm

offered

on

(11.

5^)

'this

(is),

Agni, the sacrifice which

we have

thee'^.

abhi 'towards'.
601. In its adverbial use abhi means 'towards' with verbs of motion,
abhi dru- 'run towards'; it further commonly makes verbs of action
e. g.
abhi krand- 'roar at'; it also sometimes, especially
transitive, e.g. krand- 'roar'
with bhii- 'be', comes to have the sense of superiority: abhi bhu- 'overcome'.
The adnominal use of abhi is fairly frequent, though in many individual
instances difficult to distinguish from its adverbial use. It is connected with
the accusative only, in the sense of 'to'; e.g. ud irsva nari^abhi jXvalokdm
woman, to the world of the living'. The sense of 'over'
(x. r8*) 'Arise,
(implying dominion), abstracted from one of its secondary adverbial uses, is
occasionally found; e. g. visva yds carsaiiir abhi (i. 86^) 'who (is) over
:

all

men'.

I In the later language antdr is not infrequently used with the genitive (as well
as the locative). An example of this occurs
as early as VS. XL. (= Ha Upanisad5):
tad antdr asya sdrvasyaf tdd u sdrvasya ^asya
bdhyatdh 'it is within this all and it is without this all'.

2 The adverb dpi begins to be employed

secondarily in the RV. (though rarely) as a
conjunctional particle meaning 'also'; cp.

Brugmann, kg.

588, 5.

Adverbial Prepositions.

VIII. Indeclinables.

419

dva 'down'.
602. In
'come down';

adverbial use, dva generally means 'down',

but is has also the extended sense of 'away',

its

e. g.
'off',

dva game. g. dva

srj- 'discharge'.

In its adnominal
with the ablative in

is very rare and doubtful, it is connected

sense of 'down from'.
In the following two
examples, especially the second, the case seems to be directly dependent on
the preposition: vrstim dva divd invatam (vn. 64^) 'send rain down from
heaven'; ye te panthano dva divdh (AV. vii. 55') 'which (are) thy paths down

use,

which

the

from the sky".

a 'near'.

603. The adverbial use of a with verbs expressing either physical or

mental motion is very common in the sense of 'near', 'hither', 'towards',
d krand- 'cry to'; d dhi- 'think upon',
'to', 'upon';
e. g. d aj- 'drive hither';
'attend to'. Less commonly, when used with verbs expressing rest or occurrence,
it means 'in' or 'at'; e. g. a ksi- 'dwell in', d Jan- 'be born at' a place.
When used adnominally, a regularly follows the case, excepting only
one sense of the ablative. It is primarily and most commonly connected
with the locative, when it has the sense of 'on', 'in', 'at', 'to'; e.g. updstha d
'on the lap'; dadhus tva bhfgavo mdnusesu^d (i. 58^) 'the Bhrgus brought
thee to men'.
the locative its use extended to the ablative, with which it is
It is generally used after this case, when it primarily has
the compound sense of 'from on' (cp. ddhi); e. g. parvatdd d 'from (on) the
secondarily, 'away from'; e. g. yds cid dhi tva
It also means,
mountain'.
a.

used

From

fairly often.

849) 'who entices thee away from many

This secondary meaning is sometimes further
e. g. yds te sdkhibhya d vdram (i. 4*) 'who
is
a boon to thee (in distinction) from friends', i. e. 'who is better to thee
than friends'.
o. In about a dozen instances in the RV., d is used before the ablative

bahiibhya a sutdvam avlvasati

(others) with his Soma draught'.
extended to express preference;

(i.

to express 'up to''; e. g. yatt girlbhya d samudrdt (vii. 95^) 'going from the
mountains up to the sea'; d nimrucah (i. 161 ') 'till sunset' 3. This reversal
of meaning is probably due to the reversal of the natural order of the words:

samudrdd a 'from the

b. The use of d

sea' thus
is

becoming a samudrdt

further extended to the

'to

the sea'.

accusative, with which

it

generally meaning 'to', 'upon', to express the

yusmdms ca devdn visa d ca
goal with verbs of motion; e. g. antdr lyase
mdrtan (iv. 2^ 'thou goest mediating to you, the gods, and to the people,
the mortals'; matdra sidatatn barhir d (i. 142?) 'may the two mothers seat
least frequently connected,

is

themselves upon the htter'; ehy a

devdndm vaksi priydm a sadhdstham
In
to the dear abode of the gods'.
to express purpose in the phrases

'come hither to us';

VS. xxix. i) 'bring (it)
closer connexion with nouns, d is used
josam d 'for enjoyment', and vdram a

nah (AY.

(TS. v.

i.

11.

11'

5*)

'for pleasure'.

upa 'up
604. In
'near to';
1

its

e. g.

adverbial use upa

upa gam- 'go near

Cp. Delbruck p. 451.

With very few exceptions

is

to'.

this

is

abhi and

a,

expressing

The fundamental meaning

with

the
only use of a to be found in B. ; in C. also
a is found only before the ablative, but
2

to'.

in sense akin to

'up

the

old

sense

of 'from'

of close
as

well as

to'.

3 It. is

occasionally found after the ablasense; see Grassmann s. v. a.

tive in this

27*

420

Allgemeines und Sprache.

1.

contiguity

is

4.

Vedic Grammar.

often coupled with the idea of subordination or inferiority;

e. g.

down close to', 'approach reverentially'; upa as- 'sit under',' adore'.
In its adnominal use upa is most frequently connected with the accusative (which it more often precedes than follows) in the sense of 'to'; e. g.
upa sad-

'sit

d yahi

brdhtnani vaghdtah

I'lpa

(i.

35)

'come

to

the prayers

of the wor-

shipper'.
a.

It

locative

is

also

used (about half as frequently

sense

in the

(are) beside the sun';

upa jmdnn upa

upon

earth,

vetase

of 'beside',

in the

RV.) before the

(i. 23'?) 'who

upa dydvi '(upon =) up to the sky' (from below);
dva tara (VS. xvii. 6
MS. II. 10') 'descend upon the

'upon',

'at':

yS,

I'lpa

sfirye

the reed'.

a. Quite exceptionally (only three times) upa occurs in the RV. with the (following)
instrumental. In two passages it expresses sequence of time in the phrase upa dyubhis
(v. 533; vill. 408) 'day by day'.
Once it expresses conformity: ydsmai vimus trim pada
vicakrama upa mitrdsya dharmabhih (Val. IV'') 'for whom Visnu strode forth his three steps
in accordance with the ordinances of Mitra'. These abnormal senses of upa are parallel
to those of anu (598 a, b), and the construction to that of adki (597 a).

iirds 'across'.

605. Adverbially tirds is used in the sense of 'aside', but only with the
two verbs dha- 'put' and bhu- 'be', in the Sainhitas'; thus tiro dha- 'put aside',
'conceal'; tiro bhu- 'disappear'; e. g. ajakavdnt tiro dadhe (vii. 50 'j 'I put
away the scorpion'; ma tiro 'bhut (AV. via. i') 'may it not disappear'.
Adnominally tirds is used fairly often in the RV., and a few times in
the AV., in the sense of 'across', 'over', 'through', 'past', with (nearly always
before) the accusative^; Q.g. d ye tanvdnti rasmibhis tirdh samudrdm {i.ig'^)
'who spread with their rays across the ocean'; ndyanti duritd tirdh (i. 4i3)
'they lead him through (so as to escape) dangers';
tiro visvam drcato yahy
arvdn (x. 89'*) 'come hither past (leaving behind) all singers'.
Figuratively tirds occasionally means 'contrary to'; e. g. devdnSm cit
(x. lyit) 'even against the will of the gods'; yo no .. tirds cittdni
jighamsati (vii. 59^) 'who desires to slay us contrary to expectations' (= 'una.

vdsam

tiro

awares'),
to

yo no

..

tirdh satydni

jighamsat (TS.

iv. 3.

13^) 'who

may

desire

slay us contrary to oaths'.

pari 'around'.
606.

In

its

adverbial use pari generally

'go around^,;^ figuratively

(op.

TTS'^/

it

also

means

means

'completely',

e. g.

'around',

e. g.

pari

pari vid- 'know

i-

fully'

oThs).

adnominal use starts from the accusative, with which case it

however, not very commonly connected. Here, too, it is not always certain
Its

is,

that the preposition does not

belong to the verb. It nearly always immediaprecedes the accusative in the sense of 'around', 'about'; e. g. pari dydm
anydd lyate (i-so"') 'the other (wheel) goes around the sky'. The following is
one of the two instances in which />/ comes after the accusative 3: havamahe
sraddhdm madhydmdinam pdri{:y^.it,\^ 'we invoke Sraddha (about =) at noon'*.
a.
Its use then extends to the ablative, with which it is much more
frequently connected.
Here it has primarily the compound sense of 'from
around'; e. g. divas pari (i. 47^) 'from the sky (which is) around'; tdmasas
pari (i. 50^) 'from the surrounding darkness'. The original meaning (as in
tely

I In the
SB. and later tirds
kr- 'do' also.

It

is

(xu. 339)

is

used with sense of 'away from'

ledge of.

found at least once in the AV.

and occasionally in the SB. in the

= 'without

the

know-

Cp. Grassmann, s. v. pari, 784 (bottom)

Like the German preposition 'um'.

Vni. Indeclinables.

Prepositional Adverbs.

421

then disappears, leaving only the ablative sense 'from'; e. g. tvdm

adbhyas tvdm dsmanas J>dri
jayase (11. i ') 'thou art born from the waters,
from the rock'.
puras 'before'.
ddhi)

combined with kr- 'do', and dha- 'put' only,

indrah kniotu prasave rathdm purdh (i. io29)
'may Indra place (our) car in front in the enterprise'; indram vUve deviso
dadhire purdh (i. 131') 'the all-gods placed Indra in the forefront'.
Adnominally purds occurs about nine times in the RV., in the sense of
'before' and connected with the accusative, the ablative, and the locative;
e. g. dsadan matdram purdh (x. 189') 'he has sat down before his mother';
nd gardabhdm purd dsvan nayanti (111.53^0 'they do not place the ass before
samidhydte (iv. is'*) 'who is kindled
the horse' {dsvat); ydh sfnjaye purd
607.

Adverbially purds

in the sense of 'iu front';

is

e. g.

before Srnjaya'.

prdti 'against'.

608. Used adverbially prdti means 'towards', 'against', e. g. prdti i- 'go

towards or against'; prdti ma- 'counterfeit', 'imitate'. From this sense the
notion of equality was developed, as in prdti as- 'be a match for'; e. g.
indra, ndkis tva prdty asty esam, visva jatany abhy asi tani"- (vi. 255) '0 Indra,
none of them is equal to thee; thou art superior to all these beings'. The
verb as- often being omitted, prdti appears to be used like an adjective; e. g.
indram nd mah?id prthivt cand prdti (1.55') 'not even the earth (is) equal to
Indra in greatness'. The preposition further comes to express adverbially the
sense of 'back'; e. g. prdti uh- 'thrust back'; prdti bru- 'reply'.
Adnominally /raV/ is used with the accusative only, altogether about
a dozen times in the RV. With verbs of motion^ or of calling it means
'towards', 'to' (though here there is sometimes a doubt whether it does not
rather belong to the verb); e. g. prdti tydtn cdrum adhvardm gopJthdya prd
huyase (i. 19') 'thou art summoned to the beloved sacrifice to drink the
'from'; e. g. dgne rdksa.
milk'. With verbs of protecting it means 'against'
no dmhasah, prdti sma, deva, risatah (vii. 15^3) 'O Agni, protect us from
god'. Sometimes it means 'over against', 'opposite';
distress, against injurers,

prdti
dbodhy agnih
face of the coming Dawn'.
e. g.

It

ayatim usdsam

(v. i')

'Agni has awakened in

expresses conformity in the phrase /ri/^' t-aVaw?

'according to desire' (cp. dnu b, upa

a, a).

In the phrase frati vasloh 'at dawn', occurring three times in the RV., the preposition seems to take the ablative, but vastoh may here be meant for an adverbial
a.

form 3.

B. Adnominal Prepositions.
609. This class of words which is never compounded with verbs, but
only governs oblique cases (with the exception of. the dative), cannot be
clearly distinguished from adverbs such as urdhvdm (which from B. onwards
also used as a preposition with the ablative in the sense of 'above' and
is
It is to be noted that several of them govern the genitive and the
'after').
instrumental, cases practically never connected with the genuine prepositions
The following is an account of these words arranged in
in the Sarnhitas.

their alphabetical order*.

1 Both aiki and prati primarily express with verbs of motion: here it expresses ap'about', 'at', 'on'; it
direction 'towards', but the former tends to proximate position
imply superiority or attack ('at'), the latter also means 'in regard to', 'in equality with'.
3 Cp. BR., and Delbruck p. 463.
comparison and equality or repulsion ('back').
Though several of these (avds, are,
4
2 In B. prati is regularly used after the
samdyd, sumdd.
accusative, though apparently never connected paras, sdcS, saniiur, sanutdr,

422

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

Vedic Grammar.

4.

adhds 'below'.

With the accusative adhds occurs only once in the RV., in the
sense of 'below': tisrdh prthivir adho astu (vii. 104^') 'may he be below the
It is also found once with the ablative (or genitive) in the
three earths'.
padoh (x. 166^) 'below (my) feet'. The latter use also
same sense: adhdh
occurs once in the SV. and once in the AV. yi te ;pdntha adho divdh (SV.
below the sky'; adhds te dsmano manyum
I. 2. 2. 3') 'thy paths which are
upasyamasi yd guruh (AV. vi. 42') 'we cast thy fury under a stone that (is)
610.

heavy'.

aniara 'between'.
This word occurs five times in the RV. with a following accusative in the sense of 'between', e. g. antard ddmpati 'between husband and
wife'.
It also
occurs a few times in the AV. and VS. before duals; e. g.
antari dydvaprihivt 'between heaven and earth'.
6ii.-

abhitas 'around'.

a few passages of the RV. and AV. in

e. g. sdro nd purndtn abhito vddantah
(vii. 1037) 'talking as round a brimful lake'; ye devA rastrabhfto 'bhito ydnti
sUryam (AV. xiii. \^-^ 'the kingdom-bearing gods who go around the sun'.
612. This adverb

is

employed

in

the sense of 'around' with the accusative;

avds
613. in the

'down

RV. avds occurs

from'.

four times with the ablative (cp. dvd) in

the sense of 'down from'; e.g. avdh sAryasya brhatdh purisat {y^.i'j^'^) 'down
from the vast misty region of the sun'. It is further employed four or five
times with the instrumental; e. g. avo divA patdyantam patamgdm (i. 163^)
'a

bird flying

down from

heaven'.

The

latter

use seems to be analogous to

that of ddhi with the instrumental (597 a).

upari 'above'.

RV. after the accusative

sense of 'above', 'beyond'; e. g. Hsrdh pi'thivir updri (i. 34*) 'above
the three earths'. It is also found once with the instrumental in the combination bhumyopdri^ i. e. bhumyd updri (x. 753) 'beyond the earth'.
It is,
however, more likely that here we have an irregular euphonic combination
for bhamya\h\ updri^ and that the case governed by the preposition is the
614. This adverb occurs three times in the

in

the

genitive. This would account for the frequent use of updri with the genitive
in the later language, While the instrumental would be unique.
rte 'without'.
615. This

word^

used

the RV., and occasionally in the

ablative (sometimes separated from it) in
the sense of 'without'; e. g. nd rti tvdi kriyate kirn cand (x. ii29) 'without
thee nothing is done'; yebhyo nd 'rti pdvate dhAma kim cand (TS. iv. 6. i+
VS. XVII. 14) 'without whom no dwelling is purified'.
is

fairly often in

later Sarnhitas, before or after the

'smdd) disappear in C, there is nevertheless

in the later language a large increase in
their numbers, greatly supplemented by the
periphrastic use of nouns and by the prepositional gerunds.
Cp. SPEIJEK, Vedische
und Sanskrit-Syntax 89 93.

See Grassmann, s. v. updri; cp. above

6s (top).
" In origin
an old locative. On some
other words representing; old case-forms,
used prepositionally {arvak etc.), cp. WhitI

p.

ney

1 1

28,

Vin. Indeclinables.

Prepositional Adverbs.

423

paras 'beyond'.

and

locative;

RV. paras

used with the accusative, instrumental, ablative,

but in the later Sainhitas it seems to be found with the abla-

616. In the

is

tive only.

a. It takes the accusative six or seven times in the sense of 'beyond',

not only locally, but also to express superiority or excess; e. g. dti s&ryam
pardh sakuna iva paptima (ix. 107^) 'we have flown away like birds beyond
the sun'; nahl deva nd mdrtyo mahds tdva krdtum pardh (i. 19^) 'for neither
god nor mortal (goes) beyond the might of thee, the great'.

employed nearly three times as frequently with the instrumental,

most part in the sense of 'beyond'; e. g. paro mdtraya (vir. 99')
'beyond measure'. In some passages this sense is somewhat modified. Thus
the word twice means 'over' (as opposed to avds); e. g. yds te amh'cr avds
7
ca yah pardh sruci (x. 1 j) 'thy juice which (fell) down firom and over the
e. g. paro mayabhis (v. 44')
ladle'.
Twice, moreover, it expresses 'without'
b.

It is

the

for

'

'without wiles'.
c. With the locative it occurs only once in the sense of 'beyond': yi
trimsdti trdyas paro devAso barhir isadan (viii. 28') 'the gods who, three in
excess of thirty, have seated themselves upon the litter'.

found in three passages of the RV., as well as a few times in

the VS., with the ablative in the senses of 'beyond', far 'from',
and 'away from'; e. g. paro divdh (AV. ix. 4") 'beyond the sky'; asmat
pardh (viii. 27'^) 'far from him'; tvdt pardh (AV. xii. 3^9) 'apart from thee';
paro mujavati 'tihi (VS.iii.6i) 'go away beyond (Mount) Mujavat'. The last
d.

It is

AV. and

the

example may probably be an instance of the accusative with/araj

'beyond

(the tribe of) the Mujavants'^

purdsiad

'in

front of,

This adverb is used two or three times in the Samhitas

genitive in the sense of 'before', 'in front of; e. g. sdmiddhasya
(in. 8^) 'in front of the kindled one'; vdjah purdstad utd madhyato
VS. XVIII. 34) 'strength be before us and in the midst
IV. 7. 12^
617.

with

the

purdstat

nah (TS.
of

us'.

pura 'before' (time).

used some twenty times,, and in the later Samhitas
In the
It has primarily the sense of
occasionally, before or after the ablative.
e. g. pura nu jardsah (viii. 67^) 'before old age'; puri
'before' (of time);
VS. i. 28) 'before the departure of the cruel
krurdsya visfpah (TS. I. i. 9^
(foe)'. This sense is^ however, often modified to express exclusion, sometimes
equivalent to 'without', 'except', 'in preference to', e. g. pura sambadhdd abhy a

RV. pura

is

vavrtsva

mdi

(n.

16*) 'turn to us before

(=

so as to save us from) distress';

pura

(AV.xii.3*^) 'except me'.

bahirdba 'outside'.

618. This adverb^ is once used in the VS. with the ablative in the
sense of 'outside', 'from': iddm ahdm taptdm vir bahirdhd yajhan nissrjami
(VS. V. 11) 'this heated water I eject from the sacrifice'.

saca 'with'.

The use of sdca is almost restricted

before and after the locative, meaning 'in
619.

The word mujavani- occurs

name of a tribe in AV.

as the

2 It is

used

fairly

in the plural
v. 22* etc.

often in B. and S.

The

simple
abl.) is

to the RV.,

where

association with',

it is

common

'beside',

'at'.

form bahis 'outside' (used also with

frequent in B. and later.

424

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

e. g. indra td dhdryoh sdcS (1.7') 'Indra with his two bays'; m^ddyasva suti
sdc3 (1.81*) 'rejoice at the pressed libation'; ndmucav asuri sdcs. (VS.xx.68)
'along with the demoniac Namuci".
'in';

saniiiir

'apart from'.

This adverb is used two or three times' in the RV. after the
accusative in the sense of 'beside', 'apart from'; e. g. pdtim sanitiir {v. 12^)
'without a lord'.

620.

sanutdr 'far from'.

preceding word, sanutdr appears once in the RV.
with the ablative in the sense of 'far away from': ksitrSd apasyam sanutds
621.

AUied

to

cdrantam

(v. 2t)

'far

the

from the

field I

saw him wandering'.

sahi 'with'.
622. This adverb is common in the RV. as well as the later Saiphitas,
before and after the instrumental in the sense of 'with'; e. g. sahd fsib/tih
(i. 23"+)
'together with the seers' ; jardyunS sahd (VS. viii. 28) 'with the afterbirth'; sakd pdtya (TS. I. i. 10") 'with (my) husband'; mdnasS sahd (AV. 1. 1*)
'together with divine mind'.

sakdm 'with'.
In the same sense as, but less frequently than, sahd, the adverb
sakdm ^ is used before and after the instrumental; e. g. sakdm siryasya
rasmibhih (i. 47 ?) 'together with the rays of the sun'; sakdm gan mdnasa
yaj'ndm (VS. xxvn. 31) 'may he come with thought to the sacrifice'; sakdrn
jarSyuna pata (AV. i. 11*) 'fly with the afterbirth'.
623.

sumdd

'with'.

624. This word occurs four times as an adverb < in the RV. with the
sense of 'together'.
It is found once governing the instrumental in the
sense of 'with': jayi pdtim vahati vagnuna sumdt (x. 32^) 'the wife weds the
husband with a shout of joy'.

smdd

'with'.

625. Besides being used adverbially some half dozen times in the RV.
with the sense of 'together', 'at the same time', smdd^ also occurs about as
often with the instrumental, meaning 'with'; e. g. smdt sUrlbhih (i. 51 '5)
'together with the princes'.
2.

Adverbs.

Grassmann, Worterbuch 1737 1740.

WHITNEY, Sanskrit Grammar 1097

II

17.

626. Adverbs are most conveniently grouped as those which are formed
with adverbial suffixes and those which are formed with case-endings.
The
former class may be best described according to the suffixes alphabetically
arranged, the latter according to the ordinary sequence of the cases.

Though not found in the AV., saca

4 sumdd also appears as the first member
survives in the TB. (l. 2. 18).
of a compound in sumdd-amsu-, sumdd-garia-,
2 Cp. BR. and Grassmann, s. v.
surndd-raiha:
3 On other adverbs of similar meaning,
5 smdd also appears as the first member
with case-endings {samdya, sardtham) used of six or seven compounds.
prepositionally, see Whitney 1127.

Vni. Indeclinables.

Adverbial Suffixes.

425

A. Adverbial suffixes,
627. -as forms adverbs chiefly of a local or temporal
meaning; thus
par-ds 'beyond', ^ur-ds 'before', sa-v-as and sa-dy-ds 'to-day',

iir-ds 'across',

at

once

628.

sv-ds 'to-morrow', Ay-ds 'yesterday'; also

mi^A-ds 'wrongly'.
-tas expresses the ablative sense of 'from'.
It forms adverbs:

from pronouns; e. g. d-fas 'hence', amii-^as 'from there', M-ias

whence?', ia-tas 'thence', yd-ias 'whence', and, with
accent on the suffix, i-ids
from hence', mat-tds (AV.) 'from me'.
b. from adjectives and substantives; e.
g. anyd-ias 'from another
place', daksina-tds 'from the right', sarvd-tas 'from all
sides'; agra-tds 'in front',
hrt-tds 'firom the heart', etc.; the suffix is added
to a locative case-form in
patsu-tds 'at the feet', beside pat-tds 'from the feet'.
a.

c.
from prepositions: dnti-tas 'from
(AV.) 'round about".

near',

abhi-tas 'around',

^iari-tas

o. These adverbs in -tas are sometimes used as equivalents

of ablatives; e. g
bhuyas 'more than that'; iatah sasthdt (AV.) 'from that sixth'. On the other
hand, the
ablative sense is sometimes effaced, the locative meaning: taking
e. e. ap-raa its place;
r
5

&
ato

ias 'in front'.

629.

-tat (an old ablative

of ta- 'this')' has an ablative or a locaattached to adverbial case-forms and adverbial or adnominal prepositions; thus Mak-tat 'from above', prak-tat 'from the front';
ardt-tat 'from afar', uttarit-tat 'from the north', parakit-tat 'from a distance';
pasci-tat 'from behind'; adhds-tat 'below', avds-tat 'below', pards-tat 'beyond',
purds-tat 'in or from the front', and with inserted s (probably due to the
influence of the preceding forms) updri-s-tat '(from) above'.
630. -// in dn-ti 'near', i-ti 'thus'; probably also in d-ti 'beyond', prd-ti
tive

meaning.

It is

'towards'.

631. -tra or -trd has a local sense, and is mostly attached to pronominal stems or stems allied to pronouns in sense; thus d-tra 'here', amutra (AV.) 'there', kii-tra 'where?', td-tra 'there', y d-tra 'where'; any d-tra 'elsewhere', ubhay d-tra 'in both places', visvd-tra 'everywhere' ; asma-trd 'among us',
sa-tra 'in one place', 'together'; daksina-trd 'on the right side', puru-trA 'in
many places', bahu-tra 'amongst many'; deva-tri 'among the gods', paka-ira
in simplicity', purusa-trd 'among men', mariya-tri 'among mortals', sayu-tri
'on a couch'.
o. These adverbs in -ira are sometimes used as equivalents of locatives; e. g.
ydtrddhi 'in which', hasta a daksina-trd 'in the right hand'. This locative sense also sometimes expresses the goal; e. g. patho devatra . yandn (x. 737) 'roads that go to the gods'.
.

632. -tha forms adverbs of

thus

d-tha

manner,

especially

(more usually with shortened vowel,

from pronominal stems;

dtha) 'then',

i-t-thd 'thus',

imd-tha 'in this manner', ka-tha 'how'; td-tha 'thus', y d-tha 'in which manner';
anyd-tha 'otherwise', visvd-tha 'in every way'; urdhvd-tha 'upwards', purvd-tha
'formerly', pratnd-tha 'as of old'; rtu-thd 'regularly', namd-tha (AV.) 'by name';
evd-tha

'just so'.

-tham occurs beside -tha

in i-t-thdm 'thus', and ka-thdm 'how?'.

adverbs of time almost exclusively from pronominal
thus i-da 'now', ka-di' 'when?', ta-dd 'then', ya-dd 'at what time';
roots;
sd-da 'always'; sarva-dd (AV.) 'always'.
a. -dam occurs beside -da in sd-dam 'always'; and -dd-nTm, an extended
form of -da, appears in i-dd-mm 'now', ta-dd-mm 'then', viha-di-ntm 'always'.

a.

633.

-da

forms

I In the RV. idt itself is once used independently in the sense of 'in this way'.

In the RV. nearly always accented kadi

followed by cana
'never'.

when

426

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

b. <//'-, which occurs only in yd-di 'if', is perhaps related to -da.

634, -dha forms adverbs from numerals or words of cognate meaning,
with the sense of '(so many) times', 'in (so many) ways', '-fold'; thus ekadha (AV.) 'singly', dvi-dha 'in two ways', trl-dha and tre-dha 'triply', catur-dhs,
'fourfold', so-dha 'in six ways', dvadasa-dha. (AV.) 'twelvefold'; kati-dha 'how
many times?', tati-dha (AV.) 'in so many parts', puru-dhd'- 'variously', baJiudha 'in many ways', visvd-dka^ 'in every way', sasva-dhd 'again and again';
priya-dhi (TS.) 'kindly', pre-dhd (MS.) 'kindly', bahir-dha (VS.) 'outward',
mitra-dhd (AV.) 'in a friendly manner' ; d-d/ia and (with shortened final) d-dAa
'then', a-d-dhd ('thus' =) 'truly'; sdma-dha^ (Kh. i. n't) 'in the same way'.
first member of several compounds, in the
one way' ==) 'together', is probably formed with the same suffix,
vowel being shortened ; in independent use it appears as sahd
With the same original suffix appear to be formed other adverbs

sa-dha-, occurring as the

a.

sense of
the final

('in

'with's.

in -ha; thus i-hd 'here' (Prakrit idka), ku-ha 'where?', visvd-ha^

'always',

sama-ha

635"
'like',

-VOL,

'as'*; e-vd,

'in

some way

and visvd-ha^

or other'.

expressing similarity of
often with lengthened

manner, forms two

final,

adverbs:

i-va

-vdm appears beside

1513) instead oi evd, and

e-vd 'thus',

-va in e-vdm 'thus', which occurs once in the RV. (x.

a few times in the AV. with vid- 'know'; it is also found in the SV.
nd ki evdm ydtha tvdm 'there is nothing such as thou'.

(1.3. 1.

1")

636. -vat forms adverbs meaning 'like' from substantives and adjectives;

manu-vdt 'as Manu (did)'; purana-vdt, purvaof old'. In origin it is the accusative neuter (with adverof accent) of the suffix -vant, which is used to form adjectives of

afigiras-vdt 'like Angiras',

e. g.

vdt, p>ratna-vdt 'as

bial shift

a similar meaning (e. g. tvd-vafit- 'like thee').

637. -sds is used to form adverbs of measure or manner with a distributive sense, often from numerals or words implying number; thus sata-sds
(AV.) 'by hundreds', sakasra-sds 'by thousands'; sreni-sds 'in rows'; similarly

by season', deva-sds 'to each of the gods', parva-ids 'joint by

manma-sds 'each as he is minded'.
638. -s forms two or three multiplicative adverbs: dvi-s 'twice',
iris 'thrice', and probably catur for *catur-s (cp. Zend cathrus) 'four times'.
The same suffix forms a few other adverbs: adhd-s 'below' (cp. ddha-ra 'inferior'),
avd-s 'downwards' (from dva 'down'), -dyu-s'^ (from dyu- 'day') in
anye-dyu-s (AV.) 'next day' and ubhaya-dyu-s (AV.) 'on both days'; perhaps
also in avis 'openly' and bahi-s 'outside"".
639. -hi forms a few adverbs of time from pronominal roots; thus
kdr-hi 'when?', tdr-hi 'then?'" The first part of these words seems already
to contain an adverbial suffix -r'^ (thus kd-r
Lat. curY^.
640. There are also some miscellaneous adverbs consisting of isolated
rtu-sds 'season
joint',

'

Cp.

'

The

Bkugmann, kg.

8 In the late parts of the RV. and in the

585.
vowel oipurudha and viSvddha AV. iva has often to be read as va; cp.
appears shortened before a double consonant Arnold, Vedic Metre 129, but see Oldenin the RV.
berg, ZDMG. 61, 830.
3 Cp. sama-ha.
9 See Meringer, IF. 18, 257; cp. Richter,
4 As in ddha, purudha, visvadha.
IF. 9, 238; SCHULZE, KZ. 28, 546.
10 Cp. Brugmann,
5 See above 58, 2 a (p. 52).
KG. 584.
6 Just as vUvadha beside vi'madha; but
11 amur-hi, etar-hi, yar-hi
also occur in B.

cp.
7

final

Brugmann, kg. 582.

On the other hand msvaha

'always' is
Tag-e') with" a

==

visva.
aha 'all days' i^alle
single accent, like a compound; see Grass-

MANN,

s. V.

12
Cp. avd-r, which occurs once beside
the usual avd-s.
13 Cp. Brugmann, KG.
583.

Vin. Indeclinaeles.

Adverbial Case-forms.

words or small groups, mostly of obscure

The

latter in alphabetical

-a

427

formed with other

origin,

suffixes.

order are:

kv-a (always ku-a) 'where?' and a-dy-d"^ 'to-day'.

-or pun-ar 'again' and sasv-dr 'secretly'.
-a antar-a 'between', pur-s 'before'; perhaps also in nana 'variously',
which may be
na-na 'so and so' from tlfe pronominal foot a-^
:

-it

daksin-it 'with the right hand';

-u -.jat-u 'ever',
('standing after',

-UP

from Ystha-,
muh-ur 'suddenly'.

and -vit in cikit-vit 'with deliberation'.

muh-u 'suddenly'; anti-sth-u 'at once'
su-sth-i'c 'in good state').

miih-u 'wrongly',
cp.

-k -.jyd-k 'long'.

In several other adverbs -k with more or less probability

of a root; thus ninik 'secretly' (probably from *nini-acadj. 'secret'),
madrik 'towards me' (contracted from madriak, neut. adv. of
tnadriac- adj. 'turned to me'); anu-sdk 'in succession' ('following after' -.Ysac-);
ayu-sdk 'with the cooperation of men' {sac- 'follow'); usd-dhak 'with eager
consumption' ('eagerly burning' Y^ah-).
represents

the

final

-idn -.pra-tdr 'early' and sanu-tdr 'away' (621).

-iun sani-tur 'away' (620).
:

-nam

nu-ndm 'now' and nana-ndm

-.

'variously'

(642

d).

B. Adverbial Case-forms.

number of case-forms of nominal and pronominal stems,

often not otherwise in use, are employed as adverbs.
They become such
when no longer felt to be case-forms 3. Forms of all the cases appear with
641.

large

adverbial function.

Nominative.

Examples of this case are prathamdm 'firstly', dvitiyam

divas pari prathamdm faj'ne agnir, asmdd dvitiyam pdri
jatdvedah (x. 45') 'Agni was first born from heaven, secondly he, Jatavedas,
(was born) from us'.
Such adverbs are to be explained as originally used
in apposition to tlie verbal action: 'as the first thing, Agni was born'.
A
masculine form has become stereotyped in ki-s as an interrogative adverb;
its negative forms nd-kis and ma-kis
are often used in the sense of 'never'
or simply 'not'.
'secondly';

e.

g.

642. Accusative. Adverbs of this form are to be explained firom

various meanings of the accusative.
The following are examples of nominal
forms representing:

cognate accusative:

the

a.

rca kapotam nudata pranodam (x. 1655)

citrdm bhanty usdsah (vi. 65^) 'the

'by song expel the pigeon as expulsion';

Dawns

shine brightly'

kftvah

(ill.

8*)

'we

(=

'a

bright

adorned

scil.

shining');

thy form

many

marmrjmS.
times'

te

ianvam

bhiiri

(originally 'makings');

dhrsnu 'boldly', puri'i 'much', 'very", bhuyas 'more'; and the compara-taram added to verbal prefixes; e. g. vi-tardm vi kramasva (rv. 18")
sam-tardm sdm siiadhi (AV. vii. 16') 'quicken still
'stride out more widely';
further'; prd tdm nay a pra-tardm (x. 4 5 5) 'lead him forward still further'; ud
similarly

tive in

enam ut-tardm aya (AV.vi. 5') 'lead him up still higher'; so also ava-tardm,
paras-tardm, para-tardm 'further away', and the fem. accusatives sam-tardm
and paras-tardm (AV.).
Cp. Reichelt, BB. 25, 244.
Cp. op. cit. 839; Persson, if. 2, 200 fif.,
'auf diese (oder) jene Weise' ; Bartholomae,
I

IF. JO, 10

12,

originally 'separatim'.

3 On the distinction between case function

and adverbial use see Brugmann, KG. 571.

428

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

b. the appositional accusative; thus osa-m 'quickly' (lit. 'burningly'),

kama-tn 'according to desire'; nama 'byname', rupd-m 'inform', satya-m 'truly'.
e. g. dgra-m (/-) '(go) to the front of,
c. the accusative of direction
'before'; dsta-m {gam-) '(go) home'.
e. g. durd-m 'a long way off',
d. the accusative of distance and time
'far'; nakta-m 'by night', sayd-m 'in the evening', cird-m '(for a) long (time)',
;

'constantly',

fi'itya-m

parva-m

'formerly'.

There are also some adverbs derived from obsolete nominal stems, which
would seem for the most part to have belonged originally to the sphere of the cognate
a.

accusative; thus dra-m 'sufficiently' (from *ara- 'fitting'), ila-m (AV.) id. tusni-m 'in silence',
nanana-m (from nana) 'variously', nuna-m (from nu) 'now'; sdkd-m 'together' (from *sakd;

'accompaniment':
Finally a

p.

thus

aa'a'j-

'there',

sac- 'follow' 2.

number
'thither"

of accusative adverbs are formed from pronominal stems;

zV 'just', 'even'; tddm 'here', 'now'; im 'ever' [e.g. yd Jm

'whenever'); sumd-d and smd-d 'together'.

643, Instrumental. With the ending of this case (sometimes plural)

formed adverbs from substantives, adjectives, and pronouns, the latter two
groups being at first probably used with the ellipse of a substantive. Various
Usually
senses of the instrumental case are expressed by these adverbs.
they imply manner or accompanying circumstances; e. g. tdras-a 'with
are

speed'; sdhas-a 'forcibly'; tdvin-bhis 'with might'; ndvyas-a 'anew'; end 'in this
(way)', 'thus'. Not infrequently they express extension of space or time; e. g.
dgrena 'in front'; aktu-bhis 'by night'; div-a 'by day' (but div-S. 'through the
sky'); dosS. 'in the evening'.

The substantive instrumentals are chiefly formed from feminine

in -a not otherwise in use, but corresponding mostly to masculines
or neuters in -a; thus a-datrayO. 'without (receiving) a gift' (ddtra- 'gift');
as- 'face'); rtayS 'in the right
asays 'before the face of, 'openly' {*dsSndkia-); sumnayd 'piously'
rtd-); naktaya 'by night' i^ndktaway' {*rtdsvdpna-).
sumnd-); svapnayd (AV.) 'in a dream' <*svdpna{*sutnnda.

stems

Several of these feminines are instrumentals from stems in -ta and identical in
form with the stem; thus tirascd-ta 'through'; devd-ia 'among the gods'; bahu-td '^N\K!a. the
arms'; sasvdr-la 'in secret'; dvi-ta 'in two ways' may have a similar origin (dvi-td-'t-vio')^.
'at
have perhaps also old instrumentals of feminine stems in -a in tdditna 'then'
that time'; and in vrtha 'according to choice', 'at will' {*vf-thd- 'choice', from vr- 'choose').
^. In a. few examples the instrumental seems more probably to be that of a radical
stem virith adverbial shift of accent rather than from a stem in -d thus guh-d In secret',
rather inst. of guh- 'hiding'*, than of a stem *guh-a-^; similarly mff-d 'in vain' [*mfs'neglect' inst. m;-s-d); sdc-d 'together' {^sdc- 'accompaniment' inst. sac-d). In a-siha (RV.),
perhaps meaning 'at once', we seem to have an instrumental adverb from a radical d'without delay".
stem a-stha- ('no standing')
a.

We

b.

The adjective instrumentals end

The former

either in -a (plural -ais)

or -ya.

and a few consonant stems in -c; the

latter are anomalous feminines from u- stems and one or two t- stems:
a. apakd 'afar' (dpaka- 'far'); irmd 'quickly' (trmd-); uccd and uccdis 'on
are derived from a- stems

high' {uccd-); daksind 'to the right' {ddksina-); paracdis 'for away' (^parsed-);
pascd 'behind' i^pascd-); madhyd 'in the midst' {mddhya-); sdnais 'slowly'
1

For some
which

origin,

see

4 The normal inst. of which would be

guh-d.
other adverbs of obscure
5 Cp. RV. 1. 67^ guhd guham gas and
in
were originally accusatives, the next stanza guhd bhdvantam.

Cp. Gray, IF. 11, 307

172.

ff.;

Foy, IF.

12,

Whitney imf.

Cp. Benfey, SV. Glossary, and GrassMANN, Worterbuch, s. v.

3

Vni. Indeclinables.

Particles.

429

{*Mna-) and sdnakais id.; sdna^ 'from of old' (sdna-); samani 'in the same
way' (sdmana-); tirak-a 'across'; 7iic-i 'downwards'; prac-a 'forwards'.
anu-stku-y-a'^ 'at once' {anu-sthii 'following', adv.

^.

from stha-

'stand');

asu-y-S. 'swiftly' (am-); dhrsnu-y-S. 'boldly' {dhrsnii-); mithu-y-A 'falsely' {mithu,

adv. from mith- 'be hostile'); raghu-y-s. 'rapidly' (raghu-)\ sadhu-y-a 'straight'
{sSdkti-) ;
also urviy-A (for urvy-a) 'far', from urvt f. of uri'i- 'wide'; and
vUvy-a 'everywhere', from *vis'vt-, irregular f. of visva- 'all', beside the regular
inst.

visvaya, which itself seems once

f.

(viii.

68^) to

be used adverbially.

Pronominal instrumentals are formed from several stems in -a

and one in -u. Some appear in the masculine (or neuter) form of -a or the
c.

feminine of -ya; so and 'thus' {and- 'that'); ams. 'at home' (dma- 'this'); a-yd
'thus' {a- 'this');
end 'thus' (ena- 'this'); Jia-yd 'how?' {kd- 'who?'); ubhayd
'in both ways' {ubhdya- 'both'). From amu- 'that' is formed the adverb amu-y-d
To the influence of
'in that way', with the anomalous interposition of y ^.
the latter word is probably due the form kuhayd 'where?' (RV'.) beside the
usual kuha 'where ?'The adverbial use of this case is rare. Examples
a. Dative.
644.
are: apardya 'for the future' (from dpara- 'later'); vdraya 'according to wish'
(vara- 'choice').
b. Ablative.

This case is on the whole used adverbially fairly often.

seldom formed from substantives, as ardt 'from a distance',
asdt 'from near'; or from pronouns, as at 'then', tdt 'thus', ydt 'as far as'.
thus durdt 'from afar'; nicdt
It is most commonly formed from adjectives;
'from below'; pascdt 'from behind'; saksdt 'visibly'; and with shifted accent:
adhardt 'below' (ddhara-); apakdt 'from afar' (dpaka-); amdt 'from near'
(dma-); uitardt 'from the north' (uttara-); sandt^ and sanakdt 'from of old'
It

is,

however,

(sdna-).

The adverbial use of this case is very rare. Examples

c. Genitive.
are aktos 'by night' and vdstos 'in the morning'.
Several forms of this case have an adverbial meaning;
d. Locative.
thus dgre 'in front'; abhi-svare '\)cC\a.i^ (lit. 'within call'); astam-tke'aX home';
ake 'near'; are^ 'afar'; rte 'without'; dur^ 'afar'; and in the plural aparisu
'in

fiiture'.

3.

Particles.

Whitney, Sanskrit Grammar 122, 132133.

Cp. Brugmann, kg. 817855.
240267.

p.

Delbruck, Altindische Syntax

645. Other adverbial words, the derivation of which is obscure and the
meaning of which is abstract or general, may be classed as particles. They
form three groups, the emphatic, the conjunctional, and the negative, the
The emphatic particles, as throwing stress
the most numerous.
first being
on a preceding word, are either enclitic or incapable of beginning a sentence;
nature; but the negathe conjunctional particles, except utd, are of a similar
occupy an emphatic
generally
meaning,
antithetical
strongly
a
having
tives,
position in the sentence.
words
646. The emphatic particles may usually be translated by such
word they follow.
'indeed', or rendered merely by stress on the
'just',
as

adverbs the accent perhaps due to the influence of the numerous

1 In the last three
adverbs in -ya from stems in -a, amu- being
does not shift to the final syllable.
are due per- an isolated pronominal a- stem.
2 These anomalous forms
4 sanat occurs also AA. v. 2. 2 .
haps to the influence of the pronominal
5

amu-y-a.
3

The anomalous

interposition

of

is

140.

On

are,

arat,

ft^-

cp- NeisseR,

BB.

19,

43

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

are afiga; dha^, gha, ha (the last two less emphatic than dha); sma;
'pray'; vdi, nearly always following
svid (generally following an interrogative)
the first word of a sentence. Three particles which emphasize the preceding
word more strongly in the sense of 'certainly', 'in truth', are kila (+ AV.),
khdlu (RV., not in AV.), bhdla (RV. AV'.). In the RV. ti'i usually empha-

They

sises
(vi.

exhortations

'pray',

seems

to

mean

295)

it

but sometimes also statements

once
'surely';
which is its sense in its single occurrence in

'but',

The particle nd, when it means 'as it were', 'like', was in origin
the AV.
probably an emphatic particle
'truly'
647. There are several conjunctional particles, some of which are com^3 'now', 'again', is commonly used deictically and anaphorically
pounded.
after pronouns and verbs. Both u-td and ca mean 'and', ca when compounded
with the negative particle as cand originally meant 'not even', but the negative
sense generally disappears and cand turns the interrogative pronoun into an
indefinite, as kds cand 'some one't.
ca when compounded with id, that is

ced,

means

nu

'if.

'now' generally follows the

The

disjunctive particle

air,

'never'.

first

word of

the

sentence.

va 'or', hi (generally following the first word of a

sentence) expresses the reason for an assertion
'for', 'because';
it is also
used with imperatives, when it means 'then'. It occurs once in the RV.
(vi. 48') compounded with the negative nd, but without change of meaning:
hind 'for'.
648. The negative particle which denies assertions is nd 'not'.
Its
compound ned (= nd id) expresses an emphatic 'not'; it is, however, usually
employed in the final sense of 'in order that not', 'lest'. Its compound nd-kis
often means 'never', and nd-kim, in the only two stanzas in which it occurs
(viii.78^- 5), has the same sense. The negative also occurs twice (x. 54^; 843)
compounded with nu as nanu, which expresses a strong negative
'not at
is

When

it

is

compounded

with hi as nahi, the latter

word

retains

the meaning of both particles: 'for not'.

ma 'not' is the prohibitive particle regularly used with the injunctive 5.
compounded with the petrified nom. -kis and ace. -kitn to md-kis and
It is
mi-kim. The former frequently and the latter in its only two occurrences

mean

'never'.

a.

649.

Adverbial words occurring in compounds only.

being

found

number of words of an adverbial character have either

a few instances, nearly lost their independent character,
combination with half a dozen particular verbs or as the

limited
in

entirely lost or,

in

member

of nominal compounds. In two or three examples the original

independence of such words can still be traced.
few mostly onomatopoetic reduplicative words appear only
650.
compounded with the roots kr- 'do' and bhu- 'be', the prefixed form generally

first

ending in

-a,

once

in

thus akhkhali-krtya^

-l:

(vir.

1033) 'croaking',

alala-

' Another
frequent particle of the same junctive, nor the imperative, nor the optameaning, id, has already been mentioned tive except in the form bhujema;
see
among the pronominal accusative adverbs. DELBRtJCK p. 361 (top). In the Khilas it
2 Greek val, Lat. nae, cp. Lith. net 'as it
occurs two or three times with the 2. impv.
were' (cp. Brugmann, KG. 839); this sense pasya (iir. 1517), tisfha (iv. 525), and once at
of na is generally explained as derived from least with the subj. vadali{i.<y')-MS>.vadeti.
the negative ='not (precisely)' see Whitney
This is the only instance of the prefix
Il22h; cp. BB. 22, 194 ff.
ending in -i instead of -a in the RV. In
3 On the Sandhi of u, see above 71, lb.
the AV. -r appears before forms of kr- in
4 Cp. Delbruck, op. cit. p. 544.
the nominal compounds vatt-kfta- and vaff5 It is not used with the ordinary sub- kard; designations of a disease.
:

'^

VIII. Indeclinables.

bhdvant-

(iv.

kikira krnu

Particles.

431

18) 'sounding merrily'; jahjana-bhdvant- (vm. 43^) 'sparkling';

53?) 'tear to tatters'; masmasa-karam (AV. v. 23*) 'I have crushed',

(vi.

masmasA kuru (VS. xi. 80) and mrsmrsi kuru (MS. 11. 7') 'crush', malmalabhdvant- (MS. 11. 13^9; TS.1.4. 34^) 'glittering', bharbhara-bhavat (MS. II. 2': B.)
'became confounded'; bibiba-bhavant- (MS. 1.6': B.) 'crackling'.
651.

The adverb

avis 'openly', 'in view',

the verbs as-, bhu- and kr- only.

With
e. g. avis karta (i. 86') 'make manifest'.

sometimes omitted,

it

means 'become

'being manifest'; avtr agnir abkavat

the

is

found

latter

it

combination with
visible',

With the two former, which are

visible', 'appear';
(i.

in

means 'make
e. g.

avis ssnii (vm. 8^^)

became manifest'.
appear in the AV. in combination

143^) 'Agni

pra-diir, lit. 'out of doors', begins to

with Y^'^^'j meaning 'become manifest', 'appear'.
652. The word srdd, which originally probably meant 'heart'',

is

often

combination with dha- 'place', in the sense of 'put faith in', 'credit',
nearly always, however, separated from the verb by other words, e. g. srdd
asmai dhatta (11. i25) 'believe in him'; srdd asmai, naro, vdcase dadhatana
(VS. viii. 5) 'give credence, O men, to this utterance'. It also appears in the
substantive srad-dhd- 'faith'.
The word is once also found with Y^r- in the
sense of 'entrust' srdd visva virya krdhi (viii. 75^) 'entrust all boons (to us)'.
653. The interjection h'ln is compounded with kr- 'make' in the sense
hiilh akrnot (i. 164^*) 'the
of 'utter the sound hin\ 'murmur'; thus gdnr
cow lowed'; hih-krnvati (i. 164^') 'lowing'; hin-krtaya svdha (VS. xxii. 7)
'hail to the sound hifi ; tdsma usa hih-krnoti (AV. ix. 6'*5) 'for him the dawn

found

in

utters hifi.

654. A few substantives, after assuming an adverbial character, are

found compounded with participial forms, dsta-m 'home', which still appears
as a noun in the RV., though commonly used adverbially in the accusative
with verbs of motion, is combined like a verbal prefix with participles of i'go' in the AV.: astam-ydnt- 'setting', astam-esydnt- 'about to set', dstam-ita(AV.xvii. 1^3)2 'set'. The noun ndmas- 'obeisance' is similarly compounded in
the gerund with kr -'make' in the AV.: namas-kftya^. In the RV. itself names
of parts of the body, with no tendency otherwise to adverbial use, are thus
compounded with the gerund oi grah- 'seize': karna-gfhya 'seizing by the ear',
pada-grhya 'seizing by the foot', hasta-gfhya 'grasping the hand'*. The
transition to this use was probably supplied by nouns compounded with past
participles, as sdhas-krta- 'produced by force'.
655. There are besides a few monosyllabic adverbial particles which
occur as prefixes compounded with nominal forms only. By far the
most frequent of these is the negative prefix, which appears in the form of
an-

before

vowels

and

a- before

consonants.

It

is

compounded

with in-

numerable substantives and adjectives, but rarely with adverbs, as a-kutra 'to
dn-eva (AV.)
the wrong place', a-pundr ('not again' =) 'once for all';
'not so'.

656. sd-, as a prefix expressive of accompaniment, is employed as a

reduced form of the verbal prefix sam^, and interchanges with saha-; e. g.
sd-cetas- 'accompanied by wisdom', 'wise', beside sahd-cchandas- 'accompanied
with songs'.
1 See UhlenbeCK, Kurzgefasstes Etymoaltindisclien
der
Worterbuch
logisches
Sprache, Amsterdam 188889, s. v. iraddha.
2 For some other later nominal compounds
of this kind see Whitney 1092 c.
in the later
i This is the regular form

language, but! the independent form namas

kj'tva is occasionally found ; cp. Brhaddevata,
I. I, critical note in my edition.
and above 591 a
4 Cp. WraxNEY 990 b
(p. 413, bottom) and S9l b.
5 Cp. above 250,

432

I.

Allgemeines VND Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

VIII. Indeclinables.

657. dus- (appearing also, according to the euphonic combination, as dur-,

dus-)^, means 'ill', 'hard to'; e. g. dur-gd- '(place) difficult of access',
dur-yuj- 'ill-yoked', dur-mati- 'ill-will'; dui-cyavand- 'hard to shake'; dus-kftddus-,

dus-sdha- 'irresistible'.
658. su- 'weir, 'easy to' is compounded with a much larger number of
words than dus-"; e. g. su-kdra- 'easy to accomplish'; su-kft- 'acting well',

'ill-doue';

It is, however,
found in a state of transition in the RV., where it occurs independently
more than 200 times 3, being then connected in sense with the verb only*;
e. g. asmdn su jigyusah krtam (i. 17 7) 'make us well victorious' 5.

su-gd- 'easy of access', su-mati- 'good-will', su-yuj- 'well-yoked'.

still

4.

Interjections.

certain number of words having the nature of interjections occur

659.
the Sarnhitas.
They are of two kinds, being either exclamations or

in

imitative sounds.
a.
The exclamations are bdt (RV.) 'truly', baia (RV.) 'alas!', hdnta
'come' used exhortatively with the subjunctive, and hayi 'come', before vocatives, hiriik 'away!',
huruk (RV.) 'away!', hat (AV.) 'ho!'. Perhaps uve
(x. 867)^.
b. Interjections of the onomatopoetic type are: kikira (RV.) used with
kr- 'make the sound kikird'
'tear to tatters'; kikkits. (TS.) used in invoca-

an arrow) used with kr- 'make a

whizzing sound'; phdt (AV. VS.) 'crash!', phdl (AV. xx. 135^) 'splash!'; bs.
AV.) 'dash!'; bhuk (AV. xx. 135') 'bang!', sdl (AV. xx. 135=^) 'clap!
(TS.

tions (TS. HI. 4.2'); ciscA (RV.) 'whiz!' (of

1 See
Grassmann, Worterbuch, columns sv dpayati 'may he go well away' as a
614619.
compound: su-dpayati; but this is doubt2 Op. cit, columns 1526 1560.
less an error for su
dpa ayaii. See Whit\

In the .\V. it is still used independently,

but only 14 times.
4 See Grassmann, op. cit., s. v. su.
5 The Pada text of AV. XIX. 4910 treats
3

ney's note on this passage in his Translation

of the AV.
6 See Neisser, BB. 30, 303;
cp. above
p. 337, note 7.

ADDENDA AND CORRIGENDA.

should be noted, in addition to what

is said at the end of i (p. 2),

the abbreviations 'VS.' etc. indicate the occurrence of a form in
a later Veda, they only mean that the form in question is not found in the

It

that

when

may

occur in parallel passages of one or more of the other

+ VS.' etc. are intended to draw attention to
the fact that the form indicated occurs in a later Sarahita as well as in
the RV.
In the enumeration of words, stems, inflected forms, and suffixes,
initial alphabetical order is the principle followed. But it is occasionally varied
for clearness of grouping. Thus the arrangement, in the case of compounds,
is sometimes according to the final member (e. g. 308, 375 A, 591 a) or, in
the case of roots, according to the medial or final vowel (e. g. 421, 483). The
principle is also departed from when examples only of very frequent forms are
given. Thus the nom. forms of present participles are arranged in the order of
the conjugational classes (314); the nom. and other cases of the a-declension
are given according to frequency of occurrence (372). Adverbs are classed
according to the alphabetical order of the suffixes (626
640) or the sequence
The principle of giving the meanings of words
of the cases (641
644).
has been followed throughout the work. But this has been modified in two
ways in the enumeration of inflected forms. In declension the meaning is
given only with the first occurrence of a case-form of any word found in the
same paragraph (e.g. 372). It seemed impossible to follow the same method
For, owing to the modifications of sense
in lists of inflected verbal forms.
due to context and compounding with prepositions, the meaning could not
be satisfactorily stated by giving it with the first occurrence of forms from
The meaning has therefore been stated with the root only
the same root.
or when forms from different roots might be confused (e. g. 444, 445). But
as the index gives the meaning of every root and enumerates all paragraphs
containing forms from that root, the general sense of all such forms may
As regards references, figures without an added 'p.'
easily be ascertained.
always indicate paragraphs when books are divided into paragraphs; e. g.
169)'; otherwise they refer to the page.
'Delbruck, Verbum 184 (p. 166
When pages have to be referred to they are for the convenience of the reader
often divided into quarters; thus Lanman 372^ means the third quarter of

E.V., while

it

Sarnhitas also.

The symbols

'

372 in Lanman's Noun-Inflection.

P. 51, note ^ for *guzdhd read
P. 23, line 19 for orignal read original.
P. 58, 1. 4
*guzdha-.
P. 56, 1. 27, for KSf. read Av. and/^r 'weak read weak.
P. 60, 1. 2, for appears read
from below, for cak\an\anta read cak\an\antu.
p.

P. 61, 1. Tifor become ri?a^ becomes; 1. 34, for {a-yas read a-yas\
P. 66, 72, 2 b: cp. Oldenberg, ZDMG. 63, 298.
read 'fall'.
P. 67, I. 30, for There seems to be no certain instance of this in theRV. read
This is of regular and, as far as d is concerned, of very frequent occurrence
after cakran nd
1. 31,
in the RV., e. g. tan (for tad) mitrdsya (i. iis^);

appears

1.

36,

as.

Indo-arische Philologie

>^ fall')

I.

i..

28

1-

434
(x.

95"-

P. 83,

Allgemeines und Sprache.

Vedic Grammar.

4.

P. 70, 1. 1 7, insert often also after But s.

for however read too.
1. 28,
27, for Reduplicated stems read Reduplicated present stems;

'3)

1.

after 'invoking'

add but

perfect Hsriyand- 'having resorted

to'.

P- 99; 1-2

ma-mdd-a-t; note ^, for ri-hati read rih-ate.

P. 100, last line: on ddsa-mana- cp. p. 373 note ".
P. 109, 1. 3 from
below, for vevij-d read vevij-d- and for cara-car-a read cara-car-d-.
P. 119,
1. 21,
iox jigis-i'i TfsA jigis-i't-.
P. 141, 1. 2 from below, for medh-i-rd- read
medh-i-rd-.
P. 146, 1. d, for 204 read 244.
P. 156, 1. 20, for vdrunas
read vdrunas and 1. 22, {ox pitdra- rend fitdra.
P. 157, 1. 26, for occurs
read occur.
P. 169, 1. 21, dSxtx purusa-vyaghrd- add (VS.).
P. 192, 1. 9
from below, for mahxntas read makdntas.
P. 197, note
for 55 read
66 c /S.
P. 199, note ^ add Cp. Oldenberg, ZDMG. 63, 300
302.
P. 202, I. sing.:
Oldenberg, ZDMG. 63, 289, would place the form rdna
(ix. 7') here.
P. 209, 1. 25, for 'width read width.
P. 215, note 5, for
Bahuvrlhi read a Bahuvrihi.
P. 238, note ', add Cp. Oldenberg, ZDMG.
302.
P. 255, 1. II, for Ssas read -asas\
63, 300
% 371, 1. S, for ending
read endings.
P. 257, lines 9 and 12: on krand, dand, and sakkyd (as
ace. pi.) cp. Oldenberg, ZDMG. 63, 287
P. 264, 1. 3 from below:
290.
according to Oldenberg, ZDMG. 63, 293, also iatruhdtyai.
P. 279, 1. 10,
P. 304, 1. 9 from below, for atman- read
for -declension read r-declension.
atmdn-.
P- 315 delete i after 414.
P. 317, 1. 20, for -yat read -ydt.
P. 320, sing. 3.: ydmati should perhaps be classed as a root aor. subj., though
this form seems to have a distinctly indicative sense in the two passages
in which it occurs; du. 2. for sadathas read sddai/ias, which form should perhaps rather be classed as a root aor. subj.; pi. i., delete ddyamasi {AN.).
P. 321, 1. 2, delete gdmanti: see p. 369 top; 1. 12: the shift of accent is insufficient (cp. hims-te) for the treatment of hUnsanti as a transfer form (cp.
P. 321,
p. 100, 1. 13): it should preferably be placed in 464 after vrnjanti.
Indicative Middle: Sing, i,, delete daye (AV. TS.).
Sing. 3., delete bhofate,
yojate, stdrate (p. 369, top) read vdhate before vasate, and sayate before siksate.
Du. 3., add sobhete.
PI. i
delete staramahe (p. 369, top).P. 323, S 424,
Sing. I., delete Mtf/(3:;, jiT/'a;// (503).
Sing. 2., dt\t\.z yamas, vdras (^02).
Sing. 3. delete yamat, radhat, sakat (502), tamat, ddsat, sramat, sadat (510),
minat (477), sndthat (452); for vdrat read varat ('cover'):
PL 3., delete
yama7i{i^o2), vaman, sdsan {/^e^2), 3.dd s'rdsan.
Middle. PI. 3., delete yavanta
P. 324, 1. 4, ior yq/a rend yoj'a; last line, delete dayasva (AV.).
(502).

from below,

insert (AV.) after

'',

delete sdsant- (455) and sdnant- (512).

P. 326, 1. i, for
cdyamana read cdyamana-; % 428, Sing. 3., delete asadat ($08).
P. 328, 1. 3,
s'rna- read Four; 1. 4 add gr- 'sing'
grnd- (AV.) beside grnd-, and sr- 'crush'

S 427

P. 325,

a,

Two

(AV.) beside srnd-.

430, Sing. 2., read ksipasi (AV.) before
Middle. Sing, i., delete mrje and suse{i,^\).
P. 329, 431, Sing. 3.,
delete prnit; % 432, delete guhas, rudhat, trpdn (510) and add bhujdt (b/iuf

for

tirasi;

'bend').

VS. MS.

330,
S 435, delete
P.

1.

11,

add meddtam;

I.

14, after

TS.

iv. 6.

5'

add

AV.

ksiydnt-, mrjdnt-{j^e,e^), citdnt- (506), guhdnt-, sucdnt(512), susdnt-, svasdnt- (455); insert 'bending' after bhujdnt-; Middle, delete

guhdmana-, dkrsdmSna-, nrtdmana-, sucd7nana- (512).

436, Sing. 2., add
adyas.
P. 332, 1. i, add dayamasi (AV.); 1. 7, add daye (AV. TS.); 441,
add raya.
P. 333, 1. 12, delete cdyamana-.
P. 337, lines 6 and 8, delete
bhuthds and bhutds (502), and (AV.) after psatds; Middle. Sing, i., for mrje
(AV.) read mrje; add suse {]^s'vas- 'blow').
P. 338, 1. 2., delete parcas,
idkas (502); 1. 5, add snathat; 1. 10, add vdman, sdsan; 1. 12, delete vdrjate
(502).
S 4S4) Act. Sing., add drahi (AV.) and dratu (AV.) and after psahi
delete (AV.);
note *, add Perhaps root aor. subj.; cp. 502 (p. 369).

Addenda and Corrigenda.

435

339> 1- 6, delete sotana (su- 'press'): cp. 505.

455, Act, delete
dhrsdnt- (512), a.^^ mrjdnt-, susdnt-, svasdnt-; Middle., delete dhrsand- {AN.),
add tvaksand-.
P. 340, 1. 3, delete svand- {su- 'press', SV.): cp. 506.
P-

P. 342,

1.

P- 34S> S

delete piprati.

P. 343, 1. 1 2, for
467, delete krntati- and sumbhand-.

1 1,

read prnat;

TS.

iv. 6. 1

P. 350,

read TS.
1.

11, ior

iv. 6. i+.

prnat {hS

add minat (for minat).

P. 359, 1. 23, delete VS. xxxiu. 87
1. 24,
after sr- 'crush' add AV.; 1. 26, after 'bring forth' add AY.; note ", for
sasahe read sasahi.
P. 362, 1. 6:
P. 361, 1. 10, add cakdn before sasvdr.
cakantu though sing, in form is pi. in meaning and stands by haplology for
1.

16,

1. 4
from below.
P. 364, 1. 12, read -ran or -iran
P. 366, 1. 5 from below,
9 from below, delete dvavacit (549).
delete dkran {Y krand-): see 522 (j-aor.).
P. 367, 1. 2, delete dkran iykrand-):

cakanantu:
for -iran;

cp. p. 58,

1.

P. 368,
1. 22,
delete aprJda {Yprc-): see 522 (f-aor.).
502, 1. 3, add sdkas; 1. 6, for yamat read ydmat; 1. 7, add sdkat; 1. 9, after
pathds add 'drink'.
P. 369, 1. 5 from below: on apyasam (AA. v. 3. 2) see
P- 374i
Keith, Aitareya Aranyaka, p. 157, note ', and Index iv, Y^P'P. 384, 1. 4 from
1. 2 2,
add bibhis-athas.
P. 383, 1. 8, delete ayasit.
below, add 3. ayasit.
P- 397) 1- 2 and 1. 24, add vJldyasi and vildyasva.

see 522 (j-aor.);

28*

LIST

OF ABBREVIATIONS.

= Aitareya-Aranyaka,
= Aitareya-Brahmana.
= American Journal of Philology.
APr. = Atharva-Prati^akhya.
ASL. = Ancient Sanskrit
AV. = Atharva-Veda.
Av. = Avesta.
B. = Brahmana.
BB. = Bezzenberger's Beitrage.
= Bibliotheca Indica.
BR. = BoHTLiNGK and RoTH
Petersburg Dictionary).
=
GGA. = Gottingische Gelehrte Anzeigen.
IE. = Indo-European.
= Indogerraanische Forschungen.
= Indo-Iranian.
= Indische Studien.
JAOS. = Journal of the American Oriental Society.
K. = Kathaka.
KG. = Brugmann's Kurze Vergleichende Grammatik.
Kh. = Khila.
KZ. = KuHN's
MS. = MaitrayanI Samhita.
N. = (Proper) Name.
O.
O. = Orient und Occident.
Pp. = Pada-patha.
pw. = Petersburger Worterbuch (B6htlingk's Smaller Lexicon).
Paipp. = Paippalada.
RPr. = Rigveda-Prati^akhya.
RV. = Rigveda.
=
SA. ^ Sankhayana-Aranyaka.
SB. = Satapatha-Brahmana.
SEE. = Sacred Books of the
SV. = Sama-Veda.
TB. = Taittiriya-Brahmana.
TPr. =
TS. = Taittiriya-Samhita.
Up. = Upanishad.
V. = Vedic.
VPr. = Vajasaneyi-Pratisakhya.
VS. :^
Vajasaneyi-Samhita;
Vedische Studien.
Wb. = Worterbuch.
WZKM. = Wiener
Kunde des Morgenlandes.
YV. = Yajur-Veda.
ZDMG. =
der Deutschen Morgenlandischen Gesellschaft.
AA.
AB.
AJPh.

Literature.

BI.

(St.

C.

Classical Sanskrit.

IF.

Ilr.

IS.

Zeitschrift.

u.

S.

Sutra.

East.

Taittirlya-PratiSakhya.

(l)

(2)

Zeitschrift fur die

Zeitschrift

;
,

I.

The
a-, an-,

negative particle com-

pounded with nouns

SANSKRIT INDEX.

references in both Indexes are to paragraphs.

251,

6SS-

yams- 'attain', pr. 470, sj. 47 1

impv. 472 pf. 482 c a, 485,
;

antar 'between',
loc.

with

prep,

599.
antara 'between', prep, with
ace. 611.
anyd- 'other' 403, I.

487, opt. 489, pt. 493;

root aor. 500, inj. 503 ; opt.
504, prec. 504; fl-aor. opt.

ap- 'water' 334.

511; j-aor.sj.523; inf.58s,4.

tive', inflected 344.

dpi 'upon', prep, with loc. 600.

sj.

yamh-

'compress', pf. 482 c a;

p. 358, n. 9.
akramim, I. s. aor. ]/kram66 c z.

yaks- 'mutilate', pr.impv. 472

pr. pt.

ps. pr. 445,

pt.

447,

sj.

423,

opt. 425, impv. 426, pt. 427,

impf. 428; ps. 445, pt.447;
inf.

a 'near', prep, with loc. abl.

ace. 603.
ad 'then', Sandhi of 67.
an- pf. red. syllable 482 c a.
-and pf. pt. suffix 491.
ysp- 'obtain', pr. 470, impv.
472, impf 474, pt. 479 ; pf.
482 c, 485, pt.493; prec.
504; o-aor. 508, opt. 511;
_ des. 542, sj. 544.
abhu- 'present', inflected 383.
]/flr- 'praise' (?), pr. 439.
avayas, nom. of avayaj- 302.
avis 'openly', adv. with \as-,
ybhii-, ykr- 651.
]/aj-'sit', pr. 451, sj.452, opt.
453, impv. 454, pt. 455,
impf. 456.

inflected 393.
2, 522.
araCiya- den., sj. 569 a.

380 b

3.

427, impf. 428; ps. 445,

447
556;
;

482

pf-

c a,

485

585,1.

inf.

sj.

569

a,

impv.

pr. 422,
pf.

485;

482

sj.

inf.

c .

pr. 422,

sj. 423,
424, opt. 425, impv, 426,
pt. 427, impf. 428; pf. 482 c,
485 ; root aor. opt., prec.
504; z>aor. 529, sj. 530, inj.

inj.

531, impv. 533;

538 ; pp. 574.1 ;

ft.

yi- 'go',

pr. 422, 439, 451,

452, inj. 424, 452, opt.
453, impv.426, 454, pt. 427,
442, 455; impf- 428, 456;

537, pt.

inf.

sj.

585,4-

pron., inflected 396.

dva 'down', prep, with abl.602.
flz'a-'this',

pf.

avayas, nom. of avayaj- 66

c /S 1; 302.
avds 'down from', prep, with

impv. 478, pt. 479, impf.

480; pf. 482 c, 485 ; is-

c,

485,

pt.

492;

537, 539, pt.

538; gdv. 578,1; inf. 585,
I, 4. 5. 6, 7.
587 b; gd.

abl. 613.

yams-

482

plup. 495

dvi- 'sheep' p. 283 (top).

yas- 'eat', pr. 476, opt. 477,

a.

<zK 'after', prep, with ace. 598.

yyaj- 66 c

482 c, 485.
inflected 391, I.

'say', pf.

ahdm T,

'this',

2. s. aor.

arhire, 3. pi. pf.

451, impv. 454, pt. 4SS.

pf. 482 c, 485;
impf. 456;
zj-aor. 529; cs. 556.
anaks- 'eyeless' 340.
anadvdh- 'ox' 351 a.

ysras- 66c;S2;

aydm

yav- 'favour',

585,4, 586 b.

'of us' 390, 1.

3. s. aor.

499-

423, pt. 427;

581, I.

adant- 'eating', inflected 295 c.

adhas 'below', prep, with ace.
abl. 610.
ddhi 'upon', prep, with loc.
abl. ace. inst. 597.
yan- 'breathe', pr. 422, 430,

sj.

asmaka

422, 451,

pr.

569 d.
yarh- 'deserve',

pr. 451, sj. 452,

opt.453, impv. 454, pt. 455,
impf. 456; pp. 576 a; inf.

pf.

'injure',

arthdya- den.,

596-

394.

yah-

cs.

]/ad- 'eat',

'that', inflected

424, pt. 427 red. aor.

514; cs. 555.
ajnba, f. voc. 374 (p. 265).

pt.

prep, with ace.

537; ps. 445;

585,4.

ft.

inf.

askrta, root aor. of kr- 'make'

asrat

inj.

pt.

l/a/ -'wander', pr. 422, pt. 427.

482 c

asau

with

prep,

ari- devout', inflected

584b.

anasamahai,

yam-

485;

pp. 572;

yarc- 'shine', 'praise', pr. 422,

sj. 423, inj. 424, impv. 426,

yanj- 'anoint', pr. 464, sj. 465,

impv. 466, pt. 467, impf.
468; pf. 482 c a, 485, sj.
487, opt. 489, pt. 493; ps.
445. pt- 447; PP- 574.2.
aii 'beyond',

pf.

500.

'around',
ace. 612.

ayas

ace. 595.
'drive', pr. 422,

452, opt.453, inipv.454,

455, impf. 456; pf. 482 c,
485J/2. as- 'throw', pr. 439, impv.
441, pt. 442, impf. 443.456;
inj.

impf.

s.

pp.

pt.

ybhanj65 c 2; p. 345, note 10.

abhi 'towards', prep, with ace.
2.

53I;

'stone', inflected 329,

|/t. as- 'be', pr. 45 1, sj. 452,

601.

impf. 448; gd. 591 a.

accha 'towards', prep, witli

yaj-

abhanas,

inj.

dsman-

apdd- 'footless' 319 a.

dfas- n. 'work' and apds- 'ac-

abhitas

473; u-aor. 529.

aksan, root aor. of ghas- 499.

ahkhaya- den., sj. 569 a.
yac- 'bend', pr. 422, impv.

426;

aor.
529,
,,575 b,

abl. ace.

ft-

590 b, 591 b.
yihg- 'move' cs. 554 a.
id- 'refreshment' 304.
\idh- 'kindle', pr. 464, sj. 465,
impv. 466; pf. 485; root

438
aor.

opt.

502,

sj.

506;
pt.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

50.).,

pt.

irapv. 446,

ps. 44";.

447, 455. 467, impf.468;

pp. 573; inf. 584 b, 586 a.

yinv- 'send', pr. 422, 470, sj.

423, impv. 426,472, pt. 427,

impf. 474.
iyaiha, 2. s. pf. ]//- 485.
y/Z-'be quiet', cs.554,aor.56oa.
yi. w- 'desire', pr. 430, sj. 431,
432, opt. 433, impv. 434,
pt.435, impf. 436; gd.591 a.
inj.

'send',

pr. 430, 439,

432, impf. 436,
impv. 441, pt. 442, 479;
48s; pp. 575 bisanaya- den.,
impf. 569 f.;
inf. 585, I a 3; 588 c a.
isanya- den., impv. 569 d.
1/2. is-

476,

inj.

uloka- p. 59, note

569

c.

yryi., pr. 451.

yiks- 'see', pr. 422, pt. 427,
impf. 428; z>-aor. 529; cs.
gdv. 580 a.
_ 554;
inkh- 'swing',
cs. 554 a,
sj.

559 b, pp. 575 c.

\Td- 'praise', pr. 45 1,
inj.

Vedic Grammar.
490; plup.

'.

\us- 'burn', p. 422, inj. 424,

impv. 426, pt. 427, 479.
u:a.s- f. 'dawn'
4433; 344

iiti-

d.

'aid',

inst.

s.

,555.

s.

contracted

dat.

inf.
s.

585,3
282;

p.

p. 287.

inst. pi.

iinaya- den., aor. 570.

ah-

451
482

(3-pl-).

pt.

pf-

527;

pr.

458, 470,

430,

43i>47i,

iiij-47i>

pv.

434, 460, 472, pt. 473, impf.

474; pf. 482 c, 485, pt.
492, 493; root aor. 500,

503, opt. 504, pt. 506;

fl-aor. 508, sj. 509, inj. 510,
impv. 512; red. aor. 514;
intv. 545, 2, 546; cs. 558 a,
aor. 560,
gd.
pp. 575 c,
inj.

590 b, 591 a, b.
452,
impv. fghayd- den., inj. 569 b.
pt. 455;
pf- 482 c, yr/- 'direct',
pr. 430, 439,
gdv.
464, impv. 434, pt. 442,
pp. 575 a 3;

452,

454,

sj.

opt. 453,

485;
578,4, 580.

\7r- 'set in motion', pr. 45

1,

sj. 452,
impv. 454, impf.
428,456, pt. 455 pf. 482 c,
485; cs. 554 a, sj. 559 b.
;

\Ts- 'be master', pr. 422, 451,

inj. 424, opt. 453, pt. 455,

467, impf. 468.

'go', pr. 430.
riaya- den., inj. 569 b.

yrnv-

rii 'without',

prep, with abl.

615-

yrd-

'stir',

impf.

'love', pf. pt.

pr. 422,

436;

cs.

b, pt.

559

sj.

495;

493; cs.
559 6.

kdrntan- 'act', inflected 329.

ykas- 'scratch', impf. 428.
ykas- 'open', pr. impv. 426;

yka-

ykan-

impv. 434,
553 e, sj.

impf. 428; 'be able to' with

inf. 587 a K, b a.
y/j- 'move', pr. 422, inj. 424,
impv.426, pt.427; pp.575b.

'enjoy',

485, pt. 493.

ykas- 'appear',

549;

cs.

intv.

pt.

546, 547.

556

kirtdya- den.,

529.

'go',

sj-

455;

485; j-aor.

e,

/j-aor.

yr-

pt-

pf. inj.

PP- 573-

'remove', pr. 422,

impv. 426, impf. 428.
y2. iih- 'consider', pr. 422,
]/l.

w-aor. 529, sj. 530.

kamydms- 'younger', inflected
346.'

ykam-

233)-

(P-

isaya- den., opt.

4.

548,

pf.

545, i,
impf.

a.

569 a.
ykuf' 'be angry', pr.pt. 442;
cs. 553 b; pp. 575 b.
sj.

ykiij- 'hum', pr. pt. 427.

ykUd- 'burn', cs. 554 a,

559 b.
yi. kf- 'make',

pr. 451,

sj.

470

(inflected), sj.471, inj. 471,

opt. 471, impv. 472, pt. 473,

impf. 474;

482

pf.

a,

485

(inflected), opt. 489, pt. 492,

493; plup. 495; root aor.

(inflected)

498, 499, 500,

502, inj. 503, opt. 504,
prec. 504, impv. 505, pt.
506; o-aor. 508, impv. 572;
sj.

j-aor.

522;

537, 539 (in538, pt. 538;

des. 542 b; intv. 545, 3, pt.
548; ps. 445, pt. 447, aor.
501; PP- 573; gdv- 578, I,
581; inf. 585,4, 586b, 5S7b;
gd. 590 a, b, c, 591 b.
y2. kr- 'commemorate', is-a.or.
flected),

ft.

sj.

559 b.
yrdh- 'thrive', pr. 470, sj. 464,
529; intv. 545,2, 546, 547,
impv. 441, pt. 467, impf.
aor. 550b, gdv. 578, I.
474; pf. 485; root aor. sj. yi. kr^- 'cut', pr. 430, inj.
y;"/5- 'desire', pr.
422; pf. 485.
502, opt. 504, prec. 504,
432, impv. 434, pt. 435,
pt. 506;
3-aor. opt. 511;
impf. 436; pf. 485; a-a.OT.
/< particle 647; Sandhiof7lb.
des. 542, pt. 544; ps. 445,
508, pt. 512; ft. 537, 539;
y- 'proclaim' 451, 470.
impv. 446; gdv. 578, 4.
gd. 591 a.
\uks- 'sprinkle', pr. pt. 427; yr-t- 'injure'(?), j-aor. pt. 527. y2. kri- 'spin', pr.
464; ps.
u-aor. 529; cs. 554 a; pp. yrs- 'rush', pr. 422, 430, sj.
pr. pt. 447.
impv. 426, yk/p- 'lament', pr. 422, pt.
575 a I.
423, inj. 424,
yuc- 'be pleased', pr. 437,
pt. 427, 435427, impf. 428; plup. 495;
impv. 441; pf. 482 c, 485,
root aor. 500; /j-aor. 529;
pt. 492.
ika- 'one' 403, 2, 406 a I.
cs- 554.
yud- 'wet', pr. 464, impv. 466, eka-pad- 'one-footed' 319 a.
krfana- den., sj. 569 a.
pt. 427, 467, impf. 468; pf. \ej- 'stir', pr. 422,
sj. 423,
yk^s- 'be lean', pr.impv. 434;
impv. 426, pt. 427, impf.
485; ps. 445pf. 485; cs. 553 c.
Ufa 'up to', prep, with ace.
428.
ykrs- 'plough', pr. 422, 430,
loc. inst. 604.
yedh- 'thrive', pr. 422, impv.
inj. 424, impv.426, pt.435;
ufari 'above', prep, with ace.
426; w-aor. opt. 532.
pf. 485; red. aor. 514; intv.
_

614.

ena- 'he, she,

yubj- 'force', pr.impv. 434, pt.

435. impf. 436; pp.575 a I.

yubh- 'confine',

pr.

c,
f;

oiivdms- pf. pt. 492

a.

impv. 434,

impf. 468, 480.

urusya- den., sj. 569

569
569

inflected 395.

it',

impv. 569
pp. 574, 2.

a,

d,

opt.

impf.

545. 2. 547. impf. 549.

ykf- 'scatter',
impv. 434;

pr.

430,

sj.

431,
530.
pr. 422,
opt. 425, impv. 426, pt. 427,
impf. 428; pf. 482, 485; sj.
487; red. aor. 514, sj. 515;
z>-aor.

sj.

yklp- 'be adapted',

kd- 'who?', pron. 397.
kandHya- den., ft. and pp. 570.
ykan- 'enjoy, pr.pt. 442; pf.

482,

sj.

487,

inj.

488, impv.

cs-

553

d,

559

(inflected),

sj.

Sanskrit Index.

I.

559b,impv.559 d(mflected)
gd. 590 b.
ykraks- 'crash', pr.pt. 427.
krdnta, root aor. ykr-, p. 367,
n. 16.

ykrand-

'cry out', pr. 422, inj.

424, impv. 426,

impf. 428; pf. 485,

pt.

427,

439

opt. 425, pt. 427, impf. 428,

479. impf. 436;

pf.

588

485; ft. pt. 538; pp.

574,2; inf.586b; gd.590a.
ykhakhaji-, pf. pt. 492.
ykhad- 'chew', pr. 422, impv.
426, pt. 427; pf. 482b, 485.

ykhid-

'tear',

pr. 420, inj. 432,

inf.

585,7,

c.

1/2. ^/-- 'awake',

pf482;

aor. 512, impv.

518;

red.
intv,

545. lb. 546, 547. pt. 548,

impf. 549, pf- 55.
yg^dh- 'be greedy', jDr. pt.

impv. 434, pt.

442; pf. 482, 485; a-aor.
plup. 495; a-aor. inj.
508, inj. 510.
435, impf. 436; pf.pt.482d,
red.aor.5i4, inj. 516; j-aor.
grbhaya- den., impv. 569 d.
492 b.
522; intv. 545,3, 546, pt. ykhiid- 'futuere', pr. impv. 434. ygf- 'swallow', pr. 430, 479
ykkya- 'see', pf. 485; a-aor.
root aor. sj. 502; red. aor.
548; cs. 556 a.
intv.
\kram- 'stride', pr. 422, sj.
508, inj. 510, impv. 512;
514; M-aor. inj. 531
gdv. 578,3; inf. 584 a; gd.
423, inj. 424, opt. 425,
545, lb, 2a, 547; pp.576;
impv. 426, 434, pt. 427,
gd. 591 a.
591a.
impf. 428; pf. 485, inj. 488,
go- 'cow', inflected 365.
gopaya- den., impv. 569 d;
pt- 493; root aor. 66,4 a, ygad- 'say', pr. impv. 426.
p. 402, n. 2.
499. inj- 503; 'z-aor. 508; ygam- 'go', pr. 422, 451, sj.
j-aor. 522, sj. 523; -aor.
423, opt. 425, impv. 426, gdha, 3. s. root aor. yghas-,
pt. 427, impf. 428; pf. 485,
p. 367, note 13.
529 (infiectedj, inj. 531,
plup. ^Ka- 'woman', 367 (bottom);
impv. 533, ft. 537; intv.
opt. 489, pt. 492, 493
547c; pp. 574,2; inf. 584b;
p. 263, note I.
495; periphr.pf. 496, 560 b;
root aor. 499, 500, sj. 502, ygrath- 'tie', pr. 464; pp.
gd. 591 a.
inj. 503, opt. 504, prec. 504,
ykri- 'buy', pr. 476, sj. 477,
575 a 2.
impv. 505, pt.506; a-aor.508, ygrabh- 'seize', pr. 476 (inimpf. 4S0; gd. 590 b.
sj.

487;
510;

opt- 433.

\krJd- 'play', pr. 422, sj. 423,

pt. 427.
ykrudh- 'be angry', pr. 439;
red. aor.
a-aor. inj. Sl>
515, inj. 516; cs.
5S3b; pp. 573\krus- 'cry out', pr. 422, impv.
426, pt. 427; ja-aor. 536.
512,

sj.

yksad- 'divide', pr. 422; pf.

485, pt- 493; inf- 585. l-_
yksan- 'wound', is-^ox. inj.
531; pp. 574,2.

yham-

'endure', pr. opt. 425,

impv. 426,

pt.

427

pf. opt.

sj.

509,inj.5io,opt. 511; red.

aor. 514; j-aor. 522, w-aor.

opt. 532, impv. 533; ft. 537,

impv. 434,

pt.

435;

red. aor. inj. 516.

kd- 'destroy',
yksT-

pp.

432,

sj.

477,

inj.

477,

impv. 478, impf. 480; pf.

485, opt. 489, pt. 492; plup.
495; root aor. 499, 500;
a-aor.508; 2>-aor. 529; cs.
554; pp. 575 b; inf. 584b;
gd. 591 a
ygras- 'devour', pr. opt. 425;

periph. ft. 540; des.

542; intv. 545, 1,3, 546;
cs. 555 a; ps. 445, aor. 501;
pp. 572. 574,2; inf. 585,4,
5.7. 587 b; gd. 590 b, c.
pf. opt. 489, pt. 493; pp.
ygarh- 'chide', pr. 422.
yi.ga- 'go', pr. 458, inj. 459,
575 b.
impv. 460, pt. 461, impf. ygrah- 'seize', pr. 476, opt.
477, impv. 478, pt. 479,
462; pf. 489; root aor. 499,
impf 480; pf. 485; a-aor.
sj. 502, inj. 503, impv. 505;
;>-aor. 529; pp.
inj. 510;
j--aor. inj. 524; des. 542 c;
inf._ 585, 4.
575 b; gd. 590b, 591 a.
y^.ga- 'sing', pr. 439, inj. gravan- 'pressing- stone', inflected 331.
440, impv. 441, pt. 442;
j-aor. inj. 524; sis-aax. 534; ygla- 'be weary', pr.pt. 4-12;
539,

489.
yksar- 'flow', pr. 422, inj. 424,
impv. 426, pt. 427, impf.
428; j-aor. 522; inf. 585, 7.
pr. pt. 447; pp. 574. 3yksa- 'burn', cs. 558.
yi.ksi- 'possess', pr. 422, 430, gaiuyl- den., impv. 569 d.
4Si. sj- 452, opt. 425,433, ygdh- 'plunge', pr. 422, opt.
impv. 426, pt. 427,
impv.
425,
pt. 427, 435, 455,
impf. 428; intv. 545,2 a, 546.
434, .f-aor. sj. 523 ; ft. 537,
ygu- 'sound', intv. 545, 1, 546.
pt. 538; cs. 557 a, 558 a.
ygtip- 'protect',

yz. ksi- 'destroy', pr. 439,470,

476, inj. 477. iinpf- 48o;
j--aor. inj. 524; ps. 445, pt.
447yksip- 'throw', pr. 430, inj.

flected),

p.

358,

pf.

485

(cp.

note J3);

ft.

537,

539; PP- 575 t>.

ygur- 'greet', pr. impv. 434;
pf. sj. 487, opt. 489; root
aor. 5CO; intv. 545, 2a; pp.
573 a; gd. 591 a.
pr. 422,
inj.
424, impv. 426, pt. 427,
impf. 428; a-aor. 508, inj.

cs.

558.

yghas-

'eat',

pr.

sj.

452;

pf.

485, opt. 489, pt. 492; root

aor. 499, impv. 505; j-aor.
522; des. 542 (p.389, top);
pp. 57.4. 3 a-

yghus- 'sound', pr. sj. 423,

pt. 427; cs. 553 b; ps. aor.
501; gd. 591 a.
yghr- 'drip', pr. 458 ; cs. 557 c,
ps. pt. 561 a.
yghra- 'smell', fr. 458.

ygiih- 'hide',

576 d.
yksud- 'be agitated', 'crush',
pr. 422, pt. 442; cs. 553 b.
yksudh- 'be hungry', cs. aor.

ycaks-

pr. 422,
'see',
451,
impv. 454, impf. 428, 456;
pf.
485; plup. 495; cs.
556 a; gdv. 578, 4; inf.
584 b, 585,1, 588 a; gd.
591 a, b.

j-a-aor.
pt. 512 a;
510,
536; des. 542; ps. pt. 447;
inj. 510.
PP- 573; gdv- 578, 4; gd.
590 a.
yksubh- 'quake', pf. 485.
]/%- -whet', pr. 451, pt. 455. gurdhaya- den., impv. 569 d. caksus- 'eye', inflected 342.
yi. gr- 'sing', pr. 476, inj. ycal- 'hide', pr. pt. 427; cs.
555, pt- 559 e.
477, impv. 434, 478, pt.
ykhan- 'dig', pr. 422, sj. 423,
I

440

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

uspad- 'four-footed' 319 a.

yean- 'be pleased', ir-aor.
impv. 533.
canasya- den., impv. 5^9 "^^
car- 'move', pr. 422,
pt.

426,
pf.

sj.

opt. 425,

424,

inj.

427,

yjalis- 'eat', gd.

yjajh;

585,

gdv.

impv.
is-

carmamndp.

ycal-

sj.

249 note
'stir',

545.

2,

569 a, opt.

'tanner' p. 38

n.

c.
'

4.
_

impf. 428;

inj.

516;

zj-aor.

529, opt. 532; ft. 537,539;

cs.556, sj.559b, opt. 559 c,
pt. 559 e,
impf. 559 f (inflected); pp. 574, 2; gdv.
580, 581; inf. 587 b; gd.

inf.

I, 4, 7-

caranya- den.,

sj.

inj.

flected),

590

a.

intv. jani- 'wife'

380 b

2.

janitor- 'begetter' 390.

pf. 488 (cp. p. 392 \jamhh- 'chew', red. aor. 5 14;
w-aor. 530;
intv. 545, 2,

546.

cakan inj.
note 8).
ycay- 'note',

pr.

pt.

427;

is-

aor. 529; gd. 590 b, 591 a.

J/l. ci- 'gather', pr. 422, 470,

pt.

548;

cs.

556

423, opt. 425, impv. 426

427; inf- 585.7\jrmbh- 'gape', pr. 422.
yjf- 'waste away', pr. 422,
impv. 426, pt. 427,
439,
435. impf. 441; pf- 485,
pt.492; z>-aor. inj. 531; cs.
sj.

(top), pt.

424, impv. 426,

impf. 428,
pt. 427,
454,
456; pf. 485, pt. 493; root
aor. 500; red. aor. 514 (in-

impf. 428

580;

b, c.

pr. pt. 427.

423,

aor. 529, inj. 531; ft. 539;

intv. 545. 2 b, 546, 551; pp.

575 a 3;

590

Vedic Grammar.

\ljahj- pr. pt. 427.

yjan- 'generate', pr. 422,

423,

485; red. aor. 514;

4.

a.

\jas- 'be exhausted', pr. impv.

441, pt. 427; pf. impv. 490.

452, 471, opt. 425, 471, jaha, 3. s. pf.? p. 357 note 4.
impv. 472, pt. 473, impf. jahi, 2. . impv. yhan- 32 c;
p. 50 note 9.
474; pf- 485; root aor. 499;
M-aor. impv. 533; gd. 590b. ja- 'offspring', inflected 368.
1/2. ci- 'note', pr. 458, impv. yjd- 'be born', pr. 439, inj.
sj.

557 c; pp. 576

e.

yjeh- 'pant', pr. pt. 427.

yjha- 'know', pr. 476, sj. 477,
opt. 477,
impv. 478, pt.
479, impf. 480; pf. pt. 492,
492 a; root aor. opt. 504;
red. aor. 514; j-aor. 522;
des. 542; cs. 558, aor. 560;

gdv. 578,3; ps. 445, aor.

501.
yjya- 'overpower', pr. 439,
476, opt. 477, pt. 479; des.
542; ps. 445; pp. 574,2.
yjyut- 'shine', cs. 553 b.
yjri- 'go', pr.

422; j-aor.

pt.

527'that',

id-

inflected 392, 1.
pf. 485 ; plup.

ytams- 'shake',

495; a-aor. 508; intv. 545,

2 b; sj. 547, gdv. 579; cs.
440, opt. 440, impv. 441,
pt. 442. impf. 443.
556 a; inf. 585,7.
ytai- 'rush', pr. 451, impf.
ydt- 'perceive', pr. 422, 451, janivdnis- pf. pt. 482 d.
inj. 424, impv. 426, pt. 427, jaraya- den., ps. aor. 501.
456.
impf. 428; pf. 485, sj. 487, yji- 'conquer', pr. 422, 451, ytaks- 'fashion-', pr. 422, sj.
impv. 490, pt. 492, 493;
sj. 423, inj. 424, opt. 425,
423, inj. 424, impv. 426,
plup. 495 ; root aor. 499,
impv. 426, pt. 427, impf.
pt. 427,
impf. 428,
454,
pt. 506;
j^-aor. 522;
des.
428; pf. 485, pt. 492; root
456; pf. 485; z>-aor. 529;
aor. inj. 503,
impv. 505,
pp. 575 a I.
542, sj. 544; intv. 545, I,
red. aor. 514;
j--aor. 522,
546, 547. pt. 548; cs. 553,
I/I. tan- 'stretch', pr. 470, sj.
inj. 524;
sj. 523,
ft. 537,
471, inj. 471, impv. 472,
554. sj. 559 b, opt. 5590;
ps. aor. 501; pp. 573; inf.
pt. 473, impf. 474; pf. 485,
539, pt. 538; des. 542, pt.
sj. 487, inj. 488,
opt. 489,
585,2.
544; ". 558 a; pp. 573;
ycud- 'impel', pr. 422, inj.
gdv. 581; inf. 585, la; gd.
pt.492; root aor. 499, 500;
a-aoi. 508, inj. 510; j-aor.
424, impv. 426; cs. 553 b,
591 b.
yji- oxjihv- 'quicken', pr. 422,
sj- 559 t>, ps.pt. 561 a, pp.
522; cs. 555; pp. 574, 2;
gd. 591 b.
pt. 427,
470, impv. 426,
575 cycrt- 'bind', pr. 430, impv.
impf. 428; pf. 485.
]/2. tan- 'roar', pr. 439.
'434; pf- 485; inf. 586 a.
yjru- 'live', pr. 422, sj. 423, tanu- 'body',
inflected 385
cetatur pf. ydt-, p. 358 ii. i.
opt. 425,
impv. 426, pt.
'self 400, 3.
\cest- 'stir', pr. pt. 427.
427; prec. 504; M-aor. inj. ytand- 'be weary', pr. 422,
ycyu- 'move', pr. 422, inj.
inj.(?) 424.
531; cs. 554a; pp.575a3;
gdv. 581 b; inf. 585,1,4,5. ytap- 'be hot', pr. 422, sj.
424, impv. 426; pf. 482bi,
485; plup. 495; red. aor. yjus- 'enjoy', pr. 422, 430,
423, inj. 424, impv. 426,
inj. 516,
opt. 517;
pt. 427, impf. 428; pf. 485,
451, inj. 424, 432, sj. 431,
S14,
j-aor. inj. 524; cs. 557b.
opt. 433, impv. 426, 434,
sj. 487, pt. 493;
red. aor.
pt. 435, impf. 436;. pf. 485,
sj. 515;
j-aor. 522,
514,
ychad- or chand- 'seem', pr.
sj. 487, impv. 490, pt. 492,
inj. 524; cs. 555; ps.
445,
impv. 446, pt. 447, impf.
451; pf. 485, opt. 4S9;
493; root aor. 500, sj. 502,
j-aor. 522, sj. 523; cs. 556,
pt. 506; z>-aor. sj. 530; cs.
448; aor. 501 ; pp. 573;
gd. 591 a.
556 a, sj. 559 b.
553 b, sj. 559 b; pp. 573;
ychad- 'cover', cs. 555.
gd. 590 a.
ytam- 'faint', a-aor. inj. 510.
\cha- 'cut up', pr. 430, impv. yjil- 'be swift', pr. 422, 476, taru^a- den., inj. 569 b, opt.
460, pt. 461, 462; pf. 485;
root aor. 500; des. 542.

434ychid- 'cut off', pr. 464, impv.

466; root aor. inj. 503;
3-aor. 508; j-aor. inj. 524;
ps.445, aor. 501; pp. 576a;
gd. 591 a.

sj-

477;

pf-

482,

485,

sj.

492,493;inf.585,i.
yjurv- 'consume', pr. 422, sj.
423, impv. 426, pt. 427;
487,

pt.

w-aor. 529.
yjr- 'sing', pr. 422

(p.

322),

,569

c.

adv. 'in this way'

629.
tij- 'be sharp',
pr. 422,
pt.
idt,

abl.

427; des. 542; intv. 545,

546; pp. 573.

i,

Sanskrit Index.

I.

tiros 'across', prep,

with ace.

605.

441
.r-aor.
root aor. impv. 505
inj. 525; ps- 445. pt. 447;

inz'/^'threefold',inflected306.
tvo-

'many a

inflected

one',

impv. 569

396.
PP- 574, 3 , 576 c.
\ivaks- 'fashion', pr. pt. 455. y^. da- 'bind', impf. 443; ps.
aor. 501; pp. 574,3514; tvam 'thou', inflected 391, 2.
intv. 545, 3.
yivar- 'make haste', cs. 55^- ydas- 'make offering', pr. 422,
pr. 430, 464, ytvis- 'be stirred', impf. 436,
45', 470, sj. 423, opt. 425,
l///- 'urge',
impf. 428; pf.
pt. 455,
pt. 427, 435, 467; pf. opt.
456; pf.485, Pt.493; plup485, sj.487, pt. 492, 492 b.
489, pt. 493; cs. 554; ps.
495; PP- 575 b; inf. 584 b.
445, pt. 447; inf. 584 b, ytsar- 'approach stealthily', ydis- 'point', pr. 430, opt.
pr. 422,
impf. 428 ; pf
434, pt- 435; pf- 485, sj.
585. I. 2.
ytud- 'thrust', pr. 430, impv.
487, impv. 490; plup. 495;
485; j-aor. 522.
root aor. 500; j-aor. 522;
434, pt. 43S. 467. impfintv. 545,1,546, impf. 549,
ydams- 'bite', pr. impv. 426,
436; pf._485; pp. 576 a.

tilvilayd- den.,

ytu- 'be strong', pr. 45

482, 485; red. aor.

ytur-

tr- 'pass',

d.

pf.

pr. 430,

opt-

453; des. 542; cs.554;

gd. 591 a.
tarmiya- den., inj. 569b, impf.
569 f.
yius- 'drip', pr. 422, pt. 427;
cs. 553 b.
]/A- 'be content', cs. 554.

'overcome',

\'tuTv-

impv. 426,
ytrd-

'split',

pt.

pr.

427;

5452

pf. pt.

492;

ydaksimpv. 426,

pt.

ydi/i- 'smear', pr.

impf.

579-

ydagk- 'reach to', root aor.

inj. 503; prec. 504, impv.
dan, g. of ddvi- 'house', p. 37
(bottom); 66,4a; 338.

ydan-

'straighten'?,

pr.

b.

452, pt.
455, impf 456; pp. 573yi. dl- 'fly', pr. 439, inj. 440,
impv. 441, pt. 442, impf.
443yz. dl- 'shine', pr. 458, sj.
459, impv. 460, pt. 461,
impf. 462; pf. 482, 485,
sj. 487, pt. 492yd'if- 'shine', pr. 439, impv.

gdv.

427;

584

inf.

551; PP- 573;

intv.

b, pt. 548; pp. 574,2.

'be able',
pr. 422,

505.

422,

427.

pr. 464,

pt.

sj.

sj.

441 ; red. aor. inj. 516; cs.

554 a.
y^iz/- 'play', pr. 439, inj. 440;
544; pp. 576a; inf. 587 a.
gdpf. 485;
pp. 573 ;
ytrp- 'be pleased', pr. 430,
422, 470, sj. 423, inj. 424,
591 a.
impv. 472; pf. 485, inj.
sj. 471,
impv. 434, 441.
ydii- or die- 'burn', pr. 470,
488 ; root aor. 499, inj 503
472, pt. 435 ; pf. 482, 485,
pt. 473; w-aor. sj. 530; pp.
des. 542, sj. 544; cs. 556 a;
pt. 493;
a-aor. 508,
inj.
576 d.
ps. 445; gdv. 578,4; inf.
510, pt. 512; red. aor. 514;
ydudh- 'stir up', pp. 575584 b.
des. 542, sj. 544; cs. 553 c,
durasyd- den., sj. 569 a.
ydam- 'control', cs. 556.
sj. 559 b.
duvasyd- den., sj. 569 a, opt.
ytrs- 'be thirsty', pr. 439, pt. damanya- den., impf. 569 f.
569 c, impv. 569 d.
442; pf. 4S2, 485, pt. 493; dasasyd- den., opt. 569 c, impv.
ydus- 'spoil', pr. 439; red.
569 d.
root aor. pt. 506 o-aor. 508,
aor. 514, inj. 516; ft. cs.
ydas- or das- 'waste', pr. 422,
inj. 510; red. aor. 514, inj.
537, 560; cs. 554.
516.
439, sj. 423, inj- 424, pt-

468;
aor.

pf. 485, pt.

sj.

502

493; root

des. 542,

sj.

452, inj. 452.

dant- 'tooth' 313.
ydabh- or dombh- 'harm', pr.

\trh- 'crush', pr.

sj.

465, impf.

a-aor. 508;

485;
impv. 446, pt. 447;
PP- S73; gd- 590 b, c.

436;

pf.

ps. 445,

422, 430, 470,

sj. 423> 43 1> inj. 424. 432,
impv. 426,
opt. 425, 433,
434, pt. 427, 435, 461, iinpf428,436; pf. 485, opt. 489,

-ytf-

pt.

'pass', pr.

492; red. aor. 514;

is-

aor. 529, sj. 530, inj. 531,

opt. 532; intv.545,2,3, 546,

551 ; ps.aor.50i; pp.S76e;

inf. 584 a, 585,7.9, 586 a,

588 c; gd. 590 a.

ytyaf- 'forsake', pf. 482 b I,
485.
ytras- 'be terrified', pr. 422,
impv. 426, impf. 428; red.

427, opt. 440 ; pf. pt. 492

pt. 5 12;
a-aor.
inj. 510,
w-aor. inj. 531; cs. 555.
!pr. 422, 439,
'burn',
451, sj. 423, inj. 424, impv.
426, pt. 427, impf. 428;
j-aor. 522, inj. 524, pt.527;

dus-

'ill',

ft. 537, pt- 538; PP- 573yi. da- 'give', pr. 422, 458,
sj. 459, inj. 424, 459, opt.
pt.
459, impv. 426, 460,
461, impf.428, 462; pf.485,
pt. 492; root aor. 499, 500,
sj. 507, inj. 503, opt. 504;
<i-aor.
508;
impv. 505;
S-30T. 522, sj. 523, inj. 524;
ft. 537, pt- 538; des. 542;
cs. 558; ps. 445, aor. 501;

pp. 572,
573 , 574, 3 ;
gdv. 578, 3; inf. 584 a,

first

adverbial particle as
of compounds

member

251, 657-

yduh-

pr. 422, 45^,

'milk',
452, opt. 453, impv. 454,
impf. 436, 456;
pt. 455,
pf. 485, pt.493; -r-aor. 522,
jfl-aor.
inj. 524, opt. 525;
536; des. 542, pt. 544; ps.
445, pt. 447; pp. 573; infsj.

585,

I, 7-

di'iddbha-,

note

yi.dr-

Sandhi

of,

3; 81, lb.
'pierce', pr.

p.

451;

70
pf.

485, pt. 492; root aor. 499;

opt. 525;
j-aor. sj.
523,
intv. 545,1,2, 546, 547, pt.
547, impf. 549; cs. 557 c.
|/2. dr- 'heed', gd. 591 b.

ydrp- 'rave', a-aor. 508; pp.

575 b.
585,4,5.8,9, 586b, 587b;
ydrs- 'see', pf. 485, pt. 492,
b, c, 591 a.
gd.
590
pf-485;
pt442;
441. 454,
493; root aor. 499, 500, sj.
opt.
525, yz.dd- 'divide', pr. 422,430,
j-aor. sj. 523,
inj.
502, pt. 506; a-aor. 508,
impv.
426,
434,
451,
inf.
b,
cs. gdv. 561
579;
.r-aor.
opt. 511;
inj. 510,
pt. 442,
impv.
441,
440,
585, 8.
sj. 523; des. 542, gdv.
522,
pfimpf.
493;
P*436;
tripod' 'three-footed' 319 a.

aor. 514; cs. 555.

ytra- 'rescue', pr. 439, impv.

442

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

5441, 580;
aor.

445,

584

inf.

553 c;

cs.

b,

ps.

gdv. 580;

501;

586

585, 2,

b,

5S8 a; gd. 590 b, c, 591 a.

ydrh- 'be firm', pr. 430, impv.
435, impf.
428,436; pf.pt. 493; plup.
426, 441,

pt.

>-aor,

495;

cs.

529;

devt-, inflected

dehi,

62,

\da-

'give'

4 b.

dyav- 'heaven', inflected 364.

\dyul- 'shine', pr. 422, impv.
426, pt. 427; pf. 482 b I,
485, pt. 493; root aor. pt.
506; red. aor. 514, inj.
516; intv. 545,3, 546, pt.
547, impf. 549; cs. 553 b,
554.
dyaus, accentuation

364 note

85. 93.

yi, drapf.

pt.

'run', pr.

"I

of voc.
(p. 247).

impv. 454;

j-aor.

493;

intv. pt.

440; root aor. 499; cs.

558; pp.574; inf. 585. 1,4|/l. dhav- 'run',
pr. 422, sj.
423, inj. 424, impv. 426,
pt. 427; plup. 495.
dhav- 'wash', pr. 422,
]/2.
impv. 426; V-aor. 529.
ydhJ- 'think', pr. sj. 459, pt.
impf. 462; i..f. 482;
461,

378.

impv.

pr.

sj.

j-aor. pt.

dra- 'sleep', pp. 576 c.

ydru- 'run', pr. 422, impv.
426, pt. 427, impf. 428;

485; red. aor. 514,

516; cs. 557 b.
inj.

4S5;
pp.

573ydrii- 'hurl'(?), pr. pt. 479.

dvipdd- 'two-footed' 319 a.
dvis- 'hatred', inflected 340.
ydvis- 'hate', pr. 451, sj. 452,

impv. 454, pt. 455; j-a-aor.

inj. 536;
gdv. 578,4, 580.
dvipa- 'island' 255, 4.

ydhan489;

'run', pf.
cs.

sj.

^87, opt.

pf.

w-aor. 529.

ydham- or dhma-

'blow',

pr.

422, impv. 426, pt. 427,

impf. 428: ps. 445;
PP-

574.2, 575

ydhav-

b.

opt.

559

557

c,

c,

ft.

ps. 445,

sj. 487,
inj. 488,
492; plup. 495; o-aor.
inj. 510, pt. 512; pp. 575b;
gdv. 578,4; inf. 584 b.
ydhraj- 'sweep', pr. pt. 427,

485,

impf. 428.
pf.

485;

'injure',

j-aor.

des. 542; inf. 585,

'like',

I.

Sandhi of 67,

p.

63

9.

ndkis, indecl. pron., old

sing.

522;

381b

(p.

nom.

279, bottom).

nakta- n. 'night', irreg. nom.

du. 372.
ynaks- 'attain', pr. 422, inj.
424, impv. 426, pt. 427,
impf. 428; pf. 485.
ynad- 'sound', pr. ] t. 427,
impf. 428; intv. 545,1 b,
546, pt. 548; cs. 556.
nddbkyas, dat. ainapat- 62, 3 b

impf. 428.
pr. 422, 458,
sj. 459, opt. 459, impv. 460,
pt. 461, impf. 462; pf. 485,
impv. 490; root aor. 499,
500; o-aor. 508; j-aor. sj.
inj. 524;
des. 542,
523,
sj- 544. gdv. 579; cs. 558,
321 note "-.
sj- SS9b;
ps. 445, impv. ynand- 'rejoice', pr. 422.
446, pt. 447, aor. 501, sj. ynabh- 'burst', pr. impv. 426.
inj.
502,
opt. 504, ynam- 'bend',
503,
pr. 422,
sj.
impv. 505; pp. 574,3; inf.
423, inj. 424, impv. 426,
584 a, 585,4,5,7, 586 a,
pt. 427, impf. 428; pf. 482,
587 b; gd. 591 a.
485; plup. 495; red. aor.
dha'suck*,
pr.
J/z.
inj. 516; J aor. sj. 523; pt.
439, opt.
j/l.

'flow',

dha-

'put',

503, opt. 504, j-aor.

inj.

pf-

sj.

523; des. 542 a, sj. 544; inf.

584 b.
ynas- 'unite', pr. 422, inj.
424; root aor. opt. 504.
ynah- 'bind', pr. 439, impv.
441, pt. 442, impf. 443;
ps. pt. 447; PPpf- 485;
573-

ynaih- 'seek

aid',

pp. 575 a2.

aid',

pr. part.

pr.

45 1, impf.

yiiiks- 'pierce', pr.

422, impv.

426;

'kiss',

inf.

584 b.

pr. impv. 460,

455; a-aor. 508; j--aor.

ynij- 'wash',
pt.

522,

546
ynind-

inj.

524; intv. 545,

(inflected), 547.
pr. 422,
'revile',

I,

sj.

423, impv. 426; pf. 485;

root aor. pt. 506; M-aor.
529, sj. 530; des. 542, sj.
544; ps.pt. 447; pp. 575 a I.
yiii-

'scatter',

ffi-aor., 508;" cs. 556.

ydhvan-'sa\ixvd.\ cs. 555, aor.
560 a; pp. 574, 2.

note

439,
;

nas- 'obtain', pr. 451, sj.

inj. 424; root aor. 499,

4.28.

ydhvams-

pr.

red. aor. 514,

impv. 518;

pt.

nd

dhanvan- 'bow', inflected 331.

]/2.

ynims-

b,

lost',

impv. 44 1

485; red. aor. 514, irj. 516;

ft. 537. 539;
cs. 555, inf.
585.7; PP- 573-

pf.

559

'be

424,

inj.

,427; PP- 575 b.

nav- 'ship', inflected 365.

impv.
446; inf. 585, 1,8. 588 b.
ydhrs- 'dare', pr. impv. 472;

422, sj.423,
485, pt. 492;

nas-

]/l.

ynadh- 'seek

cs.

pf.

impf. 549;

546, impf. 549;

sj-

pr.

impv. 426;

ft.

intv.

548,

aor. inj. 503;

537. 539; intv. 545.1,2,

ydhvr-

556.

ydhanv- '^-an'

'hold',

516,

537. 560;

pf.

430, 470,

482,485; root

inj.

5 10;

hostile',

a-aor. 508,

pr.

441, impv. 446, 472,

pt. 473, impf. 474; pf.48S,
inj. 488, opt. 489; root aor.
pt.
506; red. aor. 514;
j-aor. 522; intv. 545, I, 3,
546, pf. 550; gd. 591 a.
dhiipaya- den., impf. 569 f.
ydhi~4jv-'\vCyart' pr. 422, impv.
426, pt. 427.
.inj.

pf.

b,

sj.

523; ydhr-

547.

569

inj.

d.

ydhii- 'shake',

545,2, 546, pt.

556;
PP- 574,2; gdv. 58 1 ; inf.
584 b.
527;

423,

527.
den.,

dhunayaimpv. 569

]/2.

ydruh- 'be

Vedic Grammar.

4.

554a; dhi- 'thought', inflected 376.

pp. 573-

sj.

pt.
sj.

'lead', pr.

422, 451,458,

423, inj. 424, impv. 426,

427, impf. 428; pf. 485;
487 (cp. p. 361 note'),

opt.

489;

j--aor.

522,

sj.

impv. 526;
ft. 537,
2>-aor. 529;
539;
des. 542; intv. 545,1, 551
ps.445, Pt'447, impf. 448;
inf. 58S c; gd. 591 a.
nTlaya- den., sj. 569 a.
523,

inj.

524,

nu- 'praise', pr. 422, inj.

424, pt. 427, impf. 42S,
456, pt. 435; red. aor. 514,
inj.
j-aor. 522,
inj. 516;
524; >-aor.529; intv. 545, 1,
impf. 549, pf546, 547,

|/l.

550; gdv. 578, 2.

yz. nu- 'move', pr. 422, impf.
428.
ynud- 'push', pr. 430, sj. 431,
inj. 432, impv. 434, pt.435,
impf. 436; pf. 485; root
ir-aor. inj.
inj. 503;
531; PP- 576 a; inf. 584 b.
]/nrU 'dance', pr. 439, impv.
441, pt. 442; root aor. 499;
ffl-aor. pt. 512; is-SiOi. 529;
cs. 553 c.

aor.

I.

ypac- 'cook', pr. 422, 439, sj.

423, inj. 424, impv. 426,
pt. 427, irapf. 428; pf. 485;
plup. 495;

j-aor.

523;
ps.445, pt-447. impf. 448;
inf. 585,4; gd. 590 b.
padbhis, inst. pi. 42 c, 43 b I,
62,4 b (p. 57) note 3, 350
(p. 238 note I).
\\.pal- 'fly', pr. 422, sj. 423,
inj. 424,
opt. 425, impv.
426, pt. 427, impf. 428;
pf. 485, opt. 489, pt. 492;
red.aor. 514, inj. 516, impv.
518; ft. 537, 539, pt. 538;
des. 542; intv. 545,1, 546,
547; cs. 555 a; pp. 572,
575b; inf. 585,4.
]/2./a/- 'rule',

si.

pr. 439,

pt.

Sanskrit Index.

443

424, impv. 426, pt. 427,

impf. 428; pf. 485.
ypibd- 'stand firm', pr. pt.

'see',

pr. 439,

440,

opt. 440,

sj.

44.

impv.

441, pt. 442, impf. 443.

yi. pa- 'drink', pres. 422, sj.
423, inj. 424, impv. 426,
pt. 427, 461, impf. 428; pf.
485, opt. 489, pt. 492, 493;

'ask', pf.

485

inf.

585,

6);

I a.
'3.i\C,

pr. 430, sj.431,

opt. 433.

608.
impf. 436, pt. pratyafic-, inflected 299.
467, impf. 468; pf. 485; |^?-a//;- 'spread', pr.422, impv.
426, pt. 427, impf. 428; pf.
PP- 573ypid'press',
pf. 485;
cs.
485 (cp. p. 357 note =), sj.
487, inj. 488, pt. 493; root
,554 u..

ypi- 'crush', pr. 464, inj. 465,

impv. 466,

^<?--

'stronghold', inflected 355.

purds 'before', prep, with ace.

aor. pt. 50'5;

cs.

is

aor. 529;

555.

ypra- 'fill', pr. 451; pf. 485;

abl. loc. 607.
root aor. 499, sj. 502 .r-aor.
purastdd 'in front of, prep.
with gen. 617.
522; ps. aor. 501.
pura 'before', prep, with abl. pradur- 'out of doors', adv.
;

compounded with ybhii- 651.

c,

65 c

/2

(p.

61, priya- m., inflected 372.

priyd- (., inflected 374.

inj.

359 note

impv. 434, Part.

435, impf. 436; j-aor. 522;
434, impf. 436;
gdv. 544 i, 580; pp.574, i;
root aor. pt. 506; intv. 545,
inf. 584 b, 586 a, b.
I a, pt. 548;
ps. pt. 447;
pi-dti 'against', prep, with ace.
PP- 575 b.
impv.
pf. 485;

ypis- 'adorn', pr. 430,

\pad- 'go', j.r. 439, sj. 423,

mid.), 349 b, 350.
impv. 441, pt. 442, impf. ypis- 'thrive', pr. 439, si.440,
pt.
opt. 440, impv. 441,
443; pf. 485; root aor. 500,
sj. 502, prec. 504; red. aor.
442; pf. 485, opt. 489, pt.
514; j-aor. inj. 524; cs.
492; a-aor. opt. 51 1; cs.
553 b, inf. 585, I.
5SS. sj. 559b; ps.aor, 501;
pp. 576 a; inf. 587 a; gd. ypii- 'cleanse', pr. 422, 476,
sj. 423, impv. 426, 478, pt.
591 a.
pad- 'foot', inflected 3 19.
427, 479, impf. 428, 480;
\pan- 'admire', pf. 485; isred. aor. 514; is-aar. 529,
inj. 531; ps. 445. Pt- 447;
aor. inj. 531
intv. 545, 3,
gd. 590 a, b.
pt.548; cs.556, gdv. 561b;
ps. 445; pp. 575 b; gdv. ypr- 'pass', pr. 45 1, 458, impv.
460; red. aor. 514, inj. 516;
579impv. 526;
j-aor. sj. 523,
panaya- den., inj. 569 b.
cs. 557 c,
z>-aor. sj. 530;
papra, 3. s. pf. ypra- 484.
sj. 559 b; inf. 58Sb.
paras 'beyond', prep, with ace.
inst. loc. abl, 616.
yprn- 'fill', pr. 430, sj. 431,
impv. 434, impf. 436; inf.
pari 'around', prep, with ace.
abl. 606.

=prach-

(cp. p.

ypracA-

427.

442, 565 ?< impf- 443/fl'tf- 'husband', inflected 380b

in compounds 2S0;' accen617.
tuation p. 95 a, p. 96, 3.
purodas- 42

ypas-

ypraks-

priyaya- den., impf. 569 f.

yprT- 'please', pr. 476, pt. 479,
impf. 480; pf. sj. 487, impv.
plup. 495;
490, pt. 493;
root aor. prec. 504; j-aor.
sj. 523; des. 542; pp. 573.
ypru- 'flow', pr. inf. 424.
ypruih- 'snort', pr. inj. 424,
impv.426, pt.427; pf. 485 ;
intv. 545. l; gd. 591 ii.
yprus- 'sprinkle', pr. 470, sj.
471, impv. 434, pt. 435;
PP- 575 b.
yplu- 'float', pr. 422, impv.

426.
]/^M- 'devour', pr. 451, impv.

454-

yphan- 'spring', intv. 545, 3,

585. 7pt. 548; cs. 555.
yprc- 'mix', pr. 430, 464, vay
465, opt. 465, impv. 434. l/^.4a?--_ 'scatter', intv. 545,2,
impf.
pt. 467,
547 a.
460, 466,
468; pf. sj. 487, opt. 489;
opt.
sj.
aor.
502,
504, pt. 506; j-aor. 522, sj.
523; ps. 445, impv. 445,
pt. 447, impf 448 ; pp. 5 76 b

root

ybamh- 'make
ybandh478,

firm', pp. 574, 2.

'bind', pr. 476,

impf. 480;

pf.

impv.

485;

ft. 537. 539; ps. 445. impv.

root aor. 499, sj. 502, prec.
446, pt. 447; inf. 584 b,
inf. 584 b, 587 a.
504, impv. 505, pt. 506;
590 b.
des. 542, prtanya- den., sj. 569 a, impf.
j--aor. inj. 5^4;
bahirdha 'outside', prep, with
569 f.
pt. 544; cs. 558 a; ps.445,
abl. 618.
aor. 501;
pp. 574,3; inf. yprs- 'sprinkle', pr. pt. 427,
ybadh- 'oppress', pr. 422, inj.
adj. 'spotted' 313.
g<i-59oa,b;
585.3.4.5.7;
impv. 426, pt. 427,
424,
ypf- 'fill', pr. 458, 476, sj.
591 a.
impf. 428; pf. 485; j>-aor.
477, opt. 477, impv. 460,
\2.pa- 'protect', pr. 451, sj.
intv.
des. 542;
inj. 531;
478, pt. 442. 479. impf452, impv. 454, pt. 455.
lb, 2a, 546, pt. 548;
pt.
opt.
545,
pf.
489,
480;
j-aor.
sj.
462,
523.
impf. 456;
cs. 555 a; pp. 575 b.
492; red. aor. inj. 516,
papaya- den., aor. inj. 570.
impv. 518; cs. 557 c, sj. ybudh- 'wake', pr. 422, 439,
ypi- or pt- 'swell', pr. 422,
sj. 423, inj. 424, opt. 440,
';59b; pp. 576 e470, pt. 442, 461, 473; pf.
impv. 426, 441, pt. 442;
pr. 439. impv482; 485. pt- 492, 493; ypyd- 'fill up',
pf. 482 b, sj. 487, pt. 493;
441, pt. 442; j-w-aor. 01 1.
pp. 576 d.
pt.
root aor. 500,
506;
534; cs. 558 .
\pinv- 'fatten', pr. 422, inj.
.

444

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

4.

Vedic Grammar.

red. aor.
inj. 510;
465, pt. 467; pf. 485; root ymad- or mand- 'exhilarate',
aor. sj. 502, inj. 503
pr. 422, 451, 458, sj. 423,
a-aor.
514; j-aor. 522; z'j-aor. si.
inj. 424, opt.425, impv. 426,
opt. 511, impv. 512;
inf.
530; ps. aor. SOI; inf.
460, pt. 427, impf. 428,462;
584 b, 588 a.
584 b, 585. Ipf. 485, sj. 487, opt. 489,
ybrh- 'make big', pr. impv. ybhur- 'quiver', pr. inj. 432,
impv. 490, pt. 492; root
impv. 434. pt. 435; intv.
434; pf. 485, pt. 493; Uaor.499, impv. 505, pt. 506;
aor. inj. 531; intv. 545, 2,
545. 2 , 546, pt. 548.
red. aor. 514;
ybha- 'be', pr. 422, sj. 423,
j--aor. 522,
547 a.
impv. of ybhii- and
sj. 523,
inj. 524, pt. 527;
bodhi,
inj. 424,
opt. 425,
impv.
u-aor. 529, opt. 532;
cs.
ybudk- 32 c, 505 note 3.
pt. 427,
impf. 428;
426,
\bru- 'say', pr. (inflected) 45 1,
pf. 482 b I, 485, opt. 489,
555 a, 556 a, sj. 559b; ps.
pt. 447; PP-573; gdv. 578,
sj. (inflected) 452, opt. 453.
pt. 492; root aor. 499, sj.
impv.454, pt.455. impf.456.
4; inf. 585,7.
502, inj. 503, opt. 504, prec.
\bli- 'crash', pp. 576 d.
504; a-aor. 508; red. aor. mddhu- 'svieet' inflected 389.
514; ft. 537, 539, pt. 538; madhya- 'in the midst of
ybhaif- 'partake of, cs. 556 a.
des. 542,
intv.
pt. 544;
587 b a.
\bhaj- 'divide', pr. 422, 451,
pt. 548;
cs. yman- 'think', pr. 422, 439,
545, I, 546,
sj. 423, inj. 424, opt. 425,
557b; pp.573; gdv. 578,2,
470, sj. 423, 440, 471, inj.
impv. 426, pt. 427, impf.
440, 471, opt. 440, 459,
581; inf. 584a, 588c; gd.
428; pf. 485, pt. 493; j-aor.
471, impv. 441. 472, pt.
590 a, b, 591 a.
522, sj. 523, inj. 524, opt. bhii- 'earth', inflected 383.
442, 473. impf- 443. 474;
pf. 485 ; root aor. 500, sj.
525; cs. 555, ps. pt. 447, ybhils- 'adorn', pr. 422, sj.
561, gd. 591 a; ps. pr. pt.
502, pt. 506; j-aor. 522,
423, opt. 425, impv. 426,
ft. 537,
sj- 523. inj- 524;
pt. 427,
impf. 428;
gdv.
447; gd- 59 b, c.
\bhanj- 'break', pr. 464, impv.
580.
539; des. 542, ps. 544 h,
pp.544h;C5.555, opt.559c;
pr. 422, 451,
466, pt. 467, impf. 468; ybhr- 'bear',
pf. 485; ps. impv. 446.
458 (inflected), sj. 423, 459,
pp. 574. 2; inf. 585, 4, 5.
\bhan- 'speak', pr. 422, inj.
inj.
424, opt. 425, 459, manasya- den., pr. (inflected)
impv. 426, 460, pt. 427,
424, impf. 428.
569, opt. 5690.
\bhand- 'be bright', pr. 422,
461, impf. 428, 462; pf. niantraniya,- gdv. 581 b.
pt. 427.
482 d, 485, sj.487, pt. 493; ]/l. ma- 'measure', pr. 451,
ybharv- 'devour', pr. 422.
opt. 459, impv. 460, pt. 461,
plup. 495; root aor. prec.
bhdvanU 'being', inflected 314.
impf. 462; root aor. impv.
504, impv. 505 j--aor. (in\bhas- 'devour, pr. 430, 458,
flected) 522,
inj.
sj. 523,
505, pt. 506; j-aor. 522;
sj. 459, inj. 424, pt. 461.
ps. aor. 501;
524; /j-aor. 529; cond.538,
pp. 574, 3;
ybhd- 'shine', pr. 451, impv.
gdv. 578,3; inf. 584 a;
ft.pt.538; intv.545,2, 546;
gd. 590 b, 591 a.
ps. 445, sj. 446, aor. 501
454. pt. 455bhamaya- 'be angry', den., pp.
pp.573; inf. 585,585, 4.5.7.8. y2.ma- 'exchange', pr. 439;
gd. 591 b.
586b; gd. 591 b.
575 c.
ybhas- 'shine', pr. 422, sj. 423, ybhrjj- 'roast', pr. sj. 431.
ma- 'bellow', pr. 422, 458;
"I/3.
pt. 427ybhyas- 'fear', impf. 428.
pf. 585; red. aor. 514, inj.
ybhiks- 'beg', pr. 422, inj. 424, ybhrams- 'fall', pr. inj. 424;
516; inf. 585,5.
opt. 425, pt. 427.
ma, prohibitive particle used
a-aor. inj. 510;
cs. 555;
ybhid- 'split', pr. 422, 464,
vrith injunctive 648.
PP- 574.
sj. 465, inj. 465, opt. 465,
ybhraj- 'shine', pr. 422, pt. matdr- 'mother', inflected 360.
impv. 466, pt. 467, impf.
427; root aor. 499, prec. mas- 'month' 44, 3, 340 (inflected).
428,468; pf. 485 ; root aor.
504; ps. aor. 501.
ymi- 'fix', pr. 470, sj. 471,
499. sj. 502. inj. 503. P'- ybhn- 'consume', pr. 476.
inj. 471, impv. 472,
part.
506; o- aor. opt. 511 ) -f-aor. ybhres- 'totter', pr. 422.
inj. 524;
des. 542, impf.
473, impf. 474; pf. 485;
ps.445, pt.447; gdv.578,1.
544; ps.aor.50i; pp.S76a; ymamh- or mah- 'be great',
gd. 590 b, 591 a.
pr.422, opt. 425, impv. 426, ymiks- 'mix', pf. 485 (cp. p.
bhisaj- 'heal'j den., pr. 568.
pt. 427, impf. 428; pf. 482,
359 note 8), impv. 490.
bhisajya- den., impv. 569 d.
485, sj.487, inj. 488, impv. ymigh- 'mingere', pr. pt. 427.
bhisnaj- 'heal', den., impf. 568,
490, pt. 493; cs. 556, 556a, ymith- 'alternate', pr. 422, pt.
pt. 559e; inf. 584b, 585, 2.
569 f.
435; pf- 485yihl- 'fear', pr. 422, 458, sj. ymajj- 'sink', pr. 422;
gd. ymis- 'mix', des. 542, impv.544.
591a.
ymis- 'wink', pr. 430, pt. 435;
423, inj. opt. 459, impv.
426, 460, pt. 427, 461, impf. madgu- 38 c, 44 a 3 a (p. 36),
inf. 587 a a.
428, 462; pf. 482 b, 485,
ymiA-'mingeie' i^pr. 4.22, impv.
62,4 b note 3 (p. 57).
pt. 492;
plup. 495;
root ymath- or matiih- 'stir', pr.
426, pt. 427; ft. 537, 539;
aor. inj. 503, pt. 506; red.
cs. 553 a; inf. 584b.
422,476, Ej.423, impv.426,
aor. 514, inj. 516;
j-aor.
478, pt. 479, impf. 428, 480; ymi- 'damage', pr. 439, 476,
pf. 485; root aor. sj. 502;
522, pt. 527; cs. aor. 560;
inj. 477,
subj. 477,
opt.
inf. 585, I.
2>-aor. 529,
inj. 531 ;
ps.
impf. 480;
pt. 479,
440,
ybhuj- 'enjoy', pr. 464, sj.
pf. 485;
j-aor. inj. 524;
445. pt. 447; PP- 575 a 2.
3-aor.

;;

Sanskrit Index.

I.

intv. 545. 1.

584

a,

586

mtdvdms;

Pt-

548;

a-aor. inj. 5 10; red. aor.

inf.

M-aor.

516;

a.

pf. pt.

492

inj.

531

445
inj.

inf.

584 b.
meghaya- den.,

b.

ft. and pp. 570.

ymrv- 'push', pr. pt. 427 ; pp. ymed- 'be fat', pr. impv. 441
cs. 554 a.
573
ymuc- 'release',
pr.
430, ymyaks- 'be situated', pr. impv.

ymil- 'wink', gd. 591

a.

439. sj. 431, 440, impv.

434, pt. 435. impf. 436;
pf. 485, sj. 487, pt. 493;
plup. 495;
root aor. 499,

426;

pf.

485; rootaor.499;

ps. aor. 501.

ymruc- 'set', pr. pt. 427.

ymla-

'relax', cs.

558; pp. 573.

500, prec. 504; o-aor. 508,

sj. 509, inj. 510, impv. 512; ya- 'who', rel. pron. 398.
pr. inj.
inj. 524,
opt. yyaks- 'press on'(?),
j-aor. 522,
424, pt. 427; inf. 584 b.
525, des. 542, pt. 544; ps.
yyaj- 'sacrifice', pr. 451, opt.
aor. 501; gd. 591 a.
ymud- 'be merry', pr. 422,
425, impv. 426, pt. 427,
impf. 428; pf. 482bi, 485,
impv. 426, pt. 427 ; pf. 485
root aor. impv.
pt. 493;
root aor. opt. 504; y-aor.
opt. 532; ps. aor. 501; inf.
505; j-aor. 522, sj. 523,inj.

524; ja-aor. impv. 536; ft.

537; des. 542, sj. 544;
pp. 574; inf. 585.4.7; gd.

584 b.

ymur-

= mr-

'crush', pf.

sj.

487.

ymus-

'steal',
pr. 422, 476,
590 b.
479, impf. 480; M-aor. yajnasn-, inflected 376.
sj.
inj. 531;
pp. 575 b; inf. yyat- 'stretch', pr. 422,
423, opt. 425, impv. 426,
584 b; gd. 591a.
pt. 427; pf. 485; root aor.
yniuh- 'be dazed', pr. impv.

pt.

pt. 506; cs. 555, sj. 559b,

441; red.a0r.s14; cs.553b;
pt- 559 6PP- 573; inf- 584 b.
ymiirch- 'thicken', impf. 428. yyabh- 'futuere', pr. 422, impv.
426.
yi. mr- 'die', pr. 422, sj.
423; pf. 48s, pt. 492; root yyam- 'reach', pr. 422, 451,
sj. 423, inj. 424, opt. 425,
aor. 500, inj. 503, opt. 504;
impv. 426, pt. 427, impf.
ft. 537. 539; cs. 557 c; ps.
428; pf. 482 b I, 485, pt.
445, impv. 446; PP-576e.
493; root aor. 499, sj. 502,
y2. mr- 'crush', pr. impv.
opt. 504, prec. 504, impv.
478; pt. 479; intv. 547 c.
505; a-aor. opt. 511; j-aor.
ymrks- 'stroke', pr. sj. 43 1.
522, sj. 523, inj. 524, pt.
ymrc- 'injure', j-aor. opt. 525
527; 2>-aor.S29;intv.545,2,
cs. 5S3!c; sj. 559b; pp.573546;cs.555;ps.pt.447. aor.
ymrj- 'wipe', pr. 45 1, impv.
501; pp. 574, 2; aor. gdv.
454. Pt-45S. impf. 456; pf580; inf. 585, 4, Sft 586 a;
482, 485, opt. 489; jo-aor.
gd. 591 b.
536; intv. 545, 2, 547, pt.
548, impf. 549. 55'. gdv. yyas- 'be heated', pr. impv.

460, pt. 442.

553 c, opt. 559 c;
pt-447; PP-S73; yya- 'go', pr. 45 1, opt- 453.
impv. 454, pt. 455, impf.
gdv. 578.4; gd. 590 b.
456;pf. 485, pt. 492; j-aor.
ymrd- 'be gracious', pr. sj.
522, sj. 523, inj. 524; sis431, impv. 434; cs. 554.
opt., impv.
sj.,
aor. 534,
sj- 559 b534; ft- 537. pt- 538; ppmrn- 'crush', pr. 430, mj.432,
573; inf. 584 a, 585,4.
impv. 434, impf. 436; red.
yyac- 'ask', pr. 422, opt. 425,
aor. 514.
impv. 426, pt. 427, impf.
ynifd- 'crush', pf. opt. 489428; w-aor. sj. 530; cs.
y7nrdh- 'neglect', pr. 422, sj.
5S6a;pp. 575 b; inf. 586 b.
431 ; root aor. opt. 504;
yyad- 'unite'P), pr. pt. 427.
z>-aor. sj. 530, inj. 531.
ymrs- 'touch', pr. 430, sj. yi.yu- 'unite', pr. 430, 45 1.
sj. 431,452, inj- 432. impv431, impv. 434. pt- 435;
434. 454, pt- 435. 455.
impf. 436; pf- 482, 485;
impf. 436; pf. 485; des.
intv. 545.2.
jo-aor. 536;
542, pt. 544; intv. 545.1.
S47 a; gd. 591 a.
546, pt. 548; pp. 573; gd.
\mr?- 'not heed', pr. 439;
591a.
pf. 485; root aor. inj. 503-

580;

cs.

ps. 445.

y2. yu458;

'separate',

pr.

422,

459, opt.
459, impv. 426, 460, pt.
427; root aor. sj. 502, prec.
504; red. aor. inj. 516;
j-aor. sj. 523, inj. 524; isaor.inj. 53i;intv.545,I, pt.
548, impf. 549; cs. 557 b,
sj- 559 b; ps. aor. 501 ; pp.
573; inf. 585,4, 587 b.
yyuj- 'join', pr. 451, 464 (inflected), sj. 465, inj. 46s,
impv. 426, 466, pt. 467,
impf. 468; pf. 485, sj. 487,
pt. 493; root aor. 500, sj.
502, inj. 503, opt. 504, impv.
.r-aor. 522;
505, pt. 506;
ft- 537. 539; PS.44S. impv446, aor. 501; pp. 573; inf.
584 b; gd. 589 b, c.
yyudh- 'fight', pr. 422, 439,
451, sj. 440. impv. 441, pt.
442, 455, impf- 443; Pf485 ; root aor. sj. 502, impv.
505; j-aor. inj. 524; -aor.
529, sj. 530. inj- 531. impv.
533; des. 542, pt. 544; cs.
553b, sj. 559b; gdv. 578,4,
58o;inf. 584b, 585,2, 586a.
sj.

459,

inj.

yyup-

'obstruct', pf.

485;

cs.

S53,b; pp. 575 b.

yusmaka 'of you' 391, 2.
yuyam 'you', pron. 49 a, 391,2.
yyes- 'be heated', pr. pt.
427-

yramh-

'hasten', pr. 422, pt,

427, impf. 428; pf.pt. 493
cs. 556 a; gdv. 578, 4.
yraks- 'protect', pr. 422, sj

423, impv. 426, pt. 427

impf. 428; pf. 485, pt.493
(>-aor. 530; pp. 575 a I.
yraj- or ranj- 'colour', impf.
443; intv. 545, lb, 546; cs,

m. f. 'charioteer , inflected 376.

yrad- 'dig', pr. 422, 451, inj
424, impv. 426, pt. 427,
impf. 428; pf. 485; pp,

ratlii-

575 b.
yradh- or randh- 'make sub
pf.
pr. impv. 441;
ject',
482; root aor. impv. 505
inj.
510;
509,
515, inj. 516
w-aor.inj.53i; mtv.545,lb;

o-aor.

sj.

red. aor.
cs.

yran-

556

sj.

a, sj.

559

b.

'rejoice', pr. 422, 439,

424, impv.426; pf.482,

485, sj. 487, impv. 490;
plup. 495; z>-aor. 529, inj.
531; cs. 556.
randhanaya- den., impf. 5^9 finj.

yrap- 'chatter',

pr. 422, inj.

;;

446

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

424, opt. 425, pt. 427, impf.

428; intv. 545, I b, 546.
yraps- 'be full', pr. 422; pf.

485yral/h- or

rambk-

'grasp', pr.

422, sj. 423, inj. 424, opt.

435, impv. 426, pt. 427,
impf. 428;
pf. 482, 485,
j-aor. 522,
pt. 493;
pt.
527; inf. 584b, 586 a; gd.

591

a.

yram-

'rejoice', pr. 422, inj.

424, impv. 426, impf. 428,
480; red.aor. 514, sj. 515,
inj. 516;
J-aor. 522,
inj.
524; >-aor. inj. 534; cs.
a.

555

yramb- 'hang down',

pt.

460,
485,

493

451, impv.
461, impf. 456; pf.
impv. 490, pt- 492,
root aor. impv. 505

'give', pr.

j-aor. 522,

sj.

523, opt. 525,

impv. 526; pp. 573.

yz. ?-a-'bark', pr. 439, pt. 442.
yras- 'give', pr. pt. 427.
yraj- 'be liingly', pr. 422,
451, sj. 423, inj. 424, 452,
impv. 426, pt. 427, impf.
428; w-aor. 529; cs. 556a,
sj. 559 b; inf. 585, I.
yradh- 'succeed' pr. 422, sj.
423, impv. 441, pt. 442;
pf. 485
root aor. sj. 502,
prec. 504; j--aor. 522; isaor. inj. 531; ft. 537.539;
cs. 556 a; ps. aor. 501
gdv.
578, 4| inf. 585,7.
y;-/- or ri- 'flow', pr. 439, 476,
inj- 477, pt-479; impf.4So.
yHkh- 'scratch', jDr. impv. 434.
;

yric-

yruj- 'break', pr. 430, sj. 431,

inj. 432,
opt. 433, impv.
434, pt. 435, impf- 436;

pr. 422,

pt.

'leave', pr. 464,

465,
inj. 465, impf. 468; pf. 4S5,
opt. 489. pt. 492, 493; plup495; root aor. inj. 503, impv.

485; root. aor. inj. 503;

red. aor. 514; jjp. 576 b;

pf.

inf 584 b.
\rud- 'weep',

553

yrip- 'smear',

aor. 508, sj. 509, inj. 510,

opt. 511; j-a-aor. 536; des.
pt. 544;
cs. 553 b;
542,
inf. 586 a;
gd.
pp. 573;

590

485;

pp.

422, pt. 427,

ps. 445; pf. 485.
]/.'- 'tear',
pr. 430,
impv.
434, pt. 435yris- 'be hurt', pr. 439,
sj.
423, 440, inj. 424, opt. 440;
<7-aor. sj. 509, inj. 510, pt.
512; red. aor. inj. 516, opt.
517, prec. 517; des. 542,
pt.

544;
,585,7rifanya-

569
yrih-

cs.

den.,

553, 554; inf.

inj.,

impv.

b, d.
'liclc',

pf. pt.
pt-

jir.

pr. 451,

pt.

492; intv. 545,

548, 551; pp. 573-

455;
I a,

591

a.

pr. 422,
424, pt. 427, impf. 428;

554

inj.

cs.

yiap- 'prate',

427

pr.

impv. 426,

intv. 545,

I b,
546;
555; PP- 575 b.
ylabh- 'take', pr. 422, opt.
425; pf. 485, pt. 493; des.
542, pt. 544; gd. 590 b.
yii/ih'scratch', impf. 436;
M-aor. inj. 531; pp. 575 a 2.

pt.

ynbh- 'sing',
impf 42S;

b,

yrej- 'tremble',

ps. 445,

pf.

45 1, sj. 452,
508; cs.

b-

yi. rudh- 'grow', pr. 422, inj.

424, pt. 435, impf. 428.
y2. rudh- 'obstruct', jjr. 451,
464, sj. 465, impv. 466, pt.
467, impf. 468; pf. 485;
root. aor. 499; s-aor. 508,
inj.
510; .f-aor. 522; ps.
445; gd. 591 a.
yrup- 'breali', red-aor. 514;
I'P- 575 b.
ruvanya- den., inj. 569 b.
\rus- 'be vexed', pr. 422.
y-i-uh- 'ascend', pr. 422, sj.
423, opt. 425, impv. 426,
pt.
427, impf. 428; pf.
485; root aor. pt. 506; a-

sj.

573-

pr.

a-aor.

455;

pt.

505;
522;
impf. 448, aor. 501.
j-aor.

Vedic Grammar.

yr. ru- 'cry', pr. 430, inj.

impv. 434, pt. 435, 'P''432, impv. 434, pt. 435;
436; pf. 485; cs. 556 a.
w-aor. 529; intv. 545, I a, yvac- 'speak', pr. 458, impv.
pt. 548, impf. 549.
460; pf. 482 b I, 485, pt.
y2. ru- 'break', M-aor. 529;
493; red. aor. 514, sj. 515,
intv. 545, I, 546, pt- 548.
inj. 516,
opt. 517, impv.
ynic- 'shine', pr. 422, inj.
518; ft. 537, 539, pt. 538;
intv. 545, lb, impf. 549; ps.
424, impv. 42G,pt.427, impf.
428; pf. 485, inj. 48S, opt.489,
445, aor. 501; pp. 574, I;
pt. 492, 493; root aor. pt.
gdv. 578,4, 581; inf. 584b,
506; red. aor. 5 14; M-aor.
585, 4529, opt. 532; intv. pt. 548; yvanc- 'move crookedly', pr.
OS. 553 b, 554; inf. 584 b.
422; pf. 482, 485; ps. 445,
rucaya- den., inj. 569 b.
impv. 446, pt. 447.

427.

yi.ra-

4.

cs.

yiip- 'smear', pr.

522.

yii-

430;

j-aor.

'apprehend', pr. opt.

425, pt. 427 ; red. aor. 514;
cs. 555.

yvat-

yvad-

'speak',

pr.

422,

sj.

424, opt. 425, 433,

impv. 426, pt. 427, impf.
428; pf. 485; w-aor. 529,
sj. 530,
inj. 531; ft. 537,
539; intv. 545,1 b,S46, 547 c,
opt. 559 c; ps. pt. 447,

423,

inj.

pp. 575 b.
yvadh- 'slay', pr. opt. 425,
impv. 426; root aor. prec.
504; M-aor. 529, sj. 530,
inj. 531, impv. 533.
yvan- 'win', pr. 422, 470: sj.
423,431, 471, inj- 424, 471.
opt. 425, 433, 471, impv.

426,

472,

pt.

473,

impf.

474; pf. 482, 485, sj. 487,

pt. 492 ; root aor. impv. 505
j-aor.

sj.

523,

inj.

524, opt.

525; z>-aor. sj.530, opt. 532;

>-aor. opt. 534; des. 542,
543 (inflected), sj. 544; cs.
555; PP-574,2a; inf. 585,4.
vanusa- den, inj. 569 b.
vanusya- den., sj. 569 a.
yvand- 'greet', pr. 422, impv.
426, pt. 427; pf. 485; isaor. opt. 532; ps. aor. 501
gdv. 578, 4; inf. 585, 7.
yi. vap- 'strew', pr. 422, inj.
424, impv. 426, pt. 427,
impf. 428; pf. 482 b 1, 485
ps. 445,pt. 447; pp. 574, 1;
gd. 591 a.
y2. vap- 'shear', pr. (2. s.,
3 pi. act.) 422.
vapusya- den., impf. 569 f.'
vam, 1. a. aor. of w?"- 'cover'
66 C/S2, 499.
yvam- 'vomit', pr. sj. 452,
impf. 456.
varivasyd- den., sj. 569 a, impv.
569 d.

'cling', pr. 422,

impv.
426; pp. 576 d; gdv. 578,2.
ylup- 'break', pr. opt. 433; vareya-, den., sj. 569 a.
ps- 445; gd- 591 a.
yval; j-aor. sj. 523.
yiubh- 'desire', pr. pt. 442; yvalg- 'bound', pr. 422, impf.
cs. 533 b.
428.
vavrdhdnt; anom. pf. pt, p.
yva&s- 'increase', pr. 430,
363 note 7.

I.

yvas-

Sanskrit Index.

447

422, 451,
inj.
492 b; cs. 553; pp. 575 b;
477, opt. 477, impv.
inf. 585, 8; gd. 590 b.
424, opt.
478, pt. 479, impf. 480;
pf. 485; root aor. 500, sj.
42s, impv. 426, 4S4, pt. yz. vid- 'find', pr. 430, 451,
inj. 432,
opt. 433, impv.
502, inj. 503, opt. 504, pt.
4SS, impf. 428, pt. 435;
pf. 482, 485; intv. 545, I.
506; j-aor. 522; pp. 573;
434. 454, pt- 455. impf.
yi. vas- 'shine', pr. 430, sj.
gdv. 578, 2, 580.
436; pf. 485, sj. 487, pt.
opt. 433.
431. inj- 432,
492; o-aor. (inflected) 508, yvjy- 'twist', pr. 422, 464,
impv. 434, pt. 435, impf.
sj. 509, inj. 510, opt. 511,
sj. 465,
impv. 466, impf.
prec. 511, impv. 512, pt.
436 ; pf. 485, pt. 492, 493
468; pf. 482, 485, opt. 489,
plup. 495; root aor. 500;
impv. 490, pt. 492, 492 b;
512; j-aor. 522; intv. 547 a;
j-aor. 522; cs. 555; pp.
ps. 445. aor. 501 ; pp. 576 a;
root aor. 499, 500, sj. 502,
gdv. 579; inf. 584 b, 585,
inj. 503,
opt. 504, prec.
574; inf. 585, 4, 588 a.
\'2. vas- 'wear', pr. 451, inj.
504, impv. 505; a-aor. 508;
4; gd. 590 b.
j-aor. 522, inj. 524; intv.
452, opt. 453, pt. 435, impv. vid- 'finding', inflected, 319.
454, pt. 455. impf- 4S6; yvidh- 'worship', pr. sj. 431,
545, 3, cs. 550 c; cs. 553 c;
pf. 482, 485, pt. 493; isinj. 432. opt. 433, pt. 435.
inf. 584 b, 585, I, 7; gd.
aor. 529; cs. 555, ft. 537,
impf. 436.
590 a.
560.
yvUtdh- 'lack', pr. 430.
yvrl- 'turn', pr. 422, 458, inj.
1/3. vas- 'dwe'l', pr. 422, inj. vasiiya- den., sj. 569 a.
424, impv. 426, pt. 427,
impf. 428; pf. 482, 485, sj.
424, impv. 426, pt. 427, yvip- 'tremble', pr. 422, pt.
impf. 428; pf. 485, pt. 492,
427, impf. 428; pf. 485;
487, opt. 489, impv. 490,
root
root aor. pt. 506; red. aor.
pt. 492; plup. 495;
493; root aor. pt. 506;
j-aor.
aor. 499, 500, sj. 502, impv.
522; cs. 555, sj.
514; cs. 553 a, 554.
vibhu-, inflected, 383.
505; s-aor. 508; red. aor.
559 b.
yvah- 'carry', pr. 422, 451, vis-, inflected, 350.
514; j-aor. 522; ft. 537,
sj.
423, opt. 425, impv. yvis- 'enter', pr. 430, sj. 43 1,
539; des. 542; intv. 545,
impvinj. 432, opt. 433,
426, pt. 427, impf. 428;
2,3, 546; cs. 553c, sj. 559b;
pf. 482 b I, 485; root aor.
434. pt- 435. impf. 436;
PP- 573; inf- 584 b, cs.
opt. 504, impv. 505, pt.
pf. 483, 485,. opt. 489, pt.
585, 7; gd. 591 a.
506; j--aor. 522, sj. 523,
492, 492 b; plup. 495; root yvrdh- 'grow', pr. 422, sj.
inj.524;ft.537, S39;ps.445,
aor. 500, impv. 505; J-aor.
423, inj. 424, impv. 426,
pt. 427, impf. 428; pf. 482,
sj.446, pt. 447; pp. 574; inf.
522; ij-aor. 531; cs. 553 a,
opt. 559 c,
485, sj. 487, inj. 488, opt.
pp. 561 a;
585. 4, 7. 586 b; gd. 591 a.
inf. 586 a; gd. 591 a.
yi. va- 'blow', pr. 439, 451,
489, impv. 490, pt. 492,
impv. 454, pt. 455, impf. visvaiaspad- 'having feet on
493; a-aor. 508, pt. 512 a;
.f-aor. pt.
red. aor. 5^4;
every side', 319 a.
456; cs. 558.
y2. va- 'weave', pr. 439, yvis- 'be active', pr. 458, sj.
527; -aor. opt. 532; cs.
impv. 441, pt. 442, impf.
459, impv. 460, pt. 427,
553 c, sj. 559 b, pt. 559 e;
intv. gdv. 580; inf. 584 b,
impf. 42S, 462; pf. 485;
443; pf- 485; ft. 537. ptis-^ox. sj. 530; intv. 545, I a,
585, I, 7538; PP- 574. i; inf. 585.
pr. 422, impv.
pt. 548; inf. yvrs- 'rain',
4, 5, 586 b.
546, 547 b,
-vams, pf. pt. suffix, l8l, 347,
426, 434, pt. 427; pf. 482,
584 b.
impv. 490, pt. 493; v-aor.
yvist- or vesf- 'wrap', pr. impv.
491.
vac-, inflected, p. 180.
426; cs. 553.
529; cs. 553 c; gd. 590 a.
v.ijaya- den., impv. 569 d; yz/J 'enjoy', pr. 45 1, sj.452, inj. vrsiiya- den., impv. 569 d,
aor. 570.
inf. 585, 7.
4S2,impv.454,pt.455; impf.
yvanch- 'desire', pr. impv.,
456; pf. 485; j-aor. sj. 523; yvrh- 'tear', pr. 430, inj 432,
opt. 433, impv. 434, impf.
intv. 545, I a. 551; ps. 445,
426.
pt. 447, inf. 585, 3.
vdm 'we two' 391, I.
436; pf. 485; M-aor. 536;
cs- 553 c; ps- aor. 501.
yvas- 'bellow', pt. 442; pf. yvld- 'make strong', cs. 554 a482, 485, pt. 493; plup. vTraya- den., impv. 569 d, vidi-, loc. sing. p. 284 (mid.).
yven- 'long', pr. 422, inj.
impf. 569 f.
495; red. aor. 514; intv.
impv.
424, impv. 426, pt. 427,
545, I b, pt. 548, impf. 549- vTldya-., sj. 559 b,
impf. 428.
'559 d, pp. 575 cyvas
3. vas- (?) pr. 422.
yi. vr- 'Sover', pr. 422, 470, yvyac- 'extend', pr. 458, inj.
vi- 'bird' 38 1 a.
inj. 424, 47'. impv. 472,
yvic- 'sift', pr. 464, impv. 466,
459, impf. 462; pf. 482 b I,
pt. 473, impf. 474; pf.485,
485, inj. 488.
pt. 467, impf. 468; pf. pt.
pt. 492; plup. 495; root yvyath- 'waver', pr. 422, pt.
492; ps. impv. 446.
inj.
aor. 499, 500,
503,
427; is-3.or. sj. 530, inj.
yvij- 'tremble', pr. 430, impv.
impv. 505, pt. 506; red.
531; cs. 556, aor. 560 a.
434, pt- 435. impf- 436;
'pierce',
pr.
aor. 514; j-aor. sj. 523; yvyadh439,
pf. 485; root aor. inj. 503;
inj.
intv. 545, 3; cs. 557 c, sj.
440, impv. 441, pt.
red. aor. inj. 5 16; intv.
442, impf. 443; pf- pt. 492;
559 b; ft. 537, 560; ps. aor.
545, 1 a, SSIpp. 574, ; inf. 584 b.
501. PP- 573; inf. 585. 4;
yi. vui- 'know', pr. 451, sj.
yvya- 'envelope', pr. 439,
g1. 590 a, b, c, 591 b.
452, opt. 453, impv. 454,
opt. 440, impv. 441, pt.
impf. 456; pf. 485, pt. y2. z/-- 'choose', pr. 470, 476,
458,

'desire',

pr.

423,

inj.

sj.

448

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

impf.

442,

493;

pt.

574,

pf-

443;
fl-aor.

508;

yvrasc- 'cut up',

pt.

pr. 430, sj.

432, impv. 434,
ps.
impf. 436;

inj.

435,

impv. 446; pp. 576 b; gd.

590 b.
yvradh- 'stir up', pr. inj. 424,
pt.

427.

yzilag- pursue(?) gd. 591

yvli- 'crush'
yW:-.

yiamsopt.

427,

'praise', 422,

sj.

a.

j>-aor.

529,

sj.

inj-

'cut

in

pieces',

cs.

555|/l.

sad-

485,

pt.

'prevail',

pf.

482,

493.

1/2. sad- 'fair,

537, 539.
ysap- 'curse', pr. 422, sj. 423,
pt. 427,
impf. 428;
pf.
ft.

4^5; j-aor. inj. 524.

yi. sam- 'labour', pr. 439,
impv. 441, pt. 442; pf.
485,
529-

sj.

446,

il- 'lie', pr. 422, 451, opt.

453, impf. 428, 456, impv.
441, 454. pt.
455; pf-

ysram- 'be weary', pr. 439;

fl-aor.
pf. 485,
pt. 493;

487, pt. 493; z>-aor.

508,

inj. 510;
z>-aor. 529,
531; pp. 574, 2.
sravasya- den., sj. 569 a.
482 b 1 a, pt. 493; j-aor. sj. yira- (sri-, if) 'boil', pr.
523; !>aor. 529; inf. 585, 7.
476, pt. 479, impf. 480; cs.
ysa-, root
y2. si- 'sharpen'
558, sj. 559 b; pp.574, I a.
yhi- 'resort', pr. 422, sj. 423,
aor. 500.
impv. 426, pt. 427, impf.
sikaya- den., ft. and pp. 570.
yiuc- 'gleam', pr. 422, inj.
428; pf. 485, opt. 489, pt.
424, impv. 426, pt. 427,
493; plup. 495; root aor.
pt.
impf. 428;
pf. 485,
499; red. aor. 514; j-aor.
522; ps. aor. 501; cs. 558 a;
492, 493, opt. 489, impv.
490; a-aor. 508, pt. 512 a;
PP- 573,

inj.

red. aor. 514, inj. ^\(>; isaor. inj. 531; intv. 545, I a,

423,

531; cs. 556 a;

ps. 445, pt. 447, aor. 501;
gdv. 578, 4; inf. 584 b.
yiak- 'be able', pr. 470, sj.
471, impf. 474; pf. 485;
root aor. sj. 502, opt. 504,
impv. 505; fl-aor. 508, inj.
510, opt. 511; des. 542,2,
pt. 544; inf. 585, 4.
ysat-

sj.

aor. 501.

425, impv. 426, pt.

impf. 428; root aor.

impv. 505
53.

510; ps. 445,

Vedic Grammar.

yi.

3-

yvraj- 'proceed', pr. impv.

426, pt. 427; pf. 485.
yvrad- 'weaken', impf. 428.
431,

inj.

48s.
pp.

4.

547 a, pt. 548;

554; ps. aor.
..585.

cs. 553 b,
501; inf

381.

yhij- pf.pt. 493 (p.364note2).

pr.422,impv.
426,434; cs.554a; pp.574,2.
yhcbh- or sunibh- 'beautify',
422, 430, sj. 423, impv.
yia(j?/4- 'purity',

pt. 427, 435 ; root aor.

506; red. aor. 514;
cs. 553 b, 554; PP- 575^1;
inf. 5S4 b, 585, 1, 586 a.
ysus- 'dry', pr. 439, impv.
441; cs. 553 b.
yiil- or hi- 'swell', pr. pt.
427; pf- 482, 485, sj. 487,
opt. 489, pt. 492, 493 (p.
364 note 3); j-aor. pt. 527;
inf. 588 c.
yi}-)iysf- 'crush', pr.
impv. 434.
ysrdh- 'be defiant', inj. 424,
impv. 426, pt. 427; cs.
553 c.
yif- 'crush', 476, impv. 478;
pt. 479, impf. 480; pf. 485;
2>-aor. 529, inj. 531 ;
ps.
445. aor. 501 ; pp. 573 a,
576 e; mf. 587 b; gd. 591a.

426,
pt.

'clasp',

pr.

423

sj.

a-aor. inj 510; inf. 587 a.

ysrJ'mix',
pr.
476; pp.
573 a; inf. 585, I.

ysru-

7-

suci-, inflected,

yiris-

'hear', pr. 451, 470,

opt. 471, impv.
471,
472, pt. 473, impf. 474;
pf. 485, sj. 48 7, opt. 489, pt.
492; plup. 495; root. aor.
499, sj- 502, prec. 504, impv.
505; a-aor. inj. 510, des.
sj.

542 b, pt. 544, gdv. 544 i,

580; cs. 557 b; ps. 445,
aor. 501; pp. 573; gdv.
578, I, 579; gd. 590 b,
59' b.
ysrus- 'hear',

impv. 426,

pr.
pt.

inj.

427,

424,
impf.

428.
ysvaTtc-

426,
(cp.

556
svdn-,

'spread',
pt.

p.

pr.

427; pf.
361 note

impv.
487

sj.

3);

cs.

a.

accentuation,
p.
(bottom).
ykias- 'blow', 45 r, impv.

80

454,
impf.
y2. iam- 'be quiet',
pt. 455; intv. 545, lb; cs.
428; red. aor. 514; cs. 556;
555; inf 587 a.
pp. 574, 2 a.
yivit- 'be bright', root aor.
y'sas- 'cut', pr. impv. 454.
499. pt- 506; red. aor. 514;
\sa- 'sharpen', pr. 458, impv.
j-aor. 522.
460, pt. 461, impf. 436,
462; pf. pt. 493; pp. 574, socis-, inflected, 342.
sat 'six' 43 a 2.
yicand- or cand- intv. 545, 3. sat 53 a 2.
3; gd. 591 a.
ysas- 'order', pr. 422, 45 1, yicam- 'labour'(?), pr. inj.
477. ysthlv- 'spue', impf. 428.
sj. 452, impv. 454, pt.
455, yiaii- 'drip', pr. 422.
impf 428, 456; pt. 485, ysnath- 'pierce', pr. sj. 452, sa-, adv. particle in cominj. 488, impv. 490; root
impv. 454; red. aor. 514,
pounds, 250, 656.
aor. sj. 502; a-aor. 508, sj.
inj. 516; zV-aor. impv.
533; sakhi-, inflected, 380 a.
inj.
pt.
512a;
509,
510,
cs. 556; cs. pp. 575 c; inf. ysagh- 'be equal to',
pp.
impf.
,574. 3
584 b.
474; root aor. sj. 502.
yiiksdes. of iak'be yiya- 'coagulate', pp. 574, 3, ysac- 'accompany', pr.
422,
able', pr. 422, sj. 423, inj.
576 c.
458, sj. 423, inj. 424, 459,
424, opt. 425, impv. 426, yh'aih- 'slacken', pr. 476, pt.
opt. 425, impv. 426, 460,
pt. 427, impf. 428: these
479. impf. 480; pf. 485;
pt. 427 b, 461, impf
428;
forms
strictly
speaking
red. aor. inj. 516, impv.
pf. 485, pt. 492; root aor.
belong to 543, 544.
518; cs. 556.
impv. 505, pt. 506; j-aor.
yiihj- 'twang', pr. 451.
srathar-yd- den. 567 d.
522, sj. 523, inj. 524, opt.
sitipad- 'white-footed' 319 a. srathaya- den.
564 a, 569 d.
525; inf. 585, 7, 588 c.
yHm- 'labour'
yi. iam-. had- 'heart', used adverbially saca 'with', prep, with
loc '
ysif- 'leave', a-aor. sj. 509,
with ykf- and ydha-, 652.
619.

Sanskrit Index.

I.

449

ysaj- and sanj- "hang", pr. 422,

505; a-aor.opt.su; cs. sj.
impv. 426, impf. 428 ; j-aor.
559 t; pp. 574, 3; inf.
522.
584 a; gd. 591 a.
yscid- 'sit', pr. 422, 451, sj. sakdm 'with', prep. with. inst.
623.
423, inj. 424, opt. 425,
impv. 426, pt. 427, impf. ]/sadh- 'succeed', pr. 422, inj.
424, impv. 426, pt. 427,
428; pf. 485; opt. 487,
red. aor. sj. 515, inj. 516.
pt. 492; o-aor. 508, inj.
510, opt. 511, impv. 512, y- 'bind', 476, impv. 478;
pt.
pf. 485, sj. 487; root aor.
512; red. aor. 514;
j-aor. sj. 523; cs. sj. 559 b;
impv. 505; inf. 585, 4.
ps. aor. SOI; pp. 576 a; ysic- 'pour', pr. 422, 430, sj.
gdv. 578, 4; inf. 584 b,
431, inj. 432, opt. 433,
impv. 434, pt. 435, impf.
586 a; gd. 591 a.
sadka- 'together', adv. 634 a.
436; pf. 485; a-aor. 508;
sadhamds, nom. oi sadhamddps.
445, pt. 447, impf.
66 eft 319 a.
448; pp. 573; gd. 591 a.
ysan- 'gain', 470, sj. 471, opt. ]/I. sidh- 'repel', pr. 422,
impv. 426, pt. 427, impf.
471, impv. 472, impf. 474;
pf. 485, pt. 492; a-aor. 508,
428; pf. 485; intv. 545,1,
pt. 548; gd. 591 .
inj. 510, opt. 511, pt. 512;
M-aor. 529, sj. 530; ft. 537, "|/2. sidh- 'succeed', pr. 439.
539, pt. 538; des. 542, sj. sTda-, present base of sad- 'sit',

pt. 447, aor.

gd. 591

501; pp. 573;

a.

ysfp- 'creep', pr. 422, sj.

423, inj. 424, impv. 426,
pL 427, impf. 428; a-aor.
des. 542,
508, inj. 510;
pt. ,544; gd. 591 a.
senani-, inflected, 376.

ysev- 'attend upon', pr. 422,

impv. 426.
yskand- 'leap', pr. 422, sj.
423, impv. 426, pt. 427,
impf. 428; pf. 485; root

499, inj. 503 ; intv.

545, 3, 547, impf. 549; PPaor.

576 a;
yskabh-

584

inf.

b,

587

skambh-

or

a.

'prop',

pt. 479; pf- 482,

485, pt. 493; pp. 575 b;
inf._584 b; gd. 590 a.
skabhaya- den., impf. 569 f.
ysku- 'tear', pr. 470; intv.
545, I' 551kf- 'make', p. 55
yskr-

pr. 476,

544; intv. 545, 3; pp. 574,

p 57 note 8.
note 10.
gdv. 581; inf. 585, ysTv- 'sew', pr. impv. 441,
pt. 442;
pp. 573 ; gd. ystan- 'thunder', pr. impv.
2,3426, 454; root aor. inj.
sanitur 'apart from', prep.
591 a.
su 'weir, adv. particle, as
with ace. 620.
503 (or. pr. inj. 452); isaor. 529; intv. 545 2> 547;
first member of compounds,
sanuiar 'far from', prep, with
2;

>

ysap- 'serve', pr. 422, inj.

424, opt. 425, pt. 427,
impf. 428; pf. 485; red.
aor. inj. 516.
saparyd- den., sj. 569 a, opt.
569 c, impv. 569 d, impf.
aor.
569 f;
570; gdv.
prep. with. inst.
593 note 3; adv. 'together'
as first member of com'with',

pounds 250.
sama-

pr.

'press',

430,

'

inst.,

624.
susvaya- den., inj. 5^9 t)ysu- 'generate', pr. 430, 451,

impv. 434,

SJ..431, inj. 452,

'any', pron. 399.

470,

pt.
impv. 472,
473; pf. 485, pt. 492,493;
root aor. impv. 505, pt.
506; ps. 445, inj. 446, aor.
501; gdv. 581; inf. 585,4,
587 b.

471,

sj.

sumdd 'with', prep. with,

580.

sam

ysu-

pt.

435,

455.

482b

saranyd- den., sj. 569 a.

sarvapad- 'all-footed' 319 a.
ysas- 'sleep', pr. 458, impv.
454, pt- 455, impf- 456-

456;

pf.

aor.

514;

530,

inj.

529, opt. 532; ft. 537, 539;

des. 542, pt. 544; pp. 573;
inf. 585, X, 7; gd. 59.1 a.
sahd 'with' prep, with inst.
622; in compounds 656.
sahasrapad- 'thousand-footed',

pt.

538;

556.
ystabh- or stambh- 'prop', pr.
476, impv. 478, impf. 480;
pf. 485, pt. 492, 493 ; plup495 ;PP-S75b; gd. 590 b.
cs.

251, 658.

abl. 621.

impf.
I,

z>-aor.

531;

intv.

ft.

545,

436,

485; red.
529, sj.
537, pt.
I,

546;

pr. 422, 451,

423, 452, inj. 424, 452,
opt. 425, 453, impv. 454,
pt. 427, 455; impf- 456; pf4S5, sj. 487, pt. 492. 493;

yslu- 'praise',
sj.

j-aor.

plup. 495;
flected),

sj.

523,

522
inj.

(in-

524;

ps- 445, Ptft. 537, 339;

447, PP- 573; gdv. 579;
gdinf.
585, la, 4, 7;
590 b, 591 b.
ystubh- 'praise', pr. 422, impv.

426, pt. 427.

ystr- 'strew', pr. 470, 476,

inf. 585, 4, 5.
sdh; inflected, 352.
sj.
471, inj. 477, impv.
ysak- prevail', pr. 422, 451, ysud- 'put in order', pf. 485,
red. aor.
514,
478, pt. 479, impf. 480; pf.
sj.
487;
2, sj. 423, opt. 4;25, impv.
impv. 518; CS. 554 a, sj.
485, pt. 493 ; root aor. 499,
426, pt. 427, impf. 428;
sj. 502, inj. 503; j-aor. opt.
559 b.
pf. 482, 485, sj. 487, opt.
impv.
525; w-aor. 529; ps. aor.
489, pt. 492, 492 b, 493; ysr- 'flow', pr. 458,
501; pp. 576 e; inf. 584 a,
426, 460, pt. 461 ; pf. 485,
root aor. opt. 504, prec.
585, 4. 588 c.
pt. 492, 493; a-aor. 508;
504; j-aor. 522, sj. 523,
sj.
j-aor. sj. 523; ft. 537,539, ystka- 'stand', pr. 422,
opt. 525, pt. 527; w-aor.

319

a.

'bind', pr. 430, impv.

434, impf. 436; root aor.
sj.
502, opt. 504, impv.

ysd-

tndo-arische Philologie.

I. 4.

pt.

538; intv. 545, 2, 546,

548; cs. 557 c; inf.

585, 4, 5ysrj- 'emit', pr. 422, 430, sj.

43T, inj- 432. opt. 433,
impv. 434, pt. 427, 435,
impf. 436; pf- 485, opt.
489, pt. 493; plup. 495;
root aor. 500; j-aor, 522,
sj.

523,

inj-

524;

ps- 445,

423, inj. 424. opt. 425, impv.

426, pt. 427, impf. 428;
pf. 485, pt. 492, 493; root
aor. 498 (inflected), 499,
500, sj. 502, inj. 503, opt.
504,

impv.

a-aor. 508;

505, pt. 506;

red. aor. 514,

516; i-aor. inj. 524;

539; cs. 558, aor. 560;
pp. 574, 3; gd. 591 a.
inj.
ft.

29

45

Allgemeines und Sprache.

Vedic Grammar.

4.

ysHa- 'bathe', pr. 45 1, imp v.

514, inj. 516; cs. 557 b;
inf. 585, 4, 5454. Pt-4SS; cs. 558; gdv.
svd- 'own' 400, I ; 'his' etc.
S8i; gd. 590 b.
401 c.
ysniA- 'be moist', cs. 553.
ysnu- 'distil', pr. impv. 454. ysvaj- 'embrace', pr. 422, sj.
yspai- 'see', pf. 485, pt. 493;
423, inj. 424, impv. 426;
root aor. 500; r.s. 555.
'win', pr. 470, sj. 471,
impv. 472; root aor. 499,
sj. 502, inj.S03, impv. 505;
J- aor.
522; inf. 585, I; gd.

]/s/>r-

590

b.

ysprdh-

'contend',

422,

pr.

pt.

427; pf. 485, pt. 493;

plup. 495; root aor. 500,
pt. 506; inf. 585, I, 586 b;
gd. 591 a.
yspri- 'touch', pr. 430, sj. 431,
inj. 432, impv. 434,
impf.

436;
sj-

pf.

487; red. aor.

S'S; JO-aor.
584 b.

sj.

515.

inj-

536; inf.
yspfk- 'be eager', cs. 554,
opt- 559 c,
gdv. 561 b,
579-

ysphur-

'jerk',
sj.
pr. 430,
431, inj. 432, impv. 434,
pt. 435, impf. 436.
ysphurj- 'rumble', pr. 422;

pf.

485, pt. 493; plup. 495;

inf.

584 b.

svdiavas-, 44, 3, dat. pi. p.

226

note 2, and p. 233.

ysvad- and svdd- 'sweeten',
pr. 422, sj. 423, impv. 426;
red. aor. inj. 516; cs. 556;
PP- 573 a'sound', w-aor. 529,
inj.53i;intv. 545.3. sj. 547;

ysvan-

cs. 556; cs. pp. 575 c.

ysvap- 'sleep', pr. impv. 426,
454. pt- 455; pf- 482 b I,

485, pt. 492, 493; red. aor.

514; ft. 537, 539; cs. 555;
PP; 574; gd- 590 b.
svaydm 'self 400, 2.
ymar- 'sound', pr. 422, sj.
423, impv. 426, impf. 428;
pf. inj.

488;

j--aor.

556ysvid- 'sweat',
pp. 576

pf.

522;
pt.

cs.

493

a.

554 a.
ysphf- 'jerk',

ir-aor.

inj.

with

'with', prep,

inst.,

625.
'smile',

422,

pr.

inj.

424, pt. 427; pf. pt. 493.

ysmi"- 'remember', pr. sj. 423,
impv. 426.
ysyand- 'move on', pr. 422,
impv. 426, pt. 427; pf.
482 b I, 485; red. aor. 514;
j-aor.
cs.

yhan-

522;

556 a;

584

intv.

545, 3;
pp. 576 a; inf.

b, 585, 7.

\sras- 'fair, root aor. 66 c 2,

499 ; a-aor. opt. 511; red.
aor. 514; cs. 556 a; gd.

590 b.
sras, 2. 3. J- aor.

ysridh-

VW'i

'blunder',

impv. 426,
428; (7-aor.
S12.
ysrJv-

'fail',

\/sru-

'flow',

pr.

pt.

522.
422,
impf.

427,
inj. 510,

cs.

554 a

pr.

pt.

a.

422,

opt.

425, impv. 426, pt. 427,

impf. 428; pf. 485; red. aor.

'strike', pr.

451, sj. 452,

453, impv.
454. pt- 455; pf- 485. sj.
487, pt. 492; ft. 537. 539,
pt. 538; des. 542, sj. 544;
intv. 545,3. 546, 547,
pt
548, 548 a; ps. 445, impv.
446, pt. 447, impf. 456;
PP- 574.2; gdv. 581; inf.
585. 4. 5; gd. 590 t>, c,
inj.

S3'-

ysmi-

Sanskrit Index,

des. 542 c I; cs. aor. 560;

gd. 591 ayhas- 'go emulously', pr. pt.
427.
")//4z- 'impel', jDr. 470, inj. 47 1,
impv. 472, pt. 427, 473;
root aor. 499, impv. 505;
pt. 506; ffl-aor. 508; J'- aor.
522; gdv. 581; inf. 584 a.
yhinis- 'injure', pr. 422, 464,

impv.466,

pt.

467;

pf.

485;

plup. 495; M-aor. inj. 531;

ps. pt. 447;
pp. 575 a i;
gdv. 581 a; gd. 590 b.

hi- 'impel', pr.impv.

yhinv426.
yhid- 'be hostile', pf. 482,
485, pt 493; red. aor. 514;
cs. 554 a; pp. 575 a 3.
yhu- 'sacrifice', pr. 451, 45S,
sj-459, opt459. impv. 460,
pt.461, impf. 462; ft 537;

ps. aor. 501.

yhil-

'call', pr. 422, 430, 45 1,

458, inj. 424, 432, opt. 433,
pt.427, 435, impf. 436; pf.
485; root aor. 500, inj. 503;

a-aor. 508; j'-aor.522; intv.

545.1, 546,547, impf- 549;

pp. 573;
gdv. 578,2; inf. 585,4,7.
yi.hr- 'take', 422, 451, sj.
423, opt. 425, impv. 426,
pt. 427, impf. 428
pf. 485 ;
j-aor. 522; des. 542; inf.
ps. 445, pt. 447;

cs.

smad

I.

452,

opt.

591 b.

yhar- 'be

585, l; gd. 591b.

hr- 'be angry', pr. 476,
inj- 477,
impv. 478, pt
479yhrs- 'be excited', pr. 422,
1/2.

439.
gratified',

pr. 439,

440, impv. 441, pt. 442,

impf. 443.
hastin-, inflected 333.
y\. ha- 'leave', pr. 458, sj.
459, opt. 459, impv. 460,
pt. 461, impf. 462; pf. 485;
sj.

pf. pt.

in>pv. 426,
pt 427;
493; intv. 545, 2,

547, pt- 548; cs. 553 c; pp.

575

b.

yhes- 'whinney', pr. pt. 427.

yhmi- 'hide', pr. 45 1; gdv.

j-aor. 522, inj. 524; jir-aor.

579yhri- 'be ashamed', root aor.

pt. 506.

inj.

yhva-

537, 539; cs.

ps. 445, impv.
446, aor. 501; pp. 575 b a,
576 c; gd. 590 a, b, c.
y2. ha- 'go forth', pr. 458,
inj. 459, impv. 460, pt.461,
impf. 462; red. aor. inj.
p.

534;

ft.

396 note

516; j-aor. 522,

inj.

524;

pr. 439, sj. 440,

pt.
440, impv. 441,
442, impf. 443.
yh-vr- 'be or make crooked',
'call',

opt.

pr. 422, 476, sj. 459,

459; pf- 485. pt.

inj.

493;
red. aor. 514, inj. 516;
j-aor. inj. 524; pp. 573 a..

4
;

II.

Ablative: sing. masc. formed

in two, neuter in three
ways from der. i^-stems 389.
Accusative: pi. masc. and

fem. formed

from

in

two ways

-stems 389
appositional 642 b cognate
642 a; of direction 642 c;
of distance and time 642 d.
Accentuation 83 IH; aorist
505 (root aor.), 507 (a-aor.),
535 (jiz-aor.); augment 96;
causative 552; denominadouble 85 a, 91
tive 562;
(p. 96), 105 a; lack of 85 b;
irregular monosyllabic 94,
I a, 368 n. '4 (rad. J-stems),
362 n. 7 {ray-), 364 c (dydv-,
>o- H
4)"*-), 376, p. 272 n.
[strt-); normal nominal 384b
(der. ?7-stems), 382 b (radical
K-stems); shift of 22, 29
38 d, 58 d, 107 (case-forms
der.

GENERAL INDEX
the case-ending of the abl.
644 b, of the ace. 642,
642 a, 642 d ft of the dat.
644 a, of the gen. 644 c,
of the instr. 372 (p. 257),

374

264),

(P-

374

pi.

(f.

of the loc. 643,

p. 267),
644 d, of the nom. 641.

nominal stems
_ 253, 318 a 4, 328 c, 332 a.
Amredita compounds 257, 6,
Alternative

319. (p. 198 note 5);

accentuation of 88; Sandhi
in 57 b y, 78, I c.
Anudatta accent 83, 84.
258,

Anunasika for

final

77

b,

77, 2 d.

Anus vara

for
75, 2, 3, for n
77, 2 a b c ; in the intensive
reduplicative syllable 60b.

Aoristic s: added to present

stem 521 a 2; lost 520 a 4,

330
339

b,

334

336

a,

a,

338,

341 a, 343 a, 344

(p. 230 note 6), 345,
347,
349 a, 351 a, 354 a, 356,
a,

363, 380

a.

Causative stem

nominal

vatives in -ana,

isnu,

-iinu, -u

ed with

deri-

-if, -a, -alu,

561 ej form-

suffix -paya

5S8,

the p of which sometimes

retained in the reduplicated
aorist 513 a 2.
Cerebralization of,inverbal
forms after the r of pre:

positions 47

a; after r, r,

second member of
nominal compounds 47 A b,

s,

in the

81, 2 e; in a following word

c ; of initial t 78, 2 b.
Cerebrals: their origin 42,
unexplained 43 c, 47 B c;

47

Prakritic 42 b, 47 B;
representing old palatals 43;
529 a.
as adverbs), 299, 319, and Archaic Sandhi in compounds
t for final j 66 b 6 (S, / and d
J for palatal /
81.
for J 42 d
389 (inst. as adv.), 311
two in the same
(participles as substantives), Aspirates
characteristic
syllable avoided 32, 40 a.
Compounds
314 (nom. neut. of parti;

ciples as adv.),

374

ad-

(inst.

verbs p.264mid.), p. 273 n.'

(fem. of a-stems), 94, 2

(oxytones), 377,3a and 378
(der. r-stems), 380 (der. zstems), 388 c (der. -stems\

Assimilation: of s 53, 57, 78;

of final consonants 74; of

and

palatals 76,
of final media to
I, 2;
following nasal 74 a; final
final i to I

m to following mutes 75, 2,

to y Iv 75,4.
(monosyllabic stems),
334 b {dp-), 364 c {div-), Attraction with the dative and
ablative infinitive 583, 587.
93 a a (cardinals); systems
Augment 413; lengthened
of 84.
Adjectives: fem. of 299 {anc413; dropped 413 b; irregular Sandhi of 413 a.
stems),326an. i3(fl-stems),
330a (wow-stems), 332 note9
(-stems), 345 {yams-items), Breathing A: represents sonant
94,

347 {vams-stsras),
270 (j/a-stems),

p.

(various stems),
stems).

375

a,

377, I
388^.3 {u-

aspirates, guttural, palatal,

cerebral, dental, labial 58;
when final becomes i or i

66b6S, 351

b.

features 241, consisting of

phrases293,3, gender 241

Sandhi

81,

suffixes

a,

256,

tmesis p. 143 (bottom), 260;

member consisting of

first

adverbs 247, 274 b, 278 c,

289 b, nouns with caseendings 242, 248, 27s, 277,
278 a, 280, 287, 355 (p. 242
note 3), 368 (p. 252 notes
2, 3. 13. P- 253 noteS), particles 251, 278 c, 284, 289 c,
prepositions 249, 274a, 278d,
283, 298a, 292,1, alternative
stems 244, 245, present
stems 292, 2 a, b; last
member consisting of alternative stems 253, or present

stems 272.
Adverbs: two classes 626;
Conjugation irregularities of
formed from nouns 442 a, Case-endings, normal 295 c.
the a-class 421 a, of the
643 a, 643 b, from pronouns Case-forms as adverbs (treatof the ya^
fl-class 429 a,
ed in the order of the cases)
642 d /S, 643 c, from numeclass 438, of the j/o-class
641 644; strong and weak
rsJs 634 ; multiplicative 638
(passive) 444 a, of the root
295 d, 297, 298, 301, 313,
miscellaneous 640; of manof the reduclass 450 a,
ner 632; of time 639; with
31S. 323. 32Si 326b, 32Sb,
:

29*

452

I.

Allgemeines und Sprache.

plicated class 457 a, of the

infixing nasal class 463, I,
of the fiu-c\a.ss 469 a, of
the a-class 47=; a.
Consonants lost: 81, 2 a, in

group

final

66

c,

521

a;

mute between nasal and

mute 62, 3c; i between
two consonants 62, 3 b,
between two mutes 355
note 9, 520 a 4, m or in
theinst. of-fl stems328b.

j-

secondary
in
Sandhi 70, 3; in the perfect 483 a 2; in declension
344 (p. 229, 230, 232,, 233),
374 (gsn- pl- of ianya).

Contraction

masc. formed
in two, neut. in three ways,
in der. u- stems 389.
Denominative with causative
accent 563; formed from
stems in -a 563, in -a 564,
Dative:

sing.

in

-/

566

565, in -u 566, in

consonants 567;
without a suffix

in

a,

formed

inflexion 569;

568;
ciples

-o

parti-

Vedic Grammar.

4.

gen. -as, dat. -ai 374, 385

in conjugation, -ana 2. sing,
implv. 475, 3, -am 3. sing,
impv. mid. 454, -i for -ta
3.

red. aor. p. 376

-iran 494, 495, 529,

sing.

(top),

-ur

3. pl. 456, 494, 499,

503, -au 1. 3. sing. pf.
484, 485, -e 3. sing. mid.
for -te 422, 430, 451, 458,
464, 476, 546, -tana 2. pl.
impv. 426, 441, 454, 472,
478, 505, -tat impv. 418 b,
426, 434, 44!. 454. 460,
472,478, 5i8,S47.S59<i, -'22
523, -rf/52 2. sing. impv. 418a,
454, 58, 2 d, -dhva 2. pl. mid.

426, -rata 3.
-ratam
and

mid. 425,
-ram 3. pl.

pl.

+ ?^or/-),

p.2512

a-stems), 372
du. and L. pl.

f.

374 a, b (N. sing.

and L. pl. a-stems).
Hybrid form 348 (N. pl. pf.
pt.).

Imperative
3. sing.

Infinitive:

586

a,

endings of the

2.

418.

from roots
from verbal nouns
ace.

in -tu 586 b;

dat. 368, in
-dhyai from causatives56l c,
from roots 584, from verbal

nouns

in

tava,

-tya,

-as,

-i,

-ti,

-tu,

-man,
gen., from

-dhya,

-van 585; abl.

587 a, from

roots

verbal

nouns in -tu 587 b; loc,

from roots 588 a, from
3. pl.
impf. and plup. 456, 494,
stem in -tar 588 b, from
ranta 3. pl. plup. 495,
stems in -san 588 c.
-ram 3. pl. plup. 495, root Insertion of f in pr. 450 a 3,
impv. 454, 490, -rate
pr. mid. 45 1, -ran

3. pl.

aor.

5o>

-rire

3.

pl.

pf.

mid. 484, 40, 485, -re

mid. pr. 451, 469 a
470, pf. 484, 3, 4, -hi
sing. impv. 418 a, 454.
Exclamations 659 a.
pl.

3.
6,
2.

569
Dentals cerebralized 42 a, c,
A;
replace
cerebral and
47
labial 44 a 3 /3; s cerebra- Foreign
words 42, 45 b;
lized 57, palatalized 53 ai,
47 Be; 52 bg; 57, i ^, 7.
changed to i 44 a, Future participles 538.
3, 54,
522, unchanged before r
or r 57, T. a, 2 a a, un- Genitive sing. m. formed in
changed in Amredita comtwo, n. in three ways, in
pounds 57, 2b7; replaces
derivative a-stems 389.
w46d/3, 66, 4 a; k before Gerund: in -tvi 590 a; in -tva
590 b; in -tvdya 590 c; in
p 77, 2 a, before / 77, 2 e.
Dissimilation 43 b I, b 2 p. 55
-yU. and -tya 591.
note 8, 3^1 notes 5 and 6, Gerundive: in -ya 578;' in
ayya 579; in -enya 580;
469 a 1,545, 2 a (p. 391 top).
Dissyllabic
pronunciation
in -tva 581, in -tavya 581 a;
in -amya 581 b.
363 a, (f5? etc.), 364 a
(dydm), 372 (gen. pl. of Gradation of vowels 51 ; in
a-stems).
compounds 243, 255; in
Doubling of finaj n 77.
dissyllabic bases 27 b; in
Dravidian influence 42.
suffixes 27 c.
Dvandvas: accentuation 262, Guria 22; in z'-stems 380; in
267 note?; gender 264,
a-stems 388; in the pr.
266; plural 265; singular
stem. 421, 451, 457, 469;
266.
in the pf. 483 ; in the root
aor. ps. 501 ; in the a-aor.
Elision; of final a before e
507 a; in the j-aor. 520,
and
70, 2 a, after e and
523, 524; in the 2>-aor.
" 72, of a before ending
528; in the cs. 553, 557;
of gen. loc. du. 372 (p.
in the gdv. 578.
260 top); of final m 70, Gutturals: interchange with
3 b, 75, followed by conpalatals, labials, and ,r 34;
traction 372 notes = and 4
with palatals 36 a, 37, 38,
(p. 256): oly and v 72, i b,
39. 41, b 2, 43^4. 43 b 2.
73; ofi>-79, 1 b; ofj78, ib.
Enclitics 85 b I.
Haplology 64, 499 (p. 367
Endings: in declension 295 c,
note 5).
abnormal fem. loc. -am, Hiatus 67, 69 a, b, c (duals),
e.

lb,c(3

70,

(N. sing.
(N. A. n.
a-stems),

451, 456, in plup. 495, in

j--aor. 521 a I, 522, in intv.
546, in reduplicative syllable
545; oi y between vowels
372; of sibilants 77, 2abc;
of t 77, 2 f.
Instrumental:
sing.
m. n.

formed in two ways in

der.

a-stems 372 (also pi.), f. in

der. a-stems 374, m. n. in
der. -stems 389, m. f. in
der. -stems 381.
Interchange
of vowel and
consonant 50 b, 81 e, 469
a 2, 542 b, 573 a; of ?-and
/ 52 a.
Interjections 659; hih compounded with J//5/-- 653.
:

JihvamulTya for

final s 78, 2c.

Labials 45 : b often in words

of foreign
origin 45 b,
interchanges with w 45 a 3,
in place of m 45 a 5.
Lengthening of vowels 81,
1

d,

81, 2f,

82

b,

224

a,

b,

313. 315. 318 a 2,

319 a, 329 (N. A. sing, n.),
344 (N. sing.), 354 (N.sing.),

255

360

(L. sing.), 372 (I. sing.),

513 a (red. aor.), 520 a 2
(^-aor.), 554 and
555 (cs.),
563 a, 565 and 566 (den.).

Locative: sing. m. formed in

two ways, f. in four ways,
in der. i-stems 381, m. in
two ways, n. in three ways
in der. -stems 389;
Sandhi of locatives in -l and
2
b.
71,
Loss of nasal in pf. 483 a
4;

n.
in

a-aor.

S2oa3;

57; ^^ s-3.or.
in pp. 574, 2.

Metathesis sob, 51
quantity (asthas,
507 a 4.

c,

63; in

Mat

etc.)

General Index.
:

no

(p.

453

Prepositions
two
classes
592; adverbial, not compounded with verbs 5935
adnominal, used with cases,
594; accentuation 102, 103,
105,

107).

voiced dental 62, 4 b, cerebralized before loss 62,

palatal
spirant ()
c;
before d, dh 62, 4 d.
Strong forms: in declension
295 d; in conjugation 449,

Pronominal declension: in483. 494. 498, 501. 520. 528,

on
Subjunctive 414.
fluence on nominal 371.
the der. 2- declension 380 d,
Suffixes:
primary nominal
on the der. o-declension 371.
Reduction of final a to i 26,
113 a (list); secondary noNasalization: of vowels 66, i,
minal 190 (list); adverbial
483 b, 484 a I, of medial
70, I b, 70, 2 b, 372 note 5
a to i 507 a I, 574, 3, 576 c.
627640.
(p. 256), p. 258 note 3 and
Reduplicated aorist connected Supplementary stems in denote 5; of semivowels 75,
clension 315, 326 c, 330 c,
with the causative 513.
of / 77, 2 e.
339b, 343 b, 357. 362 a.
Nominal stems, obsolete, pre- Reduplication 37 e; aorist
in
513; rhythmic rule 513 a; Svarita accent 83, 84;
served in adverbs 642 d a.
Sandhi 108.
intensive 60b, 545; perfect
Nominative: pi. formed in
62, 4S2, vowel lengthened Syncope 25,1
3, 324 (-/^fl-),
two ways, in der. a-de482, irregular 482 d, sylla325, 327, 328 b; 483 a 3
clension 372, in der. a-de(pf.),
ble an- 482 c K, syllable
513 a 4 (red. aor.),
clension, 374, in der. z'-delost 482 e, rhythmic rule
542 c 2 (des.), 548 a (intv.).
clension 381, in der. u-A&484 a 4 note i, note .
clension 389.
.Transfer forms in declension
Rhotacism 51a, 52 a.
313 note 5, 315, 316 (p. 196
Onomatopoetic words 52 f,
note 4), 317 note 7, note ^1,
659 b; in compounds 251, Samprasarana 22, 23, 24,
318 a 5, 326d, 33od, 334 c,
326 b, 482 b I, 483 a I, (cs.)
5. 650339 c, 341 b, 343 c, 349 c,
554; (pp.) 574. 575351 c, 3S4b, 364b, 375 aa,
Palatals: two series 35; new Sandhi 31, 2, 38 c, 46 d a,
378 (p. 275 notes and 276
palatals 36, 37, 38; old
duplicate
forms
47 A;
bottom), 380 c, 381 (f. D.
palatals 40 (ch), 41 (y);
67 b; initial n cerebraAb. G. L. sing.), 384 c,
lized 47 A c;
new palatals revert to
54 a (i for
388 d, 389 (G. sing, m.,
gutturals, in pf. 482 d 2,
s),
57 {s for s), 58 and
conjugation:
in
I. du.);
80 b {h aspirated), 59 and
492,
495, in root aor.
421 a 4, 429a 3, 4, 457 a 8,
500 note 19 (p. 367), indes.
74 note 5 (/ for d), 62{av),
463,2, 469 a 7, 475 a4, 495.
542ca; fbecomes^ 66b2;
62, I (final group of con499 note II (p. 367), 507 a4
sonants).
j becomes k ox f (>(> h z;
(a-aor.).
s replaces s 54 1, becomes Semivowels y and v pronouncompounds
ced as iy and uv 48 a, Transfer stems in
i before j 54 b, 349 b, be254with a syllabic value 48 b,
comes s before i th 42 a,
- declension:

influence

56 a, becomes d before bh
349 b.
Parallelism,
form due to,
327 (p. 206 note 3), 354 c,
nakta N. A. du. 372,
Particles: three groups 645;
as first
a-, sa-, dus; su-

lost

62;

be-

inserted

tween vowels 49 d,
changes with z/ 49

Udatta accent 83, 84.

Unreduplicated perfect forms
V
482 e, 492 b.

interc;

interchanges with 6 and j/

UpadhmSnlya for final j 78, 1 c
50 a; final r 66, 5, indicated in the Padapatha Visarjaniya for final dental s
66 b note ^, becomes s or
66, 6 a, 78, I c e ; for final
s 79, 2 b, c, lost 62, 4; /
members of compounds
r 79, 2 a, d.
gradually increases at the Vocative: accentuation 93,109;
655-658cost of r 52 a, in foreign
Participial forms compounded
formed with -mas and -vas
words 52 g, / for d in the
with substantives used adfrom -mani, -mams and -vant
later Samliitas 52 d, for d
verbially 654.
stems 315, 316, 340, with
52 e, final / 66 b 5 note 9.
Passive: present system 444
-vas from -van and -vams
stems 331, 348, with -yas
448; aorist 501; past Shortening of vowels 81, 2 g
(a, t),
70, 1 b and p. 259
participle formed with -(a
from -yams stems 346;
note 7 (5 before r), 327 [a
final vowel gunated in i572575. with -na 576.
in aK-stems), 352 {-sa/i-),
Perfect: irregularities in the
stems 381, and -stems 389.
360 (du. of -iar stems), Vowels: e for original as
root 483 a; subjunctive 487,
optative
362 b (ray-), 369 (radical
injunctive 488,
15 b I, 62,4 b; lost 25,
a), 372 (dual a), 378 (dual
26 a, 563 c, 564 a.
489, imperative 490.
Vrddhi 22 a, 25 B, 483 (pf-).
Pragrhya vowels: T, ii 69 c,
), p. 277 note 4 {ndri-), 38
(r of n. pi.).
501 (ps. aor.), 520 (j-aor.),
71J 2; e 72,2, 374 (du. f.
Sibilant lost: initial and final /
of o-stems),
72, 3.
524, 528, 557 (cs-). 578,
andj62, 2, 78 e 2, 3, 81,2 a
(gdv.).
Prakritic words 42 b, 47 B.

Precative 417, 489, 504,

SI 7. 525.

sn,

c;

and J between mutes

62,3, 355 note 9; j before

Weak

forms for strong 348.

CONTENTS.

.... page
15
Verbal
.... page 559

INTRODUCTION

General scope of this work

Authenticity of the Texts 2.

PHONOLOGY

I.

Ancient pronunciation
of the Vedic Language

Vowels

14.

3.

4.

16.

19.

Loss of Aspiration 32.

Aspirates in contact with other Mutes S3The five
Classes of Mutes 34 45 I. Gutturals 34.

^
38. Irregular Palatalization

Cerebrals
39. Old Palatals 4041.
Dentals 44.
Labials
4243.
45. Nasals 46. Cerebral n 47.
Semivowels 48 52. Sibilants 53 57.
The Breathing A 58. Cerebral / 59.
Anusvara and Anunasika 60. Voiceless
Spirants 61. Loss of Consonants 62.
Metathesis 6^. Syllable 64.

2. Palatals

35

3.

4.

5.

EUPHONIC COMBINATION (SANDHI)

page 5976.

Finals in
Nature of Vedic Sandhi 65.
Rules of Sandhi 67pausa 66.
ConLengthening of Final Vowels 68.
Contraction of Similar Vowels 69.
traction of a with Dissimilar Vowels 70.
Final f and u before Dissimilar Vowels

71. Final e and

72. The Diphthongs

Sandhi of Consonants
and au 73,
Sandhi of Final m 75; of Final i
76; of Final 77; of Final j 78; of Final
Sandhi
r 79.
Initial Aspiration 80.
ae

74.

of Compounds 81.
to Internal

Extension of External

Sandhi 82.

ACCENT

page 76 107
Character of the Vedic Accent
Methods of Marking the Accent
83.
Normal Accent, Double Accent,
84.
i. Accentuation of
Lack of Accent 85.
2. Accentuation of
Nominal Stems 86.
Compounds 87: of Iteratives 88; of Governing Compounds 89; ofPossessives 90;
of Determinatives 91 ; of Copulatives 92.
4. Verbal
94.
3. Accent in Declension 93

in.

Nouns and Agent Nouns 1 13.

i. Primary Nominal Suffixes 114 189.
2. Secondary Nominal Derivation: Form
and Meaning 190.
Secondary Nominal

17.

18.

IL

15

Lengthening of Vowels Loss

Contraction Hiatus
of Vowels
20. Vowel Gradation 22 29. The
Consonants 3047: Doubling of Consonants 30. Modes of Articulation 31.

General

Nominal

Accent 95 lOI.
5. Accent of
6. Accent in Sandhi
Verbforms 102 107.
108.
7. Sentence Accent 109 ill.

NOMINAL STEM FORMATION

page 107143.
Primary and Secondary Suffixes 112.
1.
Primary Nominal Derivation: Action

The sounds
i. The simple

The Diphthongs

2.

IV.

i.

Suffixes 191

V.

240.

COMPOUNDS
page 143-178
.
Form of Compounds 241.
A. First Member of Compounds 242 251.
B. Last
Member of Compounds 252 256. ^Classification of Compounds 257; i. Iteratives
.

258.
2. Copulatives (Dvandvas) 259
258.
3, Determinatives
269 284.
4. Possessives (Bahuvrlhis) 285
291.
5.

Governing Compounds

tactical

Compounds

VL DECLENSION

292.

6,

Syn-

293.
.

page 178 312.

General Character 294.

I. Nouns 295.
A. Consonant Stems 296 365.
i. Palatal Stems 297
303.
2. Cerebral Stems
3. Dental Stems 305
304.
333 Stems
in -i 306
308.
Derivate Stems in -va/,
-tat, -it, -ut and secondary -t 309
310.
Participial Stems in -at and -ant^ 1 1
314.
Stems in -mant and -vant 315 316.
Stems in Radical -th 317.
Stems in -d
318 320.
Stems in -dh 321 322.
Stems in Radical -n 323 324.
Derivative Stems in -an, -man, <jan 325
33I.
Stems in -in, -min, -vin 332 333.
4. Labial Stems 334
338.
5. Stems in
Sibilants 339 ^350: in Radical -s and -j339 34i in Derivative -is and -us 341
342, in Derivative -as 343
344, in -yams
345 346, in -vdms 347 348, in Radical
-s 349
6. Stems in Radical h
350.
Stems in Semivowels
352.
7.
351
353365: in Radical -r 354 355, in Deri360, in -y {-ay) and
vative -ar and -tar 356
365.
B. Vowel Stems
-V [-av 3.nA.-av)s(n.
I a. Stems in Radical -a 367
366 389.
I b. Stems in Radical -a 369
370.
368.
372.
2 a. Stems in Derivative -a 371
2 b. Stems in Derivative -a 373
374.
3 a. Stems in Radical -i 375 376.
3 b. Stems in Derivative -i sTl 378.
4 b. Stems
4 a. Stems in Radical -i 379.
381.
in Derivative -i 380
5 a. Radical
382 383.
-it stems
5 b. Derivative

456

Allgemeines und Sprache.

I.

stems 384385.
stems 386 387.
stems 388389.
-K

6 b.

II.

Pronouns 390403:

2.

Demonstrative 392

i.

Radical -u
Derivative -u
a.

Personal 391.

396. InterInRelative 398.

rogative 397.

Reflexive 400.
definite 399.
Pronominal DeriPossessive 401.
3.

4.

5.

6.

8.

7.

and Compounds 402.

g. Pronominal Adjectives 403.
A. Cardinals
III. NiTMERALS 404
409.
C. NuB. Ordinals 408.
405407.
meral Derivatives 409.
page 312 4T 4
VII. THE VERB
.
A. The
General Characteristics 410.
Personal Endings
Finite Verb 411
570.
The Augment 413.
Formation
412.
vatives

of the Moods: Subjunctive 414, Injunctive

415, Optative 416, Precative 417, Imperative 418.
I.

The Present System 419480.

Characteristics 419.

a. First or

a-Con-

jugation 420 448: Characteristics 420.

I. The Radically accented a-Class [bhdva-)
421 428.
2. The Suffixally accented
a-Class (iudd-) 429 436.
3. The yaClass 437: A. The Radically accented jTrtClass 438-443.
B. The Suffixally
accented j/a-Class (Passive) 444 448.

The Second or Graded Conjugation

480. a I. The Root Class 450
a 2. The Reduplicating Class 457
456.
I. The Infixing Nasal Class 463
462.
468;
p 2. The K-Class 469 474.
480.
^ 3. The KS-Class 475
b.

449

|3

II.

The Perfect System 481496.

Characteristics 481.
tive Syllable 482.

The Endings 484.

485. Moods of the
3.

2.

Perfect Indicative
Perfect 486 490.

The

Vedic Grammar.

Contents.

The Aorist System 497536-

III.

printing was

Characteristics 497.
i. Simple Aorist;
A. Root Aorist 498 506; B. a-Aorist 507

Reduplicated Aorist 513 518.

3. Sigmatic Aorist 519: A. i. The j- Aorist
520 527.
A. 2. The j>-Aorist 528
A. 3. The jw-Aorist 534.
B. The
533.
5

2.

2.

535536.
IV. The Future System 537 540.
Subjunctive,
Formation of the Stem S37.
xfl-Aorist

538. Indicative

Conditional, Participles
Periphrastic Future 540.
539.
V. Secondary Conjugation 541570.
2. Intensive
1. Desiderative 542
544.
3- Causative 552561.
545 551570.
4. Denominative 562
B. Nominal Verb Forms 571591a. Past Passive
Characteristics 571.
Participles 572576.
b. Future Passive

Participles (Gerundives)
finitive

583

582588:

585.

2.

c. In-

Dative Infinitive
Accusative Infinitive 586.

Ablative-Genitive Infinitive 587.

d. Gerund
Locative Infinitive 588.

3.

4.

589-591.
Vni. INDECLINABLES

625
593608.

Prepositions 592

1.

Prepositions
Prepositions 609
2.

577581.

i.

page 414-432.
A. Adverbial

Adnominal

B.

625.

Adverbs 626644: A. Adverbial Suffixes

B. Adalphabetical order) 627
640.

(in

verbial Case-forms (in the order of the

cases) 641
644.
3. Particles 645
658: emphatic 646, con-

a. Adjunctional 647, negative 648.

verbial Words in Compounds 649658.
4. Interjections 659.

1.
The ReduplicaThe Root 483. Addenda and Corrigenda

Perfect Participle 491493.

Pluperfect
Periphrastic Perfect 496.
494 495.

4.

List of Abbreviations

Sanskrit Index

General Index
Table of Contents

commenced m May,

1907,

and

afterwards delayed by the death of the editor

Prof. Kielhorn.

page 433
436
437
451
455